Skip to main content

Full text of "Bulletin of Duke University [serial]"

See other formats 


US 


■ 


ij}/« 


hbm 


!  m 


■■Hi 
■H 


I 


! 


,i,  :  !>" 


1 1 


■ 


Ml 


fl     H 


BM 


1 


Mi 


W 


■Hi 


^■H 


■ 
■ 


IB 


B 

^■j 


■ 


HI 


I 

m 


m 


m 


HHB 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2012  with  funding  from 
Duke  University  Libraries 


http://www.archive.org/details/bulletinofdukeun8901duke 


bulletin  of 

DukeUniversity 
1989-90 

Undergraduate  Instruction 


bulletin  of 

DukeUniversity 
1989-90 

Undergraduate  Instruction 


EDITORS 

Martina  J.  Bryant 

Associate  Dean 

Ellen  W.  Wittig 

Associate  Dean 


COORDINATING  EDITOR 

Judy  Smith 

SENIOR  EDITORIAL  ASSISTANTS 

Jean  Carlton 

Elizabeth  Matheson 


PHOTOGRAPHS 

Jerry  Markatos 

Scott  Taylor 

Les  Todd 

Jimmy  Wallace 


Typesetting  by  Paste-Ups,  Limited,  Research  Triangle  Park,  North  Carolina 
Printed  by  Port  City  Press,  Washington,  DC 

The  information  in  the  bulletin  applies  to  the  academic  year  1989-90  and  is  accurate  and  current,  to  the  best 
of  our  knowledge,  as  of  January,  1989.  The  University  reserves  the  right  to  change  programs  of  study,  academic 
requirements,  lecturers,  teaching  staffs,  the  announced  University  calendar,  and  other  matters  described  in  the 
bulletin  without  prior  notice,  in  accordance  with  established  procedures. 

Duke  University  does  not  discriminate  on  the  basis  of  race,  color,  national  and  ethnic  origin,  handicap,  sexual 
orientation  or  preference,  sex,  or  age  in  the  administration  of  educational  policies,  admission  policies,  financial 
aid,  employment,  or  any  other  University  program  or  activity.  It  admits  qualified  students  to  all  the  rights,  privileges, 
programs,  and  activities  generally  accorded  or  made  available  to  students.  For  further  information,  call  Dolores 
L.  Burke,  Equal  Opportunity  Officer,  (919)  684-81 1 1 .  Duke  University  has  adopted  procedures  for  investigation 
and  remedy  of  complaints  involving  discrimination.  See  the  chapter  "Campus  Life  and  Activities." 

The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University,  Volume  61,  includes  the  following  titles  Vie  Fuqua  School  of  Business;  The  School 
of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies;  Marine  Laboratory;  Undergraduate  Instruction;  The  Graduate  School;  The  Medi- 
cal Center;  The  Divinity  School;  Information  for  Prospective  Students;  The  Graduate  School  (short  form);  The  School  of 
Law;  and  Information  and  Regulations. 


Volume  61  March  1989  Number  2 

The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University  (USPS  073-  680)  is  published  by  Duke  University,  Duke  Station,  Durham,  North 
Carolina  27706  as  follows:  monthly— May;  semimonthly— March,  April,  June,  and  August;  thrice-monthly— 
September.  Second-class  postage  paid  at  Durham. 


General  Information  10 


Contents     O^^O 

University  Calendar  6          Z2i  v-^- 1   ' 

University  Administration  8          r~i  fC  HI  V<S 

~D%17  HA 

Degree  Programs  is    1 9  £cj    /q  £, 

Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  19 

School  of  Engineering  34               /0"4~i 

Academic  Procedures  and 

Information  44 

Advanced  Placement  45 

Transfer  of  Work  Elsewhere  47 

Advising  48 

Registration  48 

Course  Load  and  Eligibility  for  Courses  50 

Course  Audit  50 

Independent  Study  51 

House  Courses  51 

Submission  of  Term  Paper  51 

Declaration  of  Major  or  Division  (TCAS)  51 

Changes  in  Status  53 

Class  Attendance,  Excused  Absences,  and  Tests  54 

Incomplete  Course  Work  55 

Final  Examinations  and  Excused  Absences  55 

Grading  and  Grade  Requirements  55 

Academic  Recognition  and  Honors  56 

Notification  of  Intention  to  Graduate  58 

Commencement  58 

Prizes  and  Awards  58 

Education  Records  61 

Special  Study  Centers,  Programs, 

and  Opportunities  62 

Campus  Centers  and  Institutes  63 

Center  for  International  Studies  63 

Center  for  Research  on  Women  65 

Continuing  Education  65 

Institute  of  the  Arts  66 

Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences  66 

Programs  Not  Offering  Majors  66 

Film  and  Video  66 

Human  Development  67 

Judaic  Studies  67 

Neurosciences  67 

Perspectives  on  Marxism  and  Society  67 

Primatology  68 

Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values  68 

Twentieth-Century  America  Program  68 

Women's  Studies  68 

Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps  69 

Off-Campus  Opportunities  70 

Study  Abroad  70 

Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  75 

Agreements  with  Other  Universities  75 

Duke  Futures  Programs  76 

Special  Summer  Programs  76 

Duke  Summer  Festival  of  Creative  Arts  76 

Precollege  Program  77 


Campus  Life  and  Activities  78 

Student  Affairs  79 

Residential  Life  79 

Dining  Facilities  80 

Religious  Life  80 

Services  Available  81 

Offices  for  Program  Planning  83 

Student  Organizations  85 

Health,  Physical  Education,  and  Recreation  86 

Intercollegiate  Athletics  87 

The  Duke  Student  Honor  Commitment  87 

Judicial  System  and  Regulations  88 

Student  Discrimination  Grievance  Procedures  88 

Student  Obligations  and  Requirements  88 

Admission  90 

Requirements  for  Application  91 

Application  Procedures  92 

Financial  Information  94 

Tuition  and  Fees  95 

Living  Expenses  99 

Fall  and  Spring  Refunds  100 

Summer  Withdrawal  Charges  and  Refunds  100 

Student  Aid  100 


Courses  of  Instruction  106 


Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 

107 

Aerospace  Studies— Air  Force  ROTC 

107 

Afro-American  Studies 

108 

Anthropology 

109 

Art  and  Art  History 

110 

Institute  of  the  Arts 

117 

Asian  and  African  Languages  and  Literature 

121 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 

124 

Biology 

126 

Botany 

134 

Canadian  Studies 

134 

Chemistry 

136 

Classical  Studies 

139 

Comparative  Area  Studies 

146 

Computer  Science 

155 

Cultural  Anthropology 

160 

Distinguished  Professor  Courses 

165 

Drama 

166 

Economics 

171 

Education 

177 

English 

179 

Film  and  Video 

188 

Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  (School) 

189 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics 

190 

Geology 

191 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

195 

Health,  Physical  Education,  and  Recreation 

198 

History 

201 

Human  Development 

212 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

213 

Judaic  Studies 

216 

Linguistics 

217 

Literature:  Undergraduate  Courses  in  the 

Literature  Program 

218 

Management  Sciences  (Fuqua  School) 

220 

The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences 
Mathematics 
Medicine  (School) 
Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies 
Military  Science— Army  ROTC 
Music 

Naval  Science— Navy  ROTC 
Neurosciences 
Philosophy 
Physics 

Political  Science 
Psychology 
Public  Policy  Studies 
Religion 

Romance  Studies 

Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values 
Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 
Sociology 

Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences 
University  Writing  Program 
Women's  Studies 
Zoology 
The  School  of  Engineering 
Interdepartmental 
Biomedical 

Civil  and  Environmental 
Electrical 
Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science 


221 
223 
230 
232 
234 
235 
242 
244 
244 
249 
252 
264 
271 
276 
283 
293 
293 
296 
303 
305 
305 
308 
308 
308 
310 
314 
320 
326 


Index 


334 


University  Calendar— 1989-90 


Summer  1989* 


April 

3 

May 

9 

10 

18 
22 

June 

26 

30 

July 

1 
5 
7 

August 

17 
18 


August 

24 

28 

29 

30-31 


September 

1 

4 
5-8 


October 

13 

13 

18 

27-29 

November 

6-9 

10-12 

22 

27 

December 

7 

8-10 

10 

11 

16 


Monday— Beginning  of  registration  for  Term  1  and/or  Term  II 

Tuesday— Beginning  this  day,  summer  Drop/Adds  must  be  approved  by  the 

academic  dean  or  director  of  graduate  studies 

Wednesday— Last  day  for  registration  and  payment  of  Term  I  fees  without  $25 

late  fee  (before  4:30  P.M.) 

Thursday— Term  I  classes  begin 

Monday— Drop/Add  for  Term  I  ends  at  4:00  P.M. 

Monday— Last  day  for  registration  and  payment  of  Term  II  fees  without  $25 

late  fee  (before  4:30  P.M.) 

Friday— Term  I  final  examinations  begin 

Saturday— Term  I  final  examinations  end 

Wednesday— Term  II  classes  begin 

Friday— Drop/Add  for  Term  II  ends  at  4:00  P.M. 

Thursday— Term  II  final  examinations  begin 
Friday— Term  II  final  examinations  end 

Fall  1989 


Thursday— Orientation  begins;  assemblies  for  all  new  undergraduate 
students 

Monday,  8:00  a.m.— Fall  semester  classes  begin 
Tuesday,  4:00-6:00  P.M.— Drop/ Add  begins,  Intramural  Building 
Wednesday-Thursday,  8:30  AM. -12:30  P.M.  and  2:00-4:00  P.M.— Drop/Add  con- 
tinues, 103  Allen  Building 

Friday,  8:30  A.M. -12:30  P.M  and  2:00-4:00  P.M.— Drop/Add  continues,  103 

Allen  Building 

Monday— Labor  Day,  classes  in  session 

Tuesday-Friday,  8:30  A.M. -12:30  P.M  and  2:00-4:00  P.M.— Drop/Add  continues, 

103  Allen  Building 

Friday— Last  day  for  reporting  midsemester  grades 
Friday,  6:00  P.M.— Fall  break  begins 
Wednesday,  8:00  AM  —Classes  resume 
Friday-Sunday— Parents'  Weekend 

Monday-Thursday— Registration  for  spring  semester,  1990 
Friday-Sunday— Homecoming 
Wednesday,  12:30  p.m.— Thanksgiving  recess  begins 
Monday,  8:00  AM  —Classes  resume 

Thursday,  6:00  PM  —Fall  semester  classes  end 
Friday-Sunday— Reading  period 
Sunday— Founders'  Day 
Monday— Final  examinations  begin 
Saturday— Final  examinations  end 


"The  School  of  Forestry,  the  Fuqua  School  of  Business,  the  Marine  Laboratory,  the  Graduate  Nursing  Pro- 
gram, and  Physical  Therapy  may  have  different  starting  dates  during  the  summer;  consult  the  appropriate  bulletins 
and  schedules. 


Spring  1990 


January 

8 

10 

11 

12 

15-19 

22-24 


February 

23 

March 

9 
19 

April 

2-4 

25 
26-29 

30 

May 

5 
11 
13 


Monday— Orientation  begins 

Wednesday— Registration  and  matriculation  of  new  undergraduate  students 
Thursday,  9:00  A.M.— Spring  semester  classes  begin 
Friday,  4:00-6:00  P.M.— Drop/Add  begins.  Intramural  Building 
Monday-Friday,  8:30  AM.  -12:30  PM  and  2:00-4:00  P.M.— Drop/Add  continues, 
103  Allen  Building 

Monday-Wednesday,  8:30  A.M. -12:30  P.M.  and  2:00-4:00  P.M.—  Drop/ Add  con- 
tinues, 103  Allen  Building 

Friday— Last  day  for  reporting  midsemester  grades 

Friday,  6:00  P.M.— Spring  recess  begins 
Monday,  8:00  AM  —Classes  resume 

Monday-Wednesday— Registration  for  fall  semester,  1990  and  beginning  of 

registration  for  summer,  1990 

Wednesday,  6:00  P.M.— Spiing  semester  classes  end 

Thursday-Sunday— Reading  period 

Monday— Final  examinations  begin 

Saturday— Final  examinations  end 

Friday— Commencement  begins 

Sunday— Graduation  exercises.  Conferring  of  degrees 


University  Administration 

GENERAL  ADMINISTRATION 

H.  Keith  H.  Brodie,  M.D.,  LL.D.,  President 

Phillip  A.  Griffiths,  Ph.D.,  Provost 

Ralph  Snyderman,  M.D.,  Chancellor  for  Health  Affairs  and  Dean  of  the  Medical  School 

Eugene  J.  McDonald,  LL.M.,  Executive  Vice-President 

William  G.  Anlyan,  M.D.,  D.So,  Chancellor 

JoelL.  Fleishman,  LL.M.,  Senior  Vice-President 

J.  Peyton  Fuller,  A.B.,  Vice-President,  Planning  and  Treasurer 

William  J.  Griffith,  A.B.,  Vice-President  for  Student  Affairs 

John  J.  Piva,  Jr.,  B.A.,  Senior  Vice-President  for  Alumni  Affairs  and  Development 

Patricia  C.  Skarulis,  M.A.,  Vice-President  for  Information  Systems 

Andrew  G.  Wallace,  M.D.,  Vice-President  for  Health  Affairs 

John  F.  Adcock,  M.B.  A.,  Vice-President  and  Corporate  Controller 

Tom  A.  Butters,  B.A.,  Vice-President  and  Director  of  Athletics 

N.  Allison  Haltom,  A.B.,  Secretary  of  the  University 

GENERAL  ACADEMIC  ADMINISTRATION 

Phillip  A.  Griffiths,  Ph.D.,  Provost 

S.  Malcolm  Gillis,  Ph.D.,  Vice-Provost  for  Academic  Affairs  and  Dean  of the  Graduate  School 

Charles  E.  Putman,  M.D.,  Vice-Proi'ost  for  Research  and  Development 

Thomas  A.  Langford,  Ph.D.,  Vice-Provost  for  Special  Projects 

Margaret  Bates,  Ph.D.,  Vice-Provost  for  Academic  Programs  and  Facilities 

Paula  Burger,  Ph.D.,  Vice-Provost  for  Academic  Services 

Jerry  D.  Campbell,  Ph.D.,  Vice-Provost  for  Library  Affairs  and  University  Librarian 

Judith  Ruderman,  Ph.D.,  Director  of  Continuing  Education 

Calvin  Ward,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Provost  for  Academic  Facilities  and  Director  of  the  Slimmer  Session 

Albert  F.  Eldridge,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Provost  and  University  Registrar 

Melissa  Mills,  M.B.A.,  Assistant  Provost 

Susan  MacDonald,  M.A.,  Assistant  Provost 

Arts  and  Sciences  and  Trinity  College 

Richard  A.  White,  Ph.D.,  Dean 

Thomas  A.  Spragens,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Dean 

Charles  W.  Byrd,  Jr.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Dean  for  Academic  Affairs 

Thomas  D.  Mann,  A.B.,  Assistant  Dean  for  Administration 

Lee  W.  Willard,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Dean  for  Planning  and  Dei'elopment 

Trinity  College 

Gerald  L.  Wilson,  B.D,  Ph.D.,  Senior  Associate  Dean 

Martina  J.  Bryant,  Ed.D.,  Associate  Dean 

Elizabeth  S.  Nathans,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Dean  and  Director  of  the  Premajor  Advising  Center 

Mary  Nijhout,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Dean  and  Director  of  Health  Professions  Advising  Center 

Ellen  W.  Wittig,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Dean 

Caroline  L.  Lattimore,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Dean 

Deborah  A.  Roach,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Dean 

Robert  P.  Weller,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Dean 

School  of  Engineering 

Earl  H.  Dowell,  Sc.D.,  Dean 

Jack  B.  Chaddock,  Sc.D,  Associate  Dean  for  Research  and  Development 

Marion  L.  Shepard,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Dean  for  Academic  Affairs 

Student  Affairs 

William  H.  Willimon,  M.Div.,  STD,  Minister  to  the  University 

Nancy  Ferree-Clark,  M.Div.,  Associate  Minister  to  the  University 

Jane  Clark  Moorman,  M.S.W.,  ACSW  Director,  Counseling  and  Psychological  Sen'ices 

Susan  L.  Coon,  M.A.,  Director,  Office  of  Cultural  Affairs 

Carlisle  C.  Harvard,  B.A.,  Director,  International  House 


Caroline  L.  Lattimore,  Ph.D.,  Dean  for  Minority  Affairs 

Edward  S.  Hill,  Ph.D.,  Director,  Mary  Lou  Williams  Center  for  Black  Culture 

Laurence  P.  Maskel,  Ph.D.,  Acting  Director,  Placement  Services 

Richard  L.  Cox,  B.D.,  Ed.D,  Dean  for  Residential  Life 

Ella  E.  Shore,  M.  A.,  Associate  Dean  for  Residential  Life 

Homai  McDowell,  D.B.A.,  Director,  Office  of  Student  Activities 

Howard  J.  Eisenson,  M.D.,  Director  of  Student  Health 

Suzanne  Wasiolek,  M.H.A.,  Dean  for  Student  Life 

Jake  Phelps,  B.A.,  Director,  University  Union 

Peter  J.  Coyle,  Jr.,  B.A.,  Associate  Director,  University  Union 

Admissions  and  Financial  Aid 

Richard  Steele,  Ph.D.,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Admissions 
James  A.  Belvin,  Jr.,  A.B.,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid 


General  Information 


Duke  University 

In  1839  a  group  of  citizens  from  Randolph  and  adjacent  counties  in  North  Carolina 
assembled  in  a  log  schoolhouse  to  organize  support  for  a  local  academy  founded  a  few 
months  earlier  by  Brantley  York.  Prompted,  they  said,  by  "no  small  share  of  philanthro- 
py and  patriotism,"  they  espoused  their  belief  that  "ignorance  and  error  are  the  banes 
not  only  of  religious  but  also  civil  society  which  rear  up  an  almost  impregnable  wall  be- 
tween man  and  happiness."  The  Union  Institute,  which  they  then  founded,  was  reor- 
ganized in  1851  as  Normal  College  to  train  teachers,  and  again  in  1859  as  Trinity  College, 
a  liberal  arts  college,  which  later  moved  from  the  fields  of  Randolph  County  to  the  grow- 
ing city  of  Durham,  North  Carolina.  Trinity  College  was  selected  by  James  B.  Duke  as  the 
major  recipient  of  a  fortune  when,  in  1924,  he  provided  endowment  funds  for  the  univer- 
sity that  would  be  organized  around  Trinity  College  and  named  for  the  Duke  family. 

The  old  Trinity  College  had,  like  almost  all  institutions  in  America  at  the  time  it  was 
founded,  been  restricted  to  men.  In  1896,  Washington  Duke  gave  an  endowment  with 
the  condition  that  women  be  admitted  "on  equal  footing  with  men."  Thereafter,  women 
were  educated  in  Trinity  College,  and  in  1930  the  Woman's  College  was  established  as 
a  separate  college.  Trinity  College  and  the  Woman's  College  continued  as  coordinate  col- 
leges for  over  forty  years.  To  assure  that  women  were  indeed  admitted  "on  equal  footing 
with  men,"  and  to  recognize  that  the  education  which  men  and  women  had  received  at 
Duke  had  long  taken  place  in  the  same  classrooms,  the  University  merged  these  coor- 
dinate colleges  in  1972  to  form  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  the  liberal  arts  un- 
dergraduate college  of  the  University.  The  Bachelor  of  Arts  and  Bachelor  of  Science  degrees 
may  be  earned  in  the  college. 

Instruction  in  engineering  started  at  Normal  College  in  1851  and  was  continued  at 
Trinity  College  as  an  option  in  the  arts  and  sciences  program .  A  Department  of  Engineer- 
ing was  established  at  Trinity  in  1910.  Following  the  establishment  of  Duke  University  in 
1924,  the  Departments  of  Civil  and  Electrical  Engineering  were  formed  in  1927,  and  a 
Department  of  Mechanical  Engineering  was  added  four  years  later.  The  three  engineer- 
ing departments  were  joined  to  form  the  Division  of  Engineering  as  a  separate  adminis- 
trative unit  of  the  University.  In  1939  this  division  was  renamed  the  College  of  Engineer- 
ing, which  in  1966  became  a  professional  school  of  engineering.  The  Division  of 
Biomedical  Engineering  was  added  to  the  School  of  Engineering  in  1967,  and  it  was  recog- 
nized as  a  department  in  1971.  In  1974  the  name  of  the  mechanical  engineering  depart- 
ment was  changed  to  the  Department  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science; 
in  1982,  the  Department  of  Civil  Engineering  was  renamed  the  Department  of  Civil  and 

Duke  University       11 


Environmental  Engineering.  All  four  departments  offer  courses  leading  to  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  Engineering,  Master  of  Science,  and  Doctor  of  Philosophy  degrees. 

The  School  of  Nursing  was  established  in  1931  in  association  with  the  School  of  Medi- 
cine and  Duke  Hospital.  From  1944  until  1984,  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Nursing  Edu- 
cation degree  was  offered.  In  1980,  the  University  Board  of  Trustees  approved  the  phaseout 
of  the  existing  undergraduate  degree  programs.  At  present,  the  School  of  Nursing  offers 
courses  leading  to  the  Master  of  Science  in  Nursing  degree,  a  program  initiated  in  1958. 

As  the  University  developed  around  the  core  of  undergraduate  colleges  and  schools, 
the  Graduate  School  expanded  in  areas  of  instruction  and  research.  The  School  of  Law 
of  Trinity  College  became  the  Duke  University  School  of  Law,  and  other  professional 
schools  were  established.  The  Divinity  School  was  organized  in  1926,  the  School  of  Medi- 
cine in  1930,  the  School  of  Forestry  in  1938,  and  the  Graduate  School  of  Business  Adminis- 
tration in  1969.  In  1974,  the  School  of  Forestry  was  renamed  the  School  of  Forestry  and 
Environmental  Studies;  in  1980  the  business  school  became  the  Fuqua  School  of  Busi- 
ness. The  Graduate  School  itself,  as  distinguished  from  these  professional  schools,  was 
organized  in  the  1920s.  It  now  consists  of  some  fifty-five  departments  and  programs,  and 
offers  A.M.,  M.S.,  M.H.A.,  and  Ph.D.  degrees. 

Duke,  a  privately  supported,  church-related  (Methodist)  university,  has  over  9,000 
students  enrolled  in  degree  programs.  These  students  represent  nearly  every  state  and 
many  foreign  countries;  Duke  has  more  than  60,000  alumni  in  all  fifty  states  and  in  many 
foreign  countries.  The  University  is  a  member  of  the  North  Carolina  Association  of  In- 
dependent Colleges  and  Universities,  the  Southern  Association  of  Colleges  and  Schools, 
and  the  Association  of  American  Universities. 

From  academy  to  university,  some  of  the  basic  principles  have  remained  constant. 
The  Duke  University  motto,  EmditioetRcligio,  reflects  a  fundamental  faith  in  the  union 
of  knowledge  and  religion,  the  advancement  of  learning,  the  defense  of  scholarship,  the 
love  of  freedom  and  truth,  a  spirit  of  tolerance,  and  a  rendering  of  the  greatest  service  to 
the  individual,  the  state,  the  nation,  and  the  church.  Through  changing  generations  of 
students,  the  objective  has  been  to  encourage  individuals  to  achieve,  to  the  extent  of  their 
capacities,  an  understanding  and  appreciation  of  the  world  in  which  they  live,  their  rela- 
tionship to  it,  their  opportunities,  and  their  responsibilities. 


Resources  of  the  University 

The  Faculty.  The  University  faculty,  approximately  1,500  along  with  1,700  adjunct  and 
clinical  faculty,  maintains  a  tradition  of  personal  attention  to  students  and  devotion  to  re- 
search. Many  members  of  the  faculty  are,  andhavebeen,  cited  for  excellence  in  teaching 
and  are  elected  to  membership  in  the  national  societies  which  honor  those  best  in  scholar- 
ship and  research .  Leaders  in  their  disciplines  and  their  professional  organizations,  they 
are  authors  of  significant  books  and  articles.  Members  of  the  faculty  also  act  as  consul- 
tants to  industry,  government,  and  foundations.  To  honor  its  outstanding  faculty,  the 
University  has  established  more  than  seventy  James  B.  Duke  and  other  named  profes- 
sorships. 

The  Library  System.  The  libraries  of  the  University  consist  of  the  William  R .  Perkins 
Library  and  its  seven  branches  on  campus:  Biology-Forestry,  Chemistry,  Divinity,  East 
Campus,  Engineering,  Music,  Mathematics-Physics;  the  Pearse  Memorial  Library  at  the 
Duke  Marine  Laboratory  in  Beaufort;  and  the  independently  administered  libraries  of 
Law,  Medicine,  and  Business  (Fuqua).  In  June  1988,  these  libraries  contained  approxi- 
mately 3,668,935  volumes.  More  than  8,958  periodicals,  9,685  serials,  and  222  newspapers 
are  received  regularly.  The  collection  includes  about  2,685,206  manuscripts,  1,279,898 
microforms,  and  over  2,000,000  public  documents. 

TheWilliamR.  Perkins  Library.  TheWilliamR.  Perkins  Library,  the  main  library  of  the 
University,  houses  most  of  the  books  and  journals  in  the  humanities  and  social  sciences, 


12       General  Information 


large  files  of  United  States  federal  and  state  documents,  public  documents  of  many  Eu- 
ropean and  Latin  American  countries,  publications  of  European  academies  and  learned 
societies,  and  special  collections  from  South  Asian,  Far  Eastern,  and  Slavic  countries.  The 
newspaper  collection,  with  nearly  535,000  microform  pieces,  has  several  long  eighteenth- 
century  files;  strong  holdings  of  nineteenth-century  New  England  papers;  and  antebel- 
lum and  Civil  War  papers  from  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  Virginia,  and  Georgia; 
as  well  as  many  European  and  Latin  American  papers.  The  manuscript  collection  of  ap- 
proximately 2.6  million  items  is  particularly  strong  in  all  phases  of  the  history,  politics, 
and  social  and  economic  life  of  the  South  Atlantic  region;  it  also  includes  significant  papers 
in  English  and  American  literature  and  the  J.  Walter  Thompson  Advertising  Archives. 
The  rare  books  collection  contains  many  scarce  and  valuable  materials  covering  a  broad 
range  of  fields,  and  the  Latin  and  Greek  manuscripts  constitute  one  of  the  outstanding 
collections  of  its  kind  in  the  United  States.  The  collection  of  Confederate  imprints  is  one 
of  the  largest  in  the  country. 

The  Undergraduate  Library  houses  the  required  reading  materials  placed  on  reserve 
for  most  graduate  and  undergraduate  courses  as  well  as  the  library's  audiovisual  collec- 
tion of  films,  audio  and  disk  recordings,  and  videocassettes.  The  branch  libraries  serve 
the  academic  disciplines  whose  names  they  bear.  The  East  Campus  Library  is  primarily 
for  undergraduate  use,  but  it  also  contains  the  principal  collections  for  graduate  and  un- 
dergraduate study  in  art  and  the  performing  arts. 

Reference  librarians  are  on  duty  in  Perkins  Library  for  most  of  the  hours  the  library 
is  open.  Their  primary  responsibility  is  to  assist  patrons  in  making  the  most  effective  use 
of  library  collections  and  facilities.  In  addition  to  answering  specific  questions,  the  refer- 
ence librarians  also  help  patrons  access  information  by  identifying  and  explaining  the 
use  of  library  sources  and  by  giving  formal  and  informal  library  instruction  to  groups  of 
students,  faculty,  or  staff.  Professional  reference  service  is  available  to  students  in  all  other 
campus  libraries. 

Tours  of  the  Perkins  Library  are  given  frequently  during  Orientation  Week  and  upon 
request  throughout  the  year.  Information  about  other  campus  libraries  may  be  obtained 
from  the  staff  in  each  of  the  libraries.  Handbooks  about  library  services  and  facilities  are 
also  available  in  each  of  the  libraries. 

To  protect  the  collections  of  Perkins  Library  for  the  benefit  of  all  members  of  the  Univer- 
sity community,  electronic  security  systems  are  in  operation  at  the  main  exit  and  at  the 
periodicals  exit.  Desk  attendants  are  authorized  to  examine  all  books  and  other  library 
materials  that  people  using  the  library  may  be  carrying  in  hands,  briefcases,  or  bags  to 
determine  if  they  are  properly  charged.  Anyone  who  refuses  to  permit  books  to  be  ex- 
amined may  be  denied  further  use  of  the  library. 

The  library  has  microfilming  and  copying  services.  The  rules  with  regard  to  copyright 
and  a  schedule  of  fees  for  reproduction  services  are  available  in  the  library  at  the  point 
of  service. 

The  Medical  Center  Library.  The  Medical  Center  Library,  located  in  the  Seeley  G.  Mudd 
Communications  Center  and  Library  Building,  provides  the  services  and  collections 
necessary  to  further  educational,  research,  and  clinical  activities  in  the  medical  field.  Serv- 
ices are  available  to  the  students,  faculty,  and  staff  of  the  School  of  Medicine;  of  the  Divi- 
sion of  Allied  Health;  of  Duke  Hospital;  and  of  the  graduate  departments  in  the  basic  med- 
ical sciences.  Other  students  and  faculty  needing  access  to  biomedical  literature  may  apply 
for  privileges  upon  application  to  the  Head  of  the  Circulation  Department. 

Over  232,000  volumes  are  available,  including  the  Trent  Collection  in  the  History  of 
Medicine.  Approximately  2,650  journal  subscriptions  are  received  currently,  in  addition 
to  extensive  back  files  of  older  materials.  The  library  has  several  types  of  audiovisual 
materials  and  equipment.  With  the  exception  of  certain  items  shelved  on  reserve,  these 
materials  have  been  integrated  into  the  general  book  and  journal  collections  and  are  listed 
in  the  card  or  journal  catalogs.  The  Frank  Engel  Memorial  Collection  consists  of  a  small 
group  of  books  on  nonmedical  subjects  for  general  reading,  together  with  several 


Resources  of  the  University       13 


newspapers  and  popular  magazines.  Traditional  reference  services  are  supplemented 
by  on-line  bibliographic  systems  and  computer-produced  specialized  indexes. 

The  uniform  borrowing  privileges  apply  to  all  registered  users.  Details  of  loan  and 
other  services  may  be  found  in  the  guide  which  is  published  each  year  and  is  available 
at  the  library. 

The  School  of  Law  Library.  The  School  of  Law  Library,  with  over  370,000  volumes,  serves 
both  the  University  and  the  local  legal  community.  It  features  comprehensive  coverage 
of  basic  Anglo-American  primary  source  materials,  including  nearly  all  reported  deci- 
sions of  federal  and  state  courts,  as  well  as  current  and  retrospective  collections  of  feder- 
al and  state  codes  and  session  laws.  Digests,  legal  encyclopedias,  and  other  indexing 
devices  provide  access  to  the  primary  documents.  A  large  section  of  the  library  collection 
is  devoted  to  treatises  on  all  phases  of  law  and  legal  sciences,  as  well  as  history,  econom- 
ics, government,  and  other  social  and  behavioral  sciences  relevant  to  legal  research.  The 
treatises  are  organized  in  the  Library  of  Congress  classification  system  and  most  are  ac- 
cessible through  the  Duke  University  online  catalog.  Special  treatise  collections  are  main- 
tained in  several  subject  areas,  including  the  George  C.  Christie  collection  in  jurispru- 
dence and  the  Floyd  S.  Riddick  collection  of  autographed  senatorial  material.  The  library 
is  a  selective  depository  for  United  States  government  publications,  with  concentration 
on  congressional  and  administrative  law  materials.  The  library  receives  the  records  and 
briefs  from  the  United  States  Supreme  Court,  the  Fourth  Circuit  Court  of  Appeals,  and 
the  North  Carolina  Supreme  Court  and  Court  of  Appeals.  In  addition  to  its  Anglo- 
American  holdings,  the  library  holds  substantial  research  collections  in  foreign  and  in- 
ternational law.  The  foreign  law  collection  is  extensive  in  coverage,  with  concentrations 
in  European  law  and  business  law  materials.  The  international  law  collection  is  strong 
in  primary  source  and  treatise  material  on  both  private  and  public  international  law  topics. 
Undergraduate  and  graduate  students  whose  course  of  study  requires  access  to  legal  liter- 
ature may  use  the  library.  However,  access  to  the  library  may  be  restricted  during  certain 
times  because  of  accreditation  standards. 

Record  Library.  The  Department  of  Music  has  a  record  library  separate  from  the 
university  libraries  with  facilities  for  listening  to  records  and  tapes.  All  materials  may  be 
used  in  the  listening  room  and  any  member  of  the  community  may  borrow  from  the  Arts 
Council  Collection  of  more  than  2,700  records  for  a  nominal  fee. 

University  Archives.  The  Duke  University  Archives,  the  official  archival  agency  of 
the  University,  collects,  preserves,  and  administers  the  records  of  the  University  having 
continuing  administrative  or  historical  value.  The  institutional  archives,  which  also  in- 
clude published  material,  photographs,  papers  of  student  groups  and  faculty,  and  selected 
memorabilia,  are  available  for  research  under  controlled  conditions  in  341  Perkins  Library. 

Computation  Center.  For  a  contemporary  university,  extensive  computing  resources 
are  essential .  At  Duke,  the  Center  for  Academic  Computing  is  the  organization  that  works 
in  partnership  with  members  of  the  University  community  to  enable  them  to  achieve  their 
goals  through  computing. 

The  Center  for  Academic  Computing  provides  access  to  a  variety  of  computing  fa- 
cilities and  services.  Through  Duke's  connection  to  the  National  Science  Foundation  data 
network,  students  can  get  access  to  an  IBM  3090-600S  at  the  Cornell  National  Supercom- 
puter Facility,  a  Cray  X-MP/48  at  the  Pittsburgh  Supercomputer  Center,  and  in  1989,  to 
the  Cray  Y-MP/432  at  the  North  Carolina  Supercomputing  Center.  Mainframe  service  for 
Duke  is  provided  on  an  IBM  3081  computer  at  the  Triangle  Universities  Computation  Cen- 
ter (TUCC)  located  in  the  Research  Triangle  Park.  TUCC  is  a  regional  computer  center 
formed  and  operated  jointly  by  North  Carolina  State  University  at  Raleigh,  the  Univer- 
sity of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  and  Duke  University.  Minicomputer  service  is 
provided  by  departmentally  owned  systems,  including  Digital  and  Sun  equipment,  and 
by  three  AT&T  3B-15s  operated  by  the  Center  for  Academic  Computing. 


14       General  Information 


Access  to  these  supercomputer,  mainframe,  and  minicomputer  systems  is  provided 
by  campus  facilities  connected  by  telecommunications  links.  These  include  public  clusters 
of  AT&T  4425  terminals  located  on  the  West,  East,  and  North  campuses.  In  addition,  any- 
one with  a  personal  computer,  modem,  and  telephone  line  can  connect  to  these  computers 
by  dialing  into  a  central  dataswitch.  Printing  services  are  available  through  four  medi- 
um speed  printers  located  on  East  and  West  campuses,  and  TUCC  printing  can  use  the 
high  speed  Xerox  9700  laser  printer  located  in  North  Building. 

The  Center  for  Academic  Computing  also  supports  extensive  personal  computer  serv- 
ices located  throughout  the  campus.  There  are  three  laboratories  of  MS-DOS  based  per- 
sonal computers  housed  in  the  North,  Engineering,  and  Carr  buildings,  and  nine  pub- 
lic clusters  of  both  MS-DOS  and  Apple  Macintosh  personal  computer  systems  spread 
throughout  the  University.  All  laboratories  and  clusters  are  equipped  with  either  dot  ma- 
trix or  laser  printing  facilities,  and  several  are  connected  to  the  campus  telecommunica- 
tions network.  While  there  is  a  nominal  charge  for  the  use  of  the  laser  printers,  there  is 
no  charge  for  the  use  of  the  personal  computers. 

Funds  for  using  TUCC  come  from  outside  grants  and  contracts,  and  from  Universi- 
ty funds.  Several  schools  within  the  University,  such  as  Arts  and  Sciences  and  Engineer- 
ing, may  apply  for  funding  specifically  designated  for  use  at  TUCC.  Faculty  within  these 
schools  automatically  have  access  to  a  TUCC  account.  Graduate  students  in  these  schools 
may  apply  for  a  TUCC  account.  Any  student  may  request  a  free  account  for  electronic  mail 
services.  More  specific  information  regarding  Duke  computing  facilities  may  be  obtained 
by  contacting  the  Center  for  Academic  Computing  Consulting  Desk  at  684-3695,  9:00  A.M. 
to  5:00  P.M.,  Monday  through  Friday. 

Science  Laboratories.  In  addition  to  the  teaching  and  research  laboratories  in  the 
departments  of  natural  and  social  sciences  and  in  the  School  of  Engineering,  there  are 
other  facilities  in  which  some  advanced  undergraduates  work  on  individual  projects. 
These  include  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  in  Beaufort,  North  Carolina;  the 
phytotron  of  the  Southeastern  Plant  Environment  Laboratories,  located  on  the  Duke  cam- 
pus; the  Duke  Forest,  adjacent  to  the  campus;  the  Duke  University  Primate  Center  in  Duke 
Forest;  and  the  Triangle  Universities  Nuclear  Laboratory,  also  on  the  campus. 

Duke  as  a  Residential  University 

Duke  has  a  long  tradition  as  a  residential  university  and  has  sought  to  provide  for 
the  great  majority  of  the  undergraduates  convenient  on-campus  housing  in  both  residence 
halls  and  apartments.  While  the  University  was  established  to  provide  a  formal  educa- 
tional opportunity  for  students,  Duke  has  always  taken  the  position  that  education  en- 
compasses social  and  personal  development  as  well  as  intellectual  growth.  In  order  to 
facilitate  such  a  holistic  approach,  Duke  seeks  to  provide  a  supportive  environment  sub- 
stantially anchored  in  its  residential  program. 

Educational,  cultural,  and  outdoor  adventure  programming  is  planned  and  presented 
throughout  the  year  for  living  groups  through  the  cooperative  work  of  the  Office  of 
Residential  Life,  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  the  School  of  Engineering,  and  resi- 
dent students.  There  are  a  number  of  faculty  members  in  residence  in  both  freshman  and 
upperclass  houses.  Faculty  offices  and  seminar  rooms  are  also  located  in  several  houses. 
The  goals  of  these  various  programs  are  to  enhance  the  quality  of  intellectual  and  social 
life  for  the  residents  on  campus,  to  facilitate  student-faculty  interaction  outside  of  the  for- 
mal classroom,  and  to  develop  a  greater  sense  of  community  within  the  individual  resi- 
dence halls  as  well  as  within  the  greater  University. 

The  Undergraduate  College  and  School 

In  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  and  the  School  of  Engineering,  instruction 
is  offered  by  University  faculty  who  engage  in  research  and  in  graduate  and  undergraduate 

The  Undergraduate  College  and  School       15 


teaching.  Duke  offers  its  undergraduates  the  opportunity  to  study  with  many  interna- 
tionally recognized  authorities  in  their  disciplines  and  with  faculty  members  who  are 
jointly  committed  to  undergraduate  instruction  and  to  the  advancement  of  knowledge. 
The  University  recognizes  that  students  learn  not  only  through  formal  lectures,  but  also 
through  the  interplay  of  ideas  among  faculty  members  and  students;  thus,  it  offers  un- 
dergraduates opportunities  to  test  their  ideas  against  those  of  their  professors  and  to  ob- 
serve at  close  range  those  who  have  committed  their  lives  to  academic  careers. 

The  University,  if  it  is  doing  its  job  properly,  is  educating  citizens  of  the  United  States 
and  of  the  world,  not  only  individuals  aspiring  to  personal  fulfillment.  At  Duke,  the  men 
and  women  who  earn  degrees  are  likely  to  become  leaders  in  industry,  government,  and 
the  professions.  They  will  have  influence  on  and  will  be  influenced  by  the  social  fabric 
of  which  they  are  a  part.  The  kind  of  people  they  become  will  matter  not  only  to  them 
and  their  families,  but  also  to  their  communities,  to  the  United  States,  and  to  the  coun- 
tries of  the  rest  of  the  world  as  well. 

Amidst  changing  external  conditions,  the  University  cannot  be  sure  of  what  knowl- 
edge and  what  talents  will  best  prepare  the  citizens  of  the  future  for  the  general  welfare. 
The  chances  are  that  the  currently  most  lucrative  professions  will  not  remain  so  as  new 
combinations  of  knowledge  and  skill  become  more  useful  to  the  polity  which  supports 
us  all. 

Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  In  Trinity  College,  the  liberal  arts  are  a  means 
through  which  students  explore  the  world  of  ideas  from  art  and  music  to  neurosciences 
and  physics.  The  undergraduate  program,  rated  one  of  the  finest  in  the  country,  helps 
students  learn  how  to  deal  successfully  with  the  challenges,  intellectual  and  philosophical, 
that  modern  life  provides.  Trinity  College  is  a  community  of  outstanding  students  and 
talented,  nationally-ranked  faculty.  As  members  of  this  community,  students  learn  to  ask 
questions,  analyze  rationally,  challenge  ideas,  and  contribute  to  the  continuing  develop- 
ment of  knowledge. 

The  Trinity  experience  offers  a  traditional  liberal  arts  base  of  study  and  currently  re- 
quires, within  broad  limits,  exposure  to  great  ideas  in  the  three  major  areas  of  intellectu- 
al activity:  the  humanities,  social  sciences,  and  natural  sciences.  It  offers  exposure  across 
a  broad  spectrum  as  well,  and  interdisciplinary  and  interdepartmental  programs  stretch 
horizons  even  further.  Internships  and  apprenticeships  in  areas  related  to  students'  majors 
are  increasingly  available  so  that  practical  experience  can  complement  a  more  formal  edu- 
cation .  In  a  world  where  people  are  drawn  ever  closer  together,  the  understanding  of  cul- 
tural difference  and  diversity  becomes  increasingly  important.  Our  study  abroad  pro- 
grams are  varied  and  plentiful. 

The  undergraduate  college  of  arts  and  sciences  is  unique  in  that  it  is  set  within  a  dis- 
tinguished research  university.  We  believe  that  this  combination  provides  unparalleled 
opportunities  for  interaction  with  faculty,  both  inside  and  outside  the  classroom.  The  arts 
and  sciences  faculty  boasts  some  of  the  most  highly  rated  scholar-teachers  in  the  coun- 
try. They  challenge  students  both  to  master  and  to  reach  beyond  the  basics  of  fundamental 
knowledge.  At  Duke  there  is  a  genuine  concern  for  learning,  and  students  are  prepared 
by  academic  challenges  and  their  individual  experiences  for  the  critical  decision-making 
required  of  them  for  participator}'  citizenship,  full  personal  lives,  and  successful  careers. 

School  of  Engineering.  The  undergraduate  engineering  program  at  Duke  Univer- 
sity is  designed  both  for  students  who  intend  to  become  professional  engineers  and  for 
those  who  desire  a  modern,  general  education  based  on  the  problems  and  the  promises 
of  a  technological  society.  The  environment  in  which  students  are  educated  is  as  impor- 
tant in  shaping  their  future  as  their  classroom  experiences.  In  the  Duke  School  of  Engineer- 
ing this  environment  has  two  major  components:  one  is  modern  technology  derived  from 
the  research  and  design  activities  of  faculty  and  students  in  the  school;  the  other  is  the 
liberal  arts  environment  of  the  total  University,  with  its  humanitarian,  social,  and  scien- 
tific emphases. 


16       General  Information 


Engineering  is  not  a  homogeneous  discipline;  it  requires  many  special  talents.  Some 
faculty  members  in  the  School  of  Engineering  are  designers;  they  are  problem-oriented, 
concerned  with  teaching  students  how  to  solve  problems— how  to  synthesize  relevant 
information  and  ideas  and  apply  them  in  a  creative,  feasible  design.  Other  engineering 
faculty  members  function  more  typically  as  scientists;  they  are  method-oriented,  using 
the  techniques  of  their  discipline  in  their  teaching  and  research  to  investigate  various 
natural  and  artificial  phenomena. 


The  Undergraduate  College  and  School       17 


Degree  Programs 


Degrees  and  Academic  Credit 

Duke  University  offers  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  the  degrees  of  Bache- 
lor of  Arts  and  Bachelor  of  Science,  and  in  the  School  of  Engineering  the  degree  of  Bache- 
lor of  Science  in  Engineering.  Within  the  curriculum  of  each  college  or  school,  students 
have  the  major  responsibility  for  designing  and  maintaining  a  course  program  appropriate 
to  their  background  and  goals.  They  are  assisted  by  faculty  advisors,  departmental  Direc- 
tors of  Undergraduate  Studies,  and  academic  deans. 

Credit  toward  a  degree  is  earned  in  units  called  semester  courses  (s.c),  commonly 
abbreviated  as  courses.  These  courses  ordinarily  consist  of  three  to  four  hours  of  instruc- 
tion each  week  of  the  fall  or  spring  semester  or  the  equivalent  total  number  of  hours  in 
a  summer  term.  Double  courses,  half  courses,  and  quarter  courses  are  also  recognized. 

Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 

Effective  for  students  who  matriculate  as  degree  candidates  after  May  1,  1988: 

A  variety  of  approaches  to  a  liberal  education  is  provided  by  Program  I  and  II .  Either 
program  leads  to  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  degree,  and  each  requires 
thirty-four  semester  courses. 

PROGRAM  I 

Program  I  provides  for  the  experience  and  achievement  that  constitute  a  liberal  edu- 
cation. The  ability  to  organize  ideas  and  to  communicate  them  with  clarity  and  precision 
is  refined  by  completing  the  writing  course  and  by  the  requirement  for  discussion  in  small 
groups.  Knowledge  of  a  foreign  language  contributes  to  an  understanding  of  the  nature 
of  language  itself  and  to  perspectives  on  other  cultures.  Through  courses  in  arts  and  liter- 
atures students  learn  about  the  creative  products  of  the  human  intellect;  courses  about 
civilizations  ask  students  to  attend  to  the  analysis  and  evaluation  of  ideas  and  events  that 
shape  civilizations  past  and  present.  Through  courses  in  natural  sciences  students  learn 
how  to  interpret  and  utilize  information  in  an  increasingly  technological  world,  while 
courses  in  quantitative  reasoning  help  develop  skills  of  inference  and  analysis.  Finally, 
through  courses  in  the  social  sciences  students  learn  about  the  causes  of  human  behavior 
and  about  the  origins  and  functions  of  the  social  structures  in  which  we  operate. 


Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       19 


Students  must  complete  the  requirements  listed  below  and  explained,  where  neces- 
sary, on  the  following  pages.  No  degree  requirements,  except  the  requirement  for  thirty- 
four  course  credits  and  continuation  requirements,  may  be  met  by  a  course  passed  un- 
der a  pass/fail  option  unless  the  course  is  offered  only  on  that  basis. 

Writing.  Students  are  required  to  demonstrate  ability  to  write  effective  English  prose 
by  completing  a  course  in  expository  writing,  ordinarily  University  Writing  Course  4,  5, 
6,  7,  or  8.  See  the  section  University  Writing  Program  in  the  chapter  "Courses  of  In- 
struction." 

General  Studies  consisting  of  courses  in  five  of  the  following  six  areas  of  knowledge : 
Arts  and  Literatures  (AL) 
Civilizations  (CZ) 
Foreign  Languages  (FL) 
Natural  Sciences  (NS) 
Quantitative  Reasoning  (QR) 
Social  Sciences  (SS). 
—In  four  of  these  areas  a  student  must  take  three  courses.  Two  of  these  three  courses 
in  each  area  must  be  related  (see  below),  and  at  least  one  of  the  three  in  each  area 
must  be  at  the  100-level. 
—In  the  remaining  area  a  student  must  take  two  courses. 
—Advanced  placement  credits  will  not  substitute  for  courses  in  these  areas. 
—Courses  counting  toward  requirements  in  a  major  (and  additional  courses  taken 
in  the  major  department)  do  not  count  toward  more  than  two  of  these  areas. 

The  Major  consists  of  the  requirements  for  majors  in  the  department  or  program  in 
which  a  student  wishes  to  obtain  a  bachelor's  degree  (see  below).  These  requirements 
are  described  under  the  course  listing  for  each  department  or  program .  Advanced  place- 
ment courses  may  substitute  for  courses  in  the  major  as  described  by  each  department. 

Elective  courses.  Advanced  placement  credits  may  function  as  elective  courses. 
Courses  that  a  student  is  using  as  electives  may  or  may  not  carry  an  area  of  knowledge 
designation. 

Small  Group  Learning  Experiences. 

—Before  reaching  junior  status :  at  least  one  full  course  designated  as  a  seminar,  tutori- 
al, or  independent  study;  or  a  combination  of  two  preceptorials  or  discussion 
sections. 

—During  the  junior  and  senior  years:  at  least  two  full  courses  designated  as  semi- 
nars, tutorials,  independent  study,  or  a  thesis. 

Course  credits.  There  are  several  separate  and  specific  requirements  concerning 
course  credits  in  Trinity  College.  Thirty-four  (34)  courses  are  required  for  graduation,  not 
more  than  two  with  a  grade  of  D,  and  including: 

— At  least  seventeen  (17)  at  Duke  (including  the  senior  year). 
—At  least  twenty-one  (21)  outside  the  major  department. 

—For  the  major  (including  courses  that  the  major  department  or  program  requires 
outside  itself):  no  more  than  seventeen  (17)  total  for  a  Bachelor  of  Arts  major  and 
no  more  than  nineteen  (19)  for  a  Bachelor  of  Science  major. 
— At  least  twelve  (12)  courses  at  or  above  the  100-level. 

—No  more  than:  one  credit  of  physical  education  activity  and  dance  activity  (i.e.,  two 
half-credit  activity  courses),  two  credits  for  house  courses  (i.e.,  four  half-credit 
house  courses),  six  from  a  professional  school  (e.g. ,  business,  engineering,  medi- 
cine), and  four  in  military  science. 

Quality  of  Work.  Passing  grades  are  expected  in  all  course  work,  but  see  pages  be- 
low for  minimum  continuation  requirements.  Students  accept  personal  responsibility 
for  understanding  and  meeting  the  requirements  of  the  curriculum. 

20       Degree  Programs 


General  Studies  (Distribution  of  Courses).  Students  achieve  breadth  and  balance 
of  intellectual  experience  by  taking  courses  in  at  least  five  of  the  six  areas  of  knowledge. 
Courses  that  can  be  taken  to  satisfy  the  distribution  requirement  are  identified  in  the  Bulle- 
tin by  a  two-letter  code  (AL,  CZ,  FL,  NS,  QR,  SS).  Infourof  the  areas  of  knowledge  a  stu- 
dent must  take  at  least  three  courses.  At  least  one  of  the  three  courses  must  be  at  the  100 
or  200  level  and  at  least  two  of  the  three  courses  must  be  related  (see  below) .  In  one  addi- 
tional area  of  knowledge  a  student  is  required  to  take  at  least  two  courses.  Courses  count- 
ing toward  requirements  in  a  major  (and  additional  courses  taken  in  the  major  depart- 
ment) do  not  count  toward  more  than  tzoo  of  these  areas. 

Related  Courses.  Students  achieve  a  measure  of  depth  in  their  general  course  of  study 
by  taking  at  least  two  related  courses  that  support  or  complement  each  other  in  each  of  four 
areas  of  knowledge .  The  related  course  work  provision  stimulates  students  to  make  con- 
sidered choices  about  their  course  distribution.  It  encourages  the  choice  of  courses  that 
develop  a  special  interest  in  depth,  of  courses  that  extend  and  enhance  what  a  student 
has  already  learned,  or  of  courses  that  build  on  each  other  to  develop  an  area  in  greater 
depth  than  can  be  explored  in  a  single  semester.  Related  courses  may  be,  for  example, 
a  defined  two-course  sequence  (such  as  Mathematics  31,  32),  a  course  and  its  prerequi- 
site, or  two  courses  that  are  used  to  develop  topical,  geographic,  or  temporal  connections. 
Choices  of  related  courses  are  made  in  consultation  with  a  faculty  advisor. 

The  Major.  Students  are  expected  to  acquire  some  mastery  of  a  particular  discipline 
or  interdisciplinary  area  as  well  as  to  achieve  a  breadth  of  intellectual  experience.  They 
therefore  complete  a  departmental  major,  an  interdisciplinary  major,  or  an  interdepart- 
mental concentration.  At  least  half  the  courses  for  a  student's  major  field  must  be  taken 
at  Duke  although  departments  may  make  exceptions  to  this  rule  in  special  circumstances. 
A  student  who  completes  requirements  for  two  majors  may  have  both  recorded  on  the 
official  record.  See  the  chapter  'Academic  Procedures  and  Information"  for  the  majors 
within  each  degree  and  for  procedures  on  declaring  a  major. 

Departmental  Major.  The  courses  for  a  departmental  major  may  include  introductory 
or  basic  prerequisite  courses  and  higher-level  courses  in  the  major  department  or  in  the 
major  department  and  related  departments.  The  courses  required  in  the  major  depart- 
ment must  include  at  least  five  beyond  the  introductory  or  basic  prerequisite  level,  but 
these  required  courses  may  not  exceed  eight  semester  course  credits  for  the  Bachelor  of 
Arts  degree  or  ten  for  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  Furthermore,  the  total  number  of 
courses  required  at  any  level  in  the  major  and  related  departments  may  not  exceed  seven- 
teen semester  courses  for  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree  and  nineteen  semester  courses  for 
the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  Students  may  elect  to  take  more  courses  in  their  major 
than  are  required,  but  only  thirteen  courses  in  one  (the  major)  department  count  toward 
the  graduation  requirement  of  thirty-four  semester  courses.  Departmental  majors  are 
available  in  anthropology,  art  design,  art  history,  chemistry,  classical  studies,  econom- 
ics, English,  French,  geology,  Germanic  languages  and  literature,  Greek,  history,  Latin, 
mathematics,  music,  philosophy,  physics,  political  science,  psychology,  public  policy 
studies,  religion,  Slavic  languages  and  literatures,  sociology,  and  Spanish.  The  courses 
required  for  a  major  are  specified  by  the  department.  The  requirements  appear  in  the  sec- 
tion following  each  department's  course  descriptions. 

Program  Major.  Students  may  satisfy  the  requirement  by  completing  work  prescribed 
for  a  major  in  approved  programs,  often  interdisciplinary.  These  programs  include  Afro- 
American  studies,  biology,  Canadian  studies,  comparative  area  studies,  drama,  and  me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  studies.  The  requirements  for  these  majors  appear  under  each 
program  in  the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction." 

Interdepartmental  Concentration.  A  student  may  pursue  an  interdepartmental  major 
program  designed  by  the  student  and  advisors  as  an  alternate  means  of  satisfying  the  ma- 
jor requirement.  An  interdepartmental  concentration  consists  of  at  least  three  courses 


Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       21 


beyond  the  introductory  level  in  each  of  two  or  more  departments.  For  procedures  see 
the  section  on  declaration  of  major  or  division  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and 
Information." 

Small  Group  Learning  Experiences.  By  supplementing  the  classroom  and  lecture 
methods  of  instruction,  small  group  learning  experience  courses  assure  students  oppor- 
tunities to  engage  in  discussion,  develop  skills,  refine  judgment,  and  defend  ideas  when 
challenged.  A  seminar  (ordinarily  indicated  by  the  suffix  S)  is  an  independent  course  of 
twelve  to  fifteen  (exceptionally  to  twenty)  students  who,  together  with  an  instructor,  en- 
gage in  disciplined  discussion .  The  number  of  meeting  hours  per  term  is  the  same  as  for 
regular  courses  of  equivalent  credit.  Instructors  are  encouraged  to  present  to  each  stu- 
dent at  the  end  of  the  term  a  written  evaluation  of  the  student's  work.  A  discussion  section 
(D)  is  a  group  of  approximately  ten  students  and  an  instructor,  in  which  discussion  is  the 
paramount  characteristic;  it  is  an  integral  part  of  a  larger  regular  course,  and  every  mem- 
ber of  the  class  is  enrolled .  A  preceptorial  (P)  is  a  group  of  usually  no  more  than  twelve  stu- 
dents and  an  instructor  in  which  discussion  is  the  primary  component;  it  is  an  addition- 
al and  optional  unit  attached  to  a  regular  course  involving  one  or  more  extra  meetings 
per  week.  No  additional  course  credit  is  given  for  a  preceptorial.  A  tutorial  (T)  is  a  group 
of  one  to  five  students  and  an  instructor  meeting  for  discussion  which  is  independent 
of  any  other  course.  For  independent  study  students  pursue  their  own  interests  in  reading, 
research,  or  writing,  but  meet  with  an  instructor  for  guidance  and  discussion.  See  the 
section  on  independent  study  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and  Information." 
Instructors  in  all  courses  that  satisfy  the  requirements  for  small  group  learning  ex- 
periences, including  independent  study,  must  meet  with  the  students  at  least  once  ev- 
ery two  weeks.  The  requirements  for  small  group  learning  experiences  are  listed  under 
Program  I,  above. 

Course  Requirements.  Thirty- four  semester  courses  are  required  for  graduation,  in- 
cluding a  maximum  of  two  courses  passed  with  a  grade  of  D.  At  least  seventeen  courses, 
including  the  work  of  the  senior  year,  must  be  passed  at  Duke.  Twelve  courses  must  be 
at  the  advanced  (100-200)  level.  The  thirty-four  course  credits  may  include  (1)  no  more 
than  thirteen  courses  in  one  department;  (2)  no  more  than  seventeen  total  for  a  major  (in- 
cluding those  required  in  related  departments)  under  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree  and 
no  more  than  nineteen  total  for  a  major  (including  those  required  in  related  departments) 
under  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree;  (3)  no  more  than  one  semester-course  credit  in  phys- 
ical education  activity  and  dance  activity  (i.e.,  a  total  of  two  half-credit  activity  courses); 
(4)  no  more  than  two  credits  for  house  courses;  (5)  no  more  than  six  credits  for  courses 
taken  in  professional  schools;  and  (6)  no  more  than  four  semester-course  credits  in  mili- 
tary science.  Certain  military  science  courses  listed  as  carrying  credit  do  not  count  toward 
graduation  but  appear  on  a  student's  permanent  academic  record.  Military  science 
courses,  like  professional  school  and  all  physical  education  courses,  do  not  satisfy  general 
studies  (area  of  knowledge)  requirements.  American  Dance  Festival  courses  are  included 
in  the  total  limitation  on  physical  education/dance  activity  courses  noted  above  in  this 
paragraph. 

Residence.  A  residence  period  of  eight  semesters  is  the  typical  amount  of  time  a  stu- 
dent may  take  to  earn  either  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  This 
period  may  be  extended  for  one  or  two  semesters  by  a  student's  academic  dean  for  legiti- 
mate reasons,  if  it  seems  probable  that  an  extension  will  enable  the  student  to  complete 
all  remaining  requirements  for  graduation .  A  student  will  not  be  permitted  residence  of 
more  than  ten  semesters  in  order  to  be  graduated. 

For  the  minimum  residence  period,  at  least  seventeen  courses  must  be  satisfactorily 
completed  at  Duke,  including  the  courses  needed  to  meet  the  senior  year  residence  re- 
quirement .  (For  the  purposes  of  the  residence  requirement,  advanced  placement  credits 
are  not  considered  as  courses  taken  at  Duke. )  If  only  seventeen  courses  are  taken  at  Duke, 
they  must  include  the  student's  last  eight  courses.  A  student  with  more  than  seventeen 

22       Degree  Programs 


courses  at  Duke  may  take  two  of  the  last  eight  courses  at  another  approved  institution. 
A  student  who  has  completed  twenty-six  courses  at  Duke  may  take  four  of  the  last  eight 
courses  at  another  approved  institution.  Courses  taken  elsewhere  must  be  approved  in 
advance  by  the  appropriate  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  the  student's  academic 
dean. 

Former  students  of  Trinity  College  or  the  Woman's  College  who  have  been  out  of  col- 
lege for  at  least  six  years,  and  left  in  good  standing,  may,  with  certain  provisos,  take  up 
to  eight  semester-courses  in  another  institution  of  approved  standing  in  final  fulfillment 
of  graduation  requirements.  Further  information  can  be  obtained  from  the  Associate  Dean 
of  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  responsible  for  coordinating  readmission. 

Quality  of  Work  (Continuation  Requirements).  A  student  must  achieve  a  satisfac- 
tory record  of  academic  performance  each  term  and  make  satisfactory  progress  toward 
graduation  each  year  to  continue  enrollment  in  college.  A  student  who  fails  to  meet  the 
minimum  requirements  described  below  must  leave  college  for  at  least  two  semesters; 
a  summer  session  may  be  counted  as  a  semester.  The  student  may  apply  to  Trinity  Col- 
lege of  Arts  and  Sciences  for  readmission.  If,  after  readmission,  the  student  again  fails 
to  meet  continuation  requirements,  the  student  will  be  ineligible,  except  in  extraordinary 
instances,  for  readmission  to  Trinity  College. 

Satisfactory  Performance  Each  Term.  A  student  who  does  not  receive  a  passing  grade 
in  all  courses  must  meet  the  following  minimum  requirements  or  be  withdrawn  from  the 
college. 

In  the  Fall  or  Spring  Semester:  (1)  in  the  first  semester  of  enrollment  at  Duke,  a  student 
with  a  normal  course  load  (of  at  least  four  semester  courses,  as  defined  in  the  chapter  "Aca- 
demic Procedures  and  Information")  may  not  fail  more  than  two  full  courses;  (2)  after  the 
first  semester  at  Duke,  a  student  with  four  or  more  courses  may  not  fail  more  than  one 
full  course;  (3)  a  first-semester  student,  whether  a  freshman  or  a  transfer  student,  who 
for  a  special  reason  has  received  permission  from  an  academic  dean  to  enroll  in  fewer  than 
four  courses  may  not  fail  more  than  one  full  course;  (4)  a  student  taking  an  authorized 
underload  after  the  first  semester  at  Duke  must  earn  all  passing  grades.  (Students  may 
not  carry  an  underload  without  the  permission  of  their  academic  dean.)  For  the  purposes 
of  continuation,  incomplete  work  in  any  course  is  considered  a  failure  to  achieve  satis- 
factory performance  in  that  course.  Therefore,  where  continuation  is  in  question,  incom- 
plete work  in  any  course  must  be  completed  with  a  passing  grade  in  time  for  final  grades 
to  be  submitted  to  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  no  later  than  the  weekday  preceding  the  first 
day  of  classes  of  the  spring  semester,  or  prior  to  the  first  day  of  classes  of  the  second  term 
of  the  summer  session,  as  appropriate.  In  the  case  of  incomplete  work  in  the  spring  se- 
mester, this  requirement  applies  whether  or  not  the  student  plans  to  attend  one  or  more 
terms  of  the  summer  session.  The  student,  however,  may  not  enroll  in  a  summer  term 
at  Duke  unless  the  requirement  of  satisfactory  performance  each  semester  has  been 
satisfied. 

In  the  Summer  Session:  to  maintain  enrollment  at  Duke  a  student  may  not  fail  more 
than  one  full  course  in  a  summer  term  or  a  summer  session.  For  purposes  of  continua- 
tion, incomplete  work  is  considered  failure  to  achieve  a  satisfactory  performance  in  that 
course.  Therefore,  when  eligibility  to  continue  from  the  summer  session  to  the  fall  is  in 
question,  incomplete  courses  must  be  satisfactorily  completed  in  time  for  a  passing  grade 
to  be  submitted  to  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  no  later  than  the  weekday  preceding  the  first 
day  of  fall  classes.  Moreover,  no  student  may  enter  the  fall  semester  with  more  than  one 
incomplete  grade  from  the  preceding  spring  and  summer. 

Any  student  excluded  from  the  college  under  the  provisions  of  these  regulations  may 
on  request  have  the  case  reviewed  by  the  Senior  Associate  Dean  of  Trinity  College  of  Arts 
and  Sciences. 

Satisfactory  Progress  toward  Graduation.  Each  year  prior  to  the  beginning  of  fall  term 
classes,  a  student  must  have  made  satisfactory  progress  toward  fulfillment  of  curricular 


Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       23 


requirements  to  be  eligible  to  continue  in  the  college;  i.e. ,  a  certain  number  of  courses  must 
have  been  passed  at  Duke  according  to  the  following  schedule: 


76  be  eligible  to 
continue  to  the 


Fall  Matriculants 

A  student  must 
have  passed  at  Duke 


Spring  Matriculants 

76  be  eligible  to  A  student  must 

continue  to  the        have  passed  at  Duke 


3rd  semester  6  semester  courses 

5th  semester         14  semester  courses 
7th  semester         24  semester  courses 


2nd  semester 
4th  semester 
6th  semester 
8th  semester 


2  semester  courses 
10  semester  courses 
19  semester  courses 
28  semester  courses 


For  students  who  have  interrupted  their  university  studies,  the  continuation  require- 
ment must  still  be  satisfied  before  the  beginning  of  each  fall  term.  For  such  students,  the 
number  of  courses  needed  to  satisfy  the  continuation  requirement  is  determined  from 
the  table  above,  based  on  which  semester  they  will  enter  in  the  fall  term. 

Courses  taken  in  the  summer  term  at  Duke  may  be  used  to  meet  this  requirement; 
advanced  placement  may  not  be  used  to  satisfy  it.  No  more  than  two  courses  completed 
with  D  grades  may  be  counted  toward  fulfilling  this  annual  continuation  requirement. 

PROGRAM  II 

Nature  and  Purpose.  Program  II  is  an  alternate  approach  leading  to  either  the  Bach- 
elor of  Arts  or  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree  which  offers  the  student  who  has  an  un- 
usual interest  or  talent  in  a  single  field,  or  an  unusual  combination  of  interests  or  talents 
in  several  fields,  an  opportunity  to  plan  and  carry  out  a  special  curriculum  adapted  to 
these  interests  and  needs.  The  student,  with  the  assistance  of  a  departmental  Program 
II  advisor,  designs  an  individual  plan  of  study  for  the  whole  or  the  remainder  of  the  stu- 
dent's college  career.  Together,  they  assess  the  student's  background,  needs,  and  ambi- 
tions and  evaluate  the  resources  at  the  University  or  outside  it  as  means  of  satisfying  those 
ambitions.  They  consider  what  academic  courses  would  be  useful  and  also  take  into  ac- 
count that  a  term  of  independent  study  or  work/study  on  or  off  campus,  or  a  period  of 
study  abroad,  might  be  appropriate.  Each  curriculum  is  tailored  to  the  special  interests 
and  talents  of  the  student  for  whom  it  is  designed.  Among  the  many  topics  for  Program 
II  have  been  American  studies,  primatology,  dramatic  literacy,  linguistics,  biochemistry, 
mariculture,  behavioral  science,  environmental  policy,  modern  thought,  and  mass 
communications. 

Admission.  Students  interested  in  Program  II  should  confer  with  the  Directors  of  Un- 
dergraduate Studies  in  the  departments  closest  to  their  interests,  with  the  dean  respon- 
sible for  Program  II,  and  with  the  Chairman  of  the  Committee  on  Program  II,  whose  name 
may  be  obtained  from  04  Allen  Building.  If  the  student  seems  eligible  for  Program  II,  the 
Director  or  other  departmental  advisor,  or  an  interdepartmental  committee,  will  coun- 
sel the  student  concerning  the  design  of  the  curriculum.  When  an  interdepartmental  com- 
mittee is  needed,  one  department  will  bear  administrative  responsibility.  The  curricu- 
lum must  be  approved  by  the  department  and  also  by  the  Committee  on  Program  II  of 
the  Undergraduate  Faculty  Council  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  Upon  endorsement  by  that  com- 
mittee, the  program  becomes  an  obligation  assumed  by  the  student  although  it  may  be 
modified  later  with  the  approval  of  the  department  and  the  Committee  on  Program  II. 
A  description  of  the  plan  is  sent  to  the  academic  dean  responsible  for  Program  II,  and  each 
semester  the  student's  progress  in  achieving  the  plan  is  reviewed. 

Until  formally  accepted  into  Program  II,  a  student  should  register  for  courses  to  satisfy 
the  curricular  requirements  of  Program  I .  Upon  acceptance  into  Program  II,  a  student  is 
relieved  of  most,  but  not  all,  requirements  expected  of  Program  I  students.  Should  Pro- 
gram II  be  dropped  for  any  reason,  the  student  assumes  all  requirements  of  Program  I. 
Ordinarily,  students  will  be  accepted  into  Program  II  only  after  their  first  semester  at  Duke; 
they  are  ineligible  to  apply  for  admission  to  Program  II  after  their  junior  year.  Further 


24       Degree  Programs 


Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       25 


information  about  Program  II  may  be  obtained  from  the  office  of  the  academic  dean 
responsible  for  Program  II,  in  04  Allen  Building. 

General  Requirements.  Apart  from  the  requirements  arising  from  the  approved  plan 
of  work,  a  Program  II  student  must  satisfy  certain  general  requirements:  thirty-four 
semester-course  credits  for  graduation;  the  regulations  on  military  science  courses;  and 
residence,  although  the  requirements  relating  to  the  last  eight  courses  may  be  adjusted 
to  suit  the  student's  approved  plan  of  work.  Graduation  with  distinction  is  available  for 
qualified  students  in  Program  II.  See  the  section  on  honors  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Proce- 
dures and  Information." 

Effective  for  students  who  matriculated  before  May  1, 1988: 

A  variety  of  approaches  to  a  liberal  arts  education  is  provided  by  Program  1  and  Program  II .  Either  program 
leads  to  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  degree  and  requires  thirty-two  semester  courses.  Students 
study  in  the  following  divisions  of  learning: 

Humanities.*  Art  and  Art  History,  Asian  and  African  languages  (Arabic,  Chinese,  Hebrew,  Hindi-Urdu, 
Japanese,  Korean,  Persian,  and  Swahili),  classical  studies  (including  Greek  and  Latin),  dance,  drama,  Eng- 
lish, Germanic  languages  and  literature,  Institute  of  the  Arts,  Judaic  studies,  literature,  music,  philosophy, 
religion,  Romance  languages  (including  French,  Italian,  Portuguese,  and  Spanish),  and  Slavic  languages 
and  literatures  (including  Russian  and  Polish). 

Natural  Sciences  and  Mathematics.  Biology,  chemistry,  computer  science,  genetics,  geology,  marine  sciences, 
mathematics,  physics,  and  statistics. 

Social  Sciences*  Biological  anthropology  and  anatomy,  cultural  anthropology,  economics,  education,  his- 
tory, political  science,  psychology,  public  policy  studies,  and  sociology. 

PROGRAM  I 

Program  I  provides  for  the  experience  and  achievement  that  constitute  a  liberal  education.  The  ability  to  or- 
ganize ideas  and  to  communicate  them  with  clarity  and  precision  is  refined  by  completing  the  writing  require- 
ment and  the  requirements  for  discussion  in  small  groups.  Knowledge  of  a  foreign  language  contributes  to  an 
understanding  of  the  nature  of  language  itself  and  to  perspectives  on  other  cultures.  The  distribution  require- 
ments ensure  learning  about  the  concepts  and  analytical  methods  in  the  humanities  and  the  arts,  the  social  sciences, 
and  the  natural  sciences.  Additionally,  through  a  course  in  the  history  of  civilization  students  acquire  knowl- 
edge of  the  complexity  of  forces  that  influence  cultures  and  societies;  through  a  course  in  literature  they  learn 
of  the  conscious  products  of  the  human  intellect;  and  through  study  in  an  empirical  natural  science  they  gain 
an  understanding  of  nature  and  the  methods  whereby  humanity  has  reached  that  understanding.  Students  must 
complete  the  requirements  listed  below  and  explained,  where  necessary,  on  the  following  pages.  No  degree  re- 
quirements, except  the  requirement  for  thirty-two  course  credits  and  the  continuation  requirements,  may  be  met 
by  a  course  passed  under  the  pass/fail  option  unless  the  course  is  offered  only  on  that  basis. 

Writing 

One  course  in  writing  (page  27). 

Foreign  Language 

Eligibility  to  enter  the  third  semester  of  college  language  instruction  by  completing  two  semester  courses  in 
one  language  at  Duke,  or  the  equivalent  (page  27). 

Distribution  of  Courses 

Students  complete  the  requirements  for  a  major  (see  section  'The  Major"  below)  and  in  addition  take  approved 
courses  in  each  of  the  following: 

—In  the  history  of  civilization  field :  one  course,  if  not  included  in  the  ma  jor  (see  lists  following  for  approved 
courses); 

—In  the  literature  field;  one  course,  if  not  included  in  the  major  (see  lists  following  for  approved  courses); 

—In  the  empirical  natural  science  field:  one  course,  if  not  included  in  the  major  (see  lists  following  for  ap- 
proved courses); 

and  in  addition: 

— In  one  divisiont  outside  that  of  the  major:  four  semester  courses,  including  two  at  the  advanced  level  (for 
excluded  courses  see  list  following,  entitled  "Courses  that  Do  Not  Satisfy  the  Divisional  Requirements"); 

—In  the  other  divisiont  outside  that  of  the  major:  two  semester  courses  (for  excluded  courses  see  list  follow- 
ing, entitled  "Courses  that  Do  Not  Satisfy  the  Divisional  Requirements"). 


*Afro-American  studies;  Canadian  studies;  comparative  area  studies;  distinguished  professor  courses;  film; 
human  development;  interdisciplinary  courses;  linguistics;  medieval  and  Renaissance  studies;  perspectives  in 
Marxism  and  society;  science,  technology,  and  human  values;  and  women's  studies  include  courses  in  more  than 
one  division.  Nondivisional  courses  in  the  military  sciences  and  in  health,  physical  education,  and  recreation 
are  also  offered.  In  addition,  advanced  students  in  Trinity  College  may  select  a  limited  number  of  courses  from 
among  certain  courses  offered  by  the  professional  schools  at  Duke  University. 

tFor  the  subjects  in  each  division  of  learning,  see  above. 

26       Degree  Programs 


For  students  who  matriculated  before  May  1, 1988 

Small  Group  Learning  Experiences 

Courses  taught  for  small  groups  (described  more  fully  below),  as  follows: 

—Before  reaching  junior  status:  at  least  one  full  semester  course  designated  as  a  seminar,  tutorial,  or  indepen- 
dent study;  or  a  combination  of  two  preceptorials  or  discussion  sections. 

—During  the  junior  and  senior  years:  at  least  two  semester-course  credits  for  seminars,  tutorials,  independent 
study,  or  a  thesis. 

Course  Credits 

Thirty-two  semester-course  credits  (no  more  than  two  with  a  grade  of  D),  including: 

— At  least  sixteen  at  Duke  (ordinarily  including  the  senior  year). 

—At  least  nineteen  outside  the  major  department. 

—No  more  than  seventeen  total  for  a  Bachelor  of  Arts  major  and  no  more  than  nineteen  total  for  a  Bachelor 
of  Science  major. 

— At  least  twelve  at  the  advanced  level. 

— Nomorethan:  one  credit  of  physical  education  activity  and  dance  activity  (i.e.,  two  half -credit  activity  courses), 
two  credits  for  house  courses  (i.e.,  four  half-credit  house  courses),  six  from  a  professional  school  (e.g.,  busi- 
ness, engineering,  medicine),  and  four  in  military  science. 

Quality  of  Work 

All  passing  grades  are  expected,  but  see  section  "Quality  of  Work"  for  minimum  continuation  requirements. 

Writing.  Students  are  required  to  demonstrate  ability  to  write  effective  English  prose  by  completing  a  course 
in  expository  writing,  ordinarily  University  Writing  Course  4, 5, 6, 7  or  8.  See  the  section  University  Writing  Pro- 
gram in  the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction." 

Foreign  Language.  This  requirement  to  assure  that  students  have  some  knowledge  of  a  foreign  culture  may 
be  met  in  any  of  the  following  ways:  (1)  by  passing  one  of  the  following  courses:  Arabic  2;  Chinese  2,  2A;  French 
2, 12, 181;  German  2, 14, 181;  Greek  2, 10, 12, 181S;  Hebrew  2;  Hindi-Urdu  2;  Italian  2, 181;  Japanese  2;  Korean 
2;  Latin  2, 181S;  Persian  2;  Polish  12;  Portuguese  181;  Religion  116  (Hebrew);  Russian  2,  14;  Spanish  2,  12,  14, 
181;  Swahili2, 14;  Yiddish  181;  (2)  by  presenting  a  College  Board  Advanced  Placement  Score  of  4  or  5,  or  score 
of  3  validated  by  satisfactory  completion  of  an  advanced  course;  or  (3)  by  achieving  a  score  on  a  College  Board 
Achievement  Test  or  College  Board  Placement  Test  sufficient  to  permit  enrollment  at  the  intermediate  level  of 
foreign  language  instruction  (see  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and  Information"). 

Students  whose  native  language  is  not  English  may  meet  the  requirement  by  successful  completion  of  a  course 
in  English  composition.  Transfer  students  may  satisfy  the  requirement  in  any  of  the  above  ways  or  by  having  ful- 
filled the  foreign  language  graduation  requirement  at  another  college  or  university  prior  to  entering  Duke.  Stu- 
dents who  have  knowledge  of  a  foreign  language  other  than  those  for  which  College  Board  tests  are  available 
may  request  to  be  examined  in  that  language  by  special  arrangement  after  matriculation. 

Distribution  of  Courses.  Students  achieve  breadth  and  balance  of  intellectual  experience  by  taking  courses 
in  each  of  the  three  divisions  of  learning  (the  humanities,  natural  sciences,  and  social  sciences,  see  below)  and 
by  taking  in  addition  an  approved  course  in  each  of  three  selected  fields  (history  of  civilization,  literature,  and 
empirical  natural  sciences).  Courses  that  satisfy  these  requirements  consist  of  the  essential  subject  matter  and 
substance  of  the  discipline.  Courses  that  satisfy  the  requirements  for  small  group  learning  experiences  may  be 
used  also  to  satisfy  these  requirements.  Courses  taken  on  the  pass/fail  basis,  however,  do  not  satisfy  these  re- 
quirements unless  offered  only  on  the  pass/fail  basis. 

Divisions  of  Learning.  Students  must  complete  a  certain  number  of  nonskills  courses  in  each  of  the  three  divi- 
sions (see  table  below): 

First  Division.  The  division  of  the  major  is  called  the  first  division.  Each  student  must  complete  require- 
ments for  a  major  in  a  single  discipline  or  in  an  interdisciplinary  program.  Thereby  the  requirement  for  the 
first  division  will  automatically  be  satisfied.  See  the  sections  on  the  major  below,  in  the  chapter  "Academic 
Procedures  and  Information,"  and  also  the  section  on  the  major  following  each  department's  course 
descriptions. 

Second  Division.  Each  student  must  pass  at  least  four  semester  courses  in  a  second  division  of  the  stu- 
dent's choice.  At  least  two  of  the  four  courses  must  be  at  the  100  or  200  level. 

Third  Division.  Each  student  must  pass  at  least  two  semester  courses  in  the  remaining  division. 

COURSES  THAT  DO  NOT  SATISFYTHE  DIVISIONAL  DISTRIBUTION  REQUIREMENTS— Military  and 
Naval  Science  Courses,  Aerospace  Studies  Courses,  American  Dance  Festival  Courses,  Courses  in  the  Profes- 
sional Schools,  Physical  Education  Courses,  and  also  the  Following  Skills  Courses: 


Arabic 

1,  2,  63,  64 

Art 

53,  54,  56 

Arts  Institute 

20S,  102,  130,  150 

Biology 

45S,  196D 

Chinese 

1, 1A,  2,  2A,  3,  63,  64 

Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       27 


For  students  who  matriculated  before  May  1, 1988 

Dance  134  and  activity  courses 

Drama  71,  81,  82,  83S,  84,  101,  161,  167,  177 

English  3,  12,  28S,  61S,  62S,  71,  72,  73S,  117S 

French  1-2, 12,  63,  76,  181 

German  1-2,  11, 14,  63,  76,  105, 181, 182 

Greek  1-2,  11-12,  181 

Hebrew  1,  2,  63,  64 

Hindi-Urdu  1,  2,  63,  64 

Italian  1-2,  63,  76,  181 

Japanese  1,  2,  63,  64 

Korean  1,  2,  63,  64 

Latin  1-2, 181S 

Mathematics  9-10, 19 

Music  applied  music  (except  for  tutorials),  161,  162,  163, 164 

Persian  1,  2,  63,  64 

Polish  11, 12 

Political  Science  138,  236 

Portuguese  181 

Psychology  117 

Religion  115-116 

Russian  1,  2,  3,  14,  63,  64,  65 

Sociology  132, 133 

Spanish '  1-2, 12, 14,  63,  76,  181 

Swahili  1,  2,  14,  63,  64 

University  Writing  4,  5,  6,  7,  8, 117S 

Yiddish  181 

Fields  of  Knowledge.  In  addition  to  fulfilling  the  divisional  requirements,  students  must  pass  one  course  from  each 
of  the  following  three  lists: 

COURSES  THAT  SATISFY  THE  REQUIREMENTS  IN  HISTORY  OF  CIVILIZATION,  LITERATURE,  AND 
EMPIRICAL  NATURAL  SCIENCE 

I.  History  of  Civilization 

Afro-American  Studies       56,  145,  146 

Art  69,  70,  114,  123. 124,  126,  131,  132, 133,  134,  140, 141,  142,  143,  145,  147, 148, 149, 

151,  152, 153,  161,  165,  186,  189 

Classical  Studies  US,  12S,  53,  54,  93, 101, 102, 103,  104,  123,  124,  131,  135,  145,  155 

Cultural  Anthropology        101, 102, 120, 121, 122,  123,  124S,  126,  127, 128, 130, 131, 133, 134,  147,  148, 168 

Drama  51, 151 

Economics  132, 150,  184 

French  136S,  139 

German  129, 130 

History  21,  21S,  22,  22S,  23,  25,  26,  49S,  53,  54,  75,  76,  91,  91S,  92,  92S,  93S,  100,  101G, 

101K,  102G,  103,  104, 107, 108,  110,  111,  112, 113, 115, 117, 120, 121, 121A,  121B, 
122, 123S,  124S,  125,  126,  128, 129, 130,  131, 132,  133,  134, 135,  136,  138,  139,  141, 
142, 143,  144, 145,  146,  149,  150, 151,  152,  156, 157, 158,  160, 161,  162,  168S,  171, 
173,  174,  180,  181,  182,  183S,  184,  193,  194, 199 

Interdisciplinary 

Courses  101,  102,  103,  162,  163, 184 

Music  119, 138 

Philosophy  93,  94, 108, 117,  119,  120, 132,  138,  139 

Political  Science  115, 131, 135,  136, 151, 161S,  163, 184, 187 

Religion  51,  56,  57,  109,  124,  125,  133,  160,  161, 162,  163 

Sociology  111,  138,  170,  184 

II.  Literature 

Afro-American  Studies  173,  174 

Arabic  171S 

Chinese  135,  136, 141S,  142S,  171 

Classical  Studies  63,  64 
Distinguished  Professor 

Courses  201,  203,  205 

Drama  55,  64,  115,  116,  118, 119,  120,  121,  122,  123, 124S,  126,  137,  147S,  148,  149, 151, 
220S 


28       Degree  Programs 


For  students  who  matriculated  before  May  1,  1988 

English  20,  21S,  22S,  23S,  24S,  25S,  26S,  49S,  51,  52,  91,  92,  93,  93S,  121, 122,  123, 124, 

125, 126,  127, 128,  131, 133, 134,  135, 136, 137, 138,  139S,  141,  143, 144,  145,  151, 152, 
153, 154, 155,  161,  162, 163,  164,  165, 167,  168,  169S,  171S,  173,  174,  175,  179S,  180, 
181, 182, 186,  187,  221,  225,  235,  241,  245,  251,  263,  267,  269,  275 

French  101,  102,  103S,  104S,  141S,  1425,  145S,  146S,  147,  148,  151,  152,  153,  155,  156, 158, 

162,  163,  166,  167,  170,  248,  251,  252,  255,  256,  257,  258,  261,  263,  265,  266,  290S 

German  101,  103S,  104S,  109S,  115S,  120S,  125S,  126S,  127S,  131S,  132,  172,  173,  175,  201S, 

202S,  205,  206,  207S,  209S,  21  IS,  214S,  215S,  217S,  230S 

Greek  63,  64, 103S,  104S,  203,  205,  222 

Interdisciplinary 

Courses  106, 155 

Italian  101,  102,  283,  284,  285 

Japanese  155,  156,  161 

Latin  63,  64,  103S,  104S,  105S,  112S,  117T,  204,  221 

Literature  50,  51,  100, 101,  121, 122,  125,  128,  129,  132,  145,  155,  159,  179,  180,  199S 

Persian  101 

Philosophy  108 

Polish  174 

Political  Science  174S 

Portuguese  182 

Religion  50,  52,  55,  106,  108,  128,  147,  172,  188,  233,  287 

Russian  124,  161,  162,  175,  176, 180, 181,  183 

Spanish  101,  102,  103S,  104S,  105,  106,  107S,  108S,  121,  141S,  142S,  146,  151,  153,  163,  165S, 

166, 171,  245,  246,  253,  254,  258S,  275,  276,  277 

Yiddish  171 

III.  Empirical  Natural  Science 

Unless  classified  as  a  skills  course,  any  course  offered  by  the  natural  science  departments  (botany,  chemis- 
try, geology,  physics,  zoology)  which  carries  one  semester-course  credit  or  more  satisfies  this  requirement. 

The  Major.  Students  are  expected  to  acquire  some  mastery  of  a  particular  discipline  or  interdisciplinary  area 
as  well  as  to  achieve  a  breadth  of  intellectual  experience.  They  therefore  complete  a  departmental  major,  an  in- 
terdisciplinary major,  or  an  interdepartmental  concentration.  At  least  half  the  courses  for  a  student's  major  field 
must  be  taken  at  Duke  although  departments  may  make  exceptions  to  this  rule  in  special  circumstances.  A  stu- 
dent who  completes  requirements  for  two  majors  may  have  both  recorded  on  the  official  record .  See  the  chapter 
"Academic  Procedures  and  Information"  for  the  majors  within  each  degree  and  for  procedures  on  declaring  a  major 

Departmental  Major.  The  courses  for  a  departmental  major  may  include  introductory  or  basic  prerequisite 
courses  and  higher-level  courses  in  the  major  department  or  in  the  major  department  and  related  departments. 
The  courses  required  in  the  major  department  must  include  at  least  five  beyond  the  introductory  or  basic  prereq- 
uisite level,  but  these  required  courses  may  not  exceed  eight  semester  course  credits  for  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  de- 
gree or  ten  for  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  Furthermore,  the  total  number  of  courses  required  at  any  level 
in  the  major  and  related  departments  may  not  exceed  seventeen  semester  courses  for  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  de- 
gree and  nineteen  semester  courses  for  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  Students  may  elect  to  take  more  courses 
in  their  major  than  are  required,  but  only  thirteen  courses  in  one  (the  major)  department  count  toward  the  gradu- 
ation requirement  of  thirty-two  semester  courses.  Departmental  majors  are  available  in  anthropology,  art  de- 
sign, art  history,  chemistry,  classical  studies,  economics,  English,  French,  geology,  Germanic  languages  and  liter- 
ature, Greek,  history,  Latin,  mathematics,  music,  philosophy,  physics,  political  science,  psychology,  public  policy 
studies,  religion,  Slavic  languages  and  literatures,  sociology,  and  Spanish.  The  courses  required  for  a  major  are 
specified  by  the  department.  The  requirements  appear  in  the  section  following  each  department's  course 
descriptions. 

Program  Major.  Students  may  satisfy  the  requirement  by  completing  work  prescribed  for  a  major  in  approved 
programs,  often  interdisciplinary.  These  programs  include  Afro-American  studies,  biology,  Canadian  studies, 
comparative  area  studies,  drama,  and  medieval  and  Renaissance  studies.  The  requirements  for  these  majors  appear 
under  each  program  in  the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction." 

Interdepartmental  Concentration.  A  student  may  pursue  an  interdepartmental  major  program  designed  by  the 
student  and  advisors  as  an  alternate  means  of  satisfying  the  major  requirement.  An  interdepartmental  concen- 
tration consists  of  at  least  three  courses  beyond  the  introductory  level  in  each  of  two  or  more  departments.  For 
procedures  see  the  section  on  declaration  of  major  or  division  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and 
Information." 

Small  Group  Learning  Experiences.  By  supplementing  the  classroom  and  lecture  methods  of  instruction, 
small  group  learning  experience  courses  assure  students  opportunities  to  engage  in  discussion,  develop  skills, 
refine  judgment,  and  defend  ideas  when  challenged.  A  seminar  (ordinarily  indicated  by  the  suffix  S)  is  an  in- 
dependent course  of  twelve  to  fifteen  (exceptionally  to  twenty)  students  who,  together  with  an  instructor,  engage 
in  disciplined  discussion.  The  number  of  meeting  hours  per  term  is  the  same  as  for  regular  courses  of  equiva- 

Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       29 


For  students  who  matriculated  before  May  1, 1988 

lent  credit.  Instructors  are  encouraged  to  present  to  each  student  at  the  end  of  the  term  a  written  evaluation  of 
the  student's  work.  A  discussion  section  (D)  is  a  group  of  approximately  ten  students  and  an  instructor,  in  which 
discussion  is  the  paramount  characteristic;  it  is  an  integral  part  of  a  larger  regular  course,  and  every  member  of 
the  class  is  enrolled.  A  preceptorial  (P)  is  a  group  of  usually  no  more  than  twelve  students  and  an  instructor  in 
which  discussion  is  the  primary  component;  it  is  an  additional  and  optional  unit  attached  to  a  regular  course 
involving  one  or  more  extra  meetings  per  week.  No  additional  course  credit  is  given  for  a  preceptorial .  A  tutorial 
(T)  is  a  group  of  one  to  five  students  and  an  instructor  meeting  for  discussion  which  is  independent  of  any  other 
course.  For  independent  study  students  pursue  their  own  interests  in  reading,  research,  or  writing,  but  meet  with 
an  instructor  for  guidance  and  discussion.  See  the  section  on  independent  study  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Proce- 
dures and  Information."  Instructors  in  all  courses  that  satisfy  the  requirements  for  small  group  learning  experiences, 
including  independent  study,  must  meet  with  the  students  at  least  once  every  two  weeks.  The  requirements  for 
small  group  learning  experiences  are  listed  under  Program  I,  above. 

Course  Requirements.  Thirty-two  semester  courses  are  required  for  graduation,  including  a  maximum  of 
two  courses  passed  with  a  grade  of  D.  At  least  sixteen  courses,  including  the  work  of  the  senior  year,  must  be 
passed  at  Duke.  Twelve  courses  must  be  at  the  advanced  (100-200)  level.  The  thirty-two  course  credits  may  in- 
clude ( 1)  no  more  than  thirteen  courses  in  one  department;  (2)  no  more  than  seventeen  total  for  a  major  (includ- 
ing those  required  in  related  departments)  under  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree  and  no  more  than  nineteen  total 
for  a  major  (including  those  required  in  related  departments)  under  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree;  (3)  no  more 
than  one  semester-course  credit  in  physical  education  activity  and  dance  activity  (i.e.,  a  total  of  two  half-credit 
activity  courses);  (4)  no  more  than  two  credits  for  house  courses;  (5)  no  more  than  six  credits  for  courses  taken 
in  professional  schools;  and  (6)  no  more  than  four  semester-  course  credits  in  military  science.  Certain  military 
science  courses  listed  as  carrying  credit  do  not  count  toward  graduation  but  appear  on  a  student's  permanent 
academic  record.  Military  science  courses,  like  professional  school  and  all  physical  education  courses,  do  not 
satisfy  distribution  or  fields  of  knowledge  requirements.  American  Dance  Festival  courses  are  included  in  the 
total  limitation  on  physical  education/dance  activity  courses  noted  above  in  this  paragraph. 

Residence.  A  residence  period  of  eight  semesters  is  the  typical  amount  of  time  a  student  may  take  to  earn 
either  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  This  period  may  be  extended  for  one  or  two  semesters 
by  a  student's  academic  dean  for  legitimate  reasons,  if  it  seems  probable  that  an  extension  will  enable  the  stu- 
dent to  complete  all  remaining  requirements  for  graduation.  A  student  will  not  be  permitted  residence  of  more 
than  ten  semesters  in  order  to  be  graduated. 


30       Degree  Programs 


For  students  who  matriculated  before  May  1, 1988 

For  the  minimum  residence  period,  at  least  sixteen  courses  must  be  satisfactorily  completed  at  Duke,  including 
the  courses  needed  to  meet  the  senior  year  residence  requirement.  (For  the  purposes  of  the  residence  require- 
ment, advanced  placement  credits  are  not  considered  as  courses  taken  at  Duke.)  If  only  sixteen  courses  are  tak- 
en at  Duke,  they  must  include  the  student's  last  eight  courses.  A  student  with  more  than  sixteen  courses  at  Duke 
may  take  two  of  the  last  eight  courses  at  another  approved  institution.  A  student  who  has  completed  twenty- 
four  courses  at  Duke  may  take  four  of  the  last  eight  courses  at  another  approved  institution .  Courses  taken  else- 
where must  be  approved  in  advance  by  the  appropriate  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  the  student's 
academic  dean. 

Former  students  of  Trinity  College  or  the  Woman's  College  who  have  been  out  of  college  for  at  least  six  years, 
and  left  in  good  standing,  may,  with  certain  provisos,  take  up  to  eight  semester  courses  in  another  institution 
of  approved  standing  in  final  fulfillment  of  graduation  requirements.  Further  information  can  be  obtained  from 
the  Associate  Dean  of  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  responsible  for  coordinating  readmission. 

Quality  of  Work  (Continuation  Requirements).  A  student  must  achieve  a  satisfactory  record  of  academic 
performance  each  term  and  make  satisfactory  progress  toward  graduation  each  year  to  continue  enrollment  in 
college.  A  student  who  fails  to  meet  the  minimum  requirements  described  below  must  leave  college  for  at  least 
two  semesters;  a  summer  session  may  be  counted  as  a  semester.  The  student  may  apply  to  Trinity  College  of  Arts 
and  Sciences  for  readmission.  If,  after  readmission,  the  student  again  fails  to  meet  continuation  requirements, 
the  student  will  be  ineligible,  except  in  extraordinary  instances,  for  readmission  to  Trinity  College. 

Satisfactory  Performance  Each  Term.  A  student  who  does  not  receive  a  passing  grade  in  all  courses  must  meet 
the  following  minimum  requirements  or  be  withdrawn  from  the  college. 

In  the  Fall  or  Spring  Semester:  (1)  in  the  first  semester  of  enrollment  at  Duke,  a  student  with  a  normal  course 
load  (of  at  least  four  semester  courses,  as  defined  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and  Information")  may 
not  fail  more  than  two  full  courses;  (2)  after  the  first  semester  at  Duke,  a  student  with  four  or  more  courses  may 
not  fail  more  than  one  full  course;  (3)  a  first-semester  student,  whether  a  freshman  or  a  transfer  student,  who 
for  a  special  reason  has  received  permission  from  an  academic  dean  to  enroll  in  fewer  than  four  courses  may  not 
fail  more  than  one  full  course;  (4)  a  student  taking  an  authorized  underload  after  the  first  semester  at  Duke  must 
earn  all  passing  grades.  (Students  may  not  carry  an  underload  without  the  permission  of  their  academic  dean.) 
For  the  purposes  of  continuation,  incomplete  work  in  any  course  is  considered  a  failure  to  achieve  satisfactory 
performance  in  that  course.  Therefore,  where  continuation  is  in  question,  incomplete  work  in  any  course  must 
be  completed  with  a  passing  grade  in  time  for  final  grades  to  be  submitted  to  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  no  later 
than  the  weekday  preceding  the  first  day  of  classes  of  the  spring  semester,  or  prior  to  the  first  day  of  classes  of 
the  second  term  of  the  summer  session,  as  appropriate.  In  the  case  of  incomplete  work  in  the  spring  semester, 
this  requirement  applies  whether  or  not  the  student  plans  to  attend  one  or  more  terms  of  the  summer  session. 
The  student,  however,  may  not  enroll  in  a  summer  term  at  Duke  unless  the  requirement  of  satisfactory  perfor- 
mance each  semester  has  been  satisfied. 

In  the  Summer  Session:  to  maintain  enrollment  at  Duke  a  student  may  not  fail  more  than  one  course  in  a  sum- 
mer term  or  a  summer  session.  For  purposes  of  continuation,  incomplete  work  is  considered  failure  to  achieve 
a  satisfactory  performance  in  that  course.  Therefore,  when  eligibility  to  continue  from  the  summer  session  to 
the  fall  is  in  question,  incomplete  courses  must  be  satisfactorily  completed  in  time  for  a  passing  grade  to  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  no  later  than  the  weekday  preceding  the  first  day  of  fall  classes.  Moreover, 
no  student  may  enter  the  fall  semester  with  more  than  one  incomplete  grade  from  the  preceding  spring  and 
summer. 

Any  student  excluded  from  the  college  under  the  provisions  of  these  regulations  may  on  request  have  the 
case  reviewed  by  the  Senior  Associate  Dean  of  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences. 

Satisfactory  Progress  toward  Graduation.  Each  year  prior  to  the  beginning  of  fall  term  classes,  a  student  must 
have  made  satisfactory  progress  toward  fulfillment  of  curricular  requirements  to  be  eligible  to  continue  in  the 
college;  i.e.,  a  certain  number  of  courses  must  have  been  passed  at  Duke  according  to  the  following  schedule: 


To  be  eligible  to  continue  to  the: 
3rd  semester 
4th  semester 
5th  semester 
6th  semester 
7th  semester 
8th  semester 


A  student  must  have  passed  at  Duke: 
6  semester  courses 
10  semester  courses 
14  semester  courses 
18  semester  courses 
22  semester  courses 
26  semester  courses 


Courses  in  the  arts  and  sciences  taken  in  the  summer  terms  at  Duke  may  be  used  to  meet  this  requirement; 
advanced  placement  may  not  be  used  to  satisfy  it.  No  more  than  two  courses  completed  with  D  grades  may  be 
counted  toward  fulfilling  this  annual  continuation  requirement. 

PROGRAM  II 

Nature  and  Purpose.  Program  II  is  an  alternate  approach  leading  to  either  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  the  Bache- 
lor of  Science  degree  which  offers  the  student  who  has  an  unusual  interest  or  talent  in  a  single  field,  or  an  un- 
usual combination  of  interests  or  talents  in  several  fields,  an  opportunity  to  plan  and  carry  out  a  special  curriculum 


Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       31 


For  students  who  matriculated  before  May  1,  1988 

adapted  to  these  interests  and  needs.  The  student,  with  the  assistance  of  a  departmental  Program  II  advisor, 
designs  an  individual  plan  of  study  for  the  whole  or  the  remainder  of  the  student's  college  career.  Together,  they 
assess  the  student's  background,  needs,  and  ambitions  and  evaluate  the  resources  at  the  University  or  outside 
it  as  means  of  satisfying  those  ambitions.  They  consider  what  academic  courses  would  be  useful  and  also  take 
into  account  that  a  term  of  independent  study  or  work/study  on  or  off  campus,  or  a  period  of  study  abroad,  might 
be  appropriate.  Each  curriculum  is  tailored  to  the  special  interests  and  talents  of  the  student  for  whom  it  is  designed. 
Among  the  many  topics  for  Program  II  have  been  American  studies,  primatology,  dramatic  literacy,  linguistics, 
biochemistry,  mariculture,  behavioral  science,  environmental  policy,  modern  thought,  and  mass  communications. 

Admission.  Students  interested  in  Program  II  should  confer  with  the  Directors  of  Undergraduate  Studies 
in  the  departments  closest  to  their  interests,  with  the  dean  responsible  for  Program  II,  and  with  the  Chairman 
of  the  Committee  on  Program  II,  whose  name  may  be  obtained  from  04  Allen  Building.  If  the  student  seems  eligible 
for  Program  II,  the  Director  or  other  departmental  advisor,  or  an  interdepartmental  committee,  will  counsel  the 
student  concerning  the  design  of  the  curriculum.  When  an  interdepartmental  committee  is  needed,  one  depart- 
ment will  bear  administrative  responsibility.  The  curriculum  must  be  approved  by  the  department  and  also  by 
the  Committee  on  Program  II  of  the  Undergraduate  Faculty  Council  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  Upon  endorsement 
by  that  committee,  the  program  becomes  an  obligation  assumed  by  the  student  although  it  may  be  modified  later 
with  the  approval  of  the  department  and  the  Committee  on  Program  II.  A  description  of  the  plan  is  sent  to  the 
academic  dean  responsible  for  Program  II,  and  each  semester  the  student's  progress  in  achieving  the  plan  is 
reviewed. 

Until  formally  accepted  into  Program  11,  a  student  should  register  for  courses  to  satisfy  the  curricular  require- 
ments of  Program  I.  Upon  acceptance  into  Program  II,  a  student  is  relieved  of  most,  but  not  all,  requirements 
expected  of  Program  I  students.  Should  Program  II  be  dropped  for  any  reason,  the  student  assumes  all  require- 
ments of  Program  I.  Ordinarily,  students  will  be  accepted  into  Program  II  only  after  their  first  semester  at  Duke; 
they  are  ineligible  to  apply  for  admission  to  Program  II  after  their  junior  year.  Further  information  about  Pro- 
gram II  may  be  obtained  from  the  office  of  the  academic  dean  responsible  for  Program  II,  in  04  Allen  Building. 

General  Requirements.  Apart  from  the  requirements  arising  from  the  approved  plan  of  work,  a  Program 
II  student  must  satisfy  certain  general  requirements:  thirty-two  semester-course  credits  for  graduation;  the  regu- 
lations on  military  science  courses;  and  residence,  although  the  requirements  relating  to  the  last  eight  courses 
may  be  adjusted  to  suit  the  student's  approved  plan  of  work.  Graduation  with  distinction  is  available  for  quali- 
fied students  in  Program  II.  See  the  section  on  honors  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and  Information." 


COMBINATION  PROGRAMS  OF  TRINITY  COLLEGE  AND  DUKE 
PROFESSIONAL  SCHOOLS 

A  student  interested  in  attending  a  Duke  professional  school  (business,  forestry  and 
environmental  studies,  law,  and  medicine)  may,  upon  meeting  certain  requirements,  com- 
bine the  senior  year  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  with  the  first  year  in  the  profes- 
sional school.  To  qualify  the  student  must  (1)  successfully  complete  twenty-six  semes- 
ter courses  in  Trinity  College  (twenty-four  for  students  who  matriculated  prior  to  May 
1, 1988);  (2)  fulfill  all  other  degree  requirements  in  Trinity  College  except  for  eight  elec- 
tive courses;  (3)  obtain  the  approval  of  the  appropriate  preprofessional  advisor  and  aca- 
demic dean  in  Trinity  College;  and  (4)  be  admitted  to  the  professional  school.  If  the  stu- 
dent's application  to  the  professional  school  is  accepted,  the  student  transfers  to  the 
professional  school  for  the  fourth  year  and  begins  work  on  the  professional  degree.  Upon 
successful  completion  of  the  work  in  the  first  year  of  the  professional  school,  the  bac- 
calaureate degree  is  awarded  to  the  student.  The  undergraduate  record  notes  the  student's 
enrollment  in  the  combination  program,  the  name  of  the  professional  school,  the  date 
of  graduation  from  Trinity  College,  and  the  degree  awarded,  but  it  does  not  include 
courses  taken  in  the  professional  school.  Counseling  and  additional  information  are  avail- 
able from  the  preprofessional  advisors. 

PREPARATION  FOR  GRADUATE  AND  PROFESSIONAL  SCHOOLS 

Students  planning  to  enter  a  graduate  or  professional  school  should  consult  their 
faculty  advisors,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies,  or  academic  dean  at  the  earliest  op- 
portunity. Since  many  graduate  and  professional  schools  require  special  tests  for  students 
seeking  admission,  information  regarding  requirements  should  also  be  obtained  from 


32       Degree  Programs 


the  catalogs  of  the  appropriate  schools.  The  Office  of  Counseling  and  Psychological  Serv- 
ices will  provide  applications  for  the  testing  programs. 

Graduate  Schools  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  As  soon  as  practicable,  students  should  ascer- 
tain the  requirements  of  the  graduate  schools  which  they  are  considering  and  should  con- 
sult an  advisor  in  the  field  of  the  proposed  advanced  study.  Most  graduate  schools  have 
requirements  in  foreign  languages,  and  candidates  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philoso- 
phy may  be  required  to  pass  reading  examinations,  usually  in  German  and  French. 

Graduate  Schools  of  Engineering.  Students  interested  in  graduate  work  in  engineer- 
ing should  consult  the  Dean  of  the  School  of  Engineering  or  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  in  one  of  the  engineering  departments.  Most  engineering  graduate  schools  re- 
quire that  a  candidate  have  the  equivalent  of  a  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  degree; 
however,  students  in  the  natural  and  social  sciences  may  obtain  conditional  admission 
if  they  have  a  sufficient  background  in  mathematics. 

Graduate  Schools  of  Business  Administration.  Students  seeking  information  about 
graduate  schools  of  business  should  consult  the  advisor  in  Trinity  College.  In  preparing 
for  graduate  business  school,  students  should  gain  a  good  liberal  arts  background,  choos- 
ing courses  that  will  help  them  develop  communication  skills,  analytical  skills,  and  an 
understanding  of  human  nature.  Students  have  often  chosen  such  courses  as  Computer 
Science  51,  Economics  1  and  2  (or  51  and  52),  Management  Sciences  53,  and  Mathemat- 
ics 31  as  those  which  develop  analytical  skills.  For  further  information  concerning  un- 
dergraduate preparation,  see  the  Prebusiness  Handbook  for  Duke  Students  or  The  Official  Guide 
to  MBA  Programs,  published  by  the  Graduate  Management  Admission  Council;  these  pub- 
lications and  other  resource  materials  are  available  in  the  Prebusiness  Advising  Office. 

Medical  and  Dental  Schools.  Students  planning  to  enter  schools  of  medicine  and 
dentistry  can  prepare  for  admission  by  completing  any  of  the  regular  departmental  majors 
in  Program  I  or  by  completing  Program  II,  and  by  taking  those  courses  required  by  the 
professional  schools  of  their  choice.  Virtually  all  medical  schools  and  most  schools  of 


Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       33 


dentistry  require  the  same  basic  group  of  college  premedical  courses— a  year  of  biology, 
a  year  each  of  inorganic  and  organic  chemistry,  and  a  year  of  general  physics.  In  addition, 
many  schools  require  a  year  of  English  and  courses  in  the  humanities  or  social  sciences. 
About  a  third  of  all  medical  schools  require  a  year  of  college  mathematics  and  some  specify 
calculus,  statistics,  or  computer  science.  For  a  complete  listing  of  these  and  any  additional 
course  requirements  set  by  each  school,  consult  Medical  School  Admissions  Requirements, 
published  by  the  Association  of  American  Medical  Colleges  or  Admission  Requirements  of 
U.S.  and  Canadian  Dental  Schools,  published  by  the  American  Association  of  Dental 
Schools.  These  and  similar  resources  for  schools  of  optometry  and  veterinary  medicine 
are  located  in  the  Health  Professions  Advising  Office.  Students  should  discuss  their  pro- 
grams of  study  with  their  major  advisors,  academic  deans,  and  with  the  advisor  for  the 
health  professions. 

Graduate  Programs  in  the  Health  Professions.  Students  interested  in  careers  as  phys- 
ical therapists,  health  administrators,  or  others  of  the  allied  health  professions  should 
prepare  with  course  work  in  the  natural  sciences  and  behavioral  sciences  within  a  liber- 
al arts  curriculum.  Descriptive  literature  on  each  of  the  allied  health  schools  and  profes- 
sions is  part  of  the  library  maintained  in  the  Health  Professions  Advising  Office.  Students 
will  also  find  publications  of  selected  advanced  degree  programs  in  biomedical  research, 
including  the  combined  M.D./Ph.D.  degree  programs. 

Law  Schools.  Students  who  plan  to  prepare  for  law  school  and  a  career  in  law  should 
seek  breadth  in  their  undergraduate  course  program  with  specialization  in  one  or  more 
areas.  They  may  choose  virtually  any  field  for  their  major  work.  Though  no  specific  courses 
are  required,  prelaw  students  have  often  chosen  from  among  the  following:  Management 
Sciences  53;  Economics  1, 2;  English  101S;  History  21, 22, 91, 91S,  92, 92S,  207, 208, 241-242; 
Philosophy  48;  Political  Science  91, 127,  207S;  Public  Policy  Studies  55;  Sociology  10  and 
157. 

For  a  fuller  discussion  of  undergraduate  preparation  for  the  study  of  law,  students 
should  refer  to  the  Duke  Prelaw  Handbook  or  the  Prelaw  Handbook  published  by  the  Associ- 
ation of  American  Law  Schools  and  the  Law  School  Admission  Council,  or  consult  the 
prelaw  advisor  in  the  college. 

Theological  Schools  and  Religious  Work.  Students  contemplating  theological  study 
should  correspond  at  the  earliest  opportunity  with  the  appropriate  schools  and  with  the 
authorities  of  their  churches  to  learn  how  to  prepare  for  the  specific  programs  they  ex- 
pect to  enter.  Probably,  they  will  find  that  they  should  consider  the  following  subjects: 
English  language  and  literature;  history,  including  non-Western  cultures  as  well  as  Eu- 
ropean and  American;  philosophy,  particularly  its  history  and  its  methods;  natural 
sciences,  both  the  physical  and  the  life  sciences;  psychology,  sociology,  and  anthropolo- 
gy; the  fine  arts  and  music;  biblical  and  modern  languages;  religion,  both  in  the  Judaeo- 
Christian  and  in  the  Near  and  Far  Eastern  traditions.  Some  seminaries  require  Greek  or 
Hebrew  for  admission.  It  is  the  understanding  gained  in  these  fields  rather  than  the  to- 
tal number  of  credits  or  semester  hours  earned  which  is  significant.  More  detailed  infor- 
mation about  theological  education,  not  limited  to  Duke,  may  be  obtained  from  the  Direc- 
tor of  Admissions  of  the  Divinity  School. 

The  School  of  Engineering 

Duke  University  offers  in  the  School  of  Engineering  programs  of  study  which  lead 
to  the  degree  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering.  Four  programs  are  accredited  by  the 
Engineering  Accreditation  Commission  of  the  Accreditation  Board  for  Engineering  and 
Technology  (ABET).  These  programs  are  biomedical  engineering,  civil  engineering,  elec- 
trical engineering,  and  mechanical  engineering.  These  accredited  programs,  and  spe- 
cial programs  of  study  in  interdisciplinary  fields,  are  offered  by  the  Departments  of 


34       Degree  Programs 


Biomedical  Engineering,  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering,  Electrical  Engineering, 
and  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science. 

For  graduation  with  a  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  degree,  a  student  must  com- 
plete successfully  a  minimum  of  thirty-four  semester  courses.  These  thirty-four  semes- 
ter courses  must  include  the  following: 

General  Requirements* 

Writing  1  s.c.       This  requirement  is  met  by  completing  a  University  Writing  Course. 

Mathematics 4  s.c.       This  requirement  is  met  by  completing  Mathematics  31 1,  32t,  and 

103;  plus  104  or  111  or  135. 

Natural  Science 4  s.c.       This  requirement  is  met  by  completing  Chemistry  11,  Physics  51  and 

52,  and  an  elective  course  in  one  of  the  natural  science  departments 
which  presents  fundamental  knowledge  about  nature  and  its 
phenomena,  preferably  including  quantitative  expression.  £ 


Social  Sciences  and 
Humanities 


.  5  s.c.  This  requirement  is  met  by  completion  of  five  courses  from  at  least 
two  departments,  one  in  the  humanities  and  one  in  social  sciences. 
One  course  must  be  100-level  or  above.  This  program  of  courses 
should  reflect  a  rationale  or  fulfill  an  objective  appropriate  to  the  en- 
gineering profession.  Courses  selected  must  be  those  which  pres- 
ent essential  subject  matter  and  substance  of  the  discipline;  for  ex- 
ample, no  introductory  skill  courses  may  be  used  to  satisfy  this 
requirement.  Likewise,  courses  devoted  primarily  to  subjects  such 
as  accounting,  management  science,  industrial  management,  fi- 
nance, personnel  administration,  introductory  language,  and  ROTC 
normally  do  not  fulfill  this  objective  regardless  of  their  general  val- 
ue in  the  total  engineering  curriculum .  Courses  taught  in  professional 
schools  may  not  be  used  to  satisfy  this  requirement. 


*House  courses  cannot  be  used  to  meet  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  degree  requirements. 
tMathematics  33  and  34  are  acceptable  in  lieu  of  Mathematics  31  and  32. 

^Courses  in  mathematics,  statistics,  and  computer  science  will  not  meet  this  requirement.  A  list  of  disal- 
lowed courses  is  maintained  in  the  Dean's  office. 


The  School  of  Engineering      35 


Engineering  and 
Applied  Sciences 


.  4  s.c.  This  requirement  is  met  by  completion  of  one  course  from  each  of 
four  of  the  following  six  areas:  electrical  science,  information  and 
computer  science,  mechanics  (solid  and  fluid),  materials  science, 
systems  analysis,  and  thermal  science  and  transfer  processes.  See 
departmental  requirements,  which  follow,  for  any  specific  courses 
to  be  included. 


Digital  Computation 


Students  are  expected  to  have  acquired  digital-computer  program- 
ming capability  before  their  sophomore  year.  The  programming 
capability  may  be  satisfied  by  prior  experience  or  by  passing  En- 
gineering 51,  Engineering  52,  Computer  Science  51,  or  Computer 
Science  53. 


Departmental 
Specifications 16  s.c. 


Departmental  Requirements 

The  department  administering  the  major  field  of  study  w  ill  specify 
this  requirement.  In  general,  it  will  consist  of  both  required  courses 
and  electives  to  be  planned  in  consultation  with  the  departmental 
advisor.  Including  the  4  s.c.  in  engineering  and  applied  sciences  listed 
under  general  requirements,  a  total  of  8.5  s.c.  equivalents  in  engineer- 
ing science  and  4.25  s.c.  equivalents  in  engineering  design  are  re- 
quired. See  the  individual  departmental  requirements,  whichfollow. 


Total  Minimum 
Requirement  . . 


.34  s.c. 


*A  maximum  of  two  semester  courses  of  junior  or  senior  level  air  science,  military  science,  or  naval  science 
course  work  may  be  counted  in  satisfying  the  minimum  requirements  of  thirty-four  semester  courses  for  a  bac- 
calaureate degree  in  engineering.  These  courses  must  be  included  in  the  sixteen  semester  courses  listed  under 
departmental  requirements.  All  other  courses  completed  in  air,  military,  or  naval  science  are  taken  in  addition 
to  the  minimum  program. 


Biomedical  Engineering  Departmental  Requirements 

All  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements  comprising  the  accredit- 
ed biomedical  engineering  major  are  incorporated  in  the  following  sequence,  only  one 
of  several  possible  sequences.  The  student  is  encouraged  to  choose  electives  and  select 
a  sequence  which  develops  broad  intellectual  interests. 


Freshman  Year 


First  Semester  Courses 

Chemistry  11 1 

University  Writing  Course 1 

Mathematics  31 1 

Engineering  51  or  Social  Science  or 
Humanities  Elective  1 

4 


Second  Semester  Courses 

Chemistry  12 1 

Physics  51 1 

Mathematics  32 1 

Social  Science  or  Humanities  Elective  or 

Engineering  51 ^1 

4 


Sophomore  Year 


First  Semester  Courses 

Physics  52 1 

Electrical  Engineering  61  1 

Mathematics  103 1 

Social  Science  or  Humanities  Elective 1 

Elective ^1 

5 


Second  Semester  Courses 

Biomedical  Engineering  163  1 

Elective 1 

Mathematics  111 1 

Social  Science  or  Humanities  Elective A 

4 


36       Degree  Programs 


Junior  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Biomedical  Engineering  110  1  Biomedical  Engineering  145   1 

Biomedical  Engineering  101 1  Life  Science  Elective 1 

Electrical  Engineering  112  or  Biomedical  Engineering  164   1 

Biomedical  Engineering  171 1  Biomedical  Engineering  Elective A_ 

Elective ^1  4 

4 

Senior  Year 

First  Semester  Courses  Second  Semester  Courses 


Biomedical  Engineering  207   

Biomedical  Engineering  Elective 

Life  Science  Elective 

Social  Science  or  Humanities  Elective  . 
Elective 


Biomedical  Engineering  Elective 1 

Biomedical  Engineering  Elective 1 

Elective 1 

Social  Science  or  Humanities  Elective ^1 

4 


Premedical  students  should  schedule  Chemistry  151, 152,  and  two  life  science  electives  before  the  end  of 
their  junior  year  by  deferring  some  required  courses  to  the  senior  year.  Biomedical  engineering  electives  include 
all  courses  with  biomedical  engineering  numbers  other  than  required  courses. 

Civil  And  Environmental  Engineering  Departmental  Requirements 

The  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements  comprising  the  accredited 
civil  engineering  major  are  all  incorporated  in  the  following  typical  program. 

Freshman  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Chemistry  11 1  Engineering  24 1 

Mathematics  31  1  Mathematics  32 1 

University  Writing  Course 1  Physics  51 1 

Engineering  51  or  52  or  Social  Science-Humanities  Elective  or 

Social  Science-Humanities  Elective ^1  Engineering  51  or  52 A_ 

4  4 

Sophomore  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Engineering  75 1  Engineering  123 1 

Mathematics  103 1  Mathematics  111 1 

Physics  52 1  Natural  Science  Elective 1 

Social  Science-Humanities  Elective ^1  Elective .1 

4  4 

Junior  Year 

First  Semester  Courses  Second  Semester  Courses 


Civil  Engineering  122 

Civil  Engineering  131 

Social  Science-Humanities  Elective 

Statistics  100 

Elective 


*Civil  Engineering  Elective  1 

*Civil  Engineering  Elective  1 

Social  Science-Humanities  Elective 1 

Elective J. 

4 


Senior  Year 

First  Semester  Courses  Second  Semester  Courses 

t Advanced  Civil  Engineering  Elective 1  + Advanced  Civil  Engineering  Elective 1 

*Civil  Engineering  Elective  1  'Civil  Engineering  Elective  1 


'These  five  courses  shall  be  chosen  from  the  following:  Civil  Engineering  116, 123, 124, 133, 134, 139,  and 
Engineering  150. 

tAny  200-level  civil  engineering  course. 

The  School  of  Engineering       37 


'Civil  Engineering  Elective  1  Elective 1 

Social  Science-Humanities  Elective 1  Elective A_ 

Elective A_  4 

5 


"These  five  courses  shall  be  chosen  from  the  following:  Civil  Engineering  116,  123,  124,  133,  134,  139,  and 
Engineering  150. 

In  order  to  satisfv  the  School  of  Engineering  distributional  requirements  of  four  courses  in  engineering  and 
applied  science,  the  student  must  take  at  least  tvvocourses  from  the  following:  Engineering  83,  Engineering  101, 
Electrical  Engineering  61,  or  Civil  Engineering  215. 

Electrical  Engineering  Departmental  Requirements 

The  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements  comprising  the  accredit- 
ed electrical  engineering  major  are  all  incorporated  in  the  following  program.  This  pro- 
gram is  presented  as  a  guide  to  assist  students  in  planning  their  four-year  program  and 
should  not  be  viewed  as  an  inflexible  sequencing  of  courses. 

Freshman  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Mathematics  31 1  Mathematics  32 1 

Chemistry  11  1  Physics  51 1 

University  Writing  Course 1  Approved  Elective 1 

Engineering  51  or  Computer  Science  51  or  Engineering  51  or  Computer  Science  51  or 

Social  Science-Humanities  Elective ^1  Social  Science-Humanities  Elective ^1 

4  4 

Sophomore  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Electrical  Engineering  61  1  Electrical  Engineering  62 1 

Mathematics  103 1  Electrical  Engineering  112 1 

Physics  52 1  Mathematics  104,  111,  or  135 1 

Social  Science-Humanities  Elective .1  Social  Science-Humanities  Elective ^1 

4  4 

Junior  Year 

First  Semester  Courses  Second  Semester  Courses 

'Electrical  Engineering 1  'Electrical  Engineering 

'Electrical  Engineering 1  'Electrical  Engineering 

tMathematics 1  ^Natural  Science 

Social  Science-Humanities  Elective .1  Approved  Elective 

4 


These  four  courses  must  be  chosen  from  the  following:  Electrical  Engineering  103, 143, 157, 161, 186, 199. 

tAny  100-level  math  course  except  123,  128, 150,  or  183. 

JOne  of  the  follow  ing:  Chemistry  12;  Physics  105,  161,  176S,  181,  and  185;  Biology  14  is  recommended. 

Senior  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Approved  Electrical  Engineering  Elective 1  Approved  Electrical  Engineering  Elective 

Approved  Electrical  Engineering  Elective 1  Social  Sciences-Humanities  Elective 

Approved  Elective 1  Approved  Elective 

Approved  Elective 1  Approved  Elective 

'Approved  Elective ^1  'Approved  Elective 

5 


'May  be  taken  during  junior  year. 

Note:  The  selection  of  approved  electives  should  take  into  account  a  departmental 
requirement  that  a  student  must  have  accumulated  by  graduation  time  the  equivalent  of 


38       Degree  Progmttis 


4. 25 engineering  design  and  8.5  engineering  science  courses.  Engineering  23,  Engineer- 
ing 174,  and  Engineering  175  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  departmental  requirement. 

In  order  to  satisfy  the  School  of  Engineering  distributional  requirement  of  four  courses 
in  engineering  and  applied  science,  the  student  may  use  Electrical  Engineering  61  as  an 
electrical  science  course  and  Electrical  Engineering  112  as  a  systems  analysis  course.  The 
remaining  two  courses  may  be  selected  from  any  two  of  the  following  areas:  information 
and  computer  science  (Engineering  51  or  Computer  Science  51  may  be  used  to  satisfy  this 
requirement),  mechanics,  materials  science,  and  thermal  sciences. 

An  up-to-date  list  of  acceptable  engineering  design  and  engineering  science  courses  may 
be  obtained  from  the  departmental  office. 

Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science  Departmental  Requirements 

The  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements  comprising  the  accredit- 
ed mechanical  engineering  major  are  all  incorporated  in  the  following  program.  This  se- 
quence of  the  courses  is  presented  as  on  overview  of  the  program  and  is  one  of  two  recom- 
mended sequences  of  the  course  requirements. 

Freshman  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Mathematics  31 1  Mathematics  32 1 

Chemistry  11  1  Physics  51 1 

University  Writing  Course 1  Engineering  83 1 

Engineering  51 ^1  'Elective ^1 

4  4 

Sophomore  Year 

First  Semester  Courses  Second  Semester  Courses 


Mathematics  103 

Physics  52 

Engineering  75 . . 

"Elective 

'Elective 


Mathematics  111 
Engineering  101  . 
Engineering  123 . 

•Elective 

•Elective 


Junior  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Engineering  130 1  Mechanical  Engineering  141 1 

Mechanical  Engineering  120 1  Mechanical  Engineering  150 1 

Mechanical  Engineering  126 1  Mathematics  114 1 

Mechanical  Engineering  115 .1  Physics  171 1 

4  4 

Senior  Year 

First  Semester                                                 Courses  Second  Semester                                           Courses 

Mechanical  Engineering  160 1  Mechanical  Engineering  Elective 1 

Mechanical  Engineering  Elective 1  TTechnical  Elective   1 

tTechnical  Elective   1  "Elective 1 

•Elective A  "Elective ^1 

4  4 


•Part  of  a  program  of  approved  electives  planned  with  the  student's  faculty  advisor  to  suit  individual  in- 
terests and  abilities.  The  program  must  include  five  social  science-humanities  courses  selected  to  meet  the  general 
requirements  as  stated  on  page  . 

tOne  of  two  electives  restricted  to  the  areas  of  engineering,  mathematics,  or  natural  sciences.  A  list  of  dis- 
allowed courses  is  maintained  in  the  departmental  office. 


The  School  of  Engineering       39 


The  major  requirements  are  included  in  the  minimum  total  of  thirty-four  courses  listed 
under  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements.  Specific  courses  which  must 
be  included  are  Engineering  75,  83, 101, 123,  and  130;  Mechanical  Engineering  115, 120, 
126, 141, 150,  and  160. 

Declaration  of  Major.  A  student  is  urged  to  declare  a  major  by  the  time  of  registra- 
tion for  the  first  semester  of  the  sophomore  year,  but  is  required  to  do  so  by  the  time  of 
registration  for  the  first  semester  of  the  junior  year.  Declaration  of  major  is  accomplished 
by  completing  a  form  available  in  the  Office  of  the  Dean  of  Engineering. 

Double  Major.  If  an  engineering  student  completes  simultaneously  the  requirements 
for  a  departmental  major  in  arts  and  sciences  and  the  requirements  for  a  Bachelor  of 
Science  in  Engineering  degree,  or  satisfies  simultaneously  the  requirements  for  two  en- 
gineering majors,  the  official  record  will  indicate  this  fact.  However,  the  Director  of  Un- 
dergraduate Studies  for  the  second  major  must  certify  that  the  departmental  major  re- 
quirements have  been  met.  The  student  must  initiate  the  procedure,  either  through  the 
Dean  of  the  School  of  Engineering  or  through  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in 
the  second  department.  The  completion  of  the  requirements  for  the  major  in  this  depart- 
ment must  be  confirmed  no  later  than  the  time  of  registration  for  the  final  semester. 
Courses  which  are  common  to  both  majors  shall  be  counted  toward  satisfying  the  require- 
ments of  both  majors. 

Interdisciplinary  Programs  in  Engineering.  These  programs  parallel  the  major  pro- 
grams in  biomedical,  civil,  electrical,  and  mechanical  engineering,  but  are  not  individu- 
ally accredited  by  ABET.  They  provide  special  opportunities  for  study  in  interdisciplinary 
fields,  such  as  energy  conversion,  biochemical  engineering,  engineering  mechanics, 
materials  science,  ocean  engineering,  pollution  control,  systems  and  controls,  and  ur- 
ban engineering,  leading  to  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  degree,  which  may 
be  arranged  with  approval  of  the  engineering  faculty.  Any  student,  in  consultation  with 
the  advisor  or  another  faculty  member,  may  propose  a  unique  combination  of  courses 
designed  to  meet  particular  career  objectives.  The  proposal  should  be  submitted  to  the 
Engineering  Faculty  Council,  through  the  Dean  of  the  School  of  Engineering,  for  approval; 
it  may  be  submitted  as  early  as  the  second  semester  of  the  freshman  year  and  must  be 
submitted  before  the  beginning  of  the  senior  year.  The  proposal  should  include  the  stu- 
dent's reasons  for  pursuing  the  suggested  program  of  study,  and  it  must  show  how  the 
proposed  courses  satisfy  the  following  requirements: 

1 .  The  proposed  program  of  study  meets  the  general  requirements  for  the  Bache- 
lor of  Science  in  Engineering  degree  but  cannot  be  accommodated  by  the  ap- 
proved departmental  requirements  in  biomedical,  civil  and  environmental,  or 
electrical  engineering,  or  mechanical  engineering  and  materials  science. 

2.  A  program  of  at  least  eight  engineering  courses  is  included  to  provide  depth  in 
the  chosen  interdisciplinary  area  of  study. 

3.  A  program  of  at  least  five  courses,  in  addition  to  the  seventeen  courses  listed  un- 
der general  requirements,  is  included  to  provide  breadth  in  technical  areas  (en- 
gineering, natural  science,  and  mathematics). 

4.  The  remaining  courses,  which  are  treated  as  electives,  require  the  approval  of  the 
student's  advisor. 

Each  student  enrolled  in  an  approved  interdisciplinary  program  will  be  assigned  to 
the  appropriate  engineering  department  for  administrative  purposes. 

Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering/Master  of  Science  Program.  This  program  pro- 
vides students  with  an  opportunity  to  plan  a  coordinated  five-year  program  of  studies 
in  the  School  of  Engineering  leading  to  both  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  and 
Master  of  Science  degrees.  Application  for  admission  to  this  integrated  program  may  be 
made  during  the  junior  or  senior  year.  Provisional  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  may 
be  granted  when  the  student  enrolls  for  the  semester  during  which  the  Bachelor  of  Science 


40       Degree  Programs 


in  Engineering  degree  requirements  will  be  completed.  Graduate  level  courses  during 
this  period  which  are  in  excess  of  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  requirements  may 
be  credited  toward  fulfillment  of  the  Master  of  Science  degree  requirements. 

Students  must  complete  thirty  semester  hours  of  credit  specifically  approved  for  the 
Master  of  Science  degree  under  the  prevailing  graduate  rules;  up  to  six  of  these  hours 
may  be  thesis  research  if  the  progTam  includes  a  written  master's  thesis.  No  more  than 
nine  semester  hours  of  graduate  work  can  be  completed  concurrently  with  completing 
the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  degree  requirements. 

Residence  Requirements.  At  least  seventeen  semester  courses  must  be  completed 
satisfactorily  at  Duke.  This  must  include  the  work  of  the  final  two  semesters,  with  the  fol- 
lowing exceptions:  the  student  who  has  completed  more  than  four  full  semesters  of  work 
at  Duke  may  take  the  last  two  courses  elsewhere;  others  may  take  the  last  course  elsewhere. 
The  courses  taken  elsewhere  must  be  approved  in  advance  by  the  student's  major  advi- 
sor and  academic  dean. 

Pass/Fail  Grading  Option.  With  the  consent  of  the  instructor  and  the  faculty  advi- 
sor, an  engineering  student  may  choose  to  be  graded  on  a  pass/fail  basis  in  up  to  four  un- 
restricted electives  or  social  sciences-humanities  electives  within  the  thirty-four-course 
program.  A  student  may  take  no  more  than  one  course  on  a  pass/fail  basis  each  semester. 

Repetition  of  Courses.  An  engineering  student  who  has  earned  a  grade  of  D-,  D,  or 
D+  in  a  required  mathematics  course  or  a  required  engineering  course  may,  with  per- 
mission of  his  or  her  advisor,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies,  and  academic  dean, 
repeat  the  course.  Both  grades  will  remain  on  the  student's  record.  Only  one  credit  may 
be  counted  toward  fulfilling  graduation  requirements. 

Annual  Recognition.  In  acknowledgment  of  high  academic  achievement,  recogni- 
tion is  given  each  summer  to  freshmen,  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  if  the  follow- 
ing requirements  are  met: 

1.  A  normal  academic  load  has  been  carried  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms. 

2.  Grades  other  than  P  have  been  earned  in  six  semester  courses. 

3.  No  incomplete  or  failing  grade  has  been  received  during  the  fall  and  spring  terms. 
The  Dean 's  List  recognizes  students  who  earn  a  3.3  average  on  all  work  in  both  the  fall 

and  spring  terms.  The  Dean 's  List  with  Distinction  includes  students  who  earn  a  3.6  on  all 
work  in  both  the  fall  and  spring  terms  of  an  academic  year. 

Continuation  Requirements.  A  student  must  achieve  a  satisfactory  record  of  academic 
performance  each  semester  and  make  satisfactory  progress  toward  graduation  to  remain 
enrolled  in  the  University. 

A  student  must  pass  at  least  three  courses  in  each  semester,  except  for  the  first  semester 
of  the  freshman  year,  in  which  at  least  two  courses  must  be  passed .  A  student  who  fails 
to  meet  this  continuation  requirement  must  leave  the  University  for  at  least  two  semesters. 
A  complete  summer  session  may  be  counted  as  a  semester.  Following  application  for  read- 
mission,  return  must  be  approved  by  the  Dean  and  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies 
in  the  student's  major  department .  If  the  student  thereafter  fails  to  pass  three  courses  in 
a  semester,  permanent  dismissal  from  the  University  usually  results.  A  student  who  en- 
rolls in  more  than  four  courses  in  a  given  semester  and  fails  two  or  more  of  them  will  not 
be  permitted  to  enroll  for  more  than  four  courses  in  the  following  semester  without  ap- 
proval of  the  Dean.  In  addition,  a  student  may  be  dismissed  temporarily  or  permanent- 
ly for  failing  to  make  satisfactory  progress  toward  graduation,  including  satisfactory  pro- 
gress toward  fulfillment  of  curricular  requirements  within  ten  semesters. 

The  term  satisfactory  progress  shall  be  defined  also  by  the  following  schedule: 
1.  To  begin  enrollment  in  the  second  year,  a  student  must  have  passed  6  s.c.  and 
earned  P,  C-,  or  better  in  4  s.c* 


'Continuation  from  the  first  to  second  year  shall  be  based  only  on  course  credits  earned  at  Duke  and  credits 
received  through  the  Advanced  Placement  program. 

The  School  of  Engineering       41 


2.  To  begin  enrollment  in  the  third  year,  a  student  must  have  passed  13  s.c.  and 
earned  P,  C-,  or  better  in  11  s.c. 

3.  To  begin  enrollment  in  the  fourth  year,  a  student  must  have  passed  20  s.c.  and 
earned  P,  C-,  or  better  in  18  s.c. 

4.  To  begin  enrollment  in  the  fifth  year,  a  student  must  have  passed  27  s.c.  and  earned 
P,  C-,  or  better  in  25  s.c. 

Grade  Requirement  for  Graduation.  Of  the  thirty-four  semester  courses  which  ful- 
fill the  specified  categories  in  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  degree  requirements, 
thirty-two  or  their  equivalent  in  number  must  be  passed  with  grades  of  P,  C-,  or  better. 


42       Degree  Programs 


The  School  of  Engineering       43 


Academic  Procedures  and  Information 


Advanced  Placement 

Scores  on  the  tests  discussed  below  and  documented  previous  educational  experience 
are  the  criteria  used  to  determine  a  student's  qualifications  for  certain  advanced  courses. 
If  questions  arise,  students  should  consult  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  the 
appropriate  department  or  the  University  Registrar. 

College  Board  Advanced  Placement  Program  (APP)  Examinations.  A  score  of  4  or 
5  on  College  Board  Advanced  Placement  Program  Examinations,  taken  prior  to  matricu- 
lation in  college,  is  the  basis  for  consideration  for  credit  and/or  placement  in  advanced 
courses  in  art,  biology,  chemistry,  computer  science,  English*  French,  German,  histo- 
ry, Latin,  music,  physicst,  political  science,  and  Spanish.  The  Department  of  Mathematics 
will  consider  a  score  of  3  for  placement  beyond  the  introductory  course.  The  record  of  a 
student  presenting  such  a  score  and  desiring  to  continue  in  the  same  subject  at  Duke  will 
be  evaluated  for  credit  and  for  placement  in  an  advanced  course.  Departmental  policies 
regarding  advanced  placement  and  credit  may  vary.  In  the  case  of  French,  German,  Lat- 
in, and  Spanish,  APP  scores  of  4  or  5  may  result  in  placement  in  courses  at  the  100  level; 
approval  of  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  or  Supervisor  of  Freshman  Instruc- 
tion in  the  appropriate  department  is  required  before  final  placement  is  made.  Credit  may 
be  granted  for  one  or  two  courses  in  each  subject  area,  with  the  approval  of  the  academic 
department  concerned.  Also,  see  the  section  on  residence  requirements  in  the  chapter 
"Degree  Programs." 

College  Board  Achievement  Tests.  Scores  on  College  Board  Achievement  Tests  are 
the  basic  criteria  for  placement  in  French,  German,  Italian,  Spanish,  Latin,  and  mathemat- 
ics. Course  credit  is  not  given  for  courses  bypassed.  The  following  tables  will  assist  stu- 
dents in  making  reasonable  course  selections  in  the  subjects  indicated. 


*The  score  in  English  Advanced  Placement,  although  qualifying  a  student  for  advanced  courses  in  litera- 
ture, does  not  satisfy  the  requirement  in  Writing. 

tin  order  to  receive  credit  for  Physics  51  or  52,  a  student  must  take  a  validation  test  during  orientation. 

Advanced  Placement       45 


French* 

German 

Ital 

■an 

College  Board 

College  Board 

College  Board 

Achievement 

Achievement 

Achievement 

Scores 

Scores 

Scores 

200-370 

French  1-2 

200-390 

German  It 

200^40 

Italian  1-2 

380-440 

French  12 

400-480 

German  65-66 

450-540 

Italian  63 

450-540 

French  63 

490-560 

German  63 

550-590 

Italian  76 

550-590 

French  76 

570  plus 

Third  vearf 

600  plus 

Italian  100- 
level  course 

600 

French  100- 
level  course§ 

Spanish* 

Lat 

in 

Mathematics* 

200-420 

Spanish  1-2 

200-520 

Latin  1 

200-480 

Math.  9-10 

430-490 

Spanish  12 

530-630 

Latin  63 

490-540 

Math.  19 

500-570 

Spanish  63 

640  plus 

Third  yearj 

550-580 

Math.  31A 

580-620 

Spanish  76 

590-800 

Math.  31  or 
33,  or  with 

630  plus 

Spanish  100- 
level  course§ 

one  year  of 
high  school 
calculus. 
Math.  41 

"In  these  languages  students  are  permitted  to  drop  back  one  level  without  loss  of  credit  (e.g.,  from  101  to 
76  or  from  76  to  63).  No  credit  will  be  allowed  for  courses  two  levels  below  the  achievement  score  (e.g.,  students 
with  a  score  of  640  in  French  or  Spanish  could  not  receive  credit  for  63,  but  could  for  76).  In  no  case  will  credit 
be  given  for  1-2  to  students  with  three  or  more  years  of  high  school  French  or  Spanish. 

tThe  first  year  of  a  language  may  not  be  taken  for  credit  by  a  student  who  has  completed  more  than  two  years 
of  that  language  in  secondary  school.  In  rare  cases,  an  exception  mav  be  granted  with  permission  of  the  Director 
of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  the  appropriate  department. 

JAn  exception  may  be  granted  in  consultation  with  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

§French  111  and  Spanish  110  are  not  open  to  first  semester  freshmen  with  a  score  of  less  than  700. 

#In  the  absence  of  an  Achievement  Test  score,  course  placement  is  determined  bv  the  SAT  score  as  follows: 
490  or  below-Math.  9-10;  500-600-Math.  19;  610-650-Math.  31A;  660-800-Math.'31  or  33.  Math.  31A  refers 
to  special  sections  of  Math.  31  which  provide  students  more  instructional  time. 

College  Board  College  Placement  Tests.  Newly  admitted  students  who  wish  to  con- 
tinue in  a  language  which  was  begun  in  high  school  should  be  sure  to  take  a  College  Board 
Achievement  Test  in  that  language  by  June  of  the  senior  year  in  secondary  school .  A  stu- 
dent who  finds  that  it  is  not  possible  to  take  a  foreign  language  achievement  test  may  pe- 
tition to  take  a  placement  test  at  Duke  University  during  orientation.  In  such  cases,  the 
student  should  write  to  the  Coordinator  of  Placement  Testing  at  Counseling  and  Psycho- 
logical Services  by  July  1,  explaining  why  it  is  not  possible  to  take  the  achievement  test. 
Taking  the  tests  under  these  circumstances  is  necessary  to  determine  whether  the  stu- 
dent has  demonstrated  foreign  language  proficiency  at  entrance  or,  if  not,  what  place- 
ment level  at  Duke  is  most  appropriate  to  his  or  her  needs. 

All  freshmen  who  plan  to  take  mathematics  during  their  first  semester  at  Duke,  and 
who  do  not  submit  the  College  Board  SAT  score  or  College  Board  Achievement  Test  score 
in  mathematics,  must  take  the  College  Board  College  Placement  Test  in  mathematics  dur- 
ing orientation .  Students  who  have  been  placed  in  Mathematics  9-10, 19,  or  31  but  believe 


46       Academic  Procedures  and  Information 


that  their  background  in  mathematics  justifies  a  higher  course  placement  need  not  take 
the  College  Board  College  Placement  Test,  but  they  should  consult  the  Director  of 
Undergraduate  Studies  or  Supervisor  of  Freshman  Instruction  in  the  Department  of 
Mathematics.  Course  credit  is  not  given  for  courses  bypassed  on  the  basis  of  the  place- 
ment tests. 

International  Baccalaureate  (IB)  Program.  Duke  University  was  one  of  the  first  in- 
stitutions of  higher  learning  in  this  country  to  recognize  the  International  Baccalaureate 
Program.  Currently,  advanced  standing  credit  and/or  placement  can  be  awarded  upon 
the  recommendation  of  the  Duke  department  concerned.  Scores  of  "6"  and  "7"  earned 
at  the  higher  level  are  acceptable  for  consideration. 

Placement  in  Russian.  Students  who  wish  to  continue  in  Russian  at  Duke  should 
see  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  the  Department  of  Slavic  Languages  and 
Literatures.  In  the  case  of  Russian,  either  College  Board  Achievement  Test  scores  or  College 
Board  Placement  Test  scores  serve  as  criteria  for  placement.  Lacking  these,  the  department 
offers  an  examination  which  is  used  in  conjunction  with  other  criteria  for  placing  students 
at  the  appropriate  course  level. 

Reading  Out  of  Introductory  Courses.  Students  demonstrating  academic  ability  may 
be  granted  the  option  of  reading  out  of  an  introductory  or  prerequisite  course  in  order 
to  allow  them  to  advance  at  their  own  pace  to  upper  level  work.  No  course  credit  may  be 
earned  by  reading  out.  Reading  for  a  course  and  auditing  are  mutually  exclusive  proce- 
dures. Students  must  be  recommended  for  the  reading  option  by  their  academic  deans, 
and  their  proposed  programs  of  reading  must  be  approved  by  the  appropriate  Director 
of  Undergraduate  Studies.  Students  may  be  certified  for  advanced  course  work  by  passing 
a  qualifying  examination  prepared  by  the  department.  When  an  advanced  course  is  com- 
pleted, an  entry  is  made  on  the  permanent  record  that  the  qualifying  examination  was 
passed,  but  no  course  credit  is  awarded.  Further  information  is  available  from  the  aca- 
demic deans. 

Transfer  of  Work  Elsewhere 

Evaluation  of  Work  Taken  Elsewhere.  For  students  transferring  from  another  accredit- 
ed, degree-granting  institution,  credit  for  up  to  seventeen  semester  courses  may  be  grant- 
ed (sixteen  for  those  who  matriculated  prior  to  May  1, 1988.)  Courses  in  which  grades 
of  less  than  C-  have  been  earned  are  not  accepted  for  transfer  credit;  students  seeking  trans- 
fer credit  for  courses  in  which  they  earned  a  P  grade  must  present  official  verification  that 
the  P  is  equivalent  to  at  least  a  C-  grade.  The  semester-course  unit  of  credit  awarded  at 
Duke  for  satisfactorily  completed  courses  cannot,  of  course,  be  directly  equated  with 
semester-hour  or  quarter-hour  credits.  Ordinarily,  transfer  students  will  not  be  awarded 
more  than  four  semester-course  credits  for  one  semester's  work  unless  they  have  satis- 
factorily completed  more  than  the  normal  course  load  at  the  institutions  from  which  they 
have  transferred.  All  courses  approved  for  transfer  are  listed  on  the  student's  permanent 
record  at  Duke,  but  grades  earned  are  not  recorded.  Courses  taken  at  other  institutions 
prior  to  matriculation  at  Duke  are  evaluated  by  the  University  Registrar  and  by  the  faculty. 

Limitation  on  Work  Taken  Elsewhere.  After  matriculation  as  a  full-time  degree  can- 
didate in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  a  student  may  receive  credit  toward  the 
Bachelor  of  Science  or  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree  for  a  maximum  of  two  courses  taken  at  an- 
other institution,  whether  in  the  summer  while  regularly  enrolled  at  Duke,  while  with- 
drawn voluntarily  from  the  college,  or  while  on  leave  of  absence  (other  than  for  an  ap- 
proved program  of  study  abroad  or  an  approved  program  at  another  institution  in  the 
United  States) .  Full-time  degree  candidates  in  the  School  of  Engineering  may  receive  credit 
towards  the  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering  degree  for  a  maximum  of  four  courses 
taken  at  another  institution.  Ordinarily,  no  credit  will  be  accepted  for  course  work  taken 


Transfer  of  Work  Elsewhere       47 


while  a  student  is  withdrawn  involuntarily.  For  purposes  of  this  regulation,  advanced 
placement  credit  is  not  considered  as  work  taken  at  another  institution.  The  provision 
of  the  residence  requirement  which  allows  a  student  to  take  the  final  courses  elsewhere 
remains  in  effect.  See  the  section  on  residence  requirements  in  the  chapter  "Degree 
Programs." 

Students  may  not  transfer  credit  from  two-year  colleges  after  completing  their  sopho- 
more year.  At  least  half  the  courses  submitted  toward  fulfillment  of  a  student's  major  field 
must  be  taken  at  Duke,  but  departments  may  make  exceptions  to  this  rule  in  special  cir- 
cumstances. No  credit  is  given  for  work  completed  by  correspondence,  and  credit  for  not 
more  than  two  semester  courses  is  allowed  for  extension  courses. 

Approval  for  Courses  Taken  Elsewhere.  Approval  forms  for  courses  to  be  taken  at 
institutions  other  than  Duke  may  be  obtained  from  the  offices  of  the  academic  deans.  Stu- 
dents wishing  to  transfer  credit  for  study  at  another  accredited  college  while  on  leave  or 
during  the  summer  must  present  a  catalog  of  that  college  to  the  appropriate  dean  and 
Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  obtain  their  approval  prior  to  taking  the  courses. 

Advising 

Students  and  their  advisors  confer  when  necessary,  but  they  should  confer  at  least 
once  before  every  registration  period  to  review  goals,  plans  for  achieving  them,  and  any 
problems  encountered  or  anticipated.  Before  declaring  a  major  in  Trinity  College,  stu- 
dents confer  with  the  premajor  advisor,  the  academic  dean  for  premajor  students,  or  the 
academic  dean  in  the  division  of  their  interests.  Upon  declaring  a  major,  the  student  is 
assigned  a  faculty  advisor;  the  academic  dean  for  that  division  is  also  available  for  con- 
sultation .  In  the  School  of  Engineering,  the  advisor's  signature  is  necessary  for  registra- 
tion and  all  course  changes.  Much  good  advising  is  informal  and  occurs  in  conversation 
with  members  of  the  faculty.  Students  have  the  responsibility  to  understand  and  meet 
the  requirements  for  the  curriculum  under  which  they  are  studying  and  should  seek  ad- 
vice as  appropriate. 

Registration 

Students  are  expected  to  register  at  specified  times  for  each  successive  term.  Prior 
to  registration  each  student  receives  special  instructions  and  registration  materials.  Stu- 
dents prepare  a  course  program,  submit  it  at  an  appointed  time  to  their  advisors  for  re- 
view, and  present  the  approved  schedule  at  registration.  In  the  School  of  Engineering, 
the  schedule  must  be  signed  by  the  advisor. 

Students  who  expect  to  obtain  certification  to  teach  in  secondary  schools  should  con- 
sult an  advisor  in  the  education  program  prior  to  each  registration  period  to  ensure  that 
they  are  meeting  requirements  for  state  certification  and  that  they  will  have  places  reserved 
for  them  in  the  student  teaching  program. 

Those  who  register  late  are  subject  to  a  $50  fine.  Students  who  fail  to  register  for  the 
fall  or  spring  semester  are  withdrawn  and  must  apply  for  readmission  if  they  wish  to  re- 
turn; they  also  forfeit  their  registration  deposits  unless  they  indicate  at  the  time  of  regis- 
tration their  intention  not  to  continue  in  the  University  the  following  term.  Those  stu- 
dents who  have  not  paid  any  fees  owed  to  or  fines  imposed  by  the  University  (such  as 
laboratory  fees,  library  fines,  and  parking  fines)  by  the  date  specified  for  registration  for 
the  following  term  will  not  be  permitted  to  register  for  the  following  term  until  such  fees 
and  fines  have  been  paid  in  full,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  the  student  may  have  paid 
in  full  the  tuition  for  the  following  term. 

Students  planning  to  register  for  a  course  under  the  reciprocal  (interinstitutional) 
agreement  must  have  the  course  approved  by  the  appropriate  Director  of  Undergradu- 
ate Studies  and  their  academic  dean.  Further  information  about  registration  procedures 
once  approval  is  given  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the  Registrar.  See  the  chapter 
"Special  Programs"  for  information  regarding  the  reciprocal  agreement  with  neighbor- 
ing universities. 

48       Academic  Procedures  and  Information 


Duke  Identification  Card  and  Term  Enrollment.  Students  are  to  report  to  103  Allen 
Building  at  the  beginning  of  each  term  to  obtain  semester  validation  of  their  Duke  I.D. 
card.  This  card  should  be  carried  at  all  times.  The  identification  card  with  proper  valida- 
tion is  means  of  identification  for  library  privileges,  University  functions,  and  services 
available  to  University  students.  Students  are  expected  to  present  their  card  on  request 
to  any  University  official  or  employee.  The  card  is  not  transferable,  and  fraudulent  use 
may  result  in  loss  of  student  privileges  or  suspension.  Loss  of  the  card  should  be  report- 
ed immediately  to  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  where  new  ones  can  be  obtained  for  $5.  Offi- 
cial enrollment  is  required  for  admission  to  any  class.  Failure  to  report,  or  to  account  before- 
hand for  an  absence,  entails  a  loss  of  registration  in  courses. 

Concurrent  Enrollment.  A  student  enrolled  at  Duke  may  not  enroll  concurrently  in 
any  other  school  or  college  without  special  permission  of  the  appropriate  academic  dean . 
See,  however,  the  statement  regarding  the  reciprocal  agreement  with  the  University  of 
North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina  Central  University  in  Durham,  and  North 
Carolina  State  University  at  Raleigh. 

Course  Changes  after  Classes  Begin  in  the  Fall  and  Spring  Terms.  During  the 
drop/add  period  changes  may  be  made  in  course  schedules.  Receipts  for  course  changes 
made  in  103  Allen  Building  must  be  retained. 

In  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  students  may  drop  and  add  courses  during 
the  first  week  of  classes  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms  at  their  own  discretion;  during  the 
second  week  of  the  drop/add  period  they  may  drop  courses  at  their  own  discretion,  but 
the  signature  of  the  appropriate  instructor  is  required  for  adding  a  course.  After  the 
drop/add  period  no  course  may  be  added;  also,  a  course  may  not  be  changed  to  or  from 
the  pass/fail  or  audit  basis.  To  withdraw  from  a  course,  students  must  obtain  permission 
from  their  academic  deans,  and  for  reasons  of  course  overload  the  academic  dean  may 
give  permission  up  to  midterm.  Ordinarily,  courses  may  not  be  discontinued  after  mid- 
term. In  extraordinary  circumstances,  however,  e.g.,  for  reasons  of  health,  the  academic 
dean  may  allow  a  student  to  withdraw.  After  the  drop/add  period,  the  student  receives 
a  WP  grade  (withdraw  passing)  or  WF  (withdraw  failing)  from  the  instructor.  Course  work 
discontinued  without  the  dean's  permission  will  ordinarily  result  in  a  grade  of  F. 

Within  the  School  of  Engineering,  the  signature  of  the  advisor  is  necessary  for  drop- 
ping or  adding  courses  after  classes  begin.  After  the  drop/add  period  no  course  may  be 
added,  and  in  order  to  withdraw  from  a  course  students  must  obtain  permission  from 
their  academic  deans.  Factors  to  be  considered  by  the  dean  include  health,  necessary  out- 
side work,  and,  up  to  the  time  midterm  grades  are  issued,  a  course  overload.  Until  the 
last  four  weeks  of  classes  in  the  semester,  the  instructor  must  certify  the  student's  stand- 
ing in  the  course  as  satisfactory  or  as  failing.  In  the  former  case  a  WP  will  be  entered  on 
the  permanent  record  and  in  the  latter,  a  WF.  During  the  last  four  weeks  of  classes  in  any 
semester,  or  the  equivalent  in  the  summer  terms,  W  will  be  assigned  if,  in  the  judgment 
of  the  student's  dean,  compelling  and  extraordinary  circumstances  make  it  necessary  for 
the  student  to  drop  the  course;  otherwise,  the  course  must  be  continued  to  the  end  of  the 
semester.  A  course  discontinued  without  approval  will  result  in  a  grade  of  F. 

When  students  note  an  error  in  their  course  schedules,  they  should  consult  with  their 
academic  dean. 

Course  Changes  for  the  Summer  Terms.  Course  changes  are  accomplished  by  sub- 
mitting the  three-part  drop/add  form(s)  to  the  Office  of  the  Summer  Session,  121  Allen 
Building.  Beginning  May  9,  all  course  changes  must  be  approved  by  the  appropriate  aca- 
demic dean .  The  Director  of  the  Summer  Session  serves  as  the  dean  for  all  non-Duke  stu- 
dents. Students  who  are  out  of  town  must  contact  their  academic  dean  directly  to  arrange 
for  dropping  or  adding  courses. 

Courses  may  be  added  before  or  during  the  first  three  days  of  the  term  (see  also  the 
section  on  late  registration  and  payment) .  After  the  third  day  of  the  term,  no  course  may 
be  added .  Prior  to  the  first  day  of  the  term,  students  may  drop  a  course  or  courses  for  which 

Registration       49 


they  have  registered  without  penalty.  During  the  first  three  days  of  the  term,  students 
will  be  charged  $150  per  course  ($75  per  half -course)  for  dropping  a  course  or  courses  if 
this  results  in  any  reduction  in  course  load  for  the  term.  With  the  permission  of  the  aca- 
demic dean  a  course  may  be  dropped  until  the  end  of  the  fourteenth  day  of  a  regular  sum- 
mer term  (eleventh  day  at  the  Marine  Laboratory);  the  instructor  then  assigns  a  WP  or 
WF  grade.  Course  work  discontinued  without  the  approval  of  the  dean  will  result  in  a 
grade  of  F  (See  also  the  section  on  Withdrawal  Charges  and  Refunds.) 

Course  Load  and  Eligibility  for  Courses 

Students  are  reminded  that  it  is  their  responsibility  to  be  certain  that  their  course  load 
conforms  with  academic  requirements.  The  normal  and  expected  course  load  in  the  fall 
or  spring  term  is  four  semester  courses.  For  students  matriculating  after  May  1, 1988,  two 
additional  semester  credits  are  needed  in  order  to  meet  the  thirty-four  (34)  semester- 
course  requirement  for  graduation.  To  take  fewer  than  four  or  more  than  five  semester 
courses,  students  must  have  the  approval  of  their  academic  dean's.  No  student,  however, 
may  take  more  than  six  courses  in  any  semester.  With  the  approval  of  their  academic  dean, 
seniors  in  Trinity  College  and  the  School  of  Engineering  who  need  fewer  than  eight  se- 
mester courses  for  graduation  requirements  may  take  an  underload. 

Maximum  course  program  for  one  term  of  the  summer  session  is  two  courses,  one 
of  which  may  be  a  laboratory  course.  Students  in  the  School  of  Engineering  may  enroll 
in  two  laboratory  courses.  In  addition,  a  student  may  enroll  in  a  physical  education  ac- 
tivity or  dance  activity  course  for  one-half  course  credit. 

Self -pacing  during  a  given  calendar  year  (two  regular  semesters  plus  two  Duke  sum- 
mer terms)  is  possible  with  the  approval  of  the  student's  academic  dean  and  faculty  ad- 
visor (and  in  consultation  with  the  Office  of  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid,  if  the  student 
is  receiving  monetary  support  from  the  University) .  Prior  to  the  beginning  of  a  semester, 
a  student  may  apply  to  take  fewer  than  four  courses  for  one  or  more  semesters  in  a  given 
calendar  year  after  the  freshman  year,  providing  the  student  can  meet  the  continuation 
requirements  described  in  the  chapter  "Degree  Programs."  Advanced  placement  credits 
and  summer  work  taken  elsewhere  are  excluded  when  minimum  annual  continuation 
requirements  are  considered  under  this  plan. 

Eligibility  for  Cou  rses.  The  rules  established  by  the  Graduate  School  provide  that  juniors 
and  well-qualified  sophomores  may  enroll  in  a  200-level  (senior-graduate)  course  if  they 
have  obtained  written  consent  of  the  instructor,  as  well  as  that  of  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  in  the  department  concerned.  Undergraduate  students  may  not  enroll  in  300- 
or  400-level  courses. 

Seniors  who,  at  the  beginning  of  the  final  term,  lack  no  more  than  three  semester 
courses  toward  the  fulfillment  of  the  requirements  for  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor 
of  Science  degree  may  enroll  in  graduate  courses,  for  a  maximum  course  load  of  five  se- 
mester courses.  Admission  to  the  Graduate  School  is  necessary. 

Students  may  not  register  for  two  courses  meeting  at  the  same  time.  In  Trinity  College 
no  course  may  be  repeated  for  credit  or  a  grade  if  a  C-  or  higher  has  been  earned  previ- 
ously, except  where  noted  in  the  course  description.  A  course  previously  passed,  how- 
ever, may  be  audited. 

Students  who  receive  a  D-,  D,  or  D+  in  any  course  in  Trinity  College  are  allowed  to 
repeat  the  course  at  Duke.  The  grade  earned  in  the  repeated  course  as  well  as  the  grade 
earned  originally  appear  on  the  transcript,  the  former  identified  as  a  repeat;  both  grades 
count  in  the  grade  point  average,  but  the  credit  for  only  one  counts  toward  the  required 
number  of  courses  for  continuation  and  the  thirty-four  (34)  courses  required  for 
graduation. 

Course  Audit 

Students  who  audit  a  course  submit  no  daily  work  and  take  no  examinations.  They 
do  not  receive  credit  for  the  course.  With  the  written  consent  of  the  instructor,  a  full-time 

50       Academic  Procedures  and  Information 


degree  student  is  allowed  to  audit  one  or  more  courses  in  addition  to  the  normal  program. 
Physical  education  activity,  studio  art,  applied  music,  and  dance  activity  courses  may  not 
be  audited.  In  the  fall  or  spring  term,  a  part-time  degree  student  may  audit  courses  by 
payment  for  each  course  audited.  In  a  summer  term,  a  student  carrying  two  courses  for 
credit  may  be  given  permission  to  audit,  without  additional  fees,  nonlaboratory  courses 
with  the  above  exceptions.  A  student  in  a  summer  term  carrying  less  than  a  full  program 
for  credit  may  secure  permission  to  audit  (above  exceptions  apply)  but  is  required  to  pay 
half  the  University  fee  for  the  course.  After  the  drop/add  period  in  any  term,  no  student 
classified  as  an  auditor  in  a  particular  course  may  take  the  course  for  credit,  and  no  student 
taking  a  course  for  credit  may  be  reclassified  as  an  auditor.  A  student  may  not  repeat  for 
credit  any  course  previously  audited. 

Courses  may  be  audited  by  faculty  members,  staff,  alumni,  employees  and  their 
spouses,  as  well  as  spouses  of  currently  enrolled  students,  and  members  of  the  Institute 
for  Learning  in  Retirement;  courses  audited  on  the  Microelectronics  Center  of  North  Caro- 
lina (MCNC)  Network  may  be  audited  without  concurrent  enrollment  in  another  course. 
Formal  application  is  not  necessary;  written  permission  from  the  instructor  must  be  ob- 
tained and  a  course  card  must  be  signed  by  the  Director  of  the  Office  of  Continuing  Edu- 
cation. Consult  the  chapter  "Financial  Information"  for  the  appropriate  fee  schedule.  Au- 
ditors must  register  on  the  Friday  before  classes  begin. 

Independent  Study 

Independent  study  enables  a  student  to  pursue  individual  research  and  reading  in 
a  field  of  special  interest  under  the  supervision  of  a  member  of  the  faculty.  A  student— 
with  the  approval  of  an  advisor,  the  instructor,  and  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies 
in  the  instructor's  department— may  enroll  in  independent  study  for  any  term  at  Duke. 
In  Trinity  College,  instructors  of  independent  study  courses  are  expected  to  meet  with 
the  students  enrolled  at  least  once  every  two  weeks  during  the  fall  or  spring  and  at  least 
once  each  week  during  a  summer  term. 

House  Courses 

House  courses,  offered  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms,  are  organized  by  students  within 
given  residential  units.  They  are  intended  to  encourage  students  to  take  initiative  in  creat- 
ing academic  experiences  that  are  not  offered  by  the  departments.  A  house  course  must 
be  sponsored  by  a  faculty  member  in  the  arts  and  sciences,  reviewed  by  the  department 
of  that  faculty  member,  and  approved  by  the  Committee  on  Courses  of  Instruction  of  the 
Undergraduate  Faculty  Council  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  House  courses  carry  a  half -course 
credit.  In  the  School  of  Engineering,  house  courses  cannot  be  used  to  meet  degree  require- 
ments. In  Trinity  College  not  more  than  two  semester-course  credits  earned  in  house 
courses  can  be  counted  toward  the  course  requirement  for  graduation.  House  courses 
do  not  count  toward  other  requirements.  Grades  are  submitted  only  on  the  pass/fail  basis. 
The  academic  deans  can  provide  further  details. 

Submission  of  Term  Paper 

Students  who  wish  (under  unusual  circumstances)  to  submit  a  single  paper  for  credit 
in  more  than  one  course  must  receive  prior  written  permission  from  each  course  instructor. 
The  student  must  indicate  the  multiple  submission  on  the  title  page  of  the  paper. 

Declaration  of  Major  or  Division  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts 
and  Sciences 

Before  declaring  a  major  or  interdepartmental  concentration  in  Trinity  College,  stu- 
dents work  with  their  premajor  advisors  and  with  other  members  of  the  faculty  and  staff 
to  develop  a  'long-range  academic  plan,"  which  outlines  academic  objectives  and  plans 

Declaration  of  Major  or  Division  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences       51 


for  meeting  goals.  The  plan  should  describe  the  proposed  major  program,  related  class- 
room and  outside  experiences,  and  the  general  pattern  of  elective  courses,  as  well  as  the 
means  by  which  the  student  will  meet  established  college  requirements  for  graduation. 
Freshmen  may  declare  a  major  in  the  spring  of  the  freshman  year.  Freshmen  who  elect 
to  postpone  their  declaration  of  major  will  not  file  long-range  academic  plans  during  their 
first  year  but  will  be  expected  to  discuss  their  progress  in  developing  their  plans  with  their 
advisors  during  that  registration  period.  All  students  must  secure  formal  approval  of  their 
long-range  plans  and  must  declare  their  major  before  the  last  day  of  classes  in  their  fourth 
undergraduate  semester.  Forms  for  filing  the  official  long-range  plan  and  for  registering 
the  initial  declaration  of  major  are  available  in  the  Premajor  Advising  Center. 

After  declaring  a  major,  students  are  assigned  an  advisor  in  the  department  of  the 
major  and  an  academic  dean  in  the  division  of  concentration.  Students  who,  having  al- 
ready declared  a  major,  wish  to  change  their  area  of  concentration  complete  a  form  in  the 
Office  of  the  Registrar  and  subsequently  develop  a  revised  long-range  academic  plan  in 
consultation  with  appropriate  faculty  members  in  the  new  major  department  and,  if 
necessary,  with  their  academic  dean .  The  second  major  should  be  declared  in  the  Office 
of  the  Registrar  before  registering  for  the  final  term. 


52      Academic  Procedures  and  Information 


A  student  may  declare  an  interdepartmental  concentration  after  conferring  with  the 
Directors  of  Undergraduate  Studies  of  the  departments  involved,  and  they  or  other  ad- 
visors assist  the  student  in  preparing  a  program  of  course  work.  The  program,  which  must 
be  planned  early  in  the  undergraduate  career,  must  consist  of  at  least  three  courses  beyond 
the  introductory  level  in  each  of  the  departments.  One  of  the  departments  should  be  iden- 
tified as  primarily  responsible  for  the  student's  advising.  A  copy  of  the  plan  for  the  pro- 
gram, with  a  descriptive  title  which  will  appear  on  the  student's  permanent  record,  should 
be  presented,  along  with  the  written  approval  of  the  Directors  of  Undergraduate  Studies, 
to  the  appropriate  academic  dean.  A  student  who  declares  an  interdepartmental  concen- 
tration must  satisfy  all  other  requirements  for  Program  I. 

A  student  may  have  a  second  major  recorded  on  the  permanent  record;  if  the  student's 
second  major  is  not  offered  within  the  degree  to  be  granted  for  completion  of  the  first  ma- 
jor, a  notation  of  the  second  major  will  appear  on  the  transcript.  Majors  offered  within 
each  degree  are  listed  below: 

Bachelor  of  Arts.  Afro-American  studies,  anthropology,  art  design,  art  history,  bi- 
ology, Canadian  studies,  chemistry,  classical  studies  (ancient  history  and  archaeol- 
ogy), comparative  area  studies,  computer  science,  drama,  economics,  English, 
French,  geology,  Germanic  languages  and  literature,  Greek,  history,  Latin, 
mathematics,  medieval  and  Renaissance  studies,  music,  philosophy,  physics,  political 
science,  psychology,  public  policy  studies,  religion,  Slavic  languages  and  literature, 
sociology,  and  Spanish. 

Bachelor  of  Science.  Biology,  chemistry,  computer  science,  geology,  mathematics, 
physics,  and  psychology. 

Changes  in  Status 

Withdrawal  and  Readmission.  Students  who  wish  to  withdraw  from  the  college  must 
give  official  notification  to  their  academic  dean.  Notification  must  be  received  prior  to  the 
beginning  of  classes  in  any  term  or  tuition  will  be  due  on  a  pro  rata  basis.  (See  the  section 
on  refunds  in  the  chapter  "Financial  Information.")  For  students  withdrawing  on  their 
own  initiative  after  the  beginning  of  classes  and  prior  to  the  last  four  weeks  of  regular 
classes  in  the  fall  or  spring  term,  or  before  the  last  two  weeks  of  regular  classes  in  a  sum- 
mer term,  a  W  is  assigned  in  lieu  of  a  regular  grade  for  each  course.  After  these  dates  an 
F  grade  is  recorded  unless  withdrawal  is  caused  by  an  emergency  beyond  the  control  of 
the  student,  in  which  case  a  W  is  assigned  by  the  student's  academic  dean. 

Applications  for  readmission  are  made  to  the  appropriate  school  or  college.  Each  ap- 
plication is  reviewed  by  officers  of  the  school  or  college  to  which  the  student  applies,  and 
a  decision  is  made  on  the  basis  of  the  applicant's  previous  record  at  Duke,  evidence  of 
increasing  maturity  and  discipline,  and  the  degree  of  success  attendant  upon  activities 
during  the  time  away  from  Duke.  Students  who  are  readmitted  usually  cannot  be  housed 
on  campus. 

Applications  for  readmission  must  be  completed  by  November  1  for  enrollment  in 
the  spring,  by  April  1  for  enrollment  in  the  summer,  and  by  July  1  for  enrollment  in  the  fall . 

Leave  of  Absence.  An  upperclassman  in  good  standing  may  apply  in  writing  to  the 
appropriate  academic  dean  to  take  a  leave  of  absence  for  one  or  two  semesters;  the  dead- 
line for  application  for  a  leave  is  the  end  of  the  registration  period  for  the  semester  im- 
mediately preceding  the  leave.  Students  returning  from  approved  medical,  financial,  or 
study  abroad  leaves  and  desiring  housing  on  campus  will  be  placed  in  the  general  housing 
lottery,  provided  they  have  submitted  the  appropriate  information  to  the  Office  of  Stu- 
dent Affairs  by  the  deadline  noted  above  and  provided  that  they  lived  on  campus  before 
taking  their  approved  leave.  Those  students  approved  for  personal  leaves  are  not  guaran- 
teed on-campus  housing,  but  will  be  given  highest  priority  on  the  housing  waiting  list 
provided  the  same  deadline  and  qualifications  described  above  have  been  met.  Unless 
an  exception  for  an  emergency  is  authorized  by  the  students'  academic  deans,  students 


Changes  in  Status       53 


applying  after  the  course  registration  cited  above  will  lose  their  priorities  in  University 
housing  for  the  period  following  the  leave. 

Registration  materials  will  be  mailed  to  a  student  on  leave,  but  final  registration  is, 
of  course,  contingent  upon  the  student's  fulfilling  the  terms  of  the  leave.  A  student  failing 
to  register  while  on  leave  will  be  withdrawn  from  the  University  and  will  have  to  apply 
forreadmission. 

A  student  who  undertakes  independent  study  under  Duke  supervision  and  for  Duke 
credit  is  not  on  leave  of  absence  even  if  studying  elsewhere.  The  student  registers  at  Duke 
as  a  nonresident  student  and  pays  the  appropriate  fees  or  tuition  at  Duke.  This  also  applies 
to  Duke  programs  conducted  away  from  the  Durham  campus. 

Transfer  between  Duke  University  Schools.  Students  in  good  standing  may  be  con- 
sidered for  transfer  from  one  Duke  undergraduate  school  or  college  to  another,  upon  writ- 
ten application  and  request  for  a  letter  of  recommendation  from  their  academic  dean.  The 
review  of  requests  to  transfer  involves  consideration  of  a  student's  general  academic  stand- 
ing, citizenship  records,  and  relative  standing  in  the  group  of  students  applying  for  trans- 
fer. The  school  or  college  to  which  transfer  is  sought  will  give  academic  counseling  to  a 
student  as  soon  as  intention  to  apply  for  transfer  is  known,  although  no  commitment  will 
be  implied. 

A  student  may  apply  to  transfer  at  any  time  prior  to  receiving  a  baccalaureate  degree. 
A  student  transferring  to  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  from  the  School  of  Engineer- 
ing, prior  to  receiving  a  baccalaureate  degree,  may  not  use  more  than  six  professional 
school  credits  toward  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  Bachelor  of  Science  degree.  If  admitted  af- 
ter having  earned  a  baccalaureate  degree,  a  student  must  complete  in  Trinity  College  a 
total  of  seventeen  additional  courses.  Transfer  credit,  AP  credit,  or  courses  previously  used 
to  satisfy  requirements  for  the  degree  in  engineering  cannot  be  counted. 

Full-Time  and  Part-Time  Degree  Status.  Ordinarily  candidates  for  degrees  are  expect- 
ed to  enroll  for  a  normal  course  load  each  semester.  Students  who  need  to  change  from 
full-time  to  part-time  status  must  request  permission  from  their  academic  dean  before 
the  end  of  the  preregistration  period  for  the  semester  for  which  part-time  enrollment  is 
sought.  Except  for  extraordinary  circumstances,  such  permission  is  given  only  to  students 
for  the  final  semester  of  their  senior  year.  Part-time  students  may  register  for  not  more 
than  two  courses  (or  two  courses  and  a  half-credit  physical  activity  or  dance  activity 
course).  Part-time  students  may  not  live  in  the  residence  halls. 

Resident  and  Nonresident  status.  See  the  chapter  "Campus  Life  and  Activities." 

Nondegree  to  Degree  Status.  A  nondegree  student  must  apply  to  the  Office  of  Un- 
dergraduate Admissions  for  admission  to  degree  candidacy. 

Class  Attendance,  Excused  Absences,  and  Tests 

Responsibility  for  class  attendance  rests  with  the  individual  student,  and  since  regular 
and  punctual  class  attendance  is  expected,  the  student  must  accept  the  consequences  of 
failure  to  attend.  Instructors  may  refer  to  the  student's  academic  dean  a  student  who  is, 
in  their  opinion,  absent  excessively.  As  a  rule,  absences  from  required  classes  and  tests 
are  excused  only  for  illnesses  certified  by  a  medical  official  of  the  University  or  for  autho- 
rized representation  of  the  University  in  out-of-town  events.  Officials  in  charge  of  groups 
representing  the  University  are  required  to  submit  the  names  of  students  to  be  excused 
to  the  appropriate  deans'  offices  forty-eight  hours  before  absences  are  to  begin. 

Class  times  are  officially  scheduled  at  registration  unless  designated  "to  be  arranged" 
(TBA) .  No  class  time  may  be  changed  without  prior  permission  of  the  University  Schedule 
Committee.  Within-class  tests  (except  for  the  final)  are  to  be  given  at  the  regular  class  meet- 
ing times .  Exceptions  are  made  for  block  tests  that  have  been  approved  by  the  University 
Schedule  Committee.  Hours  set  up  for  block  examinations  are  7:30  to  8:45  A.M. .  on  Tues- 
days and  Thursdays. 

54       Academic  Procedures  and  Information 


Incomplete  Course  Work 

If  because  of  illness,  emergency,  or  reasonable  cause  a  student  cannot  complete  work 
for  a  course,  the  student  may  request  in  writing  to  his  or  her  academic  dean  the  assign- 
ment of  an  /  (incomplete)  for  the  course.  If  the  request  is  approved  by  the  instructor  in 
the  course  and  by  the  student's  academic  dean,  then  the  student  must  satisfactorily  com- 
plete the  work  prior  to  the  last  class  day  of  the  fifth  week  of  the  subsequent  semester  or 
a  grade  of  F  will  be  recorded  for  the  course.  An  J  taken  in  the  fall  semester  must  be  resolved 
in  the  succeeding  spring  term;  an  I  taken  in  the  spring  or  summer  must  be  completed  in 
the  following  fall  term.  A  student  not  enrolled  in  the  University  during  that  subsequent 
semester  will  have  until  the  end  of  the  fifth  week  of  the  next  semester  of  matriculation 
to  clear  the  I.  An  I,  once  recorded,  will  remain  permanently  on  the  student's  record,  even 
after  the  final  grade  is  subsequently  assigned  for  the  course.  If  a  student  whose  work  is 
incomplete  is  also  absent  from  the  final  examination,  an  X  is  assigned  for  the  course.  Stu- 
dents may  not  complete  work  in  a  course  after  graduation.  For  a  discussion  of  the  possi- 
ble impact  of  an  /grade  on  continuation,  see  the  sections  on  satisfactory  performance  each 
term  in  the  chapter  "Degree  Programs." 

Final  Examinations  and  Excused  Absences 

The  times  and  places  of  final  examinations  for  the  fall  and  spring  terms  are  officially 
scheduled  by  the  University  Schedule  Committee,  generally  according  to  the  day  and 
hour  of  the  regular  course  meeting;  changes  may  not  be  made  in  the  schedule  without 
the  approval  of  the  committee.  If  a  final  examination  is  to  be  given  in  a  course,  it  will  be 
given  at  the  officially  scheduled  time.  Take-home  examinations  are  due  at  the  regularly 
scheduled  hour  of  an  examination,  based  on  the  time  period  of  the  class.  In  fall  or  spring 
courses  where  final  examinations  are  not  scheduled,  hour  examinations  may  not  be  giv- 
en in  the  last  week  of  classes.  In  the  summer  session,  final  examinations  are  held  on  the 
last  two  days  of  each  term  as  specified  in  the  summer  session  brochure  calendar.  Final 
examinations  for  short  courses  are  held  on  the  last  day  of  the  course. 

No  later  than  the  end  of  the  first  week  of  classes  of  the  fall  and  spring  term,  the  in- 
structor is  required  to  announce  plans  for  the  final  examination  exercise.  Unless  depart- 
mental policy  stipulates  otherwise,  the  form  of  the  final  exercise  is  determined  by  the  in- 
structor. However,  a  final  written  examination  may  not  exceed  three  hours  in  length  and 
a  final  take-home  examination  may  not  require  more  than  three  hours  in  the  actual  writing. 

If  a  student  is  absent  from  a  final  examination,  an  X  is  given  instead  of  a  final  grade. 
An  acceptable  explanation  for  the  absence  must  be  presented  to  the  appropriate  academic  dean  within 
forty-eight  hou  rs  after  the  scheduled  time  of  the  examination,  or  the  X  is  converted  to  an  F.  If  the 
absence  is  excused  by  an  academic  dean,  the  student  arranges  with  the  dean  and  the  in- 
structor for  a  make-up  examination  to  be  given  at  the  earliest  possible  time.  An  excused 
X  not  cleared  by  the  end  of  the  fifth  week  of  the  following  semester  is  converted  to  an  F. 
A  student  not  enrolled  in  the  University  during  that  following  semester  has  until  the  end 
of  the  fifth  week  of  the  next  semester  of  enrollment  to  clear  the  X  unless  an  earlier  dead- 
line has  been  established  by  the  instructor  and  the  academic  dean. 

Grading  and  Grade  Requirements 

Final  grades  on  academic  work  are  sent  to  students  after  the  examinations  at  the  end 
of  each  term.  Midterm  advisory  grade  reports  for  freshmen  are  issued  in  the  fall  and 
spring. 

Passing  Grades.  Passing  grades  are  A,  exceptional;  B,  superior;  C,  satisfactory;  P,  pass- 
ing (see  pass/fail  option  below);  and  D,  low  pass.  These  grades  may  be  modified  by  a  plus 
or  minus.  A  Z  may  be  assigned  for  the  satisfactory  completion  of  the  first  term  of  a  two- 
course  sequence,  and  the  final  grade  for  both  courses  is  assigned  at  the  end  of  the  second 
course  of  the  sequence. 

Grading  and  Grade  Requirements       55 


Although  the  D  grade  represents  low  pass,  in  Trinity  College  not  more  than  two 
courses  passed  with  D  grades  may  be  counted  among  those  required  for  year-to-year  con- 
tinuation or  among  the  thirty-two  courses  required  for  graduation.  Courses  for  which 
a  D  grade  is  earned,  however,  satisfy  other  requirements.  For  information  on  repeating 
a  course  with  a  D  grade,  see  the  section  on  course  load  and  eligibility  for  courses  in  the 
chapter. 

Failing  Grades.  A  grade  of  For  U  (see  pass/fail  option  below)  indicates  that  the  student 
has  failed  the  course.  The  grade  is  recorded  on  the  student's  record .  If  the  student  registers 
for  the  course  again,  a  second  entry  of  the  course  and  the  new  grade  earned  are  made 
on  the  record,  but  the  first  entry  is  not  removed. 

Pass/Fail  Option.  With  the  consent  of  the  instructor  and  faculty  advisor,  a  student 
who  has  declared  a  major  may  register  for  grading  on  a  pass/fail  basis  in  one  elective,  non- 
major  course  each  term.  No  degree  requirements,  except  the  requirement  for  thirty-four 
course  credits  and  the  continuation  requirements,  may  be  met  by  a  course  passed  under 
the  pass/fail  option,  unless  the  course  is  offered  only  on  that  basis.  Preceptorials,  discus- 
sion sections,  seminars,  and  tutorials  may  not  be  taken  on  the  pass/fail  basis,  unless  the 
course  is  offered  only  on  that  basis. 

After  the  drop/add  period  in  any  term,  no  changes  from  pass/fail  to  regular  status, 
or  from  regular  to  pass/fail  status,  are  permitted  in  any  course.  A  P  may  not  be  converted 
subsequently  to  a  regular  letter  grade,  and  the  course  may  not  be  retaken  under  the  regular 
grading  system. 

Grades  When  Absent  from  Final  Examination.  See  the  section  on  final  examination 
and  excused  absences  in  this  chapter. 

Grades  for  Incompleted  Work.  See  the  section  on  incompleted  work  in  this  chapter. 

WP,  WF,  and  W  Grades,  and  WE  Designation.  WP  and  WF  grades  may  be  issued  if 
a  student  withdraws  from  a  course  after  the  drop/add  period.  (See  the  sections  on  course 
changes  in  this  chapter.)  Wgrades  are  issued  if  a  student  withdraws  from  the  University 
before  the  last  four  weeks  of  regular  classes  in  the  fall  or  spring  semester,  or  before  the 
last  two  weeks  of  classes  in  a  regular  summer  term.  (See  the  section  on  withdrawal  and 
readmission  in  this  chapter.) 

WE  indicates  correction  of  an  error  in  registration.  It  is  not  a  grade. 

Academic  Recognition  and  Honors 

In  determining  a  student's  eligibility  for  annual  recognition  and  graduation  honors, 
the  colleges  consider  only  grades  earned  in  Duke  courses,  including  courses  taken  in  the 
University's  own  study  abroad  programs  and  under  the  interinstitutional  agreement. 

Annual  Recognition.  In  acknowledgment  of  high  academic  achievement,  recognition 
is  given  each  summer  to  freshmen,  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  if  the  following 
requirements  are  met: 

1.  A  normal  academic  load  has  been  carried  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms. 

2.  Grades  other  than  P  have  been  earned  in  six  semester  courses. 

3.  No  incomplete  or  failing  grade  has  been  received  during  the  fall  and  spring  terms. 
The  Dean 's  List  recognizes  students  who  earn  a  3.3  average  on  all  work  in  both  the  fall 

and  spring  terms.  The  Dean 's  List  with  Distinction  includes  students  who  earn  a  3.6  average 
on  all  work  in  both  the  fall  and  spring  terms  of  an  academic  year. 

Graduation  Recognition.  Academic  excellence  at  graduation  has  been  recognized 
at  Duke  at  the  departmental  level  by  graduation  with  distinction  in  a  disciplinary  or  inter- 
disciplinary program  and  at  the  college  level  by  Latin  honors.  These  traditional  forms  of 
recognition  continue.  Beginning  with  students  who  enter  Duke  as  freshmen  in  the  sum- 
mer or  fall  of  1988,  a  third  form  of  recognition  is  available  which  combines  features  of  both 
graduation  with  distinction  and  Latin  honors— the  honors  project. 

56       Academic  Procedures  and  Information 


Graduation  with  Distinction.  Academic  departments  and  interdisciplinary  programs 
of  the  colleges  have  programs  leading  to  graduation  with  distinction.  While  these  pro- 
grams may  vary  in  specific  details,  all  have  common  basic  features  and  all  have  been  ap- 
proved by  the  Honors  Committee  of  the  Undergraduate  Faculty  Council.  To  be  eligible 
to  begin  a  program  leading  to  graduation  with  distinction,  a  student  must  show  prom- 
ise of  achieving  by  the  time  of  graduation  at  least  a  B  average  in  the  major  field.  In  addi- 
tion, departments  may  have  special  requirements  regarding  standards  of  performance. 
In  the  School  of  Engineering,  for  example,  some  departments  require  at  least  a  B  average 
in  all  subjects  and  may  have  other  requirements. 

Departments  or  interdepartmental  honors  committees  may  invite  a  student  at  the  end 
of  the  sophomore  or  junior  year  to  enter  the  Graduation  with  Distinction  Program.  The 
student  typically  participates  in  a  seminar  in  the  junior  or  senior  year  and/or  a  directed 
course  of  reading,  laboratory  research,  or  other  independent  study.  The  student  must 
eventually  present  the  results  of  individual  research  and  study  in  a  piece  of  writing  judged 
by  a  departmental  committee  to  be  distinguished.  The  student's  achievement,  includ- 
ing the  paper,  is  assessed  by  a  faculty  committee,  and  if  the  student  has  at  least  a  B  aver- 
age in  the  major  field,  the  committee  may  recommend  that  the  student  be  graduated  with 
distinction  in  the  major  field.  A  student  engaged  in  an  interdisciplinary  program,  includ- 
ing Program  II,  must  attain  an  overall  B  average  for  courses  taken  in  the  departmental  area 
of  concentration  or  special  study;  achievement  is  assessed  by  an  interdepartmental  honors 
committee  established  by  the  Directors  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  the  departments  con- 
cerned. A  student  may  also  be  graduated  with  distinction  in  a  program  of  studies  that 
does  not  offer  a  major.  In  such  a  program  the  student  must  present  a  B  +  grade  point  aver- 
age in  the  program  field  and  a  B  average  in  all  subjects.  The  papers  of  students  in  special 
programs  will  be  evaluated  by  a  committee  drawn  from  the  faculty  within  those  programs. 
Interested  students  should  consult  appropriate  Directors  of  Undergraduate  Studies  or 
Program  Directors. 

Latin  Honors  by  Overall  Academic  Record.  Overall  academic  excellence  over  the  entire 
college  career  traditionally  has  been  recognized  by  the  designations  cum  laude,  magna  cum 
laude,  and  summa  cum  laude.  At  Duke  students  who  earn  the  following  averages  for  ap- 
proved course  work  are  graduated  with  honors:  3.4,  cum  laude;  3.7,  magna  cum  laude;  3.9, 
summa  cum  laude. 

Latin  Honors  by  Honors  Project.  Latin  honors  may  also  be  awarded  by  Trinity  College 
to  students  who  successfully  complete  an  honors  project  in  an  individual  department. 
Honors  projects  must  be  approved  by  departmental  faculty  at  successive  stages  during 
a  student's  junior  and  senior  years.  A  candidate  for  Trinity  College  honors  by  honors  proj- 
ect must  have  an  overall  grade  point  average  of  3.3  at  the  beginning  and  end  of  the  proj- 
ect to  qualify  for  departmental  nomination.  Departmental  procedures  governing  honors 
projects  and  the  nomination  of  students  for  Latin  honors  by  honors  project  must  be  ap- 
proved in  advance  by  the  Honors  Committee  of  the  Undergraduate  Faculty  Council. 

Other  Honors.  Elections  to  the  freshman  honorary  society,  Phi  Eta  Sigma,  are  made 
at  the  end  of  the  fall  and  spring  semesters.  Freshmen  who  earn  a  3.5  average  in  four  or 
more  semester  courses  in  their  first  semester  of  enrollment,  or  those  whose  cumulative 
average  at  the  end  of  their  second  Duke  semester  is  3.5  or  above  in  a  program  of  eight  or 
more  semester  courses,  are  invited  to  membership. 

Elections  of  undergraduate  students  in  Trinity  College  and  the  School  of  Engineer- 
ing to  membership  in  the  national  honor  society,  Phi  Beta  Kappa,  are  held  in  the  spring 
and  fall.  A  review  of  the  academic  record  of  all  prospective  candidates  is  conducted  in 
the  junior  and  senior  years  as  well  as  in  the  term  following  graduation.  (Doctoral  students, 
on  the  other  hand,  are  nominated  by  their  department.)  Eligibility  for  election  is  deter- 
mined not  by  the  University,  but  by  the  local  chapter  of  the  society.  No  less  than  four-fifths 
of  earned  credits  must  have  been  taken  on  the  regular  grading  system  (A-F).  The  total  num- 
ber of  persons  elected  annually  is  limited  by  bylaw  to  10  percent  of  the  graduating  class. 
Inquiries  concerning  distribution  requirements  for  students  in  the  School  of  Engineer- 

Academic  Recognition  and  Honors       57 


ing  should  be  directed  to  Professor  Rhett  George,  Department  of  Electrical  Engineering. 
All  other  inquiries  may  be  directed  to  the  Secretary  of  Phi  Beta  Kappa,  Box  4795,  Duke 
Station,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Elections  to  the  national  engineering  honor  society,  Tau  Beta  Pi,  are  held  in  the  fall 
and  spring.  Eligibility  is  determined  on  the  basis  of  distinguished  scholarship  and  exem- 
plary character.  Engineering  students  whose  academic  standing  is  in  the  upper  eighth 
of  the  junior  class  or  the  upper  fifth  of  the  senior  class  have  earned  consideration  by  their 
local  chapter.  Inquiries  may  be  directed  to:  Advisory  Board,  Tau  Beta  Pi,  School  of  En- 
gineering, Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

International  Fellowships.  Students  interested  in  various  prestigious  fellowships  for 
graduate  study  (for  example,  the  Fulbright-Hays,  Luce,  Marshall,  Rhodes,  and  Winston 
Churchill)  should  consult  the  academic  dean  in  charge  of  fellowships,  2022  Campus  Drive. 
Specific  information  about  deadlines  and  procedures  is  available  through  that  office. 

Notification  of  Intention  to  Graduate 

The  Diploma  Card  for  students  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  and  the  School 
of  Engineering  is  official  notification  that  they  expect  to  have  completed  all  requirements 
for  the  degree  and  to  receive  the  diploma  on  a  particular  graduation  date.  It  is  the  respon- 
sibility of  students  to  file  the  card  on  or  before  established  deadlines.  For  students  in  Trinity 
College,  the  cards,  to  be  filed  during  the  fall  registration  period,  are  available  in  the  Col- 
lege Recorder's  office;  in  the  School  of  Engineering,  the  Dean's  office. 

Commencement 

Graduation  exercises  are  held  once  a  year  in  May  when  degrees  are  conferred  upon 
and  diplomas  are  issued  to  those  who  have  completed  degree  requirements  by  the  end 
of  the  spring  term.  Those  who  complete  the  requirements  by  the  end  of  the  summer  term 
or  by  the  end  of  the  fall  term  receive  diplomas  dated  September  1  or  December  30,  respec- 
tively. There  is  a  delay  of  one  month  to  two  months  in  the  mailing  of  September  and  De- 
cember diplomas  because  diplomas  cannot  be  issued  until  they  are  approved  by  the  Aca- 
demic Council  and  the  Board  of  Trustees. 

Prizes  and  Awards 

The  achievements  of  undergraduate  students  are  recognized  in  various  fields  of  ac- 
tivity. The  following  prizes  suggest  the  range  of  recognition. 

The  Robert  E.  Lee  Prize.  This  prize  was  initiated  by  the  late  Reverend  A.  W.  Plyler,  of  the  Class  of  1892,  and  Mrs. 
Plyler  and  continued  through  the  generosity  of  Mrs.  Richard  B.  Maxwell,  Jr.,  of  the  Class  of  1942.  The  sum  of 
$50  is  awarded  annually  at  commencement  to  the  person  in  the  senior  class  of  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 
or  the  School  of  Engineering  who,  in  character  and  conduct,  scholarship,  athletic  achievement,  and  capacity  for 
leadership,  has  personified  most  nearly  the  standards  of  the  ideal  student. 

Julia  Dale  Prize  in  Mathematics.  This  is  an  annual  prize  of  at  least  $100.  The  winner  is  selected  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  Mathematics  on  the  basis  of  excellence  in  mathematics.  In  some  years  first  and  second  prizes  are  given. 

The  Henry  Schuman  Music  Prize.  A  prize  of  $350  is  awarded  annually  to  an  undergraduate  of  Duke  University 
for  an  original  composition  or  a  distinguished  paper  in  music  history  or  analysis.  The  award  is  sponsored  by  the 
Department  of  Music  through  a  continuing  gift  from  Dr.  and  Mrs.  James  H .  Semans,  who  named  the  prize  after 
Henry  Schuman,  a  lifelong  friend  of  the  Semans  and  Trent  families,  a  talented  amateur  violinist,  and  one  who 
helped  to  build  valued  collections  in  the  Duke  library. 

The  William  Schuman  Prize  for  Excellence  in  the  Performance  of  Contemporary  Music.  An  annual  prize  of  $100 
is  awarded  by  Professor  Stephen  Jaffe  of  the  Department  of  Music  to  an  undergraduate  who  has  demonstrated 
superior  musicianship  in  the  performance  of  a  twentieth-century  musical  work  (written  after  1910).  This  prize 
was  initiated  in  1985  to  honor  the  distinguished  American  composer  William  Schuman  on  his  seventy-fifth  birthday. 

The  Edward  H.  Benenson  Awards.  These  awards  of  up  to  $4,000  each  will  be  given  annually  to  undergraduates 
with  an  interest  in  art,  music,  drama,  or  creative  writing  to  broaden  students'  educational  and  professional  ob- 
jectives. Those  interested  should  consult  the  Chairman  of  their  major  department. 


58       Academic  Procedu  res  and  Information 


The  Louis  Sudler  Prize  in  the  Arts.  An  award  is  presented  annually  by  the  Institute  of  the  Arts  to  a  graduating 
senior  who,  in  the  opinion  of  a  special  institute  committee,  has  demonstrated  the  most  outstanding  achievement 
in  artistic  performance  or  creation.  The  prize  of  $1,000  was  established  in  1983  through  the  generosity  of  Louis 
C.  Sudler,  Chicago,  Illinois.  In  some  years  first  and  second  prizes  have  been  given. 

The  Beth  Gotham  Semans  Drama  Scholarships.  These  awards  are  made  annually  to  currently  enrolled  under- 
graduate students  who  have  been  and  continue  to  be  active  in  drama,  with  preference  given  to  black  and  other 
minority  students.  Applicants  need  not  be  drama  majors  but  must  demonstrate  significant  involvement  in  dramatic 
activities.  Awards  range  from  $1,000  to  $2,500;  decisions  are  made  by  a  special  committee  of  the  Institute  of  the  Arts. 

The  William  M.  Blackburn  Scholarship.  This  fund  was  established  in  1962  to  honor  William  Blackburn,  distin- 
guished teacher  of  writing  at  Duke.  The  scholarship,  awarded  by  the  Department  of  English,  recognizes  out- 
standing achievement  in  the  field  of  creative  writing. 

The  Anne  Flexner  Memorial  Award  in  Creative  Writing.  This  award  has  been  established  by  the  family  and  friends 
of  Anne  Flexner,  who  was  graduated  from  Duke  in  1945.  There  are  three  categories:  prose  fiction  (5,000-word 
limit),  poetry  (200-line  limit),  and  one-act  plays  (7,500-word  limit).  As  many  as  three  awards  may  be  given,  but 
no  more  than  one  in  any  category,  for  the  best  pieces  submitted  by  Duke  undergraduates.  The  amount  of  each 
award  will  be  $200. 

The  Rudolph  William  Rosati  Fund.  Established  in  1978 by  Mr.  W.  M.  Upchurch,  jr.,  this  fund  honors  the  mem- 
ory of  his  friend,  the  late  Mr.  Rosati,  a  talented  writer.  Awards  are  given  to  encourage,  advance,  and  reward  crea- 
tive writing  among  undergraduate  students.  Applications  for  awards  are  made  through  the  University  Librarian. 

The  Margaret  Rose  Knight  Sanford  Scholarship.  This  fund  was  established  in  recognition  of  the  untiring  efforts 
of  Margaret  Rose  Knight  Sanford  on  behalf  of  Duke  University.  The  scholarship  provides  financial  assistance 
to  a  female  student  who  demonstrates  particular  promise  in  creative  writing.  Awards  are  made  by  the  Depart- 
ment of  English. 

The  David  Taggart  Clark  Prize  in  Classical  Studies.  This  prize  of  up  to  $500  derives  from  income  earned  on  the 
generous  bequest  (1956)  of  Professor  David  Taggart  Clark,  classicist  and  economist.  It  is  awarded  to  the  senior 
major  in  Greek,  Latin,  or  Classical  Studies  who  is  judged  to  have  written  the  best  honors  essay  of  the  year. 

CRC  Outstanding  Freshman  Chemistry  Award.  A  copy  of  the  Chemical  Rubber  Company's  Handbook  of  Chemistry 
and  Physics  is  awarded  annually  to  a  freshman  student  in  general  chemistry.  The  basis  for  selection  by  a  faculty 
committee  is  academic  excellence. 

American  Chemical  Society  Undergraduate  Award  in  Analytical  Chemistry.  This  prize  is  given  annually  by  the 
Analytical  Division  of  the  American  Chemical  Society  to  an  undergraduate  student  in  analytical  chemistry.  The 
basis  for  selection  is  academic  excellence  and  laboratory  proficiency.  The  prize  is  a  subscription  to  the  journal 
Analytical  Chemistry  published  by  the  American  Chemical  Society. 

The  Phi  Lambda  Upsilon  Prize.  Phi  Lambda  Upsilon,  the  honorary  chemical  society,  annually  awards  a  prize 
to  the  junior  Bachelor  of  Science  and  senior  Bachelor  of  Science  majors  having  the  highest  overall  academic  aver- 
ages. The  prize  is  a  one-year  membership  in  the  American  Chemical  Society.  The  recipients'  names  are  inscribed 
on  a  plaque  displayed  in  the  Chemistry  Library. 

North  Carolina  Institute  of  Chemists  Award.  This  prize  is  awarded  annually  to  a  graduating  senior  who  has  demon- 
strated a  record  of  leadership  and  scholastic  achievement  and  who  has  shown  potential  for  advancement  of  the 
chemical  and  chemical  engineering  profession. 

The  Chemistry  Department  Award.  This  prize  is  awarded  annually  to  an  outstanding  senior  chemistry  major 
in  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degree  program.  The  basis  for  selection  is  the  student's  independent  research  and  in- 
terest in  pursuing  advanced  work  in  chemistry.  The  prize  is  a  one-year  subscription  to  an  appropriate  journal. 

The  Merck  Index  Award.  This  prize  is  awarded  annually  to  one  or  more  graduating  chemistry  majors  intending 
to  pursue  a  career  in  medicine.  Selection,  by  a  faculty  committee,  is  based  on  scholastic  excellence.  The  prize 
consists  of  a  copy  of  the  Merck  Index  presented  by  Merck  and  Co.,  Inc. 

The  James  B.  Rast  Memorial  Award  in  Comparative  Anatomy.  The  parents  of  James  Brailsford  Rast,  a  member 
of  the  Class  of  1958  of  Duke  University,  endowed  this  award  in  his  memory.  The  award,  consisting  of  the  Atlas 
of  Descriptive  Human  Anatomy  by  Sobotta  and  bearing  the  James  B.  Rast  Memorial  bookplate,  is  given  annually 
to  the  student  who  demonstrates  the  greatest  achievement  in  the  study  of  comparative  anatomy. 

The  Winfred  Quinton  Holton  Prize  in  Primary  Education.  This  prize  was  established  in  1922  by  gifts  of  Hol- 
land Holton,  Class  of  1907,  and  Lela  Young  Holton,  Class  of  1907,  in  memory  of  their  son,  Winfred  Quinton  Hol- 
ton, with  the  income  to  be  used  to  provide  a  prize  for  investigative  work  in  primary  education.  This  prize  may 
be  made  annually.  Competition  is  open  to  Duke  seniors  and  graduate  students  who  are  eligible  to  obtain  certifi- 
cation to  teach .  A  student  who  wishes  to  be  considered  for  the  prize  must  submit  a  paper  to  be  judged  by  a  faculty 
committee  in  the  Education  Program. 

The  William  Sen  h  a  user  Prize.  Given  by  the  mother  of  William  Senhauser  in  memory  of  her  son,  a  member  of 
the  Class  of  1942,  who  gave  his  life  in  the  Pacific  theater  of  war  on  August  4, 1944.  This  award  is  made  annually 
to  the  student  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  or  the  School  of  Engineering  who  has  made  the  greatest 
contribution  to  the  University  through  participation  and  leadership  in  intramural  sports.  The  winner  of  this  prize 
is  chosen  by  a  committee  appointed  by  the  President  of  the  University. 


Prizes  and  Awards       59 


The  Roger  Alan  Opel  Memorial  Scholarship.  A  grant  is  awarded  annually  to  a  Duke  student  who  will  spend 
a  year  of  undergraduate  study  at  a  British  university.  The  student  is  selected  on  the  basis  of  intellectual  curiosity, 
academic  ability,  and  financial  need.  The  award  was  established  by  the  parents  of  Roger  Alan  Opel,  a  senior  at 
Duke  University  who  was  killed  in  November,  1971. 

The  William  T.  Laprade  Prize  in  History.  This  prize  is  offered  in  honor  of  William  T.  Laprade,  who  was  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Department  of  History  at  Trinity  College  and  Duke  University  from  1909  to  1953,  and  Chairman  of  the 
department  from  1938  to  1952.  It  is  awarded  to  a  senior  who  is  being  graduated  with  distinction  and  whose  senior 
essay  in  history  has  been  judged  to  be  unusually  meritorious. 

The  Edward  C.  Horn  Memorial  Prize  for  Excellence  in  Zoology.  Given  each  year  to  the  graduating  zoology  or 
biology  major  who  has  shown,  in  the  opinion  of  the  zoology  faculty,  the  highest  level  of  academic  achievement 
and  promise,  this  prize  is  offered  in  memory  of  Professor  Edward  C.  Horn .  It  is  a  tribute  to  his  warm  regard  for 
students  and  faculty  and  his  appreciation  of  scholarly  excellence.  The  prize  consists  of  books  appropriate  to  the 
student's  field  of  interest. 

Alona  E.  Evans  Prize  in  International  Law.  An  annual  award  to  an  undergraduate  and/or  graduate  student  in 
arts  and  sciences  whose  paper(s)  on  international  law  reflect(s)  excellence  in  scholarship.  Prizes  of  not  more  than 
$250each  arederived  from  incomeearned  on  thegenerous  bequest  of  Professor  AlonaE.  Evans,  A.B.  '40,  Ph.D. 
(political  science)  '45. 

Robert  S.  Rankin  Political  Science  Award.  An  annual  award  of  $100  is  given  to  the  most  outstanding  student 
in  the  field  of  American  government  and  constitutional  law.  The  funds  are  donated  in  memory  of  Professor  Rankin 
by  Judge  Jerry  B.  Stone,  A.B.  '44,  J.D  '48. 

Elizabeth  G.  Verville  Political  Science  Award.  An  annual  award  of  $100  derived  from  a  gift  by  Elizabeth  G.  Ver- 
ville,  A.B.  '61,  is  given  for  the  best  paper  in  political  science  submitted  by  an  undergraduate. 

Proctor  and  Gamble  Political  Science  Award.  An  annual  award  of  $100,  made  possible  through  a  grant  from  the 
Proctor  and  Gamble  Corporation,  is  awarded  to  the  graduating  senior  political  science  major  who  has  the  highest 
overall  grade  point  average. 

The  Karl  E.  Zener  Award  for  Outstanding  Performance  of  a  Major  in  Psychology.  The  Karl  E.  Zener  Award  is 
given  to  a  psychology  major  who  has  shown  outstanding  performance  and  scholarship.  The  award,  based  on 
the  student's  total  grade  record  and  a  paper  submitted  to  the  award  committee,  consists  of  a  monetary  prize  and 
inclusion  by  name  on  a  memorial  plaque  in  Zener  Auditorium. 

The  Richard  L.  Predmore  Award  in  Spanish.  Given  each  year  to  an  outstanding  Spanish  major  in  honor  of  Richard 
L.  Predmore,  Professor  of  Spanish  at  Duke  University  from  1950-1978  and  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  from 
1962-1969. 

The  Robert  J.  Niess  Award  in  French.  Given  each  year  to  an  outstanding  French  major  in  honor  of  Robert  J.  Niess, 
Professor  of  French  at  Duke  University  from  1972  to  1981. 

The  Walter  J.  Seeley  Scholastic  Award.  This  award  is  presented  annually  by  the  Engineers'  Student  Govern- 
ment to  that  member  of  the  graduating  class  of  the  school  who  has  achieved  the  highest  scholastic  average  in 
all  subjects,  and  who  has  shown  diligence  in  pursuit  of  an  engineering  education.  The  award  was  initiated  to 
honor  the  spirit  of  academic  excellence  and  professional  diligence  demonstrated  by  the  late  Dean  Emeritus  Walter 
J .  Seeley.  It  is  hoped  that  this  award  will  serve  as  a  symbol  of  the  man  and  the  ideals  for  which  he  stood.  The  name 
of  the  recipient  is  inscribed  on  a  plaque  displayed  in  the  Engineering  Building. 

The  American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers  Prize.  The  prize  is  awarded  annually  by  the  North  Carolina  Chapter 
of  the  American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers  to  two  outstanding  civil  engineering  seniors,  upon  recommendation 
of  the  faculty  of  the  civil  engineering  department.  The  basis  for  selection  is  the  student's  scholastic  record,  con- 
tribution to  the  student  chapter,  and  participation  in  other  college  activities  and  organizations.  The  prize  consists 
of  a  certificate  of  award  and  the  payment  of  one  year's  dues  in  the  American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers. 

The  George  Sherrerd  III  Memorial  Award  in  Electrical  Engineering.  This  award  is  presented  annually  to  the 
senior  in  electrical  engineering  who,  in  the  opinion  of  the  electrical  engineering  faculty,  has  attained  the  highest 
level  of  scholastic  achievement  in  all  subjects  and  has  rendered  significant  service  to  the  School  of  Engineering 
and  the  University  at  large.  The  award  was  established  in  1958  by  the  parents  of  George  Sherrerd  III,  a  graduate 
of  the  Class  of  1955,  to  recognize  outstanding  undergraduate  scholarship.  Recipients  receive  a  monetary  award, 
and  their  names  are  inscribed  on  a  plaque  displayed  in  the  Engineering  Building. 

The  Charles  Ernest  Seager  Memorial  Award.  This  award  recognizes  outstanding  achievement  in  the  annual  Stu- 
dent Prize  Paper  Contest  of  the  Duke  branch  of  the  Institute  of  Electrical  and  Electronics  Engineers  or  significant 
contributions  to  electrical  engineering.  The  award,  established  in  1958  by  the  widow  and  friends  of  Charles  Ernest 
Seager,  a  graduate  of  the  Class  of  1955,  consists  of  inscribing  the  name  of  the  contest  winner  on  a  plaque  displayed 
in  the  Engineering  Building. 

The  Milmow  Prize.  This  prize  is  awarded  annually  to  students  from  North  or  South  Carolina  graduating  in  the 
Department  of  Electrical  Engineering,  who,  in  the  opinion  of  the  faculty  of  that  department,  and,  as  shown  by 
their  grades,  have  made  the  most  progress  in  electrical  engineering  during  the  last  year  in  school.  The  prize  consists 
of  a  certificate  of  award  and  one  year's  payment  of  dues  in  the  Institute  of  Electrical  and  Electronics  Engineers 
for  the  membership  year  in  which  the  honoree  is  awarded  the  baccalaureate  degree. 


60       Academic  Procedu  res  and  Information 


The  Raymond  C.  Gaugler  Award  in  Materials  Science  and  Engineering.  This  award  is  presented  annually  to 
the  senior  who  has  made  the  most  progress  at  Duke  in  developing  competence  in  materials  science  or  materials 
engineering.  The  basis  for  selection  is  the  student's  scholastic  record,  research,  or  design  projects  completed  at 
Duke,  and  interest  in  a  materials-related  career.  The  award  has  been  established  by  Patricia  S.  Pearsall  in  memory 
of  her  grandfather,  Raymond  C.  Gaugler,  who  was  President  of  the  American  Cyanamid  Company  prior  to  his 
death  in  1952. 

The  American  Society  of  Mechanical  Engineers  Award.  This  award  is  presented  annually  to  a  senior  in  mechanical 
engineering  for  outstanding  efforts  and  accomplishments  in  behalf  of  the  American  Society  of  Mechanical  En- 
gineers Student  Section  at  Duke.  The  award  consists  of  a  certificate  of  recognition. 

The  School  of  Engineering  Student  Service  Award.  This  award,  established  in  1978,  is  given  to  those  graduat- 
ing seniors  who,  by  their  contributions  of  time,  effort,  and  spirit,  have  significantly  benefited  the  community 
of  the  School  of  Engineering.  The  names  of  the  recipients  are  inscribed  on  a  plaque  displayed  in  the  Engineering 
Building. 

The  T.C.  Heyward  Scholarship  Award .  This  award  is  presented  annually  to  an  outstanding  senior  in  mechanical 
engineering  at  Duke  University.  The  recipient  is  chosen  by  a  committee  of  the  mechanical  engineering  faculty 
and  selection  is  based  on  academic  excellence,  engineering  ability,  and  leadership.  The  recipient  receives  a  monetary 
award  and  his  or  her  name  is  inscribed  on  a  plaque  displayed  in  the  Engineering  Building. 
The  William  Brewster  Snow  Award  in  Environmental  Engineering.  This  award  is  presented  to  an  outstanding 
senior  in  civil  engineering  who,  through  superior  academic  achievement  and  extracurricular  activities,  has  demon- 
strated interest  and  commitment  to  environmental  engineering  as  a  career.  Selection  of  the  recipient  is  made  by 
the  civil  engineering  faculty.  The  recipient  is  presented  with  an  inscribed  plaque  and  his  or  her  name  is  also  inscribed 
on  a  plaque  permanently  displayed  in  the  Engineering  Building. 

The  Otto  Meier,  Jr.  Tau  Beta  Pi  Award.  This  award  was  established  in  recognition  of  Dr.  Meier's  leadership  in 
establishing  the  North  Carolina  Gamma  Chapter  in  1948  and  his  continuous  service  as  chapter  advisor  until  1975. 
This  award  is  given  annually  to  the  graduating  Tau  Beta  Pi  member  who  symbolizes  best  the  distinguished  scholar- 
ship and  exemplary  character  required  for  membership.  The  name  of  the  recipient  is  inscribed  on  a  plaque  displayed 
in  the  Engineering  Building. 

The  da  Vinci  Award.  This  award  is  presented  by  a  faculty  committee  of  the  Department  of  Biomedical  Engineering 
to  the  biomedical  engineering  senior  with  the  most  outstanding  academic  record.  This  award  commemorates 
the  contributions  of  Leonardo  da  Vinci  in  laying  the  foundations  for  the  study  of  biomechanics. 
The  von  Helmholz  Award .  This  award  is  presented  by  a  faculty  committee  of  the  Department  of  Biomedical  En- 
gineering to  the  biomedical  engineering  senior  who  has  made  the  most  outstanding  contribution  to  the  depart- 
ment. This  award  commemorates  the  work  of  von  Helmholz  in  laying  the  foundations  of  biomedical  engineering. 
Aubrey  E.  Palmer  Award.  This  award,  established  in  1980,  is  presented  annually  by  the  faculty  of  the  Department 
of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  to  a  civil  engineering  senior  in  recognition  of  outstanding  academic  achieve- 
ment. The  award  consists  of  a  certificate  of  recognition  and  the  name  of  the  recipient  inscribed  on  a  plaque  displayed 
in  the  Engineering  Building. 

The  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science  Faculty  Award.  This  award  is  presented  annually  in  recog- 
nition of  academic  excellence  to  the  graduating  mechanical  engineering  senior  who  has  attained  the  highest  level 
of  scholastic  achievement  in  all  subjects.  The  name  of  the  recipient  is  inscribed  on  a  plaque  displayed  in  the 
Engineering  Building. 

Education  Records 

Duke  University  adheres  to  a  policy  permitting  students  access  to  their  education 
records  and  certain  confidential  financial  information.  Students  may  request  review  of 
any  information  which  is  contained  in  their  education  records  and  may,  using  appropriate 
procedures,  challenge  the  content  of  these  records.  An  explanation  of  the  complete  policy 
on  education  records  may  be  obtained  from  the  Registrar's  office. 

No  information,  except  directory  information  (see  below),  contained  in  any  student 
records  is  released  to  persofts  outside  the  University  or  to  unauthorized  persons  on  the 
campus,  without  the  written  consent  of  the  student.  It  is  the  responsibility  of  the  student 
to  provide  the  Office  of  the  Registrar  and  other  University  offices,  as  appropriate,  with 
the  necessary  specific  authorization  and  consent. 

Directory  information  includes  name,  addresses,  telephone  listing,  photograph,  ma- 
jor field  of  study,  participation  in  officially  recognized  activities  and  sports,  weight  and 
height  of  members  of  athletic  teams,  dates  of  attendance,  degrees  and  awards  received, 
and  most  recent  previous  educational  institution  attended.  This  information  may  be 
released  to  appear  in  public  documents  and  may  otherwise  be  disclosed  without  student 
consent  unless  a  written  request  not  to  release  this  information  is  filed  in  the  Office  of 
the  Registrar  by  the  end  of  the  first  week  of  classes  each  term. 

Education  Records       61 


Special  Study  Centers,  Programs, 
and  Opportunities 


Campus  Centers  and  Institutes 

CENTER  FOR  INTERNATIONAL  STUDIES 

The  University's  Center  for  International  Studies  coordinates  and  supports  a  wide 
array  of  research  and  teaching  activities  on  international  issues  in  Arts  and  Sciences  and 
the  professional  schools.  Faculty  associated  with  the  center  come  from  diverse  disciplines 
and  reflect  a  wide  range  of  intellectual  interests.  Their  primary  bond  is  a  concern  with 
peoples,  events,  movements,  and  institutions  outside  the  United  States;  relations  among 
nations;  and  activities  and  institutions  in  the  United  States  that  affect  the  rest  of  the  world . 
These  faculty  share  the  belief  that  many,  if  not  most,  matters  of  importance  occurring  with- 
in the  United  States  have  significant  effects  abroad  and  that  important  activities  that  take 
place  abroad  frequently  affect  this  country.  They  agree  that  the  awareness  of  relationships 
among  peoples,  events,  cultures,  movements,  institutions,  and  processes  are  essential 
for  an  appreciation  of  the  world  in  which  we  live  and  deserve  primary  emphasis  in  teach- 
ing and  research  in  the  University. 

The  functions  of  the  center  are  to  provide  focus,  structure,  and  support  to  the  research 
efforts  of  associated  scholars  and  to  serve  as  a  catalyst  for  the  coordination  of  varied  re- 
search undertakings.  It  also  assists  in  dissemination  of  these  undertakings  and  fosters 
international  activities  in  educational,  research,  and  governmental  institutions  in  the 
southeastern  United  States. 

The  Center  for  International  Studies  is  involved  in  monitoring  and  initiating  change 
in  the  international  curricula  of  the  undergraduate,  graduate,  and  professional  schools 
of  the  University.  It  has  a  special  interest  in  undergraduate  education  and,  through  a  va- 
riety of  programs  and  activities,  makes  a  contribution  to  the  undergraduate  academic  ex- 
perience. It  seeks  to  attract  students  to  the  wide  range  of  international  and  comparative 
courses  available  and  administers  the  major  of  the  Program  in  Comparative  Area  Studies, 
where  students  can  concentrate  on  Africa,  East  Asia,  the  Caribbean,  Latin  America,  the 
Middle  East,  Russia  and  Eastern  Europe,  South  Asia,  Canada,  or  Western  Europe.  (See 
the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction.")  All  students  are  encouraged  to  pursue  study  abroad 
opportunities  as  well  as  language  study  in  non-Western  and  Western  languages. 

The  center  also  works  toward  establishing  a  closer  relationship  between  foreign  stu- 
dents and  those  interested  in  international  studies  (see  the  section  on  International  House 
in  the  chapter  "Campus  Life  and  Activities"). 


Campus  Centers  and  Institutes       63 


Area  studies  function  in  centers,  institutes,  or  programs  in  the  following  areas: 

African  Studies.  This  program  brings  together  faculty  with  a  common  interest  in  prob- 
lems of  the  African  continent.  It  encourages  course  work  and  lectures  in  African  studies. 
Associated  faculty  work  closely  with  students  concentrating  on  Africa  in  the  major  in  com- 
parative area  studies. 

Asian/Pacific  Studies.  This  program,  administered  by  the  Asian  Pacific  Studies  In- 
stitute, supports  and  encourages  Asian  and  Pacific  studies  with  special  emphasis  on  Ja- 
pan and  China.  Courses  offered  cover  a  range  of  disciplines  including  Japanese,  Chinese, 
Korean,  anthropology,  economics,  art,  history,  political  science,  music,  and  religion.  The 
institute  provides  support  for  visiting  lecturers  and  conferences  and  makes  available  a 
limited  number  of  fellowships  annually.  Study  abroad  opportunities  are  available  in  China 
and  Japan.  An  East  Asia  concentration  is  possible  for  majors  in  comparative  area  studies. 

Canadian  Studies.  The  Canadian  Studies  Center  administers  the  Canadian  Studies 
Program,  which  offers  courses  introducing  students  to  various  aspects  of  Canadian  life 
and  culture.  Courses  and  lectures  in  a  wide  range  of  disciplines  in  the  humanities  and 
the  social  sciences  are  designed  to  increase  students'  knowledge  and  understanding  of 
Canada.  Special  emphasis  is  placed  on  Canadian  problems  and  comparisons  of  Cana- 
dian and  American  perspectives.  Concentrations  in  Canadian  studies  are  described  in 
the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction."  Study  abroad  opportunities  are  available. 

South  Asian  Studies.  The  South  Asian  Program  combines  scholars  from  Arts  and 
Sciences  and  the  professional  schools  whose  research  deals  with  the  societies  and  cul- 
tures of  the  Indian  subcontinent .  The  program  offers  courses  in  Hindi-  Urdu,  an  introduc- 
tory course  on  the  civilizations  of  the  Indian  subcontinent,  and  topical  courses  present- 
ing a  wide-ranging  view  of  the  past  and  present  of  the  Indian  subcontinent.  Majors  in 
comparative  area  studies  may  elect  a  South  Asian  concentration .  The  program  also  helps 
sponsor  cultural  events  put  on  by  the  Duke  University  South  Asian  Students  Association. 

Islamic  and  Arabian  Development  Studies.  The  Center  for  Islamic  and  Arabian  De- 
velopment Studies,  established  in  1977  and  assisted  by  grants  from  the  government  of 
Saudi  Arabia  and  American  corporations,  administers  this  program.  Students  majoring 
in  comparative  area  studies  can  concentrate  in  the  Middle  East,  choosing  from  courses 
in  Arabic,  anthropology,  history,  literature,  political  science,  and  religion.  The  center  pro- 
vides financial  support  for  outside  lecturers  in  an  interdisciplinary  Islamic  civilization 
course,  a  survey  course  on  contemporary  Arab  affairs,  and  a  senior-graduate  seminar  in 
comparative  development  problems  in  the  Islamic  world .  The  center  also  presents  an  out- 
reach program  to  colleges  and  universities  in  the  Southeast,  conducts  international  con- 
ferences, supports  lecturers,  and  has  offered  a  summer  program  for  college  teachers. 

Latin  American  Studies.  The  Council  on  Latin  American  Studies  administers  a  com- 
prehensive program  in  Latin  American  studies.  A  wide  range  of  courses  in  the  humani- 
ties, the  social  sciences,  Portuguese,  and  Spanish  is  offered .  Visiting  professors  and  lec- 
turers from  Latin  America,  a  speakers  series,  conferences,  and  summer  programs  abroad 
are  supported  by  the  program.  Faculty  associated  with  the  program  work  closely  with 
students  majoring  in  comparative  area  studies  who  concentrate  in  Latin  America. 

Caribbean  Studies.  The  Caribbean  studies  committee  focuses  its  activities  on  the 
problems  and  issues  common  to  the  various  societies  in  this  culturally  diverse  region. 
The  committee  views  the  Caribbean  region  as  an  ideal  laboratory  for  analysis  of  issues 
such  as  colonialism,  race  relations,  and  development  problems.  The  program  works  close- 
ly with  the  Council  on  Latin  American  Studies  to  serve  the  needs  of  students  with  an  in- 
terest in  this  area. 

Western  Europe  and  the  Advanced  Industrial  Democracies.  This  program  combines 
the  talents  of  experts  in  Western  Europe,  Japan,  and  North  America  in  studies  investigating 

64       Special  Study  Centers,  Programs,  and  Opportunities 


problems  common  to  advanced  industrial  societies.  Faculty  associated  with  the  program 
work  closely  with  students  concentrating  in  Western  Europe  in  the  major  in  compara- 
tive area  studies. 

Russian  and  East  European  Studies.  This  program  concentrates  on  Eastern  Europe. 
It  encourages  proficiency  in  the  Russian  language.  The  faculty  work  closely  with  students 
concentrating  on  Russia  in  the  major  in  comparative  area  studies. 

In  addition,  the  center  promotes  interdisciplinary  research  and  teaching  around  thematic  is- 
sues. These  thematic  interdisciplinary  committees  in  1988-89  include: 

International  Advertising  and  Communications.  This  program  focuses  attention 
through  its  lecture  series  and  the  courses  offered  under  its  auspices  on  the  relation  be- 
tween advertising  and  society  in  both  advanced  industrial  nations  and  the  developing 
countries  of  the  world. 

Comparative  Labor  Studies.  This  committee  brings  together  historians,  sociologists, 
political  scientists,  and  other  faculty  members  at  Duke  with  interests  in  labor  and  the  work- 
ing class.  The  committee  in  particular  promotes  scholarship  and  teaching  dealing  with 
the  comparative  study  and  history  of  labor  in  different  nations. 

Gender  in  International  Perspective.  This  program  explores  comparative  aspects  of  gen- 
der research  in  countries  of  the  North  and  the  South. 

Additional  information  on  international  studies  and  the  Program  in  Comparative  Area 
Studies  is  available  from  the  Center  for  International  Studies,  2122  Campus  Drive, 
Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

CENTER  FOR  RESEARCH  ON  WOMEN  (Duke-UNC  Chapel  Hill) 

The  Duke-UNC  Center  for  Research  on  Women  was  founded  in  1982  as  a  collabora- 
tive endeavor  between  Duke  University  and  the  University  of  North  Carolina  (Chapel 
Hill)  to  promote  women's  studies  scholarship  and  research  throughout  the  tri-state  area 
of  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  and  Virginia;  to  support  curriculum  development  in 
women's  studies;  and  to  disseminate  women's  studies  research  and  information  through- 
out the  South.  The  center  principally  seeks  to  explore  the  intersection  of  gender,  race, 
and  class,  with  a  particular  emphasis  on  the  American  South  and  Third  World  societies. 

Its  regular  activities  include  a  lectureship  series,  a  working  paper  series,  publications, 
and  the  sponsorship  of  conferences,  colloquia,  and  community  events.  Students  seek- 
ing information  should  inquire  at  207  East  Duke  Building  (Duke),  (919)  684-6641  or  at  03 
Caldwell  Hall  009A  (University  of  North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill),  (919)  966-5787. 

CONTINUING  EDUCATION 

Academic  Study.  Local  adult  residents  are  encouraged  to  pursue  academic  study  at 
Duke  (1)  as  provisional  degree  candidates,  for  those  resuming  or  beginning  a  bachelor's 
degree;  (2)  as  nondegree  students,  for  those  seeking  a  sequence  of  undergraduate  cred- 
it courses;  and  (3)  as  students  completing  the  last  year  of  work  towards  a  degree  at  an- 
other institution.  These  students  are  given  academic  and  career  counseling  by  the  Of- 
fice of  Continuing  Education.  They  are  subject  to  most  of  the  regulations  set  forth  for 
degree  candidates.  Continuing  education  applications  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office 
of  Undergraduate  Admissions  and  must  be  returned  to  that  office,  accompanied  by  a  $35 
application  fee,  by  August  1  for  the  fall  semester  and  by  December  1  for  the  spring 
semester. 

Career  Development  Services.  Career  Development  Services  assists  persons  mak- 
ing decisions  about  returning  to  work,  re-entering  school,  career  planning  and  assess- 
ment, life/work  transitions,  and  individual  goal  setting.  Individual  appointments,  group 
sessions,  and  workshops  are  held. 


Campus  Centers  and  Institutes       65 


Short  Courses  and  Conferences.  Short  courses  (noncredit)  in  the  liberal  arts  are 
offered  regularly  throughout  the  year  for  those  interested  in  personal  enrichment  or  ca- 
reer advancement.  Conferences,  institutes,  and  training  programs  are  conducted  dur- 
ing the  academic  year  and  in  the  summer.  Some  are  residential  and  others  are  designed 
for  local  participants.  Some  award  continuing  education  units. 

The  Institute  for  Learning  in  Retirement.  The  institute  is  for  persons  over  fifty  years 
of  age  who  recognize  in  themselves  a  need  to  continue  learning  and  sharing  knowledge. 

For  brochures  on  each  program  and  for  fuller  information,  write  or  call  the  Office  of 
Continuing  Education,  The  Bishop's  House,  East  Campus,  (919)  684-6259. 

INSTITUTE  OF  THE  ARTS 

The  Institute  of  the  Arts  creates  and  maintains  interdisciplinary  approaches  to  un- 
derstanding and  participating  in  the  arts  within  the  curricular  and  extracurricular  frame- 
works of  Duke  University.  To  accomplish  this  mission,  the  institute  administers  an  in- 
terdisciplinary arts  curriculum,  manages  a  university-wide  artist  residency  program,  and 
promotes  multifaceted  arts  programming.  A  certificate  program  in  the  arts  is  offered  by 
the  institute  as  well  as  a  one-semester,  off-campus  residency  program,  Duke  in  New  York 
Arts.  The  institute  is  also  the  administrative  home  for  the  Duke  Dance  Program.  The  in- 
stitute is  committed  to  defining  a  broader  role  for  the  professional  artist  as  a  resource  for 
the  University  and  surrounding  community,  through  the  Nancy  Hanks  Artist  Residency 
Program.  Prominent  artists  are  brought  to  campus  to  participate  in  classes,  give  work- 
shops, perform  and  create,  and  work  with  students  individually  and  in  groups.  Through- 
out the  year  the  institute  sponsors  events,  festivals,  and  symposia  designed  to  enrich  cam- 
pus and  community  life.  For  further  information,  inquiries  should  be  made  to  Duke 
University  Institute  of  the  Arts,  109  Bivins  Building,  (919)  684-6654. 

INSTITUTE  OF  STATISTICS  AND  DECISION  SCIENCES 

The  Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences  was  founded  in  1985  to  conduct  and 
coordinate  teaching  and  research  in  statistics  and  the  application  of  quantitative  methods 
to  the  study  of  decision  making.  The  institute  offers  training  and  consultation  in  mathe- 
matical statistics,  statistical  modelling,  applied  statistics,  statistical  computing,  operations 
research,  game  theory,  decision  analysis,  and  utility  theory.  Students  interested  in  the 
activities  of  the  institute  should  consult  the  institute  office,  322  Old  Chemistry  Building, 
(919)  684-4210. 

Programs  Not  Offering  Majors 

Through  the  programs  described  below,  students  have  the  opportunity  to  engage  in 
the  concentrated  study  of  an  area  not  offering  a  maj  or.  These  programs,  supplements  to 
the  basic  course  of  study,  usually  reach  beyond  departmental  boundaries  and  generally 
provide  an  interdisciplinary  focus  to  the  subject  matter.  If  completed,  many  offer  official 
recognition  of  participation,  often  in  the  form  of  a  certificate.  More  information  may  be 
obtained  from  the  directors  of  the  programs. 

FILM  AND  VIDEO 

The  Program  in  Film  and  Video  introduces  students  to  the  critical  analysis  of  new  com- 
munications technologies:  film,  photography,  and  television.  Practical  experience  in 
16mm  film  and  videotape  production  is  also  available  through  course  work  and  intern- 
ships. Established  in  1986,  this  program  also  sponsors  speakers,  film  and  television  screen- 
ings, and  exhibits  in  cooperation  with  the  Center  for  Documentary  Photography,  the  In- 
stitute of  the  Arts,  and  the  Center  for  International  Studies.  For  further  information, 
students  should  consult  the  program  director,  319  Carr  Building. 


66       Special  Study  Centers,  Programs,  and  Opportunities 


HUMAN  DEVELOPMENT 

This  interdisciplinary  program  provides  opportunities  to  compare  and  to  explore  the 
complementarity  of  disciplinary  perspectives  on  the  biological,  biomedical,  psycholog- 
ical, social,  and  cultural  aspects  of  human  development.  The  program,  which  is  more  fully 
described  under  "Courses  of  Instruction,"  integrates  courses,  a  research  apprenticeship, 
and  special  events  through  an  active  advisory  procedure.  For  more  information  and  a  pro- 
gram brochure,  inquire  at  the  University  Council  on  Aging  and  Human  Development, 
1512  Busse  Gerontology  Building,  (919)  684-6118. 

JUDAIC  STUDIES 

Duke  University  through  the  auspices  of  the  Center  for  Judaic  Studies  offers  a  full 
range  of  courses  in  Judaic  civilization.  Participating  departments  and  programs  include 
religion,  Germanic  languages,  comparative  literature,  political  science,  international 
studies,  anthropology,  and  women's  studies.  Also,  courses  may  be  taken  at  nearby  Chapel 
Hill  where  additional  courses  are  offered  under  the  rubric  of  the  Joint  Program  in  Judaic 
Studies.  A  full  range  of  courses  is  available  in  classical  and  modern  Hebrew  as  well  as  in 
Yiddish.  Students  desirous  of  further  language  training  or  specialization  may  elect  to  pur- 
sue their  studies  in  Israel  during  their  junior  year  at  a  Duke  approved  program. 

The  program  in  Judaic  studies  is  largely  focused  on  undergraduates  who  may  earn 
a  certificate  in  Judaic  studies  after  taking  any  four  nonlanguage  courses,  or  who  may  pur- 
sue Judaic  studies  under  Program  II,  the  alternative  program  option.  This  option  offers 
a  student  the  flexibility  to  design,  with  the  aid  of  a  faculty  advisor,  a  curriculum  to  accom- 
modate unusual  interests  and  talents.  Some  students  may  also  choose  to  concentrate  on 
Judaic  studies  within  the  context  of  a  religion  major;  such  students  are  also  eligible  to  re- 
ceive a  certificate. 

Duke  regularly  sponsors  its  own  summer  program  in  Israel  and  over  700  students  have 
participated  in  it  to  date.  For  further  information,  inquire  at  the  Center  for  Judaic  Studies, 
P.O.  Box  4735,  Duke  Station,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

NEUROSCIENCES 

The  neurosciences  program  reflects  the  rapid  developments  in  our  understanding 
of  brain  mechanisms  and  behavior.  Undergraduates  are  offered  opportunities  to  learn 
about  these  developments  in  new  and  existing  courses.  The  approach  to  the  neurosciences 
is  broad,  covering  the  cellular  and  subcellular  levels  (molecular  and  genetic  properties, 
cell  and  membrane  physiology,  neurochemistry),  systemic  levels  (neuroanatomy,  sen- 
sory and  reflex  function,  brain  disorders),  and  integrative  levels  (perception,  memory 
behavioral  genetics,  evolution  of  brain  and  behavior).  The  program  emphasizes  breadth 
in  the  arts,  sciences  and  humanities,  with  an  understanding  of  the  neurosciences  as  an 
integral  part  of  a  liberal  education.  For  further  information,  consult  the  director,  Profes- 
sor John  Staddon,  250  Psychology-Sociology  Building. 

PERSPECTIVES  ON  MARXISM  AND  SOCIETY 

Perspectives  on  Marxism  and  Society  is  a  program  devoted  to  the  study  of  Marxist 
theories  of  society.  Courses  in  the  program  focus  on  Marxism,  not  primarily  as  a  politi- 
cal or  ideological  system,  but  as  a  scholarly  methodology  incorporating  a  variety  of  ana- 
lytical techniques  across  a  wide  range  of  disciplines.  The  unifying  theme  of  the  program 
is  a  critical  appraisal  of  Marxist  methods  of  analysis  and  their  social  implications,  con- 
sidered in  the  light  of  theoretical  alternatives  and  changing  historical  circumstances. 
Courses  included  in  the  program  cover  a  wide  range  of  subjects,  including  sexual  and 
racial  inequality,  alienation,  development  and  underdevelopment  in  the  world  system, 
labor  processes,  protest  movements,  and  ideologies. 

Students  in  the  program  will  be  required  to  take  a  core  course  in  varieties  of  Marxist 
analysis.  Four  more  approved  courses,  no  more  than  three  from  one  department,  will 


Programs  Not  Offering  Majors       67 


complete  the  program  of  study.  A  certificate  will  be  awarded  to  those  who  meet  the  re- 
quirements of  the  program.  Students  in  the  program  will  be  expected  to  major  in  another 
discipline,  with  the  program  a  supplement  to  their  major.  Full  details  concerning  the  pro- 
gram and  its  courses  can  be  obtained  by  writing  or  calling  the  director,  Professor  Fredric 
R.  Jameson,  Graduate  Program  in  Literature  and  Duke  Center  for  Critical  Theory,  302  Can- 
Building,  684-4127. 

PRIMATOLOGY 

The  primate  program  provides  an  interdisciplinary  investigation  of  primate  develop- 
ment and  evolution  from  the  anatomical,  ecological,  and  behavioral  perspectives.  The- 
oretical issues  arising  from  sociobiology  and  new  fossil  discoveries  will  be  tested  as  to  their 
validity  when  applied  to  human  evolution.  The  course  of  study  leads  from  a  generalized 
introduction  through  more  specialized  topics  to  the  design  and  completion  of  a  research 
project  under  the  guidance  of  a  faculty  member.  The  final  step  is  an  oral  presentation  of 
the  research  results  in  a  senior  seminar.  For  more  information  on  the  Primatology  Pro- 
gram call  the  Department  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  at  114  Social  Sciences 
Building,  (919)  684-5012. 

SCIENCE,  TECHNOLOGY,  AND  HUMAN  VALUES 

The  Program  in  Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values  provides  students  an  op- 
portunity to  explore  the  social  and  cultural  dimensions  of  science,  technology,  and  medi- 
cine. Through  course  work  and  a  wide  variety  of  extracurricular  activities,  students  are 
introduced  to  the  perspectives  and  insights  of  other  disciplines  in  order  to  develop  a  richer 
and  more  informed  understanding  of  their  own  field  of  specialization.  The  program  brings 
together  students  and  faculty  from  the  sciences  and  engineering  with  their  counterparts 
in  the  humanities  and  social  sciences,  with  a  heavy  emphasis  on  interdisciplinary  study 
and  discussion.  Detailed  information  is  given  in  the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction"  in 
the  Bulletin. 

TWENTIETH-CENTURY  AMERICA  PROGRAM 

The  Twentieth-Century  America  Program  explores  modern  American  society  in  a 
group  of  interrelated  courses  from  the  perspectives  of  history,  literature,  sociology,  re- 
ligion, and  political  thought.  The  program  offers  five  courses  in  the  fall,  of  which  par- 
ticipants must  take  at  least  three.  Some  forty-five  students  are  selected  for  the  program; 
all  undergraduates  may  apply. 

This  special  program  provides  the  student  with  the  opportunities  that  come  from  rela- 
tively small  classes  (often  of  seminar  format),  a  program  of  interrelated  and  mutually  rein- 
forcing courses,  and  close  relationships  with  professors  and  stimulating  fellow  students. 

Courses  that  the  program  has  offered  include  University  Writing  Course  (special  sec- 
tion), History  92,  Sociology  101,  Political  Science  144S,  and  Religion  60S  (see  descriptions 
in  this  bulletin).  Further  information  and  application  forms  may  be  obtained  from  the 
director  of  the  program  who  can  be  reached  through  the  Premajor  Advising  Center. 

WOMEN'S  STUDIES 

The  Women's  Studies  Program  is  a  multidisciplinary  forum  for  the  study  of  women's 
roles  and  gender  differences  in  various  societies,  past  and  present.  Established  in  1982, 
it  offers  courses,  lectures,  films,  programs,  and  research  support  and  brings  together 
faculty  and  students  from  all  fields  who  are  concerned  with  both  the  theoretical  ques- 
tions stemming  from  the  study  of  gender  in  the  disciplines  as  well  as  the  implications  of 
such  investigations  for  women  and  men  in  contemporary  societies.  The  program  seeks 
to  encourage  the  use  of  new  scholarship,  which  in  the  last  two  decades  has  challenged 
empirical  and  theoretical  understandings  of  the  sexes,  from  the  perspectives  of  the  hu- 
manities, the  social  sciences,  and  the  biological  sciences.  Signs:  Journal  of  Women  in  Cul- 
ture and  Society  is  edited  in  the  Office  of  Women's  Studies,  providing  students  with  the 
opportunity  to  be  involved  in  the  development  of  the  most  recent  scholarship  on 

68       Special  Study  Centers,  Programs,  and  Opportunities 


women.  For  more  information  on  Women's  Studies,  inquire  at  the  Office  of  Women's 
Studies  at  207  East  Duke  Building,  (919)  684-5683. 

RESERVE  OFFICER  TRAINING  CORPS 

Duke  University  and  the  military  services  cooperate  in  offering  officer  education  pro- 
grams to  provide  opportunities  for  students  to  earn  a  commission  in  the  United  States 
Air  Force,  Army,  Navy,  or  Marine  Corps.  The  programs  are  described  below,  and  detailed 
information  on  scholarships,  entrance  requirements,  and  commissioning  requirements 
is  available  from  the  offices  of  the  Department  of  Air  Force  Aerospace  Studies,  the  Depart- 
ment of  Military  Science  (Army),  and  the  Department  of  Naval  Science.  Courses  offered 
in  these  departments  are  described  in  the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction"  in  this  bulletin. 

The  Air  Force  Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps  ( AFROTC) .  AFROTC  selects,  trains, 
and  commissions  college  men  and  women  to  serve  as  officers  in  the  U.S.  Air  Force.  Two 
AFROTC  programs  are  available,  a  four-year  and  a  two-year  program. 

The  four-year  program  consists  of  the  General  Military  Course  (GMC)  taken  during 
the  freshman  and  sophomore  years  and  the  Professional  Officer  Course  (POC)  taken  dur- 
ing the  junior  and  senior  years.  Entry  into  the  GMC  is  open  to  all  freshmen  and  sopho- 
mores. Entry  into  the  POC  is  competitive  and  requires  successful  completion  of  a  four- 
week  field-training  encampment  at  a  selected  Air  Force  base  during  the  summer  between 
the  sophomore  and  junior  years. 

Students  interested  in  the  two-year  program  should  submit  applications  no  later  than 
early  spring  semester  of  their  sophomore  year.  Entry  into  the  two-year  program  is  com- 
petitive and  requires  the  successful  completion  of  a  six-week  summer  field-training  en- 
campment prior  to  entry. 

Cadets  may  compete  for  three  and  one-half-,  three-,  two  and  one-half-,  and  two-year 
scholarships.  All  scholarship  and  POC  cadets  receive  a  tax-free  stipend  of  $100  per  month . 
On  graduation,  cadets  are  commissioned  as  second  lieutenants  in  the  Air  Force  Reserve 
and  are  obligated  to  serve  four  years  of  active  duty.  Direct  inquiries  to  the  Department 
of  Aerospace  Studies,  304  North  Building,  (919)  684-3641. 

The  Army  Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps  (AROTC).  Army  ROTC  provides  stu- 
dents with  an  opportunity  to  earn  a  commission  as  a  second  lieutenant  in  the  U.S.  Army, 
U.S.  Army  Reserve,  or  Army  National  Guard  while  completing  requirements  for  a  bac- 
calaureate degree.  Two  programs  are  available,  a  four-year  and  a  two-year  program. 

The  four-year  program  consists  of  the  Basic  Course  (freshman  and  sophomore  years) 
and  the  Advanced  Course  (junior  and  senior  years).  Direct  entry  into  the  Advanced  Course 
is  possible  under  specific  circumstances  (two-year  program).  Students  wishing  to  join 
the  two-year  program  must  confer  with  the  Department  of  Military  Science  not  later  than 
April  1  of  their  sophomore  year.  There  is  only  one  mandatory  summer  training  require- 
ment, Advanced  Camp,  which  takes  place  over  a  six-week  period  between  the  junior  and 
senior  years.  All  uniforms  and  AROTC  texts  are  provided. 

Upon  commissioning,  the  service  obligation  may  be  served  on  active  duty,  in  the  Army 
Reserve,  or  in  the  Army  National  Guard,  as  directed  by  the  Secretary  of  the  Army.  At  the 
beginning  of  the  senior  year,  cadets  submit  a  preference  statement  concerning  the  method 
by  which  they  wish  to  fulfill  their  service  obligation  and  the  specialty  in  which  they  de- 
sire to  serve.  A  request  to  delay  the  fulfillment  of  the  service  obligation  in  order  to  attend 
graduate  or  professional  schooling  is  also  authorized. 

Cadets  are  encouraged  to  compete  for  Army  ROTC  scholarships  which  pay  80  per- 
cent tuition,  most  fees,  a  generous  textbook  and  equipment  allowance,  and  $100  per  month 
for  each  month  in  school  (up  to  $1,000  per  year) .  Nonscholarship  Advanced  Course  cadets 
also  receive  the  $100  monthly  stipend.  All  of  the  above  benefits  are  tax-free.  Participants 
in  Advanced  Camp  are  paid  one-half  of  the  basic  pay  of  a  second  lieutenant. 

Detailed  information  is  available  from  the  Department  of  Military  Science,  06  West 
Duke  Building,  East  Campus,  (919)  684-5895,  or  1-800-222-9184. 


Programs  Not  Offering  Majors       69 


The  Naval  Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps  (NROTC).  The  Department  of  Naval 
Science  offers  students  the  opportunity  to  become  Naval  and  Marine  officers  upon  gradu- 
ation .  Selected  students  may  receive  up  to  four  years  of  tuition,  fees,  uniforms,  and  text- 
books at  government  expense  under  the  auspices  of  the  Scholarship  Program.  In  addi- 
tion, scholarship  students  receive  subsistence  pay  and  summer  active  duty  pay  of 
approximately  $1,300  a  year.  They  participate  in  four  weeks  of  summer  training  either 
aboard  ship  or  at  naval  shore  facilities  to  augment  their  academic  studies.  Four  years  of 
active  duty  service  as  a  Regular  Officer  is  required  upon  graduation. 

Nonscholarship  students  may  be  enrolled  in  the  College  Program.  They  take  the  same 
courses  and  wear  the  same  uniform,  but  attend  the  University  at  their  own  expense.  Uni- 
forms and  naval  science  textbooks  are  provided  by  the  government.  During  the  last  two 
academic  years,  they  are  enlisted  in  the  Naval  Reserve,  receive  $100  per  month  subsis- 
tence pay,  and  participate  in  summer  training.  Three  years  active  duty  service  as  a  Re- 
serve Officer  is  required  upon  graduation. 

College  Program  students  may  compete  for  scholarship  status  through  academic  per- 
formance, demonstrated  aptitude  for  military  service,  and  nomination  by  the  Professor 
of  Naval  Science.  Students  in  either  program  may  qualify  for  a  commission  in  the  Ma- 
rine Corps  through  the  Marine  Corps  Option  Program.  Students  seeking  further  infor- 
mation on  the  NROTC  program  may  call  the  Department  of  Naval  Science,  Hanes  House, 
(919)684-3841. 

Off  Campus  Opportunities 

STUDY  ABROAD 

A  Duke  student  may  earn  credit  for  approved  work  completed  during  the  academic 
year  at  a  foreign  university  or  for  an  approved  program  abroad  sponsored  by  Duke  or  by 
another  approved  American  college  or  university  in  the  fall,  spring,  and  summer.  To  re- 
ceive the  maximum  amount  of  study  abroad  transfer  credit  at  Duke— four  course  credits 
for  a  full  semester,  eight  for  a  full  academic  year,  two  for  a  summer— a  student  is  expect- 
ed to  take  a  full,  normal  course  load,  as  defined  by  the  other  institution  involved.  No  ad- 
ditional study  abroad  transfer  credit  will  be  awarded  for  a  course  overload .  A  leave  of  ab- 
sence from  the  University  is  granted  for  a  semester  or  academic  year  of  approved  study 
abroad.  Duke-administered  programs  do  not  involve  transfer  credit  and  do  not  require 
a  leave  of  absence.  Arrangements  are  made  normally  for  students  to  register,  while  abroad, 
for  the  term  in  which  they  plan  to  return.  Seniors  planning  to  spend  their  last  semester 
abroad  are  subject  to  the  residence  requirement  and  may  face  postponed  graduation  be- 
cause transcripts  from  abroad  are  often  delayed. 

Semester  and  Academic  Year  Programs 

A  student  who  wishes  to  receive  transfer  credit  for  study  abroad  should  take  into  ac- 
count the  following  criteria  established  by  the  faculty  and  administered  by  the  Commit- 
tee on  Study  Abroad: 

1.  a  scholastic  average  of  at  least  a  B-  (a  student  lacking  this  average  may  petition 
the  academic  dean  responsible  for  study  abroad  if  there  are  unusual  circum- 
stances); 

2.  certification,  when  applicable,  from  the  foreign  language  department  concerned, 
that  the  student  has  an  adequate  knowledge  of  the  language  of  the  country  in 
which  study  is  pursued; 

3.  approval,  obtained  before  leaving  Duke,  of  the  appropriate  Directors  of  Under- 
graduate Studies  for  the  courses  to  be  taken  abroad,  as  well  as  approval  of  the 
program  and  the  courses  by  the  dean  responsible  for  study  abroad  and  by  the  stu- 
dent's academic  dean; 

4.  permission  for  leave  of  absence  once  program  plans  are  complete. 


70       Special  Study  Centers,  Programs,  and  Opportunities 


Duke,  at  present,  offers  various  programs  in  cooperation  with  other  universities  dur- 
ing the  fall  and  spring  terms.  Students  accepted  may  study  in: 

Austria.  From  time  to  time  Duke  sponsors  a  term  program  in  Vienna  for  members  of 
the  Wind  Symphony  and  other  interested  students.  More  information  is  available  from 
Professor  Paul  Bryan,  Department  of  Music. 

Britain.  Duke  has  agreements  with  a  number  of  top  British  universities,  allowing  our 
students  to  become  members  of  outstanding  teaching  and  research  institutions  in  Brit- 
ain for  a  semester  or  academic  year.  The  universities  currently  available  are  King's  Col- 
lege (University  of  London),  London  School  of  Economics  (University  of  London), 
University  of  Manchester,  University  of  Sussex,  University  College  London  (University 
of  London),  and  Warwick  University.  There  is  a  special  program  for  civil  engineers  at 
University  College  London.  Applications  are  available  at  2022  Campus  Drive. 

Canada,  Montreal.  Duke  students  participating  in  the  Duke/McGill  University  Ex- 
change Program  may  spend  one  semester  or  academic  year  at  McGill,  located  in  the  Que- 
bec city  of  Montreal.  Because  the  language  of  instruction  at  McGill  is  English,  program 
applicants  need  not  have  studied  French  although  some  knowledge  of  it  would  be  ad- 
vantageous. The  program  is  sponsored  by  the  Canadian  Studies  Center  and  Trinity  Col- 
lege; information  and  application  forms  are  available  at  2022  Campus  Drive. 

China.  In  cooperation  with  Nanjing  University  and  Beijing  Teachers  College,  Duke 
conducts  a  six-month  study  program  in  the  People's  Republic  of  China  in  the  summer 
and  fall  terms.  The  program  includes  a  fall  term  at  Nanjing  University  preceded  by  an 
intensive  language  session  in  Peking.  Participants  must  have  at  least  one  year  of  Chinese 
language.  Information  is  available  from  the  Asian-Pacific  Studies  Institute,  2111  Campus 
Drive,  and  at  2022  Campus  Drive. 

Egypt,  Cairo.  Through  an  agreement  with  the  American  University  in  Cairo,  Duke  stu- 
dents may  spend  a  spring  semester  or  academic  year  there  taking  regular  classes  with 
Egyptian  students.  They  may  enroll  in  general  courses  in  humanities,  social  sciences,  and 
sciences,  as  well  as  in  Arabic  language  and  specialized  courses  in  Middle  Eastern  studies. 
Applications  are  available  at  2022  Campus  Drive. 

England,  Oxford.  Through  a  special  arrangement  with  several  colleges  at  the  Univer- 
sity of  Oxford,  selected  Duke  students  may  spend  their  junior  year  at  Oxford  as  regular- 
ly enrolled  visiting  students.  The  students  are  treated  exactly  like  their  British  counter- 
parts, and  most  of  them  live  in  college  housing.  Students  may  choose  to  concentrate  their 
study  in  any  one  of  the  major  fields  in  the  humanities,  social  sciences,  or  selected  natu- 
ral sciences.  Each  student  is  assigned  a  tutor.  Applicants  must  have  a  very  strong  academic 
record;  previous  course  work  in  the  subject  to  be  pursued  at  Oxford  is  also  required .  More 
information  may  be  obtained  from  2022  Campus  Drive. 

France,  Paris.  Duke  offers  a  full-year  program  in  Paris  in  conjunction  with  the  Univer- 
sity of  Paris-VII  in  the  heart  of  the  Latin  Quarter.  The  language  of  instruction  will  be  French; 
one  course  will  be  offered  by  the  Resident  Director  from  Duke,  and  three  courses  will  be 
taught  by  the  faculty  of  Paris-VII.  Applicants  must  have  completed  four  semesters  of 
French  plus  two  courses  at  the  100-level  or  above  with  a  grade  of  at  least  B  + .  Priority  will 
be  given  to  juniors  and  full-year  applicants,  although  some  participants  may  be  admit- 
ted for  one  semester  only.  More  information  may  be  obtained  from  2022  Campus  Drive 
or  the  Department  of  Romance  Studies,  205  Languages  Building. 

Germany,  West  Berlin.  Each  spring  and  summer  (mid-February- mid-July)  Duke  offers 
a  special  study  program  at  the  Free  University  of  West  Berlin  for  students  in  junior,  sen- 
ior, or  post-baccalaureate  standing  and  with  an  advanced  knowledge  of  German.  Stu- 
dents are  matriculated  as  regular  students  of  the  Free  University  and  enroll  in  two  inten- 
sive German  language  courses  on  the  advanced  level  and  one  special  course  each  in 
German  history  and  political  science,  and  will  earn  four  regular  Duke  credits.  In  addi- 
tion they  audit  at  least  one  regular  Free  University  course  of  their  choice.  More  complete 
information  may  be  obtained  in  the  Office  of  the  Summer  Session,  121  Allen  Building. 


Off  Campus  Opportunities       71 


India,  Madras.  Duke  students  may  participate  in  a  fall  semester  program  administered 
by  the  consortium  of  the  South  Atlantic  States  Association  for  Asian  and  African  Studies, 
of  which  Duke  is  a  member.  The  program,  which  is  offered  in  alternate  years,  offers  courses 
in  Indian  history  and  culture,  beginning  Tamil,  and  independent  research.  More  infor- 
mation may  be  obtained  at  2022  Campus  Drive. 

Italy,  Rome.  As  one  of  the  participating  members  of  the  Intercollegiate  Center  for  Clas- 
sical Studies  in  Rome,  Duke  University  may  send  classics  majors  and  other  students  with 
strong  classical  interests  for  admission  to  a  term's  work  at  the  center,  usually  in  the  ju- 
nior year.  Instruction  is  offered  in  Greek,  Latin,  ancient  history,  ancient  art,  and  archaeol- 
ogy. Some  scholarship  help  is  available.  Additional  information  may  be  obtained  from 
the  Department  of  Classical  Studies,  328  Carr  Building. 

japan,  Tokyo.  Qualified  students  may  be  recommended  each  year  by  the  Asian-Pacific 
Studies  Committee  for  the  junior  year  exchange  program  with  International  Christian 
University  in  Tokyo.  This  small,  select  university  is  noted  for  the  international  character 
of  its  student  body  (85-90  percent  Japanese,  10-15  percent  non-Japanese,  primarily  from 
other  Asian  nations  and  the  United  States).  Courses  may  be  taken  in  English  as  well  as 
Japanese.  More  information  is  available  from  the  Asian-Pacific  Studies  Institute,  2111 
Campus  Drive,  and  2022  Campus  Drive. 

Scotland,  Glasgoiv.  The  Department  of  Public  Policy  Studies  offers  departmental  majors 
the  opportunity  to  study  during  the  fall  semester  of  their  senior  year  at  the  University 
of  Glasgow,  where,  practically  speaking,  public  policy  analysis  was  invented.  Students 
will  live  on  campus  and  will  take  the  program's  special  seminar  in  public  policy,  in  addi- 
tion to  three  electives  from  the  general  university  curriculum.  Further  information  may 
be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  the  Department  of  Public  Policy 
Studies,  116D  Old  Chemistry  Building. 

Spain .  This  program  offers  advanced  students  a  variety  of  on-site  experiences  and  an 
opportunity  to  hear  and  speak  Spanish  in  an  ideal  environment.  The  program  offers 
courses  in  Spanish  history,  culture,  literature,  politics,  and  arts,  as  well  as  several  organized 
excursions.  Students  are  housed  with  selected  Spanish  families.  More  information  may 
be  obtained  from  Professor  Miguel  Garci-Gomez,  Department  of  Romance  Studies. 

Further  information  concerning  semester  and  academic  year  programs,  as  well  as  the 
Oxford  Summer  Program  (described  below)  and  non-Duke  summer  programs,  may  be 
obtained  at  2022  Campus  Drive.  All  Trinity  College  students  are  responsible  for  follow- 
ing the  procedures  and  meeting  the  deadlines  set  forth  in  Duke's  study  abroad  booklet, 
Opportunities  for  Undergraduate  Study  Abroad,  available  there.  In  all  cases,  the  dean  of  study 
abroad  must  be  informed  in  advance  about  a  student's  plans. 

Duke  Summer  Programs  Abroad 

The  Office  of  the  Summer  Session,  in  cooperation  with  several  University  depart- 
ments, provides  many  opportunities  for  students  to  study  abroad  while  earning  Duke 
University  credit.  Information  about  Duke  Summer  Programs  Abroad  and  about  the  time 
they  will  next  be  offered  can  be  obtained  from  the  program  directors  or  the  Office  of  the 
Summer  Session,  121  Allen  Building. 

British  Isles,  England,  Cambridge.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Department  of 
Political  Science  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  at  the  University  of  Cambridge 
focusing  on  the  comparison  of  the  British  and  American  legal  systems.  One  course  is 
taught  by  Professor  Paul  Haagen  of  Duke,  the  other  by  faculty  members  of  the  Universi- 
ty of  Cambridge.  Students  live  at  Emmanuel  College,  Cambridge  University.  For  further 
information  see  Professor  Paul  Haagen,  School  of  Law,  017  Law  School. 

British  Isles,  England,  Durham.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Departments  of 
Religion  and  English  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  at  the  University  of  Durham 
on  English  fiction  from  the  1830s  to  the  1980s  and  its  relation  to  religion.  One  course  is 
taught  by  Professor  Wesley  Kort  of  Duke,  the  other  by  a  faculty  member  of  the  University 


72       Special  Study  Centers,  Programs,  and  Opportunities 


of  Durham.  Students  live  in  one  of  the  university's  colleges.  For  further  information  see 
Professor  Wesley  Kort,  Department  of  Religion,  328  Gray  Building. 

British  Isles,  England,  London.  The  Summer  Session  Office,  Duke  Drama,  and  the 
Department  of  English  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  in  London,  focusing  on  the 
history  and  analysis  of  theater  in  Britain  with  study  of  dramatic  texts  and  their  produc- 
tion. One  course  is  taught  by  Professor  John  Clum  of  Duke's  Drama  Program  and  Depart- 
ment of  English,  the  other  by  a  faculty  member  of  the  Department  of  Drama  and  Theatre 
Studies  of  the  University  of  London.  Students  live  in  dormitories.  For  further  informa- 
tion see  Professor  John  Clum,  Department  of  English,  304B  Allen  Building. 

British  Isles,  England,  Oxford.  The  Duke/Oxford  Summer  Program,  a  six-week  session 
at  New  College,  Oxford,  utilizes  the  Oxford  tutorial  system  of  education.  The  tutorial  for- 
mat is  supplemented  by  the  lectures  given  at  the  University  of  Oxford  International  Gradu- 
ate Summer  School  by  noted  British  scholars.  Detailed  information  may  be  obtained  in 
the  Study  Abroad  Office,  2022  Campus  Drive. 

British  Isles,  Ireland,  Scotland,  England.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Depart- 
ment of  Religion  offer  a  two-course  program  on  ethical  issues  in  health  and  illness  in  the 
United  States,  Ireland,  and  Great  Britain.  Lectures  by  medical  personnel  are  supplement- 
ed by  site  visits  to  medical  facilities  and  health  care  agencies.  The  first  two  weeks  of  study 
are  in  Dublin,  the  next  three  weeks  in  Edinburgh,  and  the  last  week  in  London.  Students 
live  in  dormitories.  For  further  information  see  Professor  Thomas  McCollough,  Depart- 
ment of  Religion,  325  Gray  Building. 

Canada.  The  Summer  Session  Office,  the  Department  of  History,  and  the  Canadian 
Studies  Program  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  based  at  McGill  University  in  Mon- 
treal. Included  in  the  program  is  an  extensive  study  trip  throughout  Canada.  The  objec- 
tives of  this  program  are  to  familiarize  students  with  the  historical,  political,  and  social 
reality  of  Canada  as  a  bilingual  and  bicultural  society.  Students  live  in  dormitories  and 
hotels.  For  further  information  see  Professor  Clark  Cahow,  Canadian  Studies  Center,  2016 
Campus  Drive. 

The  Caribbean.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Departments  of  History  and  Po- 
litical Science  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  in  Trinidad  and  Tobago.  The  program 
focuses  on  colonial  history  and  culture,  and  on  government  and  politics  of  the  West  In- 
dies. One  course  is  taught  by  Professor  Barry  Gaspar  of  Duke.  The  other  course  is  taught 
by  a  faculty  member  of  the  University  of  the  West  Indies  at  the  St .  Augustine  campus  in 
Trinidad.  Students  live  in  a  hotel.  For  further  information  see  Professor  Barry  Gaspar, 
Department  of  History,  08C  West  Duke  Building. 

France.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Department  of  Romance  Studies  offer 
a  two-course,  six-week  program  in  Paris.  It  provides  the  opportunity  to  take  Duke  courses 
in  the  ambience  of  Paris.  One  course  is  in  French  language;  the  other  is  in  French  litera- 
ture and  culture.  Both  courses  are  taught  in  French.  Students  live  in  a  hotel.  For  further 
information  see  Professor  Clare  Tufts,  Department  of  Romance  Studies,  205  Languages 
Building. 

Germany.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Department  of  Germanic  Languages 
offer  two  programs  at  the  Friedrich-Alexander  Universitat  at  Erlangen,  Germany.  One 
program  provides  an  opportunity  to  study  classroom  German  at  different  levels  while 
living  with  a  German  family  and  participating  in  study,  day  trips,  and  excursions  (May 
and  June).  In  the  other  program,  advanced  students  may  choose  from  a  variety  of  FAU 
courses  and  remain  for  a  full  summer  semester  (through  early  August).  Semester  pro- 
gram students  live  in  dormitories.  For  further  information  see  Professor  Helga  Bessent, 
Department  of  Germanic  Languages,  107  Languages  Building. 

Greece.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Department  of  Classical  Studies  offer 
a  one-course,  four- week  program  in  Greece  featuring  readings,  walking  lectures,  and  tour- 
ing important  sites  and  museums  to  study  the  development  of  the  preclassical,  classi- 
cal, Roman,  and  Byzantine  cultures  in  Greece.  The  course  is  taught  by  Professor  John 


Off  Campus  Opportunities       73 


Younger  of  Duke.  Students  live  in  hotels.  For  further  information  see  Professor  John  Youn- 
ger, Department  of  Classical  Studies,  316  Carr  Building. 

Israel.  The  Summer  Session  Office,  the  Department  of  Religion,  and  the  Duke  Cen- 
ter for  Judaic  Studies  offer  a  summer  program  in  Israel— in  Jerusalem  and  Galilee— giving 
students  an  opportunity  to  participate  in  an  archaeological  dig  and  to  explore  historical 
and  contemporary  Israel,  as  well  as  Western  religious  traditions.  Students  live  in 
dormitory-style  accommodations.  For  further  information  see  Professors  Carol  Meyers 
or  Eric  Meyers,  Department  of  Religion,  118  Gray  Building. 

Italy,  Bologna.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Departments  of  Romance  Studies 
and  Political  Science  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  at  the  University  of  Bologna 
in  Italian  politics  and  culture.  One  course  is  taught  by  Professor  Valeria  Finucci  of  Duke, 
the  other  by  a  member  of  the  faculty  of  the  University  of  Bologna .  Both  courses  are  taught 
in  English.  Students  live  in  a  hotel.  For  further  information  see  Professor  Valeria  Finuc- 
ci, Department  of  Romance  Studies,  310  Languages  Building. 

Italy,  Florence.  The  Summer  Session  Office,  the  Department  of  History,  and  the 
Department  of  Art  and  Art  History  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  focusing  on 
Renaissance  Florentine  history  and  art.  Both  courses  are  taught  in  English.  Students  live 
in  a  hotel.  For  further  information  see  Professor  John  Spencer,  Department  of  Art  and 
Art  History,  112  East  Duke  Building. 

Italy,  Rome.  The  Summer  Session  Office,  the  Department  of  Classical  Studies,  and 
the  Department  of  Art  and  Art  History  offer  a  two-course,  six- week  program  in  Rome  and 
central  Italy.  Through  visits  to  sites  and  museums,  walking  lectures,  and  readings,  the 
courses  examine  the  history  of  the  city  of  Rome  from  the  earliest  times  through  the  Ba- 
roque and  modern  periods.  Students  live  in  dormitory-style  accommodations.  For  fur- 
ther information  inquire  at  the  Summer  Session  Office,  121  Allen  Building. 

japan.  The  Summer  Session  Office,  the  Department  of  History,  the  Department  of 
Sociology,  and  the  Institute  of  Asian/Pacific  Studies  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program 
at  Hosei  University  near  Tokyo  focusing  on  Japanese  history  and  culture.  One  course  is 
taught  by  Professor  Andrew  Gordon  of  Duke,  the  other  by  faculty  of  Hosei  University. 
Both  courses  are  taught  in  English .  Students  live  variously  in  dormitories  and  with  fam- 
ilies. For  further  information  see  Professor  Andrew  Gordon,  Department  of  History,  104 
West  Duke  Building. 

Mexico.  The  Summer  Session  Office,  the  Department  of  Sociology,  and  the  Depart- 
ment of  Political  Science  offer  a  two-course,  six- week  program  on  Mexican  politics  and 
international  relations  and  the  problems  encountered  by  a  developing  country.  The  pro- 
gram is  based  at  the  Colegio  de  Mexico  in  Mexico  City  under  the  direction  of  Professor 
Gary  Gereffi  of  Duke.  Both  courses  are  taught  in  English  by  Duke  faculty  and  faculty  of 
the  Colegio  de  Mexico.  Students  live  in  dormitory-style  facilities.  For  further  information 
see  Professor  Gary  Gereffi,  Department  of  Sociology,  268  Sociology-Psychology  Building. 

Morocco.  The  Summer  Session  Office,  the  Institute  of  Asian-Pacific  Studies,  and  var- 
ious other  departments  offer  a  program  at  the  University  of  Marrakesh.  The  course  offer- 
ings vary  from  year  to  year.  Courses  are  taught  in  English .  Students  live  in  hotels.  For  fur- 
ther information  see  Professor  Miriam  Cooke,  Institute  of  Asian-Pacific  Studies  or  inquire 
at  the  Summer  Session  Office,  121  Allen  Building. 

The  Netherlands,  Amsterdam,  Learning  Disabilities.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the 
Program  in  Education,  in  conjunction  with  the  Department  of  Psychology,  offer  a  two- 
course,  six-week  program  in  Amsterdam  on  learning  disabilities  with  Professor  Lucy 
Davis  of  Duke  and  Professor  Dr.  Jacob  Valk,  Department  of  Neuroradiology  of  the  Free 
University  of  Amsterdam.  The  program  is  taught  in  English  and  is  designed  primarily 
for  advanced  undergraduates,  graduate  students,  and  practicing  learning  disabilities 
specialists.  Amsterdam  is  a  major  center  for  study  and  treatment  of  learning  disabilities, 
and  the  program  utilizes  guest  lecturers  from  institutions  in  Amsterdam  and  elsewhere 
in  the  Netherlands .  Students  live  in  apartments  of  the  university  guesthouse.  For  further 
information  see  Professor  Lucy  Davis,  Program  in  Education,  213C  West  Duke  Building. 


74        Special  Study  Centers,  Programs,  and  Opportunities 


The  Netherlands,  Amsterdam,  Economics.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Depart- 
ment of  Economics  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  in  economics  at  the  City  Univer- 
sity of  Amsterdam  focusing  on  an  introduction  to  economic  thinking  and  the  political 
economy  of  a  pluralist  society.  Both  courses  are  taught  in  English.  Students  live  in 
dormitory-style  facilities.  For  further  information  see  Professor  Neil  de  Marchi,  Depart- 
ment of  Economics,  318  Social  Sciences  Building. 

Soviet  Union.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Department  of  Slavic  Languages 
offer  a  two-course,  six-week  summer  program  in  Leningrad.  Russian  language  study  at 
different  levels  is  offered,  as  well  as  a  course  in  Russian  culture.  Extensive  excursions  to 
Moscow  and  other  cities  are  included  in  this  program.  Classes  in  Leningrad  are  taught 
at  Leningrad  State  University  by  faculty  of  the  university.  Students  live  in  dormitories. 
For  further  information  see  Professor  Edna  Andrews,  Department  of  Slavic  Languages, 
321C  Languages  Building. 

Spain.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Department  of  Romance  Studies  offer  a 
two-course,  six-week  program  at  the  advanced  level  in  Madrid  and  Malaga  with  excur- 
sions to  Toledo,  Segovia,  Granada,  Sevilla,  Cordoba,  and  Gibraltar.  All  courses  are  con- 
ducted in  Spanish,  and  students  live  with  Spanish  families.  For  further  information  see 
Professor  Miguel  Garci-Gomez,  Department  of  Romance  Studies,  205  Languages 
Building. 

Tahoan.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Departments  of  History,  Anthropolo- 
gy, and  Sociology  offer  a  two-course,  six-week  program  at  National  Taiwan  University 
in  Taipei  focusing  on  modern  Chinese  society  and  development  issues  of  East  Asia .  Stu- 
dents live  in  dormitories.  The  program  begins  with  a  week  in  Seoul,  Korea  and  concludes 
with  a  three-day  excursion  to  Hong  Kong.  For  further  information  inquire  at  the  Sum- 
mer Session  Office,  121  Allen  Building. 

Zimbabive/Botswana.  The  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Department  of  Political 
Science  offer  a  two-course,  six- week  program  based  for  three  weeks  at  the  University  of 
Zimbabwe  in  Harare  and  for  three  weeks  at  the  University  of  Botswana  in  Gabarone.  The 
courses  focus  on  politics  and  development  of  southern  Africa  and  are  taught  in  English 
by  Duke  faculty  with  guest  lecturers  from  the  Universities  of  Zimbabwe  and  Botswana. 
The  program  includes  study  trips  to  development  projects,  and  excursions  to  Victoria  Falls 
and  Hwange  ( Wankie)  Game  Park.  Students  live  in  dormitories.  For  further  information, 
see  Professor  Sheridan  Johns,  Department  of  Political  Science,  214  Perkins  Library. 

DUKE  UNIVERSITY  MARINE  LABORATORY 

The  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  (DUML)  is  located  adjacent  to  the  historic 
seacoast  town  of  Beaufort,  North  Carolina,  with  direct  access  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean,  Cape 
Lookout  National  Seashore  Park,  the  Outer  Banks,  estuaries,  sand  beaches  and  dunes, 
wetlands,  and  coastal  forests.  Because  of  the  richness  and  diversity  of  its  flora  and  fau- 
na, the  area  provides  an  excellent  opportunity  for  marine  study.  The  Marine  Laboratory 
is  an  interdepartmental  teaching  and  research  facility  of  the  University.  The  departments 
and  programs  which  are  chiefly  concerned  are  biochemistry,  biology,  cell  biology,  chemis- 
try, and  geology.  Academic  programs  include  a  spring  term  and  a  fall  term  for  undergradu- 
ates and  three  terms  of  summer  school  for  undergraduate  and  graduate  students  as  well 
as  a  cooperative  academic  program  for  students  from  several  colleges  and  universities. 
For  information  concerning  application  and  registration,  write  to  Admissions  Office,  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516. 

AGREEMENTS  WITH  OTHER  UNIVERSITIES 

Neighboring  Universities.  Under  a  plan  of  cooperation,  the  interinstitutional  agree- 
ment among  Duke  University  and  the  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  North 
Carolina  State  University  at  Raleigh,  and  North  Carolina  Central  University  in  Durham, 
a  student  regularly  enrolled  in  Duke  University  and  paying  full  fees  may  enroll  for  one 
approved  course  each  semester  at  one  of  the  institutions  in  the  cooperative  program.  If 


Off  Campus  Opportunities       75 


the  student  takes  two  or  more  courses  during  a  summer  at  Duke,  one  of  the  courses  may 
be  taken  at  one  of  the  neighboring  institutions  under  this  plan .  This  agreement  does  not 
apply  to  contract  programs  such  as  the  American  Dance  Festival. 

Approval  forms  for  courses  to  be  taken  at  these  neighboring  institutions  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  offices  of  the  academic  deans  at  Duke .  Ordinarily,  only  those  courses  not 
offered  at  Duke  will  be  approved.  Credit  so  earned  is  not  defined  as  transfer  credit  since 
grades  in  courses  taken  under  the  interinstitutional  agreement  are  entered  on  the  offi- 
cial record  and  used  in  determining  the  quality  point  ratio.  The  student  pays  any  special 
fees  required  of  students  at  the  host  institution  and  provides  transportation. 

Howard  University.  Duke  students  participating  in  the  Duke/Howard  University  Ex- 
change Program  may  spend  a  semester  studying  at  Howard  University  in  Washington, 
DC,  while  Howard  undergraduates  enroll  for  the  same  period  at  Duke.  More  informa- 
tion about  this  program,  administered  by  Trinity  College,  is  available  at  2022  Campus 
Drive. 

DUKE  FUTURES  PROGRAMS 

Initiated  in  1985,  Duke  Futures  Programs  offers  undergraduates  the  opportunity  to 
explore  a  wide  range  of  career  interests  through  participation  in  summer  and  academic 
year  internships  and  jobs.  Opportunities  are  arranged  through  the  Futures  Job  Network 
or  made  available  through  the  general  employment  and  internship  listings  in  the  Duke 
Futures  office. 

The  Futures  Job  Network  provides  sophomores  and  juniors  with  firsthand  experience 
in  a  field  related  to  their  academic  program  or  future  career.  Internships  are  paid  and  are 
for  at  least  a  twelve-week  period  during  the  summer.  Students  can  register  throughout 
the  academic  year  prior  to  the  summer  in  which  they  wish  to  work.  Positions  are  devel- 
oped by  a  network  of  alumni  volunteers  located  primarily  in  thirteen  U.S.  cities.  Paid  in- 
ternships are  also  available  in  the  community  service  sector  through  the  Futures  Serv- 
ice Learning  Project.  Two  scholarships  are  available  to  students  placed  through  the 
program.  The  Academic  Scholarship  is  a  merit  award  of  $750  for  an  independent  study 
course  relevant  to  the  student's  internship.  The  Opportunity  Scholarship  is  a  need-based 
award  that  replaces  all  or  part  of  the  summer  savings  expectation  for  students  on  finan- 
cial aid,  enabling  them  to  accept  the  most  attractive  job  offer. 

Through  other  services  such  as  individual  counseling,  resume  workshops,  interview 
technique  seminars,  a  resource  library,  on-campus  corporate  summer  recruitment,  and 
monthly  job  bulletins,  Duke  Futures  Programs  helps  students  to  prepare  for  the  transi- 
tion from  their  academic  career  to  their  work  career. 

Special  Summer  Programs 

DUKE  SUMMER  FESTIVAL  OF  CREATIVE  ARTS 

The  Duke  Summer  Festival  of  Creative  Arts  is  administered  jointly  by  the  Summer 
Session  Office  and  the  Office  of  Cultural  Affairs.  The  festival  provides  an  exciting,  artisti- 
cally stimulating  environment  for  the  campus  and  community.  The  Ciompi  Quartet, 
Duke's  well-known  Chamber  Music  Ensemble,  will  give  several  performances.  Other  spe- 
cial events  such  as  jazz  concerts,  carillon  recitals,  dance  and  theater  performances,  and 
film  series  are  planned. 

Summer  Theater  Institute.  The  Summer  Theater  Institute,  for  students  seriously  in- 
terested in  theater,  offers  intense  professional-level  training  and  experience.  Courses  in- 
volve substantial  contact  time  and  carefully-prepared  assignments.  Open  primarily  to 
Duke  students,  but  with  the  permission  of  the  Director  of  Drama,  students  from  other 
institutions  may  attend. 

Detailed  information  on  faculty  and  courses  may  be  obtained  from  Summer  Theater 
Institute,  206  Bivins,  Duke  University,  Durham  NC  27708. 

76       Special  Study  Centers,  Programs,  and  Opportunities 


The  American  Dance  Festival.  The  six-week  program  offers  a  wide  variety  of  class- 
es, performances,  and  workshops.  For  a  catalog,  write  to  the  American  Dance  Festival, 
Duke  University,  Box  6097  College  Station,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27708. 

PRECOLLEGE  PROGRAM 

During  the  summer  of  1989,  Duke  University  will  offer  a  Term  II  program  for  academ- 
ically talented  rising  high  school  seniors  from  across  the  country.  The  Precollege  Program 
is  designed  to  provide  the  academic  challenge  of  college-level  courses  to  qualified  college- 
bound  students  and  to  help  prepare  them  for  the  adjustments  they  will  be  making  when 
they  enter  college  as  freshmen.  Students  will  enroll  in  two  regular  summer  session  classes 
with  Duke  undergraduates.  Introductory  level  courses  in  the  humanities,  social  sciences, 
natural  sciences,  and  languages  will  be  offered  for  college  credit  and  there  will  be  a  wide 
range  of  campus  programs  and  activities  available  as  well.  The  students  will  live  in  su- 
pervised, air-conditioned  University  dormitories,  eat  their  meals  in  the  University  din- 
ing halls,  enjoy  the  opportunity  of  studying  with  distinguished  members  of  the  Duke 
faculty,  and  will  have  access  to  all  University  libraries  and  athletic  facilities.  Special  pro- 
grams organized  by  the  residential  staff  will  include  sessions  on  such  topics  as  research 
and  study  skills,  communicative  skills,  health  and  physical  fitness,  selection  of  careers 
and  colleges,  and  interpersonal  relationships.  For  further  information  contact  the 
Precollege  Program,  Duke  University,  Box  40077,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706-0077. 


Special  Summer  Programs       77 


Campus  Life  and  Activities 


Student  Affairs 

The  Division  of  Student  Affairs  strives  to  complement  the  educational  mission  of  the 
University  by  helping  to  relate  many  of  the  nonacademic  components  of  the  University 
to  the  academic  experiences  of  the  students.  The  residence  halls,  the  athletic  fields,  the 
Chapel,  and  many  student  organizations  play  an  important  humanistic  and  holistic  role 
in  the  students'  university  experience  by  developing  leadership  qualities,  skills  in  inter- 
personal relationships,  and  appreciation  for  the  care  of  the  physical  self.  Thus,  the  univer- 
sity experience  encompasses  collectively  the  life  of  the  mind,  body,  emotions,  and,  in- 
deed, the  spirit. 

Residential  Life 

Duke  has  a  long  tradition  as  a  residential  university  and  has  sought  to  provide  con- 
venient housing  for  the  majority  of  the  undergraduate  students.  While  the  University 
was  established  to  provide  a  formal  educational  opportunity  for  students,  Duke  has  al- 
ways taken  the  position  that  education  encompasses  social  and  personal  development 
as  well  as  intellectual  growth.  In  order  to  facilitate  such  a  holistic  approach,  Duke  seeks 
to  provide  a  supportive  environment  substantially  anchored  in  its  residential  program. 

Although  freshmen  are  required  to  live  in  the  University  residence  halls,  a  number 
of  upperclassmen  choose  to  live  off  campus.  Students  enrolled  beyond  their  fourth  year 
of  the  undergraduate  program  cannot  be  granted  space  in  University  housing.  Part-time 
and  former  students  who  have  been  readmitted  are  not  eligible  for  on-campus  housing. 

Residence  Halls  and  Apartments.  The  University  accommodates  approximately  90 
percent  of  its  undergraduates  in  sixty  residence  hall  living  groups  located  on  East,  West, 
and  North  Campuses  and  in  apartments  located  on  Central  Campus.  Within  one  of  the 
residence  halls,  there  are  languages  corridors  for  students  interested  in  speaking  French, 
Spanish,  and  German.  Another  residence  hall  houses  the  Women's  Studies  living  group. 

University  housing  is  considered  to  include  residence  hall  space  as  well  as  Central 
Campus  Apartments.  Placement  in  any  of  these  areas  fulfills  the  University's  obligation 
to  house  eligible  students  in  University  housing.  Free  on-campus  bus  service  connect- 
ing East,  West,  North,  and  Central  Campuses  is  provided  by  the  University. 

Freshmen  reside  in  all-freshman  houses  clustered  on  several  campuses;  upperclass 
students  reside  not  only  in  all-upperclass  residence  halls  but  also  in  Central  Campus 
Apartments.  Residential  fraternities  are  housed  in  sections  of  upperclass  residence  halls; 

Residential  Life       79 


by  tradition,  sororities  are  not  residential.  Freshman  housing  assignments  are  made  by 
lottery  to  the  houses  in  the  freshman  clusters  while  upperclass  housing  assignments  are 
made  by  a  combination  of  lottery  and  student  choice.  Within  the  residence  halls,  students 
live  in  single,  double,  or  triple  rooms.  Living  groups  elect  officers  and  organize  social, 
intramural,  and  cocurricular  programs,  and  community  service  projects. 

All  of  the  residence  halls  have  resident  advisors  who  live  in  the  houses  and  are  mem- 
bers of  the  staff  of  the  Dean  for  Residential  Life.  These  graduate  and  undergraduate  stu- 
dents have  broad  responsibilities  in  the  residential  life  of  the  University  including  coun- 
seling students  with  personal  problems,  advising  the  house  governments,  and  serving 
as  resource  persons  for  students. 

Residence  Hall  Programming.  Academic,  cultural,  and  cocurricular  programming 
is  planned  and  presented  throughout  the  year  in  the  residence  halls  through  the  cooper- 
ative work  of  the  Office  of  Residential  Life,  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  the  School 
of  Engineering,  and  resident  students.  There  are  a  number  of  faculty  members  in  resi- 
dence in  both  freshman  and  upperclass  houses.  Faculty  offices  and  seminar  rooms  are 
also  located  in  several  of  the  freshman  houses.  The  goals  of  these  various  residential  pro- 
grams are  to  enhance  the  quality  of  intellectual  and  social  life  for  the  residents  on  cam- 
pus, to  facilitate  student-faculty  interaction  outside  of  the  formal  classroom,  and  to  de- 
velop a  greater  sense  of  community  within  the  individual  residence  halls  as  well  as  within 
the  greater  University. 

Living  Off  Campus.  The  option  of  living  off  campus  is  available  for  students  after 
the  first  semester  of  their  freshman  year,  and  those  who  choose  it  may  retain  their  resi- 
dent status  and  eligibility  for  University  housing  if  they  follow  the  proper  procedures  as 
published  by  the  Office  of  Residential  Life. 


Dining  Facilities 


All  students  living  in  campus  residence  halls  are  required  to  participate  in  one  of  five 
meal  plan  options  and  are  able  to  select  from  a  wide  range  of  dining  locations  and  a  large 
variety  of  food  offerings,  all  of  which  are  available  on  their  prepaid  dining  account  (see 
"Food  and  Other  Expenses"  in  the  chapter  "Financial  Information").  In  addition  to  two 
all-you-can-eat  cafeterias,  University  Food  Services  provides  restaurants,  snackbars,  delis, 
and  a  pizza  take-out  and  delivery  service.  Food  service  operations  are  located  on  each 
campus. 

Facilities  on  East  Campus  include  the  East  Court  Cafeteria;  the  Magnolia  Room,  a  for- 
mal seated  restaurant;  The  Dope  Shop,  a  snack  bar;  and  the  DownUnder,  an  a  la  carte 
restaurant  featuring  sandwiches  and  snacks.  On  West  Campus,  students  may  select  from 
the  University  Room,  an  a  la  carte  cafeteria;  the  Blue  and  White  Room  cafeteria;  the  Oak 
Room,  a  seated  dining  restaurant;  the  Cambridge  Inn,  a  deli,  pizza,  and  fast  food  shop. 
Arthur's,  located  in  Edens  Quad  on  West  Campus,  provides  late  night  snack  services  for 
the  nearby  living  groups.  The  Boyd-Pishko  Cafe,  Licks,  and  the  Rathskeller,  located  in 
the  Bryan  University  Center,  also  serve  West  Campus.  The  Boyd-Pishko  Cafe  serves  break- 
fast items,  sandwiches,  and  snacks.  Gourmet  hamburgers,  deli  sandwiches,  and  salads 
are  featured  in  the  Rathskeller.  On  North  Campus,  there  are  the  Trent  Drive  Hall  cafe; 
The  Sprout,  a  soup  and  salad  bar;  and  the  North  Central  Connection,  a  snack  bar  provid- 
ing service  during  late  evening  hours.  The  Pub,  a  restaurant  serving  specialty  sandwiches, 
is  located  on  Central  Campus.  Catering  services  and  pizza  delivery  are  also  available. 

Religious  Life 

Two  symbols  indicate  how  important  religion  has  been  to  this  University  since  its 
founding:  Eruditio  et  Religio,  the  motto  on  the  seal  of  the  University,  and  the  location  of 
the  Duke  Chapel  at  the  center  of  the  campus.  People  from  all  segments  of  the  University 


80       Campus  Life  and  Activities 


and  the  community  gather  in  Duke  Chapel  on  Sunday  morning  to  worship  in  a  service 
which  offers  excellent  liturgy,  music,  and  preaching.  The  world's  outstanding  Christian 
preachers  have  preached  from  the  Duke  Chapel  pulpit. 

The  University  ministers  work  with  the  campus  ministers  and  staff  from  the  Roman 
Catholic,  Jewish,  and  Protestant  communities,  and  with  other  groups  to  provide  a  ministry 
which  is  responsive  to  the  plurality  of  religious  interests  on  the  campus. 

Through  the  religious  life  of  the  University,  students  are  encouraged  to  search  for 
meaning,  to  ask  the  ultimate  questions,  to  worship,  to  meditate  in  the  beautiful  chapel, 
to  learn  from  outstanding  theologians  from  a  wide  array  of  traditions,  and  to  work  to  bring 
about  a  more  just  and  humane  society. 

Services  Available 

Student  Health  Service.  The  objective  of  the  Student  Health  Service  is  to  provide 
medical  care  and  advice  to  students.  Both  the  Student  Health  Services  Clinic  and  the 
University  Infirmary  are  available  to  students  for  that  purpose.  A  separate  mandatory 
fee  for  this  service  is  assessed  and  covers  most  services  offered  within  the  clinic  and  in- 
firmary. Counseling  and  Psychological  Services  (CAPS),  which  is  a  separate  and  com- 
plementary service  to  the  Student  Health  Service,  provides  a  wide  range  of  counseling 
and  psychiatric  services  which  are  also  covered  by  a  portion  of  the  Student  Health  fee. 
(See  next  section.) 

The  facilities  of  the  Student  Health  Clinic  are  open  during  both  regular  and  summer 
sessions  to  all  currently  enrolled  full-time  undergraduate  students,  as  well  as  to  regular- 
ly enrolled  students  in  the  graduate  and  professional  schools.  For  treatment  of  illnesses 
or  injuries,  students  should  first  visit  the  Student  Health  Clinic.  Outside  regular  clinic 
hours,  students  should  call  or  visit  the  University  Infirmary,  open  twenty-four  hours  daily 
during  regular  academic  sessions.  The  campus  bus  makes  regular  trips  to  the  clinic;  emer- 
gency transportation  to  the  clinic,  infirmary,  or  Duke  Medical  Center  emergency  room 
can  be  obtained  from  the  Duke  public  safety  officers  or  from  ambulance  services  in 
Durham.  Resident  Advisors  (RAs)  should  be  consulted,  whenever  possible,  for  assistance 
in  obtaining  emergency  treatment.  For  a  description  of  the  specific  services  provided  by 
the  clinic  and  also  by  the  infirmary,  see  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Infonnation  and  Regu- 
lations. 

The  health  education  staff,  located  within  the  student  health  facility  at  Pickens  Build- 
ing, is  available  to  work  with  students  in  making  informed  decisions  that  lead  to  healthy 
lifestyles  at  Duke  and  beyond.  Specific  areas  of  concern  and  interest  include  alcohol  and 
other  drug  usage,  eating  and  nutrition,  sexual  activity,  and  stress  management.  Programs, 
meetings,  and  consultations  are  provided  for  both  groups  and  individuals. 

In  addition  to  the  Student  Health  Service,  the  University  makes  available  a  plan  of 
accident  and  sickness  insurance  to  cover  students  who  are  enrolled  in  the  University.  This 
plan  is  designed  to  complement  services  normally  not  accessible  to  students  through  the 
Student  Health  Service  coverage;  it  covers  students  both  on  and  off  campus,  at  home, 
or  while  traveling  between  home  and  school  during  the  interim  vacation  periods  through- 
out the  one-year  term  of  the  policy. 

All  full-time  and  part-time  degree  candidates  are  required  to  enroll  in  the  student  ac- 
cident and  sickness  insurance  policy,  made  available  by  the  University,  unless  they  show 
evidence  that  they  are  covered  by  other  generally  comparable  insurance.  This  evidence 
of  comparable  coverage  is  given  by  completing  the  appropriate  waiver  statement  contained 
in  the  remittance  form  of  the  University  invoice.  This  statement  requires  that  the  name 
of  the  insurance  company  and  the  policy  number  be  indicated  as  well  as  the  signature 
of  the  student  or  parent.  While  this  requirement  may  be  waived  by  signing  the  appropriate 
space  on  the  University  invoice  indicating  a  willingness  to  assume  the  medical  costs  of 
any  sickness  or  accident,  the  Student  Health  Service  strongly  recommends  that  all  stu- 
dents be  covered  by  accident  and  sickness  insurance. 


Senrices  Available       81 


Counseling  and  Psychological  Services.  Counseling  and  Psychological  Services 
(CAPS)  provides  a  comprehensive  range  of  counseling  and  developmental  services  to 
assist  and  promote  the  personal  growth  of  Duke  students.  The  professional  staff  is  com- 
posed of  psychologists,  clinical  social  workers,  and  psychiatrists  experienced  in  work- 
ing with  young  adults.  They  provide  evaluation  and  brief  counseling/psychotherapy 
regarding  a  wide  range  of  concerns,  including  such  issues  as  self-esteem  and  identity, 
family  relationships,  academic  performance,  dating,  intimacy,  and  sexual  concerns.  Also 
provided  is  career  counseling,  in  which  students  may  receive  career  testing  or  work  with 
a  computerized  career  guidance  system.  A  career  library  with  sources  of  occupational 
and  educational  information  is  maintained.  While  students'  visits  with  counselors  are 
usually  by  appointment,  emergencies  are  handled  when  they  arise. 

Each  year,  CAPS  offers  a  series  of  self-development  seminars  focusing  on  skills  de- 
velopment and  special  interests.  Topics  of  previous  seminars  have  included  career  plan- 
ning, stress  management,  social  development,  communication  enhancement,  and  un- 
derstanding eating  problems. 

As  Duke's  center  for  administration  of  national  testing  programs,  CAPS  also  offers 
a  wide  variety  of  graduate/professional  school  admission  tests  and  professional  licensure 
and  certification  examinations.  The  staff  is  also  available  to  the  entire  University  commu- 
nity for  consultation  and  educational  activities  in  student  development  and  mental  health 
issues  affecting  not  only  individual  students  but  the  campus  community  as  a  whole.  They 
work  with  campus  personnel,  including  administrators,  faculty,  student  health  staff,  re- 
ligious life  staff,  resident  advisors,  and  student  groups,  in  meeting  needs  identified 
through  such  liaisons.  Staff  members  are  also  available  to  lead  workshops  and  discus- 
sion groups  on  topics  of  interest  to  students. 

CAPS  maintains  a  policy  of  strict  confidentiality  concerning  information  about  each 
student's  contact  with  the  CAPS  staff.  If  a  student  desires  that  information  be  released 
to  anyone,  written  authorization  must  be  given  by  the  student  for  such  release.  Evalua- 
tion and  brief  counseling/therapy  as  well  as  career  and  skills  development  seminars  are 
covered  by  the  student  health  fee.  There  are  no  additional  costs  for  these  services. 

For  additional  information,  see  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Information  and  Regu- 
lations, or  call  (919)  684-5100. 

Office  of  Placement  Services.  The  Office  of  Placement  Services  is  the  liaison  between 
the  University  community  and  potential  employers  in  business,  education,  nonprofit  or- 
ganizations, and  government.  The  purposes  of  the  office  are  to  give  Duke  students  op- 
portunities to  investigate  career  options  prior  to  beginning  the  placement  process  and 
to  assist  seniors  in  identifying  employment  opportunities  commensurate  with  their 
qualifications,  interests,  and  desires.  An  extensive  file  of  openings  for  permanent  em- 
ployment is  available,  as  is  a  library  of  general  information  about  careers  and  employers. 
Staff  members  are  available  to  discuss  career  plans;  permanent  employment  opportu- 
nities; interviewing  techniques;  and  other  related  matters.  Employer  and  graduate  and 
professional  school  representatives  visit  Duke  beginning  in  early  October  each  year. 

Preliminary  exploration  of  career  interests  early  in  the  student's  academic  career  is 
possible  through  the  Career  Apprenticeship  Program,  which  offers  nonpaid  experience 
in  a  variety  of  career  fields.  This  program  gives  the  student  the  opportunity  to  gain  prac- 
tical work  experience  and  to  broaden  the  educational  experience  by  related  fieldwork  dur- 
ing the  undergraduate  years.  Students  may  also  use  the  Duke  Network  file  to  identify 
Duke  alumni,  representing  a  variety  of  career  fields,  who  have  agreed  to  talk  with  un- 
dergraduates about  various  career  paths. 

Office  of  Minority  Affairs.  The  Office  of  Minority  Affairs  (OM  A)  is  an  interdiscipli- 
nary/student service  component  of  the  University  which  assists  minority  students  in  their 
adjustment  to  student  life.  Although  OMA  primarily  counsels  and  advises  students,  the 
office  is  also  involved  in  matters  relating  to  policy  and  circumstances  which  affect  minority 
students.  Appropriate  discussions  are  held  with  faculty,  staff,  parents,  and/or  students. 


82       Campus  Life  and  Activities 


The  office  has  designed  and  implemented  a  variety  of  programs  which  are  aimed  at 
maximizing  students'  potential  for  realizing  their  academic  goals.  Three  major  program 
components  are  included  in  these  efforts: 

Duke  PREVIEW  Program  (DPP).  This  program  introduces  selected  precollege  students 
to  academic  and  student  life  at  Duke.  Courses  in  English,  computers,  mathematics,  and 
study  skills  are  offered  to  incoming  freshman  students  during  the  summer  preceding 
matriculation.  Individual,  group,  and  peer  counseling  sessions  in  PREVIEW  present  stu- 
dents with  the  opportunity  to  exchange  ideas  regarding  individual  and  group  concerns. 

Counseling  in  Academic  and  Social  Affairs  (CASA).  CASA  provides  the  ongoing  leader- 
ship of  a  graduate  counselor  or  undergraduate  peer  to  each  undergraduate  minority  stu- 
dent. The  counselors  visit  with  students  on  a  regular  basis,  hold  group  discussions,  and 
serve  as  sources  of  information  and  referral  to  all  students. 

Tutoring  Program.  This  program  maintains  tutors  in  mathematics  and  the  sciences  on 
a  regular  basis  for  any  students  seeking  assistance.  Although  many  students  come  to  the 
tutoring  program  through  supportive  academic  personnel,  most  are  self-referred .  Tutor- 
ing is  encouraged  and  should  be  arranged  as  soon  as  a  need  is  perceived. 

Offices  for  Program  Planning 

The  University  Union.  The  University  Union  brings  together  undergraduate  and 
graduate  students,  faculty,  administrators,  employees,  alumni,  and  others  through  a 
broad  program  of  lectures,  concerts,  performing  arts,  exhibits,  games,  festivals,  crafts, 
special  events,  dances,  and  film  and  video  presentations  and  productions.  It  is  governed 
by  a  board  comprised  of  representatives  of  virtually  all  segments  of  the  University  com- 
munity; the  board  also  governs  the  operation  of  the  Bryan  University  Center,  where  the 
Union  is  located. 

The  Bryan  University  Center  is  the  hub  of  cultural,  social,  recreational,  cocurricular, 
and  service  activities  for  students  and  other  members  of  the  campus  community.  In  ad- 
dition to  the  Union,  the  Bryan  Center  also  houses  a  cafe,  a  snack  bar,  three  theaters,  a  video 
auditorium,  a  post  office,  bank  services,  an  art  gallery,  meeting  rooms,  of  f  ices  for  student 
organizations,  an  information  center,  a  ballroom,  a  crafts  center,  a  game  room,  lounges, 
and  a  mall.  Also  located  in  the  Bryan  Center  are  the  University  stores  which  provide  text- 
books, supplies,  trade  books,  magazines  and  newspapers,  health  and  beauty  aids,  gifts, 
and  wearing  apparel. 

Office  of  Student  Life.  The  Office  of  Student  Life  develops  and  coordinates  the  new 
student  orientation  programs  for  freshmen  and  transfer  students  and  works  closely  with 
the  Freshman  Advisory  Council  (FAC),  which  is  composed  of  upperclass  men  and  women 
who  are  selected  for  qualities  of  responsibility  and  leadership.  The  members  of  the  Fresh- 
man Advisory  Council  are  each  assigned  small  groups  of  freshmen  or  transfer  students. 
During  Orientation  Week,  they  welcome  their  new  students  and  introduce  them  to  the 
University;  during  the  first  semester,  they  continue  their  relationship  with  their  students, 
helping  them  make  the  many  adjustments  to  university  life. 

Other  responsibilities  of  this  office  include  coordinating  the  application  of  the  general 
rules  and  regulations  of  the  University,  advising  the  participants  in  the  judicial  process, 
serving  as  a  resource  center  for  handicapped  students,  advising  the  Interfraternity  and 
Panhellenic  Councils,  acting  as  a  liaison  with  both  the  Student  Health  Service  and  the 
Department  of  Public  Safety,  and  designing  and  implementing  the  Parents'  Weekend 
program. 

Office  of  Student  Activities.  The  Office  of  Student  Activities,  located  in  the  Bryan 
Center,  is  a  resource  for  approximately  three  hundred  University  clubs  and  organizations. 

The  director  and  progTam  associates  are  available  for  advice  in  planning  events,  for 
guidance  in  establishing  new  groups,  and  for  information  about  activities  of  campus 
groups.  The  financial  manager  oversees  the  financial  affairs  of  student  groups,  Greek 


Offices  forP rog ra m  Pla n n ing       83 


organizations,  and  residential  living  units.  This  includes  processing  their  financial  and 
payroll  transactions;  auditing  certain  financial  accounts;  offering  bookkeeping,  budg- 
eting, and  fund-raising  workshops  for  treasurers;  and  providing  financial  advice  on  an 
ongoing  basis. 

The  office  offers  a  Complementary  Education  Program  with  instructional  and 
programmatic  aids  to  foster  leadership,  organizational,  and  financial  skills  among  stu- 
dent leaders.  An  internship/career  apprenticeship  program  provides  students  with  op- 
portunities to  gain  practical  experience  and  develop  job  related  skills  in  such  areas  as  ac- 
counting, advertising,  public  relations,  editing,  administration,  and  data  processing.  Also, 
the  office  sponsors  an  annual  Student  Activities  Day,  coordinates  Duke's  participation 
in  the  Share  Your  Christmas  Program,  and  participates  actively  in  Black  Student  Weekend. 

Office  of  Cultural  Affairs.  The  Office  of  Cultural  Affairs  is  responsible  for  the  crea- 
tion, coordination,  and  implementation  of  many  of  the  cultural  and  popular  programs 
which  occur  on  campus.  The  office  is  directly  responsible  for  the  Duke  Artists  Series;  the 
Chamber  Arts  Society  Series;  Quadrangle  Pictures;  the  Summer  Festival  of  the  Arts;  and 
the  scheduling  of  Page  Auditorium,  as  well  as  all  campus  activities.  With  the  exception 
of  athletic  events,  all  campus  entertainment  programs  which  require  tickets  are  handled 
by  Page  Box  Office,  an  extension  of  the  Office  of  Cultural  Affairs.  In  addition  to  oversee- 
ing arts-related  activities,  this  office  assists  in  publishing  and  distributing  the  yearly  edition 
of  the  Duke  University  Calendar. 

The  Mary  Lou  Williams  Center  for  Black  Culture.  The  Mary  Lou  Williams  Center 
for  Black  Culture  was  dedicated  in  September,  1983,  in  memory  of  the  "great  lady  of  jazz" 
and  former  artist-in-residence  whose  name  it  bears.  The  culmination  of  the  work  and 
dreams  of  many  people,  the  center  exists  to  promote  and  preserve  black  expressive  cul- 
ture at  Duke.  It  serves  as  a  gathering  place  for  black  students,  where  they  can  learn  more 
about  the  beauty  and  richness  of  their  culture  and  can  with  pride  share  their  heritage  with 
other  students  and  members  of  the  Duke  community  in  an  atmosphere  of  racial  harmony. 

The  center  is  composed  of  the  Director's  office,  two  lounge  areas,  a  library,  an  art  gal- 
lery, and  a  large  meeting  area.  This  is  the  site  of  a  variety  of  programs  planned  by  the  Direc- 
tor and  students,  and  it  can  also  be  reserved  by  all  groups  on  campus. 

International  House.  International  House  is  the  center  of  cocurricular  programs  for 
approximately  five  hundred  students  at  Duke  from  sixty-seven  countries,  as  well  as  for 
American  students  who  are  interested  in  other  cultures,  are  considering  study  abroad 
(see  the  section  on  study  abroad  in  the  chapter  "Special  Programs"),  or  are  planning  to 
travel  outside  the  United  States.  The  International  Association,  sponsored  by  Interna- 
tional House  and  composed  of  both  American  and  foreign  students,  plans  social  and  cul- 
tural programs  which  emphasize  personal  contact  and  informal  exchange  of  ideas  among 
students  from  diverse  backgrounds.  Included  are  weekly  open  houses  with  lectures,  dis- 
cussions, films,  potluck  dinners  or  parties;  periodic  trips  outside  of  Durham;  and  an  an- 
nual International  Day  on  campus  which  draws  visitors  from  throughout  the  area. 

Programs  of  International  House  which  assist  students  from  abroad  in  participating 
in  the  life  of  the  Duke  and  Durham  communities  include  an  intensive  orientation  pro- 
gram at  the  beginning  of  the  academic  year;  the  International  Friend/Host  Family  Pro- 
gram, in  which  interested  international  students  may  become  acquainted  with  Ameri- 
can families  or  individuals;  Duke  Partners,  in  which  an  international  student  is  paired 
with  an  American  partner  for  weekly  meetings  to  work  on  language  and  life  skills;  Speak- 
ers' Bureau,  which  arranges  for  international  students  to  speak  at  civic  and  social  groups 
as  well  as  schools  in  the  Durham  community;  and  English  conversation  classes  which 
meet  four  hours  a  week  on  campus. 

International  House  also  has  a  visa  specialist  on  the  staff  who  works  with  students 
from  abroad  in  fulfilling  the  various  immigration  and  tax  formalities  involved  in  coming 
to  Duke.  Further  information  may  be  obtained  from  International  House,  2022  Campus 
Drive,  (919)  684-3585. 

84       Campus  Life  and  Activities 


Student  Organizations 

Associated  Students  of  Duke  University.  The  Associated  Students  of  Duke  Univer- 
sity ( ASDU)  is  responsible  for  articulating  undergraduate  student  thought  on  issues  rele- 
vant to  the  University  and  for  working  to  improve  the  educational  process  and  Universi- 
ty environment.  The  working  philosophy  of  ASDU  is  that  students  have  the  right  to 
participate  in  the  University's  decision-making  process  on  matters  that  directly  affect  the 
student  body. 

The  Executive  Committee  is  responsible  for  the  implementation  of  all  legislative  ac- 
tion and  for  the  coordination  of  the  organization.  It  consists  of  the  President,  four  Vice- 
Presidents  (Executive,  Student  Affairs,  Academic  Affairs,  and  Engineering),  an  Execu- 
tive Secretary,  an  Administrative  Secretary,  an  Attorney  General,  a  Press  Secretary,  and 
a  Director  of  Student  Services. 

The  ASDU  legislature  is  composed  of  representatives  from  each  undergraduate  liv- 
ing group  on  campus,  representatives  of  students  living  off  campus  and  on  Central  Cam- 
pus, and  representatives  selected  from  the  entire  student  body.  Within  the  legislative 
branch,  there  are  four  committees  (Academic  Affairs,  Student  Affairs,  External  Affairs, 
and  Buildings  and  Grounds)  which  initiate  legislation  and  projects  to  benefit  the  student 
body.  Another  legislative  committee,  the  Student  Organizations  Committee,  is  respon- 
sible for  allocating  the  student  activities  fee  paid  by  each  undergraduate  to  various  char- 
tered clubs  and  organizations. 

ASDU's  services  seek  to  aid  every  undergraduate  during  his/her  Duke  career.  These 
services  include  a  free  legal  assistance  program,  a  check  cashing  service,  a  maternity/abor- 
tion loan  fund,  a  bail  loan  fund,  a  ride-rider  board,  babysitting  and  typing  files,  the  Safe 
Rides  and  Safe  Walks  Programs,  and  a  student  travel  service. 

Cultural  and  Social  Organizations.  The  scope  of  the  more  than  three  hundred  stu- 
dent organizations  is  suggested  by  a  partial  listing  of  their  names:  Alpha  Phi  Omega  serv- 
ice fraternity,  Black  Student  Alliance,  Baptist  Student  Union,  Cheerleaders,  International 
Association,  Duke  Ice  Hockey,  Outing  Club,  Sailing  Club,  Model  United  Nations  Club, 
Photography  Group,  and  the  N.C.  Public  Interest  Research  Group.  Twenty-one  nation- 
al social  fraternities  and  thirteen  national  sororities  are  represented  on  campus.  They  are 
governed  by  the  Interfraternity  and  Panhellenic  Councils,  respectively. 

Many  opportunities  are  provided  on  campus  in  the  areas  of  music  and  drama.  The 
Chorale,  Modern  Black  Mass  Choir,  Chapel  Choir,  Wind  Symphony,  Marching  Band, 
Symphony  Orchestra,  and  Collegium  Musicum  are  examples  of  musical  organizations. 
Duke  Players  perform  established  and  experimental  drama;  Hoof  'n'  Horn  presents  mu- 
sical comedy;  Karamu  performs  drama  related  to  the  black  experience. 

Several  academic  departments  sponsor  organizations  and  programs  for  students  with 
special  academic  or  professional  interests.  There  are  over  twenty  academic  department 
majors  unions  on  campus.  There  are  also  academic  and  leadership  honorary  societies. 

Media.  The  Duke  Chronicle,  the  campus  newspaper,  publishes  five  issues  weekly  and 
is  governed  by  the  Chronicle  Board.  A  humor  magazine  (Jabbenvoch/),  a  literary  maga- 
zine (the  Archive ),  a  special  topics  newspaper  (The  Missing  Link),  a  feature  magazine  (Tobac- 
co Road),  a  humanities  review  (Eruditio),  a  science  magazine  ( Vertices),  a  photography  maga- 
zine (Latent  Image),  and  the  Duke  Journal  of  Politics  are  published  on  a  regular  basis  by 
students.  In  addition,  a  Teacher-Course  Evaluation  Book,  The  Student  Guide  to  Duke,  The  Duke 
Women's  Handbook,  and  a  comprehensive  yearbook,  the  Chanticleer,  are  produced  each 
year.  These  publications  are  under  the  direction  of  the  Undergraduate  Publications  Board, 
which  chooses  the  editors  and  business  managers,  and  reviews  the  financial  budgets  of 
all  such  franchised  publications.  The  DukEngineer,  the  official  student  magazine  of  the 
School  of  Engineering,  appears  twice  each  year  and  contains  articles  on  technical  and 
semitechnical  topics  as  well  as  other  matters  of  interest  to  the  school.  WXDU  88.7  FM  is 
the  student-managed  and  programmed  radio  station,  broadcasting  to  the  Duke  and 


Student  Organizations       85 


Durham  communities.  Duke  Union  Community  Television  (Cable  13)  is  operated  by  stu- 
dents and  produces  color  television  programs  that  are  broadcast  throughout  the  campus 
on  the  University  cable  system.  It  also  produces  Yearbook,  Duke's  video  yearbook. 

Project  WILD.  Project  WILD  (Wilderness  Initiatives  for  Learning  at  Duke)  is  a  unique 
student  organization  which,  through  the  ideal  of  experiential  education  (learning  through 
doing),  tries  to  ease  the  transition  period  into  college  for  Duke  students.  Run  totally  by 
students,  the  program  strives  to  teach  self-worth,  group  awareness,  and  an  appreciation 
of  nature.  WILD,  a  ten-day  course  held  prior  to  Orientation  Week,  runs  backpacking  crews 
through  the  North  Carolina  mountains.  In  addition  to  this  August  course,  WILD  also 
sponsors  activities  including  weekend  trips,  house  courses,  March  and  May  wilderness 
courses,  and  a  year-round  ropes  course  available  to  the  entire  University. 

Health,  Physical  Education,  and  Recreation 

Besides  offering  a  variety  of  classes  (see  the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction"),  the 
Department  of  Health,  Physical  Education,  and  Recreation  also  sponsors  numerous  pro- 
grams for  all  students  in  intramurals,  sports  clubs,  and  recreation. 

The  Intramural  Sports  Program  provides  an  opportunity  for  every  student  to  partic- 
ipate in  organized  recreation  competition  in  fifty-two  activities.  The  program  is  comprised 
of  four  major  areas:  men's  intramurals,  women's  intramurals,  co-rec  intramurals,  and 


86       Campus  Life  and  Activities 


recreation  programs.  It  is  open  to  all  graduate  and  undergraduate  students  as  well  as  to 
faculty  and  staff  of  Duke  University.  Participation,  not  skill,  is  a  major  factor  that  is  em- 
phasized in  the  program. 

More  than  thirty-one  sports  clubs  have  been  chartered  by  Duke  students  for  those 
with  similar  interests  to  participate  in  competition  and  recreational  activities.  Clubs  vary 
from  those  which  compete  with  clubs  of  other  universities,  such  as  soccer,  rugby,  and  ice 
hockey,  to  those  of  a  more  recreational  nature  such  as  cycling,  scuba  diving,  and  sailing, 
and  one  which  yearly  presents  several  performances,  the  water  ballet  club. 

The  University's  many  recreational  facilities,  available  to  all  students,  include  the 
championship  Robert  Trent  Jones  Golf  Course,  tennis  courts  (some  lighted)  on  both  cam- 
puses, swimming  pools  on  both  campuses,  three  gymnasiums,  a  weight  training  room, 
squash  and  racquetball  courts,  outdoor  handball  and  basketball  courts,  an  archery  range, 
horseshoe  courts,  an  all-weather  track,  numerous  playing  fields,  jogging  trails,  and  in- 
formal recreational  areas.  Tournaments  in  recreational  sports  are  often  organized  and  con- 
ducted by  students.  Students  may  reserve  facilities  and  equipment  at  designated  times. 

Intercollegiate  Athletics 

The  Athletic  Department  fosters  intercollegiate  athletics  by  striving  for  excellence  and 
by  providing  the  best  possible  framework  within  which  highly  accomplished  student  ath- 
letes can  compete.  The  department  has  a  dual  responsibility  to  provide  a  high-quality 
athletic  program  and  environment  so  that  all  students  have  the  opportunity  to  compete 
to  the  fullest  extent  of  their  abilities.  Duke  is  a  member  of  the  National  Collegiate  Athlet- 
ic Association  and  the  Atlantic  Coast  Conference  ( ACC) .  The  ACC  consists  of  Clemson, 
Duke,  Georgia  Tech,  Maryland,  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina  State,  Vir- 
ginia, and  Wake  Forest. 

The  intercollegiate  program  for  men  includes  football,  cross-country,  basketball, 
swimming,  fencing,  wrestling,  indoor  and  outdoor  track,  baseball,  golf,  tennis,  and  la- 
crosse. The  women's  athletic  program  provides  intercollegiate  competition  in  basketball, 
fencing,  field  hockey,  golf,  soccer,  swimming,  tennis,  volleyball,  indoor  and  outdoor  track, 
and  cross  country.  Freshmen  may  participate  on  all  varsity  teams. 

The  Director  of  Athletics  and  Associate  Director  of  Athletics  provide  departmental 
leadership  and  coordinate  all  athletic  policies  with  the  University  Athletic  Council.  The 
council  consists  of  representatives  from  the  undergraduate  student  body,  the  faculty,  the 
administrative  staff,  the  trustees,  and  the  alumni.  The  council  meets  with  the  Director 
of  Athletics  periodically  during  the  school  year.  The  chairman  of  the  council  is  the  offi- 
cial University  representative  at  national  and  conference  athletic  meetings. 

The  Duke  Student  Honor  Commitment 

"The  Duke  Student  Honor  Commitment"  was  proposed  by  the  members  of  the  class 
of  1982.  Different  from  and  in  addition  to  the  Judicial  Code,  the  Honor  Commitment  is 
a  personal  commitment  of  honor  and  integrity  which  is  self  imposed  and  not  enforced 
by  an  outside  authority. 

Following  is  a  copy  of  this  commitment: 

Aunique  aspect  of  a  liberal  education  is  its  attempt  to  instill  in  the  student  a  sense  of  honor  and  high  princi- 
ples that  extends  beyond  academics.  An  essential  feature  of  Duke  University  is  its  commitment  to  an  atmosphere 
of  integrity  and  ethical  conduct.  As  a  student  of  Duke  University  I  accept  as  my  personal  responsibility  the  vig- 
orous maintenance  of  high  standards  of  honesty,  truth,  fairness,  civility,  and  concern  for  others. 

My  devotion  to  integrity  establishes  that  I  will  not  cheat  in  academic  work,  and  that  I  will  adhere  to  the  es- 
tablished and  required  community  code  of  conduct.  According  to  the  dictates  of  my  own  conscience,  I  will  re- 
port behavior  in  violation  of  such  established  standards.  In  addition  and  beyond  the  requirements  of  any  code 
or  law,  1  confirm  my  own  commitment  to  personal  honor  and  integrity  in  all  matters  large  and  small.  Even  though 
the  ideal  of  honor  is  an  abstract  one,  by  implementing  this  ideal,  I  join  the  men  and  women  of  Duke  University 
in  making  the  concept  of  honor  a  reality. 


The  Duke  Student  Honor  Commitment       87 


Judicial  System  and  Regulations 

Duke  University  expects  and  requires  of  all  its  students  full  cooperation  in  develop- 
ing and  maintaining  high  standards  of  scholarship  and  conduct.  Each  student  is  subject 
to  the  rules  and  regulations  of  the  University  currently  in  effect,  or  which  are  put  into  ef- 
fect from  time  to  time  by  the  appropriate  authorities  of  the  University.  At  the  same  time, 
the  individual  is  responsible  for  decisions  and  choices  within  the  framework  of  the  regu- 
lations of  the  community,  as  Duke  does  not  assume  in  loco  parentis  relationships. 

Students,  in  accepting  admission,  indicate  their  willingness  to  subscribe  to  and  be 
governed  by  these  rules  and  regulations.  They  acknowledge  the  right  of  the  University 
to  take  disciplinary  action,  including  suspension  or  expulsion,  for  f  ailure  to  abide  by  the 
regulations  or  for  other  conduct  adjudged  unsatisfactory  or  detrimental  to  the  University. 

Responsibility  for  prescribing  and  enforcing  rules  and  regulations  governing  student 
conduct  rests  ultimately  with  the  Board  of  Trustees  of  Duke  University  and,  by  delega- 
tion, with  administrative  officers  of  the  University.  In  the  undergraduate  schools,  and 
in  the  University  as  a  whole,  many  of  these  rules  have  been  established  over  the  years 
by  cooperative  action  between  students,  faculty,  and  administrative  officers.  Represen- 
tative student  organizations,  such  as  student  governments  and  judicial  boards,  and  more 
recently,  community-wide  bodies  of  students,  faculty,  and  administrators,  have  initiat- 
ed proposals  for  policies  and  rules  necessary  to  assure  satisfactory  standards  in  academic 
and  nonacademic  conduct.  These  proposals  have  been  accepted  by  University  officers 
and  have  become  a  substantial,  if  not  all-inclusive,  body  of  rules  governing  student  life 
at  Duke.  For  current  regulations,  refer  to  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Information  and 
Regulations. 

Students  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  and  in  the  School  of  Engineering  con- 
stitute an  undergraduate  community  whose  members  are  subject  to  the  Judicial  Code 
of  the  Undergraduate  Community.  Violations  of  the  code  and  of  certain  University  regu- 
lations by  individuals  are  adjudicated  before  the  Undergraduate  Judicial  Board,  composed 
of  representatives  of  the  student  body,  the  faculty,  and  the  administration.  The  Judicial 
Code  of  the  Undergraduate  Community,  the  constitution  of  the  board,  the  procedural 
safeguards,  and  the  rights  of  appeal  guaranteed  to  students  are  published  in  the  Bulletin 
of  Duke  University:  Information  and  Regulations  for  the  undergraduate  community.  As 
provided  in  the  judicial  structure  of  the  University,  each  residential  unit  may  have  a  ju- 
dicial board  which  has  jurisdiction  over  all  offenses  involving  violations  of  regulations 
relating  to  dormitory  procedures  and  social  regulations  not  covered  by  the  undergradu- 
ate community  code  or  University  policies  and  regulations.  The  Residential  Judicial  Board 
may  function  as  an  appellate  body  in  cases  involving  appeals  from  the  individual  house 
judicial  boards  and  has  original  jurisdiction  over  group  violations  of  the  code  as  well  as 
in  disputes  involving  two  or  more  living  groups.  For  further  information,  refer  to  the  Bulle- 
tin of  Duke  University:  Information  and  Regulations. 

Student  Discrimination  Grievance  Procedures 

The  Duke  University  policy  on  nondiscrimination  is  set  forth  on  the  credits  page  of 
this  bulletin.  Procedures  for  investigation  and  remedy  of  any  complaint  and  for  appeal 
of  any  decision  are  detailed  in  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Information  and  Regulations. 

Student  Obligations  and  Requirements 

Students  are  expected  to  meet  academic  requirements  and  financial  obligations,  as 
specified  elsewhere  in  this  bulletin,  in  order  to  remain  in  good  standing.  Certain  nonaca- 
demic rules  and  regulations  must  be  observed  also.  Failure  to  meet  these  requirements 
may  result  in  dismissal  by  the  appropriate  officer  of  the  University. 


88       Campus  Life  and  Activities 


Student  Obligations  and  Requirements       89 


Admission 


Principles  of  Selection 

James  B.  Duke,  in  his  Indenture  of  Trust,  requested  that  "great  care  and  discrimina- 
tion be  exercised  in  admitting  as  students  only  those  whose  previous  record  shows  a 
character,  determination,  and  application  evincing  a  wholesome  and  real  ambition  for 
life."  In  this  light,  and  in  view  of  the  institution's  limited  enrollment,  Duke  University  looks 
beyond  the  basic  characteristics  of  academic  competence  possessed  by  the  majority  of 
applicants.  It  seeks,  in  each  prospective  student,  regardless  of  race,  sex,  color,  religion, 
handicap,  or  national  origin,  not  only  evidence  of  intellectual  promise  and  maturity  of 
judgment,  but  also  a  degree  of  positive  energy.  Often,  this  energy  is  expressed  in  the  form 
of  special  talents  and  accomplishments;  it  is  seen  consistently  in  a  student's  determina- 
tion to  make  creative  use  of  the  opportunities  and  challenges  posed  by  Duke  University. 

Requirements  for  Application 

As  there  are  occasionally  changes  in  admission  policies  or  procedures  after  the  print- 
ing deadline  for  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Undergraduate  Instruction,  candidates  are 
urged  to  consult  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Information  for  Prospective  Students  for  specif- 
ic admissions  information,  dates,  and  policies. 

DEGREE  STATUS 

Although  there  are  no  inflexible  requirements  as  to  subject  matter,  students  are  urged 
to  choose  a  broad  and  challenging  high  school  program .  At  least  twelve  units  of  accepta- 
ble college  preparatory  work  must  be  presented  for  review.  Applicants  to  the  School  of 
Engineering  are  advised  to  take  four  units  of  mathematics  and  at  least  one  unit  of  phys- 
ics or  chemistry. 

The  Scholastic  Aptitude  Test  (SAT),  given  by  the  College  Board,  and  three  achieve- 
ment tests  (one  of  which  must  be  English  Composition,  with  or  without  essay)  are  re- 
quired of  all  candidates  for  freshman  admission  and  must  be  taken  by  the  spring  of  the 
junior  year  for  Early  Decision  and  by  January  of  the  senior  year  for  April  Notification .  Since 
placement  in  foreign  language  study  and  fulfillment  of  the  foreign  language  requirement 
can  be  determined  by  an  Achievement  Test  score,  candidates  who  have  studied  a  foreign 
language  should  take  the  Achievement  Test  in  that  language  by  June  of  the  senior  year 
in  secondary  school.  Candidates  may  submit  results  of  the  American  College  Testing  Pro- 
gram (ACT)  in  lieu  of  SAT  and  Achievement  Test  scores,  provided  the  test  is  taken  by  De- 
cember of  the  senior  year  for  April  Notification  applicants  and  by  June  of  the  junior  year 
for  Early  Decision  applicants;  the  scores  must  be  made  available  to  the  Admissions 

Requirements  for  Application       91 


Committee  thirty  days  before  the  decision  date.  Candidates  for  the  School  of  Engineer- 
ing who  elect  to  take  the  College  Board  test  battery  are  required  to  take  an  Achievement 
Test  in  mathematics,  either  level  1  or  level  2. 

NONDEGREE  STATUS 

Summer  Session.  Persons  who  are  or  were  at  the  time  of  leaving  their  home  institu- 
tions in  good  standing  in  accredited  colleges  or  universities  may  be  admitted  for  sum- 
mer study  only  by  the  Director  of  the  Summer  Session. 

Continuing  Education.  Admission  as  a  nondegree  student  at  Duke  is  limited  to:  peo- 
ple residing  in  the  area  who,  because  of  family  and  work  responsibilities,  have  no  other 
access  to  education;  Duke  graduates  of  the  preceding  year;  people  who  will  be  moving 
to  the  area  and  who  will  reside  here  for  a  substantial  period  of  time;  local  high  school  stu- 
dents; and  Duke  University  employees.  These  students  are  given  academic  and  career 
counseling  by  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education;  they  are  subject  to  most  of  the  regula- 
tions set  forth  for  degree  candidates. 

Application  Procedures 

DEGREE  STATUS 

A  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Information  for  Prospective  Students,  which  contains  the 
first  part  of  the  application,  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  Undergraduate  Admis- 
sions, Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706.  A  nonrefundable  processing  fee 
of  $50  must  accompany  the  first  part  of  the  application. 

A  personal  interview  at  Duke  is  not  required  for  admission;  students  who  find  it  pos- 
sible to  visit  the  campus,  however,  may  call  or  write  for  an  interview.  Area  alumni  inter- 
views are  also  available  for  most  applicants  after  Part  I  of  the  application  has  been  filed. 
Interviews  cannot  be  granted  from  January  through  April,  when  applications  are  under 
review. 

April  Notification.  Candidates  for  admission  to  the  freshman  class  must  submit  the 
first  part  of  the  application  by  December  1  and  final  applications  no  later  than  January 
1  of  their  senior  year  in  secondary  school.  Decisions  are  mailed  from  the  University  by 
April  15,  and  accepted  candidates  are  expected  to  reserve  a  place  in  the  class  by  May  1 
with  a  nonrefundable  deposit  of  $500. 

Early  Decision.  Students  with  superior  credentials  for  whom  Duke  is  a  clear  first 
choice  may  apply  for  early  decision.  Candidates  who  apply  for  early  decision  are  required 
to  sign  a  statement  confirming  their  commitment  to  enroll  at  Duke  if  they  are  admitted 
in  the  early  decision  process  and  to  withdraw  applications  from  other  colleges  and  univer- 
sities as  soon  as  they  learn  of  their  admission  to  Duke.  Secondary  school  counselors  and 
parents  are  also  asked  to  sign  the  early  decision  agreement. 

Students  applying  for  early  decision  should  submit  the  first  part  of  the  application 
by  October  1.  Deadline  for  final  applications  is  November  1.  The  SAT  or  the  ACT  must 
be  taken  in  the  spring  of  the  junior  year.  Achievement  Tests  should  also  be  taken  in  the 
spring  since  early  decision  applicants  who  have  not  completed  their  Achievement  Tests 
will  be  deferred  to  April  notification.  Applicants  are  notified  of  their  status— admit,  de- 
fer, or  reject— by  December  15.  Admitted  students  pay  a  nonrefundable  deposit  of  $500 
by  January  5.  The  credentials  of  candidates  who  are  deferred  are  considered  along  with 
those  of  students  who  request  an  April  15  decision .  Deferred  students  are  no  longer  bound 
by  the  early  decision  agreement  and  are  free  to  accept  offers  of  admission  from  other  col- 
leges and  universities. 

This  plan  is  designed  to  give  exceptional  students  who  know  Duke  is  their  first  choice 
a  means  of  indicating  that  commitment  to  the  University  and  of  receiving  a  decision  ear- 
ly enough  to  eliminate  the  necessity  of  applying  to  several  colleges. 


92       Admission 


Midyear  Admission.  Midyear  admission  allows  a  limited  number  of  freshmen  to  be- 
gin their  college  work  a  semester  early  or  to  postpone  matriculation  for  a  semester.  Mid- 
year applicants  are  expected  to  complete  all  the  requirements  for  fall  admission.  The  ap- 
plication deadline  for  new  candidates  is  September  15  for  the  first  part  of  the  application 
and  October  15  for  the  final  application;  students  will  be  notified  of  the  decision  on  their 
applications  by  November  15,  with  the  expectation  that  those  who  are  accepted  will  re- 
ply by  December  1  with  a  nonrefundable  deposit  of  $500. 

Transfer  Admission.  Transfer  admission  from  other  accredited  institutions  may  be 
arranged  for  a  limited  number  of  students  each  semester.  Because  the  transcript  of  at  least 
a  full  year  of  academic  work  is  preferred  by  the  Admissions  Committee,  and  because  trans- 
fer students  are  required  to  spend  their  last  two  years  at  Duke,  most  candidates  apply  to 
Duke  during  their  third  or  fourth  semester  in  college.  Candidates  submit  official  tran- 
scripts of  all  work  completed  at  other  accredited  colleges,  high  school  records,  scores  on 
the  Scholastic  Aptitude  Test,  and  employment  records  if  there  has  been  an  extended  peri- 
od of  employment  since  graduation  from  secondary  school,  along  with  completed  ap- 
plication forms.  See  the  section  on  transfer  credit  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures 
and  Information."  Transfer  students  are  eligible  for  university  housing. 

June  (Term  II,  summer  session)  and  September  (fall  semester)  transfer  students  meet 
a  March  1  deadline  for  the  first  part  of  the  application  and  an  April  1  final  application  dead- 
line, learn  of  their  decisions  by  May  15,  and  respond  to  the  University  by  June  1  with  a 
nonrefundable  deposit  of  $400  or  $500,  if  housing  is  requested .  January  transfer  students 
submit  the  first  part  of  the  application  by  September  15  and  final  applications  by  October 
15,  learn  of  their  decisions  by  November  15,  and  reply  to  the  University  by  December  1. 

NONDEGREE  STATUS 

Summer  Session.  Application  forms  and  schedules  of  courses  may  be  obtained  by 
writing  or  calling  the  Office  of  the  Summer  Session,  121  Allen  Building,  Duke  University, 
Durham,  North  Carolina  27706;  (919)  684-2621.  No  application  fee  is  required. 

Continuing  Education.  Applications  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  Undergradu- 
ate Admissions  and  must  be  returned  to  that  office,  accompanied  by  a  $35  application  fee, 
by  August  1  for  the  fall  semester  and  by  December  1  for  the  spring  semester. 

A  certain  grade  point  average  over  four  courses  must  be  attained  before  a  provision- 
al degree  student  may  petition  for  degree  candidancy.  More  detailed  information  on  non- 
degree  course  work  through  Continuing  Education  is  available  from  the  Office  of  Con- 
tinuing Education,  The  Bishop's  House,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27708. 

READMISSION  OF  FORMER  STUDENTS 

A  student  who  desires  to  return,  following  withdrawal  from  college,  should  apply 
to  the  appropriate  college  or  school.  (See  the  section  on  readmission  procedures  in  the 
chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and  Information.")  Students  who  have  been  withdrawn 
from  the  University  for  five  or  more  years  must  submit  a  new  application  to  the  Office 
of  Undergraduate  Admissions. 


Application  Procedures       93 


Financial  Information 


Tuition  and  Fees 

No  college  or  university  can  honestly  state  that  an  education  at  the  college  level  is  in- 
expensive. Fees  paid  by  students  cover  less  than  half  the  cost  of  their  instruction  and  the 
operation  of  the  University.  Income  from  endowment  and  contributions  from  alumni  and 
other  concerned  individuals  meet  the  balance  and  assure  each  student  the  opportunity 
to  pursue  an  education  of  unusually  high  quality. 

Students  are  urged  to  give  their  attention  first  to  the  selection  of  institutions  which 
meet  their  intellectual  and  personal  needs,  and  then  to  the  devising  of  a  sound  plan  for 
meeting  the  cost  of  their  education.  This  process  will  require  an  in-depth  knowledge  of 
both  the  University's  financial  aid  program  and  the  resources  of  the  student's  family.  A 
brochure  describing  in  detail  the  various  forms  of  financial  aid  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Office  of  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Estimated  Expenses*  Certain  basic  expenditures,  such  as  tuition,  room,  and  board, 
are  considered  in  preparing  a  student's  budget.  These  necessary  expenditures,  with  a 
reasonable  amount  allotted  for  miscellaneous  items,  are  shown  below: 


Academic  Year,  1989-90 

Tu'o  Summer  Terms,  1989 

Tuition 

(two  semesters) 

[one  semester  equivalent) 

Pre-1988  Matriculants 

$11,350+ 

$3,684-$4,298 

1988  and  Later  Matriculants 

$12,800+ 

$3,684-$4,298 

Residential  Fee 

Single  Room 

$2,312-$3,034 

$1,348 

Double  Room 

$l,738-$2,287 

$674 

Food 

100%  board  plan 

$2,460 

$1,030 

75%  board  plan 

$2,040 

$770 

Books  and  Supplies 

$498 

$243 

Student  Health  Fee 

$256 

$82 

tFor  the  School  of  Engineering,  the  tuition  for  pre-1988  matriculants  is  $1 2,400;  for  1988  and  later  matriculants, 
$13,575. 

It  should  be  realized  that  additional  expenses  will  be  incurred  which  will  depend  to 
a  large  extent  upon  the  tastes  and  habits  of  the  individual.  The  average  Duke  student, 
however,  can  plan  on  a  budget  of  approximately  $18,950  for  1988  and  later  matriculants 
and  $17, 500  for  pre-1988  matriculants  for  the  academic  year*  The  budget  estimate  for  the 
summer  (two  terms,  one  semester  equivalent)  is  $6,250*  These  budgets  are  all-inclusive 
except  for  travel  costs  and  major  clothing  purchases. 


The  figures  in  this  section  are  projections  and  are  subject  to  change. 


Tuition  and  Fees       95 


Registration  Fees  and  Deposits  for  Fall  and  Spring.  On  notification  of  acceptance, 
students  are  required  to  pay  a  nonrefundable  first  registration  fee  of  $40  and  to  make  a 
deposit  of  $460.  The  deposit  will  not  be  refunded  to  accepted  applicants  who  fail  to  matric- 
ulate. For  those  who  do  matriculate,  $100  of  the  deposit  serves  as  a  continuing  residen- 
tial deposit  for  successive  semesters,  and  the  remaining  $360  serves  as  a  continuing  regis- 
tration deposit. 

Late  Registration.  Continuing  students  who  fail  to  register  during  the  registration  peri- 
od must  pay  a  fee  of  $50  to  the  Bursar. 

ROTC  Deposit.  An  Air  Force  ROTC  deposit  of  $10  is  required  of  students  enrolling  in 
air  science  to  cover  possible  loss  of  military  equipment  issued  to  them.  This  deposit  is 
refunded  to  the  student  upon  return  of  issued  equipment. 

Part-Time  Students.  In  the  regular  academic  year  students  who  register  for  not  more 
than  two  courses  in  a  semester  are  classified  as  part-time  students.  Part-time  students 
will  be  charged  at  the  following  rates :  one  course,  pre-1988  matriculants  $1,419, 1988  and 
later  matriculants  $1,600  (for  engineering  courses,  $1,550  and  $1,697);  half  course,  pre-1988 
matriculants  $709.50, 1988  and  later  matriculants  $800  (for  engineering  courses,  $775  and 
$848.50);  quarter  course,  pre-1988  matriculants  $354.75, 1988  and  later  matriculants  $400 
(for  engineering  courses,  $387.50  and  $424.25).  Registration  for  more  than  two  courses 
requires  payment  of  full  tuition .  Graduate  students  registered  for  undergraduate  courses 
will  be  assessed  three  units  for  nonlaboratory  courses  and  four  units  for  laboratory  courses. 
Men  and  women  in  nondegree  programs  who  are  being  considered  for  admission  to  de- 
gree programs,  as  designated  by  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education,  pay  fees  by  the  course 
at  the  pre-1988  matriculant  rate  whether  the  course  load  is  one,  two,  or  three  courses. 
Auditing  one  or  more  courses  without  charge  is  allowed  for  students  paying  full  fees, 
provided  that  the  consent  of  the  instructor  is  obtained .  Students  who  are  enrolled  for  one 
or  two  courses  may  audit  other  courses  by  payment  of  $142  for  pre-1988  matriculants,  $160 
for  1988  and  later  matriculants  ($155  and  $170  for  engineering)  for  each  course  audited. 
With  the  consent  of  the  appropriate  instructor  and  the  Director  of  Continuing  Education, 
graduates  of  Duke  may  audit  undergraduate  courses  for  the  above  payment  per  course 
at  the  pre-1988  matriculant  rate. 

Payment  of  Accounts  for  Fall  and  Spring.  The  Office  of  the  Bursar  will  issue  invoices 
to  registered  students  for  tuition,  fees,  and  other  charges  approximately  four  to  six  weeks 
prior  to  the  beginning  of  classes  each  semester.  The  total  amount  due  on  the  invoice  is  pay- 
able by  the  invoice  late  payment  date  which  is  normally  one  week  prior  to  the  beginning 
of  classes.  As  part  of  the  admission  agreement  to  Duke  University,  a  student  is  required 
to  pay  all  invoices  as  presented.  If  full  payment  is  not  received,  a  late  payment  charge  as 
described  below  will  be  assessed  on  the  next  invoice  and  certain  restrictions  as  stated  below 
will  be  applied.  Failure  to  receive  an  invoice  does  not  warrant  exemption  from  the  pay- 
ment of  tuition  and  fees  nor  from  the  penalties  and  restrictions.  Nonregistered  students 
will  be  required  to  make  payment  for  tuition,  fees,  required  deposits,  and  any  past  due 
balance  at  the  time  of  registration. 

Multiple  Payment  Plan .  The  Multiple  Payment  Plan  allows  students  and  their  parents 
to  pay  part  or  all  of  the  annual  financial  obligations  for  tuition,  room,  and  board  in  nine 
equal  installments.  An  annual  nonrefundable  participation  fee  is  charged,  but  no  interest 
is  charged .  The  initial  payment  is  made  by  check  and  subsequent  payments  are  made  by 
bank  drafts.  Questions  regarding  this  plan  should  be  directed  to  the  Office  of  the  Bursar, 
101  Allen  Building,  (919)  684-3531. 

Guaranteed  Tuition  Plan.  The  Guaranteed  Tuition  Plan  offers  undergraduate  freshmen 
who  are  not  recipients  of  University  supported  financial  aid  and  their  parents  the  oppor- 
tunity of  paying  four  years  of  tuition  in  forty-four  installments.  The  tuition  is  guaranteed 
at  the  freshmen  fall  semester  rate  and  financed  at  a  set  rate  of  interest.  The  initial  payment 
is  made  by  check  and  subsequent  payments  are  made  by  bank  drafts.  Questions  regard- 
ing this  plan  should  be  directed  to  the  Office  of  the  Bursar,  101  Allen  Building,  (919) 
684-3531. 

96       Financial  Information 


Tuition  Prepayment  Plan.  The  Tuition  Prepayment  Plan  offers  undergraduate  fresh- 
men who  are  not  recipients  of  University-supported  financial  aid  and  their  parents  the 
opportunity  of  paying  four  years  of  tuition  on  or  before  July  31  preceding  the  start  of  the 
freshman  year  at  the  freshmen  rate  for  the  upcoming  academic  year.  Future  tuition  in- 
creases will  not  be  passed  along  to  participants  for  the  duration  of  their  plan .  Participants 
must  also  pay  a  nonrefundable  participation  fee. 

Late  Payment  Charge.  If  the  total  amount  due  on  an  invoice  is  not  received  by  the  in- 
voice late  payment  date,  the  next  invoice  will  show  a  penalty  charge  of  1  %  percent  per 
month  assessed  on  the  past  due  balance  regardless  of  the  number  of  days  past  due.  The 
past  due  balance  is  defined  as  the  previous  balance  less  any  payments  and  credits  received 
on  or  before  the  late  payment  date  and  also  any  student  loan  or  scholarship  memo  credits 
related  to  the  previous  balance  which  appear  on  the  invoice. 

Restrictions.  An  individual  will  be  in  default  of  this  agreement  if  the  total  amount  due 
on  the  student  invoice  is  not  paid  in  full  by  the  invoice  late  payment  date.  An  individual 
who  is  in  default  will  not  be  allowed  to  register  for  classes,  receive  a  copy  of  the  academic 
transcript,  have  academic  credits  certified,  be  granted  a  leave  of  absence,  or  receive  a  diplo- 
ma at  graduation.  In  addition,  an  individual  in  default  may  be  subject  to  withdrawal  from 
school. 

Tuition  and  Fees  for  Summer  Session.  Tuition  for  undergraduates  is  $921  for  each 
nonlaboratory  or  3  semester  hour  (s.  h . )  course,  $1, 228  for  each  laboratory  or  4  s.h .  course, 
$614  for  each  half  course  (2  s.h.),  and  $1,842  for  each  one  and  one-half  course  program 
(6  s.h.)  offered  at  the  Marine  Laboratory. 

Tuition  for  graduate  students  taking  an  undergraduate  course  is  as  indicated  above. 

Health  Fee.  All  Duke  students  and  all  full-time  non-Duke  students  are  required  to  pay 
$41  per  term.  All  students  at  the  Marine  Laboratory  are  required  to  pay  $34  per  five-week 
registration  period. 

Studio  Fee.  A  fee  of  $40  will  be  charged  for  each  studio  art  class. 

Music  Fee.  A  fee  of  $100  will  be  charged  for  Music  081  and  085.  A  fee  of  $200  will  be 
charged  for  Music  091  and  095. 

Auditing  Fees.  With  permission  of  the  instructor  and  the  Director  of  the  Summer  Ses- 
sion, students  registered  for  a  full  course  program  (two  courses)  may  audit  nonlaborato- 
ry courses  except  physical  education  and  dance  activity  courses,  studio  art  courses,  ap- 
plied music  courses  and  foreign  programs.  No  extra  charge  is  made. 

Students  carrying  less  than  a  full  course  program  may  be  granted  permission  by  the 
instructor  and  the  Director  of  the  Summer  Session  to  audit  a  course  (the  above  exceptions 
apply)  but  must  pay  half  the  University  fee  for  the  course. 

Payment  of  Tuition  and  Fees.  The  University  does  not  mail  statements  for  summer  ses- 
sion tuition  and  fees.  All  summer  tuition  and  fees  and  any  past  due  balance  should  be 
paid  in  the  Office  of  the  Bursar  (101  Allen  Building)  at  least  five  full  working  days  prior 
to  the  first  day  of  class  (see  Summer  Session  calendar) .  Students  registering  by  mail  may 
forward  payment  to  the  Office  of  the  Bursar,  101  Allen  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham, 
North  Carolina  27706.  Students  who  fail  to  pay  tuition  and  fees  and/or  otherwise  fail  to 
clear  with  the  Bursar  by  the  end  of  the  drop/add  period  will  be  withdrawn  from  their 
courses.  These  withdrawn  students  will  be  billed  the  health  fee  and  an  administrative 
withdrawal  fee  of  $150  per  course  ($75  per  half-course)  and  receive  a  "W"  for  each  course 
for  which  they  were  registered.  (See  the  section  on  Refunds  and  Administrative  With- 
drawal Charges  concerning  penalties  in  this  chapter).  Students  who,  subsequent  to  with- 
drawal, clear  with  the  Bursar  may,  with  written  permission  of  their  academic  dean,  be 
reinstated  in  their  classes  as  originally  registered  and  receive  regular  grades  instead  of 
"Ws."  The  administrative  withdrawal  fee  will  stand  and  the  student  will  be  liable  for  full 
tuition  and  fees.  Students  who  are  unable  to  meet  these  deadlines  should  consult  with 
the  Bursar  and  their  academic  dean  prior  to  the  deadline. 

Tuition  and  Fees       97 


98       Financial  Information 


Late  Fee.  Students  who  fail  to  register  and  pay  all  tuition  and  fees  before  five  full  work- 
ing days  prior  to  the  first  scheduled  class  day  of  a  given  course  will  pay  an  extra  charge 
of  $25. 

Transcripts.  Requests  for  transcripts  of  academic  records  should  be  directed  to  the 
Associate  Registrar.  Ten  days  should  be  allowed  for  processing.  A  fee  of  $2,  payable  in 
advance,  is  charged  for  each  copy. 

Duke  Employees.  With  the  permission  of  their  supervisors,  employees  may,  through 
the  Office  of  Continuing  Education,  take  up  to  two  courses  for  credit  or  audit  during  any 
one  semester  or  one  during  a  summer  term .  A  formal  application  for  credit  course  work 
must  be  submitted  by  August  1  for  the  fall  semester  or  December  1  for  the  spring  semes- 
ter. No  formal  application  is  required  for  auditing.  Half-time  employees  with  one  or  more 
years  of  service  who  receive  permission  to  take  such  courses  will  be  charged  one-half  the 
tuition  rate  shown  above  for  part-time  students  during  the  fall  and  spring  and  one-half 
of  the  summer  tuition  rate.  This  benefit  applies  only  to  nondegree  work.  Full-time  (thir- 
ty or  more  hours  a  week)  employees  with  two  or  more  years  of  service  who  receive  per- 
mission to  take  such  courses  will  be  charged  one-tenth  the  tuition  rate  for  credit  course 
work  and  will  be  permitted  to  audit  at  no  charge.  This  benefit  continues  after  degree  can- 
didacy has  been  attained.  Eligible  employees  should  consult  the  Benefits  Office,  705  Broad 
Street  (919)  684-6723,  at  least  one  week  in  advance  of  payment  date  to  obtain  the  appropri- 
ate tuition  voucher.  The  Director  of  Continuing  Education  is  available  to  advise  Duke  em- 
ployees on  educational  matters  (684-6259). 

Living  Expenses* 

Housing  for  Fall  and  Spring.  In  dormitories  for  undergraduate  students  the  hous- 
ing fee  for  a  single  room  ranges  from  $2,312  to  $3,034  for  the  academic  year;  for  a  double 
room,  the  fee  ranges  from  $1,738  to  $2,287  per  occupant. 

To  reserve  University  housing  for  the  fall  semester,  returning  students  who  are  eligible 
for  and  wish  to  occupy  such  housing  must  make  a  $50  prepayment  of  the  housing  fee  at 
a  designated  time  during  the  spring  semester. 

Detailed  information  concerning  the  student's  obligations  under  the  housing  con- 
tract and  the  consequences  of  failure  to  comply  are  published  in  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  Univer- 
sity: Information  and  Regulations. 

Housing  for  Summer.  For  detailed  information  on  types  and  costs  of  accommoda- 
tions available  at  Duke  University  for  the  summer  session  write:  Department  of  Hous- 
ing Management,  218  Alexander  Avenue,  Apartment  B,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27705. 

Food  and  Other  Expenses.  University  Food  Services  and  Duke  University  Store  oper- 
ations are  located  on  campus  to  serve  the  needs  of  the  Duke  community.  The  University 
identification  card,  known  as  THE  DUKE  CARD,  can  be  used  to  gain  access  to  prepaid 
accounts  and  make  purchases  in  many  Duke  University  facilities. 

There  are  two  accounts:  the  dining  account,  used  to  purchase  food  items  in  Univer- 
sity Food  Services  and  Duke  Stores  operations;  and  the  flexible  spending  account,  used 
to  purchase  any  goods  or  services  from  Food  Services,  Duke  Stores,  and  other  operations. 

All  students  living  in  campus  residence  halls  are  required  to  participate  in  the  din- 
ing plan  account  and  may  choose  one  of  five  plans  ranging  in  cost  from  $660  to  $1,230  per 
semester.  The  flexible  spending  account  is  optional  and  may  be  set  for  $50  or  more. 

Information  regarding  these  accounts  is  sent  to  matriculating  students.  For  more  in- 
formation about  campus  retail  and  food  facilities,  see  the  chapter  "Campus  Life"  in  this 
bulletin. 


The  figures  contained  in  this  section  are  projections  and  are  subject  to  change  prior  to  the  beginning  of 
the  fall  1989  semester. 


Living  Expenses       99 


Fall  and  Spring  Refunds 

In  the  case  of  withdrawal  from  the  University,  students  or  their  parents  may  elect  to 
have  tuition  refunded  or  carried  forward  as  a  credit  for  later  study  according  to  the 
following  schedule: 

Withdrawal  Refund 

Before  classes  begin  Full  amount 

During  first  or  second  week  80  percent 

During  third,  fourth,  or  fifth  week  60  percent 

During  sixth  week  20  percent 

After  sixth  week  None 

Tuition  charges  paid  from  grants  or  loans  will  be  restored  to  those  funds  on  the  same 
pro  rata  basis  and  will  not  be  refunded  or  carried  forward .  In  the  event  of  death,  a  full  tu- 
ition, fees,  and  residence  hall  refund  will  be  granted.  Also,  the  outstanding  balance  of 
the  food  service  board  plan  will  be  refunded. 

In  the  case  of  dropping  special  fee  courses  (e.g.  music,  art,  golf),  or  of  part-time  stu- 
dents dropping  audit  courses,  a  full  refund  will  be  granted  students  during  the  drop-add 
period.  Students  changing  status  to  part-time  are  required  to  request  permission  at  the 
time  of  preregistration;  therefore,  no  refunds  are  granted  during  the  drop/add  period  or 
subsequently  for  changes  which  involve  carrying  less  than  a  full-time  load. 

The  registration  deposit  will  be  refunded  to  students  whom  the  University  does  not 
permit  to  return,  who  graduate,  or  who  request  the  refund  prior  to  registration,  thereby 
indicating  their  intention  not  to  return  for  the  following  semester.  The  registration  de- 
posit will  not  be  refunded  to  students  who  register  for  the  following  semester  but  fail  to 
enter.  Arrangements  for  refund  of  the  $100  residential  deposit  are  described  in  the  hous- 
ing contract. 

Summer  Administrative  Withdrawal  Charges  and  Refunds* 

Drop  or  Administrative  Withdrawal  Charges.  Students  who  will  not  be  attending  a  sum- 
mer term  or  course  for  which  they  have  registered  (i.e. ,  have  submitted  a  course  card)  must 
officially  drop  the  course(s)  prior  to  the  beginning  of  the  term  whether  or  not  they  have 
paid  tuition  and  fees.  (See  the  section  on  course  changes  for  the  summer  term  in  the  chap- 
ter 'Academic  Procedures  and  Information.")  Students  who  fail  to  drop  the  course(s)  prior 
to  the  beginning  of  the  term  will  be  charged  $150  per  course  ($75  per  half-course)  plus 
the  health  fee. 

Refunds  (Except  Foreign  Programs).  Students  who  will  not  be  attending  a  summer  term 
or  course  for  which  tuition  and  fees  have  been  paid  are  eligible  for  refunds  following  these 
policies: 

1 .  There  is  no  refund  of  tuition  and  fees  if  the  student  drops  a  course(s)  or  withdraws 
from  the  term  after  the  third  day. 

2.  Full  tuition  less  $150  per  course  ($75  per  half-course)  is  refunded  if  the  student 
officially  drops  a  course(s)  or  withdraws  from  the  term  during  the  first  three  days. 
The  health  fee  is  not  refunded.  (There  is  no  charge  for  drop/adds  that  result  in 
no  change  in  course  load  in  the  same  term.) 

3.  Full  tuition  and  fees  are  refunded  if  the  student  officially  drops  a  course(s)  or  with- 
draws from  the  term  before  the  first  day. 

Student  Aid 

Duke  University  is  strongly  committed  to  its  financial  aid  program  and  for  the  four 
years  of  undergraduate  enrollment  will  meet  100  percent  of  the  demonstrated  need  of 


This  policy  does  not  apply  to  foreign  program  students. 

100         Financial  Information 


each  eligible  admitted  student.  The  University's  aid  program  includes  both  merit  and 
need-based  scholarships,  work-study,  the  Pell  grant  program,  the  Perkins  Loan  (formerly 
National  Direct  Student  Loan  Program),  the  Stafford  Student  Loan  Program  (formerly 
Guaranteed  Student  Loan  Program).  Students  needing  assistance  are  strongly  en- 
couraged to  apply  for  financial  aid.  Students  receiving  financial  aid  will  be  notified  at  the 
same  time  that  they  are  offered  admission. 

For  the  student  with  demonstrated  need,  the  net  cost  of  an  education  at  Duke  Univer- 
sity will  generally  be  no  greater  than  that  for  attendance  at  any  college  or  university.  It 
is  the  intention  of  the  Office  of  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid  to  set  each  award  at  a  level 
consistent  with  a  student's  ability  to  meet  the  costs  of  attending  Duke  University.  This 
will  be  done  by  taking  into  consideration  the  contribution  that  can  reasonably  be  expect- 
ed from  the  student,  the  family,  and  any  available  outside  sources.  During  the  current 
academic  year,  over  forty  percent  of  the  student  body  receives  more  than  seventeen  mil- 
lion dollars  in  aid  of  various  types. 

Financial  Aid  for  Entering  Freshmen.  Candidates  should  initiate  their  application 
for  financial  aid  concurrently  with  their  application  for  admission  during  the  fall  semes- 
ter of  their  senior  year  in  secondary  school.  Instructions  concerning  the  specific  require- 
ments and  deadline  dates  will  accompany  application  materials.  The  Financial  Aid  Form 
(FAF)  must  be  submitted  to  the  College  Scholarship  Service.  In  divorce  cases,  the  Univer- 
sity requires  both  parents  to  complete  and  submit  a  FAF  which  may  be  obtained  either  from 
a  high  school  guidance  counselor  or  from  the  Financial  Aid  Office.  A  notarized  copy  of 
all  pages,  including  schedules  and  attachments,  of  the  parents'  and  student's  current  Fed- 
eral Income  Tax  Form  must  be  submitted  to  the  Financial  Aid  Office  on  or  before  May  1. 
Information  provided  on  the  FAF  will  be  verified  through  the  use  of  the  tax  return. 

Financial  aid  recipients  wishing  to  operate  a  motor  vehicle  on  campus  must  first  reg- 
ister it  with  the  Financial  Aid  Office.  As  an  automobile  represents  an  asset,  the  value  of 
a  financial  aid  recipient's  car  will  be  considered  in  the  estimation  of  a  student's  need .  As 
a  general  rule,  a  student's  annual  contribution  will  be  increased  by  35  percent  of  the  val- 
ue of  the  car. 

Renewal  of  Financial  Aid  after  the  Freshman  Year.  Each  year  students  must  file  an 
application  for  renewal  of  financial  aid.  This  application  must  include  a  new  Financial 
Aid  Form  and  a  notarized  copy  of  all  pages,  including  schedules  and  attachments,  of  the 
parents'  and  student's  current  federal  income  tax  return.  Application  packets  may  be 
picked  up  in  the  Financial  Aid  Office  in  mid-December. 

To  have  financial  aid  renewed,  a  student  must  meet  the  continuation  requirements 
outlined  on  pages  23,  24,  and  41,  42,  as  appropriate.  Students  not  qualifying  for  finan- 
cial aid  due  to  their  inability  to  meet  these  requirements  may  appeal  directly  to  the  Finan- 
cial Aid  Office.  Students  holding  merit  scholarships  are  required  to  maintain  an  average 
considerably  higher  than  the  minimum  required  for  need-based  financial  aid  recipients. 
Specific  details  regarding  retention  standards  are  outlined  on  page  102  and  will  be  provid- 
ed to  scholarship  winners. 

Summer  School  Financial  Aid.  Financial  aid  is  available  for  each  summer  session. 
Interested  students  can  obtain  specific  details  as  to  available  funding  and  an  application 
through  the  Financial  Aid  Office  in  March  of  each  year. 

Types  of  Financial  Aid.  Gift  scholarships  or  grants,  long-term  loans,  and  employ- 
ment are  integral  parts  of  the  financial  aid  program,  and  some  portion  of  the  aid  offered 
an  undergraduate  is  normally  in  each  of  these  forms. 

The  work-study  opportunity  and  loan(s)  offered  as  financial  aid  are  considered  to 
be  the  self-help  portion  of  the  award.  The  standard  aid  package  at  Duke  provides  that 
the  first  $2,500  to  $3,900  of  each  student's  need  be  awarded  in  the  form  of  self-help  funds. 
Funds  awarded  in  excess  of  this  amount  will  generally  be  grant  funds.  This  combination 
of  University  grant  funds  and  opportunities  for  self-help  enables  Duke  to  extend  its 


Student  Aid         101 


resources  to  a  larger  number  of  deserving  students.  A  student  may  choose  not  to  accept 
any  portion  of  an  aid  award  with  the  understanding  that  the  responsibility  for  provid- 
ing the  dollar  equivalent  is  accepted  by  the  individual. 

Duke  has  several  scholarships  based  on  need  which  are  available  from  personal  en- 
dowments and  corporations.  Some  are  intended  for  entering  freshmen,  whereas  others 
are  awarded  to  upperclass  students.  These  scholarships  may  be  based  on  achievement 
in  a  particular  field  or  on  an  outstanding  overall  record. 

Gift  Scholarships.  The  following  are  among  the  named  gift  scholarships  offered 
through  Duke  University.  Where  specified,  these  scholarships  are  renewable  for  four  (4) 
years  for  those  students  meeting  the  following  academic  standards: 

Renewable  merit  scholarships  will  be  continued  for  freshmen  who  complete  the  first 
year  of  studies  with  a  2.8  average  or  higher.  Upperclass  students  must  complete  each  aca- 
demic year  with  a  3.0  average  or  higher.  Students  failing  to  meet  these  standards  will  be 
placed  on  probation  for  one  semester  during  which  they  must  maintain  a  3.0  average  or 
higher.  Failure  to  maintain  a  3.0  average  or  higher  in  subsequent  semesters  will  lead  to 
cancellation  of  the  scholarship. 

Angier  B.  Duke  Memorial  Scholarships.  The  Angier  B.  Duke  Memorial  Scholarships,  competitively  awarded 
on  the  basis  of  academic  merit,  have  been  established  to  encourage  the  intellectual  achievement  of  men  and  women 
by  recognizing  those  who  possess  outstanding  academic  and  leadership  abilities.  Candidates  are  selected  on 
the  basis  of  intellectual  performance,  creative  talent,  and  promise  of  being  eventual  leaders  in  whatever  field  of 
endeavor  they  choose.  The  scholarship  is  a  four-year  program  (eight  semesters),  and  a  student's  continuation 
in  the  program  is  contingent  upon  good  academic  performance.  All  1988-89  freshman  scholarship  holders  received 
$11 ,340  if  enrolled  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  and  $1 1,950  if  enrolled  in  the  School  of  Engineering. 
Approximately  twenty  scholarships  are  awarded  each  year.  Students  demonstrating  additional  need  will  receive 
a  grant  from  Duke  University  funds  up  to  the  amount  needed .  All  Angier  B.  Duke  Scholars  participate  in  a  six- 
week  summer  study  program  at  Oxford  University  in  England  after  the  junior  year.  Under  the  program  the  scholar- 
ship pays  tuition,  single  room  accommodation,  full  board,  designated  excursions  for  all  scholars,  and  an  allowance 
for  transatlantic  air  fare  between  New  York  and  London.  Those  choosing  not  to  participate  in  the  Oxford  pro- 
gram are  eligible  for  a  $2,000  grant  for  an  approved  independent  project .  At  least  one  of  the  four  years  of  the  scholar- 
ship could  be  used  abroad  on  an  approved  program. 

W.  N.  Reynolds  Memorial  Scholarships.  Recipients  of  these  awards  are  students  with  outstanding  ability  and/or 
need  who  show  promise  of  constructive  leadership.  In  considering  candidates  for  the  awards,  consideration  will 
be  given  in  the  following  order:  (1)  children  of  employees  of  R.  J.  Reynolds  Tobacco  Company  or  any  of  its  affili- 
ates or  subsidiaries;  (2)  children  of  families  residing  in  Forsyth  County,  North  Carolina;  and  (3)  other  candidates 
who  are  residents  or  natives  of  North  Carolina.  There  are  a  number  of  awards  available  for  each  freshman  class 
with  a  value  of  $500  to  $3,900  annually. 

A.  ].  Fletcher  Scholarships.  These  music  department  scholarships  are  given  to  students  who  can  demonstrate, 
by  tape  or  audition,  talent  and  achievement  in  instrumental  or  vocal  performance.  These  awards  are  at  least  $500 
per  year  and  are  renewable  annually  for  up  to  four  years.  Although  recipients  are  not  required  to  major  in  mu- 
sic, they  are  required  to  study  privately  and  to  participate  in  departmental  performing  groups. 

Lionel  Hampton  Scholarship.  This  award  of  $500(not  renewable)  is  given  to  an  incoming  freshman  who  demon- 
strates high  proficiency  in  a  musical  instrument  and  strong  potential  in  jazz  performance. 

United  Methodist  Scholarships.  A  number  of  United  Methodist  Scholarships  are  available  on  a  basis  of  demon- 
strated need  to  Methodist  students  who  have  given  evidence  of  leadership  in  their  local  Methodist  Youth  Fel- 
lowship groups. 

Alice  M.  Baldwin  Scholarships.  One  or  more  of  these  scholarships,  varying  in  amount  from  $500  to  $2,500, 
are  awarded  to  women  who  are  rising  seniors  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  on  the  basis  of  scholarship, 
character,  and  leadership. 

Evelyn  Barnes  Memorial  Scholarship.  One  $400  or  two  $200  grants  are  awarded  to  undergraduate  women  who 
are  contributing  to  the  musical  life  of  the  University.  Scholarship,  character,  and  leadership  are  considered.  Recom- 
mendation by  a  member  of  the  music  faculty  is  required. 

Panhellenic  Scholarship.  A  scholarship  of  approximately  $1,000  is  awarded  to  an  upperclass  woman  in  Trini- 
ty College  of  Arts  and  Sciences  on  the  basis  of  scholarship,  character,  leadership,  and  service. 

/.  A.  Jones  Memorial  Scholarships.  The  scholarships,  sponsored  through  the  Jones  Fund  for  Engineering,  are 
awarded  to  engineering  students  whose  outstanding  academic  and  personal  qualifications  suggest  that  they  will 
become  leaders  in  a  technological  society.  The  awards  range  from  a  yearly  sum  of  $1,000  to  $3,000,  depending 
on  the  degree  of  need. 


102         Financial  Information 


Robert  H.  Pinnix  Scholarships.  The  Robert  H .  Pinnix  Scholarships  are  awarded  annually  to  two  upperclass- 
men  enrolled  in  the  Duke  School  of  Engineering.  The  award  is  based  upon  demonstrated  ability,  excellence  in 
engineering,  and  financial  need. 

The  Ellen  P.  and  W.  Clay  Hamner  Scholarship.  This  scholarship  covers  the  full  cost  of  an  academic  year  as  well 
as  providing  a  stipend  to  cover  a  foreign  travel  learning  experience  for  one  summer.  This  scholarship  is  available 
to  graduates  from  public  high  schools  in  Georgia,  Alabama,  or  North  Carolina  with  preference  to  students  from 
single  parent  families.  Criteria  include  need,  academic  ability,  and  character.  The  scholarship  is  designed  for 
a  student  studying  in  humanities  with  preference  for  those  students  who  wish  to  enter  the  field  of  business  upon 
graduation. 

Scholarships  for  Foreign  Students.  A  limited  number  of  awards  will  be  made  each  year  to  qualified  students 
from  other  countries  who  enter  as  freshmen.  Two  named  scholarships  are  awarded  to  currently  enrolled  for- 
eign students:  the  Carol  Cranmer  Scholarship  (named  for  a  former  student)  and  the  Roberta  Florence  Brinkley 
International  Scholarship  (named  for  a  former  Dean). 

The  Mary  Duke  Biddle  Scholarship  in  Music  Composition.  This  scholarship  with  a  stipend  of  $3,500  per  year 
is  available  to  a  member  of  each  entering  class.  It  is  renewable  from  year  to  year  so  long  as  the  student  meets  the 
required  standards  for  renewal.  Students  wishing  to  apply  for  this  award  will  be  required  to  submit  examples 
of  their  composition.  Eligibility  is  limited  to  students  planning  to  major  in  music. 

Air  Force  ROPC  College  Scholarship  Program.  Students  can  apply  for  three-year  scholarships  during  their  fresh- 
man year  and  two-year  scholarships  during  their  sophomore  year.  Scholarships  are  available  to  students  who 
qualify  for  flight  training  and  to  students  who  major  in  certain  scientific  or  engineering  fields.  The  scholarships 
include  tuition,  fees,  and  textbook  reimbursement,  plus  a  $100  per  month  tax-free  allowance. 

Army  ROTC  Scholarship  Program.  All  freshman  and  sophomore  students  are  eligible  to  apply  for  Army  ROTC 
scholarships.  Awarded  without  regard  to  academic  major,  these  grants  pay  tuition,  fees,  and  textbook/equip- 
ment costs  in  addition  to  providing  a  tax-free  monthly  stipend  of  $100  for  the  balance  of  the  student's  normal 
period  to  graduation.  Commissioned  service,  following  graduation,  can  be  either  on  active  duty  or  with  the  re- 
serve forces.  Additional  information  concerning  Army  ROTC  scholarships  is  available  from  the  professor  of  military 
science. 

Navy  ROTC  College  Scholarship  Program.  This  program  provides  for  up  to  four  years'  tuition  and  textbooks, 
laboratory  fees,  and  a  $100  per  month  stipend.  These  scholarships,  based  upon  academic  achievement,  leader- 
ship potential,  and  overall  performance,  can  be  awarded  at  any  stage  of  the  student's  college  career  through  ei- 
ther a  nationwide  selection  process  or  by  the  Professor  of  Naval  Science  at  the  University.  In  addition,  two  other 
two-year  scholarships  are  available  to  rising  juniors:  one  leads  to  a  career  in  nuclear  power,  and  the  other  fol- 
lows a  summer  attendance  at  the  Naval  Science  Institute  at  Newport,  Rhode  Island.  For  further  information  on 
any  of  the  above  scholarship  programs,  contact  the  professor  of  naval  science. 

The  Minnie  Happer  Pruden  Scholarships.  These  scholarships  of  $1,000  are  available  to  the  daughters  of  Epis- 
copal clergymen. 

The  Huguenot  Scholarship.  One  scholarship  of  $1,000  per  year  is  available  from  the  Huguenot  Society  of  America 
to  a  descendant  of  a  Huguenot. 

Reginaldo  Howard  Scholarships.  These  scholarships,  awarded  annually  to  freshman  minority  students,  are 
provided  to  honor  the  late  Reggie  Howard,  first  black  president  of  the  student  government.  Seven  scholarships 
for  $6,000  are  awarded  each  year.  Scholarships  are  available  for  the  four  years  of  undergraduate  study  as  long 
as  the  student  maintains  the  academic  average  specified  for  renewal. 

The  Anne  McDougall  Memorial  Award.  The  Anne  McDougall  Memorial  Award  for  Women  is  awarded  each 
year  to  one  woman  student  studying  psychology  or  a  related  field .  Administered  through  women's  studies,  this 
$1,000  award  is  intended  to  provide  encouragement  and  support  for  women  who  wish  to  pursue  academic  study 
and  continue  in  the  area  of  human  service. 

Alumni  Endowed  Scholarships.  Two  $5,000  per  year  Alumni  Endowed  Undergraduate  Scholarships  are  awarded 
to  students  who  demonstrate  superior  academic  ability  and  leadership  potential.  These  awards  are  renewable 
annually  for  those  meeting  the  stated  requirements.  Although  not  restrictive,  preference  is  given  to  children  of 
alumni. 

Scholarships  for  North  Carolina  Residents 

The  Benjamin  N.  Duke  Scholarship  Fund.  Established  by  the  Duke  Endowment  to  honor  Benjamin  N.  Duke, 
this  fund  is  intended  to  encourage  the  enrollment  of  students  from  North  Carolina  and  South  Carolina. 

The  Benjamin  N.  Duke  Leadership  Award.  As  part  of  the  Benjamin  N.  Duke  Scholarship  Fund,  these  awards 
recognize  and  encourage  leadership  potential  and  community  involvement  of  students  from  North  and  South 
Carolina.  Ten  scholarships,  valued  at  75  percent  of  tuition,  are  awarded  annually. 

The  Benjamin  N.  Duke  Scholarship  Fund  also  provides  a  number  of  grants  which  replace  what  would  nor- 
mally be  the  loan  portion  of  need-based  awards  received  by  students  from  North  Carolina  and  South  Carolina. 
This  allows  need-based  aid  recipients  from  the  Carolinas  to  graduate  debt  free  following  the  eight  standard  semesters 
of  enrollment. 

Student  Aid        103 


Trinity  Scholarships.  Awarded  to  North  Carolinians  of  exceptional  ability,  these  scholarships  are  named  to 
honor  the  fact  that  Duke  University  was  originally  named  Trinity  College.  Trinity  scholarships  provide  each  winner 
an  award  equal  to  the  value  of  tuition,  fees,  room,  board,  and  the  cost  of  a  summer  of  study  abroad. 

North  Carolina  Math  Contest.  Upon  enrolling  at  Duke,  the  top  two  students  finishing  in  the  top  ten  in  the 
North  Carolina  Math  Contest  are  eligible  to  receive  a  scholarship  equal  to  the  amount  of  tuition.  This  scholar- 
ship is  available  for  each  of  the  four  years  of  undergraduate  enrollment  as  long  as  the  student  maintains  the  specified 
average.  Winners  must  have  applied  to  and  been  accepted  by  Duke  University. 

North  Carolina  Writer's  Contest.  Among  the  top  ten  finishers  in  the  state  writing  contest  the  top  two  matriculating 
at  Duke  will  be  eligible  for  full  tuition  scholarships.  To  receive  these  scholarships  the  winners  must  have  already 
applied  to  and  been  admitted  to  Duke  University.  Each  scholarship  is  available  for  the  four  years  of  undergradu- 
ate study  as  long  as  the  student  maintains  the  required  average. 

Duke  North  Carolina  Scholars  Awards.  Scholarships  funded  by  Duke  University  are  awarded  annually  to  selected 
incoming  freshmen  from  North  Carolina.  Scholarships  are  renewable  for  the  four  years  of  undergraduate  study 
as  long  as  the  student  maintains  the  required  average.  Scholarships  are  valued  at  $3,000. 

The  Perry  Family  Scholarship.  Awarded  to  students  from  Winston-Salem  and  the  Forsyth  County  area,  this 
scholarship,  valued  at  $5,000,  is  awarded  every  other  year.  Recipients  of  the  scholarship  will  be  required  to  demon- 
strate high  academic  achievement  as  well  as  leadership  and/or  involvement  in  extracurricular  activities.  The  scholar- 
ship is  available  for  four  years  if  the  student  meets  the  specified  academic  requirements. 

/.  Welch  Harriss  Scholarships.  Recipients  of  these  scholarships  will  receive  $1,000  per  year  without  reference 
to  need.  If  demonstrated  need  exceeds  $1,000,  then  the  scholarship  will  be  adjusted  accordingly.  These  awards 
are  made  to  entering  freshmen  who  have  achieved  outstanding  academic  records.  They  are  renewable  each  year 
as  long  as  the  student  maintains  the  required  average.  Consideration  will  be  given  in  the  following  order:  (1)  stu- 
dents from  High  Point,  North  Carolina;  (2)  students  from  Guilford  County,  North  Carolina;  and  (3)  students  from 
North  Carolina. 

Alyse  Smith  Cooper  Scholarships.  Each  year  six  or  more  scholarships  of  various  amounts  are  awarded  to  stu- 
dents demonstrating  both  talent  and  need.  Preference  is  given  to  students  from  Alamance  County,  North  Caro- 
lina. Majors  in  music,  particularly  students  of  piano,  organ,  and  voice,  receive  special  consideration. 

Braxton  Craven  Endowed  Scholarships.  Recipients  of  these  scholarships  will  receive  an  amount  equal  to  the 
current  tuition  at  Duke.  Braxton  Craven  scholars  will  be  chosen  on  the  basis  of  outstanding  academic  and  ex- 
tracurricular achievement.  First  preference  is  given  to  students  from  North  Carolina.  The  scholarships  are  ap- 
proved on  a  continuing  basis,  provided  that  the  recipient  complies  with  the  specified  academic  requirements. 

Thejohn  M.  and  Sally  V.  Blalock  Beard  Scholarship.  These  scholarships  are  awarded  annually  to  outstanding 
students  from  the  Wake  County  area  of  North  Carolina  who  major  in  English  or  the  History  of  the  United  States. 
These  awards  are  based  on  financial  need,  scholarship,  character,  and  academic  achievement. 

North  Carolina  Legislative  Tuition  Grant.  The  North  Carolina  General  Assembly  has  established  a  program 
of  tuition  grants  available  to  North  Carolina  residents  who  are  full-time  students  at  private  colleges  and  univer- 
sities in  the  State  of  North  Carolina.  The  grant  for  each  eligible  student  is  $1,100  per  year.  Applications  will  be 
mailed  to  all  eligible  students  during  the  summer.  In  the  case  of  a  need-based  financial  aid  recipient,  this  grant 
reduces  a  student's  tuition  and  therefore  his  budget.  All  qualified  need-based  aid  recipients  are  required  to  ap- 
ply for  this  grant. 

State  Contractual  Scholarships  for  Needy  North  Carolinians.  Funds  provided  by  the  State  of  North  Carolina  through 
the  Legislative  Grant  Program  are  distributed  to  needy  North  Carolinians  qualifying  for  the  State  Contractual 
Scholarship  Program.  Application  is  made  through  the  College  Scholarship  Service's  Financial  Aid  Form. 

Employment.  Duke  University  offers  subsidized  employment  opportunities  to  many  students  not  qualify- 
ing for  need-based  financial  aid .  Interested  students  should  submit  the  Financial  Aid  Form  to  the  College  Scholar- 
ship Service. 

Loans.  The  loan  programs  which  are  available  to  students  through  Duke  University 
are  listed  below: 

Perkins  Loan.  Loan  funds  supplied  by  the  federal  government  and  Duke  University  through  Part  E  of  Title 
IV  of  the  Higher  Education  Act  of  1965  are  available  to  qualified  students  Repayment  of  loans  under  this  act  nor- 
mally begins  nine  months  after  the  student  is  graduated  or  leaves  college,  with  complete  payment  scheduled 
within  a  ten-year  period.  Interest  accrues  at  the  rate  of  5  percent  annually,  commencing  nine  months  after  the 
borrower  ceases  to  be  at  least  a  half-time  student  at  an  institution  of  higher  education.  This  loan  is  part  of  the 
student's  financial  aid  award. 

Stafford  Student  Loan  Program.  Loans  under  the  Stafford  Student  Loan  program  are  available  from  banks  or 
other  incorporated  state  lending  agencies.  Duke  University  can  arrange  an  alternate  lender  for  students  who  are 
unable  to  obtain  these  loans  through  their  home  state  agencies  or  local  banks.  Need  as  established  by  the  federal 
government's  formula  will  be  considered  in  the  University's  decision  regarding  applications.  The  annual  limit 
on  a  loan,  which  has  an  interest  of  8  percent  for  the  first  four  years  of  repayment  and  10  percent  for  the  balance 
of  the  repayment  period,  is  $2,625  for  freshmen  and  sophomores  and  $4,000  for  upperclass  students.  Repayment 
begins  six  months  after  the  student  leaves  school. 

104         Financial  Information 


Students  may  apply  for  Stafford  loan  funds  by  submitting  a  loan  application  directly  to  the  Financial  Aid 
Office.  In  addition,  loan  applicants  must  submit  the  Financial  Aid  Form  to  the  College  Scholarship  Service.  Ad- 
ditional information  about  this  loan  program  may  be  obtained  from  the  Undergraduate  Financial  Aid  Office. 

Parents '  Loan  for  Undergraduate  Students  Program.  Parents  may  borrow  up  to  $4,000  through  the  Parents'  Loan 
for  Undergraduate  Students  (PLUS)  program.  Repayment  of  these  loans  begins  sixty  days  after  loan  disburse- 
ment. Interest  is  based  upon  treasury  bill  rates  but  will  be  no  higher  than  12  percent  and  begins  to  accrue  at  the 
point  repayment  begins.  Interested  parents  should  contact  their  home  state  lending  agency. 

Supplemental  Loans  for  Students.  Under  the  Supplemental  Loans  for  Students  (SLS)  Program,  independent 
undergraduate  students  are  eligible  to  borrow  up  to  $4,000  per  academic  year  at  an  interest  rate  between  12  and 
14  percent.  Repayment  of  the  principal  begins  after  the  student  is  out  of  school  six  months,  while  interest  pay- 
ments are  not  deferred  and  are  paid  quarterly. 

Share  Loans.  "Share"  is  a  supplemental  educational  loan  program  developed  specifically  to  help  families 
meet  the  costs  of  higher  education.  Credit- worthy  families,  regardless  of  income,  may  be  eligible  to  borrow  through 
this  program.  Annual  loan  amounts  range  from  $2,000  to  $20,000  per  year  with  a  cumulative  borrowing  limit  of 
$60,000.  The  interest  rate  is  variable,  and  Share  offers  several  repayment  options. 

Children  of  Methodist  Ministers.  Children  of  ministers  in  the  North  Carolina  and 
the  Western  North  Carolina  Annual  Conferences  of  the  United  Methodist  Church  may 
be  eligible  to  receive  a  partial  tuition  grant  of  $750  per  semester  for  a  maximum  of  eight 
semesters  of  undergraduate  study  at  Duke  University.  Eligibility  is  met  by  the  parent  be- 
ing in  a  regular  pastoral  appointment  and  resident  in  one  of  the  conferences.  When  the 
parent  is  in  a  special  appointment  and  resident  in  one  of  the  conferences,  eligibility  will 
be  determined  on  an  individual  basis,  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  appointment. 
In  all  cases  the  decision  of  the  University  will  be  final. 

Employment.  Most  financial  aid  recipients  are  offered  a  job  as  part  of  their  aid  pack- 
age. These  jobs  require  between  ten  and  fourteen  hours  a  week  and  provide  an  average 
stipend  of  $1,600.  The  money  is  paid  directly  to  the  student.  The  Office  of  Undergradu- 
ate Financial  Aid  maintains  part-time  employment  listings  for  the  campus  and  Durham 
area .  All  students  interested  in  working  during  the  school  year  should  inquire  at  the  Finan- 
cial Aid  Office  at  the  beginning  of  the  semester.  Every  effort  will  be  made  to  help  students 
find  jobs  consistent  with  their  interests. 

Duke  University  also  expects  that  students  receiving  financial  aid  will  work  during 
the  summer.  In  the  year  before  entering  college,  a  freshman  should  save  $1,100  for  use 
during  the  first  year  of  college.  In  subsequent  years,  the  student  should  save  $1,300  to  be 
used  for  college  expenses.  These  figures  are  viewed  as  estimates  and  are  revised  consis- 
tent with  actual  earnings. 

Tuition  Plans.  Many  families  finance  a  college  education  with  the  assistance  of  an 
insured  tuition  payment  plan  regardless  of  whether  they  receive  financial  assistance  from 
Duke.  Although  these  plans  are  sponsored  by  a  number  of  private  firms,  the  University 
refers  parents  to  plans  provided  by  the  Richard  C.  Knight  Insurance  Agency,  Inc.  The  com- 
pany provides  the  University  with  the  full  sum  required  each  semester  and  arranges  a 
schedule  for  monthly  repayment  by  the  subscribing  families.  The  schedules  for  repay- 
ment vary  with  the  program  offered  by  the  company.  Additional  information  on  this  par- 
ticular tuition  payment  plan  may  be  obtained  by  writing  to  Richard  C .  Knight  Insurance 
Agency,  Inc.,  Insured  Tuition  Payment  Plan,  53  Beacon  Street,  Boston,  Massachusetts 
02108. 

Tuition  payment  plans  are  also  available  through  the  Tuition  Plan,  Concord,  New 
Hampshire  03301.  Each  year  the  Tuition  Plan  will  send  information  to  all  students. 


Student  Aid     105 


Courses  of  Instruction 


Definition  of  Terms 

Courses  taught  in  1987-88  or  in  1988-89  or  scheduled  for  1989-90  are  included  in  this 
chapter  with  full  descriptions.  Additional  courses,  which  were  taught  prior  to  1987-88  and 
are  likely  to  be  taught  in  the  future,  are  listed  separately  by  number  and  title  only  under 
the  heading  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled.  For  courses  which  will  be  offered  in  1989-90, 
consult  the  Official  Schedule  of  Courses. 

Introductory  level  courses  are  numbered  below  100;  advanced  level  courses  are  num- 
bered 100  and  above.  Courses  numbered  1  through  49  are  primarily  for  freshmen;  courses 
numbered  from  200  through  299  are  primarily  for  seniors  and  graduate  students.  (See 
the  section  on  course  load  and  eligibility  in  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and  In- 
formation.") 

Odd-numbered  courses  are  usually  offered  in  the  fall  semester,  even-numbered 
courses  in  the  spring  semester.  Double  numbers  separated  by  a  hyphen  indicate  that  credit 
is  contingent  upon  completion  of  both  courses.  Double  numbers  separated  by  a  comma 
indicate  that  although  the  course  is  a  year  course,  credit  may  be  received  for  either  course 
or  both  courses. 

The  following  symbols,  suffixed  to  course  numbers,  identify  the  small  group  learn- 
ing experiences:  S,  seminar;  P,  preceptorial;  T,  tutorial;  D,  discussion  section.  The  L  suf- 
fix indicates  that  the  course  includes  laboratory  experience.  C-L:  denotes  a  course  that 
is  cross-listed  or  a  program  under  which  a  course  is  listed. 

The  following  symbols,  suffixed  to  course  titles,  identify  the  area  of  knowledge  to 
which  a  particular  course  has  been  assigned:  AL,  arts  and  literatures;  CZ,  civilizations; 
FL,  foreign  languages;  NS,  natural  sciences;  QR,  quantitative  reasoning;  SS,  social 
sciences. 

The  following  portion  of  this  bulletin,  arranged  alphabetically,  includes  courses  of 
departments,  programs,  and  institutes,  as  well  as  categories  of  courses.  Details  are  provid- 
ed in  the  individual  entries,  which  indicate  whether  a  major  is  available  in  that  particu- 
lar field.  A  certificate,  offered  in  some  programs,  is  not  a  substitute  for  a  major  but  is  a 
supplement,  confirming  that  a  student  has  satisfied  the  requirements  of  that  program. 

Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 

Professor  White,  Dean  of  Arts  and  Sciences  and  Trinity  College;  Professor  Spragens,  Associ- 
ate Dean  of  Arts  and  Sciences  and  Trinity  College;  Senior  Associate  Dean  Wilson;  Associate 
Deans  Bryant,  Nathans  (Director  of  the  Premajor  Advising  Center),  Nijhout  (Director  of 
Health  Professions  Advising),  and  Wittig;  Assistant  Deans  Lattimore,  Roach,  and  Weller 

Aerospace  Studies— Air  Force  ROTC  (AS) 

Professor  O'Connor,  Colonel,  USAF,  Chairman;  Visiting  Assistant  Professor  Bond,  Cap- 
tain, USAF,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Visiting  Assistant  Professors  Kessler,  Cap- 
tain, USAF,  and  Snoddy,  Captain,  USAF 


Aerospace  Studies— Air  Force  ROTC  (AS)         107 


Eligibility  Requirements.  All  freshmen  and  sophomores,  men  or  women,  are  eligi- 
ble to  enroll  in  the  General  Military  Course  in  the  Air  Force  Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps. 
For  enrollment  in  the  Professional  Officer  Course,  the  student  must  have  completed  suc- 
cessfully either  the  General  Military  Course  or  the  six-week  field  training  course;  must 
execute  a  written  agreement  with  the  government  to  complete  the  Professional  Officer 
Course;  must  be  sworn  into  the  enlisted  reserve;  and  must  agree  to  accept  a  commission 
in  the  U.S.  Air  Force  Reserve  upon  graduation.  Inaddition,  each  student  must  take  at  least 
one  course  in  mathematical  reasoning  prior  to  graduation/commissioning.  All  students 
also  will  be  required  to  attend  one  hour  of  leadership  laboratory  each  week.  All  courses, 
except  2L,  are  open  to  all  students  with  consent  of  instructor. 

General  Military  Courses 

First  Year 

1.  The  Air  Force  Today.  Development  of  aerospace  power  in  the  United  States;  mis- 
sion, doctrine,  and  organization  of  the  U.S.  Air  Force  and  its  relationship  to  the  other  serv- 
ices within  the  Department  of  Defense.  (May  not  be  counted  to  satisfy  graduation  require- 
ments.) Half  course.  O'Connor 

2L.  Leadership  Laboratory.  Instruction  in  drill  and  ceremonies,  wearing  the  uniform, 
giving  commands,  and  other  leadership  activities.  Mandatory  for  all  Air  Force  ROTC 
cadets.  Must  be  repeated  each  semester.  Pass/fail  grading  only.  No  credit.  Staff 

Second  Year 

51.  Development  of  Air  Power.  Growth  and  development  of  air  power  from  dirigi- 
bles and  balloons  to  the  present,  emphasizing  evolution  of  concepts  and  doctrine  govern- 
ing air  power  employment  in  support  of  national  objectives.  (May  not  be  counted  to  satisfy 
graduation  requirements.)  Half  course.  Snoddy 

Professional  Officer  Courses 

All  students  selected  to  continue  aerospace  studies  pursue  the  following  courses: 

Third  Year 

105S.  Aerospace  Leadership  and  Management.  An  introduction  to  management  fun- 
damentals to  include  the  knowledge  base  and  process  of  managing.  One  course.  Kessler 

106S.  Aerospace  Leadership  and  Management.  Application  of  management  fun- 
damentals to  duties  as  junior  officers/executives  to  include  principles  of  leadership.  One 
course.  Kessler 

Fourth  Year 

205S.  National  Security  Forces  in  Contemporary  American  Society.  The  role  of  the 
professional  military  officer  in  a  democratic  society  and  the  environment  in  which  na- 
tional security  policy  is  formulated.  One  course.  Bond 

206S.  National  Security  Forces  in  Contemporary  American  Society.  The  evolution 
of  U.S.  nuclear  strategy,  the  international  context  in  which  national  security  policy  is  im- 
plemented, and  the  military  justice  system.  One  course.  Bond 

Afro-American  Studies  Program  (aas> 

A  major  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  program  in  Afro-American  Studies  provides  instruction  directed  toward  the  ex- 
perience and  concerns  of  black  America.  The  courses  encompass  the  black  experience 
in  America  and  the  black  experience  as  illuminated  by  literary,  religious,  and  cultural  evi- 
dence generated  by  black  Americans.  The  courses  in  the  program  are  essential  compo- 

108         Courses  of  Instruction 


nents  of  a  liberal  arts  education  and  may  constitute  a  major  or  complement  another  ma- 
jor. In  addition  to  the  courses  listed  below,  many  related  courses  are  offered.  Descriptions 
can  be  found  under  the  Departments  of  Anthropology  Economics,  History,  Political 
Science,  Public  Policy  Studies,  Religion,  and  Sociology.  Swahili  courses  are  described  un- 
der Asian  and  African  Languages.  Further  information  is  available  in  04  Allen  Building. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

56.  The  Black  Religious  Experience  in  America.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Religion  56.  One 
course.  Lincoln 

74.  Introduction  to  Jazz.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Music  74.  One  course.  Jeffrey 

116.  Race  and  Ethnic  Relations.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Sociology  116.  One  course.  Staff 

138.  Political  Leadership  in  the  Black  Church.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Religion  138.  One  course. 
Lincoln 

144.  Black  Cults  and  Sects  in  America.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Religion  144.  One  course.  Lincoln 

145, 146.  Afro-American  History.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  History  145,  146.  One  course  each. 
Gavins 

173, 174.  Afro-American  Literature.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  167, 168.  One  course  each. 
K.  Williams 

213S.  Economics  of  Slavery  in  the  American  South.  (SS)  Prerequisites:  Economics 
149  and  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Economics  213S.  One  course.  Coats 

265.  Religions  of  the  West  Africa  Diaspora.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Religion  265;  also  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Lincoln 

THE  MAJOR 

Eight  courses  are  required  for  the  major.  The  course  of  study  for  each  student  is 
planned  by  the  student  and  the  student's  advisor  in  the  light  of  the  student's  interests  and 
goals. 

Anthropology 

A  major  is  available  in  anthropology.  For  descriptions  of  courses  and  listings  of  faculty 
see  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  as  well  as  Cultural  Anthropology. 

ANTHROPOLOGY  COURSES  BY  FIELDS  OF  CONCENTRATION 

Anthropology  courses  for  undergraduates  are  offered  in  four  fields,  as  noted  below. 
Students  majoring  in  anthropology  are  expected  by  the  time  of  their  graduation  to  have 
completed  a  concentration  in  one  of  the  four  fields. 

Ethnology.  Cultural  Anthropology  49S,  101, 102, 105, 109, 110,  111,  113, 114, 122, 129, 130, 133, 134, 135, 136S,  137, 
139, 140, 141, 142, 145, 147, 148, 151, 152S,  155, 156, 158S,  160S,  164, 165, 170, 173, 180, 180S,  189, 195S,  196S,  201S, 
204S,  205,  206S,  215S,  228S,  234S,  237S,  239,  251S,  255S,  267,  272S,  275S,  280S,  281S.  Courses  on  major  world  areas: 
Cultural  Anthropology  120,  121,  123,  124S,  126,  127,  128,  131,  163,  282S. 

Linguistic  Anthropology.  Cultural  Anthropology  107, 112,  116, 118S,  119,  159,  211S,  258S. 

Physical  Anthropology.  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  132, 143, 144, 146, 172S,  180S,  185, 186, 187S,  195S, 
196S,  238,  244S,  246S,  280S,  281S,  292. 

Archaeology.  Cultural  Anthropology  99,  166,  167,  168,  241,  243. 

THE  MAJOR 

The  major  in  anthropology  is  offered  under  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  degree. 
Major  Requirements.  Eight  courses  in  anthropology,  two  of  which  must  be  Biological 
Anthropology  and  Anatomy  93  and  Cultural  Anthropology  94.  Concentration  in  one  of 

Anthropology         109 


the  four  fields  of  the  discipline  must  be  accomplished  by  completing  a  minimum  num- 
ber of  courses  designated  for  the  chosen  field .  The  remaining  courses  to  complete  the  re- 
quired eight  may  be  selected  from  other  offerings  of  the  two  departments,  either  in  the 
field  of  concentration  or  in  other  fields.  Courses  in  each  field  of  concentration  are  listed 
above,  and  the  concentration  requirements  for  each  field  follow: 

Ethnology  Concentration.  At  least  three  courses  selected  from  the  Cultural  Anthro- 
pology offerings  in  ethnology,  one  of  which  must  be  a  course  from  the  list  dealing 
with  the  cultures  and  societies  of  a  major  world  area. 

Linguistic  Anthropology  Concentration.  At  least  three  courses  selected  from  the  cul- 
tural anthropology  offerings  in  linguistics,  one  of  which  must  be  cultural  anthropol- 
ogy 107  or  119. 

Physical  Anthropology  Concentration.  At  least  three  courses  selected  from  biolog- 
ical anthropology  and  anatomy,  one  of  which  must  be  132. 

Archaeology  Concentration.  At  least  three  courses  selected  from  the  cultural  an- 
thropology department's  offerings  in  archaeology,  one  of  which  must  be  Cultural  An- 
thropology 166. 

Recommended  Cou  rses  in  Anth  ropology  beyond  Basic  Requirements.  Although  an  anthro- 
pology major  consists  of  only  eight  required  courses,  students  are  encouraged  to  take  ad- 
ditional courses  both  within  their  concentration  and  elsewhere  in  the  two  departments. 
The  breadth  of  the  discipline  makes  this  desirable. 

Suggested  Work  in  Related  Disciplines.  Related  courses  in  other  departments  are  strongly 
advised.  Each  student's  advisor  will  recommend  a  program  of  related  work  to  comple- 
ment the  student's  concentration  and  interests  in  anthropology. 

Honors.  Qualified  majors  are  encouraged  to  participate  in  special  work  leading  to 
graduation  with  distinction  in  anthropology.  See  the  section  on  honors  in  this  bulletin 
for  general  requirements.  Any  major  with  a  B  +  average  (3.3  gpa)  in  anthropology  courses 
and  with  a  B  average  (3.0  gpa)  in  all  courses  is  eligible.  Students  who  desire  to  undertake 
honors  work  should  request  a  member  of  the  anthropology  faculties  to  recommend  their 
names  to  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  To  receive  departmental  honors  a  ma- 
jor must  complete  a  paper  involving  significant  independent  research  or  scholarship  and 
pass  an  oral  examination  on  the  paper  conducted  by  an  appointed  committee  of  faculty 
members,  at  least  two  of  whom  should  be  in  anthropology.  Normally,  students  will  pre- 
pare their  papers  over  the  course  of  the  senior  year  working  in  close  collaboration  with 
their  committees  and  receiving  on  the  average  two  course  credits  in  independent  study 
for  the  work. 

Arabic 

For  courses  in  Arabic,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages. 

Art  and  Art  History  (art) 

Professor  Spencer,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Wharton,  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies;  Associate  Professors  Bruzelius  and  Pratt;  Assistant  Professors  Castriota,  Cer- 
nuschi,  Stiles,  Sund,  and  Van  Miegroet;  Professors  Emeriti  Hall,  Jenkins,  Markman,  and 
Sunderland;  Adjunct  Professors  Lee  and  Mezzatesta;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Reents- 
Budet;  Artists-in-Residence  Noland  and  Shatzman;  Part-time  Instructor  Smith 

Majors  in  Art  History  and  Design  are  available  in  this  department. 

HISTORY  OF  ART 

Art  history  is  intellectual  history,  providing  students  from  all  academic  disciplines 
the  opportunity  to  strengthen  their  powers  of  perception  and  expression  and  to  bring  to- 
gether their  various  interests  and  different  kinds  of  learning  experiences.  Art  history  is 

110         Courses  of  Instruction 


the  study  of  works  of  art  in  their  historical  context,  that  is,  in  the  context  of  their  cultural, 
religious,  philosophical,  and  sociological  conceptions.  Studying  art  history  develops  the 
ability  to  evaluate  and  organize  different  kinds  of  information,  and  it  enhances  the  faculties 
of  creative  imagination,  precise  observation,  clear  expression,  and  critical  judgment.  Stu- 
dents of  art  history  acquire  an  appreciative  awareness  of  the  great  aesthetic  achievements 
of  mankind  and  a  sense  of  our  cultural  heritage. 

A  major  or  second  major  in  art  history  is  the  appropriate  preparation  for  students  in- 
terested in  art  historical  teaching  and  scholarship,  in  work  in  galleries,  museums,  and 
art  publishing,  or  graduate  work  in  architecture.  Art  history  is  also  an  excellent  background 
for  those  planning  careers  in  medicine,  law,  or  other  professions. 

69,  70.  Introduction  to  the  History  of  Art.  (AL)  The  history  of  western  architecture, 
sculpture,  and  painting  in  a  cultural  context.  69:  from  prehistory  to  the  Renaissance  (c. 
1400).  70:  from  the  Renaissance  to  the  present.  One  course  each.  Staff 

114.  The  Aegean  Bronze  Age.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  155.  One  course.  Younger 

115.  Ancient  Greece.  (CZ)  Prerequisite:  Classical  Studies  IIS,  53, 123,  or  124,  or  His- 
tory 53,  or  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  147.  One  course.  Younger 

116S.  Athens.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  161S.  One  course.  Younger 

117.  Pompeii.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  162.  One  course.  Staff 

120.  The  Art  of  Egypt  and  the  Ancient  Near  East.  (AL)  Art  and  architecture  of  the  ma- 
jor urban  centers  of  Egypt,  Syria-  Palestine,  Mesopotamia,  and  Iran  from  the  fourth  millen- 
niumB.C.  to  the  conquest  of  Alexander.  Emphasis  on  architecture,  sculpture,  and  paint- 
ing. One  course.  Castrwta 

121.  The  Art  of  Ancient  Italy.  (AL)  Art  and  architecture  in  Italy  from  the  Villanovan 
period  to  the  late  Roman  Republic.  Emphasis  on  relations  among  the  Etruscans,  early 
Rome,  and  the  Greek  cities  of  the  South.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Classical 
Studies  126.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  121.  One  course.  Castriota 

122.  Art  and  Myth  in  Ancient  Greece.  (AL)  Art  in  relation  to  myth  in  Greek  society 
from  the  Orientalizing  to  the  Hellenistic  period.  Emphasis  on  architectural  sculpture  and 
painting;  connections  between  monumental  and  small-scale  arts.  C-L:  Classical  Studies 
122.  One  course.  Castriota 

123.  Greek  Art  and  Archaeology  I .  ( AL)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  123.  One  course. 
Younger 

124.  Greek  Art  and  Archaeology  II.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  124.  One  course. 
Younger 

125.  The  City  in  Antiquity.  (CZ)  Urban  architecture  and  city  planning  in  the  ancient 
Near  East  and  the  classical  world .  Forms  and  development  of  the  urban  environment  as 
a  function  of  religious,  political,  and  economic  factors  from  the  beginnings  of  Mesopotamia 
to  the  centers  of  Hellenistic  Greece  and  the  Roman  Empire.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  125. 
One  course.  Castriota 

126.  Rome:  History  of  the  City.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  145.  One  course.  Boat- 
wright  or  Burian 

128.  Art  of  the  Roman  Empire.  (AL)  Art  and  architecture  in  the  Roman  world  from 
Augustus  to  Theodosius.  Emphasis  on  portraiture,  private  arts,  and  triumphal  monu- 
ments. Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Classical  Studies  126.  C-L:  Classical  Studies 
128.  One  course.  Castriota 

130.  Late  Antique  and  Early  Christian  Art.  (AL)  Mediterranean  arts  and  architecture 
from  the  second  to  sixth  century  A. D.  The  development  of  Christian  art  in  Roman  society. 
One  course.  Wharton 

Art  and  Art  History  (ART)        111 


131.  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture.  (AL)  Stylistic  and  structural  developments  in 
architecture,  mosaics,  frescoes,  and  icons  in  Byzantium  from  iconoclasm  to  the  fall  of  Con- 
stantinople (ninth  to  fifteenth  century),  considered  with  their  cultural  context.  C-L:  Clas- 
sical Studies  131.  One  course.  Wharton 

132.  Romanesque  Art.  (AL)  Western  European  art  and  architecture  from  the  mid- 
tenth  through  the  twelfth  centuries.  Influence  of  monasticism,  the  Crusades,  and  pil- 
grimages on  the  arts.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Bruzelius 

133.  Gothic  Art.  (AL)  Western  European  art  and  architecture  of  the  High  Middle  Ages 
to  the  early  fifteenth  century.  Emphasis  on  the  French  contribution  to  the  development 
of  Gothic  style.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Bruzelius 

134.  Medieval  Architecture.  (AL)  The  development  of  medieval  architecture  through 
the  mid-  fourteenth  century.  Emphasis  on  churches,  with  some  discussion  of  castles  and 
fortifications,  town  planning,  and  domestic  architecture.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  One  course.  Bruzelius 

135.  Gothic  Cathedrals.  (AL)  Major  monuments  of  Gothic  architecture  in  the  twelfth 
and  thirteenth  centuries  on  the  continent  and  in  England  with  concentration  on  the  great 
cathedrals  of  France.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Bruzelius 

136.  Gothic  Cathedrals.  (AL,  FL)  Same  as  Art  135,  but  taught  in  French.  C-L:  Medie- 
val and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Bruzelius 

141.  Fifteenth-Century  Italian  Art.  (AL)  Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  from 
Masaccio,  Donatello,  and  Brunelleschi  to  Leonardo.  Emphasis  on  the  art  of  Florence.  C- 
L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Spencer 

142.  Sixteenth-Century  Italian  Art.  (AL)  Painting  and  sculpture  in  Rome  and  Flor- 
ence: Michelangelo,  Raphael,  Leonardo.  The  rise  and  diffusion  of  mannerism:  Pontor- 
mo  to  Tintoretto.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Spencer 

145.  Renaissance  Art  in  Florence.  ( AL)  Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  from  Giot- 
to to  Michelangelo  based  on  the  works  of  art  preserved  in  Florence.  Emphasis  on  individu- 
al artists  and  their  creations  and  on  the  relation  of  the  artists  to  the  society  of  their  times. 
Closely  integrated  with  History  182.  (Taught  in  summer  program  in  Italy.)  One  course. 
Spencer 

146.  Italian  Renaissance  Architecture.  (AL)  Development  of  building  types  and  city 
planning  in  the  fifteenth  and  sixteenth  centuries  in  central  and  northern  Italy.  Empha- 
sis on  Brunelleschi,  Alberti,  Bramante,  Michelangelo,  and  Palladio.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Spencer 

148.  Art  of  the  Netherlands  in  the  Fifteenth  Century.  ( AL)  Early  Netherlandish  paint- 
ing with  an  emphasis  on  the  innovations  of  the  Master  of  Flemalle,  Jan  van  Eyck,  Rogier 
van  der  Weyden,  and  Hugo  van  der  Goes;  courtly  and  civic  patronage  of  the  visual  arts 
in  the  cities  of  Flanders  and  Brabant;  the  cult  of  oil-based  pigments  and  paintings  as  a  mir- 
ror of  nature.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Van  Miegroet 

151.  Art  of  Italy  in  the  Seventeenth  Century.  (AL)  Caravaggio,  the  Carracci,  Guido 
Reni,  Domenichino,  Bernini,  and  Poussin .  Modes  of  description  and  narration;  the  con- 
cern with  the  status  of  pictorial  representation;  and  the  attempts  to  define  and  retrieve 
the  canonical  achievements  of  the  early  sixteenth  century.  One  course.  Mezzatesta 

152.  Art  of  the  Netherlands  in  the  Sixteenth  Century.  ( AL)  Introduction  of  new  pic- 
torial formats  and  functions  in  Netherlandish  prints  and  paintings  at  the  turn  of  the  six- 
teenth century;  Floris,  Bruegel,  and  the  definition  of  native  idioms  in  the  circle  of  Abra- 
ham Ortelius  in  Antwerp;  the  Haarlem  community  of  engravers  and  theoreticians  and 
the  formulation  of  a  history  of  Northern  art  at  the  close  of  the  sixteenth  century.  C-L:  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Van  Miegroet 

112         Courses  of  Instruction 


153.  Art  of  the  Netherlands  in  the  Seventeenth  Century.  (AL)  The  descriptive  sub- 
ject categories  and  the  alternative  modes  of  representation  formulated  by  Rubens,  Rem- 
brandt, and  Vermeer.  One  course.  Van  Miegroet 

154.  Art  of  Germany  in  the  Fifteenth  and  Sixteenth  Centuries.  (AL)  A  close  exami- 
nation of  German  art,  from  Konrad  Witz  to  Albrecht  Diirer  and  Hans  Holbein  the  Youn- 
ger; historical  and  artistic  significance  of  the  Councils  of  Konstanz  and  Basel;  the  revolu- 
tionary impact  of  the  printing  press;  new  trends  in  prints  and  sculpture;  the  beautiful 
and  relatively  unknown  wood  carvings  created  in  Nuremberg  between  1475  and  1515. 
One  course.  Van  Miegroet 

161.  Nineteenth-Century  European  Art.  (AL)  Painting  and  sculpture  of  leading  ar- 
tists within  the  movements  of  neoclassicism,  romanticism,  impressionism,  and  sym- 
bolism. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Cernuschi  or  Sund 

162.  American  Art  from  Colonial  Times  to  1900.  (AL)  The  development  of  an  Ameri- 
can national  school  in  portraiture,  history  painting,  landscape,  genre  scenes,  and  still- 
life.  Major  figures  include  Copley,  Bingham,  Cole,  Church,  Whistler,  and  Eakins.  One 
course.  Sund 

164.  Art  of  the  Romantic  Period.  (AL)  Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  in  France, 
England,  Spain,  and  Germany  from  the  late  eighteenth  century  to  the  Revolution  of  1848. 
The  relationship  of  art  to  politics,  changing  concepts  of  genius  and  originality,  the  cult 
of  styles,  orientalism,  and  the  emergence  of  landscape  as  a  dominant  art  form.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Sund 

165.  Topics  in  Oriental  Art.  (AL)  A  critical  survey  of  Chinese,  Korean,  and  Japanese 
art  from  the  earliest  times  to  the  nineteenth  century.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Lee 

178.  Pre-Columbian  Art  and  Architecture.  (AL)  A  survey  of  the  art  and  architecture 
of  American  cultures  in  Mexico,  Central  America,  and  Peru  before  the  Spanish  conquest. 
Particular  emphasis  on  their  political  and  religious  functions,  including  the  Olmec,  Teoti- 
huacan,  Mayan,  Aztec,  and  Inca  civilizations.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Reents-Budet  or  Sund 

179.  History  of  Event  Art.  ( AL)  Post-1950s  developments  in  Event  Art— happenings, 
Fluxus,  demonstrations,  ceremonies,  destruction  art,  body  art,  and  performance  art- 
considered  theoretically  and  ideologically  in  the  context  of  feminism,  concrete  poetry, 
New  Music,  and  video.  One  course.  Stiles 

181.  The  New  York  School:  Art  of  the  1950s.  (AL)  American  art  after  World  War  II: 
abstract  expressionism  and  the  New  York  School.  Emphasis  on  improvisation,  gesture, 
and  experimentation  in  the  works  of  Pollock,  de  Kooning,  Rothko,  David  Smith,  Johns, 
and  Rauschenberg.  Historical  influences  and  parallels  with  the  other  arts.  One  course. 

Cernuschi 

183.  Twentieth-Century  American  Art.  (AL)  Art  of  the  twentieth  century  in  the  Ameri- 
cas. Emphasis  on  the  development  of  regional  styles  and  the  emergence  of  the  United 
States  in  the  vanguard  of  modernism.  One  course.  Stiles 

184.  History  of  Impressionism.  (AL)  The  evolution  of  the  impressionist  movement 
and  post-impressionist  reactions  of  the  1880s.  Particular  attention  to  the  work  of  Manet, 
Degas,  Monet,  Renoir,  and  Pissarro.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Cer- 
nuschi or Sund 

185.  Post-Impressionism.  (AL)  The  emergence  and  development  of  post- 
impressionist  styles— neo-impressionism,  synthetism,  symbolism— with  emphasis  on 
Seurat,  Cezanne,  Van  Gogh,  and  Gauguin.  The  impact  of  post-impressionism  on  early 


Art  and  Art  History  (ART)         113 


twentieth-century  movements,  including  fauvism,  expressionism,  and  cubism.  One 
course.  Cernuschi  or  Sund 

186.  Twentieth-Century  Art.  (AL)  Modern  art  from  1900  to  present.  Emphasis  on  ma- 
jor movements,  theoretical  aims,  and  actual  achievements.  One  course.  Cernuschi,  Stiles, 
or Sund 

187.  Surrealism.  (AL)  The  surrealist  movement  that  flourished  in  Paris  between  the 
World  Wars:  its  origins,  aims,  and  major  adherents— such  as  the  artists  Miro,  Magritte, 
Tanguy,  and  Dali— examined  in  the  context  of  surrealist  literature,  theory  and  politics. 
One  course.  Stiles 

188.  Twentieth-Century  Criticism.  (AL)  Twentieth-century  art  through  the  writings 
of  its  major  proponents  from  Apollinaire  and  Roger  Fry  through  Meyer  Schapiro  and 
Clement  Greenberg  to  present-day  theorists  of  postmodernism.  The  definition  of  mod- 
ernism and  the  role  of  the  critic  as  advocate,  mediator,  arbiter,  and  prophet  of  contem- 
porary trends.  One  course.  Cernuschi 

189.  Modern  Architecture.  (AL)  Major  movements  in  European  and  American  ar- 
chitecture in  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  centuries  with  concentration  on  major  ar- 
chitects and  major  buildings.  Technical  and  theoretical  bases;  social  and  aesthetic  impli- 
cations. One  course.  Wharton 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
students  in  the  junior  year,  by  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

220S.  Studies  in  Greek  Art.  ( AL)  Specific  aspects  of  the  art  or  architecture  in  the  Greek 
world  from  the  late  Geometric  to  the  Hellenistic  periods.  Subject  varies  from  year  to  year. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  220S.  One  course.  Castriota 

221S.  Studies  in  Roman  Art.  (AL)  Selected  topics  in  the  art  and  architecture  of  late 
republican  and  imperial  Rome.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Classical  Studies 
227S.  One  course.  Castriota 

222S.  Greek  Sculpture.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  231S.  One  course.  Stanley 

223S.  Greek  Painting.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  232S.  One  course.  Stanley 

224S.  Greek  Architecture.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  233S.  One  course. 
Richardson 

225S.  Roman  Architecture.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  235S.  One  course. 
Richardson 

226S.  Roman  Painting.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  236S.  One  course.  Richardson 

230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture.  (AL)  Conceptual,  institution- 
al, or  stylistic  topics.  Subject  varies  from  year  to  year.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 
C-L:  Classical  Studies  230S  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Wharton 

232S.  Romanesque  and  Gothic  Art  and  Architecture.  (AL)  Analysis  of  an  individu- 
al topic.  Subject  varies  from  year  to  year.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Medie- 
val and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Bruzelius 

242S.  Studies  in  Italian  Renaissance  Art.  (AL)  Specific  problems  dealing  with  iconog- 
raphy, style,  or  an  individual  master  from  c.  1300  to  1600.  Subject  varies  from  year  to  year. 
Prerequisite :  consent  of  instructor.  C-L :  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies .  One  course . 

Spencer 


114         Courses  of  Instruction 


243S.  Studies  in  Northern  Art.  (AL)  Selected  topics  such  as  the  Antwerp  workshops 
of  the  sixteenth  century,  picturing  in  Haarlem  at  the  turn  of  the  seventeenth  century,  or 
Rubens  and  Rembrandt.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Van  Miegroet 

261S.  Studies  in  Romanticism.  ( AL)  Examination  of  the  work  of  a  single  artist  or  the 
development  of  a  specific  theme  or  movement  within  the  period  1760  to  1850.  One  course. 
Sund 

262S.  Studies  in  Nineteenth-Century  Art.  (AL)  Focus  on  a  major  artist,  movement, 
or  trend  in  nineteenth-century  art .  Prerequisite :  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Sund 

276S.  Studies  in  Modern  Art.  (AL)  Selected  topics  in  modern  art  before  1945,  with 
emphasis  on  major  movements  or  masters.  Prerequisite :  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Cernuschi  or  Stiles 

277S.  Contemporary  Art.  (AL)  Historical  and  critical  principles  applied  to  present- 
day  artists  and/or  movements  in  all  media  since  World  War  II.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course.  Cernuschi  or  Sund 

282S.  Contemporary  Theory  in  the  Visual  Arts.  (AL)  Theory  in  contemporary  art  his- 
tory and  its  accommodation  to  theoretical  developments  in  other  disciplines  (for  exam- 
ple, literature,  women's  studies,  Marxism,  and  anthropology).  Focus  on  the  writings  of 
contemporary,  theory-centered  art  historians  and  critics.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course.  Wharton 

291, 292.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
students  in  the  senior  year,  by  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

293S.  Methodology  of  Art  History.  (AL)  Approaches  to  the  study  and  theory  of  art: 
historiography,  connoisseurship,  iconology,  and  criticism.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  in- 
structor. One  course.  Staff 

294, 295.  Special  Problems  in  Art  History.  (AL)  Individual  study  and  research.  One 
course  each.  Staff 

DESIGN 

To  cover  materials  supplied  in  design  courses,  a  fee  of  $40  will  be  charged  for  each 
course,  payable  prior  to  the  beginning  of  classes. 

53.  Drawing.  Directed  approaches  to  practice  in  life  drawing  and  in  the  expression 
of  graphic  concepts.  One  course.  Shatzman  or  Smith 

54.  Two-Dimensional  Design  and  Color.  Experiments  in  form  and  color,  with  work 
from  observation .  Introduction  to  color  theory  in  various  media.  Prerequisite :  Art  53.  One 
course.  Smith 

56.  Sculpture.  Introduction  to  the  principles  and  processes  of  sculpture.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Noland 

102.  Figure  Drawing.  (AL)  The  human  figure  through  different  artistic  media  and 
visual  concepts.  Prerequisites:  Art  53  and  54,  and  consent  of  the  instructor  based  on  port- 
folio. One  course.  Staff 

103, 104.  Painting.  (AL)  Studio  practice  in  painting  with  individual  and  group  criti- 
cism and  discussion  of  important  historic  or  contemporary  ideas.  Prerequisites:  Art  54 
or  equivalent  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Pratt 

105, 106.  Advanced  Drawing  and  Color.  (AL)  Work  from  life  or  in  formal  modes,  with 
emphasis  on  personal  development,  through  individual  and  group  criticism  and  discus- 
sion. Prerequisites:  Art  53  and  54  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Pratt 

Art  and  Art  History  (ART)         115 


108.  Printmaking:  Intaglio.  (AL)  Studio  course  with  directed  problems  in  the  intaglio 
medium  including  etching,  aquatint,  drypoint,  black  and  white  and  color  printing 
methods.  Prerequisite:  Art  53,  54, 107,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Shatzman 

109.  Printmaking:  Silkscreen.  (AL)  Studio  course  on  the  silkscreen  medium  and  its 
stencil-making  process  including  paper,  film,  glue,  tusche,  and  photographic  methods. 
Prerequisite:  Art  53,  54,  107,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Shatzman 

110.  Intermediate  Sculpture.  (AL)  Studio  practice  in  sculpture  at  the  intermediate 
level.  Group  and  individual  discussion  and  critique.  Prerequisite:  Art  56  or  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course.  Noland 

111.  Advanced  Sculpture.  (AL)  Studio  practice  in  sculpture  at  the  advanced  level. 
Group  and  individual  discussion  and  critique.  Prerequisites:  Art  56  and  110,  or  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Noland 

180S.  Theory  of  Design.  (AL)  Visual  thinking  and  innovations  in  historical  and  con- 
temporary art.  Formal  analysis  and  discussion  of  important  issues  for  students  involved 
in  creating  art.  Prerequisites:  two  courses  in  design  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Pratt 

203, 204.  Advanced  Painting.  (AL)  Prerequisites:  Art  53  and  54  and  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course  each.  Pratt 

207.  Advanced  Printmaking.  ( AL)  Studio  course  on  advanced  methods  of  color  print- 
ing in  the  relief,  intaglio,  silkscreen,  and  monotype  areas.  Traditional  and  more  experimen- 
tal methods  and  the  combinations  of  the  included  media.  Prerequisite:  Art  108, 109,  or 
consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Shatzman 

208.  Printmaking:  Papermaking.  (AL)  Studio  course  on  handmade  sheets  for  water- 
color,  printmaking,  and  drawing.  Projects  in  combination  with  other  studio  areas.  Prereq- 
uisite: Art  53, 103, 108,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Shatzman 

217, 218.  Individual  Project.  (AL)  Independent  work  open  to  highly  qualified  seniors 
on  recommendation  of  instructor  and  invitation  of  department.  One  course  each.  Staff 

See  also  Institute  of  the  Arts  in  this  bulletin. 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

107.  Survey  of  Printmaking.  (AL) 

129.  The  Age  of  Justinian.  (AL) 

140.  Giotto  and  the  Origins  of  the  Renaissance.  (AL) 

143.  Classical  Tradition  in  the  Renaissance.  (CZ) 

144.  Central  Italian  Art.  (AL) 

149.  Death  in  Art.  (AL) 

150.  Prints  in  the  Fifteenth,  Sixteenth,  and  Seventeenth  Centuries.  (AL) 
160.  Rococo  to  Neoclassicism:  Eighteenth-Century  European  Art.  (AL) 
279S.  Problems  in  Modern  Architecture.  (AL) 

THE  MAJOR 

The  student  will  elect  a  sequence  of  courses  emphasizing  either  the  history  of  art  or 
design.  The  department  offers  work  leading  to  graduation  with  distinction .  See  the  sec- 
tion on  honors  in  this  bulletin. 


116        Courses  of  Instruction 


History  of  Art 

Major  Requirements.  Either  Art  69  or  70  is  recommended,  and  one  of  them  may  be 
counted  toward  the  requirement  of  eight  courses  in  the  history  of  art.  The  eight  courses 
are  to  include:  one  course  from  each  of  the  following  areas— ancient,  medieval,  Renais- 
sance/baroque, and  modern;  one  seminar  at  the  200  level.  For  students  planning  to  do 
graduate  work  in  art  history,  one  of  these  should  be  Art  293S.  Two  years  of  college  level 
study  or  the  equivalent  in  French,  German,  or  Italian  are  strongly  recommended .  Majors 
contemplating  graduate  work  in  history  of  art  are  advised  to  take  more  than  eight  courses 
in  history  of  art  and  to  gain  competence  in  French  and  German. 

Design 

Prerequisites.  Art  69  or  70  and  one  other  art  history  course;  Art  53  and  54. 
Major  Requirements.  Five  studio  courses  exclusive  of  Art  53  and  54. 

Institute  of  the  Arts  (ad 

Artist-in-Residence  Cerveris,  Director;  Fellows  Applewhite  (English),  Arcus  (divinity), 
Bagg  (music),  Ball  (drama),  Berg  (music),  Bloom  (music),  Clum  (drama  and  English),  Cole- 
man (music),  Desmond  (dance),  Dickinson  (dance),  Dorrance  (dance),  El  Guindi  (dra- 
ma), Fitzmorris  (drama),  Harris  (public  policy  studies),  Henry  (music),  Herman  (drama), 
Hill  (music),  Hobbs  (drama),  Jaffe  (music),  Jeffrey  (music),  Kremen  (psychology),  Love 
(music),  Ma  (drama),  McAuliffe  (drama),  Muti  (music),  Noland  (art  and  art  history),  Par- 
kins (music),  Pope  (English),  Porter  (English),  Pratt  (art  and  art  history),  Price  (English), 
Raimi  (music),  Shatzman  (art  and  art  history),  Smith  (art  and  art  history),  St.  Clair  (dra- 
ma), Szasz  (music),  Troxler  (music),  Ward  (philosophy),  Williams  (music),  Wray  (dance), 
and  Wynkoop  (music);  Associate  Fellows  Azenberg  (drama),  Davis  (dance),  Hawkins 
(music),  Kaiser  (drama),  Lally  (drama),  and  Young  (drama) 

A  certificate,  but  not  a  major,  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  Institute  of  the  Arts  administers  an  undergraduate  certificate  program  in  the  arts, 
offers  interdisciplinary  courses,  sponsors  artist  residencies,  coordinates  and  promotes 
activities  in  the  creative  and  performing  arts,  and  works  to  expand  the  role  of  the  artist 
in  a  liberal  arts  setting.  Courses,  festivals,  and  events  sponsored  by  the  institute  bring  to- 
gether faculty  and  students  in  different  art  forms  to  encourage  an  interdisciplinary  per- 
spective. All  performing  and  creative  artists  who  teach  at  Duke  are  fellows  of  the  institute. 

The  Institute  provides  advisors  for  interdepartmental  concentrations  in  the  arts  and 
assists  students  in  designing  individualized  courses  of  study.  A  fall-semester  off-campus 
residency  program,  the  Duke  in  New  York  Arts  Program,  provides  academic  and  profes- 
sional experiences  for  selected  juniors  and  seniors. 

The  Dance  Program  is  administered  through  the  institute,  and  courses  in  dance  are 
listed  below.  Other  institute  courses  and  cross-listed  courses  are  also  described  below; 
for  courses  and  majors  in  art  and  art  history,  drama,  English,  and  music  see  the  depart- 
mental listings  under  those  headings.  For  further  information  about  the  institute,  inquire 
in  109  Bivins  Building. 

DUKE  IN  NEW  YORK  ARTS  PROGRAM 

The  institute-sponsored  Duke  in  New  York  Arts  Program  offers  an  intensive,  off- 
campus  experience  for  a  select  group  of  juniors  and  seniors.  The  program  has  four  com- 
ponents, each  earning  one  credit:  two  seminars,  an  arts  internship,  and  a  course  at  New 
York  University.  The  Duke  courses  are  described  below  under  Institute  Courses.  For  in- 
formation on  admission  to  this  program,  contact  the  Institute  of  the  Arts. 


Institute  of  the  Arts  (Al)         117 


INSTITUTE  OF  THE  ARTS  (AI) 

20S.  Structure.  Does  not  count  toward  the  divisional  or  fields  of  knowledge  require- 
ments. See  C-L:  Biology  45S.  One  course.  Wainwright 

101S.  Arts  Resources  in  New  York.  (AL)  Investigation  of  a  central  theme  through  at- 
tendance at  selected  art  events  in  the  New  York  area  supplemented  by  discussions,  criti- 
cal papers,  and  reports.  Visiting  Duke  faculty  members  and  New  York  practitioners  in 
the  arts  provide  guest  lectures  and  lead  discussions.  Open  only  to  those  admitted  to  the 
Duke  in  New  York  Arts  Program.  One  course.  Staff 

102.  Arts  Internship  in  New  York.  Immersion  in  the  professional  art  world  through 
apprenticeship  to  a  sponsoring  artist,  scholar,  or  organization  chosen  to  match  each  stu- 
dent's area  of  interest  and  expertise.  Offered  only  on  the  pass/fail  basis  and  open  only 
to  those  admitted  to  the  Duke  in  New  York  Arts  Program.  One  course.  Staff 

103S.  Arts  Production,  Promotion,  and  Presentation  in  New  York.  Analysis  and  in- 
vestigation of  the  processes  by  which  representative  arts  events  and  endeavors  in  New 
York  are  conceived,  developed,  produced,  promoted,  performed,  and  evaluated.  Guest 
lectures  by  practitioners  in  these  processes.  Open  only  to  students  admitted  to  the  Duke 
in  New  York  Arts  Program.  One  course.  Staff 

110S.  Video  and  Performance.  (AL)  Creation  of  video  works  involving  the  perform- 
ing arts  in  the  context  of  contemporary  critical  theory.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course.  Desmond 

115S.  Film  and  Video  Theory  and  Practice.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  Comparative  Litera- 
ture 177,  Drama  65,  or  English  81.  See  C-L:  English  83S;  also  C-L:  English  183S,  Drama 
131S,  and  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Staff 

121S.  The  Diaghilev  Ballet,  1909-1929.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing 
or  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Dance  188S;  also  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  188S. 
One  course.  Dickinson  and  staff 

122.  The  Arts  as  Human  Experience.  (AL)  The  arts  from  an  interdisciplinary  perspec- 
tive with  special  attention  to  historical  and  critical  settings.  Development  of  an  under- 
standing of  the  values  and  ideals  at  work  in  certain  eras  of  culture  and  the  arts  through 
in-class  and  public  performances,  exhibitions,  and  presentations.  One  course.  Staff 

123.  Music  Theater  Practicum.  Staging,  singing,  acting,  movement,  and  designing, 
explored  in  practical  terms  through  analysis  and  direct  involvement  with  these  elements 
in  workshop  settings.  Team  taught.  Pass/fail  grading  only.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course.  Staff 

130.  Inter-Arts:  Theory  and  Practice.  (AL)  Principles  and  techniques  in  contemporary 
interdisciplinary  performance  pieces,  using  combined  art  forms.  Primary  focus  on  the 
interrelationships  of  art  forms  and  on  collaboration  among  artists;  analysis  of  such  works 
as  distinguished  from  more  traditional  artistic  expression.  Workshop  in  creation  of  a  per- 
formed work.  Half  course.  Cerveris  and  staff 

150.  Managing  the  Arts.  Various  aspects  of  planning,  organization,  promotion,  re- 
source development,  and  general  operations  of  such  typical  arts  organizations  as  arts 
councils,  museums  and  galleries,  subscription  series,  orchestras,  and  dance  and  thea- 
tre companies.  Private,  public,  and  governmental  support  for  the  arts.  One  course.  Silbiger 

151S.  Art  and  Its  Making.  (AL)  An  inquiry  into  artistic  process  from  a  conceptual  sur- 
vey of  dominant  views  to  direct  interviewing  of  and  discussion  with  artists.  Not  open  to 
freshmen.  One  course.  Kremen 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Admission  by  consent 
of  instructor  and  Director  of  the  Institute  of  the  Arts.  One  course  each.  Staff 

118         Courses  of  Instruction 


ARTIST  IN  RESIDENCE  PROGRAM 

The  Nancy  Hanks  Artist  Residency  Program  brings  artists  of  great  breadth  and  ac- 
complishment to  Duke  to  interact  with  students,  faculty,  and  the  community  at  large,  in 
settings  as  diverse  as  formal  courses,  class  visits,  performances  and  exhibitions,  infor- 
mal workshops  and  seminars,  and  off -campus  programs. 

Courses  by  Nancy  Hanks  Resident  Artists  and  by  other  visiting  artists  in  the  insti- 
tute may  not  be  listed  in  the  bulletin  since  they  vary  from  year  to  year.  Consult  the  cur- 
rent course  schedule  and  the  institute  for  information  about  courses  by  artists  in  residence. 

The  Ciompi  Quartet,  a  professional  chamber  music  ensemble,  is  in  residence  in  the 
Institute  of  the  Arts  all  year.  Members  of  the  quartet  also  offer  string  instruction  in  the 
Department  of  Music.  Consult  that  department's  listings  for  applied  music  courses. 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

120.  Romanticism  in  the  Arts.  (AL) 

DANCE  (DAN) 

Associate  Professor  Wray,  Coordinator  of  the  Dance  Program;  Artists-in-Residence  Desmond 
and  Dickinson;  Part-time  Instructors  Davis  and  Dorrance 

The  Dance  Program  offers  its  students  the  opportunity  to  study  modern  dance,  bal- 
let, dance  history,  choreography,  repertory,  and  non-Western  dance  forms  in  an  environ- 
ment that  challenges  the  student's  intellectual,  expressive,  and  physical  capabilities.  Em- 
phasis is  placed  on  both  the  acquisition  of  technical  skills  and  the  creative  development 
of  the  individual  student.  Courses  in  technique,  performance  and  production  (half  course 
credit),  and  theory  courses  (whole  course  credit)  are  offered.  Dance  theory  courses  ful- 
fill humanities  division  and  seminar  requirements,  and  students  may  concentrate  in  dance 
through  Program  II.  Activity  courses  are  given  only  on  a  pass/fail  basis. 

Activity  Courses 

60.  Beginning  Modern  Dance  I.  A  movement  course  exploring  modern  dance 
through  technique,  improvisation,  and  composition  culminating  in  a  class  showing  at 
the  end  of  term.  No  previous  dance  experience  necessary.  Half  course.  Staff 

61 .  Beginning  Modern  Dance  II .  Prerequisite :  Dance  60  or  equivalent  .Half  course. 
Staff 

62.  Intermediate  Modern  Dance  I.  Increased  complexity  of  movement  sequences  and 
greater  emphasis  on  clarity  of  expression  and  quality  of  performance.  Prerequisite :  Dance 
61.  Half  course.  Staff 

63.  Intermediate  Modern  Dance  II.  Continuation  of  Dance  62.  Prerequisite:  Dance 
62  or  equivalent.  Half  course.  Staff 

65.  Beginning  Improvisation.  Exploration  of  space,  time,  and  energy  in  movement 
and  of  improvisational  structures.  No  previous  dance  experience  necessary.  Half  course. 
Staff 

68.  Ballet  Fundamentals.  Fundamentals  of  classical  ballet  technique  concentrating 
on  correct  placement  and  body  alignment  within  the  ballet  vocabulary.  No  previous  dance 
experience  necessary.  Half  course.  Dorrance 

70.  Ballet  I.  Barre  work  concentrating  on  body  alignment  and  correct  placement  within 
the  ballet  vocabulary  followed  by  center  adagio  and  allegro  sequences.  Prerequisite :  Dance 
68  or  equivalent.  Half  course.  Dorrance 

71.  Ballet  II.  Greater  complexity  of  barre  and  center  sequences  with  increased  em- 
phasis on  correctness  of  style  and  quality  of  performance.  Prerequisites:  Dance  70  or 
equivalent,  and  consent  of  instructor.  Half  course.  Dorrance 

Institute  of  the  Arts  (AI)        119 


79.  African  Dance  Technique.  Half  course.  Davis 

80.  Individual  Dance  Program.  Half  course.  Staff 

81.  Repertory.  The  study  of  choreography  and  performance  through  participation 
in  the  mounting  of  a  dance  work  from  inception  through  rehearsal  to  performance.  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

Theory  Courses 

101.  Introduction  to  Dance.  (AL)  Dance  as  a  theater  art  including  the  choreographic 
process;  technique  in  relation  to  style,  form,  content;  the  role  of  dance  in  society.  One 
course.  Desmond,  Dickinson,  or  Wray 

129S.  Dance  as  a  Western  Theater  Art  before  1900.  A  history  of  theatrical  dance, 
primarily  European,  with  emphasis  on  developments  that  occurred  after  1500.  Illustra- 
tive topics:  dance  in  ancient  Greece;  the  Renaissance  dancing  master;  ballet  d  'action;  the 
romantic  ballet;  Petipa  and  classical  ballet  in  Russia.  One  course.  Dickinson 

131.  Modern  Dance:  History  and  Theory  I.  (AL)  Same  as  131S  but  in  a  lecture  for- 
mat. One  course.  Staff 

131S.  Modern  Dance:  History  and  Theory  I.  (AL)  Modern  dance,  through  the  phi- 
losophy and  work  of  its  major  artists  considered  in  relation  to  the  other  arts  and  the  so- 
ciopolitical climate  of  the  period  1890  to  1950.  One  course.  Desmond,  Dickinson,  or  Wray 

132S.  Modern  Dance:  History  and  Theory  II.  (AL)  See  131S,  but  from  1950  to  the  pres- 
ent. One  course.  Desmond,  Dickinson,  or  Wray 

133.  History  of  Black  Dance.  (AL)  A  survey  of  black  dance  in  Africa,  America,  and 
the  Carribean  during  the  eighteenth,  nineteenth,  and  twentieth  centuries.  One  course. 
Davis 

135S.  Introduction  to  the  Principles  of  Contemporary  Dance  Composition.  (AL)  Basic 
compositional  tools;  sources  of  movement  material;  use  of  movement  dynamics,  varia- 
tion, rhythm,  and  design  in  dance  composition;  methods  of  structuring  group  compo- 
sitions from  short  movement  studies  to  the  more  complex  group  pieces.  One  course.  Staff 

136S.  Advanced  Contemporary  Dance  Composition.  (AL)  Choreographing  for  less 
traditional  performing  areas;  contemporary  methods  of  composition;  improvisation  as 
a  source  of  movement  material  and  choreographic  form.  Prerequisite:  Dance  135S.  One 
course.  Staff 

181.  Special  Topics.  Content  to  be  determined  each  semester.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

181S.  Special  Topics.  Content  to  be  determined  each  semester.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

188S.  The  Diaghilev  Ballet,  1909-1929.  (AL)  The  Diaghilev  Ballet  as  a  focal  point  for 
modernist  movements  in  the  arts  and  a  revitalizing  force  for  ballet  that  brought  together 
choreographers  Fokine,  Nijinsky,  Massine,  Nijinska;  composers  Stravinsky,  Ravel, 
Debussy,  Satie;  artists  Bakst,  Benois,  Picasso,  Braque.  Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  stand- 
ing or  consent  of  the  instructor.  C-L:  Institute  of  the  Arts  121S  and  Interdisciplinary  Course 
188S.  One  course.  Dickinson  and  staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Individual  intensive  research  or  creative  projects.  Half 
or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

198.  Sacred  Dance.  (AL)  One  course.  Wray 


120         Courses  of  Instruction 


Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 
64.  Advanced  Modern  Dance 
69.  Jazz  Dance 

134.  Creative  Movement  for  Children 
139.  Movement  Connotations 
183.  Dance  and  Dance  Music,  1600-1800.  (AL) 
197.  Aesthetics  of  Twentieth-Century  Dance.  (AL) 

Asian  and  African  Languages  and  Literature 

Associate  Professor  Cooke,  Director,  Assistant  Professor  Kunst,  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies;  Associate  Professor  Fowler;  Assistant  Professors  Nagai,  Wang,  and  Willis;  Instruc- 
tor Kuriya.  Affiliated  faculty:  Professors  Apte  (cultural  anthropology),  Lawrence  (relig- 
ion), E.  Meyers  (religion),  and  O'Barr  (cultural  anthropology) 

Asian  and  African  Languages  and  Literature  provides  instruction  in  several  lan- 
guages, literatures,  and  linguistics  of  Africa  and  Asia .  Languages  offered  are  Arabic,  Chi- 
nese, Hebrew,  Hindi,  Japanese,  Korean,  Persian,  and  Swahili.  It  offers  Arabic,  Chinese, 
and  Japanese  literature  and  linguistics  courses,  many  in  translation.  Its  courses  are  par- 
ticularly compatible  with  a  major  in  Comparative  Area  Studies. 

ARABIC  (ARB) 

1, 2.  Elementary  Arabic.  (FL)  Understanding,  speaking,  reading,  and  writing  mod- 
ern standard  Arabic.  Language  laboratory.  One  course  each.  Cooke 

63,  64.  Intermediate  Arabic.  (FL)  Reading,  composition,  and  conversation  in  mod- 
ern standard  Arabic.  Readings  include  selections  from  the  Qur'an,  contemporary  liter- 
ature, and  the  Arabic  press.  One  course  each.  Cooke 

100.  North  African  Culture.  (AL)  Introduction  to  the  culture  of  North  Africa  with  spe- 
cial emphasis  on  the  modern  fiction  of  the  area.  (Taught  in  the  summer  program  in  Moroc- 
co, in  English.)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Cooke 

155, 156.  Advanced  Arabic.  (AL,  FL)  Readings  in  classical  and  contemporary  fiction 
and  nonfiction.  Works  include  al-Jahiz,  Ibn  Arabi,  Abduh,  Taha  Husain,  Ghada  al- 
Sammanand  1001  Nights.  Prerequisite:  Arabic  64  or  equivalent.  One  course  each.  Cooke 

173S.  Women  in  Arabic  Literature.  (AL)  Taught  in  English.  Representative  novels, 
short  stories,  plays,  and  poems  by  writers  (mostly  female)  in  the  Arab  world.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Cooke 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  One  course  each.  Cooke 
Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

171S.  Modern  Arabic  Literature  in  Translation.  (AL) 

CHINESE  (CHN) 

1,  2.  Elementary  Chinese.  (FL)  Introduction  to  speaking,  understanding,  reading, 
and  writing  modern  standard  Chinese  (Mandarin,  or  putonghua,  based  on  the  Beijing  di- 
alect). One  and  one-half  courses  each.  Wang  and  staff 

1  A.  Abridged  Elementary  Chinese.  (FL)  Fundamentals  of  spoken  and  written  mod- 
ern standard  Chinese  (Mandarin) .  Intended  for  post-baccalaureate  and  summer  session 
students.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

Asian  and  African  Languages  and  Literature        121 


2A.  Abridged  Elementary  Chinese  II.  (FL)  Prerequisites:  Chinese  1A  and  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

3.  Literacy  in  Chinese.  (FL)  An  alternative  to  Chinese  1, 2  for  fluent  speakers  of  mod- 
ern standard  Chinese  (Mandarin),  with  little  or  no  reading  and  writing  ability,  who  wish 
to  make  sufficient  progress  in  one  semester  to  advance  to  Chinese  64  in  the  spring  semes- 
ter. One  course.  Staff 

63,  64.  Intermediate  Chinese.  (FL)  Reading,  oral  practice,  language  laboratory.  One 
and  one-half  courses  each.  Kunst  and  staff 

125, 126.  Advanced  Chinese.  (CZ,  FL)  Contemporary  nonfiction,  films,  and  the  me- 
dia, concerning  current  political,  social,  and  economic  issues  in  China,  Taiwan,  and  Hong 
Kong.  Prerequisite:  Chinese  63,  64  or  equivalent.  One  course  each.  Staff 

141S.  The  Fantastic  in  Chinese  Fiction.  (AL)  A  survey  of  Chinese  narrative  conven- 
tion with  special  emphasis  on  the  genre  of  the  fantastic  in  premodern  fiction.  Topics  in- 
clude the  influence  of  Chinese  literary  conventions  and  religious  modes  on  the  fantastic 
in  tales  and  full-length  novels.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Wang 

142S.  Masterpieces  of  Chinese  Literature  in  Translation.  ( AL)  Traditional  fiction,  dra- 
ma, and  poetry  in  their  intellectual  and  social  context.  Chinese  literature,  from  Chuang 
Tzu  to  the  revolutionary  era  of  the  1920s:  poetry  in  a  variety  of  genres,  drama  from  the 
Yuan  (Mongol)  dynasty  to  Peking  opera,  and  such  novels  as  the  eighteenth  century  Dream 
of  the  Red  Chamber.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kunst 

166S.  The  I  Ching,  or  Book  of  Changes.  (CZ)  Its  place  in  ancient  Chinese  religion  and 
systematic  thought;  its  contributions  to  Chinese  and  world  culture.  Taught  in  English. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kunst 

171.  The  Novel  in  Modern  China.  (AL,  FL)  Reading  and  discussion  in  depth  of  a 
selected  novel,  with  its  cultural  and  historical  background .  Prerequisite :  Chinese  125  or 
126  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kunst 

182S.  Classical  Readings  in  Chinese  Philosophy.  (CZ,  FL)  An  examination  of  early 
Chinese  philosophies:  Confucianism  and  Taoism  in  the  classical  texts.  The  sacred  and 
the  secular,  political  philosophies  of  Confucianism  and  Taoism,  and  the  historical  rise 
of  the  two  schools.  Taught  in  Mandarin  Chinese.  Prerequisite:  Chinese  63,  64, 125  or  126. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Wang 

183, 184.  Topics  in  Modern  Chinese.  (FL)  Readings  and  other  material,  including  films, 
television,  and  radio  broadcasts.  Exercises  in  composition.  Prerequisite:  Chinese  125, 126, 
127, 129,  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  Kunst 
or  Wang 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  One  course  each.  Staff 

Courses  Offered  in  the  Duke  Study  in  China  Program  at  Beij  ing  Teachers  College  and 
Nanjing  University 

111,  112.  Intensive  Progress  in  Chinese.  (FL)  One  course  each.  Staff 

127.  Chinese  Conversation  and  Composition.  (FL)  Discussion  based  on  oral  and  writ- 
ten reports.  Aural  comprehension  practice.  One  course.  Staff 

129.  Advanced  Readings  in  Chinese.  (CZ,  FL)  Reading  and  discussion  of  selections 
from  modern  Chinese  literature,  expository  prose,  and  the  Chinese  press.  One  course. 

Staff 

193.  Directed  Study.  Reading  and  research  culminating  in  a  paper,  on  a  topic  approved 
and  supervised  by  the  resident  director.  One  course.  Staff 

122         Courses  of  Instruction 


Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

135, 136.  Introduction  to  Modern  Chinese  Literature.  (AL,  FL) 

HEBREW  (HEB) 

1,  2.  Elementary  Modern  Hebrew.  (FL)  Introduction  to  speaking,  understanding, 
reading,  and  writing  modern  Hebrew.  Language  laboratory.  One  course  each.  Staff 

63, 64.  Intermediate  Modern  Hebrew.  (FL)  Reading,  composition,  conversation,  and 
language  laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Hebrew  1,  2  or  equivalent.  One  course  each.  Staff 

191, 192, 193, 194.  Independent  Study.  One  course  each.  Staff 

HINDI-URDU  (HIN) 

1,  2.  Intensive  Elementary  Hindi-Urdu.  (FL)  Conversation,  basic  grammar,  and 
vocabulary;  introduction  to  the  Devanagari  script  and  the  reading  of  graded  texts.  Four 
hours  of  classroom  work;  two  hours  of  language  laboratory  drill .  One  course  each .  Staff 

63, 64.  Intensive  Intermediate  Hindi-Urdu.  (FL)  Reading,  composition,  and  conver- 
sation. Four  hours  of  classroom  work,  two  hours  of  language  drill.  Prerequisites:  Hindi- 
Urdu  1  and  2.  One  course  each.  Staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  students 
with  prior  knowledge  of  Hindi-Urdu.  One  course  each.  Staff 

JAPANESE  (JPN) 

1, 2.  Elementary  Japanese.  (FL)  Introduction  to  speaking,  understanding,  reading, 
and  writing.  One  course  each.  Nagai  and  staff 

63, 64.  Intermediate  Japanese.  (FL)  Practice  on  advanced  spoken  and  written  patterns; 
reading  and  discussion.  One  course  each.  Kuriya  and  staff 

155, 156.  Readings  in  Modern  Japanese.  (AL,  FL)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course  each.  Kuriya  and  staff 

161.  Modern  Japanese  Fiction  in  Translation.  (AL)  An  examination  of  the  major  forms 
of  long  and  short  fiction  from  1890  to  the  present  and  the  tradition  from  which  they  arose. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Fowler 

175.  Structure  of  Japanese.  (AL,  FL)  Syntactic  and  semantic  analysis  of  Japanese  with- 
in the  framework  of  current  linguistic  theory.  Prerequisites:  Japanese  1  and  2.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Nagai 

183, 184.  Topics  in  Japanese.  ( AL,  FL)  Readings  and  other  material,  including  televi- 
sion and  radio  broadcasts.  Exercises  in  composition.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  Fowler  or  Nagai 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  One  course  each.  Staff 

KOREAN  (KOR) 

1, 2.  Elementary  Korean.  (FL)  Learning  through  self-instructional  mode.  Intensive 
work  in  language  laboratory;  drill  sessions  with  native  speaker;  emphasis  on  conversa- 
tion. Reading  and  writing  in  hangul  script.  One  course  each.  Kunst  and  staff 

63,  64.  Intermediate  Korean.  (FL)  Spoken  and  written  Korean  through  self- 
instructional  mode.  One  course  each.  Kunst  and  staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  One  course  each.  Kunst 

Asian  and  African  Languages  and  Literature        123 


PERSIAN  (PER) 

1,  2.  Elementary  Persian.  (FL)  Introduction  to  spoken  and  literary  Persian:  under- 
standing, speaking,  reading,  and  writing.  Language  laboratory  drill.  One  course  each. 
Lawrence 

63,  64.  Intermediate  Persian.  (FL)  Four  hours  of  classroom  work.  Advanced  reading 
and  composition  in  classical  Persian .  Prerequisite :  elementary  Persian.  One  course  each . 
Lawrence 

101.  Introduction  to  Persian  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  An  introduction  to  classical  Persian 
literature  through  the  reading  and  translation  of  selected  prose  and  poetry  texts.  Prereq- 
uisites: Persian  64  or  the  equivalent,  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Lawrence 

SWAHILI  (SWA) 

1, 2.  Elementary  Swahili.  (FL)  Language  instruction  through  self-instructional  mode. 
Intensive  work  in  language  laboratory;  drill  sessions  with  native  speakers.  Emphasis  on 
conversation.  One  course  each.  W.  O'Barr 

14.  Intensive  Swahili.  (FL)  Accelerated  introduction  to  Swahili,  combining  in  one  se- 
mester the  work  of  Swahili  1  and  2.  Normally  offered  only  in  the  summer.  Two  courses. 
W.  O'Barr 

63, 64.  Intermediate  Swahili.  (FL)  Classroom  work  and  language  laboratory  drill.  An 
advanced  study  of  language,  culture,  and  literature.  One  course  each.  W.  O'Barr 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  One  course  each.  W.  O'Barr 

Astronomy 

For  courses  in  astronomy,  see  Physics. 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  <baa> 

Professor  Kay,  Acting  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Glander,  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies;  Professors  Cartmill,  Hylander,  Simons,  and  Terborgh;  Associate  Professors  Smith 
and  Van  Schaik;  Assistant  Professors  Bassett,  Roth,  and  Wright;  Associate  Professor 
Emeritus  Duke;  Visiting  Assistant  Professor  White 

A  major  is  available  in  anthropology. 

Anthropology  is  a  comparative  discipline  which  studies  the  world's  peoples,  cultures, 
and  the  physical  evolution  of  humanity.  It  emphasizes  the  application  of  the  perspectives 
which  anthropology  developed  from  its  initial  concentration  on  the  prehistoric  and  primi- 
tive world  to  modern  studies  of  the  evolution  of  complex  societies,  primate  anatomy,  and 
developmental  biology. 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  is  an  interdisciplinary  natural  science  depart- 
ment centering  on  the  study  of  nonhuman  and  human  primate  origins  and  evolution. 
There  are  three  general  areas  of  focus  in  the  department  and  its  course  work.  (1)  Primate 
behavior  and  ecology  attempts  to  understand  the  behavioral  relationship  of  humans  to 
other  primates.  Significant  opportunities  for  undergraduates  are  found  at  the  Duke  Pri- 
mate Center  which  houses  a  unique  and  diverse  range  of  nonhuman  primates,  especially 
prosimians  from  Madagascar.  (2)  Human  and  nonhuman  primate  evolutionary  studies 
concentrate  on  the  fossil  evidence.  Advanced  students  will  find  a  range  of  opportunities 
to  study  original  fossils  and  casts  in  laboratories  at  the  Primate  Center  and  in  the  Medi- 
cal School.  (3)  Functional  and  developmental  biology  of  primates  provides  laboratory  op- 
portunities to  study  nonhuman  and  human  primate  anatomy  from  an  adaptive  and  evolu- 
tionary perspective. 


124         Courses  of  Instruction 


Students  without  prerequisites  for  a  course  may  ask  the  instructor  for  admission. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

93.  Human  Origins.  (NS)  Origins  and  distribution;  primate  evolution;  a  survey  of 
human  paleontology  and  human  biology,  prehistory,  and  language;  and  the  origins  of 
human  social  organization  and  culture.  One  course.  Staff 

93D.  Human  Origins.  (NS)  Same  as  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  93  ex- 
cept instruction  is  provided  in  two  lectures  and  one  small  laboratory  meeting  each  week. 
One  course.  Staff 

132.  Human  Evolution.  (NS)  Evolutionary  biology  of  the  primates.  Anatomical  and 
behavioral  adaptations  and  phylogeny  of  fossils  and  living  primates  including  Homo 
sapiens.  Prerequisite:  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  93  or  equivalent.  One  course. 
Cartmill,  Glander,  or  Simons 

143.  Primate  Biology.  (NS)  A  comprehensive  survey  of  primate  feeding  strategies  and 
general  ecology.  One  course.  Glander,  Simons,  or  Wright 

144.  Evolutionary  Study  of  Behavior.  (NS)  Phylogenetic  comparison  of  communi- 
cation, infant  socialization,  aggression,  and  sexual  behavior  as  they  pertain  to  species 
group  structure.  Emphasis  on  primates.  One  course.  Glander  or  Simons 

146.  Sociobiology  and  Gender.  (NS)  Sociobiological  theory  reviewed  and  applied 
to  the  social  behavior  of  free-ranging  primates.  The  effects  of  gender  on  social  behavior. 
One  course.  Wright 

151.  Anatomy  of  the  Lower  Extremities.  Introduction  to  the  functional  anatomy  of 
the  lower  extremities.  Does  not  count  for  anthropology  major  requirements.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Bassett 

172S.  Primate  Anatomy.  (NS)  The  comparative  anatomy  of  primates  from  the  per- 
spective of  adaptation  and  phylogeny.  Laboratory  includes  some  dissection  or  prosec- 
tion  of  human  and  nonhuman  primates.  One  course.  Kay 

180.  Current  Issues  in  Anthropology.  (SS)  Selected  topics  in  methodology,  theory, 
or  area.  One  course.  Staff 

180S.  Current  Issues  in  Anthropology.  (SS)  Same  as  Biological  Anthropology  and 
Anatomy  180  except  instruction  is  provided  in  seminar  format.  One  course.  Staff 

185.  Current  Issues  in  Primatology.  (NS)  Selected  topics  in  primate  behavior,  ecolo- 
gy, and  conservation.  One  course.  Glander  or  Wright 

186S.  Research  Internship  in  Primatology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  See 
C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  186S.  One  course.  Staff 

187S.  Senior  Seminar  in  Primatology.  (NS)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  See 
C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  187S.  One  course.  Staff 

193.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
seniors,  with  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

195S,  196S.  Senior  Seminar.  Prerequisites:  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 
93,  a  100-level  course  in  anthropology,  and  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 
One  course  each.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

238.  Functional  and  Evolutionary  Morphology  of  Primates.  (NS)  History  and  func- 
tional significance  of  locomotor  and  feeding  adaptations,  craniofacial  morphology,  sense 
organs,  and  reproductive  systems  in  primates,  including  Homo  sapiens .  Prerequisite :  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  (BAA)         125 


244S.  Primate  Behavior.  (NS)  Social  behavior  of  prosimians,  monkeys,  and  apes  and 
the  evolutionary  development  of  primates.  One  course.  Glander 

246S.  The  Primate  Fossil  Record.  (NS)  Evolution  of  humans  and  other  primates  as 
inferred  from  fossil  remains.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in  human  evolution.  One  course. 
Simons 

280S,  281S.  Seminar  in  Selected  Topics.  (NS)  Special  topics  in  methodology  theory 
or  area.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

292.  Topics  in  Morphology  and  Evolution.  (NS)  Various  aspects  of  vertebrate  mor- 
phology and  evolution,  including  major  historical  approaches  to  the  interpretation  of  mor- 
phology; the  evolution,  development,  and  function  of  specific  morphological  structures; 
and  patterns  of  vertebrate  evolution.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Smith 

THE  MAJOR  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY 

For  a  description  of  the  anthropology  major  see  the  section  Anthropology. 

Biology  (Bio) 

Faculty  in  Botany:  Professor  W.  Culberson,  Chairman;  Professor  Searles,  Director  of  Un- 
dergraduate Studies  in  Biology;  Professors  Antonovics,  Boynton,  Christensen,  Osmond, 
Ramus,  Schlesinger,  Siedow,  Stone,  Strain,  White,  and  R.  Wilbur;  Associate  Professor 
Knoerr;  Assistant  Professors  Johnston,  Kohorn,  Mishler,  and  Vilgalys;  Professors  Emeriti 
Anderson,  Billings,  Hellmers,  Kramer,  Naylor,  and  Philpott;  Adjunct  Professor  C.  Cul- 
berson; Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Patterson 

Faculty  in  Zoology:  Professor  Gillham,  Chainnan;  Professors  Costlow,  Fluke,  Forward, 
Klopfer,  Livingstone,  McClay,  Nicklas,  H.  Nijhout,  Ruderman,  Staddon,  Tucker,  Vogel, 
Wainwright,  Ward,  and  H.  Wilbur;  Associate  Professors  Laurie,  Lundberg,  Rausher, 
Sutherland,  and  Uyenoyama;  Assistant  Professors  Nowicki  and  Roth;  Professors  Emeriti 
Bailey,  Bookhout,  Gregg,  Schmidt-Nielsen,  andK.  Wilbur;  Adjunct  Professor  Schmidt- 
Koenig;  Lecturer  M.  Nijhout 

A  major  is  available  in  biology. 

The  biology  courses  and  the  biology  major  are  cooperatively  administered  by  the 
Department  of  Botany  and  the  Department  of  Zoology.  Additional  courses  in  biosciences 
are  offered  by  the  Departments  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy,  Chemistry,  and 
Psychology  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences;  by  the  basic  science  departments  in 
the  School  of  Medicine;  and  by  the  Schools  of  Engineering  and  of  Forestry  and  Environ- 
mental Studies. 

Biology  21L  and  22L  constitute  the  normal  introductory  courses  for  students  plan- 
ning to  major  in  the  biological  sciences  and  are  prerequisites  for  intermediate  and  ad- 
vanced courses  in  biology.  The  two  courses  may  be  taken  in  any  order,  and  students  major- 
ing in  biology  may  take  their  second  course  in  the  sequence  concurrently  with  an 
intermediate  level  course,  as  appropriate.  For  nonmajors,  either  course,  or  both,  may  count 
for  the  distributional  requirement  in  the  natural  sciences. 

10L.  Marine  Biology.  (NS)  Physical  and  chemical  characteristics  of  marine  ecosystems 
and  the  functional  adaptations  of  marine  organisms  to  these  systems.  Lectures,  field  trips, 
and  laboratories.  For  students  not  majoring  in  a  natural  science.  Given  at  Beaufort.  C-L: 
Marine  Sciences.  One  course.  Staff 

14L.  Principles  of  Biology.  (NS)  A  one-semester  introduction.  Final  time  offered  is 
fall  1989,  open  only  to  sophomores  and  above.  One  course.  Staff 

19.  General  Biology.  This  number  represents  course  credit  for  advanced  placement 
on  the  basis  of  the  College  Board  Examination  in  biology.  One  course. 

126        Courses  of  Instruction 


21L.  Introduction  to  Organismal  and  Environmental  Biology.  (NS)  The  basic  prin- 
ciples of  genetics,  population  genetics,  evolution,  ecology,  and  physiology  of  animals  and 
plants.  The  diversity  and  phylogeny  of  unicellular  organisms  and  of  plants.  May  be  tak- 
en before  or  after  Biology  22L.  One  course.  Staff 

22L.  Introduction  to  Cellular  and  Developmental  Biology.  (NS)  The  basic  principles 
of  cell  biology,  photosynthesis,  metabolism,  molecular  biology,  immunology,  and  de- 
velopment of  animals  and  plants.  The  diversity  and  phylogeny  of  animals.  May  be  tak- 
en before  or  after  Biology  21L.  One  course.  Staff 

43.  Ecology  and  Society.  (NS)  Ecological  concepts  and  their  application  to  human  so- 
ciety. Intended  for  nonscience  majors.  One  course.  Staff 

45S.  Structure.  The  structural  design  principles  that  underlie  function,  failure,  and 
fancy  in  natural  and  manmade  things.  Gaps  and  connections  between  science  and  art. 
Lectures  and  tasks  for  minds  and  hands  on  worldly  designs.  Does  not  count  toward  the 
divisional  or  fields  of  knowledge  requirements.  C-L:  Institute  of  the  Arts  20S.  Onecourse. 

Wainwright 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

53.  Introductory  Oceanography.  (NS)  Basic  principles  of  physical,  chemical,  biolog- 
ical, and  geological  oceanography.  C-L:  Geology  53.  One  course.  Pilkey  and  Searles 

74L.  Introductory  Animal  Diversity.  (NS)  Structure,  functions,  and  habits  of  animals; 
classification,  evolutionary  origins,  and  phylogenetic  relationships  of  major  extant  groups. 
One  course.  Rausher  or  Roth 

85.  Ecology  and  Natural  History  of  North  America.  (NS)  Origin,  distribution,  struc- 
ture, and  function  of  ecosystems  related  to  past  and  present  patterns  of  geology,  climate, 
and  human  land  use.  One  course.  Christensen 

90.  Plants  and  Man.  (NS)  The  biological  nature  of  crop  plants,  the  world's  major  eco- 
nomic plants,  and  the  origins  and  evolution  of  agriculture.  One  course.  W.  Culberson  or 
R.  Wilbur 

96D.  Human  Sex  and  Sexuality.  Anatomical,  physiological,  and  psychological  aspects 
of  sexuality.  Weekly  lectures  by  specialists.  Does  not  satisfy  major,  divisional,  or  fields 
of  knowledge  requirements.  Pass/fail  grading  only.  Half  course.  Klopfer  and  staff 

100.  Perspectives  on  Living  Systems.  (NS)  For  upperclass  students  not  intending 
majors  in  a  biological  science.  One  course.  Staff 

102.  Trees  and  Shrubs  of  North  Carolina.  (NS)  Identification  and  natural  history  of 
the  trees,  shrubs,  and  woody  vines.  Emphasis  on  those  cultivated  or  occurring  natural- 
ly in  North  Carolina.  One  course.  R.  Wilbur 

103L.  General  Microbiology.  (NS)  Classical  and  modern  principles  of  the  structure, 
physiology,  and  genetics  of  microorganisms  and  their  roles  in  human  affairs.  Prerequi- 
site: one  course  in  a  biological  science  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Vilgalys 

105.  Introduction  to  Molecular  Biology.  (NS)  Concepts  and  techniques.  Prerequi- 
site: Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L.  One  course.  Staff 

108L.  Developmental  and  Comparative  Anatomy  of  Vertebrates.  (NS)  The  embryol- 
ogy, anatomy,  and  evolutionary  development  of  vertebrate  organ  systems.  Prerequisite: 
Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L.  One  course.  Lundberg 

110L.  Ecology.  (NS)  Physical,  chemical,  and  biological  processes  that  determine  the 
distribution  and  abundance  of  plants  and  animals,  emphasizing  physiological  responses, 
population  dynamics,  species  interaction,  biogeography,  nutrient  cycling,  and  energy 


Biology  (BIO)        127 


flow  through  food  webs.  Laboratory  includes  fieldwork.  Prerequisites:  Biology  21L,  22L 
or  Biology  14L;  and  Mathematics  31.  One  course.  ChristensenandH.  Wilbur,  or  Livingstone 
and  Schlesinger 

111.  Learning  and  Adaptive  Behavior.  (NS)  Prerequisite:  none,  but  some  knowledge 
of  quantitative  science  desirable.  See  C-L:  Psychology  111.  One  course.  Staddon 

113L.  Behavioral  Ecology.  (NS)  How  ecological  factors  shape  foraging,  mating,  ag- 
gressive and  social  behavior.  Laboratory  experiments  and  field  observations  from  the  Out- 
er Banks  environment.  Independent  projects  and  seminars.  Not  open  to  students  who 
have  taken  Zoology  213L.  Given  at  Beaufort.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology 
14L.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  One  course.  Rubenstein 

114L.  Biological  Oceanography.  (NS)  Physical,  chemical,  and  biological  processes 
of  the  oceans,  emphasizing  special  adaptations  for  life  in  the  sea  and  factors  controlling 
distribution  and  abundance  of  organisms.  Laboratory  emphasis.  One  course  (spring); 
one  and  one-half  courses  (summer).  Given  at  Beaufort.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L,  22L 
or  Biology  14L.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  Variable  credit.  Ramus  and  staff 

117L.  Biology  of  Marine  Macrophytes.  (NS)  Physiology  and  ecology  of  seaweeds, 
seagrasses,  marshgrasses,  and  mangroves.  Biological  flux  of  carbon  and  nutrients  in  coast- 
al seas.  Ecological  consequences  of  photosynthetic  adaptations.  Given  at  Beaufort.  Prereq- 
uisites: Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L;  and  Chemistry  11,  12  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Ma- 
rine Sciences.  One  course.  Ramus 

120.  Principles  of  Evolution.  (NS)  Evidence  for  evolution;  mechanisms  of  micro-  and 
macro-evolutionary  change.  Genetic  change  in  populations.  Ecological,  behavioral, 
molecular  forces  influencing  genetic  change.  Speciation;  phylogenetic  reconstruction. 
Prerequisite:  Biology  21L  or  Biology  14L.  One  course.  Antonovics 

140L.  Plant  Diversity.  (NS)  Major  groups  of  living  plants,  their  evolutionary  origins 
and  phylogenetic  relationships.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L.  One  course. 
Mishler,  Searles,  orR.  Wilbur 

142L.  Plant  Systematics.  (NS)  Surveys  major  groups.  Principles  of  vascular  plant  tax- 
onomy with  practice  in  identification  of  local  flora.  Lectures,  laboratories,  and  field  trips. 
One  course.  Mishler  and  R.  Wilbur 

145.  Physical  Radiations  and  Biological  Significance.  (NS)  Kinds  of  physical  radia- 
tions, related  biological  hazards  and  benefits.  Levels  of  concern  for  plants  and  animals, 
including  humans.  Protection,  cellular  repair  processes.  Prerequisites:  Biology  21L,  22L 
or  Biology  14L;  and  Chemistry  12.  One  course.  Fluke 

149.  Comparative  Biomechanics.  (NS)  The  structure  and  operation  of  organisms  in 
relation  to  the  mechanics  of  solids  and  fluids.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Biol- 
ogy 249.  Prerequisites:  Physics  51  and  Mathematics  31  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Vogel 
and  Wainwright 

150L.  Physiology  of  Marine  Animals.  (NS)  Environmental  factors,  biological 
rhythms,  and  behavioral  adaptations  in  the  comparative  physiology  of  marine  animals. 
Given  at  Beaufort.  Prerequisites:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L;  and  chemistry.  C-L: 
Marine  Sciences.  One  course.  Forward 

151L.  Principles  of  Animal  Physiology.  (NS)  Functional  aspects  of  respiration,  cir- 
culation, neural  and  hormonal  coordination,  water  balance,  metabolism,  thermoregu- 
lation, and  responses  to  special  environments.  Prerequisites:  Biology  22L  or  Biology  14L, 
and  Chemistry  12.  One  course.  Tucker,  Nowicki,  or  staff 

152L.  Plant  Physiology.  (NS)  Principal  physiological  processes  of  plants,  including 
respiration,  photosynthesis,  water  relations,  and  factors  associated  with  plant  morpho- 

128        Courses  of  Instruction 


genesis.  Prerequisites:  Biology  21L  or  Biology  14L,  and  one  year  of  chemistry;  organic 
chemistry  is  desirable.  One  course.  Siedow 

160.  Principles  of  Cell  Biology.  (NS)  Structure  and  function  of  organelles,  metabo- 
lism, and  regulatory  mechanisms.  Prerequisites:  Biology  22L  or  Biology  14L,  and  Chemis- 
try 12.  One  course.  Kohorn,  McClay,  orM.  Nijhout 

160L.  Principles  of  Cell  Biology.  (NS)  See  Biology  160.  Includes  laboratory.  One 
course.  Kohorn,  McClay,  or  M.  Nijhout 

164.  The  Molecular  Biology  of  Development.  (NS)  Principles  and  problems  of  de- 
velopment and  differentiation.  Fertilization  and  early  development;  molecular  and  cel- 
lular mechanisms  of  determination,  lineage  determinism,  embryonic  induction  and 
differentiation;  developmental  genetics,  morphogenesis,  and  pattern  formation.  Includes 
attention  to  current  literature.  Prerequisites:  Biology  22L  or  Biology  14L,  and  Chemistry 
12.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  One  course.  Ruderman 

169L.  Marine  Communities.  (NS)  Dynamics  of  marine  communities  in  the  context 
of  current  ecological  theory.  Life  history  strategies,  competition,  predation,  diversity,  and 
stability;  detailed  considerations  of  benthic  and  pelagic  communities.  Given  at  Beaufort. 
Prerequisites:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L;  and  Mathematics  31.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences. 
One  course.  Sutherland 

170L.  Plant  Anatomy.  (NS)  A  comparative  study  of  basic  cell  types,  tissues,  and  or- 
gans of  vascular  plants.  Correlation  of  anatomical  information  with  pertinent  literature, 
application  of  anatomy  to  problems  in  systematics  and  evolution,  and  the  interrelation- 
ship between  structure  and  function.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L,  or  Biology  14L  plus 
Biology  140L,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  White 

176L.  Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology.  (NS)  Structure,  function,  and  development  of 
invertebrates  collected  from  estuarine  and  marine  habitats.  Not  open  to  students  who  have 
taken  Zoology  274L.  One  course  (fall);  one  and  one-half  courses  (summer).  Prerequisite: 
Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  Variable  credit.  Kirby-Smith  (marine 
sciences) 

180.  Principles  of  Genetics.  (NS)  Structure  and  properties  of  genes  and  chromosomes 
in  individual  organisms  and  in  populations.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology 
14L.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  One  course.  Antonovics,  Boynton,  Gillham, 
and  Laurie 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  (NS)  For  junior  and  senior  majors  with  consent  of  Direc- 
tor of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  supervising  instructor.  Three  courses  of  191, 192, 193T, 
and  194T,  maximum.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

193T,  194T.  Tutorial.  (NS)  For  junior  and  senior  majors  with  consent  of  Director  of 
Undergraduate  Studies  and  supervising  instructor.  Three  courses  of  191, 192, 193T,  and 
194T,  maximum.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

195S,  196S.  Seminar  in  Botany.  (NS)  Variable  credit.  Staff 

199S.  The  Changing  Biosphere:  Past,  Present,  and  Future.  (NS)  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Distinguished  Professor  Course  199S.  One  course.  Billings 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Advanced  Neuroscience  I.  (NS)  Prerequisite:  Psychology  103.  See  C-L:  Psychol- 
ogy 200;  also  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  200.  One  course.  Cant  and  McClay 

201L,S.  Animal  Behavior.  (NS)  Survey  of  past  developments  and  current  controver- 
sies in  animal  behavior.  Extensive  readings,  followed  by  individual  experimental  or 
descriptive  projects  in  the  laboratory  or  field  (or  Primate  Center).  Recommended  back- 

Biology  (BIO)         129 


ground:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L;  Biology  151L;  and  Statistics  200;  or  equivalents. 
One  course.  Klopfer 

203L.  Marine  Ecology.  (NS)  Application  of  ecological  theory  to  marine  systems.  Em- 
phasis on  hypothesis  formulation,  field  experimentation,  data  analysis,  scientific  writ- 
ing, and  familiarity  with  current  ecological  literature.  Given  at  Beaufort.  Prerequisite: 
course  in  introductory  ecology,  invertebrate  zoology,  or  marine  botany  (phycology); 
knowledge  of  statistics  helpful.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  One  and  one-half  courses.  Hay 
(visiting  summer  faculty) 

205.  Molecular  Biology.  (NS)  Molecular  aspects  of  gene  expression  and  cell  differen- 
tiation; application  of  recombinant  DNA  techniques  to  basic  and  applied  problems. 
Prerequisite:  cell  biology  and/or  genetics.  One  course.  Johnston 

206S.  Controversies  in  Biology.  (NS)  A  contentious  theme  for  reading,  discussion, 
and  an  individual  or  joint  paper.  Illustrative  past  topics:  the  nature  of  the  creative  proc- 
ess, causality  in  biological  thought,  the  lack  of  political  impact  of  many  scientific  develop- 
ments. Open  to  nonmajors.  One  course.  Klopfer 

210L.  Bryology.  (NS)  Morphological,  systematic,  and  ecological  characteristics  of 
mosses  and  liverworts.  One  course.  Mishler 

212L.  Phycology.  (NS)  Morphological  and  ecological  characteristics  of  common  fresh- 
water and  marine  algae  and  principles  of  their  classification.  One  course.  Searles 

216L.  Limnology.  (NS)  Lakes,  ponds,  and  streams;  their  origin,  development,  ge- 
ochemistry, energy  balance,  productivity,  and  the  dynamics  of  plant  and  animal  com- 
munities. Laboratory  includes  field  trips.  Offered  biennially.  Prerequisites:  Biology  21L, 
22L  or  Biology  14L;  and  Chemistry  12  and  Mathematics  32  and  physics;  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. One  course.  Livingstone 

218.  Barrier  Island  Ecology.  (NS)  Adaptation  of  plants  to  barrier  island  migration  and 
other  physical  characteristics  of  the  coastal  environment.  Major  emphasis  on  manage- 
ment of  barrier  beaches  from  Maine  to  Texas  and  the  impact  of  human  interference  with 
natural  processes.  Field  studies.  Given  at  Beaufort.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in  general  ecol- 
ogy. C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  218  and  Marine  Sciences.  One  and  one- 
half  courses.  Staff 

219L.  Benthic  Marine  Algae.  (NS)  Morphology,  reproduction,  life  histories,  systemat- 
ics,  and  natural  history  of  seaweeds.  Lectures,  laboratories,  and  fieldwork  in  ocean  and 
estuaries.  Given  at  Beaufort.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L;  plant  diver- 
sity recommended.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  One  course.  Searles 

220L.  Mycology.  (NS)  Survey  of  the  major  groups  of  fungi  with  emphasis  on  life  his- 
tory and  systematics.  Field  and  laboratory  exercises.  One  course.  Vilgalys 

221S.  Topics  in  Advanced  Mycology.  (NS)  Current  research  on  fungal  evolution, 
genetics,  physiology,  and  ecology.  Prerequisite:  Biology  220L.  One  course.  Vilgalys 

222L.  Entomology.  (NS)  The  biology  of  insects:  diversity,  development,  physiology, 
and  ecology.  Field  trips.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L.  One  course.  H. 
Nijhout 

226L.  Ichthyology.  (NS)  Diversity,  evolution,  natural  history,  and  ecology  of  fishes. 
Laboratory  includes  overnight  field  trips  to  marine  and  freshwater  habitats.  Prerequisites: 
Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L;  and  Biology  108L  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Lundberg 

232.  Microclimatology.  (NS)  C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  232.  One 
course.  Knoerr 


130         Courses  of  Instruction 


233.  Principles  of  Insect  Behavior.  (NS)  Processes  governing  the  behavior  of  animals 
as  illustrated  by  insects.  Neural  integration,  communication,  genetics,  ecology,  and  evo- 
lution of  individual  and  social  behavior.  Invertebrate  zoology  or  entomology  recommend- 
ed. One  course.  Rausher 

234S.  Problems  in  the  Philosophy  of  Biology.  (NS)  Prerequisite :  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. See  C-L:  Philosophy  234S.  One  course.  Brandon  (philosophy) 

237L.  Systematic  Biology.  (NS)  Theory  and  practice  of  identification,  species  discov- 
ery, phylogeny  reconstruction,  classification,  and  nomenclature.  Prerequisites:  Biology 
21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L;  and  one  course  in  animal  or  plant  diversity.  One  course.  Lund- 
berg  and  Mishler 

243S.  Classification  of  Angiosperms.  (NS)  The  characteristics  and  phylogenetic  rela- 
tionships of  large  and  important  families  of  angiosperms  with  emphasis  upon  the  sys- 
tems of  Cronquist  and  Thorne.  Prerequisite:  Biology  142L  or  equivalent.  One  course.  R. 
Wilbur 

244.  Principles  of  Immunology.  (NS)  An  introduction  to  the  molecular  and  cellular 
basis  of  the  immune  response.  Topics  include  anatomy  of  the  lymphoid  system,  lympho- 
cyte biology,  antigen-antibody  interactions,  humoral  and  cellular  effector  mechanisms, 
and  control  of  immune  responses.  Prerequisites:  Biology  160  and  Chemistry  151  and  con- 
sent of  instructor.  C-L:  Microbiology  and  Immunology  244.  One  course.  Carrington 
(microbiology  and  immunology),  McClay,  and  staff 

245S.  Radiation  Biology.  (NS)  The  biological  effects  of  ionizing  radiations:  classical 
concepts  in  the  context  of  recent  research  papers.  Analytical  uses  of  radiation .  Prerequi- 
sites :  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L;  Chemistry  11, 12;  and  Physics  51,  52.  One  course. 
Fluke 

247S.  Photobiology.  (NS)  Effects  of  visible  light  and  of  ultraviolet  and  near  ultravio- 
let radiation  in  living  systems:  repair  processes,  quantum  processes,  physical  optics. 
Prerequisites:  college  physics  and  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L.  One  course.  Fluke 

249.  Comparative  Biomechanics.  (NS)  The  structure  and  operation  of  organisms  in 
relation  to  the  mechanics  of  solids  and  fluids,  including  readings  from  the  primary  liter- 
ature. Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Biology  149.  Prerequisites:  Physics  51  and 
Mathematics  31  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Vogel  and  Wainwright 

253.  Biophysical  Plant  Physiology.  (NS)  Application  of  physical  principles  to  such 
processes  as  ion  transport,  water  relations,  and  the  interconversion  of  energy  in  plant  cells. 
Prerequisites:  Biology  152L  and  Mathematics  32  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Knoerr  or 
Siedow 

256L,  S.  Plant  Biosystematics.  (NS)  Descriptive  and  experimental  procedures  used 
to  assess  systematic  implications  of  plant  evolution.  Laboratory,  discussion,  and  field- 
oriented  problems.  Prerequisites:  basic  courses  in  systematics  and  genetics.  One  course. 
Vilgalys 

259L.  Laboratory  in  Biomechanics.  (NS)  Introduction  to  instruments  used  in  inves- 
tigations of  solid  and  fluid  biomechanics.  Exercises  and  individual  projects.  Prerequisites: 
Biology  249  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Vogel  and  Wainwright 

261.  Photosynthesis.  (NS)  Principles  of  photosynthesis:  developmental,  mechanistic, 
regulatory,  and  ecological  aspects  of  the  photosynthetic  process.  Prerequisite:  Biology 
152L.  One  course.  Siedow 

262.  Biology  of  Parasitism.  (NS)  How  parasites,  from  viruses  through  vertebrates, 
have  solved  the  special  problems  associated  with  their  dependence  on  other  organisms. 
Emphasis  on  life  cycles,  host-parasite  interactions,  and  experimental  parasitology.  Intend- 
ed for  seniors.  Prerequisites:  cell  biology  and  animal  diversity.  One  course.  M.  Nijhout 

Biology  (BIO)      131 


265L.  Physiological  Plant  Ecology.  (NS)  The  physiological  approach  to  interpreting 
adaptation  in  plants,  with  emphasis  on  terrestrial  seed  plants.  Prerequisites:  Biology  110L 
and  152L  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Strain 

266.  Plant  Population  Biology.  (NS)  Theoretical,  experimental,  and  field  approaches 
to  plant  population  dynamics;  population  growth  and  regulation;  effects  of  density,  com- 
petition, and  predation.  One  course.  Antonovics 

267L.  Community  Ecology.  (NS)  Mechanisms  that  determine  the  distribution  and 
abundance  of  plants  and  animals:  geology,  climate,  physiography,  soils,  competition,  pre- 
dation, and  history.  Lectures  focus  on  ecological  principles.  Seminars  and  weekend  field 
trips.  Prerequisites :  an  introductory  ecology  course  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Christensen  and  H.  Wilbur 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology.  (NS)  Structural  and  functional  organization  of  cells  and 
their  components  with  emphasis  on  current  research  problems  and  prospects.  Prereq- 
uisite: introductory  cell  biology  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Cell  and  Molecular  Biolo- 
gy 269,  Cell  Biology  269,  and  Microbiology  and  Immunology  269.  One  course.  Nicklasand 
staff 

272.  Biogeochemistry.  (NS)  Processes  controlling  the  circulation  of  carbon  and  bi- 
ochemical elements  in  natural  ecosystems  and  at  the  global  level,  with  emphasis  on  soil 
and  surficial  processes.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  12  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Geology  272.  One 
course.  Schlesinger 

274L.  Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology.  (NS)  Structures,  functions,  and  habits  of  inver- 
tebrate animals  under  natural  and  experimental  conditions.  Field  trips.  Not  open  to  stu- 
dents who  have  taken  Biology  76L  or  176L.  Given  at  Beaufort.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L, 
22L  or  Biology  14L.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  One  and  one-half  courses.  Ruvvert  (visiting  sum- 
mer faculty) 

278L.  Invertebrate  Developmental  Biology.  (NS)  Gametogenesis,  fertilization,  and 
development  of  invertebrates,  with  emphasis  on  experimental  studies  of  prelarval  stages. 
Given  at  Beaufort.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  One  and  one- 
half  courses.  McClay  and  visiting  staff 

281.  DNA,  Chromosomes,  and  Evolution.  (NS)  The  relationship  of  chromosome  and 
DNA-sequence  organization  with  evolution;  karyotype  changes  and  speciation;  repeti- 
tive DNA,  split  genes,  transposable  elements,  and  evolutionary  mechanisms;  phyloge- 
ny  reconstruction;  evolution  of  mitosis  and  the  chromosome  cycle.  Prerequisite:  an  in- 
troductory course  in  genetics  or  cell  or  molecular  biology,  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L: 
The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  One  course.  Laurie  and  Nicklas 

283.  Extrachromosomal  Inheritance.  (NS)  Genetics,  biochemistry,  and  molecular  bi- 
ology of  the  organelles  of  eukaryotic  cells,  and  cellular  symbionts.  Emphasis  on  recent 
literature.  Prerequisite:  introductory  genetics.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics. 
One  course.  Boynton  and  Gillham 

285S.  Ecological  Genetics.  (NS)  Interaction  of  genetics  and  ecology  and  its  impor- 
tance in  explaining  the  evolution,  diversity,  and  distribution  of  plants  and  animals.  Prereq- 
uisites: Biology  180  and  286  or  equivalents.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  One 
course.  Antonovics 

286.  Evolutionary  Mechanisms.  (NS)  Population  ecology  and  population  genetics 
of  plants  and  animals.  Fitness  concepts,  life  history  evolution,  mating  systems,  genetic 
divergence,  and  causes  and  maintenance  of  genetic  diversity.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L, 
22L  or  Biology  14L  with  either  plant  or  animal  diversity;  Biology  180.  C-L:  The  Universi- 
ty Program  in  Genetics.  One  course.  Antonovics,  Uyenoyama,  and  H.  Wilbur 


132         Courses  of  Instruction 


287S.  Macroevolution.  (NS)  Evolutionary  patterns  and  processes  at  and  above  the 
species  level;  species  concepts,  speciation,  diversification,  extinction,  ontogeny  and 
phylogeny,  rates  of  evolution,  and  alternative  explanations  for  adaptation  and  evolution- 
ary trends.  Prerequisite:  Biology  21L,  22L  or  Biology  14L  with  one  course  in  plant  or  ani- 
mal diversity.  C-L:  One  course.  Mishler  and  Roth  (zoology) 

288.  Mathematical  Population  Genetics.  (NS)  Principles  of  formulation  and  analy- 
sis of  dynamic  mathematical  models  of  genetic  evolution.  Rotating  topics  include:  mat- 
ing systems,  sex  ratio,  stochastic  processes.  Prerequisites:  calculus;  statistics  and  linear 
algebra  recommended.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  One  course.  Uyenoyama 

293L.  Population  Biology.  (NS)  Theoretical  approach  to  population  genetics,  life  ta- 
ble mathematics,  life-cycle  evolution  in  plants  and  animals,  population  dynamics,  and 
regulation.  Laboratories  emphasize  experimental  methods.  Individual  projects  and  week- 
end field  trips.  Prerequisites:  calculus  and  ecology.  One  course.  Antonovics  and  H.  Wilbur 

295S,  296S.  Seminar.  (NS)  Variable  credit.  Staff 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

51L.  Culture  and  Propagation  of  Plants.  (NS) 

107.  Heredity.  (NS) 

178.  Functional  Morphology.  (NS) 

179T.  Tutorial  in  Functional  Morphology.  (NS) 

209L.  Lichenology.  (NS) 

263L.  Tropical  Seaweeds.  (NS) 

THE  MAJOR 

The  Bachelor  of  Arts  and  the  Bachelor  of  Science  degrees  are  offered  with  a  major 
in  biology  or  in  an  individually  designed  interdepartmental  concentration  approved  by 
the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  Biology.  Information  about  the  biology  major 
may  be  obtained  in  the  office  of  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

For  the  A.B.  Degree 

This  degree  program  is  the  general  liberal  arts  major  program.  Students  contemplat- 
ing a  career  in  biological  or  biomedical  sciences  should  elect  the  program  leading  to  the 
B.S.  degree. 

Prerequisite.  Biology  21L,  22L  or  equivalent. 

Corequisites.  Chemistry  11, 12;  Mathematics  31,  32;  plus  three  science-related  courses 
outside  the  biological  sciences  selected  from  an  approved  list  of  such  courses. 

Major  Requirements.  A  minimum  of  eight  courses  in  the  biosciences,  not  including  the 
above  prerequisites  and  corequisites;  two  of  these  courses  must  include  related  labora- 
tory experience;  one  laboratory  independent  study  course  may  be  counted  toward  the 
laboratory  requirement .  The  eight  courses  must  include  one  core  course  from  each  of  three 
areas:  cell  biology  and  genetics;  organism  structure  and  function;  and  ecology,  evolution, 
and  systematics.  These  courses  are  prerequisites  to  many  of  the  advanced  courses  in  these 
subject  areas.  The  remaining  courses  may  be  elected  from  among  courses  numbered  100 
or  above  in  biology,  or  from  approved  courses  in  the  basic  science  departments  of  the 
School  of  Medicine,  or  from  approved  courses  of  a  basic  biological  character  in  related 
departments.  For  a  straight  biology  major,  five  of  these  eight  courses  must  be  in  biology. 
The  elective  courses  acceptable  for  a  biology  major  with  an  area  of  concentration  are  de- 
fined by  the  requirements  for  that  concentration.  At  least  one  of  these  eight  courses  must 
be  at  the  200  level. 

Biology  (BIO)        133 


For  the  B.S.  Degree 

This  is  the  program  in  biology  for  students  contemplating  a  career  in  biological  or  bi- 
omedical sciences. 

Prerequisite.  Biology  21L,  22L  or  equivalent. 

Corequisites.  Mathematics  31,  32;  Chemistry  11, 12,  and  151;  Physics  51  and  52.  Ad- 
ditional corequisites  may  be  required  for  particular  areas  of  concentration  (see  below). 

Major  Requirements.  A  minimum  of  eight  courses  in  the  biosciences,  not  including  the 
above  prerequisites  and  corequisites;  two  of  these  courses  must  include  related  labora- 
tory experience;  one  laboratory  independent  study  course  may  be  counted  toward  the 
laboratory  requirement.  The  eight  courses  must  include  one  core  course  from  each  of  three 
areas:  cell  biology  and  genetics;  organism  structure  and  function;  and  ecology,  evolution, 
and  systematics.  These  courses  are  prerequisites  to  many  of  the  advanced  courses  in  these 
subject  areas.  The  remaining  courses  may  be  elected  from  among  courses  numbered  100 
or  above  in  biology,  or  from  approved  courses  in  the  basic  science  departments  of  the 
School  of  Medicine,  or  from  approved  courses  of  a  basic  biological  character  in  related 
departments.  For  a  straight  biology  major,  five  of  these  eight  courses  must  be  in  biology. 
The  elective  courses  acceptable  for  a  biology  major  with  an  area  of  concentration  are  de- 
fined by  the  requirements  for  that  concentration .  At  least  one  of  these  eight  courses  must 
be  at  the  200  level. 

For  Areas  of  Concentration 

Students  may  elect  to  complete  requirements  in  specified  areas  of  concentration.  Cer- 
tification in  an  area  of  concentration  is  designated  on  the  official  transcript.  For  informa- 
tion on  areas  of  concentration  see  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

The  Negotiated  Major 

As  an  alternative  to  the  above  programs,  a  student  with  unusual  interests  in  biology 
may  arrange  a  negotiated  concentration  of  study  After  appropriate  discussion  with 
departmental  faculty,  a  student  may  devise  a  program  of  study  which  must  be  endorsed 
by  two  members  of  the  faculty  and  approved  by  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 
The  statement  of  the  proposed  program  must  make  clear  why  the  negotiated  major  is  more 
appropriate  than  a  conventional  major.  Such  a  program  must  be  arranged  before  the  start 
of  a  student's  fifth  semester.  The  only  formal  limitation  on  this  approach  to  the  major  is 
that  it  include  at  least  five  courses  in  biology  to  meet  minimum  Trinity  College  require- 
ments. See  the  Handbook  for  Biology  Majors  for  more  details. 

Honors 

A  program  for  graduation  with  distinction  in  biology  is  available.  See  the  section  on 
honors  in  this  bulletin .  The  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  can  provide  more  details. 

Botany  (bod 

Professor  W.  Culberson,  Chairman;  Professors  Antonovics,  Boynton,  Christensen,  Os- 
mond, Ramus,  Schlesinger,  Searles,  Siedow,  Stone,  Strain,  White,  and  R.  Wilbur;  As- 
sociate Professor  Knoerr;  Assistant  Professors  Johnston,  Kohorn,  Mishler,  and  Vilgalys; 
Professors  Emeriti  Anderson,  Billings,  Hellmers,  Kramer,  Naylor,  and  Philpott;  Adjunct 
Professor  C.  Culberson;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Patterson 

See  Biology  for  a  description  of  the  major  and  the  list  of  courses  taught  by  the  botany 
faculty. 

Canadian  Studies  Program 

Professor  Cahow,  Director 

A  second  major  is  available  in  this  program. 

134         Courses  of  Instruction 


The  program  in  Canadian  studies  seeks  to  provide  the  student  with  an  understand- 
ing of  Canada  and  its  problems  and  prospects.  Students  may  undertake  the  program  to 
supplement  another  major,  or  to  complete  a  second  major  in  Canadian  studies,  or  as  part 
of  an  interdepartmental  concentration,  or  under  Program  II .  Canadian  studies  may  also 
be  an  area  concentration  in  the  comparative  area  studies  major,  described  elsewhere  in 
this  bulletin.  See  sections  below  on  the  program  and  the  major.  The  courses  are  described 
in  the  departmental  and  interdisciplinary  listings. 

COURSES  WITH  FULL  CANADIAN  CONTENT 

The  following  courses  count  as  one  full  course  in  the  four  required  for  the  program 
in  Canadian  studies  and  in  the  eight  required  for  the  major  in  Canadian  studies: 

Drama 

146S.  Canadian  Theater.  Ball 

English 

186.  Canadian  Literature  in  English.  Staff 

French 

114.  Language  and  Civilization  of  Quebec.  Staff 

169.  The  Contemporary  Novel  in  French  Canada.  Kenug  and  staff 

History 

183S.  Canada  from  the  French  Settlement.  Cahow 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

184.  An  Introduction  to  Canada  and  Canadian  Issues.  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  184;  also  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies,  Economics  184,  History  184,  Political  Science  184,  and  Sociology  184.  Cahow 
282S.  Canada.  See  C-L:  History  282S;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Cultural  Anthropology  282S, 
History  282S,  Interdisciplinary  Course  282S,  Political  Science  282S,  and  Sociology  282S.  Cahow 

COURSES  WITH  SIGNIFICANT  CANADIAN  CONTENT 

Two  of  these  partial  content  courses  may  count  as  one  full  course  among  the  four  re- 
quired for  the  program  in  Canadian  studies  and  among  the  eight  required  for  the  major 
in  Canadian  studies,  but  no  more  than  two  partial  content  courses  may  be  counted  as  full 
content  courses  in  this  way.  All  other  partial  content  courses  may  count  only  for  a  half 
credit  for  Canadian  studies  majors  and  programs. 

Economics 

265S.  International  Trade  and  Finance.  By  special  arrangement  this  course  may  be  counted  as  a  full  con- 
tent course.  Toiver 

French 

1315.  French  in  the  New  World.  Hull 

Health  Administration 

Students  interested  in  this  area  should  consult  the  Director  of  the  Canadian  Studies  Program  (2016 
Campus  Drive)  for  more  information. 

History 

150.  Canadian  and  American  Agrarian  Movements.  Goodwyn 
166S.  U.S.  and  Canada:  Canadian-American  Relations.  Staff 
167S.  United  States  and  Canadian  Constitutional  Issues.  Cahoio 
215-216.  The  Diplomatic  History  of  the  United  States.  C.  Davis 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

182.  Media  in  Comparative  Perspective.  Paletz  or  Smith 

Political  Science 

175.  Political  Parties  and  Legislatures  in  Western  Democracies.  Komberg 
180.  Media  in  Comparative  Perspective.  Paletz  or  Smith 

195.  Comparative  Political  Behavior  in  the  United  States  and  Canada.  Komberg 
293.  Federalism.  Leach 

Sociology 

170.  Mass  Communication.  Smith 


Canadian  Studies  Program         135 


179.  Modern  Nationalist  Movements.  Tiryakian 

182.  Media  in  Comparative  Perspective.  Paletz  or  Smith 

THE  PROGRAM 

In  the  Canadian  Studies  Program  a  student  must  take  four  courses  with  Canadian 
content  or  their  equivalents.  These  must  include  Interdisciplinary  Course  184.  It  is  recom- 
mended that  students  who  do  not  have  the  equivalent  of  two  years  of  college  level  French 
should  take  French  181  and  182,  Intensive  French. 

THE  MAJOR 

Corequisite.  Completion  of  another  major. 

Major  Requirements.  Eight  courses  in  Canadian  studies,  including  Interdisciplinary 
Course  184  and  seven  other  semester-course  credits  in  courses  on  Canada  with  full  or  sig- 
nificant content,  or  approved  independent  study,  or  special  reading  courses.  Two  of  the 
courses  with  significant  Canadian  content  may  count  as  half  courses  to  make  up  the  eight 
required  courses.  No  more  than  two  courses  required  for  the  first  major  may  be  counted 
for  the  Canadian  studies  major. 

To  complete  the  major  in  Canadian  studies  a  student  must  also  take  at  least  two  full 
years  of  college  level  French,  or  must  possess  an  equivalent  competence  in  the  language 
as  certified  by  the  Department  of  Romance  Languages. 


Chemistry  (chm> 


Professor  Arnett,  Chairman;  Professor  Wilder,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Profes- 
sor Bonk,  Supervisor  of  Freshman  Instruction;  Professors  Baldwin,  Chesnut,  Crumbliss, 
Fraser-Reid,  Lochmuller,  A.  McPhail,  Palmer,  Porter,  Smith,  Strobel,  and  Wells;  Associ- 
ate Professors  Henkens,  McGown,  and  Shaw;  Assistant  Professors  R.  MacPhail,  Pol- 
niaszek,  and  Prisant;  Professors  Emeriti  Bradsher,  Brown,  Hobbs,  Krigbaum,  Poirier,  and 
Quin;  Adjunct  Professors  Ghirardelli,  Jeffs,  Painter,  Pitt,  Preston,  and  Spielvogel;  Ad- 
junct Associate  Professors  Morosoff  and  Millington;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professors  Chao 
and  Sternbach 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Courses  with  laboratories  include  fifty  to  sixty  hours  of  laboratory  work  per  term. 

11, 12.  Principles  of  Chemistry.  (NS)  The  introductory  course  for  students  who  in- 
tend to  take  additional  chemistry  courses  other  than  Chemistry  83.  11:  emphasizes 
stoichiometry  and  atomic  and  molecular  structures.  12:  emphasizes  thermodynamics, 
chemical  kinetics,  synthesis,  and  analysis.  Laboratory  work  includes  both  qualitative  and 
quantitative  analysis.  Prerequisites:  one  year  of  high  school  chemistry  or  consent  of  in- 
structor; Mathematics  19  or  its  equivalent;  and  for  12:  Chemistry  11.  One  course  each. 
Bonk  and  staff 

23.  Advanced  General  Chemistry.  (NS)  An  intensive  introductory  course  for  well  pre- 
pared students,  covering  in  one  semester  the  major  topics  of  Chemistry  11  and  12.  Labora- 
tory work  includes  both  qualitative  and  quantitative  analysis.  Students  may  not  receive 
credit  for  both  Chemistry  23  and  Chemistry  11,  12  or  Chemistry  31S.  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  19  or  its  equivalent;  and  two  years  of  high  school  chemistry  or  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course.  Bonk  and  staff 

31S.  Advanced  Chemical  Fundamentals.  (NS)  Generally  paralleling  Chemistry  23, 
but  for  selected  able  potential  science  majors.  Taught  as  one  lecture  and  two  discussions 
weekly.  Laboratory  with  a  month  of  small  research  problems.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course.  R.  MacPhail  or  Strobel 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 
136         Courses  of  Instruction 


83.  Chemistry  and  Society.  (NS)  Past  discoveries  and  current  challenges:  a  chemical 
background  for  decisions  involving  energy  radiation,  pollution,  drugs,  food  additives, 
vitamins,  and  pesticides.  For  students  not  majoring  in  a  natural  science  or  continuing  in 
chemistry.  Not  open  to  students  having  credit  for  Chemistry  11  or  equivalent.  One  course. 
Wells  and  staff 

117.  Inorganic  Chemistry.  (NS)  Bonding,  structures,  and  reactions  of  inorganic  com- 
pounds studied  through  physical  chemical  concepts.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  161.  One 
course.  Crumbliss,  Palmer,  or  Wells 

132.  Analytical  Chemistry.  (NS)  Fundamentals  of  qualitative  and  quantitative  meas- 
urement with  emphasis  on  instrumental  methods  of  analysis.  Laboratory.  Prerequisite : 
Chemistry  161.  One  course.  Lochmiiller,  McGoivn,  or  Strobel 

151, 152.  Organic  Chemistry.  (NS)  The  structures  and  reactions  of  the  compounds 
of  carbon.  Laboratory:  techniques  of  separation,  organic  reactions  and  preparations,  and 
systematic  identification  of  compounds  by  their  spectral  and  chemical  properties.  Prereq- 
uisite: Chemistry  12, 23,  or  31S  or  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  for  152: 
Chemistry  151.  One  course  each.  Baldwin,  Fraser-Reid,  Polniaszek,  Porter,  or  Wilder 

154.  Intermediate  Organic  Chemistry:  Mechanism  and  Stereochemistry  of  Synthetic 
Organic  Reactions.  (NS)  A  mechanism-based  survey  of  enolate  chemistry,  sigmatropic 
rearrangements,  polyene  cyclizations,  hydroboration,  oxidation  and  reduction  methods. 
Laboratory  work  emphasizes  techniques  involved  in  manipulation  of  sensitive  reagents 
and  analysis  of  reaction  products.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  152.  One  course.  Polniaszek 

161.  Physical  Chemistry.  (NS)  Fundamentals  of  theoretical  chemistry  with  particu- 
lar emphasis  on  chemical  thermodynamics  and  kinetics.  Laboratory.  Prerequisites: 
Chemistry  152,  Physics  52  and  Mathematics  32  or  34.  One  course.  Chesnut,  Henkens,  R. 
MacPhail,  Prisant,  or  Smith 

162.  Physical  Chemistry.  (NS)  Fundamentals  of  theoretical  chemistry  with  particu- 
lar emphasis  on  quantum  chemistry,  molecular  structure,  and  molecular  spectroscopy. 
Laboratory.  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  161  and  either  Mathematics  103  or  105  or  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Chesnut,  R.  MacPhail,  Prisant,  or  Smith 

176.  Biophysical  Chemistry.  (NS)  The  physical  chemical  principles  of  and  experimen- 
tal methods  employed  in  the  study  of  biological  macromolecules.  Students  may  not  re- 
ceive credit  for  both  Chemistry  176  and  196S.  Prerequisites :  Chemistry  161  and  175  or  Bi- 
ochemistry 227.  One  course.  Henkens 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  (NS)  Supervised  reading  and  research.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  Independent  Study  Coordinator.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  (NS)  Supervised  reading  and  research.  Prerequisites: 
Chemistry  191, 192,  and  consent  of  Independent  Study  Coordinator.  One  course  each. 

Staff 

195S,  198S.  Seminar.  (NS)  Topics  from  various  areas  of  chemistry,  changing  each  year. 
For  example:  organic  chemistry  of  biologically  important  compounds,  chemical  basis  of 
pharmacology,  metal  ions  in  biological  systems.  Open  to  senior  chemistry  majors  or  by 
consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

196S.  Seminar.  (NS)  Selected  topics  in  physical  chemistry  of  biological  macro- 
molecules.  Students  may  not  receive  credit  for  both  Chemistry  176  and  196S.  Prerequi- 
sites: Chemistry  161  and  175  or  Biochemistry  227.  One  course.  Henkens  or  Shaw 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

201.  Molecular  Spectroscopy.  (NS)  Selected  spectroscopic  methods  in  the  study  of 
molecular  structure.  Symmetry  and  group  theoretical  basis  for  selection  rules,  theories 

Chemistry  (CHM)         137 


of  magnetic  and  optical  resonance,  and  interpretation  of  spectra;  examples  from  both  in- 
organic and  organic  chemistry.  Three  lectures.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Un- 
dergraduate Studies.  One  course.  Fraser-Reid,  Palmer,  and  Smith 

203.  Quantum  Chemistry.  (NS)  Basic  principles  of  quantum  and  group  theoretical 
methods.  Topics  include  symmetry  and  a  review  of  the  fundamentals  and  the  mathemat- 
ical foundations  of  quantum  theory.  Emphasis  on  the  application  of  molecular  orbital  the- 
ory to  organic  and  inorganic  systems.  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  162  and  consent  of  Director 
of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course.  Chesnut  and  Polniaszek 

205.  Structure  and  Reaction  Dynamics.  (NS)  Structure  and  mechanisms  in  organic 
and  inorganic  compounds,  substitution  reactions,  linear  free  energy  relations,  and 
molecular  rearrangements.  Emphasis  on  the  use  of  kinetic  techniques  to  solve  problems 
in  reaction  mechanisms.  Three  lectures.  Prerequisite :  consent  of  Director  of  Undergradu- 
ate Studies.  One  course.  Arnett,  Crumbliss,  and  Polniaszek 

207.  Principles  of  Kinetics,  Thermodynamics,  and  Diffraction.  (NS)  Three  lectures. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

209.  Advanced  Chemistry.  (NS)  A  combination  of  three  one-third  course  segments 
from  Chemistry  201,  203,  205,  and  207.  Interested  students  should  consult  the  Director 
of  Undergraduate  Studies  for  scheduling.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Under- 
graduate Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

275,  276.  Advanced  Studies.  (NS)  (1)  Analytical  chemistry,  (2)  inorganic  chemistry, 
(3)  organic  chemistry,  and  (4)  physical  chemistry.  Open  to  especially  well-prepared  un- 
dergraduates by  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
151M,  152M.  Organic  Chemistry.  (NS) 
152P.  Preceptorial.  (NS) 

175.  Molecular  Basis  of  Biological  Processes.  (NS) 
197S.  Seminar.  (NS) 

THE  MAJOR 

Differing  major  programs  are  offered  under  the  baccalaureate  degrees.  The  Bache- 
lor of  Arts  degree  programs  permit  greater  flexibility  in  allowing  students  to  select  an  area 
of  concentration  while  satisfying  the  junior-senior  small  group  learning  experience  re- 
quirements through  seminar  courses  (option  one)  or  through  independent  study  in 
chemistry  or  related  departments  (option  two).  Of  particular  significance  are  the  areas 
of  specialization  including  marine  chemistry,  chemical  physics,  materials  science,  and 
biological  chemistry.  Students  may  specialize  in  biological  chemistry  using  either  semi- 
nars (option  three)  or  independent  study  in  chemistry  or  related  departments  (option 
four)  to  satisfy  the  junior-senior  small  group  learning  experience  requirement.  The  Bach- 
elor of  Science  degree  program,  accredited  by  the  American  Chemical  Society,  provides 
in-depth  preparation  for  graduate  study  in  chemistry. 

For  the  A.B.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Chemistry  11,  12;  or  Chemistry  23  or  31S;  or  advanced  placement. 
Mathematics  31,  32  (or  33,  34);  Physics  51,  52. 

Major  Requirements.  Chemistry  132, 151, 152, 161,  plus  one  of  the  following  options: 

1 .  Two  of  the  following:  Chemistry  117, 154, 162, 175  (or  Biochemistry  227),  176, 195S, 
196S,  198S. 


138        Courses  of  Instruction 


2.  One  of  the  following:  Chemistry  117,  154,  162,  175  or  Biochemistry  227;  plus 
Chemistry  191, 192  or  the  equivalent  in  a  natural  science,  mathematics,  engineer- 
ing, or  a  basic  science  department  in  the  School  of  Medicine. 

3.  Chemistry  175  or  Biochemistry  227;  195S  or  198S;  and  176  or  196S. 

4.  Chemistry  175  or  Biochemistry  227  and  Chemistry  176  or  196S;  and  Chemistry 
191,  192  in  a  biochemically  related  area,  or  the  equivalent  in  a  biological  area, 
biomedical  engineering,  or  basic  science  department  in  the  School  of  Medicine. 

Recommendations.  Computer  Science  51  or  Engineering  51,  Mathematics  103  or  105 
(for  options  one  and  two);  Chemistry  162;  two  courses  in  a  foreign  language  or  the  equiva- 
lent. Students  planning  graduate  study  are  advised  to  take  these  recommended  courses 
and  to  consult  with  advisors  regarding  appropriate  additional  courses. 

For  the  B.S.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Chemistry  11,  12;  or  Chemistry  23  or  31S;  or  advanced  placement. 
Mathematics  31, 32  (or  33,  34);  103  (or  105);  Physics  51,  52;  two  courses  in  German  or  Rus- 
sian or  the  equivalent. 

Major  Requirements.  Chemistry  117, 132, 151, 152, 161, 162,  plus  four  of  the  following 
courses:  Chemistry  154, 175  (or  Biochemistry  227),  176, 191, 192, 195S,  196S,  198S,  201, 
203, 205,  207, 209,  275,  or  276,  with  at  least  two  being  selected  from  the  laboratory  courses 
154,  191,  192.  In  an  exceptional  case  and  with  the  prior  approval  of  the  Director  of  Un- 
dergraduate Studies,  a  student  may  substitute  one  advanced  level  nonindependent  study 
course,  or  a  two-course  independent  study  sequence,  in  an  appropriate  science  depart- 
ment in  Trinity  College,  the  School  of  Engineering,  or  the  School  of  Medicine  for  one  of 
the  two  optional  nonlaboratory  chemistry  courses.  At  least  nine  courses  above  the  fresh- 
man sequence  must  be  completed  in  chemistry.  A  course  directly  paralleling  one  offered 
by  the  chemistry  department  may  not  be  substituted.  Chemistry  201,  203,  205,  and  207 
are  offered  also  in  one-third  semester  segments;  in  some  instances  a  student  may  wish 
to  take  some  combination  of  three  of  these  segments  by  registering  for  Chemistry  209. 
Additional  details  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

Recommendations.  Computer  Science  51  or  Engineering  51;  Mathematics  104;  Phys- 
ics 100.  Students  planning  graduate  study  in  chemistry  should  consult  with  advisors 
regarding  appropriate  additional  courses. 

Honors 

The  department  offers  a  program  for  graduation  with  distinction  in  chemistry.  See 
the  section  on  honors  in  this  bulletin.  The  program  involves  two  semesters  of  indepen- 
dent study,  taken  either  in  the  chemistry  department  (Chemistry  191, 192)  or,  with  the 
prior  approval  of  the  Coordinator  of  Independent  Study,  in  an  appropriate  science  depart- 
ment in  Trinity  College,  the  School  of  Engineering,  or  the  School  of  Medicine.  A  research 
paper  based  upon  the  independent  study  and  nomination  by  the  research  supervisor 
form  the  basis  for  consideration  by  a  departmental  committee.  The  committee  may  recom- 
mend the  student  for  graduation  with  distinction  in  chemistry.  Additional  details  may 
be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

Chinese 

For  courses  in  Chinese,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages. 

Classical  Studies  (cs> 

Professor  Newton,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Boatwright,  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies;  Professors  Oates  and  Richardson;  Associate  Professors  Burian,  Rigsby,  Stanley, 
and  Younger;  Assistant  Professor  Vander  Waerdt;  Professor  Emeritus  Willis;  Adjunct 
Professor  Michels 


Classical  Studies  (CS)         139 


Majors  are  available  in  this  department. 

The  objective  of  classical  studies  is  to  increase  knowledge  and  understanding  of  the 
roots  of  Western  culture  in  the  civilizations  of  Greece  and  Rome.  Toward  this  aim,  the 
department  offers  courses  and  majors  in  three  areas:  Latin,  Greek,  and  classical  studies. 
Concentration  in  the  languages  offers  students  training  in  exploring  at  first  hand  the  liter- 
ature, history,  and  thought  of  antiquity.  In  the  process,  students  will  gain  a  deeper  in- 
sight into  language  itself,  as  well  as  an  appreciation  of  the  problems  of  interpretation  and 
the  varieties  of  evidence  upon  which  interpretation  may  be  based.  For  students  interest- 
ed in  history,  ancient  art,  or  archaeology,  courses  in  classical  studies  offer  a  means  of  as- 
sessing the  culture  and  the  material  remains  of  Greece  and  Rome  in  their  own  rich  and 
varied  context. 

A  secondary  aim  is,  and  has  been  by  a  centuries-old  tradition,  the  development  of 
a  keener  perception  and  understanding  of  the  cultural  forces  at  work  in  the  contemporary 
world.  As  a  result,  the  field  of  classical  studies  is  an  excellent  foundation  for  advanced 
work  in  other  academic  disciplines  as  well  as  professional  programs  in  law,  medicine,  and 
finance. 

GREEK  (GRK) 

1-2.  Elementary  Greek.  (FL)  A  study  of  grammar  and  an  introduction  to  reading.  Two 
courses.  Burian 

11-12.  Elementary  Modern  Greek.  (FL)  An  introduction  to  literary  and  conversational 
demotic  Greek.  Two  courses.  Younger 

63,  64.  Intermediate  Greek.  (FL)  Introduction  to  Greek  prose  and  poetry.  63:  Plato's 
Republic  1,  Apology,  or  Symposium.  64:  Euripides  and  Homer.  One  course  each.  Vander 
Waerdt  or  Younger 

103S,  104S.  Studies  in  Greek  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  103S:  Herodotus  and  Sophocles. 
104S:  Thucydides  and  Aristophanes.  One  course  each.  Burian  or  Vander  Waerdt 

181S.  Intensive  Elementary  Greek.  (FL)  Intensive  introduction  to  the  language  and 
the  literature,  offered  only  in  the  summer.  Prerequisite:  proficiency  in  another  language. 
Two  courses.  Staff 

182S.  Intensive  Intermediate  Greek.  (FL)  See  Greek  181S.  Prerequisites:  Greek  181S 
and  proficiency  in  another  language.  Two  courses.  Staff 

200.  Readings  in  Greek  Literature.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

203.  Homer.  (AL,  FL)  Problems  of  language  and  structure  in  the  Iliad;  present  state 
of  Homeric  scholarship.  One  course.  Stanley 

205.  Greek  Lyric  Poets.  ( AL,  FL)  Fragments  of  the  early  lyric  poets;  selected  odes  of 
Pindar  and  Bacchylides.  One  course.  Burian  or  Stanley 

207.  The  Dramatists.  (AL,  FL)  Readings  and  studies  of  selected  plays  by  the  major 
playwrights  Aeschylus,  Sophocles,  Euripides,  and  Aristophanes.  One  course.  Burian 

210.  Hellenistic  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Examples  of  Hellenistic  literature  with  empha- 
sis on  the  A  rgonautica  of  Apollonius  of  Rhodes,  and  attention  to  the  shorter  poems  of  The- 
ocritus and  Callimachus.  One  course.  Stanley 

217T.  Greek  Prose  Composition.  (FL)  The  course  content  is  determined  by  the  needs 
of  the  students  enrolled.  One  course.  Staff 

222.  The  Historians.  (AL,  FL)  Readings  and  studies  in  the  major  Greek  historians 
Herodotus,  Thucydides,  and  Xenophon.  One  course.  Oates 


140         Courses  of  Instruction 


Courses  offered  each  year  on  demand  in  consultation  with  the  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies: 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
juniors  and  seniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193,  194.  Directed  Research  in  Greek.  Research  culminating  in  the  writing  of  one 
longer  or  two  shorter  papers  as  partial  fulfillment  of  the  requirements  for  graduation  with 
distinction.  Open  only  to  senior  majors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

LATIN  (LAT) 

1-2.  Elementary  Latin.  (FL)  Study  of  the  structure  of  the  language  (forms,  vocabu- 
lary, syntax,  and  pronunciation);  selected  readings  in  prose  and  poetry.  Two  courses. 
Stanley 

63,  64.  Intermediate  Latin.  (FL)  Introduction  to  Latin  prose  and  poetry.  63:  selected 
prose,  including  Caesar.  64:  three  books  of  Vergil's  Aeneid.  One  course  each.  Boatwright 

100.  Introduction  to  Literature.  This  number  represents  course  credit  for  a  score  of 
4  or  5  on  one  or  more  of  the  College  Board  Advanced  Placement  tests  in  Latin .  One  course. 

103S,  104S.  Studies  in  Latin  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  103S:  the  Late  Republic,  including 
Catullus  and  Cicero.  104S:  the  Age  of  Augustus,  including  Horace  and  Livy.  One  course 
each.  Boatwright  or  Newton 

105S.  Ovid:  The  Metamorphoses.  (AL,  FL)  The  poem  studied  as  representative  of 
Ovid's  varied  narrative  art,  as  the  largest-scale  Roman  treatment  of  classical  myths,  and 
in  the  light  of  the  distinctivelv  Ovidian  attitude  toward  Augustanism.  One  course.  Newton 

108S.  Lyric  and  Occasional  Poetry.  ( AL,  FL)  Readings  in  the  works  of  Catullus,  Horace, 
and  Martial.  One  course.  Newton  or  Richardson 

HIS.  Elegiac  Poets.  (AL,  FL)  The  traditions  of  Latin  love  elegy  and  its  development 
in  Propertius,  Tibullus,  and  Ovid.  One  course.  Richardson 

112S.  Roman  Comedy.  (AL,  FL)  Representative  plays  of  Plautus  and  Terence  with 
lectures  on  the  genre  and  its  Greek  forebears.  One  course.  Richardson 

114S.  The  Historians.  (AL,  FL)  Readings  in  representative  historical  writing  chosen 
from  Caesar,  Sallust,  Livy,  and  Tacitus.  One  course.  Boatwright  or  Richardson 

116S.  Lucretius.  (AL,  ¥L)The  De Rerum  Natura  studied  as  poetry  and  philosophical 
thought.  One  course.  Nezvton  or  Richardson 

181S.  Intensive  Elementary  Latin.  (FL)  Intensive  introduction  to  the  language  and 
the  literature,  offered  only  in  the  summer.  Prerequisite:  proficiency  in  another  language. 
Two  courses.  Staff 

182S.  Intensive  Intermediate  Latin.  (FL)  See  Latin  181S.  Prerequisites:  Latin  181S  and 
proficiency  in  another  language.  Two  courses.  Staff 

200.  Readings  in  Latin  Literature.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

206.  Cicero.  (AL,  FL)  One  course.  Richardson 

207S.  Vergil's/leMe«V/.  (AL,  FL)  Intensive  analysis  of  all  of  Vergil's  Aeneid,  focusingon 
text  and  historical  context,  complemented  by  research  papers  and  reports.  Not  open  to 
students  who  have  taken  Latin  107S.  One  course.  Newton 

211S.  Elegiac  Poets.  (AL,  FL)  Analysis  of  most  of  the  corpora  of  Propertius,  Tibullus, 
and  Ovid  with  close  attention  to  the  stylistics  of  the  poems,  their  place  in  the  traditions 


Classical  Studies  (CS)         141 


of  Latin  love  elegy,  and  their  relation  to  other  phenomena  of  the  Augustan  period.  Not 
open  to  students  who  have  taken  Latin  HIS.  One  course.  Richardson 

214S.  The  Historians.  (AL,  FL)  Investigations  of  the  Romans'  conceptions  and  prac- 
tices of  writing  history,  based  on  detailed  analysis  of  the  works  of  Sallust,  Livy,  and  Taci- 
tus. Additional  readings  in  the  fragments  of  other  Latin  historians,  and  in  comparative 
Greek  historians.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Latin  114S.  One  course.  Boatwright 
or  Richardson 

217T.  Latin  Prose  Composition.  (FL)  The  course  content  is  determined  by  the  needs 
of  the  students  enrolled.  One  course.  Staff 

221.  Medieval  Latin.  ( AL,  FL)  Selected  works  of  the  Latin  Middle  Ages  from  Pruden- 
tius  to  the  humanists.  Genres  studied  usually  include  the  hymn,  sequence,  drama,  lyr- 
ic, saints'  lives,  chronicle,  epic,  and  epistle.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One 
course.  Newton 

Courses  offered  each  year  on  demand  in  consultation  with  the  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies: 

191,  192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  to  qualified 
juniors  and  seniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Directed  Research  in  Latin.  Research  culminating  in  the  writing  of  one  longer 
or  two  shorter  papers  as  partial  fulfillment  of  the  requirements  for  graduation  with  dis- 
tinction. Open  only  to  senior  majors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

106S.  Roman  Satire.  (AL,  FL) 

107S.  Vergil's  Aeneid.  (AL,  FL) 

204.  Epic  of  the  Silver  Age.  (AL,  FL) 

205.  The  Roman  Novel.  (AL,  FL) 

208S.  Lyric  and  Occasional  Poetry.  (AL,  FL) 

CLASSICAL  STUDIES  (CS) 

US.  Greek  Civilization.  (CZ)  The  culture  of  the  ancient  Greeks  from  the  Bronze  Age 
to  Alexander  the  Great:  art,  literature,  history,  philosophy,  and  religion.  Not  open  to  stu- 
dents who  have  had  Classical  Studies  53  or  History  53.  One  course.  Staff 

12S.  Roman  Civilization.  (CZ)  The  culture  of  ancient  Romans  from  their  beginnings 
to  Constantine:  art,  Literature,  history,  philosophy,  and  religion.  Not  open  to  students  who 
have  had  Classical  Studies  54  or  History  54.  One  course.  Staff 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

53.  Greek  History.  (CZ)  The  political  and  intellectual  history  of  the  Hellenes  from  earli- 
est times  to  the  death  of  Alexander  the  Great.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Clas- 
sical Studies  IIS.  C-L:  History  53.  One  course.  Rigsby 

54.  Roman  History.  (CZ)  The  Roman  Republic  and  Empire  to  the  Late  Antique.  Not 
open  to  students  who  have  had  Classical  Studies  12S.  C-L:  History  54.  One  course. 

Boatumght 

63.  The  Epic.  (AL)  Reading  in  translation  of  major  epics  from  antiquity  and  the  Mid- 
dle Ages,  such  as  Gilgamesh,  Homer's  Iliad  and  Odyssey,  Vergil's  Aeneid,  and  Beowulf.  One 
course.  Burian 


142         Courses  of  Instruction 


64.  Drama  of  Greece  and  Rome.  (AL)  Reading  in  translation  of  Greek  and  Roman 
tragedies  (Aeschylus,  Sophocles,  Euripides,  Seneca)  and  comedies  (Aristophanes, 
Menander,  Plautus,  Terence).  C-L:  Drama  64.  One  course.  Burian 

93.  History  of  Ancient  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Prerequisites :  for  freshmen,  previous  phi- 
losophy course  and  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Philosophy  93.  One  course.  Ferejohn 
or  Mahoney 

101.  Science  and  Technology  in  the  Ancient  World.  (CZ)  Technical  innovation  and 
scientific  thought  in  the  ancient  Near  East,  Greece,  and  Rome.  C-L:  History  100.  One 
course.  Rigsby 

102.  History  of  Greek  and  Roman  Civil  Law.  (CZ)  The  development  of  law  from  the 
early  Greek  polis  and  Rome  of  the  XII  tables  to  the  Digest  of  Justinian,  emphasizing  civil 
law  and  procedure.  C-L:  History  103.  One  course.  (Dates 

103.  Religion  in  Greece  and  Rome.  (CZ)  Religious  thought,  rituals,  and  institutions 
from  Homer  to  late  antiquity,  excluding  Christianity.  C-L:  History  125.  One  course.  Boat- 
wright  or  Rigsby 

104.  Women  in  the  Ancient  World.  (CZ)  The  perception  and  reality  of  the  roles,  func- 
tions, and  status  of  women  from  the  time  of  Homer  to  late  antiquity.  C-L:  History  126  and 
Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Boatwright 

114D.  Hellenistic  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Prerequisite:  sophomore  standing;  Philosophy 
93  suggested.  See  C-L:  Philosophy  114D.  One  course.  Vander  Waerdt 

115.  The  Classical  Tradition.  (AL)  The  notion  of  the  "classical"  from  the  creation  of 
the  archetype  to  the  present.  One  course.  Burian 

117.  Ancient  Mythographers.  ( AL)  Myth  in  classical  and  medieval  writers  from  Hesiod 
to  Boccaccio.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Newton 

121.  The  Art  of  Ancient  Italy.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Art  121.  One  course.  Castriota 

122.  Art  and  Myth  in  Ancient  Greece.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Art  122.  One  course.  Castriota 

123.  Greek  Art  and  Archaeology  I.  (AL)  Greek  architecture,  sculpture,  and  painting 
from  the  Bronze  Age  through  the  Classical  period.  C-L:  Art  123.  One  course.  Younger 

124.  Greek  Art  and  Archaeology  II.  (AL)  Architecture,  sculpture,  painting,  and 
mosaics  from  the  Classical  period  through  the  Greco-Roman  period.  C-L :  Art  124.  One 
course.  Younger 

125.  The  City  in  Antiquity.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Art  125.  One  course.  Castriota 
128.  Art  of  the  Roman  Empire.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Art  128.  One  course.  Castriota 

131.  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Art  131.  One  course.  Wharton 

135.  Alexander  the  Great.  (CZ)  His  career  and  the  effects  of  his  conquests.  C-L:  His- 
tory 181.  One  course.  Oates 

145.  Rome:  History  of  the  City.  (CZ)  The  development  of  the  urban  plan  and  its  ma- 
jor monuments  through  the  ages;  the  influence  of  the  ancient  Republic  and  Empire,  the 
Papacy,  and  the  modern  secular  state;  change  and  continuity  in  artistic  forms  and  daily 
life.  Taught  on  site  in  Italy  in  summer.  C-L:  Art  126.  One  course.  Boatwright  or  Burian 

147.  Ancient  Greece.  (CZ)  On-site  study  of  the  cultures  in  Greece  from  Neolithic  to 
Medieval,  concentrating  on  Athens,  the  Peloponnese,  Crete,  and  the  Cyclades.  Summer 
program  in  Greece.  Prerequisite:  Classical  Studies  IIS,  53, 123,  or  124,  or  History  53,  or 
consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Art  115.  One  course.  Younger 


Classical  Studies  (CS)         143 


155.  The  Aegean  Bronze  Age.  (CZ)  Application  of  archaeological  techniques  and 
procedures  to  problems  in  the  development  of  the  Minoan  and  Mycenaean  civilizations. 
C-L:  Art  114.  One  course.  Younger 

161S.  Athens.  (CZ)  The  city  from  antiquity  (c.  1500  B.C.)  to  the  present,  concentrat- 
ing on  its  monuments,  self-image,  and  influence.  C-L:  Art  116S.  One  course.  Younger 

162.  Pompeii.  (CZ)  Contributions  of  the  city  to  knowledge  of  ancient  Roman  life :  its 
history,  houses  and  temples,  amusements,  and  municipal  administration.  C-L:  Art  117. 
One  course.  Richardson 

171.  Ancient  Cosmology.  (CZ)  The  development  of  Greek  theories  of  cosmology  from 
Thales  through  the  Stoics.  Readings  from  the  pre-Socratics,  Plato,  Aristotle,  the  Atomists, 
and  the  Stoics.  Prerequisite:  open  to  sophomores  by  consent  of  instructor;  Philosophy 
93  suggested.  One  course.  Wander  Waerdt 

173.  Classical  Political  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Ancient  theories  of  the  way  of  life  and  the 
political  regime  best  suited  to  promote  happiness  in  human  communities.  Readings  from 
the  Greek  sophists,  Aristophanes,  Plato,  Aristotle,  the  academic  skeptics,  Stoics,  and  Cic- 
ero. Prerequisite:  junior  standing;  open  to  sophomores  by  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Phi- 
losophy 173.  One  course.  Vander  Waerdt 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
juniors  and  seniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Directed  Research  in  Classical  Studies.  Research  culminating  in  the  writ- 
ing of  one  longer  or  two  shorter  papers  as  partial  fulfillment  of  the  requirements  for  gradu- 
ation with  distinction.  Open  only  to  senior  majors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

195S,  196S.  Junior-Senior  Seminars  in  Classical  Studies.  (CZ)  Specific  aspects  of  the 
history,  art,  and  literature  of  classical  Greece  and  Rome.  Open  only  to  qualified  juniors 
and  seniors;  some  knowledge  of  classical  studies  and  history  desirable,  but  not  strictly 
necessary.  Topics  have  included :  sexual  roles  in  antiquity,  and  Imperial  Rome.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

211S.  Plato.  (CZ)  Selected  dialogues.  C-L:  Philosophy  211S.  One  course.  Ferejohn 

217S.  Aristotle.  (CZ)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Philosophy  217S.  One  course.  Ferejohn 

220S.  Studies  in  Greek  Art.  (AL)  Prerequisite :  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Art  220S. 
One  course.  Castriota 

222.  Fifth  and  Fourth  Century  Greece.  (CZ)  From  the  Persian  Wars  to  the  dominance 
of  Philip  of  Macedon.  C-L:  History  260.  One  course.  Oates  orRigsby 

223.  Alexander  and  the  Hellenistic  World .  (CZ)  The  achievements  and  legacy  of  Alex- 
ander the  Great  and  the  rise  of  Roman  power  in  the  Eastern  Mediterranean.  C-L:  Histo- 
ry 261.  One  course.  Oates 

224.  The  Roman  Republic.  (CZ)  The  rise  of  Rome,  to  its  mastery  of  the  Mediterrane- 
an; the  political,  social,  and  intellectual  consequences.  C-L:  History  263.  One  course.  Boat- 
wright  or  Rigsby 

225.  The  Roman  Empire.  (CZ)  The  foundation,  consolidation,  and  transformation 
of  Roman  rule  from  Augustus  to  Diocletian.  C-L:  History  264.  One  course.  Boatwright 

227S.  Studies  in  Roman  Art.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Art 
221S.  One  course.  Castriota 

230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
instructor.  See  C-L:  Art  230S;  also  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course. 
Wharton 

144         Courses  of  Instruction 


231S.  Greek  Sculpture.  (AL)  Free  standing,  relief,  and  architectural  sculpture  from 
the  archaic  period  to  the  Hellenistic  Age,  representing  changing  aesthetic,  social,  and  po- 
litical aims.  C-L:  Art  222S.  One  course.  Stanley 

232S.  Greek  Painting.  (AL)  From  the  late  Bronze  Age  to  the  fourth  century  B.C.,  with 
emphasis  on  archaic  and  classical  Athenian  vase  painters.  C-L:  Art  223S.  One  course. 
Stanley 

235S.  Roman  Architecture.  (AL)  Development  of  design  and  engineering  in  the  ar- 
chitecture of  ancient  Rome.  The  major  building  forms,  public  and  private,  and  the  prin- 
cipal styles  from  the  regal  period  to  Hadrian.  C-L:  Art  225S.  One  course.  Richardson 

236S.  Roman  Painting.  (AL)  The  techniques,  iconography,  and  use  in  decoration.  C-L: 
Art  226S.  One  course.  Richardson 

258.  The  Hellenistic  and  Roman  East.  (CZ)  The  social  and  cultural  history  of  the 
Greco-Roman  world,  concentrating  on  papyrological  evidence.  Prerequisites:  knowledge 
of  ancient  Greek  and  Latin.  One  course.  Oates 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 
129.  The  Age  of  Justinian.  (AL) 
221.  Archaic  Greece.  (CZ) 
226.  Late  Antiquity.  (CZ) 
233S.  Greek  Architecture.  (AL) 

THE  MAJOR 

Students  may  choose  first  or  second  majors  in  Greek,  Latin,  or  in  classical  studies 
(ancient  history,  civilization,  or  archaeology). 

Students  majoring  in  either  Greek  or  Latin  who  contemplate  graduate  work  are 
reminded  of  the  necessity  for  competence  in  both  languages  and  a  reading  knowledge 
of  French  and  German  for  all  higher  degrees. 

Prospective  second  majors  in  Latin,  Greek,  or  classical  studies  are  urged  to  consult 
with  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  at  the  earliest  feasible  time,  preferably  by  the 
sophomore  year. 

Majors  are  eligible  for  nomination  to  one  semester  during  their  junior  year  at  the  In- 
tercollegiate Center  for  Classical  Studies  in  Rome,  of  which  Duke  University  is  a  found- 
ing member,  or  at  the  College  Year  in  Athens,  at  a  cost  comparable  to  that  of  a  semester 
at  Duke.  Financial  assistance  at  Duke  can  usually  be  transferred,  and  arrangements  are 
made  through  the  University.  Courses  in  Greek,  Latin,  ancient  history,  and  archaeolo- 
gy taken  in  these  programs  are  counted  toward  the  major  requirements.  For  further  in- 
formation, see  the  section  on  study  abroad. 

Greek 

Prerequisite.  Greek  2  or  equivalent. 

Major  Requirements.  Six  courses  in  Greek  above  the  level  of  Greek  12,  and  Classical 
Studies  195S  or  196S.  In  addition,  students  will  be  required  to  pass  an  examination  test- 
ing proficiency  in  Greek  composition  or  to  complete  Greek  117T.  Students  entering  with 
three  or  more  years  of  ancient  Greek  are  urged  to  consult  with  the  Director  of  Undergradu- 
ate Studies  to  develop  a  program  suited  to  their  specific  needs  and  interests. 

Related  Work.  Greek  majors  normally  take  at  least  four  courses  in  Latin  and  are  also 
encouraged  to  take  course  work  in  ancient  history  and/or  archaeology.  The  nature  and 
amount  of  related  work,  however,  may  vary  with  the  student. 


Classical  Studies  (CS)         145 


Latin 

Prerequisite.  Latin  64  or  equivalent. 

Major  Requirements.  Six  courses  in  Latin  above  the  level  of  Latin  100,  and  Classical 
Studies  195S  or  196S.  In  addition,  students  will  be  required  to  pass  an  examination  test- 
ing proficiency  in  Latin  composition  or  to  complete  Latin  117T. 

Related  Work.  Latin  majors  normally  take  at  least  four  courses  in  Greek  and  are  also 
encouraged  to  take  course  work  in  ancient  history  and/or  archaeology.  The  nature  and 
amount  of  related  work,  however,  may  vary  with  the  student. 

Classical  Studies  (Ancient  History,  Civilization,  or  Archaeology) 

Prerequisites.  Classical  Studies  IIS  and  12S;  or  53  and  54. 

Major  Requirements.  Eight  courses  above  the  level  of  60,  including  Classical  Studies 
195S  or  196S.  Reading  knowledge  of  Latin  or  Greek  to  the  level  of  Latin  64  or  Greek  64. 
Two  courses  in  the  ancient  languages  above  that  level  may  be  counted  toward  the  major. 

Honors 

The  department  offers  work  leading  to  graduation  with  distinction.  See  the  section 
on  honors  in  this  bulletin. 

Comparative  Area  Studies  Program  <cst) 

Associate  Professor  Gordon,  Director 

A  major  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  undergraduate  major  in  comparative  area  studies  offers  a  Bachelor  of  Arts  de- 
gree to  students  interested  in  the  interdisciplinary  study  of  societies  and  cultures  of  a  par- 
ticular region  of  the  world.  Students  complement  their  study  with  either  a  concentration 
in  a  second  world  area  or  in  the  comparative  study  of  international  problems.  The  major 
allows  a  student  to  combine  language  study  with  courses  in  a  variety  of  disciplines.  As 
in  area  studies  programs  elsewhere,  the  result  is  a  sustained  focus  on  a  single  world  area, 
tailored  to  fit  the  student's  interest.  Comparative  Studies  at  Duke,  however,  is  distinct  from 
most  such  programs  in  several  respects.  The  primary  concentration  encourages  study  of 
language,  literature,  religion,  and  art  of  the  chosen  area  as  well  as  analysis  of  its  social, 
historical,  and  political  roots  and  problems.  The  secondary  concentration  imparts  breadth 
of  focus  and  a  comparative  perspective  to  the  course  of  study.  And  the  required  course 
on  comparative  methods  focuses  attention  on  the  particular  disciplinary  concerns  and 
approaches  of  the  social  sciences  and  humanities. 

Students  in  the  program  are  currently  studying  Latin  America,  the  Caribbean,  Afri- 
ca, the  Middle  East,  Russia,  South  Asia,  East  Asia,  Western  Europe,  and  Canada .  Many 
comparative  area  studies  majors  "double-major"  in  comparative  area  studies  and  in  such 
fields  as  anthropology,  history,  political  science,  Spanish,  and  French.  Although  the  pro- 
gram provides  all  students  with  a  solid  background  in  liberal  arts,  it  is  specifically  designed 
for  those  with  career  objectives  in  academia,  government  (especially  the  foreign  service), 
international  business,  international  law,  health  and  environmental  programs,  the  United 
Nations  and  international  agencies,  and  private-international  religious  or  service  organi- 
zations. 

The  major  draws  its  offerings  from  courses  taught  by  over  eighty  Duke  professors  in 
a  dozen  cooperating  departments.  Interdisciplinary  and  intercultural  courses  have  been 
designed  specifically  for  majors  in  the  program  to  help  place  those  societies  chosen  for 
specialization  in  a  broad  comparative  perspective.  These  courses  stress  the  interrelation- 
ship of  developed  and  underdeveloped  societies  and  probe  the  difficulties  and  advan- 
tages of  comparative,  interdisciplinary,  and  intercultural  research. 

The  program  is  administered  by  its  director  and  an  advisory  committee  represent- 
ing the  various  areas  and  cooperating  departments. 

146         Courses  of  Instruction 


Advising:  Students  must  identify  their  primary  area  focus.  Faculty  members  with  ex- 
pertise in  each  area  are  available  to  provide  advice  concerning  selection  of  an  area  and 
course  work  in  the  major.  Students  wishing  to  specialize  in  an  area  not  indicated  in  the 
categories  of  courses  that  follow  will  be  required  to  submit  a  proposed  course  of  study 
to  the  advisory  committee  for  approval.  Selection  of  area  is  normally  done  by  the  end  of 
the  sophomore  year.  The  program  encourages  close  relationships  between  faculty  and 
students  working  in  similar  areas. 

Study  Abroad  or  on  Another  Campus:  The  program  encourages  qualified  and  interest- 
ed students  to  engage  in  sustained  study  abroad  in  their  chosen  area  for  a  semester  or 
for  an  academic  year.  Duke  students  are  eligible  for  a  variety  of  programs  now  operating 
in  Africa,  Asia,  Canada,  Latin  America,  the  Soviet  Union,  and  Western  Europe.  Students 
can  also  take  advantage  of  special  programs  in  the  United  States  for  intensive  language 
training,  legislative  or  foreign  service  study  in  Washington,  and  internship  programs  at 
the  United  Nations.  Occasionally  summer  internships  in  a  variety  of  structured  programs, 
including  international  business,  are  available  for  qualified  students. 

The  courses  listed  below  may  be  taken  for  credit  as  introductory  courses,  compara- 
tive courses,  and  area  courses.  Others  may  be  selected  with  the  approval  of  the  Director. 
Courses  in  basic  language  instruction  are  not  included,  but  courses  in  advanced  language 
and  literature  that  can  be  used  to  meet  the  language  requirement  (not  the  area  require- 
ment) for  the  major  are  shown  under  the  appropriate  headings.  For  a  complete  descrip- 
tion, including  cross-listings,  consult  the  listing  under  the  appropriate  department  or  un- 
der Interdisciplinary  Courses. 

COMPARATIVE  AREA  STUDIES  COURSES 

109.  Contemporary  International  Problems:  Their  Historical  Origins  and  Their  Im- 
plications for  Future  Policy.  (SS)  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  109,  History  109,  Political 
Science  160,  and  Sociology  175.  One  course.  Staff 

125.  Strategies  of  Comparative  Analysis.  (SS)  Comparative  research  and  analysis  in 
the  social  sciences  and  the  humanities :  strengths  and  weaknesses  of  cross-cultural  com- 
parison as  developed  by  sociologists,  historians,  political  scientists,  anthropologists,  and 
specialists  in  comparative  literature  and  religion.  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  125,  His- 
tory 137,  Political  Science  125,  and  Sociology  125.  One  course.  Staff 

150S.  Comparative  Area  Studies  Senior  Seminar.  (CZ)  Open  to  seniors  majoring  in 
Comparative  Area  Studies  and  other  seniors  if  space  is  available.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Gordon 

INTRODUCTORY  COURSES 

Comparative  Area  Studies  109.  Contemporary  International  Problems:  Their  Historical  Origins  and  Their 
Implications  for  Future  Policy.  Staff 

Cultural  Anthropology  94.  Introduction  to  Cultural  Anthropology.  Staff 

History  25.  Introduction  to  World  History:  To  1700.  Staff 

History  26.  Introduction  to  World  History:  Since  1700.  Staff 

History  75,  76.  The  Third  World  and  the  West.  R.  Davis,  Dirlik,  Ewald,  Gordon,  or  Richards 

Literature  101.  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Literature  and  Society.  Wi//is 

Music  136S.  Introduction  to  Non-Western  Music.  Seebass 

Political  Science  92.  Comparative  Politics.  Staff 

Religion  57.  Introduction  to  the  Religions  of  Asia.  Corless,  Lawrence,  Partin,  or  Robinson 

Sociology  110.  Comparative  Sociology.  Cereffi,  Myers,  Smith,  or  Tiryakian 

COMPARATIVE  COURSES 

Cultural  Anthropology 

114.  Gender  Inequality.  Quinn 
119.  Language,  Culture,  and  Society.  Apteor  Welter 
152S.  Food  in  Cross-Cultural  Perspectives.  Apte 
155.  Anthropological  Approaches  to  Religion.  Welter 

Comparative  Area  Studies  Program  (CST)         147 


239.  Culture  and  Ideology.  Welter 

255S.  Heroes  and  Heroics:  Culture  and  the  Individual.  Fox 

Economics 

219S.  Economic  Problems  of  Underdeveloped  Areas.  Kelley  or  Naylor 
286S.  Economic  Policy-Making  in  Developing  Countries.  Gi//is 

History 

101C.  Terrorism,  1848-1968.  M.  Miller 

120.  History  of  Socialism  and  Communism.  Lemer 

123S.  Madness  and  Society  in  Historical  Perspective.  Miller 

167S.  United  States  and  Canadian  Constitutional  Issues.  Cahoio 

168S.  The  Atlantic  Slave  Trade.  Caspar 

233S.  Slave  Resistance  and  Social  Control  in  New  World  Societies.  Gaspar 

239S.  History  of  Socialism  and  Communism.  Lemer 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

120A.  Perspectives  on  Food  and  Hunger.  Johns 

120B.  Perspectives  on  Food  and  Hunger.  Johns 

140.  The  Great  Mother:  Archetype  or  Stereotype?  Wang 

234S.  Political  Economics  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World.  Fox,  Gereffi,  or  Smith 

Literature 

121.  Introduction  to  Non-Western  Literatures.  Cooke  and  Fowler 
129.  Latin  American  Literature.  Dorfman  or  Fein 

155.  Comparative  Perspectives  on  Literature  and  Social  Change:  From  Plantation  to  City.  Willis 
185.  Psychoanalysis,  Literature,  and  Film.  Gaines 

Political  Science 

107.  Comparative  Environmental  Policies.  McKean 

147.  International  Environmental  Politics  and  Policies.  McKean 

163.  Gender,  Politics,  and  Policy:  The  Third  World  Case.  O'Barr 

173S.  Political  Economy  of  World  Food  Problems.  Johns 

212S.  Domestic  Structures  and  Foreign  Policies  of  Advanced  Democratic  States.  Grieco 

231S.  Crisis,  Choice,  and  Change  in  Advanced  Democratic  States.  Kitschelt 

237S.  Comparative  Public  Policy.  Kitschelt 

242S.  Comparative  Law  and  Policy:  Ethnic  Group  Relations.  Horowitz 

249.  Comparative  International  Development  and  Technology  Flow.  Staff 

259S.  Low  Intensity  Conflict  and  the  Lessons  of  Vietnam.  Lomperis 

262S.  International  Communism.  Hough 

277.  Comparative  Party  Politics.  Komberg  or  Lange 

284S.  Public  Policy  Process  in  Developing  Countries.  Ascher 

293.  Federalism.  Leach 

Public  Policy  Studies 

284S.  Public  Policy  Process  in  Developing  Countries.  Ascher 

286S.  Economic  Policy-Making  in  Developing  Countries.  Conrad  or  Gillis 

Religion 

125.  Women  and  Sexuality  in  the  Christian  Tradition.  Clark 

142.  Comparative  Mythology.  Partin 

143.  Mysticism.  Staff 

157.  Bioethics  in  Comparative  Contexts.  McCollough 
282.  Myth  and  Ritual.  Robinson  and  staff 

Sociology 

118.  Sex,  Gender,  and  Society.  O'Rand 

126.  Third  World  Development.  Gereffi 

170.  Mass  Communication.  Smith 

171.  Comparative  Health  Care  Systems.  Maddox 

173.  Social  Conflict  and  Social  Development.  Tiryakian  or  Wilson 

179.  Modern  Nationalist  Movements.  Tiryakian 

180.  Modern  Revolutions.  Tiryakian 

182.  Media  in  Comparative  Perspective.  Paletz  or  Smith 

214.  Comparative  and  Historical  Methods.  Janoski,  Smith,  or  Tiryakian 

222B.  Comparative  Aspects  of  Societal  Transformation.  Gereffi,  Simpson,  Smith,  or  Tiryakian 


148         Courses  of  Instruction 


AREA  COURSES:  AFRICA 

Arabic 

100.  North  African  Culture.  (Taught  in  Morocco.)  Cooke 

Cultural  Anthropology 

122.  Modern  Africa.  O'Barr 

History 

115.  History  of  Africa.  Ewald 

179.  History  of  South  Africa,  1600-1960.  Ewald 

195S.23,  196S.23.  Issues  in  the  History  of  Tropical  Africa.  Ewald 

Interdisciplinary  Course 

164.  History  and  Religions  of  North  Africa.  (Taught  in  Morocco.)  Lawrence 

Literature 

128.  Writings  in  the  Pan-African  Tradition.  Willis 

Political  Science 

161S.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Africa.  Bates  or  Johns 
171.  Politics  of  South  African  Apartheid.  Johns 

Religion 

265.  Religions  of  the  West  African  Diaspora.  Lincoln 

AREA  COURSES:  CANADA 

English 

186.  Canadian  Literature  in  English.  Staff 

French 

131S.  French  in  the  New  World.  Hull 

169.  The  Contemporary  Novel  in  French  Canada.  Keinig  and  staff 

History 

183S.  Canada  from  the  French  Settlement.  Cahoiv 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

184.  An  Introduction  to  Canada  and  Canadian  Issues.  Cahow 
282S.  Canada.  Cahow 

AREA  COURSES:  CARIBBEAN 

Afro-American  Studies 

265.  Religions  of  the  West  African  Diaspora.  Lincoln 

Cultural  Anthropology 

128.  Caribbean  Societies  and  Cultures.  Dominguez 

History 

115.  History  of  Africa.  Ewald 

124S.  Slave  Society  in  Colonial  Anglo-America:  The  West  Indies,  South  Carolina,  and  Virginia.  Gaspar 

131.  Mexico  and  the  Spanish  Caribbean  in  the  Nineteenth  and  Twentieth  Centuries.  TePaske 

145,  146.  Afro-American  History.  Gavins 

168S.  The  Atlantic  Slave  Trade.  Gaspar 

174.  History  of  Colonial  Hispanic  America  from  Pre-Columbian  Times  to  the  Wars  of  Independence.  TePaske 

Literature 

128.  Writings  in  the  Pan-African  Tradition.  Wi7/is 

155.  Comparative  Perspectives  on  Literature  and  Social  Change:  From  Plantation  to  City.  Willis 

AREA  COURSES:  EAST  ASIA 

Art 

165.  Topics  in  Oriental  Art.  Lee 

Chinese 

125, 126.  Advanced  Chinese.  Staff 

141S.  The  Fantastic  in  Chinese  Fiction.  Wang 

142S.  Masterpieces  of  Chinese  Literature  in  Translation.  Kunst 

166S.  The  I  Ching,  or  Book  of  Changes.  Kunst 


Comparative  Area  Studies  Program  (CST)         149 


171.  The  Novel  in  Modern  China.  Kunst 

182S.  Classical  Readings  in  Chinese  Philosophy  (in  Chinese).  Wang 

183, 184.  Topics  in  Modern  Chinese.  Kunst  or  Wang 

Additional  Chinese  courses  are  taught  in  Beijing  and  Nanjing  as  part  of  the  Duke  Study  in  China  ProgTam. 

Cultural  Anthropology 

121.  China:  Tradition  and  Transformation.  Welter 

131.  Socialism  and  Society  in  China.  Weller 

163.  Foundations  of  Chinese  Civilization.  (Taught  in  China.)  Staff 

History 

101K.  Topics  in  Chinese  Civilization.  Dirlik 

139.  China  since  1949:  The  People's  Republic.  Dirlik 

141.  Imperial  China.  R.  Davis 

142.  China:  Roots  of  Revolution.  Dirlik 

143.  Ancient  and  Early  Modern  Japan.  Gordon 

144.  The  Emergence  of  Modern  Japan.  Gordon 

163.  Foundations  of  Chinese  Civilization.  (Taught  in  China.)  Staff 

195S.07, 196S.07.  Socialism  and  Revolution  in  East  Asia.  Dirlik 

195S.17, 196S.17.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Modern  Japan.  Gordon 

195S.30,  196S.30.  Traditions  in  China  and  the  West.  R.  Davis 

243,  244.  Marxism  and  History.  Dirlik 

245,  246.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  of  China.  R.  Davis  and  Dirlik 

Japanese 

155,  156.  Readings  in  Modern  Japanese.  Kuril/a  and  staff 
161.  Modern  Japanese  Fiction  in  Translation.  Fou'ler 
175.  Structure  of  Japanese.  Nagai 
183,  184,  Topics  in  Japanese,  foioler  or  staff 

Music 

138.  Music  in  East  and  Southeast  Asia.  Seebass 

Political  Science 

111.  Contemporary  Japanese  Politics.  McKean 

132.  Politics  of  Asia,  lomperis 

149.  United  States  and  East  Asia.  McKean 
169.  Politics  in  Revolutionary  China.  McKean 

Religion 

141.  Religions  of  China  and  Japan.  Corless 
149.  Buddha  and  Buddhism.  Corless 
218.  Religions  of  East  Asia.  Corless 
287.  The  Scriptures  of  Asia.  Staff 

AREA  COURSES:  LATIN  AMERICA 

Art 

178.  Pre-Columbian  Art  and  Architecture.  Reents-Budct  or  Sund 

History 

128.  The  United  States  and  Latin  America.  Staff 

131.  History  of  Mexico  and  the  Spanish  Caribbean  in  the  Nineteenth  and  Twentieth  Centuries.  TePaske 

173.  History  of  Spain  from  Late  Medieval  Times  to  the  Present.  TePaske 

174.  History  of  Colonial  Hispanic  America  from  Pre-Columbian  Times  to  the  Wars  of  Independence.  TePaske 
177.  Modern  Latin  America.  Staff 

195S.22,  196S.22.  Problems  in  Latin-American  History.  TePaske 

231S,  232S.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Spain  and  the  Spanish  Empire.  TePaske 

265S.  Problems  in  Latin  American  History.  Staff 

Cultural  Anthropology 

124S.  The  American  Indian.  Staff 
127  Social  Transformations  in  Central  America.  Smith 
128.  Caribbean  Societies  and  Cultures.  Dominguez 
173.  Revolutions  in  Latin  America.  Smith 

Political  Science 

151.  Introduction  to  Latin-American  Politics.  Staff 

253S.  Comparative  Government  and  the  Studv  of  Latin  America.  Staff 


150         Courses  of  Instruction 


Portuguese 

181.  Brazilian  Portuguese.  Staff 

182.  Topics  in  Portuguese  and  Brazilian  Literature  and  Culture.  Staff 

Spanish 

105,  106.  Introduction  to  Spanish-American  Literature.  Fein  or  Ross 

107S.  Spanish-American  Short  Fiction.  Fein 

121.  Latin  American  Literature  in  Translation.  Fein 

131.  Topics  of  Hispanic  Civilization.  Staff 

146.  The  Spanish-American  Novel.  Fein 

166.  Nineteenth-Century  Prose  Fiction.  Perez  Firmat  or  Sieburth 

171.  Literature  of  Contemporary  Spain.  Osuna 

210.  History  of  the  Spanish  Language.  Garci-Gbmez 

245.  Modern  Spanish-American  Poetry.  Fein 

lib.  Modern  Spanish-American  Fiction.  Perez  Firmat 

AREA  COURSES:  MIDDLE  EAST 

Arabic 

100.  North  African  Culture.  (Taught  in  Morocco.)  Cooke 
173S.  Women  in  Arabic  Literature.  Cooke 

Cultural  Anthropology 

126.  Middle  East:  Wars,  Revolutions,  and  Social  Change.  Dominguez 

147,  148.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  Lawrence  and  staff 

History 

101G,  102G.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  Lawrence  and  staff 
159S.  The  Palestine  Problem  and  United  States  Public  Policy.  Kuniholm 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

162,  163.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  Lawrence  and  staff 

164.  History  and  Religions  of  North  Africa.  (Taught  in  Morocco.)  Lawrence 

Political  Science 

177,  178.  Contemporary  Social  and  Political  Development  in  the  Islamic  World.  Staff 
235S.  Comparative  Development  of  Islam.  Staff 

Public  Policy  Studies 

175S.  The  Palestine  Problem  and  United  States  Public  Policy.  Kuniholm 
257  United  States  Policy  in  the  Middle  East.  Kuniholm 

Religion 

110.  Archaeology  and  Art  of  the  Biblical  World.  C.  Meyers  or  E.  Meyers 

134.  Jewish  Mysticism.  Bland 

135.  Jewish  Religious  Thought.  Bland 

136.  Contemporary  Jewish  Thought.  Bland  or  E.  Meyers 
152.  Islamic  Mysticism.  Lawrence 

162,  163.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  Lawrence  and  staff 
283.  Islam  and  Modernism.  Lawrence 

AREA  COURSES:  RUSSIA  AND  EAST  EUROPE 

Economics 

293.  Soviet  Economic  History.  Treml 
294S.  Soviet  Economic  System.  Treml 

History 

120.  History  of  Socialism  and  Communism.  Lemer 

161, 162.  History  of  Modern  Russia.  M.  Miller 

180.  The  Soviet  Experience.  Lerner 

195S.18,  196S.18.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Russia  before  1917.  Lerner  or  M.  Miller 

201S.  The  Russian  Intelligentsia  and  the  Origins  of  the  Revolution.  M.  Miller 

202S.  The  Russian  Revolution.  M.  Miller 

239S.  History  of  Socialism  and  Communism.  Lerner 

262.  Problems  in  Soviet  History.  Lerner 

Political  Science 

165.  Government  and  Politics  of  the  Soviet  Union.  Hough 

166.  Soviet  Foreign  Relations.  Hough 


Comparative  Area  Studies  Program  (CST)         151 


Russian 

100.  Studies  in  Russian  Culture.  (Taught  in  Leningrad.)  Andrews 
124.  Masters  of  Russian  Short  Fiction.  Staff 

150.  The  Languages  of  the  Soviet  Union.  Pugh 

161,  162.  Introduction  to  the  Russian  Novel.  Staff 

175.  Tolstoy.  Staff 

176.  Dostoevsky.  Staff 

185S.  Introduction  to  Slavic  Linguistics.  Andrews 
186S.  History  of  the  Russian  Language.  Pugh 
196.  Readings  in  Modern  Russian.  Staff 
225.  Tolstoy.  Staff 
232.  Dostoevsky.  Staff 

AREA  COURSES:  SOUTH  ASIA 

Cultural  Anthropology 

101,  102.  Introduction  to  the  Civilizations  of  Southern  Asia.  Apte  or  Fox 

History 

140.  Medieval  and  Early  Modern  India,  Pakistan,  and  Bar.  .ladesh.  Richards 
164.  India,  Pakistan,  and  Bangladesh:  1750  to  the  Present.  Richards 
193,  194.  Introduction  to  the  Civilizations  of  Southern  Asia.  Far  and  staff 
195S.21,  196S.21.  Problems  in  Indian  History.  Richards 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

162,  163.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  Lawrence  and  staff 

Music 

138.  Music  in  East  and  Southeast  Asia.  Sffdass 

Political  Science 

132.  Politics  of  Asia.  Lomperis 

177.  178.  Contemporary  Social  and  Political  Development  in  the  Islamic  World.  Staff 

Religion 

140.  Religions  of  India.  Lawrence  and  staff 

145.  Social  Issues  in  Contemporary  Hinduism.  Robinson 

149.  Buddha  and  Buddhism.  Corless 

160,  161.  Introduction  to  the  Civilizations  of  Southern  Asia.  Fox  and  staff 
217.  Islam  in  India.  Lawrence 

284.  The  Religion  and  History  of  Islam.  Partm 

287.  The  Scriptures  of  Asia.  Staff 

288.  Buddhist  Thought  and  Practice.  Cor/ess 

AREA  COURSES:  WESTERN  EUROPE 

Art 

161.  Nineteenth-Century  European  Art.  Ccmuschi  or  Sund 
164.  Art  of  the  Romantic  Period.  Sund 

184.  History  of  Impressionism.  Ccrnuschi  or  Sund 

186.  Twentieth-Century  Art.  Ccrnuschi,  Stiles,  or  Sund 

187.  Surrealism.  Stiles 

Distinguished  Professor  Courses 

196S.  Current  Political  Problems  in  Western  European  and  Commonwealth  Countries.  Cole 

Economics 

150.  History  of  Economic  Thought,  it  Marchi  or  Goodwin 

French 

107S.  Contemporary  Ideas.  Staff 

113.  French  for  Business  and  Law.  Bryan 

136S.  Life  in  Eighteenth-Century  France.  Steivart 

137.  Aspects  of  Contemporary  French  Culture.  Staff 

139.  French  Civilization.  Keinig  or  Tetel 

166,  167.  Contemporary  French  Life  and  Thought.  Kaplan 
256.  Modern  Literature  and  History.  Orr 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

127S.  Contemporary  Germany.  Bessent 


152         Courses  of  Instruction 


129.  Deutsche  Kulturgeschichte.  Staff 

130.  German  Life  and  Thought.  Bernhardt 

175.  Consciousness  and  Modern  Society.  Rolleston 

History 

104.  The  Intellectual  Life  of  Europe,  1250-1600.  Robisheaux  or  Witt 
107, 108.  Social  and  Cultural  History  of  England.  Cell  or  Herrup 
117  Early  Modern  Europe.  Neuschel 
119.  Modern  European  Intellectual  and  Cultural  History.  M.  Miller 

135.  Germany  from  the  Thirty  Years'  War  to  Unification  in  1871.  Koonz 

136.  Germany  since  Unification  in  1871 .  Koonz 
138.  Early  Modern  Germany.  Robisheaux 

171.  A  History  of  Women  in  Europe.  Neuschel 

173.  History  of  Spain  from  Late  Medieval  Times  to  the  Present.  TePaske 

174.  History  of  Colonial  Hispanic  America  from  Pre-Columbian  Times  to  the  Wars  of  Independence.  TePaske 
182.  Politics  and  Culture  in  Renaissance  Florence.  Wift 

188.  German  History  from  1870  to  1970.  (Taught  in  Germany.)  Staff 

195S,  196S.  Selected  Seminars  in  European  History.  Staff 

199.  The  History  of  Women  in  Science  and  Medicine.  Green 

207,  208.  Constitutional  History  of  Britain:  The  Rise  of  the  Common  Law.  Herrup 

217S,  218S.  Western  Europe  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  Cotton 

221.  Problems  in  the  Economic  and  Social  History  of  Europe,  1200-1700.  Neuschel  or  Robisheaux 

231S-232S.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Spain  and  the  Spanish  Empire.  TePaske 

253S,  254S.  European  Diplomatic  History,  1871-1945.  IV  Scoff 

267S.  England  in  the  Sixteenth  Century.  Herrup 

268S.  England  in  the  Seventeenth  Century.  Herrup 

269S,  270S.  British  History,  Seventeenth  Century  to  the  Present.  Cell 

Literature 

132.  Dada  and  Surrealism.  Thomas 

Music 

119.  The  Humanities  and  Music.  Bartlett,  Higgins,  or  Seebass 
125.  Masterworks  of  Music.  Druesedow,  Henry,  Muti,  or  Todd 

143.  Beethoven  and  His  Time.  Bartlet,  Gilliam,  Silbiger,  or  Todd 

144.  Bach  and  His  Time.  Hill  or  Silbiger 

145.  Mozart  and  His  Time.  Seebass 

156S.  Music  History  II:  Late  Renaissance,  Baroque.  Bartlet,  Higgins,  Seebass,  Silbiger,  or  Williams 

157S.  Music  History  III:  Rococo  and  Classic.  Bartlet,  Seebass,  Silbiger,  or  Todd 

158S.  Music  History  IV:  Romanticism  to  the  Early  Modern  Period.  Bartlet,  Gilliam,  Silbiger,  or  Todd 

Political  Science 

115.  Politics  and  Society  in  West  Germany.  Kitschelt 

134.  West  Germany  and  East  Germany:  From  Confrontation  to  Normalization.  (Taught  in  Germany. )  Staff 

135.  Political  Development  of  Western  Europe.  Kitschelt  or  Lange 

136.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Western  Europe.  Kitschelt,  Lange,  or  Tsebelis 
216S.  Evolutions  of  European  Marxism.  Staff 

225.  Topics  in  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Western  Europe.  Kitschelt  or  Lange 
232.  Political  Economy:  Theory  and  Applications.  Lange 

Spanish  and  Portuguese 

See  appropriate  listings  under  Latin  America. 

THE  MAJOR 

For  Students  Who  Matriculated  before  May  1988: 

Introductory  Cou  rses:  A  student  must  take  an  introductory  course  emphasizing  com- 
parative approaches  from  each  of  two  departments  (two  courses).  See  the  listing  under 
Introductory  Courses. 

Foreign  Language  Requirement:  Four  semesters  of  courses  for  a  single  language  of  the 
primary  area  are  required .  Students  with  advanced  placement  credits  or  other  evidence 
of  foreign  language  proficiency  are  not  exempted  from  this  requirement.  However,  in  the 
following  cases  students  may  substitute  one  or  two  nonlanguage  courses  to  meet  this  re- 
quirement: (1)  if  a  second  year  of  a  language  is  not  taught  at  Duke  or  (2)  if  no  language 
course  is  available  at  a  sufficiently  advanced  level.  In  these  cases,  approved  humanities 

Comparative  Area  Studies  Program  (CST)         153 


or  social  science  courses  taught  in  a  foreign  language,  or  a  year  of  general  linguistics  or 
literature  in  translation,  may  be  substituted  for  the  second  year  of  a  language.  The  specific 
language  courses  are  too  numerous  to  list  here.  Area  advisors  should  be  consulted  for 
specific  approval  of  the  language  choice  unless  it  conforms  to  the  list  below. 

Africa:  Swahili;  relevant  European  languages  such  as  French  may  be  used  if  ap- 
propriate to  specific  programs. 

East  Asia:  Chinese,  Japanese. 

South  Asia:  Hindi-Urdu. 

Middle  East:  Arabic,  Persian;  or  modern  Hebrew  for  persons  specializing  in 
Israel. 

Latin  America:  Spanish;  Portuguese  for  those  specializing  in  Brazil. 

Russia  and  Eastern  Europe:  Russian. 

Western  Europe:  French,  German,  Italian,  Portuguese,  Spanish. 

Canada:  French. 
Primary  Area  Courses:  Four  semester  courses  in  the  geographical  area  of  special  in- 
terest (the  area  of  the  language  studied).  The  areas  and  courses  are  listed  above.  Others 
may  be  selected  with  the  consent  of  the  Director. 

Secondary  Concentration:  The  secondary  concentration  is  intended  to  provide  a  com- 
parative perspective  on  the  student's  primary  area  of  study  and  to  focus  attention  on  Third 
World  as  well  as  Western  societies.  A  student  must  take  three  courses  in  one  of  the  fol- 
lowing concentrations:  comparative  courses,  examples  of  which  are  listed  above;  or  a  sec- 
ond geographical  area .  Students  who  choose  Western  Europe  or  Russia/Eastern  Europe 
as  a  primary  area  must  take  a  non-European  or  comparative  secondary  area.  Similarly, 
students  who  choose  either  Latin  America  or  the  Caribbean  as  their  primary  area  may 
not  take  the  other  of  this  pair  as  the  secondary  area. 

Comparative  Methods  Course  and  Senior  Seminar:  All  students  must  take  either  the  com- 
parative methods  course  (Comparative  Area  Studies  125)  in  their  junior  or  senior  year, 
or  the  Honors  Seminar  (Comparative  Area  Studies  150S)  in  their  senior  year.  The  form- 
er course  (Comparative  Area  Studies  125)  will  be  taught  by  faculty  members  affiliated  with 
comparative  area  studies  and  is  open  only  to  majors.  The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  teach 
students  the  various  strategies  that  can  be  employed  in  making  appropriate  comparisons 
within  and  across  distinct  regions  of  the  world.  The  course  will  combine  a  lecture  format 
with  discussion  sections,  and  students  will  be  encouraged  to  write  papers  that  reflect  the 
cross-cultural  and  interdisciplinary  objectives  of  the  major.  The  optional  honors  semi- 
nar will  be  open  to  seniors  in  the  major.  Candidates  will  apply  in  their  junior  year  and 
be  selected  by  the  comparative  area  studies  faculty.  Selection  criteria  include  the  feasi- 
bility of  the  proposed  topic  and  the  student's  motivation  and  skills  to  carry  it  out  suc- 
cessfully. 

For  Students  Who  Matriculated  after  May  1988: 

1 .  Corequisite  Foreign  Language  Requirement:  Four  (4)  courses  in  a  single  language  of  the 
primary  area  studied.  Detailed  requirements  same  as  above. 

2.  Major  Requirements: 

A.  Introductory  Courses:  Two  (2)  introductory  courses  emphasizing  comparative 
approaches,  one  from  each  of  two  departments.  See  list  under  Introductory 
Courses. 

B.  Primary  Area  Courses:  Four  (4)  semester  courses  in  the  geographical  area  of  spe- 
cial interest  (the  area  of  the  language  studied) .  Areas  and  courses  are  listed  above. 
Others  may  be  selected  with  the  consent  of  the  Director. 

C.  Secondary  Concentration:  Three  (3)  courses  in  the  secondary  area  of  concen- 
tration or  three  comparative  courses.  Detailed  requirements  the  same  as  above. 

D.  Comparative  Area  Studies  125,  Strategies  of  Comparative  Analysis:  usually  tak- 
en in  the  junior  or  senior  year. 


154         Courses  of  Instruction 


3.  Honors  Seminar.  For  graduation  with  distinction  or  honors  by  honors  project,  a  re- 
search project  completed  in  senior  year,  usually  in  the  Comparative  Area  Studies  150S 
senior  seminar.  For  detailed  requirements  and  application,  consult  the  comparative  area 
studies  office. 

Inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  the  Director,  Comparative  Area  Studies,  2122  Cam- 
pus Drive. 

Comparative  Literature  Program 

See  Literature:  Undergraduate  Courses  in  the  Literature  Program. 

Computer  Science  (cps> 

Professor  Rose,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Ramm,  Associate  Chairman;  Professor  Bier- 
mann,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Professors  Gallie,  Loveland,  Marinos,  Patrick, 
Reif ,  Starmer,  Trivedi,  Utku,  and  Woodbury;  Associate  Professors  Dugan,  C.  Ellis,  J.  El- 
lis, Greenside,  Kedem,  Kootsey,  and  Wagner;  Assistant  Professors  Board,  Gardner,  Hol- 
liday,  Nadathur,  and  Szyld;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Coughran 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

The  Department  of  Computer  Science  provides  courses  on  the  concepts  of  comput- 
ing and  computers,  their  capabilities,  and  uses.  In  most  courses  students  make  exten- 
sive use  of  the  available  computing  facilities.  Students  who  wish  to  take  a  single  introduc- 
tory course,  as  part  of  their  general  education,  usually  elect  Computer  Science  10  or  51 . 

In  cooperation  with  the  Microelectronics  Center  of  North  Carolina  (MCNC),  the 
University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  and  other  MCNC-affiliated  universities  in 
North  Carolina,  the  department  often  sponsors  advanced  computer  science  and  other 
high  technology  courses  originating  at  other  universities.  These  are  available  through  a 
closed  circuit  television  and  data  network  belonging  to  MCNC.  Contact  the  Department 
of  Computer  Science  for  further  information  on  the  availability  of  such  courses. 

10.  Computer  Science  Fundamentals.  (QR)  An  introduction  to  computers  for  students 
who  do  not  intend  to  major  in  computer  science.  Fundamental  concepts  of  the  nature  of 
computers  and  computability,  programming,  numeric  and  symbolic  data  processing.  Not 
open  to  students  having  credit  for  Computer  Science  51  or  higher.  One  course.  Staff 

51.  Introduction  to  Computer  Programming.  (QR)  Problem  solving  using  a  digital 
computer.  Use  of  a  high  level  algorithmic  programming  language.  Students  expected  to 
write  a  substantial  number  of  programs.  Use  of  a  computer  in  laboratory-style  classes 
utilizing  personal  computers.  One  course.  Kootsey  and  staff 

53.  Programming,  Analysis,  and  Design  I.  (QR)  Computer  programming,  data  struc- 
tures, analysis  and  design  of  algorithms.  Intended  as  a  first  course  for  students  in  the  B.S. 
degree  program.  One  course.  Staff 

102.  Data  Structures.  (QR)  Linear  lists,  trees,  multilinked  structures,  and  their  use  in  al- 
gorithms. Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  51,  53,  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

103.  Programming,  Analysis,  and  Design  II.  (QR)  A  continuation  of  Computer 
Science  53.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  53.  One  course.  Staff 

104.  Computers  and  Programming.  (QR)  Computer  structure,  machine  language, 
instruction  execution,  addressing  techniques,  and  digital  representation  of  data.  Com- 
puter systems  organization,  logic  design,  microprogramming,  and  interpreters.  Symbolic 
coding  and  assembly  systems.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  102  or  103  or  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course.  Ramm  and  staff 

Computer  Science  (CPS)         155 


106.  Programming  Languages.  (QR)  Syntax  and  semantics  of  programming  lan- 
guages. Compilation,  interpretation,  and  programming  environments;  including 
programming  languages  such  as  Algol,  PL/1,  Pascal,  APL,  LISP,  and  Prolog.  Exercises 
in  programming.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  104.  One  course.  Staff 

121.  Introduction  to  Numerical  Methods.  (QR)  Numerical  solution  of  systems  of  lin- 
ear and  nonlinear  equations  and  of  ordinary  differential  equations.  Polynomial  and  spline 
interpolation.  Integration.  Least  squares.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  102  and 
Mathematics  103  and  104.  One  course.  Staff 

125.  Mathematical  Foundations  of  Computer  Science.  (QR)  An  introduction  to  the- 
oretical computer  science  including  studies  of  abstract  machines,  the  language  hierar- 
chy from  regular  sets  to  recursively  enumerable  sets,  noncomputability,  and  complexity 
theory.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  53  and  103  and  Mathematics  103.  One  course. 
Staff 

131.  Introduction  to  Operating  Systems.  (QR)  Basic  concepts  and  principles  of  mul- 
tiprogrammed  operating  systems.  Processes,  interprocess  communication,  CPU  schedul- 
ing, mutual  exclusion,  deadlocks,  memory  management,  I/O  devices,  file  systems,  pro- 
tection mechanisms.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  102  and  104.  One  course.  Hollidau 

155.  Program  Design  and  Construction.  (QR)  Substantial  programs.  Design  specifi- 
cations, choice  of  data  structures,  estimation  of  programming  effort,  stepwise  develop- 
ment, and  program-testing  methodology.  Programming  teams  and  human  factors  in  sys- 
tem implementation.  Advanced  topics  in  use  of  a  procedural  language  and  file 
management.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  104.  One  course.  Staff 

157.  Introduction  to  Switching  and  Automata  Theory.  (QR)  See  C-L:  Electrical  En- 
gineering 157.  One  course.  Carroll  or  Strole 

160.  Digital  Electronics  and  Computer  Hardware.  The  basics  of  DC  and  AC  circuit 
analysis,  digital  circuitry,  MOS  devices  and  hybrid  designs,  riming  considerations.  Switch- 
ing characteristics  of  transistors  and  simple  amplifier  circuits.  Speed,  power,  fanin  and 
fanout,  and  cost  as  a  basis  of  comparison  of  different  logic  families.  Applications  to  digi- 
tal system  design .  Not  open  to  biomedical  or  electrical  engineering  majors.  Prerequisite: 
Physics  52.  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  160.  One  course.  Dollas  or  Dugan 

Y74.  Analysis  of  Algorithms.  (QR)  Design  and  analysis  of  efficient  algorithms  for  sort- 
ing, searching,  dynamic  structure  manipulation,  pathfinding,  fast  multiplication,  and 
others;  nondeterministic  algorithms  and  computationally  hard  problems.  Prerequisites: 
Computer  Science  102  and  four  semesters  of  college  mathematics.  One  course.  Loveland 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  for  qualified  juniors. 
Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  for  qualified  seniors. 
Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Programming  Methodology.  (QR)  Practical  and  theoretical  topics  including 
structured  programming,  specification  and  documentation  of  programs,  debugging  and 
testing  strategies,  choice  and  effective  use  of  programming  languages  and  systems,  psy- 
chology of  computer  programming,  proof  of  correctness  of  programs,  analysis  of  al- 
gorithms, and  properties  of  program  schemata.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  102.  One 
course.  Staff 

156        Courses  of  Instruction 


201.  Programming  Languages.  (QR)  Information  binding,  data  structures  and  stor- 
age, control  structures,  recursion,  execution  environments,  input/output;  syntax  and 
semantics  of  languages;  study  of  PL/1,  Fortran,  Algol,  APL,  LISP,  SNOBOL,  and  SIM- 
ULA; exercises  in  programming.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  200.  One  course.  Staff 

202.  Applied  Discrete  Structures.  (QR)  Aspects  of  discrete  mathematics  that  are  es- 
sential to  the  development  of  computer  science.  Topics  from  combinatorics  and  graph 
theory,  discrete  probability  theory,  and  mathematical  logic.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics 
103  and  104  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Staff 

204.  Computer  Network  Architecture.  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  157.  See 
C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  204.  One  course.  Strole 

207.  Fault-Tolerant  Computer  Systems.  See  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  207.  One 
course.  Marinas 

208.  Digital  Computer  Design.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  157  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. See  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  208.  One  course.  Marinas 

209.  Microprocessor  Fundamentals  and  Applications.  Prerequisites:  Computer 
Science  157  and  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  209.  One  course. 
Marinos 

210.  Introduction  to  VLSI  Design.  A  first  course  in  VLSI  design  with  CMOS  tech- 
nologies. A  study  of  devices,  circuits,  fabrication  technology,  logic  design  techniques,  sub- 
system design  and  system  architecture.  Modeling  of  circuits  and  subsystems.  Testing  of 
gates,  subsystems  and  chips,  and  design  for  testability.  The  fundamentals  of  full-custom 
design,  and  some  semi-custom  design.  Prerequisites:  logic  design  (Computer 
Science/Electrical  Engineering  157  or  equivalent),  and  electronics  (EE 161,  or  CPS/EE 160, 
or  equivalent).  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  210.  One  course.  Dollas  or  Kedem 

212.  Introduction  to  Scientific  Computing.  Practical  introduction  for  students  and 
faculty  to  computer  resources  that  facilitate  scientific  research:  scientific  word  process- 
ing (Tex  and  LaTex),  symbolic  manipulation  programs,  software  tools,  numerical  software 
packages,  and  graphics.  Case  studies  used  to  illustrate  these  resources.  For  noncomputer 
scientists.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  103,  104,  or  equivalent;  some  programming  ex- 
perience. One  course.  Gardner  or  Greenside 

213.  Introduction  to  Nonlinear  Dynamics.  Introduction  to  the  mathematical  theory 
of  nonlinear  dynamics,  and  how  this  theory  compares  with  physical  experiments,  with 
applications  to  biology  (Turing  states  and  morphogenesis),  computer  science  (random- 
ness and  computability),  mathematics  (chaos  and  strange  attractors),  and  physics  (pat- 
tern formation  and  transition  to  turbulence).  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  111,  Physics  51, 
52,  and  Computer  Science  51.  C-L:  Physics  213.  One  course.  Greenside 

215.  Artificial  Intelligence.  (QR)  Heuristic  versus  algorithmic  methods;  program- 
ming of  games  such  as  chess;  theorem  proving  and  its  relation  to  correctness  of  programs; 
readings  in  simulation  of  cognitive  processes,  problem  solving,  semantic  memory,  anal- 
ogy, adaptive  learning.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  102  or  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  Biertnann,  Loveland,  or Nadathur 

221.  Numerical  Analysis.  (QR)  Error  analysis,  interpolation  and  spline  approxima- 
tion, numerical  differentiation  and  integration,  solutions  of  linear  systems,  nonlinear 
equations,  and  ordinary  differential  equations.  Prerequisites:  knowledge  of  an  algorithmic 
programming  language,  intermediate  calculus  including  some  differential  equations,  and 
Mathematics  104.  C-L:  Mathematics  221.  One  course.  Gardner,  Greenside,  or  Szyld 


Computer  Science  (CPS)         157 


222.  Numerical  Differential  Equations.  (QR)  Numerical  methods  for  solving  ordi- 
nary and  partial  differential  equations  emphasizing  nonlinear  differential  equations. 
Methods  for  solving  ordinary  differential  equations  that  generalize  to  solve  partial 
differential  equations:  finite  difference,  spectral,  and  finite  element  methods.  Solution 
of  hyperbolic,  parabolic,  and  elliptical  partial  differential  equations  arising  in  scientific 
problems.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  221.  C-L:  Mathematics  222.  One  course.  Gard- 
ner, Greenside,  Rose,  or  Szyld 

223.  Numerical  Linear  Algebra .  (QR)  Solution  of  large,  sparse  linear  systems  of  equa- 
tions. Storage  schemes,  graph  theory  for  sparse  matrices,  different  orderings  to  minimize 
fill,  block  factorizations,  iterative  methods,  analysis  of  different  splittings,  conjugate  gra- 
dient methods.  Eigenvalue  problems,  QR  factorization,  Lanczos  method,  power  meth- 
od and  inverse  iteration,  Rayleigh  quotient.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  221  or  equiva- 
lent. C-L:  Mathematics  223.  One  course.  Gardner,  Greenside,  Rose,  or  Szyld 

224.  Analysis  of  Algorithms.  (QR)  Design  and  analysis  of  efficient  algorithms.  De- 
sign techniques  include  recursion,  divide-and-conquer,  and  dynamic  programming.  Ap- 
plications include  sorting,  searching,  dynamic  structures,  pathfinding,  fast  multiplica- 
tion, fast  Fourier  transform.  Nondeterministic  algorithms.  Computationally  hard 
problems.  NP-completeness.  This  course  is  the  same  as  Computer  Science  174  with  more 
advanced-level  work  required  of  the  student.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  102  and 
four  semesters  of  college  mathematics.  One  course.  Loveland 

225.  Formal  Languages  and  Theory  of  Computation.  (QR)  An  introduction  to  the 
study  of  abstract  machines  and  the  languages  they  define,  their  capabilities,  and  limita- 
tions. Finite-state  automata,  regular  languages,  pushdown  automata,  context-free  lan- 
guages, Turing  machines,  recursive  functions  and  recursively  enumerable  sets,  noncom- 
putable  sets,  measures  of  complexity  for  algorithms.  Prerequisite :  four  courses  in  college 
mathematics.  One  course.  Loveland  orReif 

226.  Mathematical  Methods  for  Systems  Analysis  I.  (QR)  Basic  concepts  and  tech- 
niques used  in  the  stochastic  modeling  of  systems.  Elements  of  probability,  statistics,  queu- 
ing theory,  and  simulation.  Prerequisite:  four  courses  in  college  mathematics.  One  course. 

Trivedi 

227.  Mathematical  Methods  for  Systems  Analysis  II.  (QR)  Basic  concepts  and  tech- 
niques used  in  the  deterministic  modeling  of  systems.  Elements  of  linear  algebra;  linear, 
integer,  dynamic,  and  geometric  programming;  and  unconstrained  and  constrained  op- 
timization. Prerequisite:  four  courses  in  college  mathematics.  One  course.  Trivedi 

231.  Operating  Systems.  (QR)  Fundamental  principles  of  operating  system  design 
applied  to  state-of-the-art  computing  environments  (multiprocessors  and  distributed  sys- 
tems) including  process  management  (coscheduling  and  load  balancing),  shared  mem- 
ory management  (data  migration  and  consistency),  and  distributed  file  systems.  Advanced 
topics  include  transaction-based  operating  systems,  reliable  communication  protocols, 
concurrency  control  and  recovery  mechanisms,  computer  security,  and  performance  anal- 
ysis. One  course.  Staff 

232.  Compiler  Construction.  (QR)  Models  and  techniques  used  in  the  design  and 
implementation  of  assemblers,  interpreters,  and  compilers.  Lexical  analysis,  compilation 
of  arithmetic  expressions  and  simple  statements,  specifications  of  syntax,  algorithms  for 
syntactic  analysis,  code  generation  and  optimization  techniques.  One  course.  Wagner 

241.  Data  Base  Methodology.  (QR)  Basic  concepts  and  principles.  Relational,  hier- 
archical, and  network  approaches  to  data  organization;  data  entry  and  query  language 
support  for  data  base  systems;  theories  of  data  organization;  security  and  privacy  issues. 

158         Courses  of  Instruction 


Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  104  and  either  155  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Mechanical  En- 
gineering 242.  One  course.  Starmer 

245.  Functional  Analysis  for  Scientific  Computing.  (QR)  Linear  spaces,  topologies, 
norms,  and  completeness.  Focus  on  Banach  and  Hilbert  spaces  including  Sovolev  spaces. 
Linear  and  nonlinear  operators.  Frechet  derivatives.  Iterative  methods  for  nonlinear  oper- 
ator systems,  such  as  Newton-like  methods.  Applications.  Intended  for  science  and  en- 
gineering students  but  not  mathematics  graduate  students.  Prerequisite:  Computer 
Science  221.  C-L:  Mathematics  245.  One  course.  Rose  or  Szyld 

252.  Computer  Systems  Organization.  Hardware  and  software  aspects.  Processor, 
memory,  device,  and  communication  subsystems;  case  studies  of  hardware  system  or- 
ganization, for  example,  parallel,  associative,  fault-tolerant;  organization  of  software  sys- 
tems to  exploit  hardware  systems  organization;  economic  and  reliability  aspects  of  vari- 
ous hardware  organizations.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  104  and  157.  C-L:  Electrical 
Engineering  252.  One  course.  Trivedi 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Computer  Science.  One  course.  Staff 

276.  Communication,  Computation,  and  Memory  in  Biological  Systems.  (QR)  Com- 
munication and  memory  in  biological  systems:  voltage  sensitive  ion  channels,  hormone- 
receptor  interactions,  and  initiation  and  control  of  RNA/DNA  synthesis.  Models  of  sig- 
naling and  memory  are  developed  and  related  to  electronic  signaling  schemes.  Prereq- 
uisites: Computer  Science  102,  two  semesters  of  college  chemistry,  and  four  semesters 
of  college  mathematics.  One  course.  Starmer 

THE  MAJOR 

For  the  B.  A.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Computer  Science  51;  Mathematics  33  (or  31),  34  (or  32),  105  (or  103), 
106  (or  104). 

Major  Requirements.  Computer  Science  102, 104, 106, 121  (or  Mathematics  160),  and 
131;  one  elective  course  at  the  100  level  or  above  in  Computer  Science,  Electrical  Engineer- 
ing, or  Mathematics;  and  Mathematics  135  or  Statistics  100.  If  Mathematics  135  is  elect- 
ed, it  is  strongly  recommended  that  it  be  followed  by  Mathematics  136.  Students  must 
complete  at  least  five  additional  courses  at  the  100  level  or  above  (excluding  Mathemat- 
ics 103, 104, 105,  and  106)  in  one  department  other  than  computer  science  or  in  an  approved 
area.  A  list  of  areas  which  have  been  approved  by  the  department,  such  as  the  zoology- 
chemistry  combination  often  chosen  by  premedical  students,  may  be  obtained  from  the 
Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

For  the  B.S.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Chemistry  11;  Mathematics  33  (or  31),  34  (or  32),  105  (or  103),  106  (or  104); 
Physics  51  and  52. 

Major  Requirements.  Computer  Science  53, 103, 104,  106, 121, 125,  and  131;  two  elec- 
tive courses  at  the  100  level  or  above  in  computer  science,  electrical  engineering,  or 
mathematics;  Electrical  Engineering  157;  Mathematics  135  or  Statistics  100;  and  Mathemat- 
ics 124  or  187.  If  Mathematics  135  is  selected,  it  is  recommended  that  Mathematics  136  be 
taken  also. 

Students  who  begin  the  B.  A.  program  and  later  wish  to  transfer  to  the  B.S.  program 
should  consult  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

Honors 

Students  who  are  qualified  (see  the  section  on  honors  in  this  bulletin)  may  under- 
take work  leading  to  a  B.  A.  or  B.S.  degree  with  distinction  in  computer  science  by  apply- 


Computer  Science  (CPS)        159 


ing  to  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  Normally,  candidates  must  have  grades  of 
A  in  computer  science  courses.  They  must  complete  a  substantial  project,  suitably 
documented,  or  a  distinguished  paper  on  which  they  will  be  examined  orally  by  a  com- 
mittee of  three  faculty  members. 

Cultural  Anthropology  <ca>* 

Professor  Friedl,  Acting  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Dominguez,  Director  of  Undergradu- 
ate Studies;  Professors  Apte,  Cartmill,  Fox,  and  O'Barr;  Associate  Professors  Quinn  and 
Smith;  Professor  Emeritus  La  Barre;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Weller 

A  major  is  available  in  anthropology. 

Cultural  anthropology  is  a  comparative  discipline  that  studies  the  world's  peoples 
and  cultures.  It  emphasizes  the  application  of  the  perspectives  which  anthropology  de- 
veloped from  its  initial  concentration  on  the  primitive  world  to  studies  of  complex  socie- 
ties including  rural,  urban,  and  ethnic  segments  of  the  Third  World  and  contemporary 
industrial  nations. 

Cultural  anthropology  is  divided  into  three  subdisciplines:  ethnology,  archaeology, 
and  linguistics.  Ethnologists,  or  social  /cultural  anthropologists  as  they  may  be  called, 
study  development  and  change  in  the  form  and  the  process  of  social  organization  among 
contemporary  human  populations.  Archaeologists  concern  themselves  with  events  and 
processes  of  the  human  unwritten  past .  Anthropological  linguists  work  with  languages 
of  the  present  and  past  and  trace  the  relationship  between  language  and  culture.  The 
department  offers  courses  in  the  three  subdisciplines. 

Students  without  prerequisites  for  a  course  may  ask  the  instructor  for  admission. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

94.  Introduction  to  Cultural  Anthropology.  (SS)  The  dynamics  of  culture  and  socie- 
ty; form  and  function  of  social  institutions.  Emphasis  upon  primitive  and  complex  soci- 
eties. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

94D.  Introduction  to  Cultural  Anthropology.  (SS)  Same  as  Cultural  Anthropology 
94  except  instruction  is  provided  in  two  lectures  and  one  small  discussion  meeting  each 
week.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

94S.  Introduction  to  Cultural  Anthropology.  (SS)  See  Cultural  Anthropology  94.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

107.  Introduction  to  Linguistics.  (SS)  Origin  and  nature  of  language;  methods  of 
descriptive  linguistics  with  reference  to  historical  and  comparative  linguistics.  C-L:  English 
111,  Interdisciplinary  Course  111,  and  Linguistics.  One  course.  Butters,  Ni/gard,  or  Tetel 

109.  Contemporary  International  Problems:  Their  Historical  Origins  and  Their  Im- 
plications for  Future  Policy.  (SS)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  109,  History  109,  Polit- 
ical Science  160,  and  Sociology  175.  One  course.  Staff 

110.  Advertising  and  Society.  (SS)  History  and  development  of  commercial  adver- 
tising; advertising  as  a  reflector  and/or  creator  of  social  and  cultural  values;  advertisements 
as  cultural  myths;  effects  on  children,  women,  and  ethnic  minorities;  advertising  and  lan- 
guage; relation  to  political  and  economic  structure;  and  advertising  and  world  culture. 
Primary  emphasis  on  American  society  with  consideration  of  selected  other  cultures.  C-L: 
English  120,  Sociology  160,  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  O'Barr,  /.  Smith,  or  Wilson 

112.  Current  Topics  in  Linguistics.  (SS)  Advanced  study  of  an  area  of  linguistics  or 
grammar.  C-L:  English  119,  Interdisciplinary  Course  119,  and  Linguistics.  One  course.  Staff 


"Proposed  title  at  time  the  bulletin  went  to  press. 

160         Courses  of  Instruction 


113.  The  Cultural  Construction  of  Gender.  (SS)  Explanation  of  differing  gender  be- 
liefs cross-culturally.  Comparison  of  these  belief  complexes  with  dominant  Western 
themes  about  gender,  as  reflected  in  Western  history,  in  contemporary  ideological  strug- 
gles, and  most  especially,  in  gender  origin  myths  constructed  by  Western  social  scientists. 
C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Qiiinn 

114.  Gender  Inequality.  (SS)  Universalistic  theories  of  gender  inequality  posited  on 
biological  sex  differences  and  differences  in  early  psychological  experience.  Evolution- 
ary theories  that  point  to  the  existence  of  egalitarian  societies  and  the  appearance  of  gender 
inequality  only  with  the  emergence  of  ranking,  stratified  societies.  The  rise  of  the  state; 
examination  of  the  form  of  gender  inequality  in  state  societies.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Quinn 

118S.  The  Language  of  Advertising.  (SS)  Topics  include:  history  and  development 
of  the  genre  of  advertising  language;  comparisons  to  the  specialized  language  used  in 
medical,  legal,  and  other  professional  contexts;  and  relation  of  topics  to  sociolinguistic 
theories  and  anthropological  field  methods.  Primary  focus  on  American  television,  print, 
and  radio  advertising  and  consideration  of  advertising  language  in  certain  other  cultures. 
Directed  field  projects.  Prerequisite:  Cultural  Anthropology  110  or  consent  of  instructor. 
C-L:  Linguistics.  One  course.  O'Barr 

119.  Language,  Culture,  and  Society.  (SS)  Analysis  of  language  behavior  within  and 
across  societies  relating  variations  in  linguistic  usage  to  sociocultural  factors:  ethnoseman- 
tics,  social  dialects,  and  ethnography  of  speech.  Prerequisite:  Cultural  Anthropology  94. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Linguistics.  One  course.  Aptcor  Weller 

121.  China:  Tradition  and  Transformation.  (CZ)  Culture  and  social  life  in  late  imperial 
China;  continuation  and  transformation  in  the  twentieth  century.  Topics  include  relig- 
ion, kinship  and  family,  the  position  of  women,  imperialism,  economic  change  in  Tai- 
wan, and  the  revolution.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Weller 

122.  Modern  Africa.  (CZ)  Indigenous  cultures  and  societies  of  Africa  through  the 
study  of  kinship,  politics,  economics,  religion,  and  sociocultural  change.  Prerequisite: 
Cultural  Anthropology  94.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  O'Barr 

124S.  The  American  Indian.  (CZ)  The  Indians  of  North  and  South  America;  origins 
and  prehistory,  archaeology,  racial  affiliations,  languages,  material  culture,  social  and  po- 
litical organization,  economics,  and  religion.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Staff 

125.  Strategies  of  Comparative  Analysis.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies 
125;  also  C-L:  History  137,  Political  Science  125,  and  Sociology  125.  One  course.  Staff 

126.  Middle  East:  Wars,  Revolutions,  and  Social  Change.  (CZ)  Political  and  institu- 
tional consequences  of  different  forms  of  social  relations.  Topics  include  male-female  re- 
lations, tribalism,  traditional  and  experimental  forms  of  family  organization,  ethnic  and 
national  identities  and  conflicts,  and  the  impact  of  colonialism  and  the  modern  world  sys- 
tem on  the  region.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course. 
Domingucz 

127.  Social  Transformations  in  Central  America.  (CZ)  Current  issues  affecting  the 
peoples  of  Central  America  in  historical  and  anthropological  perspective;  analysis  of  revo- 
lution through  the  development  of  distinctive  social  structures  and  cultural  forms.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Smith 

128.  Caribbean  Societies  and  Cultures.  (CZ)  Social,  economic,  and  political  develop- 
ment within  the  world  system;  social  differentiation,  cultural  fragmentation,  colonial- 
ism, and  dependence;  the  effects  of  slavery;  and  the  Caribbean  diaspora.  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies.  One  course.  Dominguez 

Cultural  Anthropology  (CA)         161 


130.  Social  and  Cultural  Change.  (SS)  Contemporary  theories  of  change,  including 
innovation,  acculturation,  and  modernization.  Prerequisite:  Cultural  Anthropology  94. 
One  course.  O'Barr  or  Smith 

131.  Socialism  and  Society  in  China.  (CZ)  The  People's  Republic  of  China  since  1949: 
socialist  economic  development,  political  life,  population  control,  local  community  or- 
ganization, the  arts,  and  dissidence.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Women's 
Studies.  One  course.  Weller 

137.  Incest,  Adultery,  and  Other  Problems  in  Kinship  and  Marriage.  (SS)  Cross- 
cultural  attitudes  on  human  sexuality.  Varieties  of  family  life  and  its  integration  in  the  po- 
litical and  economic  context  of  human  societies.  Prerequisite:  Cultural  Anthropology  94. 
C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Dominguez  or  Quinn 

139.  Marxism  and  Society.  (SS)  A  critical  appraisal  of  Marxism  as  a  scholarly  meth- 
odology for  understanding  human  societies.  The  basic  concepts  of  historical  material- 
ism, as  they  have  evolved  and  developed  in  historical  contexts.  Topics  include  sexual  and 
social  inequality,  alienation,  class  formation,  imperialism,  and  revolution.  Core  course 
for  the  program  in  Perspectives  on  Marxism  and  Society.  C-L:  Education  139,  History  186, 
Interdisciplinary  Course  139,  and  Sociology  139.  One  course.  Fox  or  Wilson 

141.  The  Self  and  Others:  Ethnic,  Racial,  and  Social  Classifications.  (SS)  The  na- 
ture of  human  social  identities,  the  contexts  in  which  they  are  shaped,  and  the  process- 
es by  which  they  change;  emphasis  on  ethnic,  racial,  and  gender  identities.  C-L:  Wom- 
en's Studies.  One  course.  Dominguez 

145.  Medical  Anthropology.  (SS)  Evolution  and  disease;  theories  of  disease  and  heal- 
ing; and  factors  influencing  behavior  in  health  and  illness.  One  course.  Weller 

147, 148.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course 
162, 163;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies;  History  101G,  102G;  and  Religion  162, 163. 
One  course  each.  Lawrence  and  staff 

151 .  Culture  and  Thought.  (SS)  The  role  of  culture  in  the  organization  of  knowledge 
for  the  performance  of  everyday  cognitive  tasks  and  of  thematic  knowledge  for  the  broader 
purposes  of  living,  such  as  understanding  oneself  and  others'  behavior  and  pursuing  one's 
life  goals.  One  course.  Dominguez  or  Quinn 

152S.  Food  inCross-Cultural  Perspectives.  (SS)  The  behavioral,  institutional,  linguis- 
tic, religious,  and  ideological  aspects  in  relation  to  the  production,  distribution,  and  con- 
sumption of  food  within  and  across  cultures.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Apte 

155.  Anthropological  Approaches  to  Religion.  (SS)  Cross-cultural  perspectives  on 
the  relationship  of  religion  to  experience,  behavior,  conflict,  and  change.  C-L:  Comparative 
Area  Studies.  One  course.  Weller 

158S.  Cross-Cultural  Studies  of  Humor.  (SS)  Sociocultural  basis,  nature,  scope,  and 
function  of  humor.  Prerequisite:  Cultural  Anthropology  94.  One  course.  Apte 

163.  Foundations  of  Chinese  Civilization.  (CZ)  The  contemporary  experience  in  Chi- 
na and  its  relation  to  ethnic,  spiritual,  social,  aesthetic,  moral,  political,  and  economic 
themes  in  China's  past.  (Taught  in  China.)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  History 
163.  One  course.  Staff 

166.  Introduction  to  Archaeology:  Humans  and  Culture.  (SS)  Modern  methodolo- 
gy and  analysis,  theories  of  cultural  evolution,  and  survey  of  world  prehistory  with  an 
exploration  of  the  uses  of  ethnographic  analogy.  One  course.  Staff 

167.  Prehistoric  Technology.  (SS)  Procurement  of  raw  materials,  manufacturing  of  ob- 
jects, and  the  usage  of  these  objects  in  archaeological  context.  One  course.  Staff 

162         Courses  of  Instruction 


168.  Beginnings  of  Civilization.  (CZ)  Cultural  developments  from  the  beginning  of 
agriculture  to  the  rise  of  civilization  in  Africa,  Mesoamerica,  Peru,  India,  Southwest  Asia, 
and  China,  using  archaeological  and  ethnographic  examples.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One 
course.  Staff 

173.  Revolutions  in  Latin  America.  (CZ)  Social,  economic,  political,  and  ideological 
circumstances  that  generate  revolutions  in  twentieth-century  Latin  America.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Smith 

180.  Current  Issues  in  Anthropology.  (SS)  Selected  topics  in  methodology,  theory, 
or  area.  One  course.  Staff 

180S.  Current  Issues  in  Anthropology.  (SS)  Same  as  Cultural  Anthropology  180  ex- 
cept instruction  is  provided  in  seminar  format.  One  course.  Staff 

193.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
seniors,  with  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

195S,  196S.  Senior  Seminar.  Prerequisites:  Cultural  Anthropology  94,  a  100-level 
course  in  anthropology,  and  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

201S.  Marxism  and  Anthropology.  (SS)  The  interaction  of  Marxist  and  anthropolog- 
ical theory  over  the  last  half  century;  particular  attention  to  evolution,  historical  trans- 
formation, mode  of  production,  labor  processes,  culture,  ideology,  and  consciousness. 
One  course.  Smith 

206S.  Current  Theoretical  Schools  in  Anthropology.  (SS)  The  theoretical  schools 
since  World  War  II,  including  cultural  materialism  and  neo-Marxism,  structuralism,  cog- 
nitive anthropology,  cultural  analysis  and  symbolic  anthropology,  transactional  analy- 
sis, and  sociobiology.  Prerequisite:  Cultural  Anthropology  94  or  graduate  standing  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  Apte,  Dominguez,  Fox,  O'Barr,  Quinn,  Smith,  or  Weller 

211S.  Ethnography  of  Communication.  (SS)  History  of  the  mutual  influence  of  lin- 
guistics and  anthropology  leading  to  the  development  of  ethnography  of  speaking,  eth- 
noscience,  structuralism,  and  sociolinguistics.  Topics  vary  each  semester.  Prerequisite : 
Cultural  Anthropology  107  or  119.  C-L:  Linguistics.  One  course.  Apte,  Dominguez,  Fox, 
O'Barr,  Quinn,  Smith,  or  Weller 

239.  Culture  and  Ideology.  (SS)  Major  theories  about  the  relation  between  ideolo- 
gies and  social/economic  systems.  Readings  from  the  works  of  Marx,  Weber,  Gramsci, 
Althusser,  Geertz,  and  others.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Weller 

241.  The  Rise  of  Civilization  in  Mesopotamia  and  Iran.  (CZ)  An  introductory  sur- 
vey of  the  major  stages  of  development  from  the  beginnings  of  agriculture  to  the  collapse 
of  the  early  state-system  (10,000-1,800  B.C.E.).  Archaeological  and  textual  evidence,  focus- 
ing on  the  rise  of  the  Mesopotamian  state-system,  the  nature  of  that  system,  and  the 
mechanisms  leading  to  its  collapse.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

243S.  Theory  and  Method  in  Archaeology.  (SS)  Techniques  of  geochronology,  en- 
vironmental reconstruction,  sociocultural  reconstruction,  and  statistical  analyses  applied 
to  problem  areas  in  archaeology.  Prerequisite:  Cultural  Anthropology  166.  One  course. 
Staff 

251S.  American  Marriage:  A  Cultural  Approach.  (SS)  Individual  research  on  the 
American  cultural  model  of  marriage.  Collection,  transcription,  and  analysis  of  how  in- 
dividuals adapt  it  to  understanding  their  own  experiences.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One 
course.  Quinn 

Cultural  Anthropology  (CA)         163 


255S.  Heroes  and  Heroics:  Culture  and  the  Individual.  (SS)  Can  great  men  or  women 
change  the  course  of  cultures?  Or  are  even  those  we  call  geniuses  and  heroes  simply  car- 
riers of  their  culture?  The  relationship  between  individuals  and  their  cultures  as  portrayed 
in  anthropology  and  related  disciplines.  Various  approaches  to  the  lives  of  selected  heroes, 
using  M.  K.  Gandhi  as  an  exemplar.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Fox 

258S.  Symbols  in  Society.  (SS)  Symbolic  action  and  expressive  culture  among  trib- 
al, peasant,  and  industrial  societies.  Approaches  emphasized  are  functionalism,  sym- 
bolic interaction,  structuralism,  and  cultural  interpretation.  One  course.  Dom'mguezor 
Weller 

267.  Cognitive  Anthropology.  (SS)  The  organization  of  culturally  shared  knowledge; 
cognitive  tasks  such  as  categorizing,  decision  making,  problem  solving,  and  reasoning. 
One  course.  Quinn 

272S.  Marxism  and  Feminism.  (SS)  Introduction  to  the  theoretical  literature  and  de- 
bates linking  Marxism  and  feminism .  Prerequisite :  consent  of  instructor.  C-L :  Women's 
Studies.  One  course.  Smith 

280S,  281S.  Seminar  in  Selected  Topics.  Special  topics  in  methodology,  theory,  or  area. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

282S.  Canada.  (SS)  See  C-L:  History  282S;  also  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies,  Interdisciplinary  Course  282S,  Political  Science  282S,  and  Sociology 
282S.  One  course.  Cahow 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course 
284S;  also  C-L:  History  284S,  Political  Science  264S,  Psychology  284S,  Sociology  284S, 
and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  or  Spenner 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
99.  Perspectives  in  Archaeology.  (CZ) 

101, 102.  Introduction  to  the  Civilizations  of  Southern  Asia.  (CZ) 
105.  History  of  Anthropology.  (SS) 
111.  Anthropology  of  Law.  (SS) 
116.  Language,  Ethnicity,  and  New  Nations.  (SS) 
120.  South  Asia:  Institutions  and  Change.  (CZ) 
123.  Societies  of  Mediterranean  Europe.  (CZ) 
129.  The  Black  Experience  in  the  Americas:  Roots  and  Directions.  (CZ) 

133.  The  Effects  of  Colonialism  and  Neocolonialism  on  Native  Peoples.  (SS) 

134.  Political  Anthropology.  (SS) 

135.  American  Culture:  Research  and  Analysis.  (SS) 
136S.  Cross-Cultural  Studies  of  Socialization.  (SS) 
140.  The  Anthropology  of  Race.  (SS) 

142.  Anthropology  and  Cultural  Bias.  (SS) 
156.  The  Politics  of  Ritual  Performance.  (SS) 
159.  Language  and  the  International  Order.  (SS) 
160S.  Anthropology  and  Literature.  (SS) 

164         Courses  of  Instruction 


164.  Peasantry  and  Peasant  Movements.  (SS) 

165.  Psychological  Anthropology.  (SS) 
170.  Economic  Anthropology.  (SS) 

189.  The  Americas:  A  Survey  of  the  Forces  Shaping  the  Hemisphere.  (SS) 

204S.  The  Anthropology  of  Cities.  (SS) 

205.  The  Anthropology  of  Anthropology.  (SS) 

215S.  The  Anthropology  of  Women:  Theoretical  Issues.  (SS) 

228S.  Slavery  and  Society.  (SS) 

237S.  Interpretations  of  Kinship.  (SS) 

275S.  Inequality  in  Precapitalist  Societies.  (SS) 

THE  MAJOR  IN  ANTHROPOLOGY 

For  a  description  of  the  anthropology  major,  see  the  section  Anthropology. 

Dance 

For  courses  in  dance,  see  Institute  of  the  Arts. 

Distinguished  Professor  Courses  <dpo 

Distinguished  professor  courses  enable  students,  regardless  of  their  majors,  to  study 
with  some  of  the  most  outstanding  teachers  and  scholars  within  the  University.  The 
courses  ordinarily  focus  on  topics  of  broad  intellectual  and  academic  interest  beyond  the 
scope  of  a  single  discipline.  They  may  count  toward  the  appropriate  distributional 
requirements. 

194S.  Bach:  Master  of  Style.  (AL)  An  approach  to  the  "deepest  thinking,"  the  "most 
desirous  of  learning"  of  all  the  great  composers.  Works  showing  his  unique  ability  to  as- 
similate styles:  including  the  Brandenburg  Concertos,  the  Passions,  and  the  B  minor  Mass. 
The  complete  Well-tempered  Clavier  is  studied  by  the  class  and  performed  on  the  harp- 
sichord by  instructor.  Prerequisite:  ability  to  read  music.  C-L:  Music  171S.  One  course. 
Williams 

195S.  Geometry  and  Physics.  (NS)  Relativity  and  general  field  theory  from  the  point 
of  view  of  differential  geometry,  to  provide  background  for  the  modern  gauge-field  the- 
ories, including  Yang-Mills  theory,  now  prominent  in  mathematical  physics.  Prerequi- 
sites: advanced  calculus  and  general  physics,  including  electricity  and  magnetism.  One 
course.  Griffiths 

196S.  Current  Political  Problems  in  Western  European  and  Commonwealth  Coun- 
tries. (SS)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Cole 

199S.  The  Changing  Biosphere:  Past,  Present,  and  Future.  (NS)  Interactions  between 
changing  global  environments  through  time.  The  maintenance,  evolution,  and  extinc- 
tion of  biotic  systems,  including  communities.  Special  emphasis  on  the  nineteenth,  twen- 
tieth, and  twenty-first  centuries.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biology  199S. 
One  course.  Billings 

201.  Dante's  Inferno.  (AL)  A  close  study  of  the  text  in  a  bilingual  edition.  Attention 
to  the  historical,  political,  and  theological  aspects  of  the  poem .  Examples  of  use  of  some 
of  the  cantos  by  Joyce,  Eliot,  and  Beckett.  One  course.  Fowlie 

Distinguished  Professor  Courses  (DPC)         165 


202S.  What  It  Means  to  Be  Human.  (SS)  What  natural  and  humanistic  sciences,  and 
also  philosophy  and  theology,  have  to  say  about  the  distinctive  character  of  human  be- 
ings. Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing.  One  course.  Langford 

203.  Proust,  Remembrance  of  Things  Past.  (AL)  In  the  three-volume  translation  by 
Kilmartin .  The  aesthetics  of  the  novel  in  terms  of  its  structure,  characters,  and  social  classes 
of  France.  Students  who  know  French  will  be  encouraged  to  do  some  of  the  reading  in 
French.  One  course.  Fowlie 

204S.  Health  Care  Law  and  Policy.  (SS)  How  law  shapes  the  performance  of  the  health 
care  industry.  The  tensions  between  quality  and  cost,  professionalism  and  commercial- 
ism, and  regulation  and  competition.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing.  One  course. 
Hai'ighurst 

205.  The  French  Symbolists  and  T.  S.  Eliot.  (AL)  A  study  of  the  poems  and  theory 
of  Baudelaire,  Mallarme,  and  Rimbaud.  The  debt  of  the  symbolists  to  Poe  and  their  in- 
fluence on  Eliot.  Taught  in  English.  Bilingual  texts  will  be  used.  One  course.  Fowlie 

207S.  Topics  in  Psychobiology.  (NS)  The  biological  substrates  of  human  behavior  in 
health  and  disease.  Drug  abuse,  alcoholism,  depression,  schizophrenia,  and  human  ag- 
gression. Films  and  videotapes.  Student  presentations;  patient  interviews.  Prerequisites: 
senior  standing  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Psychology  207S.  One  course.  Brociie 

Drama  Program  (dra> 

Faculty  of  the  Program:  Artist-in-ResidenceBall,  Directorofthe  Drama  Program;  Artist-in- 
Residence  El  Guindi,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Professors  of  the  Practice  of  The- 
ater Clum  and  Hobbs;  Artists-in-Residence  Fitzmorris,  Judd,  McAuliffe,  St.  Clair,  and 
Worden;  Adjunct  Professor  Azenberg;  Instructors  Kumin,  O'Dor,  and  Young;  Lecturer 
Banner.  Affiliated  faculty:  Professors  DeNeef  (English),  Jackson  (English),  Jameson  (Ro- 
mance Languages),  A.  Patterson  (English),  Randall  (English),  Stewart  (Romance  lan- 
guages), Torgovnick  (English),  and  G.  Williams  (English);  Associate  Professors  Alt  (Ger- 
manic languages),  Burian  (classical  studies),  Gopen  (English),  Jones  (English),  and  Porter 
(English);  Assistant  Professors  Gaines  (English)  and  Moses  (English);  Lecturer  Hill 
(English) 

A  major  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  Drama  Program  applies  two  approaches:  the  artistic/creative,  and  the  scholar- 
ly/theoretical. Using  both  approaches,  the  program  either  can  provide  a  component  of 
a  liberal  arts  education,  or,  via  intensive  in-depth  studio  instruction,  it  can  prepare  highly- 
motivated,  passionately  interested  students  to  pursue  professional  theater  or  screen  ac- 
tivities. Classwork  is  primary,  but  complemented  and  extended  by  an  array  of  student 
production  activities  and  participation  in  professional  stage  and  screen  projects.  The 
professional  backgrounds  and  expertise  of  the  resident  faculty  are  augmented  by  those 
of  a  guest  faculty  of  wide-ranging  experience,  from  Broadway  to  Hollywood,  from  regional 
theater  to  television.  The  program's  emphasis  is  on  understanding  and  experiencing  the- 
ater and  screen  as  participatory,  group  art  forms  shaped  by  social,  economic,  technolog- 
ical, artistic,  personal,  and  intellectual  forces.  The  program— whether  for  the  moderate- 
ly interested  student  or  the  fervent,  dedicated  preprofessional— stresses  the  continual 
interdependence  of  these  forces. 

INTRODUCTORY  COURSES 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

51.  Introduction  to  World  Theater.  (AL)  Relationship  of  the  history,  arts,  and  crafts 
of  theater  to  dramatic  content  and  society.  Primitive  origins  to  Renaissance.  Basics  of  text 
analysis.  One  course.  Ball  and  Clum 

166         Courses  of  Instruction 


64.  Drama  of  Greece  and  Rome.  ( AL)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  64.  One  course.  Burian 

65.  Introduction  to  Film.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  81;  also  C-L:  Film  and  Video.  One 
course.  Gaines 

71.  Stagecraft.  Fundamentals  of  scenic  technology:  theater  space,  tools  and  hardware, 
lighting  equipment,  and  reading  of  plans.  Laboratory.  One  course.  Fitzmorris 

81.  Essentials  of  Public  Speaking.  Basics  of  and  practice  in  oral  presentations,  with 
particular  attention  to  the  gathering  and  organization  of  speech  materials.  For  freshmen 
and  sophomores.  C-L:  English  71.  One  course.  O'Dor  or  Hill 

82.  Essentials  of  Public  Speaking.  Similar  to  Drama  81,  but  for  juniors  and  seniors. 
Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Drama  81  or  English  71 .  C-L:  English  72.  One  course. 
O'Dor  or  Hill 

83S.  Argumentation.  Analysis,  investigation,  evidence,  reasoning  and  refutation,  and 
other  communication  strategies.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  English73S.  One 
course.  O'Dor 

84.  Interpersonal  Communicative  Behavior.  Study  of  the  verbal  and  nonverbal  com- 
municative behavior  of  individuals  involved  in  dyadic,  face-to-face  interactions.  Focus 
on  self-concept,  relational  messages,  turn-taking,  gender,  and  communication,  among 
other  interpersonal  concepts.  One  course.  O'Dor 

85.  Small  Group  and  Interview  Communicative  Behavior.  Verbal  and  nonverbal  com- 
municative processes  of  small  group  interaction  and  interviewing.  Theory,  research,  and 
practical  application.  Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  only.  One  course.  O'Dor 

99S.  Introduction  to  Acting.  ( AL)  The  development  of  creativity  by  exploring  the  use 
of  the  imagination  through  improvisation  and  theater  games.  For  nonmajors  and  begin- 
ning majors.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Drama  101.  One  course.  Staff 

OTHER  UNDERGRADUATE  COURSES 

101S.  Acting:  Theory  and  Practice  I.  (AL)  Fundamental  concepts  and  performance 
skills;  beginning  scene  study.  (Drama  71  may  be  taken  concurrently  with  Drama  101.) 
Prerequisites:  Drama  71  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Hobbs 

102S.  Acting:  Theory  and  Practice  II .  ( AL)  Continuing  scene  study,  emphasizing  anal- 
ysis and  character.  Prerequisites:  Drama  101  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Hobbs 

103.  Acting:  Theory  and  Practice  III.  (AL)  Advanced  scene  study.  Elements  of  style. 
Open  to  drama  majors  only.  Prerequisites:  Drama  51  or  Drama  151,  Drama  102,  and  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  Hobbs 

104.  Acting:  Theory  and  Practice  IV.  (AL)  Continuing  advanced  scene  study  and  style. 
Audition  preparation.  Prerequisites:  Drama  103  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Hobbs 

105.  Voice  and  Speech.  Vocal  production  and  articulation.  Phonetics,  control,  emo- 
tional response,  projection,  placement,  and  awareness  of  regionalisms.  Prerequisite:  Dra- 
ma 101.  One  course.  Staff 

106.  Voice  and  Speech  II.  Advanced  technique  work.  Open  only  to  drama  majors  in 
the  advanced  studies  sequence.  Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  and  Drama  105.  One 
course.  Staff 

107.  Movement.  Applied  body  mechanics,  tension  release,  breath,  energy  flow,  relax- 
ation, emotional  response,  alignment,  and  physical  articulation.  One  course.  Staff 


Drama  Program  (DRA)         167 


108.  Movement  II.  Advanced  technique  work.  Open  only  to  drama  majors  in  the  ad- 
vanced studies  sequence.  Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  and  Drama  107.  Onecourse. 

Staff 

111S.  Playwriting  I.  (AL)  Fundamentals  of  writing  for  stage  and  screen.  Prerequi- 
sites: a  practical  theater  course  (for  example,  acting,  directing,  design,  stagecraft),  and 
consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  English  107S  and  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Ball  and  El  Guindi 

112S.  Playwriting  II.  (AL)  Advanced  projects  in  writing  for  production.  Prerequisites: 
Drama  HIS,  and  99  or  101  or  181S,  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  English  108S  and  Film 
and  Video.  One  course.  Ball  and  El  Guindi 

113S.  Screenwriting.  (AL)  Advanced  writing  projects  for  feature  film.  Study  of  ex- 
isting scripts  and  videos,  application  of  techniques.  Prerequisites:  Drama  111  and  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  Ball 

115, 116.  Shakespeare.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  143, 144;  also  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renais- 
sance Studies.  One  course  each.  DeNeef,  Gopen,  fackson,  Jones,  A.  Patterson,  Porter,  Randall, 
or  G.  Williams 

118.  Absurdist  and  Postmodern  Drama.  (AL)  One  course.  Chun 

119.  The  Political  Stage.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Literature  119.  One  course.  Chun 

120.  Twentieth-Century  American  Drama.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  162.  One  course. 
Chun 

121.  Modern  British  Drama.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  133.  One  course.  Chun  or  Moses 

122.  French  Comedy.  (AL,  FL)  See  C-L:  French  151.  One  course.  Stewart 

123.  French  Drama  of  the  Twentieth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  See  C-L:  French  162.  One 
course.  Staff 

124S.  Drama  (German).  (AL,  FL)  See  C-L:  German  115S.  One  course.  Alt 

126.  French  Drama  of  the  Seventeenth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  See  C-L:  French  148;  also 
C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

131S.  Film  and  Video  Theory  and  Practice.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  Drama  65,  English  81, 
or  Literature  177.  See  C-L:  English  183S;  also  C-L:  Institute  of  the  Arts  115S.  One  course. 

Staff 

135.  Narrative  Film  and  the  Novel.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  188;  also  C-L:  Film  and  Vid- 
eo. One  course.  Clum,  Gaines,  Moses,  or  Torgovnick 

136.  Studies  in  Film  History.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  185;  also  C-L:  Film  and  Video  and 
Literature  187.  One  course.  Clum,  Gaines,  Jameson,  or  Moses 

137.  Melodrama  and  Soap  Opera.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  187.  One  course.  Chun  or 

Gaines 

138.  American  Film  Genres.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  182;  also  C-L:  Film  and  Video.  One 

course.  Clum,  Gaines,  or  Moses 

139.  Television,  Technology,  and  Culture.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  Drama  65,  English  81, 
or  Literature  177.  See  C-L:  English  190.  One  course.  Gaines 

140S.  Theater  Forum.  Topics  for  study  and  evaluation  include:  artistic  and  professional 
conventions  and  standards;  current  theater  issues;  future  educational  and  career  options; 
portfolios  and  resumes;  analysis  and  evaluation  of  student's  own  current  theater  work; 
other  areas  of  educational  and  procedural  importance  for  advancing  theater  students. 
Prerequisite:  junior  drama  major  or  consent  of  instructor.  Half  course.  Ball  and  Hobbs 

168     Courses  of  Instruction 


141.  Production  and  Internship.  Practical  involvement  in  four  different  areas  of  Drama 
Program  productions,  attendance  at  Drama  Program  symposia,  participation  in  senior 
drama  major  projects,  and  completion  of  an  approved  internship  or  Duke  Summer  Dra- 
ma Institute.  Course  requirements  may  be  satisfied  in  any  year,  but  only  seniors  regis- 
ter. Offered  only  on  the  pass/fail  basis.  Prerequisite:  Drama  140S.  No  credit.  Staff 

145S.  Theater  Farce.  (AL)  Farce  as  a  genre  in  its  onstage  context.  Aristophanes,  Plau- 
tus,  medieval  interludes,  Shakespeare,  Goldoni,  Feydeau,  Chekhov,  Orton,  and  others. 
C-L:  English  171S.  One  course.  El  Guindi 

146S.  Canadian  Theater.  (AL)  Development  and  current  state  of  Canada's  dramatic 
literature  and  theater  activity.  Dramatic  topics,  styles,  trends,  administrative  and  support 
systems,  the  roles  of  theater  in  society,  and  comparisons  of  these  factors  in  the  United 
States  and  Western  Europe.  Guest  lectures  by  Canadian  playwrights  and  other  theater 
artists,  and  by  non-Canadians  with  substantial  involvement  with  Canadian  theater. 
C-L:  Canadian  Studies  and  English  184S.  One  course.  Ball 

147S.  Southern  Playwrights.  (AL)  The  work  of  Southern  playwrights  in  the  context 
of  Southern  literature,  environment,  culture,  and  language;  how  these  considerations 
affect  the  creation  of  work  for  the  stage;  traditional  and  contemporary  works.  One  course. 
Banner 

148.  Text  and  Performance.  (AL)  (London  summer  program.)  See  C-L:  English  181. 
One  course.  Clum 

149.  Drama  and  Society.  (AL)  (London  summer  program.)  See  C-L:  English  134.  One 
course.  Chun 

151.  World  Theater:  Advanced.  (AL)  Intensive  investigation  of  the  history,  arts,  and 
crafts  of  theater  and  their  relationship  to  dramatic  content  and  theory  and  to  society. 
Renaissance  to  present.  C-L:  English  174.  One  course.  Clum 

161.  Stage  Costuming.  Survey  of  skills  and  techniques  of  design  and  construction. 
History,  textiles,  crafts,  millinery,  and  aesthetics.  Laboratory.  One  course.  Warden 

162.  Costume  Design  I.  Design  principles  applied  to  visualizing  character  and  rela- 
tionships. Periods  and  styles.  One  course.  Worden 

163.  Costume  Design  II.  Advanced  applications.  Prerequisite:  Drama  162.  One 
course.  Worden 

164.  Advanced  Costume  Construction.  Pattern  draping,  finishing,  dyeing.  Labora- 
tory. Prerequisite:  Drama  161  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Worden 

165.  Costume  and  Scene  Design  Rendering.  Drawing  and  painting  fundamentals 
for  readable  renderings.  One  course.  Worden 

166.  Costume  History.  (CZ)  Relationship  of  clothing  to  culture  and  society  from  an- 
cient Egypt  to  the  present.  One  course.  Worden 

167.  Make-Up:  Theory  and  Practice.  Design  and  execution.  Methods,  materials,  spe- 
cial problems,  and  projects.  Laboratory.  Half  course.  Worden 

168.  Drawing  and  Rendering.  Fundamentals  of  representational  drawing  using  eye 
training  methods.  One  course.  Worden 

170.  Design  and  Color.  Applications  of  theory  to  scenery,  costumes,  and  lighting;  em- 
phasis on  graphic  presentation.  Laboratory.  Prerequisites:  Drama  71  and  one  of  the 
following— Drama  168,  Art  53,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

171.  Advanced  Stagecraft.  Advanced  methods  and  tools  of  scenic  technology;  em- 
phasis on  drafting,  construction,  and  contemporary  materials.  Laboratory.  Prerequisite: 
Drama  71.  One  course.  Fitzmorris 

Drama  Program  (DRA)         169 


172.  Scenery  Design  I.  Application  of  aesthetics,  skills,  and  theory  to  scenic  design; 
emphasis  on  design  projects.  Laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Drama  170  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor based  on  portfolio  review.  One  course.  Judd 

173.  Scenery  Design  II.  Advanced  applications.  Prerequisite:  Drama  172.  One  course. 
Judd  and  staff 

177.  Lighting:  Theory  and  Practice.  History,  fundamentals  of  electricity,  instrumen- 
tation, and  drafting  light  plots.  Laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Drama  71  or  consent  of  instructor. 
One  course.  Judd 

178.  Lighting  Design.  Advanced  application  of  aesthetics  and  technique  to  lighting 
design,  emphasizing  design  projects.  Laboratory.  Prerequisites:  Drama  170,  Drama  177, 
and  Drama  168  or  Art  53  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Judd 

181S.  Directing:  Theory  and  Practice  I.  (AL)  History,  aesthetics,  and  fundamental 
techniques  of  directing.  (Drama  51  may  be  taken  concurrently  with  Drama  181S. )  Prereq- 
uisites: Drama  51,  99  or  101,  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  McAuliffe 

182S.  Directing:  Theory  and  Practice  II.  (AL)  Advanced  application  of  aesthetics, 
skills,  and  theory  to  performance  projects.  Prerequisite:  Drama  181S.  One  course. 

McAuliffe 

185S.  Theater  Administration.  History  and  principles  of  running  the  theater  and 
managing  the  production.  Emphasis  on  theater  organization,  theater  types  (commercial, 
not-for-profit,  regional),  and  involvement  with  other  entities  (unions,  investors,  philan- 
thropic bodies).  One  course.  Kumin  and  staff 

191,  192,  193,  194.  Independent  Study.  Individual  intensive  research  or  creative 
projects.  Half  or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

195, 196.  Special  Topics.  Illustrative  examples:  specific  writers  or  other  theater  artists, 
media  studies,  styles,  mime,  masks,  clowns,  stage  fighting,  newspaper  criticism,  studies 
of  the  profession,  audition  techniques,  and  theater  periods.  May  be  taken  more  than  once. 
Half  course,  one  course,  respectively.  Staff 

195S,  196S.  Special  Topics.  Seminar  versions  of  Drama  195  and  196.  May  be  taken  more 
than  once.  Half  course,  one  course,  respectively.  Staff 

197S.  Special  Topics  in  Film.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  189S;  also  C-L:  Film  and  Video. 
One  course.  Clutn,  Gaines,  or  Moses 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
220S.  Drama  (German).  (AL,  FL) 

THE  MAJOR 

Majoring  in  drama  is  a  means  of  ( 1)  acquiring  a  comprehensive  knowledge  of  the  field, 
(2)  learning  the  skills,  discipline,  and  dedication  inseparable  from  theater  and  screen  pur- 
suits, and  (3)  becoming  aware  of  the  relationship  of  every  field  of  knowledge  to  stage  and 
screen  activities.  Drama  majors  are  expected  to  demonstrate  continual  visible  growth  in 
each  of  these  areas,  and  this  most  especially  requires  the  development  of  professional 
attitudes,  behavior,  and  responsibility.  Thus,  deep  intellectual  involvement  and  extraor- 
dinary passion  are  crucial  prerequisites. 

(1)  Theater  Sequence  (for  students  interested  primarily  in  live  theater). 
Prerequisites:  Drama  51  and  71. 

Requirements:  Drama  99  or  101, 140S,  141, 151, 161  or  172, 181S,  185,  and  two  approved 
dramatic  literature  courses. 

(2)  Theater  and  Screen  Sequence  (for  students  interested  in  both  live  theater  and  film 
and  video). 

170         Courses  of  Instruction 


Prerequisites:  Drama  51  (or  151),  65,  and  71. 

Requirements:  Drama  99  or  101, 131, 140S,  141, 181S,  plus  two  courses  in  Drama  195, 
196  (Special  Topics:  for  example,  screen  acting,  directing,  writing,  producing,  design)  plus 
two  approved  courses  in  film  or  video  history,  criticism,  or  analysis. 

Advanced  Studies:  Students  intending  to  pursue  graduate  or  professional  theater  or 
screen  work  may  choose  to  take  best  advantage  of  the  program's  offerings  via  an  advanced 
sequence  of  five  approved  Drama  Program  and  related  courses. 

Note:  The  Drama  Program's  screen  studies  are  distinct  from  those  of  the  Film  and  Video 
Program.  Screen  studies  in  the  Drama  Program  emphasize  creative  application  and 
production,  with  an  academic  component.  The  Film  and  Video  Program  emphasizes  his- 
tory, theory,  and  criticism,  with  a  production  component.  Students  may  pursue  both. 
See  listing  under  Film  and  Video  Program. 

Economics  (eco> 

Professor  Vernon,  Chairman;  Professor  Grabowski,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Professors  Clotfelter,  Cook,  Davies,  de  Marchi,  Geweke,  Gillis,  Goodwin,  Graham, 
Havrilesky,  Kelley,  Kreps,  Krueger,  McElroy,  Naylor,  Tauchen,  Tower,  Treml,  Viscusi, 
Wallace,  Weintraub,  and  Yohe;  Associate  Professors  Kimbrough  and  Marshall;  Assistant 
Professors  Baumgardner,  Brock,  and  Meurer;  Instructor  Pessino;  Adjunct  Professors 
Bates,  Gallant,  Ladd,  and  Richard;  Research  Professors  Coats,  Henderson,  and  Hendry 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Economics  courses  develop  the  critical  and  analytical  skills  essential  for  understand- 
ing economic  problems  and  institutions,  in  both  their  contemporary  and  historical  set- 
tings. Although  no  particular  vocational  or  professional  goal  is  emphasized,  these  courses 
provide  the  academic  background  necessary  for  positions  in  industry,  for  work  in  many 
branches  of  government  service,  for  law  school,  and  for  graduate  study  in  business  ad- 
ministration, economics,  and  the  social  sciences. 

Students  planning  to  do  graduate  work  in  economics  are  advised  to  take  as  many  of 
the  following  courses  in  mathematics  (listed  in  preferential  order)  as  their  schedules  per- 
mit: Mathematics  31,  32, 103, 104, 131,  135,  and  136. 

1.  National  Income  and  Public  Policy.  (SS)  Basic  economic  analysis  emphasizing  cur- 
rent public  policy  issues.  Means  of  determining  the  level  and  rate  of  growth  of  aggregate 
national  income  and  output.  Causes  of  unemployment,  inflation,  and  international  pay- 
ment problems.  The  effects  of  monetary  policy  (money  supply  and  interest  rates)  and  fiscal 
policy  (government  expenditures  and  taxes)  on  these  problems.  Open  only  to  freshmen. 
One  course.  Staff 

ID,  2D.  (SS)  The  same  courses  as  Economics  1,  2  except  taught  as  lectures  with  dis- 
cussion sections.  One  course  each.  Staff 

2.  Competition,  Monopoly,  and  Welfare.  (SS)  The  composition  of  output  and  the 
distribution  of  income  in  a  market  economy.  Role  of  government.  Contemporary  prob- 
lems of  the  environment .  Topics  such  as  environmental  economics,  monopoly,  unionism, 
international  trade.  Comparison  of  a  market  economy  with  other  systems  of  economic 
organization .  Economic  problems  of  developing  countries.  Open  only  to  freshmen .  One 
course.  Staff 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

51.  National  Income  and  Public  Policy.  (SS)  See  Economics  1 .  Open  to  all  students. 
One  course.  Staff 

51D,  52D.  (SS)  The  same  courses  as  Economics  51,  52  except  taught  as  lectures  with 
discussion  sections.  One  course  each.  Staff 


Economics  (ECO)         171 


52.  Competition,  Monopoly,  and  Welfare.  (SS)  See  Economics  2.  Open  to  all  students. 
One  course.  Staff 

53.  Economics  of  Contemporary  Issues.  (SS)  Modern  economic  problems,  such  as 
environmental  deterioration  and  urban  decay.  The  market  as  one  of  the  interrelated  sub- 
systems of  the  social  system,  from  institutionalist,  Marxist,  and  other  perspectives  in  the 
social  sciences.  One  course.  Staff 

108.  Economics  of  War.  (SS)  Conflict  theory,  causes  and  economic  consequences  of 
war,  military  personnel,  military-industrial  complex,  disarmament,  and  the  economy. 
Prerequisite:  Economics  52.  One  course.  Weintraub 

114.  Social  Choice.  (SS)  The  economic  study  of  nonmarket  decision  making.  The- 
ory of  constitutions,  voting  rules,  voter  behavior,  the  bureaucracy,  incentives  for  reach- 
ing consensus,  and  the  evolution  of  cooperation .  Applications  to  the  provision  of  public 
goods,  and  tax  policy  and  redistribution.  Available  only  in  the  Duke  in  Amsterdam  Sum- 
mer Program.  Prerequisite:  Economics  1  or  51,  2  or  52.  One  course,  de  Marchi 

132.  Introduction  to  Economic  History.  (SS)  A  survey  of  Western  economic  history: 
population,  production,  exchange,  and  institutions;  from  antiquity  to  the  present.  Prereq- 
uisite: Economics  52  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

133.  The  Evolution  of  the  American  Economy.  (SS)  The  process  of  industrialization 
and  modernization  in  the  United  States  from  the  pre-Civil  War  period  to  the  present. 
Prerequisites:  Economics  51  and  52.  One  course.  Coats 

135.  The  Dutch  Economy.  (SS)  Analysis  of  social  and  economic  policy-making  in  the 
Netherlands.  The  recent  history  and  theory  of  state  intervention;  the  ideology,  institu- 
tional context  and  machinery  of  social  consensus  in  the  areas  of  taxation,  labor  markets, 
incomes  policy,  industrial  policy,  energy,  housing,  education,  healthcare,  and  national 
insurance.  Available  only  in  the  Duke  in  Amsterdam  Summer  Program.  One  course. 
de  Marchi 

139.  Introduction  to  Econometrics.  (SS)  Data  collection,  estimation,  and  hypothe- 
sis testing.  Use  of  econometric  models  for  analysis  and  policy.  Prerequisites:  Economics 
2  or  52  and  Mathematics  32  or  equivalent  and  Statistics  10D  or  equivalent.  One  course. 
Marshall,  McElroy,  Tauchen,  or  Wallace 

149.  Microeconomic  Theory.  (SS)  Cost  and  supply  considerations  in  price  theory; 
the  demand  for  factors  of  production.  The  allocation  of  resources  in  the  context  of  com- 
petitive and  monopolistic  market  structures.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Public 
Policy  Studies  110.  Prerequisites:  Economics  2  or  52  and  Mathematics  31.  One  course.  Gra- 
ham, McElroy,  Pessino,  Treml,  Vernon,  or  Wallace 

150.  History  of  Economic  Thought.  (SS)  Approaches  to  economic  problems  from 
Aristotle  to  Keynes,  emphasizing  certain  models  and  doctrines— their  origins,  relevance, 
and  evolution.  Readings  from  Mun,  Quesnay,  Adam  Smith,  Malthus,  Ricardo,  Marx,  Wal- 
ras,  Veblen,  and  Keynes.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course,  de  Marchi  or  Goodwin 

153.  Monetary  Economics.  (SS)  The  evolution  and  operations  of  commercial  and  cen- 
tral banking  and  nonbanking  financial  institutions  in  the  United  States,  the  determina- 
tion of  monetary  aggregates  and  interest  rates,  the  financial  impacts  of  Treasury  opera- 
tions, and  the  linkages  from  Federal  Reserve  actions  to  price  level,  employment,  economic 
growth,  and  balance  of  payments  objectives.  Prerequisite:  Economics  154.  One  course. 
Brock,  Havrilesky,  or  Yohe 

154.  Aggregate  Economics.  (SS)  Concepts  and  measurement  of  national  income  and 
expenditures,  employment,  interest  rates,  and  price  levels;  the  theoretical  determination 
of  these  aggregates;  applications  of  macroeconomic  theory  to  business  cycles  and 


172         Courses  of  Instruction 


economic  growth.  Prerequisites:  Economics  1  or  51  and  2  or  52  and  Mathematics  31 .  One 
course.  deMarchi,  Havrilesky,  Kimbrough,  Tauchen,  Tower,  orYohe 

155.  Labor  Economics:  Analysis  and  Measurement.  (SS)  Labor  market  equilibria. 
The  demand  for  labor.  Thesupply  of  labor:  human  fertility,  human  capital,  hours  ofwork, 
and  labor  force  participation.  Wage  levels  and  differences.  Union  and  government  as  la- 
bor market  factors.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149,  Mathematics  31,  and  statistics.  One 
course.  Baumgardner  or  Pessino 

157S.  Business  Cycles  and  Economic  Forecasting.  (SS)  Causes  of  fluctuations  in  eco- 
nomic activity  and  conventional  methods  of  forecasting  micro-  and  macroeconomic  vari- 
ables, using  microcomputer  programs.  Forecasting  projects  by  students.  Prerequisites: 
Economics  149,  154,  and  statistics.  One  course.  Yohe 

159.  State  and  Local  Public  Policy.  (SS)  Does  not  count  for  economics  major  require- 
ments. Prerequisite:  Economics  149,  Public  Policy  110,  or  consent  of  instructor.  SeeC-L: 
Public  Policy  Studies  159.  One  course.  Staff 

180.  Law  and  Economics.  (SS)  An  introduction  to  the  economic  analysis  of  legal  is- 
sues and  legal  reasoning.  Case  studies  in  accident  law,  product  liability,  and  the  value 
of  life.  Other  topics  include  contracts,  property,  affirmative  action,  civil  procedure,  and 
the  economics  of  criminal  behavior.  Prerequisite:  Economics  149.  One  course.  Viscusi 

184.  An  Introduction  to  Canada  and  Canadian  Issues.  (SS)  Does  not  count  for  eco- 
nomics major  requirements.  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  184;  also  C-L:  Canadian 
Studies,  Comparative  Area  Studies,  History  184,  Political  Science  184,  and  Sociology  184. 
One  course.  Cahow 

187.  Public  Finance.  (SS)  Economic  aspects  of  such  problems  as  the  growth  of  govern- 
ment, the  proper  role  of  the  state,  the  centralization  and  decentralization  of  government, 
government  bureaucracy,  the  impact  of  taxes  and  spending  on  the  wealthy  and  the  poor, 
other  public  policies  and  questions.  Prerequisite:  Economics  149.  One  course.  Davies 

189.  Business  and  Government.  (SS)  Public  policies  which  most  directly  affect  the 
operation  of  competition  in  the  business  world.  The  economic  basis  for  an  evaluation  of 
antitrust  policy,  public  utility  regulation,  and  public  enterprise.  Prerequisites:  Econom- 
ics 149  and  statistics,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Grabowski,  Marshall,  or  Vernon 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Prerequisites:  consent 
of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Same  as  Economics  191, 192,  but  for  seniors.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

200.  Capitalism  and  Socialism.  (SS)  Selected  ideological  classics  of  new  and  old,  right 
and  left  economics  including  both  "counsels  for  perfection"  (Utopias)  and  "precepts  for 
action"  in  political  economy.  Prerequisites :  Economics  149  and  154  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course.  Naylor 

203S.  Mathematical  Economics.  (SS)  Selected  mathematical  tools  from  symbolic  logic, 
naive  set  theory,  linear  algebra,  calculus,  analysis,  and  elementary  topology  applied  to 
the  analysis  of  economic  problems.  Topics  include  consumer  choice,  production,  general 
equilibrium,  and  growth.  Prerequisites:  two  courses  in  college  calculus  and  Economics 
149.  One  course.  Graham 

205S.  Advanced  Monetary  Theory  and  Policy.  (SS)  Emphasis  on  recent  issues:  in- 
novations in  the  payments  mechanism  and  new  monetary  aggregates,  the  subterrane- 
an economy  financial  crises,  alternative  views  of  the  monetary  policy  transmission  mech- 

Economics  (ECO)        173 


anism,  and  the  monetarist-fiscalist  controversy.  Prerequisite:  Economics  153.  One  course. 

Havrilesky  or  Yohe 

212S.  Economic  Science  and  Economic  Policy.  (SS)  A  historical  examination  of  the 
impact  of  economics  on  public  policy;  topics  vary  each  semester  and  have  included  energy 
and  anti-inflation  policy,  productivity  growth,  the  Third  World,  and  the  Council  of  Eco- 
nomic Advisers.  One  course.  Goodwin  or  Henderson 

214.  Social  Choice.  (SS)  A  nonseminar  version  of  214S.  Same  as  114  but  requires  ad- 
ditional major  research  paper.  Available  only  in  the  Duke  in  Amsterdam  Summer  Pro- 
gram. Prerequisite:  Economics  1  or  51,  2  or  52.  One  course,  de  Marchi 

218.  Macroeconomic  Policy.  (SS)  Does  not  count  for  economics  major  requirements. 
See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  218.  One  course.  Staff 

219S.  Economic  Problems  of  Underdeveloped  Areas.  (SS)  Analysis  of  underdevel- 
oped countries  with  some  attention  to  national  and  international  programs  designed  to 
accelerate  development.  Prerequisite:  Economics  149  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kelley  or  Naylor 

220S.  Computer  Modeling  for  Policy  Analysis.  (SS)  Introduction  to  the  use  of  com- 
puter techniques  in  economic  policy  evaluation;  policy  applications  to  international  eco- 
nomics, public  finance  and  development  economics;  computer  analysis  of  linear  and  non- 
linear models.  Students  required  to  complete  a  major  modeling  project.  Prerequisites: 
Economics  149  and  Economics  154.  One  course.  Tower 

232.  Microeconomics:  Policy  Applications.  (SS)  Does  not  count  for  economics  ma- 
jor requirements.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  232.  One  course.  Cillis 

233.  Public  Sector  Economics  and  Policies.  (SS)  Analysis  of  expenditures,  taxation, 
debt,  public  enterprises,  and  current  government  programs.  Prerequisite:  Economics  149 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Dairies 

239.  Introduction  to  Econometrics.  (SS)  Same  as  139  but  requires  additional  term  pa- 
per. (Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Economics  139. )  Prerequisites:  Economics  2  or 
52  and  Mathematics  32  or  equivalent  and  Statistics  10D  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Mar- 
shall, McElroy,  Tauchen,  or  Wallace 

243.  Econometrics  I.  (SS)  Economic  theory,  mathematics,  statistical  inference,  and 
electronic  computers  applied  to  analysis  of  economic  phenomena.  Objective  is  to  give 
empirical  content  to  economic  theory.  Matrix  algebra  used  to  develop  topics  in  inference, 
linear  regression,  and  systems  of  simultaneous  equations.  Use  is  made  of  the  electronic 
computer.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  Statistics  200  or  equivalents.  C-L:  Statistics 
243.  One  course.  Marshall  or  Wallace 

244.  Corporate  Economics  I.  (SS)  Strategic  planning  models  of  the  firm  including  mar- 
ginal analysis,  mathematical  programming,  portfolio,  and  corporate  simulation  models. 
Economics  as  the  language  of  corporate  planning  and  modeling.  Prerequisites:  Economics 
149  and  statistics,  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Naylor 

245.  Econometrics  II.  (SS)  Advanced  theory  and  applications:  includes  specification 
error,  generalized  least  squares,  lag  structures,  Bayesian  decision  making,  simultaneous 
equation  methods,  and  forecasting.  Emphasis  on  current  applied  literature.  Prerequisite: 
Economics  243.  C-L:  Statistics  245.  One  course.  Geioeke,  McElroy,  Tauchen,  or  Wallace 

246.  Selected  Topics  in  Econometric  Theory.  (SS)  Analysis  of  panel  data,  combining 
data  from  different  sources,  vector  autoregressive  methods,  problems  of  causation  in  time 
series  data,  nonlinear  estimation,  limited  dependent  variables,  sample  selection  bias,  and 
other  topics  to  be  chosen  subject  to  the  interests  of  the  class.  C-L:  Statistics  246.  One  course. 
Geweke,  Hendry,  Richard,  Tauchen,  or  Wallace 

174         Courses  of  Instruction 


247S.  Applied  Econometrics.  (SS)  Application  of  current  developments  in  economet- 
ric methodology  to  empirical  problems  in  economics.  Emphasis  on  the  conduct  of  em- 
pirical research,  including  model  and  hypothesis  formulation,  testing,  and  integration 
of  economic  and  econometric  theory.  C-L:  Statistics  247S.  One  course.  Geweke,  Marshall, 
McElroy,  Tauchen,  or  Wallace 

249.  Microeconomics.  (SS)  Similar  to  Economics  149  but  at  a  more  advanced  level. 
Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Economics  149.  One  course.  Staff 

250S.  Modern  Economic  Thought.  (SS)  Major  streams  of  economic  analysis  since 
1936.  Selected  topics  from  the  economics  of  Keynes,  its  offshoots  and  coordinate  develop- 
ments in  monetary  and  equilibrium  theory;  post-Marxian  economic  theory.  Historical 
evolution  of  recent  ideas  and  their  interrelations.  Prerequisites :  Economics  149,  Economics 
154,  and  statistics,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course,  de  Marchi  or  Weintraub 

254.  Macroeconomics.  (SS)  Similar  to  Economics  154  but  at  a  more  advanced  level . 
Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Economics  154.  One  course.  Staff 

265S.  International  Trade  and  Finance.  (SS)  Fundamental  principles  of  international 
economic  relations.  The  economic  basis  for  international  specialization  and  trade  and  the 
economic  gains  from  trade,  the  balance  of  international  payments,  problems  of  interna- 
tional finance,  investments,  and  monetary  problems.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and 
154.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies.  One  course.  Brock,  Kimbrough,  Krueger,  or  Tower 

268.  Federal  Tax  Policy.  (SS)  Does  not  count  for  economics  major  requirements.  See 
C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  268;  also  C-L:  Law  518.  One  course.  Clotfelteror  Schmalbeck 

270S.  Fundamentals  of  Political  Economy.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Political  Science  270S.  One 
course.  Aldrich,  Bates,  or  Bianco 

286S.  Economic  Policy-Making  in  Developing  Countries.  (SS)  Does  not  count  for 
economics  major  requirements.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  286S;  also  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies.  One  course.  Gillis 

287.  Public  Finance.  (SS)  Same  as  187  but  requires  additional  term  paper.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  had  Economics  187.  Prerequisite:  Economics  149.  One  course.  Davies 

293.  Soviet  Economic  History.  (SS)  Establishment  of  foundations  of  a  socialist  econ- 
omy: collectivization,  industrialization,  and  search  for  economic  efficiency.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Treml 

294S.  Soviet  Economic  System.  (SS)  Economic  planning  and  administration  in  the 
Soviet  Union  and  other  socialist  countries.  International  comparisons.  Theoretical  and 
applied  problems  of  resource  allocation,  economic  development,  and  optimal  micro  de- 
cision making  in  a  nonmarket  economy.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 

Treml 

Honors  Seminars  (by  invitation  only) 

201S,  202S.  Current  Issues  in  Economics.  (SS)  Economic  analysis  of  such  issues  as 
the  health  care  system,  crime  and  punishment,  pollution  and  the  environment,  the  per- 
forming arts,  welfare,  and  the  energy  crisis.  Prerequisites:  for  201S,  Economics  149  and 
statistics;  for  202S,  Economics  201S.  One  course  each.  Davies 

206S.  Regulation  and  Industrial  Economics.  (SS)  Analysis  of  industrial  competition 
and  performance  in  industries  such  as  automobiles,  steel,  agriculture,  airlines,  phar- 
maceuticals, computers,  and  cable  TV.  Analysis  of  the  efficiency  of  regulation  and  other 
public  policy  programs.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  statistics.  One  course.  Grabowski 


Economics  (ECO)         175 


207S.  Conflict  and  Cooperation  in  Economics.  (SS)  Elements  of  game  theory.  Cooper- 
ative and  noncooperative  games  with  reference  to  trading,  general  equilibrium  theory, 
oligopoly,  and  monopoly.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  Mathematics  103.  One  course. 
Weintraub 

208S.  Economics  of  Labor  Supply  and  the  Family.  (SS)  Supply  of  labor  and  returns 
to  human  capital  over  the  life  cycle;  demand  for  labor  and  discrimination;  sex  and  race 
differences  in  wage  rates,  hours  of  work  earnings,  occupation,  and  unemployment; 
specialization,  conflict  and  cooperation,  and  the  allocation  of  goods  and  leisure  within 
a  family;  marriage  and  divorce;  and  fertility.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  statistics; 
Economics  139  is  recommended.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  McElroy 

209S.  Economics  of  Population.  (SS)  Relationship  of  population  growth  to  economic 
development  and  to  natural  resource  and  environmental  pressures.  Causes  and  impacts 
of  population  change,  including  economic  models  of  fertility,  mortality,  marriage,  and 
migration.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  154.  One  course.  Kelley 

213S.  Economics  of  Slavery  in  the  American  South.  (SS)  The  nature,  development, 
and  economic  and  social  consequences  of  slavery  in  the  United  States  during  the  nine- 
teenth century.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Afro- 
American  Studies  213S.  One  course.  Coats 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

160.  Resource  Economics  and  Public  Policy.  (SS) 

169, 170.  Microeconomic  Analysis  I  and  II.  (SS) 

198S.  Economics  of  Regulation.  (SS) 

204S.  Advanced  Monetary  Economics.  (SS) 

211S.  Current  Problems  in  Aggregate  Supply.  (SS) 

214S.  Social  Choice.  (SS) 

224S,  225S.  Economics  of  the  Law.  (SS) 

234.  Urban  and  Regional  Economics.  (SS) 

235.  The  Economics  of  Crime.  (SS) 

285.  Evaluation  of  Public  Expenditures.  (SS) 

THE  MAJOR 

For  freshmen  matriculating  in  the  fall  1986  semester,  and  thereafter: 

Prerequisites.  Mathematics  31,  Economics  1  or  51,  and  Economics  2  or  52,  and  an  ap- 
proved statistics  course.  (Statistics  courses  currently  acceptable  include  Statistics  10  and 
100  and  Public  Policy  Studies  112.) 

Major  Requirements.  Economics  149,  154,  and  any  three  additional  100-  or  200-level 
courses.  Substitution  of  similar  courses  in  other  departments  for  courses  in  the  economics 
department  will  not  be  permitted. 

For  all  students  matriculating  before  the  fall  1986  semester: 

Prerequisites.  Mathematics  31,  Economics  1  or  51,  and  Economics  2  or  52. 

Major  Requirements.  Economics  149, 154,  and  any  three  additional  100- or  200-level  eco- 
nomics courses.  Substitution  of  similar  courses  in  other  departments  for  courses  in  the 
economics  department  will  not  be  permitted. 

Honors.  For  graduation  with  distinction  at  least  one  honors  seminar  and  an  honors 
paper  are  required.  Prerequisites  for  admission  to  an  honors  seminar  are  two  of  the  fol- 

176         Courses  of  Instruction 


lowing  courses:  Economics  149,  154,  and  an  approved  statistics  course.  See  the  section 
on  honors  in  this  bulletin. 

Education  Program  <edu) 

Associate  Professor  Davis,  Chairman  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Professor  Page; 
Associate  Professors  Ballantyne,  Carbone,  Di  Bona,  Johnson,  and  Sawyer;  Adjunct  Profes- 
sor Eilber;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Martin;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Mayesky; 
Part-time  Instructor  Peete;  Lecturers  Bryant,  Fowler,  and  Malone 

Students  who  desire  an  understanding  of  the  study  of  education  as  part  of  their  liberal 
arts  program  should  elect  courses  in  accordance  with  their  special  interests.  Selected 
courses  in  education  may  satisfy  requirements  in  the  social  sciences  area  of  knowledge 
designation.  Students  who  expect  to  teach  should  confer  with  an  advisor  in  the  program 
prior  to  registration  each  semester.  Students  interested  in  certification  to  teach  in  secon- 
dary schools  should  consult  Professors  Carbone,  Davis,  or  Mayesky.  For  early  childhood 
certification  consult  Professor  Mayesky. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

100.  Social  and  Philosophical  Foundations  of  Education.  (SS)  Basic  features  and  as- 
sumptions, viewpoints,  andissuesof  education  in  contemporary  America.  Onecourse. 
Carbone  or  Di  Bona 

103S.  American  Educational  Theory.  (SS)  A  study  of  contemporary  issues  and  prob- 
lems. One  course.  Carbone 

108S.  Early  Childhood  Language  Arts.  (SS)  Theories  and  programs  for  the  develop- 
ment of  reading,  writing,  speaking,  and  listening  competencies  in  children.  Onecourse. 

Staff 

109S.  Early  Childhood  Curriculum.  Seminar  in  curriculum  development.  Principles, 
practices,  and  problems  of  instruction.  For  student  teachers  only.  One  course.  Bn/ant  or 
Mayesky 

117S.  Psychology  of  Personal  and  Social  Adjustment.  (SS)  Principles  of  mental  health 
affecting  individual  and  social  adjustments.  One  course.  Malone  or  staff 

118.  Educational  Psychology.  (SS)  Emotional  and  cognitive  learning  in  children, 
youth,  and  adults.  One  course.  Ballantyne,  Davis,  or  Page 

120.  Early  Childhood  Education:  Internship.  Supervised  internship  in  an  elemen- 
tary school,  involving  full-time  teaching.  For  student  teachers  only.  Pass/fail  grading  only. 
Two  courses.  Mayesky  and  staff 

121.  Infancy,  Early  Childhood,  and  Educational  Programs.  (SS)  Developmental  the- 
ories and  their  practical  application  in  education .  Emphasis  on  parenting  and  teaching. 
One  course.  Mayesky 

139.  Marxism  and  Society.  (SS)  Core  course  for  the  Program  in  Perspectives  on  Marx- 
ism and  Society.  See  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  139;  also  C-L:  History  186,  Interdiscipli- 
nary Course  139,  and  Sociology  139.  One  course.  Fox  or  Wilson 

140.  The  Psychology  of  Work.  (SS)  Factors  affecting  career  choice  and  change.  One 
course.  Ballantyne 

149S.  Exceptional  Children.  (SS)  Etiology  and  assessment  of  major  types  of  excep- 
tionalities, including  intellectual  abilities,  physical  or  emotional  handicaps,  andsensori- 
ally  impaired.  Family  relationships  and  treatment  programs.  One  course.  Davis 


Education  Program  (EDU)         177 


155S.  Tests  and  Measurements.  (SS)  Measuring  abilities,  achievement,  and  person- 
ality. Analysis,  criticism,  and  construction  of  tests  for  admission,  classroom,  and  society. 
One  course.  Page 

189S.  The  Teaching  of  Composition,  Grammar,  and  Literature  in  Secondary  School. 
See  C-L:  English  118S.  One  course.  Page 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  for  juniors.  Prerequi- 
sites: consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  for  seniors.  Prerequi- 
sites: consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

205,  206.  Selected  Topics.  One  course  each.  Staff 

215S.  Seminar  in  Secondary  School  Teaching.  Principles,  practices,  and  problems 
in  secondary  school  instruction.  One  course.  Carbone  or  staff 

216.  Secondary  Education:  Internship.  Supervised  internship  in  senior  high  schools, 
involving  some  full-time  teaching.  For  student  teachers  only.  Two  courses.  Carbone  or  staff 

225.  Teaching  of  History  and  the  Social  Studies.  Evaluation  of  the  objectives,  con- 
tent, materials,  and  methods  in  the  teaching  of  history  and  the  social  studies.  One  course. 
Carbone  or  staff 

232.  Learning  and  Living  in  Families.  Role  and  function  of  the  family  as  related  to 
the  development  and  behavior  of  its  members,  to  gender  identification,  to  parenting,  and 
to  interactions  among  family  members.  One  course.  Ballantyne  or  Davis 

236.  Teaching  Developmental  and  Remedial  Reading  in  the  Secondary  School.  Prin- 
ciples, methods,  and  materials  for  the  development  of  effective  reading  attitudes  and  skills 
in  developmental  and  remedial  programs.  One  course.  Staff 

242S.  Group  Interactions.  Examination  of  theoretical  issues  and  processes  involved 
in  the  dynamics  of,  and  learning  in,  small  groups  of  children,  adolescents,  parents,  oth- 
er adults,  with  attention  to  problem-oriented  groups.  One  course.  Ballantyne 

246.  Teaching  of  Mathematics.  Aims,  curriculum,  and  classroom  procedure  for  teach- 
ing secondary  school  mathematics.  One  course.  Staff 

276.  The  Teaching  of  High  School  Science.  Discussion,  lectures,  and  collateral  reading 
related  to  such  topics  as  aims,  tests,  curriculum,  classroom  and  laboratory  procedures, 
field  trips,  and  course  and  lesson  planning  for  secondary  school  science.  One  course.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

168S.  Contemporary  Education  Criticism.  (SS) 

170.  The  Undergraduate  Curriculum 

171T,  172T.  Junior-Senior  Tutorials 

173, 174.  Clinical  Reading  Practicum 

211.  Education  and  the  Mass  Media.  (SS) 

212S.  Pedagogy  and  Political  Economy:  A  World  View.  (SS) 

227.  Contemporary  Theories  of  Counseling  and  Psychotherapy.  (SS) 

248.  Practicum  in  Counseling 


178         Courses  of  Instruction 


UNIVERSITY  PROGRAM  FOR  PREPARATION  FOR  TEACHING* 

Duke  University  offers  programs  to  prepare  students  to  meet  certification  require- 
ments for  teaching  in  elementary  and  secondary  schools  although  no  major  is  offered  in 
education.  Prerequisites  for  all  prospective  teachers  are  an  introductory  course  in  psy- 
chology and  Education  100  or  103S  or  equivalent.  Special  methods  courses  should  be  taken 
in  the  education  program  and  other  appropriate  departments  prior  to  undergraduate  stu- 
dent teaching,  which  is  part  of  a  planned  professional  semester  in  the  senior  year. 

Secondary  School  Teaching 

Prospective  secondary  school  teachers  major  in  one  of  sixteen  departments  in  Trini- 
ty College  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  They  are  advised  to  consult  an  advisor  in  the  Education 
Program  concerning  their  interest  in  teaching  and  their  completion  of  an  application  to 
be  accepted  in  the  teacher  preparation  program.  Students  preparing  to  teach  in  a  secon- 
dary school  must  meet  certification  requirements  by  qualifying  in  one  teaching  field:  Eng- 
lish, mathematics,  sciences,  or  social  sciences.  Qualifications  for  certification  to  teach  a 
single  science  may  be  sought  under  either  the  Bachelor  of  Arts  or  the  Bachelor  of  Science 
degree. 

Early  Childhood  Teaching 

Undergraduate  students  who  have  the  desire  to  teach  young  children  (usually  kin- 
dergarten through  grade  four),  either  in  public  or  private  schools,  may  qualify  for  a  teach- 
ing certificate  while  at  Duke  in  addition  to  completing  their  Trinity  College  majors.  Com- 
pletion of  four  elective  courses  and  an  intensive  senior  fall  semester  internship  entitles 
students  to  early  childhood  teacher  certification. 

Interested  undergraduate  students  should  apply  to  the  Early  Childhood  Program  in 
the  fall  of  the  junior  year.  Students  are  selected  by  competitive  criteria  for  participation 
in  an  intensive  senior  fall  semester  which  links  together  a  teaching  internship  in  a  model 
school,  seminars,  and  independent  directed  research  (four  courses) .  Students  selected 
for  the  early  childhood  teaching  certificate  program  are  placed  as  interns  with  master 
teachers  in  a  model  elementary  school  in  a  public  school  system,  and  supervised  by  a  Duke 
professor  on  a  one-to-one  basis.  Duke  student  interns  begin  their  internship  with  the  mas- 
ter teacher  during  preservice  days  before  classes  for  children  begin. 

Upon  completion  of  the  senior  year  fall  internship  semester,  and  upon  completion 
of  the  four-year  Trinity  College  undergraduate  degree,  students  may  apply  for  early  child- 
hood teaching  certification. 

English  <eng) 

Professor  Fish,  Chairman;  Professor  Torgovnick,  Assistant  Chairman;  Associate  Professor 
Gerber,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Associate  Professor  Gopen,  Supervisor  of  Fresh- 
man Instruction  and  Director  of  University  Writing  Program;  Professors  Anderson,  Ap- 
plewhite, Budd,  DeNeef,  Ferguson,  Gleckner,  Jackson,  F.  Lentricchia,  Nygard,  A.  Pat- 
terson, L.  Patterson,  Price,  Randall,  Ryals,  Sedgwick,  B.  H.  Smith,  G.  Smith,  Strandberg, 
Tompkins,  G.  Williams,  and  K.  Williams;  Associate  Professors  Butters,  Clum,  Jones,  Mel- 
lown,  Pope,  Porter,  and  Schwartz;  Assistant  Professors  Ferraro,  Gaines,  Moon,  and  Moses; 
Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Ball;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professors  M.  Lentricchia,  Tetel,  and 
Wittig;  Instructor  Cox;  Lecturer  Hill 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 


*Duke  University  is  accredited  by  the  North  Carolina  Department  of  Public  Instruction  and  has  reciprocal 
approval  for  initial  certification  with  most  of  the  fifty  states. 


English  (ENG)         179 


WRITING  AND  LANGUAGE 

For  courses  in  composition  see  below  and  also  University  Writing  Courses  4,  5,  6,  7, 
8,  and  117S  in  the  University  Writing  Program  section  of  this  bulletin. 

3.  Introductory  Composition  and  Literature.  A  skills  course  in  composition  and  liter- 
ature (contemporary  essays  and  short  stories),  with  frequent  writing  assignments;  regular 
individual  conferences.  (This  course,  offered  in  the  Summer  Transitional  Program,  does 
not  satisfy  the  requirement  for  proficiency  in  writing.)  One  course.  Staff 

27S.  Studies  in  Nonliterary  Topics.  May  be  taken  twice.  One  course.  Staff 

28S.  Introduction  to  Creative  Writing.  Consent  of  instructor  required.  One  course. 
Staff 

29.  Composition  and  Language.  This  number  represents  credit  for  advanced  place- 
ment on  the  basis  of  the  College  Board  examination  in  composition  and  language.  One 
course. 

61S.  Writing:  Prose  Fiction  and  Drama.  Consent  of  instructor  required .  One  course. 

Staff 

62S.  Writing:  Poetry.  Consent  of  instructor  required.  One  course.  Staff 

103S,  104S.  Writing:  Short  Stories.  (AL)  Class  discussion  of  students'  manuscripts; 
individual  conferences  with  the  instructor.  Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors. 
Consent  of  instructor  required.  One  course  each.  Applewhite,  Cox,  M.  Lentricchia,  Pope, 
Porter,  or  Price 

105S,  106S.  The  Writing  of  Poetry.  (AL)  Meter,  image,  tone,  and  dramatic  organiza- 
tion in  traditional  and  modern  poems  as  a  basis  for  original  composition.  Consent  of  in- 
structor required.  One  course  each.  Applewhite  or  Pope 

107S.  Playwriting  I.  (AL)  Fundamentals  of  writing  for  stage  and  screen.  Prerequisites: 
a  practical  theater  course  (for  example,  acting,  directing,  design,  stagecraft)  and  consent 
of  instructor.  C-L:  Drama  11  IS  and  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Ball 

108S.  Playwriting  II.  (AL)  Advanced  projects  in  writing  for  production.  Prerequisites: 
Drama  HIS  or  English  107S,  and  Drama  101  or  181S,  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Dra- 
ma 112S  and  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Ball 

109S.  Special  Topics  in  Writing.  (AL)  Advanced  work  for  majors  who  have  taken  at 
least  two  previous  100-level  writing  courses.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  Staff 

110S.  Writing:  Longer  Prose  Narrative.  (AL)  The  writing  of  a  novel,  novella,  or  group 
of  short  stories.  Primarily  for  juniors  and  seniors.  Consent  of  instructor  required.  One 
course.  Cox,  Porter,  or  Price 

111.  Introduction  to  Linguistics.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  107;  also  C- 
L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  111  and  Linguistics.  One  course.  Butters,  Nygard,  or  Tetel 

112.  English  Historical  Linguistics.  (SS)  Introduction  to  methods  and  principles  of 
historical  linguistics,  as  exemplified  by  the  history  of  the  English  language  from  Proto- 
Indo-European  to  the  present.  C-L:  Linguistics.  One  course.  Butters,  Nygard,  or  Tetel 

115.  Present-Day  English.  (SS)  Origins,  development,  and  current  structure  of  Eng- 
lish, especially  in  America.  Transformational  versus  traditional  and  structural  grammar, 
written  versus  spoken  English,  social  and  regional  dialects.  C-L:  Linguistics.  One  course. 
Butters,  Nygard,  or  Tetel 

117S.  Advanced  Expository  and  Persuasive  Writing.  See  C-L:  University  Writing 
Course  117S.  One  course.  Staff 

180         Courses  of  Instruction 


118S.  The  Teaching  of  Composition,  Grammar,  and  Literature  in  Secondary  School. 

Visits  to  secondary  school  English  classes,  discussion  with  successful  teachers,  practice 
in  making  presentations,  and  evaluation  of  written  work  and  other  performance.  C-L: 
Education  189S.  One  course.  Page  (education) 

119.  Current  Topics  in  Linguistics.  (SS)  May  be  repeated  as  topics  vary.  See  C-L:  Cul- 
tural Anthropology  112;  also  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  119  and  Linguistics.  One 
course.  Staff 

For  Juniors,  Seniors,  and  Graduates 

205.  Semiotics  and  Linguistics.  See  C-L:  Russian  205.  One  course.  Andrews 

208.  History  of  the  English  Language.  (SS)  Introductory  survey  of  the  changes  in 
sounds,  forms,  and  vocabulary  of  the  English  language  from  its  beginning  to  the  pres- 
ent, with  emphasis  on  the  evolution  of  the  language  as  a  medium  of  literary  expression. 
C-L:  Linguistics  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Butters,  Nygard,  or 
Tetel 

209.  Present-Day  English.  (SS)  A  survey  of  contemporary  linguistic  theories  applied 
to  modern  English;  designed  for  students  of  literature  and  teachers  of  English.  C-L:  Lin- 
guistics. One  course.  Butters  or  Nygard 

INTRODUCTION  TO  LITERATURE 

20.  Literature  and  Composition.  This  number  represents  credit  for  advanced  place- 
ment on  the  basis  of  the  College  Board  examination  in  literature  and  composition.  One 
course.  Butters  and  Nygard 

21S.  Studies  in  the  Novel.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

22S.  Studies  in  Drama.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

23S.  Studies  in  the  Short  Story.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

24S.  Studies  in  Poetry.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

25S.  Studies  in  the  Epic.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

26S.  Studies  in  Special  Topics.  (AL)  May  be  taken  twice.  One  course.  Staff 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

51,  52.  Representative  American  Writers.  (AL)  Selections  and  complete  works.  51: 
Poe,  Emerson  or  Thoreau,  Hawthorne,  Melville,  Whitman,  Dickinson,  and  Twain;  not 
open  to  students  who  have  taken  English  152  or  153. 52:  James,  Frost  or  Robinson,  Crane 
or  Dreiser,  O'Neill,  Faulkner,  Hemingway,  and  others.  Not  open  to  students  who  have 
taken  English  153  or  154.  One  course  each.  Staff 

91.  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  English  Literature.  (AL)  Methods  of  literary  analy- 
sis through  the  selected  works  of  Chaucer,  Shakespeare,  Milton,  and  Pope.  One  course. 
Staff 

92.  British  Literature  1750-1950.  (AL)  Studies  in  the  literature  of  Great  Britain  from 
the  eighteenth  century  through  the  modern  period.  One  course.  Staff 

93.  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Literary  Genre.  (AL)  An  introduction,  through  select- 
ed poetry,  fiction,  and  drama,  to  the  distinctive  nature  of  each  major  genre  and  to  the  crit- 
ical procedures  for  examining  that  genre.  One  course.  Staff 

93S.  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Literary  Genre.  ( AL)  A  seminar  version  of  English 
93.  One  course.  Wittig 


English  (ENG)         181 


ENGLISH  AND  BRITISH  LITERATURE 

121.  Medieval  English  Literature  to  1500.  (AL)  The  principal  forms  and  examples  of 
English  prose,  poetry,  and  drama  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  and  Middle  English  periods  (ex- 
cluding Chaucer).  In  translation.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course. 

Ni/gard  or  L.  Patterson 

122.  Sixteenth-Century  English  Literature.  (AL)  Emphasis  in  poetry  on  Wyatt,  Sid- 
ney, Spenser,  Raleigh,  and  Shakespeare;  in  prose  on  Sidney  and  Sir  Thomas  More;  in 
drama  on  Marlowe.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  DeNeef,  Fish, 
A.  Patterson,  Randall,  or  Schwartz 

123.  English  Literature:  1600  to  1660.  (AL)  Emphasis  in  poetry  on  Jonson  and  the 
cavaliers,  Donne  and  the  metaphysicals;  in  drama  on  Jonson,  Tourneur,  Webster,  and  Ford; 
in  prose  on  character  writers,  Bacon,  Burton,  Donne,  and  Browne.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  or  Schwartz 

124.  English  Literature:  1660  to  1800.  (AL)  Major  genres  and  authors  such  as  Dryden, 
Congreve,  Addison,  Swift,  Pope,  Gray,  Johnson,  Blake,  and  Defoe  or  Fielding.  One  course. 
Ferguson  or  Jackson 

125.  English  Literature  of  the  Romantic  Period.  (AL)  Wordsworth,  Coleridge,  Byron, 
Shelley,  Keats.  One  course.  Applewhite,  Gleckner,  or  Jackson 

126.  English  Literature:  1832  to  1900.  (AL)  Major  writers  and  genres,  with  special  em- 
phasis on  Carlyle,  Tennyson,  Browning,  Arnold,  the  pre-Raphaelites,  and  Hopkins.  Col- 
lateral reading  from  novels.  One  course.  Ryals  or  Sedgwick 

127, 128.  Twentieth-Century  British  Literature.  (AL)  Emphasis  on  principal  writers 
of  fiction,  drama,  and  poetry.  127:  usually  Conrad,  Shaw,  Yeats,  Wells,  Synge,  Forster, 
Woolf ,  and  Joyce.  128:  usually  Lawrence,  Cary,  Huxley,  Auden,  Greene,  Beckett,  and  Dy- 
lan Thomas.  One  course  each.  Mellown,  Moses,  Pope,  or  G.  Smith 

131.  Studies  in  a  Single  British  Author.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

132.  Faith  and  Fiction  in  Victorian  England.  (AL)  (Summer  program  in  England.) 
Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  English  137.  See  C-L:  Religion  186.  One  course.  Staff 

133.  Modern  British  Drama.  (AL)  O'Casey,  Coward,  Eliot,  Osborne,  Pinter,  Beckett, 
Stoppard,  and  others.  C-L:  Drama  121.  One  course.  Clum  or  Moses 

134.  Drama  and  Society.  (AL)  Dramas  of  various  ages  and  cultures  in  relation  to  the 
mores  and  values  of  the  societies  for  which  they  were  written.  The  ways  in  which  con- 
temporary drama  and  contemporary  productions  of  earlier  works  reflect  the  concerns 
and  values  of  society  now.  Readings  of  the  texts  and  background  work  and  viewing  of 
sixteen  London  theatrical  productions.  (London  summer  program).  C-L:  Drama  149.  One 
course.  Clum 

135.  British  Poetry  of  the  Twentieth  Century.  ( AL)  Changes  in  poetry  and  its  criticism 
from  theEdwardians.  Yeats,  Housman,  Lawrence,  Owen,  the  Sitwells,  Graves,  Auden, 
MacNeice,  Dylan  Thomas,  Hughes,  andLarkin.  One  course.  Mellown,  Moses,  Pope,  orG. 
Smith 

136.  Eighteenth-Century  British  Novel.  (AL)  Defoe,  Richardson,  Fielding,  Smollett, 
and  Sterne;  the  Gothic  novel.  One  course.  Ferguson  or  Jackson 

137.  Nineteenth-Century  British  Novel.  (AL)  Scott,  Austen,  Dickens,  Thackeray,  Trol- 
lope,  the  Brontes,  George  Eliot,  Meredith,  Butler,  Hardy,  and  others.  Not  open  to  students 
who  have  taken  English  132.  One  course.  Moses,  Ryals,  or  Sedgwick 

138.  Twentieth-Century  British  Novel.  (AL)  Conrad,  Lawrence,  Forster,  Joyce,  Woolf, 
Huxley,  Cary,  Amis,  and  Golding.  One  course.  Mellown,  Moses,  Pope,  or  G.  Smith 

182         Courses  of  Instruction 


139S.  Special  Topics  in  British  Literature.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

Major  Authors 

141.  Chaucer.  (AL)  Focus  on  The  Canterbury  Tales  and  its  literary  and  social  background. 
C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  DeNeef,  Nygard,  or  L.  Patterson 

143, 144.  Shakespeare.  (AL)  143:  twelve  plays  before  1600. 144:  usually  ten  plays  af- 
ter 1600.  C-L:  Drama  115, 116  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course  each. 
DeNeef,  Gopen,  Jackson,  Jones,  A.  Patterson,  Porter,  Randall,  orG.  Williams 

145.  Milton.  (AL)  Poetry  and  its  literary  and  social  background.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Price,  or  Schwartz 

For  Juniors,  Seniors,  and  Graduates 

207.  Old  English  Language  and  Literature.  (AL)  The  pre-Conquest  language  and 
representative  prose  and  poetry.  One  course.  Nygard 

212.  Middle  English  Literature:  1100  to  1500.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Fish,  Gopen,  Nygard,  orL.  Patterson 

221.  Renaissance  Prose  and  Poetry:  1500  to  1660.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Medie- 
val and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  Schwartz, 
orG.  Williams 

225.  Renaissance  Drama:  1500  to  1642.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  orG.  Williams 

235.  Restoration  and  Eighteenth-Century  Literature:  1660  to  1800.  (AL)  Selected 
topics.  One  course.  Ferguson  or  Jackson 

241.  Romantic  Literature:  1790  to  1830.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Applewhite, 
Gleckner,  or  Jackson 

245.  Victorian  Literature:  1830  to  1900.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Ryals  or 
Sedgwick 

251.  British  Literature  since  1900.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Mellown,  Moses, 
orG.  Smith 

AMERICAN  LITERATURE 

151.  American  Literature  to  1820.  (AL)  Colonial  authors  such  as  Bradford,  Taylor,  Cot- 
ton Mather,  Edwards,  Byrd,  and  Franklin,  and  authors  of  the  early  Republic  such  as  Ty- 
ler, Freneau,  and  C.  B.  Brown.  One  course.  Jones,  Moon,  or  Tompkins 

152.  American  Literature:  1820  to  1860.  ( AL)  Prose  and  poetry  of  American  romanti- 
cism: Emerson,  Thoreau,  Hawthorne,  Poe,  Melville,  and  Whitman.  Not  open  to  students 
who  have  taken  English  51.  One  course.  Anderson,  Gerber,  Jones,  Moon,  Tompkins,  orK. 
Williams 

153.  American  Literature:  1860  to  1915.  (AL)  Dickinson,  Twain,  James,  the  social  and 
philosophical  essayists,  Crane,  Dreiser,  Robinson,  and  Frost.  Not  open  to  students  who 
have  taken  English  52.  One  course.  Anderson,  Budd,  Gerber,  Jones,  Moon,  or  K.  Williams 

154.  American  Literature:  1915  to  1960.  (AL)  Eliot,  Fitzgerald,  Hemingway,  Faulkner, 
and  others.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  English  52.  One  course.  Clum,  Ferraro, 
F.  Lentricchia,  Moon,  Moses,  Pope,  or  Strandberg 

155.  Contemporary  American  Writers.  (AL)  Novelists  and  poets  prominent  since  1960. 
One  course.  Clum,  Ferraro,  Moses,  or  Strandberg 

English  (ENG)         183 


161.  Studies  in  a  Single  American  Author.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

162.  Twentieth-Century  American  Drama.  (AL)  Representative  plays  by  O'Neill, 
Odets,  Williams,  Miller,  Albee,  Lanford  Wilson,  and  others.  C-L:  Drama  120.  One  course. 
Clum 

163.  Twentieth-Century  American  Poetry.  (AL)  The  classicism  of  Pound,  Eliot,  and 
the  Fugitives  in  relation  to  the  neoromanticism  of  Stevens,  Williams,  Crane,  and  Roethke. 
Developments  during  World  War  II  and  after:  Lowell,  Jarrell,  Berryman,  Dickey,  Lever- 
tov,  and  Wright.  One  course.  Applewhite,  Moon,  Moses,  or  Pope 

164, 165.  American  Fiction.  (AL)  A  survey  of  the  novel  and  the  short  story.  164:  the 
nineteenth  century;  Poe,  Hawthorne,  Melville,  Twain,  James,  and  others.  165:  the  twen- 
tieth century;  Hemingway,  Faulkner,  Fitzgerald,  Barth,  Pynchon,  and  others.  One  course 
each.  Clum,  Ferraro,  Moses,  Strandberg,  orK.  Williams 

167, 168.  Afro-American  Literature.  (AL)  167:  oral  and  written  literary  traditions  from 
the  American  colonial  period  into  the  nineteenth  century,  including  the  spiritual  as  lyr- 
ic poetry  and  the  slave  narrative  as  autobiography.  168:  the  late  nineteenth  and  the  twen- 
tieth centuries,  Paul  Laurence  Dunbar  to  Cyrus  Colter.  C-L:  Afro-American  Studies  173, 
174.  One  course  each.  K.  Williams 

169S.  Special  Topics  in  American  Literature.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

For  Juniors,  Seniors,  and  Graduates 

263.  American  Literature  to  1865.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Anderson,  Jones, 
Moon,  or  Tompkins 

267.  American  Literature:  1865  to  1915.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Budd,  Tomp- 
kins, orK.  Williams 

269.  American  Women  Writers.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One 
course.  Pope  or  Tompkins 

275.  American  Literature  since  1915.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Ferraro,  F.  Len- 
tricchia,  Moses,  Pope,  or  Strandberg 

GENRE,  CRITICISM,  AND  WORLD  LITERATURE 

170.  Theory  of  Genre.  (AL)  Introduction  to  literary  genre  and  the  critical  questions 
raised  about  literature  when  examined  from  a  generic  perspective.  One  course.  DeNeef, 
Jackson,  Moses,  or  Torgovnick 

171S.  Theater  Farce.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Drama  145S.  One  course.  El  Guindi 

172.  Literary  Theory.  Major  works  and  theoretical  issues  in  the  history  of  literary  criti- 
cism. One  course.  Staff 

173.  Legend  and  Literature.  (AL)  Classical,  Celtic,  and /or  Germanic  legends  and  their 
places  in  later  literature.  Special  attention  to  monsters  in  literature  and  to  Arthurian  ma- 
terial. One  course.  L.  Patterson  or  Torgovnick 

174.  World  Theater:  Advanced.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Drama  151.  One  course.  Clum 

175.  Literary  Approaches  to  the  Bible.  (AL)  Selected  books  of  both  Testaments,  em- 
phasizing narrative  strategies,  literary  contexts,  and  Biblical  genres:  primeval  myth,  pa- 
triarchal history,  prophecy,  and  apocalyptic.  One  course.  Schzvartz 

176.  Introduction  to  Folklore.  (AL)  A  survey  of  the  materials  of  oral  tradition  (folk- 
tale, legend,  myth,  and  related  forms)  and  the  methods  of  investigation  in  the  field .  One 
course.  Nygard 

184         Courses  of  Instruction 


177.  Ballad  and  Folksong.  (AL)  Orally  transmitted  song  traditions,  British  and  Ameri- 
can. One  course.  Nygard 

178.  Literature  and  the  Other  Arts.  ( AL)  Selected  topics  in  the  study  of  the  interrela- 
tion of  literature  and  other  art  forms,  such  as  music  and  painting.  One  course.  Staff 

179S.  Special  Topics  in  a  Literary  Genre.  (AL)  One  course.  Staff 

180.  Writings  in  the  Rural  Tradition:  From  the  Caribbean  to  the  American  South. 
(AL)  See  C-L:  Literature  180.  One  course.  Willis 

181 .  Text  and  Performance.  ( AL)  The  relationship  between  the  written  dramatic  text 
and  theatrical  performance  of  plays  representing  different  periods,  styles,  and  national 
origins.  The  twelve  plays  chosen  from  offerings  in  London,  Stratford-on-Avon,  and  region- 
al festivals.  Papers  in  addition  to  classroom  analysis  of  texts  and  productions.  (London 
summer  program.)  C-L:  Drama  148.  One  course.  Clum 

184S.  Canadian  Theater.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Drama  146S;  also  C-L:  Canadian  Studies.  One 
course.  Staff 

186.  Canadian  Literature  in  English.  (AL)  Eighteenth  century  to  the  present.  Empha- 
sis on  the  twentieth  century  and  on  novels  by  Hugh  MacLennan,  Margaret  Laurence,  Mor- 
decai  Richler,  Margaret  Atwood,  Rudy  Wiebe,  and  others.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies  and 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

For  Juniors,  Seniors,  and  Graduates 

281.  Studies  in  Genre.  (AL)  History,  criticism,  and  theory  of  literary  genres  such  as 
the  novel,  pastoral,  epic,  and  drama.  One  course.  Staff 

283S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities.  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  283S; 
also  C-L:  Religion  269S  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Clark,  Orr,  Pope,  Sedgwick,  or 
Tompkins 

285.  Major  Texts  in  the  History  of  Literary  Criticism.  (AL)  A  survey  of  major  critical 
writings  from  Aristotle  to  the  present.  One  course.  Staff 

288.  Special  Topics.  (AL)  Subjects,  areas,  or  themes  that  cut  across  historical  eras, 
several  national  literatures,  or  genres.  One  course.  Staff 

289.  The  Theory  of  the  Novel.  ( AL)  Major  issues  in  the  history  and  theory  of  the  novel . 
One  course.  Moses  or  Torgovnick 

CULTURAL  STUDIES 

81.  Introduction  to  Film.  (AL)  Basic  film  theory  and  history  of  motion  picture  tech- 
nology. Introduction  to  experimental,  documentary,  and  narrative  forms  of  Third  World, 
European,  and  United  States  cinemas.  Economics  and  aesthetics.  C-L:  Drama  65  and  Film 
and  Video.  One  course.  Gaines 

82.  Introduction  to  Media  Studies.  (AL)  Film,  photography,  television,  and  other 
popular  forms.  Interdisciplinary  perspectives  on  television  news  and  serial  form,  pulp 
fiction  and  popular  music,  documentary  film  and  photography,  national  cinemas  and 
international  advertising,  avant-garde  performance  and  theatrical  acting,  communica- 
tions policy  and  legal  theory.  C-L:  Film  and  Video  and  Literature  102.  One  course.  Gaines 
and  staff 

120.  Advertising  and  Society.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  110;  also  C-L:  So- 
ciology 160  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  O'Barr  (cultural  anthropology),  J.  Smith 
(sociology),  or  Wilson  (sociology) 


English  (ENG)         185 


156.  American  Popular  Culture.  ( AL)  The  formation  of  American  popular  culture  in 
different  historical  periods.  Cultural  forms  including  music,  movies,  fashion,  and  leisure. 
C-L:  Literature  156.  One  course.  Radway  or  Willis 

157, 158.  American  Literature  and  Culture.  (AL)  Relationship  of  literature  to  the  other 
arts,  American  intellectual  history,  religion,  science,  technology,  and  architecture.  157: 
to  the  Civil  War.  158:  from  the  Civil  War  to  1960.  One  course  each.  K.  Williams 

182.  American  Film  Genres.  (AL)  Introduction  to  study  of  popular  film  and  televi- 
sion as  narrative  form  and  industrial  product.  Overview  of  the  musical,  comedy,  west- 
ern, and  gangster  genre.  Analysis  of  film  stars,  history  of  film  technology,  and  study  of 
audience.  C-L:  Drama  138  and  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Clum,  Gaines,  or  Moses 

183S.  Film  and  Video  Theory  and  Practice.  (AL)  Film  and  video  production  in  con- 
junction with  comparative  history  and  theory  of  these  technologies.  Students  produce 
works  in  basic  Super  8  mm,  16  mm,  and  small  format  video  production .  Prerequisite :  Dra- 
ma 65,  English  81,  or  Literature  177.  C-L:  Institute  of  the  Arts  115S,  Drama  131S,  and  Film 
and  Video.  One  course.  Staff 

185.  Studies  in  Film  History.  (AL)  Close  examination  of  a  particular  issue,  period, 
national  cinema,  or  technological  development.  C-L:  Drama  136,  Film  and  Video,  and 
Literature  187.  One  course.  Clum,  Gaines,  Jameson,  or  Moses 

187.  Melodrama  and  Soap  Opera.  (AL)  History  of  melodrama  from  Victorian  theatrical 
production  to  television  soap  opera.  Close  study  of  popular  women's  fiction,  silent  cine- 
ma, the  thirties  and  forties  woman's  picture,  and  fifties  technicolor  melodrama.  C-L:  Dra- 
ma 137  and  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Clum  or  Gaines 

188.  Narrative  Film  and  the  Novel.  (AL)  Continuities  in  the  nineteenth-century  re- 
alist novel,  literary  naturalism,  and  classical  narrative  cinema.  Nonnarrative  experimental 
forms,  pulp  fiction,  and  television  specialization.  C-L:  Drama  135,  Film  and  Video,  and 
Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Clum,  Gaines,  Moses,  or  Torgovnick 

189S.  Special  Topics  in  Film.  (AL)  A  major  genre,  period,  or  director.  Prerequisite: 
Drama  65  or  English  81.  C-L:  Drama  197S  and  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Clum,  Gaines, 
or  Moses 

190.  Television,  Technology,  and  Culture.  (AL)  Television  criticism  and  its  relation 
to  film  theory.  Mainstream  television  genres,  the  historical  avant-garde,  and  video  art. 
History  of  the  technology  and  cross-cultural  comparison  of  television  programming. 
Prerequisite:  Drama  65,  English  81,  or  Literature  177.  C-L:  Drama  139.  One  course.  Gaines 

INDEPENDENT  STUDY 

191,  192,  193,  194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Students 
should  consult  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  as  early  as  possible  in  the  preced- 
ing term.  One  course  each.  Staff 

195T.  Tutorial.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Students  should  consult  the  Director 
of  Undergraduate  Studies  as  early  as  possible  in  the  preceding  term.  One  course.  Staff 

197S,  198S.  Honors  Program  Sequence.  See  Honors  under  THE  MAJOR.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

RELATED  TOPICS 

71.  Essentials  of  Public  Speaking.  See  C-L:  Drama  81.  One  course.  Hill  orO'Dor 

71.  Essentials  of  Public  Speaking.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  English  71 
or  Drama  81.  See  C-L:  Drama  82.  One  course.  Hill  orO'Dor 


186         Courses  of  Instruction 


73S.  Argumentation.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Drama  83S.  One 
course.  O'Dor 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
12.  Intermediate  Composition 

THE  MAJOR 

Basic  Requirements.  One  course  from  the  following  list  of  introductory  courses:  Eng- 
lish 51,  52,  61S,  62S,  81,  82,  91,  92,  93,  93S.  Except  by  written  permission  of  the  Director 
of  Undergraduate  Studies,  the  course  must  be  taken  in  the  first  term  after  the  major  has 
been  declared  (unless  it  has  been  taken  earlier).  It  may  be  taken  concurrently  with  ad- 
vanced courses. 

Major  Requirements.  Eight  or  more  courses  at  the  100-  or  200-level,  which  are  to  be  or- 
ganized into  a  coherent  plan  of  study  approved  by  the  student's  advisor.  One  of  the  courses 
must  be  a  100-level  seminar;  one  of  the  courses  must  be  in  a  major  author— Chaucer  (Eng- 
lish 141),  Shakespeare  (English  143  or  144),  or  Milton  (English  145). 

No  later  than  the  second  semester  of  the  student's  junior  year,  the  student  must  file 
a  plan  of  study  (approved  by  the  student's  advisor)  with  the  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies  in  English .  Typical  nine-course  plans  of  study  include  (but  are  not  limited  to)  four 
or  five  courses  in  such  core  areas  as  Afro-American  literature,  American  literature,  Brit- 
ish literature,  contemporary  writers,  creative  writing,  cultural  studies,  drama,  linguis- 
tics, literary  theory,  the  novel,  poetry,  and  women  writers.  Majors  are  encouraged  to  take 
a  broad  range  of  department  courses;  students  thus  should  select  their  electives  with  va- 
riety as  an  important  criterion.  The  plan  of  study  may  be  altered  at  any  time  with  the  con- 
sent of  the  advisor  or  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

Foreign  Languages.  The  department  recommends  that  students  majoring  in  English 
complete  at  least  two  years  of  college-level  study,  or  the  equivalent,  of  a  foreign  language. 
Students  contemplating  graduate  work  in  English  should  note  that  many  master's  pro- 
grams require  examination  in  one  foreign  language  and  that  doctoral  programs  commonly 
require  examination  in  two.  Students  interested  in  linguistics  are  strongly  urged  to  study 
at  least  one  non-Indo-European  language. 

Teacher  Certification.  Each  year  a  number  of  Duke  English  majors  earn  certificates  as 
secondary  school  teachers.  While  licensed  by  the  state  of  North  Carolina,  such  majors 
are  essentially  certified  for  other  states  as  well.  Also,  such  training  is  urged  for  those  who 
consider  private-school  teaching,  since  most  private  or  parochial  schools,  other  things 
equal,  would  prefer  the  experienced  and  trained  candidate. 

Such  licensing  may  be  gained  as  part  of  the  English  major  and  is  not  as  time  consum- 
ing as  sometimes  believed.  Candidates  should  select  a  major  plan  of  study  in  American 
literature  and  choose  Shakespeare  as  their  major  author,  as  these  emphases  correspond 
to  the  material  of  most  secondary  English  programs.  Also  required  are  certain  other  Eng- 
lish courses,  and  two  courses  in  education .  The  last  semester  of  the  senior  year  is  devot- 
ed to  the  Student  Teaching  Block,  including  two  special,  accelerated  courses  and  eight 
weeks  of  full-time  teaching  and  observation  in  the  schools,  working  with  a  selected  teacher 
and  with  Duke  faculty.  This  experience  leads  to  an  English-teaching  certificate  to  accom- 
pany the  bachelor's  degree. 

Anyone  considering  English  teaching  should  confer  with  the  Program  in  Education 
as  soon  as  possible,  to  help  plan  out  the  program. 

Honors.  For  English  majors  in  their  senior  year,  the  department  offers  an  honors  pro- 
gram consisting  of  a  two-semester  sequence— English  197S  and  198S.  These  honors  semi- 
nars raise  questions  about  literary  interpretation,  introduce  students  to  the  principles  of 
sustained  research,  and  provide  a  forum  in  which  to  discuss  the  writing  of  the  honors 
thesis.  To  earn  honors,  students  in  the  program  must  present  a  long  thesis— or  its  equiva- 
lent in  imaginative  writing— by  the  end  of  the  second  semester.  The  department's  Honors 
Committee  will  evaluate  the  theses  and  award  honors  according  to  University  guidelines. 

English  (ENG)         187 


Course  credit  for  individual  semesters  (but  not  honors)  will  be  given  if  the  work  satisfies 
the  course  requirement  but  falls  short  of  the  honors  standard .  Students  who  want  to  en- 
ter the  program  must  apply  to  the  department's  Honors  Committee  by  February  1  of  their 
junior  year.  Applicants  must  have  a  B+  average  in  English  courses;  previous  grades, 
recommendations  by  teachers,  a  sample  of  the  students'  writing,  and  the  students'  own 
statements  of  purpose  in  their  applications  will  determine  admission. 

Film  and  Video  Program 

Assistant  Professor  Gaines,  Director 

A  certificate,  but  not  a  major,  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  Program  in  Film  and  Video  is  an  interdisciplinary  course  of  study  which  in- 
troduces students  to  the  critical  analysis  of  communications  technologies :  film,  photog- 
raphy, and  television.  Practical  production  experience  is  also  available  through  course 
work  and  internships.  Courses  in  this  area  are  offered  through  twelve  different  academ- 
ic departments  and  programs  and  taught  by  twenty  faculty  members.  The  program  also 
sponsors  speakers,  film  and  television  screenings,  and  exhibits  in  cooperation  with  the 
Center  for  Documentary  Photography,  the  Institute  of  the  Arts,  and  the  Center  for  Inter- 
national Studies. 

Students  working  toward  a  certificate  in  film  and  video  declare  a  major  in  an  academic 
department.  To  qualify  for  the  certificate,  students  take  five  courses  from  the  approved 
list  published  in  this  bulletin .  One  of  these  courses  must  be  an  introductory  course  selected 
from  those  listed  below.  Program  courses  are  described  under  the  listings  of  the  various 
departments. 

Note:  The  course  of  study  in  the  Film  and  Video  Program  is  distinct  from  that  of  the 
Drama  Program.  The  Film  and  Video  Program  emphasizes  history,  theory,  and  criticism 
with  a  production  component.  The  Drama  Program  emphasizes  creative  application  and 
production  with  an  academic  component.  Students  may  pursue  both.  See  the  listings 
under  Drama  Program. 

Introductory  Courses 

English  81.  Introduction  to  Film.  C-L:  Drama  65.  Gaines 

English  82.  Introduction  to  Media  Studies.  C-L:  Literature  102.  Gaines  and  staff 
English  182.  American  Film  Genres.  C-L:  Drama  138.  Clum,  Gaines,  or  Moses 

Cultural  Anthropology  110.  Advertising  and  Society.  C-L:  English  120,  Sociology  160,  and  Women's  Studies. 
W.  O 'Bun- 
Cultural  Anthropology 

118S.  The  Language  of  Advertising.  C-L:  Linguistics.  W.  O'Barr 

Drama 

HIS,  112S.  Playwriting  I,  II.  Ball 

English 

156.  American  Popular  Culture.  C-L:  Literature  156.  Radwayand  Willis 

183S.  Film  and  Video  Theory  and  Practice.  C-L:  Institute  of  the  Arts  115S  and  Drama  131S.  Staff 

185.  Studies  in  Film  History.  C-L:  Literature  187  and  Drama  136.  Clum,  Gaines,  or  Moses 

187.  Melodrama  and  Soap  Opera.  C-L:  Drama  137.  Clum  or  Gaines 

188.  Narrative  Film  and  the  Novel.  C-L:  Drama  135  and  Women's  Studies.  Clum,  Gaines,  Moses,  or  Torgovnick 
189S.  Special  Topics  in  Film.  C-L:  Drama  197S.  Clum  or  Gaines 

190.  Television,  Technology,  and  Culture.  C-L:  Drama  139.  Gaines 

History 

127S.  History  and  the  Visual  Image.  TePaske  or  Wood 

Institute  of  the  Arts 

110S.  Video  and  Performance.  Desmond 
Dance  181S.  Special  Topics.  Desmond 

Literature 

177.  Film  Theory.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  Gaines 

185.  Psychoanalysis,  Literature,  and  Film.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  Gaines 

188        Courses  of  Instruction 


Political  Science 

153,  154.  Politics  and  the  Media  of  Mass  Communication.  Paletz 
203S.  Politics  and  the  Media  of  Mass  Communication.  Paletz 

Public  Policy  Studies 

154S.  Journalism  and  Public  Policy.  Stevens 

163S.  Telecommunications  Policy  and  Regulation.  Geller 

176S.  American  Communities:  A  Photographic  Approach.  Harris 

180.  Writing  for  the  Media.  Staff 

186.  Shaping  the  News.  Barber 

240S.  Analyzing  the  News.  Staff 

Romance  Languages 

French  122.  The  French  Film.  Staff 

French  170.  Film  and  the  French  Novel.  Jameson 

Sociology 

170.  Mass  Communication.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies  and  Comparative  Area  Studies.  Smith 
182.  The  Media  in  Comparative  Perspective.  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  182  and  Political  Science  180. 
Paletz  or  Smith 

Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  Courses  <fes> 

The  professional  school  courses  listed  below  are  described  fully  in  the  Bulletin  of  Duke 
University:  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies.  They  are  open  to  undergraduates 
by  consent  of  the  instructor.  No  major  is  offered  to  undergraduates. 

Students  who  are  preparing  for  professional  careers  in  natural  resources  and  the  en- 
vironment should  refer  to  the  section  on  undergraduate-professional  combination  pro- 
grams in  this  bulletin. 

191,  192.  Independent  Study.  Open  to  qualified  juniors  and  seniors  with  consent  of  the  student's  major 
advisor  and  the  instructor.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

200.  Student  Projects.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  dean  of  the  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies. 

Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

201.  Field  Studies.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

204.  Forest  Inventory,  Growth,  and  Yield.  One  course.  Davison 

205.  Silviculture.  One  course.  Oren 

207L.  Forest  Pest  Management.  One  course.  Stambaugh 

210L.  Forest  Pathology.  One  course.  Stambaugh 

211L.  Applied  Ecology  and  Ecosystem  Management.  One  course.  Richardson 

212.  Ecological  Toxicology.  One  course.  Di  Giulio 

213.  Forest  Ecosystems.  One  course.  Richter 

215.  Environmental  Physiology.  One  course.  Di  Giulio  and  Oren 

216.  Applied  Population  Ecology.  One  course.  Maguire 

218.  Barrier  Island  Ecology.  Prerequisite:  course  in  general  ecology.  (Given  at  Beaufort.)  C-L:  Biology  218 

and  Marine  Sciences.  One  and  one-half  courses.  Staff 
221.  Soil  Resources.  One  course.  Richter 

230.  Weather  and  Climate.  One  course.  Knoerr 

231.  Environmental  Climatology.  One  course.  Staff 

232.  Microclimatology.  C-L:  Biology  232.  One  course.  Knoerr 
234.  Watershed  Hydrology.  One  course.  Staff 

236.  Water  Quality  Management.  One  course.  Reckhow 

237.  Watershed  Modeling  and  Management.  Prerequisite:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  234.  One 

course.  Staff 

242.  Environmental  Chemistry.  One  course.  Faust 

261.  Remote  Sensing  for  Resource  Management.  One  course.  Davison 

267.  Wildland  and  Wildlife  Management.  One  course.  Boyce  and  Maguire 

270.  Resource  Economics  and  Policy.  Prerequisite :  introductory  course  in  economics  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  272.  One  course.  Kramer 

283.  Environmental  Policy  and  Values.  One  course.  Staff 

285.  Land  Use  Principles  and  Policy.  One  course.  Healy 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

194.  Conserving  Natural  Resources 
208.  Fire  Behavior  and  Use 

Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  Courses  (FES)        189 


French 

For  courses  in  French,  see  Romance  Languages. 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics 

Professor  Antonovics,  Director  (botany);  Professors  Amos  (immunology),  Bastia  (microbi- 
ology), Boynton  (botany),  Counce  (cell  biology),  Gillham  (zoology),  Gross  (biochemis- 
try), Joklik  (microbiology),  Kredich  (medicine  and  biochemistry),  Modrich  (biochemis- 
try), Moses  (cell  biology),  Nevins  (microbiology),  Nicklas  (zoology),  Ruderman  (zoology), 
C.  Ward  (zoology),  F.  Ward  (immunology),  and  Webster  (biochemistry);  Associate  Profes- 
sors Endow  (microbiology),  Greene  (biochemistry),  Greenleaf  (biochemistry),  Hershfield 
(medicine  and  biochemistry),  Hsieh  (biochemistry),  Keene  (microbiology),  Laurie  (zool- 
ogy), Linney  (microbiology),  Rausher  (zoology),  Steege  (biochemistry),  and  Uyenoyama 
(zoology);  Assistant  Professors  Burdett  (microbiology),  Holmes  (medicine  and  biochemis- 
try), Johnston  (botany),  Kaufman  (biochemistry),  Kohorn  (botany),  Kreuzer  (microbiol- 
ogy), Ostrowski  (microbiology  and  immunology),  Pickup  (microbiology),  Schachat  (cell 
biology),  and  Swain  (microbiology);  Adjunct  Professors  Drake  (National  Institute  of 
Environmental  Health  Sciences),  Judd  (National  Institute  of  Environmental  Health 
Sciences),  Kunkel  (National  Institute  of  Environmental  Health  Sciences),  Lucchesi 
(University  of  North  Carolina),  Resnick  (National  Institute  of  Environmental  Health 
Science),  and  Sugino  (National  Institute  of  Environmental  Health  Sciences) 

A  certificate,  but  not  a  major,  is  available  in  this  program. 

Acceptance  into  the  certificate  program  is  by  arrangement  with  the  Director  of  the 
Genetics  Program.  It  is  open  to  majors  in  all  disciplines.  The  program  offers  students  an 
opportunity  to  gain  expertise  in  modern  genetics  with  a  view  to  its  application  to  biolo- 
gy, medicine,  public  policy,  law,  or  engineering.  The  courses  in  the  certificate  program 
are  taught  by  members  of  the  University  Program  in  Genetics.  Further  details  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  Genetics  Program  office. 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  under  the  supervision 
of  faculty  instructors  from  the  University  Program  in  Genetics,  subject  to  the  consent  of 
the  instructor  and  of  the  Director  of  the  Genetics  Program.  Variable  credit.  Staff  (Genetics 
Program) 

For  descriptions  of  the  courses  below  consult  the  listings  under  the  specified 
departments. 

Required  Courses: 

Introductory  Biology  (Biology  14  or  Biology  21,  22) 

Principles  of  Genetics  (Biology  180) 

An  advanced  course  in  molecular  genetics,  for  example. 

Molecular  Biology  (Biology  205) 

Molecular  Biology  II.  Nucleic  Acids  (Biochemistry  268) 

Molecular  Biology  of  Development  (Biology  164) 
Independent  study  with  a  member  of  the  Genetics  Program  (University  Program  in  Genetics  191, 
192) 

Additional  Courses: 

Any  Genetics  Program  courses  listed  below. 

Also:  Introductory  Biochemistry  (Biochemistry  227) 

Principles  of  Cell  Biology  (Biology  160) 

Advanced  Cell  Biology  (Biology  269) 

Molecular  Biology.  (Biology  205.)  One  course.  Johnston 

The  Molecular  Biology  of  Development.  (Biology  164.)  One  course.  Ruderman 

Principles  of  Genetics.  (Biology  180.)  One  course.  Antonovics,  Boynton,  Gillham,  and  Laurie 

Genetic  Mechanisms.  (Biochemistry  215.)  One  course.  Webster  and  staff 

Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids.  (Biochemistry  268.)  One  course.  Modrich  and  staff 

Extrachromosomal  Inheritance.  (Biology  283.)  One  course.  Boynton  and  Gillham 

190         Courses  of  Instruction 


Ecological  Genetics.  (Biology  285S.)  One  course.  Antonovics 

Evolutionary  Mechanisms.  (Biology  286.)  One  course.  Antonovics,  Uyenoyama,  and  H.  Wilbur 

Independent  Study  and  Special  Problems.  (Biology  191, 192,  224T,  225T,  and  226T).  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor  and  the  appropriate  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  prior  to  registration. 

Mathematical  Population  Genetics.  (Biology  288.)  Calculus  required;  statistics  and  linear  algebra  recom- 
mended. One  course.  Uyenoyama 

Geology  <geo) 

Professor  Perkins,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Corliss,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Professors  Heron,  Pilkey,  and  Rosendahl;  Associate  Professors  Baker,  Johnson,  and  Kar- 
son;  Assistant  Professors  Boudreau  and  Strelitz;  Instructor  Klein 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

The  department  offers  introductory  and  advanced  courses  in  all  branches  of  geol- 
ogy including  petrology,  geochemistry,  geophysics,  paleontology,  sedimentology  and  ma- 
rine geology.  The  degree  requirements  emphasize  a  broad  knowledge  of  both  geology 
and  the  associated  physical  sciences.  An  option  is  available  for  one  semester  of  study  at 
the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  in  Beaufort,  North  Carolina,  to  fulfill  elective  re- 
quirements for  the  degree.  The  B.S.  degree  in  geology  provides  a  strong  background  for 
graduate  work  in  earth  sciences;  the  B.S.  and  A.B.  degrees  provide  background  for  work 
in  fields  allied  to  geology— environmental  law,  hydrology,  waste  disposal,  engineering 
geology,  and  secondary  education. 

10S.  Analysis  of  Outcrops.  (NS)  Field  interpretation  of  geologic  features.  Includes 
four  field  trips.  Prerequisite:  Geology  41  (may  be  taken  concurrently).  Half  course.  Staff 

41.  Introduction  to  Geology.  (NS)  Earth  composition,  processes,  and  structure.  One 
course.  Heron  and  staff 

43S.  Application  of  Geologic  Principles.  (NS)  Mineral  and  rock  classification,  topo- 
graphic and  geologic  map  interpretation.  Prerequisite:  Geology  41  (may  be  taken  con- 
currently). Half  course.  Staff 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

53.  Introductory  Oceanography.  (NS)  See  C-L:  Biology  53.  One  course.  Pilkey  and 
Searles 

72.  History  of  the  Earth.  (NS)  Physical  and  biological  evolution  of  the  earth  from  the 
viewpoint  of  global  tectonics.  Primarily  for  science  majors.  Fee  for  field  trips.  Weekend 
field  trip  through  the  Appalachians,  and  Saturday  field  trip  through  the  Deep  River  Tri- 
assic  Basin.  Prerequisite:  Geology  41  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Corliss 

99L.  Gibraltar  to  the  Sahara:  Exploring  Geology  in  Morocco.  (NS)  An  introduction 
to  practical  geology:  examining  minerals,  rocks,  fossils,  geologic  maps  and  remote  sens- 
ing. One  week  of  practical  work  followed  by  three  weeks  of  fieldwork  in  the  Rif  moun- 
tains of  northern  Morocco,  the  Middle  and  High  Atlas  of  central  Morocco,  and  the  Anti- 
Atlas  range  of  the  Moroccan  Sahara.  Taught  in  summer  program  in  Morocco.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Baker  and  Karson 

105.  Fundamentals  of  Mineralogy.  (NS)  Crystal  chemistry,  crystal  physics,  mineral 
identification,  and  genesis.  Lectures  or  recitations,  laboratory,  and  field  trips.  Prerequi- 
site: Chemistry  12  (may  be  taken  concurrently).  One  course.  Klein 

106.  Igneous  and  Metamorphic  Rocks.  (NS)  Silicate  mineralogy,  theory  of  origin  and 
classification  of  igneous  and  metamorphic  rocks,  and  rock  identification.  Lectures  and 
laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Geology  105.  One  course.  Boudreau 

Geology  (GEO)         191 


108.  Sedimentary  Rocks.  (NS)  Authigenic  and  detrital  minerals,  theory  of  origin  and 
classification  of  sedimentary  rocks,  and  rock  identification.  Lecture,  laboratory,  and  field 
trips.  Prerequisite:  Geology  72  or  105  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Heron 

109S.  Marine  Sediments.  (NS)  Sedimentary  processes  in  nearshore,  shelf,  and  deep- 
sea  environments.  Emphasis  on  field  methods  and  laboratory  analyses.  (Given  at 
Beaufort.)  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  One  course.  Johnson 

111.  Stratigraphic  Principles  and  Applications.  (NS)  Prerequisites:  Geology  72  and 
108  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Perkins 

130.  Principles  of  Structural  Geology.  (NS)  Description,  origin,  and  interpretation 
of  primary  and  secondary  geologic  rock  structures.  Prerequisites:  Geology  106  and  108. 
One  course.  Karson 

145.  Invertebrate  Paleontology.  (NS)  Biologic  and  stratigraphic  relationships  of  in- 
vertebrates and  their  phylogeny.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Geology  72  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  Corliss 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  or  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
juniors  and  seniors  by  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  supervising  in- 
structor. One  course  each.  Staff 

195.  Independent  Study  for  Nonmajors.  Open  to  qualified  juniors  and  seniors  upon 
approval  of  the  departmental  faculty.  One  course.  Staff 

196S.  Beach  and  Island  Geological  Processes.  (NS)  Processes  affecting  evolution  of 
beaches  and  barrier  islands  with  emphasis  on  the  effect  of  constructions.  (Given  at 
Beaufort  on  three  weekends.)  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  Half  course.  Pilkey 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

200.  Beach  and  Coastal  Processes.  (NS)  The  study  of  sedimentary  processes  and  ge- 
omorphology  of  nearshore  environments  with  emphasis  on  both  developed  and  undeve- 
loped barrier  island  systems.  One  course.  Pilkey 

203.  Physical  Oceanography.  (NS)  Physical  processes  in  the  oceans:  the  physical 
properties  of  seawater,  the  dynamics  of  currents,  waves,  and  tides,  and  the  transmission 
of  light  and  sound  in  the  sea.  (Given  at  Beaufort.)  Prerequisite:  Physics  41  or  51 .  C-L:  Ma- 
rine Sciences.  Half  course.  Johnson 

204.  Chemical  Oceanography.  (NS)  An  introduction  to  chemical  processes  in  the 
oceans :  including  factors  controlling  the  major  ion  composition  of  sea  salt,  the  distribu- 
tion of  dissolved  gases  in  seawater,  sediment-seawater  interactions,  and  seawater-basalt 
interactions  at  oceanic  ridge  crests.  (Given  at  Beaufort.)  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  11  and 
Geology  203  (may  be  taken  concurrently).  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  One  course.  Staff 

205S.  Geological  Oceanography.  (NS)  The  geology  of  ocean  basins,  including  ori- 
gin, bottom  physiography,  sediment  distribution,  and  sedimentary  processes.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  taken  Geology  206S.  (Given  at  Beaufort.)  C-L:  Marine  Sciences. 
One  course.  Johnson 

206S.  Principles  of  Geological  Oceanography.  (NS)  Geological  aspects  of  the  ocean 
basins  including  coastal  to  deep  water  sediment  types  and  sedimentation  processes,  sea 
floor  physiography  and  environmental  problems.  One  course.  Pilkey 

208S.  Paleoceanography.  (NS)  Geology,  paleoceanography,  and  evolution  of  the 
oceans,  ocean  basins,  and  marine  biota  based  on  analysis  of  deep-sea  sedimentary  se- 
quences. One  course.  Corliss 

209S.  Marine  Sediments.  (NS)  Same  as  109S  except  additional  term  paper  required. 
C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  One  course.  Johnson 

192        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


212.  Carbonate  Facies  Analysis:  Recent  and  Ancient.  (NS)  Origin,  distribution,  and 
diagenetic  alteration  of  recent  carbonate  sediments  and  their  ancient  analogs.  Prerequi- 
site: Geology  111.  One  course.  Perkins 

214S.  Sedimentary  Petrography.  (NS)  Descriptive  and  interpretive  analysis  of  sedi- 
ments and  sedimentary  rocks  in  thin  section,  with  an  emphasis  on  diagenesis.  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Perkins 

215.  Clastics  Facies  Analysis:  Recent  and  Ancient.  (NS)  Modern  clastic  deposition- 
al  systems  and  their  ancient  analogs.  Prerequisite:  Geology  111.  One  course.  Heron 

216.  Field  Analysis  of  South  Florida  Carbonates.  (NS)  Analysis  of  recent  sediments 
and  organisms  and  their  Pleistocene  analogs.  One-week  field  trip.  Pass/fail  grading  only. 
Prerequisite:  Geology  111  or  consent  of  instructor.  Half  course.  Perkins 

217.  Field  Analysis  of  Ancient  Sedimentary  Sequences.  (NS)  Regional  analysis  of 
ancient  clastic  and  carbonate  systems.  One-week  field  trip.  Pass/fail  grading  only.  Prereq- 
uisite: Geology  111  or  consent  of  instructor.  Half  course.  Heron  and  Perkins 

219.  Sediment  Transport.  (NS)  How  river,  ocean,  and  wind  currents  move  solid  par- 
ticles. Dimensional  analysis,  near-bed  turbulence,  boundary  layer  forces,  initiation  and 
rates  of  particle  movement,  bed-load  vs.  suspended-load,  erosion,  deposition,  sorting, 
evolution  and  motion  of  dunes  and  other  bed  forms.  Emphasis  on  physical  understand- 
ing of  phenomena  with  application  to  environmental  issues  (for  example,  dust  genera- 
tion, desertification),  engineering  questions  (for  example,  silting  of  channels)  and  geo- 
logical problems  (for  example,  ripple  laminae,  size-sorting).  Prerequisites:  Civil  and 
Environmental  Engineering  122  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Haff 

230S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Structural  Geology  and  Tectonics.  (NS)  Selected  topics 
related  to  the  deformation  of  rocks,  ranging  from  microstructure  to  plate  tectonics.  Prereq- 
uisite: Geology  130  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Karson 

233.  Oceanic  Crust  and  Ophiolites.  (NS)  Structure,  tectonics,  petrology,  and 
geochemistry  of  oceanic  spreading  environments  and  ophiolite  complexes.  Prerequisites: 
Geology  106  and  130  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Karson 

236.  Lithosphere  Plate  Boundaries.  (NS)  Plate  tectonics  and  the  geological  and 
geophysical  expression  of  orogenic  belts,  spreading  centers,  transform  faults,  subduc- 
tion  zones.  Prerequisite:  Geology  130  or  consent  of  instructors.  One  course.  Karson  and 
Rosendahl 

237S.  Structure  and  Evolution  of  the  Appalachian  Orogen.  (NS)  Overview  of 
sedimentation,  deformation,  and  metamorphism  responsible  for  the  development  of  the 
Appalachian  Mountain  Belt  from  Newfoundland  to  Alabama  in  the  context  of  plate  tec- 
tonics. Prerequisites :  Geology  106, 108,  and  130  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Karson 

249.  Marine  Micropaleontology.  (NS)  Introduction  to  marine  microfossils,  basic  prin- 
ciples of  micropaleontology  and  stable  isotope  geochemistry  with  applications  to 
paleoceanography.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  One  course.  Corliss 

251.  Physics  of  the  Earth.  (NS)  Origin,  primeval  evolution,  rotation,  potential  fields, 
paleomagnetism,  gravity  anomalies,  earthquake  seismology,  thermal  properties,  inter- 
nal structure  of  the  earth,  and  thermodynamics  of  plate  motions.  Prerequisites:  Geolo- 
gy 41,  Chemistry  12,  Mathematics  32,  and  Physics  52;  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 

Strelitz 

252.  Exploration  Seismology.  (NS)  Elastic  wave  theory,  reflection  and  refraction  of 
acoustic  waves,  field  methodologies,  computer  processing,  and  interpretation  of  seismic 
data.  Prerequisites:  Geology  41,  Mathematics  32,  Computer  Science  51,  and  Physics  52; 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Rosendahl 

Geology  (GEO)        193 


255.  Seismic  Interpretation.  (NS)  Basic  rock  physics,  seismic  expression  of  structur- 
al styles,  seismic  facies  analysis,  maps  generated  from  seismic  data,  and  basin-wide  seis- 
mic stratigraphic  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Geology  251;  corequisite:  Geology  252  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  Rosendahl  and  staff 

260S.  Hydrocarbon  Exploration.  (NS)  Origin,  migration,  and  accumulation  of 
hydrocarbons  with  emphasis  on  exploration  techniques.  Prerequisites:  Geology  111  and 
251.  One  course.  Perkins  and  Rosendahl 

270.  Sedimentary  Geochemistry.  (NS)  Chemistry  of  aqueous  solutions  and  authigenic 
minerals  in  sedimentary  systems.  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  12  and  Mathematics  32.  One 
course.  Baker 

271.  Isotope  Geochemistry.  (NS)  Theory  and  applications  of  stable  and  radioactive 
isotope  distributions  in  nature.  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  12  and  Mathematics  32.  One 
course.  Baker 

TJ1.  Biogeochemistry.  (NS)  See  C-L:  Biology  272.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  12  or 
equivalent.  One  course.  Schlesinger 

275.  Economic  Geology.  (NS)  Geology  and  geochemistry  of  ore  deposits.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Boudreau 

281S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Igneous  Petrology.  (NS)  Current  topics  in  igneous  petrol- 
ogy including  andesite  petrogenesis,  ocean  ridge  basalts,  and  experimental  petrology. 
Prerequisites:  Geology  105  and  106.  One  course.  Staff 

283S.  Experimental  Methods  in  Geology.  (NS)  Theory  and  application  of  experimen- 
tal techniques  in  igneous  and  metamorphic  petrology  and  high-  and  low-temperature 
geochemistry,  with  examples  from  recent  literature.  Prerequisites:  Geology  105  and  106 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

292.  Computer  Methods  in  Geology.  (NS)  Techniques  used  in  the  geological  sciences 
including  simulation  and  forward  modeling,  inverse  and  least  squares  methods,  statistical 
methods  and  exploratory  data  analysis  as  well  as  graphics.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics 
32  and  Computer  Science  51,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Strelitz 

295S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology.  (NS)  Topics,  instructors,  and  credits  to  be  arranged 
each  semester.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
1.  Introductory  Geology.  (NS) 
253S.  Geophysics.  (NS) 

THE  MAJOR 

For  the  A.B.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Geology  41  and  72;  Chemistry  11  and  12;  and  Mathematics  31  and  32. 
Major  Requirements.  A  minimum  of  eight  geology  courses  above  the  introductory  lev- 
els, including  105, 106,  108,  111,  130,  and  145. 

For  the  B.S.  Degree 

The  Department  of  Geology  offers  two  programs: 

Geology:  Preparatory  to  Advanced  Studies  in  Geology 

Prerequisites.  Geology  41  and  72;  Chemistry  11  and  12;  Mathematics 31  and  32;  Phys- 
ics 41  and  42  or  51  and  52;  and  Computer  Science  51. 


194         Courses  of  Instruction 


Major  Requirements.  Required  courses  include  105, 106, 108,  111,  130, 145,  a  field  course 
normally  taken  during  the  summer  after  the  junior  year,  and  three  other  geology  courses 
above  the  introductory  level. 

Geology:  Preparatory  to  Advanced  Studies  in  Oceanography 

Prerequisites.  Geology  41  and  72;  Geology  53  (or  206);  Chemistry  11  and  12;  Physics 
41  and  42  or  51  and  52;  Biology  21L,  22L;  Mathematics  31  and  32;  and  two  courses  of  science 
electives. 

Major  Requirements.  A  minimum  of  seven  geology  courses  above  the  introductory  level, 
including  105, 106,  108,  111,  130,  and  145. 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

Associate  Professor  Borchardt,  Chairman;  Assistant  Professor  Bessent,  Director  of  Under- 
graduate Studies  and  Supervisor  of  Freshman  Instruction;  Professor  Rolleston;  Associate 
Professor  Alt;  Assistant  Professors  Morton  and  Rasmussen;  Professor  Emeritus  Phelps; 
Lecturers  Dowell,  Johns,  and  Koeppel;  Instructor  Bernstein 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

GERMAN  (GER) 

1-2.  Elementary  German.  (FL)  Practice  in  understanding,  speaking,  reading,  and 
writing.  Classroom  techniques  are  combined  with  those  of  the  language  laboratory  and 
the  computer.  Two  courses.  Bessent  and  staff 

14.  Intensive  German.  (FL)  Accelerated  introduction  to  German,  combining  in  one 
semester  the  work  of  German  1-2.  Classroom  theory  and  practice  with  extended  exposure 
to  language  laboratory  and  computer  programmed  instruction .  Prerequisite :  consent  of 
Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  Two  courses.  Bernstein 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

63.  Intermediate  German.  (FL)  Prerequisite:  German  1-2  or  equivalent.  One  course. 
Bernstein  and  staff 

German  63  is  usually  followed  by  76, 100S,  101,  or  117S. 

65-66.  German  in  Review.  (FL)  Grammar  review,  reading  of  literary  and  cultural  texts, 
oral  practice,  and  laboratory.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  German  63.  Prerequi- 
site: German  1-2,  14,  or  equivalent.  Two  courses.  Dowell 

76.  Advanced  Intermediate  German.  (FL)  Specially  designed  to  raise  proficiency  levels 
in  speaking  and  reading.  Prerequisite:  German  63, 66,  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Koeppel 

100S.  Business  German.  (FL)  Introduction  to  the  language  of  commerce  and  indus- 
try; modes  of  expression  for  technology  and  marketing .  Prerequisite :  consent  of  instructor. 
One  course.  Koeppel 

101.  Introduction  to  German  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Readings  from  representative  Ger- 
man authors.  One  course.  Bessent 

102.  German  for  Legal  Studies.  (FL)  Legal  terminology  and  concepts;  reading  of  le- 
gal documents  (codes,  cases,  contracts,  wills);  communication  about  legal  and  law-related 
issues.  Prerequisites:  German  63  or  equivalent  and  consent  of  instructors.  C-L:  Law  102. 
One  course.  H.  Bernstein  and  W.  Bernstein 

103S,  104S.  Undergraduate  Seminars.  (AL,  FL)  Topics  vary.  One  course  each.  Staff 

105.  Composition.  (FL)  Syntax  with  practice  in  the  elements  of  German  expository 
style,  recommended  for  majors.  One  course.  Bessent  and  staff 

109S.  Nineteenth-Century  Prose  Fiction.  (AL,  FL)  Emphasis  on  shorter  forms: 
novelle,  fairy  tale,  legend.  One  course.  Bessent 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature     195 


115S.  Drama.  (AL,  FL)  Development  of  German  drama  and  stagecraft  from  Sturm  und 
Drang  to  Brecht's  Epic  Theater.  C-L:  Drama  124S.  One  course.  Alt 

117S,  118S.  German  Conversation  and  Composition.  (FL)  Primarily  conversation  with 
oral  and  written  reports,  based  on  works  by  contemporary  writers  of  East  and  West  Ger- 
many. Required  for  German  majors;  other  students  by  consent  of  instructor.  One  course 
each.  W.  Bernstein,  Bessent,  Johns,  orKoeppel 

119S.  Advanced  Intensive  German.  (FL)  For  advanced  students  to  increase  conver- 
sational skills.  Discussion  of  current  events  based  on  newspaper  articles.  Emphasis  on 
the  finer  points  of  German  grammar  and  style.  Equivalent  of  German  117S  or  118S  but 
offered  only  in  the  Berlin  semester  program.  One  course.  Staff 

120S.  Berlin  in  Contemporary  East  and  West  German  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Reading 
and  discussion  of  literary  works  of  East  and  West  German  writers  with  particular  focus 
on  Berlin  as  a  divided  city  and  on  the  German  question  in  general.  Offered  only  in  the 
Berlin  semester  program.  One  course.  Staff 

124S.  Reason  and  Imagination.  (AL,  FL)  The  eighteenth-century  revolution  in 
thought  and  sensibility,  and  its  impact  on  literature:  nature  and  the  organic  paradigm, 
genius,  national  cultures,  and  history  as  evolution  and  as  progress.  Lessing,  Herder,  Klop- 
stock,  Wieland,  and  Lenz.  One  course.  Morton 

125S.  German  Literature  to  World  War  I.  (AL,  FL)  Selected  nineteenth-  and  early 
twentieth-century  texts  to  explore  and  define  elements  of  the  modern .  Kleist,  Hoffmann, 
Biichner,  Heine,  Nietzsche,  and  Thomas  Mann.  One  course.  Alt  orRolleston 

126S.  German  Literature  since  World  War  I.  (AL,  FL)  From  expressionism  to  the  pres- 
ent, the  social  and  intellectual  contexts.  Mann,  Kafka,  Rilke,  Boll,  and  Grass.  One  course. 
Rolleston 

127S.  Contemporary  Germany.  (AL,  FL)  The  current  literary  scene  in  the  two  Ger- 
manies  in  its  cultural,  social,  and  political  contexts.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Bessent 

129.  Deutsche  Kulturgeschichte.  (CZ,  FL)  An  analysis  of  the  larger  historical,  politi- 
cal, and  cultural  developments  and  their  influences  on  present-day  Germany.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

130.  German  Life  and  Thought.  (CZ)  German  cultural  and  intellectual  history.  Read- 
ing and  discussion  in  English.  Taught  in  English.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Borchardt 

131S.  Goethezeit.  (AL,  FL)  The  struggle  for  order  in  an  age  of  revolution.  Weimarer 
classicism  and  the  response  to  the  romantic  impulse.  Herder,  Goethe,  Schiller,  Jean  Paul, 
and  Holderlin.  One  course.  Morton 

132.  The  Romantics.  (AL,  FL)  Major  writers  of  the  romantic  movement  (1795-1830) 
considered  in  their  national  and  international  context.  One  course.  Rolleston 

137.  Aspects  of  Contemporary  German  Culture.  (CZ,  FL)  Offered  as  part  of  summer 
program  in  Erlangen.  One  course.  Staff 

172.  Modern  German  Literature  in  English  Translation.  (AL)  Representative  works 
by  such  writers  as  Mann,  Kafka,  Hesse,  Brecht,  Boll,  and  Grass.  Taught  in  English .  One 
course.  Borchardt  or  Morton 

173.  Goethe's  Faust  in  English  Translation.  (AL)  The  poem,  its  place  in  world  litera- 
ture, and  its  cultural  and  historical  backgrounds.  One  course.  Borchardt 


196         Courses  of  Instruction 


175.  Consciousness  and  Modern  Society.  (CZ)  The  blend  of  philosophy,  literature, 
and  sociology  in  German  thinking  about  actual  and  possible  societies.  The  idea  of  con- 
sciousness as  producing  involvement,  detachment,  or  transformation.  Marx,  Nietzsche, 
Lukacs,  Freud,  Marcuse,  Benjamin,  Adorno,  and  Habermas.  Texts  and  discussion  in  Eng- 
lish. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Rolleston 

181.  German  for  Reading,  I.  (FL)  Foundations  of  German  grammar  and  syntax;  em- 
phasis on  vocabulary  and  complex  verbal  structures.  Not  open  for  credit  to  students  who 
have  completed  German  1-2  or  the  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
students  in  the  junior  year,  by  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Stud  ies.  One  course 
each.  Alt,  Bessent,  Bernhardt,  Morton,  Rasmussen,  or  Rolleston 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
students  in  the  senior  year,  by  consent  of  the  department .  One  course  each .  Alt,  Bessent, 
Borchanit,  Morton,  Rasmusscn,  or  Rolleston 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200S.  Proseminar.  (AL,  FL)  Fundamental  course  for  advanced  study  of  German.  Liter- 
ary history;  schools  of  criticism;  practical  exercises  in  interpretation  and  research  methods. 
One  course.  Alt 

201S,  202S.  Goethe.  ( AL,  FL)  His  life  and  works,  in  the  light  of  his  lasting  significance 
to  Germany  and  world  literature.  201S :  lyrics,  prose,  fiction,  and  selected  dramas.  202S: 
Faust  land  II.  One  course  each.  Morton 

205, 206.  Middle  High  German.  (AL,  FL)  The  language  and  literature  of  Germany's 
first  classical  period.  C-L:  Linguistics  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course 
each.  Rasmussen 

207S.  German  Romanticism.  (AL,  FL)  The  principal  writers  of  the  period  from  1795 
to  1830.  One  course.  Rolleston 

209S.  Drama.  (AL,  FL)  Studies  in  the  German-speaking  theater  with  emphasis  on 
the  nineteenth  century.  C-L:  Drama  220S.  One  course.  Alt 

210S.  The  Eighteenth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  The  culture  of  reason,  progress,  and  the  in- 
dividual in  early  modern  philosophy  and  literature.  Leibniz,  Lessing,  Herder,  Kant,  and 
Schiller.  One  course.  Morton 

211S.  Nineteenth-Century  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  From  the  end  of  Romanticism  through 
realism.  One  course.  Alt 

214S.  The  Twentieth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  Literature  of  the  twentieth  century  present- 
ed through  representative  authors.  One  course.  Rolleston 

215S.  Seventeenth-Century  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Leading  writers  of  the  baroque, 
viewed  against  the  background  of  their  time.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 
One  course.  Borchardt 

216.  History  of  the  German  Language.  (FL)  Development  of  the  phonology,  morphol- 
ogy, and  syntax  of  German  from  the  beginnings  to  the  present.  C-L:  Linguistics  and  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Rasmussen 

217S.  Renaissance  and  Reformation  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  The  period  from  1400  to 
about  1600.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Borchardt 

218S.  The  Teaching  of  German.  (FL)  A  survey  of  modern  teaching  techniques:  prob- 
lems in  the  teaching  of  German  on  the  secondary  and  college  levels.  Analysis  and  evalu- 
ation of  textbooks,  related  audiovisual  materials,  and  computer  programs.  One  course.  Alt 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature         197 


219.  Applied  Linguistics.  (FL)  The  application  of  modern  linguistic  principles  to  a 
systematic  study  of  the  phonetics,  morphology,  and  syntax  of  modern  German.  C-L:  Lin- 
guistics. One  course.  Rasmussen 

230S.  Lyric  Poetry.  (AL,  FL)  Studies  in  poetry  and  poetic  theory.  From  Goethe  and 
the  romantics  to  Rilke,  Benn,  and  contemporary  authors.  One  course.  Rolleston 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

182.  German  for  Reading,  II.  (FL) 

YIDDISH  (YDH) 

181, 182.  Elementary  Yiddish.  (FL)  A  thorough  study  of  elementary  Yiddish  gram- 
mar with  reading,  composition,  and  oral  practice.  No  previous  knowledge  of  German 
or  Hebrew  required.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course  each.  Alt 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

171.  Yiddish  Fiction  in  Translation.  (AL) 
191, 192.  Independent  Study 

THE  MAJOR 

Students  majoring  in  German  develop  language  skills  in  their  cultural  and  literary 
context.  The  international  and  humanistic  emphasis  makes  the  German  major  an  ap- 
propriate companion  to  technical  and  career-oriented  concentrations.  Numerous  oppor- 
tunities are  available,  including  programs  of  study  abroad,  interdisciplinary  programs, 
and  Fulbright  and  German  Academic  Exchange  Service  (DAAD)  scholarships. 

Prerequisites.  Elementary  and  intermediate  German. 

Major  Requirements.  Conversation  and  composition  (German  117S,  118S  or  equiva- 
lent), plus  six  advanced  courses,  three  of  which  must  be  at  the  200  level.  The  following 
courses  may  not  be  used  to  fulfill  major  requirements:  172, 173, 181, 182.  Either  130  or  175 
(but  not  both)  may  count  towards  the  major. 

Honors.  Qualified  students  (see  the  section  on  honors  in  this  bulletin)  may  apply  or 
be  invited  to  apply  for  graduation  with  distinction  or  to  achieve  Latin  honors  by  project. 
Latin  honors  projects  must  be  approved  and  initiated  by  the  end  of  the  junior  year.  Fur- 
ther information  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

Greek 

For  courses  in  Greek,  see  Classical  Studies. 

Health,  Physical  Education,  and  Recreation  (pe> 

Professor  Buehler,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Spangler,  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies;  Professor  Friedrich;  Associate  Professors  Harvey,  LeBar,  Lloyd,  Raynor,  Skinner, 
and  Woodyard;  Part-time  Instructors  Beguinet,  Bowen,  Falcone,  Forbes,  Gringle, 
McCauley,  McNutt,  Orr,  Riehl,  Sharpe,  Sigmon,  Strome,  Thompson,  Trout,  and  Wilson 

Courses  in  this  program  do  not  count  toward  distributional  requirements. 
ACTIVITY  COURSES 

The  activity  courses  listed  below  may  be  taken  by  men  and  women  unless  otherwise 
indicated.  Each  course  carries  a  half-course  credit  and  is  given  on  a  pass/fail  basis.  The 
maximum  amount  of  credit  that  counts  for  the  undergraduate  degree  is  one  full  course, 
but  additional  courses  may  be  taken  without  credit  toward  graduation. 

198         Courses  of  Instruction 


10.  Adapted  Physical  Education.  Individualized  programs  for  permanently  or  tem- 
porarily disabled  students.  Half  course.  Staff 

11.  Cardiorespiratory  Conditioning  and  Aerobics.  Individualized  programs  in  walk- 
ing, jogging,  running,  cycling,  and  swimming.  Half  course.  Buckler 

12.  Dancing  for  Health.  Dancing  for  cardiovascular  and  physical  conditioning.  Half 
course.  Sharpe 

13.  Weight  Control.  Individualized  exercise  and  diet  programs.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  physician.  Half  course.  Staff 

14.  Tension  Control.  Techniques  for  recognizing  and  reducing  tension .  Half  course. 

Friedrich 

15.  Weight  Training.  Progressive,  cumulative,  and  measurable  physical  condition- 
ing. Half  course.  Harvey 

16.  Endurance  Swimming.  Individualized  programs  to  improve  skills  and  fitness. 
Half  course.  Spangler 

20.  Beginning  Swimming.  Propulsion  techniques,  water  safety,  introduction  to  the 
five  basic  strokes.  Half  course.  Spangler 

21.  Intermediate  Swimming.  Development  of  the  five  basic  strokes,  overarm  side 
trudgen,  and  trudgen  crawl.  Half  course.  Spangler 

22.  Advanced  Swimming.  Skill  development  and  endurance.  Half  course.  Spangler 

24.  Lifesaving.  American  Red  Cross  Advanced  Lifesaving  certification.  Half  course. 

Woody 'ard 

25.  Water  Safety  Instructors  Course.  American  Red  Cross  Water  Safety  Instructors 
certification.  Half  course.  Woodyard 

26.  Scuba  Diving.  Half  course.  Thompson 

27.  Kayaking.  Basic  skills  for  kayaking  in  Whitewater.  Half  course.  Harvey 

28.  Canoeing.  Basic  skills  for  canoeing  in  Whitewater.  Half  course.  Friedrich 

29.  Water  Polo.  Prerequisite:  Physical  Education  16  or  consent  of  instructor.  Half 
course.  Forbes 

30.  Beginning  Golf.  Half  course.  Lloyd 

31.  Intermediate  Golf.  Stroke  development  and  use  of  all  clubs.  Half  course.  Lloyd 

32.  Advanced  Golf.  Use  of  all  clubs;  course  strategy.  Emphasis  on  playing.  Half  course. 

Lloyd 

40.  Beginning  Tennis.  Half  course.  LeBar 

41.  Intermediate  Tennis.  Strategy  of  the  game  and  stroke  development.  Half  course. 
LeBar 

42.  Advanced  Tennis.  Stroke  development  with  emphasis  on  strategy.  Half  course. 
LeBar 

43.  Racquetball.  Half  course.  Skinner 

44.  Badminton  and  Racquetball.  Half  course.  Friedrich 

45.  Advanced  Racquetball.  Development  of  competitive  skills.  Half  course.  Skinner 

48.  Men's  Competitive  Tennis.  High  level  drills,  strategy,  mental  and  physical  con- 
ditioning for  those  interested  in  tennis  competition.  Half  course.  LeBar 

Health,  Physical  Education,  and  Recreation  (PE)     199 


49.  Women's  Competitive  Tennis.  See  Physical  Education  48.  Half  course.  LeBar 

50.  Mixed  Competitive  Tennis.  See  Physical  Education  48.  Half  course.  LeBar 

51.  Self-Defense:  Karate.  Fundamentals  of  selected  martial  arts.  Half  course.  Bowen 

52.  Fencing.  Foils,  epee,  and  saber.  Half  course.  Beguinet 

53.  Intermediate  Fencing.  Further  study  of  basics  and  theory.  Half  course.  Beguinet 

56.  Intermediate  Karate.  Continued  practice  of  basic  technique.  Introduction  to  round 
kick,  back  kick,  free  sparring,  four  Pinan  Katas  of  the  Wadoryu  System.  Half  course.  Bowen 

60.  Volleyball.  Half  course.  Wilson 

65.  Yoga.  Traditional  hatha  yoga  combined  with  balanced  structural  alignment  to  de- 
velop strength,  flexibility,  and  mental  concentration.  Half  course.  Orr 

70.  Folk  Dancing.  Dances  and  music,  folklore,  and  costumes.  Half  course.  Wrai/ 

71.  Square  Dancing.  Calls  and  steps.  Half  course.  Staff 

72.  Social  Dancing.  Waltz,  foxtrot,  tango,  cha-cha,  rumba,  jitterbug,  rock,  disco,  and 
others.  Half  course.  Trout 

80.  Equitation.  Skills  in  balance  seat  riding:  walk,  trot,  and  canter.  Half  course.  Sigmon 

81.  Advanced  Equitation:  Hunt  Seat.  Cross-country  and  stadium  jumping  tech- 
niques. Half  course.  Sigmon 

93.  Orienteering.  Route  selection  and  techniques  of  map  reading,  compass  use,  and 
navigation.  Films,  lectures,  and  field  practice.  Half  course.  McNutt 

95.  Wilderness  Skills.  Basic  and/or  intermediate  outdoor  camping  and  leadership 
skills:  orienteering,  navigation,  campcraft,  equipment,  trip  planning,  first  aid  and  safe- 
ty, with  emphasis  on  "learning  by  doing."  Half  course.  McNutt 

THEORY  COURSES 

100.  Advanced  First  Aid  and  Cardiopulmonary  Resuscitation.  Certification  in  ad- 
vanced first  aid  and  CPR.  Half  course.  Raynor 

110.  Diet  and  Nutrition.  Health  implications  of  diet  and  nutrition:  alcohol  as  food 
and  beverage,  anorexia  and  bulimia,  vegetarian  options,  exercise,  "junk"  foods,  food  ad- 
ditives, and  other  topics.  Half  course.  Gringle 

112.  Alcohol  and  Society.  Historical  and  legal  perspectives;  alcohol  use  on  college 
campuses,  problem  drinking,  alcohol  dependence,  and  options  for  treatment  for  the 
alcohol-troubled  person.  Half  course.  Gringle 

115.  Care  and  Prevention  of  Athletic  Injuries.  Basic  instruction  in  prevention,  recog- 
nition, care,  and  rehabilitation  of  athletic  related  injuries.  Half  course.  Riehl 

136.  Health  and  Fitness.  Theory  and  practice  of  personal  health:  body  mechanics, 
exercise,  weight  control,  and  nutrition.  Recent  research  in  sports  medicine.  One  course. 
Strome 

170.  History  of  Sports.  Sports  from  ancient  to  modern  times  with  an  emphasis  on 
sports  in  America.  One  course.  Friedrich 

171.  Recreation  Leadership.  Concepts  and  techniques  with  an  emphasis  on  organiz- 
ing recreation  for  special  groups.  One  course.  Friedrich 

174.  Health  and  Wellness  for  the  College  Student.  A  problem-solving  approach  to 
health  concerns.  One  course.  Friedrich 

200        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


Hindi-Urdu 

For  courses  in  Hindi-Urdu,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages. 

History  <hst) 

Professor  Lerner,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Reddy,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Professors  Cahow,  Cell,  Chafe,  C.  Davis,  Durden,  Gaspar,  Kuniholm,  Mauskopf,  Mill- 
er, Oates,  Richards,  Roland,  A.  Scott,  W.  Scott,  TePaske,  Witt,  and  Young;  Associate  Profes- 
sors R.  Davis,  Dirlik,  English,  Gavins,  Goodwyn,  Gordon,  Herrup,  Keyssar,  Koonz,  S. 
Nathans,  and  Wood;  Assistant  Professors  Ewald,  Green,  Neuschel,  Robisheaux,  and]. 
Scott;  Professors  Emeriti  Colton,  Ferguson,  Franklin,  Holley,  Parker,  Preston,  Ropp,  and 
Watson;  Lecturers  Grimes,  Litle,  E.  Nathans,  Roberts,  and  Wilson 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

History  courses  offer  students  from  all  disciplines  within  the  University  an  oppor- 
tunity to  investigate  the  past,  gain  perspective  on  the  present,  and  improve  their  critical 
faculties.  History  provides  an  integrating  principle  for  the  entire  learning  process,  and 
students  of  history  gain  a  sense  of  human  development,  an  understanding  of  fundamental 
and  lasting  social  processes,  and  a  feeling  for  human  interrelatedness.  History  courses 
train  the  mind  by  improving  skills  in  communicating  thought  and  imagination. 

INTRODUCTORY  COURSES 

Students  are  urged,  but  not  required,  to  take  two  introductory  courses  before  proceed- 
ing to  advanced-level  courses.  Majors  take  a  sequence  of  two  introductory  courses  in  his- 
tory (21, 22;  21S,  22S;  23;  25, 26;  53, 54;  75, 76;  91, 92;  91S,  92S  or  93S).  Additional  courses 
may  be  chosen  from  this  group  as  electives  or  part  of  the  departmental  major. 

21.  Europe  to  the  Eighteenth  Century.  (CZ)  Development  and  world  impact  of  Eu- 
ropean civilization,  critical  evaluation  of  historical  interpretations,  and  investigation  of 
history  from  primary  sources.  One  course.  Staff 

21S.  Europe  to  the  Eighteenth  Century.  (CZ)  A  seminar  version  of  History  21.  One 
course.  Staff 

22.  Europe  from  the  Eighteenth  Century.  (CZ)  Development  and  world  impact  of  Eu- 
ropean civilization,  critical  evaluation  of  historical  interpretations,  and  investigation  of 
history  from  primary  sources.  One  course.  Staff 

22S.  Europe  from  the  Eighteenth  Century.  (CZ)  A  seminar  version  of  History  22.  One 
course.  Staff 

23.  Europe  to  the  Eighteenth  Century.  (CZ,  FL)  Readings,  lectures,  and  discussions 
in  French;  examinations  in  English.  Development  and  world  impact  of  European  civili- 
zation, critical  evaluation  of  historical  interpretations,  and  investigation  of  history  from 
primary  sources.  Satisfies  History  21  requirement  for  history  majors.  Taught  in  French. 
Prerequisite :  French  advanced  placement  credit  or  French  achievement  test  score  of  600 
or  above;  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Witt 

25.  Introduction  to  World  History:  To  1700.  (CZ)  The  beginning  and  evolution  of  civili- 
zation; major  traditions  of  Eurasia  (Greek,  Christian  European,  Indian,  Chinese,  Islam- 
ic); Africans  and  American  Indians;  the  European  invasion  of  America;  foundations  of 
the  European  world  economy;  Europe's  preparation  for  world  hegemony.  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

26.  Introduction  to  World  History:  Since  1700.  (CZ)  Establishment  of  European  po- 
litical, economic,  and  cultural  hegemony;  non-Western  responses;  the  decline  of  West- 
ern hegemony.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

History  (HST)         201 


49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

53.  Greek  History.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  53.  One  course.  Rigsby 

54.  Roman  History.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  54.  One  course.  Boatzvright 

75,  76.  The  Third  World  and  the  West.  (CZ)  Economic,  social,  political,  and  cultural 
relationships,  1500  to  the  present.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  R. 

Davis,  Dirlik,  Ewald,  Gordon,  or  Richards 

91.  The  Development  of  American  Democracy  to  1865.  (CZ)  The  trends  vital  to  an 
understanding  of  the  United  States  today.  The  development  of  American  democracy. 
Problems  of  foreign  policy,  the  growth  of  capitalism,  political  practices,  social  reform,  and 
conflicting  ideals  are  considered  in  relation  to  this  main  theme.  One  course.  Staff 

91S.  The  Development  of  American  Democracy  to  1865.  (CZ)  Seminar  version  of  His- 
tory 91 .  One  course.  Staff 

92.  The  Development  of  American  Democracy,  1865  to  the  Present.  (CZ)  A  continu- 
ation of  History  91  with  emphasis  upon  the  emergence  of  contemporary  problems  in  the 
United  States.  Students  who  have  taken  History  93S  may  not  receive  credit  for  History 
92.  One  course.  Staff 

92S.  The  Development  of  American  Democracy,  1865  to  the  Present.  (CZ)  Seminar 
version  of  History  92.  One  course.  Staff 

93S.  Modern  American  History.  (CZ)  Same  as  History  92,  but  emphasizing  additional 
topics  considered  appropriate  for  the  Twentieth-Century  America  Program.  Open  only 
to  students  in  that  program.  One  course.  Staff 

UNDERGRADUATE  COLLOQUIA 

Colloquia  are  open  without  prerequisite  to  all  undergraduates  and  are  designed  for 
the  nonspecialist,  although  history  majors  may  take  them  for  credit.  Each  colloquium  con- 
sists of  reading  and  discussion  involving  an  explicit  historical  theme.  Short  papers, 
reports,  and  a  final  examination  may  be  required.  Unlike  seminars,  which  emphasize 
materials  and  methods  of  historical  research,  colloquia  concentrate  on  historical  literature. 

101C.  Terrorism,  1848-1968.  (CZ)  A  comparative  analysis  of  the  origins  and  develop- 
ment of  modern  terrorism  in  the  West  (Europe,  Russia,  and  the  United  States) .  C-L :  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  M.  Miller 

101G,  102G.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary 
Course  162, 163;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies;  Cultural  Anthropology  147, 148; 
and  Religion  162,  163.  One  course  each.  Lawrence  and  staff 

101H .  Structures,  Science,  and  Society.  (CZ)  The  historical  and  scientific  importance 
of  selected  structures.  Monuments,  buildings,  bridges,  and  machines  from  Stonehenge 
to  nuclear  reactors.  (Taught  in  summer  program  in  London.)  One  course.  Mauskopf 

101K.  Topics  in  Chinese  Civilization.  (CZ)  One  course.  Dirlik 

101L.  History  of  Modern  Spain.  (CZ)  (Taught  in  fall  program  in  Spain. )  One  course. 

Staff 

UNDERGRADUATE  SURVEY  COURSES 

100.  Science  and  Technology  in  the  Ancient  World.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies 
101.  One  course.  Rigsb}/ 

103.  History  of  Greek  and  Roman  Civil  Law.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  102.  One 
course.  Oates 


202         Courses  of  Instruction 


104.  The  Intellectual  Life  of  Europe,  1250-1600.  (CZ)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies 
and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Robisheaux  or  Witt 

105.  Brazilian  History  in  Comparative  Perspective.  (CZ)  A  survey  of  Brazilian  histo- 
ry from  colonial  times  to  the  present  with  emphasis  on  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  cen- 
turies. Social,  cultural,  economic,  and  political  issues  in  comparative  Latin  American  per- 
spective. (Taught  in  summer  program  in  Brazil.)  One  course.  Staff 

106.  Working  Class  History  in  the  United  States.  (CZ)  A  social  history  of  the  work- 
ing class,  as  well  as  a  political  history  of  labor,  from  the  early  nineteenth  century  to  the 
present.  One  course.  Keyssar 

107, 108.  Social  and  Cultural  History  of  England.  (CZ)  English  history  from  the  four- 
teenth century  to  the  present  time  in  an  effort  to  arrive  at  a  synthesis  of  ideas,  social  con- 
ditions, and  political  events  and  thus  provide  a  background  for  the  study  of  English  liter- 
ature. 107  cross-listed  with  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course  each.  Cell  or  Herrup 

109.  Contemporary  International  Problems:  Their  Historical  Origins  and  Their  Im- 
plications for  Future  Policy.  (SS)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  109,  Cultural  Anthro- 
pology 109,  Political  Science  160,  and  Sociology  175.  One  course.  Staff 

111.  Early  America  to  1760.  (CZ)  Pre-Columbian  explorations,  European  invasion  of 
North  America,  the  evolution  of  race  slavery,  and  the  responses  of  the  native  American 
peoples.  One  course.  Wood 

112.  Era  of  the  American  Revolution,  1760-1815.  (CZ)  Origins,  evolution,  and  con- 
sequences. Attention  to  economic,  social,  and  geographical  questions,  as  well  as  military 
and  political.  One  course.  Wood 

113.  The  United  States  from  the  1890s  to  1940.  (SS)  Economic,  social,  and  political 
history  of  the  United  States  from  the  Populist  revolt  to  the  end  of  the  New  Deal.  One 
course.  Kn/ssar 

115.  History  of  Africa.  (CZ)  Social,  political,  and  economic  development  in  sub- 
Saharan  Africa  from  1400  to  the  present.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Women's 
Studies.  One  course.  Ewald 

116.  Introduction  to  Medieval  Studies.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  114; 
also  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Solterer,  Witt,  and  staff 

117.  Early  Modern  Europe.  (CZ)  The  economic,  social,  and  political  history  of  early 
modern  Europe.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 
One  course.  Neuschel 

119.  Modern  European  Intellectual  and  Cultural  History.  (CZ)  The  period  between 
the  French  Enlightenment  and  the  First  World  War:  nationalism,  ideology,  revolution, 
and  social  theory;  the  writings  of  Hegel,  Marx,  Nietzsche,  and  Freud.  C-L:  Comparative 
Area  Studies.  One  course.  M.  Miller 

120.  History  of  Socialism  and  Communism.  (CZ)  The  origins  and  development  of 
socialist  and  communist  movements  from  pre-Marxian  times  to  the  present.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Lerner 

121  A.  America  in  Internationa]  Affairs,  1689-1861.  (CZ)  The  diplomacy  of  the  Coloni- 
al, Revolutionary,  and  early  national  periods.  One  course.  C.  Davis 

121B.  The  United  States  as  a  World  Power:  1861-1941.  (CZ)  American  diplomacy  from 
the  beginning  of  the  Civil  War  to  entry  into  World  War  II.  One  course.  C.  Davis 

122.  American  Diplomacy  and  Issues  of  War  and  Peace  since  Entry  into  World  War 
II.  (CZ)  One  course.  C.  Davis 

History  (HST)        203 


123S.  Madness  and  Society  in  Historical  Perspective.  (SS)  Mental  illness  and  psy- 
chiatric treatment  from  antiquity  to  the  present  with  special  concentration  on  the  nine- 
teenth and  twentieth  centuries  in  Europe,  America,  and  Russia.  One  course.  M.  Miller 

124S.  Slave  Society  in  Colonial  Anglo-America:  The  West  Indies,  South  Carolina, 
and  Virginia.  (CZ)  The  development  of  slave-based  societies  and  the  production  of  sta- 
ple crops  for  export.  One  course.  Gaspar 

125.  Religion  in  Greece  and  Rome.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  103.  One  course. 
Boatwright  orRigsby 

126.  Women  in  the  Ancient  World.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  104;  also  C-L: 
Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Boatwright 

129.  Experiment  in  Republicanism:  The  United  States,  1787-1860.  (CZ)  One  course. 

S.  Nathans 

130.  From  Victorian  to  Corporate  America,  1820-1900.  (CZ)  One  course.  S.  Nathans 

131.  History  of  Mexico  and  the  Spanish  Caribbean  in  the  Nineteenth  and  Twentieth 
Centuries.  (CZ)  Political,  economic,  and  social  developments  in  Mexico  and  the  Span- 
ish Caribbean  with  emphasis  upon  comparison  of  the  Cuban  and  Mexican  Revolutions. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  TePaske 

133.  Medieval  Europe,  300-1400.  (CZ)  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One 
course.  Young 

134.  Medieval  England.  (CZ)  From  the  fifth  through  the  fourteenth  centuries.  C-L: 
Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Young 

135.  Germany  from  the  Thirty  Years'  War  to  Unification  in  1871.  (CZ)  Emphasis  on 
changes  in  German  society.  One  course.  Koonz 

136.  Germany  since  Unification  in  1871.  (CZ)  Emphasis  on  social  history.  One  course. 
Koonz 

137.  Strategies  of  Comparative  Analysis.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies 
125;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  125,  Political  Science  125,  and  Sociology  125.  One 
course.  Staff 

138.  Renaissance  and  Reformation  Germany.  (CZ)  The  interplay  of  social,  econom- 
ic, and  political  developments  in  Central  Europe  from  the  eve  of  the  Reformation  to  the 
end  of  the  Thirty  Years'  War,  with  particular  attention  to  the  links  between  religion,  gen- 
der, and  the  social  order.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  One  course.  Robisheaux 

139.  China  since  1949:  The  People's  Republic.  (CZ)  The  Chinese  path  to  communism 
and  the  communist  transformation  of  Chinese  society.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course.  Dirlik 

140.  Medieval  and  Early  Modern  India,  Pakistan,  and  Bangladesh.  (CZ)  Surveys  the 
Islamic  period  of  South  Asian  history  from  c.  1200  A.D.  to  1750  A.D.  Special  emphasis 
on  the  Delhi  Sultanate,  the  Kingdom  of  Vijayanagara,  the  Rajput  Confederacy,  the  Mughal 
Empire,  and  the  Maratha  before  British  conquest.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Richards 

141.  Imperial  China.  (CZ)  A  survey  course  from  antiquity  to  the  modern  period  (eight- 
eenth century).  An  exploration  of  social,  economic,  intellectual,  and  political  themes.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  R.  Davis 

142.  China:  Roots  of  Revolution.  (CZ)  A  survey  of  modern  Chinese  history  with  spe- 
cial emphasis  on  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  centuries.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course.  Dirlik 

204         Courses  of  Instruction 


143.  Ancient  and  Early  Modern  Japan.  (CZ)  Japan  from  earliest  settlement  to  1868; 
the  Heian  Court,  rise  of  the  samurai,  feudal  society  and  culture,  the  Tokugawa  age,  and 
the  Meiji  Restoration.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Gordon 

144.  The  Emergence  of  Modern  Japan.  (CZ)  Japan  from  Meiji  to  microchips.  The  Meiji 
settlement,  industrialization  and  urban  growth;  political  parties,  social  movements,  and 
foreign  policy  in  the  imperial  era;  World  War  II  and  the  American  occupation;  economic 
recovery.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Gordon 

145, 146.  Afro-American  History.  (CZ)  The  black  experience  in  America  from  slav- 
ery to  the  present.  C-L:  Afro-American  Studies  145,  146.  One  course  each.  Gavins 

148.  Introduction  to  Renaissance  Studies.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  115; 
also  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Robisheaux,  Schwartz,  and  staff 

149.  Military  History.  (CZ)  War,  politics,  and  technology.  One  course.  Roland 

150.  Canadian  and  American  Agrarian  Movements.  (SS)  A  comparative  study  of  the 
impact  of  industrialization  on  the  agricultural  societies  of  Canada  and  the  United  States, 
1880-1935.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies.  One  course.  Gooduyn 

152.  The  Modern  Middle  East.  (CZ)  The  historical  development  of  the  Middle  East 
in  the  nineteenth  and  twentieth  centuries.  The  emergence  of  nation-states  in  the  region 
following  World  War  I.  One  course.  Y.  Miller 

153S.  The  Insurgent  South.  (CZ)  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  153S.  One  course. 
Goodwyn 

154.  The  Rise  and  Fall  of  European  Liberalism,  1688-1945.  (CZ)  Development  and 
decline  of  European  liberalism  and  its  impact  on  European  societies  and  political  insti- 
tutions. One  course.  Reddy 

155.  Imperialism  to  1914.  (CZ)  European  reconnaissance  and  expansion;  mercan- 
tilism; slave  trade  and  slave  societies;  empire  in  India  and  Southeast  Asia;  American 
colonial  revolutions;  the  "New  Imperialism";  Asian  and  African  collaboration  and  resis- 
tance. One  course.  Cell 

156.  Imperialism  since  1914.  (CZ)  Nationalism  in  Asia  and  Africa;  decolonization; 
underdevelopment,  neocolonialism,  and  problems  of  post-colonial  societies.  One  course. 
Cell 

157, 158.  The  Rise  of  Modern  Science.  (CZ)  The  development  of  science  and  medi- 
cine, with  attention  to  cultural  and  social  influences  upon  science.  157:  through  New- 
ton. 158:  eighteenth  to  twentieth  centuries.  One  course  each.  Mauskopf 

159S.  The  Palestine  Problem  and  United  States  Public  Policy.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Public 
Policy  Studies  175S;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kuniholm 

160.  The  United  States  from  the  New  Deal  to  the  Present.  (CZ)  C-L:  Women's  Studies. 
One  course.  Chafe 

161, 162.  History  of  Modern  Russia.  (CZ)  161 :  origins  of  Kievan  Russia  in  the  ninth 
century  through  the  reign  of  Catherine  the  Great  (1762-1796),  concentrating  on  the  for- 
mation of  the  imperial  state,  class  elites,  and  psychological  interpretations  of  the  rulers. 
162:  nineteenth  and  early  twentieth  centuries  to  the  death  of  Lenin,  stressing  the  oppo- 
sition movements  in  society.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  M.  Miller 

163.  Foundations  of  Chinese  Civilization.  (CZ)  (Taught  in  China.)  See  C-L:  Cultur- 
al Anthropology  163;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

164.  India,  Pakistan,  and  Bangladesh:  1750  to  the  Present.  (CZ)  Social  and  econom- 
ic impact  of  Western  rule,  development  of  nationalism  and  independence.  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies.  One  course.  Richards 

Histon/  (HST)         205 


167S.  United  States  and  Canadian  Constitutional  Issues.  (CZ)  A  comparative  study 
of  the  development  of  federalism.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies  and  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course.  Cahow 

168S.  The  Atlantic  Slave  Trade.  (CZ)  The  development  of  the  slave  trade  from  the  fif- 
teenth century  to  its  abolition  in  the  nineteenth  century;  organization  and  mechanics, 
impact  on  Europe,  Africa,  and  the  Americas.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Gaspar 

169, 170.  The  Social  History  of  American  Women.  (CZ)  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One 
course  each.  A.  Scott 

171.  A  History  of  Women  in  Europe.  (CZ)  Women  in  Europe  since  medieval  times, 
with  particular  attention  to  economic,  social,  and  intellectual  experience.  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Neuschel 

173.  History  of  Spain  from  Late  Medieval  Times  to  the  Present.  (CZ)  Development 
of  the  Spanish  nation-state  from  the  times  of  Ferdinand  and  Isabella,  Charles  V,  and  Philip 
II  to  the  Franco  regime  and  its  aftermath.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Medieval 
and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  TePaske 

174.  History  of  Colonial  Hispanic  America  from  Pre-Columbian  Times  to  the  Wars 
of  Independence.  (CZ)  The  pre-Columbian  cultures,  European  conquest  and  its  effects 
on  the  Amerindian  peoples,  and  development  of  the  Spanish  and  Portuguese  Empires 
to  the  wars  of  independence,  with  special  emphasis  upon  colonial  institutions  and  so- 
cioeconomic developments.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Medieval  and  Renais- 
sance Studies.  One  course.  TePaske 

175S.  The  Southern  Plantation  as  Historical  Laboratory:  Odyssey  in  Black  and 
White,  1770-1970.  (CZ)  Readings  and  discussion  on  the  plantation  as  a  microcosm  of  South- 
ern social  history  since  1770,  emphasizing  the  parallel  evolution  of  black  and  white  com- 
munities, families,  economies,  cultures,  perceptions,  and  power  struggles.  One  course. 

S.  Nathans 

176S.  The  Southern  Plantation  as  Historical  Laboratory:  Research  Seminar.  (CZ) 

Original  research  projects  and  seminar  discussions  on  the  social  history  of  the  planta- 
tion and  its  black  and  white  inhabitants,  relying  on  manuscripts  at  Duke  and  at  the  South- 
ern Historical  Collection,  statistical  records,  the  architectural  legacy,  literary  and  oral  tes- 
timony, material  culture,  and  folklore.  One  course.  S.  Nathans 

177.  Modern  Latin  America.  (CZ)  A  survey  of  nineteenth-  and  twentieth-century  eco- 
nomic, social,  and  cultural  change.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

179.  History  of  South  Africa,  1600-1960.  (CZ)  The  relationships  among  South  Afri- 
ca's racial  and  cultural  communities,  with  special  attention  to  economic  and  political  de- 
velopments within  each  community  and  the  impact  of  those  developments  on  their  mutu- 
al interactions.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Ewald 

180.  The  Soviet  Experience.  (CZ)  A  survey  of  the  history  of  Russia  and  the  Soviet  Un- 
ion from  the  eve  of  the  Revolution  to  the  present  day  with  particular  emphasis  on  politi- 
cal, social,  and  cultural  change  and  continuity.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  His- 
tory 262.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Lemer 

181.  Alexander  the  Great.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  135.  One  course.  Oates 

182.  Politics  and  Culture  in  Renaissance  Florence.  (CZ)  (Taught  in  summer  program 
in  Italy.)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Witt 

183S.  Canada  from  the  French  Settlement.  (CZ)  Problems  in  the  development  of 
Canada  and  its  provinces.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies  and  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Cahow 

206         Courses  of  Instruction 


184.  An  Introduction  to  Canada  and  Canadian  Issues.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdiscipli- 
nary Course  184;  also  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Economics  184, 
Political  Science  184,  and  Sociology  184.  One  course.  Cahow 

185.  American  Diplomacy  from  the  Kennedy  Administration  to  the  Present.  (SS)  C-L: 

Public  Policy  Studies  185.  One  course.  C.  Davis  or  Kuniholm 

186.  Marxism  and  Society.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  139;  also  C-L:  Edu- 
cation 139,  Interdisciplinary  Course  139,  and  Sociology  139.  One  course.  Fox  or  Wilson 

187.  History  and  Religions  of  North  Africa.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Religion  164;  also  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  Interdisciplinary  Course  164.  One  course.  Lawrence 

188.  German  History  from  1870  to  1970.  (CZ,  FL)  Analysis  of  the  major  historical,  so- 
cial, economic,  and  cultural  developments  of  German  history,  from  the  founding  of  the 
German  Reich  through  the  post  World  War  II  period .  Taught  in  German  for  Duke  students 
by  a  faculty  member  of  the  Free  University  of  Berlin.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Staff 

190.  Twentieth-Century  Japanese  History.  A  survey  of  major  trends  and  themes  in 
Japanese  history  in  the  twentieth  century.  One  course.  Gordon 

199.  The  History  of  Women  in  Science  and  Medicine.  (CZ)  The  history  of  scientific 
and  medical  theories  about  women  and  an  analysis  of  women  as  participants  in  the  evo- 
lution of  science  and  medicine.  One  course.  Green 

SMALL  GROUP  LEARNING  EXPERIENCES 

Independent  Study 

Independent  study  is  usually  undertaken  by  students  concurrently  with  a  course  or 
with  an  instructor  with  whom  they  have  had  a  course.  Students  should  submit  to  the  in- 
structor in  writing  a  detailed  description  of  intent  in  the  study.  Both  the  instructor's  con- 
sent and  approval  of  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  are  required  for  enrollment . 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  One  course  each.  Staff 

Undergraduate  Seminars 

See  also  History  21S,  22S,  49S,  91S,  92S,  93S,  123S,  124S,  127S,  153S,  159S,  167S,  168S, 
170S,  175S,  176S,  183S. 

165S,  166S.  Seminars  in  Selected  Topics.  Course  content  determined  by  instructor. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

195S,  196S.  Seminars  for  Undergraduates.  Opportunities  for  historical  investigation 
of  significant  problems.  Juniors  as  well  as  seniors  may  apply  for  admission  to  these  courses 
and  are  urged  to  do  so  if  they  expect  to  be  candidates  for  graduation  with  distinction  in 
history  or  if  they  expect  to  practice-teach  in  their  senior  year.  Open  to  majors  and  non- 
majors.  The  sections  are  listed  below.  Most  sections  are  offered  for  year-long  study  and 
carry  two  course  credits.  Sections  25  through  32  and  sections  35  through  37  are  offered 
only  for  one  semester  and  carry  one  course  credit.  One  course  each.  Staff 

1.  Renaissance  Intellectual  History,  1300  to  1600.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  Will 

2.  Twentieth-Century  Europe.  Colton 

3.  Problems  in  the  Social  and  Intellectual  History  of  the  United  States.  Holley 

4.  Medicine  and  Society  in  America.  English 

5.  The  Age  of  the  American  Revolution.  Wood 

6.  The  Era  of  the  American  Civil  War,  1820-1900.  Durden 

7.  Socialism  and  Revolution  in  East  Asia.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  Dirlik 

11.  Problems  in  Modern  British  History.  Cell 

12.  Europe  and  the  World  since  1914.  IV.  Scoff 


History  (HST)         207 


13.  Problems  in  Early  Modern  English  History.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  Herrup 

15.  The  Emergence  of  Industrial  Society  in  Western  Europe,  1780-1914.  Reddy 

16.  Science  and  Society.  Mauskopf 

17.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Modern  Japan.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  Gordon 

18.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Russia  before  1917.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  Lemeror  Miller 

19.  Social  Conflict  and  Political  Change  in  the  United  States,  1789-1860.  S.  Nathans 

20.  Comparative  Problems  in  Early  Modern  European  History.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 

Neuschel  or  Robisheaux 

21.  Problems  in  Indian  History.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  Richards 

22.  Problems  in  Latin  American  History.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  TePaske 

23.  Issues  in  the  History  of  Tropical  Africa.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  Ewald 

24.  Problems  in  Recent  United  States  Diplomatic  History.  C.  Dan's 

25.  Problems  in  Twentieth-Century  American  History.  Chafe 

26.  Popular  Protest  in  British  Society,  1750-1914.  Staff 
17.  Origins  of  the  Cold  War.  Kuniholm 

28.  The  Black  Death  and  the  Crisis  of  Late  Medieval  Europe.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 

Robisheaux 

29.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Women  in  Europe.  Neuschel 

30.  Traditions  in  China  and  the  West.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  R.  Davis 

31.  Issues  in  Third  World  Women's  History.  Ewald 

32.  Crime  and  Society:  Changing  Definitions  of  Criminality  in  England  and  America.  Herrup 

33.  Political  Participation  in  the  United  States.  Keyssar 

34.  Comparative  Race  Relations:  South  Africa  and  America.  Cell 

35.  Palestine  and  the  Arab-Israeli  Conflict.  Y.  Miller 
37.  Women  in  Science  and  Medicine.  Green 

197S-198S.  Senior  Honors  Seminar.  Designed  to  introduce  qualified  students  to  ad- 
vanced methods  of  historical  research  and  writing  and  to  the  appraisal  of  critical  histori- 
cal issues.  Open  only  to  seniors,  but  not  restricted  to  candidates  for  graduation  with  dis- 
tinction. This  course,  when  taken  by  a  history  major,  is  accompanied  by  either  a  year-long 
195S-196S  seminar  or  two  courses  at  the  200  level.  In  unusual  circumstances,  with  con- 
sent of  the  instructor,  coordinator  of  the  senior  honors  seminar,  and  Director  of  Under- 
graduate Studies,  191-192  may  replace  the  two  courses  of  195S-196S  seminars  or  the  two 
courses  at  the  200  level.  Two  courses.  Staff 

ADVANCED  COURSES  (FOR  SENIORS  AND  GRADUATES) 

Students  may  receive  credit  for  either  semester  of  a  hyphenated  course  at  the  200  level 
without  taking  the  other  semester  if  they  obtain  written  consent  from  the  instructor. 

201S.  The  Russian  Intelligentsia  and  the  Origins  of  the  Revolution.  (CZ)  Origin  and 
dynamics  of  the  Russian  revolutionary  movement,  the  intelligentsia,  and  the  emergence 
of  the  labor  movement.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  M.  Miller 

202S.  The  Russian  Revolution.  (CZ)  An  analysis  of  the  Bolshevik  seizure  of  power 
in  1917  and  the  establishment  of  a  revolutionary  society  and  state  during  the  1920s.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  M.  Miller 

207, 208.  Constitutional  History  of  Britain:  The  Rise  of  the  Common  Law.  (CZ)  The 

origins  and  development  of  Britain's  law  and  constitution,  related  to  its  setting  in  a  chang- 
ing society.  207  cross-listed  with  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  C-L:  Comparative 
Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  Herrup 

215-216.  The  Diplomatic  History  of  the  United  States.  (CZ)  Not  open  to  undergradu- 
ates who  have  had  History  121, 122.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies.  Two  courses.  C.  Davis 

217S,  218S.  Western  Europe  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  (CZ)  Selected  topics  in  politi- 
cal and  social  history:  Europe  in  1900;  the  impact  of  two  world  wars;  the  social  politics 
of  the  Great  Depression;  Fascism  and  Nazism;  economic  recovery  and  changes  after  1945. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  Cohort 

219S,  220S.  History  of  Science  and  Technology.  (CZ)  The  interaction  of  science  and 
technology  in  the  Western  world  from  earliest  times  to  the  present.  One  course  each. 
Mauskopf  and  Roland 

208        Courses  of  Instruction 


221.  Topics  in  the  Social  and  Economic  History  of  Europe,  1200-1700.  (CZ)  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

222.  Problems  in  the  Intellectual  History  of  the  European  Renaissance  and  Refor- 
mation. (CZ)  Prerequisites:  History  104  and  reading  knowledge  of  German,  French,  or 
Italian.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Witt 

225S.  Problems  in  Comparative  Labor  History.  (SS)  Common  dilemmas  and  vary- 
ing solutions  in  the  cross-national  development  of  labor-management  relations,  their  po- 
litical implications,  and  their  larger  historical  significance.  One  course.  Gordon,  Keyssar, 
or  Reddy 

226.  Topics  in  the  Labor  History  of  the  United  States.  (SS)  One  course.  Keyssar 

227-228.  Recent  United  States  History:  Major  Political  and  Social  Movements.  (CZ) 
C-L:  Women's  Studies.  Two  courses.  Chafe 

231S,  232S.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Spain  and  the  Spanish  Empire.  (CZ)  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  TePaske 

233S.  Slave  Resistance  and  Social  Control  in  New  World  Societies.  (CZ)  The  opera- 
tion of  slave  societies  in  the  Americas  from  the  sixteenth  to  the  nineteenth  centuries  focus- 
ing on  master-slave  relations  and  slave  resistance.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Gaspar 

235S.  The  Antebellum  South.  (CZ)  The  economic,  political,  and  social  aspects  of  life 
in  the  South,  1820-1860.  One  course.  S.  Nathans 

237S.  Europe  in  the  Early  Middle  Ages.  (CZ)  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 
One  course.  Young 

238S.  Europe  in  the  High  Middle  Ages.  (CZ)  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 
One  course.  Young 

239S.  History  of  Socialism  and  Communism.  (CZ)  Problems  in  the  origins  and  de- 
velopment of  socialist  and  communist  movements.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Lerner 

241-242.  United  States  Constitutional  History.  (CZ)  241:  to  1865;  242: 1865  to  pres- 
ent. Two  courses.  Cahoiv 

243-244.  Marxism  and  History.  (SS)  Critical  examination  of  Marxist  theory  and  its  rel- 
evance to  historical  understanding  and  explanation.  Two  courses.  Dirlik 

245,  246.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  of  China.  (CZ)  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course  each.  R.  Davis  and  Dirlik 

247.  History  of  Modern  India  and  Pakistan,  1707-1857.  (CZ)  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Richards 

248.  History  of  Modern  India  and  Pakistan,  1857  to  the  Present.  (CZ)  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies.  One  course.  Richards 

249-250.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  of  the  United  States.  (CZ)  The  interplay  of 
ideas  and  social  practice  through  the  examination  of  attitudes  and  institutions  in  such 
fields  as  science  and  technology,  law,  learning,  and  religion.  Two  courses.  Holley 

253S,  254S.  European  Diplomatic  History,  1871-1945.  (CZ)  Origins  of  the  First  and 
Second  World  Wars,  the  diplomacy  of  the  wars,  and  the  peace  settlements  which  followed 
them.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  W.  Scott 

260.  Fifth  and  Fourth  Century  Greece.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  222.  One 
course.  Oates  or  Rigsby 

History  (HST)        209 


261.  Alexander  and  the  Hellenistic  World.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  223.  One 
course.  Oates 

262.  Problems  in  Soviet  History.  (CZ)  Studies  in  the  background  of  the  Revolution 
of  1917  and  the  history  and  politics  of  the  Soviet  state.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course.  Lerner 

263.  The  Roman  Republic.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  224.  One  course.  Boatwright 
orRigsby 

264.  The  Roman  Empire.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  225.  One  course.  Boativright 

265S.  Problems  in  Modern  Latin  American  History.  (SS)  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

267S.  England  in  the  Sixteenth  Century.  (CZ)  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 
One  course.  Herrup 

268S.  England  in  the  Seventeenth  Century.  (CZ)  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  One  course.  Herrup 

269S-270S.  British  History,  Seventeenth  Century  to  the  Present.  (CZ)  Historiogra- 
phy of  social  structure  and  social  change:  English  Revolution,  party,  the  Industrial  Revo- 
lution, class  and  class  consciousness,  Victorianism,  and  the  impact  of  war  in  the  twen- 
tieth century.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  Two  courses.  Cell 

273S,  274S.  Topics  in  the  History  of  Science.  (CZ)  Critical  stages  in  the  evolution  of 
scientific  thought.  One  course  each.  Mauskopf 

277S.  The  Coming  of  the  Civil  War  in  the  United  States,  1820-1861.  (CZ)  One  course. 
Durden 

278S.  The  Civil  War  in  the  United  States  and  Its  Aftermath,  1861-1900.  (CZ)  One 

course.  Durden 

279,  280.  Health,  Healing,  and  History.  (CZ)  The  development  of  medicine  within 
the  broader  cultural  context  from  prehistory  to  the  twentieth  century.  One  course  each. 
English 

282S.  Canada.  (SS)  A  research  seminar  for  advanced  students  familiar  with  Cana- 
da. Topics  vary  each  semester;  recent  perspectives  have  included  nationalism,  Canadian- 
American  relations,  regionalism  in  the  Maritimes  and  the  West,  and  cross-border  environ- 
mental issues,  among  others.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Cul- 
tural Anthropology  282S,  Interdisciplinary  Course  282S,  Political  Science  282S,  and 
Sociology  282S.  One  course.  Cahow 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  (SS)  History  majors  should  consult 
with  the  department  about  whether  this  course  meets  senior  seminar  requirements  for 
the  major.  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  284S;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  284S, 
Political  Science  264S,  Psychology  284S,  Sociology  284S,  and  Women's  Studies.  One 
course.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  orSpenner 

285S,  286S.  Oral  History.  (SS)  Research  on  race  relations  and  civil  rights  in  the  United 
States  in  the  twentieth  century  using  techniques  of  oral  history.  Prerequisite:  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course  each.  Chafe  and  Goodun/n 

Upperclassmen-Graduate  Seminars 

See  History  201S,  202S,  217S,  218S,  219S,  220S,  229S,  230S,  231S,  232S,  233S,  234S, 
237S,  238S,  239S,  253S,  254S,  265S,  267S,  268S,  269S-270S,  273S,  274S,  277S,  278S,  282S, 
284S,  285S,  286S. 


210         Courses  of  Instruction 


COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

118.  Science  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  (CZ) 

127S.  History  and  the  Visual  Image.  (SS) 

132.  Major  South  American  Nations,  1850  to  the  Present.  (CZ) 

147.  History  of  Weapons.  (SS) 

151.  History  of  Technology.  (CZ) 

172A.  Contemporary  Science:  Issues  and  Challenges.  (CZ) 

172B.  Contemporary  Technology:  Issues  and  Challenges.  (SS) 

178.  American  Diplomacy  during  World  War  II  and  the  Early  Cold  War:  1939-1961. 
(SS) 

189.  The  Americas:  A  Survey  of  the  Forces  Shaping  the  Hemisphere.  (SS) 

193, 194.  Introduction  to  the  Civilizations  of  Southern  Asia.  (CZ) 

212.  The  American  Indian  in  the  Revolutionary  Era,  1760-1800.  (CZ) 

229S,  230S.  Revolution  in  Modern  Europe,  1789-1919.  (CZ) 

234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World. 
(SS) 

259.  Archaic  Greece.  (CZ) 

266.  Late  Antiquity.  (CZ) 

HISTORY  COURSES  BY  FIELDS 

History  courses  for  undergraduates  are  offered  in  five  fields,  as  noted  below;  students 
majoring  in  the  department  must  complete  at  least  one  course  in  each  of  three  fields.  A 
course  listed  in  two  fields  may  be  used  to  meet  the  requirement  in  either  of  those  fields, 
but  may  not  be  used  for  both. 

Africa,  Asia,  Canada,  Caribbean,  Latin  America,  Russia.  History  25, 26, 75, 76, 101G,  102G.  101K,  105, 109, 110, 
115, 120, 124S,  128, 131, 132, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, 144, 150, 152, 159S,  161, 162, 163, 164, 167S,  168S,  174, 177, 179, 
180, 183S,  184, 186, 187, 189;  193, 194;  195S-196S  sections  7, 17, 18, 21, 22, 23, 30, 31,  34;  201S,  202S,  234S,  239S,  247, 
248,  262,  265S,  282S. 

Ancient,  Medieval  and  Renaissance.  History  23, 25, 53, 54, 100, 103, 104, 107, 117, 125, 126, 133, 134, 138, 152, 173, 
181,  182;  195S-196S  sections  1,  13,  28;  221,  222,  237S,  238S,  260,  261,  263,  264,  267S. 

Medicine,  Military,  Science,  Technology.  History  100, 101H,  118, 123S,  127S,  147, 148, 149, 151, 157, 158, 172A, 
172B,  199;  195S-196S  sections  4,  16;  213,  219S,  220S,  273,  274. 

Modern  Europe.  History  21, 21S,  22, 22S,  23, 49S,  101C,  107, 108, 117, 119, 120, 135, 136, 137, 138, 154, 171, 173, 180, 
182, 188;  195S-196S  sections  2, 11, 12, 20, 26, 28, 29;  207, 208, 217S,  218S,  221, 229S,  230S,  253S,  254S,  268S,  269S,  270S. 

United  States.  History  91,  91S,  92,  92S,  93S,  110,  111,  112, 113, 121, 122, 124S,  128, 129, 130, 145, 146, 150, 153S, 
159S,  160, 168S,  169S,  170S,  175S,  176S,  185;  195S-196S  sections  3,  5, 6, 19,  24,  25,  27,  33;  212, 215-216,  229S,  230S, 
231S,  232S,  241-242,  249-250,  277S,  278S,  285S,  286S. 

THE  MAJOR 

Introducton/  Courses.  Two  introductory  courses  in  history  (21-22,  21S-22S,  23,  25-26, 
53-54,  75-76,  91-92,  91S-92S,  93S). 

Major  Requirements.  Eight  coupes  in  history  including  (1)  at  least  two  introductory 
courses,  (2)  at  least  one  course  in  each  of  three  out  of  the  five  fields  described  above,  (3) 
two  courses  in  an  undergraduate  seminar  (195S-196S)  or  on  the  200  level.  Students  are 
urged  to  register  for  two  consecutive  courses  at  this  level,  but  may  take  two  single  semester 

History  (HST)        211 


courses  with  consent  of  both  instructors.  Students  wishing  to  take  advanced  courses  in 
a  field  are  advised  to  elect  the  introductory  course  in  that  field. 

Advanced  Placement  Credit.  Two  of  the  eight  courses  needed  for  the  major  may  be  ful- 
filled by  advanced  placement  credits.  If  two  additional  advanced  placement  credits  have 
been  granted  they  may  be  applied  toward  the  thirty-two  credits  needed  for  graduation, 
but  may  not  be  applied  to  the  history  major. 

Foreign  Languages.  Majors  interested  in  a  particular  area  of  study  benefit  from  knowl- 
edge of  the  language  of  that  area.  Majors  who  contemplate  graduate  work  are  reminded 
of  the  requirement  of  a  reading  knowledge  of  one  or  two  foreign  languages. 

Majors  Planning  to  Teach.  Majors  who  plan  to  teach  in  secondary  schools  should  con- 
sult an  advisor  in  education.  Rising  juniors  who  intend  to  practice-teach  in  the  senior  year 
should  take  the  195S-196S  or  197S-198S  seminars  or  200-level  courses  as  juniors. 

Honors.  Any  student  who  is  qualified  (see  the  section  on  honors  in  this  bulletin)  may 
apply  to  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  for  permission  to  undertake  work  lead- 
ing to  a  degree  with  distinction  in  history. 

House  Courses  <hq 

See  the  chapter  "Academic  Procedures  and  Information"  for  information  on  house 
courses. 

Human  Development  Program 

Professor  Maddox,  Director 

A  certificate,  but  not  a  major,  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  goal  of  this  interdisciplinary  program  is  to  broaden  and  enhance  the  perspec- 
tives of  students  interested  in  human  development.  The  program  seeks  to  foster  an  un- 
derstanding and  appreciation  of  how  biological,  psychosocial,  and  cultural  factors  act  to- 
gether in  development  throughout  the  life  course;  highlight  the  ways  in  which  different 
disciplines  conceptualize  and  study  development;  demonstrate  the  complementarity  of 
disciplinary  perspectives;  and  facilitate  dialogue  among  faculty  and  students,  illustrat- 
ing the  complementarity  of  and  necessity  for  multidisciplinary  perspectives. 

Achievement  of  the  program's  goal  is  facilitated  by  an  integrated  curriculum  of  re- 
quired and  elective  courses,  a  research  apprenticeship,  a  lecture  series,  and  other  spe- 
cial events.  An  active  advisory  procedure  assists  students  in  planning  learning  oppor- 
tunities. A  certificate  is  available  for  students  who  complete  program  requirements. 
Participation  in  selective  parts  of  the  program  and  in  the  advisory  system,  however,  is  avail- 
able to  all  undergraduates  whether  or  not  they  seek  the  certificate. 

The  curriculum  includes  six  courses,  completion  of  which  is  required  for  the  program 
certificate. 

Interdisciplinary  Course  124.  Human  Development.  C-L:  Psychology  124  and  Sociology  124.  Maddox  and  staff 
Either  Psychology  159S  (Biological  Psychology  of  Human  Development,  Thompson)  or  Interdisciplinary 

Course  180,  C-L:  Psychology  130  and  Sociology  169  (Psychosocial  Aspects  of  Human  Development, 

Martin  Lakin  and  Maddox) 
Interdisciplinary  Course  190.  Research  Apprenticeship  in  Human  Development.  Staff 
Interdisciplinary  Course  191S.  Senior  Seminar  in  Human  Development.  Staff 
Tvvoelective  courses  chosen  from  an  illustrative  list  of  biological,  psychological,  and  social  scientific  courses 

affiliated  with  the  program  published  in  the  program  brochure. 

The  research  apprenticeship  arranged  through  the  program  and  the  related  senior 
seminar  would  ordinarily  be  available  only  to  students  seeking  the  program  certificate. 
Other  components  of  the  progrp'n  are  available  to  all  undergraduates. 


212        Courses  of  Instruction 


Interdisciplinary  Courses  (idq 

21S.  Freshman  Seminar:  Topics  in  Medieval  Studies.  Topics  vary  according  to  in- 
structor: perspectives  from  history,  literature,  religion,  philosophy,  and  the  arts.  C-L:  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

22S.  Freshman  Seminar:  Topics  in  Renaissance  Studies.  Topics  vary  according  to  in- 
structor: perspectives  from  history,  literature,  religion,  philosophy,  and  the  arts.  C-L:  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

103.  An  Introduction  to  Women's  Studies.  (SS)  Gender  roles,  their  place  in  Ameri- 
can culture,  and  the  twentieth-century  feminist  movement.  Use  of  the  perspectives  of 
the  social  sciences,  the  natural  sciences,  and  the  humanities.  Emphasis  on  integrating 
the  study  of  women,  women's  history,  experience,  and  modes  of  expression  into  the  tradi- 
tional disciplines.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  /.  O'Barrand  staff 

104.  Public  Policy  and  the  Marine  Environment.  (SS)  Economic,  legal,  medical,  po- 
litical, social,  and  scientific  viewpoints  on  the  effect  of  human  society  on  the  marine  en- 
vironment; special  emphasis  on  coastal  North  Carolina.  Lectures  and  projects.  One 
course.  Costloiv 

106.  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Literature  and  Society.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Literature  101; 
also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Willis 

107S,  108S.  Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values.  (SS)  Open  to  juniors  and  seniors 
in  the  Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values  Program  and  to  other  seniors  if  space  is 
available.  Credit  by  arrangement:  the  pair,  or  either  107S  or  108S,  may  be  taken  for  one 
course  credit.  Two  half  courses  or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Varia- 
ble credit.  Vesilind  and  staff 

111.  Introduction  to  Linguistics.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  107;  also 
C-L:  English  111  and  Linguistics.  One  course.  Staff 

112S,  113S.  Topics  in  Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values.  Six  five-week  seg- 
ments offered  sequentially  over  the  fall  and  spring  semesters  by  faculty  of  the  Program 
in  Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values.  Credit  for  112S  or  113S  is  awarded  for  com- 
pletion of  three  to  five  segments  within  a  single  academic  year;  credit  for  112S  and  113S 
for  completion  of  six  segments.  Students  who  expect  to  take  three  to  five  segments  only 
are  encouraged  to  register  for  112S.  One  course  each.  Vesilind  and  staff 

114.  Introduction  to  Medieval  Studies.  (CZ)  A  survey  of  historical,  literary, 
philosophical,  and  art  historical  materials  introducing  medieval  culture  and  the  methods 
developed  for  its  study.  C-L:  History  116.  One  course.  Solterer,  Witt,  and  staff 

115.  Introduction  to  Renaissance  Studies.  (CZ)  A  survey  of  historical,  literary, 
philosophical,  and  art  historical  materials  introducing  Renaissance  culture  and  the 
methods  developed  for  its  study.  C-L:  History  148.  One  course.  Robisheaux,  Schwartz,  and 
staff 

119.  Current  Topics  in  Linguistics.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  112;  also  C-L: 
English  119  and  Linguistics.  One  course.  Staff 

120.  Perspectives  on  Food  and  Hunger.  (SS)  Issues  of  food  and  hunger  from  an  in- 
terdisciplinary perspective.  Lectures  present  analytic  approaches  from  the  natural 
sciences,  social  sciences,  and  the  humanities.  Pass/fail  grading  only.  C-L:  Comparative 
Area  Studies.  Half  course.  Johns 

120A.  Perspectives  on  Food  and  Hunger.  (SS)  See  Interdisciplinary  Course  120.  Lec- 
tures, weekly  discussion  meetings,  and  individual  research.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies  and  Political  Science  176A.  One  course.  Johns 

Interdisciplinary  Courses  (IDC)         213 


120B.  Perspectives  on  Food  and  Hunger.  (SS)  See  Interdisciplinary  Course  120.  Lec- 
tures, community  internship  project,  and  discussion  meetings.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies  and  Political  Science  176B.  One  course.  Johns 

124.  Human  Development.  (SS)  Biological,  behavioral,  and  cultural  perspectives  and 
approaches.  Evaluation  of  competing  paradigms.  Taught  by  multidisciplinary  team.  Es- 
pecially for  sophomores.  C-L:  Human  Development,  Psychology  124,  and  Sociology  124. 
One  course.  Maddox  and  staff 

139.  Marxism  and  Society.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  139;  also  C-L:  Edu- 
cation 139,  History  186,  and  Sociology  139.  One  course.  Fox  or  Wilson 

140.  The  Great  Mother:  Archetype  or  Stereotype?  ( AL)  The  Jungian  archetype  of  the 
Great  Mother  and  the  emerging  feminist  critique  of  the  Jungian  model.  The  dual  sym- 
bolism of  the  Feminine  as  nurturing  and  devouring  Mother,  the  ambivalent  nature  of 
mother-daughter  relations,  the  identification  of  woman  with  Eros,  and  alternatives  to  the 
patriarchal  myth  of  the  Mother.  Readings  include  Jungian  and  feminist  theories;  Asian, 
Egyptian,  and  Greek  mythologies;  and  modern  fiction.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies 
and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Wang 

153S.  The  Insurgent  South.  (CZ)  C-L:  History  153S.  One  course.  Goodwyn 

155.  Comparative  Perspectives  on  Literature  and  Social  Change:  From  Plantation  to 
City.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Literature  155;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  VW//is 

160S.  Topics  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  Interdisciplinary  perspectives 
from  the  arts,  history,  literature,  philosophy,  and  religion.  For  juniors  and  seniors  and 
Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  majors,  or  with  consent  of  instructor.  Prerequisite: 
one  course  in  Medieval  and/or  Renaissance  periods.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

162, 163.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  (CZ)  Extensive  survey  of  Muslim  peo- 
ples and  institutions.  162:  the  Middle  Eastern  origins  and  cultural  attainments  of  medi- 
eval Islam.  163:  modern  developments  and  global  features  of  the  Islamic  world.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies;  Cultural  Anthropology  147, 148;  History  101G,  102G;  and  Religion 
162, 163.  One  course  each.  Lawrence  and  staff 

164.  History  and  Religions  of  North  Africa.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Religion  164;  also  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  History  187.  One  course.  Lawrence 

180.  Psychosocial  Aspects  of  Human  Development.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Psychology  130; 
also  C-L:  Human  Development  and  Sociology  169.  One  course.  Martin  Lakin  and  Maddox 

182.  Media  in  Comparative  Perspective.  (SS)  Impact  of  mass  media  outside  the  United 
States.  Cross-national  comparisons  of  media  content,  audiences,  and  control.  Relation- 
ships of  governments  to  media  and  media  policies.  International  flow  of  media  materi- 
als and  their  cross-national  impact.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Political  Science  180, 
and  Sociology  182.  One  course.  Paletz  or  Smith 

184.  An  Introduction  to  Canada  and  Canadian  Issues.  (SS)  A  survey  of  the  main  ge- 
ographic, historical,  economic,  governmental,  and  political  facets  that  have  shaped  mod- 
ern Canada  and  an  examination  of  persistent  and  current  issues  facing  the  Canadian  na- 
tion. C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Economics  184,  History  184, 
Political  Science  184,  and  Sociology  184.  One  course.  Cahow 

186S.  Research  Internship  in  Primatology.  Part  of  the  Undergraduate  Program  in 
Primatology.  Supervised  work  either  in  a  laboratory  or  at  the  Primate  Center.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  186S.  One  course. 

Staff 


214         Courses  of  Instruction 


187S.  Senior  Seminar  in  Primatology.  (NS)  Part  of  the  Undergraduate  Program  in 
Primatology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anat- 
omy 187S.  One  course.  Staff 

188S.  The  Diaghilev  Ballet,  1909-1929.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  junior  or  senior  standing 
or  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Dance  188S;  also  C-L:  Institute  of  the  Arts  121S.  One 
course.  Dickinson  and  staff 

190.  Research  Apprenticeship  in  Human  Development.  Part  of  the  Undergraduate 
Program  in  Human  Development.  Supervised  work  may  be  in  a  laboratory,  project,  or 
organizational  setting.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Human  Development. 
One  course.  Staff 

191S.  Senior  Seminar  in  Human  Development.  (SS)  Part  of  the  Undergraduate  Pro- 
gram in  Human  Development.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Human  Develop- 
ment. One  course.  Thompson  and  staff 

195S.  Senior  Seminar  in  Women's  Studies.  Original  research  project  in  feminist 
scholarship,  applying  multidisciplinary  perspectives.  For  Women's  Studies  Program  cer- 
tificate earners.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  /.  O'Barrand  staff 

200.  Advanced  Neuroscience  I.  (NS)  Prerequisite:  Psychology  103.  See  C-L:  Psychol- 
ogy 200;  also  C-L:  Biology  200.  One  course.  Cant  and  McClay 

201.  Advanced  Neuroscience  II.  (NS)  Prerequisite:  Biology  200,  Interdisciplinary 
Course  200,  or  Psychology  200.  See  C-L:  Psychology  201 .  One  course.  R.  Erickson  and  W. 
G.  Hall 

211S.  History  of  Feminist  Thought.  (CZ)  The  intellectual  history  of  feminist  thought 
and  an  analysis  of  the  sex/gender  system  from  medieval  through  modern  times.  Exami- 
nation of  a  number  of  classical  philosophical,  sociological,  and  literary  texts.  Open  to  ad- 
vanced undergraduates  with  instructor's  consent  and  to  all  graduate  students.  C-L:  Wom- 
en's Studies.  One  course.  Neuschel,  ].  O'Barr,  or  Pope 

282S.  Canada.  (SS)  See  C-L:  History  282S;  also  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies,  Cultural  Anthropology  282S,  Political  Science  282S,  and  Sociology  282S. 
One  course.  Cahow 

283S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanitites.  Beliefs  about  gender  in  the  assumptions, 
methods,  and  issues  of  mainstream  scholarship  in  traditional  disciplines  of  the  human- 
ities. The  impact  of  gender-related  social  and  institutional  circumstances  on  those  dis- 
ciplines. C-L:  English  283S,  Religion  269S,  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Clark,  Orr, 
Pope,  Sedgwick,  or  Tompkins 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  (SS)  Examination  of  feminist  modes 
of  inquiry  in  the  social  sciences.  The  relationship  of  gender  in  economic,  political,  social 
and  cultural  systems  and  the  resulting  methodological  shifts  in  social  science  disciplines. 
C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  284S,  History  284S,  Political  Science  264S,  Psychology  284S, 
Sociology  284S,  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith, 
or  Spenner 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
99.  Perspectives  in  Archaeology.  (CZ) 

101, 102.  Introduction  to  the  Civilizations  of  Southern  Asia.  (CZ) 
170.  Romanticism  in  the  Arts.  (AL) 
189.  The  Americas:  A  Survey  of  the  Forces  Shaping  the  Hemisphere.  (SS) 


Interdisciplinary  Courses  (IDC)         215 


234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World. 
(SS) 

Italian 

For  courses  in  Italian,  see  Romance  Languages. 

Japanese 

For  courses  in  Japanese,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages. 

Judaic  Studies  Program  (Center  for  Judaic  Studies) 

Professor  E.  Meyers  (religion),  Director;  Associate  Professor  Bland  (religion),  Director  of 
Undergraduate  Studies;  Professor  Wintermute  (religion);  Associate  Professors  Alt  (German- 
ic languages  and  literature),  Bailey  (Divinity  School),  and  C.  Meyers  (religion) 

A  program  in  Judaic  studies  may  be  taken  as  part  of  a  major  in  religion  or  as  a  sup- 
plement to  any  other  major.  It  may  also  be  taken  under  Program  II.  Students  are  eligible 
for  a  certificate  in  Judaic  studies  after  completing  four  courses  in  the  program. 

For  descriptions  of  the  courses  consult  the  listings  under  the  specified  departments. 

German 

181, 182.  Elementary  Yiddish.  Alt 

Hebrew 

1,  2.  Elementary  Modern  Hebrew.  Staff 
63,  64.  Intermediate  Modern  Hebrew.  Staff 
191,  192,  193,  194.  Independent  Study.  Staff 

Religion 

50.  The  Old  Testament.  C.  Meyers,  E.  Meyers,  Peters,  or  Wintermute 

51.  Introduction  to  Judaic  Civilization.  Bland  or  E.  Meyers 

101.  Selected  Studies  in  the  Bible:  Prophets.  Staff 

102.  Selected  Studies  in  the  Bible:  Writings.  Staff 
105.  Theology  of  the  Old  Testament.  Wintermute 

109.  Women  in  the  Biblical  Tradition:  Image  and  Role.  C.  Meyers 

110.  Archaeology  and  Art  of  the  Biblical  World.  C.  Meyers  or  E.  Meyers 
115-116.  Introduction  to  Biblical  Hebrew.  Bailey 

131D.  Principles  of  Archaeological  Investigation.  C.  Meyers  or  E.  Meyers 
132D.  Palestine  in  Late  Antiquity  E.  Meyers 

133.  Foundations  of  Post-Biblical  Judaism.  E.  Meyers 

134.  Jewish  Mysticism.  Bhmd 

135.  Jewish  Religious  Thought.  Bland 

136.  Contemporary  Jewish  Thought.  Bland  or  £.  Meyers 
195B,  196B.  Junior- Senior  Seminars.  Staff 

207,  208.  Intermediate  Biblical  Hebrew.  Staff 

220.  Rabbinic  Hebrew.  E.  Meyers  or  staff 

221.  Readings  in  Hebrew  Biblical  Commentaries.  Bland 
238.  Jewish  Responses  to  Christianity.  Bland 

243.  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Biblical  Times.  C.  Meyers 

244.  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Hellenistic-Roman  Times.  E.  Meyers 

Opportunities  for  independent  study  are  offered  in  the  Department  of  Religion  un- 
der 191, 192, 193, 194.  Procedures  for  registration  and  applications  are  available  in  118  Gray 
Building. 

Special  attention  is  directed  to  those  courses  in  New  Testament  which  are  relevant 
to  the  study  of  Rabbinic  Judaism— Religion  106,  107,  108,  and  111.  A  list  of  appropriate 
courses  at  the  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill  is  available  in  230C  Gray  Build- 
ing, Duke  University,  and  in  101  Saunders  Hall,  University  of  North  Carolina,  Chapel 
Hill  and  may  be  taken  under  the  rubric  of  the  Cooperative  Program  in  Judaic  Studies. 

216         Courses  of  Instruction 


Korean 

For  courses  in  Korean,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages. 

Latin 

For  courses  in  Latin,  see  Classical  Studies. 

Linguistics  Courses 

Students  interested  in  the  study  of  language  as  part  of  their  undergraduate  program 
or  as  preparation  for  graduate  work  in  linguistics  should  consult  the  instructors  of  the 
courses  listed  below  or  Assistant  Professor  Andrews,  Chair,  Committee  on  Linguistics, 
314  Languages  Building.  Students  may  concentrate  in  linguistics  through  Program  II.  For 
descriptions  of  the  following  courses  see  the  listings  of  the  specified  departments: 

Cultural  Anthropology 

107.  Introduction  to  Linguistics.  Butters,  Nygard,  or  Tetel 

112.  Current  Topics  in  Linguistics.  Staff 

118S.  The  Language  of  Advertising.  O'Bnrr 

119.  Language,  Culture,  and  Society.  Apte  or  Welter 

211S.  Ethnography  of  Communication.  Apte,  Do/m'nguez,  Fox,  O'Barr,  Quinn,  Smith,  or  Weller 

English 

111.  Introduction  to  Linguistics.  Staff 

112.  English  Historical  Linguistics.  Butters,  Nygard,  or  Tetel 
115.  Present-Day  English.  Butters,  Ni/gani,  or  Tetel 

118S.  The  Teaching  of  Composition,  Grammar,  and  Literature  in  the  Secondary  School.  Page 
119.  Current  Topics  in  Linguistics.  Staff 
205.  Semiotics  and  Linguistics.  Andreios 

208.  History  of  the  English  Language.  Butters,  Nygard,  or  Tetel 

209.  Present-Day  English.  Butters  or  Nygard 

French 

131S.  French  in  the  New  World.  Hull 

210.  The  Structure  of  French.  Hull 

211.  History  of  the  French  Language.  Hull 

German 

205,  206.  Middle  High  German.  Rasmussen 

216.  History  of  the  German  Language.  Rasmussen 

219.  Applied  Linguistics.  Rasmussen 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

111.  Introduction  to  Linguistics.  Staff 
119.  Current  Topics  in  Linguistics.  Staff 

Philosophy 

103.  Symbolic  Logic.  Brandon  or  Posy 

109.  Philosophy  of  Language.  Posy 

228S.  Recent  and  Contemporary  Philosophy.  Posy 

250S.  Topics  in  Formal  Philosophy.  Posy 

Psychology 

134.  Psychology  of  Language.  Day 
220S.  Psycholinguistics.  Day 

Russian 

119.  Topics  in  Eastern  and  Northern  European  Languages.  Pugh 
150.  The  Languages  of  the  Soviet  Union.  Pugh 
185S.  Introduction  to  Slavic  Linguistics.  Andrews 
186S.  History  of  the  Russian  Language.  Pugh 
205.  Semiotics  and  Linguistics.  Andrews 


Linguistics  Courses         217 


Spanish 

119S.  Structure  of  Spanish.  Staff 

210.  History  of  the  Spanish  Language.  Carci-Gbmez 

Literature:  Undergraduate  Courses  in  the  Literature 
Program  (lit) 

The  following  courses  are  offered  as  electives  for  undergraduates  who  are  interest- 
ed in  interdisciplinary  approaches  in  the  humanities,  literary  theory,  film  theory,  or  the 
study  of  non-Western  literatures  and  cultures.  Inquiries  should  be  directed  to  Professor 
A.  Patterson,  305  Carr  Building,  or  the  office  of  the  Literature  Program.  For  graduate 
courses  in  the  Literature  Program,  consult  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Graduate  School. 

20S.  Introductions  to  Literature.  (AL)  Introduction  to  the  study  of  literature  and  other 
forms  of  cultural  expression,  such  as  film.  Different  introductory  approaches  will  be  used 
in  each  section  (for  example,  a  systematic  account  of  literary  genres,  a  historical  survey 
of  ideas  and  forms  of  fiction,  concepts  of  authorship  and  subjectivity,  or  of  literary  meaning 
and  interpretation) .  More  than  one  national  literature  or  culture  represented.  One  course. 
Staff 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

50.  What  Is  Literature?  (AL)  Introduction  to  the  idea  of  literature  from  an  innovative 
and  questioning  position,  to  a  number  of  major  modern  thinkers,  and  to  theory  in  general. 
The  relationship  of  literature  to  history;  theories  of  reading  and  interpretation;  and  the 
concepts  and  structures  of  thought  associated  with  modernism  and  postmodernism.  One 
course.  Jameson  and  A.  Patterson 

51.  Foundations  of  Western  Literature:  Homer  to  Dante.  (AL)  Classical  and  medie- 
val texts  that  have  defined  the  central  topics  and  forms  of  Western  literature,  including 
the  nature  of  love;  the  relation  of  people  to  their  gods,  to  death,  and  to  the  afterlife;  the 
values  and  perils  of  writing  itself.  One  course.  L.  Patterson 

100.  Introduction  to  Comparative  Literature.  (AL)  Basic  structures  of  literature  un- 
derstood as  fiction-making:  the  journey,  the  hero,  the  storyteller,  the  goal  of  communi- 
ty. Texts  from  the  Odi/ssey  to  contemporary  works,  with  an  introduction  to  theoretical  is- 
sues. One  course.  Rolleston 

101.  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Literature  and  Society.  (AL)  Literature  in  relation 
to  history,  social  situation,  and  culture.  Development  of  modes  of  interpretation  that  jux- 
tapose textual  features  and  broader  contextual  concern.  Readings  from  Western  and  non- 
Western  sources  representative  of  a  number  of  periods  and  genres.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies  and  Interdisciplinary  Course  106.  One  course.  Willis 

102.  Introduction  to  Media  Studies.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  82;  also  C-L:  Film  and  Vid- 
eo. One  course.  Gaines  and  staff 

119.  The  Political  Stage.  (AL)  The  link  between  political  issues— governance,  law, 
ethics,  economics,  sexual  politics— and  drama.  Texts  represent  different  issues,  nations, 
and  eras,  from  Aeschylus  to  the  present.  C-L:  Drama  119.  One  course.  Clum 

121.  Introduction  to  Non-Western  Literatures.  (AL)  An  exploration  of  such  themes 
as  women,  war,  and  the  West  in  twentieth-century  literature  of  East  Asia,  South  Asia,  the 
Middle  East,  North  Africa,  and  sub-Saharan  Africa.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Cooke  and  Fowler 

122.  The  American  Imagination.  (AL)  A  syncretic  approach  to  the  literature  of  the 
Americas,  North  and  South,  drawing  attention  to  the  underlying  homogeneity  of  New 
World  culture.  Borges,  Faulkner,  Garcia  Marquez,  Melville,  Neruda,  Thoreau,  and  others. 
One  course.  Perez  Firmat 

218         Courses  of  Instruction 


125.  The  Romantic  Impulse  in  the  Novel.  (AL)  An  exploration  of  how  novels  inter- 
mix realistic  and  romantic  techniques,  forms,  themes,  and  concerns.  Fictions  by  Emily 
Bronte,  Stendhal,  Flaubert,  Dickens,  Dostoevsky,  Gide,  Nabokov,  Barth,  and  others.  One 
course.  Torgovnick 

128.  Writings  in  the  Pan-African  Tradition.  (AL)  Pan-Africanism  as  a  political  and 
cultural  movement  in  this  century.  Political  philosophies  of  black  intellectuals  (Garvey, 
Padmore,  DuBois,  James)  as  context  for  Negritude  poetry  and  novels  from  black  Africa, 
the  Caribbean,  and  the  United  States.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Willis 

129.  Latin-American  Literature  in  Translation.  (AL)  See  C-L:  Spanish  121;  also 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Fein 

132.  Dada  and  Surrealism.  (AL)  The  international  dada  and  surrealist  movement  in 
its  multiple  manifestations:  theater,  painting,  novel,  film,  autobiography,  and  manifes- 
to. Knowledge  of  French  or  German  desirable.  One  course.  Thomas 

145.  The  Descent  of  the  Epic.  (AL)  Epic  impulses  and  persistent  themes  in  literary 
history:  Homer,  Vergil,  Dante,  Voltaire,  Dostoevsky,  T.  S.  Eliot,  and  Joyce.  One  course. 

Torgovnick 

155.  Comparative  Perspectives  on  Literature  and  Social  Change:  From  Plantation  to 
City.  (AL)  Representations  of  rural  life  in  North  America,  the  Caribbean,  and  Latin  Ameri- 
ca drawn  from  literary  texts  and  sociological  and  historical  studies.  Focus  on  the  rural  fa- 
mily as  the  nexus  between  individual  relationships  and  the  forces  of  history.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  Interdisciplinary  Course  155.  One  course.  Wi7/is 

156.  American  Popular  Culture.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  156.  One  course.  Radway  or 
Willis 

159.  Tragedy  and  the  Tragic.  (AL)  Sources,  social  role,  and  philosophical  implications 
of  tragedy  from  ancient  Greece  to  Shakespeare  and  the  Elizabethans,  the  classical  French 
theater  and  modern  times.  One  course.  Burian 

177.  Film  Theory.  (AL)  Recent  critical  developments  in  Marxist  aesthetics,  structural- 
ism, semiotics  of  the  image,  feminist  film  theory.  Both  experimental  and  Hollywood  nar- 
rative fims.  C-L:  Film  and  Video  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Gaines 

179.  Contemporary  Science  Fiction.  (AL)  Major  writers  in  the  tradition  of  Utopia  and 
Science  Fiction  since  the  1960s,  in  particular  LeGuin,  Dick,  and  Delany.  The  formal  dis- 
tinction between  science  fiction  and  fantasy,  innovations  in  narrative  structure,  concepts 
of  Utopia  and  dystopia,  and  the  relationship  between  the  genre  and  the  social  history  of 
the  1960s  and  70s.  One  course.  Jameson 

180.  Writings  in  the  Rural  Tradition:  From  the  Caribbean  to  the  American  South. 
(AL)  Comparative  readings  of  fiction  and  poetry  from  the  southern  United  States  and 
the  Caribbean,  analyzed  in  relation  to  the  plantation  heritage.  C-L:  English  180.  One 
course.  Willis 

185.  Psychoanalysis,  Literature,  and  Film.  (AL)  Genres,  styles,  and  schools  in  film 
and  literature  that  attract  psychoanalytic  readings  and  raise  issues  of  gender  and  sexu- 
ality: the  gothic,  horror,  melodrama,  and  romance  fiction;  surrealism  and  the  avant-garde. 
C-L:  Film  and  Video  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Gaines 

187.  Studies  in  Film  History.  (AL)  See  C-L:  English  185;  also  C-L:  Drama  136  and  Film 
and  Video.  One  course.  Clum,  Gaines,  Jameson,  or  Moses 

199S.  Theory  and  Practice  of  Literary  Translation.  Linguistic  foundations  and  histor- 
ical role  of  translation.  Practical  exercises  and  translation  assignments.  Prerequisites: 
working  knowledge  of  a  foreign  language  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Burian 


Literature:  Undergraduate  Courses  in  the  Literature  Program  (LIT)         219 


Management  Sciences  Courses  (ms> 

Professor  Keller,  Chairman;  Professor  Dickens,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies 

The  courses  listed  below  are  offered  for  undergraduates  by  the  Fuqua  School  of  Busi- 
ness. They  are  professional  school  courses  and  hence  do  not  count  for  the  distributional  re- 
quirements. They  fall  within  the  limit  of  six  professional  school  courses  which  may  count 
for  an  undergraduate  degree  from  Trinity  College.  A  major  is  not  offered  to  undergraduate 
students. 

Taking  a  selection  of  these  courses  may  be  helpful  in  preparation  for  graduate  edu- 
cation in  business  and  law  and  may  provide  the  liberal  arts,  science,  and  engineering  stu- 
dent an  advantage  in  placement.  Students  planning  to  take  the  accounting  concentra- 
tion in  the  Master  of  Business  Administration  Program  of  the  Fuqua  School  of  Business 
either  following  graduation  or  in  the  undergraduate-professional  combination  program 
should  take  Management  Sciences  53  and  137  at  a  minimum. 

The  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  is  available  for  consultation  with  under- 
graduates. 

53.  Introductory  Financial  Accounting.  The  accounting  model  of  the  firm  and  trans- 
actions analysis.  Topics  include  the  procedures  used  to  process  accounting  data,  issues 
in  asset  valuation  and  income  determination,  and  financial  statement  analyses.  Prereq- 
uisite: sophomore  standing.  One  course.  Staff 

120.  Analysis  of  Organizational  Behavior.  Organizations  and  the  behavior  of  in- 
dividuals within  organizations  with  emphasis  on  environmental,  structural,  and  human 
factors.  Topics  include  socialization,  work  motivation,  decision  making,  leadership,  pow- 
er, control,  small  group  behavior,  strategy  formation,  organization  design,  organizational 
culture,  and  effects  of  technology.  Prerequisite:  junior  standing.  One  course.  Staff 

137.  Managerial  Accounting.  The  use  of  accounting  information  by  management  in 
short-term  planning,  control,  and  decision  making  in  business  enterprises.  Cost  accumu- 
lation, cost  analysis,  cost  estimation,  the  development  of  standards,  introduction  to  budg- 
eting, and  short-run  decisions.  Prerequisite:  Management  Sciences  53.  One  course.  Staff 

150.  Financial  Management.  An  overview  of  corporate  finance,  financial  markets, 
portfolio  diversification,  and  asset  pricing.  Financial  instruments  and  how  the  market 
views  them;  fundamental  issues  and  models  of  risk,  return,  and  asset  pricing.  Cases  re- 
quiring students  to  project  short-term  and  long-term  financial  needs,  to  value  bonds  and 
stocks,  and  to  critique  capital  budgeting  techniques.  Major  corporate  finance  issues  of 
debt  and  dividend  policies.  One  course.  Staff 

161.  Marketing  Management.  The  role  of  the  marketing  function  in  business;  prod- 
uct planning,  price,  promotion,  and  distribution  as  elements  of  a  total  marketing  mix. 
Formal  models  in  solving  the  marketing  mix  problem  of  the  firm.  Prerequisite:  junior 
standing.  One  course.  Staff 

171.  Production  and  Operations  Management.  Issues  in  the  design,  operation,  and 
control  of  the  process  by  which  goods  are  manufactured  and  services  delivered.  Topics 
include  work-force  management,  production  planning  and  materials  management,  ca- 
pacity and  technology  choice,  and  the  combination  of  operations  choices  into  a  coher- 
ent strategy.  Prerequisite:  junior  standing.  One  course.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
seniors  with  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  Variable  credit. 

Staff 


220         Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences 

Professor  Ramus  (botany),  Acting  Director;  Professor  Forward  (zoology),  Director  of  Un- 
dergraduate Student  Affairs;  Professors  Costlow*  (zoology),  Gutknecht  (cell  biology), 
McClayt  (zoology),  PilkeyJ  (geology),  and  Searlest  (botany);  Associate  Professors  C. 
Bonaventura  (cell  biology),  J.  Bonaventura  (cell  biology),  Johnson  (geology),  Sullivan  (bi- 
ochemistry), and  Sutherland  (zoology);  Professor  Emeritus  Bookhout  (zoology);  Research 
Associate  Professor  Kirby-Smith  (Marine  Laboratory);  Research  Assistant  Professors 
Brouwer  and  Rittschof  (Marine  Laboratory) 

The  interdisciplinary  program  in  marine  sciences  provides  students  with  a  unique 
opportunity  to  live  and  study  at  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  for  a  full  aca- 
demic semester— fall  or  spring  or  during  the  summer  terms.  The  program  emphasizes 
small  class  size,  independent  study,  and  integrated  classroom,  laboratory,  and  field  ex- 
perience. Students  have  daily  access  to  modern  scientific  equipment,  a  specialized  library, 
and  the  surrounding  natural  marine  environment. 

The  fall  and  spring  semesters  are  offered  primarily  for  juniors  and  seniors.  Partici- 
pation in  either  the  spring  or  fall  semester  is  possible  for  all  majors  with  appropriate  prepa- 
ration. Before  attending  a  semester  program,  it  is  advised  that  students  have  completed 
introductory  college  courses  in  biology,  chemistry,  mathematics,  and  physics.  Students 
wishing  to  apply  to  the  fall  or  the  spring  semester  must  submit  an  application  form  which 
contains  the  written  approval  of  their  faculty  advisor  to  the  Admissions  Office,  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516,  prior  to  Duke's  registra- 
tion period  for  the  desired  semester.  Students  will  be  notified  of  the  action  of  the  Admis- 
sions Committee  shortly  after  receipt  of  their  application.  Applications  received  after 
Duke's  registration  period  for  the  desired  semester  will  be  considered  if  space  is  available. 

The  summer  curriculum,  taught  in  three  five-week  terms,  includes  a  rich  assortment 
of  courses  in  the  natural  sciences.  Attention  is  directed  to  the  relatively  new  introducto- 
ry course  in  marine  biology  (Biology  10L),  designed  for  humanities  or  social  sciences 
majors  at  Duke. 

Applications  for  summer  courses  must  contain  the  written  approval  of  the  student's 
advisor  or  dean,  must  be  accompanied  by  a  current  academic  transcript  (transcript  not 
required  of  students  applying  to  Biology  10L)  and  should  be  submitted  by  the  end  of  March 
to  the  address  indicated  above.  Thereafter,  applications  will  be  considered  if  space  is 
available. 

A  number  of  summer  tuition  scholarships  are  available  on  a  competitive  basis.  Please 
consult  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Marine  Laboratory  for  specific  requirements  and 
deadline  dates,  or  contact  the  Admissions  Office  of  the  Marine  Laboratory. 

The  courses  below  are  described  in  the  bulletin  listings  of  the  specified  departments. 
See  the  most  recent  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Marine  Laboratory  and  the  Duke  University 
Official  Schedule  ofCou  rscs  for  the  current  schedule  of  courses.  For  information  on  courses 
fulfilling  requirements  of  the  biology  major  consult  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies 
for  the  major. 

FALL,  SPRING,  OR  SUMMER  COURSES  AT  BEAUFORT 

Marine  Biology.  (Biology  10L.)  For  students  not  majoring  in  a  natural  science.  One  course.  Kcnmy 

Public  Policy  and  the  Marine  Environment.  (Interdisciplinary  Course  104.)  Economic,  legal,  medical,  po- 
litical, social,  and  scientific  viewpoints  on  the  effect  of  human  society  on  the  marine  environment;  special  em- 
phasis on  coastal  North  Carolina.  Lectures  and  projects.  One  course.  Costlow 


"On  sabbatical  leave  1  January-31  December  1989. 
tSummer  only. 
^Spring  only. 


The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences        221 


Marine  Sediments.  (Geology  109S  or  Geology  209S.)  For  Geology  209S,  additional  requirement  of  term 
paper.  One  course.  Johnson 

Behavioral  Ecology.  (Biology  1 13L.)  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  One  course.  Rubenstein  (visiting summer 
faculty) 

Biological  Oceanography.  (Biology  114L.)  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  One  course  (spring);  one  and 
one-half  courses  (summer).  Ramus  and  staff 

Biology  of  Marine  Macrophytes.  (Biology  1T7L. )  Prerequisites:  introductory  biology  and  chemistry.  One 
course.  Ramus 

Physiology  of  Marine  Animals.  (Biology  150L.)  Prerequisites:  introductory  biology  and  chemistry.  One 
course.  Forward 

Organization  of  Marine  Communities.  (Biology  169L. )  Prerequisites:  introductory  biology  and  Mathematics 
31.  One  course.  Sutherland 

Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology.  (Biology  176L.)  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Zoology  274L.  Prereq- 
uisite: introductory  biology.  One  course  (fall);  one  and  one-half  courses  (summer).  Kirhy-Smith 

Independent  Study.  (Biology  191,  192;  Geology  191, 192, 195;  Cell  Biology  210;  or  as  listed  under  the  stu- 
dent's major  department. )  For  junior  and  senior  majors  with  consent  of  appropriate  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies  and  supervising  instructor.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

Light  in  the  Sea.  (Biology  195S.)  Half  course.  Ramus 

Marine  Policy.  (Public  Policy  Studies  195S.)  One  course.  Orbach  (visiting  summer  faculty  I 

Beach  and  Island  Geological  Processes.  (Geology  196S.)  Half  course  Pilkey 

Physical  Oceanography.  (Geology  203.)  Prerequisite:  Physics  41  or  51.  Half  course.  Johnson 

Marine  Ecology.  (Biology  203L.)  Prerequisites:  course  in  introductory  ecology,  invertebrate  zoology,  or  marine 
botany  (phycology);  knowledge  of  statistics  helpful.  One  and  one-half  courses.  Hay  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

Barrier  Island  Ecology.  (Biology  218  or  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  218.)  Prerequisite:  a  course  in 
general  ecology.  One  and  one-half  courses.  Staff 

Benthic  Marine  Algae.  (Biology  219L.)  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology;  plant  diversity  recommended. 
One  course.  Schneider  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

Tropical  Seaweeds.  (Biology  263L. (Two-week  field  study.  Prerequisites:  Biology  145L  or  equivalent  or  consent 
of  instructor.  Half  course.  Searles 

Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology.  (Biology  274L.)  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Biology  76L  or  176L.  Prereq- 
uisite: introductory  biology.  One  and  one-half  courses.  Ruppert  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

Invertebrate  Developmental  Biology.  (Biology  278L. )  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  and  one-half 
courses.  McClay  and  visiting  staff 

Advanced  Topics  in  Geology:  Continental  Margin  Sedimentation.  (Geology  295S.)  Prerequisite:  Geolo- 
gy 206S  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Johnson  and  visiting  staff 

Marine  Animal  Navigation.  (Biology  295S.)  Half  course.  Fonvard 

Experimental  Ecology  of  the  Marine  Intertidal  Zone.  (Biology  296S.)  Half  course.  Sutherland 

Analysis  of  Coastal  Ecosystems.  (Biology  296S.)  One  course.  Costlow 

The  Ecology  of  Chemical  Signals.  (Biology  296S. )  Half  course.  Rittschof 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

Macromolecules,  Ecology,  and  Evolution.  (Biochemistry  245L.) 
Marine  Biochemistry  and  Genetics.  (Biochemistry  266S.) 
Comparative  and  Evolutionary  Biochemistry.  (Biochemistry  276L.) 
Natural  History  of  Coastal  Marine  Systems.  (Biology  295S.) 
Marine  Fishes:  Selected  Topics.  (Biology  296S.) 


222         Courses  of  Instruction 


Mathematics  (mth> 

Professor  Reed,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Lawler,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Instructor  Blake,  Supervisor  of  Freshman  Instruction;  Professors  Allard,  Beale,  Bryant, 
Griffiths,  Rose,  Schaeffer,  Shoenfield,  Warner,  and  Weisfeld;  Associate  Professors  Bur- 
dick,  R.  Hodel,  Kitchen,  Kraines,  Moore,  Morrison,  Pardon,  Saper,  Scoville,  Smith,  Stern, 
and  Venakides;  Assistant  Professors  Gardner,  Layton,  Nance,  Papanicolaou,  and  Schoen; 
Professors  Emeriti  Carlitz,  Dressel,  Elliott,  Hickson,  Murray,  and  Roberts;  Adjunct  Profes- 
sor Chandra;  Visiting  Associate  Professor  Pittie;  Visiting  Assistant  Professor  Edelstein- 
Keshet;  Instructor  Bookman;  Part-time  Instructors  M.  Hodel  and  Sager;  Lecturer  Israel 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

9-10.  Preparatory  and  Precalculus  Mathematics.  A  two-semester  skills  course  for  stu- 
dents who  need  to  review  topics  in  high  school  mathematics  while  covering  the  material 
in  Mathematics  19.  Students  whose  mathematics  SAT  scores  are  500  or  below,  or  whose 
CEB  Mathematics  Level  I  or  II  Achievement  Test  scores  are  480  or  below,  need  this  two- 
semester  course  before  taking  Mathematics  31.  No  credit  for  Mathematics  9  without  suc- 
cessful completion  of  Mathematics  10.  Not  open  to  students  who  take  Mathematics  19. 
Prerequisite:  for  10,  Mathematics  9.  One  course.  Staff 

19.  Precalculus  Mathematics.  Selected  topics  in  algebra,  trigonometry,  and  analytic 
geometry.  Students  with  achievement  scores  in  mathematics  below  550  need  this  skills 
course  before  taking  Mathematics  31.  Not  open  to  students  who  take  Mathematics  10. 
Prerequisite:  two  units  of  college  preparatory  mathematics.  One  course.  Staff 

31.  Introductory  Calculus  I.  (QR)  Functions,  limits,  continuity,  trigonometric  func- 
tions, techniques  and  applications  of  differentiation,  indefinite  and  definite  integrals,  the 
fundamental  theorem.  One  course.  Staff 

31X,  32X.  Introductory  Honors  Calculus  I  and  II.  (QR)  Similar  to  Mathematics  31  and 
32,  but  faster  paced  and  more  challenging.  Open  to  students  who  score  at  least  750  on 
the  SAT  Mathematics  Aptitude  Test.  One  course  each.  Staff 

32.  Introductory  Calculus  II.  (QR)  Transcendental  functions,  techniques  and  appli- 
cations of  integration,  indeterminate  forms,  improper  integrals,  infinite  series.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  34, 36,  or  41 .  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  31  or  33. 
One  course.  Staff 

33.  34.  Introductory  Calculus  with  Digital  Computation.  (QR)  Same  as  31,  32  but 
these  courses  meet  one  additional  hour  per  week  to  discuss  the  solution  of  calculus  prob- 
lems using  the  computer.  No  programming  experience  required.  Prerequisites:  for  34, 
Mathematics  33  or  31  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

41.  One  Variable  Calculus.  (QR)  Meets  five  times  a  week,  quickly  reviews  differen- 
tial calculus  and  then  covers  integral  calculus  and  infinite  series.  Designed  for  freshmen 
who  have  had  a  year  of  calculus  in  high  school  and  have  Mathematics  SAT  scores  of  650 
or  above,  but  who  have  not  received  advanced  placement  credit  for  Mathematics  31 .  Not 
open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  31, 32, 33, 34,  or  36.  One  and  one-half  courses. 
Staff 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

71S.  Special  Topics  in  Mathematics:  For  Freshmen  and  Sophomores.  (QR)  Select- 
ed topics  from  problem  solving,  number  theory,  geometry,  topology,  mathematical  log- 
ic, and  other  areas  of  mathematics.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

103.  Intermediate  Calculus.  (QR)  Partial  differentiation,  multiple  integrals,  topics  in 
differential  and  integral  vector  calculus.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  32,  34,  or  41.  One 
course.  Staff 

Mathematics  (MTH)        223 


103X,  104X.  Honors  Intermediate  Calculus  and  Linear  Algebra.  (QR)  Similar  to 
Mathematics  103,  104,  but  more  theoretical.  Students  who  have  taken  31X,  32X  are  en- 
couraged to  enroll.  Students  continuing  from  103X  should  take  104X  rather  than  104.  One 
course  each.  Staff 

104.  Linear  Algebra  and  Applications.  (QR)  Systems  of  linear  equations  and  elemen- 
tary row  operations,  Euclidean  H-space  and  subspaces,  linear  transformations  and  ma- 
trix representations,  Gram-Schmidt  orthogonalization  process,  determinants,  eigenvec- 
tors and  eigenvalues;  applications.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  32, 34, 36,  or  41.  One  course. 
Staff 

111.  Applied  Mathematical  Analysis  I.  (QR)  First  and  second  order  differential  equa- 
tions with  applications;  matrices,  eigenvalues,  and  eigenvectors;  linear  systems  of 
differential  equations;  Fourier  series  and  applications  to  partial  differential  equations. 
Intended  primarily  for  engineering  and  science  students  with  emphasis  on  problem  solv- 
ing. Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  131 .  Prerequisite :  Mathematics  103. 
One  course.  Staff 

114.  Applied  Mathematical  Analysis  II.  (QR)  Boundary  value  problems,  complex 
variables,  Cauchy's  theorem,  residues,  Fourier  transform,  applications  to  partial  differen- 
tial equations.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  181  or  230.  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  111  or  131,  or  103  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

121.  Introduction  to  Abstract  Algebra.  (QR)  Groups,  rings,  and  fields.  Students  in- 
tending to  take  a  year  of  abstract  algebra  should  take  Mathematics  200  and  201 .  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  200.  One  course.  Staff 

123S.  Geometry.  (QR)  Euclidean  geometry,  inversive  and  projective  geometries,  to- 
pology (Mobius  strips,  Klein  bottle,  projective  space),  and  non-Euclidean  geometries  in 
two  and  three  dimensions.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  32  or  34  or  41,  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course.  Staff 

124.  Combinatorics.  (QR)  Permutations  and  combinations,  generating  functions, 
recurrence  relations;  topics  in  enumeration  theory,  including  the  Principle  of  Inclusion- 
Exclusion  and  Polya  Theory;  topics  in  graph  theory,  including  trees,  circuits,  and  matrix 
representations;  applications.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  104  or  106  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course.  Staff 

126.  Introduction  to  Linear  Programming  and  Game  Theory.  (QR)  Fundamental 
properties  of  linear  programs;  linear  inequalities  and  convex  sets;  primal  simplex  meth- 
od, duality;  integer  programming;  two-person  and  matrix  games.  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  32  or  34  or  41,  and  103  and  104  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

128.  Number  Theory.  (QR)  Divisibility  properties  of  integers,  prime  numbers,  con- 
gruences, quadratic  reciprocity,  number-theoretic  functions,  simple  continued  fractions, 
rational  approximations.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  32  or  34  or  41  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course.  Staff 

131.  Elementary  Differential  Equations.  (QR)  Solution  of  differential  equations  of 
elementary  types;  formation  and  integration  of  equations  arising  in  applications.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  111.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  103;  corequisite: 
Mathematics  104.  One  course.  Staff 

132S.  Qualitative  Theory  of  Ordinary  Differential  Equations.  (QR)  Qualitative  be- 
havior of  general  systems  of  ordinary  differential  equations,  with  application  to  biologi- 
cal and  ecological  systems,  oscillations  in  biochemistry,  electrical  networks,  and  the  the- 
ory of  deterministic  epidemics.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  131  or  111  or  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course.  Staff 


224         Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


135.  Probability.  (QR)  Probability  models,  random  variables  with  discrete  and  con- 
tinuous distributions.  Independence,  joint  distributions,  conditional  distributions.  Ex- 
pectations, functions  of  random  variables,  central  limit  theorem.  Prerequisite:  Mathemat- 
ics 103.  One  course.  Staff 

136.  Statistics.  (QR)  Sampling  distributions,  point  and  interval  estimation,  maximum 
likelihood  estimators.  Tests  of  hypotheses,  the  Neyman-Pearson  theorem.  Bayesian 
methods.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Statistics  100  or  200.  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  104  and  135.  One  course.  Staff 

139.  Advanced  Calculus  I.  (QR)  Algebraic  and  topological  structure  of  the  real  num- 
ber system;  rigorous  development  of  one-variable  calculus  including  continuous,  dif  feren- 
tiable,  and  Riemann  integrable  functions  and  the  Fundamental  Theorem  of  Calculus;  uni- 
form convergence  of  a  sequence  of  functions.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had 
Mathematics  203.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  103.  One  course.  Staff 

150.  Topics  in  Mathematics  from  a  Historical  Perspective.  (QR)  Content  of  course 
determined  by  instructor.  Prerequisite :  Mathematics  139  or  203  or  consent  of  instructor. 
One  course.  Staff 

150S.  Topics  in  Mathematics  from  a  Historical  Perspective.  (QR)  Same  as  Mathemat- 
ics 150,  but  offered  as  a  seminar.  One  course.  Staff 

160.  Mathematical  Numerical  Analysis.  (QR)  Zeros  of  functions;  polynomial  inter- 
polation and  splines;  numerical  integration  and  differentiation;  applications  to  ordinary 
differential  equations;  numerical  linear  algebra;  error  analysis;  extrapolation  and  acceler- 
ation. Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Computer  Science  121  or  221.  Satisfies  the 
prerequisite  for  Computer  Science  222  and  223.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  103  and  104 
and  knowledge  of  an  algorithmic  programming  language,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  Staff 

160S.  Mathematical  Numerical  Analysis.  (QR)  Same  as  Mathematics  160,  but  offered 
as  a  seminar.  One  course.  Staff 

171S.  Elementary  Topology.  (QR)  Metric  spaces  and  topological  spaces;  basic  topo- 
logical properties  including  compactness  and  connectedness;  Brouwer  fixed  point  the- 
orem for  n =2,  classification  theorem  for  compact,  connected,  2-manifolds.  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  103  and  104.  One  course.  Staff 

181.  Complex  Analysis.  (QR)  Complex  numbers,  analytic  functions,  complex  integra- 
tion, Taylor  and  Laurent  series,  theory  of  residues,  argument  maximum  principles,  con- 
formal  mapping.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  114.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  139  or  203.  One  course.  Staff 

187.  Introduction  to  Mathematical  Logic.  (QR)  Propositional  calculus;  predicate  cal- 
culus. Godel  completeness  theorem,  applications  to  formal  number  theory,  incomplete- 
ness theorem,  additional  topics  in  proof  theory  or  computability.  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  103  and  104  or  Philosophy  103.  One  course.  Staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Admission  by  consent 
of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Same  as  191, 192,  but  for  seniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

196S.  Seminar  in  Mathematical  Model  Building.  (QR)  Real  models,  mathematical 
models,  axiom  systems  as  used  in  model  building,  deterministic  and  stochastic  models, 
linear  optimization,  competition,  graphs  and  networks,  growth  processes,  evaluation 
of  models.  Term  project:  model  of  a  nonmathematical  problem.  Prerequisites:  Mathemat- 
ics 103  and  104.  One  course.  Staff 


Mathematics  (MTH)        225 


For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Introduction  to  Algebraic  Structures  I.  (QR)  Laws  of  composition,  groups,  rings; 
isomorphism  theorems;  axiomatic  treatment  of  natural  numbers;  polynomial  rings;  di- 
vision and  Euclidean  algorithms.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  121 . 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  104  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

201.  Introduction  to  Algebraic  Structures  II.  (QR)  Vector  spaces,  matrices  and  line- 
ar transformations,  fields,  extensions  of  fields,  construction  of  real  numbers.  Prerequi- 
site: Mathematics  200,  or  Mathematics  121  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

203.  Basic  Analysis  I.  (QR)  Topology  of  Rn,  continuous  functions,  uniform  conver- 
gence, compactness,  infinite  series,  theory  of  differentiation,  and  integration.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  139.  Prerequisite :  Mathematics  104.  One  course. 
Staff 

204.  Basic  Analysis  II.  (QR)  Inverse  and  implicit  function  theorems,  differential  forms, 
integrals  on  surfaces,  Stokes'  theorem.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathemat- 
ics 140.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  203.  One  course.  Staff 

205.  Topology.  (QR)  Elementary  topology,  surfaces,  covering  spaces,  Euler  charac- 
teristic, fundamental  group,  homology  theory,  exact  sequences.  Prerequisite:  Mathemat- 
ics 104.  One  course.  Staff 

206.  Differential  Geometry.  (QR)  Geometry  of  curves  and  surfaces,  the  Serret-Frenet 
frame  of  a  space  curve,  the  Gauss  curvature,  Cadazzi-Mainardi  equations,  the  Gauss- 
Bonnet  formula.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  104.  One  course.  Staff 

221.  Numerical  Analysis.  (QR)  Prerequisites:  knowledge  of  an  algorithmic  program- 
ming language,  intermediate  calculus  including  some  differential  equations,  and 
Mathematics  104.  See  C-L:  Computer  Science  221.  One  course.  Gardner,  Greenside,  or  Szyld 

222.  Numerical  Differential  Equations.  (QR)  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  221. 
See  C-L:  Computer  Science  222.  One  course.  Gardner,  Greenside,  Rose,  or  Szyld 

223.  Numerical  Linear  Algebra.  (QR)  See  C-L:  Computer  Science  223.  One  course. 

Gardner,  Greenside,  Rose,  or  Szyld 

230.  Mathematical  Methods  in  Physics  and  Engineering  I.  (QR)  Heat  and  wave  equa- 
tions, initial  and  boundary  value  problems,  Fourier  series,  Fourier  transforms,  potential 
theory.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  114.  Prerequisites:  Mathemat- 
ics 103  and  104  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Staff 

231.  Mathematical  Methods  in  Physics  and  Engineering  II.  (QR)  Green's  functions, 
partial  differential  equations  in  several  space  dimensions.  Complex  variables,  analytic 
functions,  Cauchy's  theorem,  residues,  contour  integrals.  Other  topics  may  include  meth- 
od of  characteristics,  perturbation  theory,  calculus  of  variations,  or  stability  of  equilibria. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  114  or  230.  One  course.  Staff 

233.  Asymptotic  and  Perturbation  Methods.  Asymptotic  solution  of  linear  and  non- 
linear ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations.  Asymptotic  evaluation  of  integrals.  Sin- 
gular perturbation.  Boundary  layer  theory.  Multiple  scale  analysis.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  114  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

238,  239.  Topics  in  Applied  Mathematics.  (QR)  Conceptual  basis  of  applied 
mathematics,  combinatorics,  graph  theory,  game  theory,  mathematical  programming, 
or  numerical  solution  of  ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations.  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  103  and  104  or  equivalents.  One  course  each.  Staff 

240.  Applied  Stochastic  Processes.  (QR)  Applications  of  probability  theory  and 
stochastic  processes  to  economics  and  environmental  science.  Markoff  chains,  optional 

226         Courses  of  Instruction 


stopping,  queuing  theory,  decision  theory,  birth  and  death  processes,  and  the  Monte  Carlo 
method.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  135  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Statistics  240.  One  course.  Staff 

241.  Linear  Models.  (QR)  Prerequisite:  Statistics  200  or  equivalent.  See  C-L:  Statis- 
tics 241.  One  course.  Staff 

242.  Multivariate  Statistics.  (QR)  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  241  or  Statistics  241  or 
equivalent.  See  C-L:  Statistics  242.  One  course.  Staff 

245.  Functional  Analysis  for  Scientific  Computing.  (QR)  See  C-L:  Computer  Science 
245.  One  course.  Rose  or  Szyld 

251.  Set  Theory  I.  (QR)  Zermelo-Fraenkel  axioms,  ordinals  and  cardinals,  models 
of  set  theory,  constructiblesets.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  187  or  200  or  equivalent.  One 
course.  Staff 

252.  Set  Theory  II.  (QR)  Forcing,  large  cardinals,  determinateness,  and  other  ad- 
vanced topics.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  251.  One  course.  Staff 

253.  Recursion  Theory.  Register  and  Turing  machines;  recursive  functions  and  sets; 
enumeration  theorems;  recursively  enumerable  sets;  arithmetical  and  analytic  hierar- 
chies; degrees;  unsolvable  problems;  complexity  theory.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  187 
or  Mathematics  200  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

258,  259.  Topics  in  Logic.  (QR)  Model  theory,  recursion  theory,  set  theory,  or  other 
fields  of  logic.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  250  or  equivalent.  One  course  each.  Staff 

260.  Groups,  Rings,  and  Fields.  (QR)  Groups  including  nilpotent  and  solvable 
groups,  p-groups  and  Sylow  theorems;  rings  and  modules  including  classification  of  mod- 
ules over  a  PID  and  applications  to  linear  algebra;  fields  including  extensions  and  Galois 
theory.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  201  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

261.  Commutative  Algebra.  (QR)  Extension  and  contraction  of  ideals,  modules  of 
fractions,  primary  decomposition,  integral  dependence,  chain  conditions,  affine  algebraic 
varieties,  Dedekind  domains,  completions.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  260  or  equivalent. 
One  course.  Staff 

268.  Topics  in  Algebra.  (QR)  Algebraic  number  theory,  algebraic  X-theory,  homolog- 
ical  algebra,  or  topological  algebra.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  260.  One  course.  Staff 

271.  Algebraic  Topology.  (QR)  Fundamental  group  and  covering  spaces,  homology 
groups  of  cell  complexes,  classification  of  compact  surfaces,  the  cohomology  ring  and 
Poincare  duality  for  manifolds.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  171S  and  200  or  equivalents. 
One  course.  Staff 

273.  Algebraic  Geometry.  Local  theory:  affine  varieties,  algebraic  and  topological  the- 
ory of  singularities.  Global  theory  over  the  complex  numbers:  Riemann  surfaces,  Jaco- 
bians,  Kahler  manifolds,  Hodge  theory,  theorems  of  Lefschetz  and  Kodaira.  Prerequi- 
site: Mathematics  261  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

275.  Differential  Geometry.  (QR)  Differentiable  manifolds,  fiber  bundles,  connec- 
tions, curvature,  characteristic  classes,  Riemannian  geometry  including  submanifolds 
and  variations  of  the  length  integral,  complex  manifolds,  homogeneous  spaces.  Prereq- 
uisites: Mathematics  204  and  260  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Staff 

276.  Topics  in  Differential  Geometry.  (QR)  Lie  groups  and  related  topics,  Hodge  the- 
ory, index  theory,  minimal  surfaces,  Yang-Mills  fields,  exterior  differential  systems,  several 
complex  variables.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  275  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Staff 


Mathematics  (MTH)         227 


277.  Topics  in  Algebraic  Geometry.  (QR)  Projective  varieties  and  the  theory  of  extremal 
rays,  classification  of  surfaces  and  higher-dimensional  varieties,  variation  of  Hodge  struc- 
ture and  moduli  problems,  schemes  and  arithmetic  varieties,  or  other  advanced  topics. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  273  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

278.  Topics  in  Topology.  (QR)  Point  set,  algebraic,  geometric,  or  differential  topolo- 
gy. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

281.  Real  Analysis  I.  (QR)  Measures;  Lebesgue  integral;  LP  spaces;  Daniell  integral, 
differentiation  theory,  product  measures.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  204  or  equivalent. 
One  course.  Staff 

282.  Real  Analysis  II.  (QR)  Metric  spaces,  fixed  point  theorems,  Baire  category  the- 
orem, Banach  spaces,  fundamental  theorems  of  functional  analysis,  Fourier  transform. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  281  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

284.  Topics  in  Functional  Analysis.  (QR)  Advanced  spectral  analysis,  operator  al- 
gebras, nonlinear  functional  analysis,  or  structure  theory  of  Banach  spaces.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  282  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

285.  Complex  Analysis.  (QR)  Complex  calculus,  conformal  mapping,  Riemann  map- 
ping theorem,  Riemann  surfaces.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  204  or  equivalent.  One 
course.  Staff 

286.  Topics  in  Complex  Analysis.  (QR)  Geometric  function  theory,  function  algebras, 
several  complex  variables,  uniformization,  or  analytic  number  theory.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  285  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

290.  Probability.  (QR)  Random  variables,  independence,  expectations,  laws  of  large 
numbers,  central  limit  theorem,  Markoff  chains.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  281  or  equiva- 
lent. One  course.  Staff 

293.  Topics  in  Probability  Theory.  (QR)  Ergodic  theory,  multiparameter  stochastic 
processes  and  random  fields,  stochastic  control  theory,  or  stochastic  differential  equa- 
tions. Prerequisite:  Mathematics  290  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

295.  Fourier  Analysis  and  Distribution  Theory.  (QR)  Tempered  distributions,  Fou- 
rier transforms,  classical  inequalities,  and  oscillatory  integrals.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics 
204  and  285  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Staff 

296.  Ordinary  Differential  Equations.  (QR)  Existence  and  uniqueness  theorems  for 
nonlinear  systems,  well-posedness,  two-point  boundary  value  problems,  phase  plane 
diagrams,  stability,  dynamical  systems,  and  strange  attractors.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics 
104,  111  or  131,  and  203  or  139.  One  course.  Staff 

297.  Partial  Differential  Equations  I.  (QR)  Fundamental  solutions  of  linear  partial 
differential  equations,  hyperbolic  equations,  characteristics,  Cauchy-Kowalevski  theorem, 
propagation  of  singularities.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  204  or  equivalent.  One  course. 
Staff 

298.  Partial  Differential  Equations  II.  (QR)  Elliptic  boundary  value  problems,  regular- 
ity theorems,  the  diffusion  equation,  and  nonlinear  equations.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics 
297  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

299.  Topics  in  Partial  Differential  Equations.  (QR)  Hyperbolic  conservation  laws, 
pseudo-differential  operators,  variational  inequalities,  theoretical  continuum  mechan- 
ics. Prerequisite:  Mathematics  298  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
31P,  32P.  Preceptorial.  (QR) 

228        Courses  of  Instruction 


36.  Calculus  for  the  Social  Sciences.  (QR) 

72S.  Special  Topics  in  Mathematics:  For  Freshmen  and  Sophomores.  (QR) 

103P.  Preceptorial.  (QR) 

104R  Preceptorial.  (QR) 

105.  Intermediate  Calculus  with  Digital  Computation.  (QR) 

106.  Linear  Algebra  with  Digital  Computation.  (QR) 
135P,  136P.  Preceptorial.  (QR) 

140.  Advanced  Calculus  II.  (QR) 

140S.  Advanced  Calculus  II.  (QR) 

197S.  Seminar  in  Mathematics.  (QR) 

198S,  199S.  Honors  Seminar  in  Mathematics.  (QR) 

234.  Mathematics  for  Quantum  Mechanics.  (QR) 

235.  Topics  in  Mathematical  Physics.  (QR) 
250.  Introductory  Mathematical  Logic.  (QR) 

279.  Topics  in  Topology.  (QR) 

280.  Differential  Analysis.  (QR) 
283.  Linear  Operators.  (QR) 

288,  289.  Topics  in  Analysis.  (QR) 
294.  Topics  in  Probability.  (QR) 

THE  MAJOR 

The  Department  of  Mathematics  publishes  a  handbook  to  guide  majors  in  selecting 
courses  for  various  areas  of  interest.  A  copy  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Under- 
graduate Studies. 

For  students  matriculating  in  the  fall  1989  semester  and  thereafter: 
For  the  A.B.  Degree 

Prerequisites:  Mathematics  103  and  104  or  the  equivalent .  (Many  upper  level  mathemat- 
ics courses  assume  programming  experience  at  the  level  of  Computer  Science  10.  Stu- 
dents without  computer  experience  are  encouraged  to  take  Computer  Science  51  or  53.) 

Major  Requirements:  Six  courses  in  mathematics  numbered  above  111  including 
Mathematics  121  or  200  and  Mathematics  139  or  203. 

For  the  B.S.  Degree 

Prerequisites:  Mathematics  103  and  104  or  the  equivalent .  (Many  upper  level  mathemat- 
ics courses  assume  programming  experience  at  the  level  of  Computer  Science  10.  Stu- 
dents without  computer  experience  are  encouraged  to  take  Computer  Science  51  or  53. ) 

Major  Requirements:  Eight  courses  in  mathematics  numbered  above  111  including: 
Mathematics  121  or  200;  Mathematics  139  or  203;  and  one  of  Mathematics  136, 140, 181, 
204,  205.  Also,  Physics  51,  52  or  Physics  41,  42. 


Mathematics  (MTH)         229 


For  students  matriculating  before  the  fall  1989  semester: 
For  the  A.B.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Mathematics  103  and  104  or  equivalent  courses. 

Major  Requirements.  Six  courses  in  mathematics  numbered  above  106,  including  ei- 
ther Mathematics  139  or  Mathematics  203  and  204.  At  most  two  of  the  following  courses 
may  be  counted:  Computer  Science  121, 125;  Statistics  100, 200;  approved  courses  taken 
at  another  area  university  while  in  residence  at  Duke. 

For  the  B.S.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Mathematics  103  and  104  or  equivalent  courses. 

Major  Requirements.  Eight  courses  in  mathematics  numbered  above  106,  including  (1) 
either  Mathematics  139  or  Mathematics  203,  204;  and  (2)  one  of  the  sequences  135, 136; 
160(or221),  222(or223);  200, 201;  205(orl71S),  206;  230, 231.  At  most  three  of  the  follow- 
ing courses  may  be  counted:  Computer  Science  121,  125;  Statistics  100,  200;  approved 
courses  taken  at  another  area  university  while  in  residence  at  Duke.  Students  must  also 
meet  an  area  of  concentration  requirement  by  (1)  satisfying  the  major  requirement  of  any 
discipline  other  than  mathematics  or  by  (2)  completing  a  program  of  four  mathematical- 
ly related  courses  approved  by  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

Honors 

The  department  offers  a  program  for  graduation  with  distinction  for  majors  under 
the  curriculum  affecting  students  who  matriculated  before  May  1988  and  a  program  for 
Latin  honors  by  honors  project  for  students  who  matriculated  thereafter.  See  the  section 
on  honors  in  this  bulletin  and  also  the  Handbook  for  Majors. 

School  of  Medicine — Basic  Science  Courses  Open  to 
Undergraduates 

Qualified  students  in  arts  and  sciences  may  select  courses  from  the  following  offered 
by  the  graduate  departments  associated  with  the  School  of  Medicine.  A  major  is  not 
offered  to  undergraduates  in  any  of  the  departments  listed  below.  For  permission  to  reg- 
ister for  these  courses  and  for  further  information,  see  Professors  Webster  (biochemis- 
try), Padilla  (cell  biology),  Willett  (microbiology  and  immunology),  or  Bigner  (patholo- 
gy) .  The  200-leveI  courses  below  are  described  in  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Graduate 
School. 

Biochemistry  (BCH) 

209,  210.  Independent  Study.  One  or  two  courses.  Staff 

215.  Genetic  Mechanisms.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biochemistry.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics. 
One  course.  Webster  and  staff 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation.  C-L:  Cell  Biology  219,  Microbiology  and  Immunolo- 
gy 219,  and  Pathology  219.  One  course.  Counce  and  staff 

222.  Structure  of  Biological  Macromolecules.  Half  course.  Richardson 

227.  Introductory  Biochemistry  I:  Intermediary  Metabolism.  Prerequisite:  organic  chemistry.  One  course. 
Fridovich  and  Rajagopalan 

259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Protein  and  Membrane  Structure/Function.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biochemistry 
or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biochemistry  259,  Cell  Biology  259,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  259,  and  The 
University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  One  course.  Erickson  and  staff 

265S,  266S.  Seminar.  Topics  and  instructors  announced  each  semester.  Half  course  or  variable.  Staff 

268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids.  Prerequisites:  introductory  biochemistry  and  Biochemistry  259 
or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Microbiology  and  Immunology  268.  One  course.  Modrtch  and  staff 

291 .  Physical  Biochemistry.  Prerequisites :  Chemistry  161  and  162  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Hsieh  and  staff 

297.  Intermediary  Metabolism.  One  course.  Siegel  and  staff 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

228.  Introductory  Biochemistry  II:  Biological  Macromolecules 


230         Courses  of  Instruction 


245L.  Macromolecules,  Ecology,  and  Evolution 
276L.  Comparative  and  Evolutionary  Biochemistry 

Cell  Biology  (CBI) 

All  courses  require  the  consent  of  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

191, 192,  193,  194.  Independent  Study.  Open  to  qualified  juniors  and  seniors  with  consent  of  instructor. 
No  more  than  three  of  these  may  be  taken  for  credit.  Four  courses.  Staff 

200.  Medical  Physiology.  Limited  to  students  whose  training  requires  knowledge  of  human  physiology  as 
it  pertains  to  medicine.  Four  lectures,  one  conference,  and  one  clinical  correlation  per  week.  Open  to  undergradu- 
ates only  with  consent  of  course  leader.  Students  may  take  either  200  or  203-204,  but  not  both,  for  credit .  One 
course.  Somjen  and  staff 

203.  Introduction  to  Modern  Physiology.  Consent  of  instructor  required.  Students  may  take  either  200  or 
203-204,  but  not  both,  for  credit.  One  course.  Blum  and  staff 

204.  Introduction  to  Modern  Physiology.  (Continuation  of  203. )  Consent  of  instructor  required .  One  course. 
Blum  and  staff 

205.  Design  and  Analysis  of  Biological  Experiments.  Half  course.  Lobaugh 

217.  Membrane  Transport.  Physical  chemistry  is  recommended .  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Spring. 
One  course.  Mandel 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation.  C-L:  Biochemistry  219,  Microbiology  and  Immunol- 
ogy 219,  and  Pathologv  219.  One  course.  Counceand  staff 

220.  Developmental  Biology.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in  genetics  or  cell  biology.  One  course.  Counce 

225.  Neurobiology  of  Sensory  Systems.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Onecourse.  Corless,  Simon,  and 
guest  lecturers 

230.  Cytoskeleton  and  Cell  Motility.  Half  course.  Bennett,  Erickson,  and  Schlossman 

232.  Extracellular  Matrix  and  Cell  Adhesion.  Half  course.  Bennett,  Erickson,  and  Lightner 

233.  Introduction  to  Biomedical  Simulation.  Prerequisites:  calculus;  prior  computer  or  programming  ex- 
perience NOT  required.  One  course.  Kootsey  and  staff 

234.  Methods  in  Physiological  Simulation.  Prerequisites:  a  course  in  physiologv  and  knowledge  of  a  high- 
level  computer  language,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Magid  and  staff 

236.  Seminar  on  the  Cellular  and  Molecular  Biology  of  Skeletal  Muscle.  One  course.  Schachat 
259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Protein  and  Membrane  Structure/Function.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 
C-L:  Biochemistry  259,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  259,  and  the  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular 
Biology.  One  course.  Erickson  and  staff 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology.  C-L:  Biology  269,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  269,  and  the  University  Pro- 
gram in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology  269.  One  course.  Erickson  and  staff 

Microbiology  and  Immunology  (MIC) 

209,  210.  Independent  Study  A  laboratory  or  library  project.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Under- 
graduate Studies  and  instructor.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

214.  Fundamentals  of  Electron  Microscopy.  Prerequisites:  introductory  biology  and  consent  of  instructor. 
One  course.  Miller 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation.  C-L:  Biochemistry  219,  Cell  Biologv  219,  Microbiolo- 
gy and  Immunology  219,  and  Pathology  219.  One  course.  Counce  and  staff 

221.  Medical  Microbiology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Onecourse.  foklik  and  staff 

221L.  Medical  Microbiology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  and  one-half  courses,  foklik  and  staff 

244.  Principles  of  Immunology.  An  introduction  to  the  molecular  and  cellular  basis  of  the  immune  response. 
Topics  include  anatomy  of  the  lymphoid  system,  lymphocyte  biology,  antigen-antibody  interactions,  humoral 
and  cellular  effector  mechanisms,  and  control  of  immune  responses.  Prerequisites:  Biology  160  and  Chemistry 
152  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biology  244.  One  course.  Amos,  McClay,  and  staff 

246S.  Parasitic  Diseases.  Prerequisites:  Microbiology  244  or  291,  and  Biochemistry  227  or  equivalent.  One 
course.  Balber 

259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Protein  and  Membrane  Structure/Function.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biochemistry 
or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biochemistry  259,  Cell  Biology  259,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  259,  and  the 
University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  One  course.  Erickson  and  staff 

268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids.  Prerequisites:  introductory  biochemistry  and  Microbiology  259 
or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biochemistry  268.  One  course.  Modrich  and  staff 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology.  Prerequisite:  introductory  cell  biology  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biology 
269,  Cell  Biology  269,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  269,  and  the  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Bi- 
ology. One  course.  Erickson  and  staff 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

234.  Introduction  to  Biostatistical  Methods 

Pathology  (PTH) 

All  courses  require  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

210.  Independent  study.  Prerequisite:  senior  standing.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation  .C-L:  Biochemistry  219,  Cell  Biology  219,  and  Microbi- 
ology and  Immunology  219.  One  course.  Counce  and  staff 

School  of  Medicine— Basic  Science  Courses  Open  to  Undergraduates        231 


258.  Cellular  and  Subcellular  Pathology.  Hall  course,  Shelburne  and  Summer 

275.  Fundamentals  of  Electron  Microscopy  and  Biological  Microanalysis.  One  course.  Brady,  Ingram,  Slni- 
bumc,  and  Sommer 

Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  Program 

Professor  L.  Patterson,  Chairman;  Professor  Witt,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies 

A  major  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  program  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  is  designed  to  provide  the  stu- 
dent with  a  well-rounded  understanding  of  the  historical,  cultural,  and  social  forces  that 
shaped  the  medieval  and  Renaissance  periods.  The  program  is  divided  into  four  areas 
of  study:  fine  arts  (art  and  musicology);  history;  language  and  literature  (English,  French, 
German,  Greek,  Italian,  Latin,  and  Spanish);  and  philosophy-religion.  An  interdiscipli- 
nary major  is  offered.  See  the  section  on  the  major  below. 

The  courses  listed  below  are  among  those  now  available  in  the  program,  and  they 
are  described  under  the  listings  of  the  specified  departments. 

Art  and  Art  History 

132.  Romanesque  Art.  Bruzelius 

133.  Gothic  Art.  Bruzelius 

134.  Medieval  Architecture.  Bruzelius 

135.  Gothic  Cathedrals.  Bruzelius 

136.  Gothic  Cathedrals.  Taught  in  French.  Bruzelius 

141.  Fifteenth-Century  Italian  Art.  Spencer 

142.  Sixteenth-Century  Italian  Art.  Spencer 

145.  Renaissance  Art  in  Florence.  Spencer 

146.  Italian  Renaissance  Architecture.  Spencer 

148.  Art  of  the  Netherlands  in  the  Fifteenth  Century.  Mim  Migroet 
152.  Art  of  the  Netherlands  in  the  Sixteenth  Centurv.  Vim  Migroet 
230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture.  Wharton 
232S.  Romanesque  and  Gothic  Art  and  Architecture.  Bruzelius 
242S.  Studies  in  Italian  Renaissance  Art.  Spencer 

Classical  Studies 

117.  Ancient  Mythographers.  Nation 

Drama 

126.  French  Drama  of  the  Seventeenth  Centurv  C-L:  French  148.  Staff 

English 

121.  Medieval  English  Literature  to  1500.  Nygard  or  L.  Patterson 

122.  Sixteenth-Century  English  Literature.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  or  Schwartz 

123.  English  Literature:  1600  to  1660.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  or  Schwartz 
141.  Chaucer.  DeNeef,  Nygard,  orL.  Patterson 

143.  144.  Shakespeare.  DeNeef,  Gopen,  Jackson,  Jones,  A.  Patterson,  Porter,  Randall,  or  G.  Wdliatns 
145.  Milton.  Fish,  A.  Patterson.  Price,  or  Schwartz 

208.  History  of  the  English  Language.  Butters,  Nygard,  or  Tetel 

212.  Middle  English  Literature:  1100  to  1500.  Fish,  Gopen,  Nygartt,  orL.  Patterson 

221.  Renaissance  Prose  and  Poetry:  1500  to  1660.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  Schwartz,  orG.  Williams 

225.  Renaissance  Drama:  1500  to  1642.  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  or  G.  Williams 

French 

145S.  Topics  in  Renaissance  Literature  and  Culture.  Tetel 

146S.  Montaigne  and  Self-Portraiture.  Tclcl 

148.  French  Drama  of  the  Seventeenth  Century.  Farrcll 

211.  History  of  the  French  Language.  Hull 

248.  French  Literature  of  the  Seventeenth  Century.  Farrcll 

German 

205,  206.  Middle  High  German.  Resmussen 

215S.  Seventeenth-Century  Literature.  Borchardt 

216.  History  of  the  German  Language.  Rasmussen 

217S.  Renaissance  and  Reformation  Literature  Borchardt 


232         Courses  of  Instruction 


History 

104.  The  Intellectual  Life  of  Europe,  1250-1600.  Robisheaux  or  Witt 
107.  Social  and  Cultural  History  of  England.  Cell  or  Herrup 

116.  Introduction  to  Medieval  Studies.  Solterer,  Witt,  and  staff 

1 17.  Early  Modern  Europe.  Neuschel 

133.  Medieval  Europe,  300-1400.  Young 

134.  Medieval  England.  Young 

138.  Early  Modern  Germany.  Robisheaux 

148.  Introduction  to  Renaissance  Studies.  Robisheaux,  Schwartz,  and  staff 

173.  History  of  Spain  from  Late  Medieval  Times  to  the  Present.  TePaske 

174.  History  of  Colonial  Hispanic  America  from  Pre-Columbian  Times  to  the  Wars  of  Independence.  TePaske 
195S.01-196S.01.  Renaissance  Intellectual  History,  1300  to  1600.  Witt 

195S.13-196S.13.  Problems  in  Early  Modern  English  History.  Herrup 

195S.20.  Comparative  Problems  in  Early  Modern  European  History.  Neuschel  or  Robisheaux 

195S.28.  The  Black  Death  and  the  Crisis  of  Late  Medieval  Europe.  Robisheaux 

207,  208.  Constitutional  History  of  Britain:  The  Rise  of  the  Common  Law.  Herrup 

222.  Problems  in  the  Intellectual  History  of  the  European  Renaissance  and  Reformation.  Witt 

237S.  Europe  in  the  Early  Middle  Ages.  Young 

238S.  Europe  in  the  High  Middle  Ages.  Young 

267S.  England  in  the  Sixteenth  Century.  Herrup 

268S.  England  in  the  Seventeenth  Century.  Herrup 

Interdisciplinary  Courses 

21S.  Freshman  Seminar:  Topics  in  Medieval  Studies.  Staff 
22S.  Freshman  Seminar:  Topics  in  Renaissance  Studies.  Staff 

114.  Introduction  to  Medieval  Studies.  Solterer,  Witt,  and  staff 

115.  Introduction  to  Renaissance  Studies.  Robisheaux,  Schwartz,  and  staff 
160S.  Topics  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  Staff 

Italian 

101 .  Writers  of  the  Middle  Ages  and  Quattrocento.  Caserta  or  Finucci 

102.  Writers  from  the  Renaissance  to  Pre-Romanticism.  Caserta  or  Finucci 
145S.  Topics  in  Renaissance  Literature  and  Culture.  Finucci 

284,  285.  Dante.  Caserta 

Latin 

221.  Medieval  Latin.  Newton 

Music 

155S.  Music  History  I:  Antiquity,  Middle  Ages,  Early  Renaissance.  Higgins,  Seebass,  or  Silbiger 
156S.  Music  History  II:  Late  Renaissance,  Baroque.  Bartlet,  Higgins,  Seebass,  Silbiger,  or  Williams 
211.  Notation.  Higgins  or  Williams 

222.  Music  in  the  Middle  Ages.  Higgins  or  Seebass 

223.  Music  in  the  Renaissance.  Higgins  or  Silbiger 

Philosophy 

119.  Medieval  Philosophy.  Mahoney 

120.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Philosophy.  Mahoney 
218S.  Medieval  Philosophy.  Mahoney 

219S.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Philosophy.  Mahoney 

Religion 

134.  Jewish  Mysticism.  Bland 

162.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  Lawrence  and  staff 

Spanish 

151.  Spanish  Literature  of  the  Renaissance  and  the  Baroque.  Ross  or  Wardropper 

153.  Golden  Age  Literature:  Cervantes.  Staff 

210.  History  of  the  Spanish  Language.  Garci-Go'mez 

251.  The  Origins  of  Spanish  Prose  Fiction.  Wardropper 

254.  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age.  Wardropper 

258S.  Spanish  Lyric  Poetry  before  1700.  Wardropper 

THE  MAJOR 

A  major  consists  of  at  least  eight  courses  drawn  from  the  nonintroductory  courses 
of  the  four  areas  of  study  (fine  arts,  history  language  and  literature,  and  philosophy- 
religion).  Three  courses  in  each  of  two  areas  must  be  included.  Besides  the  courses  spe- 
cifically listed  (under  departmental  and  Interdisciplinary  Course  headings)  in  the 

Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  Program        233 


Medieval  and  Renaissance  periods,  provision  may  be  made  for  independent  study  in  any 
of  the  four  areas. 

Each  program  is  tailored  to  the  needs  and  interests  of  the  student  under  the  supervi- 
sion of  a  committee  consisting  of  faculty  members  from  appropriate  departments.  After 
discussion  with  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  for  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies,  the  student  submits  a  provisional  program  of  study  outlining  special  interdis- 
ciplinary interests.  Normally  the  program  is  planned  well  before  the  end  of  the  sopho- 
more year  to  allow  time  to  acquire  a  working  knowledge  of  languages  pertinent  to  specific 
interests. 

Microbiology  and  Immunology  (miq 

For  courses  in  Microbiology  and  Immunology,  see  School  of  Medicine— Basic  Courses 
Open  to  Undergraduates. 

Military  Science— Army  ROTC  (msq 

Professor  Gibbs,  Lieutenant  Colonel,  U.S.  Army,  Chairman;  Visiting  Assistant  Professor 
Jones,  Major,  U.S.  Army,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Visiting  Assistant  Professor  Ral- 
ston, Captain,  U.S.  Army,  Supervisor  of  Freshman  Instruction;  Visiting  Assistant  Professors 
Dillard,  Captain,  U.S.  Army,  Morris,  Major,  U.S.  Army,  andPetzrick,  Captain,  U.S.  Army 

The  Department  of  Military  Science  offers  students  from  all  disciplines  within  the 
University  the  opportunity  to  learn  the  theory  and  practical  application  of  skills  involv- 
ing the  following  areas:  leadership,  management  (time,  personnel,  and  materiel),  com- 
munications, land  navigation,  military  law,  and  tactics.  Non-ROTC  students  may  take 
courses  without  incurring  an  obligation  to  the  Army. 

The  Army  ROTC  program  is  made  up  of  a  two-year  basic  course  of  study  (freshman 
and  sophomore  level)  which  is  taken  without  obligation  by  nonscholarship  students,  and 
a  two-year  advanced  course  of  study  (junior  and  senior  level)  which  includes  a  six-week 
advanced  camp,  usually  completed  during  the  summer  prior  to  the  senior  year.  Direct 
entry  into  the  advanced  course  is  sometimes  permitted  if  an  applicant  has  previous  mili- 
tary training  or  experience,  or  when  a  six-week  basic  camp  is  completed.  To  be  eligible 
for  participation  in  the  advanced  course,  students  must  successfully  complete  the  basic 
course  (unless  direct  entry  is  permitted),  be  physically  qualified,  be  of  good  moral  charac- 
ter, have  a  minimum  of  two  years  remaining  as  a  student  (undergraduate  or  graduate  level, 
or  a  combination),  and  sign  a  contract  to  accept  a  commission  in  the  United  States  Army, 
the  Army  National  Guard,  or  the  Army  Reserve  as  directed  by  the  Secretary  of  the  Army. 

Laboratory  is  mandatory  each  semester  for  scholarship  cadets  and  nonscholarship 
cadets  in  their  second  or  later  semester  of  ROTC.  Some  specific  laboratories  are  required 
for  non-ROTC  students  taking  Military  Science  51,  52,  and  113.  Students  should  consult 
the  Department  of  Military  Science  (telephone  1-919-684-5895  collect,  or  1-800-222-9184, 
toll  free)  for  more  detailed  information.  Also  see  the  Army  Reserve  Officers'  Training 
Corps  section  under  Special  Programs  in  this  bulletin. 

1L.  Fall  Semester  Laboratory.  Drill  and  ceremonies,  marksmanship  training,  land 
navigation  exercises,  first  aid,  and  confidence  course  training.  Mandatory  for  Army  ROTC 
scholarship  cadets  and  nonscholarship  cadets  in  their  second  or  later  semester  of  ROTC 
who  are  enrolled  in  Military  Science  11,  51,  113,  and  151.  Must  be  repeated  with  each 
course.  No  credit.  Dillard 

2L.  Spring  Semester  Laboratory.  Drill  and  ceremonies,  communications,  and  tacti- 
cal exercises.  Mandatory  for  Army  ROTC  scholarship  cadets  and  nonscholarship  cadets 
in  their  second  or  later  semester  of  ROTC  who  are  enrolled  in  Military  Science  12, 52, 114, 
and  152.  Must  be  repeated  with  each  course.  No  credit.  Dillard 


234        Courses  of  Instruction 


11.  Introduction  to  ROTC  and  the  Army.  The  military  organization  with  emphasis 
on  tradition,  doctrine,  and  contribution  to  national  objectives.  Laboratory  required  for 
ROTC  scholarship  cadets  only.  Half  course.  Morris  or  Ralston 

12.  The  Military  Profession.  Introduction  to  the  concept  of  the  military  as  a  profes- 
sion .  Questions  of  ethics  and  values  in  the  military;  the  issue  of  war  and  morality.  Labora- 
tory required  for  ROTC  cadets  only.  Half  course.  Morris  or  Ralston 

51.  Military  Topography.  Interpretation  and  use  of  topographical  maps  to  facilitate 
land  navigation .  Consideration  of  the  military  significance  of  terrain.  Laboratory  required 
for  Army  ROTC  cadets  only,  with  minor  exceptions.  Half  course.  Petzrick 

52.  Introduction  to  Small  Unit  Tactics.  Introduction  to  planning,  organizing,  and  con- 
ducting small  unit  offensive  and  defensive  operations.  Consideration  of  the  principles 
of  war.  Laboratory  required  for  Army  ROTC  cadets  only,  with  minor  exceptions.  Half 
course.  Petzrick 

113.  Advanced  Military  Operations.  Fundamentals  of  the  conduct  of  military  oper- 
ations including  advanced  military  topography;  unit  movements;  route  planning;  nu- 
clear, biological,  and  chemical  defense;  and  military  communications.  Laboratory  re- 
quired for  Army  ROTC  cadets  only.  Prerequisite:  Military  Science  51.  Onecourse.  Dillard 
or  Gibbs 

114.  Advanced  Tactical  Applications.  Study  of  the  Warsaw  Pact  Forces  to  include  doc- 
trine, organization,  equipment,  and  training.  Conduct  of  platoon  offensive,  defensive, 
and  patrolling  operations  for  Army  infantry  units.  Laboratory  required  for  Army  ROTC 
cadets  only.  Prerequisite:  Military  Science  52.  One  course.  Dillard  or  Gibbs 

151.  Military  Justice  and  the  Law  of  War.  Introduction  to  the  Uniform  Code  of  Mili- 
tary Justice  and  its  relationship  to  the  American  legal  system.  Theory  and  practice  of  the 
law  of  war  as  embodied  in  the  Geneva,  Hague,  and  other  agreements.  Laboratory  required 
for  Army  ROTC  cadets  only.  One  course.  Gibbs  or]ones 

152.  Leadership  and  Command  Management.  Theory  and  practice  of  leadership  and 
military  management  techniques  for  mission  accomplishment.  Laboratory  required  for 
Army  ROTC  cadets  only.  One  course.  Gibbs  or  Jones 

191.  Independent  Study.  Directed  readings  and  research  in  military  science.  One 
course.  Gibbs  or  Jones 

Music  (mus) 

Professor  Silbiger,  Chairman;  Artist-in-Residence  Parkins,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Professor  Williams;  Associate  Professors  Jaffe,  Seebass,  and  Todd;  Assistant  Professors 
Bartlet,  Gilliam,  Henry,  Higgins,  and  Hill;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Druesedow; 
Artists-in-Residence  Coleman,  Jeffrey,  Love,  Muti,  Szasz,  Troxler,  and  Wynkoop;  Artists- 
in-Residence  (Institute  of  the  Arts)  Bagg,  Berg,  Bloom,  andRaimi;  Staff  Associates  Dims- 
dale,  Gilmore,  Hanks,  Hawkins,  Jensen,  Ketch,  Lail,  Mizesko,  Peck,  Pederson,  and 
Weddle 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

For  over  two  thousand  years,  music  has  been  viewed  as  a  crucial  part  of  education, 
compulsory  in  some  cultures,  optional  in  many,  formative  in  all.  Music  is  customarily 
regarded  as  an  art,  but  as  a  university  subject  it  has  its  own  scientific  language,  logic,  and 
grammar,  in  the  understanding  of  which  the  mind  is  stretched  and  tested.  Furthermore, 
music  as  taught  at  Duke  includes  assumptions  that  history,  theory,  composition,  and  per- 
formance are  areas  of  comparable  worth  both  in  themselves  and  as  a  means  of  understand- 
ing the  many  facets  of  musicianship.  Almost  every  student  has  some  personal  involve- 


Music  (MUS)        235 


ment  with  music  (often  with  the  many  kinds  of  music),  and  the  courses  aim  to  further 
that  involvement,  whether  passive  or  active,  a  simple  hobby  or  compelling  force. 

Courses  include  many  kinds  of  instruction:  instrumental  lessons,  history  and  the- 
ory lectures,  harmony  classes,  composition  seminars,  ensemble  participation,  practical 
laboratory  work  (such  as  ear-training),  and  coaching  sessions  for  conductors.  Emphasis 
is  placed  equally  on  theory  and  practice,  and  students'  musical  activity  can  vary  widely 
across  the  spectrum  from  composing  their  own  music  to  endeavoring  to  understand  the 
technical,  historical,  and  sociological  context  of  other  composers'  music. 

Musical  studies  can  have  a  particular  value  in  Program  II.  So  many  areas  of  interest 
in  literature  (English  and  world  literature),  the  arts,  art  history,  sociology,  politics,  phi- 
losophy, religion,  psychology,  and  physics  are  illustrated,  paralleled,  or  elucidated  by 
aspects  of  music,  just  as  music  itself  is  by  those  other  disciplines. 

THEORY  AND  COMPOSITION 

The  department's  theory  courses  are  designed  to  give  the  student  a  deeper  under- 
standing of  musical  materials:  harmony,  counterpoint,  voice  leading,  and  musicianship. 
This  is  accomplished  through  analysis  of  repertoire,  composition,  aural  work,  and  key- 
board playing  (score  reading,  figured  bass,  and  simple  improvisation). 

36.  Acoustics  and  Music.  (NS)  No  previous  knowledge  of  physics  is  assumed.  See 
C-L:  Physics  36.  One  course.  Lawson 

55.  Introduction  to  Music  Theory.  (AL)  Fundamentals  of  notation,  melodic  and  har- 
monic practice,  analysis,  and  score  reading,  as  a  basis  for  independent  work.  Does  not 
count  for  major  requirements.  Prerequisite:  some  ability  to  read  music.  One  course.  Troxler 

or  staff 

65.  Fundamentals  of  Music  Theory.  (AL)  Physical  properties  of  sound,  principles  of 
diatonic  tonal  organization,  melodic  and  harmonic  constructions,  elementary  counter- 
point, and  figured  bass.  Laboratory.  Prerequisite:  basic  knowledge  of  musical  notation 
and  vocabulary.  One  course.  Hill  or  Wynkoop 

66.  Tonal  Harmony.  (AL)  Harmonic  language  of  eighteenth  and  nineteenth  centu- 
ries, functional  chromaticism,  and  introduction  to  musical  forms.  Laboratory.  Prerequi- 
site: Music  65.  One  course.  Hill  or  Wynkoop 

67S.  Composition  I.  (AL)  Composing  original  music  in  smaller  forms  for  voice,  pi- 
ano, and  other  instruments.  Studies  in  compositional  techniques.  Prerequisites:  Music 
65  and  66  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Jaffe 

68S.  Composition  II.  (AL)  See  Music  67S.  Prerequisites:  Music  65  and  66  or  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Jaffe 

75.  Jazz  Improvisation.  (AL)  The  theory  of  jazz  improvisation  for  all  instruments  and 
its  practical  application  to  the  different  styles  of  jazz.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 
Half  course,  Jeffrey 

115S.  Modal  Counterpoint.  (AL)  Polyphonic  practice  of  the  fifteenth  and  sixteenth 
centuries;  sacred  and  secular  music.  Laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Music  66  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. One  course.  Higgins 

116S.  Tonal  Counterpoint.  ( AL)  Polyphonic  practice  of  the  seventeenth,  eighteenth, 
and  nineteenth  centuries;  sacred  and  secular  music.  Laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Music  115S 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Higgins,  faffe,  or  Williams 

122.  Orchestration.  (AL)  Characteristics  and  transpositions  of  the  instruments.  Scor- 
ing for  symphony  orchestra;  concert  band;  and  string,  woodwind,  brass,  and  percussion 
ensembles  from  pre-existing  piano  scores  or  the  student's  original  compositions.  Prereq- 
uisite: Music  116S.  One  course,  jaffe 

236        Courses  of  Instruction 


128.  Instrumental  Conducting.  (AL)  Development  of  techniques  of  conducting  in- 
strumental ensembles  with  emphasis  on  orchestral  repertoire.  Score-reading  and  anal- 
ysis, principles  of  interpretation,  and  practical  conducting  experience.  Prerequisite:  Music 
116S  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Midi 

129.  Choral  Conducting.  (AL)  Development  of  techniques  of  conducting  vocal  reper- 
toire, ranging  from  church  anthems  to  large-scale  works.  Score-reading  and  analysis,  prin- 
ciples of  interpretation,  and  practical  conducting  experience.  Prerequisite:  Music  116S 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Wynkoop 

HISTORY,  LITERATURE,  AND  MUSICOLOGY 

The  study  of  music  history  and  literature  contributes  to  a  broader  knowledge  of  cul- 
ture and  society.  Courses  offer  students  the  opportunity  to  examine  compositions  in  their 
historic  and/or  social  context.  In  addition  to  surveying  significant  forms,  genres,  and  styles, 
and  their  development,  the  courses  include  consideration  of  music's  function,  the  place 
of  musicians,  aspects  of  performance  practice,  and  aesthetic  value.  Although  the  normal 
prerequisite  for  Music  155S-158S  (Music  History  I-IV)  is  Music  65,  interested  students  in 
other  disciplines  with  some  background  in  music  are  encouraged  to  ask  individual  in- 
structors for  permission  to  enroll. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

74.  Introduction  to  Jazz.  (AL)  A  survey  examining  musical,  aesthetic,  sociological, 
and  historical  aspects.  Fornonmajors.  C-L:  Afro-American  Studies  74.  Onecourse.  Jeffrey 

76.  Introduction  to  the  Symphony.  (AL)  Selected  works  from  the  classical,  roman- 
tic, impressionist,  and  contemporary  periods  that  examine  the  creation,  enjoyment,  and 
evaluation  of  symphonic  literature.  Development  of  critical  abilities  through  the  study 
of  style,  structure,  and  orchestration  in  the  symphony,  concert  suite,  symphonic  poem, 
and  program  symphony.  For  nonmajors.  One  course.  Ham/ 

77.  Introduction  to  Chamber  Music.  ( AL)  A  survey  of  major  works  of  chamber  mu- 
sic through  live  performances  and  discussions  with  participating  artists.  The  role  of  cham- 
ber music  in  Western  society  and  its  portrayal  in  art  and  literature.  With  the  participation 
of  the  Ciompi  Quartet  and  visiting  ensembles.  For  nonmajors.  One  course.  Silbiger 

119.  The  Humanities  and  Music.  (AL)  A  historical  survey  of  the  relationship  of  sig- 
nificant literary  texts  to  music,  exemplifying  literary  genres  and  concepts  with  musical 
works  from  antiquity  to  the  nineteenth  century.  Readings  from  primary  literary  sources, 
listening  to  representative  musical  settings.  Does  not  count  for  the  major  in  music.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Bartlet,  Higgins,  or  Seebass 

120S.  Women  in  Music.  (CZ)  The  lives  and  works  of  the  principal  women  composers 
and  musicians  of  Western  art  music  from  the  Middle  Ages  to  the  present  within  their  con- 
temporary intellectual,  artistic,  sociological,  and  economic  contexts.  The  extent  to  which 
gender  as  an  historical  variable  affected  their  creative  activities  and  achievements  as  well 
as  the  critical  assessment  of  their  canon.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Higgins 

125.  Masterworks  of  Music.  (AL)  An  introduction  to  the  lives  and  works  of  major 
Western  composers.  For  nonmajors.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Druesedow,  Henri/,  Muti,  or  Todd 

125D.  Masterworks  of  Music.  (AL)  Same  as  Music  125  except  instruction  is  provid- 
ed in  two  lectures  and  one  small  discu  ssion  meeting  each  week.  One  course.  Gilliam  and 
staff 

135S.  American  Music  to  1900.  (AL)  Music  from  the  settlement  of  the  Pilgrims  in  1620 
to  the  early  ragtime  era  (the  1890s).  Hymnody,  stage  music,  popular  song,  instrumental 
concert  music,  national  tunes,  and  other  genres.  One  course.  Druesedow 

Music  (MUS)         237 


136S.  Introduction  to  Non-Western  Music.  (AL)  Study  of  social  and  religious  con- 
texts. Native  instruments  and  related  craftsmanship.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Seebass 

138.  Music  in  East  and  Southeast  Asia.  (AL)  An  introduction  to  the  musical  culture 
of  Japan,  China,  mainland  Southeast  Asia,  Indonesia,  and  the  Philippines.  Notation,  per- 
formance, and  musical  instruments;  historical,  religious,  and  social  context.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Seebass 

139.  Twentieth-Century  Music.  (AL)  Influential  creative  stylistic  developments  in  mu- 
sic of  the  present  century.  A  critical  survey  of  works  by  Bartok,  Berg,  Schoenberg, 
Stravinsky,  and  Webern  as  a  means  of  establishing  a  relative  standard  of  values  for  sub- 
sequent independent  exploration.  Prerequisite:  a  one-year  course  in  music  theory  or  liter- 
ature, or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Jaffe  or  Todd 

143.  Beethoven  and  His  Time.  (AL)  The  music  of  Beethoven  and  its  relation  to  con- 
temporary historical,  social,  and  literary  developments.  Emphasis  on  the  nine  sympho- 
nies. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Bartlet,  Gilliam,  Silbiger,  or  Todd 

144.  Bach  and  His  Time.  (AL)  The  music  of  Johann  Sebastian  Bach  and  its  historical 
and  cultural  background,  with  emphasis  on  the  sacred  and  the  instrumental  works.  Some 
consideration  also  given  to  the  music  of  Bach's  contemporaries,  including  Vivaldi, 
Rameau,  and  Handel.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Hill  or  Silbiger 

145.  Mozart  and  His  Time.  (AL)  A  biographical  sketch  and  a  study  of  his  works  in 
their  relationship  to  the  past  and  to  works  of  contemporaries  in  various  European  coun- 
tries. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Seebass 

146.  Mendelssohn  and  Schumann.  (AL)  The  music  of  Felix  Mendelssohn-Bartholdy 
and  Robert  Schumann  and  its  role  in  the  evolution  of  German  music  in  the  nineteenth 
century.  Topics  include  the  Bach  revival,  the  character  piece,  the  art  song,  the  concert  over- 
ture, programmatic  music,  and  music  criticism.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  Todd 

155S.  Music  History  I:  Antiquity,  Middle  Ages,  Early  Renaissance.  (AL)  Prerequi- 
site: for  music  majors,  Music  65  or  consent  of  instructor;  for  nonmajors,  consent  of  in- 
structor. C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Higgins,  Seebass,  or  Silbiger 

156S.  Music  History  II:  Late  Renaissance,  Baroque.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  for  music 
majors,  Music  65  or  consent  of  instructor;  for  nonmajors,  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Bartlet,  Higgins, 
Seebass,  Silbiger,  or  Williams 

157S.  Music  History  III:  Rococo  and  Classic.  (AL)  Prerequisite:  for  music  majors,  Mu- 
sic 65  or  consent  of  instructor;  for  nonmajors,  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Comparative 
Area  Studies.  One  course.  Bartlet,  Seebass,  Silbiger,  or  Todd 

158S.  Music  History  IV:  Romanticism  to  the  Early  Modern  Period.  (AL)  Prerequi- 
site: for  music  majors,  Music  65  or  consent  of  instructor;  for  nonmajors,  consent  of  in- 
structor. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Bartlet,  Gilliam,  Silbiger,  or  Todd 

161.  Musicianship  I.  Development  of  practical  musical  skills:  sight  singing,  ear  train- 
ing, and  keyboard  proficiency.  Normally  taken  concurrently  with  Music  1 15S.  Prerequi- 
site: for  music  majors,  Music  66;  for  nonmajors,  consent  of  instructor.  Quarter  course.  Staff 

162.  Musicianship  II.  Prerequisite:  Music  161.  Quarter  course.  Staff 

163.  Musicianship  HI.  Prerequisite:  Music  162.  Quarter  course.  Staff 

164.  Musicianship  IV.  Prerequisite:  Music  163.  Quarter  course.  Staff 


238         Courses  of  Instruction 


166.  Opera .  ( AL)  History  of  opera  from  the  late  sixteenth  century  to  the  present  .Rela- 
tionship of  music  and  text;  opera  as  social  commentary;  changing  forms  and  styles.  Select- 
ed composers,  especially  Mozart,  Verdi,  Puccini,  and  Wagner.  Onecourse.  BartlctorMuti 

171S.  Bach:  Master  of  Style.  (AL)  SeeC-L:  Distinguished  Professor  Course  194S.  One 
course.  Williams 

185S,  186S.  Seminar  in  Music.  (AL)  Primarily  for  junior  and  senior  music  majors. 
Topics  to  be  announced.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

201.  Introduction  to  Musicology.  (AL)  Methods  of  research  on  music  and  its  histo- 
ry, including  studies  of  musical  and  literary  sources,  iconography,  performance  practice, 
ethnomusicology,  and  historical  analysis,  with  special  attention  to  the  interrelationships 
of  these  approaches.  One  course.  Druesedow  or  Seebass 

203.  Proseminar  in  Performance  Practice.  (AL)  Critical  methods  in  the  study  of  histor- 
ical performance  practice,  including  the  evaluation  of  evidence  provided  by  musical  and 
theoretical  sources,  archival  and  iconographic  materials,  instruments,  and  sound  record- 
ings. Current  issues  regarding  the  performance  practice  for  music  from  the  middle  ages 
to  the  twentieth  century.  One  course.  Silbiger 

211,  212.  Notation.  (AL)  Development  and  changing  function  of  musical  notation 
from  c.  900  to  c.  1900,  including  plainchant  notations,  black  notations,  white  notations, 
the  invention  of  printing  (particularly  movable  type  and  engraving),  keyboard  and  lute 
tablatures,  scores.  One  course  each.  Higgins  or  Williams 

213.  Theories  and  Notation  of  Contemporary  Music.  ( AL)  The  diverse  languages  of 
contemporary  music  and  their  roots  in  the  early  twentieth  century,  with  emphasis  on  prob- 
lems and  continuity  of  musical  language.  Recent  composers  and  their  stylistic  progeni- 
tors: for  example,  Ligeti,  Bartok,  and  Berg;  Carter,  Schoenberg,  Ives,  and  Copland; 
Crumb,  Messiaen,  and  Webern;  Cage,  Varese,  Cowell,  and  Stockhausen.  One  course,  faffe 

215.  Music  Analysis.  (AL)  Historical,  philosophical,  and  ideological  issues  raised  by 
music  analysis.  Intensive  study  of  harmony  and  voice  leading  in  the  works  of  major  to- 
nal composers,  with  emphasis  on  the  analytic  approach  of  Heinrich  Schenker.  One 
course.  Hill  or  Todd 

222.  Music  in  the  Middle  Ages.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  One  course.  Higgins  or  Seebass 

223.  Music  in  the  Renaissance.  ( AL)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  One  course.  Higgins  or  Silbiger 

224.  Music  in  the  Baroque  Era.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Hill,  Silbiger,  or 
Williams 

225.  Music  in  the  Classic  Era.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  Onecourse.  Bartlet,  Seebass,  orTodd 

226.  Music  in  the  Nineteenth  Century.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Bartlet, 
Gilliam,  or  Todd 

227.  Music  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  (AL)  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Gilliam  or  Todd 

236.  Nineteenth-Century  Piano  Music.  (AL)  Beethoven,  Schubert,  Weber,  Mendels- 
sohn, Schumann,  Chopin,  Liszt,  and  Brahms.  The  arts  of  improvisation  and  transcrip- 
tion, the  keyboard  virtuoso,  the  character  piece,  and  the  conflict  between  romantic  con- 
tent and  form.  One  course.  Todd 


Music  (MUS)        239 


295S.  Composition  Seminar.  (AL)  Selected  topics  in  composition,  including  origi- 
nal composition  in  stylized  genres  (for  example,  Classical-period  sonata,  Romantic  pi- 
ano piece,  free  atonal  song)  as  well  as  free  composition  on  given  materials.  Related  topics 
in  form,  harmony,  and  instrumentation.  One  course.  Jaffe 

296S.  Analysis  of  Contemporary  Music.  (AL)  Structures,  expressive  intentions,  and 
functions  since  1914.  Contemporary  orchestral  music,  American  music,  European  mu- 
sic, popular  media,  musical  tradition  and  contemporary  composers.  Analysis  of  works 
performed  in  the  department's  Encounters  Series  with  occasional  guest  composers  pres- 
ent. One  course.  Jaffe 

297, 298, 299.  Composition.  (AL)  Weekly  independent  study  sessions  at  an  advanced 
level  with  a  member  of  the  graduate  faculty  in  composition.  One  course  each.  Jaffe 

INDEPENDENT  STUDY  AND  SEMINARS 

Admission  to  these  courses  will  be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  Director  of  Under- 
graduate Studies  and  the  instructor.  The  instructor  and  course  content  will  be  established 
in  accordance  with  the  individual  student's  interests  and  capacities. 

179, 180.  Independent  Study  in  Musical  Performance*  Open  only  to  sophomores 
possessing  an  exceptional  technical  and  interpretative  command  of  a  musical  medium. 
Requires  either  a  half-length  recital  at  the  end  of  each  semester  of  study  or  a  full-length 
recital  at  the  end  of  the  second  semester.  In  the  latter  case,  a  brief  performance  before  a 
jury  of  music  department  faculty  is  required  at  the  end  of  the  first  semester.  Prerequisites: 
previous  registration  in  private  instruction  in  applied  music  at  Duke,  audition,  and  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

181,  182.  Independent  Study  in  Musical  Performance*  Same  as  179,  180,  but  for 
juniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

183,  184.  Independent  Study  in  Musical  Performance*  Same  as  179,  180,  but  for 
seniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading,  research,  and/or  theoretical  analy- 
sis, culminating  in  a  substantial  paper;  or  exploration  of  advanced  compositional  tech- 
niques resulting  in  a  work  of  larger  scale.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Same  as  191, 192,  but  for  seniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

APPLIED  MUSIC 

In  conjunction  with  theory  and  history,  performance  is  an  active  way  of  understanding 
music  literature,  facing  questions  of  style,  and  honoring  one's  technical  and  expressive 
skills.  Provided  they  qualify  by  audition,  students  are  encouraged  to  enroll  in  private  in- 
struction and  to  participate  in  ensembles.  Auditions  must  be  arranged  with  the  instruc- 
tor prior  to  registration.  For  those  students  who  wish  to  study  privately  but  do  not  quali- 
fy for  university-level  instruction,  a  list  of  music  teachers  in  the  immediate  area  who  are 
available  to  Duke  students  can  be  obtained  from  the  department  office.  All  applied  mu- 
sic courses  may  be  repeated  for  credit,  but  no  more  than  two  ensembles  may  be  taken  con- 
currently for  credit. 

57S,  58S.  Vocal  Diction.  57S:  Italian/English;  58S:  German/French.  For  singers,  ac- 
tors, radio  announcers,  and  public  speakers.  Introduction  to  the  international  phonetic 
alphabet.  Students  will  be  required  to  sing  in  class.  Written,  oral,  and  vocal  performance 
examinations.  Half  course  each.  Lail  or  Peck 


The  schedule  of  fees  for  private  lessons,  as  published  in  the  subsection  on  fees,  is  applicable  to  courses 
179,  180,  181.  182,  183,  184. 

240         Courses  of  Instruction 


Instruction:  half  hour 

78.  Class  Harpsichord.  Quarter  course.  Hill 

79.  Class  Voice.  Quarter  course.  bail 

80.  Piano.  Quarter  course.  Coleman,  Hawkins,  hove,  or  Szasz 

81.  Strings.  Quarter  course.  Bagg,  Berg,  Bloom,  or  Raimi 

82.  Woodwinds.  Quarter  course.  Gilmore,  Jeffrey.  Pederson,  Troxlcr,  or  Weddle 

83.  Brass.  Quarter  course.  Dimsdale,  Ketch,  orMizesko 

84.  Percussion.  Quarter  course.  Hanks 

85.  Voice.  Quarter  course.  Jensen,  bail,  or  Peck 

86.  Organ.  Quarter  course.  Parkins 

87.  Harpsichord.  Quarter  course.  Hill 

Instruction:  1  hour 

90.  Piano.  Half  course.  Coleman,  Hawkins,  have,  or  Szasz 

91.  Strings.  Half  course.  Bagg,  Berg,  Bloom,  or  Raimi 

92.  Woodwinds.  Half  course.  Gilmore,  Jeffrey,  Pederson,  Troxler,  or  Weddle 

93.  Brass.  Half  course.  Dimsdale,  Ketch,  or  Mizesko 

94.  Percussion.  Half  course.  Hanks 

95.  Voice.  Half  course.  Jensen,  hail,  or  Peck 

96.  Organ.  Half  course.  Parkins 

97.  Harpsichord.  Half  course.  Hill 

Ensemble  Classes:  pass/fail 

100.  Symphony  Orchestra.  Quarter  course.  Muti 

101.  Wind  Symphony.  Quarter  course.  Staff 

102.  Marching  Band.  Quarter  course.  Boumpam 

103.  Jazz  Ensemble.  Quarter  course.  Jeffrey 
106.  Chamber  Music.  Quarter  course.  Hawkins 

110.  Collegium  Musicum.  Quarter  course.  Hill 

111.  Opera  Workshop.  Quarter  course.  Staff 

112.  Chapel  Choir.  Quarter  course.  Staff 

113.  Chorale.  Quarter  course.  Wynkoop 

Credit  in  Applied  Music.  (Skills  courses— credit  not  applicable  to  distributional  re- 
quirements.)* Credit  for  instruction  in  courses  below  100  is  granted  on  the  basis  of  a  half 
course  per  semester  for  one  hour  of  private  instruction  per  week  and  a  minimum  of  six 
hours  practice  weekly;  or  a  half  course  per  year  for  one  half  hour  of  private  instruction 
or  one  period  of  class  study  and  a  minimum  of  six  hours  practice  per  week.  An  addition- 
al weekly  class  meeting  for  performance  and  criticism  may  be  required  by  the  instructor 
without  additional  credit. 

Fees.  Applied  music  instruction  in  one  medium  (instrument  or  voice)  is  offered  free 
to  music  majors.  Additional  instruction  for  music  majors  and  all  instruction  for  nonmajors 
will  be  charged  as  follows: 

One  half-hour  private  lesson  per  week  for  one  semester  $100 

One  one-hour  private  lesson  per  week  for  one  semester  $200 

One  half-hour  class  lesson  per  week  for  one  semester  $60 

Registration  in  ensemble  classes  (Music  100-113)  Free 

No  charge  is  made  for  practice  room  facilities  for  students  registered  for  private  or  class 
lessons  in  applied  music.  A  fee  schedule  for  the  use  of  facilities  by  others  not  registered 
for  applied  lessons  is  available  from  the  music  department  office. 

Fees  are  not  refundable  after  the  final  drop/add  day. 

See  also  Institute  of  the  Arts  in  this  bulletin. 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

130T,  131T.  Performance  Practice  (Organ)  I,  II.  (AL) 


•Subject  to  instructor's  approval,  a  student  at  an  advanced  level  in  applied  music  may  take  courses  for  tutorial 
requirements.  These  courses  shall  be  designated  by  adding  a  Tto  the  appropriate  course  number.  Students  who 
have  not  reached  an  advanced  level  will  continue  to  take  the  regular  applied  music  courses. 


Mhsi'c  (MUS)         241 


132T,  133T.  Performance  Practice  (Organ)  III,  IV.  (AL) 

137.  Music  in  South  Asia.  (AL) 

142.  The  Musical  Theater.  (AL) 

160.  History  of  the  Organ  and  Its  Literature.  (AL) 

170.  Romanticism  in  the  Arts.  (AL) 

THE  MAJOR 

A  major  or  second  major  in  music  is  a  means  of  preparing  students  for  further  profes- 
sional training  in  the  branches  of  the  art,  for  graduate  study  as  historians,  composers, 
and  performers,  and  for  a  more  intimate  understanding  of  one  of  life's  most  important 
experiences. 

The  aim  of  the  required  courses  is  to  give  a  balanced  selection  of  history,  theory,  com- 
position, and  performance,  reinforced  by  constant  attention  to  the  art  of  listening.  With 
the  required  courses  as  their  foundation,  students  choose  electives  to  further  their  interest 
in,  or  gifts  for,  a  particular  music  activity,  so  that  a  performer  will  have  a  good  theoretical 
background,  a  historian  considerable  experience  as  a  player,  a  composer  various  kinds 
of  understanding  of  music  of  the  past,  and  so  on. 

Prerequisites.  Music  65,  66,  and  one  year  of  applied  music  study  in  an  instrument  or 
voice;  two  semesters  of  participation  in  a  departmental  ensemble  (excluding  Music  102 
and  112),  with  or  without  credit. 

Major  Requirements.  Music  115S,  116S,  155S-158S,  161-164  (one  course),  and  one  ad- 
ditional elective  course  in  the  department.  Those  who  plan  to  study  music  beyond  the 
undergraduate  level  are  strongly  advised  to  prepare  themselves  in  two  or  more  foreign 
languages. 

Honors.  Music  majors  who  are  qualified  (see  the  section  on  honors  in  this  bulletin) 
may  undertake  work  leading  to  departmental  graduation  with  distinction  or  Latin  honors 
by  honors  project.  In  either  case  the  candidate  must  make  application  to  the  Director  of 
Undergraduate  Studies  by  March  20  of  the  junior  year.  The  project  is  normally  a  year-long 
endeavor  involving  an  independent  study  or  an  appropriate  graduate  seminar  each  se- 
mester of  the  senior  year.  It  must  culminate  in  a  substantial  paper  (historical,  analytical, 
or  theoretical),  which  may  be  more  concise  if  offered  in  conjunction  with  a  recital  or  a  com- 
position. The  final  project  must  be  approved  by  a  faculty  committee. 

Naval  Science — Navy  ROTC  (NS) 

Professor  Triebel,  Captain,  U.S.  Navy,  Chairman;  Visiting  Associate  Professor  Meldrum, 
Commander,  U.S.  Navy,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Visiting  Assistant  Professors 
Dossett,  Major,  U.S.  Marine  Corps,  Perry,  Lieutenant,  U.S.  Navy,  Uphoff,  Lieutenant, 
U.S.  Navy,  and  Greer,  Lieutenant,  U.S.  Navy 

Courses  in  naval  science  are  open  to  all  students.  The  program  in  naval  science  offers 
students  an  opportunity  to  gain  a  broad-based  knowledge  in  naval  studies  leading  to  a 
challenging  career  as  a  naval  or  marine  corps  officer. 

Since  a  major  is  not  available  in  this  program,  scholarship  program  participants  are 
encouraged  to  pursue  majors  in  technical  fields,  although  a  major  in  any  field  of  study 
leading  to  a  baccalaureate  degree  meets  the  basic  requirement.  The  academic  program 
for  an  approved  degree  and  commission  must  include  all  naval  science  courses  and  labora- 
tories. Navy  option  scholarship  students  must  complete  one  year  of  calculus  by  the  end 
of  the  sophomore  year,  one  year  of  calculus-based  physics  by  the  end  of  the  junior  year, 
one  year  of  American  military  history  or  national  security  policy,  one  year  of  English,  one 
semester  of  an  Indo-European  or  Asiatic  language,  and  one  semester  of  computer  science. 

Nonscholarship  Navy  option  student  requirements  are  one  year  of  mathematics,  one 
year  of  physical  science,  one  year  of  English,  and  one  semester  of  computer  science. 

242         Courses  of  Instruction 


Marine  Corps  option  students  are  required  to  take  one  year  of  American  military  history 
or  national  security  policy  and,  if  on  scholarship,  one  semester  of  a  foreign  language. 

11.  Naval  Orientation.  The  missions,  warfare  communities,  and  organization  of  the 
United  States  Navy.  Seapower,  the  maritime  strategy,  the  Soviet  Navy,  leadership,  the 
Uniform  Code  of  Military  Justice,  and  naval  customs.  No  credit.  Grccr 

11L.  Naval  Orientation  Laboratory.  Practical  application  of  the  elements  and  mate- 
rial presented  in  Naval  Science  11.  No  credit.  Greer 

12.  Naval  Ships  Systems.  Structure,  elements  of  design,  stability,  compartmentation, 
communications,  and  propulsion  systems  as  they  bear  on  safe  operation  and  combat  or 
service  effectiveness.  One  course.  Greer 

12L.  Naval  Ships  Systems  Laboratory.  Practical  application  of  the  theories  and  prin- 
ciples of  naval  ships  systems.  No  credit.  Greer 

52.  Seapower  and  Maritime  Affairs.  The  role  of  seapower  in  national  and  foreign  poli- 
cy, and  as  an  instrument  of  politico-military  strategy.  Includes  comparative  study  of  United 
States  and  Soviet  maritime  strategies.  One  course.  Triebcl 

53L.  Seapower  Laboratory.  Case  studies  and  contemporary  issues  dealing  with  Unit- 
ed States  Navy.  Mandatory  for  Navy  ROTC  midshipmen.  No  credit.  Triebcl 

126.  Concepts  and  Analyses  of  Naval  Tactical  Systems.  Detection  systems;  systems 
integration  into  current  naval  platforms  and  their  offensive  and  defensive  capabilities. 
One  course.  Perry 

126L.  Naval  Tactical  Systems  Laboratory.  Practical  application  of  the  theories  and 
principles  of  naval  tactical  systems.  No  credit.  Perry 

131.  Navigation.  Theory,  principles,  and  procedures  of  ship  navigation,  movements, 
and  employment.  Dead  reckoning,  piloting,  celestial  and  electronic  principles  of  navi- 
gation. Naval  Science  131L  should  be  taken  concurrently.  One  course.  Uphoff 

131L.  Navigation  Laboratory.  Practical  application  of  the  theories  and  principles  of 
navigation  as  presented  in  the  lecture  series.  No  credit.  Uphoff 

132.  Naval  Operations.  Components  of  general  naval  operations,  including  concepts 
and  application  of  tactical  formations  and  dispositions,  relative  motion,  maneuvering 
board  and  tactical  plots,  rules  of  the  road,  and  naval  communications.  Naval  Science  132L 
is  a  concurrent  requirement.  One  course.  Uphoff 

132L.  Naval  Operations  Laboratory.  Practical  application  of  the  theories  of  naval  oper- 
ations as  presented  in  the  lecture  series.  No  credit.  Uphoff 

137L,  138L.  Marine  Tactics  Laboratory.  Concepts  and  applications  of  tactical  employ- 
ment of  Marine  Amphibious  Forces.  Ground  weapons  systems,  land  navigation,  and 
small  unit  tactics.  No  credit.  Dosseit 

141S.  Evolution  of  Warfare.  Continuity  and  change  in  the  history  of  warfare,  with  at- 
tention to  the  interrelationship  of  social,  political,  technological,  and  military  factors.  One 
course.  Dossett 

145L.  Naval  Leadership  and  Management  I.  Study  of  organizational  behavior  and 
management  in  the  context  of  naval  organization.  Topics  include  discussion  of  leader- 
ship and  management  functions  of  planning,  controlling,  and  directing.  Practical  appli- 
cations explored  using  case  studies.  No  credit.  Meldrum 

146L.  Naval  Leadership  and  Management  II.  The  study  of  officer  responsibilities  in 
Naval  administration.  Discussions  of  counseling  methods,  military  justice,  human 
resources  management,  and  supply  systems.  No  credit.  Meldrum 

Naval  Science-Nam/  ROTC  <NS)        243 


147L,  148L.  Marine  Leadership  Laboratory.  Marine  Corps  career  management,  na- 
val correspondence,  force  structure,  leadership  techniques,  and  training.  No  credit. 
Dossett 

151S.  Amphibious  Operations.  Development  of  amphibious  doctrine,  with  atten- 
tion to  its  current  applications.  One  course.  Dossett 

191.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified  stu- 
dents in  junior  and  senior  years  by  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One 
course.  Staff 

Neurosciences  Program 

Professor  Staddon,  Director 

A  certificate,  but  not  a  major,  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  study  of  the  nervous  system  has  developed  into  one  of  the  most  exciting  areas 
of  modern  science  with  rapidly  expanding  knowledge  in  both  basic  and  medically  ap- 
plied areas.  This  program  offers  the  student  a  liberal  arts  education  with  the  opportuni- 
ty to  emphasize  studies  in  the  neural  sciences.  The  neurosciences  certificate  program  is 
also  excellent  preparation  for  graduate  study  or  professional  school. 

Acceptance  into  the  biology-psychology  interdepartmental  concentration  is  by  ar- 
rangement with  the  Directors  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  biology  and  psychology.  The 
interdepartmental  concentration,  which  fulfills  the  requirements  of  a  major  for  gradua- 
tion, requires  four  courses  beyond  the  introductory  level  in  biology  and  three  in  psychol- 
ogy. Beyond  this,  acceptance  into  the  neurosciences  program  is  limited  by  the  size  of  the 
core  neurosciences  courses. 

The  required  core  courses  are  Psychology  103  and  Interdisciplinary  Courses  200  and 
201.  A  selection  from  a  number  of  recommended  allied  courses  allows  students  to  select 
particular  areas  of  neuroscience  and  related  fields.  Independent  study  and  research  with 
the  various  faculty  are  encouraged.  A  strong  background  in  the  sciences  is  required. 

A  certificate  in  the  neurosciences  may  be  awarded  at  graduation  upon  successful  com- 
pletion of  the  course  of  study  and  approval  of  the  advisory  committee  and  Directors  of 
Undergraduate  Studies  in  biology  and  psychology. 

Core  Courses 

Psychology  103.  Biological  Bases  of  Behavior.  Physiological,  developmental,  and  evolutionary  approaches 
to  behavior.  Sensory  and  cognitive  processes,  sleep,  pain,  emotion,  hunger,  and  thirst  as  well  as  maternal  and 
sexual  behavior  patterns.  Prerequisite:  Biology  14L  or  21L;  may  be  taken  concurrently.  One  course.  C.  Erickson 

Interdisciplinary  Course  200.  Advanced  Neuroscience  I.  Basic  neuroanatomy  and  neurophysiology,  phys- 
iology of  the  neuron  and  neural  networks,  neurotransmitter  functions,  sensory  and  motor  systems.  Prerequi- 
site: Psychology  103.  C-L:  Biology  200  and  Psychology  200.  One  course.  Cant  and  McOay 

Interdisciplinary  Course  201.  Advanced  Neuroscience  II.  Integrative  activities  of  the  nervous  system;  sensory- 

motor  relationships,  neuroendocrine  relationships,  emotion  and  motivation,  sleep,  learning  and  memory,  dis- 
eases of  the  nervous  system  and  their  psychological  correlates.  Prerequisite:  Biology  200,  Interdisciplinary  Course 
200,  or  Psychology  200.  C-L:  Psychology  201.  One  course.  R.  Erickson  and  W.  G.  Hall 

Further  details  on  the  neurosciences  program  may  be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  the 
Director  (Professor  Staddon),  249  Sociology-Psychology  Building. 

Philosophy  (phd 

Professor  Sanford,  Chairman;  Professor  Mahoney,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Profes- 
sor Golding;  Associate  Professors  Brandon  and  Posy;  Assistant  Professors  Ferejohn,  Lind, 
Roderick  and  Vander  Waerdt;  Professors  Emeriti  Peach  and  Welsh;  Adjunct  Associate 
Professor  Ward;  Visiting  Professor  Van  Cleve 


244         Courses  of  Instruction 


A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

The  undergraduate  program  in  the  Department  of  Philosophy  acquaints  students 
with  the  content  and  the  structure  of  philosophical  theory  in  various  areas.  Discussion 
is  encouraged  so  that  students  can  engage  actively  in  the  philosophical  examination  of 
problems. 

Course  offerings  fall  into  two  general  categories:  the  systematic  and  the  historical. 
In  a  systematic  treatment,  the  organization  of  a  course  is  primarily  in  terms  of  the  prob- 
lems presented  by  the  subject  matter  of  that  course,  as  in  logic,  ethics,  and  metaphysics. 
In  historical  courses,  attention  is  directed  more  to  the  order  of  development  in  the  thought 
ofaparticularphilosopher  (Plato,  Aristotle,  Kant)  or  in  a  historical  period.  In  all  courses, 
reading  of  the  works  of  philosophers  acquaints  the  students  with  the  important  and  in- 
fluential contributions  to  the  definition  and  solution  of  philosophical  issues. 

The  problems  raised  in  philosophy  in  respect  to  the  various  fields  of  the  arts  and 
sciences  involve  questions  which  are  not  normally  given  attention  in  those  particular  dis- 
ciplines. In  the  consideration  of  such  problems,  therefore,  it  is  expected  that  students  will 
acquire  some  understanding  and  perspective  of  the  major  areas  of  the  human  intellec- 
tual endeavor.  In  this  sense,  philosophical  comprehension  is  an  essential  part  of  a  stu- 
dent's learning  and  education. 

Philosophy  provides  a  sound  preparation  for  the  demands  of  many  professions.  For 
example,  the  precision  of  argument  and  broad  acquaintance  with  intellectual  traditions 
emphasized  in  philosophy  form  an  excellent  basis  for  the  study  of  law. 

Only  one  course  from  among  Philosophy  41, 42,  43S,  and  44S  may  be  taken  for  cred- 
it. These  courses  are  normally  not  open  to  juniors  and  seniors. 

41.  Introduction  to  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Examination  of  problems  in  philosophy;  em- 
phasis on  metaphysics  and  theory  of  knowledge.  One  course.  Staff 

42.  Introduction  to  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Examination  of  problems  in  philosophy;  em- 
phasis on  ethics  and  value  theory.  One  course.  Staff 

43S.  Introduction  to  Ph'ilosophy.  (CZ)  Philosophy  41  conducted  as  a  seminar.  One 
course.  Staff 

44S.  Introduction  to  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Philosophy  42  conducted  as  a  seminar.  One 
course.  Staff 

48.  Logic.  (CZ)  The  conditions  of  effective  thinking  and  clear  communication .  Exami- 
nation of  the  basic  principles  of  deductive  reasoning.  One  course.  Brandon,  Posy,  Sanford, 
or  Welsh 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

93.  History  of  Ancient  Philosophy.  (CZ)  The  pre-Socratics,  Socrates,  Plato,  Aristotle, 
and  post-Aristotelian  systems.  Prerequisites:  for  freshmen,  previous  philosophy  course 
and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  93.  One  course.  Ferejohn,  Mahoney,  or 
Vandcr  Wacrdt 

94.  History  of  Modern  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Bacon,  Hobbes,  Descartes,  Spinoza,  Leibniz, 
Locke,  Berkeley,  Hume,  and  Kant.  Prerequisites:  for  freshmen,  previous  philosophy 
course  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Posy  or  Van  Cleve 

102.  Aesthetics:  The  Philosophy  of  Art.  (CZ)  The  concept  of  beauty,  the  work  of  art, 
the  function  of  art,  art  and  society,  the  analysis  of  a  work  of  art,  criticism  in  the  arts.  One 
course.  Ward 

103.  Symbolic  Logic.  (CZ)  Detailed  analysis  of  deduction  and  of  deductive  systems. 
Open  to  sophomores  by  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Linguistics.  Onecourse.  Brandon  or  Posy 

104.  Philosophy  of  Science.  (CZ)  The  principal  philosophical  and  methodological 
problems  in  contemporary  science.  One  course.  Brandon 

Philosophy  (PHI)        245 


106.  Philosophy  of  Law.  (CZ)  Natural  law  theory,  legal  positivism,  legal  realism,  the 
relation  of  law  and  morality.  One  course.  Golding 

107.  Political  and  Social  Philosophy.  (CZ)  The  fundamental  principles  of  political  and 
social  organizations.  One  course.  Mahoney 

109.  Philosophy  of  Language.  (CZ)  A  philosophical  analysis  of  problems  arising  in 
the  study  of  language  and  symbolism.  Topics  include:  theories  of  language,  the  nature 
of  signs  and  symbols,  theories  of  meaning,  types  of  discourse  (scientific,  mathematical, 
poetic),  definition,  ambiguity,  metaphor.  C-L:  Linguistics.  One  course.  Posy 

110.  Knowledge  and  Certainty.  (CZ)  Problems  in  the  theory  of  knowledge:  condi- 
tions of  knowledge,  scepticism,  perception,  memory,  induction,  knowledge  of  other 
minds,  and  knowledge  of  necessary  truths.  One  course.  Sanford 

111.  Appearance  and  Reality.  (CZ)  Problems  in  metaphysics:  theories  of  existence, 
substance,  universals,  identity,  space,  time,  causality,  determinism  and  action,  and  the 
relation  of  mind  and  body.  One  course.  Ferejohn  or  Sanford 

112.  Philosophy  of  Mind.  (CZ)  Such  topics  as  mind  and  body,  thought,  perception, 
persons,  and  personal  identity.  One  course.  Sanford 

113.  Philosophy  of  Mathematics.  (CZ)  Survey  of  mathematical  thought  including  the 
nature  of  infinity,  Platonism,  constructivism,  and  the  foundational  crisis  of  the  early  twen- 
tieth century.  Prerequisite:  one  course  in  calculus  or  logic  or  philosophy;  or  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course.  Posy 

114D.  Hellenistic  Philosophy.  (CZ)  The  major  epistemological  and  ethical  controver- 
sies between  the  Epicureans,  Stoics,  and  Academic  skeptics.  Topics  include  pleasure  as 
our  chief  good,  skepticism  as  the  only  intellectual  stance  that  leads  to  happiness,  and  the 
criteria  of  infallible  knowledge.  Prerequisite:  sophomore  standing;  Philosophy  93  sug- 
gested. C-L:  Classical  Studies  114D.  One  course.  Vander  Waerdt 

116.  Systematic  Ethics.  (CZ)  Problems  in  moral  philosophy:  the  nature  of  morality, 
ethical  relativism,  egoism,  utilitarianism.  Both  historical  and  contemporary  readings,  with 
emphasis  on  the  latter.  One  course.  Golding  or  Lind 

117.  Ancient  and  Modern  Ethical  Theories.  (CZ)  The  development  of  ethical  thought 
in  the  West;  the  interaction  between  culture  and  ethical  theory,  with  special  reference  to 
the  Greek  city-state,  Roman  law,  the  Renaissance,  the  Reformation,  and  the  rise  of  mod- 
ern science.  Readings  in  the  great  ethical  philosophers.  One  course.  Golding,  Lind,  or  Welsh 

118.  Philosophical  Issues  in  Medical  Ethics.  (CZ)  Ethical  issues  arising  in  connec- 
tion with  medical  practice  and  research  and  medical  technology.  Definition  of  health  and 
illness;  experimentation  and  consent;  genetic  counseling  and  biological  engineering; 
abortion,  contraception,  and  sterilization;  death  and  dying;  codes  of  professional  con- 
duct; and  the  allocation  of  scarce  medical  resources.  Prerequisites:  for  freshmen,  previ- 
ous philosophy  course  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Brandon  or  Golding 

119.  Medieval  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Christian,  Islamic,  and  Jewish  philosophy  from  late 
antiquity  to  1300.  Special  emphasis  on  historical  influences  and  institutional  develop- 
ments. Nature  and  destiny  of  humans,  existence  and  nature  of  God,  problem  of  ethical 
norms,  political  philosophy.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course. 
Mahoney 

120.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Problems  of  political  authority 
and  nature  of  the  state,  mysticism,  humanism,  critical  trends,  background  of  Galileo,  and 
impact  of  the  Reformation  related  to  cultural  and  institutional  changes.  C-L:  Medieval 
and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Mahoney 

246        Courses  of  Instruction 


122.  Philosophical  Issues  in  Feminism.  (CZ)  Issues  in  political  and  moral  philoso- 
phy in  their  bearing  on  feminist  concerns,  including  political  equality  and  rights,  preferen- 
tial treatment,  feminist  and  non-feminist  critiques  of  pornography,  and  the  morality  of 
abortion.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Liud 

125.  Philosophy  of  Music.  (CZ)  The  nature  of  music  and  its  place  in  the  arts.  Emo- 
tion and  meaning,  creation  and  interpretation  in  music.  Readings  from  a  wide  variety  of 
sources.  One  course.  Ward 

132.  Nineteenth-Century  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Emphasis  on  Hegel,  Marx,  and  Nietzsche. 
One  course.  Roderick 

134.  Existentialism.  (CZ)  Themes  and  approaches  in  existential  philosophy.  Select- 
ed writings  of  Kierkegaard,  Tolstoy,  Dostoevsky,  Heidegger,  and  Sartre.  Contemporary 
relevance  of  existentialist  perspectives.  One  course.  Ward 

135.  Philosophy  in  Literature.  (CZ)  Comparative  examination  of  philosophical  topics 
such  as  freedom,  responsibility,  good  and  evil,  time  and  reality.  One  course.  Staff 

138.  Analytic  Philosophy  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  (CZ)  An  historical  survey  from 
Frege,  Moore,  Russell,  and  the  logical  positivism  of  the  Vienna  Circle  to  current  develop- 
ments. Philosophers  covered  include  Wittgenstein,  Ryle,  Austin,  Quine,  and  Davidson. 
Prerequisite  rone  philosophy  course  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Posy  or  Sanford 

139.  Twentieth-Century  Continental  Philosophy.  (CZ)  A  critical  and  historical  exami- 
nation of  movements  in  European  philosophy  such  as  existentialism,  structuralism,  post- 
structuralism,  hermeneutics,  and  critical  theory.  Husserl,  Heidegger,  Sartre,  Gadamer, 
Habermas,  and  Derrida :  their  views  of  language,  history,  and  the  problems  of  modern 
society.  One  course.  Roderick 

173.  Classical  Political  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Prerequisite:  junior  standing;  open  to  sopho- 
mores by  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  173.  One  course.  Vander  Waerdt 

191, 192, 193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research .  Open  only  to 
highly  qualified  students  in  the  junior  and  senior  year  with  consent  of  the  department. 
One  course  each.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

203S.  Contemporary  Ethical  Theories.  (CZ)  The  nature  and  justification  of  basic  ethi- 
cal concepts  in  the  light  of  the  chief  ethical  theories  of  twentieth-century  British  and  Ameri- 
can philosophers.  One  course.  Golding  or  Lind 

204S.  Philosophy  of  Law.  (CZ)  Natural  law  theory  and  positivism;  the  idea  of  obli- 
gation (legal,  political,  social,  moral);  and  the  relation  of  law  and  morality.  One  course. 
Golding 

206S.  Responsibility.  (CZ)  The  relationship  between  responsibility  in  the  law  and 
moral  blameworthiness;  excuses  and  defenses;  the  roles  of  such  concepts  as  act,  inten- 
tion, motive,  ignorance,  and  causation.  One  course.  Golding  or  Lind 

208S.  Political  Values.  (CZ)  Analysis  of  the  systematic  justification  of  political  prin- 
ciples and  the  political  values  in  the  administration  of  law.  One  course.  Golding 

211S.  Plato.  (CZ)  Selected  dialogues.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  211S.  One  course.  Ferejohn 

217S.  Aristotle.  (CZ)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  217S.  One  course.  Ferejohn 

218S.  Medieval  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Selected  problems.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  One  course.  Mahoney 

219S.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Selected  problems.  C-L:  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Mahoney 

Philosophy  (PHL)         247 


225S.  British  Empiricism.  (CZ)  A  critical  study  of  the  writings  of  Locke,  Berkeley,  or 
Hume  with  special  emphasis  on  problems  in  the  theory  of  knowledge.  One  course.  Lind 

227S.  Continental  Rationalism.  (CZ)  A  critical  study  of  the  writings  of  Descartes, 
Spinoza,  or  Leibniz  with  special  emphasis  on  problems  in  the  theory  of  knowledge  and 
metaphysics.  One  course.  Van  Cleve 

228S.  Recent  and  Contemporary  Philosophy.  (CZ)  A  critical  study  of  some  contem- 
porary movements,  with  special  emphasis  on  analytic  philosophers.  One  course.  Posy 

231S.  Kant's  Critique  of  Pure  Reason.  (CZ)  One  course.  Posy 

232S.  Recent  Continental  Philosophy.  Selected  topics.  One  course.  Staff 

233S.  Methodology  of  the  Empirical  Sciences.  (CZ)  Recent  philosophical  discussion 
of  the  concept  of  a  scientific  explanation,  the  nature  of  laws,  theory  and  observation,  prob- 
ability and  induction,  and  other  topics.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Brandon 

234S.  Problems  in  the  Philosophy  of  Biology.  (NS)  Selected  topics,  with  emphasis 
on  evolutionary  biology:  the  structure  of  evolutionary  theory,  adaptation,  teleological  or 
teleonomic  explanations  in  biology,  reductionism  and  organicism,  the  units  of  selection, 
and  sociobiology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biology  234S.  One  course. 
Brandon 

235S.  Nineteenth-Century  German  Philosophy.  (CZ)  A  critical  examination  of  the 
writings  of  Hegel,  Marx,  or  Nietzsche.  One  course.  Roderick 

250S.  Topics  in  Formal  Philosophy.  (CZ)  Topics  selected  from  formal  logic,  philoso- 
phy of  mathematics,  philosophy  of  logic,  or  philosophy  of  language.  One  course.  Posy 

251S.  Epistemology.  (CZ)  Selected  topics  in  the  theory  of  knowledge,  for  example, 
conditions  of  knowledge,  scepticism  and  certainty,  perception,  memory,  knowledge  of 
other  minds,  and  knowledge  of  necessary  truths.  One  course.  Sanford 

252S.  Metaphysics.  (CZ)  Selected  topics:  substance,  qualities  and  universals,  iden- 
tity, space,  time,  causation,  and  determinism.  One  course.  Sanford 

291S,  292S.  Special  Fields  of  Philosophy.  One  course  each.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

101.  Philosophy  of  Religion.  (CZ) 

105.  Philosophy  of  History.  (CZ) 

108.  Social  Ideals  and  Utopias.  (CZ) 

121.  Philosophy  and  Film.  (CZ) 

196S,  197S,  198S,  199S.  Seminars  in  Philosophy 

202S.  Aesthetics:  The  Philosophy  of  Art.  (CZ) 

205S.  Philosophy  of  History.  (CZ) 

230S.  The  Meaning  of  Religious  Language.  (CZ) 

253S.  Philosophy  of  Mind.  (CZ) 

254S.  Topics  in  Philosophy  of  Religion.  (CZ) 

THE  MAJOR 

Major  Requirements.  Eight  courses  in  philosophy  including  Philosophy  93  and  94;  at 
least  one  nonintroductory  course  in  moral,  social,  political,  or  legal  philosophy,  such  as 

248         Courses  of  Instruction 


Philosophy  106, 107, 108,  116, 117, 118,  or  122;  and  at  least  one  course  at  the  200  level.  In 
addition,  a  course  in  logic  is  highly  recommended. 

Honors.  The  department  offers  work  leading  to  graduation  with  distinction.  See  the 
section  on  honors  in  this  bulletin. 

Physics  (phy) 

Professor  Evans,  Chairman;  Professor  Walter,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Professors 
Biedenharn,  Bilpuch,  De  Lucia,  Fortney,  Goshaw,  Han,  Herbst,  Johnson,  Madey,  Meyer, 
Roberson,  Robinson,  Walker,  and  Weller;  Associate  Professors  Behringer,  Greenside, 
Palmer,  and  Thomas;  Assistant  Professors  Howell,  Oh,  and  Teitsworth;  Research  Associ- 
ate Professor  Tornow;  Research  Assistant  Professor  Benson;  Visiting  Assistant  Professors 
Bittner  and  Holmgren;  Instructor  Haque;  Instructor  and  Research  Associates  Brown, 
Hanly,  and  Schramm 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

By  studying  physics  students  learn  the  methods  and  results  of  a  systematic  exami- 
nation of  the  objects  that  make  up  the  natural  universe  and  of  their  interactions  with  each 
other.  The  knowledge  and  analytical  skills  thus  obtained  are  basic  to  the  study  of  the 
sciences  and  engineering.  The  department  offers  a  number  of  courses  for  nonspecialists 
who  wish  to  learn  about  the  physicist's  description  of  nature  for  its  intrinsic  intellectual 
value. 

21,  22.  Introductory  Physics.  These  numbers  represent  course  credit  for  advanced 
placement  on  the  basis  of  the  College  Board  Examinations  "Physics-C."  One  course  each . 

32.  Physics  from  the  Historical  Perspective.  (NS)  The  historical  development  of  phys- 
ical theories  is  traced  from  early  theories  of  the  solar  system  to  relativity  and  quantum 
theory.  No  previous  study  of  physics  is  assumed,  but  the  student  must  be  able  to  use  sim- 
ple mathematics  through  basic  algebra.  One  course.  Palmer  or  Walker 

35.  Practical  Physics.  (NS)  Fundamental  concepts  and  laws  of  physics  in  the  context 
of  technological  applications.  Intended  for  persons  not  majoring  in  science  or  engineer- 
ing; no  previous  knowledge  of  physics  is  assumed.  The  emphasis  is  on  "how  things  work." 
One  course.  Robinson 

36.  Acoustics  and  Music.  (NS)  The  physical  principles  underlying  musical  instru- 
ments, room  acoustics,  and  the  human  ear.  Analysis,  reproduction,  and  synthesis  of  mu- 
sical sounds.  No  previous  knowledge  of  physics  is  assumed.  C-L:  Music  36.  One  course. 
Lawson 

41,  42.  Fundamentals  of  Physics.  (NS)  For  students  interested  in  majoring  in  phys- 
ics; taken  in  the  freshman  year.  Basic  principles  of  physics,  mainly  classical,  at  a  level  simi- 
lar to  Physics  51,  52,  but  with  emphasis  on  laying  a  foundation  for  further  study.  Lecture, 
recitations,  and  laboratory.  Closed  to  students  having  credit  for  Physics  51, 52.  Prerequi- 
sites: consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Mathematics  31  and  32  may  be  tak- 
en concurrently.  One  course  each.  Evans  or  Palmer 

51, 52.  General  Physics.  (NS)  Basic  principles  of  general  physics  treated  quantitatively. 
Designed  for  students  entering  medicine,  engineering,  and  the  sciences.  Not  open  for 
credit  to  students  who  have  completed  Physics  41, 42.  Students  planning  to  major  in  phys- 
ics should  enroll  in  Physics  41, 42  in  their  freshman  year.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  31 
and  32  or  equivalents;  Mathematics  32  may  be  taken  concurrently  with  Physics  51.  One 
course  each.  Staff 

55.  Introduction  to  Astronomy.  (NS)  The  evolving  theory  of  the  physical  universe. 
Cosmological  models,  galaxies,  stars,  interstellar  matter,  the  solar  system,  and  experimen- 
tal techniques  and  results.  Several  observatory  sessions.  One  course.  Herbst  or  Kolena 


Physics  (PHY)         249 


100.  Introduction  to  Modern  Physics.  (NS)  Survey  of  modern  physics  including  rela- 
tivity and  the  quantum  physics  of  atoms,  nuclei,  particles,  and  quarks.  Not  applicable 
toward  a  major  in  physics.  Prerequisites:  Physics  51,  52  or  41,  42  and  Mathematics  103 
(may  be  taken  concurrently).  One  course.  Han 

105.  Introduction  to  Astrophysics.  (NS)  Basic  principles  of  astronomy  treated  quan- 
titatively. Cosmological  models,  galaxies,  stars,  interstellar  matter,  the  solar  system,  and 
experimental  techniques  and  results.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  31  and  Physics  51,  52 
or  consent  of  the  instructor.  One  course.  Kokna 

143.  Optics  and  Modern  Physics.  (NS)  Intended  as  a  continuation  of  Physics  41,  42. 
Classical  wave  and  ray  optics.  Special  relativity.  Introduction  to  quantum  physics.  Prereq- 
uisites: Physics  41,  42  or  51,  52  and  Mathematics  103  (may  be  taken  concurrently).  One 
course.  Walter 

Pln/sics41,  42or51,  52  or  equivalents,  and  Mathematics  103  or  equivalent  are  prerequisites 
to  all  of  the  following  courses. 

171.  Electronics.  (NS)  Elements  of  electronics  including  circuits,  transfer  functions, 
solid-state  devices,  transistor  circuits,  operational  amplifier  applications,  digital  circuits, 
and  computer  interfaces.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  One  course.  Fbrtney 

176.  Thermodynamics  and  Kinetic  Theory.  (NS)  Thermodynamics,  kinetic  theory, 
and  elementary  statistical  mechanics.  One  course.  Behringeror  Teitsworth 

181.  Introductory  Mechanics.  (NS)  Newtonian  mechanics  at  the  intermediate  level, 
Lagrangian  mechanics,  linear  oscillations,  special  relativity.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics 
111  or  equivalent  (may  be  taken  concurrently).  One  course.  Roberson 

182.  Electricity  and  Magnetism.  (NS)  Electrostatic  fields  and  potentials,  boundary 
value  problems,  magnetic  induction,  energy  in  electromagnetic  fields,  Maxwell's  equa- 
tions, introduction  to  electromagnetic  radiation.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  111  or  equiva- 
lent. One  course.  Evans 

185, 186.  Modern  Optics.  (NS)  Optical  processes  including  the  propagation  of  light, 
coherence,  interference,  and  diffraction.  Consideration  of  the  optical  properties  of  solids 
with  applications  to  modern  optical  devices.  Second  semester  will  emphasize  nonlinear 
interactions,  optical  modulators,  lasers,  and  spectroscopy.  Lecture  and  laboratory  projects. 
Note:  the  following  cross-listing  applies  only  to  Physics  185.  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering 
213.  One  course  each.  Guenther  or  Hacker 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

211.  Modern  Physics.  (NS)  Fundamental  concepts  of  quantum  theory  applied  mainly 
to  study  of  atomic  structure  and  spectra,  and  to  statistical  physics.  Prerequisites:  Physics 
181  and  Mathematics  111.  One  course.  Herbst 

213.  Introduction  to  Nonlinear  Dynamics.  See  C-L:  Computer  Science  213.  One 
course.  Greenside 

214.  Introduction  to  Solid-State  Physics.  (NS)  See  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  214. 
One  course.  Hacker 

215.  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics.  (NS)  Fundamental  postulates;  wave 
mechanics  and  elementary  applications;  operators,  eigenvalues,  and  eigenf unctions;  an- 
gular momentum  and  rotations;  spin  and  coupling  of  angular  momenta;  perturbation 
theory,  transition  rates,  and  selection  rules;  identical  particles;  applications.  Prerequi- 
sites: Physics  181  and  211;  Mathematics  111  and  114  (may  be  taken  concurrently).  One 
course.  Robinson 

250         Courses  of  Instruction 


217S,  218S.  Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  and  Seminar.  (NS)  Experiments  involv- 
ing the  fields  of  electricity,  magnetism,  heat,  optics,  and  modern  physics.  One  course  each. 

Meyer 

225,  226.  Elementary  Investigations.  (NS)  Training  in  the  laboratory  and  library 
methods  of  physical  research .  Qualified  students  may  conduct  elementary  investigations 
under  the  supervision  of  a  member  of  the  staff.  One  course  each.  Staff 

240.  Computer  Applications  to  Physical  Measurement.  (NS)  Hardware  and  software 
techniques  for  computer-assisted  data  acquisition,  display,  and  control  in  the  modern 
experimental  environment.  Theory  and  application  of  discrete  signal  analysis  including 
digital  filters,  Z-transform,  and  fast  Fourier  transform.  Lecture  and  laboratory.  Prereq- 
uisite: Physics  171  or  220  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Fortney 

244.  Nuclear  and  Particle  Physics.  (NS)  Current  ideas  and  models  in  nuclear  and  par- 
ticle physics.  Experimental  methods;  nuclear  structure;  nuclear  reactions;  families  of 
elementary  particles;  quarks  and  gluons;  weak  interactions.  Prerequisite:  Physics  211. 
One  course.  Oh 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

33.  Energy:  Principles,  Problems,  Alternatives.  (NS) 
102.  Applications  of  Modern  Physics  in  Medicine.  (NS) 
106.  Topics  in  Astrophysics.  (NS) 
212.  Modern  Physics.  (NS) 

THE  MAJOR 

Students  majoring  in  physics  are  prepared  for  work  in  industrial  and  governmental 
laboratories.  They  are  also  prepared  for  graduate  work  in  physics  or  for  the  study  of 
medicine. 

Students  planning  to  major  in  physics  should  enroll  in  Physics  41,  42  in  their  fresh- 
man year.  They  should  also  arrange  to  complete  the  necessary  mathematics  as  soon  as 
possible. 

For  the  A.B.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Physics  41, 42  or  51,  52,  or  equivalents;  Mathematics  31, 32, 103,  111,  or 
equivalents,  and  one  additional  course  at  the  100  or  200  level. 

Major  Requirements.  Physics  143, 171, 176, 181,  and  two  other  courses  in  physics  at  the 
100  or  200  level. 

For  the  B.S.  Degree 

Prerequisites.  Physics  41, 42  or  51,  52,  or  equivalents;  Mathematics  31,  32, 103,  111,  or 
equivalents,  and  one  additional  course  at  the  100  or  200  level. 

Major  Requirements.  Physics  143, 171, 176, 181, 182,  211,  and  two  other  courses  in  phys- 
ics at  the  100  or  200  level,  at  least  one  of  which  must  be  a  laboratory  course.  Students  plan- 
ning graduate  study  in  physics  are  urged  to  take  one  additional  elective  in  physics  and 
one  in  mathematics. 

Honors 

The  department  offers  upperclassmen  the  possibility  of  being  associated  with  re- 
search conducted  in  the  department.  This  work  may  lead  to  graduation  with  distinction. 
See  the  section  on  honors  in  this  bulletin. 


Physics  (PHY)        251 


Polish 

For  courses  in  Polish,  see  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures. 

Political  Science  <ps) 

Professor  Romberg,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Johns,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Professors  Aldrich,  Ascher,  Barber,  Bates,  Braibanti,  Fish,  Holsti,  Horowitz,  Hough, 
Leach,  Paletz,  Price,  and  Spragens;  Associate  Professors  Eldridge,  Lange,  and  McKean; 
Assistant  Professors  Bianco,  Canon,  Gillespie,  Grant,  Grieco,  Kitschelt,  Lomperis,  Niou, 
Roberts,  and  Smith;  Professors  Emeriti  Ball,  Cleaveland,  Cole,  Grzybowski,  Hall, 
Hallowell,  Kulski,  and  Simpson;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  O'Barr 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Courses  in  political  science  for  undergraduates  are  offered  in  four  fields:  (A)  American 
government,  politics,  and  public  administration;  (B)  comparative  government  and  poli- 
tics; (C)  political  theory  and  methodology;  and  (D)  international  law,  relations,  and  pol- 
itics. In  the  course  descriptions  below  the  field  within  which  the  course  falls  is  indicated 
by  the  appropriate  letter  symbol  (A,  B,  C,  or  D)  after  the  title  of  the  course.  In  each  field, 
a  course  numbered  at  the  90  level  serves  as  an  introduction  both  to  the  study  of  political 
science  and  to  the  subject  matter  and  approaches  of  the  field,  and  middle  and  upper  level 
courses  and  seminars  (numbered  at  the  100  and  200  levels  respectively)  consider  partic- 
ular aspects  and  topics  within  the  field.  In  addition,  independent  study  under  faculty 
supervision  enables  students  to  explore  topics  of  special  interest.  See  below,  following 
the  course  descriptions,  for  the  listing  of  courses  by  fields,  information  on  internships, 
and  requirements  for  the  major  and  honors. 

INTRODUCTORY  COURSES 

The  following  courses  introduce  the  study  of  political  science,  and  each  serves  as  the 
basic  course  in  one  of  the  four  fields  of  the  discipline.  Students  ordinarily  will  take  at  least 
one  of  these  courses  before  proceeding  to  more  advanced  courses.  Some  advanced  courses 
may  require  a  particular  introductory  course  as  a  prerequisite. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

91.  The  American  Political  System  (A) .  (SS)  Theory  and  practice  of  American  govern- 
ment and  politics;  federal-state  relations;  the  separation  and  interrelationships  of  the  ex- 
ecutive, legislative,  and  judicial  branches  of  government;  judicial  review;  the  role  of  po- 
litical parties  and  public  opinion;  the  formulation  and  execution  of  domestic  and  foreign 
policy;  civil  liberties.  One  course.  Staff 

91D.  The  American  Political  System  (A).  (SS)  Same  as  Political  Science  91  except 
instruction  is  provided  in  two  lectures  and  one  small  discussion  meeting  each  week .  One 
course.  Staff 

92.  Comparative  Politics  (B).  (SS)  Topics  include  problems  of  conceptualization  and 
analysis;  foundations  of  politics  under  democratic,  authoritarian,  and  totalitarian  regimes; 
theories  of  development  and  underdevelopment;  revolution  and  collective  violence;  the 
role  of  elites,  such  as  the  military.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

92D.  Comparative  Politics  (B).  (SS)  Same  as  Political  Science  92  except  instruction 
is  provided  in  two  lectures  and  one  small  discussion  meeting  each  week.  One  course.  Staff 

93.  Elements  of  International  Relations  (D) .  (SS)  The  nature  of  international  politics, 
the  analysis  of  national  power,  the  instruments  of  foreign  policy,  and  the  controls  of  state 
behavior.  One  course.  Staff 


252        Courses  of  Instruction 


93D.  Elements  of  International  Relations  (D) .  (SS)  Same  as  Political  Science  93  except 
instruction  is  provided  in  two  lectures  and  one  small  discussion  meeting  each  week.  One 
course.  Staff 

94.  Contemporary  Political  Ideologies  (C).  (SS)  Liberalism,  socialism,  Marxism  and 
its  variants,  fascism,  contemporary  democratic  theory.  One  course.  Staff 

94D.  Contemporary  Political  Ideologies  (C).  (SS)  Same  as  Political  Science  94  except 
instruction  is  provided  in  two  lectures  and  one  small  discussion  meeting  each  week.  One 
course.  Staff 

OTHER  UNDERGRADUATE  COURSES 

100.  Duke  University  Overseas  Semester  (C).  (SS)  This  number  represents  course 
credit  for  political  science  courses  taken  either  in  Duke  University  Summer  Session  Study 
Abroad  Programs  or  in  Duke  University  exchange  programs  with  overseas  universities. 

A.  Duke  Summer  Program  in  Berlin  (B).  Two  courses. 

B.  Duke  Summer  Program  in  Brazil  (B).  Two  courses. 

C.  Duke  Summer  Program  in  Zimbabwe/Botswana  (BD).  Two  courses. 

D.  Duke  Summer  Program  in  Cambridge  University  (AB).  Two  courses. 

E.  Duke  Summer  Program  in  Media  and  Politics  in  Europe  (B).  Two  courses. 

F.  Duke  Summer  Program  in  Israel  (B).  One  course. 

G.  Duke  Summer  Program  in  Mexico  (D).  One  course. 
H.   Duke  Summer  Program  in  Bologna  (B).  One  course. 

Variable  credit. 

104.  Politics  and  Literature .  (SS)  The  enduring  questions  of  politics  and  political  phi- 
losophy illustrated  in  Western  literature :  historical,  literary,  and  philosophical  analysis. 
One  course.  Gillespie  or  Grant 

106.  International  Security  (D).  (SS)  Contemporary  and  future  threats.  Regional  con- 
flicts, the  United  States-Soviet  strategic  balance,  theories  of  deterrence  and  defense, 
prospects  for  arms  control.  One  course.  Staff 

107.  Comparative  Environmental  Policies  (B).  (SS)  Comparative  analysis  of  environ- 
mental problems  and  policies  in  politically  diverse  industrialized  nations  including  the 
United  States,  Russia,  and  Japan.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Public  Policy 
Studies  107.  One  course.  McKean 

108.  The  American  Presidency  (A).  (SS)  The  presidency  and  its  impact  on  the  Ameri- 
can political  system.  One  course.  Canon  orPaletz 

109.  State  and  Local  Government  Today  (A).  (SS)  Problems  in  state,  county,  and  city 
government.  One  course.  Leach 

111.  Contemporary  Japanese  Politics  (B).  (SS)  Introduction  to  political  change  in  post- 
war Japan.  Foundations  of  the  modern  industrial  state,  electoral  politics,  policy-making 
and  bureaucracy,  defense,  foreign  policy,  and  foreign  trade.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  McKean 

112S.  Shaping  the  News  (A).  (SS)  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  186S.  One  course.  Barber 

113.  International  Political  Economy  (D) .  (SS)  The  interplay  between  politics  and  eco- 
nomics in  international  trade,  money,  investment,  and  technology  flows  among  advanced 
capitalist  societies,  between  developed  and  developing  countries,  and  between  capital- 
ist and  socialist  countries.  One  course.  Grieco 

115.  Politics  and  Society  in  West  Germany  (B).  (SS)  Industrialization,  democratiza- 
tion, and  fascism  in  Germany;  social  structure,  political  institutions,  and  political  culture; 


Political  Science  (PS)         253 


selected  public  policies;  West  Germany  in  the  world  economy  and  in  world  politics. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kitschelt 

116S.  The  Small  Democracies  in  Europe  (B).  (SS)  Institutions  and  policy-making  in 
selected  small  European  democracies.  Consensus,  efficiency,  and  economic  survival  of 
small  democracies.  One  course.  Kitschelt 

118.  American  Constitutional  Development  (A).  (SS)  Prerequisite:  Political  Science 
91  or  91D  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Fish 

120.  International  Conflict  and  Violence  (D).  (SS)  Nature  and  processes  of  interna- 
tional conflict  and  violence  with  emphasis  on  contemporary  instances  of  violence  in  in- 
ternational affairs.  Consideration  of  restraints  on  violence.  One  course.  Eldridge 

121.  International  Organization  (D).  (SS)  Political  aspects  of  military  and  economic 
organizations  at  the  global  and  regional  levels  of  the  international  system.  One  course. 
Grieco 

122.  Modern  International  Politics  (D).  (SS)  The  major  problems  in  contemporary 
international  affairs  with  attention  to  superpower  politics,  specific  regional  concerns,  and 
the  problems  associated  with  the  emergence  of  a  new  international  economic  order.  One 
course.  Eldridge 

123.  Introduction  to  Political  Philosophy  (C).  (SS)  The  nature  and  enduring  prob- 
lems of  political  philosophy,  illustrated  by  selected  theorists  in  the  Western  political  tra- 
dition. One  course.  Staff 

125.  Strategies  of  Comparative  Analysis  (B).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies 
125;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  125,  History  137,  and  Sociology  125.  One  course.  Staff 

126.  Theories  of  Liberal  Democracy  (C).  (SS)  Critical  discussion  of  classic  theorists, 
such  as  Locke,  Rousseau,  Mill,  and  Madison,  and  contemporary  theories  of  liberal 
democracy.  One  course.  Grant  or  Spragens 

127.  Law  and  Politics  (A).  (SS)  Nature  and  functions  of  law;  Anglo-American  legal 
institutions;  the  process  of  judicial  decision  making;  and  the  relationships  among  judges, 
lawyers,  legislators,  and  administrators  in  the  development  of  public  as  well  as  private 
law.  One  course.  Fish 

128.  Congress  and  the  Presidency  (A) .  (SS)  Policy-making  in  the  executive  and  legis- 
lative branches  of  the  United  States  government,  with  particular  attention  to  intragovern- 
mental  relations.  One  course.  Bianco  or  Canon 

129.  Political  Participation  (A) .  (SS)  The  motives,  methods,  and  results  of  the  activi- 
ties of  individuals  and  groups  and  of  social  movements.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One 
course.  Paletz 

130S.  Nongovernmental  Organizations  and  Public  Policy  (A).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Public 
Policy  Studies  130S.  One  course.  Smith 

131.  Introduction  to  American  Political  Thought  (C).  (SS)  Basic  elements  in  the 
American  political  tradition  as  developed  from  its  English  roots  to  the  present.  One  course. 
Grant  or  Leach 

132.  Politics  of  Asia  (B).  (SS)  The  impact  of  nationalism,  development,  and  revolu- 
tion on  traditional  Asian  society  and  its  emerging  states.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course.  Lompcris 

134.  West  Germany  and  East  Germany:  From  Confrontation  to  Normalization?  (D) . 
(FL,  SS)  Politics  of  Germany  after  World  War  II;  the  integration  of  West  Germany  into 
NATO  and  East  Germany  into  the  Warsaw  Pact;  the  political  relations  between  the 

254        Courses  of  Instruction 


German  states  in  an  era  of  superpower  conflict.  Offered  only  in  the  Berlin  semester  pro- 
gram; taught  in  German.  One  course.  Staff 

135.  Political  Development  of  Western  Europe  (B) .  (SS)  The  development  of  the  mod- 
ern political  systems  of  Britain,  France,  Germany,  and  other  European  countries;  the 
spread  of  capitalism,  the  emergence  of  mass  democracy  and  the  rise  of  the  welfare  state. 
Contemporary  developments  examined  in  historical  and  theoretical  perspective.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kitschelt  or  Lange 

136.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Western  Europe  (B).  (SS)  Modern  po- 
litical institutions  and  processes  of  European  democracies:  political  parties,  interest 
groups  and  parliaments;  regional,  religious,  and  class  divisions;  political  participation 
and  mobilization;  relationships  of  state,  society  and  economy;  political,  social  and  eco- 
nomic change  in  postwar  Europe.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kitschelt 
or Lange 

137.  Political  Behavior  in  Elections  (A).  (SS)  An  introduction  to  voting  and  elections 
in  the  United  States,  with  emphasis  on  presidential  nomination  and  election  procedures, 
characteristics  of  the  American  electorate,  and  theories  of  voting  behavior  in  presiden- 
tial and  congressional  elections.  One  course.  Aldrich  or  Bianco 

138.  Quantitative  Political  Analysis  I  (C).  (QR)  Basic  applications  of  statistical 
methods  to  the  analysis  of  political  phenomena.  Emphasis  on  research  design,  descrip- 
tive and  inferential  statistics,  and  use  of  computers.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had 
or  are  enrolled  in  Political  Science  236,  Economics  138,  Mathematics  53  or  117,  Psycholo- 
gy 117,  Public  Policy  Studies  112  or  222,  Sociology  132, 133,  or  293,  or  Statistics  10D  or  100. 
One  course.  Staff 

140.  Law  and  Society  (C).  (SS)  The  evolution  of  the  competing  political  philosophies 
of  law.  Consideration  of  a  variety  of  standpoints  for  examining  current  debates  about  the 
nature  of  law  and  rights.  One  course.  Staff 

141S.  Issues  in  Twentieth-Century  American  Political  Practice  (A).  (SS)  Recurring 
themes  of  debate  over  the  nature  of  American  government.  Selected  contemporary  prob- 
lems and  institutions.  Open  only  to  students  in  the  Twentieth-Century  America  Program. 
One  course.  Staff 

143S.  Politics  of  Liberties  (A) .  (SS)  Theory  and  development  of  the  Bill  of  Rights  with 
attention  to  Supreme  Court  decisions  and  to  cultural  and  political  forces.  One  course.  Fish 

144S.  Issues  in  Twentieth-Century  American  Political  Theory  (C).  (SS)  Recurring 
themes  of  contemporary  debate.  Attempts  to  refurbish  or  develop  alternatives  to  the  dom- 
inant liberal  tradition.  Open  only  to  students  in  the  Twentieth-Century  America  Program. 
One  course.  Staff 

145.  Political  Analysis  for  Public  Policy-Making  (A).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Public  Policy 
Studies  114.  One  course.  Ascher 

146.  American  Legislative  Behavior  (A).  (SS)  An  introduction  to  the  American  legis- 
lative process,  with  specific  focus  on  the  U.S.  Congress.  Emphasis  on  legislative  rules  and 
procedures,  congressional  elections,  and  the  behavior  of  legislators  in  their  representa- 
tive and  policy-making  roles.  One  course.  Bianco  or  Canon 

147.  International  Environmental  Politics  and  Policies  (D).  (SS)  Environmental  is- 
sues in  developing  countries  in  the  context  of  the  North-South  problem;  transboundary 
pollution  problems  and  international  trade;  problems  of  the  global  commons  (such  as 
the  deep  sea,  the  upper  atmosphere,  genetic  resources);  international  organizations  and 
environmental  policy.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  McKean 


Political  Science  (PS)        255 


148.  The  Politics  of  American  Business  and  Government  in  the  International  Econ- 
omy (D).  (SS)  Major  political  forces  which  affect  United  States  business  operations  abroad 
and  the  responses  to  the  forces  by  business  and  the  United  States  government.  One 
course.  Grieco 

149.  United  States  and  East  Asia  (D).  (SS)  American  military  intervention  in  China, 
Korea,  and  Vietnam;  contemporary  United  States  relations  with  Japan,  China,  and  oth- 
er Asian  nations;  new  trends  and  sources  of  tension  in  East  Asia  and  the  Pacific.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  McKean 

150.  The  Individual  and  Society:  The  Classical  View  (C).  (SS)  Ancient  political  phi- 
losophy and  drama  emphasizing  the  case  of  Socrates.  Readings  include  Plato's  Republic, 
Apology,  and  Crito;  Aristophanes'  The  Clouds;  Sophocles'  Antigone.  One  course.  Grant 

151 .  Introduction  to  Latin  American  Politics  (B) .  (SS)  Historical  and  cultural  context 
of  political  institutions  and  behavior,  the  role  of  traditional  and  emerging  groups  and 
forces,  political  instability  and  the  decision-making  process.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

152.  Political  Thought  of  the  American  Founding  (C) .  (SS)  Debate  over  the  Consti- 
tution. Readings  include  Declaration  of  Independence,  Articles  of  Confederation,  the 
Constitution,  the  Debates  over  the  Constitution,  the  Federalist  Papers,  and  selections  of  An- 
tifederalist  writings.  One  course.  Grant 

153, 154.  Politics  and  the  Media  of  Mass  Communication  153  (B),  154  (A).  (SS)  Anal- 
ysis of  the  nature,  organization,  and  products  of  the  mass  media  (especially  the  movie, 
television,  and  newspaper  industries)  as  they  affect  the  political  systems,  political  process- 
es, institutions,  and  people  of  the  United  States  and  other  nations.  Open  to  juniors  and 
seniors.  It  is  desirable  but  not  required  that  students  taking  153  continue  with  154.  With 
consent  of  the  instructor,  students  who  have  not  taken  153  may  enroll  in  154.  C-L:  Film 
and  Video  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course  each.  Paletz 

156.  Space,  Weapons,  and  War  (D).  (SS)  Space,  weapons,  and  war  in  international 
relations.  Offense,  defense,  and  space  technology.  One  course.  Roberts 

157.  Foreign  Policy  of  the  United  States  (D) .  (SS)  Sources  of  American  foreign  poli- 
cy, containment,  international  economic  policy,  deterrence,  arms  control,  and  disarma- 
ment. Prospects  for  the  future.  Emphasis  on  the  period  since  World  War  II.  One  course. 
Holsti 

158.  Space  and  International  Relations  (D).  (SS)  A  comparative  and  historical  sur- 
vey of  the  developments  regarding  space,  emphasizing  the  relations  between  states  and 
the  international  system.  The  concept  of  space  from  fantasy  to  historical  reality,  focus- 
ing on  the  role  of  science,  industry,  and  the  administrative  state.  One  course.  Roberts 

159.  Ambition  and  Politics  (C).  (SS)  A  theoretical  examination  of  the  role  of  ambi- 
tion in  politics,  including  works  by  or  on  Plato,  Plutarch,  Machiavelli,  Shakespeare,  Madi- 
son, Tocqueville,  and  Hitler.  One  course.  Gillespie 

160.  Contemporary  International  Problems:  Their  Historical  Origins  and  Their  Im- 
plications for  Future  Policy  (D).  (SS)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  109,  Cultural  An- 
thropology 109,  History  109,  and  Sociology  175.  One  course.  Staff 

161S.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Africa  (B).  (SS)  Nationalism,  nation 
building,  and  problems  of  development  in  sub-Saharan  Africa.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Bates  or  Johns 

163.  Gender,  Politics,  and  Policy:  The  Third  World  Case  (B) .  (SS)  A  comparative  anal- 
ysis of  precolonial,  colonial,  and  postcolonial  politics  and  distribution  of  political  power 
between  women  and  men.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Women's  Studies.  One 
course.  O'Barr 

256        Courses  of  Instruction 


165.  Government  and  Politics  of  the  Soviet  Union  (B).  (SS)  Analysis  of  the  Soviet  po- 
litical system,  emphasizing  the  sources  of  stability  and  instability  and  the  responsiveness 
of  its  policies.  Literature  on  the  non-Soviet  world  (notably  the  United  States)  will  be  in- 
cluded. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Hough 

166.  Soviet  Foreign  Relations  (D).  (SS)  Nature  of  relations  with  other  states.  Deter- 
minants and  formulation  of  foreign  policy.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Hough 

169.  Politics  in  Revolutionary  China  (B).  (SS)  Political  process  in  China  since  1949, 
with  emphasis  on  ideological  shifts  in  the  Cultural  Revolution  and  the  post-Mao  era.  Party 
politics,  leadership,  economic  organization,  thought  reform,  mass  mobilization,  and  so- 
cialist transformation.  China  as  an  emerging  world  power.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  McKean 

171.  Politics  of  South  African  Apartheid  (B).  (SS)  The  South  African  political  sys- 
tem in  the  twentieth  century,  with  particular  attention  to  the  economic  and  ethnic  roots 
of  racial  conflict.  United  States-South  African  relations.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course.  Johns 

173S.  Political  Economy  of  World  Food  Problems  (B).  (SS)  Changing  policies  toward 
food  production  and  distribution .  Topics  include  American  agricultural  policy,  interna- 
tional food  and  famine  aid,  and  Third  World  agricultural  development  strategies.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Johns 

174S.  Political  Biography  (A).  (SS)  Nature  of  politics  as  revealed  in  the  life  histories 
of  individuals.  Readings  in  single  biographies  and  autobiographies,  but  with  some  com- 
parative work.  Students  project  their  autobiographies  toward  possible  political  futures. 
One  course.  Barber 

176A.  Perspectives  on  Food  and  Hunger  (B).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course 
120A;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Johns 

176B.  Perspectives  on  Food  and  Hunger  (B).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course 
120B;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Johns 

177, 178.  Contemporary  Social  and  Political  Development  in  the  Islamic  World  (B). 
(SS)  An  analysis  of  contemporary  events  in  Iran,  Afghanistan,  Pakistan,  Iraq,  and  the  Ara- 
bian Peninsula;  the  political  manifestation  of  Shi'ia  and  Sunni  Islam;  security  in  the  Arab 
world  and  its  relationship  to  global  politics.  Prerequisite:  for  178, 177  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

180.  Media  in  Comparative  Perspective  (B).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course 
182;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Sociology  182.  One  course.  Paletz  or  Smith 

184.  An  Introduction  to  Canada  and  Canadian  Issues  (B) .  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdiscipli- 
nary Course  184;  also  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Economics  184, 
History  184,  and  Sociology  184.  One  course.  Cahow 

186.  Political  Leadership  (A).  (SS)  The  development,  characteristics,  and  impact  of 
political  leaders.  Biographical  and  collective  studies  are  considered  primarily  from  a  psy- 
chological perspective.  One  course.  Barber 

187.  Politics  and  the  Libido  (A).  (SS)  Effects  of  the  libido  on  elite  and  mass  political 
activities.  Government  regulation  of  sex-inspired  behavior.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One 
course.  Paletz 

188.  The  Psychology  of  Political  Symbols  (A) .  (SS)  The  role  of  symbolic  political  is- 
sues in  determining  public  attitudes  and  voting  behavior.  Symbolic  political  issues  such 
as  "law  and  order,"  pornography,  and  prohibition;  distinguished  from  public  welfare  is- 
sues such  as  employment  policies.  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  188.  One  course.  McConahay 

Political  Science  (PS)         257 


189, 190.  Internship  (A).  Open  to  students  engaging  in  practical  or  governmental  work 
experience  during  the  summer  or  a  regular  semester.  To  enroll,  a  student  must  obtain  the 
approval  of  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  A  faculty  member  in  the  department 
will  supervise  a  program  of  study  related  to  the  work  experience,  including  an  analyti- 
cal paper.  One  course  each.  Johns 

191, 192.  Independent  Study  (A,  B,  C,  or  D).  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open 
only  to  qualified  juniors  by  consent  of  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  of  the 
supervising  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study  (A,  B,  C,  or  D).  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open 
only  to  seniors  by  consent  of  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  of  the  supervis- 
ing instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 

196  (I-IV).  American  University  Washington  Semester  (A).  This  number  represents 
transfer  course  credit  for  courses  taken  at  American  University  in  the  Washington  Semes- 
ter Program:  Washington  Semester  Seminar  I,  Washington  Semester  Seminar  II,  Washing- 
ton Semester  Internship,  and  an  elective  or  research  project.  If  any  of  the  above  courses 
at  American  University  are  taken  outside  the  political  science  department,  approval  must 
be  obtained  beforehand  from  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  of  the  appropriate 
Duke  department  in  order  to  obtain  transfer  credit.  Four  transfer  credits.  Four  courses. 

199.  Special  Topics  in  Government  and  Politics.  (SS)  Topics  vary  from  semester  to 
semester. 

A.  American  Government  and  Politics 

B.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics 

C.  Political  Theory 

D.  International  Relations 
One  course.  Staff 

For  Seniors  Only 

197S-198S.  Senior  Honors  Thesis.  Preparation  and  writing  of  research  paper;  group 
meetings  to  present  topics  and  for  discussion.  Open  only  to  senior  political  science  majors 
in  the  honors  program.  See  section  on  honors  under  description  of  the  major.  Two  courses. 
Staff 

200S.  Senior  Seminars.  (SS)  Open  also,  if  places  are  available,  to  qualified  juniors 
who  have  earned  a  3.0  average  and  obtained  the  consent  of  the  instructor. 

A.  American  Government  and  Politics 

B.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics 

C.  Political  Theory 

D.  Internationa!  Relations 
One  course.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates* 

201S.  Problems  in  International  Security  (D) .  (SS)  Major  security  issues.  Prerequi- 
site: a  course  in  international  relations  or  American  foreign  policy.  One  course.  Staff 

203S.  Issues  and  Problems  in  Politics  and  the  Media  (A).  (SS)  Research  seminar 
analyzing  significant  questions  in  the  relationship  between  politics  and  the  media  of  com- 
munication. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Paletz 


The  following  courses  may  be  taken  by  juniors  who  have  earned  a  3.0  average  and  obtained  the  consent  of  the 
instructor. 


258        Courses  of  Instruction 


204S.  Ethics  in  Political  Life  (C).  (SS)  Ethical  issues  arising  in  the  conduct  of  politi- 
cal vocations  and  activities.  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  204S.  One  course.  Spragens 

207S.  American  Constitutional  Interpretation  (A) .  (SS)  Development  of  the  Consti- 
tution of  the  United  States  through  Supreme  Court  decisions.  One  course.  Fish 

208S.  Analyzing  the  News  (A).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  240S.  One  course. 
Entman 

209.  Problems  in  State  Government  and  Politics  (A).  (SS)  One  course.  Leach 

212S.  Domestic  Structures  and  Foreign  Policies  of  Advanced  Democratic  States  (D). 
(SS)  The  influence  of  democratic  institutions  on  the  national-security  and  foreign- 
economic  policies  of  advanced  industrialized  states.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Grieco 

213S.  Theories  of  International  Political  Economy  (D).  (SS)  Comparison  and  assess- 
ment of  traditional  and  modern  theories  in  terms  of  their  logical  and  empirical  validity. 
One  course.  Grieco 

216S.  Evolution  of  European  Marxism  (C) .  (SS)  The  central  themes  in  the  evolution 
of  European  Marxism:  socialist  thought  prior  to  Marx;  the  writings  of  Marx  and  Engels. 
The  themes  are  articulated  in:  Russian  Marxism;  Soviet  Communism  and  its  Marxist  crit- 
ics; the  rethinking  of  Marx's  political  economy,  the  theory  of  the  state,  and  concepts  of 
class  consciousness  in  the  works  of  twentieth-century  European  Marxists.  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

218.  Political  Thought  in  the  United  States  (C).  (SS)  American  political  thought 
through  the  Civil  War  period.  The  Founders  and  their  European  antecedents.  Debates 
over  the  Constitution,  slavery,  and  the  Union.  One  course.  Gillespie  or  Grant 

220S.  Problems  in  International  Politics  (D).  (SS)  Prerequisite:  one  course  in  inter- 
national relations,  foreign  policy,  or  diplomatic  history.  One  course.  Holsti 

221S.  International  Institutions  and  the  World  Political  Economy  (D).  (SS)  Exami- 
nation of  theory  concerning  the  role  of  international  institutions  in  facilitating  economic 
cooperation  among  advanced  democratic  states.  Investigation  of  the  impact  on  interna- 
tional economic  relations  of  such  multilateral  institutions  as  the  International  Monetary 
Fund,  the  World  Bank,  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade,  and  the  International 
Energy  Agency.  One  course.  Grieco 

223.  Ancient  Political  Philosophy  (C).  (SS)  Intensive  analysis  of  the  political  philos- 
ophy of  Plato,  Aristotle,  and  other  ancient  theorists.  One  course.  Gillespie  or  Grant 

224S.  Modern  Political  Theory  (C).  (SS)  A  historical  survey  and  philosophical  anal- 
ysis of  political  theory  from  the  beginning  of  the  seventeenth  to  the  middle  of  the  nine- 
teenth century.  The  rise  of  liberalism,  the  Age  of  Enlightenment,  the  romantic  and  con- 
servative reaction,  idealism  and  utilitarianism.  One  course.  Grant  or  Spragens 

225.  Topics  in  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Western  Europe  (B) .  (SS)  Topics 
vary:  the  development  of  mass  democracy  and  the  welfare  state;  political  and  electoral 
participation  and  mobilization;  social  movements  and  political  change;  center-periphery 
conflicts;  government  and  bureaucratic  institutions  and  their  relationships  to  society;  the 
modern  welfare  state  and  political  economy.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Kitschelt  or  Lange 

226S.  Theories  of  International  Relations  (D).  (SS)  An  overview  with  applications 
to  political-military  and  political-economic  empirical  problems.  One  course.  Grieco 


Political  Science  (PS)        259 


228S.  Nineteenth-  and  Twentieth-Century  Political  Philosophy  (C).  (SS)  Topics  in 
nineteenth-  and  twentieth-century  political  philosophy,  considering  such  authors  as 
Hegel,  Marx,  Nietzsche,  Dostoevsky,  Heidegger,  Malraux,  and  Camus.  One  course. 
Gillespie 

229S.  Contemporary  Theory  of  Liberal  Democracy  (C).  (SS)  One  course.  Spragens 

230S.  Introduction  to  Positive  Political  Theory  (C).  (SS)  Basic  concepts  of  political 
economy,  theory  of  preference  and  choice,  social  choice  theory,  and  decision  and  game 
theory.  One  course.  Aldrich,  Bates,  Bianco,  orNiou 

231S.  Crisis,  Choice,  and  Change  in  Advanced  Democratic  States  (B).  (SS)  Contri- 
butions of  Marx,  Weber,  and  Durkheim  toward  analysis  of  modern  democracies.  Exami- 
nation of  selected  contemporary  studies  using  these  three  perspectives  to  highlight 
processes  of  change  and  crisis.  Unsettling  effects  of  markets  upon  political  systems,  con- 
sequences of  bureaucratic  regulation,  and  transformation  of  sources  of  solidarity  and  in- 
tegration in  modern  politics.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kitschelt 

232.  Political  Economy:  Theory  and  Applications  (C).  (SS)  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Utnge 

233S.  Quantitative  Political  Analysis  II  (C).  (QR)  Intermediate  statistical  methods, 
especially  linear  regression,  for  political  science  research.  Emphasis  on  assumptions  and 
interpretations  of  results.  Prerequisite:  Political  Science  138  or  236  or  equivalent.  One 
course.  Staff 

235S.  Comparative  Development  of  Islam  (B).  (SS)  Comparative  development  of  Is- 
lam in  Indonesia,  Malaysia,  Pakistan,  India,  North  Africa,  and  sub-Saharan  Africa.  A  com- 
parative analysis  of  the  resurgence  of  Islam  as  a  religious,  political,  and  cultural  force.  One 
course.  Staff 

236.  Statistical  Analysis  (C).  (QR)  Introduction  to  statistics  in  political  research,  em- 
phasizing research  design,  descriptive  and  inferential  statistics,  and  use  of  computers. 
Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  or  are  enrolled  in  Political  Science  138,  Economics 
138,  Mathematics  53  or  117,  Psychology  117,  Public  Policy  Studies  112  or  122,  Sociology 
132, 133,  or  293,  or  Statistics  10D  or  100.  One  course.  Staff 

237S.  Comparative  Public  Policy  (B).  (SS)  Introduction  to  methods,  concepts,  and 
theories  of  comparative  public  policy  analysis.  Substantive  policies  examined  in  the  course 
vary  each  semester  and  may  include  economic,  industrial,  social,  and  civil  rights  poli- 
cies. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Kitschelt 

240.  American  Political  Behavior  (A).  (SS)  One  course.  Staff 

242S.  Comparative  Law  and  Policy:  Ethnic  Group  Relations  (B).  (SS)  Various  ap- 
proaches to  the  reduction  of  conflict  in  deeply  divided  societies,  primarily  in  Asia  and 
Africa,  with  secondary  attention  to  Western  countries.  The  nature  of  ethnic  identity,  the 
sources  of  group  conflict,  and  the  forms  and  patterns  it  takes.  Methods  of  analyzing  so- 
cial science  materials  and  utilizing  them  for  the  design  of  policies,  laws,  and  institutions. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Hormvitz 

243S.  Political  Applications  of  Game  Theory  (C).  (SS)  Theory  of  games  as  a  tool  to 
understand  strategic  behavior  of  political  actors.  Applications  to  legislative  politics,  in- 
ternational cooperation,  bureaucratic  behavior.  One  course.  Bianco  or  Niou 

245.  Ethics  and  Policy-Making  (C).  (SS)  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Pub- 
lic Policy  Studies  116.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  223.  One  course.  Rapaport 

246S.  Political  Hypocrisy  and  Idealism  (C) .  (SS)  The  cases  for  and  against  hypocri- 
sy in  political  and  social  life.  The  concept  of  authenticity  as  the  alternative  to  hypocrisy. 
Selections  from  Machiavelli,  Shakespeare,  Rousseau,  Nietzsche,  and  others.  One  course. 

Grant 

260         Courses  of  Instruction 


248.  The  Politics  of  the  Policy  Process  (A).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  219. 
One  course.  Entman 

249.  Comparative  International  Development  and  Technology  Flow  (B).  (SS)  Anal- 
ysis of  social,  political,  and  economic  development  in  Third  World  countries.  The  inter- 
nal problem  of  maintaining  political  systems  and  the  external  problem  of  adapting  inter- 
mediate or  appropriate  technologies.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

251S.  The  American  Presidency  (A).  (SS)  One  course.  Paletz 

253S.  Comparative  Government  and  the  Study  of  Latin  America  (B).  (SS)  Current 
literature  on  major  themes  of  Latin  American  politics.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course.  Staff 

255.  Political  Sociology  (B).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Sociology  255.  One  course.  Smith  or  Tiryakian 

256S.  Arms  Control  and  National  Security  Policy  (D) .  (SS)  The  evolution  of  nuclear 
weapons  and  strategy  and  of  global  defense  policy  toward  the  Soviet  Union  and  other 
adversaries;  the  arms  control  process  and  nonproliferation .  Prerequisite :  consent  of  in- 
structor. One  course.  Lomperis 

259S.  Low  Intensity  Conflict  and  the  Lessons  of  Viet  Nam  (D).  (SS)  The  Viet  Nam 
conflict  and  comparative  cases;  implications  for  Western  interventions  in  the  Third  World. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Lomperis 

260S.  The  Tradition  of  Political  Inquiry  (C).  (SS)  Past  and  present  problems,  goals, 
presuppositions,  and  methods.  One  course.  Spragens 

262S.  International  Communism  (D).  (SS)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Hough 

263S.  Methods  of  Political  Science  (C).  (SS)  The  relation  between  theory  and  evi- 
dence; research  designs  for  the  comparative  analyses  of  historical  and  statistical  evidence. 
One  course.  Roberts 

264S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences  (A).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary 
Course  284S;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  284S,  History  284S,  Psychology  284S,  So- 
ciology 284S,  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  or 
Spenner 

267S.  Policy-Making  in  International  Organizations  (D).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Public  Poli- 
cy Studies  267S.  One  course.  Ascher 

270S.  Fundamentals  of  Political  Economy  (C) .  (SS)  Application  of  economic  reasoning 
to  the  study  of  politics.  Analysis  of  campaigns  and  elections;  legislatures;  and  the  regu- 
lation of  industries.  C-L:  Economics  270S.  One  course.  Aldrich,  Bates,  Bianco,  or  Niou 

275.  The  American  Party  System  (A).  (SS)  An  intensive  examination  of  selected  facets 
of  American  national  political  parties,  such  as  relationships  between  presidential  and  con- 
gressional politics,  the  politics  of  national  conventions,  recent  foreign  policy  and  party 
alignments,  and  the  controversy  over  party  government.  One  course.  Romberg 

277.  Comparative  Party  Politics  (B).  (SS)  The  impact  of  social  and  political  systems 
on  party  structures,  functions,  ideologies,  and  leadership  recruitment.  Emphasis  upon 
research  techniques  and  objectives.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Rom- 
berg or  Lange 

279S.  Political  Protest  and  Collective  Mobilization  (B).  (SS)  Survey  of  theories, 
methods,  and  empirical  studies  of  political  mobilization  outside  institutional  channels; 
protest  behavior  and  strategies;  responses  of  the  state  to  these  challenges;  the  success 
of  collective  mobilization.  Emphasis  on  comparative  analyses  of  protest  in  advanced  in- 
dustrial democracies.  One  course.  Kitschelt 


Political  Science  (PS)        261 


282S.  Canada  (B).  (SS)  SeeC-L:  History  282S;  alsoC-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies,  Cultural  Anthropology  282S,  Interdisciplinary  Course  282S,  and  So- 
ciology 282S.  One  course.  Cahow 

283S.  Congressional  Policy-Making  (A).  (SS)  Lawmaking  and  oversight  of  the  ex- 
ecutive branch  by  the  U.S.  Congress.  Committee,  party,  executive,  and  interest  group 
roles.  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  283S.  One  course.  Bianco  or  Canon 

284S.  Public  Policy  Process  in  Developing  Countries  (B).  (SS)  See  C-L:  Public  Poli- 
cy Studies  284S;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Ascher 

286S.  Judicial  Administration  (A).  (SS)  Organization,  case  processing,  and  manage- 
ment of  courts  with  emphasis  on  federal  appellate  courts.  Prerequisite:  Political  Science 
127.  One  course.  Fish 

293.  Federalism  (B).  (SS)  Theoretical  and  operational  aspects  of  federal  systems  of 
government,  focusing  on  the  United  States  and  Canada.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies  and  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Leach 

299.  Advanced  Topics  in  Government  and  Politics.  (SS)  Topics  vary  from  semester 
to  semester. 

A.  American  Government  and  Politics 

B.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics 

C.  Political  Theory 

D.  International  Relations 
One  course.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

110.  The  Americas:  A  Survey  of  the  Forces  Shaping  the  Hemisphere  (B).  (SS) 

114.  United  States  Foreign  Policy  and  Latin  America  (D).  (SS) 

117.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Selected  Countries  (B).  (SS) 

155.  The  Politics  and  Economics  of  Developing  Areas  (B).  (SS) 

167.  International  Law  (D).  (SS) 

172.  Political  Economy  of  Global  Natural  Resources  (B).  (SS) 

175.  Political  Parties  and  Legislatures  in  Western  Democracies  (B).  (SS) 

195.  Comparative  Political  Behavior  in  the  United  States  and  Canada  (B).  (SS) 

211S.  Current  Problems  and  Issues  in  Japanese  Politics  (B).  (SS) 

214S.  The  Politics  of  Scarcity  (B).  (SS) 

215S.  Philosophical  Bases  of  Political  Economy  and  Society  (C).  (SS) 

222S.  Seminar:  Modern  Political  Classics  (C).  (SS) 

234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World 
(B).  (SS) 

261.  Politics  and  the  Future  (D).  (SS) 

280S.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Sub-Saharan  Africa  (B).  (SS) 

POLITICAL  INTERNSHIPS 

The  department  administers  an  internship  program,  primarily  in  Washington,  DC. , 
for  political  science  majors  and  interested  nonmajors.  Students  participate  by  qualify- 

262         Courses  of  Instruction 


ing  for  a  position  obtained  by  the  department  or  by  acquiring  their  own  relevant  employ- 
ment, with  or  without  compensation.  Course  credit  can  be  obtained  by  enrolling  in  Po- 
litical Science  189  or  190  and  writing  an  analytical  paper.  Potential  applicants  should  con- 
tact the  Internship  Director,  Louise  Walker  (327  Perkins),  at  any  time,  but  preferably  in 
the  fall  semester. 

POLITICAL  SCIENCE  COURSES  BY  FIELDS 

Political  science  courses  for  undergraduates  are  offered  in  four  fields.  The  courses 
in  each  of  the  four  fields  are  listed  below;  in  the  course  descriptions  above,  the  field  in 
which  each  course  falls  is  indicated  by  the  appropriate  symbol  (A,  B,  C,  or  D).  Students 
majoring  in  the  department  must  complete  at  least  one  course  in  each  of  three  fields. 

American  Government,  Politics,  and  Public  Administration  (A).  Political  Science  91, 91D,  100D,  108, 109, 112S, 
118, 127, 128, 129, 130S,  137, 141S,  143, 145, 146, 154, 174S,  186, 187, 188, 189, 190, 191,*  192,*  193,*  194,*  196, 197S-198S* 
199A,  200S  A,  203S,  207S,  208S,  209,  240,  248,  251S,  264S,  275,  283S,  286S,  299A. 

Comparative  Government  and  Politics  (B).  Political  Science  92,  92D,  100A,  100B,  100C,  100D,  100E,  100F,  100H, 
107, 110,  111,  115, 116S,  117,  125,  132, 135,  136,  151, 153, 155,  161S,  163,  165, 169,  171,  172,  173S,  175,  176A,  176B, 
177, 178, 180, 184, 191,*  192,*  193*  194*  195, 197S-198S,*  199B,  200S  B,  211S,  214S,  225, 231S,  234S,  235S,  237S,  242S, 
249,  253S,  255,  277,  279S,  280S,  282S,  284S,  293,  299B. 

Political  Theory  and  Methodology .  Political  Science  94, 94D,  104, 123, 126, 131, 138, 140, 144S,  150, 152, 159, 191  * 
192*  193*  194  *  197S-198S  *  199C,  200S  C,  204S,  215S,  216S,  218, 222S,  223, 224S,  228S,  229S,  230S,  232,  233S,  236, 
243S,  245,  246S,  260,  263S,  270S,  299C. 

International  Law,  Relations,  and  Politics  (D).  Political  Science  93, 93D,  100C,  100G,  106, 113, 114, 120, 121, 122, 
134, 147, 148, 149, 156, 157, 158, 160, 166, 167, 191,*  192*  193,*  194,*  197S-198S*  199D,  200S D,  201S,  212S,  213S,  220S, 
221S,  226S,  256S,  259S,  261,  262S,  267S,  299D. 

THE  MAJOR 

Requirements.  Eight  courses  in  political  science  including  (1)  at  least  one  course  in  each 
of  three  fields;  (2)  at  least  one  course  at  Duke  at  the  200-299  level;  and  (3)  no  more  than 
three  cross-listed  courses  originated  outside  the  Department  of  Political  Science.  Such 
courses  cannot  be  used  to  meet  the  major  requirements  in  both  political  science  and  also 
in  another  department.  (Cross-listed  courses  appear  in  the  preceding  listing  without 
descriptions.) 

Of  the  eight  required  political  science  courses,  at  least  six  must  be  taken  at  Duke  to 
meet  major  requirements,  five  if  the  student:  (1)  is  transferring  courses  from  a  year-long 
approved  study  abroad  program;  or  (2)  transferred  to  Duke  after  completing  two  under- 
graduate years  at  another  institution;  or  (3)  completed  one  semester  at  an  approved  study 
abroad  program  and  one  semester  at  the  Washington  Semester  Program  at  American 
University.  For  the  purpose  of  this  requirement  courses  in  the  Washington  Semester  Pro- 
gram at  American  University  will  be  counted  as  transfer  courses. 

Advanced  Placement  Credit.  If  advanced  placement  credits  in  political  science  have  been 
granted,  they  may  be  applied  toward  the  thirty-four  credits  needed  for  graduation,  but 
they  may  not  be  applied  to  the  political  science  major. 

Suggested  Work  in  Related  Disciplines.  Several  courses  in  such  disciplines  as  anthropol- 
ogy, economics,  history,  philosophy,  psychology,  public  policy,  religion,  and  sociology 
are  desirable. 

Honors.  The  department  offers  students  majoring  in  political  science  a  senior  honors 
program,  by  successful  completion  of  which  a  participant  achieves  graduation  with  dis- 
tinction in  political  science.  The  central  feature  and  requirement  of  the  program  is  the 
honors  thesis  which  the  student  prepares  under  faculty  supervision.  Students  who  have 
attained  at  least  a  3.3  grade  average  overall  and  a  3.5  average  in  political  science  courses 
may  enter  the  program  by  submitting,  prior  to  the  end  of  the  second  semester  of  the  jun- 
ior year,  a  research  proposal  to  the  departmental  honors  committee  and  also  obtaining 
consent  of  a  faculty  member  to  supervise  the  proposed  thesis.  In  the  first  semester  of  the 


*If  subject  matter  is  appropriate  to  the  field. 

Political  Science  (PS)         263 


senior  year,  accepted  students  take  Political  Science  197S  with  emphasis  on  research 
methods.  The  following  semester  they  take  Political  Science  198S  during  which  their  thesis 
is  written,  presented  orally,  and  evaluated  by  the  honors  committee.  Graduation  with 
distinction  is  awarded  to  students  receiving  a  grade  of  A-  or  better.  Further  information 
may  be  obtained  from  the  chairman  of  the  honors  committee  or  the  Director  of  Under- 
graduate Studies. 

Psychology  (psy) 

Professor  R.  Erickson,  Chairman  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Professors  Alex- 
ander, Carson,  Coie,  Costanzo,  Diamond,  C.  Erickson,  W.  G.  Hall,  Hasher,  Martin  Lakin, 
Lockhead,  Rubin,  Staddon,  M.  Wallach,  Wing,  and  Wolbarsht;  Associate  Professors  Day, 
Eckerman,  Holland,  and  Roth;  Assistant  Professors  Kremen  and  Putallaz;  Professors 
Emeriti  Borstelmann,  Kimble,  and  H.  Schiffman;  Adjunct  Professors  Brodie,  Crovitz, 
George,  W.  C.  Hall,  Maddox,  S.  Schiffman,  Thompson,  L.  Wallach,  and  Weiss;  Adjunct 
Associate  Professors  Goldstein,  Marsh,  and  Spenner;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professors  Coop- 
er, Musia  Lakin,  Lindahl,  Lochman,  and  Swartzwelder;  Lecturers  Casseday,  Hoyle,  Iz- 
ard, Sawyer,  and  Woody 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

The  General  Courses,  coded  (G),  apply  as  indicated.  The  Biological  Bases  of  Behavior  area, 
coded  (B),  includes  courses  on  the  nervous  system,  the  learning  process,  motivation,  neu- 
rochemistry,  hormones,  and  other  biological  factors  in  their  relationship  to  behavior.  The 
Cognitive  Psychology  area,  coded  (C),  includes  the  topics  of  sensation  and  perception,  cog- 
nition, learning,  language,  memory,  and  psycholinguistics.  Developmental  Psychology,  cod- 
ed (D),  emphasizes  the  developmental  aspects  of  all  psychological  processes  such  as  sen- 
sory and  motor  behavior,  cognition,  children's  thinking  and  reasoning,  and  social 
behavior.  Courses  in  the  Personality /Social  Psychology  area,  coded  (P),  ultimately  bear  on 
the  questions  of  human  character  and  behavior,  both  normal  and  abnormal.  These  in- 
clude personality,  social  and  abnormal  issues,  along  with  strategies  for  the  prevention 
of  deviance. 

GENERAL  COURSES 

11.  Introductory  Psychology  (G).  (SS)  Biological  bases  of  behavior,  psychological  de- 
velopment, cognitive  psychology,  personality,  abnormal  behavior,  and  social  psycholo- 
gy. Designed  as  a  broad  introduction  to  psychology  for  nonmajors  as  well  as  majors;  not 
required  for  the  major.  Students  are  expected  to  participate  as  subjects  in  three  to  six  hours 
of  psychological  research.  One  course.  Staff 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

103.  Biological  Bases  of  Behavior:  Introduction  and  Survey  (B).  (NS)  Physiological, 
developmental,  and  evolutionary  approaches  to  behavior.  Sensory  and  cognitive  process- 
es, sleep,  pain,  emotion,  hunger,  and  thirst  as  well  as  maternal  and  sexual  behavior  pat- 
terns. Prerequisite:  Biology  14L  or  Biology  21L;  may  be  taken  concurrently.  One  course. 
C.  Erickson  and  staff 

105.  Developmental  Psychology:  Introduction  and  Survey  (D) .  (SS)  Theory  and  re- 
search on  growth  and  behavior  from  infancy  to  adolescence.  One  course.  Goldstein  or 
Putallaz 

107.  Cognitive  Psychology:  Introduction  and  Survey.  (C)  (SS)  Overview  of  cognitive 
processes  including  pattern  recognition,  concept  formation,  attention,  memory,  imagery, 
language,  problem  solving,  and  thinking.  Emphasis  both  empirical  and  theoretical.  One 
course.  Day 


264         Courses  of  Instruction 


108.  Personality  and  Social  Behavior:  Introduction  and  Survey  (P).  (SS)  The  deter- 
minants of  socially  significant  human  behavior— those  residing  in  the  person,  those  that 
are  the  product  of  interpersonal  context,  and  those  resulting  from  the  interaction  of  both 
sources.  Formative  as  well  as  contemporary  influences  considered.  One  course.  Carson 
or  Costanzo 

110.  Applied  Psychology  (P).  (SS)  Applications  of  psychology  to  problems  of  per- 
sonnel selection,  industrial  efficiency,  advertising,  and  selling.  Prerequisite:  Psycholo- 
gy 117  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

111.  Learning  and  Adaptive  Behavior  (B,  C).  (NS)  Principles  of  instrumental  learn- 
ing in  animals  and  humans.  Prerequisite:  none,  but  some  knowledge  of  quantitative 
science  desirable.  C-L:  Biology  111.  One  course.  Staddon 

112.  Sensation  and  Perception  (C) .  (SS)  Principles  of  organization  of  perceptual  sys- 
tems, including  sensory  systems  (vision,  audition,  proprioception,  and  chemical  senses); 
pattern  recognition;  perceptual  anomalies;  attention;  methods  of  measurement.  One 
course.  Lockhead 

114.  Personality  (P) .  (SS)  Representative  theories  of  personality  from  Freud  to  the  pres- 
ent, emphasizing  problems  of  normal  personality  structure,  dynamics,  development,  and 
assessment.  One  course.  Alexander  or  Kremen 

115.  Introduction  to  Learning  Theory  (C).  (SS)  Simple  processes  of  learning,  mem- 
ory, and  motivation,  primarily  nonhuman,  from  the  perspectives  of  associationism,  ethol- 
ogy, and  cognitive  science.  One  course.  Holland 

116.  Social  Psychology  (P).  (SS)  Problems,  concepts,  and  methods  in  the  study  of  so- 
cial interaction  and  interpersonal  influence.  C-L:  Sociology  106  and  Women's  Studies. 
One  course.  Costanzo  or  George 

117.  Statistical  Methods  (G).  (QR)  Elementary  statistical  techniques  and  their  appli- 
cation to  the  analysis  and  interpretation  of  social  science  data.  Theory  of  inference  is 
stressed.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  136,  Statistics  100,  Statistics 
200,  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Sociology  133.  One  course.  Staff 

118.  The  Psychology  of  Individual  Differences  (B,  C,  D,  G,  P).  (SS)  Nature  and  causes 
of  individual  and  group  variations  in  intelligence,  special  abilities,  social  and  emotional 
characteristics.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  117  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

119.  Abnormal  Psychology  (P).  (SS)  Disordered  behavior  and  constructive  person- 
ality change  viewed  in  interpersonal  and  social  context  for  purposes  of  understanding 
normal  and  abnormal  personality  development  and  functioning.  One  course.  Carson  or 
Lindahl 

120.  Comparative  Psychology  (B).  (SS)  A  survey  of  animal  behavior  from  the  psy- 
chologist's perspective.  Analysis  of  several  specific  behaviors:  such  as  navigation,  com- 
munication, social  organization.  One  course.  Holland 

123.  Introduction  to  Human  Memory  (C).  (SS)  A  review  of  the  theoretical  and  em- 
pirical study  of  the  encoding,  storage,  and  retrieval  of  information.  The  development, 
pathology,  and  computer  modeling  of  memory  in  clarification  of  basic  process  and  ap- 
plications. One  course.  Hasher  or  Rubin 

124.  Human  Development  (D).  (SS)  Biological,  behavioral,  and  cultural  perspectives 
and  approaches.  Evaluation  of  competing  paradigms.  Taught  by  multidisciplinary  team. 
C-L:  Human  Development,  Interdisciplinary  Course  124,  and  Sociology  124.  One  course. 
Maddox  and  staff 


Psychology  (PSY)        265 


126.  Behavior  and  Neurochemistry  (B,  P).  (NS)  The  role  of  brain  chemicals  (neu- 
rotransmitters, peptides,  and  hormones)  in  behavior.  Hypotheses  addressing  the  neu- 
robiology of  mental  disorders.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  103.  One  course.  Cooper 

130.  Psychosocial  Aspects  of  Human  Development  (D).  (SS)  The  connectedness  of 
societal,  behavioral,  and  biological  components  of  normal  development  from  childhood 
through  old  age;  society  as  the  context  in  which  individuals  develop  over  the  lifespan. 
Introductory  work  in  anthropology,  psychology,  or  sociology  recommended.  C-L:  Hu- 
man Development,  Interdisciplinary  Course  180,  and  Sociology  169.  One  course.  Martin 
Lakin  and  Maddox 

134.  Psychology  of  Language  (C).  (SS)  Psychological  "reality"  of  linguistic  structures, 
language  and  cognition,  biological  bases,  animal  communication,  language  pathologies, 
nonverbal  communication,  language  versus  music,  linguistic  universals,  and  bilingual- 
ism.  Everyday  language  phenomena  (for  example,  slips  of  the  tongue)  as  well  as  the  ex- 
perimental and  theoretical  literature.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  107  desirable.  C-L:  Lin- 
guistics. One  course.  Day 

136.  Advanced  Developmental  Psychology  (D).  (SS)  Issues,  concepts,  and  methods 
in  psychological  development,  for  example,  comparative  social  development,  social  cog- 
nition, adolescence.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  105  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Eckerman  orPutallaz 

137.  Adolescence  (D).  (SS)  Adolescent  development,  including  identity  formation, 
intelligence,  sexuality,  peer  and  parent  relationships,  vocational  choices,  drugs,  and  psy- 
chopathology.  Theory  and  empirical  findings.  One  course.  Goldstein 

140S.  Research  Methods  in  Developmental  Psychology  (D).  (SS)  Prerequisite:  Psy- 
chology 105  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Eckerman  or  L.  Wallach 

141S.  Tests  and  Measurements  (B,  C,  D,  G,  P).  (SS)  Test  methods  used  by  psycholo- 
gists to  measure  and  evaluate  mental  processes.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  117  or  equiva- 
lent. One  course.  Staff 

142S.  Child  Observation  (D).  (SS)  Observation  of  children  in  the  group  setting  of  the 
University  Preschool  and  Primary  Program.  Aspects  of  personality,  social  development, 
and  child-adult  relationships.  Open  only  to  junior  and  senior  psychology  majors  with 
consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Musia  Lakin 

143.  Experimental  Methods  in  Cognitive  Psychology  (C).  (SS)  Human  cognition;  lan- 
guage, memory,  problem  solving,  and  other  higher  mental  processes.  Prerequisite:  Psy- 
chology 107  or  112.  One  course.  Hasher,  Lockhead,  or  Rubin 

143S.  Cognition  Laboratory  (C).  (SS)  Human  cognition;  language,  memory,  prob- 
lem solving,  and  other  higher  mental  processes.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  107  or  112  or 
123.  One  course.  Hasher,  Lockhead,  or  Rubin 

145S.  Experimental  Approaches  to  Personality  (P) .  (SS)  Methods  applied  to  person- 
ality research.  Prerequisite:  one  course  in  psychology.  One  course.  M.  Wallach 

148S.  Sensation  and  Perception  Laboratory  (C) .  (S  S)  Experimental  approaches  to  ba- 
sic phenomena  of  perception  as  determined  by  conditions  in  the  external  situation  and 
the  person:  biological  and  psychological.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  112  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. One  course.  Lockhead 

149S.  Methods  in  Behavioral  Neurobiology  (B).  (NS)  Research  in  neural  bases  of  be- 
havior using  simple  biological  systems  as  models  for  more  complex  behavior.  Laborato- 
ry experience  in  experimental  methodologies.  Observational  techniques  in  study  of  nat- 
ural behaviors  and  neurophysiological  recording  and  stimulation.  Prerequisites: 
Psychology  103  or  background  in  biology  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  W.  G. 
Hall  and  Staff 

266         Courses  of  Instruction 


150S.  Hormones  and  Behavior  (B,  P).  (NS)  The  endocrine  system  and  hormones  in 
aggressive,  sexual,  and  emotional  behavior.  Prerequisites:  Psychology  103  and  consent 
of  instructor.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Izard 

154S.  Education,  Children,  and  Poverty  (D).  (SS)  Psychological  hypotheses  concern- 
ing the  roles  of  preschool  intervention  programs,  improved  quality  of  resources,  teach- 
er expectancy  effects,  and  enhancement  of  pupil  self-confidence,  in  relation  to  the  goal 
of  improved  cognitive  competence  for  poverty  background  children.  Criteria  for  defin- 
ing competence,  such  as  scores  on  psychometric  intelligence  tests,  performing  on  Piage- 
tian  tasks,  and  development  of  specific  skills.  Interpretations  concerning  intelligence  and 
cognitive  deprivation  in  poor  children  in  light  of  relevant  psychological  evidence.  Prereq- 
uisite: one  course  in  psychology  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  M.  Wallach 

157S.  Social  Development  of  Children  (D).  (SS)  The  study  of  the  child's  social  self; 
specifically,  how  children's  social  behavior  changes  developmentally  and  what  factors 
influence  the  development  of  that  behavior.  One  course.  Coie  or  Putallaz 

159S.  Biological  Psychology  of  Human  Development  (B,  D).  (SS)  Multidisciplinary 
perspectives  bearing  on  key  processes  in  human  development  from  infancy  through  old 
age;  the  way  that  biological  and  psychological  processes  act  together  in  normal  and  patho- 
logical behavior  and  development.  Clinical  case  material  and  videotapes.  Preference  given 
to  senior  psychology  majors  and  to  students  in  the  Program  in  Human  Development. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Thompson 

161S.  Advanced  Learning  Theory  (C).  (SS)  Selected  topics  in  the  data  and  theory  of 
basic  processes  of  learning,  memory,  and  motivation  in  animals  and  humans.  Empha- 
sis on  the  nature  of  theory  construction  and  evaluation,  and  the  relation  of  current  per- 
spectives to  older  ones.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  115  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Holland 

162S.  Clinical  Issues:  Conceptions,  Techniques,  and  Problems  of  Professional  Clin- 
ical Psychology  (P) .  (SS)  Assessment  of  personality  and  psychopathology.  Consultation 
and  psychotherapy  in  individuals,  groups,  family,  and  organizational  contexts.  Research 
on  clinical  questions.  Intended  for  those  contemplating  advanced  graduate  or  professional 
study  and  careers  in  clinical  psychology,  counseling,  psychiatry,  social  work,  or  cognate 
fields.  Prerequisites:  junior  or  senior  status  and  consent  of  the  instructor.  One  course. 
Martin  Lakin 

163S.  Stress  and  Coping  (P).  (SS)  Psychological  theory  and  empirical  work  on  stress 
and  coping,  with  an  emphasis  on  post-traumatic  stress.  Open  only  to  psychology  majors. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Roth 

164S.  Psychology  of  Women  (P).  (SS)  The  psychology  of  women  in  this  country:  de- 
velopment, including  sex  differences,  separation  and  individuation,  and  achievement; 
sexuality;  sex-roles;  mental  health  problems  particularly  salient  to  women;  cultural  in- 
fluences on  female  development;  and  views  within  the  field  of  psychology  about  wom- 
en. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Roth 

165S.  Neurobiology  of  Learning  and  Memory  (B) .  (NS)  Readings  in  the  neurophysio- 
logical  and  neurochemical  underpinnings  of  the  memory  process.  Current  and  classi- 
cal research  and  review  articles.  Prerequisites:  Psychology  103  and  consent  of  instructor. 
One  course.  Swartzwelder 

169S.  Eating  Behavior  and  Disorders  (B,  P) .  (SS)  The  interaction  of  taste  and  smell 
with  obesity,  anorexia,  and  nutritional  status  including  that  of  the  elderly.  Prerequisite : 
consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Schiffman 

170S.  A-R,  U-Z .  Selected  Problems  (G) .  New  courses  not  yet  in  the  bulletin  are  desig- 
nated as  170S  or  270S  depending  on  their  level .  Since  all  faculty  offer  these  courses,  their 
contents  vary  accordingly.  Different  courses  indicated  by  the  letter.  One  course.  Staff 

Psychology  (PSY)         267 


171T.  A-R.  Tutorials  (G).  Small  group  discussions  about  influential  books  and  arti- 
cles in  psychology.  The  availability  of  tutorials,  their  content,  and  the  instructors  will  be 
announced  before  registration.  Pass/fail  grading  only.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. Half  course.  Staff 

191, 192, 193, 194.  Independent  Study  (G).  Directed  reading  and  research.  191, 192: 
junior  year  fall,  spring;  193, 194:  senior  year  fall,  spring.  Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor 
and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

For  Advanced  Undergraduates  and  Graduates 

200.  Advanced  Neuroscience  I  (B).  (NS)  Basic  neuroanatomy  and  neurophysiology, 
physiology  of  the  neuron  and  neural  networks,  neurotransmitter  functions,  sensory  and 
motor  systems.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  103.  C-L:  Biology  200  and  Interdisciplinary 
Course  200.  One  course.  Cant  and  McClay 

201.  Advanced  Neuroscience  II  (B).  (NS)  Integrative  activities  of  the  nervous  system; 
sensory-motor  relationships,  neuroendocrine  relationships,  emotion  and  motivation, 
sleep,  learning  and  memory,  diseases  of  the  nervous  system  and  their  psychological  corre- 
lates. Prerequisite:  Biology  200,  Interdisciplinary  Course  200,  or  Psychology  200.  C-L:  In- 
terdisciplinary Course  201.  One  course.  R.  Erickson  and  W.  G.  Hall 

203S.  Sensation  and  Perception  (C) .  (SS)  Classical  and  current  concepts  and  methods. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Lockhead 

204S.  Great  Ideas  in  Psychology  (G).  (SS)  Ideas  in  psychology  drawn  from  various 
content  areas  (for  example,  perception,  personality,  motivation,  biological  bases,  social, 
cognitive,  developmental,  learning,  clinical)  and  various  methodological  approaches  (for 
example,  experimental,  introspection,  observation,  interview,  longitudinal,  simulation). 
Prerequisites:  must  be  a  junior  or  senior  psychology  major  and  have  consent  of  instruc- 
tor, or  have  graduate  status.  One  course.  Day 

207S.  Topics  in  Psychobiology  (B).  (NS)  The  biological  substrates  of  human  behavior 
in  health  and  disease.  Drug  abuse,  alcoholism,  depression,  schizophrenia,  and  human 
aggression.  Films  and  videotapes.  Student  presentations;  patient  interviews.  Prerequi- 
sites: senior  standing  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Distinguished  Professor  Course  207S. 
One  course.  Brodie 

210S.  Cognition  (C) .  (SS)  Schematic  view  of  cognitive  psychology  plus  intensive  study 
of  two  to  three  specific  research  topics  such  as  forms  of  representation,  individual  differ- 
ences, and  problem-solving  models.  Emphasis  on  alternative  experimental  and  theoretical 
approaches.  Prerequisites:  Psychology  107  and  consent  of  instructor,  or  graduate  status. 
One  course.  Day 

212S.  Human  Memory  (C).  (SS)  Classical  and  modern  literature,  data,  and  theories 
relating  to  mechanisms  of  information  processing,  storage,  and  retrieval.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  One  course.  Hasher  or  Rubin 

214S.  Development  of  Social  Interaction  (D,  P).  (SS)  Major  concepts  and  methods 
pertaining  to  early  social  development,  emphasizing  human  social  behavior  and  a  de- 
velopmental psychobiological  approach.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 

Eckerman 

215S.  Cognitive  Development  (C,  D).  (SS)  Intensive  critical  evaluation  of  major  ap- 
proaches to  the  development  of  knowledge,  including  those  of  Piaget,  Thomas  Kuhn, 
Vygotsky,  Eleanor  Gibson,  Kohlberg,  and  others.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  L.  Wallach 

217S.  Advanced  Social  Psychology  (P) .  (SS)  The  psychology  of  interpersonal  influence 
and  control;  the  cognitive  and  social  factors  affecting  the  perception  of  persons  and 

268         Courses  of  Instruction 


social  action;  the  dynamics  of  interpersonal  relations  and  relationship  formation  and 
change;  the  contribution  of  individual  differences  to  social  behavior.  Applications  in  en- 
vironmental psychology,  social  psychology  and  law,  and  organizational  psychology. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  One  course.  Costanzo 

219S.  Physiological  Foundations  of  Psychology  (B,  P) .  (NS)  Structure  and  function 
of  the  nervous  system  as  related  to  problems  of  sensory-motor  processes,  learning,  moti- 
vation, and  memory.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  One  course. 
C.  EricksonandR.  Erickson 

220S.  Psycholinguistics  (C).  (SS)  Selected  topics  such  as  neurolinguistics,  linguis- 
tic versus  pictorial  representation,  individual  differences,  oral  versus  written  expression, 
language  and  personality,  and  the  language-thought  interaction.  Prerequisites:  Psychol- 
ogy 134  and  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  One  course.  Day 

230S.  Social  Behavior  of  Animals  (B,  D,  P) .  (SS)  Developmental,  ecological,  and  phys- 
iological aspects  of  territorial,  sexual,  parental,  and  aggressive  behavior.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  C.  Erickson 

234S.  Advanced  Personality  (P).  (SS)  Selected  topics  of  current  interest  concerning 
empirical  research  on  personality.  Strategies  for  the  definition  of  research  questions  and 
the  evaluation  of  research  progress.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  sta- 
tus. One  course.  M.  Wallach 

238S.  Psychophysiology  (B).  (NS)  How  emotional  and  cognitive  processes  are  ex- 
pressed physiologically  and  recorded  from  heart,  skin,  muscle,  and  brain  activity.  Dis- 
cussion of  major  research  papers  in  the  field;  focus  on  outlining  what  is  known  and  de- 
veloping an  understanding  of  the  major  issues  in  psychophysiology.  Topics  include:  sleep, 
selective  attention,  memory,  language  processes,  lie  detection,  and  differentiation  be- 
tween arousal,  anger,  and  fear.  Laboratory.  One  course.  Marsh 

266S.  Comparative  Neurobiology  (B) .  (NS)  The  evolution  and  functional  organiza- 
tion of  the  vertebrate  brain.  A  study  of  the  original  papers  of  the  pioneers  in  compara- 
tive anatomy.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  One  course.  Diamond 
and  W.  C.  Hall 

267S.  Brain  Mechanisms  of  Behavior  (B,  C).  (NS)  General  physiological  principles 
of  brain  organization  in  relation  to  behavioral  processes  from  sensation  to  concept  for- 
mation. Discussions  of  original  readings  from  seminal  papers  in  the  early  nineteenth  cen- 
tury to  the  present.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  One  course. 
R.  Erickson 

270S.  A-R,  U-Z.  Selected  Problems  (G).  New  courses  not  yet  in  the  bulletin  are  desig- 
nated as  170S  or  270S  depending  on  level.  Since  all  faculty  offer  these  courses,  their  con- 
tents vary  accordingly.  Different  courses  indicated  by  the  letter.  One  course.  Staff 

273S.  Statistical  Principles  in  Experimental  Design  (G).  (QR)  The  problems  of  scien- 
tific inference;  methods  of  data  analysis  and  issues  in  experimental  design .  Prerequisite : 
consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  One  course.  Roth  or  staff 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course 
284S;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  284S,  History  284S,  Political  Science  264S,  Sociol- 
ogy 284S,  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  orSpenner 

289S.  Psychology  of  Prevention  (P).  (SS)  Concepts  of  prevention  and  mental  health 
promotion;  community  psychology  and  social  systems;  epidemiology  and  prediction  of 
disorder;  intervention  strategies;  evaluation  of  prevention  trials;  and  ethical  and  cultur- 
al issues.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  One  course.  Coie 


Psychology  (PSY)        269 


COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

113.  Research  Methods  in  Psychology  (B,  C).  (SS) 

121.  Health  Psychology  (P).  (SS) 

139.  Psychobiology  of  Motivation  (B,  D).  (NS) 

147S.  Experimental  Social  Psychology  (P).  (SS) 

151S-152S.  Child  Clinical  Psychology  (D,  P).  (SS) 

153S.  Child  Rearing:  Theories,  Research,  Realities  (D).  (SS) 

155S.  Perinatal  Behavior  (B,  D).  (NS) 

206S.  Stress  and  Health  (B,  C).  (SS) 

231S.  Parent-Child  Interaction  (D).  (SS) 

255S.  Perinatal  Behavior  (B,  D).  (NS) 

286S.  Biological  Basis  of  Hearing  (B,  C).  (NS) 

THE  MAJOR 

For  the  A.B.  Degree 

Corequisites.  Corequisites  are  intended  to  place  the  study  of  psychology  into  a  broad, 
liberal  arts  context.  They  are  in  four  areas;  one  of  a  short  list  of  courses  is  required  in  each 
area.  (Note:  the  lists  are  updated  regularly;  inquire  in  the  Undergraduate  Studies  Office). 

(1)  Biological  context  of  behavior.  Biology  14L  or  22L. 

(2)  Social  context  of  behavior.  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  93;  Cultural  An- 
thropology 94;  Sociology  110. 

(3)  History/philosophy  of  science.  Philosophy  104;  Philosophy  110;  Sociology  156;  His- 
tory 158. 

(4)  Quantitative  methods.  Mathematics  31  or  equivalent. 

Required  Courses.  Eight  courses  in  psychology  are  required  for  the  major,  which  is  de- 
vised to  provide  depth  and  breadth,  a  small  group  course  in  psychology,  and  familiarity 
with  the  quantitative  methods  involved  in  psychology.  For  breadth,  the  student  is  required 
to  take  two  Introductory  and  Survey  courses  including:  (1)  either  103  (Biological  Bases  of 
Behavior)  or  107  (Cognitive  Psychology),  and  (2)  either  105  (Developmental  Psychology) 
or  108  (Personality  and  Social  Behavior) .  These  Introductory  and  Su  rvey  courses  define  four 
areas  of  concentration  in  psychology  as  listed  above.  For  depth,  the  student  is  required 
to  take  at  least  two  courses  in  one  of  these  areas  in  addition  to  the  introductory  course 
in  that  area  of  concentration .  For  instruction  in  small  groups,  the  student  is  to  take  at  least 
one  seminar  (number  140S  and  above,  including  200-level  courses).  It  is  advisable  that 
this  seminar  be  in  the  student's  area  of  concentration.  For  quantitative  methods,  the  stu- 
dent is  to  take  one  of  the  following:  Mathematics  136;  Sociology  133;  Statistics  200;  or  Psy- 
chology 117  (none  of  which  count  as  one  of  the  eight  required  courses  in  psychology). 
For  purposes  of  the  major,  Sociology  106  is  the  equivalent  of  Psychology  116,  and  Sociol- 
ogy 133  is  the  equivalent  of  Psychology  117.  A  student  guidebook  describing  the  curricu- 
lum in  detail  is  available  from  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

For  the  B.S.  Degree 

As  for  the  A.B.  degree,  with  the  following  additions:  (1)  Mathematics  32  or  equiva- 
lent; (2)  six  courses  in  at  least  two  of  the  following  mathematics/natural  science  depart- 
ments: mathematics  (100-level  or  above,  in  addition  to  statistics  requirement,  above),  com- 
puter sciences  (100-level  or  above),  chemistry,  physics,  and  biology;  (3)  at  least  three  of 
the  six  mathematics/natural  science  courses  must  be  numbered  100  or  higher;  (4)  at  least 
one  course  that  involves  extensive  laboratory  or  fieldwork  (for  example,  experimental 
methods  or  independent  research). 

270         Courses  of  Instruction 


Independent  Study 

A  program  of  individualized  readings  or  an  empirical  research  project  may  be  car- 
ried out  by  arrangement  with  a  faculty  supervisor  and  enrollment  in  Psychology  191-194. 
A  written  plan  of  the  program  must  be  approved  by  the  supervisor  and  the  Director  of 
Undergraduate  Studies.  Credit  for  191-194  may  be  recorded  either  as  pass/fail  or  by  means 
of  letter  grades.  At  most  only  one  of  these  independent  study  courses  may  count  toward 
the  area  of  concentration  requirement,  and  only  two  may  count  toward  the  major. 

Honors 

Any  student  majoring  in  psychology  with  an  overall  grade  point  average  of  3.3  and 
a  grade  point  average  of  3.3  in  psychology  courses  may  be  a  candidate  for  graduation  with 
distinction  in  psychology.  Recommendation  for  this  honor  is  made  by  a  faculty  commit- 
tee which  evaluates  a  thesis  submitted  by  the  candidate  and  administers  an  oral  exami- 
nation. Candidates  typically  enroll  in  independent  study  courses  (191-194)  during  one 
or  more  semesters,  often  as  early  as  the  junior  year,  although  enrollment  in  independent 
study  is  not  a  precondition  of  candidacy.  All  eligible  students  are  encouraged  to  carry  out 
independent  study  and  to  secure  the  sponsorship  of  a  faculty  supervisor. 

Public  Policy  Studies  (pps> 

Professor  Cook,  Chairman;  Professor  Kuniholm,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Profes- 
sors Ascher,  Barber  (political  science),  Behn,  Clotfelter,  Fleishman  (law),  Gillis,  Hough 
(political  science),  Ladd,  Pearsall  (engineering),  and  Price  (political  science);  Associate 
Professors  Conrad,  Lipscomb,  Magat  (business),  McConahay,  Rapaport,  and  Stack;  As- 
sistant Professors  Durning,  Mayer,  and  Smith;  Research  Assistant  Professors  Entman  and 
O'Neil;  Professors  of  the  Practice  Broder,  Geller,  Harris,  Kaiser,  Stubbing,  and  Yaggy;  Ad- 
junct Professor  Owen;  Adjunct  Lecturer  Jackson;  Visiting  Professors  Dupree,  Friedrich- 
Cofer,  and  Healy;  Visiting  Associate  Professor  Dutton;  Visiting  Assistant  Professors  Mal- 
son  and  Newell;  Instructors  Braverman,  Ott,  and  Storck;  Lecturers  Guillory,  Pardue,  and 
Payne;  Visiting  Lecturers  Bredder,  Slawson,  and  Stevens 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Courses  in  public  policy  are  open  to  all  students  providing  that  any  prerequisites  are 
met. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

55.  Analytical  Methods  for  Public  Policy-Making.  (SS)  Basic  concepts  of  analytical 
thinking  including  quantitative  methods  for  assessing  the  probabilities  of  outcomes  and 
appraising  policy  alternatives.  Illustrated  by  problems  faced  by  busy  decision  makers  in 
government,  business,  law,  medicine.  One  course.  Staff 

107.  Comparative  Environmental  Policies.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Political  Science  107;  also 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  McKean 

110.  Economic  Analysis  for  Public  Policy-Making:  Microeconomic  and  Non- 
probabilistic  Models.  (SS)  Application  of  microeconomic  analysis  to  public  policy  areas, 
including  agriculture,  housing,  taxation,  and  income  redistribution.  (Not  open  to  stu- 
dents who  have  taken  Economics  149.)  Prerequisite:  Economics  52  or  equivalent.  One 
course.  Cook,  Ladd,  or  Lipscomb 

112.  Statistics  and  Public  Policy.  (QR)  Uses  and  limitations  of  statistical  methods,  in- 
cluding experimentation,  for  monitoring  and  evaluating  public  policies.  Not  open  to  stu- 
dents who  have  taken  Economics  138,  Mathematics  117,  Psychology  117,  or  Statistics  10. 
Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  55.  One  course.  Cook  or  McConahay 


Public  Policy  Studies  (PPS)        271 


114.  Political  Analysis  for  Public  Policy-Making.  (SS)  Analysis  of  the  political  and 
organizational  processes  which  influence  the  formulation  and  implementation  of  pub- 
lic policy.  Alternative  models.  C-L:  Political  Science  145.  One  course.  Durning,  Mayer,  or 
Smith 

116.  Policy  Choice  as  Value  Conflict.  (SS)  Theoretical  and  practical  problems  in  de- 
cision making  in  relation  to  conflicts  of  value  and  of  interest .  The  manifestation  of  norms 
deriving  from  professional  ethics,  ideology,  law,  and  other  sources  in  such  policy  issues 
as  welfare,  environmental  management,  and  national  defense.  One  course.  Braverrnan, 
Kuniholm,  Ott,  Payne,  orRapaport 

130S.  Nongovernmental  Organizations  and  Public  Policy.  (SS)  The  consequences 
of  the  increasingly  prominent  role  of  nongovernmental  organizations  in  public  policy, 
including  voluntary  associations,  cooperatives,  self-help  organizations,  and  public  cor- 
porations. C-L:  Political  Science  130S.  One  course.  Smith 

145D.  Leadership,  Policy,  and  Change.  (SS)  Ethical  and  practical  problems  of  leader- 
ship, including  motivation,  organizational  morale,  and  strategies  for  large-scale  change. 
Historical  and  modern  case  studies,  literary  examples,  and  political  and  psychological 
theory.  One  course.  O'Neil,  Ott,  or  Payne 

146S.  Leadership  and  Judgment.  (SS)  Theoretical  and  experiential  foundation  for 
the  exercise  of  judgment  and  leadership  in  policy-making.  Readings,  in-class  exercises, 
and  a  major  leadership  project  within  either  the  Duke  or  Durham  community.  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Off 

151S.  Administration  of  Justice.  (SS)  Analysis  of  policy  problems  and  conflicts  in- 
volved in  the  operation  of  the  criminal  justice  system.  One  course.  Staff 

152S.  Administration  of  Justice,  Summer  Internship.  (SS)  Pass/fail  grading  only.  Half 
course  or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  151S.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

154S.  Journalism  and  Public  Policy.  (SS)  Policy  problems  and  conflicts  involved  in 
applying  First  Amendment  principles  to  print  and  electronic  journalism.  Topics  include 
libel,  obscenity,  privacy,  national  security,  fair  trial,  and  antitrust.  One  course.  Staff 

155S.  Journalism  and  Public  Policy,  Summer  Internship.  (SS)  Pass/fail  grading  only. 
Half  course  or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  154S.  Variable  credit.  Broder 
and  Kaiser 

157S.  Health  Policy.  (SS)  Analysis  of  health  care  problems  and  policies.  One  course. 

Staff 

158S.  Health  Policy,  Summer  Internship.  (SS)  Pass/fail  grading  only.  Half  course  or 
one  course.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  157S.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

159.  State  and  Local  Public  Policy.  (SS)  How  state  and  local  governments  pay  for  public 
services.  Financing  education  and  transportation  programs,  the  use  of  municipal  bonds 
for  capital  projects,  and  the  design  of  intergovernmental  aid  programs.  State  and  local 
tax  policy.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  110,  Economics  149,  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. C-L:  Economics  159.  One  course.  Ladd 

161S.  State  and  Local  Public  Policy,  Summer  Internship.  (SS)  Pass/fail  grading  only. 
Half  course  or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  159S.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

163S.  Telecommunications  Policy  and  Regulation.  (SS)  Broadcast  policies,  the  rise 
of  cable  television,  spectrum  allocation  and  authorization,  and  developments  in  common 
carrier  telecommunications.  One  course.  GeWer  and  staff 

164S.  Telecommunications  Policy  and  Regulation,  Summer  Internship.  (SS)  Pass/fail 
grading  only.  Half  course  or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  163S.  Varia- 
ble credit.  Geller 

272         Courses  of  Instruction 


167S.  International  Policy.  (SS)  Relationships  among  organizations  and  agencies  in- 
volved in  international  political  and  economic  affairs,  focusing  on  selected  problems  of 
international  policy.  Prerequisite :  Political  Science  93  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Ascher,  Kuniholm,  or  Mayer 

168S.  International  Policy,  Summer  Internship.  (SS)  Pass/fail  grading  only.  Half 
course  or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  167S.  Variable  credit.  Storck 

175S.  The  Palestine  Problem  and  United  States  Public  Policy.  (CZ)  Identification  of 
Arab  and  Zionist  perceptions,  alternatives  available  to  American  decision  makers,  interest 
group  pressures  on  United  States  policies,  historical  analysis  as  a  means  to  improve  public 
policy.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  History  159S.  One  course.  Kuniholm 

176S.  American  Communities:  A  Photographic  Approach.  (SS)  A  documentary  ap- 
proach to  the  study  of  American  communities  through  individual  photographic  projects 
centered  around  a  community  of  the  student's  choosing.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. C-L:  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Harris 

177S.  Advanced  Documentary  Photography.  (SS)  An  advanced  course  for  students 
who  have  taken  Public  Policy  Studies  176S  or  have  had  substantial  experience  in  documen- 
tary fieldwork.  Students  complete  an  individual  photographic  project  and  study  impor- 
tant works  within  the  documentary  tradition.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  176S 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Harris 

180S.  Writing  for  the  Media.  (SS)  Workshop  on  writing  news  stories,  editorials,  and 
features  for  the  print  media.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

185.  American  Diplomacy  from  the  Kennedy  Administration  to  the  Present.  (SS)  C-L: 

History  185.  One  course.  C.  Davis  or  Kuniholm 

186S.  Shaping  the  News.  (SS)  C-L:  Political  Science  112S.  One  course.  Barber 

188.  The  Psychology  of  Political  Symbols.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Political  Science  188.  One 
course.  McConahay 

190.  Internship.  For  students  working  in  a  public  agency,  political  campaign,  or  oth- 
er policy-oriented  group  under  the  supervision  of  a  faculty  member.  Pass/fail  grading  only. 
Prerequisites:  prior  consent  of  Assistant  Director  for  Internships,  Placement,  and  Alumni 
and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research .  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  for  seniors.  One  course 
each.  Staff 

195S.  Selected  Public  Policy  Topics.  One  course.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

204S.  Ethics  in  Political  Life.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Political  Science  204S.  One  course.  Spragens 

217.  Microeconomics  and  Public  Policy-Making.  (SS)  Consumption  and  production 
theory,  welfare  economics,  theories  of  collective  choice,  market  structures  and  regula- 
tion, and  nonmarket  decision  making.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy 
Studies  110.  One  course.  Clotfelter 

218.  Macroeconomic  Policy.  (SS)  Survey  of  macroeconomic  theory  and  analysis  of 
policies  designed  to  reduce  unemployment,  stimulate  economic  growth,  and  stabilize 
prices.  Conventional  monetary  and  fiscal  instruments,  employment  policies,  and  new 
policies  designed  to  combat  inflation.  C-L:  Economics  218.  One  course.  Staff 

219.  The  Politics  of  the  Policy  Process.  (SS)  The  formulation  of  public  policies,  sub- 
stantive policies  in  a  variety  of  contexts  from  local  government  to  international  affairs;  the 

Public  Policy  Studies  (PPS)        273 


role  of  legislatures,  interest  groups,  chief  executives,  and  the  bureaucracy  in  defining  al- 
ternatives and  in  shaping  policy  from  agenda  formulation  to  implementation.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy  Studies  114.  C-L:  Political  Science  248.  One 
course.  Mayer 

221.  Decision  Analysis  for  Public  Policymakers.  (SS)  Methods  for  structuring  deci- 
sion dilemmas  and  decomposing  complex  problems,  assessing  the  probabilities  of  un- 
certain consequences  of  alternative  decisions,  appraising  the  decision  maker's  preferences 
for  these  consequences  and  for  reexamining  the  decision.  Not  open  to  students  who  have 
taken  Public  Policy  Studies  55.  One  course.  Behn 

222.  Data  Analysis  for  Public  Policymakers.  (QR)  Sampling  theory,  Bayesian  statis- 
tics, and  regression  analysis.  Examples  from  problems  in  health  care,  transportation, 
crime,  urban  affairs,  and  politics.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy 
Studies  112.  One  course.  McConahay 

223.  Ethics  and  Policy-Making.  (SS)  Normative  concepts  in  politics,  liberty,  justice, 
and  the  public  interest:  historical  and  philosophical  roots,  relationship  to  one  another 
and  to  American  political  tradition,  and  implications  for  domestic  and  international  prob- 
lems. Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy  Studies  116.  C-L:  Political  Science 
245.  One  course.  Rapaport 

231.  Quantitative  Evaluation  Methods.  (QR)  Problems  in  quantifying  policy  target 
variables  such  as  unemployment,  crime,  and  poverty.  Experimental  and  nonexperimental 
methods  for  evaluating  the  effect  of  public  programs,  including  topics  in  experimental 
design,  regression  analysis,  and  simulation.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  222  or 
equivalent.  One  course.  Cook  or  McConahay 

232.  Microeconomics:  Policy  Applications.  (SS)  Cost  benefit  analysis  of  public  pro- 
grams. Public  utility  regulation,  pollution  regulation,  hospital  rate  setting,  regulation  of 
product  safety.  Quantitative  methods  and  microeconomic  theory  for  analysis  of  both  nor- 
mative and  positive  aspects  of  economic  policy.  Prerequisites:  Public  Policy  Studies  110 
or  217  or  Economics  149  and  familiarity  with  regression  analysis  or  concurrent  enrollment 
in  Public  Policy  Studies  231.  C-L:  Economics  232.  One  course.  Ladd 

236S,  237S.  Public  Management  I  and  II:  Managing  Public  Agencies.  (SS)  236S:  oper- 
ations management,  information  and  performance,  personnel  management,  public  sector 
marketing.  237S:  organizational  strategy,  organizational  structure  and  design,  leadership 
and  motivation,  labor  negotiations.  Prerequisite:  for  237S,  Public  Policy  Studies  236S.  One 
course  each.  Behn  or  Yaggy 

238S.  Public  Budgeting  and  Financial  Management.  (SS)  Fund  accounting  for 
government;  techniques  of  financial  analysis,  including  break-even  analysis,  cost  account- 
ing, cash-flow  analysis,  and  capital  budgeting;  and  governmental  budgeting,  including 
the  budgetary  process  and  reforms,  and  the  budget  crunch  in  the  public  sector.  One 
course.  Stubbing 

240S.  Analyzing  the  News.  (SS)  Research  seminar  on  political  messages  and  effects 
of  media.  Methods  and  findings  of  content  analysis,  survey  research,  critical  theory,  semi- 
ology; research  project  integrating  these  approaches.  C-L:  Political  Science  208S.  One 
course.  Staff 

245S.  Leadership  Tutorial.  (SS)  Analysis  of  techniques,  personal  qualities,  and  or- 
ganizational factors  that  help  or  hinder  effective  leadership.  Practical  experience  in  evalu- 
ation of  leadership  efforts.  Prerequisite :  Public  Policy  Studies  145D  or  consent  of  instructor. 
One  course.  Payne 

250S.  Policy,  Philanthropy,  and  the  Arts.  (SS)  Democratic  and  aesthetic  values  in  re- 
lation to  past  and  present  patterns  of  public,  corporate,  and  philanthropic  support  for 

274         Courses  of  Instruction 


the  arts.  The  uses  of  art  criticism  and  political  theory  in  evaluating  subsidies,  grants,  tax 
incentives,  and  censorship.  One  course.  Payne 

254.  Transportation  Planning  and  Policy  Analysis.  (SS)  Prerequisite  or  corequisite: 
Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  116  or  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Civil  and  En- 
vironmental Engineering  216.  One  course.  Pas 

257.  United  States  Policy  in  the  Middle  East.  (SS)  From  World  War  II  to  the  present 
with  a  focus  on  current  policy  options.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Kuniholm 

264S.  Research  Seminar:  Topics  in  Public  Policy  I.  (SS)  Selected  topics.  One  course. 
Staff 

267S.  Policy-Making  in  International  Organizations.  (SS)  Emphasis  on  international 
financial  institutions  such  as  the  World  Bank  and  the  International  Monetary  Fund. 
C-L:  Political  Science  267S.  One  course.  Ascher 

268.  Federal  Tax  Policy.  (SS)  Structure,  incidence,  and  economic  effects  of  major  fed- 
eral taxes.  Special  attention  to  problems  of  inflation,  income  definition,  distortions,  sav- 
ings, and  investment.  C-L:  Economics  268.  One  course.  Clotfelteror  Schmalbeck 

272.  Resource  Economics  and  Policy.  (SS)  Prerequisite:  introductory  course  in  eco- 
nomics or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  270.  One  course. 
Hyde 

278.  Human  Service  Bureaucracies.  (SS)  Schools,  prisons,  courts,  welfare  agencies: 
decision  making,  implementation,  the  impact  of  work  practices  on  clients.  The  future  of 
street-level  bureaucracy.  One  course.  Stack 

283S.  Congressional  Policy-Making.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Political  Science  283S.  One  course. 
Bianco  or  Canon 

284S.  Public  Policy  Process  in  Developing  Countries.  (SS)  Policy-making  patterns 
in  less  developed  countries;  examples  from  Latin  America,  Africa,  and  Asia.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  Political  Science  284S.  One  course.  Ascher 

286S.  Economic  Policy-Making  in  Developing  Countries.  (SS)  Fiscal,  monetary,  and 
exchange  rate  policies  in  less  developed  countries;  issues  in  public  policy  toward  natu- 
ral resources  and  state-owned  enterprises.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  110  or  Eco- 
nomics 149.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Economics  286S.  One  course.  Conrad  or 
Gillis 

290.  Glasgow  Seminar  in  Public  Policy.  (SS)  The  large  theoretical  problems  of  pub- 
lic policy  (for  example,  justice,  equality,  liberty);  the  making  and  implementation  of  policy 
in  specific  areas  (for  example,  economic,  urban,  social);  comparative  analysis  of  Europe's 
communist  countries  and  how  their  political  systems  differ  from  those  of  the  United  States 
and  Britain.  (Taught  in  Scotland.)  Prerequisites:  Public  Policy  Studies  55, 110, 112, 114, 
116,  and  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies,  who  may  waive  requirements. 
One  course.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

118S.  Ethical  Dilemmas  and  Social  Policy.  (SS) 

166.  Child  Policy  in  the  United  States.  (SS) 

178S.  Visual  Language  and  Policy  Choice.  (SS) 

241.  Reporting  the  American  People.  (SS) 

256.  The  Economics  of  Health  Care.  (SS) 

270S.  Humanistic  Perspectives  on  Public  Policy.  (SS) 

Public  Policy  Studies  (PPS)        275 


INTERNSHIP  COURSES 

The  internship  courses  provide  students  with  an  opportunity  to  develop  a  basic  un- 
derstanding of  one  or  more  public  policy  areas,  to  apply  that  understanding  in  a  job  dur- 
ing the  summer,  and  to  return  to  the  classroom  to  build  on  this  knowledge  and  experience. 
Normally,  students  take  a  two-course  sequence  to  receive  credit  for  the  field  experience 
requirement  of  all  public  policy  studies  majors.  Prior  to  participation  in  the  internship 
program,  all  majors  must  have  completed  Public  Policy  Studies  55  and  three  of  the  four 
core  courses  (Public  Policy  Studies  110, 112, 114,  or  116).  This  requirement  may  be  waived 
by  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  for  transfer  students  or  others  in  unusual  cir- 
cumstances. Applications  for  enrollment  in  the  internship  program  must  be  completed 
in  the  early  fall  and  approved  by  the  Assistant  Director  of  Internships,  Placement,  and 
Alumni.  Stipends  are  usually  provided  for  all  public  policy  majors  enrolled  in  an  intern- 
ship sequence  that  begins  with  any  one  of  the  following  internship  courses :  Public  Poli- 
cy Studies  152S,  155S,  158S,  161S,  164S,  or  168S. 

All  majors  are  encouraged  to  take  an  advanced  follow-up  course  in  the  area  of  their 
summer  internship. 

THE  MAJOR 

The  public  policy  studies  major  is  an  interdisciplinary  social  science  program  designed 
to  provide  students  with  the  skills,  analytical  perspectives,  and  descriptive  information 
needed  by  policy  analysts  to  deal  effectively  with  major  contemporary  social  problems. 
The  course  of  study  familiarizes  the  student  with  the  kind  of  contribution  each  of  sever- 
al disciplines  (political  science,  economics,  social  psychology,  applied  mathematics,  his- 
tory, and  ethics)  can  make  to  policy  analysis.  Opportunities  are  provided,  both  in  the  class- 
room and  through  field  experiences,  for  students  to  integrate  this  material  and  apply  it 
to  analyzing  specific  public  policy  issues. 

Students  majoring  in  public  policy  participate  in  a  variety  of  learning  experiences  in- 
cluding seminars,  lecture  and  discussion  classes,  individual  study,  policy  workshops, 
and  an  internship.  In  addition,  students  are  urged  to  participate  actively  in  programs  spon- 
sored by  the  Institute  of  Policy  Sciences  and  Public  Affairs  to  supplement  material  covered 
in  class.  As  a  matter  of  policy,  students  are  asked  to  evaluate  teaching  and  course  content 
and  are  provided  both  formal  and  informal  opportunities  to  shape  the  program  and  cur- 
riculum. 

Prerequisites.  Economics  2  or  52,  Political  Science  91,  and  Public  Policy  Studies  55. 

Major  Requirements.  Public  Policy  Studies  110,  112,  114,  116,  plus  three  additional 
courses,  one  of  which  must  be  a  200-level  course.  A  policy-oriented  field  experience  ap- 
proved by  the  Assistant  Director  of  Internships,  Placement,  and  Alumni  is  required .  (See 
Internship  Courses  above.) 

Religion  (red 

Professor  Hillerbrand,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Surin,  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies;  Professors  Clark,  Kort,  Lawrence,  Lincoln,  E.  Meyers,  Osborn,  and  Wintermute; 
Associate  Professors  Bland,  Corless,  McCollough,  C.  Meyers,  Partin,  and  Peters;  Assis- 
tant Professors  Martin  and  Robinson;  Lecturer  Shows 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Study  in  the  Department  of  Religion  arises  from  the  recognition  that  religion,  al- 
though it  takes  many  forms,  is  a  constitutive  element  of  human  existence  individually 
and  collectively.  The  curriculum  pursues  the  study  of  religion  in  two  distinguishable  ways: 
first,  through  the  examination  of  the  particulars  of  specific  religious  traditions;  and,  sec- 
ond, through  theoretical  studies  of  an  analytic,  comparative,  and  constructive  nature. 

Introductory  courses  (Religion  50,  51,  52,  53,  54,  55,  56,  57,  58,  and  59)  are  open  to  all 
undergraduates.  These  courses  also  help  fulfill  distributional  field  requirements  for  the 

276        Courses  of  Instruction 


religion  major.  Courses  at  the  100  level  are  open  to  all  undergraduates  with  the  excep- 
tion of  those  specially  designated.  Courses  at  the  200  level  are  open  to  upperclassmen 
with  the  consent  of  the  instructor. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

50.  The  Old  Testament.  (CZ)  Historical,  literary,  and  theological  investigations. 
C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  C.  Meyers,  E.  Meyers,  Peters,  or  Wintennute 

51.  Introduction  to  Judaic  Civilization.  (CZ)  Continuity  and  change  in  the  major  peri- 
ods of  Judaism.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  Bland  or  E.  Meyers 

52.  The  New  Testament.  (CZ)  Origins,  development,  and  content  of  thought.  One 
course.  Martin  or  staff 

52D.  The  New  Testament.  (CZ)  Same  as  Religion  52  with  discussion  section  includ- 
ed. One  course.  Staff 

53.  The  Roman  Catholic  Tradition.  (CZ)  A  survey  of  the  development  of  Roman  Cath- 
olic theology  and  institutions  from  the  second  century  to  Vatican  II.  One  course.  Clark 

54.  Protestant  Traditions.  (CZ)  A  survey  of  the  historical  development  of  Protestant 
theologies  and  denominations.  One  course.  Clark 

55.  Biblical  Literature.  (AL)  A  study  of  selected  Old  Testament  and  New  Testament 
texts,  their  cultural  context,  and  the  relation  within  them  of  religious  meaning  to  literary 
form.  One  course.  Staff 

56.  The  Black  Religious  Experience  in  America.  (CZ)  From  the  slave  period  to  the 
present.  C-L:  Afro-American  Studies  56.  One  course.  Lincoln 

57.  Introduction  to  Religions  of  Asia.  (CZ)  Problems  and  methods  in  the  study  of  re- 
ligion, followed  by  a  survey  of  the  historical  development,  beliefs,  practices,  and  contem- 
porary significance  of  the  Islamic  religion  and  religions  of  south  and  east  Asia.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Corless,  Lawrence,  Partin,  or  Robinson 

58.  Interpretations  of  Religion  in  Western  Culture.  (CZ)  Western  religion  as  explained 
by  contemporary  sociologists,  psychologists,  anthropologists,  and  theologians.  One 
course.  Bland  or  staff 

59.  An  Introduction  to  Christian  Theology  and  Ethics.  (CZ)  Analysis  and  interpre- 
tation of  faith  and  practice.  One  course.  Kort,  McCollough,  or  Osborn 

60.  Ethical  Issues  in  Twentieth-Century  America.  (CZ)  A  critical  examination  of  ethi- 
cal themes,  with  special  emphasis  on  public  policy.  For  participants  in  the  Twentieth- 
Century  America  Semester  only.  One  course.  McCollough 

71A,  72A.  Freshman-Sophomore  Seminars:  African  and  Asian  Traditions.  Topics 
and  instructors  to  be  announced.  One  course  each.  Staff 

71C,  72C.  Freshman-Sophomore  Seminars:  Analytic,  Comparative,  and  Construc- 
tive Studies.  Topics  and  instructors  to  be  announced.  One  course  each.  Staff 

101.  Selected  Studies  in  the  Bible:  Prophets.  (CZ)  Analysis  and  interpretation  of 
representative  issues  and  personalities  in  the  historical  and  prophetic  books.  C-L:  Juda- 
ic Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

102.  Selected  Studies  in  the  Bible:  Writings.  (CZ)  Analysis  and  interpretation  of 
representative  forms  and  ideas,  with  particular  attention  to  wisdom  literature  and  psalms. 
C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

105.  Theology  of  the  Old  Testament.  (CZ)  Emphasis  upon  history  and  eschatology, 
covenant,  messianism,  and  wisdom.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  Wintermute 

Religion  (REL)         277 


106.  Jesus  and  the  Synoptic  Gospels.  (CZ)  The  gospel  tradition  in  the  New  Testament. 
One  course.  Staff 

108.  The  Life  and  Letters  of  Paul.  (CZ)  Paul's  role  in  the  expansion  of  the  Christian 
movement,  the  most  important  aspects  of  his  thought,  and  his  continuing  influence.  One 
course.  Martin 

109.  Women  in  the  Biblical  Tradition:  Image  and  Role.  (CZ)  C-L:  Judaic  Studies  and 
Women's  Studies.  One  course.  C.  Meyers 

110.  Archaeology  and  Art  of  the  Biblical  World.  (CZ)  The  material  culture  of  ancient 
Palestine  as  it  relates  to  the  Hebrew  Bible,  the  New  Testament,  and  early  Judaism.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  C.  Meyers  or  E.  Meyers 

111.  The  Historical  Jesus.  (CZ)  Historical  research  on  the  life  of  Jesus.  One  course. 

Martin 

115-116.  Introduction  to  Biblical  Hebrew.  (FL)  (Divinity  School  courses  open  to  un- 
dergraduates with  consent  of  instructor. )  Elements  of  phonology,  morphology,  and  syn- 
tax. Exercises  in  reading  and  writing  Hebrew.  116:  study  of  the  weak  verb;  exegetical  treat- 
ment of  the  Book  of  Jonah.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  Two  courses.  Bailey 

120.  History  of  the  Christian  Church.  (CZ)  Crucial  events,  issues,  structures,  and  writ- 
ings that  have  shaped  the  Christian  community  and  influenced  Western  civilization  from 
the  time  of  the  Early  Church  to  the  present.  One  course.  Hillerbrand 

123.  Issues  in  Early  Christian  History.  (CZ)  Theological,  ecclesiastical,  moral,  and 
social  issues  in  second-  to  fifth-century  Christianity.  Prerequisite :  Religion  52  or  53  or  54 
or  125  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Clark 

125.  Women  and  Sexuality  in  the  Christian  Tradition.  (CZ)  A  historical  survey  of 
Christian  attitudes  and  practices  from  New  Testament  times  to  the  present.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Clark 

128.  The  Background  of  Contemporary  Christian  Thought:  1918-1960.  (CZ)  Theol- 
ogy of  Karl  Barth,  Rudolf  Bultmann,  Paul  Tillich,  Karl  Rahner,  Reinhold  Niebuhr,  and 
others.  One  course.  Osborn 

129.  Contemporary  Christian  Faith  and  Politics.  (CZ)  One  course.  Osborn 

131D.  Principles  of  Archaeological  Investigation.  (CZ)  Supervised  fieldwork,  visits 
to  other  excavations,  introduction  to  ceramic  chronology,  numismatics,  and  other  relat- 
ed disciplines.  Excavation  of  a  late  Roman  village  in  Galilee.  Offered  in  Israel,  only  in  the 
summer.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  C.  Meyers  or  E.  Meyers 

132D.  Palestine  in  Late  Antiquity.  (CZ)  The  history,  literature,  and  archaeology  of 
Roman  Palestine  with  particular  emphasis  on  Galilee  in  rabbinic  and  early  Christian  times. 
C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  E.  Meyers 

133.  The  Foundations  of  Post-Biblical  Judaism.  (CZ)  History,  religion,  and  literature 
of  Pharasaic  and  sectarian  Judaism  from  the  time  of  Ezra  to  Rabbi  Judah.  C-L:  Judaic 
Studies.  One  course.  E.  Meyers 

134.  Jewish  Mysticism.  (CZ)  The  main  historical  stages,  personalities,  texts,  and  doc- 
trines from  rabbinic  to  modern  times.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Judaic  Studies, 
and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Bland 

135.  Jewish  Religious  Thought.  (CZ)  Doctrines,  dialectics,  and  religious  attitudes  of 
pre-Enlightenment  theologians.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Judaic  Studies,  and  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Bland 

278         Courses  of  Instruction 


136.  Contemporary  Jewish  Thought.  (CZ)  Modern  Jewish  thought  from  Mendels- 
sohn to  the  present,  with  particular  reference  to  American  thinkers.  C-L:  Comparative 
Area  Studies  and  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  Bland  or  E.  Meyers 

138.  Political  Leadership  in  the  Black  Church.  (SS)  Turner,  Powell,  King,  Malcolm 
X,  and  others.  C-L:  Afro-American  Studies  138.  One  course.  Lincoln 

140.  Religions  of  India.  (CZ)  Major  religious  traditions  of  the  subcontinent:  Hindu- 
ism, Buddhism,  Jainism,  and  Islam.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Lawrence 
or  staff 

141.  Religions  of  China  and  Japan.  (CZ)  Traditional  religion  in  China  and  Japan  and 
its  interaction  with  Sino-Japanese  Buddhism.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Corless 

142.  Comparative  Mythology.  (CZ)  Nature  and  functions  of  religious  myth  in  Juda- 
ism, Christianity,  Islam,  Hinduism,  and  Buddhism.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Part  in 

143.  Mysticism.  (CZ)The  mystical  element  of  religion:  Hinduism,  Buddhism,  Chris- 
tianity, and  Islam.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

144.  Black  Cults  and  Sects  in  America.  (SS)  Cult-sect  phenomena.  C-L:  Afro- 
American  Studies  144.  One  course.  Lincoln 

145.  Social  Issues  in  Contemporary  Hinduism.  (CZ)  Emphasis  on  the  caste  system 
and  reactions  to  it;  topics  include  untouchability,  religious  roles  of  women,  and  institu- 
tional responses  to  famines  and  epidemics.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Robinson 

148.  Modern  American  Religious  Cults.  (CZ)  Children  of  God,  Unification  Church, 
Scientology,  Feraferia,  Transcendental  Meditation,  Krishna  Consciousness,  Bahai,  and 
others.  One  course.  Partin 

149.  Buddha  and  Buddhism.  (CZ)  A  systematic  introduction  to  the  origins  and  spread 
of  Buddhist  thought  and  practice.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Corless 

151.  Ethical  Issues  in  Social  Change  and  Public  Policy.  (CZ)  American  moral  tradi- 
tion and  factors  in  social  change  in  the  normative  analysis  of  public  policy,  with  a  con- 
sideration of  specific  ethical  issues.  One  course.  McCollough 

152.  Islamic  Mysticism.  (CZ)  Sufism  as  an  ascetical  protest  movement  that  affected 
the  worldwide  growth  of  Islam.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Lawrence 

155.  Ethical  Issues  in  the  Life  Cycle.  (CZ)  Human  development  viewed  in  religious, 
ethical,  and  psychological  perspectives.  One  course.  McCollough 

157.  Bioethics  in  Comparative  Contexts.  (CZ)  Ethical  approaches  to  health  and  ill- 
ness from  moral,  religious,  and  philosophical  perspectives  in  relation  to  economic,  so- 
cial, and  political  factors.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  McCollough 

158.  Psychology  and  Religion.  (SS)  Contributions  of  major  psychological  theories 
to  an  understanding  of  religion,  especially  Christianity.  One  course.  Shmvs 

159.  Ethical  Issues  in  Health  Care.  (CZ)  A  theological  and  comparative  study  of  select- 
ed ethical  issues  in  health  policy:  the  profession  of  medicine,  institutional  organization 
and  services,  and  medical  practice.  One  course.  McCollough 

162, 163.  Introduction  to  Islamic  Civilization.  (CZ)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course 
162, 163;  also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies;  Cultural  Anthropology  147, 148;  History 
101G,  102G;  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course  each.  Lawrence  and  staff 

Religion  (RED         279 


164.  History  and  Religions  of  North  Africa.  (CZ)  An  introduction  to  the  cultural  pat- 
terns, social  forces,  and  historical  developments  that  have  shaped  North  Africa  and  its 
major  religious  traditions.  C-L:  History  187  and  Interdisciplinary  Course  164.  One  course. 
Lawrence 

170.  Problems  of  Religious  Thought.  (CZ)  Analysis  of  uses  of  know,  true,  mind,  body, 
time,  person,  love,  meaning,  in  modern  Western  culture  as  introduction  to  religious  reflec- 
tion. One  course.  Staff 

172.  Religion  and  Tragedy.  (AL)  Influence  of  the  Judaic-Christian  religious  tradition 
on  the  development  of  the  tragic  view  of  life.  One  course.  Staff 

174.  Technology  Assessment  and  Social  Choice.  (CZ)  See  C-L :  Engineering  174.  One 
course.  Garg  and  McCollough 

186.  Faith  and  Fiction  in  Victorian  England.  (AL)  The  relation  of  fiction  to  major  re- 
ligious and  theological  developments  in  England  during  the  Victorian  period.  (Summer 
program  in  England.)  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  English  137.  C-L:  English  132. 
One  course.  Staff 

187.  Atmosphere  and  Mystery  in  Twentieth-Century  English  Fiction.  (AL)  Narrative 
atmosphere  in  English  fiction  of  this  century  in  relation  to  beliefs  about  circumstances 
which  limit  and  determine  the  human  world;  religious  significance  of  these  beliefs.  (Sum- 
mer program  in  England.)  One  course.  Kort 

188.  Recent  Literature  and  Its  Religious  Implications.  (AL)  Religious  elements  in  re- 
cent literature.  One  course.  Kort 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  For  freshmen  and  sophomores  with  departmental  ap- 
proval. One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  For  juniors  and  seniors  with  departmental  approval. 
One  course  each.  Staff 

195A,  196A.  Junior-Senior  Seminars:  African  and  Asian  Traditions.  Topics  and  in- 
structors to  be  announced.  One  course  each.  Staff 

195B,  196B.  Junior-Senior  Seminars:  Jewish  and  Christian  Traditions.  Topics  and 
instructors  to  be  announced.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

195C,  196C.  Junior-Senior  Seminars:  Analytic,  Comparative,  and  Constructive 
Studies.  Topics  and  instructors  to  be  announced.  One  course  each.  Staff 

197-198.  Honors  Research.  Consent  of  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  re- 
quired. Two  courses.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

207, 208.  Intermediate  Biblical  Hebrew.  (FL)  Grammar  with  reading  and  exegesis  of 
Old  Testament  prose  and  poetry.  Prerequisite:  at  least  one  year  of  Hebrew  or  consent  of 
instructor.  C-L:  Old  Testament  207,  208  and  Judaic  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

212.  Policy-Making  and  Theological  Ethics.  (CZ)  Relation  of  knowledge,  power,  and 
values  in  policy-making;  models  of  decision  making  in  the  policy  sciences  and  their  ethical 
implications.  One  course.  McCollough 

217.  Islam  in  India.  (CZ)  History  and  thought  of  major  Indian  Muslims  from  Biruni 
to  Wali-Ullah,  with  special  attention  to  the  role  of  Sufism.  An  introduction  to  selected  Mus- 
lim scholars  and  saints  who  contributed  to  the  interaction  between  Islam  and  Hinduism 
in  Northern  India  during  the  second  millenium  A.D.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies. 
One  course.  Lawrence 


280         Courses  of  Instruction 


218.  Religions  of  East  Asia.  (CZ)  Shinto,  Taoism,  Confucianism,  and  East  Asian  Bud- 
dhism studied  phenomenologically  in  relation  to  the  Axial  Age.  One  course.  Corless 

220.  Rabbinic  Hebrew.  (FL)  Interpretive  study  of  late  Hebrew,  with  readings  from 
the  Mishnah  and  Jewish  liturgy.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  E.  Meyers  or  staff 

221.  Readings  in  Hebrew  Biblical  Commentaries.  (CZ)  Selected  Hebrew  texts  in 
Midrash  Aggadah  and  other  Hebrew  commentaries  reflecting  major  trends  of  classical 
Jewish  exegesis.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  Bland 

226B.  Exegesis  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  (Romans).  (CZ)  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

226F.  Exegesis  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  (I  and  II  Corinthians).  (CZ)  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

228.  Twentieth-Century  Continental  Theology.  (CZ)  An  investigation  of  leading  the- 
ologians and  theological  trends.  One  course.  Osborn 

230S.  The  Meaning  of  Religious  Language.  (CZ)  An  analysis  of  the  credentials  of 
some  typical  claims  of  theism  in  the  light  of  theories  of  meaning  in  recent  thought.  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Philosophy  230S.  One  course.  Staff 

231S.  Seminar  in  Religion  and  Contemporary  Thought.  (CZ)  Analytical  reading  and 
discussion  of  such  critical  cultural  analysis  as  is  found  in  the  works  of  Polanyi,  Arendt, 
Trilling,  and  others,  with  appraisal  of  the  relevance  of  theological  inquiry.  One  course.  Staff 

232S.  Religion  and  Literature.  (AL)  Theories  concerning  the  relation  of  religion  to 
literary  forms,  particularly  narrative.  One  course.  Kort 

233.  Modern  Narratives  and  Religious  Meanings.  (AL)  A  study  of  kinds  of  religious 
meaning  or  significance  in  representative  American,  British,  and  continental  fiction  of 
the  first  half  of  the  twentieth  century.  One  course.  Kort 

234.  Early  Christian  Asceticism.  (CZ)  The  development  of  asceticism  and  monasti- 
cism  in  the  first  six  centuries  of  Christianity.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Clark 

235.  Heresy:  Theological  and  Social  Dimensions  of  Early  Christian  Dissent.  (CZ) 

One  course.  Clark 

238.  Jewish  Responses  to  Christianity.  (CZ)  Apologetic  and  polemical  themes  in  rab- 
binic, medieval,  and  contemporary  writings.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  Bland 

239.  Introduction  to  Middle  Egyptian  I.  (FL)  Grammar  and  readings  in  hieroglyph- 
ic texts  relating  to  the  Old  Testament.  One  course.  Wintermute 

240.  Introduction  to  Middle  Egyptian  II.  (FL)  Readings  in  Middle  Egyptian  and  in- 
troduction to  New  Egyptian  Grammar.  Prerequisite:  Religion  239.  One  course.  Wintermute 

243.  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Biblical  Times.  (CZ)  Investigation  of  selected  ma- 
terial remains  from  the  Bronze  Age  to  the  Persian  period.  Trends  in  biblical  studies,  with 
particular  attention  to  methodological  considerations  and  current  developments.  One 
course.  C.  Meyers 

244.  The  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Hellenistic-Roman  Times.  (CZ)  The  study  of 
material  and  epigraphic  remains  as  they  relate  to  Judaism  in  Hellenistic-Roman  times, 
with  special  emphasis  on  Jewish  Art.  C-L:  Judaic  Studies.  One  course.  E.  Meyers 

248.  Theology  of  Karl  Barth.  (CZ)  A  historical  and  critical  study  of  Barth's  theology. 
One  course.  Osborn 

258.  Coptic.  (FL)  Introduction  to  the  Sahidic  dialect  with  selected  readings  from  Chris- 
tian and  Gnostic  texts.  Prerequisite:  one  year  of  Greek  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 

Wintermute 

Religion  (RED        281 


264.  The  Sociology  of  the  Black  Church.  (SS)  An  effort  to  identify,  define,  describe, 
and  interpret  the  black  church.  One  course.  Lincoln 

265.  Religions  of  the  West  Africa  Diaspora.  (CZ)  Religious  development  of  Africans 
displaced  to  the  Western  Hemisphere  by  slavery.  C-L:  Afro-American  Studies  265  and 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Lincoln 

269S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities.  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  283S; 
also  C-L:  English  283S  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Clark,  Orr,  Pope,  Sedgwick,  or 
Tompkins 

280.  The  History  of  the  History  of  Religions.  (CZ)  The  origin  and  history  of  the  com- 
parative study  of  religion,  with  particular  attention  to  its  methodology.  One  course.  Partin 

282.  Myth  and  Ritual.  (CZ)  Myths,  rites,  and  symbols  as  modes  of  religious  expres- 
sion. Interpretation  of  symbolic  configurations  of  kingship,  initiation,  sacrifice,  and  pil- 
grimage in  diverse  cultural  contexts.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Robinson 
and  staff 

283.  Islam  and  Modernism.  (CZ)  Cultural,  religious,  and  ideological  forces  which 
shape  Muslim  responses  to  modernism.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Lawrence 

285.  Introduction  to  the  History  of  Religions.  (CZ)  The  history,  symbols,  rites,  and 
structures  of  the  manifestations  of  the  sacred  in  the  major  religious  traditions  of  the  world. 
One  course.  Staff 

287.  The  Scriptures  of  Asia.  (CZ)  Translations  of  basic  texts  from  the  religious  tradi- 
tions of  India,  China,  and  Japan.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

297.  Philosophical  and  Theological  Discourses  on  Modernity.  (CZ)  Theological 
responses  to  the  intellectual  and  cultural  agendas  set  by  the  Enlightenment.  One  course. 
Surin 

298.  Religious  Pluralism  and  Christian  Theologies.  (CZ)  The  ascription  of  superi- 
ority or  uniqueness  to  particular  religions  within  the  context  of  the  world  religions.  The 
phenomenon  of  religious  pluralism  will  provide  a  thematic  focus  for  this  study.  One 
course.  Sunn 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

71B,  72B.  Freshman-Sophomore  Seminars:  Jewish  and  Christian  Traditions 

99.  Perspectives  in  Archaeology.  (CZ) 

100.  Selected  Studies  in  the  Bible:  Pentateuch.  (CZ) 
107.  Theology  of  the  New  Testament.  (AL) 

124.  Christianity  in  the  United  States.  (CZ) 

147.  Muhammad  and  the  Qur'an.  (CZ) 

160, 161.  Introduction  to  the  Civilizations  of  Southern  Asia.  (CZ) 

166.  The  Professions  and  Society.  (SS) 

281.  Phenomenology  and  Religion.  (CZ) 

284.  The  Religion  and  History  of  Islam.  (CZ) 

288.  Buddhist  Thought  and  Practice.  (CZ) 


282         Courses  of  Instruction 


RELIGION  COURSES  BY  FIELDS 

Introductory  Courses.  Religion  50,  51,  52,  52D,  53,  54,  55,  56,  57,  58,  59,  60. 

African  and  Asian  Religions.  Religion  57,  71  A,  72A,  140, 141,  145, 147,  149, 152, 160, 161, 162, 163, 195A,  196A, 
217,  255,  265,  283,  284,  285,  287 

Jewish  and  Christian  Traditions.  Religion  50,  51,  52,  52D,  55,  71B,  72B,  100, 101, 102, 105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 
111,  115-116, 120, 123, 124, 125,  127, 128, 129, 131D,  132D,  134,  135, 139,  195B,  196B,  207,  208,  220,  221,  226B,  228, 
239,  243,  248,  258. 

Analytic,  Comparative,  and  Constructive  Studies.  Religion  56,  58,  59,  60,  71C,  72C,  99,  138, 142, 143, 144,  148, 
151,  155, 158,  166, 170,  172,  174,  188, 195C,  196C,  212,  233,  238,  264,  280. 

THE  MAJOR 

Major  Requirements.  Eight  courses,  which  must  include  at  least  two  introductory 
courses  (numbered  50  through  60).  The  distribution  of  courses  must  also  include  at  least 
one  each  from  the  categories  African  and  Asian  traditions;  Jewish  and  Christian  tradi- 
tions; and  analytic,  comparative,  and  constructive  studies.  One  of  the  eight  courses  must 
be  a  junior-senior  seminar  or  a  200-level  course. 

The  student,  in  consultation  with  an  assigned  advisor  and  with  the  advisor's  approval, 
should  elect  four  of  the  eight  courses  in  such  a  way  that  they  constitute  a  thematic  or 
methodological  concentration  on  a  particular  aspect  of  religion. 

To  prepare  for  graduate  or  professional  study  of  religion,  the  department  recommends 
that  students  complete  at  least  four  courses  in  college  level  study,  or  the  equivalent,  of 
a  foreign  language.  Master  of  Arts  and  Doctor  of  Philosophy  programs  often  require  ex- 
amination in  one  or  two  foreign  languages.  Students  planning  to  attend  a  theological  semi- 
nary should  note  that  knowledge  of  biblical  languages,  as  well  as  Latin,  frequently  is 
presupposed  or  required.  Those  planning  to  pursue  studies  of  Asian  religions  should 
begin  appropriate  language  study  as  part  of  their  undergraduate  preparation. 

Honors.  The  department  offers  work  leading  to  graduation  with  distinction.  For  fur- 
ther information  consult  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  the  section  on  honors 
in  this  bulletin. 

Romance  Studies  (rs>* 

Professor  Perez  Firmat,  Chairman;  Assistant  Professor  Bell,  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies;  Professors  Fein,  Garci-Gomez,  Jameson,  Mudimbe,  Osuna,  Schor,  Stewart,  Tetel, 
and  Thomas;  Associate  Professors  Bryan,  Caserta,  Kaplan,  and  Orr;  Assistant  Profes- 
sors Farrell,  Finucci,  Ross,  Sieburth,  and  Solterer;  Professors  Emeriti  Cordle,  N.  Dow, 
Fowlie,  Jordan,  and  Wardropper;  Associate  Professors  Emeriti  Ripley  and  Vincent;  As- 
sistant Professors  Emeriti  M.  T.  Dow  and  Miller;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Keinig;  Visit- 
ing Assistant  Professor  Mudimbe-Boyi;  Lecturer  and  Coordinator  of  Language  Instruc- 
tion Tufts 

Majors  in  French  and  Spanish  are  available  in  this  department. 

French  and  Spanish  76,  or  an  Achievement  or  Placement  Test  score  of  600  in  French 
and  630  in  Spanish,  are  the  prerequisites  for  all  courses  over  100  not  taught  in  English. 
Students  who  by  reason  of  foreign  residence  have  had  special  opportunities  in  French 
or  Spanish  must  be  classified  by  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 

The  intensive  language  courses  181  and  182  provide  an  introduction  to  the  language. 
They  are  recommended  for  students  who  wish  to  acquire  proficiency  in  a  second  foreign 
language  before  entering  graduate  school. 

In  literature,  one  credit  is  granted  for  a  score  of  3  or  4  and  two  credits  for  a  score  of 
5  (French  or  Spanish  70,  71)  on  the  examination  of  the  advanced  placement  program .  In 
language,  one  advanced  placement  credit  (French  or  Spanish  76)  is  granted  for  scores  of 
4  and  5. 


"Proposed  title  at  time  the  bulletin  went  to  press. 

Romance  Studies  <RS)        283 


FRENCH  (FR) 

1-2.  Elementary  French.  (FL)  Understanding,  speaking,  reading,  and  writing  French. 
Language  laboratory  for  recording-listening  practice.  Two  courses.  Staff 

12.  Review  of  Elementary  French.  (FL)  Intensive  review  of  first-year  French.  Open 
only  to  students  with  a  placement  or  achievement  score  of  380-440.  May  not  be  taken  for 
credit  by  students  who  have  taken  1-2.  One  course.  Staff 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

63.  Intermediate  French.  (FL)  Grammar  review,  reading,  and  oral  practice,  includ- 
ing laboratory  experience.  Prerequisite:  French  2, 12,  or  Achievement  or  Placement  Test 
score  of  450-540.  One  course.  Staff 

70,  71.  Introduction  to  Literature.  These  numbers  represent  one  or  two  course  credits 
for  advanced  placement  in  literature.  One  course  each. 

76.  Advanced  Intermediate  French.  (FL)  Oral  practice,  reading,  composition.  Prereq- 
uisite: French  63  or  Achievement  or  Placement  Test  score  of  550-590.  One  course.  Staff 

101, 102.  Introduction  to  French  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  An  introduction  to  the  major 
writers  of  the  French  literary  tradition .  Selections  and  complete  works  of  poetry,  fiction, 
theater,  and  essay  101:  Middle  Ages  through  the  eighteenth  century.  102:  nineteenth  and 
twentieth  centuries.  Lectures  and  discussions;  short  essays  and  tests.  Conducted  in 
French.  One  course  each.  Staff 

103S,  104S.  Discussions  of  Readings.  (AL,  FL)  Selected  topics.  Open  only  to  fresh- 
men and  sophomores.  One  course  each.  Staff 

107S.  Contemporary  Ideas.  (CZ,  FL)  Readings  and  discussion  of  French  works  which 
have  provoked  political  or  intellectual  thought  in  recent  years.  For  freshmen  and  sopho- 
mores only.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

108S.  French  Women:  Myths,  Realities,  and  the  Law.  (CZ,  FL)  Influential  women 
writers  of  the  last  forty  years:  Beau  voir,  Duras,  Yourcenar,  Sullerot,  Veil,  Halimi,  and 
others.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Bryan 

110.  Advanced  Grammar  and  Composition.  (FL)  A  systematic  study  of  the  structure 
of  formal  French.  Practice  in  writing.  One  course.  Bryan  or  Hull 

111S.  French  for  Current  Affairs.  (FL)  Problems  and  controversies  in  today's  France. 
Readings,  discussions,  and  exposes.  One  course.  Bryan  or  Keinig  and  staff 

112S.  Special  Topics  in  Advanced  Language.  (FL)  Intensive  work  on  the  vocabulary 
and  usage  of  a  specialized  field.  Readings,  discussions,  and  exposes.  One  course.  Staff 

113S.  French  for  Business  and  Law.  (FL)  An  introduction  to  French  commercial  and 
legal  practices  and  vocabulary.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Bryan 

117.  French  Phonetics.  (FL)  Sounds,  rhythm,  intonation.  Individual  practice  in  lan- 
guage laboratory.  Readings  in  phonetic  theory.  One  course.  Hull 

118.  Advanced  Translation  and  Stylistics.  (FL)  Differences  between  French  and  Eng- 
lish patterns  of  expression.  Levels  of  usage.  Practice  in  translation.  Prerequisite:  French 
110  or  equivalent  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Hull  or  Thomas 

131S.  French  in  the  New  World.  (FL,  SS)  French  and  Creole  in  Canada,  New  England, 
Louisiana,  and  the  Caribbean.  Origins,  history,  linguistic  characteristics,  current  politi- 
cal and  social  issues.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Comparative  Area  Studies,  and  Linguis- 
tics. One  course.  Hull 

284         Courses  of  Instruction 


136S.  Life  in  Eighteenth-Century  France.  (CZ,  FL)  A  course  based  on  period 
documents— books,  memoirs,  newspapers,  scandal  sheets— designed  to  give  a  picture 
of  life  in  a  large  French  city  before  the  modern  era.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One 
course.  Stewart 

137.  Aspects  of  Contemporary  French  Culture.  (CZ,  FL)  Offered  only  as  part  of  sum- 
mer program  in  Paris.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

139.  French  Civilization.  (CZ,  FL)  The  institutions  and  culture  of  France  from  the  Mid- 
dle Ages  to  the  present.  Readings  and  discussions  in  French.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Keinig  or  Tetel 

141S,  142S.  French  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Topics  to  be  announced.  Open  to  juniors  and 
seniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

143.  Aspects  of  French  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Concentration  on  single  authors,  genres, 
movements,  or  themes.  Topics  to  be  announced .  Offered  only  as  part  of  summer  program 
in  Paris.  One  course.  Staff 

145S.  Topics  in  Renaissance  Literature  and  Culture.  (AL,  FL)  Topics  may  include: 
women  writers,  love  and  self-knowledge,  carnival  and  the  grotesque,  in  search  of  Rome, 
text  as  political  and  religious  pamphlet.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One 
course.  Tetel 

146S.  Montaigne  and  Self-Portraiture.  (AL,  FL)  A  reading  of  some  essais  in  the  light 
of  the  self-portrait  in  Renaissance  art.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One 
course.  Tetel 

147.  The  Roots  of  Modernity  in  Seventeenth-Century  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Analysis 
of  form  and  thought  in  selected  works  of  Descartes,  La  Fontaine,  Madame  de  Lafayette, 
Pascal,  La  Rochefoucauld,  and  La  Bruyere.  Emphasis  on  the  innovations  and  lasting  in- 
fluence of  each  author.  One  course.  Farrell 

148.  French  Drama  of  the  Seventeenth  Century.  ( AL,  FL)  The  plays  of  Corneille,  Ra- 
cine, and  Moliere  read  in  conjunction  with  several  twentieth-century  works  to  explore 
dramatic  conventions  and  the  difference  between  tragedy  and  comedy.  C-L:  Drama  126 
and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Farrell 

151.  French  Comedy.  (AL,  FL)  The  theatrical  tradition  of  comedy  and  its  evolution, 
with  emphasis  on  Moliere,  Marivaux,  and  Beaumarchais,  and  other  readings  from  Pathelin 
to  Ionesco.  C-L:  Drama  122.  One  course.  Steicart 

152.  The  Early  French  Novel.  (AL,  FL)  Origins  and  evolution  of  the  novel  in  the  seven- 
teenth and  eighteenth  centuries:  Madame  de  Lafayette,  Marivaux,  Prevost,  Rousseau, 
Diderot,  Laclos,  Sade.  One  course.  Stezoart 

153.  The  French  Enlightenment.  (AL,  FL)  Religion,  politics,  and  philosophic  and  liter- 
ary ideas  of  eighteenth-century  France:  Montesquieu,  Voltaire,  Rousseau,  and  others. 
One  course.  Stewart 

155.  Romanticism  in  French  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Romantic  theory  and  practice;  in- 
cluding Constant,  Chateaubriand,  Lamartine,  Hugo,  Musset,  Vigny,  and  Nerval.  One 
course.  Orr 

156.  The  Age  of  the  Novel.  (AL,  FL)  Flaubert,  Balzac,  and  Stendhal.  One  course.  Bell, 
Orr,  or  Schor 

157.  Difference  and  Representation.  (AL,  FL)  Issues  of  gender  and  representation 
in  nineteenth-century  French  fiction  and  painting.  One  course.  Schor 

158.  Toward  Modernism  in  French  Poetry.  (AL,  FL)  An  introduction  to  modern  trends 
in  the  nineteenth  century;  emergence  from  traditional  romanticism;  art  for  art's  sake  and 

Romance  Studies  (RS)        285 


Parnassians  (Gautier,  Leconte  de  Lisle);  the  transition  from  decadence  to  symbolism 
(Baudelaire,  Verlaine,  Rimbaud,  and  Mallarme).  One  course.  Thomas 

159.  Feminist  Fiction.  (AL,  FL)  Works  by  women  in  the  modern  period,  including 
George  Sand,  Colette,  Simone  de  Beauvoir,  and  others.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One 
course.  Orr 

162.  French  Drama  of  the  Twentieth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  A  survey  of  literature  for  the 
stage  from  1890  to  the  present.  One  play  each  of  Claudel,  Maeterlinck,  Jarry,  Giraudoux, 
Cocteau,  Ghelderode,  Anouilh,  Montherlant,  Sartre,  Camus,  Genet,  Ionesco,  Beckett, 
Pinget,  Vian,  and  Arrabal.  C-L:  Drama  123.  One  course.  Staff 

163.  French  Poetry  of  the  Twentieth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  The  symbolist  heritage  and 
surrealism:  Mallarme,  Apollinaire,  Breton,  Eluard,  Tzara,  and  others.  One  course.  Thomas 

166, 167.  Contemporary  French  Life  and  Thought.  (AL,  FL)  Major  writers  of  the  twen- 
tieth century  and  their  historical  and  cultural  circumstances.  166:  Proust,  Gide  and  the 
Nouvelle  revue /rancaise,  Colette,  Alain-Fournier,  Mauriac  and  the  generation  of  1914;  the 
social  novel  of  the  1930s.  167:  Existentialism  and  Les  Temps  Modernes,  the  New  Novel,  the 
writer-critics,  recent  trends.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  Kaplan 

169.  The  Contemporary  Novel  in  French  Canada.  (AL,  FL)  Major  trends  in  the  nov- 
el since  World  War  II:  social  revolt,  proletarianism,  political  and  religious  liberation,  and 
rejection  of  the  past.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies  and  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 

Keinig  and  staff 

181 .  Intensive  Elementary  French  for  Advanced  Students.  (FL)  Basic  grammar  struc- 
tures in  one  semester;  emphasis  on  oral  work.  Fall  semester  only.  Prerequisite:  four 
semesters  of  another  foreign  language  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

182 .  Intensive  Intermediate  French  for  Advanced  Students.  (FL)  Review  of  basic  gram- 
mar; emphasis  on  reading,  with  some  practice  in  writing.  Prepares  students  to  enroll  in 
courses  at  the  100  level.  Spring  semester  only.  Prerequisite:  French  181  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. One  course.  Staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research .  Open  only  to  qualified 
juniors  by  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each . 
Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
seniors  by  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each . 
Staff 

200S.  Seminar  in  French  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Topics  to  be  announced.  One  course. 
Staff 

210.  The  Structure  of  French.  (FL)  Modern  French  phonology,  morphology,  and  syn- 
tax. Readings  in  current  linguistic  theory.  C-L:  Linguistics.  One  course.  Hull 

211.  History  of  the  French  Language.  (FL)  The  evolution  of  French  from  Latin  to  its 
present  form;  internal  developments  and  external  influences.  C-L:  Linguistics  and  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Hull 

223.  Semiotics  for  Literature.  (AL)  Theoretical  writings  in  general  semiotics  by  Frege, 
Peirce,  Saussure,  Mukarovsky,  and  Morris  and  their  applications  for  textual  analysis  of 
French  literary  works  by  representative  contemporary  critics  such  as  Eco,  Riffaterre,  Corti, 
and  Greimas.  Taught  in  English.  C-L:  Literature  280.  One  course.  Thomas 

248.  French  Literature  of  the  Seventeenth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  The  baroque  and  the  clas- 
sical: form  and  meaning  in  the  plays  of  Corneille,  Racine,  and  Moliere.  Readings  in  ba- 
roque and  precieux  poetry.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Farrell 

286        Courses  of  Instruction 


251, 252.  Literature  of  the  Eighteenth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  Problems  of  literary  history, 
critical  reading,  and  interpretation,  focused  on  varying  topics.  One  course  each.  Stewart 

256.  Modern  Literature  and  History.  (AL,  FL)  The  problems  of  history,  society,  and 
politics  in  literature,  through  the  writings  of  Rousseau,  Tocqueville,  Michelet,  Flaubert, 
Hugo,  Merleau-Ponty,  Fbucault,  and  others.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
On 

258.  The  Narrative  of  Social  Crisis.  (AL,  FL)  Realism  and  naturalism,  with  special 
emphasis  on  Balzac,  Flaubert,  and  Zola.  One  course.  Bell,  Jameson,  On,  or  Schor 

261.  French  Symbolism.  (AL,  FL)  Poetry  and  theories  of  Baudelaire,  Mallarme,  and 
Rimbaud.  Decadence:  Lautreamont  and  Laforgue.  One  course.  Thomas 

266.  French  Literature  of  the  Mid-Twentieth  Century.  (AL,  FL)  Emphasis  on  Malraux, 
Sartre,  Camus,  and  the  nouveau  roman.  One  course.  Jameson 

267.  Contemporary  French  Novel.  (AL,  FL)  A  chronological  and  theoretical  approach 
to  the  major  writers  and  movements  since  1970.  Selections  from  Duras,  LeClezio, 
Sallenave,  Modiano,  Sollers,  Tournier,  Oulipo,  Yourcenar,  and  others.  One  course.  Kaplan, 
On,  or  Thomas 

290S.  Studies  in  a  Contemporary  Figure.  (AL,  FL)  A  writer,  philosopher,  critic,  or 
artist.  One  course.  Staff 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

114.  Language  and  Civilization  of  Quebec.  (CZ,  FL) 

120.  Language,  Computers,  and  Formal  Intelligence.  (SS) 

122.  The  French  Film.  (AL,  FL) 

132.  Literature  and  History  of  Quebec.  (AL,  FL) 

170.  Film  and  the  French  Novel.  (AL,  FL) 

255.  French  Preromantic  and  Romantic  Poetry.  (AL,  FL) 

257.  Problems  of  Identity  in  the  Nineteenth-Century  Novel.  (AL,  FL) 

263.  Contemporary  French  Theater.  (AL,  FL) 

264.  Contemporary  French  Poetry.  (AL,  FL) 

265.  French  Literature  of  the  Early  Twentieth  Century.  (AL,  FL) 

ITALIAN  (IT) 

1-2.  Elementary  Italian.  (FL)  Understanding,  speaking,  reading,  and  writing  Italian. 
Language  laboratory  available  for  recording-listening  practice.  Two  courses.  Staff 

63.  Intermediate  Italian.  (FL)  Grammar  review,  reading,  oral  practice  including  labora- 
tory experience.  One  course.  Staff 

76.  Advanced  Intermediate  Italian.  (FL)  Oral  practice,  reading,  and  composition. 
Prerequisite :  Italian  63  or  Achievement  or  Placement  Test  score  of  550-590.  One  course. 
Finucci  or  staff 

101.  Writers  of  the  Middle  Ages  and  Quattrocento.  (AL,  FL)  Readings  from  Dante, 
Petrarch,  Boccaccio,  and  the  Humanists.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One 
course.  Caserta  or  Finucci 


Romance  Studies  (RS)         287 


102.  Writers  from  the  Renaissance  to  Preromanticism.  (AL,  FL)  Readings  from 
Machiavelli,  Ariosto,  Tasso,  Marino,  Goldoni,  Parini,  Alfieri,  and  others.  C-L:  Medieval 
and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Caserta  or  Finucci 

103.  Italian  Poetry  and  Prose  of  the  Nineteenth  Century.  ( AL,  FL)  Works  by  Foscolo, 
Manzoni,  Leopardi,  Verga,  and  others.  One  course.  Caserta  or  Finucci 

105.  Italian  Women  Writers.  (AL,  FL)  Representative  works  by  women  from  the 
Middle  Ages  to  the  modern  period.  Caterina  da  Siena,  Colonna,  Stampa,  Aleramo, 
Deledda,  Morante,  and  others.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Finucci 

111.  Advanced  Spoken  Italian.  (FL)  Intensive  instruction  in  Italian  using  selected 
topics,  readings,  and  films  to  build  vocabulary  and  to  provide  practice  in  oral  communi- 
cation. Prerequisite:  successful  completion  of  Italian  63,  76,  or  182  or  achievement  or  place- 
ment test  score  of  600.  One  course.  Caserta  or  Finucci 

121.  Aspects  of  Italian  Culture.  (CZ)  Offered  only  as  part  of  the  summer  program 
in  Italy.  Taught  in  English.  One  course.  Staff 

145S.  Topics  in  Renaissance  Literature  and  Culture.  (AL,  FL)  Topics  may  include: 
epic  women  writers,  treatises,  Petrarchism.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One 
course.  Finucci 

181.  Intensive  Italian.  (FL)  An  introduction  to  the  language.  Prerequisite:  four 
semesters  of  another  foreign  language  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Caserta 

182.  Intensive  Italian.  (FL)  Readings  in  modern  literature:  analysis  and  discussion. 
Prerequisite:  Italian  181  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Caserta 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
juniors  by  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each. 
Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
seniors  by  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each. 
Staff 

283.  Italian  Novel  of  the  Novecento.  (AL,  FL)  Representative  novelists  from  Svevo 
to  the  most  recent  writers.  One  course.  Caserta 

284,  285.  Dante.  (AL,  FL)  284:  La  Vita  Nuova  and  a  close  reading  of  the  Inferno.  285: 
The  Purgatorio  and  the  Paradiso  in  the  light  of  Dante's  cultural  world.  Special  attention  will 
be  given  to  the  poetic  significance  of  the  Commedia.  Reading  in  Italian  or  English.  Prereq- 
uisite: for  285,  Italian  284  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One 
course  each.  Caserta 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

137.  The  Italian  Cinema.  (AL,  FL) 

PORTUGUESE  (PTG) 

181.  Brazilian  Portuguese.  (FL)  An  intensive  introduction  to  the  language.  Prereq- 
uisite: four  semesters  of  another  foreign  language  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

182.  Topics  in  Portuguese  and  Brazilian  Literature  and  Culture.  (FL)  Grammar  re- 
view, readings,  and  discussion.  Focus  on  twentieth-century  Luso-African,  Portuguese, 
and  Brazilian  writers.  Prerequisite:  Portuguese  181  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

191, 192, 193, 194.  Independent  Study  One  course  each.  Staff 
288         Courses  of  Instruction 


SPANISH  (SP) 

1-2.  Elementary  Spanish.  (FL)  Understanding,  speaking,  reading,  and  writing  Span- 
ish. Language  laboratory  available  for  recording-listening  practice.  Two  courses.  Staff 

12.  Review  of  Elementary  Spanish.  (FL)  Intensive  review  of  first-year  Spanish.  Open 
only  to  students  with  a  placement  or  achievement  score  of  430-490.  May  not  be  taken  for 
credit  by  students  who  have  taken  1-2.  One  course.  Staff 

14.  Intensive  Elementary  Spanish.  (FL)  Offered  only  in  the  Duke-in-Spain  program. 
Two  courses.  Staff 

63.  Intermediate  Spanish.  (FL)  Grammar  review,  reading,  and  oral  practice,  includ- 
ing laboratory  experience.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  2, 12,  or  Achievement  or  Placement  Test 
score  of  500-570.  One  course.  Staff 

70, 71.  Introduction  to  Literature.  These  numbers  represent  one  or  two  course  credits 
for  advanced  placement  in  literature.  One  course  each. 

76.  Advanced  Intermediate  Spanish.  (FL)  Oral  practice,  reading,  composition.  Prereq- 
uisite :  Spanish  63  or  Achievement  or  Placement  Test  score  of  580-620.  One  course.  Staff 

100S.  Introduction  to  Literary  Analysis.  (AL,  FL)  How  to  approach  different  genres 
in  literature.  Narrative,  poetry,  drama,  and  essay.  Texts  drawn  from  different  periods  of 
Spanish  or  Spanish-American  literature.  One  course.  Ross 

101, 102.  Introduction  to  Spanish  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Major  writers  of  the  Spanish 
literary  tradition.  Poetry,  fiction,  theater,  and  essay.  101 :  Middle  Ages  through  the  seven- 
teenth century.  102:  eighteenth,  nineteenth,  and  twentieth  centuries.  One  course  each. 

Garci-Gbmez,  Osuna,  and  staff 

103S,  104S.  Discussion  of  Readings.  (AL,  FL)  Selected  topics.  Open  only  to  fresh- 
men and  sophomores.  One  course  each.  Staff 

105, 106.  Introduction  to  Spanish-American  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  A  survey  of  major 
writers  and  movements  from  the  period  of  discovery  to  the  present  day.  105:  the  periods 
of  conquest,  colonial  rule,  and  early  independence.  Includes  works  by  native  Indian,  mes- 
tizo, and  women  writers.  106:  from  Modernismo  to  the  contemporary  period.  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  Fein  or  Ross 

107S.  Spanish-American  Short  Fiction.  (AL,  FL)  Novelettes  and  short  stories  of  the 
twentieth  century:  Borges,  Cortazar,  Denevi,  Donoso,  Garcia  Marquez,  and  others. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Fein 

109S.  Contemporary  Hispanic  Ideas.  (CZ,  FL)  Readings  in  twentieth-century  Spanish 
and  Spanish-American  nonfiction.  Open  only  to  freshmen  and  sophomores.  One  course. 
Perez  Firmat 

110.  Spoken  Spanish.  (FL)  Study  of  colloquial  Spanish,  practice  in  pronunciation  and 
conversation,  emphasis  on  oral  communication.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  76  or  consent  of 
instructor.  One  course.  Garci-Gbmez  and  staff 

111.  Written  Spanish.  (FL)  Grammatical  problems  in  composition  and  translations; 
introduction  to  the  techniques  of  literary  and  professional  styles.  One  course.  Perez  Firmat 
and  staff 

114S.  Spanish  Language:  Peninsular  or  American.  (FL)  Topics  to  be  announced .  One 
course.  Staff 

119S.  Structure  of  Spanish.  (FL)  A  systematic  study  of  modern  Spanish  morpholo- 
gy and  syntax  with  some  readings  in  current  linguistic  theory.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  110 
or  111.  C-L:  Linguistics.  One  course.  Staff 

Romance  Studies  (RS)        289 


121.  Latin-American  Literature  in  Translation.  (AL)  Fictional  and  poetic  works  of  the 
last  thirty  years  that  have  made  an  impact  on  world  literature.  Taught  in  English .  C-L:  Com- 
parative Area  Studies  and  Literature  129.  One  course.  Fein 

131.  Topics  of  Hispanic  Civilization.  (CZ,  FL)  A  humanistic  study  of  Spain  or  Span- 
ish America  through  history,  culture,  people,  and  institutions.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

137.  Aspects  of  Contemporary  Spanish  Culture.  (CZ,  FL)  Offered  only  as  part  of  the 
summer  program  in  Spain.  One  course.  Garci-Gbmez 

138S.  The  Spanish  Civil  War  in  History  and  Literature.  ( AL,  FL)  An  examination  of 
the  Spanish  Civil  War  of  1936-39  through  literary  and  historical  readings,  and  through 
its  representation  in  art,  music,  and  film.  One  course.  Sieburth 

141S,  142S.  Spanish  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Topics  to  be  announced.  Open  to  juniors 
and  seniors.  One  course  each.  Staff 

143S.  Literature  of  the  Discovery  and  Conquest  of  America.  (AL,  FL)  Prose  and  po- 
etry from  the  sixteenth  through  eighteenth  centuries,  exploring  the  idea  of  the  New  World 
from  conquest  to  independence.  One  course.  Ross 

144S.  Spanish-American  Literature  of  Identity.  (AL,  FL)  Exploration  of  the  concepts 
of  lo  criollo  or  lo  americano,  essentially  through  the  analysis  of  texts  by  Arrivi,  Carpentier, 
Neruda,  Paz,  and  others.  One  course.  Perez  Firmat 

145S.  Literature  of  the  Hispanic  Minorities  of  the  United  States.  (AL,  FL)  Represen- 
tative Spanish-language  works  by  Puerto  Rican,  Cuban-American  and  Chicano  writers. 
One  course.  Perez  Firmat 

146.  The  Spanish-American  Novel.  (AL,  FL)  Masterworks  of  the  twentieth  century. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Fein 

151 .  Spanish  Literature  of  the  Renaissance  and  the  Baroque.  ( AL,  FL)  Selected  works 
of  the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries  with  attention  to  their  reflection  of  social,  re- 
ligious, and  political  ideas.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Ross  or 

Wardropper 

153.  Golden  Age  Literature:  Cervantes.  (AL,  FL)  Emphasis  on  the  Quijote.  C-L:  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

163.  The  Generation  of  1898.  ( AL,  FL)  Selected  works  by  Unamuno,  Baroja,  Azorin, 
Valle-Inclan,  and  Machado.  One  course.  Osuna 

165S.  Major  Spanish  Authors.  (AL,  FL)  Textual  studies;  methods  of  literary  interpre- 
tation and  criticism.  One  course.  Wardropper 

166.  Nineteenth-Century  Prose  Fiction.  ( AL,  FL)  Major  forms  in  Spain  and  Spanish 
America:  Clarin,  Blest-Gana,  Cambaceres,  Galdos,  and  others.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Perez  Firmat  or  Sieburth 

171.  Literature  of  Contemporary  Spain.  (AL,  FL)  A  sociological  approach  to  the  novel, 
theater,  and  poetry:  Goytisolo,  Buero  Vallejo,  Sastre,  Arrabal,  Celaya,  and  Otero.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Osuna 

181.  Intensive  Elementary  Spanish  for  Advanced  Students.  (FL)  Basic  grammar  struc- 
tures in  one  semester;  emphasis  on  oral  work.  Fall  semester  only.  Prerequisite:  four 
semesters  of  another  foreign  language  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

182.  Intensive  Intermediate  Spanish  for  Advanced  Students.  (FL)  Review  of  basic 
grammar;  emphasis  on  reading,  with  some  practice  in  writing.  Prepares  students  to  en- 
roll in  courses  at  the  100  level.  Spring  semester  only.  Prerequisite:  Spanish  181  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

290        Courses  of  Instruction 


191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
juniors  by  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each . 
Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research .  Open  only  to  qualified 
seniors  by  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each . 

Staff 

200S.  Seminar  in  Spanish  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Topics  to  be  announced.  One  course. 

Staff 

210.  History  of  the  Spanish  Language.  (FL)  Formation  and  development.  Internal 
forces  and  external  contributions.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Linguistics,  and  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Garci-Gbmez 

241.  Colonial  Prose  of  Spanish  America.  (AL,  FL)  Narrative  forms  written  in  Span- 
ish America  during  the  sixteenth,  seventeenth,  and  eighteenth  centuries.  One  course.  Ross 

245.  Modern  Spanish-American  Poetry.  (AL,  FL)  From  modernismo  to  the  present. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Fein 

246.  Modern  Spanish-American  Fiction.  ( AL,  FL)  Twentieth-century  novels  and  short 
stories  by  Borges,  Carpentier,  Cortazar,  Gallegos,  Garcia  Marquez,  Quiroga,  and  others. 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Perez  Firmat 

248.  Studies  in  Spanish-American  Literature.  (AL,  FL)  Concentration  on  single 
authors,  genres,  movements,  or  themes.  One  course.  Staff 

251.  The  Origins  of  Spanish  Prose  Fiction.  (AL,  FL)  Selected  examples  of  the  romance 
and  the  novel:  Amadis  de  Gaula,  Diego  de  San  Pedro's  La  Carcel  de  amor,  the  Abencerraje, 
the  Lazarillo,  Montemayor's  Diana.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course. 
Wardropper 

254.  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age.  (AL,  FL)  The  chief  Spanish  dramatists  of  the  seven- 
teenth century  with  readings  of  representative  plays  of  this  period.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  One  course.  Wardropper 

258S.  Spanish  Lyric  Poetry  before  1700.  (AL,  FL)  Selected  poems  of  the  Middle  Ages, 
Renaissance,  and  baroque.  Special  emphasis  on  the  Razbn  de  amor,  la  poesia  de  tipo  tradi- 
cional,  and  Santillana;  on  Garcilaso,  San  Juan  de  la  Cruz,  Fray  Luis  de  Leon,  and  Her- 
rera;  on  Gongora  and  Quevedo.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  One  course. 

Wardropper 

262.  The  Romantic  Movement.  (AL,  FL)  Principal  manifestations  of  romanticism  in 
Hispanic  literature;  poetry  (Becquer,  Espronceda,  Rosalia  de  Castro),  drama  (Rivas, 
Zorilla),  and  the  novel  (Isaacs,  Marmol).  One  course.  Perez  Firmat 

266.  Nineteenth-Century  Prose  Fiction.  (AL,  FL)  Readings  by  novelists  such  as  Valera, 
Galdos,  Alas,  and  Pardo  Bazan  in  the  light  of  current  critical  theory.  One  course.  Siebu  rth 

275.  Modern  Spanish  Poetry.  (AL,  FL)  Juan  Ramon  Jimenez,  Unamuno,  Antonio 
Machado,  the  Generation  of  1927,  and  the  contemporary  poets.  One  course.  Osuna 

276.  Modern  Spanish  Drama.  (AL,  FL)  The  theater  of  Benavente,  Valle-Inclan,  Lorca, 
Casona,  Buero  Vallejo,  Sastre,  and  Arrabal.  One  course.  Osuna 

277.  Modern  Spanish  Novel.  'AL,  FL)  From  the  Generation  of  1898  to  the  present. 
One  course.  Osuna 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

108S.  Spanish  Traditional  Poetry.  (AL,  FL) 

Romance  Studies  (RS)         291 


117S.  Advanced  Grammar.  (FL) 

118S.  Translation  from  and  into  Spanish.  (FL) 

133S.  Spanish-American  Civilization.  (CZ,  FL) 

169.  Topics  in  Nineteenth-  and  Twentieth-Century  Spanish  Literature.  (AL,  FL) 

242.  Colonial  Poetry  and  Theater  of  Spanish  America.  (AL,  FL) 

253.  Cervantes.  (AL,  FL) 

ROMANCE  STUDIES  (RS) 

218.  The  Teaching  of  Romance  Languages.  Evaluation  of  objectives  and  methods; 
practical  problems  of  language  teaching  at  the  elementary,  secondary,  and  college  lev- 
els; analysis  of  textbooks,  tests,  and  audiovisual  aids.  Taught  in  English.  One  course.  Tufts 

THE  MAJOR  IN  FRENCH  OR  SPANISH 

Prerequisite.  French  or  Spanish  74  or  76  or  equivalents. 

Major  Requirements.  French:  A  total  of  eight  courses  numbered  100  or  above.  These  must 
include  101, 102,  and  at  least  three  courses  above  140.  Spanish :  A  total  of  eight  courses  num- 
bered 100  or  above.  These  must  include  two  of  the  following:  101,  102,  105,  106;  and  at 
least  three  courses  above  140.  Courses  numbered  120  through  129  (French  and  Spanish) 
are  taught  in  English  and  do  not  count  toward  the  major. 

Study  Abroad.  Students  are  strongly  urged  to  study  abroad,  since  this  is  the  best  way 
to  achieve  language  proficiency  and  to  acquire  an  intimate  knowledge  of  a  country's  cul- 
ture. A  maximum  of  two  courses  per  semester,  or  one  per  summer,  may  be  counted  to- 
ward the  major.  (The  summer  course  restriction  does  not  apply  to  Duke-sponsored 
programs.) 

Suggested  Work  in  Related  Disciplines.  In  order  to  give  perspective  to  a  student's  pro- 
gram, majors  in  French  or  Spanish  will  normally  select,  with  the  approval  of  the  major 
advisor,  appropriate  courses  from  such  fields  as:  (1)  other  languages  and  literatures;  (2) 
history;  (3)  philosophy;  (4)  music  and  art;  and  (5)  linguistics. 

OPTION  FRANCAIS 

Option  Francais  is  an  offering  of  courses  taught  in  French .  Unlike  the  French  courses 
offered  by  the  Department  of  Romance  Languages,  however,  in  which  language  or  liter- 
ature is  the  essential  subject  matter,  these  are  courses  in  various  departments  where 
French  is  simply  the  medium  of  instruction.  Prerequisite:  French  SAT  score  of  600  (or  the 
same  score  on  the  Placement  Test),  a  score  of  3  on  the  Advanced  Placement  Test  in  French, 
or  prior  completion  of  a  French  course  numbered  above  70. 

Art  136:  Gothic  Cathedrals.  Bruzelius 

History  23:  Europe  to  the  Eighteenth  Century.  VWff 

Music  119:  The  Humanities  and  Music.  Bartlet,  Higgins,  or  Seebass 

Music  125:  Masterworks  of  Music.  Seebass 

Sociology  24S:  Paris  and  Montreal  in  1900  and  1968.  Tiryakian 

These  courses  appear  also  in  the  listings  of  the  several  departments.  They  meet  dis- 
tributional and  Field  of  Knowledge  requirements  as  these  are  specified  elsewhere  in  the 
undergraduate  bulletin.  They  do  not  meet  requirements  for  the  major  in  French. 

Russian 

For  courses  ir.  Russian,  see  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures. 


292        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values  Program 

Professor  Vesilind,  Director 

A  certificate,  but  not  a  major,  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  Program  in  Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values  offers  students  the  oppor- 
tunity to  develop  a  comprehensive  view  of  science,  medicine,  or  technology  in  social, 
historical,  and  ethical  terms.  Although  a  major  is  not  available  in  this  program,  the  course 
of  study  will  enrich  the  u  nderstanding  of  one's  profession  for  the  future  scientist,  physi- 
cian, or  engineer  and  will  broaden  the  appreciation  of  activities  in  these  areas  for  others. 

COURSE  OF  STUDY 

Duke  courses  pertinent  to  the  program  are  classified  according  to  their  approach:  ethi- 
cal, analytical  (historical,  philosophical,  or  sociological),  or  policy-centered.  Each  student 
entering  the  program  designates,  for  purposes  of  advising,  an  area  of  primary  interest 
and  then  selects  a  program  of  five  courses  (four  for  engineering  majors)  covering  all  three 
approaches.  Individual  programs,  selected  from  more  than  fifty  courses,  are  tailored  to 
each  student's  interests. 

Students  in  the  program  focus  their  course  work  and  individual  interests  through 
a  year-long  interdisciplinary  seminar  offered  in  the  senior  year  (Interdisciplinary  Course 
107S,  108S).  A  seminar  consisting  of  six  varied  topics  in  science  and  the  humanities  is 
offered  as  a  course  for  undergraduates  (Interdisciplinary  Course  112S,  113S). 

Full  details  concerning  the  program  and  courses  in  science,  technology,  and  human 
values  may  be  obtained  by  writing  or  calling  the  Director. 

ELIGIBILITY  AND  CERTIFICATION 

Students  normally  apply  to  the  program  at  any  time  before  the  end  of  their  junior 
year.  On  the  basis  of  the  expressed  area  of  primary  interest,  each  student  is  assigned  a 
faculty  advisor  from  the  program  steering  committee,  with  whom  he  or  she  designs  a  pro- 
gram to  suit  his  or  her  particular  interests.  To  students  who  complete  the  program,  Duke 
University  gives  official  recognition  of  their  participation. 

Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 

Associate  Professor  Lahusen,  Chairman;  Assistant  Professor  Pugh,  Director  of  Undergradu- 
ate Studies;  Assistant  Professor  Andrews,  Supervisor  of  Language  Instruction;  Professor 
Emeritus  Krynski;  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  Jezierski;  Visiting  Assistant  Professor 
Van  Tuyl;  Lecturer  Flath 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

RUSSIAN  (RUS) 

1-2.  Elementary  Russian.  (FL)  Introduction  to  understanding,  speaking,  reading,  and 
writing.  Audiolingual  techniques  are  combined  with  required  recording-listening  prac- 
tice in  the  language  laboratory.  Two  courses.  Staff 

3.  Introduction  to  Russian  Conversation.  (FL)  Beginning  conversation  class:  emphasis 
on  everyday  use  of  constructions  that  present  particular  difficulties  for  learners  of  Rus- 
sian. Taught  in  Russian  in  the  U.S.S.R.  Prerequisites:  Russian  1  and  2,  or  equivalent.  One 
course.  Staff 

14.  Intensive  Russian.  (FL)  Russian  1  and  2  combined  in  one  course.  Two  meetings 
daily,  as  well  as  daily  computer  and  language  laboratory  work.  One  course.  Staff 

63, 64.  Intermediate  Russian.  (FL)  Intensive  classroom  and  laboratory  practice  in  spo- 
ken and  written  patterns.  Reading  in  contemporary  literature.  Prerequisites:  Russian  1 
and  2,  or  two  years  of  high  school  Russian.  One  course  each.  Staff 

Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures        293 


65.  Intermediate  Conversation  and  Composition.  (FL)  Consolidation  of  grammati- 
cal skills.  Intensive  conversation  on  current  topics  of  interest  to  students  of  the  U.S.S.R. 
Development  of  writing  skills.  Taught  in  Russian  in  the  U.S.S.R.  Prerequisites:  Russian 
63  and  64,  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

66,  67.  Russian  Conversation.  (FL)  Consolidation  of  oral  skills.  Intensive  conversa- 
tion on  a  broad  range  of  topics.  Prerequisites:  Russian  1  and  2,  or  equivalent.  Half  course 
each.  Staff 

91S,  92S.  Advanced  Russian  Conversation  and  Readings.  (FL)  Nineteenth-  and 
twentieth-century  literature  in  the  original.  Conducted  in  Russian.  Prerequisites:  for  91S, 
Russian  63  and  64,  or  equivalent;  for  92S,  Russian  91S.  One  course  each.  Staff 

93.  Issues  in  Contemporary  Standard  Russian.  (FL)  The  Russian  language  in  Soviet 
society:  different  writing  styles;  dialects  in  comparison  with  standard  Russian;  sociological 
implications.  Taught  in  Russian  in  the  U.S.S.R.  Prerequisites:  Russian  91S  and  92S,  or 
equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

100.  Studies  in  Russian  Culture.  (CZ)  Introduction  to  the  culture  and  political  sys- 
tem of  the  U.S.S.R.  (Taught  in  the  U.S.S.R.  in  Russian  or  English  depending  on  placement.) 
C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Andrews 

119.  Topics  in  Eastern  and  Northern  European  Languages.  ( AL)  Introduction  to  one 
of  the  following  languages:  Bulgarian,  Finnish,  Serbo-Croatian,  or  Ukrainian.  One  year 
of  a  foreign  language  recommended.  C-L:  Linguistics.  One  course.  Pugh 

124.  Masters  of  Russian  Short  Fiction.  (AL)  Pushkin,  Gogol,  Turgenev,  Tolstoy, 
Dostoevsky,  Chekhov,  Babel,  and  others.  Taught  in  English.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

150.  The  Languages  of  the  Soviet  Union.  (FL)  Structural  survey  of  the  various  lan- 
guage families  represented  in  the  U.S.S.R.,  with  special  emphasis  on  national  language 
policy  in  that  country,  bilingualism,  and  language  contact.  Taught  in  English.  One  course. 
Pugh 

161, 162.  Introduction  to  the  Russian  Novel.  (AL)  Outstanding  works.  161:  Lermon- 
tov,  Gogol,  Turgenev,  Goncharov,  and  Tolstoy.  162:  Dostoevsky,  Bely,  Sologub,  Bunin, 
and  Gorky.  Taught  in  English.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

175.  Tolstoy.  (AL)  Introduction  to  life  and  works,  including:  War  and  Peace,  Anna 
Karenina,  the  shorter  fiction,  dramatic  works,  and  essays.  Tolstoy's  impact  on  the  litera- 
ture and  thought  of  today,  in  and  outside  of  Russia.  Taught  in  English.  C-L:  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

176.  Dostoevsky.  (AL)  Introduction  to  life  and  works.  Emphasis  on  his  relevance  to 
today's  world.  Readings  include:  Crime  and  Punishment,  The  Idiot,  and  The  Brothers 
Karamazov.  Historical  overview  of  critical  reaction  in  Russia  and  abroad.  Taught  in  Eng- 
lish. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

180, 181.  Twentieth-Century  Russian  Literature.  (AL)  A  survey  of  Russian  prose,  po- 
etry, and  plays  by  representative  authors  from  Blok  to  Nabokov.  Attention  to  nonconform- 
ist and  emigre  writers.  Taught  in  English.  One  course  each.  Staff 

185S.  Introduction  to  Slavic  Linguistics.  (FL)  Basic  introduction  to  linguistic  termi- 
nology; emphasis  on  synchronic  linguistic  theory  in  the  East,  West,  and  South  Slavic 
areas.  Phonological,  morphological,  and  syntactic  structure  of  contemporary  standard 
Russian.  Readings  in  English  and  Russian.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Linguis- 
tics. One  course.  Andrews 

186S.  History  of  the  Russian  Language.  (FL)  The  development  of  the  Russian  lan- 
guage from  the  eleventh  century,  with  consideration  of  the  origins  of  modern  literary  and 

294        Courses  of  Instruction 


dialectal  features.  Readings  in  Russian.  Prerequisite:  second  year  Russian  or  consent  of 
instructor.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Linguistics.  One  course.  Pugh 

190.  The  Social  History  of  Russian  Literature  1689-1917.  (CZ)  An  inquiry  into  the  so- 
cial context  of  the  Russian  writer  and  the  creative  act.  The  history  of  books,  publishing, 
and  the  changing  role  of  writers  in  Imperial  Russia .  Taught  in  English .  One  course.  Pelech 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Open  only  to  qualified 
students  by  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  for  qualified  seniors. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

195.  Advanced  Russian.  (FL)  Review  of  grammar  with  an  emphasis  on  the  refinement 
of  oral  and  written  language  skills.  Prerequisite:  Russian  92  or  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  Staff 

196.  Readings  in  Modern  Russian.  (FL)  An  intensive  reading  and  conversation  course 
based  on  contemporary  Russian  literary  and  Soviet  press  texts,  emphasizing  problems 
in  Russian-English  and  English-Russian  translation.  Prerequisite:  Russian  195  or  consent 
of  instructor.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

197.  Syntax.  (FL)  Application  of  advanced  syntactic  structures  to  speech  situations 
and  written  Russian.  Taught  in  Russian  in  the  U.S.S.R.  Prerequisites:  Russian  195  and 
196,  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Staff 

198, 199.  Russian  Stylistics  and  Conversation.  (FL)  Refinement  of  stylistic  control  and 
range  in  spoken  and  written  Russian .  Emphasis  on  fluent  discursive  skills,  as  well  as  de- 
velopment of  expository  prose  style.  Prerequisites:  Russian  91S  and  92S,  or  equivalent. 
Half  course  each.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

205.  Semiotics  and  Linguistics.  A  survey  of  modern  semiotics,  particularly  the  works 
of  C.  S.  Peirce  and  Umberto  Eco.  Semiotic  works  directly  related  to  modern  linguistic 
thought  and  linguistic  sign  theory.  Emphasis  on  the  interdisciplinary  aspects  of  semiot- 
ic theory.  C-L:  English  205.  One  course.  Andreios 

225.  Tolstoy.  (AL)  War  and  Peace  and  other  works.  Prerequisite:  Russian  175  or  equiva- 
lent. C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

232.  Dostoevsky.  (AL)  Emphasis  on  The  Brothers  Karamazov  and  the  theory  of  the  novel . 
Prerequisite:  Russian  176  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

250.  Russian  Literary  Criticism  from  Lomonosov  to  Lotman.  (AL)  Russian  literary 
criticism  from  its  beginning  with  Mikhail  Lomonosov  to  its  most  eminent  living  practi- 
tioner, Iurii  Lotman.  Some  major  figures  treated  are  Lomonosov,  Karamzin,  Belinskii, 
Chernyshevskii,  Dobroliubov,  Pisarev,  Mikhailovskii,  Shklovskii,  Bakhtin,  Jakobson, 
Lotman.  Taught  in  English.  One  course.  Pelech 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

183.  Slavic  Drama  and  Theater  of  the  Twentieth  Century.  (AL) 
201,  202.  Russian  Novel  of  the  Nineteenth  Century.  (AL) 

POLISH  (POL) 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 
11.  Beginning  Polish.  (FL) 

Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures        295 


12.  Intermediate  Polish.  (FL) 

174.  The  Poles:  Literature  and  Society,  1940-1980.  (AL) 

THE  MAJOR 

Prerequisites.  Russian  1-2  and  63,  64  or  equivalent. 

Major  Requirements.  A  minimum  of  eight  courses  in  the  department.  All  majors  must 
take  the  following  courses:  Russian  91,  92,  195,  196,  plus  four  courses  in  literature. 

Students  contemplating  graduate  work  may  elect  a  more  intensive  program  consisting 
of  ten  courses.  An  in-depth  knowledge  of  Russian  literature  or  some  knowledge  of  Pol- 
ish language  and/or  literature  will  facilitate  admission  to  graduate  school  and  subsequent 
study  in  the  field. 

Sociology  (soo 

Professor  Land,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Wilson,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Professors  Back,  George  (Psychiatry  and  Aging  Center),  Kerckhoff,  Maddox,  Myers, 
O'Barr  (Cultural  Anthropology),  Simpson,  Smith,  and  Tiryakian;  Associate  Professors 
DiPrete,  Gereffi,  O'Rand,  and  Spenner;  Assistant  Professor  Janoski;  Professor  Emeritus 
Preiss;  Adjunct  Professors  Manton  (Demographic  Studies)  and  Palmore  (Psychiatry  and 
Aging  Center);  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Romanelli  (Fuqua  School  of  Business);  Lec- 
turer Williams 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Sociology  combines  an  appreciation  of  human  beings'  capacity  for  self-realization 
with  a  scientific  understanding  of  the  causes  and  consequences  of  their  social  behavior. 
Each  course  aims  to  develop  both  the  analytical  and  critical  skills  necessary  for  under- 
standing and  evaluating  social  institutions  and  social  change.  Emphasis  is  upon  contem- 
porary research  and  the  use  of  sociological  data  in  tackling  social  problems.  Active  involve- 
ment in  the  learning  process  is  fostered  through  seminars,  independent  study,  honors 
work,  and  internships. 

10D.  Introduction  to  Sociology.  (SS)  Structure  and  dynamics  of  groups,  organiza- 
tions, and  institutions;  social  behavior  over  the  life  cycle;  social  control  and  deviance; 
population  and  social  ecology;  formation  and  change  of  societies.  Two  lectures  and  one 
discussion  section.  One  course.  Janoski,  Simpson,  or  Tiryakian 

11.  Contemporary  Social  Problems.  (SS)  A  survey  of  approaches  to  the  study  of  cur- 
rent social  problems  and  social  trends.  Sexism,  racism,  age  discrimination;  job  displace- 
ment by  technological  change;  social  consequences  of  environmental  pollution;  unem- 
ployment and  poverty;  interpersonal  problems  associated  with  changes  in  family 
structures;  maldistribution  of  health  care  and  educational  opportunities;  deviance.  One 
course.  Land 

Social  Issues  of  Contemporary  Society.  Topics  vary  from  semester  to  semester.  One 
course  each.  Staff 

20S.  Individual  and  Society.  (SS)  One  course. 

21S.  American  Demographics.  (SS)  One  course. 

22S.  The  Third  World.  (SS)  One  course. 

23S.  Social  Organization.  (SS)  One  course. 

24S.  Social  History.  (SS)  One  course. 

25S.  Deviance.  (SS)  One  course. 

49S.  Freshman  Seminar.  Topics  vary  each  semester  offered.  One  course.  Staff 

296        Courses  of  hist  ruction 


101.  Contemporary  American  Society.  (SS)  Social  trends  and  social  problems  and 
their  effects  on  individuals  and  society.  Urbanization;  bureaucracy;  distribution  of  wealth, 
income,  and  power;  status  of  minorities.  One  course.  Kerckhoff 

106.  Social  Psychology.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Psychology  116;  also  C-L:  Women's  Studies. 
One  course.  Costanzo  or  George 

110.  Comparative  Sociology.  (SS)  Comparative  sociological  studies  focusing  on  di- 
verse societies  of  the  world.  Topics  include  population  and  migration,  social  stratifica- 
tion, the  organization  of  work,  urban  forms,  law  and  social  control,  the  family,  develop- 
ment and  global  interdependence,  culture  and  communication.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies.  One  course.  Gereffi,  Myers,  Smith,  or  Tiryakian 

111.  Inequality  in  America.  (SS)  Differences  in  social  position  in  the  United  States 
as  they  relate  to  income,  prestige,  and  power.  Primary  focus  on  the  process  of  achieve- 
ment, including  level  of  education  and  occupational  position,  while  controlling  for  race, 
sex,  and  age.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Kerckhoff  or  O'Rand 

112.  American  Demographics.  (SS)  Examination  of  trends  in  the  fertility,  migration, 
geographic  distribution,  and  composition  of  the  United  States  population.  Consequences 
for  lifestyles,  social  trends,  consumer  markets,  health  care,  and  public  policy.  One  course. 
Land  or  Myers 

116.  Race  and  Ethnic  Relations.  (SS)  History  and  changing  nature  of  race  and  ethnic 
relations,  with  special  reference  to  the  United  States.  Sources,  forms,  and  consequences 
of  racial  discrimination;  movements  for  racial  integration  and  separatism;  the  intersec- 
tion of  race,  class,  and  gender.  C-L:  Afro-American  Studies  116.  One  course.  Staff 

117.  Childhood  in  Social  Perspective.  (SS)  Social  forces  affecting  the  place  and  pur- 
pose of  children  in  society,  their  relations  to  adults  and  their  treatment  by  social  institu- 
tions such  as  schools  and  governments.  Topics  include  parent-child  relations,  sibling  re- 
lations, child  abuse,  children's  rights,  child  labor,  and  the  portrayal  of  children  in  the  mass 
media.  One  course.  Simpson 

118.  Sex,  Gender,  and  Society.  (SS)  Nature  and  acquisition  of  sex  roles.  Cross-cultural 
variations.  Developing  nature  of  sex  roles  in  American  society.  C-L:  Comparative  Area 
Studies  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  O'Rand 

119.  Juvenile  Delinquency.  (SS)  Environments  in  which  juvenile  delinquency  de- 
velops; delinquent  subcultures  and  peer  groups;  societal  reactions  to  delinquency  in 
schools,  courts,  and  other  agencies.  One  course.  Land 

Sociology  120,  122,  and  123  are  designed  as  a  sequence  and  might  optimally  be  taken  in  that 
order,  with  Sociology  120  being  recommended  preparation  for  122  and  123.  However,  thereareno 
prerequisites. 

120.  Causes  of  Crime.  (SS)  Definition,  types,  and  extent  of  crime;  biological,  psycho- 
logical, economic,  and  social  causes  of  criminality;  explanation  and  critical  evaluation  of 
theories  of  crime;  structure  and  patterns  of  recruitment  of  criminal  organizations;  social 
reactions  to  crime  and  the  justice  system.  One  course.  Land 

122.  Punishment  and  Treatment  of  Deviants.  (SS)  Concepts  of  punishment  and  re- 
habilitation. Programs  and  facilities  for  deviants.  Structure  and  operation  of  "total"  in- 
stitutions, such  as  prisons  and  hospitals.  Problems  of  returning  to  family  and  commu- 
nity life.  One  course.  Simpson 

123.  Social  Aspects  of  Mental  Illness.  (SS)  Theoretical  and  practical  sociological  con- 
tributions to  problems  of  etiology,  definition,  law,  and  treatment;  comparisons  with  other 
contributions;  questions  of  public  policy  and  programs.  One  course.  Back  orPalmore 

Sociology  (SOC)        297 


124.  Human  Development.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  124;  also  C-L:  Hu- 
man Development  and  Psychology  124.  One  course.  Maddox 

125.  Strategies  of  Comparative  Analysis.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies 
125;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  125,  History  137,  and  Political  Science  125.  One 
course.  Staff 

126.  Third  World  Development.  (SS)  Theories  concerning  the  role  of  transnational 
corporations  and  international  financial  institutions  (for  example,  World  Bank)  in  the  de- 
velopment of  Third  World  nations,  assessed  with  the  aid  of  sociological  and  economic 
data.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Gereffi 

132.  Methods  of  Social  Research.  (SS)  Principles  of  social  research,  design  of  socio- 
logical studies,  sampling,  and  data  collection  with  special  attention  to  survey  techniques. 
One  course.  Kerckhoff  or  Myers 

133.  Statistical  Methods.  (QR)  Elementary  statistical  techniques  and  their  applica- 
tion to  the  analysis  and  interpretation  of  social  science  data.  Theory  of  inference  is  stressed. 
Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  136,  Statistics  10  or  200,  or  equivalent. 
C-L:  Psychology  117.  One  course.  Spenner 

135.  Computers  and  Society.  (SS)  The  impact  of  the  computer  and  related  technolo- 
gies on  society.  Topics  include  the  effects  on  individual  freedom  and  the  nature  of  work, 
the  implications  of  high  speed  information  retrieval,  and  others.  One  course.  Smith  or 

Spenner 

138.  History  of  Social  Thought.  (SS)  Theories  of  society  and  social  relations  in  the 
writings  of  Montesquieu,  Rousseau,  Comte,  Marx,  Weber,  Durkheim,  Simmel,  Veblen, 
Sorokin,  and  others.  The  history  of  sociology  in  relation  to  philosophical  currents,  so- 
cial movements,  and  transformation  of  the  modern  world.  One  course.  Tiryakian  or  Wilson 

139.  Marxism  and  Society.  (SS)  A  critical  appraisal  of  Marxism  as  a  scholarly  meth- 
odology for  understanding  human  societies.  The  basic  concepts  of  historical  material- 
ism, as  they  have  evolved  and  developed  in  historical  contexts.  Topics  include  sexual  and 
social  inequality,  alienation,  class  formation,  imperialism,  and  revolution.  Core  course 
for  the  program  in  Perspectives  on  Marxism  and  Society.  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  139, 
Education  139,  History  186,  and  Interdisciplinary  Course  139.  One  course.  Fox  or  Wilson 

143.  Industrial  Relations.  (SS)  Theories  and  current  research  on  the  interlocking  roles 
of  business  and  labor  in  the  United  States  and  elsewhere.  One  course.  Gereffi  or  janoski 

149.  Sexuality  and  Society.  (SS)  Socioculrural  factors  affecting  sexual  behavior.  Chang- 
ing beliefs  about  sex;  how  sexual  knowledge  is  socially  learned  and  sexual  identities 
formed;  the  relation  between  power  and  sex;  control  over  sexual  expression.  One  course. 
Tiryakian 

150.  The  Changing  American  Family.  (SS)  Structure,  organization,  and  social  psy- 
chology of  marital,  parental,  and  sibling  relations  over  the  life  cycle  of  a  family;  courtship, 
marriage,  family  dissolution  in  relation  to  contemporary  American  society;  deviations 
from  and  alternatives  to  the  traditional  nuclear  family.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course. 

Kerckhoffor  Simpson 

151.  Sociology  of  Religion.  (SS)  The  religious  factor  in  modern  society  and  the  so- 
cial factor  in  modern  religion.  Major  sociological  theories  and  marginal  religious  group- 
ings. One  course.  Tiryakian  or  Wilson 

153.  Sport  and  Society.  (SS)  The  effect  of  sports  on  people,  their  self-image,  and  so- 
cial roles.  Relation  of  sports  as  an  institution  to  the  family,  education,  economics,  and  pol- 
itics. One  course.  Wilson 

298         Courses  of  Instruction 


154.  Art  and  Literature  in  Society.  (SS)  An  analysis  of  the  social  relations  of  the  world 
of  the  arts  (painting  and  sculpture,  music,  and  literature)  with  emphasis  upon  creative 
artists,  art  publics,  art  organizations,  and  art  works  as  they  function  in  their  social-cultural 
milieux.  One  course.  Back  or  Tiryakian 

155.  Organizations  and  Management.  (SS)  Forms  of  work  organization  (corporations, 
government  agencies),  the  social  forces  shaping  them  (management  styles,  technology, 
government  policy,  labor  markets),  and  their  effects  on  employees  (productivity,  work 
satisfaction,  turnover).  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  DiPrete  or  Simpson 

156.  Science,  Technology,  and  Social  Change.  (SS)  The  ways  in  which  society  in- 
fluences the  production  of  scientific  knowledge  and  its  transformation  into  usable  tech- 
nology. Effects  of  technological  and  scientific  innovation  on  social  life.  One  course.  O'Rand 

157.  The  Legal  Profession  and  the  Law.  (SS)  Development  of  the  American  legal 
profession,  emphasizing  the  recruitment  and  training  of  lawyers,  the  ways  lawyers'  work 
is  organized,  the  role  of  professional  associations,  the  determinants  of  success  in  legal 
practice,  and  the  influence  of  legal  ethics  on  practice.  One  course.  Simpson,  Tiryakian,  or 
Wilson 

158.  Markets  and  Marketing.  (SS)  Markets  as  systems  of  social  exchange:  how  they 
are  organized  and  develop;  their  relationship  to  other  social  structures  such  as  families, 
work  organizations  and  the  state;  their  impact  on  individuals,  careers,  consumption  pat- 
terns, and  lifestyles.  One  course.  Simpson  or  Spenner 

159.  The  Sociology  of  Entrepreneurship.  (SS)  The  social  origins  and  careers  of  en- 
trepreneurs. The  interrelation  of  their  work  and  family  roles  and  the  distinctiveness  of 
their  values  and  interests.  The  role  of  entrepreneurial  activity  in  societal  development, 
and  its  function  in  different  industries,  ethnic  groups,  and  societies.  One  course.  Romanelli, 
Simpson,  or  Spenner 

160.  Advertising  and  Society.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  110;  also  C-L:  Eng- 
lish 120  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  O'Barr,  J.  Smith,  or  Wilson 

161.  Aging  and  Death.  (SS)  Sociological  and  psychological  perspectives  on  aging, 
from  adolescence  through  old  age  and  death;  demography  of  human  aging;  problems 
caused  by  increased  longevity;  policy  issues.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  Onecourse.  George 
or  O'Rand 

162.  Health  and  Illness  in  Society.  (SS)  Relations  between  patients  and  health  profes- 
sionals, and  utilization  of  resources  for  health  care.  One  course.  Back 

165.  Occupations,  Professions,  and  Careers.  (SS)  How  occupations  organize  and  con- 
trol labor  markets,  define  services,  chart  career  lines,  and  develop  and  sustain  occupa- 
tional identities.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Simpson  or  Spenner 

Vol.  The  Social  Bases  of  Politics.  (SS)  Theories  of  and  research  on  political  power  at 
the  community,  national,  and  international  levels.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  One  course. 
Gereffi  or  Smith 

169.  Psychosocial  Aspects  of  Human  Development.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Psychology  130; 
also  C-L:  Human  Development  and  Interdisciplinary  Course  180.  One  course.  Martin 
Lakin  and  Maddox 

170.  Mass  Communication.  (SS)  An  analysis  of  the  role  of  radio,  the  press,  magazines, 
movies,  and  television.  An  examination  of  the  selective  audiences,  content  characteris- 
tics, controlling  elements,  and  organizational  structure  of  the  various  media.  Compara- 
tive Canadian  material  considered  where  feasible.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Comparative 
Area  Studies,  and  Film  and  Video.  One  course.  Smith 

Sociology  (SOC)        299 


171.  Comparative  Health  Care  Systems.  (SS)  The  interaction  of  historical,  political, 
economic,  legal/ethical,  and  sociological  factors  in  the  organization  and  operation  of  health 
care  systems  in  the  United  States,  the  United  Kingdom,  Sweden,  and  elsewhere.  C-L: 
Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course.  Maddox 

173.  Social  Conflict  and  Social  Movements.  (SS)  Mobilization  and  strategy  of  riots, 
demonstrations,  public  interest  groups,  social  movements,  and  revolutions.  One  course. 

Tin/akian  or  Wilson 

175.  Contemporary  International  Problems:  Their  Historical  Origins  and  Their  Im- 
plications for  Future  Policy.  (SS)  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  109,  Cultural  Anthro- 
pology 109,  History  109,  and  Political  Science  160.  One  course.  Staff 

179.  Modern  Nationalist  Movements.  (SS)  A  comparative  sociological  study  of  ma- 
jor nationalist  movements:  Western  nationalism  in  the  nineteenth  century,  anti-Western 
movements  of  the  Third  World,  and  regional  movements  within  and  against  established 
nation-states.  C-L:  Canadian  Studies  and  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 

Tin/akian 

182.  Media  in  Comparative  Perspective.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course  182; 
also  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies  and  Political  Science  180.  One  course.  Paletz  or  Smith 

184.  An  Introduction  to  Canada  and  Canadian  Issues.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdiscipli- 
nary Course  184;  also  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Comparative  Area  Studies,  Economics  184, 
History  184,  and  Political  Science  184.  One  course.  Cahow 

188.  The  Sociology  of  Contemporary  Spain.  (SS)  An  overview  of  the  social  transfor- 
mations shaping  Spain  during  the  last  half-century.  Topics  covered  include  the  political 
system,  regional  autonomous  movements,  family  and  educational  systems,  folklore,  and 
religion.  One  course.  Staff 

193, 194.  Independent  Study.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each. 

Staff 

195S,  196S,  197S.  Seminar  in  Special  Topics.  One  course  each.  Staff 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

206.  Sociological  Theory.  (SS)  Structure,  foundations,  and  historical  antecedents  of 
recent  formulations  of  such  theoretical  approaches  as  phenomenological  sociology,  ex- 
change theory,  critical  theory,  structuralism,  neo-Marxist  sociology,  sociobiology,  and  ac- 
tion theory.  One  course.  Tin/akian  or  Wilson 

207.  Social  Statistics  I:  Basic  Concepts  and  Methods.  (QR)  Review  of  descriptive  statis- 
tics; probability  concepts;  statistical  inference,  t-tests,  and  the  analysis  of  variance.  Bivar- 
iate  correlation  and  regression,  dummy  variables,  multiple  regression,  and  the  analysis 
of  covariance.  Stress  on  applications.  Statistical  computing  using  SPSS  and  other  pro- 
grams. One  course.  DiPrete,  Land,  or  Spenner 

208.  Survey  Research  Methods.  (SS)  Theory  and  application  of  survey  research  tech- 
niques in  the  social  sciences.  Sampling,  measurement,  questionnaire  construction  and 
distribution,  pretesting  and  posttesting,  response  effects,  validity  and  reliability,  scaling 
of  data,  data  reduction  and  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Sociology  207  or  the  equivalent.  One 
course.  Back,  Kerckhoff,  or  Smith 

211S.  A-E.  Proseminars  in  Sociological  Theory.  (SS)  Development  of  sociological 
thought;  systematic  sociological  theory;  interrelations  with  other  social  and  behavioral 
sciences. 

A.  Background  of  Sociology 

B.  Formal  Aspects  of  Theory 

300        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


C.  Sociology  of  Knowledge 

D.  Evolutionary  Theory  and  Sociobiology 

E.  Special  Topics  in  Sociological  Theory 
One  course.  Tiiyakian  or  Wilson 

212.  Social  Statistics  II:  Linear  Models,  Path  Analysis,  and  Structural  Equation  Sys- 
tems. (QR)  Model  specification,  review  of  simple  regression,  the  Gauss-Markov  theorem, 
multiple  regression  in  matrix  form,  ordinary  and  generalized  least  squares,  residual  and 
influence  analysis.  Path  analysis,  recursive  and  nonrecursive  structural  equation  models; 
measurement  errors  and  unobserved  variables.  Application  of  statistical  computing  pack- 
ages. Prerequisite:  Sociology  207  or  equivalent.  One  course.  DiPrete,  Land,  or  Spenner 

213.  Social  Statistics  HI:  Discrete  Multivariate  Models.  (QR)  Assumptions,  estima- 
tion, testing,  and  parameter  interpretation  for  the  log-linear,  logit,  logistic,  and  probit 
models.  Model  comparisons;  applications  of  statistical  computing  packages  and  pro- 
grams. Prerequisite:  Sociology  212  or  equivalent.  One  course.  DiPrete,  Land,  or  Spenner 

214.  Comparative  and  Historical  Methods.  (SS)  Scope,  methods,  and  controversies 
of  comparative  and  historical  sociology.  C-L:  Comparative  Area  Studies.  One  course. 
Janoski,  Smith,  or  Tiryakian 

215.  Basic  Demographic  Methods  and  Materials.  (SS)  Population  composition, 
change,  and  distribution .  Methods  of  standardizing  and  decomposing  rates,  life  tables 
and  population  models,  analysis  of  data  from  advanced  and  developing  countries.  Ap- 
plications of  computer  programs  for  demographic  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Sociology  207 
or  equivalent.  One  course.  Manton  or  Myers 

216.  Advanced  Methods  of  Demographic  Analysis.  (SS)  Theory  and  estimation 
methods  for  life  tables.  Reproductivity,  the  stable  population  model.  Graduation,  inter- 
polation, and  other  data  adjustments  for  faulty  data.  Hazards  modeling.  Applications 
of  computer  packages  for  demographic  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Sociology  215  or  equiva- 
lent. One  course.  Land  or  Manton 

217S.  A-F.  Proseminars  in  Social  Statistics  and  Research  Methods.  (SS)  Selected  topics 
in  the  collection  and  analysis  of  social  science  data. 

A.  Discrete  and  Continuous  Models  of  Measurement 

B.  Hazards  Models,  Event  History  Analysis,  and  Panel  Data 

C.  Dynamic  Models  and  Time  Series  Analysis 

D.  Research  Design 

E.  Evaluation  Research  Methods 

F.  Special  Topics  in  Social  Statistics  and  Research  Methods 
One  course.  Staff 

221S.  A-D.  Proseminars  in  Aging  and  Life  Course  Analysis.  (SS)  Selected  topics  in 
socialization,  human  development,  status  attainment  and  careers,  and  the  sociology  of 
aging. 

A.  Social  Structure  and  the  Life  Course 

B.  Social  Patterns  of  Personal  Development 

C.  Social  Gerontology 

D.  Special  Topics  in  Aging  and  Life  Course  Analysis 
One  course.  Staff 

222S.  A-D.  Proseminars  in  Comparative  and  Historical  Sociology.  (SS)  Selected 
topics  in  the  differentiation  and  transformation  of  societies. 

A.  Theories  of  Social  Change 

B.  Comparative  Aspects  of  Societal  Transformation 

C.  Theories  of  Change  in  Third  World 

D.  Special  Topics  in  Comparative  and  Historical  Sociology 
One  course.  Gereffi,  Simpson,  Smith,  or  Tiryakian 

Sociology  (SOC)         301 


223S.  A-E.  Proseminars  in  Crime,  Law,  and  Deviance.  (SS)  Selected  topics  in  crime 
and  the  institutions  of  social  control. 

A.  Theories  of  Crime  Causation 

B.  Human  Development  and  Criminal  Careers 

C.  Social  Control  and  the  Criminal  Justice  System 

D.  Sociology  of  Law 

E.  Special  Topics  in  Crime,  Law,  and  Deviance 
One  course.  Land,  Simpson,  Tiryakian,  or  Wilson 

224S.  A-F.  Proseminars  in  Population  Studies.  (SS)  Selected  topics. 

A.  Population  Dynamics 

B.  Mortality,  Morbidity,  and  Epidemiology 

C.  Urbanization  and  Migration 

D.  Demography  of  the  Labor  Force 

E.  Demography  of  Aging 

F.  Special  Topics  in  Population  Studies 

One  course.  Back,  DiPrete,  Land,  Maddox,  Manton,  Myers,  O'Rand,  or  Smith 

225S.  A-E.  Proseminars  in  Organizations,  Markets,  and  Work.  (SS)  Selected  topics 
in  complex  organizations,  the  labor  process,  and  changing  occupations. 

A.  Organizations  and  Environments 

B.  The  Social  Psychology  of  Organizations 

C.  Markets  and  Market  Behavior 

D.  Careers  and  Labor  Markets 

E.  Special  Topics  in  Organizations,  Markets,  and  Work 
One  course.  fanoski,  O'Rand,  or  Spenner 

226S.  A-H.  Proseminars  in  Social  Institutions  and  Processes.  (SS)  Selected  topics 
in  the  sociology  of  institutions  and  social  and  institutional  behavior. 

A.  Social  Psychology 

B.  Social  Stratification 

C.  Political  Sociology 

D.  Sociology  of  Religion 

E.  Sociology  of  Science 

F.  Sociology  of  Education 

G.  Medical  Sociology 

H.  Special  Topics  in  Social  Institutions  and  Processes 
One  course.  Staff 

255.  Political  Sociology.  (SS)  Pluralist,  elite,  and  class  theories  of  the  relationship  be- 
tween state  and  society.  Topics  include:  recent  debates  on  the  welfare  state,  social  con- 
trol, political  participation,  and  state-society  relations  in  socialist  economies.  C-L:  Polit- 
ical Science  255.  One  course.  Smith  or  Tiryakian 

282S.  Canada.  (SS)  See  C-L:  History  282S;  also  C-L:  Canadian  Studies,  Compara- 
tive Area  Studies,  Cultural  Anthropology  282S,  Interdisciplinary  Course  282S,  and  Po- 
litical Science  282S.  One  course.  Cahow 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Interdisciplinary  Course 
284S;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  284S,  History  284S,  Political  Science  264S,  Psy- 
chology 284S,  and  Women's  Studies.  One  course.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  or 
Spenner 

298S,  299S.  Seminar  in  Selected  Topics.  Substantive,  theoretical,  or  methodologi- 
cal topics.  One  course  each.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

102.  America  in  the  Modern  World  System.  (SS) 

302         Courses  of  Instruction 


140.  Environment  and  Society.  (SS) 

189.  The  Americas:  A  Survey  of  the  Forces  Shaping  the  Hemisphere.  (SS) 

234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World . 
(SS) 

THE  MAJOR 

Prerequisite.  Sociology  10D  or  an  equivalent  course  with  consent  of  the  Director  of  Un- 
dergraduate Studies. 

Major  Requirements.  Eight  courses  above  101:  Sociology  132,  133,  138,  one  200-level 
course,  and  four  others.  Only  one  independent  study  credit  can  be  applied  to  the  major; 
it  may  not  substitute  for  a  required  course. 

A  student  may  complete  a  second  major  in  sociology.  Requirements  and  advising  are 
the  same  for  the  second  major  as  for  the  first  major. 

A  Handbook  for  Sociology  Majors,  available  in  the  office  of  the  Director  of  Undergradu- 
ate Studies,  describes  areas  of  concentration,  the  honors  program,  and  the  Sociology  Un- 
ion. It  also  describes  the  departmental  advising  system  and  the  interests  of  the  faculty. 

Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences  <sta> 

Professor  Geweke,  Director;  Associate  Professors  Burdick,  West,  and  Wolpert;  Assistant 
Professor  Lavine;  Visiting  Professor  Richard 

The  Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences  coordinates  teaching  and  research 
in  statistics  and  decision  theory  at  Duke.  It  offers  various  courses  in  basic  statistics  and 
advanced  mathematical  statistics.  The  research  emphasis  on  statistical  decision  theory 
in  the  institute  leads  to  its  offering  a  variety  of  courses,  at  various  levels,  in  statistics  and 
decision  sciences.  There  is  no  undergraduate  major  in  statistics.  The  institute  maintains 
and  runs  a  Statistical  Consulting  Center  which  provides  help  on  statistics  problems  and 
projects  for  members  of  the  Duke  community. 

10D.  Basic  Statistics.  (QR)  Statistical  concepts  involved  in  making  inferences,  deci- 
sions, and  predictions  from  data.  Emphasis  on  applications,  not  formal  technique.  Not 
open  to  students  who  have  had  Economics  138,  Mathematics  53,  Political  Science  138,  Psy- 
chology 117,  Public  Policy  Studies  112,  or  Sociology  133.  One  course.  Staff 

20.  Introduction  to  Decision  Analysis.  (QR)  Frameworks  for  identifying  and  analyz- 
ing choices  and  their  consequences.  Elementary  probability  theory  and  applications,  util- 
ity, risk  and  decision  trees.  Introduction  to  constrained  optimization  theory  and  appli- 
cation. One  course.  Staff 

30.  Applied  Game  Theory.  (QR)  Introduction  to  theory  of  games  through  its  appli- 
cation to  economics,  political  science,  animal  behavior,  and  decision  analysis.  One  course. 
Staff 

100.  Introduction  to  Applied  Statistics.  (QR)  Classical  techniques  of  testing  and  es- 
timation. Emphasis  on  applications  of  the  theory  to  applied  problems.  Not  open  to  stu- 
dents who  have  taken  Statistics  200  or  equivalent.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  103  (may 
be  taken  concurrently)  or  equivalent,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

191, 192.  Independent  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research.  Prerequisites:  consent 
of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  One  course  each.  Staff 

200.  Introduction  to  Statistical  Methods.  (QR)  Emphasis  on  classical  techniques  of 
hypothesis  testing  and  point  and  interval  estimation,  using  the  binomial,  normal,  t,  F, 
and  chi  square  distributions.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Economics  237  or 
Mathematics  117.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  103  (may  be  taken  concurrently)  or  equiva- 
lent, or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences  (STA)        303 


205S.  Senior  Seminar  in  Statistics.  (QR)  Illustrative  past  topics:  empirical  applica- 
tions of  classical  and  Bayesian  methods;  robustness  and  model  specification;  time  series 
analysis;  applications  of  probability  theory.  Prerequisite:  Statistics  200  or  Mathematics 
136.  One  course.  Staff 

210.  Bayesian  Statistics.  (QR)  Foundations  of  Bayesian  theory.  Bayesian  versus  clas- 
sical inference  procedures;  applications  to  simple  random  processes.  Introduction  to  Baye- 
sian computer  software.  Prerequisite :  Statistics  200  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
Richard 

220.  Decision  Analysis.  Decision  making  under  uncertainty.  Theory  and  methods 
of  structuring  problems,  defining  uncertainty,  and  satisfying  multiple  objectives.  The- 
ories of  risk,  information,  and  psychological  bias.  Prerequisite:  Statistics  200  or  consent 
of  instructor.  C-L:  Business  Administration  491.  One  course.  Winkler 

222.  Quantitative  Methods  and  Statistics.  (QR)  Review  of  multivariate  calculus;  op- 
timization methods;  linear  algebra  for  statistics;  introduction  to  probability  and  statis- 
tics, with  emphasis  on  applications  of  the  theory  to  applied  problems.  Not  open  to  stu- 
dents who  have  taken  Statistics  100  or  200.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  32,  34,  36,  or  41. 
Two  courses.  Staff 

224D.  Statistics  and  Data  Analysis.  (QR)  Elements  of  statistical  inference  and  esti- 
mation including  exploratory  data  analysis,  regression,  and  analysis  of  variance.  One 
course.  Wolpert 

226.  Optimization  Methods.  (QR)  Introductory  survey  of  optimization  techniques 
useful  in  management  and  social  decision  making.  Numerical  techniques  for  uncon- 
strained optimization,  linear  and  dynamic  programming,  and  optimal  control  methods. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Wolpert 

240.  Applied  Stochastic  Processes.  (QR)  Prerequisite:  Statistics  200  or  equivalent. 
See  C-L:  Mathematics  240.  One  course.  Staff 

241.  Linear  Models.  (QR)  Geometrical,  interpretation,  multiple  regression,  analy- 
sis of  variance,  experimental  design,  analysis  of  covariance.  Prerequisite:  Statistics  200 
or  equivalent.  C-L:  Mathematics  241.  One  course.  Staff 

242.  Multivariate  Statistics.  (QR)  Multinormal  distributions,  multivariate  general  lin- 
ear model,  Hotelling's  T2  statistic,  Roy  union-intersection  principle,  principal  compo- 
nents, canonical  analysis,  factor  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Statistics  241  or  equivalent.  C-L: 
Mathematics  242.  One  course.  Staff 

243.  Econometrics  I.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Economics  243.  One  course.  Staff 

244.  Applied  Regression  Analysis.  (QR)  Regression  analysis  with  nonexperimen- 
tal  data  using  ordinary  least  squares.  Emphasis  on  assumption  violations :  consequences 
and  correctives.  Analysis  of  variance  and  time  series  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Statistics  224 
or  equivalent.  One  course.  Burdick 

245.  Econometrics  II.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Economics  245.  One  course.  Staff 

246.  Selected  Topics  in  Econometric  Theory.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Economics  246.  One 
course.  Staff 

247S.  Applied  Econometrics.  (SS)  See  C-L:  Economics  247S.  One  course.  Staff 

248,  249.  Topics  in  Statistics.  (QR)  Advanced  topics  in  analysis  of  variance,  design 
of  experiments,  nonparametric  statistics,  foundations  of  statistical  inference.  Prerequi- 
site: Statistics  200  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  each.  Staff 


304         Courses  of  Instruction 


Swahili 

For  courses  in  Swahili,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages. 

University  Writing  Program  (uwo 

Associate  Professor  Gopen,  Director 

The  writing  requirement  may  be  fulfilled  by  successfully  completing  University  Writ- 
ing Course  4,  5, 6, 7,  or  8,  each  of  which  involves  expository  themes  and  regular  individual 
conferences.  Despite  the  distinction  in  titles  and  topics,  all  these  courses  deal  with  the 
same  core  concerns  and  have  the  same  objective:  they  are  intended  to  help  students  of 
all  abilities  to  a  greater  understanding  of  the  language  and  thereby  to  a  greater  control 
of  their  thinking  process. 

4.  Principles  of  Writing.  Designed  for  those  who  would  benefit  from  a  small  class 
that  concentrates  on  the  principles  of  clear,  sophisticated,  college-level  prose.  Essays  are 
based  on  a  variety  of  topics.  One  course.  Staff 

5.  Persuasive  Writing.  Differs  from  University  Writing  Course  4  in  only  three  ways: 
(1)  the  essays  in  each  course  section  are  based  on  a  single  topic,  the  readings  for  which 
are  primarily  nonf  iction;  (2)  the  class  size  is  slightly  larger;  and  (3)  the  pace  may  be  some- 
what faster.  One  course.  Staff 

6.  Interpretive  Writing.  Differs  from  University  Writing  Course  5  only  in  that  the  es- 
says in  each  course  section  are  based  primarily  on  readings  in  literature,  selected  to  form 
a  single  literary  topic  for  the  term.  One  course.  Staff 

7.  Writings  on  Special  Topics.  Themes  and  readings  vary  with  the  topic  of  each  sec- 
tion. Enrollment  in  some  sections  may  be  restricted  to  students  in  specified  programs. 
One  course.  Staff 

8.  Expository  and  Persuasive  Writing.  This  course,  which  covers  the  rhetorical  prin- 
ciples available  in  University  Writing  Course  4,  5,  6,  and  7,  is  offered  only  in  the  spring. 
The  readings  vary  with  the  individual  instructors.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  passed 
4,  5,  6,  or  7.  One  course.  Staff 

117S.  Advanced  Expository  and  Persuasive  Writing.  Emphasis  on  the  connections 
between  substance  and  structure;  revision  techniques  and  inventional  procedures.  Tai- 
lored to  the  level,  needs,  and  interests  of  students  who  enroll.  Prerequisite:  previous 
University  Writing  Course  or  consent  of  the  director  of  the  University  Writing  Program . 
C-L:  English  117S.  One  course.  Staff 

For  other  courses  in  writing,  see  listings  for  Department  of  English. 

Women's  Studies  Program 

Associate  Professor  J.  O'Barr,  Director 

A  certificate,  but  not  a  major,  is  available  in  this  program. 

The  program  in  women's  studies  provides  for  students  an  understanding  of  the  forces 
that  shape  the  position  of  women  in  society  and  develops  an  appreciation  of  women's 
experiences.  Women's  studies  brings  together  faculty  and  students  from  many  disciplines 
who  share  an  interest  in  studying  women's  experiences  and  who  incorporate  ideas  and 
information  about  these  experiences  into  research,  teaching,  and  learning.  Women's 
studies  encourages  students  to  question  and  reinterpret  existing  bodies  of  information 
and  theories  and  to  include  women's  perspectives  and  contributions  in  the  new  interpre- 
tation. 

Courses  in  women's  studies,  open  to  all  Duke  students,  are  offered  through  a  num- 
ber of  academic  departments  and  through  the  interdisciplinary  course  designation.  A 

Women's  Studies  Program        305 


certificate,  representing  an  area  of  concentration  supplementing  a  major,  is  available  for 
students  in  the  program.  Students  working  toward  the  certificate  declare  a  major  outside 
the  program  and  utilize  women's  studies  as  a  valuable  additional  area  of  academic  con- 
centration. 

To  earn  a  certificate,  students  take  a  minimum  of  five  women's  studies  courses:  In- 
terdisciplinary Course  103,  An  Introduction  to  Women's  Studies;  three  departmental 
courses  that  focus  on  women,  at  least  one  in  the  area  of  social  sciences  and  one  in  arts 
and  literature  or  civilizations;  and  one  course  on  women  in  relation  to  culture  and  socie- 
ty. Interdisciplinary  Course  195S,  Senior  Seminar  in  Women's  Studies,  is  offered  every 
spring,  and  can  be  taken  in  place  of  Interdisciplinary  Course  103  (with  the  director's  ap- 
proval) if  the  student  has  completed  several  courses  in  women's  studies  prior  to  the  sen- 
ior year.  The  senior  seminar  is  also  strongly  recommended  as  a  sixth  course  for  students 
earning  the  certificate.  With  approval  of  the  director,  one  independent  study  course  (taken 
at  Duke  or  abroad)  may  count  toward  the  certificate.  Four  out  of  the  five  courses  taken 
for  the  certificate  must  be  at  the  100-level  or  above,  and  not  more  than  one  may  be  at  the 
200-level. 

Students  earning  the  undergraduate  certificate  are  eligible  for  graduation  with  dis- 
tinction in  women's  studies.  Guidelines  for  honors  in  women's  studies  are  available  in 
the  program  office. 

The  courses  listed  below  are  offered  regularly  and  can  be  used  to  fulfill  the  require- 
ments for  the  certificate.  For  a  more  detailed  description  of  each  course,  consult  the  list- 
ing in  the  appropriate  department  or  contact  the  Women's  Studies  Program  Office. 

REGULARLY  SCHEDULED  COURSES 

Core  Interdisciplinary  Courses 

Interdisciplinary  Course  103.  An  Introduction  to  Women's  Studies.  /.  O'Barrand  staff 
Interdisciplinary  Course  195S.  Senior  Seminar  in  Women's  Studies.  /.  O'Barrand  staff 
Interdisciplinary  Course  211S.  History  of  Feminist  Thought.  Neuschel,  J.  O'Barr,  or  Pope 
Interdisciplinary  Course  283S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities.  C-L:  English  283S  and  Religion  283S. 

Clark,  Orr,  Pope,  or  Tompkins 
Interdisciplinary  Course  284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  284S, 

History  284S,  Political  Science  264S,  Psychology  284S,  and  Sociology  284S.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand, 

C.  Smith,  or  Spenner 

Departmental  Courses  on  Women/Gender 

Arabic  173S.  Women  in  Arabic  Literature.  Cooke 

Classical  Studies  104.  Women  in  the  Ancient  World.  Boatwright 

Cultural  Anthropology  113.  Cultural  Construction  of  Gender.  Quinn 

Cultural  Anthropology  114.  Gender  Inequality.  Quinn 

Cultural  Anthropology  272S.  Marxism  and  Feminism.  Smith 

English  269.  American  Women  Writers.  Pope  or  Tompkins 

French  108S.  French  Women:  Myths,  Realities,  and  the  Law.  Bryan 

French  159.  Feminist  Fiction.  Orr 

History  169S,  170S.  The  Social  History  of  American  Women.  A.  Scott 

History  171.  A  History  of  Women  in  Europe.  Neuschel 

History  199.  The  History  of  Women  in  Science  and  Medicine.  Green 

Italian  105.  Italian  Women  Writers.  Finucci 

Music  120S.  Women  in  Music.  Higgins 

Philosophy  122.  Philosophical  Issues  in  Feminism.  Lind 

Political  Science  163.  Gender,  Politics,  and  Policy:  The  Third  World  Case.  /.  O'Barr 

Psychology  164S.  Psychology  of  Women.  Roth 

Religion  109.  Women  in  the  Biblical  Tradition:  Image  and  Role.  C.  Meyers 

Religion  125.  Women  and  Sexuality  in  the  Christian  Tradition.  Clark 

Sociology  118.  Sex,  Gender,  and  Society.  O'Rand 

Departmental  Courses  on  Women  in  Relation  to  Culture  and  Society 

Cultural  Anthropology  110.  Advertising  and  Society.  W.  O'Barr 

Cultural  Anthropology  126.  Middle  East:  Wars,  Revolutions,  and  Social  Change.  Dominguez 

Cultural  Anthropology  137.  Incest,  Adultery,  and  Other  Problems  in  Kinship  and  Marriage.  Dominguez  or 

Quinn 
Cultural  Anthropology  141.  The  Self  and  Others:  Ethnic,  Racial,  and  Social  Classifications.  Dominguez 

306        Courses  of  Instruction 


Cultural  Anthropology  251S.  American  Marriage:  A  Cultural  Approach.  Quinn 

Economics  208S.  Economics  of  Labor  Supply  and  the  Family.  McElroy 

English  187.  Melodrama  and  Soap  Opera.  Gaines 

History  115.  History  of  Africa.  Eivald 

History  117.  Early  Modern  Europe.  Neuschel 

History  160.  The  United  States  from  the  New  Deal  to  the  Present.  Chafe 

Interdisciplinary  Course  155.  Comparative  Perspectives  on  Literature  and  Social  Change:  From  Plantation 

to  City.  Willis 
Literature  128.  Writings  in  the  Pan-African  Tradition.  Willis 
Literature  177.  Film  Theory.  Gaines 

Literature  185.  Psychoanalysis,  Literature,  and  Film.  Gaines 
Political  Science  129.  Political  Participation.  Paletz 

Political  Science  153,  154.  Politics  and  the  Media  of  Mass  Communication.  Paletz 
Political  Science  187.  Politics  and  the  Libido.  Paletz 
Religion  234.  Early  Christian  Asceticism.  Clark 
Sociology  106.  Social  Psychology.  George 
Sociology  111.  Inequality  in  America.  Kercklwff  or  O'Rand 
Sociology  149.  Sexuality  and  Society.  Staff 

Sociology  150.  The  Changing  American  Family.  Kerckhoffor  Simpson 
Sociology  161.  Aging  and  Death.  George  or  O'Rand 
Sociology  165.  Occupations,  Professions,  and  Careers.  Simpson  or  Spenner 

OTHER  PERTINENT  COURSE  OFFERINGS 

In  addition  to  the  regular  courses  listed  above,  the  following  sections  of  general 
courses  are  offered  by  women's  studies  faculty  members  in  various  departments.  These 
sections  focus  specifically  on  topics  relevant  to  women;  they  count  toward  the  women's 
studies  certificate  requirements  only  when  offered  on  these  specific  topics  by  the  wom- 
en's studies  faculty  members  listed  here.  Also,  house  courses,  taken  for  half  credit  through 
Duke  dormitories,  are  frequently  offered  and  sponsored  through  the  Women's  Studies 
Program.  Students  should  consult  the  Women's  Studies  Program  each  semester  for  in- 
formation on  all  courses. 

Departmental  Courses  on  Women/Gender 

Classical  Studies  195S,  196S.  Sex  Roles  in  Antiquity.  Boatwright 

Cultural  Anthropology  180.  Sociobiology  and  Gender.  Wright 

English  179S.  Portraits  of  the  Lady:  Studies  in  the  Literary  Images  of  Women.  Pope 

English  179S.  Studies  in  Women's  Fiction.  Pope 

French  104S.  Women  in  Contemporary  France.  Bryan  orOrr 

French  290S.  Studies  in  a  Contemporary  Figure:  Wittig.  Orr 

History  196S.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Women  in  Europe.  Neuschel 

History  196S.  Issues  in  Third  World  Women's  History.  Ewald 

Political  Science  200S  A.  Contemporary  American  Feminism.  /.  O'Barr 

Public  Policy  Studies  264S.  Women  and  Justice.  Stack 

Departmental  Courses  on  Women  In  Relation  to  Culture  and  Society 

English  26S.  Solitary  in  Fiction.  Pope 

English  154.  American  Literature:  1915-1960.  Pope 

English  163.  Twentieth-Century  American  Poetry.  Pope 

English  189S.  Sexualities  in  Film  and  Literature.  Gaines 

English  288.  The  Western  in  American  Culture.  Tompkins 

French  166, 167  Contemporary  French  Life  and  Thought.  Kaplan 

Public  Policy  195S.  Poverty  and  Progress.  Staff 

Public  Policy  Studies  278.  Human  Service  Bureaucracies.  Staff 

Spanish  166.  Nineteenth-Century  Prose  Fiction.  Sieburth 

In  addition  to  offering  courses  and  a  certificate  representing  a  concentration  in  wom- 
en's studies,  the  Women's  Studies  Program  sponsors  lectures,  films,  discussions,  con- 
ferences, and  internships  that  focus  on  women's  issues.  It  provides  academic  advice  and 
assistance  to  students  earning  certificates  in  the  program.  Additional  information  on 
courses,  the  women's  studies  certificate,  and  other  opportunities  in  women's  studies  is 
available  at  the  Office  of  Women's  Studies,  207  East  Duke  Building. 


Women's  Studies  Program         307 


Writing 

See  University  Writing  Program. 

Zoology  (zoo 

Professor  Gillham,  Chairman;  Professors  Costlow,  Fluke,  Forward,  Klopfer,  Livingstone, 
McClay,  Nicklas,  H.  Nijhout,  Ruderman,  Staddon,  Tucker,  Vogel,  Wainwright,  Ward,  and 
H.  Wilbur;  Associate  Professors  Laurie,  Lundberg,  Rausher,  Sutherland,  and  Uyenoya- 
ma;  Assistant  Professors  Nowicki  and  Roth;  Professors  Emeriti  Bailey,  Bookhout,  Gregg, 
Schmidt-Nielsen,  andK.  Wilbur;  Adjunct  Professor  Schmidt-Koenig;  Lecturer  M.  Nijhout 

See  Biology  for  a  description  of  the  major  and  the  list  of  courses  taught  by  the  zoolo- 
gy faculty. 

School  of  Engineering 

Professor  Dowell,  Dean;  Professor  Shepard,  Associate  Dean 

ENGINEERING  (INTERDEPARTMENTAL)  (EGR) 

23.  Principles  and  Practices  in  Engineering  Economics.  Introduction  to  the  princi- 
ples and  practices  in  engineering  economics.  The  initial  set  of  lectures  develops  a  gener- 
al understanding  of  basic  engineering  economics  and  break-even  analysis/minimum  cost 
in  engineering  design .  The  second  set  of  lectures  focuses  on  industrial  practices  and  public 
projects:  interest  formulas,  annual  and  present  worth,  as  well  as  taxes  and  depreciation. 
The  final  lectures  address  forecasting  and  uncertainty  in  engineering  economics.  (1.0  ES) 
Prerequisite:  sophomore  standing.  One  course.  Peirce 

24.  Environmental  Engineering  Science.  Materials  and  energy  balances  applied  to 
environmental  engineering  problems.  Water  pollution  control,  applied  ecology,  air  quality 
management,  solid  and  hazardous  waste  control.  Environmental  ethics.  (1.0  ES)  Prereq- 
uisite: Chemistry  11.  One  course.  Vesilind 

50.  Introduction  to  Numerical  Computing.  Introduction  to  the  use  of  computers  in 
the  solution  of  engineering  and  scientific  problems.  Systematic  methods  for  algorithm 
development  and  coding  in  a  higher-level  computer  language.  Application  of  selected 
numerical  methods.  Offered  in  summer  only.  One  course.  Pas 

51.  Computers  in  Engineering.  Introduction  to  use  of  digital  computers  in  engineer- 
ing. Attributes  of  digital  computer  systems;  program  languages;  algorithm  development; 
numerical  analysis,  including  approximation  and  interpolation,  searches  and  maximi- 
zation, linear  equations;  applications  to  engineering;  interactive  computing,  editing,  and 
file  handling;  computer  graphics.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  completed  Computer 
Science  51  or  Engineering  52.  (1.0  ES)  One  course.  Melosh,  Pas,  or  Utku 

52.  Computational  Methods  in  Engineering.  Introduction  to  computer  methods  and 
algorithms  for  analysis,  simulation,  and  optimization  of  engineering  systems;  matrix,  di- 
rect, and  iterative  analysis  techniques;  finite  increment  techniques;  linear  programming. 
Requires  prior  programming  experience  and  learning  FORTRAN  or  Pascal  type  languages 
with  minimal  help  from  the  course.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  completed  Computer 
Science  51  or  Engineering  51.  (1.0  ES)  One  course.  Melosh  or  Utku 

75.  Mechanics  of  Solids.  Analysis  of  force  systems  and  their  equilibria  as  applied  to 
engineering  systems.  Stresses  and  strains  in  deformable  bodies;  mechanical  behavior  of 
materials;  applications  of  principles  to  static  problems  of  beams,  torsion  members,  and 
columns.  Selected  laboratory  work.  (1.0  ES)  Prerequisites:  Physics  51  and  Mathematics 
32.  One  course.  Hueckel,  Melosh,  Petroski,  or].  F.  Wilson 

308         Courses  of  Instruction 


83.  Structure  and  Properties  of  Solids.  Introduction  to  materials  science  and  engineer- 
ing, emphasizing  the  relationships  between  the  structure  of  a  solid  and  its  properties. 
Atomic  and  molecular  origins  of  electrical,  mechanical,  and  chemical  behavior  are  treat- 
ed in  some  detail  for  metals,  alloys,  polymers,  ceramics,  glasses,  and  composite  materi- 
als. (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  11  and  Mathematics  31.  One  course.  Cocks, 
Jones,  Needham,  or  Shepard 

101.  Thermodynamics.  The  principal  laws  of  thermodynamics  for  open  and  closed 
systems  and  their  application  in  engineering.  Properties  of  the  pure  substance,  relation- 
ships among  properties,  mixtures  and  reactions.  Power  and  refrigeration  cycle  analysis. 
(1.0  ES)  Prerequisite:  Physics  52.  One  course.  Chaddock  or  Harman 

123.  Dynamics.  Principles  of  dynamics  of  particles,  rigid  bodies,  and  selected  non- 
rigid  systems  with  emphasis  on  engineering  applications.  Kinematic  and  kinetic  analy- 
sis of  structural  and  machine  elements  in  a  plane  and  in  space  using  graphical,  computer, 
and  analytical  vector  techniques.  Absolute  and  relative  motion  analysis.  Work-energy; 
impact  and  impulse-momentum.  Laboratory  experiments.  (1.0  ES)  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  103  and  Engineering  75  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Petroski  or 
J.  F.  Wilson 

130.  Modeling  and  Analysis  of  Dynamic  Systems.  Mathematical  modeling  of 
mechanical,  electrical,  fluid,  and  thermal  systems.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  a  universal  ap- 
proach to  system  analysis.  Topics  include:  state  variables,  linearization  methods,  trans- 
fer functions  and  block  diagrams,  and  feedback  techniques  for  the  control  of  dynamic 
systems.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  103  and  Physics  51.  One  course.  Garg, 
Quinlan,  or  Wright 

150.  Engineering  Communication.  Principles  of  written  and  verbal  technical  com- 
munication; graphics,  mapping,  surveying  and  engineering  drawing.  Computer  graph- 
ics, two-  and  three-dimensional  transformations,  hidden-surface  and  hidden-line  al- 
gorithms, and  computer  aided  design.  (1 .0  ES)  Prerequisite:  Engineering  51  or  equivalent. 
One  course.  Pas  and  Vesilind 

151.  Computer  Simulations  in  Engineering.  Simulation  of  various  engineering  sys- 
tems, starting  from  their  mathematical  formulations.  Simulation  of  the  boundary  value, 
eigenvalue,  and  the  initial  value  problems.  Examples  from  the  beam-,  truss-,  and  plate- 
theories,  the  fluid  flow,  the  heat  transfer,  and  the  dynamics  of  mechanical  and  electrical 
systems.  Use  of  widely  used  numerical  algorithms.  Identification  of  the  problems  associat- 
ed with  numerical  simulations.  (1 .0  ES)  Prerequisite:  junior  standing  in  engineering.  One 
course.  Utku 

165.  Special  Topics  in  Engineering.  Study  arranged  on  special  engineering  topics  in 
which  the  faculty  have  particular  interest  and  competence  as  a  result  of  research  or  profes- 
sional activities.  Quarter  course,  half  course,  or  one  course.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  in- 
structors). Variable  credit.  Staff 

174.  Technology  Assessment  and  Social  Choice.  Societal,  economic,  environmen- 
tal, psychological,  and  ethical  considerations  in  the  design  and  application  of  technological 
systems;  techniques  for  technological  forecasting  and  assessment;  citizen  participation 
in  policy-making;  recent  case  studies;  interdisciplinary  team  project.  (.75  ED/. 25  ES) 
C-L:  Religion  174.  One  course.  Garg  and  McCollough 

175.  Aesthetics,  Design,  and  Culture.  An  examination  of  the  role  of  aesthetics,  both 
as  a  goal  and  as  a  tool,  in  a  culture  which  is  increasingly  dependent  on  technology.  Visu- 
al thinking,  perceptual  awareness,  experiential  learning,  conceptual  modeling,  and  de- 
sign will  be  explored  in  terms  of  changes  in  sensory  environment .  Design  problems  will 
be  formulated  and  analyzed  through  individual  and  group  design  projects.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES) 
One  course.  Pearsall 


School  of  Engineering        309 


183, 184.  Projects  in  Engineering.  Courses  in  which  engineering  projects  of  an  inter- 
disciplinary nature  are  undertaken.  The  projects  must  have  engineering  relevance  in  the 
sense  of  undertaking  to  meet  human  need  through  a  disciplined  approach  under  the  gui- 
dance of  a  member  of  the  engineering  faculty.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course  each.  Staff 

221.  Computational  Linear  Algebra.  Linear  vector  spaces  of  real  and  complex  n- 
touples,  norms,  metrics,  inner-products,  basis  vectors,  rank  and  dimensionality;  matrices 
as  linear  maps,  rank  and  nullity,  particular  and  general  solutions  of  Ax  =  b;  factorization 
of  matrices  by  successive  transformations;  solution  of  Ax  =  b  by  direct  and  iterative 
methods;  special  and  general  eigenvalue  problems;  diagonalization  and  tridiagonaliza- 
tion  by  similarity  transformations;  power  methods,  computational  complexities,  storage 
requirements,  convergence  characteristics,  error  propagation,  and  the  mathematical  basis 
of  the  studied  algorithms.  (1.0  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  111  or  equivalent,  and 
knowledge  of  any  algorithmic  programming  language.  One  course.  Utku 

222.  Computer  Solutions  of  Ordinary  and  Partial  Differential  Equations.  Ordinary 
differential  equations;  initial  value  problems;  Lipschitz  conditions;  single  and  multi-step 
methods;  predictor-corrector  methods;  stability  and  error  control;  elliptic  partial  differen- 
tial equations;  linear  boundary  value  problems,  solutions  by  finite  differences  and  finite 
elements;  parabolic  differential  equations,  initial  value  problems,  solutions  by  succes- 
sive boundary  value  problems;  stability  and  error  control;  hyperbolic  differential  equa- 
tions; propagation  of  discontinuities;  method  of  characteristics.  (1 .0  ES)  Prerequisite:  En- 
gineering 221  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Utku 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
135.  Continuum  Mechanics 
170.  Forecasting  Techniques 

172A.  Contemporary  Science:  Issues  and  Challenges 
172B.  Contemporary  Technology:  Issues  and  Challenges 

187.  History  of  Nuclear  Energy:  Civilian  Applications 

188.  History  of  Nuclear  Energy:  Military  Applications 

Biomedical  Engineering  <bme) 

Professor  McElhaney,  Chairman;  Professor  Clark,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies;  Profes- 
sors Barr,  Hammond,  Hochmuth,  Nolte,  Pilkington,  Plonsey,  von  Ramm,  and  Wolbarsht; 
Associate  Professors  Burdick,  Jaszczak,  and  Pasipoularides;  Assistant  Professors  Daniels, 
Reichert,  Smith,  Trahey,  and  Truskey;  Research  Professor  Thurstone;  Research  Assistant 
Professors  Altman,  Bohs,  Cusma,  Floyd,  Krassowska,  Nandedkar,  and  Paver;  Adjunct 
Associate  Professors  Cooper  and  Joost 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Biomedical  engineering  is  the  discipline  in  which  the  physical,  mathematical,  and 
engineering  sciences  and  associated  technology  are  applied  to  biology  and  medicine.  Con- 
tributions range  from  modeling  and  simulation  of  physiological  systems  through  ex- 
perimental research  to  solutions  of  practical  clinical  problems.  The  undergraduate  pro- 
gram in  biomedical  engineering  is  flexible  and  can  satisfy  the  requirements  for  entrance 
into  graduate  work  in  engineering,  medicine,  and  other  professional  schools  or  science 
disciplines. 

Opportunities  for  student  research  are  available  in  the  biomedical  engineering  labora- 
tories. The  department  utilizes  digital  computers  extensively,  and  computer  science  tech- 
niques are  applied  in  acquiring,  processing,  and  modeling  biological  data.  Research  in 

310         Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


the  biomedical  materials  laboratory  is  directed  toward  the  development  of  materials  suita- 
ble for  use  in  biological  environments  such  as  the  vascular  system .  Biomedical  engineering 
in  pediatric  cardiology  involves  study  of  the  electrical  activity  of  the  heart  and  heart  tis- 
sues in  animals  and  humans,  to  increase  the  basic  knowledge  of  their  normal  and  abnor- 
mal behavior.  Other  electrophysiological  systems  are  examined  through  the  application 
of  models  and  simulation  techniques.  The  ultrasound  imaging  laboratories  are  employed 
for  research  and  instruction  in  the  biomedical  application  of  this  important  technique. 
Ultrasound  instrumentation  measures  and  images  biological  tissue  structures,  and  the 
laboratories  are  equipped  with  a  variety  of  advanced  ultrasonic  imaging  instruments.  A 
transducer  fabrication  facility,  test  equipment  for  the  design  and  construction  of  advanced 
ultrasound  systems,  a  dedicated  VAX  11/780  computer  for  image  processing,  and  exten- 
sive video  recording  and  display  facilities  are  available.  Other  areas  of  research  and  in- 
struction in  medical  imaging  include  digital  angiography  and  MR  imaging.  The  bi- 
omechanics laboratory  is  equipped  to  measure  biomechanical  responses  of  tissues  and 
organs  and  gait  parameters,  and  to  test  protective  headgear  and  develop  new  prosthetic 
devices.  Additional  opportunities  are  available  in  biological  fluid  mechanics,  lipid  trans- 
port mechanisms,  and  biosensors. 

7.  Membranes.  An  introduction  to  the  elementary  properties  of  membranes,  both  elec- 
trical and  mechanical  from  a  mathematical  perspective,  with  some  computer  exercises. 
Intended  for  freshmen  who  are  prospective  biomedical  engineering  majors.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES) 
One  course.  Barr 

101.  Electrobiology.  The  electrophysiology  of  excitable  cells  from  a  quantitative  per- 
spective. Topics  include  the  ionic  basis  of  action  potentials,  the  Hodgkin-Huxley  model, 
impulse  propagation,  source-field  relationships,  and  an  introduction  to  functional  elec- 
trical stimulation.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisite:  Biomedical  Engineering  163  or  Electrical 
Engineering  62.  One  course.  Barr  or  Plonsey 

106.  Mass  and  Energy  Balances  in  Chemical  and  Biological  Systems.  Engineering 
problems  involving  material  and  energy  balances  taken  from  chemical  and  biochemical 
process  industries  and  mammalian  physiology.  Batch  and  continuous  reactive  systems 
in  the  steady  and  unsteady  state.  Humidification  processes.  Metabolism.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES) 
Prerequisite:  Chemistry  12.  One  course.  Clark 

110.  Introductory  Biomechanics.  Static  and  dynamic  analysis  of  biological  systems; 
analysis  of  gait  and  locomotion;  ballistocardiography;  biomechanical  aspects  of  various 
sport  activities,  diving,  and  jumping;  power,  work,  and  energy  concepts  applied  to  the 
human  body;  strength  and  properties  of  tissue;  and  injury  mechanisms  and  tolerance. 
(.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  32  and  Physics  51.  One  course.  McElhaney 

145.  Chemical  Thermodynamics.  Thermodynamic  properties  and  thermodynam- 
ic state.  Exchange  of  heat  and  work  in  quasi-equilibrium  processes.  Chemical  and  phase 
equilibria  of  multicomponent  mixtures.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite:  junior  standing.  One 
course.  Clark,  Daniels,  or  Truskey 

163, 164.  Biomedical  Electronics  and  Measurements.  A  study  of  the  basic  principles 
of  biomedical  electronics  and  measurements  with  emphasis  on  the  operational  perfor- 
mance and  selection  of  transducers,  instruments,  and  systems  for  biomedical  data  acqui- 
sition and  processing.  Selected  laboratory  work  emphasizes  the  measurements  of  specific 
physiological  events.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES  each)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  61.  One  course 
each.  Hammond,  Trahey,  or  von  Ramm 

171.  Signals  and  Systems.  Convolution,  deconvolution,  Fourier  series,  Fourier  trans- 
form, sampling,  and  the  Laplace  transform.  Continuous  and  discrete  formulations  with 
emphasis  on  computational  and  simulation  aspects  and  selected  biomedical  examples. 
(1.0  ES)  One  course.  Pilkington 

Biomedical  Engineering  (BME)         311 


191, 192.  Projects  in  Biomedical  Engineering.  For  seniors  who  express  a  desire  for 
such  work  and  who  have  shown  aptitude  for  research  in  one  area  of  biomedical  engineer- 
ing. Half  course  to  two  courses.  (.5  ED/.5  ES)  Variable  credit.  Staff 

201.  Electrophysiology.  The  electrophysiology  of  excitable  cells  from  a  quantitative 
perspective.  Topics  include  the  ionic  basis  of  action  potentials,  the  Hodgkin-Huxley  mod- 
el, impulse  propagation,  source-field  relationships,  and  an  introduction  to  functional  elec- 
trical stimulation.  Students  choose  a  relevant  topic  area  for  detailed  study  and  report. 
Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Biomedical  Engineering  101  or  equivalent.  (.25 
ED/75  ES)  One  course.  Ban  or  Plonsey 

205, 206.  Microprocessors  and  Digital  Instruments.  Design  of  microcomputer-based 
devices  including  both  hardware  and  software  considerations  of  system  design.  Prima- 
ry emphasis  on  hardware  aspects,  including  a  progression  through  initial  design,  pro- 
totype construction  in  the  laboratory,  testing  of  prototypes  to  locate  and  correct  faults, 
and  final  design  evaluation.  Evaluation  includes  examination  of  complexity,  reliability, 
and  cost.  Design  and  construction  oriented  toward  biomedical  devices  or  instruments 
that  include  dedicated  microcomputers,  usually  operating  in  real  time.  ( .5  ED/. 5  ES  each) 
Prerequisites:  for  205,  Engineering  51  and  Biomedical  Engineering  163, 164  or  equivalents; 
for  206,  satisfactory  work  in  205.  One  course  each.  Ban,  Hammond,  or  von  Ramm 

207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems.  An  introduction  to  the  modeling 
of  complex  biological  systems  using  principles  of  transport  phenomena  and  biochemi- 
cal kinetics.  Topics  include  the  conservation  of  mass  and  momentum  using  differential 
and  integral  balances;  rheology  of  Newtonian  and  non-Newtonian  fluids;  steady  and  tran- 
sient diffusion  in  reacting  systems;  dimensional  analysis;  homogeneous  versus  heter- 
ogeneous reaction  systems.  Biomedical  and  biotechnological  applications  are  discussed. 
( .25  ED/.75  ES)  C-L:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  207  and  Mechanical  Engineer- 
ing 207.  One  course.  Bryers,  Daniels,  or  Tniskey 

211.  Theoretical  Electrophysiology.  Advanced  topics  on  the  electrophysiological  be- 
havior of  nerve  and  striated  muscle.  Source-field  models  for  single-fiber  and  fiber  bun- 
dle lying  in  a  volume  conductor.  Forward  and  inverse  models  for  EMG  and  ENG.  Bido- 
main  model.  Model  and  simulation  for  stimulation  of  single-fiber  and  fiber  bundle. 
Laboratory  exercises  based  on  computer  simulation,  with  emphasis  on  quantitative  be- 
havior and  design.  Readings  from  original  literature.  (.5  ED/.5  ES)  Prerequisite:  Biomedical 
Engineering  101  or  201.  One  course.  Barrand  Plonsey 

212.  Theoretical  Electrocardiography.  Electrophysiological  behavior  of  cardiac  mus- 
cle. Emphasis  on  quantitative  study  of  cardiac  tissue  with  respect  to  propagation  and  the 
evaluation  of  sources.  Effect  of  junctions,  inhomogeneities,  anisotropy,  and  presence  of 
unbounded  extracellular  space.  Bidomain  models.  Study  of  models  of  arrhythmia,  fib- 
rillation, and  defibrillation.  Electrocardiographic  models  and  forward  simulations. 
Laboratory  exercises  based  on  computer  simulation,  with  emphasis  on  quantitative  be- 
havior and  design.  Readings  from  original  literature.  (.5ED/.5ES)Prerequisite:  Biomedical 
Engineering  101  or  201.  One  course.  Barrand  Plonsey 

215.  Biomedical  Materials  and  Artificial  Organs.  Chemical  structures,  processing 
methods,  evaluation  procedures,  and  regulations  for  materials  used  in  biomedical  ap- 
plications. Applications  include  implant  materials,  components  of  ex  vivo  circuits,  and 
cosmetic  prostheses.  Primary  emphasis  on  polymer-based  materials  and  on  optimiza- 
tion of  parameters  of  materials  which  determine  their  utility  in  applications  such  as  ar- 
tificial kidney  membranes  and  artificial  arteries.  (.5  ED/.5  ES)  Prerequisite:  Engineering 
83  or  Chemistry  151  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Mechanical  Engineering  215.  One 
course.  Clark 

216.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Cells  and  Organs.  Applications  of  the  principles  of  mass 
and  momentum  transport  to  the  analysis  of  selected  processes  of  biomedical  and  biotech- 

312         Courses  of  Instruction 


nological  interest.  Emphasis  placed  on  the  development  of  critical  analysis  of  models  of 
the  particular  transport  process.  Topics  discussed  include:  reaction-diffusion  process- 
es, transport  in  natural  and  artificial  membranes,  dynamics  of  blood  flow,  pharmacoki- 
netics, receptor-mediated  processes  and  macromolecular  transport,  normal  and  neoplas- 
tic tissue.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite:  Biomedical  Engineering  207  or  equivalent.  One 
course.  Truskey 

222.  Principles  of  Ultrasound  Imaging.  Propagation,  reflection,  refraction,  and 
diffraction  of  acoustic  waves  in  biologic  media.  Topics  include  geometric  optics,  physi- 
cal optics,  attenuation,  and  image  quality  parameters  such  as  signal-to-noise  ratio,  dy- 
namic range,  and  resolution.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  design  and  analysis  of  medical 
ultrasound  imaging  systems.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisites:  Physics  52  and  Mathematics  111. 
One  course,  von  Ramm 

230.  Biomechanics.  Basic  elements  of  mechanics  are  developed  with  application  in 
biomechanics.  Primary  emphasis  is  given  to  trauma  mechanisms,  injury  criteria,  and  hu- 
man protection .  Head  and  neck  injuries  and  helmet  design  are  discussed .  Case  studies 
from  product  liability  lawsuits  with  a  strong  biomechanics  context  are  discussed  in  a  semi- 
nar mode.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  One  course.  McElhaney 

233.  Modern  Diagnostic  Imaging  Systems.  The  underlying  concepts  and  instrumen- 
tation of  several  modern  medical  imaging  modalities.  Review  of  applicable  linear  systems 
theory  and  relevant  principles  of  physics.  Modalities  studied  include  X-ray  radiography 
(conventional  film-screen  imaging  and  modern  electronic  imaging),  computerized  tomog- 
raphy (including  the  theory  of  reconstruction),  and  nuclear  magnetic  resonance  imag- 
ing. (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Custna  or  Floyd 

235.  Acoustics  and  Hearing.  The  generation  and  propagation  of  acoustic  (vibration- 
al) waves  and  their  reception  and  interpretation  by  the  auditory  system .  Topics  under  the 
heading  of  generation  and  propagation  include  free  and  forced  vibrations  of  discrete  and 
continuous  systems,  resonance  and  damping,  and  the  wave  equation  and  solutions.  So 
that  students  may  understand  the  reception  and  interpretation  of  sound,  the  anatomy 
and  physiology  of  the  mammalian  auditory  system  are  presented;  and  the  mechanics  of 
the  middle  and  inner  ears  are  studied.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisites:  Physics  52  and 
Mathematics  111  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Trahex/ 

241.  Artificial  Intelligence  in  Medicine.  Basic  concepts  of  artificial  intelligence  (AI) 
and  in-depth  examination  of  medical  applications  of  AI.  Knowledge  of  heuristic  program- 
ming; brief  examination  of  classic  AI  programming  languages  (LISP  and  PROLOG)  and 
AI  programming;  rule-based  systems  and  cognitive  models.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  One  course. 
Hammond 

243.  Computers  in  Biomedical  Engineering.  An  in-depth  study  of  the  use  of  com- 
puters in  biomedical  applications.  Hardware,  software,  and  applications  programming. 
Data  collection,  analysis,  and  presentation  studied  within  application  areas  such  as 
monitoring,  medical  records,  computer-aided  diagnoses,  computer-aided  instruction, 
M.D.-assistance  programs,  laboratory  processing,  wave  form  analysis,  hospital  informa- 
tion systems,  and  medical  information  systems.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  One  course.  Hammond 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Biomedical  Engineering.  Advanced  subjects  related  to  pro- 
grams within  biomedical  engineering  tailored  to  fit  the  requirements  of  a  small  group. 
(.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

204.  Measurement  and  Control  of  Cardiac  Electrical  Events 


Biomedical  Engineering  (BME)         313 


THE  MAJOR 

The  major  requirements  are  included  in  the  minimum  total  of  thirty-four  courses  listed 
under  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements.  The  following  specific 
courses  must  be  included:  Biomedical  Engineering  101,  110, 163,  164,  and  207. 

Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  <ce> 

Professor  Vesilind,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Pas,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Professors  Haff,  Melosh,  Petroski,  S.  Utku,  and  J.  F.  Wilson;  Associate  Professors  Biswas, 
Bryers,  Hueckel,  Medina,  Peirce,  andReckhow;  Assistant  Professor  Faust;  Adjunct  Profes- 
sors Kranich  and  Saibel;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  B.  Utku 

A  civil  engineering  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Civil  and  environmental  engineering  is  one  of  the  broadest  of  the  engineering  dis- 
ciplines, extending  across  mathematics  and  the  natural  sciences,  including  physics,  bi- 
ology, and  chemistry,  and  emphasizing  the  social  and  management  sciences.  Civil  and 
environmental  engineers  develop  expertise  in  these  disciplines  to  research,  plan,  design, 
and  construct  solutions  to  problems  faced  in  modern  life  by  both  the  public  and  private 
sectors.  These  solutions  vary  widely  in  nature,  size,  and  scope;  space  satellites  and  launch- 
ing facilities,  offshore  structures,  environmental  controls  to  protect  public  health,  nuclear 
and  conventional  power  stations,  bridges,  dams,  buildings,  tunnels,  highways,  and  mass 
transportation  systems. 

Seven  major  specialty  areas  at  Duke  enjoy  national  and  international  reputations  for 
quality  at  both  the  undergraduate  and  graduate  levels  of  study: 

—environmental  engineering:  hazardous  waste  disposal,  solid  waste  processing,  bi- 
otechnology, and  water  supply  and  wastewater  treatment  to  protect  public  health  and 
the  environment; 

—mechanics:  the  behavior  of  solid  and  fluid  materials  under  selected  conditions  of 
loading  and  environment; 

—structural  engineering:  the  economical  and  safe  design  of  engineered  structures; 

—urban  and  regional  engineering:  a  broad  spectrum  of  integrated  land  and  city  plan- 
ning and  transportation  system  planning  and  engineering; 

—water  resources:  the  use,  preservation,  and  management  of  surface  and  ground- 
water supplies; 

— geotechnical  engineering:  the  interaction  between  structures  and  the  supporting 
soil  and  rock; 

—architectural  engineering:  interaction  between  engineering  design  and  artistic 
representation  of  structures. 

In  addition,  students  may  elect  a  general  program  in  civil  and  environmental  engineer- 
ing studies,  and/or  pursue  a  degree  with  a  double  major  in  civil  engineering  and  anoth- 
er department  at  Duke.  The  list  of  recently  completed  double  majors  indicates  the  diver- 
sity and  breadth  of  interests  shared  by  civil  and  environmental  engineers:  public  policy 
studies,  economics,  business,  French,  and  music.  Students  also  may  obtain  the  BSE  and 
MBA  degrees  in  five  years  through  a  special  program  of  study. 

The  Civil  and  Environmental  Program  at  Duke  is  supported  by  prominent  faculty  as 
well  as  modern  laboratory  and  instructional  facilities.  The  professors  in  the  Department 
of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  are  committed  to  quality  classroom  lectures  and 
laboratory  experiences  in  settings  which  encourage  student-student  and  student-faculty 
interactions.  The  same  professors  conduct  research  of  national  and  international  conse- 
quence. 

Laboratory  facilities  in  the  Department  are  comparable  to  those  found  in  other  ma- 
jor universities.  For  example,  computers  are  relied  upon  for  data  collection  and  analysis. 
Chemical  and  biological  testing  apparatus  are  utilized  in  the  laboratory  for  teaching  and 
research  activities,  and  electronic  measurement  equipment  is  designed,  constructed,  and 
applied  in  many  of  the  specialty  areas  mentioned  above. 

314        Courses  of  Instruction 


Students  in  the  Department  of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  may  spend  their 
junior  year  studying  at  University  College  London.  Courses  taken  under  this  program 
will  be  graded  and  counted  toward  the  Duke  BSE  degree.  Applications  should  be  made 
through  the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  the  department. 

Recent  graduates  from  the  Department  of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  have 
selected  from  a  wide  range  of  possible  career  paths.  Graduate  study  in  engineering  or 
in  such  fields  as  business  and  architecture  is  often  pursued  by  Duke  graduates.  Many  other 
graduates  accept  positions  with  major  corporations  as  well  as  federal,  state,  and  local 
government  agencies  as  design  engineers  and  project  managers. 

101.  Structural  Engineering  in  Perspective.  How  structures  work,  and  why  they 
sometimes  fail .  An  introduction  to  the  engineering  method,  especially  as  applied  to  the 
design  and  analysis  of  civil  engineering  structures.  Open  to  engineering  and  nonengineer- 
ing  students  alike.  (.5  ED/.5ES)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Petroski 

116.  Transportation  Engineering.  The  role  and  history  of  transportation.  Introduc- 
tion to  the  planning  and  design  of  multimodal  transportation  systems.  Principles  of  traffic 
engineering  and  route  location  and  design.  Planning  studies  and  economic  evaluation. 
(.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisites:  junior  or  senior  standing  and  consent  of  instructor  for  nonen- 
gineering  students.  One  course.  Pas 

122.  Fluid  Mechanics.  Physical  properties  of  fluids;  fluid-flow  concepts  and  basic 
equations;  continuity,  energy,  and  momentum  principles;  dimensional  analysis  and  dy- 
namic similitude;  viscous  effects;  applications  emphasizing  real  fluids.  Selected  labora- 
tory work.  (1.0  ES)  Corequisite:  Engineering  123.  One  course.  Medina 

123.  Water  Resources  Engineering.  Descriptive  and  quantitative  hydrology,  hydraulics 
of  pressure  conduits  and  measurement  of  flow,  compound  pipe  systems,  analysis  of  flow 
in  pressure  distribution  systems,  open  channel  flow,  reservoirs  and  distribution  system 
storage.  Groundwater  hydrology  and  well-hydraulics.  Probability  and  statistics  in  wa- 
ter resources.  Selected  laboratory  and  field  exercises,  computer  applications.  ( .  15  ED/.85 
ES)  Prerequisite:  Civil  Engineering  122.  One  course.  Medina 

124.  Environmental  Engineering.  Qualitative  and  quantitative  physical,  chemical, 
and  bacteriological  characterization  of  water  and  wastewater.  Introduction  to  water  treat- 
ment processes  and  wastewater  collection,  treatment  and  disposal  systems.  Air  pollu- 
tion control;  solid  and  hazardous  waste  management.  Laboratory  included.  Field  trips 
to  be  arranged.  (.75  ED/. 25  ES)  Prerequisite:  Civil  Engineering  123.  One  course.  Bnjers, 
Peirce,  or  Vesilind 

127.  Environmental  Pollution  Control.  A  study  of  the  environmental  causes  and  ef- 
fects of  air,  land,  and  water  pollution.  Interactions  between  the  environment  and  stress- 
es to  which  it  is  subjected  as  a  consequence  of  growth  and  concentration  of  populations 
and  their  increasing  demands  on  natural  resources.  Solid  waste,  recycling,  noise  pollu- 
tion, and  environmental  ethics.  Not  open  to  engineering  majors.  (1 .0  ES)  One  course.  Peirce 
or  Vesilind 

131.  Theory  of  Structures.  Application  of  mechanics  to  the  analysis  of  plane  and  space 
structures;  a  unified  treatment  of  statically  determinate  and  indeterminate  structural  sys- 
tems. (.15  ED/.85  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  103  and  Engineering  75.  One  course. 
Biswas  or  Melosh 

133.  Structural  Design  I.  Nonhomogenous  materials.  Determination  of  physical  and 
mechanical  properties  of  construction  materials.  Theory  and  design  of  compression  and 
flexural  members.  Emphasis  on  ultimate  strength  theory  for  concrete.  Timber  design  using 
mechanical  fasteners.  Laboratory  exercises  include  concrete  aggregate  evaluation,  con- 
crete mix  design,  and  structural  timber  tests.  (1 .0  ED)  Prerequisite:  Civil  Engineering  131 . 
One  course.  Bisioas 


Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  (CE)         315 


134.  Structural  Design  II.  Design  in  metals,  primarily  steel.  Properties  of  materials 
as  criteria  for  failure.  Tension,  compression,  and  flexural  members.  Bolted  and  welded 
connections,  including  eccentric  connections.  Built-up  members.  Design  by  elastic  and 
plastic  methods.  Selected  problems  to  include  computations  and  drawings.  (1.0  ED) 
Prerequisite:  Civil  Engineering  131.  One  course.  Biswas  orMelosh 

139.  Introduction  to  Soil  Mechanics.  Origin  and  composition  of  soils,  soil  structure. 
Flow  of  water  through  soils;  capillary  and  osmotic  phenomena .  Soil  behavior  under  stress; 
compressibility,  shear  strength.  Elements  of  mechanics  of  soil  masses  with  application 
to  problems  of  bearing  capacity  of  foundations,  earth  pressure  on  retaining  walls,  and 
stability  of  slopes.  Laboratory  included.  (.5  ED/.5  ES)  Prerequisite:  Civil  Engineering  122. 
One  course.  Hueckel 

141, 142.  Special  Topics  in  Civil  Engineering.  Study  arranged  on  a  special  topic  in 
which  the  instructor  has  particular  interest  and  competence.  Half  course  or  one  course 
each.  Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  Varia- 
ble credit.  Staff 

161.  Architectural  Engineering  I.  Analysis  of  the  building  through  the  study  of  its 
subsystems  (enclosure,  space,  structural,  environmental-control).  Building  materials  and 
their  principal  uses  in  the  enclosure  and  structural  subsystems.  System  and  material  selec- 
tion studies.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite:  Engineering  75  or  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  B.  Utku 

162.  Architectural  Engineering  II.  Design  and  integration  of  building  subsystems  (en- 
closure, space,  structural,  environmental-control)  in  the  design  of  a  medium-size  build- 
ing. (1.0  ED)  Prerequisite:  Civil  Engineering  161  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course. 
B.  Utku 

197, 198.  Projects  in  Civil  Engineering.  These  courses  may  be  taken  by  junior  and  sen- 
ior engineering  students  who  have  demonstrated  aptitude  for  independent  work.  Half 
course  or  one  course  each.  Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Under- 
graduate Studies.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

201.  Advanced  Mechanics  of  Solids.  Tensor  fields  and  index  notation.  Analysis  of 
states  of  stress  and  strain .  Conservation  laws  and  field  equations.  Constitutive  equations 
for  elastic,  viscoelastic,  and  elastic-plastic  solids.  Formulation  and  solution  of  simple  prob- 
lems in  elasticity,  viscoelasticity,  and  plasticity.  (1.0  ES)  One  course.  Hueckel  or  Petroski 

203.  Plasticity.  Inelastic  behavior  of  soils  and  engineering  materials.  Yield  criteria. 
Flow  rules.  Concepts  of  perfect  plasticity  and  plastic  hardening.  Methods  of  rigid- 
plasticity.  Limit  analysis.  Isotropic  and  kinematic  hardening.  Plastic  softening.  Diffused 
damage.  Thermo-plasticity.  Visco-plasticity.  (l.OES)Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental 
Engineering  201  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Hueckel 

204.  Plates  and  Shells.  Differential  equation  and  extremum  formulations  of  linear 
equilibrium  problems  of  Kirchhoffian  and  non-Kirchhoffian  plates  of  isotropic  and  or- 
thotropic  material.  Solution  methods.  Differential  equation  formulation  of  thin  shell  prob- 
lems in  curvilinear  coordinates;  membrane  and  bending  theories;  specialization  for  shal- 
low shells,  shells  of  revolution,  and  plates.  Extremum  formulation  of  shell  problems. 
Solution  methods.  (1.0  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  111  and  Engineering  75  or  135. 
One  course.  Utku 

205.  Elasticity.  Introduction  to  linear  theory  of  elasticity.  Constitutive  equations  for 
anisotropic  and  isotropic  elastic  solids.  Formulation  and  solution  of  torsion,  bending,  and 
flexure  problems.  Plane,  axisymmetric,  and  three-dimensional  problems.  (1.0  ES)  One 
course.  Petroski 


316        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems.  ( .25  ED/ .75  ES)  See  C-L:  Biomed- 
ical Engineering  207;  alsoC-L:  Mechanical  Engineering  207.  One  course.  Bryers,  Daniels, 
or  Truskey 

210.  Intermediate  Dynamics.  Comprehensive  treatment  of  space  kinematics,  kinetics 
of  particles  and  rigid  bodies;  generalized  coordinates  and  Lagrange's  equations;  introduc- 
tion to  stability,  nonlinear,  and  random  dynamic  analysis  of  flexible,  continuous  systems. 
(.25  ED/.75  ES)  C-L:  Mechanical  Engineering  210.  One  course.  Doivell 

212.  Mechanical  Behavior  and  Fracture  of  Materials.  Historical  perspective  on  struc- 
tural failure.  Fracture  mechanics  and  its  application  to  brittle  and  ductile  fracture,  and 
fatigue  in  structural  materials.  Analysis  of  load  spectra;  fatigue  crack  growth  calculations. 
(.25  ED/ .75  ES)  One  course.  Petroski 

215.  Engineering  Systems  Analysis.  Fundamental  concepts  and  tools  for  engineer- 
ing systems  analysis,  including  optimization  techniques  and  decision  analysis.  System 
definition  and  model  formulation,  optimization  by  calculus,  linear  programming,  integer 
programming,  separable  integer  programming,  nonlinear  programming,  network  anal- 
ysis, dynamic  programming,  and  decision  analysis.  Application  to  diverse  engineering 
systems.  (.25  ED/ .75  ES)  One  course.  Pas 

216.  Transportation  Planning  and  Policy  Analysis.  Issues  in  policy  planning  and  de- 
cision making  in  urban  and  rural  transportation  systems.  Transportation  legislation.  Pub- 
lic transportation  alternatives  with  emphasis  on  public  transit  and  paratransit  solutions. 
(1.0  ES)  Prerequisite:  (or  corequisite)  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  116  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  254.  One  course.  Pas 

217.  Transportation  Systems  Analysis.  The  transportation  systems  planning  proc- 
ess. Quantitative  analysis;  mathematical  modeling  and  computer  simulation  techniques 
for  short-  and  long-range  planning  and  evaluation  of  transportation  systems.  (1.0  ES) 
Prerequisite:  (or  corequisite)  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  116  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. One  course.  Pas 

218.  Engineering  Management  and  Project  Evaluation.  Statistical  analysis  and  eco- 
nomics. Data  organization,  distributions,  estimates  of  parameters,  hypothesis  testing, 
analysis  of  variance.  Economic  impact  assessment,  supply  and  demand  forecasting,  ben- 
efit/cost analysis,  economic  incentives,  public  and  private  finance,  input/output  analy- 
sis. (1.0  ES)  One  course.  Pence 

225.  Dynamic  Engineering  Hydrology.  Dynamics  of  the  occurrence,  circulation,  and 
distribution  of  water;  hydrometeorology,  geophysical  fluid  motions.  Precipitation,  sur- 
face runoff  and  stream  flow,  infiltration,  water  losses.  Hydrograph  analysis,  catchment 
characteristics,  hydrologic  instrumentation,  and  computer  simulation  models.  (1.0  ES) 
Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  122  or  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  Medina 

227.  Groundwater  Hydrology  and  Contaminant  Transport.  Review  of  surface  hydrol- 
ogy and  its  interaction  with  groundwater.  The  nature  of  porous  media,  hydraulic  con- 
ductivity, and  permeability.  General  hydrodynamic  equations  of  flow  in  isotropic  and 
anisotropic  media.  Water  quality  standards  and  contaminant  transport  processes: 
advective-dispersive  equation  for  solute  transport  in  saturated  porous  media.  Analyti- 
cal and  numerical  methods,  selected  computer  applications.  Deterministic  versus  stochas- 
tic models.  Applications:  leachate  from  sanitary  landfills,  industrial  lagoons  and  ponds, 
subsurface  wastewater  injection,  monitoring  of  groundwater  contamination.  Conjunc- 
tive surface-subsurface  models.  (.1  ED/.9ES)  Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  En- 
gineering 123  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Medina 

233.  Prestressed  Concrete  Design.  A  critical  review  of  research  and  recent  develop- 
ments in  prestressed  concrete  design.  Prestressed  tanks,  beams,  and  columns;  partial 

Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  (CE)         317 


prestressing  and  composite  design.  (1.0  ED)  Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental 
Engineering  133.  One  course.  Biswas 

235.  Foundation  Engineering.  An  introduction  to  methods  of  analysis,  design,  and 
construction  of  foundations.  Bearing  capacity  and  settlement  of  shallow  and  deep  foun- 
dations. Soil  exploration,  excavation  and  bracing,  drainage  and  stabilization,  and  under- 
pinning. Foundation  vibrations.  (1.0  ED)  Prerequisite:  Civil  Engineering  139.  One  course. 
Hueckel 

237.  Advanced  Soil  Mechanics.  Characterization  of  behavior  of  geomaterials.  Stress- 
strain  incremental  laws.  Nonlinear  elasticity,  hypo-elasticity,  plasticity  and  visco-plasticity 
of  geomaterials;  approximated  laws  of  soil  mechanics;  fluid-  saturated  soil  behavior;  cy- 
clic behavior  of  soils;  liquefaction  and  cyclic  mobility;  elements  of  soil  dynamics;  ther- 
mal effects  on  soils.  (1.0  ES)  Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  139  or 
equivalent.  One  course.  Hueckel 

240.  Fate  of  Organic  Chemicals  in  the  Environment.  Kinetic,  equilibrium,  and  ana- 
lytical approaches  applied  to  quantitative  description  of  processes  affecting  the  fate  of 
anthropogenic  and  natural  organic  compounds  in  ground,  surface,  and  atmospheric 
waters,  and  in  selected  treatment  processes,  including  sorption  phenomena,  gas  trans- 
fer, hydrolysis,  photochemistry,  oxidation-reduction,  andbiodegradation.  Sampling,  de- 
tection, identification,  and  quantification  of  organic  compounds  in  the  environment.  Gas 
and  liquid  chromatography  and  mass  spectrometry.  (1.0  ES)  Corequisite:  Civil  Engineer- 
ing 242  or  equivalent.  Spring,  odd-numbered  years.  C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental 
Studies  240.  One  course.  Dubay  and  Faust 

242.  Environmental  Chemistry.  Principles  of  chemical  kinetics  and  equilibria  applied 
to  quantitative  description  of  the  chemistry  of  lakes,  rivers,  oceans,  atmospheric  waters, 
groundwaters,  and  selected  treatment  processes.  Equilibrium,  steady  state  and  other  ki- 
netic models  applied  to  processes  such  as  the  carbonate  system,  coordination  chemis- 
try, precipitation  and  dissolution,  oxidation-  reduction,  photochemistry,  heterogeneous 
reactions,  gas  transfer,  and  some  aspects  of  atmospheric  chemistry.  Spring.  (1.0  ES) 
C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  242.  One  course.  Faust 

243.  Physicochemical  Unit  Operations  in  Water  Treatment.  Fundamental  bases  for 
design  of  water  and  waste  treatment  systems,  including  transport,  mixing,  sedimenta- 
tion and  filtration,  gas  transfer,  coagulation,  and  biotreatment  processes.  (.25  ED/ .75  ES) 
Prerequisite:  Engineering  24  or  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  124.  One  course. 
Bryers  or  Vesilind 

244.  Applied  Microbial  Processes.  Existing  and  novel  biological  processes  used  to 
treat  or  exploit  waste.  Concepts  of  microbiology,  chemical  engineering,  and  process  anal- 
ysis. Specific  biological  processes  such  as  aerobic  carbon  oxidation,  nitrification,  denitrif  i- 
cation,  methane  production,  biological  electricity  generation,  aerobic  digestion,  and 
wastewater  treatment  for  long  term  space  travel.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  One  course.  Bryers 

245.  Pollutant  Transport  Systems.  Distribution  of  pollutants  in  natural  waters  and  the 
atmosphere;  diffusive  and  advective  transport  phenomena  within  the  natural  environ- 
ment and  through  artificial  conduits  and  storage/treatment  systems.  Analytical  and  nu- 
merical prediction  methods.  (.1  ED/.9  ES)  Prerequisites:  Civil  and  Environmental  En- 
gineering 122  and  Mathematics  111  or  equivalents.  One  course.  Medina 

246.  Water  Supply  Engineering  Design.  The  study  of  water  resources  and  munici- 
pal water  requirements  including  reservoirs,  transmission,  treatment  and  distribution 
systems;  methods  of  collection,  treatment,  and  disposal  of  municipal  and  industrial 
wastewaters.  The  course  includes  the  preparation  of  a  comprehensive  engineering  re- 
port encompassing  all  aspects  of  municipal  water  and  wastewater  systems.  Field  trips  to 
be  arranged.  (1.0  ED)  Prerequisite:  Engineering  24  or  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 
124  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Vesilind 

318         Courses  of  Instruction 


248.  Solid  Waste  and  Resource  Recovery  Engineering.  Engineering  design  of  resource 
recovery  systems  including  traditional  and  advanced  technologies.  Sanitary  landfills  and 
incineration  of  solid  wastes.  Energy  recovery  and  recycling  processes.  Application  of  sys- 
tems analysis  to  collection  of  municipal  refuse.  Collection,  treatment,  and  disposal  of  solid 
wastes  from  wastewater  treatment.  (1 .0  ED)  Prerequisite :  Engineering  24  or  Civil  Engineer- 
ing 124.  One  course.  Vesilind 

249.  Control  of  Hazardous  and  Toxic  Waste.  Engineering  solutions  to  industrial  and 
municipal  hazardous  waste  management  problems.  Handling,  transportation,  storage, 
and  disposal  technologies.  Biological,  chemical,  and  physical  processes.  Upgrading  an 
abandoned  disposal  site.  Economic  and  regulatory  aspects.  Case  studies.  ( .25  ED/.75  ES) 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Peirce 

251.  Systematic  Engineering  Analysis.  Mathematical  formulation  and  numerical 
analysis  of  discrete  engineering  systems  with  emphasis  on  theory  of  structures.  Equilibri- 
um and  propagation  problems  in  continuum;  properties  of  these  systems  and  their  dis- 
cretization by  the  trial  functions  with  undetermined  parameters.  The  use  of  weighted 
residual  methods,  finite  elements,  and  finite  differences.  (1 .0  ES)  Prerequisite :  senior  or 
graduate  standing.  One  course.  S.  Utku 

254.  Applications  of  Finite  Element  Analysis.  Theory  of  element  and  material  models; 
models  of  metals,  rock,  reinforced  concrete,  wood,  glass,  soil,  water,  and  air;  analyses 
of  torsion  members,  shear  walls,  membranes,  plates,  shells,  solids,  and  compound  struc- 
tural systems;  analysis  of  soil-structure  and  fluid-structure  systems;  prediction  of  field 
heating,  seepage,  and  pollution .  ( .  1  ED/. 9  ES)  Prerequisite :  Civil  and  Environmental  En- 
gineering 251  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Melosh 

257.  Structural  Optimization.  Computer-aided  improvement  of  structural  designs; 
redesign  search  processes,  sensitivity  analysis,  integrity  analysis;  optimization  of  stat- 
ic, steady-state,  and  transient  response  systems;  minimization  of  structural  weight  and 
response  potentials  for  trusses,  frames,  and  continua.  (.65  ED/.35  ES)  One  course.  Melosh 

258.  Analysis  of  Dynamic  and  Nonlinear  Behavior  of  Structures.  Computation  of 
nonlinear  response  by  discretization;  models  for  simulation  of  geometric,  material,  and 
boundary  constraint  nonlinearities;  analysis  of  limit  loads,  bifurcations,  and  snap- 
through;  simulation  of  super-  elastic,  plastic,  visco-elastic,  and  slipping  materials;  predic- 
tion of  collapsing,  ballooning,  gapping,  metal  forming,  and  welding  behavior.  (1.0  ES) 
Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  251  or  consent  of  instructor.  One 
course.  Melosh  or  S.  Utku 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering.  Opportunity  for 
study  of  advanced  subjects  relating  to  programs  within  the  civil  and  environmental  en- 
gineering department  tailored  to  fit  the  requirements  of  a  small  group.  One  course.  Staff 

281.  Experimental  Systems.  Formulation  of  experiments;  Pi  theorem  and  principles 
of  similitude;  data  acquisition  systems;  static  and  dynamic  measurement  of  displacement, 
force,  and  strain;  interfacing  experiments  with  digital  computers  for  data  storage,  analy- 
sis, and  plotting.  Students  select,  design,  perform,  and  interpret  laboratory-scale  experi- 
ments in  areas  of  fluid  systems  including  environmental  engineering,  and  in  solid  sys- 
tems including  structural  and  basic  material  behavior.  (.3  ED/ .7  ES)  Prerequisite:  senior 
or  graduate  standing  in  engineering  or  the  physical  sciences.  One  course.  /.  F.  Wilson 

283.  Structural  Dynamics.  Formulation  of  dynamic  models  for  discrete  and  continu- 
ous structures,  normal  mode  analysis,  deterministic  and  stochastic  responses  to  shocks 
and  environmental  loading  (earthquakes,  winds,  and  waves),  introduction  to  nonlinear 
dynamic  systems,  analysis  and  stability  of  structural  components  (beams  and  cables  and 
large  systems  such  as  offshore  towers,  moored  ships,  and  floating  platforms).  (1.0  ES)  One 
course.  /.  F.  Wilson 

Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  (CE)         319 


COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
202.  Advanced  Mechanics  of  Solids  II 
226.  Operational  Hydrology 
232.  Reinforced  Concrete  Design 
234.  Advanced  Structural  Design  in  Metals 
236.  Earth  Structures 

238.  Rock  Mechanics 

239.  Physical  Properties  of  Soils 
247.  Air  Pollution  Control 

THE  MAJOR 

The  major  requirements  are  included  in  the  minimum  total  of  thirty-four  courses  listed 
under  the  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements. 

Electrical  Engineering  <ee> 

Professor  Casey  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Hacker,  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies; 
Professors  Fair,  Joines,  Kerr,  Marinos,  Nolte,  Pilkington,  Trivedi,  Wang,  and  T.  G.  Wilson; 
Associate  Professors  Dugan,  Kedem,  and  Massoud;  Assistant  Professors  Alexandrou, 
Board,  Dollas,  George,  Hansen,  and  Wong;  Professor  Emeritus  Owen;  Research  Assis- 
tant Professor  Frenzel;  Adjunct  Professors  Glomb  and  Stroscio;  Adjunct  Associate  Profes- 
sors Derby  and  Rebman;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professors  Goodwin-Johansson,  Kanopou- 
los,  Loeb,  and  Srrole;  Visiting  Professor  Trickey 

A  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

Electrical  engineering  is  a  broadly  based  discipline  dealing  with  the  processing,  con- 
trol, and  transmission  of  information  and  energy  by  making  use  of  electrical  and  elec- 
tromagnetic phenomena. 

The  flexibility  of  the  electrical  engineering  curriculum  permits  students  to  concen- 
trate in  such  areas  as  computer  engineering  and  digital  systems,  control  systems,  elec- 
tronic circuits  and  microelectronics,  signal  processing  and  communications,  and  elec- 
tromagnetic fields  and  microwaves.  Students  may  also  plan  a  double-major  program  with 
secondary  concentration  in  such  fields  as  computer  science,  biomedical  engineering, 
physics,  mathematics,  history,  public  policy  studies,  and  many  others.  Students  with  in- 
terests such  as  premedicine,  prelaw,  economics,  art,  music,  psychology,  and  social  sys- 
tems can  be  accommodated  within  the  curriculum  through  individually  designed 
programs. 

The  various  teaching  and  research  laboratories  in  the  department  provide  opportu- 
nities for  laboratory  and  project  work  in  areas  such  as  electronics,  digital  systems,  microe- 
lectronics and  microprocessors,  signal  analysis  and  adaptive  signal  processing,  power 
electronics,  microwaves  and  microwave-matter  interactions,  and  solid-state  properties 
of  materials.  These  laboratories  are  important  to  the  undergraduate  program  since  they 
permit  students  to  become  actively  acquainted  with  the  devices  and  techniques  of  mod- 
ern electrical  engineering  through  regularly  scheduled  experiments,  independent 
projects,  and  occasionally,  part-time  assistance  to  faculty  members  engaged  in  research. 

51,  52.  Undergraduate  Research  in  Electrical  Engineering.  An  elective  program  in 
which  undergraduate  students  participate  in  an  ongoing  program  of  research  with  elec- 
trical engineering  faculty  members.  The  research  topic  to  be  pursued  by  the  student  must 
be  discussed  with,  and  approved  by,  the  faculty  member  who  is  to  serve  as  the  research 
supervisor  prior  to  registration  for  the  course.  For  sophomores  only.  Half  course  each.  Staff 

320        Courses  of  Instruction 


61.  Introductory  Circuits  and  Systems.  Circuit  principles  for  linear  and  nonlinear  net- 
works, common  signal  waveforms,  natural  and  forced  response  of  linear  circuits.  Circuits 
in  the  AC  steady  state.  One-port  and  two-port  network  theorems,  transfer  functions,  block 
diagrams,  feedback.  Semiconductor  diodes,  transistors,  and  integrated  circuits.  (.25 
ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  32  and  Physics  51.  One  course.  Staff 

62.  Introductory  Electronics  and  Energy  Conversion.  Amplifiers:  biasing  circuits, 
large-signal  diode  and  transistor  models,  small-signal  multistage  and  feedback  amplifi- 
ers. Operational  amplifiers  and  analog  computers.  Energy  conversion  via  magnetic  fields 
and  circuits.  Transformers,  DC  and  AC  machines,  instrumentation,  and  automatic  con- 
trol. (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  61.  One  course.  Staff 

101, 102.  Undergraduate  Research  in  Electrical  Engineering.  For  juniors  only.  See 
Electrical  Engineering  51,  52.  Half  course  each.  Staff 

103.  Introduction  to  Nonlinear  Network  Theory.  Introduction  to  theory  and  tech- 
niques for  analysis  and  synthesis  of  nonlinear  circuits.  Characterization  of  2-,  3-,  and  n- 
terminal  nonlinear  network  elements.  Laws  for  interconnecting  elements  and  determining 
equilibrium  equations.  Operating  points,  driving-point  and  transfer-characteristic  plots. 
Graphical  and  numerical  analysis  and  synthesis  of  DC  and  AC  nonlinear  resistive  func- 
tional networks.  Nonautonomous  first-order  nonlinear  networks,  and  autonomous 
second-order  nonlinear  networks.  Some  laboratory  and  computer  simulations.  (.5  ED/. 5 
ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  61.  One  course.  T.  G.  Wilson 

112.  Fundamentals  of  Linear  System  Theory.  Fourier  series  and  transforms;  spec- 
tral analysis  applied  to  networks  and  modulation  systems.  Laplace  transforms  and  tran- 
sient response  of  systems;  transfer  functions,  poles  and  zeros,  stability.  Introduction  to 
Z-transforms  and  state  variable  models.  (1 .0  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  61 . 
One  course.  Staff 

132.  Statistical  and  Computational  Methods  in  Signal  Processing.  Introduction  to 
fundamental  concepts  of  signal  processing  for  both  deterministic  and  random  discrete- 
time  signals  in  noise.  Difference  equations,  sampling  theorem,  Z-transforms,  and  spec- 
tral analysis.  Detection  and  estimation  of  signals  in  noise.  Some  computer  simulations. 
(.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisites:  Biomedical  Engineering  171  or  Electrical  Engineering  112  and 
Mathematics  135  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Biomedical  Engineering  132.  One  course.  Nolte 

142.  Thermodynamics  of  Electrical  Processes.  A  study  of  those  aspects  of  classical 
and  statistical  thermodynamics  that  are  essential  for  an  understanding  of  the  thermal 
properties  of  electrical  materials  and  processes.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  ther- 
modynamics of  metals,  semiconductors,  and  superconductors.  (1.0  ES)  Prerequisites: 
Electrical  Engineering  112  and  Mathematics  104  or  111.  One  course.  Hacker 

143.  Introduction  to  Electromagnetic  Fields.  Review  of  vector  analysis.  Introduction 
to  Maxwell's  equations.  Electrostatic  and  magnetostatic  fields  and  their  sources.  Elec- 
tromagnetic power,  energy,  and  the  Poynting  theorem.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  104  or  111  and  Physics  52.  One  course.  Hacker  orjoines 

151, 152.  Undergraduate  Research  in  Electrical  Engineering.  For  seniors  only.  See 
Electrical  Engineering  51,  52.  Half  course  or  one  course  each.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

155, 156.  Special  Topics  in  Electrical  Engineering.  Study  of  selected  topics  in  electri- 
cal engineering  tailored  to  fit  the  requirements  of  a  small  group.  Half  course  or  one  course 
each.  Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  Varia- 
ble credit.  Staff 

157.  Introduction  to  Switching  and  Automata  Theory.  This  course  introduces  tech- 
niques for  the  analysis  and  design  of  combinational  and  sequential  networks.  Discrete 
mathematical  systems,  elements  of  code  theory,  threshold  logic,  functional  decomposi- 

Electrical  Engineering  (EE)        321 


tion,  minimum-complexity  combinational  and  sequential  networks,  asynchronous  and 
clocked  sequential  systems,  iterative  switching  structures,  Turing  machines,  fault  diag- 
nosis techniques.  Selected  laboratory  work.  Usually  open  to  juniors  and  seniors.  (.25 
ED/75  ES)  C-L:  Computer  Science  157.  One  course.  Strole 

160.  Digital  Electronics  and  Computer  Hardware.  The  basics  of  DC  and  AC  circuit 
analysis,  digital  circuitry,  MOS  devices  and  hybrid  designs,  timing  considerations.  Switch- 
ing characteristics  of  transistors  and  simple  amplifier  circuits.  Speed,  power,  fanin  and 
fanout,  and  cost  as  a  basis  of  comparison  of  different  logic  families.  Applications  to  digi- 
tal system  design.  Not  open  to  biomedical  or  electrical  engineering  majors.  (.25  ED/75 
ES)  Prerequisite:  Physics  52.  C-L:  Computer  Science  160.  One  course.  Dollas  or  Dagan 

161.  Electronic  Circuits.  Graphical  and  mathematical  modeling  of  electronic  devices 
such  as  diodes,  and  bipolar-junction  and  field-effect  transistors;  techniques  for  the  anal- 
ysis and  design  of  electronic  circuits  with  emphasis  on  large-signal  and  small-signal 
methods;  applications  of  these  methods  to  particular  circuits,  including  regulators,  bias- 
point  stability,  amplifiers,  and  switching  circuits;  computer  simulation  of  electronic  cir- 
cuits using  SPICE.  Three  class  sessions  and  one  computation  or  laboratory  session.  (75 
ED/. 25  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  112.  One  course.  George 

162.  Advanced  Analog  Electronic  Circuits.  Feedback  and  operational  amplifiers:  a 
study  of  feedback  analysis,  stability  design,  circuits;  bipolar  junction  transistor  and  MOS 
operational  amplifier  analyses,  stability  techniques,  noise,  and  other  topics.  Laboratory 
and  computer  simulation  work.  ( 75  ED/.  25  ES)  Prerequisite :  Electrical  Engineering  161 . 
One  course.  Derbi/and  George 

173, 174.  Projects  in  Electrical  Engineering.  A  course  which  may  be  undertaken  only 
by  seniors  who  are  enrolled  in  the  graduation  with  distinction  program  or  who  show  spe- 
cial aptitude  for  individual  project  work.  Elective  for  electrical  engineering  majors.  Half 
course  to  two  courses  each .  Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies. 
Variable  credit.  Staff 

186.  Fundamentals  of  Signal  Processing  and  Communications.  The  fundamentals 
of  signal  representation  and  system  characterization  used  in  digital  signal  processing  and 
communications.  Linear  time-invariant  systems  and  sampling  theory.  Probability:  ran- 
dom variables,  probability  density  functions,  expectation,  moments,  auto  and  cross-  corre- 
lation, transformation  of  random  variables.  Communication  systems:  basic  concepts  in 
amplitude  modulation,  frequency  division  multiplexing,  amplitude  shift  keying,  pulse 
code  modulation,  matched  filtering.  Discrete-time  signal  processing:  discrete-time  sys- 
tems, response  with  noisy  excitation,  introduction  to  digital  filter  design,  discrete  Fouri- 
er transform,  fast  Fourier  transform.  Applications  to  areas  such  as  image,  sonar/ radar, 
or  speech.  (.25  ED/75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineering  112  and  Mathematics  135 
or  Statistics  200,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Alexandrou,  Hansen,  Kerr,  or  Nolte 

187.  Digital  Telecommunications.  Examination  of  existing  telephone  networks  in  the 
U.S.  with  emphasis  on  the  transition  from  analog  to  digital  systems.  Sequential  process- 
es of  encoding,  transmission,  switching,  and  network  hierarchy.  Consideration  of  the 
problems  which  must  be  solved  in  the  transition  from  analog  to  digital  networks.  (.5  ED/.5 
ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  186.  One  course.  Glomb 

199.  Linear  Control  Systems.  Analysis  and  design  of  feedback  control  systems.  Block 
diagram  and  signal  flow  graph  system  models.  Servomechanism  characteristics,  steady- 
state  errors,  sensitivity  to  parameter  variations  and  disturbance  signals.  Time  domain  per- 
formance specifications.  Stability.  Root  locus,  Nyquist,  and  Bode  analysis;  design  of  com- 
pensation circuits;  closed  loop  frequency  response  determination.  Introduction  to  time 
domain  analysis  and  design.  (.5  ED/.5  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  112  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  One  course.  Kerr  or  T.  G.  Wilson 

322        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


201.  Digital  Processing  of  Speech  Signals.  Detailed  treatment  of  the  theory  and  ap- 
plication of  digital  speech  processing.  Modeling  of  the  speech  production  system  and 
speech  signals;  speech  processing  methods;  digital  techniques  applied  in  speech  trans- 
mission, speech  synthesis,  speech  recognition,  and  speaker  verification.  Acoustic-  pho- 
netics, digital  speech  modeling  techniques,  LPC  analysis  methods,  speech  coding  tech- 
niques. Application  case  studies:  synthesis,  vocoders,  DTW  (dynamic  time 
warping)/HMM  (hidden  Markov  modeling)  recognition  methods,  speaker  verifica- 
tion/identification. (.25  ED/ .75  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  206  or  equivalent 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Hansen 

202.  Digital  Communication  Systems.  Transmission  of  pulse  signals  over  analog 
channels  at  baseband  and  high  frequency.  Effects  of  channel  amplitude  and  phase  dis- 
tortion, multipath,  and  noise.  Typical  signaling  formats  and  their  autocorrelation  func- 
tions and  power  spectra.  Theory  and  design  of  adaptive  transversal  filters  for  the  elimi- 
nation of  intersy  mbol  interference.  Design  of  digital  transversal  matched  filters  to  reduce 
error  probabilities  in  the  presence  of  noise.  Optimum  pulse  shaping  techniques  and  Ny- 
quist  channel  characteristics.  Discrete  Fourier  transforms,  FFTs,  and  their  relation  to  con- 
tinuous Fourier  transforms.  Introduction  to  the  channel  characteristics  and  sources  of 
noise  in  optical  fiber  channels.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineering  186  and 
Mathematics  135  or  Electrical  Engineering  203,  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Kerr 

203.  Random  Signals  and  Noise.  Introduction  to  mathematical  methods  of  describ- 
ing and  analyzing  random  signals  and  noise.  Review  of  basic  probability  theory;  joint, 
conditional,  and  marginal  distributions;  random  processes.  Time  and  ensemble  averages, 
correlation,  and  power  spectra.  Optimum  linear  smoothing  and  predicting  filters.  In- 
troduction to  optimum  signal  detection  and  parameter  estimation .  (1 .0  ES)  One  course. 
Kerr  or  Nolte 

204.  Computer  Network  Architecture.  The  architecture  of  computer  communication 
networks  and  the  hardware  and  software  required  to  implement  the  protocols  that  de- 
fine the  architecture.  Basic  communication  theory,  transmission  technology,  private  and 
common  carrier  facilities.  International  standards.  Satellite  communications  and  local 
area  networks.  Performance  analysis  and  modeling  of  communication  networks.  (.25 
ED/75  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  157.  C-L:  Computer  Science  204.  One 
course.  Strole 

205.  Signal  Detection  and  Extraction  Theory.  Introduction  to  signal  detection  and 
information  extraction  theory  from  a  statistical  decision  theory  viewpoint.  Subject  areas 
covered  within  the  context  of  a  digital  environment  are  decision  theory,  detection  and  es- 
timation of  known  and  random  signals  in  noise,  estimation  of  parameters  and  adaptive 
recursive  digital  filtering,  and  decision  processes  with  finite  memory.  Applications  to 
problems  in  communication  theory.  ( .5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite :  Electrical  Engineering  203 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Nolte 

206.  Digital  Signal  Processing.  Introduction  to  the  fundamentals  of  processing  sig- 
nals by  digital  techniques  with  applications  to  practical  problems.  Discrete  time  signals 
and  systems,  elements  of  the  Z-transform,  discrete  Fourier  transforms,  digital  filter  de- 
sign techniques,  fast  Fourier  transforms,  and  discrete  random  signals.  ( .5  ED/. 5  ES)  One 
course.  Nolte 

207.  Fault-Tolerant  and  Testable  Computer  Systems.  Faults  and  failure  mechanisms, 
test  generation  techniques  and  diagnostic  program  development  for  detection  and  loca- 
tion of  faults  in  digital  networks;  design  for  testability,  redundancy  techniques,  self- 
checking  and  fail-safe  networks,  fault-tolerant  computer  architectures.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES) 
Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  157  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Computer  Science  207.  One 
course.  Marinos 


Electrical  Engineering  (EE)        323 


208.  Digital  Computer  Architecture  and  Design.  Structural  organization  and  hard- 
ware design  of  digital  computer  systems.  Arithmetic  unit,  switching  matrices,  memory 
organization,  central  processing  unit  (CPU),  I/O  unit,  and  microprogram  control.  Detailed 
design  and  simulation  of  a  general-purpose  computer  system.  Computer  systems  based 
on  cellular  structures,  hardware  compilers,  and  parallel  processing  architectures  are  also 
discussed.  (.75  ED/.25  ES)  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineering  157  and  Computer  Science 
104  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Computer  Science  208.  One  course.  Marinos 

209.  Microprocessor  Fundamentals  and  Applications.  Various  state-of-the-art 
microprocessor  chips  and  their  associated  instruction  sets;  microcomputer  architectures; 
comparative  study  of  various  microprocessor  designs;  microprocessor-based  system  de- 
sign illustrated  by  several  carefully  selected  design  projects.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisites: 
Electrical  Engineering  157  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Computer  Science  209.  One 
course.  George 

210.  Introduction  to  VLSI  Systems.  A  first  course  in  VLSI  design  with  CMOS  tech- 
nologies. A  study  of  devices,  circuits,  fabrication  technology,  logic  design  techniques,  sub- 
system design  and  system  architecture.  Modeling  of  circuits  and  subsystems.  Testing  of 
gates,  subsystems  and  chips,  and  design  for  testability.  The  fundamentals  of  full-custom 
design,  and  some  semi-custom  design.  Prerequisites:  logic  design  (Computer 
Science/Electrical  Engineering  157  or  equivalent),  and  electronics  (EE 161,  or  CPS/EE 160, 
or  equivalent).  C-L:  Computer  Science  210.  One  course.  Dollas  orKedem 

211.  Quantum  Mechanics.  Wave  mechanics  and  elementary  applications,  free  par- 
ticle motion,  Schrodinger  equation,  approximation  methods.  (1.0  ES)  One  course.  Staff 

213.  Modern  Optics.  Optical  processes  including  the  propagation  of  light,  coherence, 
interference,  and  diffraction.  Consideration  of  the  optical  properties  of  solids  with  ap- 
plications of  these  concepts  to  lasers  and  modern  optical  devices.  ( .25  ED/ .75  ES)  C-L:  Phys- 
ics 185.  One  course.  Guenther  or  Hacker 

214.  Introduction  to  Solid-State  Physics.  Discussion  of  solid-state  phenomena  includ- 
ing crystalline  structures,  thermal  properties,  free  electron  theory  of  metals,  and  band 
theory  of  semiconductors  with  emphasis  on  understanding  the  electrical,  magnetic,  and 
optical  properties  of  solids.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisite:  Physics  161  or  equivalent.  C-L: 
Physics  214.  One  course.  Hacker 

216.  Devices  for  Integrated  Circuits.  Basic  operating  concepts  of  the  devices  that  are 
used  in  integrated  circuits:  Schottky-barriers,  ohmic  contacts,  p-n  junctions,  bipolar  tran- 
sistors, and  Si  MOS  capacitors  and  field-effect  transistors.  Basic  MOS  logic  circuits.  Select- 
ed laboratory  work.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  One  course.  Casey 

218.  Integrated  Circuit  Engineering.  Basic  processing  techniques  and  layout  tech- 
nology for  integrated  circuits.  Photolithography,  diffusion,  oxidation,  ion  implantation, 
and  metallization.  Design,  fabrication,  and  testing  of  integrated  circuits.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES) 
Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  216.  One  course.  Casey  or  Fair 

219.  Digital  Integrated  Circuits.  Analysis  and  design  of  digital  integrated  circuits. 
MOSFET  and  bipolar  devices.  SPICE  models.  Major  logic  families  such  as  NMOS,  CMOS, 
TTL,  ECL,  and  PL  as  well  as  regenerative  logic  circuits  and  memories.  Circuit  design  con- 
siderations for  LSI  and  VLSI.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineering  157  and 
216.  One  course.  Massoud 

225.  Microwave  Electronic  Circuits.  Microwave  circuit  analysis  and  design  techniques. 
Properties  of  planar  transmission  lines  for  integrated  circuits.  Matrix  and  computer-aided 
methods  for  analysis  and  design  of  circuit  components.  Analysis  and  design  of  input, 
output,  and  interstage  networks  for  microwave  transistor  amplifiers  and  oscillators.  (.5 
ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  161  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Joines 


324         Courses  of  Instruction 


234.  Power  Electronics:  High-Power  Circuits.  Basic  principles  of  analysis  and  design 
of  electronic  power  control  and  conversion  circuits  with  particular  emphasis  on  thyris- 
tor  (for  example,  SCRs,  TRIACs)  circuits.  Characteristics  of  high-power  semiconductors, 
commutating  circuits,  AC  voltage  controllers,  AC-to-AC  controlled  rectifiers,  DC-to-DC 
converters,  DC-to-AC  inverters,  AC-to-AC  converters.  Laboratory.  (.75  ED/. 25  ES)  Prereq- 
uisite: Electrical  Engineering  161  or  equivalent.  One  course.  T.  G.  Wilson 

235.  Nonlinear  Magnetic  and  Semiconductor  Power  Converters.  Nonlinear  magnetic 
and  semiconductor  switching  characteristics  for  transient  and  steady-state  analysis  of 
power  electronic  circuits.  Design  of  saturable  and  nonsarurating  magnetic  devices.  State- 
plane  analysis  of  negative-resistance  oscillators  and  self -oscillating  inverters.  Laborato- 
ry. (.75  ED/. 25  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  161  or  equivalent.  One  course. 
T.  G.  Wilson 

236.  Energy-Storage  Power  Converters.  Analysis  and  design  of  switch-mode  electronic 
power  converters  utilizing  energy-storage  principles.  Determination  of  large-signal  and 
small-signal  dynamic  response  and  stability  of  closed-loop  regulated  converters.  Exten- 
sive use  of  computer-aided  analysis,  design  and  measurement  techniques.  Laboratory. 
( .75  ED/.  25  ES)  Prerequisite :  Electrical  Engineering  161  or  equivalent .  One  course.  T.  G. 
Wilson 

241.  Linear  Systems.  Modeling  of  multiple  input-output  linear  systems  in  the  frequen- 
cy and  time  domains.  Matrix  differential  and  difference  equations  and  their  solutions; 
state  variables.  Digital  simulation  of  differential  systems.  Fourier  analysis  of  signals  and 
systems.  Transform  techniques  applied  to  state  variable  models.  State-space  models  of 
distributed  systems.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  One  course.  Kerr  or  Wang 

250.  Introduction  to  Robotics.  Fundamental  notions  in  robotics,  basic  configurations 
of  manipulator  arm  designs,  coordinate  transformations,  control  of  robot  actions,  robot 
programming,  artificial  intelligence;  machine  vision,  force,  touch,  and  other  sensory  sys- 
tems; selected  laboratory  assignments.  (.25  ED/ .75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineer- 
ing 112  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Wang 

251.  Pattern  Classification  and  Recognition.  Parameter  estimation  and  supervised 
learning,  nonparametric  techniques,  linear  discriminant  functions,  clustering,  language 
theory  related  to  pattern  recognition,  examples  from  areas  such  as  character  and  severe 
weather  recognition,  classification  of  community  health  data,  recognition  of  geometri- 
cal configurations,  algorithms  for  recognizing  low  resolution  touch-sensor  array  signa- 
tures and  3-D  objects.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Wang 

252.  Computer  Systems  Organization.  See  C-L:  Computer  Science  252.  One  course. 
Patrick  or  Trivedi 

253.  Digital  Control  Systems.  Review  of  traditional  techniques  used  for  the  design 
of  discrete-time  control  systems;  introduction  of  "nonclassical"  control  problems  of  in- 
telligent machines  such  as  robots.  Limitations  of  the  assumptions  required  by  tradition- 
al design  and  analysis  tools  used  in  automatic  control.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisite:  Elec- 
trical Engineering  112.  One  course.  Myers 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Electrical  Engineering.  Opportunity  for  study  of  advanced 
subjects  related  to  programs  within  the  electrical  engineering  department  tailored  to  fit 
the  requirements  of  a  small  group.  Prerequisites:  consent  of  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies  and  of  supervising  instructor.  One  course.  Staff 

271.  Electromagnetic  Theory.  The  classical  theory  of  Maxwell's  equations;  electrostat- 
ics, magnetostatics,  boundary  value  problems  including  numerical  solutions,  currents 
and  their  interactions,  and  force  and  energy  relations.  Three  class  sessions.  (.25  ED/.75 
ES)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Hacker  orfoines 


Electrical  Engineering  (EE)        325 


272.  Electromagnetic  Communication  Systems.  Review  of  fundamental  laws  of  Max- 
well, Gauss,  Ampere,  and  Faraday.  Elements  of  waveguide  propagation  and  antenna  radi- 
ation. Analysis  of  antenna  arrays  by  images.  Determination  of  gain,  loss,  andnoise  tem- 
perature parameters  for  terrestrial  and  satellite  electromagnetic  communication  systems. 
(.5  ED/.5  ES)  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  164  or  271.  One  course.  Joines 

273.  Optical  Communication  Systems.  Mathematical  methods,  physical  ideas,  and 
device  concepts  of  optoelectronics.  Maxwell's  equations,  and  definitions  of  energy  den- 
sity and  power  flow.  Transmission  and  reflection  of  plane  waves  at  interfaces.  Optical  reso- 
nators, waveguides,  fibers,  and  detectors  are  also  presented.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequi- 
site: Electrical  Engineering  143  or  equivalent.  One  course.  Joines 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
185.  Pulse  and  Digital  Electronics 
188.  Electrical  Energy  Systems 
215.  Semiconductor  Physics 
217.  Lasers 

222.  Nonlinear  Analysis 
224.  Advanced  Electronic  Circuits 

226.  Modeling  and  Computer-Aided  Analysis  of  Electronic  Systems 

227.  Network  Synthesis 

243.  Advanced  Linear  Systems  Theory 

THE  MAJOR 

The  major  requirements  are  included  in  the  minimum  total  of  34  courses  listed  un- 
der the  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements.  The  electrical  engineer- 
ing department  requires  the  equivalent  of  4. 25  engineering  design  and  8.50  engineering 
science  courses. 

Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science  (ME) 

Professor  Hochmuth,  Chairman;  Assistant  Professor  Buzzard,  Director  of  Undergraduate 
Studies;  Professors  Bejan,  Chaddock,  Cocks,  Dowell,  Garg,  Gosele,  Harman,  Pearsall, 
Shaughnessy,  Shepard,  and  Tan;  Associate  Professors  Bliss,  Jones,  Quinlan,  and  Wright; 
Assistant  Professors  Cherry,  Georgiadis,  Knight,  and  Needham;  Research  Assistant 
Professor  Tran-Son-Tay;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Wu;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professors 
Hart,  Jenkins,  and  Lind 

A  mechanical  engineering  major  is  available  in  this  department. 

The  profession  of  mechanical  engineering  began  during  the  industrial  revolution 
when  mankind  learned  how  to  use  the  energy  contained  in  coal  and  oil  to  perform  use- 
ful work.  The  early  mechanical  engineers  designed  the  machine  tools  and  the  shafts,  pul- 
leys, gears,  cams,  pistons,  cylinders,  crankshafts,  boilers,  turbines,  and  generators  for 
transportation  and  manufacturing  in  the  eighteenth  and  nineteenth  centuries.  These  early 
engineers  also  discovered  a  new  branch  of  physics,  called  thermodynamics,  which  puts 
a  definite  limit  on  just  how  much  energy  can  be  converted  into  useful  work.  Thus,  even 
at  its  beginning,  mechanical  engineering  involved  both  science  and  the  art  of  design. 

Modern  mechanical  engineering  contains  all  of  its  historical  elements  plus 
microprocessors  and  computers  to  aid  in  design  and  analysis  and  to  create  "smart" 
machines  and  robots.  Also,  in  a  world  of  expanding  population  and  shrinking  natural 

326        Courses  of  Instruction 


resources,  modern  mechanical  engineers  must  strive  to  minimize  any  adverse  impacts 
of  their  machines  and  power  plants  on  the  environment  by  minimizing  the  consumption 
of  energy  and  the  production  of  pollutants.  Finally,  they  must  be  able  to  analyze  failures 
and  eliminate  them  through  rational  design  and  selection  of  materials. 

The  rapid  change  of  our  technological  society  requires  that  engineering  students  learn 
to  think  in  a  fundamental  way  so  they  can  grow,  develop,  and  adapt  throughout  life.  To 
accomplish  this,  students  of  mechanical  engineering  first  study  the  "basics":  mathematics, 
including  advanced  applied  mathematics;  physics,  including  classical  mechanics,  dynam- 
ics, and  electromagnetics;  chemistry;  the  humanities;  and  the  social  sciences.  Courses 
in  the  mechanical  engineering  sciences  serve  as  a  connecting  link  between  the  basic  sub- 
jects and  design.  These  engineering  sciences  include  thermodynamics,  solid  and  fluid 
mechanics,  heat  transfer,  and  materials  science.  In  order  to  learn  how  to  acquire  and  proc- 
ess information  and  create  smart  machines,  students  also  take  courses  in  electronics,  in- 
strumentation and  measurements,  and  modeling  and  control  of  dynamic  systems.  Finally, 
students  use  their  knowledge  in  advanced  courses  in  design.  Students  may  take  as  elec- 
tives  advanced  200-level  courses  in  thermodynamics,  fluid  mechanics,  lubrication,  heat 
transfer,  acoustics,  dynamics  and  control,  biochemical  engineering,  corrosion,  electronic 
materials,  polymer  science,  physical  metallurgy,  and  expert  systems.  The  department  has 
a  number  of  research  and  teaching  laboratories  in  these  areas  of  study. 

11, 12.  Undergraduate  Research  in  Mechanical  Engineering.  An  elective  program 
in  which  undergraduate  students  participate  in  an  ongoing  program  of  research  with 
mechanical  engineering  faculty  members.  The  research  topic  pursued  by  the  student  is 
arranged  by  mutual  agreement  between  the  student  and  the  participating  faculty  mem- 
ber. For  freshmen  only.  Quarter  course  each.  Staff 

102.  Thermodynamics  II.  Application  of  the  laws  of  thermodynamics  to  gas  and  va- 
por cycles.  Compressor,  turbine,  and  internal  combustion  engine  design  and  perfor- 
mance. Refrigeration  systems  and  analysis  and  applications  in  air  conditioning.  Aircraft 
propulsion  system  performance.  Thermodynamics  of  direct  energy  conversion  devices. 
(.6  ED/.4  ES)  Prerequisite:  Engineering  101.  One  course.  Harman 

113.  Introduction  to  Electronic  Materials.  The  fundamental  relationships  between 
structure  and  the  electronic  properties  of  materials.  Emphasis  on  the  interrelationship 
of  solid  state  chemistry  and  the  control  and  prediction  of  concomitant  electronic  proper- 
ties. Materials  preparation  and  characterization  methods.  (.25  ED/75  ES)  Prerequisite: 
Engineering  83.  One  course.  G'dsele 

115.  Failure  Analysis  and  Prevention.  A  study  and  analysis  of  the  causes  of  failure 
in  engineering  materials  and  the  diagnosis  of  those  causes.  Elimination  of  failures  through 
proper  material  selection,  treatment,  and  use.  Case  histories.  Examination  of  fracture  sur- 
faces. Laboratory  investigations  of  different  failure  mechanisms.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequi- 
sites: Engineering  75  and  83  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Jones,  Cocks,  orPcarsall 

120.  Engineering  Instrumentation  and  Measurements.  Analysis,  design,  and  appli- 
cation of  instrumentation.  Error  analysis  and  propagation.  Experimental  laboratory  with 
PCXT based  measurement  and  data  acquisition,  analysis,  and  graphic  display.  (.25  ED/ .75 
ES)  Corequisite:  Engineering  130.  One  course.  Buzzard 

126.  Fluid  Mechanics.  An  introductory  course  emphasizing  the  application  of  the 
principles  of  conservation  of  mass,  momentum,  and  energy  to  a  fluid  system.  Physical 
properties  of  fluids,  dimensional  analysis  and  similitude,  viscous  effects  and  integral 
boundary  layer  theory,  subsonic  and  supersonic  flows,  normal  shock  waves.  Selected 
laboratory  work.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Corequisite:  Engineering  101  and  123.  One  course.  Knight 
or  Shaughnessy 

141.  Mechanical  Design.  A  study  of  practical  aspects  of  mechanical  design  includ- 
ing conceptualization,  specifications,  and  selection  of  mechanical  elements.  The  design 

Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science  (ME)         327 


and  application  of  mechanical  components  such  as  gears,  cams,  bearings,  springs,  and 
shafts.  Practice  in  application  of  the  design  process  through  design  projects.  (1.0  ED) 
Prerequisite:  Mechanical  Engineering  115.  One  course.  Wright 

150.  Heat  and  Mass  Transfer.  A  rigorous  development  of  the  laws  of  mass  and  ener- 
gy transport  as  applied  to  a  continuum.  Energy  transfer  by  conduction,  in  laminar  and 
turbulent  flow  inside  and  outside  of  tubes,  and  by  radiation.  Application  to  heat  ex- 
changers, thermal  power  equipment,  and  heat  transfer  in  the  environment.  Introduc- 
tion to  the  principles  of  molecular  diffusion  and  convective  mass  transfer.  Use  of  the  anal- 
ogies between  mass,  momentum,  and  energy  transfer  in  problem  solving.  Selected 
laboratory  work.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mechanical  Engineering  126  and 
Mathematics  111.  One  course.  Chaddock,  Georgiadis,  or  Hochmuth 

153.  Heating,  Air  Conditioning,  and  Refrigeration.  Principles  of  thermodynamics, 
heat  transfer,  and  fluid  flow  applied  to  comfort  and  industrial  air  conditioning.  Cycles 
and  equipment  for  heating,  cooling,  and  humidity  control.  Air  transmission  and  distri- 
bution. Modern  vapor  compression,  absorption,  and  low  temperature  refrigeration  cy- 
cles and  systems.  (.8  ED/. 2  ES)  Prerequisite:  Engineering  101.  One  course.  Staff 

160.  Mechanical  Systems  Design.  An  integrative  design  course  addressing  both  crea- 
tive and  practical  aspects  of  the  design  of  systems.  Development  of  the  creative  design 
process,  including  problem  formulation  and  needs  analysis,  feasibility,  legal,  economic 
and  human  factors,  aesthetics,  safety,  synthesis  of  alternatives,  and  design  optimization. 
Application  of  design  methods  through  several  projects  including  a  term  design  project. 
(1.0  ED)  Prerequisites:  Mechanical  Engineering  141  and  150.  One  course.  Staff 

165, 166.  Special  Topics  in  Mechanical  Engineering.  Study  arranged  on  a  special  en- 
gineering topic  in  which  the  faculty  has  particular  interest  and  competence  as  a  result 
of  research  and  professional  activities.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Half  course  or  one  course  each. 
Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies.  Variable  cred- 
it. Staff 

183.  Power  Generation.  Basic  concepts  of  thermodynamics,  heat  transfer,  and  fluid 
flow  applied  to  power  generation  processes.  Nuclear  reaction  theory  and  reactor  tech- 
nology; fossil  fuel  combustion  theory  and  modern  boiler  practice.  Power  plant  ancillary 
equipment  and  processes.  Design  considerations  and  analyses  include  economic  and  en- 
vironmental factors.  (.6  ED/ .4  ES)  One  course.  Harman 

198.  Projects  in  Mechanical  Engineering.  This  course  may  be  assigned  by  the  Chair- 
man of  the  department  to  outstanding  seniors  who  express  a  desire  for  such  work  and 
who  have  shown  aptitude  for  research  in  one  distinct  field  of  mechanical  engineering. 
( .75  ED/. 25  ES)  Half  course  to  two  courses.  Prerequisites:  B  average  and  senior  standing. 
Variable  credit.  Staff 

202.  Engineering  Thermodynamics.  Axiomatic  formulations  of  the  first  and  second 
laws.  General  thermodynamic  relationships  and  properties  of  real  substances.  Energy, 
availability,  and  second  law  analysis  of  energy  conversion  processes.  Reaction  and  mul- 
tiphase equilibrium.  Power  generation.  Low  temperature  refrigeration  and  the  third  law 
of  thermodynamics.  Thermodynamic  design.  (.3  ED/.7  ES)  One  course.  Bejan 

205.  Biochemical  Engineering.  Mathematical  analysis  of  the  effects  of  substrate  con- 
centration, pH,  temperature,  and  chemical  inhibitors  on  the  rate  and  yield  of  biological 
processes.  Enzyme  kinetics.  Kinetics  of  cell  growth  and  metabolite  production  in  batch 
and  continuous  culture.  Design  of  bioreactors  for  microbial,  mammalian,  and  plant  cell 
culture.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites:  calculus  and  a  course  in  microbial  physiology  or 
biochemistry.  One  course.  Cherry  or  Quinlan 


328         Courses  of  Instruction 


206.  Optimization  of  Bioprocess  Kinetics.  Concepts  and  mathematical  modeling 
techniques  needed  to  maximize  the  rates  and  yields  at  which  cells  produce  biomass  and 
metabolites.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisite:  Mechanical  Engineering  205.  One  course. 
Quinlan 

207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  See  C-L:  Biomed- 
ical Engineering  207;  also  C-L:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  207.  One  course. 
Bryers,  Daniels,  or  Truskey 

208.  Introduction  to  Colloid  and  Surface  Science.  The  colloid  state:  classification  of 
colloids  and  the  theoretical  frameworks  and  experimental  techniques  involved  in  their 
characterization.  Interfaces:  surface  tension  and  free  energy;  curved  interfaces;  adhesion, 
cohesion  and  wetting;  surface  activity;  catalytic  and  mechanical  properties  of  solid  sur- 
faces. Inter-Surface  Forces:  the  balance  of  attractive  and  repulsive  forces  which  operate 
between  colloidal  particles  and  at  macroscopic  surfaces.  Some  emphasis  on  natural  and 
artificial  biomembranes.  (1.0  ES)  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Needham 

210.  Intermediate  Dynamics.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  See  C-L:  Civil  and  Environmental  En- 
gineering 210.  One  course.  Doivell 

211.  Theoretical  and  Applied  Polymer  Science.  An  advanced  course  in  materials 
science  and  engineering  dealing  specifically  with  the  structure  and  properties  of  poly- 
mers. Particular  attention  paid  to  recent  developments  in  the  processing  and  use  of  mod- 
ern plastics  and  fibers.  Product  design  considered  in  terms  of  polymer  structures,  process- 
ing techniques,  and  properties.  (.6  ED/.4  ES)  One  course.  Pearsall 

212.  Electronic  Materials.  An  advanced  course  in  materials  science  and  engineering 
dealing  with  the  various  materials  important  for  solid-state  electronics  including  semi- 
conductors, ceramics,  and  polymers.  Emphasis  on  thermodynamic  concepts  and  on 
defects  in  these  materials.  Materials  preparation  and  modification  methods  for  techno- 
logical applications.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisite:  Engineering  83.  One  course.  Tan 

214.  Corrosion  and  Corrosion  Control.  Environmental  aspects  of  the  design  and  utili- 
zation of  modern  engineering  alloys.  Theory  and  mechanisms  of  corrosion,  particular- 
ly in  seawater  and  atmospheric  environments.  Microstructural  aspects  of  diffusion,  oxi- 
dation, hot  corrosion,  and  stress  corrosion.  (.25  ED/.75ES)  Prerequisite:  Engineering  83. 
One  course.  Jones 

215.  Biomedical  Materials  and  Artificial  Organs.  See  C-L:  Biomedical  Engineering 
215.  One  course.  Clark 

216.  Materials  Science  and  Solar  Technology.  All  aspects  of  materials  science  as  related 
to  solar  energy  development.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  photovoltaic  materials  and  devices, 
including  the  relationship  of  conversion  efficiency  to  material  properties  and  solar  cell 
design.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  One  course.  Cocks 

217.  Fracture  of  Engineering  Materials.  Conventional  design  concepts  and  their  rela- 
tionship to  the  occurrence  of  fracture.  Linear  elastic  and  general  yield  fracture  mechan- 
ics. Microscopic  plastic  deformation  and  crack  propagation.  The  relationship  between 
macroscopic  and  microscopic  aspects  of  fracture.  Time  dependent  fracture.  Fracture  of 
specific  materials.  ( .7  ED/.3  ES)  Prerequisites:  Engineering  83  and  Mechanical  Engineering 
115.  One  course.  Jones 

218.  Thermodynamics  of  Electronic  Materials.  Basic  thermodynamic  concepts  ap- 
plied to  solid  state  materials  with  emphasis  on  technologically  relevant  electronic  materials 
such  as  silicon  and  GaAs.  Thermodynamic  functions,  phase  diagrams,  solubilities  and 
thermal  equilibrium  concentrations  of  point  defects;  nonequilibrium  processes  and  the 
kinetic  phenomena  of  diffusion,  precipitation,  and  growth.  (.25  ED/.75ES)  One  course. 
Gosele 

Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science  (ME)        329 


221 .  Compressible  Fluid  Flow.  Basic  concepts  of  the  flow  of  gases  from  the  subsonic 
to  the  hypersonic  regime.  Effects  of  friction,  heat  transfer,  and  shock  on  one-dimensional 
inviscid  flow.  Potential  theory,  oblique  shock  waves,  and  special  calculation  techniques 
in  two-dimensional  flow.  (.4  ED/.6  ES)  One  course.  Shaughnessy 

224.  An  Introduction  to  Turbulence.  Flow  instability  and  the  transition  to  turbulence. 
Physical  characteristics  of  turbulent  flows,  averaging,  and  the  Reynolds  equation.  Tur- 
bulent transport  and  mixing  length  theories.  The  statistical  description  of  turbulence, 
correlations,  and  spectra.  Fourier  transforms.  Measurement  techniques.  (1.0  ES)  One 
course.  Shaughnessy 

225.  Mechanics  of  Viscous  Fluids.  Equations  of  motion  for  a  viscous  fluid,  general 
properties  and  selected  solutions  of  the  Navier-Stokes  equations,  the  Stokes  equations, 
laminar  boundary  layer  equations  with  selected  solutions  and  approximate  techniques, 
origin  of  turbulence.  (1.0  ES)  One  course.  Hochmuth 

226.  Intermediate  Fluid  Mechanics.  A  survey  of  the  principals,  concepts,  and  equa- 
tions of  fluid  mechanics.  Fluid  statics.  Surface  tension.  The  Eulerian  and  Lagrangian 
description.  Kinematics.  Reynolds  transport  theorem.  The  differential  and  integral  equa- 
tions of  motion.  Constitutive  equations  for  a  Newtonian  fluid .  The  Navier-Stokes  equa- 
tions. Boundary  conditions  on  velocity  and  stress  at  material  interfaces.  (.2  ED/ .8  ES)  One 
course.  Shaughnessy 

227.  Advanced  Fluid  Mechanics.  Flow  of  a  uniform  incompressible  viscous  fluid.  Exact 
solutions  to  the  Navier-Stokes  equation .  Similarity  methods.  Irrotational  flow  theory  and 
its  applications.  Elements  ofboundary  layer  theory.  (.2ED/.8ES)Prerequisite:  Mechan- 
ical Engineering  226  or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Shaughnessy 

228.  Lubrication.  Derivation  and  application  of  the  basic  governing  equations  for 
lubrication;  the  Reynolds  equation  and  energy  equation  for  thin  films.  Analytical  and  com- 
putational solutions  to  the  governing  equations.  Analysis  and  design  of  hydrostatic  and 
hydrodynamic  slider  bearings  and  journal  bearings.  Introduction  to  the  effects  of  fluid 
inertia  and  compressibility.  Dynamic  characteristics  of  a  fluid  film  and  effects  of  bearing 
design  on  dynamics  of  machinery.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  111  and 
Mechanical  Engineering  126.  One  course.  Knight 

229.  Computational  Fluid  Mechanics  and  Heat  Transfer.  An  exposition  of  numeri- 
cal techniques  commonly  used  for  the  solution  of  partial  differential  equations  encoun- 
tered in  engineering  physics.  Finite-difference  schemes  (which  are  well-suited  for  fluid 
mechanics  problems);  notions  of  accuracy,  conservation,  consistency,  stability,  and  con- 
vergence. Recent  applications  of  weighted  residuals  methods  (Galerkin),  finite-element 
methods,  and  grid  generation  techniques.  Through  specific  examples,  the  student  is  guid- 
ed to  construct  and  assess  the  performance  of  the  numerical  scheme  selected  for  the  par- 
ticular type  of  transport  equation  (parabolic,  elliptic,  or  hyperbolic).  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  One 
course.  Georgiadis 

230.  Modern  Control  and  Dynamic  Systems.  Dynamic  modeling  of  complex  linear 
and  nonlinear  physical  systems  involving  the  storage  and  transfer  of  matter  and  energy. 
Unified  treatment  of  active  and  passive  mechanical,  electrical,  and  fluid  systems.  State- 
space  formulation  of  physical  systems.  Time  and  frequency-domain  representation.  Con- 
trollability and  observability  concepts.  System  response  using  analytical  and  computa- 
tional techniques.  Lyapunov  method  for  system  stability.  Modification  of  system  charac- 
teristics using  feedback  control  and  compensation .  Emphasis  on  application  of  techniques 
to  physical  systems.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  One  course.  Garg 

236.  Engineering  Acoustics.  Fundamentals  of  acoustics  including  sound  generation, 
propagation,  reflection,  absorption,  and  scattering.  Emphasis  on  basic  principles  and  ana- 
lytical methods  in  the  description  of  wave  motion  and  the  characterization  of  sound  fields. 

330        Courses  of  Instruction 


Applications  including  topics  from  noise  control,  sound  reproduction,  architectural 
acoustics,  and  aerodynamic  noise.  Occasional  classroom  or  laboratory  demonstration. 
(.25  ED/.75  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  111  and  Engineering  123  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. One  course.  Bliss 

237.  Aerodynamics.  Fundamentals  of  aerodynamics  applied  to  wings  and  bodies  in 
subsonic  and  supersonic  flow.  Basic  principles  of  fluid  mechanics  and  analytical  methods 
for  aerodynamic  analysis.  Two-  and  three-dimensional  wing  theory,  slender-body  the- 
ory, lifting  surface  methods,  vortex  and  wave  drag.  Brief  introduction  to  vehicle  design, 
performance,  and  dynamics.  Special  topics  such  as  unsteady  aerodynamics,  vortex  wake 
behavior,  and  propeller  and  rotor  aerodynamics.  (.25  ED/.75  ES)  One  course.  Bliss 

240.  Patent  Technology  and  Law  for  Engineers.  The  use  of  patents  as  a  technological 
data  base  is  emphasized  including  information  retrieval  in  selected  engineering  dis- 
ciplines. Fundamentals  of  patent  law  and  patent  office  procedures.  (.6  ED/.4  ES)  One 
course.  Cocks 

245.  Applications  in  Expert  Systems.  A  comprehensive  introduction  to  the  key  prac- 
tical principles,  techniques,  and  tools  being  used  to  implement  knowledge-based  sys- 
tems. The  classic  MYCIN  system  studied  in  detail  to  provide  historic  perspective.  Cur- 
rent systems  employing  combinations  of  production  rules,  prototypical  knowledge,  and 
frame-based  case  studies.  Student  term  projects  consist  of  the  development  of  individual, 
unique  expert  systems  using  the  Texas  Instruments  Personal  Consultant.  Knowledge  of 
LISP  not  a  prerequisite.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  One  course.  Wright 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Mechanical  Engineering.  Opportunity  for  study  of  advanced 
subjects  related  to  programs  within  mechanical  engineering  tailored  to  fit  the  require- 
ments of  a  small  group.  ( .  25  ED/ .75  ES)  Prerequisite :  approval  of  Director  of  Undergraduate 
or  Graduate  Studies.  One  course.  Staff 

270.  Robot  Control  and  Automation.  Review  of  kinematics  and  dynamics  of  robotic 
devices;  mechanical  considerations  in  design  of  automated  systems  and  processes,  hy- 
draulic and  pneumatic  control  of  components  and  circuits;  stability  analysis  of  robots  in- 
volving nonlinearities;  robotic  sensors  and  interfacing;  flexible  manufacturing;  man- 
machine  interaction  and  safety  consideration.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisites:  Mechanical  En- 
gineering 230  or  equivalent  and  consent  of  instructor.  One  course.  Garg 

277.  Optimization  Methods  for  Mechanical  Design.  Definition  of  optimal  design. 
Methodology  of  constructing  quantitative  mathematical  models.  Nonlinear  programming 
methods  for  finding  "best"  combination  of  design  variables :  minimizing  steps,  gradient 
methods,  flexible  tolerance  techniques  for  unconstrained  and  constrained  problems.  Em- 
phasis on  computer  applications  and  term  projects.  (.5  ED/. 5  ES)  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor.  One  course.  Wright 

280.  Convective  Heat  Transfer.  Models  and  equations  for  fluid  motion,  the  general 
energy  equation,  and  transport  properties.  Exact,  approximate,  and  boundary  layer  so- 
lutions for  laminar  flow  heat  transfer  problems.  Use  of  the  principle  of  similarity  and  anal- 
ogy in  the  solution  of  turbulent  flow  heat  transfer.  Two-phase  flow,  nucleation,  boiling, 
and  condensation  heat  and  mass  transfer.  (1.0  ES)  One  course.  Bejan 

281.  Conduction  and  Radiation.  Conduction  heat  transfer  in  the  steady  and  transient 
state,  in  rectangular,  cylindrical,  and  spherical  coordinates.  Melting  and  solidification. 
Radiation  exchange  involving  absorbing  and  emitting  media  including  gases  and  flames, 
combined  conduction  and  radiation,  and  combined  convection  and  radiation.  Exact  and 
approximate  methods  of  solution  including  separation  of  variables,  transform  calculus, 
numerical  procedures,  and  integral  and  variational  methods.  (1.0  ES)  One  course.  Bejan 


Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Sciences  (ME)        331 


COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

235.  Advanced  Mechanical  Vibrations 

THE  MAJOR 

The  major  requirements  are  included  in  the  minimum  total  of  thirty-four  courses  listed 
under  the  general  requirements  and  departmental  requirements.  Specific  courses  which 
must  be  included  are  Engineering  75, 83, 101, 123,  and  130;  Mechanical  Engineering  115, 
120,  126, 141,  150,  and  160. 


332        Courses  of  Instruction 


Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Sciences  (ME)        333 


Index 


Academic  Credit,  19 

Academic  Honors,  56 

Academic  Regulations,  45-56 

Accounting,  courses,  see  Management  Sciences 

Achievement  Tests,  45 

Activities,  cultural,  84;  recreational,  86;  religious,  80 

Administration,  general,  8;  general  academic,  8 

Admission,  91;  procedures,  92;  requirements,  91 

Advanced  Placement  Program,  45 

Advanced  Courses,  20,  107 

Advising,  48 

Aerospace  Studies,  107 

African  Studies,  64 

Afro-American  Studies,  108 

Agreements  with  Other  Universities,  75 

Air  Force  Reserve  Officers  Training  Corps,  69,  107 

American  Dance  Festival,  77 

Anthropology,  109;  see  also  Biological  Anthropology  and 
Anatomy,  and  Cultural  Anthropology 

Application  for  Admission,  92 

Arabic,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages 

Archives,  university,  14 

Army  Military  Science,  234 

Army  Reserve  Officers'  Training  Corps,  69,  234 

Art  and  Art  History,  Department  of,  110 

Artist  in  Residence  Program,  119 

Arts,  Institute  of  the,  66,  117;  dance,  119 

Arts  and  Sciences,  see  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and 
Sciences 

Asian-Pacific  Studies,  64 

Asian  and  African  Languages,  121 

Associated  Students  of  Duke  University  (ASDU),  85 

Astronomy,  see  Physics 

Athletics,  87 

Attendance  Regulation,  54 

Auditing,  50 

Awards,  58 

Bachelor  of  Arts,  Program  1, 19,  26;  Program  II,  24,  31 

Bachelor  of  Science,  Program  1, 19, 26;  Program  II,  24, 31 

Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering,  34;  requirements, 
35 

Bills,  payment  of  for  fall  and  spring,  96;  summer,  97 

Biochemistry,  see  Medicine,  School  of 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy,  124 

Biology,  126 

Biomedical  Engineering,  courses  in,  310;  departmen- 
tal requirements,  36 

Botany,  Department  of,  134 

Business  Administration,  see  Management  Sciences; 
combination  program,  33 

Calendar,  6 

Campus  Life  and  Activities,  78 

Canadian  Studies,  64, 135 

Career  Counseling,  65,  82 

Caribbean  Studies,  64 

Cell  Biology,  231 

Certification  to  teach,  179 

Change  of  Major,  52 

Changes  in  Status,  53 

Chemistry,  Department  of,  136 

Chinese,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages 

Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering,  courses  in,  314; 
departmental  requirements,  37 

C-L  (cross-listing),  107 


Class  Attendance,  54 

Classical  Studies,  Department  of,  139;  in  Italy,  72,  74 

College  Board,  advanced  placement  program,  45;  tests, 

45 
Combination  Programs,  undergraduate-professional, 

32 
Commencement,  58 
Comparative  Area  Studies,  146 
Comparative  Labor  Studies,  65 
Computation  Center,  14 
Computer  Science,  Department  of,  155 
Concurrent  Enrollment,  49 
Conduct,  regulations  governing,  88 
Continuation  Requirements,  Trinity  College,  23,  31; 

School  of  Engineering,  41 
Continuing  Education,  65,  93,  96 
Counseling  and  Psychological  Services,  82 
Course  Changes,  for  the  summer  terms,  49;  in  the  fall 

and  spring  terms,  49 
Course  Credit,  20 
Course  Load,  50 
Course  Numbering  System,  107 
Courses  of  Instruction,  107;  see  also  departmental  listings 
Credit,  20 

Cultural  Affairs,  Office  of,  84 
Cultural  Anthropology,  160 
Cum  laude,  57 
Curricular  Requirements,  Program  1, 19,  26;  Program 

II,  24, 31;  Bachelor  of  Science  in  Engineering,  34 
Dance,  119 
Dean's  List,  56 

Dean's  List  with  Distinction,  56 
Declaration  of  Major  or  Division,  51 
Degrees  Offered,  Trinity,  19;  Engineering,  19,  34 
Degree  Status,  full-time  and  part-time,  54,  92 
Department  Major,  21;  see  also  departmental  listings 
Dining  Facilities,  80,  99 
Diploma  Cards,  58 
Discussion  Section,  definition  of,  22 
Distinguished  Professor  Courses,  165 
Distribution  of  Courses,  21,  27 
Divisions  of  Learning,  26 
Divisional  Requirements,  see  Program  I,  Distribution 

of  Courses 
Double  Major,  21,  29,  40,  53 

Dormitories,  see  "Residential  Facilities"  or  "Housing" 
Drama,  166 
Drop-Add  Period,  49 
Duke  Futures  Programs,  76 
Duke  in  New  York  Arts  Program,  1 17 
Duke  University,  history  of,  11 
Economics,  Department  of,  171 
Education,  177 
Education  Records,  61 
Electrical  Engineering,  courses  in,  320;  departmental 

requirements,  38 
Eligibility  for  Courses,  50 
Employment  Opportunities,  105 
Engineering,  see  School  of  Engineering 
English,  Department  of,  179 
Excused  Absences,  class  attendance,  54,  55 
Expenses,  estimate  of,  95;  living,  99 
Faculty,  12 
Failing  Grades,  56 


334 


Fees,  registration,  96;  transcripts,  99 

Fields  of  Knowledge  Requirements,  20,  28 

Film  and  Video,  Program  in,  66,  188 

Final  Examinations,  55;  absence  from,  55 

Financial  Aid,  100 

Financial  Information,  95 

First  Division,  see  Distribution  of  Courses 

Food  Services,  80,  99 

Foreign  Language,  proficiency  in,  26,  27 

Foreign  Language  Requirement,  26,  27,  and  see  in- 
dividual departmental  majors 

Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies,  combination  pro- 
gram, 32;  courses  in,  189 

French,  see  Romance  Studies,  Department  of 

Full-Time  Degree  Status,  54 

Genetics,  The  University  ProgTam  in,  190 

Geology,  Department  of,  191 

Gender  in  International  Perspective,  65 

German,  see  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature,  Department  of, 
195 

Gift  Scholarships,  102 

Government,  student,  85 

Grading  and  Grade  Requirements,  55 

Graduate  School,  courses,  50;  preparation  for,  32 

Graduation  Honors,  56 

Graduation,  notification  of  intention,  58 

Graduation  Requirements,  Program  1, 23;  Program  II, 
24;  School  of  Engineering,  34 

Graduation  with  Distinction,  57 

Greek,  see  Classical  Studies,  Department  of 

Grievance  Procedures,  88 

Health,  Physical  Education,  and  Recreation,  Depart- 
ment of,  86, 198 

Health  Services,  81 

Hebrew,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages 

Hindi-Urdu,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages 

History,  Department  of,  201 

Honor  Commitment,  Duke  student,  87 

Honors,  56 

House  Courses,  51 

Housing,  resident  and  nonresident,  79;  expenses,  99 

Howard  University,  exchange  program,  76 

Human  Development  courses,  212;  program  in,  67 

Humanities,  see  Distribution  of  Courses 

Identification  Cards,  48 

Incompleted  Work,  55 

Independent  Study,  51 

Individually  Designed  Plans  of  Study,  see  Program  II 

Institute  of  the  Arts,  see  Arts,  Institute  of  the 

Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences,  see  Statistics 
and  Decision  Sciences,  Institute  of 

Intercollegiate  Athletic  Program,  87 

Interdepartmental  Concentration,  21,  29;  procedures, 
51 

Interdisciplinary  Courses,  213 

Interdisciplinary  Major,  21 

Interdisciplinary  Programs  in  Engineering,  40 

Interinstitutional  Agreement,  47,  75 

International  Advertising  and  Communications,  65 

International  Baccalaureate  Program,  47 

International  Fellowships,  58 

International  House  and  International  Office,  84 

International  Studies,  Center  for,  63 

Internships,  see  Duke  Futures  Programs 

Intramural  Activities,  86 

Introductory  Courses,  107 


Islamic  and  Arabian  Development  Studies,  64 

Italian,  see  Romance  Studies 

Japanese,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages 

Judaic  Studies,  Cooperative  Program,  67;  courses  in, 
216 

Judicial  System,  88 

Korean,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages 

Laboratories,  science,  15 

Latin,  see  Classical  Studies,  Department  of 

Latin-American  Studies,  64 

Law  School,  combination  program,  34 

Learning  Experiences,  Small-Group,  22,  29 

Leave  of  Absence,  53 

Libraries,  12 

Linguistics,  217 

Literature:  Undergraduate  Courses  in  the  Literature 
Program,  218 

Living  Expenses,  99 

Loans,  104 

Magna  cum  laude,  57 

Majors,  Trinity,  21, 51;  Engineering,  40;  see  also  depart- 
mental listings 

Management  Sciences,  220 

Marine  Laboratory,  15,  75,  221 

Marine  Sciences,  The  University  Program,  221 

Marxism  and  Society,  program  in,  67 

Mary  Lou  Williams  Center  for  Black  Culture,  84 

Mathematics,  Department  of,  223 

Mechanical  Engineering,  courses  in,  326;  departmental 
requirements,  39 

Media,  85 

Medicine,  School  of,  basic  science  courses,  230 

Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  Program,  232 

Microbiology  and  Immunology,  see  Medicine,  School  of 

Military  Science,  69,  234 

Minority  Affairs,  Office  of,  82;  Counseling  in  Academic 
and  Social  Affairs,  83;  Duke  PREVIEW  Pro- 
gram, 83;  tutoring,  83 

Music,  Department  of,  235;  organizations,  85,  theory 
and  composition,  236 

Natural  Sciences  and  Mathematics,  see  Distribution  of 
Courses 

Naval  Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps,  70,  242 

Naval  Science,  242 

Neurosciences,  program  in,  67;  courses  in,  244 

Newspaper,  see  Publications 

Nondiscrimination  Policy,  2,  88 

Nondegree  Status,  54,  92,  93 

Nonresident  Students,  80 

Off-Campus  Living,  80 

Organizations,  student,  85 

Part-Time  Degree  Status,  54 

Pass/Fail  Option,  56 

Passing  Grades,  55 

Payment  of  Accounts,  96 

Persian,  see  Asian  and  African  Languages 

Perspectives  on  Marxism  and  Society,  program  in,  67 

Phi  Beta  Kappa,  57 

Philosophy,  Department  of,  244 

Physical  Education,  see  Health,  Physical  Education,  and 
Recreation 

Physics,  Department  of,  249 

Placement  Services,  82 

Placement,  tests,  46;  in  Russian,  47 

Polish,  see  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 

Political  Science,  Department  of,  252 

Portuguese,  see  Romance  Studies 


335 


Preceptorial,  definition  of,  22,  30 

Precollege  Program,  77 

Primate  Center,  15 

Primatology,  program  in,  68 

Prizes  and  Awards,  58 

Professional  Schools,  combination  programs,  32; 
preparation  for,  32-34 

Program  1,  19-24;  26-32;  continuation,  23,  31;  depart- 
mental major,  21, 29;  distribution  of  courses,  21, 
26;  double  major,  21, 29;  graduation,  23,  31;  in- 
terdepartmental concentration,  21, 29;  writing, 
20,  27;  proficiency  in  foreign  language,  26,  27; 
residence,  22,  30;  small  group  learning  ex- 
perience, 20,  27 

Program  Major,  21,  29 

Program  II,  24-26;  31-32 

Project  WILD,  86 

Psychological  Services,  81 

Psychology,  Department  of,  264 

Publications,  85 

Public  Policy  Studies,  271 

Radio  Station,  85 

Reading-Out  of  Introductory  Courses,  47 

Readmission  of  Former  Students,  53,  93 

Recognition,  for  academic  work,  56 

Records,  release  of,  61 

Recreational  Activities,  86 

Refunds,  100 

Registration,  48;  course  changes,  49;  late  fee,  48,  96 

Regulations,  Academic,  45-56 

Religion,  Department  of,  276 

Religious  Activities,  80 

Requirements,  Program  1,  curricular,  19,  26;  Program 
II,  general,  24,  31;  School  of  Engineering,  34 

Reserve  Officer  Training  Corps,  69,  see  also  Aerospace 
Studies,  Military  Science,  and  Naval  Science 

Residence  Requirements,  Program  1, 22, 30;  School  of 
Engineering,  41 

Resident  and  Nonresident  Status,  54 

Residential  Facilities,  15,  79 

Residential  Life,  Office  of,  15,  80 

Romance  Studies,  Department  of,  283 

Rooms,  see  Housing 

Russian  and  East  European  Studies,  65 

Russian,  placement,  47;  see  also  Slavic  Languages  and 
Literatures 

Scholarships,  102 

Scholastic  Aptitude  Tests,  46 

School  of  Engineering,  courses  in,  308;  degree  require- 
ments, 35;  departmental  requirements,  36;  dou- 
ble major,  40;  history,  11;  interdisciplinary  pro- 
grams, 40;  prizes  and  awards,  58-61;  purpose, 
16;  scholarships,  102 

Science,  Technology,  and  Human  Values,  program  in, 
68;  courses  in,  293 

Secondary  School  Teaching,  179 

Second  Division  see  Distribution  of  Courses 

Second  Major,  21,  29,  53 

Self-pacing,  50 

Semester  course,  definition  of,  19 

Skill  Courses,  27 

Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures,  Department  of,  293 

Small  Group  Learning  Experiences,  requirement,  20, 27 

Social  Regulations,  88 

Social  Sciences,  see  Distribution  of  Courses 

Sociology,  Department  of,  296 


South  Asian  Studies,  64 

Spanish,  see  Romance  Studies,  Department  of 

Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences,  Institute  of,  66,  303 

Student  Activities,  Office  of,  83 

Student  Affairs,  79 

Student  Aid,  100 

Student  Life,  Office  of,  83 

Study  Abroad,  semester  and  academic  year  programs, 

70;  summer  programs,  72 
Sunmia  cum  laude,  57 
Summer  Festival  of  Creative  Arts,  76 
Summer  Session,  admission,  93;  calendar,  6;  course 

changes,  49;  housing,  99;  programs  abroad,  70; 

refunds,  100;  special  programs,  76;  tuition  and 

fees,  97 
Summer  Theatre  Institute,  76 
Swahili,  set  Asian  and  African  Languages 
Teach,  preparation  to,  179 
Teaching,  student,  179 
Television,  86 

Term  Paper,  multiple  submission  of,  51 
Tests,  45;  standardized,  91 
Third  Division,  see  Distribution  of  Courses 
Transcripts,  fees,  99 

Transfer,  admission,  93;  between  Duke  schools  and  col- 
leges, 48;  of  work  elsewhere,  47 
Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  administration, 

107;  history,  11;  purpose,  16 
Tuition   and   Fees,   95;   for  children  of  Methodist 

ministers,  105;  for  Duke  employees,  99 
Tuition  Plans,  96,  105 
Tutorial,  definition  of,  22 
Twentieth-Century  America  Program,  68 
Undergraduate  College  and  Schools,   history,   11; 

resources,  12 
Undergraduate-Professional  Combination  Programs, 

32 
University   Courses,    see   Distinguished   Professor 

Courses 
University  Union,  83 
University  Writing  Program,  305 
Western  Europe  and  Advanced  Industrial  Democracies 

Program,  64 
Withdrawal,  from  courses,  56;  from  school,  53 
Women's  Studies,  program  in,  68;  courses  in,  305 
Women's  Research,  Center  for,  65 
Work/Study,  105 
Writing,  20,  26,  305 

Yiddish,  see  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 
Zoology,  Department  of,  308 


336 


5  8 

H 


o  a  c 

C    C    3 

".  x*  a 

CCJQ 
3     H 


o 


3" 

3 


O 
0> 


> 
'S. 

H 

■^  m 

n     » 
0)    ^ 

S-.  3 

'  S"  G. 

rD    3^ 

'  S5.  o 
■-(   -*-, 

'  "-■    Q. 


n  oo 
vi  w 

vi 

o 

ON 


2 

c 

a 

c 

7T 

n> 

C 
3 

<' 
m 


D) 

O 

C 

T> 

O 

to 

3 

a 

3"  > 

3  ° 

C/J 

ST 

ID 

o 

D> 

n> 

W 

z 

CO 

o 

bulletin  of 

DukeUniversity 
1989-90 


bulletin  of 

DukeUniversity 
1989-90 

Graduate  School 


EDITOR 

Judy  Smith 

SENIOR  EDITORIAL  ASSISTANTS 

Jean  Carlton 

Elizabeth  Matheson 


PHOTOGRAPHS 

Les  Todd 

Jimmy  Wallace 


Typesetting  by  Paste-Ups,  Ltd.,  Research  Triangle  Park,  North  Carolina 
Printed  by  Port  City  Press,  Washington,  DC. 

Duke  University  does  not  discriminate  on  the  basis  of  race,  color,  national  and  ethnic  origin,  handicap,  sexual 
orientation  or  preference,  sex,  or  age  in  the  administration  of  educational  policies,  admission  policies,  financial 
aid,  employment,  or  any  other  University  program  or  activity.  It  admits  qualified  students  to  all  the  rights,  privileges, 
programs,  and  activities  generally  accorded  or  made  available  to  students.  For  further  information,  call  Dolores 
L.  Burke,  Equal  Opportunity  Officer,  (919)  684-8111. 

The  information  in  the  bulletin  applies  to  the  academic  year  1989-90  and  is  accurate  and  current,  to  the  best 
of  our  knowledge,  as  of  April,  1989.  The  university  reserves  the  right  to  change  programs  of  study,  academic  re- 
quirements, lecturers,  teaching  staffs,  the  announced  University  calendar,  and  other  matters  described  in  the 
bulletin  without  prior  notice,  in  accordance  with  established  procedures. 

The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University,  Volume  61,  includes  the  following  titles:  The  Fuqua  School  of  Business;  The 
Schoolof Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies;  Marine  Laboratory;  Undergraduate  Instruction;  The  Graduate  School;  The 
Medical  Center;  The  Divinity  School;  Information  for  Prospective  Students;  The  Graduate  School  (short  form);  Allied  Health 
Programs;  The  School  of  Law;  and  Information  and  Regulations. 


Volume  61 June  1989 Number  7 

The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University  (USPS  073-680)  is  published  by  Duke  University,  Duke  Station,  Durham,  North 
Carolina  27706  as  follows:  monthly— May;  semimonthly— March,  April,  June,  and  August;  thrice-monthly— 
September.  Second-class  postage  paid  at  Durham. 


Introduction  9 

A  Community  of  Scholars  9 

The  Decision  to  Go  to  Graduate  School  9 

Choosing  a  Graduate  School  11 

Duration  of  Program  13 

Duke  University  Graduate 

School  15 


Teaching  and  Research 
Special  Programs 
General  Regulations  Governing 
Graduate  Studies 

15 
16 

23 

Admission 

23 

Earning  the  Degrees 

The  Language  Requirement 

Other  Requirements 

26 
26 
26 

Financial  Information 

27 

Calendar  of  the  Graduate  School 

31 

Advanced  Degree  Programs  33 

An  abbreviated  list  of  course  offerings 
and  program  descriptions,  1989-90 


To  the  Prospective  Graduate  Student 

A  graduate  school  is  where  excellence  is  established  in  a 
university.  At  Duke,  the  Graduate  School  is  where  the  two  essen- 
tial functions  of  a  university,  teaching  and  research,  truly  come 
together.  Over  the  years  Duke's  strength  at  the  graduate  level  has 
grown  in  all  the  main  fields  of  knowledge.  The  nineteen-eighties 
have  been  particularly  fruitful  years  for  recruitment  of  faculty,  es- 
tablishment of  new  programs,  and  attraction  of  outstanding  stu- 
dents. The  faculty  enjoys  international  distinction.  The  laborato- 
ries, libraries,  and  computer  facilities  are  among  the  very  best.  Yet 
the  Graduate  School  remains  small  enough  so  that  personal  con- 
tact is  a  central  feature  of  our  programs,  and  fruitful  interaction 
across  disciplines  is  a  common  experience,  both  for  faculty  and 
students. 

For  the  student  in  search  of  a  strong  graduate  education,  Duke 
University  has  much  to  offer.  This  is  a  community  in  which  minds 
and  ideas  grow.  We  provide  training  for  many  careers,  but  we  also 
seek  to  foster  personal  creativity  and  to  provide  stimulating  yet 
congenial  surroundings  for  productive  education  and  research. 

The  following  pages  provide  the  information  you  require  in 
making  the  important  choice  of  the  course  of  your  graduate  edu- 
cation. We  look  forward  to  welcoming  you  to  the  Duke  commu- 
nity of  scholars. 


Malcolm  Gillis 

Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 


University  Administration 


General  Administration 

COMMITTEE  OF  EXECUTIVE  OFFICERS: 

H.  Keith  H.  Brodie,  M.D.,  LL.D.,  President 
Phillip  A.  Griffiths,  Ph.D.,  Provost  Ralph  Snyderman,  M.D.,  Chancellor  for  Health  Affairs 

and  Dean  of  the  Medical  School 
William  G.  Anlyan,  M.D.,  D.Sc,  Chancellor  Eugene  J.  McDonald,  L.L.M.,  Executive  Vice-President 

Joel  L.  Fleishman,  LL.M.,  Senior  Vice-President 

John  J.  Piva,  Jr.,  B.A.,  Senior  Vice-President  for  Alumni  Affairs  and  Development 

Patricia  C.  Skarulis,  M.A.,  Vice-President  for  Information  Systems 

J.  Peyton  Fuller,  A.B.,  Vice-President,  Planning  and  Treasurer 

William  J.  Griffith,  A.B.,  Vice-President  for  Student  Affairs 

Andrew  G.  Wallace,  M.D,  Vice-President  for  Health  Affairs 

John  F.  Adcock,  M.B.A.,  Vice-President  and  Corporate  Controller 

Tom  A.  Butters,  B.  A.,  Vice-President  and  Director  of  Athletics 

N.  Allison  Haltom,  A.B.,  Secretary  of  the  University 

Graduate  School  Administration 

Malcolm  Gillis,  Ph.D.,  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 
A.  Leigh  DeNeef,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Dean 
Donna  Lee  Giles,  A.B.,  Assistant  Dean 
Jacqueline  Looney,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Dean 
Katharine  Pfeiffer,  M.A.,  Assistant  Dean 
Aleane  G.  Webb,  Assistant  Dean 

Executive  Committee  of  the  Graduate  Faculty 

Dean  Malcolm  Gillis 

Associate  Dean  A.  Leigh  DeNeef 

William  Ascher 

Robert  Ashton 

Steven  Baldwin 

Jeffrey  R.  Dawson 

Oliver  Ferguson 

Alfred  Goshaw 

Lynn  Hasher 

Robert  Hochmuth 

Peter  Lange 

Bruce  Lawrence 

Annabel  Patterson 

George  Pearsall 

Salvatore  Pizzo 

Richard  Searles 

Kathleen  Smith 

Larry  Todd 


* 

&      1 

I 

I     1 

*^^^^^B 

P 

f  1 

-i 

1 

1 

^^k 

^=*          \        > 

Introduction 

A  Community  of  Scholars 

Writing  in  the  1920s  the  philosopher  and  man  of  science,  Alfred  North  Whitehead, 
defined  the  purpose  of  a  university  in  these  terms:  "The  justification  of  a  university  is 
that  it  preserves  the  connection  between  knowledge  and  the  zest  for  life  by  uniting  the 
young  and  the  old  in  the  imaginative  consideration  of  learning."  If  this  is  true  of  a  university 
generally,  it  is  true  of  a  graduate  school  especially.  Faculty  members  and  graduate  stu- 
dents work  together  in  the  imaginative  recasting  of  ideas  necessary  for  successful  research 
and  the  development  of  human  knowledge. 

Ideally,  a  graduate  school  is  a  community  of  scholars  engaged  in  imparting  and  ex- 
tending the  realm  of  human  knowledge  in  the  arts  and  sciences.  A  select  group  of  stu- 
dents is  admitted  each  year  to  undergo  the  rigorous  discipline  of  an  advanced  degree  pro- 
gram, the  successful  among  them  to  emerge  as  scholars  of  promise.  To  enter  into  graduate 
education  today  is  to  accept  a  real  challenge,  and  this  decision  should  not  be  made  casually. 
The  work  toward  a  doctorate  requires  several  years  of  tireless  effort  and  possibly  sacri- 
fice, and  the  material  rewards  may  be  less  certain  than  in  some  alternative  endeavor.  How- 
ever, pursued  with  determination,  graduate  education  can  be  the  doorway  to  a  stimulat- 
ing, creative,  and  meaningful  life.  The  student  who  is  contemplating  this  challenge  may 
have  many  questions  in  mind;  the  material  that  follows  is  an  attempt  to  answer  some  of 
them. 

The  Decision  to  Go  to  Graduate  School 

The  decision  to  work  toward  an  advanced  degree  must  be  a  personal  commitment 
born  of  a  willingness  to  devote  oneself  to  many  months  or  possibly  years  of  academic  dis- 
cipline just  at  an  age  when  one  may  be  impatient  for  financial  independence  and  free- 
dom from  academic  discipline.  Graduate  study  requires  all  of  one's  energy  and  en- 
thusiasm; to  enter  into  it  half-heartedly  is  to  invite  discouragement  or  failure. 

Qualities  instrumental  for  success  in  graduate  study  are  a  natural  curiosity  and  the 
capacity  for  self-discipline.  A  good  undergraduate  record  may  or  may  not  be  adequate 
evidence  of  these  characteristics.  Many  students  with  excellent  undergraduate  records 
have  been  unsuccessful  in  graduate  study  because  their  undergraduate  training  stressed 
the  marshalling  and  articulation  of  facts  rather  than  real  understanding  and  analysis  of 
material .  On  the  other  hand,  many  distinguished  scholars  had  undistinguished  under- 
graduate records.  In  gaining  admission  to  a  graduate  school,  the  undergraduate  record 


10 


is,  of  course,  an  important  element,  but  usually  some  margin  is  left  to  allow  for  students 
who  develop  serious  academic  interests  late  in  their  undergraduate  careers.  Students  are 
often  best  able  to  judge  for  themselves  whether  their  grades  truly  gauge  their  abilities. 
There  is  no  unerring  way  of  knowing  in  advance  whether  one  will  be  successful  or 
happy  in  graduate  school .  It  is  quite  likely,  however,  that  if  one  has  both  motivation  and 
ability  and  does  not  try  it,  there  will  be  regrets  in  later  years.  Although  the  decision  must 
be  an  individual  choice,  superior  intellectual  ability  is  a  scarce  human  resource,  and  the 
encouragement  and  utilization  of  it  is  a  matter  of  community  as  well  as  personal  concern. 

Choosing  a  Graduate  School 

Over  250  universities  today  offer  work  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  degree.  Among  these  are 
about  60  institutions  which  grant  only  two  or  three  such  degrees  a  year  in  all  fields  com- 
bined .  At  the  other  end  of  the  scale  are  about  50  universities  which  account  for  nearly  70 
percent  of  all  doctorates  granted  in  this  country.  Duke  University  is  among  the  latter,  as 
are  most  of  the  major  institutions  which  offer  programs  in  a  wide  range  of  academic  dis- 
ciplines. But  even  if  one  can  narrow  the  field  to  about  50  major  institutions,  how  does  one 
select  among  these,  and  what  factors  should  affect  one's  final  choice?  A  few  key  factors 
are  discussed  briefly  below. 

Size.  Size  is  not  an  infallible  guide  to  the  quality  of  a  graduate  school.  There  are  a  num- 
ber of  poor  graduate  schools  of  exceedingly  large  size  and  a  number  of  extremely  good 
small  ones.  However,  the  ideal  is  a  small  number  of  superior  students  working  closely 
in  intellectual  pursuits  with  a  few  esteemed  scholars.  It  might  be  helpful  simply  to  men- 
tion a  few  of  the  disadvantages  of  too  many  or  too  few  students. 

In  an  extremely  large  graduate  school— there  are  some  that  have  between  6,000  and 
12,000  enrolled— classes  of  50  to  100  students,  inaccessibility  of  senior  faculty,  shortage 
of  library  materials  and  facilities,  and  only  a  nodding  acquaintance  with  fellow  students 
are  a  few  of  the  possible  drawbacks.  An  able  student  may  develop  well  even  in  this  at- 
mosphere of  mass  production,  but  it  is  hardly  the  ideal. 

An  extremely  small  graduate  school  also  has  its  disadvantages.  Facilities  are  often 
limited,  and  the  faculty  is  likely  to  be  composed  primarily  of  undergraduate  instructors. 
A  university  must  be  willing  to  commit  a  significant  portion  of  its  resources  to  develop 
a  graduate  program  of  high  quality,  and  this  is  often  not  the  case  in  an  extremely  small 
graduate  school. 

More  important  than  the  size  of  the  entire  graduate  school  is  the  size  of  the  particu- 
lar departmental  program  in  which  a  student  is  interested .  An  optimum  doctoral  program 
will  have  an  enrollment  of  perhaps  25  to  100  students,  admitting  10  to  30  new  students 
each  year  and  awarding  perhaps  three  to  ten  Ph.D.  degrees  a  year.  This  information  is 
usually  available  in  university  catalogs  or  government  publications  on  higher  education. 

Duke  University  is  committed  to  programs  of  moderate  size  in  which  the  interests 
of  the  student  are  important.  Total  enrollment  in  the  Graduate  School  is  1,998  students. 
Between  500  and  550  new  students  are  admitted  each  year  from  approximately  4, 200  ap- 
plications. Only  eight  departments  have  more  than  80  students;  thirty  departments  have 
enrollments  that  fall  within  the  optimum  range  suggested  in  the  preceding  paragraph. 

Quality.  Not  only  do  universities  differ  considerably  in  their  reputation  for  quality, 
but  there  are  marked  differences  among  departments  within  any  university.  Many  ex- 
cellent universities  have  a  few  weak  departments  in  which  a  student  would  fare  less  well 
than  in  an  excellent  department  in  a  less  esteemed  institution.  Therefore,  the  student 
should  not  be  guided  solely  by  the  reputation  of  a  university  as  a  whole,  but  should  in- 
quire more  specifically  about  the  area  of  specialization. 

Since  judging  the  quality  of  a  graduate  program  is  necessarily  subjective,  no  two  peo- 
ple are  likely  to  be  in  complete  agreement .  Prospective  students  would  do  well  to  talk  with 
their  undergraduate  professors,  particularly  those  who  have  themselves  achieved  some 


11 


reputation  in  the  world  of  scholarship.  As  witnessed  by  their  own  continuing  writing  and 
research,  they  are  more  likely  to  have  reliable  inf ormation  on  the  merits  of  various  graduate 
programs.  Similarly  younger  faculty  members  who  are  only  four  or  five  years  out  of  gradu- 
ate school  may  have  more  recent  acquaintance  with  their  own  and  other  schools. 

Another  guide  may  be  occasional  questionnaires  asking  educators  to  rank  various 
graduate  departments. 

Alone,  none  of  these  guides  is  adequate;  however,  in  conjunction  with  individual 
advice  and  recommendations,  they  can  serve  as  useful  indicators.  In  summary,  the  best 
procedure  is  to  take  as  many  factors  as  possible  into  account,  and  then  to  apply  to  three 
or  four  of  the  schools  high  in  consideration.  (Applying  to  fifteen  universities  is  a  waste 
of  the  applicant's  and  the  universities'  time. )  Write  to  the  graduate  school  or  to  the  depart- 
mental Director  of  Graduate  Studies  if  further  information  is  desired;  visit  the  universi- 
ty in  person,  if  possible;  and  carefully  weigh  the  advice  of  distinguished  faculty  mem- 
bers of  one's  undergraduate  college. 


12 


Duration  of  Program 

The  length  of  time  a  graduate  student  spends  in  study  toward  an  advanced  degree 
depends  upon  the  requirements  of  the  individual  program,  on  personal  work  habits,  and 
on  the  environment  of  the  graduate  school  and  the  department  in  which  the  study  is  con- 
ducted. 

The  student's  level  of  preparation  before  entering  graduate  school  has  a  direct  bear- 
ing on  the  speed  with  which  the  degree  may  be  earned.  A  student  who  enters  with  profi- 
ciency in  one  or  more  foreign  languages  and  a  good  foundation  in  the  chosen  field  may 
well  be  able  to  finish  within  the  minimum  time  limits.  On  the  other  hand,  the  student 
who  is  not  as  well  prepared  may  find  that  one  and  a  half  to  two  years  are  the  minimum 
for  the  A.M.  degree,  and  four  to  five  years  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  (although  wise  use  of  the 
summers  may  reduce  this  time  somewhat) .  The  total  time  may  also  be  lengthened  if  the 
student  must  work  during  part  of  the  period  of  residence. 

The  attitude  of  the  graduate  school  and  its  various  departments  will  also  affect  the 
time  needed  to  complete  the  degree.  During  the  last  decade  the  average  time  elapsing 
between  entering  graduate  school  and  receiving  the  doctorate  in  American  universities 
has  been  about  ten  years.  At  Duke  the  average  doctorate  in  the  humanities  requires  a  lit- 
tle over  seven  years,  nearly  six  years  in  the  social  sciences,  and  slightly  over  four  years 
in  the  sciences.  Over  the  last  few  years,  Duke  University  has  been  among  the  forerun- 
ners in  reducing  even  further  the  time  needed  to  obtain  the  Ph.D.  without  any  sacrifice 
in  quality.  This  effort  has  taken  the  form  of  trying  to  eliminate  unnecessary  delays,  par- 
ticularly those  due  to  financial  burdens  on  the  student.  Duke  ranks  among  the  leading 
institutions  in  the  country  today  in  terms  of  financial  aid  per  student  from  university 
sources.  Moreover,  much  of  this  aid  is  in  the  form  of  fellowships  and  scholarships  which 
do  not  require  burdensome  services  in  return.  The  large  public  institutions  are  often  more 
restricted  to  awards  which  require  substantial  teaching,  research,  or  other  duties,  thus 
reducing  the  speed  with  which  a  student  can  complete  the  resident  course  work.  A  stu- 
dent will  be  wise  to  inquire  to  what  extent  progress  toward  a  degree  may  be  delayed  by 
the  work  entailed  in  certain  awards.  If,  for  example,  an  assistantship  lengthens  unduly 
the  time  necessary  to  obtain  a  degree,  a  smaller  fellowship  may  be  preferable.  The  dura- 
tion of  the  graduate  program  depends  on  several  factors,  but  the  policy  of  the  Duke  Gradu- 
ate School  is  to  keep  the  length  of  time  a  student  is  involved  in  obtaining  an  advanced 
degree  at  a  minimum. 


13 


14 


Duke  University  Graduate  School 

Teaching  and  Research 

In  surveying  the  progress  made  in  the  first  seven  years  after  the  founding  of  Duke 
University,  its  first  President,  William  Preston  Few,  wrote  that  he  wanted  "to  see  the  Gradu- 
ate School  made  strong  because  it  will  best  and  most  quickly  ensure  our  attaining  and 
maintaining  a  place  of  real  leadership  in  the  educational  world."  President  Few  believed 
that  "more  than  anything  else  here  our  Graduate  School  will  determine  the  sort  of  Univer- 
sity we  are  to  build  and  its  standing  in  the  educational  world ."  This  conviction  has  con- 
tinued to  prevail  to  the  present  day,  with  emphasis  upon  the  interdependence  of  teach- 
ing and  research  as  the  necessary  components  of  scholarship. 

Over  700  members  of  the  graduate  faculty  teach  the  approximately  900  courses  and 
seminars  offered  in  the  Graduate  School  and  supervise  thesis  and  dissertation  research. 
Many  of  the  major  universities  of  the  world  have  helped  to  train  this  faculty;  approximately 
90  percent  of  the  graduate  staff  hold  degrees  from  the  52  institutions  which  make  up  the 
Association  of  Graduate  Schools  within  the  Association  of  American  Universities.  By 
place  of  birth,  the  faculty  represent  almost  every  state  in  the  nation  and  almost  two  doz- 
en foreign  countries. 

The  groundwork  for  learning  may  be  laid  in  privacy— indeed  a  certain  amount  of  pri- 
vate study  and  research  is  absolutely  essential— but  the  vital  stimulus  to  the  learning  proc- 
ess comes  from  one's  contact  with  the  minds  of  other  people  with  similar  or  related  in- 
terests. This  is  precisely  why  graduate  schools  are  highly  selective  in  their  admissions 
policies,  and  it  is  one  of  the  important  reasons  for  their  willingness  to  offer  attractive  fel- 
lowship awards  to  outstanding  students.  The  superior  student  is  a  valuable  catalyst  both 
for  fellow  students  and  for  faculty  and  is  prized  as  such. 

Faculty  and  students  comprise  the  essential  human  factor  in  education,  but  their  joint 
endeavor  cannot  prosper  without  adequate  research  and  library  facilities.  Duke  University 
has  research  facilities  for  physics,  botany,  zoology,  chemistry,  psychology,  sociology,  en- 
gineering, and  biochemistry,  as  well  as  well-equipped  laboratories  in  the  various  depart- 
ments of  medical  science.  They  have  been  built  entirely,  or  modernized  and  expanded, 
within  recent  years.  The  University  has  an  excellent  Computation  Center  on  the  campus 
and  shares  a  computing  facility  with  the  University  of  North  Carolina  and  North  Caroli- 
na State  University.  The  Triangle  Universities  Computation  Center  is  among  the  largest 
research-oriented  computer  facilities  in  the  world .  The  University  has  an  excellent  research 
library.  In  number  of  volumes,  serials,  and  documents,  and  in  breadth  of  coverage,  the 

15 


library  offers  more  resources  than  many  graduate  schools  with  enrollments  two  or  three 
times  Duke's  size.  To  the  student  in  the  arts,  humanities,  or  social  sciences,  this  is  an  im- 
measurable asset. 

Among  the  many  special  features  of  the  Graduate  School  a  few  important  examples 
may  be  mentioned.  For  students  in  the  biological  and  physical  sciences,  the  facilities  of 
the  Duke  Marine  Laboratory  at  Beaufort,  North  Carolina,  are  available  for  course  work 
and  research.  The  laboratory  has  research  buildings,  classrooms,  research  vessels,  and 
living  quarters  which  make  it  an  excellent  research  center  in  marine  biology.  Closer  to 
home  are  the  8,300  acres  of  Duke  Forest,  managed  by  the  School  of  Forestry  and  Environ- 
mental Studies,  ideal  for  research  on  timber  growth,  soils,  and  related  topics.  A  regional 
nuclear  structure  laboratory  is  housed  on  the  campus  and  serves  the  major  universities 
in  the  area.  The  phytotron,  adjacent  to  the  botany  greenhouses,  is  an  integrated  series 
of  plant-growth  rooms,  chambers,  and  greenhouses,  with  forty-six  separately  controlled 
environments  providing  more  than  4,000  square  feet  of  plant-growing  space.  The  environ- 
mental factors  controlled  in  the  units  for  the  study  of  plant  growth  include  light,  temper- 
ature, nutrients,  carbon  dioxide  concentration,  and  humidity. 

Additional  resources  and  facilities  are  available  to  the  graduate  student  through 
Duke's  fine  Schools  of  Law,  Business,  Medicine,  Engineering,  Forestry  and  Environmental 
Studies,  and  the  Divinity  School.  A  two-term  summer  session  and  the  availability  of 
courses  at  the  nearby  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina  Cen- 
tral University  in  Durham,  and  North  Carolina  State  University  in  Raleigh,  under  a 
cooperative  arrangement,  offer  other  opportunities  to  the  graduate  student. 

No  description  of  programs  can  begin  to  give  the  prospective  student  the  full  flavor 
of  graduate  study  in  a  particular  institution .  If  practical,  a  visit  to  the  universities  in  which 
one  is  interested  is  always  helpful.  The  Duke  Graduate  School  offers  a  warm  invitation 
to  prospective  students  to  come  to  the  campus  during  the  year  to  discuss  their  possible 
application  and  admission. 

The  visitor  will  find  at  Duke  most  of  the  facilities  that  one  could  hope  for  in  the  largest 
of  institutions,  and  yet  the  University  has  been  fortunate  in  avoiding  many  of  the  evils 
that  seem  inevitable  with  mass  education.  Despite  a  total  University  enrollment  of  ap- 
proximately 9,500,  Duke  has  retained  the  sense  of  community  that  one  usually  associ- 
ates with  a  small  liberal  arts  college.  And  in  an  age  when  current  architectural  whim  of- 
ten adds  yet  another  stylistic  variant  to  an  already  eclectic  array  of  buildings,  Duke  has 
built  a  campus  of  unusual  and  architecturally  coherent  beauty  This,  too,  is  an  important 
part  of  education,  creating  an  environment  conducive  to  learning. 

Special  Programs 

Center  for  the  Study  of  Aging  and  Human  Development.  The  primary  aims  of  the 
center  are  to  encourage  and  support  basic  and  applied  research  on  biomedical,  behavioral, 
and  social  scientific  aspects  of  adult  development  and  aging;  to  train  investigators  for  such 
research;  to  provide  clinical  training  in  geriatrics  for  health  professionals;  and  to  develop 
sources  of  scientific  information  which  are  accessible  to  interested  individuals,  organi- 
zations, and  governmental  agencies.  Although  the  center  does  not  offer  degrees,  the  var- 
ied programs,  research  laboratories,  and  clinical  settings  provide  a  context  and  resource 
for  undergraduate  and  graduate  students  and  for  health  professionals  with  a  special  in- 
terest in  adult  development  and  aging.  Inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  Harvey  Jay 
Cohen,  M.D.,  Director,  Duke  University  Center  for  the  Study  of  Aging  and  Human 
Development,  Box  3003,  Duke  University  Medical  Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

Asian-Pacific  Studies  Institute.  The  institute  sponsors  an  agenda  of  visiting  speak- 
ers and  scholars  and  coordinates  study  abroad  programs  in  China  and  Japan.  A  limited 
number  of  fellowships  are  granted  which  provide  stipends  for  a  two-year  period .  Incom- 
ing graduate  students  with  the  Ph .  D.  as  their  objective,  students  in  good  standing  in  the 
first  year  of  study  in  Duke  professional  schools,  and  current  Duke  students  enrolled  in 

16 


Ph.D.  programs  may  be  considered  for  these  fellowships.  Further  information  may  be 
obtained  from  The  Asian-Pacific  Studies  Institute,  2111  Campus  Drive,  Duke  University, 
Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering.  The  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering 
offers  versatile  and  broad  education  at  the  graduate  level  for  students  interested  in  de- 
veloping and  using  engineering  principles  to  understand  and  implement  biological  and 
biochemical  processes.  The  programs  of  study  in  biochemical  engineering  are  thus  in- 
terdisciplinary. Students  follow  a  program  of  course  work  to  reinforce  advanced  princi- 
ples of  chemical  process  engineering,  mathematics,  and  physics,  as  well  as  microbiolo- 
gy, biochemistry,  immunology,  and  genetics.  Close  relations  are  maintained  with  many 
departments  and  schools  of  the  University,  and  research  projects  involving  work  in  these 
other  departments  are  encouraged.  Major  emphasis  is  placed  on  study  leading  to  the 
Ph.D.,  the  traditional  degree  of  scholarship  awarded  for  mastery  of  a  significant  field  of 
knowledge.  This  mastery  is  demonstrated  by  a  combination  of  course  work  in  a  major 
and  minor  field,  completion  of  an  original  research  project  submitted  as  a  dissertation, 
and  a  successful  defense  of  the  research.  Programs  leading  to  the  Master  of  Science  de- 
gree are  also  available.  Students  from  non-engineering  programs  are  encouraged  to  ap- 
ply to  either  degree  program.  Further  information  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies,  The  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering,  Teer  Engineering  Building, 
Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Canadian  Studies  Program.  The  purpose  of  the  program  is  to  increase  American 
knowledge  and  understanding  of  Canada  by  formalizing  and  expanding  graduate  interest 
in  Canada,  introducing  the  study  of  Canadian  life  and  culture  at  the  undergraduate  lev- 
el, and  encouraging  such  study  in  primary  and  secondary  schools.  The  program  awards 
a  limited  number  of  graduate  fellowships  and  teaching  assistantships  to  resident  or  in- 
coming graduate  students  who  undertake  a  dissertation  topic  on  Canada  or  Canadian- 
American  relations;  sponsors  lectures  by  Canadian  specialists;  and  supports  seminars 
devoted  to  Canada.  Inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  the  Director,  Canadian  Studies  Cen- 
ter, 2016  Campus  Drive,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  This  program  centralizes 
the  cell,  developmental,  and  molecular  biology  research  training  found  in  eight  of  the 
University's  departments:  biochemistry,  botany,  cell  biology/physiology,  microbiology 
and  immunology,  neurobiology,  pathology,  pharmacology,  and  zoology.  Prospective  stu- 
dents may  either  apply  to  one  of  the  participating  departments,  or  apply  directly  to  the 
program.  Applications  for  admission  and  fellowship  support  must  be  received  by  Febru- 
ary 1,  but  early  applications  may  receive  advance  consideration.  Inquiries  should  be  ad- 
dressed to  Dr.  Bernard  Kaufman,  The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biolo- 
gy, Box  3711,  Duke  University  Medical  Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

Continuing  Education.  Local  adult  residents  may  pursue  graduate  academic  study 
at  Duke  as  nondegree  students  through  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education,  which  will 
provide  both  academic  and  career  counseling  to  such  students.  Up  to  12  graduate  credits 
earned  by  a  nondegree  Continuing  Education  student  in  graduate  courses  taken  at  Duke 
before  full  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  may  be  carried  over  into  a  graduate  degree 
program  if  (1)  the  action  is  recommended  by  the  student's  Director  of  Graduate  Studies, 
(2)  the  work  is  not  more  than  two  years  old,  and  (3)  the  work  is  of  G  level  or  better.  GRE 
workshops  are  also  offered  regularly.  Information  and  applications  may  be  obtained  from 
the  Office  of  Continuing  Education,  The  Bishop's  House,  Duke  University,  Durham, 
North  Carolina  27708. 

Cooperative  Programs  with  Neighboring  Universities:  Library  Exchange.  Through 
a  cooperative  lending  program,  graduate  students  of  the  University  of  North  Carolina 
and  Duke  University  are  granted  library  loan  privileges  in  both  universities. 


17 


Cooperative  Program  in  Russian  and  East  European  Studies.  The  graduate  schools 
of  Duke  University  and  the  University  of  North  Carolina  offer  a  cooperative  program  lead- 
ing to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  in  several  disciplines  (economics,  history  literature, 
linguistics,  political  science,  and  psychology),  with  a  concentration  in  Russian  and  East 
European  studies.  Students  admitted  to  one  institution  are  encouraged  to  enroll  in  courses 
advantageous  to  their  programs  at  the  other  institution,  to  utilize  the  libraries  and  facili- 
ties of  both  universities,  and  to  participate  in  the  periodic  colloquia  involving  the  personnel 
of  the  two  institutions  and  distinguished  visiting  scholars.  For  information,  contact  Profes- 
sor Martin  Miller,  Department  of  History,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina 
27708. 

Center  for  Demographic  Studies.  The  facilities  of  the  center,  located  at  2117  Campus 
Drive,  include  a  population  library,  the  Joseph  J.  Spengler  Collection  of  publications  and 
research  materials,  and  extensive  data  resources.  These  are  available  to  the  entire  Duke 
community.  The  center  does  not  offer  degrees;  it  promotes  the  pursuit  of  advanced 
degrees,  with  a  specialization  in  population  studies,  through  either  the  Department  of 
Sociology  or  the  Department  of  Economics.  The  center's  program  provides  opportuni- 
ties for  direct  student  participation  in  ongoing  research  projects.  The  program  of  ex- 
tramural research  stresses,  but  is  not  limited  to,  work  in  the  demography  of  aging,  health, 
mortality,  fertility,  and  migration .  Inquiries  for  training  and  research  opportunities  may 
be  directed  to  Dr.  George  C.  Myers,  Director,  Center  for  Demographic  Studies,  2117  Cam- 
pus Drive,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  Program  for  the  Study  of  Developed  Shorelines.  The  Program  for  the  Study  of 
Developed  Shorelines  was  established  in  recognition  of  a  critical  need  for  both  academ- 
ic programs  and  geological  research  on  national  coastal  issues.  The  goal  of  the  program 
is  promotion  of  research,  education,  and  publications  concerned  with  oceanic  shorelines 
already  under  development .  A  limited  number  of  graduate  research  fellowships  are  avail- 
able to  both  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  candidates  and  postdoctoral  support  is  available  for  individu- 
als involved  in  appropriate  research.  The  program  is  centered  entirely  within  the  Depart- 
ment of  Geology  and  fellows  supported  by  the  program  must  satisfy  all  departmental 
requirements.  For  more  information  contact  Professor  Orrin  Pilkey,  Director,  Program  for 
the  Study  of  Developed  Shorelines,  Department  of  Geology,  Duke  University  Durham, 
North  Carolina  27709. 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  This  is  an  interdisciplinary  program  with  a 
faculty  drawn  from  several  of  the  biological  science  departments  (biochemistry,  botany, 
cell  biology,  microbiology  and  immunology,  zoology),  and  is  designed  to  meet  the  needs 
of  students  with  a  variety  of  educational  backgrounds  and  professional  objectives  who 
are  interested  in  specializing  in  the  field  of  genetics.  Interested  students  should  apply  for 
admission  to  the  department  of  their  choice,  and  after  being  admitted  make  arrangements 
to  participate  in  the  program.  For  information,  consult  Dr.  P.  Modrich,  Director,  The 
University  Program  in  Genetics,  Department  of  Biochemistry,  Box  3711  Duke  University 
Medical  Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

Master  of  Arts  Program  in  Humanities.  This  interdepartmental  program  centered 
in  the  humanities  and  leading  to  the  A.M.  degree  is  designed  for  students  whose  interests 
cross  disciplinary  lines  and  are  not  easily  met  by  departmental  programs.  Students  se- 
lect a  set  of  thematically  related  courses  from  the  graduate  level  offerings  of  humanities 
departments,  and,  where  appropriate,  from  other  departments  as  well .  The  interdepart- 
mental committee  which  manages  the  program  offers  aid  in  tailoring  a  set  of  courses  to 
the  individual  student's  needs,  approves  the  program  chosen,  and  provides  ongoing  su- 
pervision. Information  on  program  requirements  and  admission  may  be  found  in  the 
chapter  on  "Advanced  Degree  Programs."  Additional  information  may  be  obtained  by  writ- 
ing the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  Master  of  Arts  Program  in  Humanities,  The  Graduate 
School,  127  Allen  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

18 


Program  in  International  Development  Policy.  The  Duke  Center  for  International 
Development  Research  provides  long  and  short-term  training  for  mid-career  professionals 
from  developing  and  industrialized  countries.  The  Program  in  International  Development 
Policy  (PIDP)  is  a  year-long  program  in  policy  design  and  implementation  with  a  master's 
degree  option. 

The  structural  core  of  the  PIDP  consists  of  two  simultaneous  year-long  development 
policy  seminars  attended  by  all  participants.  During  the  1989-90  academic  year,  one  semi- 
nar focuses  on  export-oriented  natural  resource  exploitation  for  development,  and  the 
other  seminar  explores  the  evolution  of  the  public  sector. 

Beyond  the  development  policy  seminars,  PIDP  fellows  have  the  opportunity  to  draw 
from  the  extensive  resources  of  the  Institute  of  Policy  Sciences  and  Public  Affairs  and  of 
Duke  University— particularly  the  graduate  and  professional  schools.  Fellows  are  able 
to  map  out  a  course  of  study  which  addresses  their  specific  needs— whether  that  need 
is  to  supplement  training  through  course  work  across  a  range  of  fields,  to  focus  on  an  in- 
tegrated curriculum  leading  to  a  master's  degree,  or  to  concentrate  completely  on  the  re- 
search generated  through  the  development  policy  seminars. 

Duke  University  International  House.  International  House  is  the  center  of  cocur- 
ricular  programs  for  the  more  than  four  hundred  students  from  sixty-nine  countries  who 
are  presently  enrolled  at  Duke.  Programs  which  assist  students  from  abroad  in  participat- 
ing in  the  life  of  the  Durham  and  Duke  communities  include:  an  intensive  orientation 
program  at  the  beginning  of  the  academic  year;  the  International  Friends  Program  (for- 
merly Host  Family  Program),  in  which  interested  international  students  may  become  ac- 
quainted with  American  families;  the  Duke  Partners  Program  which  pairs  an  American 
and  visiting  partner  for  weekly  meetings  to  practice  English  and  to  learn  about  each  other's 
cultures;  the  International  Wives  Club,  which  provides  a  structure  for  international  wom- 
en to  meet  with  American  women  in  an  informal  atmosphere;  the  Speakers'  Bureau, 
which  arranges  for  international  students  to  speak  at  civic  and  social  groups  as  well  as 
schools  in  the  Durham  community;  intermediate  level  English  conversation  and  gram- 
mar classes  which  meet  twice  a  week;  and  the  Friday  coffee  break  in  the  basement  of  the 
Chapel  which  is  sponsored  by  Campus  Ministry  especially  for  internationals  and  friends. 
The  International  Association  is  a  student  organization  which  includes  a  significant  num- 
ber of  American  members,  as  well  as  international  students.  The  association  plans  so- 
cial and  cultural  programs  which  emphasize  personal  contact  and  the  informal  exchange 
of  ideas  among  students  from  diverse  backgrounds.  Included  are  weekly  open-houses 
with  lectures,  films,  pot-luck  dinners,  or  parties;  periodic  trips  outside  of  Durham;  and 
an  annual  International  Day  on  campus  which  draws  visitors  from  throughout  the  area. 
Additional  information  may  be  obtained  by  writing  to  Carlisle  C.  Harvard,  Director,  In- 
ternational House,  2022  Campus  Drive,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Islamic  and  Arabian  Development  Studies.  This  program,  begun  in  1977  with  the 
assistance  of  grants  from  the  government  of  Saudi  Arabia  and  some  twenty  corporations 
in  the  United  States,  sponsors  conferences  and  research  on  Islamic  themes  with  special 
reference  to  developmental  problems  of  the  Arabian  peninsula.  The  program  has  sup- 
ported courses  and  seminars  on  the  language,  art,  and  contemporary  problems  of  the 
Islamic  world.  It  sponsored  student  delegations  to  the  annual  Model  Assembly  of  the 
League  of  Arab  States  in  Washington,  D.C.  The  1984  delegation  won  the  highest  num- 
ber of  awards  given  to  any  participating  university  Twelve  faculty  members  from  out- 
reach colleges  were  awarded  fellowships  for  study  in  Cairo  and  six  Duke  faculty  were  given 
fellowships  for  study  in  Jordan  in  1984.  The  program  was  the  recipient  of  a  bequest  by 
the  late  Joseph  J.  Malone  of  his  library  in  Arabian  affairs.  The  program  also  arranged  for 
acquisition  by  Perkins  Library  of  the  Louis  and  Nancy  Hatch  Dupree  Collection  on  Islamic 
Central  Asia.  The  program  has  sponsored  four  international  conferences,  two  at  Duke, 
one  at  Kiawah  Island  and  the  fourth  at  the  Rockefeller  Foundation  Conference  Center, 
Bellagio,  Italy.  The  program  also  sponsors  an  outreach  program  which  includes 


19 


Appalachian  State  University,  Belmont  Abbey  College,  the  College  of  Charleston,  Con- 
verse College,  Davidson  College,  Johnson  C.  Smith  University,  Old  Dominion  Univer- 
sity, and  the  University  of  the  South .  Inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  Dr.  Ralph  Braibanti, 
Director,  Islamic  and  Arabian  Development  Studies,  2114  Campus  Drive,  Duke  Univer- 
sity, Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Latin  American  Studies  Program.  The  Graduate  School  offers  an  interdepartmen- 
tal program  in  Latin  American  studies  in  conjunction  with  several  departments.  Students 
apply  to  the  Departments  of  Cultural  Anthropology,  Economics,  History,  Political  Science, 
Sociology,  or  Romance  Studies,  fulfilling  the  requirements  of  those  departments  and  writ- 
ing their  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  under  their  auspices.  In  consultation  with  the  candi- 
date, a  faculty  committee  will  determine  a  special  program  of  study  giving  the  candidate 
rigorous  training  in  the  Latin  American  field  in  addition  to  their  disciplinary  training.  The 
holdings  of  the  Perkins  Library  for  graduate  work  and  research  in  Latin-American  histo- 
ry, inter-American  relations,  economic  history,  politics,  art,  and  Spanish-American  liter- 
ature are  constantly  being  enlarged.  Program  faculty  are  involved  in  different  national 
research  programs  dealing  with  Latin  American  topics  and  offer  advice  on  fellowship  sup- 
port for  graduate  research  in  Latin  America  and  the  Caribbean .  Inquiries  should  be  direct- 
ed to  the  Council  on  Latin  American  Studies,  Center  for  International  Studies,  2122  Cam- 
pus Drive,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Master  of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies.  The  Master  of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies  is  an  inter- 
disciplinary program  that  allows  individuals  with  a  variety  of  professional  and  personal 
educational  goals  the  flexibility  to  pursue  their  interests  across  traditional  disciplinary 
boundaries.  The  program  is  managed  by  an  interdepartmental  committee.  Students  study 
primarily  on  a  part-time  basis  and  choose  from  an  array  of  interdisciplinary  courses  de- 
veloped specifically  for  this  program.  In  addition,  the  students  may  select  other  graduate- 
level  courses  that  fit  their  individual  needs  and  interests.  For  further  information,  call  or 
write  the  Director,  Master  of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies  Program,  Room  120  Allen  Building, 
Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706,  (919)  684-3222. 

The  Graduate  Program  in  Literature.  The  doctoral  Program  in  Literature  at  Duke  has 
as  its  goals  the  education  of  men  and  women  who  will  be  fully  qualified  to  teach  in  depart- 
ments of  national  literatures  as  well  as  in  humanities  and  other  interdisciplinary  programs. 
The  program  is  not  comparatist  in  the  traditional  sense  but  theoretical  in  focus,  dedicated 
to  the  understanding  of  cultural  history  and  the  reshaping  of  literary  studies  in  the  context 
of  contemporary  thought.  All  the  literature  departments  cooperate  in  this  program  and 
its  students  have  access  to  all  courses  given  under  the  auspices  of  the  graduate  faculties 
in  the  humanities.  A  full  descriptive  brochure  is  available.  To  obtain  the  brochure  or  other 
information,  contact  Dr.  Annabel  Patterson,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  Graduate  Pro- 
gram in  Literature,  305  Carr  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Medical  Historian  Training  Program.  Conducted  under  the  auspices  of  the  School 
of  Medicine  and  the  Graduate  School,  this  program  requires  a  minimum  of  six  years  of 
graduate  study  for  the  M.D.-Ph.D.,  and  four  or  five  years  for  the  M.D.-A.M.  The  M.D.- 
Ph.D  program  is  intended  for  those  students  who  know  that  their  major  career  effort  will 
be  in  teaching  and  other  scholarly  activities  in  the  history  of  medicine  (not  necessarily 
to  the  total  exclusion  of  clinical  medicine).  TheM.D.-A.M.,  on  the  other  hand,  is  appropri- 
ate for  those  who  are  undecided,  but  who  wish  to  acquire  a  firm  foundation  for  future 
study,  or  for  those  who  are  seriously  interested  in  pursuing  an  avocation  in  the  history 
of  medicine.  Applicants  must  meet  the  requirements  for  admission  to  the  School  of  Medi- 
cine and  the  Graduate  School  in  the  Department  of  History.  Inquiries  should  be  addressed 
to  Dr.  Peter  English,  Director,  Medical  Historian  Training  Program,  Box  3420,  Duke  Univer- 
sity Medical  Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

Medical  Scientist  Training  Program.  This  program  is  conducted  under  the  auspices 
of  the  Graduate  School  and  the  School  of  Medicine  and  is  designed  for  students  with  a 

20 


strong  background  in  science  who  are  motivated  toward  a  career  in  the  medical  sciences 
and  academic  medicine.  It  provides  an  opportunity  to  integrate  graduate  education  in 
one  of  the  sciences  basic  to  medicine  with  the  clinical  curriculum  of  the  School  of  Medi- 
cine, and  usually  requires  six  to  seven  years  of  study  leading  to  both  the  M.  D.  and  Ph .  D. 
degrees.  Interested  students  should  apply  for  admission  to  both  the  Graduate  School  and 
the  School  of  Medicine.  Additional  information  may  be  obtained  by  consulting  Dr.  Sal- 
vatore  Pizzo,  Director,  Medical  Scientist  Training  Program,  Department  of  Pathology,  Box 
3712,  Duke  University  Medical  Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

Program  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  This  program  is  administered  by  the 
Duke  University  Center  for  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  A  participating  student 
is  enrolled  in  one  of  the  regular  departments  and  fulfills  the  Ph.D.  requirements  for  that 
discipline  while  taking  a  program  of  electives  which  will  advance  his  or  her  interdiscipli- 
nary competence  in  the  medieval  or  Renaissance  areas.  Such  a  program  may  include  a 
choice  from  the  fields  of  art  history,  language  and  literature,  history,  philosophy,  and  re- 
ligion. Participation  in  the  program  will  fulfill  the  Graduate  School  requirement  for  work 
in  a  related  field.  Inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  Duke 
University  Center  for  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies,  Box  4666,  Duke  Station, 
Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Oak  Ridge  Associated  Universities.  Duke  University  is  one  of  the  sponsoring  univer- 
sities of  the  Oak  Ridge  Associated  Universities  located  at  Oak  Ridge,  Tennessee.  The 
graduate  research  program  at  Duke  has  available  to  it  all  of  the  facilities  of  the  Oak  Ridge 
National  Laboratory  and  the  cooperative  supervision  of  student  research  by  the  staff  at 
Oak  Ridge.  Fellowships  in  several  fields  of  science  are  available  to  qualified  applicants. 
Further  information  may  be  obtained  from  Judith  Argon,  Office  of  Research  Support,  001E 
Allen  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Institute  of  Policy  Sciences  and  Public  Affairs.  See  Public  Policy  Studies  in  the  chapter 
on  "Advanced  Degree  Programs"  in  this  bulletin. 

Center  for  Resource  and  Environmental  Policy  Research.  Housed  in  the  School  of 
Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies,  the  center  combines  the  efforts  of  a  small  perma- 
nent faculty  with  participation  by  business  leaders,  government  officials,  and  the  faculty 
and  students  of  Duke  University  and  other  universities  to  provide  a  center  of  excellence 
for  the  analysis  of  contemporary  resource  and  environmental  policy  issues,  a  forum  for 
the  examination  of  public  and  private  responsibilities  for  natural  resources  and  the  en- 
vironment, and  a  link  between  the  specialized  knowledge  of  academia  and  the  informa- 
tion needs  of  government  and  industry.  Graduate  research  assistantships  are  offered  to 
qualified  students  researching  resource  and  environmental  policy  problems.  Support  is 
available  to  students  pursuing  M .  S. ,  A .  M . ,  or  Ph .  D.  degrees  through  the  Graduate  School 
at  Duke  University  and  in  conjunction  with  the  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental 
Studies  or  other  departments.  Course  work  is  offered  in  both  intensive  (one  to  three 
weeks)  and  semester-long  formats.  For  further  information,  write  to  Dr.  Robert  Healy, 
Center  for  Resource  and  Environmental  Policy  Research,  102  Biological  Sciences  Build- 
ing, Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  University  Program  in  Toxicology.  This  interdepartmental  program  provides 
graduate  students  and  postdoctoral  fellows  with  an  opportunity  for  a  strong  education 
in  toxicology  through  support  of  courses,  seminars,  and  research .  The  objectives  of  pro- 
gram members  are  to  understand  and  devise  controls  for  those  toxicological  phenome- 
na having  direct  effects  on  human  life  and  health,  to  train  scholars  who  will  advance  the 
science  of  this  discipline,  and  to  provide  a  forum  for  faculty  and  student  discussion  of 
recent  research  developments.  The  faculty  of  the  toxicology  program  is  drawn  from  bio- 
chemistry, biological  anthropology  and  anatomy,  cell  biology/physiology,  chemistry,  for- 
estry and  environmental  studies,  microbiology  and  immunology,  neurobiology,  pathol- 
ogy, pharmacology,  zoology,  and  several  departments  in  the  School  of  Medicine.  Current 

21 


areas  of  research  include  pulmonary  toxicology,  neurotoxicology,  immunotoxicology  car- 
cinogenesis, and  biochemical  toxicology.  Students  may  base  their  training  in  general  tox- 
icology ecotoxicology,  or  any  area  in  which  the  faculty  is  currently  involved.  Prospective 
graduate  students  may  apply  to  the  program  directly  or  to  one  of  the  participating  depart- 
ments, and  must  be  admitted  both  to  the  department  and  to  the  program.  Information 
on  fellowship  support  and  application  procedures  may  be  obtained  from  Dr.  Doyle  G. 
Graham,  Director,  University  Program  in  Toxicology,  Box  3712,  Duke  University  Medi- 
cal Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

Organization  for  Tropical  Studies.  Duke  University  is  a  member  of  an  international 
consortium  created  to  promote  an  understanding  of  tropical  environments  though  re- 
search and  research-training  programs  in  the  tropics.  A  basic  eight- week  OTS  course  in 
tropical  biology  is  conducted  twice  a  year,  and  advanced  course  offerings  are  scheduled 
periodically  in  agriculture,  botany,  forestry,  geography,  and  zoology.  For  information,  con- 
sult Dr.  Donald  Stone  or  Dr.  Richard  White,  Department  of  Botany;  or  Dr.  John  Lund- 
berg,  Department  of  Zoology;  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Short  Courses  and  Conferences.  Short  courses,  institutes,  and  conferences  are  con- 
ducted throughout  the  year  by  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education.  Some  are  residen- 
tial, others  are  designed  for  local  participants;  some  carry  continuing  education  units 
(CEUs).  Programs  include  the  Duke  Young  Writers'  Camp,  Writers'  Conferences,  and 
Product  Safety  Seminars.  Contact  Dr.  Judith  Ruderman,  Director,  Office  of  Continuing 
Education,  The  Bishop's  House,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27708,  for 
brochures  describing  current  offerings. 

Duke  Summer  Festival  of  the  Arts.  The  Duke  Summer  Festival  of  Creative  Arts  is  ad- 
ministered jointly  by  the  Summer  Session  Office  and  the  Office  of  Cultural  Affairs.  The 
festival  provides  an  exciting,  artistically  stimulating  environment  for  the  campus  and  com- 
munity. The  Ciompi  Quartet,  Duke's  well-known  Chamber  Music  Ensemble,  will  give 
several  performances.  Other  special  events  such  as  jazz  concerts,  carillon  recitals,  dance 
and  theater  performances,  and  film  series  are  planned.  Specific  course  listings  can  be 
found  under  art,  dance,  drama,  and  music. 

The  American  Dance  Festival.  The  six-week  program  offers  a  wide  variety  of  class- 
es, performances,  and  workshops.  For  a  catalog,  write  to  the  American  Dance  Festival, 
Duke  University,  Box  6097  College  Station,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27708. 

Summer  Theater  Institute.  The  Summer  Theater  Institute,  for  students  seriously  in- 
terested in  theater,  offers  intense  professional-level  training  and  experience.  Courses  in- 
volve substantial  contact  time  and  carefully  prepared  assignments.  Opportunities  for  stu- 
dents to  be  involved  in  professional  theater  activities  are  planned.  Courses  are  open 
primarily  to  Duke  students,  but  with  special  permission  of  the  Director  of  Drama,  stu- 
dents from  other  institutions  may  attend.  Detailed  information  on  faculty  and  courses 
may  be  obtained  from  the  Summer  Theater  Institute,  206  Bivins  Building,  Duke  Univer- 
sity, Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

General  Regulations  Governing  Graduate  Studies 

The  official,  detailed  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Graduate  School,  published  in  March 
of  each  year,  gives  an  account  of  regulations  concerning  graduate  work  at  Duke  Univer- 
sity and  a  full  description  of  course  content .  The  following  pages  are  a  summary  of  these 
materials  for  1989-90  and  should  provide  sufficient  information,  together  with  the  ap- 
plication packet,  for  the  prospective  student.  The  bulletin  is  normally  mailed  to  each  stu- 
dent who  is  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  in  the  late  spring  of  the  year  of  matricula- 
tion so  that  the  course  program  may  be  planned  for  the  first  year. 


22 


Admission 

All  students  seeking  a  graduate  degree  from  Duke  University  must  formally  be  ad- 
mitted to  the  Graduate  School.  Applicants  are  considered  without  regard  to  race,  color, 
religion,  national  origin,  handicap,  veteran  status,  sexual  orientation  or  preference,  sex, 
or  age. 

Prerequisites  for  admission  include  a  bachelor's  degree  (or  the  equivalent)  from  an 
accredited  institution.  The  student's  undergraduate  background  should  be  well-rounded 
and  of  high  quality,  indicating  ability  for  graduate  study.  Ordinarily  the  student  should 
have  majored  in  the  area  of  intended  graduate  study.  Many  departments  (see  the  section 
on  "Advanced  Degree  Programs")  list  specific  prerequisites.  Satisfactory  scores  on  the 
Graduate  Record  Examination  are  required  by  all  departments. 

Many  graduate  departments  will  consider  applications  from  students  wishing  to  pur- 
sue degree  study  on  a  full-time  or  part-time  basis.  (Consult  application  materials  for  listing 
of  departments.)  Admission  requirements,  procedures,  and  deadlines  are  the  same  for 
both  full-  and  part-time  students.  Part-time  study  requires  a  minimum  registration  of  3 
units  per  semester,  and  while  it  is  possible  to  obtain  the  master's  degree  on  a  totally  part- 
time  basis,  the  Ph.  D.  degree  does  require  a  minimum  of  one  year  of  full-time  residence. 
Additionally,  students  must  maintain  continuous  registration  from  entry  into  the  Gradu- 
ate School  to  completion  of  degree.  Time  limits  for  completion  of  degrees  are  the  same 
for  both  full-  and  part-time  students.  Financial  aid  through  Duke  University  is  not  avail- 
able to  part-time  students  (except  during  their  year  of  full-time  residence).  Visa  restric- 
tions do  not  allow  nonimmigrant  students  to  pursue  graduate  study  on  a  part-time  basis. 

Students  who  do  not  intend  to  earn  an  advanced  degree  at  Duke,  but  who  wish  to 
take  graduate  courses,  may  apply  for  nondegree  admission.  Such  admission  is  granted 
in  three  different  categories:  (1)  admission  as  a  regular  nondegree  student  in  the  Gradu- 
ate School,  which  involves  application  to  a  particular  department  and  fulfillment  of  stan- 
dard application  procedures  and  requirements;  (2)  admission  as  a  special  nondegree  stu- 
dent through  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education  in  conjunction  with  the  Graduate 
School,  without  departmental  affiliation,  following  special  application  procedures;  and 
(3)  admission  as  an  unclassified  student  in  the  summer  session  only,  requiring  applica- 
tion to  the  Director  of  the  Summer  Session. 

Procedures.  A  student  seeking  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  should  obtain  an 
application  packet  from  the  Graduate  School  Admissions  Office.  (Note:  Persons  interested 
in  the  Master  of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies  should  contact  that  program  directly  for  informa- 
tion, requirements,  and  special  application  materials.)  This  packet  contains  the  neces- 
sary forms  and  detailed  application  instructions.  The  application  form  and  accompany- 
ing Summary  Data  sheet  must  be  filled  out  completely,  signed,  and  returned  to  the 
Graduate  Admissions  Office  accompanied  by  a  nonrefundable  fee  of  $50  in  U.S.  curren- 
cy (check  or  money  order  payable  to  Duke  University  through  a  U.S.  bank).  In  addition, 
the  student  must  provide  the  following  supporting  documents:  (1)  two  copies  of  the  offi- 
cial, confidential  transcript  from  each  post-secondary  institution  attended  sent  directly 
to  the  Graduate  School  by  the  institution;  (2)  three  letters  of  evaluation  from  persons  best 
qualified  to  judge  the  applicant  as  a  prospective  graduate  student,  written  on  the  forms 
provided  and  returned  by  the  applicant  in  the  confidential  envelopes  that  have  been 
sealed-then-signed  by  the  evaluators  (or  returned  directly  to  the  Graduate  School  by  the 
evaluator);  (3)  official  scores  on  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  General  Test  for  ap- 
plicants to  all  departments;  and  (4)  official  scores  on  the  Graduate  Record  Examination 
Subject  Test  for  applicants  to  certain  specified  departments.  Please  consult  the  current 
application  packet  for  more  detailed  information  on  all  requirements. 

Students  applying  for  fall  admission  and  award  should  take  the  Graduate  Record 
Examination  no  later  than  the  October  testing  in  the  previous  year  to  meet  our  deadlines. 
Information  on  the  times  and  places  of  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  can  be  provided 


23 


by  the  applicant's  college  or  by  the  Educational  Testing  Service,  P.O.  Box  6000,  Princeton, 
New  Jersey  08541-6000. 

Applications  cannot  be  reviewed  until  all  supporting  documents  are  on  file.  Materials 
submitted  in  support  of  an  application  are  not  released  for  other  purposes  and  cannot  be  returned  to 
the  applicant . 

Fully  qualified  students  from  outside  the  United  States  may  apply  for  admission  to 
full-time  study  in  the  Graduate  School.  The  foreign  student  must,  in  addition  to  the  infor- 
mation required  of  all  students,  submit  the  following  materials  with  the  application:  (1) 
if  the  student's  native  language  is  not  English,  certification  of  English  proficiency  demon- 
strated by  official  scores  from  the  Test  of  English  as  a  Foreign  Language  (TOEFL),  ad- 
ministered through  the  Educational  Testing  Service,  P.O.  Box  6155,  Princeton,  New  Jersey 
08541-6155  (the  Graduate  School  requires  a  score  of  550  or  higher  on  the  TOEFL);  (2)  a 
statement  showing  financial  arrangements  for  the  proposed  term  at  Duke  (estimated  costs 
per  calendar  year  are  about  $19,500) .  Foreign  students  may  apply  for  full-time  study  only. 

During  new  matriculants'  first  registration  period  at  Duke,  every  foreign  student 
whose  native  language  is  not  English  will  be  required  to  take  a  test  to  verify  competence 
in  the  use  of  oral  and  written  English.  Students  found  to  lack  the  necessary  competence 
will  be  expected  to  undertake  additional  English  language  instruction.  Students  who  do 
not  perform  satisfactorily  on  the  test  for  competence  in  oral  and  written  English  by  the 
end  of  their  first  year  of  residency  will  not  be  permitted  to  continue  graduate  work  at  Duke 
University.  Please  note  that  the  competency  test  does  not  take  the  place  of  the  TOEFL  550 
requirement,  nor  does  passing  the  competency  examination  meet  degree  requirements 
for  a  foreign  language. 

It  is  the  applicant's  responsibility  to  make  certain  that  the  Graduate  School  Office  has 
received  all  required  materials  before  the  specified  deadlines,  which  are  outlined  at  the 
close  of  this  chapter  and  detailed  in  the  application  materials.  To  ensure  that  the  Admis- 
sions Office  will  have  adequate  time  to  assemble  all  items  submitted  on  an  applicant's 
behalf,  applications  should  be  submitted  at  least  two  weeks  before  the  deadline.  Only 
complete  applications  can  be  considered.  Anyone  whose  folder  is  not  complete  by  the 
deadline  will  face  the  possibility  that  departmental  enrollment  will  have  been  filled  and 
that  all  financial  aid  funds  will  have  been  committed  based  on  applications  that  were  com- 
plete as  of  the  deadline. 

Application  files  are  assembled  in  the  Graduate  School  Admissions  Office,  where 
all  official  record-keeping  is  maintained.  Applications,  when  complete,  are  sent  to  the 
departments.  A  departmental  admissions  committee,  usually  headed  by  the  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies,  reviews  the  applications  and  makes  recommendations  to  the  Dean. 
Formal  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  is  offered  only  by  the  Dean,  who  will  send  the 
official  letter  of  admission  and  an  acceptance  form.  The  process  of  admission  is  not  com- 
plete until  the  student  returns  the  acceptance  form.  An  admission  offer  is  only  for  the 
semester  specified  in  the  letter  of  admission;  admission  may  not  be  deferred  from  one 
term  to  another. 

Immunizations.  North  Carolina  Statute  G.S. :  130A-155.1  states  that  no  person  shall 
attend  a  college  or  university,  public,  private,  or  religious,  excluding  students  attending 
night  classes  only  and  students  matriculating  in  off-campus  courses,  unless  a  certificate 
of  immunizations  against  diptheria,  tetanus,  whooping  cough,  poliomyelitis,  red  mea- 
sles (rubeola),  and  rubella  is  presented  to  the  college  or  university  on  or  before  the  first 
day  of  matriculation.  The  required  forms  and  instructions  are  provided  to  students  in  the 
packet  of  materials  sent  with  the  letter  of  admission. 


24 


25 


Earning  the  Degrees 

Duke  University  offers  graduate  programs  leading  to  the  specified  advanced  degrees 
in  the  following  fields:* 


Biochemical  Engineering,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 

Biochemistry,  Ph.D. 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy, 

Ph.D. 
Biomedical  Engineering,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 
Botany,  Ph.D. 

Business  Administration,  Ph.D. 
Cell  Biology,  Ph.D. 
Chemistry,  Ph.D. 
Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering, 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 
Classical  Studies,  Ph.D. 
Computer  Science,  Ph.D. 
Cultural  Anthropology,  Ph.D. 
Economics,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 
Electrical  Engineering,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 
English,  Ph.D. 
Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies, 

A.M.,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 
Geology,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 
Germanic  Languages  and  Literature, 

A.M. 
Health  Administration,  M.H.A. 

The  Language  Requirement 

Although  individual  departments  establish  their  own  requirements  (see  individual 
departmental  headnotes  in  the  section  on  "Advanced  Degree  Programs"),  the  regulations 
of  the  Graduate  School  require  no  foreign  language  for  the  master's  degree  or  for  the  Ph.D. 
degree.  The  languages  normally  required  by  departments  are  French,  German,  and  Rus- 
sian, but  others  may  be  offered  if  appropriate  and  approved. 

Advanced  level,  noncredit,  reading  courses  in  French  and  German  are  provided  for 
students  who  need  them. 

Foreign  students  whose  native  language  is  not  English  may,  with  the  approval  of  the 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  their  major  department,  substitute  English  for  a  foreign 
language  required  by  their  department  for  a  master's  or  doctoral  program. 

Other  Requirements 

The  general  requirement  for  a  master's  degree  is  a  minimum  of  30  units  (semester 
hours)  of  course/seminar/research  credit.  The  student  must  present  acceptable  grades 
for  a  minimum  of  24  units  of  graduate  courses.  The  nature  of  the  additional  6  units  for 
which  students  must  register  depends  on  whether  they  are  enrolled  in  thesis  or  nonthe- 
sis  programs;  i.e. ,  these  last  6  units  are  earned  either  with  successful  submission  of  the 
thesis  or  with  such  other  courses  or  academic  exercises  as  are  approved  by  the  student's 
department. 


History,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 

Humanities,  A.M. 

Liberal  Studies,  A.M. 

Literature,  Ph.D. 

Mathematics,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 

Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials 

Science,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 
Microbiology  and  Immunology,  Ph.D. 
Music,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 
Neurobiology,  Ph.D. 
Pathology,  Ph.D. 
Pharmacology,  Ph.D. 
Philosophy,  Ph.D. 
Physical  Therapy,  M.S. 
Physics,  Ph.D. 

Political  Science,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 
Psychology,  Ph.D. 
Public  Policy  Studies,  A.M. 
Religion,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 
Romance  Studies,  A.M.,  Ph.D. 
Sociology,  Ph.D. 

Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences,  Ph.D. 
Zoology,  Ph.D. 


•Students  interested  in  additional  information  on  departmental  programs  not  furnished  in  the  Bulletin  of 
Duke  University:  Graduate  School  should  contact  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  the  appropriate  department. 


26 


A  master's  program  can  be  completed  in  one  academic  year,  but  the  student  who 
presents  a  thesis  usually  needs  at  least  a  calendar  year,  and  foreign  students  should  be 
prepared  to  study  for  two  years.  The  maximum  length  of  time  permitted  from  first  regis- 
tration to  completion  of  all  requirements  is  six  years.  Under  certain  circumstances  a  max- 
imum credit  of  6  units  may  be  transferred  toward  the  master's  degree  for  graduate  courses 
completed  elsewhere,  provided  the  grades  earned  in  the  particular  courses  were  not  less 
than  B  or  the  equivalent.  In  such  a  case,  however,  the  transfer  of  graduate  credit  does  not 
reduce  the  required  minimum  registration  for  a  master's  degree  at  Duke. 

The  course/seminar/research  requirement  in  the  doctoral  program  is  60  units,  but  the 
proportions  of  course/seminar  work  and  research  are  generally  flexible,  based  on  in- 
dividual needs.  Those  applicants  with  recent  master's  degrees,  after  establishing  quali- 
ty work  here,  may  be  granted  transfer  credit  up  to  a  maximum  of  15  units.  The  disserta- 
tion is  expected  to  be  a  mature  and  competent  piece  of  writing,  embodying  the  results 
of  original  and  significant  research .  All  dissertations  will  be  published  on  microfilm  and 
the  author  may  retain  copyright  privileges. 

Time  limitations  are  set  for  the  completion  of  the  doctoral  program .  The  preliminary 
examination,  which  may  be  taken  only  after  language,  course/seminar,  and  residence  re- 
quirements have  been  met,  formally  admits  a  student  to  candidacy  for  the  degree.  This 
examination  should  be  passed  by  the  end  of  the  third  year  of  doctoral  study.  The  interval 
between  preliminary  examination  and  presentation  of  an  acceptable  dissertation  should 
ordinarily  be  one  to  two  years  and  may  not  be  more  than  four  years  without  special  ap- 
proval by  the  Dean.  Should  this  interval  extend  beyond  five  years,  a  second  preliminary 
examination  usually  becomes  necessary. 

Financial  Information* 

Tuition  and  fees  are  charged  at  the  rate  of  $320  per  unit  (a  unit  is  equivalent  to  a  se- 
mester hour),  with  the  normal  full  program  of  study  being  24  units  for  an  academic  year. 
The  basic  necessary  expenses  for  a  year  of  graduate  study,  assuming  one  lives  in  Univer- 
sity graduate  housing,  are  approximately  as  follows: 

Registration  Fee  $    900 

Tuition  7,680 

Health  Fee  252 

Room  Rentt 

(Central  Campus  Apartments)  2,442 

Mealst  2,460 

tDepending  upon  accommodations  chosen. 
^Cafeteria  estimate. 

Normally,  a  doctoral  student  will  not  pay  tuition  beyond  60  units  of  degree  credit. 

Additional  allowances  should  be  made  for  books,  laundry,  and  other  personal  expen- 
ditures. 

Apartment  accommodations  for  graduate  and  professional  students  are  available  in 
the  Central  Campus  Apartments,  the  Town  House  Apartments,  and  modular  homes,  all 
of  which  are  conveniently  located  close  to  East  and  West  Campus.  Two-  and  three- 
bedroom  apartments  are  available  furnished  or  unfurnished .  In  addition  to  University 
housing,  the  Central  Campus  office  maintains  an  off -campus  listing  service  which  pro- 
vides a  list  of  privately  owned  homes,  apartments,  duplexes,  and  efficiencies  for  rent  in 
Durham. 

Duke  University  does  not  have  a  deferred  payment  plan  for  tuition,  fees,  and  other 
charges.  Students  are  expected  to  pay  tuition  and  fees  at  the  time  of  matriculation  unless 
they  plan  to  pay  via  payroll  deduction  from  payments  received  for  fellowships,  assistant- 
ships,  or  employment .  Graduate  students  who  receive  payments  from  the  University  and 


The  figures  contained  in  this  section  are  subject  to  change  prior  to  the  beginning  of  the  fall,  1989,  semester. 

27 


who  plan  to  pay  tuition  and  fees  and/or  campus  housing  charges  via  payroll  deduction 
must  make  arrangements  in  the  Bursar's  office  for  such  deduction. 

Financial  Aid.  In  recent  years  at  Duke  about  two-thirds  of  all  full-time  students  have 
held  an  award  of  some  type.  Part-time  students  are  not  eligible  for  financial  aid  from  the 
University. 

The  student  who  seeks  financial  aid  from  Duke  University  should  be  certain  that  the 
request  for  admission  and  award  is  filed  not  later  than  February  1  of  the  year  in  which 
September  admission  is  sought.  (The  deadline  is  January  15  for  psychology. )  The  appli- 
cation for  admission,  including  transcripts  of  previous  college  work  and  letters  of  evalu- 
ation, is  processed  by  the  Graduate  School  and  forwarded  to  the  department  in  which 
the  student  wishes  to  pursue  advanced  work.  The  graduate  faculty— or  admissions 
committee— in  the  department  reviews  all  applications  and  then  makes  its  recommen- 
dation to  the  Dean  for  announcement  in  late  March.  The  most  outstanding  applicants 
are  then  offered  awards;  the  next  in  order  of  rank  are  placed  on  an  alternate  list  for  awards. 
Other  students  are  offered  only  admission  to  the  Graduate  School.  Because  of  multiple 
applications  by  students,  a  fraction  of  the  awards  offered  by  any  graduate  school  are  not 
accepted.  Alternates  on  the  award  list  are  immediately  notified,  and  the  process  continues 
until  the  available  number  of  awards  has  been  made. 

Awards  to  entering  students  at  Duke  are  in  the  form  of  fellowships,  scholarships,  and 
assistantships.  Students  holding  awards  usually  are  paid  in  nine  equal  installments  be- 
ginning in  late  September. 

James  B.  Duke  Graduate  Fellowships  are  provided  through  the  Duke  Endowment. 
Fellows  are  chosen  from  nominations  made  by  the  departments.  Only  outstanding  ap- 
plicants who  are  seeking  the  Ph .  D.  degree  are  considered .  These  nominations  are  made 
in  late  February  and  are  judged  in  a  competition  which  includes  candidates  from  all  depart- 
ments granting  the  Ph .  D.  degree .  The  fellowships  provide  for  payment  of  tuition  for  full 
registration  and  a  stipend  of  $1,000  per  month  for  twelve  months  for  the  duration  of  the 
award.  The  award  requires  no  service  beyond  that  which  is  required  of  all  students  in  a 
given  department  as  a  part  of  their  training  and  is  renewable  each  year  upon  satisfactory 
progress  toward  the  degree  at  a  fellowship  level  of  quality.  The  total  value  of  a  James  B. 
Duke  Fellowship  over  the  full  three  years  of  tenure  is  over  $62,000  at  current  tuition  rates. 

Graduate  Fellowships  range  in  value  to  $19,000  for  the  calendar  year  and  are  made 
on  a  year-to-year  basis.  They  are  awarded  upon  recommendation  by  each  department. 
No  service  is  required  as  a  prerequisite  for  accepting  a  fellowship,  but  all  fellowship  holders 
are  expected  to  maintain  full-time  registration. 

Special  Graduate  Fellowships  for  Minority  Students  provide  for  payment  of  tuition 
plus  a  stipend  of  up  to  $900  per  month  for  nine  months.  They  are  awarded  to  qualified 
applicants  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  department. 

Graduate  Scholarships  provide  for  payment  of  tuition  or  partial  tuition.  Full  tuition 
scholarships  are  valued  at  $8,038  for  the  academic  year.  Scholarships  are  awarded  upon 
the  recommendation  of  each  department. 

Graduate  Assistantships  range  in  value  to  $18,000  for  the  academic  year.  Assistants 
are  normally  permitted  to  reduce  their  registration  to  9  units,  and  residence  credit  as  a 
full-time  student  is  allowed  under  these  circumstances.  Assistantships  are  most  common 
in  the  science  departments,  where  the  student  often  provides  laboratory  assistance  to  var- 
ious members  of  the  faculty.  Most  graduate  assistants  remain  in  residence  during  the  sum- 
mer sessions  carrying  research  or  course  credit.  In  this  way,  the  normal  progress  toward 
a  degree  is  not  impeded  by  the  reduced  load  during  the  fall  and  spring  semesters.  Depart- 
mental research  funds  are  often  available  to  provide  financial  assistance  during  the 
summer. 


28 


Other  graduate  fellowships  are  available  from  foundations,  industry,  or  the  govern- 
ment. Among  those  at  the  University's  disposal  are:  Kearns  fellowships  in  religion,  Mellon 
fellowships  and  traineeships  under  a  grant  from  the  Office  of  Education  for  students  in 
the  Canadian  Studies  Program,  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  fellowships.  Over 
300  other  traineeships  and  assistantships  are  available  in  the  biological,  physical,  and  so- 
cial sciences  under  grants  from  the  National  Institutes  of  Health,  National  Institutes  of 
Mental  Health,  National  Science  Foundation,  research  agencies  in  the  Department  of  De- 
fense, and  other  governmental  agencies. 

Loans.  Students  who  anticipate  the  need  to  supplement  their  financial  resources 
through  loans  should  contact  their  state  lending  agencies  or  banks  which  provide  loans 
through  the  Stafford  Student  Loan  Program.  Students  should  contact  the  Graduate 
School  Financial  Aid  Office  for  information  concerning  obtaining  the  Stafford  Student 
Loan  if  they  have  problems  establishing  residency  or  locating  a  lender  in  their  home  states. 

It  is  the  policy  of  the  Graduate  School  to  provide  loans  through  the  University  to  help 
students  meet  their  educational  expenses.  Students  with  full-time  status  who  meet  the 
federal  criteria  for  need  and  who  have  applied  for  loans  from  their  state  agencies  are  eligible 
for  loans  through  the  University.  Loan  funds  are  provided  through  the  Stafford  Student 
Loan  Program  and  the  Perkins  Loan  (formerly  National  Direct  Student  Loan  Program). 
Generally,  loans  made  from  these  funds  or  the  state  lending  agencies  bear  no  interest 
charge  to  qualified  borrowers  while  they  maintain  student  status  and  for  a  short  period 
thereafter.  Interest  during  the  repayment  period  is  at  a  generally  favorable  rate. 

Inquiries  concerning  loans  should  indicate  the  department  of  intended  matricula- 
tion and  include  all  pertinent  information  concerning  application  to  a  state  agency.  These 
inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  the  Financial  Aid  Coordinator,  Graduate  School,  Duke 
University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  costs  of  graduate  education  are  high,  but  Duke  University  attempts  to  allocate 
its  funds  so  that  the  superior  student  is  able  to  finish  work  for  a  degree  in  the  normal  length 
of  time  regardless  of  personal  financial  resources.  This  is  a  contribution  to  the  commu- 
nity of  scholarship  which  the  University  is  glad  to  bear. 

The  applicant  who  wishes  further  information  on  facilities  and  regulations  on  course 
programs  not  covered  in  this  bulletin  is  invited  to  write  to  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School, 
or  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  the  department  of  intended  study. 


29 


30 


Calendar  of  the  Graduate  School 

Summer  Session  1989  Academic  Year  1989-90 

First  Term:  May  18-July  1  First  Semester:  August  28-  December  16 

Second  Term:  July  5-August  18  Second  Semester:  January  11-  May  5 

August  22-23  Registration  for  first  semester 

August  28 Classes  begin 

October  13-18  Fall  break 

November  22-27  Thanksgiving  recess 

December  2-10 Reading  period* 

December  16 End  of  first  semester 

January  10 Registration  for  second  semester 

January  11  Classes  begin 

March  9-19 Spring  recess 

April  21-29 Reading  period* 

May  5 End  of  second  semester 

May  11-13 Commencement 

Special  Deadlines  for  Admission  Applicants 

Consult  current  application  materials  for  a  more  detailed  explanation  of  deadlines  and  their  en- 
forcement. 

July  15, 1989 Last  day  for  completion  of  applications  for 

admission  to  the  fall  1989  semester  (for 
those  departments  with  space  available) 

November  1, 1989 Last  day  for  completion  of  applications 

to  the  spring  1990  semester 

January  12, 1990,  5:00  P.M Deadline  for  completion  of  applications 

to  specified  programs  (see 
application  materials),  fall  1990 

January  31, 1990,  5:00  P.M Deadline  for  completion  of 

applications  for  admission  and  award  to 
all  other  programs  for  the  fall  1990  semester 

April  15, 1990 Last  day  for  completion  of  applications  for+ 

first  summer  session  1990 

May  15, 1990  Last  day  for  completion  of  applications  for+ 

second  summer  session,  1990 

July  15, 1990 Last  day  for  completion  of  applications  for 

admission  to  the  fall  1990  semester  (for 
those  departments  with  space  available) 


*For  200-level  courses,  the  length  of  the  reading  period  is  at  the  discretion  of  the  instructor. 
tStudents  seeking  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  for  study  in  the  summer  session  should  apply  to  the 
Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  and  to  the  Director  of  the  Summer  Session. 


31 


32 


Advanced  Degree  Programs 

Art  and  Art  History 

Professor  John  R.  Spencer,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Associate  Professors 

Caroline  A.  Bruzelius,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Annabel  Wharton,  Ph.D.  (Courtauld  Institute,  University  of  London) 
Assistant  Professors 

David  Castriota,  Ph.D.  (Columbia),  Claude  Cernuschi,  Ph.D.  (New  York  University);  Kristine  Stiles,  Ph.D. 

(University  of  California,  Berkeley);  Judy  Sund,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Hans  van  Miegroet,  Ph.D.  (University 

of  California,  Santa  Barbara) 
Professor  Emeritus 

Sidney  David  Markman,  Ph.D.  (Columbia) 

Graduate  work  in  the  Department  of  Art  and  Art  History  is  offered  leading  to  the  A.M. 
degree  in  art  history  and  is  designed  to  provide  basic  training  in  the  history  of  art  with 
specialization  in  a  given  field  selected  by  the  student  after  consultation  with  and  approval 
by  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  Prospective  students  should  present  a  minimum  of 
24  semester  hours  of  undergraduate  work  in  the  history  of  art.  In  special  cases  a  student 
who  does  not  fulfill  this  prerequisite  may  be  required  to  attend  prescribed  undergradu- 
ate courses.  A  reading  knowledge  of  one  foreign  language  (preferably  German)  is  re- 
quired; candidates  who  do  not  meet  this  requirement  upon  admission  to  the  program 
are  expected  to  do  so  by  the  end  of  their  first  term  in  residence. 

The  program  for  the  A.M.  degree  in  art  history  consists  of  30  units  as  follows :  12  units 
in  art  history;  6  units  in  an  approved  minor;  6  units  in  the  major  or  minor,  or  other  ap- 
proved subject;  and  6  units  in  thesis.  A  written  thesis  is  required. 

33 


Courses  of  Instruction 

220S.  Studies  in  Greek  Art  262S.  Studies  in  Nineteenth-Century  Art 

221S.  Studies  in  Roman  Art  274.  The  History  of  Impressionism 

222S.  Greek  Sculpture  275.  Surrealism 

223S.  Greek  Painting  276S.  Problems  in  Modern  Art 

224S.  Greek  Architecture  278.  Twentieth-Century  Criticism 

225S.  Roman  Architecture  282S.  Contemporary  Theory  in  the  Visual  Arts 

226S.  Roman  Painting  293S.  Methodology  of  Art  History 

230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture        294,  295.  Special  Problems  in  Art  History 

232S.  Romanesque  and  Gothic  Art  and  Architecture       _,  ^  .in        i_jij 

234.  Medieval  Architecture  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

235.  Gothic  Cathedrals  227.  Early  Christian  Culture:  Evidence  of  Art  and 
241.  Fifteenth-Century  Italian  Art  Literature 

242S.  Studies  in  Italian  Renaissance  Art  231.  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture 

243S.  Studies  in  Northern  Art  245.  Sixteenth-Century  Italian  Art 

251.  Italian  Baroque  Art  248.  Art  of  Northern  Europe  in  the  Fifteenth  and 

252.  Northern  Baroque  Painting  Sixteenth  Centuries 

261S.  Studies  in  Romanticism  279S.  Problems  in  Modern  Architecture 

Asian  Languages 

The  courses  are  offered  as  an  enrichment  for  students  interested  in  the  South  Asian 
subcontinent.  See  the  announcement  for  the  Asian-Pacific  Studies  Institute  in  this  bulletin 
in  the  section  on  special  programs.  For  courses  in  Chinese  and  Japanese,  see  the  Bulletin 
of  Duke  University:  Undergraduate  Instruction. 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

Hindi-Urdu  200,  201.  Special  Studies  in  South  Asian  Languages 
Hindi-Urdu  203.  Studies  in  Commonwealth  Literature 


Biochemistry 


Professor  Robert  L.  Hill,  Ph.D.  (Kansas),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry  and  Chairman 
Professor  Robert  E.  Webster,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Robert  Bell,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley),  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry;  Vann  Bennett,  M.D.,  Ph.D. 
(Johns  Hopkins);  Irwin  Fridovich,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of Biochemistry;  Samson  R.  Gross, 
Ph.D.  (Columbia);  NicholasM.  Kredich,  M.D.  (Michigan);  Robert  J.  Lefkowitz,  M.D.  (Columbia);  Kenneth 
S.  McCarty,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Paul  L.  Modrich,  Ph.D.  (Stanford),  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry; 
K.  V.  Rajagopalan,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Madras);  Lewis  M.  Siegel,  Ph.D.  Qohns  Hopkins);  Leonard  Spicer,  Ph.D. 
(Yale) 

Associate  Professors 

Ronald  C.  Greene,  Ph.D.  (California  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Arno  L.  Greenleaf,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Edward  Holmes, 
M.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Tao-shih  Hsieh,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Bernard  Kaufman,  Ph.D.  (Indiana); 
David  C.  Richardson,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Harvey  J.  Sage,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Deborah  A.  Steege, 
Ph.D.  (Yale);  James  B.  Sullivan,  Ph.D.  (Texas) 

Assistant  Professors 

Michael  Been,  Ph.D.  OJniversity  of  Washington,  Seattle);  Perry  J.  Blackshear,  M.D.  (Harvard);  Carol  Fierke, 
Ph.D.  (Brandeis);  Michael  S.  Hershfield,  M.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Russel  E.  Kaufman,  M.D.  (Ohio  State  Univer- 
sity); David  M.  Schlossman,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Professor  Emeritus 

Mary  L.  C.  Bernheim,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Cambridge) 

Associate  Medical  Research  Professor 
Jane  Richardson,  M.A.T  (Harvard) 

Graduate  work  in  the  Department  of  Biochemistry  is  offered  leading  to  the  Ph .  D.  de- 
gree. Preparation  for  such  graduate  study  may  take  diverse  forms.  Undergraduate  majors 
in  chemistry,  biology,  mathematics,  or  physics  are  welcome,  but  adequate  preparation 
in  chemistry  is  essential.  Graduate  specialization  areas  include  protein  structure  and  func- 
tion, crystallography  of  macromolecules,  nucleic  acid  structure  and  function,  lipid  bio- 


34 


chemistry,  membrane  structure  and  function,  molecular  genetics,  and  enzyme  mechan- 
isms. The  biochemistry  department,  in  cooperation  with  the  University  Program  in  Genet- 
ics and  the  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  offers  biochemistry  stu- 
dents the  opportunity  to  pursue  advanced  research  and  study  to  fulfill  the  requirements 
for  the  Ph.D.  degree  related  to  these  fields. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  General  Biochemistry  268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids 

209,  210.  Independent  Study  286.  Current  Topics  in  Immunochemistry 

215.  Genetic  Mechanisms  288.  The  Carbohydrates  and  Lipids  of  Biological 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation  Systems 

219S.  Seminar  291.  Physical  Biochemistry 

222.  Structure  of  Biological  Macromolecules  297.  Intermediary  Metabolism 

224.  Biochemistry  of  Development  and  Differentiation  345,  346.  Biochemistry  Seminar 

227  Introductory  Biochemistry  I:  Intermediary  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

Metabolism  ' 

259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Proteins  and  Enzymes  245L  Macromolecules,  Ecology,  and  Evolution 

265S  266S  Seminar  276.  Comparative  and  Evolutionary  Biochemistry 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 

Professor  Richard  F.  Kay,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Chairman 

Associate  Professor  Kathleen  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Matt  Cartmill,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  William  Hylander,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  FJwyn  Simons,  Ph.D.  (Princeton),  D.Phil. 

(University  Coll.,  Oxford),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy;  JohnTerborgh,  Ph.D. 

(Harvard) 
Associate  Professors 

Kenneth  Glander,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Carel  van  Schaik,  Ph.D.  (Utrecht) 
Assistant  Professors 

Frank  H.  Bassett  III,  M.D.  (Louisville);  V.  Louise  Roth,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Patricia  Wright,  Ph.D.  (CUNY) 
Prof  e  ssor  Emeritus 

Weston  LaBarre,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Anthropology 
Associate  Professor  Emeritus 

Kenneth  Duke,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 
Visiting  Assistant  Professor 

Frances  J.  White,  Ph.D.  (SUNY,  Stony  Brook) 

The  Department  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  aims  to  provide  students 
with  a  broad  background  for  the  study  of  behavior,  ecology,  physiology,  morphology,  sys- 
tematics,  and  evolution.  The  major  focus  of  the  department  is  primatology;  however,  stu- 
dents are  encouraged  to  define  courses  of  study  that  cross  traditional  boundaries  of  sub- 
ject matter  or  taxa.  The  department  accepts  students  only  for  Ph.D.  study.  Applicants  will 
be  considered  regardless  of  undergraduate  major,  although  it  is  expected  that  students 
will  have  a  background  in  evolution,  ecology,  behavior,  or  morphology. 

The  focus  of  the  department  and  current  research  opportunities  are  in  three  major 
areas:  (A)  Behavior  and  ecology  of  living  primates.  Field  studies  are  underway  in  Bor- 
neo, the  Philippines,  Central  and  South  America,  and  Madagascar.  Studies  of  behavior 
and  breeding  on  a  large  and  diverse  array  of  captive  prosimian  primates  from  Africa,  Asia, 
and  Madagascar  are  being  actively  pursued  at  the  Duke  University  Center  for  the  Study 
of  Primate  Biology  and  History.  (B)  Functional  anatomy  and  evolution  of  mammals.  Cur- 
rent faculty  are  studying  the  relation  between  tooth  form  and  diet,  the  functional  sig- 
nificance of  the  primate  and  human  masticatory  system,  and  the  development,  function, 
and  evolution  of  oral-facial  musculature  in  vertebrates.  (C)  The  phylogeny  of  mammals 
and  primates.  The  faculty  is  conducting  paleontological  expeditions  in  Africa,  Madagas- 
car, North  America,  and  Central  and  South  America  to  recover  new  fossil  remains  to  docu- 
ment the  evolution  of  primates  and  other  mammals  over  the  past  65  million  years.  This 
work  is  coordinated  with  study  of  the  relationships  among  living  species  based  on  anat- 
omy and  development. 


35 


Further  information  on  the  program  is  contained  in  The  Guide  to  Graduate  Studies  in 
Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy,  available  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

238.  Functional  and  Evolutionary  Morphology  of 

Primates 
244S.  Primate  Behavior 
246S.  The  Primate  Fossil  Record 
272S.  Primate  Anatomy 
280S,  281S.  Seminar  in  Selected  Topics 
292.  Topics  in  Morphology  and  Evolution 
301.  Anatomy  of  the  Limbs 


305.  Gross  Human  Anatomy 

312.  Research 

313.  Anatomy  Seminar 

314.  Biological  Anthropology  Seminar 
334.  Topics  in  Physical  Anthropology 
340.  Tutorial  in  Advanced  Anatomy 

354.  Research  in  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 


Botany 


Professor  William  L.  Culberson,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin),  Hugo  L.  Blomquist  Professor  of  Botany  and  Chairman 
Professor  William  H.  Schlesinger,  Ph.D.  (Cornell),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Janis  Antonovics,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  Coll.  of  North  Wales),  fames  J.  Wolfe Professor of 'Botany;  JohnE.  Boynton,  Ph.D. 
(California  at  Davis);  Norman  L.  Christensen,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Santa  Barbara);  C.  Barry  Osmond, 
Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Adelaide),  Arts  and  Sciences  Distinguished  Professor  of  Botany;  Joseph  S.  Ramus,  Ph.D.  (California 
at  Berkeley);  Richard  B.  Searles,  Ph .  D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  James  N.  Siedow,  Ph .  D.  (Indiana);  Donald 
E.  Stone,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Boyd  R.  Strain,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles);  Richard  A.  White, 
Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Robert  L.  Wilbur,  Ph.D.  (Michigan) 

Associate  Professor 

Kenneth  R.  Knoerr,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 

Assistant  Professors 

Stephen  A.  Johnston,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  BruceD  Kohorn,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  BrentD.  Mishler,  Ph.D.  (Harvard); 
Rytas  Vilgalys,  Ph.D.  (Virginia  Polytechnic  and  State  Univ.) 

Professors  Emeriti 

Lewis  Edward  Anderson,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  William  D.  Billings,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  James  B.  Duke  Professor 
Emeritus  of  Botany;  Henry  Hellmers,  Ph .  D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Paul  J.  Kramer,  Ph .  D.  (Ohio  State),  James 
B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Botany;  Aubrey  Willard  Naylor,  Ph.D.  (Chicago),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeri- 
tus of  Botany;  Jane  Philpott,  Ph.D.  (Iowa) 

Adjunct  Professor 

Chicita  F.  Culberson,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

David  T.  Patterson,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Graduate  work  in  the  Department  of  Botany  is  offered  leading  to  the  A.M.  (nonthe- 
sis),  M.S.  (thesis),  and  Ph.D.  degrees.  Students  entering  the  graduate  program  in  bota- 
ny normally  have  a  broad  background  in  the  botanical  or  biological  sciences  supplemented 
with  basic  courses  in  chemistry  mathematics,  and  physics.  Biochemistry  and  physical 
chemistry  are  strongly  recommended  for  students  interested  in  molecular  areas,  and  ad- 
vanced courses  in  mathematics  are  recommended  for  students  in  population  genetics  and 
ecology.  Deficiencies  may  be  corrected  by  taking  appropriate  courses  during  the  first  year 
of  graduate  study 

Students  in  botany  may  specialize  in  a  wide  variety  of  areas  including  anatomy;  cel- 
lular and  molecular  biology;  evolution;  developmental,  ecological,  molecular,  organelle, 
and  population  genetics;  physiology;  community,  ecosystem,  physiological,  and  popu- 
lation ecology;  marine  biology;  and  the  systematics  of  algae,  fungi,  lichens,  bryophytes, 
ferns,  and  flowering  plants.  Students'  programs  are  tailored  to  individual  needs.  A 
brochure  providing  detailed  information  on  the  Botany  Department  is  available  from  the 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

205.  Molecular  Biology  219L.  Benthic  Marine  Algae 

210L.  Bryology  220L.  Mycology 

212L.  Phycology  221S.  Topics  in  Advanced  Mycology 

217L.  Biology  of  Marine  Macrophytes  224T,  225T.  Special  Problems 

218.  Barrier  Island  Ecology  232.  Microclimatology 


36 


234S.  Problems  in  the  Philosophy  of  Biology 

237L.  Systematic  Biology 

240L.  Plant  Diversity 

242L.  Systematics 

252L.  Plant  Physiology 

253.  Biophysical  Plant  Physiology 

255L.  Molecular  Systematics  and  Evolution 

256L,  S.  Plant  Biosystematics 

261.  Photosynthesis 

263L.  Tropical  Seaweeds 

265L.  Physiological  Plant  Ecology 

266.  Plant  Population  Biology 

267L.  Community  Ecology 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology 

272.  Biogeochemistry 

280.  Principles  of  Genetics 

283.  Extrachromosomal  Inheritance 

285S.  Ecological  Genetics 

286.  Evolutionary  Mechanisms 


287S.  Macroevolution 

293L.  Population  Biology 

295S,  296S.  Seminar 

300.  Tropical  Biology:  An  Ecological  Approach 

305S,  306S.  Plant  Systematics  Seminar 

310S,  311S.  Plant  Ecology  Seminar 

315S,  316S.  Population  Genetics  Seminar 

320S,  321S.  Systematics  Discussion  Group 

325S,  326S.  Developmental,  Cellular,  and  Molecular 

Biology  Seminar 
330L.  Environmental  Monitoring  and  Instrumentation 
359,  360.  Research  in  Botany 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

209L.  Lichenology 

243S.  Classification  of  Angiosperms 

247L.  Plant  Ecology 

270L.  Plant  Anatomy 

344.  Micrometeorology  and  Biometeorology  Seminar 


Related  Programs 

The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  Cell  and  Molecular  Biolo- 
gy courses  offered  by  the  Botany  Department  are  an  integral  part  of  this  interdepartmental 
program.  Refer  to  the  announcement  in  this  bulletin  under  The  University  Program  in 
Cell  and  Molecular  Biology. 

University  Program  in  Genetics.  Genetics  courses  offered  by  the  botany  department 
are  an  integral  part  of  this  interdepartmental  program.  Refer  to  the  announcement  in  this 
bulletin  under  The  University  Program  in  Genetics. 

Program  in  Tropical  Biology.  Fellowships  are  available  for  travel  and  subsistence  in 
field-oriented  programs  in  Central  America.  Refer  to  Organization  for  Tropical  Studies 
in  the  section  on  special  programs. 

The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences.  Interdisciplinary  programs  emphasiz- 
ing marine  botany  are  available.  Refer  to  the  announcement  in  this  bulletin  under  The 
University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences. 

Business  Administration 

Professor  Thomas  F.  Keller,  Ph.D.  (Michigan),  R.  /.  Reynolds  Industries  Professor  of  Business  Administration  and  Dean 
Professor  James  R.  Bertman,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Burlington  Industries  Professor  of Business  Administration  and  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Robert  Ashton,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota);  Helmy  Baligh,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Richard  M.  Burton,  D.B.  A. 
(Illinois);  Kalman  J.  Cohen,  Ph.D.  (Carnegie-Mellon);  John  D.  Forsyth,  D.B.A.  (Illinois);  Dan  J.  Laughhunn, 
D.B.A.  (Illinois);  Arie  Y.  Lewin,  Ph.D.  (Carnegie-Mellon);  Wesley  A.  Magat,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern);  Tho- 
mas H.  Naylor,  Ph.D.  (Tulane);  John  W.  Payne,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Irvine);  Rakesh  K.  Sarin,  Ph.D.  (California 
at  Los  Angeles);  Richard  Staelin,  Ph.D.  (Michigan),  Edward  and  Rose  Donnell  Professor of Business  Administra- 
tion; Robert  L.  Winkler,  Ph.D.  (Chicago),  Calvin  Bryce  Hoover  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Associate  Professors 

Allison  Ashton,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  Douglas  T.  Breeden,  Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Julie  A.  Edell,  Ph.D.  (Carnegie-Mellon); 
Grant  W.  Gardner,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Joel  C.  Huber,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  John  M.  McCann,  Ph.D.  (Pur- 
due); Joseph  B.  Mazzola,  Ph.D.  (Carnegie-Mellon);  Marian  Moore,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles);  Wil- 
liam E.  Ricks,  Ph .  D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Blair  H.  Sheppard,  Ph .  D.  (Illinois  at  Champaign);  Anne  S.  Tsui, 
Ph.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles);  Robert  E.  Whaley,  Ph.D.  (Toronto);  Valarie  A.  Zeithaml,  Ph.D.  (Maryland) 

Assistant  Professors 

William  F.  Boulding,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Jane  L.  Butt,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Richard  L.  Daniels,  Ph.D.  (Califor- 
nia at  Los  Angeles);  Fred  Feinberg,  Ph .  D.  (Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology );  F.  Douglas  Foster,  Ph .  D. 
(Cornell);  Jennifer  Francis,  Ph.D.  (Cornell);  Christopher  Gresov,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Campbell  R.  Harvey, 
Ph.D.  (University  of  Chicago);  Michael  L.  Hemler,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Chicago);  Amna  Kirmani,  Ph.D. 
(Stanford);  Naoki  Kishimoto,  Ph.D.  (New  York  University);  Frederick  Lindahl,  Ph.D.  (University  of 


37 


Chicago);  Kevin  F.  McCardle,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles);  Michael  J.  Moore,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Robert 
F.  Nau,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Donna  Rae  Philbrick,  Ph.D.  (Cornell);  Devavrat  Purohit,  Ph.D. 
(Carnegie-Mellon);  Elaine  Romanelli,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Jeffrey  L.  Rummel,  Ph.D.  (Rochester);  Tom  Smith, 
Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Jens  A.  Stephan,  Ph.D.  (Cornell);  S.  Viswanathan,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern) 
Adjunct  Professor 

David  West  Peterson,  Ph.D.  (Stanford) 

The  Ph .  D.  in  Business  Administration  program  prepares  candidates  for  research  and 
teaching  careers  at  leading  educational  institutions  and  for  careers  in  business  and  gov- 
ernmental organizations  where  advanced  research  and  analytical  capabilities  are  required . 
The  Ph .  D.  program  places  major  emphasis  on  independent  inquiry,  on  the  development 
of  competence  in  research  methodology,  and  on  the  communication  of  research  results. 

The  program  requires  that  doctoral  candidates  must  acquire  expertise  in  their  cho- 
sen area  of  study  and  in  research  methodology.  This  competence  may  be  gained  from 
course  work,  participation  in  seminars,  and  independent  study.  The  student  and  his/her 
faculty  committee  determine  the  specific  program  of  study  subject  to  the  approval  of  the 
Director  of  the  Doctoral  Program.  Each  student  takes  a  comprehensive  examination  at 
the  end  of  the  second  year  or  at  the  beginning  of  the  third  year  of  residence.  The  final  re- 
quirement is  the  presentation  of  a  dissertation.  The  Ph  .D.  program  usually  requires  four 
years  of  work  beyond  the  bachelor's  degree. 

Refer  to  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  The  Fuqua  School  of  Business  for  a  complete  list 
of  courses  and  course  descriptions. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

510.  Bayesian  Inference  and  Decision  598.  Independent  Study 

513.  Choice  Theory  599.  Directed  Research 

521.  Organization  Seminar:  A  Micro  Focus  ,_  _  ,     _T        ,      ,    ,     . 

522.  Organization  Seminar:  A  Macro  Focus  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 
525.  Behavioral  Decision  Theory  309.1-9.  Research  in  Managerial  Economics 

531.  Financial  Accounting  Seminar  319.1-9.  Research  in  Quantitative  Methods 

532.  Management  Accounting  Seminar  329.1-9.  Research  in  Organization  Theory  and 

551.  Corporate  Finance  Seminar  Management 

552.  Investment  Seminar  339.1-9.  Research  in  Information  and  Accounting 

553.  Portfolio  Theory  and  Asset  Pricing  Systems 

561.  Seminar  in  Quantitative  Research  in  Marketing  349.1-9.  Research  in  Public  Policy  and  Social 

562.  Seminar  in  Behavioral  Models  in  Marketing  Responsibility 

563.  Marketing  Models  Seminar  359. 1-9.  Research  in  Finance 

571.  Operations  Strategy  Seminar  369.1-9.  Research  in  Marketing 

572.  Seminar  in  Operational  and  Technological  Tactics    379.1-9.  Research  in  Production 

591.  Selected  Topics  in  Business  392-393.  Tutorial  in  Interdisciplinary  Areas 

597.  Dissertation  Research  397.  Dissertation  Research 

The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology 

Professor  Robert  L.  Hill,  Ph.D.  (Kansas),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry  and  Director 
Associate  Professor  Bernard  Kaufman,  Ph.D.  (Indiana),  Associate  Director 

Professors 

David  R.  McClay,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Elliott  Mills,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Salvatore  V.  Pizzo, 
M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  James  Siedow,  Ph.D.  (Indiana);  Lewis  Siegel,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  Sidney  Simon, 
Ph.D.  (Northwestern) 
Associate  Professors 

Jack  D.  Keene,  Ph.D.  (Washington);  Marc  G.  Caron,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Miami) 

Faculty:  A  complete  list  of  faculty  including  research  interests,  will  be  made  availa- 
ble to  prospective  students. 

Research  training  in  cell,  developmental,  and  molecular  biology  is  found  in  eight 
departments  at  Duke  University :  biochemistry,  botany,  cell  biology/physiology,  microbi- 
ology and  immunology,  neurobiology,  pathology,  pharmacology,  and  zoology.  To  effec- 
tively utilize  this  broad  spectrum  of  expertise  for  the  training  of  promising  young  scien- 
tists while  still  providing  a  coherent  curriculum,  the  Duke  University  Program  in  Cell  and 
Molecular  Biology  has  been  established. 

38 


During  the  first  year  of  doctoral  study  a  student  will  complete  the  program's  three- 
course  sequence  presenting  current  understanding  and  research  activities  in  cell  biolo- 
gy and  the  molecular  biology  of  nucleic  acids,  proteins,  and  membranes.  Each  student 
will  also  choose  elective  courses  in  an  area  of  specialization  and  will  have  theopportuni- 
ty  to  participate  in  and  otherwise  become  acquainted  with  research  programs  of  the 
faculty.  Research  training  is  stressed  throughout  the  program  and  dissertation  research 
usually  begins  by  the  third  semester. 

Prospective  students  may  apply  directly  to  the  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology  Program 
or  to  one  of  the  eight  participating  departments.  Applicants  must  have  demonstrated, 
in  addition  to  overall  academic  excellence,  a  proficiency  in  the  biological  and  physical 
sciences.  Applications  for  admission  and  fellowship  support  must  be  received  by  February 
1,  but  early  applications  may  receive  earlier  consideration. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Proteins  and  Enzymes  268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids 

264.  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology  Seminar  269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology 

Cell  Biology 

Professor  Harold  P.  Erickson,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins),  Acting  Chairman 

Professor  Melvyn  Lieberman,  Ph.D.  (SUNY-Downstate  Medical  Center),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

MarcG.  Caron,  Ph.D.  (Miami);  Shelia  J.  Counce,  Ph.D.  (Edinburgh);  Edward  A.  Johnson,  M.D.  (Sheffield); 
Montrose  J.  Moses,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  R.  Bruce  Nicklas,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  George  M.  Padilla,  Ph.D.  (UCLA); 
Michael  K.  Reedy,  M.D.  (University  of  Washington);  J.  David  Robertson,  M.D.  (Harvard),  Ph.D.  (Mas- 
sachusetts Institute  of  Technology) 

Associate  Professors 

Celia  Bonaventura,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  Joseph  Bonaventura,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  Joseph  M.  Corless,  M.D,  Ph.D.  (Duke); 
Eric  L.  Effman,  M.D.  (Indiana);  J.  Mailen  Kootsey,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Thomas  J.  Mcintosh,  Ph.D.  (Carnegie- 
Mellon);  Frederick  H.  Schachat,  Ph.D.  (Stanford);  David  W.  Schomberg,  Ph.D.  (Purdue) 

Assistant  Professors 

Yair  Argon,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  William  E.  Garrett,  Jr.,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Emma  R.  Jakoi,  Ph.D.  (Duke); 
Michael  K.  Lamvik,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Patricia  M.  Saling,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania) 

Associate  Medical  Research  Professor 

Kenneth  A.  Taylor,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley) 

Assistant  Medical  Research  Professors 

Allen  Dearry,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Rebecca  J.  Van  Benedon,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins) 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professors 

Hie  Ping  Beall,  Ph.D.  (Tulane);  David  A.  Kopf,  Ph.D.  (Chicago) 

Division  of  Physiology 

Professor  J.  Joseph  Blum,  Ph.D.  (Chicago),  Division  Head 

Professors 

Enrico  M.  Camporesi,  M.D.  (Milan);  John  Gutknecht,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Stuart  Hand- 
werger,  M.D  (Maryland);  Diane  L.  Hatchell,  Ph.D.  (Marquette);  Frans  F.  Jobsis,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Lazaro 
J.  Mandel,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Thomas  J.  McManus,  M.D.  (Boston  University);  Robert  Plonsey,  Ph.D. 
(California  at  Berkeley);  George  Somjen,  M.D.  (Amsterdam),  Ph.D.  (New  Zealand);  Joachim  R.  Sommer, 
M.D.  (Munich);  Madison  S.  Spach,  M.D.  (Duke) 

Associate  Professors 

Nels  C.  Anderson,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Purdue);  Joseph  C.  Greenfield,  Jr.,  M.D.  (Emory);  Elliott  Mills,  Ph.D.  (Columbia); 
Steven  R.  Vigna,  Ph.D.  (Washington) 

Assistant  Professors 

Page  A .  W.  Anderson,  M .  D  (Duke);  Vincent  W.  Dennis,  M .  D.  (Georgetown);  E .  Ann  LeFurgey,  Ph .  D.  (North 
Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Andrew  W.  Wallace,  M.D.  (Duke);  R.  Sanders  Williams,  M.D.  (Duke);  William  E. 
Yarger,  M.D.  (Baylor) 

Associate  Medical  Research  Professors 

Peter  G.  Aitken,  Ph.D.  (Connecticut);  Avis  L.  Sylvia,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill) 

Assistant  Medical  Research  Professors 

Wayne  Gerth,  Ph.D.  (California  at  San  Diego);  Bruce  Klitzman,  Ph.D.  (Virginia);  Bruce  Lobaugh,  Ph.D.  (Penn- 
sylvania State);  Alan  D.  Magid,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Washington) 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professor 

Reginald  D.  Carter,  Ph.D.  (Bowman  Gray) 


39 


The  Department  of  Cell  Biology  offers  a  program  of  study  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  de- 
gree. The  goal  of  this  program  is  to  train  independent  and  productive  scholars  in  cell  bi- 
ology and/or  physiology.  The  academic  and  research  programs  focus  on  the  structural, 
subcellular,  and  cellular  levels,  and  on  the  analysis  of  complex  integrated  physiological 
systems.  Students  have  the  opportunity  to  concentrate  their  course  work  and  research 
in  cell  biology  and  physiology.  In  addition,  graduate  courses  and  research  in  develop- 
mental biology,  molecular  biology,  biophysics,  and  theoretical  biology  are  available  in  the 
department. 

Students  accepted  to  this  program  usually  have  earned  a  bachelor's  degree  in  bio- 
logical sciences,  chemistry,  or  engineering,  and  hold  a  strong  academic  background  in 
the  physical  sciences,  including  mathematics  and  biochemistry.  Students  may  apply  for 
admission  through  the  Graduate  School  directly  to  the  Department  of  Cell  Biology  or  to 
the  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  Interdepartmental  programs  avail- 
able to  students  in  the  Department  of  Cell  Biology  include:  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology, 
Toxicology,  Pharmacology,  Genetics,  Neurosciences,  and  the  Medical  Scientist  Training 
Program. 

The  Ph.D.  program  in  cell  biology  requires  four  to  five  years  of  study.  The  first  two 
years  are  devoted  primarily  to  a  course  of  study  that  includes  laboratory  rotations,  whereas 
the  latter  two  years  are  devoted  to  research  for  the  dissertation.  The  departmental  course 
requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  are  formulated  by  the  Graduate  Advisory  Commit- 
tee with  sufficient  flexibility  to  permit  students  to  design  individual  programs  of  study 
in  consultation  with  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  Students  in  the  Department  of  Cell 
Biology  are  encouraged  to  expand  their  academic  and  research  training  by  enrolling  in 
elective  courses  offered  by  other  departments  in  the  Medical  Center  and  the  University. 
There  is  no  foreign  language  requirement. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Medical  Physiology  235.  Advanced  Research  Training  in  Marine  Molecular 

203.  Introduction  to  Modern  Physiology  I  Biology  and  Biotechnology 

204.  Introduction  to  Modern  Physiology  n  236.  Seminar  on  the  Cellular  and  Molecular  Biology  of 

205.  Design  and  Analysis  of  Biological  Experiments  Skeletal  Muscle 

210.  Individual  Study  259.  Molecular  Biology  I 

217.  Membrane  Transport  269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation        280.  Student  Seminar 

220.  Developmental  Biology  307.  Microscopic  Anatomy 
225.  Neurobiology  of  Sensory  Systems  312.  Research 

230.  Cytoskeleton  and  Cell  Motility  313,  314.  Departmental  Seminar 

232.  Extracellular  Matrix  and  Cell  Adhesion  340.  Tutorial  in  Advanced  Cell  Biology/Physiology 

233.  Introduction  to  Biomedical  Simulation  399.  Readings  in  Cell  Biology 

234.  Methods  in  Physiological  Simulation 


Chemistry 


Professor  Edward  M.  Arnett,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania),  R.J.  Reynolds  Industries  Pwfessor  of Chemistry  and  Chairman 
Professor  Steven  Baldwin,  Ph.D.  (California  Inst,  of  Tech.),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Donald  B.  Chesnut,  Ph.D.  (California  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Alvin  L.  Crumbliss,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern);  Bertram 

O.  Fraser-Reid,  Ph.D.  (Alberta),  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of Chemistry;  William  R.  Krigbaum,  Ph.D.  (Illinois), 

fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Chemistry;  Charles  H.  Lochmiiller,  Ph.D.  (Fordham);  Andrew  T.  McPhail,  Ph.D. 

(Univ.  of  Glasgow);  Richard  A.  Palmer,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Ned  Allen  Porter,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  fames  B.  Duke 

Professor  of  Chemistry;  Peter  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Cambridge);  Howard  Austin  Strobel,  Ph.D.  (Brown); 

Richard  L.  Wells,  Ph.D.  (Indiana);  Pelham  Wilder,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 
Associate  Professors 

Robert  W.  Henkens,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  LindaB.  McGown,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Washington);  Michael  C.  Pirrung,  Ph.D. 

(California  at  Berkeley);  Barbara  Ramsay  Shaw,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Washington) 
Assistant  Professors 

Richard  A.  MacPhail,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Richard  P.  Polniaszek,  Ph.D.  (UCLA);  Michael  G.  Prisant, 

Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Weitao  Yang,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill) 


40 


Professors  Emeriti 

Charles  Kilgo  Bradsher,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Frances  C.  Brown,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  Marcus  E.  Hobbs,  Ph.D. 

(Duke);  Jacques  C.  Poirier,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Louis  DuBose  Quin,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill), 

James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 
Adjunct  Professors 

Robert  G.  Ghirardelli,  Ph.D.  (California  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Peter  W.  Jeffs,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Natal);  Eugene  Magat, 

Ph.D.  (Mass.  Inst,  of  Technology);  Colin  G.  Pitt,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  London);  Bernard  Spielvogel,  Ph.D. 

(Michigan) 
Adjunct  Associate  Professors 

David  Millington,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Liverpool);  George  Painter,  Ph.D.  (Emory  University) 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professors 

Mary  Ellen  Switzer,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Daniel  D.  Sternbach,  Ph.D.  (Brandeis) 

In  the  Department  of  Chemistry  graduate  work  is  offered  leading  to  the  M.S.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees.  Before  undertaking  a  graduate  program  in  chemistry,  a  student  should 
have  taken  an  undergraduate  major  in  chemistry,  along  with  related  work  in  mathemat- 
ics and  physics. 

Graduate  courses  in  the  department  are  offered  in  the  fields  of  analytical,  inorgan- 
ic, organic,  and  physical  chemistry.  Research  programs  are  active  in  all  these  fields. 

A  booklet  providing  detailed  information  on  the  department  is  available  from  the 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

201 .  Molecular  Spectroscopy  320.  Synthetic  Organic  Chemistry 

203.  Quantum  Chemistry  322.  Organic  Reactive  Intermediates 

205.  Structure  and  Reaction  Dynamics  324.  Special  Topics  in  Organic  Chemistry 

207.  Principles  of  Kinetics,  Thermodynamics,  and  330.  Separation  Science  and  Fundamental 

Diffraction  Electrochemistry 

275,  276.  Advanced  Studies  331,  332.  Special  Topics  in  Analytical  Chemistry 

300.  Basic  Statistical  Mechanics  334.  Chemical  Instrumentation  and  Practical 

302.  Basic  Quantum  Mechanics  Electrochemistry 

303,  304.  Special  Topics  in  Physical  Chemistry  373,  374.  Seminar 
310.  Theoretical  and  Structural  Inorganic  Chemistry  375,  376.  Research 

312.  Inorganic  Reactions  and  Mechanisms  377.  Research  Orientation  Seminar 

313.  Special  Topics  in  Inorganic  Chemistry 

Classical  Studies 

Professor  Francis  Newton,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill),  Chairman 

Associate  Professor  Kent  J.  Rigsby,  Society  of  Fellows  (Harvard),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

John  F.  Oates,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Lawrence  Richardson,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 
Associate  Professors 

MaryT.  Boatwright,  Ph.D.  (Michigan),  Peter  Burian,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Dennis  Keith  Stanley,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Johns 

Hopkins);  John  G.  Younger,  Ph.D.  (Cincinnati) 
Assistant  Professor 

Paul  Vander  Waerdt,  Ph.D.  (Princeton) 
Professor  Emeritus 

William  H.  Willis,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 

The  Department  of  Classical  Studies  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees  in  classical  studies.  Work  in  the  department  encompasses  all  aspects  of 
the  Greco-Roman  world :  students  in  the  program  are  able,  through  course  work,  direct- 
ed research,  and  their  own  teaching,  to  prepare  for  careers  of  teaching  and  research  as 
broadly  trained  classical  scholars.  For  regular  admission,  students  should  offer  at  least 
three  years  of  college  study  in  one  of  the  classical  languages  and  two  in  the  other.  Before 
developing  a  specialization  within  the  program,  students  are  expected  to  acquire  facili- 
ty in  both  Greek  and  Latin,  a  broad  knowledge  of  the  literatures  and  of  ancient  history 
and  archaeology,  and  command  of  research  methods.  Reading  knowledge  of  French  and 
German  is  required  for  the  Ph .  D.  The  resources  of  the  department  include  important  col- 
lections of  Greek  and  Latin  manuscripts  and  papyri,  computer  facilities  in  the  ancient 
languages,  and  a  valuable  study  collection  of  Greek  and  Roman  art.  The  department  pub- 

41 


lishes  the  journal  Greek,  Roman,  and  Byzantine  Studies.  The  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 
will  provide  on  request  a  brochure  giving  further  information  about  the  department's  re- 
quirements, resources,  and  financial  aid;  prospective  students  should  also  consult  the 
general  requirements  of  the  University  set  forth  in  the  section  on  "General  Regulations 
Governing  Graduate  Studies"  in  this  bulletin. 


Greek 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Readings  in  Greek  Literature 

201.  Studies  in  Greek  Literature  I 

202.  Studies  in  Greek  Literature  II 

203.  Homer 

205.  Greek  Lyric  Poets 
207.  The  Dramatists 
210.  Hellenistic  Literature 
211S.  Plato 
217S.  Aristotle 


222.  The  Historians 

301.  Seminar  in  Greek  Literature  I 

302.  Seminar  in  Greek  Literature  II 
313.  Seminar  in  Greek  Epigraphy 
399.  Directed  Reading  and  Research 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

221.  Early  Greek  Prose 

226.  The  Orators 

321.  Seminar  in  Literary  Papyri 


Latin 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Readings  in  Latin  Literature 

201.  Studies  in  Latin  Literature  I 

202.  Studies  in  Latin  Literature  II 
206.  Cicero 

207S.  Vergil's  Aeneid 
211S.  Elegiac  Poets 
214.  The  Historians 

301.  Seminar  in  Latin  Literature  I 

302.  Seminar  in  Latin  Literature  II 


312.  Seminar  in  Latin  Paleography 

314.  Seminar  in  Latin  Epigraphy 

315.  Seminar  in  Roman  Law 

399.  Directed  Reading  and  Research 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

204.  Epic  of  the  Silver  Age:  Lucan  to  Statius 

205.  The  Roman  Novel 

208.  Lyric  and  Occasional  Poetry 
221.  Medieval  Latin 


Classical  Studies  (Ancient  History) 

Courses  of  Instruction 

222.  Fifth  and  Fourth  Century  Greece 

223.  Alexander  and  the  Hellenistic  World 

224.  The  Roman  Republic 

225.  The  Roman  Empire 

258.  The  Hellenistic  and  Roman  East 

321.  Seminar  in  Ancient  History  I 

322.  Seminar  in  Ancient  History  II 
399.  Directed  Reading  and  Research 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

221.  Archaic  Greece 

226.  Late  Antiquity 

327.  Seminar  in  Byzantine  History 


Classical  Studies  (Archaeology) 

Courses  of  Instruction 

220S.  Studies  in  Greek  Art 

227S.  Studies  in  Roman  Art 

230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture 

231S.  Greek  Sculpture 

232S.  Greek  Painting 

233S.  Greek  Architecture 

235S.  Roman  Architecture 

236S.  Roman  Painting 

311.  Archaeology  Seminar  I 

312.  Archaeology  Seminar  II 

399.  Directed  Reading  and  Research 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

234S.  Roman  Sculpture 


Under  the  terms  of  a  cooperative  agreement,  graduate  students  of  Duke  University 
may  take  appropriate  graduate  courses  offered  by  the  Departments  of  Classics  or  Art  of 
the  University  of  North  Carolina.  A  list  of  these  courses  will  be  sent  upon  request. 

Computer  Science 

Professor  Donald  Rose,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  Chairman 

Associate  Professor  Gershon  Kedem,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 


42 


Professors 

Alan  W.  Biermann,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Thomas  M.  Gallie,  Ph.D.  (Rice);  Donald  W.  Loveland, 
Ph.D.  (New  York  Univ.);  Peter  N.  Marinos,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  State);  Merrell  L.  Patrick,  Ph.D.  (Carnegie- 
Mellon);  John  H.  Reif,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Charles  Starmer,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Kishor  S. 
Trivedi,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Senol  Utku,  Sc.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.) 

Associate  Professors 

Joanne  BechtaDugan,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  CarlaS.  Ellis,  Ph.D.  (Washington);  Henry  S.  Greenside,  Ph.D.  (Prince- 
ton), Robert  A.  Wagner,  Ph.D.  (Carnegie-Mellon) 

Assistant  Professors 

John  A.  Board,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Oxford);  Carl  L.  Gardner,  Ph.D.  (M.I.T.);  Mark  A.  Holliday,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin); 
Gopalan  Nadathur,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Daniel  Szyld,  Ph.D.  (New  York  Univ.) 

Research  Associate  Professors 

John  L.  Ellis,  Ph.D.  (Toledo);  J.  Mailen  Kootsey,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Dietolf  Ramm,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

William  M.  Coughran,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Stanford) 

The  Department  of  Computer  Science  offers  programs  leading  to  the  M .  S.  and  Ph .  D. 
degrees.  The  department  also  actively  cooperates  with  the  computer  science  department 
of  the  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill. 

A  student  entering  graduate  work  in  computer  science  should  have  had  three 
semesters  of  calculus  and  one  semester  of  linear  algebra,  and  have  a  knowledge  of  data 
structures,  and  of  assembler  as  well  as  higher-level  computer  programming  languages. 
Research  interests  of  present  faculty  include  systems  modeling;  mathematical  founda- 
tions of  computer  science;  artificial  intelligence;  scientific  computing  (including  numerical 
analysis);  medical  applications  of  computers;  distribution  and  parallel  operating  systems; 
VLSI  design,  computer  architecture,  and  CAD  algorithms. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Programming  Methodology  I  308.  Advanced  Topics  in  Digital  Systems 

201.  Programming  Languages  310.  CMOS  VLSI  Design 

202.  Applied  Discrete  Structures  315.  Advanced  Topics  in  Artificial  Intelligence 
204.  Computer  Network  Architecture  316.  Computational  Linguistics 

207.  Fault-Tolerant  Computer  Systems  320.  VLSI  Algorithmics 

208.  Digital  Computer  Architecture  and  Design  321.  Topics  in  Numerical  Mathematics 

209.  Microprocessor  Fundamentals  and  Applications  326.  Systems  Modeling 

210.  Introduction  to  VLSI  Design  331 .  Operating  Systems  Theory 

212.  Introduction  to  Scientific  Computing  381.  Seminar  in  Computer  Systems  Analysis 

213.  Introduction  to  Nonlinear  Dynamics  382.  Seminar  in  Artificial  Intelligence 

221.  Numerical  Analysis  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

222.  Numerical  Differential  Equations  301.  Topics  in  Programming  Theory 

223.  Numerical  Linear  Algebra  325.  Theory  of  Computation 

224.  Analysis  of  Algorithms  332.  Topics  in  Operating  Systems 

225.  Formal  Languages  and  Theory  of  Computation 

226.  Mathematical  Methods  for  Systems  Analysis  I 

227.  Mathematical  Methods  for  Systems  Analysis  II 

231 .  Operating  Systems  Comp  145.  Software  Engineering  Laboratory 

232.  Compiler  Construction  Comp  171.  Natural  Language  Processing 
241.  Data  Base  Methodology  Comp  230.  File  Management  Systems 
245.  Functional  Analysis  for  Scientific  Computing  Comp  236.  Computer  Graphics 

252.  Computer  Systems  Organization  Comp  238.  Raster  Graphics 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Computer  Science  Comp  254.  Picture  Processing  and  Pattern  Recognition 

276.  Communication,  Computation,  and  Memory  in  Comp  265.  Architecture  of  Computers 
Biological  Systems 


Supplementary  Courses 
Offered  at  UNC-CH 


Cultural  Anthropology 


Professor  Ernestine  Friedl,  Ph.D.  (Columbia),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Anthropology,  Chairman  and  Director  of  Gradu- 
ate Studies 

Professors 

Mahadev  L.  Apte,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  Richard  G.  Fox,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  William  OBarr,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern) 
Associate  Professors 

Virginia  R.  Dorruhguez,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Naomi Quinn,  Ph.D.  (Stanford) 


43 


Professor  Emeritus 

Weston  LaBarre,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Anthropology 

The  department  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  degree  in  anthropology. 
Applicants  for  admission  should  submit  scores  on  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  Ap- 
titude Test.  Admission  to  the  program  is  not  contingent  on  previous  anthropological 
course  work  or  any  other  specific  program  of  study  at  the  undergraduate  level. 

The  department  offers  a  program  of  specialization  in  social/cultural  anthropology. 
The  emphasis  of  the  social/cultural  anthropology  program  is  the  application  of  a  theo- 
retical and  comparative  perspective  to  research  in  complex  societies.  Within  this  perspec- 
tive, a  wide  range  of  interests  is  represented  in  the  department. 

Curriculum  is  tailored  to  the  individual  student's  background,  academic  needs,  and 
research  goals;  pursuit  of  relevant  cross-disciplinary  study,  within  and  outside  the  depart- 
ment, is  expected.  However,  a  modest  number  of  courses  is  required  of  students.  Candi- 
dates for  the  Ph.D.  degree  must  demonstrate  competence  in  their  chosen  subfield  of 
specialization  and  knowledge  of  the  broad  theoretical  perspectives,  from  all  relevant  dis- 
ciplines, which  inform  their  area  of  concentration. 

Further  details  of  the  graduate  program  in  anthropology,  the  departmental  facilities, 
the  staff,  and  various  stipends  available  are  described  in  the  Guidelines  for  Graduate  Stu- 
dents in  Anthropology  which  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

201S.  Marxism  and  Anthropology 
204S.  The  Anthropology  of  Cities 
206S.  Current  Theoretical  Schools  in 

Anthropology 
211S.  Ethnography  of  Communication 
215S.  The  Anthropology  of  Women:  Theoretical 

Issues 
234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories 

of  Change  in  the  Third  World 
239.  Culture  and  Ideology 
251S.  American  Marriage:  A  Cultural  Approach 
255S.  Heroes  and  Heroics:  Culture  and  the 

Individual 


258S.  Symbols  in  Society 

267.  Cognitive  Anthropology 

272S.  Marxism  and  Feminism 

280S,  281S.  Seminar  in  Selected  Topics 

282S.  Canada 

330S,  331S.  Theories  and  Methods  in  Sociocul- 

tural  Anthropology 
393.  Individual  Research  in  Anthropology 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

205.  The  Anthropology  of  Anthropology 

237S.  Interpretations  of  Kinship 

275S.  Inequality  in  Precapitalist  Societies 


Economics 

Professor  John  M.  Vernon,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology),  Chairman 
Professor  T.  Dudley  Wallace,  Ph.D.  (Chicago),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Charles  T.  Clotfelter,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Phillip  J.  Cook,  Ph.  D  (California  at  Berkeley);  DavidG.  Davies,  Ph.D. 
(California  at  Los  Angeles);  Neil  Barry  de  Marchi,  Ph .  D.  (Australian  National  Univ.);  John  F.  Geweke,  Ph.  D. 
(Minnesota),  William  Rand  Kenan,  Jr.  Professor  of  Economics;  S.  Malcolm  Gillis,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Craufurd  D. 
Goodwin,  Ph. D  (Duke),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Economics;  Henry  G.  Grabowski,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Daniel 

A.  Graham,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Thomas  M.  Havrilesky,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Allen  C.  Kelley,  Ph.D.  (Stanford),  James 

B.  Duke  Professor  of Economics;  AnneO.  Krueger,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin),  Distinguished  Professor  of  Economics;  Marjorie 
McElroy,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern);  HerveJ.  Moulin,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Paris),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Eco- 
nomics; Thomas  H.  Naylor,  Ph.D.  (Tulane);  George  E.  Tauchen,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota);  Edward  Tower,  Ph.D. 
(Harvard);  Vladimir  G.Treml,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  KipViscusi,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  George 
G.  Allen  Professor  of  Economics;  E.  Roy  Weintraub,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  William  P.  Yohe,  Ph.D.  (Michigan) 

Associate  Professors 

Kent  P.  Kimbrough,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Robert  C.  Marshall,  Ph.D.  (California  at  San  Diego) 

Assistant  Professors 

James  Baumgardner,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Phillip  L.  Brock,  Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Ellen C.  McGrattan,  Ph.D.  (Stan- 
ford); Michael  Meurer,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota);  Carola  Pessino,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Dale  O.  Stahl  II,  Ph.D.  (California 
at  Berkeley) 

Research  Professors 

A.  W  Coats,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  James  Henderson,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 


44 


Adjunct  Professor 

Robert  H.  Bates,  Ph.D.  (MIT);  A.  Ronald  Gallant,  Ph.D.  (Iowa  State  University);  Helen  F.  Ladd,  Ph.D.  (Har- 
vard); Jean-Francois  Richard,  Ph.D.  (Catholic  University  of  Louvain) 
Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

Robert  Conrad,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin) 

The  Department  of  Economics  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A .  M .  and  Ph .  D. 
degrees.  Among  the  undergraduate  courses  of  distinct  advantage  to  the  graduate  student 
in  economics  are  statistics,  economic  theory,  and  basic  courses  in  philosophy,  mathemat- 
ics, and  social  sciences  other  than  economics.  Advanced  work  in  mathematics  or  statis- 
tics is  also  useful. 

Requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  in  economics  include  courses  in  economic  theory, 
quantitative  methods,  and  econometrics  in  the  first  year,  and  at  the  end  of  the  second  year, 
an  examination  in  economic  analysis.  In  addition,  a  student  must  obtain  certification  in 
three  fields,  one  of  which  may  be  in  an  outside  minor.  The  student  may  select  from  ad- 
vanced economic  theory,  history  of  political  economy,  economic  development,  economic 
history,  international  economics,  money  and  banking,  labor  economics,  public  finance, 
industrial  organization,  econometrics,  statistics,  Soviet  economics,  corporate  econom- 
ics, and  certain  fields  outside  the  economics  department  (e.g. ,  demography).  Course  work 
for  the  Ph.D.  degree  should  be  completed  in  five  semesters  of  residence. 

Courses  of  Instruction 


200.  Capitalism  and  Socialism 

201S,  202S.  Current  Issues  in  Economics 

204S.  Advanced  Monetary  Economics 

205S.  Advanced  Monetary  Theory  and  Policy 

207S.  Conflict  and  Cooperation  in  Economics 

208S.  Labor  Supply  and  the  Family 

212S.  Economic  Science  and  Economic  Policy 

213S.  1 .  The  Economics  of  Slavery  in  the 

American  South 
214.  Social  Choice 
218.  Macroeconomic  Policy 
219S.  Economic  Problems  of  Underdeveloped  Areas 

232.  Analytical  Methods  IV:  Topics  in  Economic  Policy 

233.  Federal,  State,  and  Local  Finance  and  Economic 
Policies 

234.  Urban  and  Regional  Economics 
243.  Econometrics  I 

245.  Econometrics  II 

246.  Selected  Topics  in  Econometric  Theory 
247S.  Applied  Econometrics 

249.  Microeconomics 

250S.  Modern  Economic  Thought 

254.  Macroeconomics 

265S.  International  Trade  and  Finance 

268.  Federal  Tax  Policy 

285.  Evaluation  of  Public  Expenditures 

286S.  Economic  Policy-Making  in  Developing 

Countries 
293.  Soviet  Economic  History 
294S.  Soviet  Economic  System 

301 .  Microeconomic  Analysis  I 

302.  Microeconomic  Analysis  II 

303.  Microeconomic  Analysis  HI 

304.  305.  Monetary  Theory  and  Policy 

307.  Quantitative  Analysis  I 

308.  Quantitative  Analysis  II 


311,  312.  History  of  Political  Economy 
313,  314.  Seminar  in  Economic  Theory 
317.  Seminar  in  Demographic,  Population,  and 
Resource  Problems  (Development  Economics  I) 

319.  Seminar  in  the  Theory  and  the  Problems  of 
Economic  Growth  and  Change  (Development 
Economics  II) 

320.  Macroeconomic  Analysis  I 

322.  Macroeconomic  Analysis  II 
324,  325.  Economics  of  the  Law 
326.  Stochastic  Macroeconomics 

329.  Federal  Finance 

330.  Seminar  in  Public  Finance 
350.  Modern  Economic  Thought 
355.  Seminar  in  Labor  Economics 

358.  Seminar  in  Labor  Market  and  Related  Analysis 

359.  Economic  Analysis  of  Legal  Issues 

365.  Seminar  in  International  Trade  Theory  and  Policy 

366.  Seminar  in  International  Monetary  Theory 
380.  Graduate  Economics  Workshops 

388.  Industrial  Organization 

389.  Seminar  in  Industrial  and  Governmental  Problems 
397,  398.  Directed  Research 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

235.  The  Economics  of  Crime,  Law  Enforcement, 

and  Justice 
303.  Theory  of  Economic  Decision  Making 
316.  Seminar  in  Economics  of  Soviet-Type  Socialism 

321.  Theory  of  Quantitative  Economic  Policy 

323.  Income  Distribution  Theory 

331.  Seminar  in  Economic  History 

345,  346.  Demographic  Techniques  I  and  II 

401 .  Seminar  on  the  British  Commonwealth 

402.  Interdisciplinary  Seminar  in  the  History  of  the 
Social  Sciences 


Related  Courses  in  Other  Departments 

Courses  in  related  fields  may  be  selected  from  anthropology,  business,  computer 
science,  forestry,  history,  mathematics,  philosophy,  political  science,  public  policy  studies, 
and  sociology,  or  from  an  area  that  complements  the  candidate's  area  of  research  interests 


45 


in  economics.  See  also  the  section  on  the  Center  for  Demographic  Studies  under  "Spe- 
cial Programs"  in  this  bulletin. 

Education 

Associate  Professor  Lucy  T.  Davis,  Ed.D.  (Columbia),  Chairman  and  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professor 

Ellis  B.  Page,  Ed.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles) 
Associate  Professors 

Robert  H.  Ballanryne,  Ed.D.  (Washington  State);  Peter  F.  Carbone,  Ed.D.  (Harvard);  Joseph  DiBona,  Ph.D. 

(California  at  Berkeley);  Charles  B.  Johnson,  Ed.D.  (Duke);  Robert  N.  Sawyer,  Ed.D.  (Wyoming) 
Professor  Emeritus 

W.  Scott  Gehman,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania  State) 
Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

Robert  A.  Pittillo,  Jr.,  Ed.D.  (Duke) 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professor 

Mary  E.  Mayesky,  Ph.D.  (Wayne  State) 
Lecturer 

John  A.  Fowler,  M.D  (Bowman  Gray) 

Qualified  juniors,  seniors,  and  graduate  students  may  enroll  in  appropriate  educa- 
tion courses  as  electives.  Further  information  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Gradu- 
ate Studies. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

205.  Selected  Topics  350.  Directed  Activities  in  Education 

206.  Selected  Topics  351.  Directed  Activities  in  Education 
215S.  Seminar  in  Secondary  School  Teaching  357.  Directed  Research 

216.  Secondary  Education:  Internship 

225.  The  Teaching  of  History  and  the  Social  Studies 


Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 


232.  Learning  and  Living  in  Families  211 .  Education  and  the  Mass  Media 

236.  Teaching  Developmental  and  Remedial  Reading  212S.  Pedagogy  and  Political  Economy:  A  World  View 

in  the  Secondary  School  227.  Contemporary  Theories  of  Counseling  and 
242S.  Group  Interactions  Psychotherapy 

246.  Teaching  of  Mathematics  248.  Practicum  in  Counseling 
276.  Teaching  of  High  School  Science 

Engineering 

Professor  Earl  H.  Dowell,  Sc.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.),  Dean 

The  School  of  Engineering  offers  programs  of  study  and  research  leading  to  the  M.S. 
and  Ph.D.  degrees  with  a  major  in  biochemical,  biomedical,  civil  and  environmental,  elec- 
trical, and  mechanical  engineering  and  materials  science.  These  programs  are  designed 
to  provide:  (1)  development  of  depth  and  breadth  in  mathematics,  computer  science,  the 
basic  physical  sciences,  the  life  sciences  where  appropriate,  and  the  engineering  sciences; 
(2)  mastery  of  an  advanced  body  of  knowledge  in  the  candidate's  chosen  field  of  speciali- 
zation or  research;  (3)  experience  in  the  art  of  engineering,  including  strong  elements  of 
intuition,  imagination,  and  judgment;  and  (4)  performance  of  original  research  which, 
in  the  case  of  the  M.S.  degree,  demonstrates  the  ability  to  advance  knowledge  in  the  area 
of  professional  study  and,  in  the  case  of  the  Ph.D.  degree,  makes  a  significant  contribu- 
tion to  the  research  literature  through  publication  in  a  leading  professional  journal  in  the 
field.  Engineering  graduate  students  are  expected  to  participate  in  advanced  seminars 
appropriate  to  their  fields  of  study. 

A  minimum  of  30  units  of  earned  graduate  credit  beyond  the  bachelor's  degree  is  re- 
quired for  the  M.S.  degree:  12  in  the  major,  6  in  related  minor  work  (usually  mathemat- 
ics or  natural  science),  6  in  either  the  major  or  minor  subject  or  in  other  areas  approved 
by  the  major  department,  and  6  for  a  research-based  thesis.  A  nonthesis  option  requir- 
ing 30  units  of  course  credit  is  available.  Each  degree  program  imposes  additional  require- 
ments in  the  exercise  of  this  option.  There  is  no  language  requirement  for  this  degree. 


46 


A  minimum  of  60  units  of  earned  graduate  credit  beyond  the  bachelor's  degree  is  re- 
quired for  the  Ph.D.  degree.  In  civil  and  environmental  engineering,  12  units  of  course 
work  beyond  the  master's  degree  are  required  to  be  in  the  major  field,  6  in  a  related  mi- 
nor field,  and  6  in  either  the  major  or  minor  field;  in  electrical  engineering,  24  units  are 
required  in  the  major  field  and  12  units  in  a  related  minor  field  (often  mathematics  or  nat- 
ural science),  12  in  either  the  major  or  minor  subject  or  other  areas  approved  by  the  ma- 
jor department,  and  12  for  a  research-based  dissertation.  In  biochemical,  biomedical,  and 
mechanical  engineering  and  materials  science  there  are  no  specific  course  requirements; 
each  program  is  planned  to  meet  individual  needs.  Doctoral  students  are  required  to  pass 
qualifying  and  preliminary  examinations  that  consist  of  either  written,  oral,  or  a  combi- 
nation of  written  and  oral  components,  at  the  discretion  of  the  committee  and  the 
department. 

In  addition,  the  School  of  Engineering  and  the  Fuqua  School  of  Business  offer  an 
MBA/MS  Joint-Degree  program.  Further  details  about  this  program  may  be  obtained  from: 
Professor  Eric  I  Pas,  Director,  MBA/MS  Joint-Degree  Program,  Department  of  Civil  and 
Environmental  Engineering. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

221.  Computational  Linear  Algebra 

222.  Computer  Solutions  of  Ordinary  and  Partial  Differential  Equations 

Biochemical  Engineering 

Professor  Robert  M.  Hochmuth,  Ph.D.  (Brown),  Acting  Director 

Associate  Professor  James  D.  Bryers,  Ph.D.  (Rice),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Howard  G.  Clark,  Ph.D.  (Maryland);  Charles  H.  Lochmiiller,  Ph.D.  (Fordham) 
Associate  Professors 

Robert  W.  Henkens,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Alician  V.  Quinlan,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.) 
Assistant  Professors 

Robert  S.  Cherry,  Ph.D.  (Rice);  David  Needham,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Nottingham);  William  M.  Reichert,  Ph.D. 

(Michigan);  George  A.  Truskey,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.) 
Research  Associate  Professors 

Andrew  B.  Balber,  Ph.D.  (Rockefeller  Univ.) 

The  biochemical  engineering  program  offers  graduate  education  leading  to  the  M.S. 
and  Ph .  D.  degrees  for  those  students  interested  in  developing  and  using  engineering  prin- 
ciples to  understand  and  implement  biological  and  biochemical  processes.  Students  fol- 
low a  program  of  course  work  to  reinforce  knowledge  of  advanced  principles  of  process 
engineering,  transport  phenomena,  and  kinetics,  as  well  as  microbiology,  immunolo- 
gy, cell  biology,  chemistry,  and  biochemistry.  Prior  undergraduate  courses  in  any  or  all 
of  these  areas  would  be  useful  to  the  applicant.  Major  emphasis  in  the  program  is  on  ex- 
perimental research  leading  to  either  the  M.S.  or  Ph.D.  degrees.  A  nonthesis  M.S.  de- 
gree option  is  also  available  with  prior  approval. 

Requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  include  a  total  of  60  credit  hours  beyond  the  un- 
dergraduate degree  with  demonstrated  performance  in  the  key  areas  of  bioprocess  en- 
gineering, transport  phenomena,  thermodynamics  or  separations,  biochemistry,  and  cel- 
lular biology  or  microbiology.  In  addition,  to  be  considered  a  Ph .  D.  candidate,  the  student 
must  successfully  pass  a  qualifying  examination  no  later  than  the  fourth  semester  of  resi- 
dence. A  preliminary  examination  by  the  candidate's  thesis  committee  is  also  required 
prior  to  defending  the  research.  A  final  oral  defense  of  the  research  and  written  disser- 
tation are  also  required  by  the  Graduate  School. 

Requirements  for  the  M.S.  degree  include  a  total  of  30  credit  hours  beyond  the  un- 
dergraduate degree,  a  total  of  24  course  credits,  an  oral  defense  of  the  research  project, 
and  a  written  thesis. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

205.  Introductory  Biochemical  Engineering  206.  Optimization  of  Bioprocess  Kinetics 

47 


207.  Transport  Processes  in  Biological  Systems  240.  Biosensors 

208.  Introduction  to  Colloid  and  Surface  Science  244.  Applied  Microbial  Processes 

209.  Kinetics  and  Reactor  Design  260.  Animal  Cell  Culture  Technology 

210.  Advanced  Topics  in  Biochemical  Engineering  265.  Special  Topics 
216.  Transport  Processes  in  Cells  and  Organs 

Biomedical  Engineering 

Professor  James  H.  McElhaney,  Ph.D.  (West  Virginia),  Chairman 
Professor  Olaf  T.  vonRamm,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Roger  C.  Barr,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Howard  G.  Clark,  Ph.D.  (Maryland);  William  E.  Hammond,  Ph.D.  (Duke); 

Robert  M.  Hochmuth,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Loren  W.  Nolte,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Theo  C.  Pilkington,  Ph.D.  (Duke); 

Robert  Plonsey,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Myron  L.  Wolbarsht,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins) 
Associate  Professors 

Donald  S.  Burdick,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Ronald  J.  Jaszczak,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Horida);  Ares  Pasipoularides, 

M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota) 
Assistant  Professors 

Frederick  H.  Daniels,  Sc.D.  (Columbia);  Carey  E.  Hoyd,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  William N.  Reichert,  Ph.D.  (Michi- 
gan); Peter  K.  Smith,  M.D  (Duke);  Gregg  E.  Trahey,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  George  A.  Truskey,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts 

Inst,  of  Tech.) 
Research  Professor 

Frederick  L.  Thurstone,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  State) 
Research  Assistant  Professors 

Jack  T.  Cusma,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  James  R.  Jacobs,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Alabama,  Birmingham) 

Biomedical  engineering  is  the  discipline  in  which  the  physical,  mathematical,  and 
engineering  sciences  and  associated  technology  are  applied  to  biology  and  medicine.  Con- 
tributions range  from  modeling  and  simulation  of  physiological  systems  through  experi- 
mental research  to  solutions  of  practical  clinical  problems.  The  goal  of  the  graduate  pro- 
gram in  biomedical  engineering  is  to  combine  training  in  advanced  engineering, 
biomedical  engineering,  and  the  life  sciences  so  that  graduates  of  the  program  can  con- 
tribute at  the  most  advanced  professional  level.  The  doctoral  dissertation  should  demon- 
strate significant  and  original  contributions  to  an  interdisciplinary  topic,  accomplished 
as  an  independent  investigator.  The  major,  current,  research  areas  are:  biochemical  en- 
gineering, biomechanics,  biomedical  materials,  biomedical  modeling,  biosensors,  data 
acquisition  and  processing,  medical  imaging,  and  electrophysiology.  Every  biomedical 
engineering  graduate  student  is  required  to  serve  as  a  teaching  assistant  as  part  of  the 
graduate  training. 

Courses  of  Instruction 


201.  Electrophysiology 

202.  Biomedical  Transfer  Processes 

205,  206.  Microprocessors  and  Digital  Instruments 
207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems 

211.  Theoretical  Electrophysiology 

212.  Theoretical  Electrocardiography 

215.  Biomedical  Materials  and  Artificial  Organs 

216.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Cells  and  Organs 
222.  Principles  of  Ultrasound  Imaging 

230.  Biomechanics 

233.  Modern  Diagnostic  Imaging  Systems 

235.  Acoustics  and  Hearing 


241.  Artificial  Intelligence  in  Medicine 

243.  Computers  in  Biomedical  Engineering 

244.  Mathematical  Models  of  Physiological  Systems 
265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Biomedical  Engineering 
333.  Biomedical  Imaging 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Biomedical  Engineering 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

204.  Measurement  and  Control  of  Cardiac  Electrical 

Events 
221.  Electrophysiological  Techniques 
311.  Inverse  Models 


Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 

Professor  P.  Aarne  Vesilind,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill),  Chairman 

Professor  J.  Jeffrey  Peirce,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Wisconsin  at  Madison),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

PeterK.  Haff,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Virginia);  Robert  J.  Melosh,  Ph.D.  (Washington);  Henry  J.  Petroski,  Ph.D. 


48 


(University  of  Illinois-Urbana);  Senol  Utku,  Sc.D.  (Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology);  James  F.  Wil- 
son, Ph.D.  (Ohio  State) 

Associate  Professors 

Mrinmay  Biswas,  Ph.D.  (Virginia);  James  D.  Bryers,  Ph.D.  (Rice);  Tomasz  A.  Hueckel,  Ph.D.  (Polish  Academy 
of  Science),  DSc.  (National  Polytechnic  Inst.);  Miguel  A.  Medina,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Florida);  Eric  I.  Pas,  Ph.D.  (North- 
western); Kenneth  H.  Reckhow,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 

Assistant  Professors 

Bruce  C.  Faust,  Ph.D.  (Calif.  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Timothy  L.  Jacobs,  Ph.D.  (Purdue) 

Civil  and  environmental  engineering  is  the  broadest  of  the  engineering  disciplines, 
extending  across  mathematics,  the  natural  sciences  including  physics,  biology,  and 
chemistry,  and  emphasizing  the  social  and  management  sciences  and  humanities.  Gradu- 
ate students  at  Duke  conduct  research  for  a  Ph.D.  or  an  M.S.  degree  in  one  of  seven  spe- 
cialty areas:  environmental  engineering,  mechanics  of  solids  and  fluids,  structural  en- 
gineering, ocean  engineering,  urban  and  regional  planning  and  transportation,  water 
resources,  and  geotechnical  engineering.  A  wide  range  of  programs  complements  these 
major  research  efforts:  public  policy,  economics,  sociology,  and  management  sciences. 
Additionally,  a  student  may  elect  courses  to  support  the  research  offered  by  the  School 
of  Public  Health  at  the  University  of  North  Carolina. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

201.  Advanced  Mechanics  of  Solids  251.  Systematic  Engineering  Analysis 

203.  Plasticity  254.  Applications  of  Finite  Element  Analysis 

204.  Plates  and  Shells  257.  Structural  Optimization 

205.  Elasticity  258.  Analysis  of  Dynamic  and  Nonlinear  Behavior 
207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems  of  Structures 

210.  Intermediate  Dynamics  265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Civil  and  Environmental 
212.  Mechanical  Behavior  and  Fracture  of  Materials  Engineering 

215.  Engineering  Systems  Analysis  281 .  Experimental  Systems 

216.  Transportation  Planning  and  Policy  Analysis  283.  Structural  Dynamics 

217.  Transportation  Systems  Analysis  301,  302.  Fall  and  Spring  Seminars 

218.  Engineering  Management  and  Project  Evaluation     399.  Special  Readings  in  Civil  and  Environmental 
225.  Dynamic  Engineering  Hydrology  Engineering 

227.  Groundwater  Hydrology  and  Contaminant  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

Transport  J 

233.  Prestressed  Concrete  Design  202-  Advanced  Mechanics  of  Solids  II 

235.  Foundation  Engineering  221  ■  Incompressible  Fluid  Flow 

236.  Earth  Structures  222-  °Pen  Channel  How 

237  Advanced  Soil  Mechanics  m  How  Through  Porous  Media 

240.  Fate  of  Organic  Chemicals  in  the  Environment  226-  Operational  Hydrology 

242.  Environmental  Chemistry  23L  Structural  Engineering  Analysis 

243.  Physicochemical  Unit  Operations  in  Water  232'  Reinforced  Concrete  Design 
Treatment  234,  Advanced  Structural  Design  in  Metals 

244.  Applied  Microbial  Processes  23a  Rock  Mechanics 

245.  Pollutant  Transport  Systems  239-  Physical  Properties  of  Soils 

246.  Water  Supply  Design  24Z  Air  Pollution  Control 

248.  Solid  Waste  and  Resource  Recovery  Engineering      33Z  Elements  of  Soil  Dynamics 

249.  Control  of  Hazardous  and  Toxic  Waste  35a  Advanced  Engineering  Analysis 
Engineering 


Electrical  Engineering 


Professor  H.  Craig  Casey,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Stanford),  Chairman 

Professor  Peter  N.  Marinos,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  State),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Richard B.  Fair,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  William T.  Joines,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Robert B.  Kerr,  Ph.D.  (Johns Hopkins);  Loren 

W.  Nolte,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Theo  C.  Pilkington,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Kishor  S.  Trivedi,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Paul  P. 

Wang,  Ph.D.  (Ohio  State);  Thomas  G.  Wilson,  Sc.D.  (Harvard) 
Associate  Professors 

Joanne  Bechta  Dugan,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Herbert  Hacker,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Gershon  Kedem,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin); 

HishamZ.  Massoud,  Ph.D.  (Stanford) 
Assistant  Professors 

Dimitri  Alexandrou,  Ph.D.  (California-San  Diego);  John  A.  Board,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Oxford);  Apostolos  Dollas,  Ph.D. 

(Illinois);  RhettT.  George,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Horida);  JohnH.  L.  Hansen,  Ph.D.  (Georgia Tech.);  Ronald C.  Wong, 

Ph.D.  (Duke) 

49 


Research  Assistant  Professor 

Karen  Z.  Frenzel,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 
Professor  Emeritus 

Harry  A.  Owen,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  State) 

A  student  may  specialize  in  any  one  of  the  following  fields  in  working  toward  either 
the  M.S.  or  the  Ph.D.  degree  with  a  major  in  electrical  engineering:  computer-aided  de- 
sign, computer  engineering,  detection  and  estimation  theory,  digital  signal  processing, 
electromagnetic  fields  and  microwaves,  integrated  circuit  design  and  fabrication, 
microprocessor  systems,  robotics  and  control  systems,  solid-state  devices  and  materials, 
solid-state  power  conditioning,  and  VLSI  circuit  design. 

Recommended  prerequisites  for  the  graduate  courses  in  electrical  engineering  include 
a  knowledge  of  basic  mathematics  and  physics,  electric  networks,  and  system  theory.  Stu- 
dents in  doubt  about  their  background  for  enrollment  in  specific  courses  should  discuss 
the  matter  with  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  The  M.S.  degree  program  includes  ei- 
ther a  thesis  or  a  project  and  an  oral  examination.  A  qualifying  examination  is  required 
for  the  Ph.D.  degree  program.  This  examination  is  intended  to  test  both  the  breadth  and 
depth  of  the  student's  understanding  of  basic  electrical  engineering  concepts.  There  is 
no  foreign  language  requirement. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

201.  Digital  Processing  of  Speech  Signals  265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Electrical  Engineering 

202.  Digital  Communication  Systems  271.  Electromagnetic  Theory 

203.  Random  Signals  and  Noise  272.  Electromagnetic  Communication  Systems 

204.  Computer  Network  Architecture  273.  Optical  Communication  Systems 

205.  Signal  Detection  and  Extraction  Theory  308.  Advanced  Topics  in  Digital  Systems 

206.  Digital  Signal  Processing  310.  CMOS  VLSI  Design 

207.  Fault-Tolerant  and  Testable  Computer  Systems  316.  Advanced  Physics  of  Semiconductor  Devices 

208.  Digital  Computer  Architecture  and  Design  320.  Integrated  Circuit  Fabrication  Laboratory 

209.  Microprocessor  Fundamentals  and  Applications      333.  Electronic  Properties  of  Submicron  Solid-State 

210.  Introduction  to  VLSI  Design  Devices 

211.  Quantum  Mechanics  399.  Special  Readings  in  Electrical  Engineering 

213.  Modern  Optics  _  _  ..,.«.. 

214.  Introduction  to  Solid-State  Physics  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 
216.  Devices  for  Integrated  Circuits  215.  Semiconductor  Physics 

218.  Integrated  Circuit  Engineering  217.  Lasers 

219.  Digital  Integrated  Circuits  222.  Nonlinear  Analysis 

225.  Microwave  Electronic  Circuits  224.  Advanced  Electronic  Circuits 

227.  Network  Synthesis  226.  Modeling/Computer-Aided  Analysis  of  Electronic 

234.  Power  Electronics:  High-Power  Circuits  Systems 

235.  Nonlinear  Magnetic  and  Semiconductor  Power        302.  Applied  Information  Theory  and  Statistical 
Converters  Estimation 

236.  Energy-Storage  Power  Converters  305.  Advanced  Topics  in  Signal  Processing 
241.  Linear  Systems  317.  Quantum  Electronics 

243.  Advanced  Linear  Systems  324.  Nonlinear  Oscillations  in  Physical  Systems 

250.  Introduction  to  Robotics  342.  Optimal  Control  Theory 

251.  Pattern  Classification  and  Recognition  371.  Advanced  Electromagnetic  Theory 

252.  Computer  Systems  Organization  373.  Selected  Topics  in  Field  Theory 

Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science 

Professor  Robert  M.  Hochmuth,  Ph.D.  (Brown),  Chairman 

Professor  Charles  M.  Harman,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Adrian  Bejan,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Jack  B.  Chaddock,  Sc.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.); 
Franklin  H.  Cocks,  Sc.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Earl  H.  Dowell,  Sc.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.); 
DevendraP.  Garg,  Ph.D.  (New  York  Univ.);  UlrichM.  Gdsele,  Ph.D.  (Max  Planck  Institut  fur  Metallforschung, 
Stuttgart);  George  W.  Pearsall,  Sc.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Edward  J.  Shaughnessy,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Vir- 
ginia); Marion  L.  Shepard,  Ph.D.  (Iowa  State);  Teh  Yu  Tan,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley) 
Associate  Professors 

Donald  B.  Bliss,  Ph.D.  (Massachsuetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Phillip  L.  Jones,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles); 
Alician  V.  Quinlan,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Donald  Wright,  Ph.D.  (Purdue) 


50 


Assistant  Professors 

Gale  H.  Buzzard,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  State);  Robert  S.  Cherry,  Ph.D.  (Rice  University);  John  G.  Geor- 

giadis,  Ph.D.  (University  of  California  at  Los  Angeles);  Josiah  Doss  Knight,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Virginia); 

David  Needham,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Nottingham) 
Research  Assistant  Professor 

Roger  Tran-Son-Tay,  D.Sc.  (Washington  University) 

The  department  offers  programs  of  study  and  research  leading  to  the  M .  S.  and  Ph .  D. 
degrees  in  both  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science.  Within  mechanical  engi- 
neering, the  broad  areas  of  concentration  include  thermal  and  fluids  systems,  mechanics 
and  biomechanics,  and  dynamics  and  control .  Within  materials  science,  the  areas  of  con- 
centration include  electronic  materials,  biomaterials,  and  the  determination  of  material 
characteristics.  The  department  emphasizes  a  highly  research-oriented  Ph.D.  degree 
program. 

Current  research  areas  available  include:  cellular  biomechanics;  biorheology;  convec- 
tion; diffusion  and  heat  transfer  in  heterogeneous  media;  aeroelasticity;  computational 
fluid  dynamics;  chaotic  systems;  vibrations  and  acoustics  of  dynamic  systems;  sound 
propagation  and  absorbing  materials;  thermal  performance  of  buildings;  thermal  design 
by  entropy  generation;  control  systems;  robotics;  expert  systems;  bearing  design  and  lubri- 
cation; mechanical  properties  of  human  stones;  positron  annihilation  spectroscopy;  diffu- 
sion and  kinetics  in  Si  GaAs  and  other  electronic  materials;  modeling  and  optimization 
of  bioprocesses;  and  cell  culture  optimization. 

Courses  of  Instruction 


202.  Engineering  Thermodynamics 

205.  Biochemical  Engineering 

206.  Optimization  of  Bioprocess  Kinetics 

207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems 

208.  Introduction  to  Colloid  and  Surface  Science 

210.  Intermediate  Dynamics 

211.  Theoretical  and  Applied  Polymer  Science 

212.  Electronic  Materials 

214.  Corrosion  and  Corrosion  Control 

215.  Biomedical  Materials  and  Artificial  Organs 

216.  Materials  Science  and  Solar  Technology 

217.  Fracture  of  Engineering  Materials 

218.  Thermodynamics  of  Electronic  Materials 
221 .  Compressible  Fluid  Flow 

224.  An  Introduction  to  Turbulence 

225.  Mechanics  of  Viscous  Fluids 

226.  Intermediate  Fluid  Mechanics 

227.  Advanced  Fluid  Mechanics 


228.  Lubrication 

229.  Computational  Fluid  Mechanics  and  Heat  Transfer 

230.  Modern  Control  and  Dynamic  Systems 

236.  Engineering  Acoustics  and  Noise  Control 

237.  Aerodynamics 

240.  Patent  Technology  and  Law  for  Engineers 

245.  Applications  in  Expert  Systems 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Mechanical  Engineering 

270.  Robot  Control  and  Automation 

277.  Optimization  Methods  for  Mechanical  Design 

280.  Convective  Heat  Transfer 

281 .  Conduction  and  Radiation  Heat  Transfer 
325.  Aeroelasticity 

331 .  Nonlinear  Control  Systems 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Mechanical  Engineering 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

322.  Mechanics  of  Viscous  Huids 


English 


Professor  Stanley  Fish,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Chairman 

Professor  Marianna  Torgovnick,  Ph.D.  (Columbia),  Assistant  Chairman 

Professor  Oliver  W.  Ferguson,  Ph.D.  (Illinois),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Assistant  Professor  Michael  V.  Moses,  Ph.D.  (Virginia),  Assistant  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Carl  Anderson,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  James  Applewhite,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Louis  J.  Budd,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin), 
fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of English;  Cathy  N.  Davidson,  Ph.D.  (SUNY-Binghamton);  A.  Leigh  DeNeef,  Ph.D. 
(Pennsylvania  State);  Robert  F.  Gleckner,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  Wallace  Jackson,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania); 
Frank  Lentricchia,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  HolgerO  V.  Nygard,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Annabel  Patterson, 
Ph.D.  (London);  Lee  Patterson,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Reynolds  Price,  B.Litt.  (Oxford);  DaleB.  J.  Randall,  Ph.D.  (Penn- 
sylvania); Clyde  de  Loache  Ryals,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Eve  Sedgwick,  Ph.D.  fiate);  Barbara  Herrnstein 
Smith  (Brandeis);  Grover  C.  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Victor  H.  Strandberg,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Jane  Tompkins, 
Ph.D.  (Yale);  George  W.  Williams,  Ph.D.  (Virginia);  Kenny  J.  Williams,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania) 
Associate  Professors 

Ronald  R.  Butters,  Ph.D.  (Iowa);  John  Clum,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Gerald  E.  Gerber,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern); 
George  D  Gopen,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Buford  Jones,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Elgin  W.  Mellown,  Ph.D.  (London); 
Deborah  Pope,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  Joseph  Porter,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  ReginaM.  Schwartz,  Ph.D. 
(Virginia) 


51 


Assistant  Professors 

Sarah  Beckwith,  Ph.D.  (London);  Thomas  Ferraro,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Jane  Gaines,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern);  Michael 
Moon,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  Susan  Willis,  Ph.D.  (California  at  San  Diego) 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professor 

Julie  Tetel,  Ph.D.  (University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill) 

The  department  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  although 
normally  students  seeking  only  the  A .  M .  degree  are  not  admitted .  If  not  already  earned 
elsewhere,  the  A.M.  degree  may  be  taken  en  route  to  the  Ph .  D.  and  by  students  who  elect 
to  withdraw  from  the  doctoral  program .  The  A.M.  degree  is  not  required  for  students  pur- 
suingthe  Ph. D.  Astatement  of  the  requirements  for  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  may  be 
obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  The  department  requires  a  reading 
knowledge  of  at  least  one  foreign  language  for  the  Ph .  D.  degree;  an  additional  language 
or  languages  may  be  required  by  the  student's  committee. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  ESL  Composition  324.  Studies  in  Shakespeare 

205.  Semiotics  and  Linguistics  329.  Studies  in  Milton 

207.  Old  English  Language  and  Literature  337.  Studies  in  Augustanism 

208.  History  of  the  English  Language  338.  Studies  in  a  Major  Augustan  Author 

209.  Present-Day  English  341.  Studies  in  Romanticism 
212.  Middle  English  Literature:  1100  to  1500  347.  Studies  in  Victorianism 

221.  Renaissance  Prose  and  Poetry:  1500  to  1660  348.  Studies  in  a  Major  Nineteenth-Century  Author 

225.  Renaissance  Drama:  1500  to  1642  353.  Studies  in  Modern  British  Literature 

235.  Restoration  and  Eighteenth-Century  Literature:       361.  Studies  in  American  Literature  before  1915 

1660  to  1800  368.  Studies  in  a  Major  American  Author  before  1915 

241.  Romantic  Literature:  1790  to  1830  375.  Studies  in  Modern  American  Literature 

245.  Victorian  Literature:  1830  to  1900  376.  Studies  in  a  Modern  Author  (British  or  American) 

251.  British  Literature  since  1900  381.  Special  Topics  Seminar 

263.  American  Literature  to  1865  385.  Studies  in  Literary  Criticism 

267.  American  Literature:  1865  to  1915  386.  Problems  in  the  Theory  of  Value  and  Judgment 

269.  American  Women  Writers  388.  The  History  of  Rhetoric:  Classical  to  Renaissance 

275.  American  Literature  since  1915  389.  The  History  of  Rhetoric :  Eighteenth  to  Twentieth 
281.  Studies  in  Genre  Centuries 

283.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities  390.  Composition  Theory  and  Pedagogy 
285.  Major  Texts  in  the  History  of  Literary  Criticism         391.  Tutorial  in  Special  Topics 

288.  Special  Topics  392.  Tutorial  in  Journal  Editing 

289.  The  Theory  of  the  Novel  393.  Professionalism,  Theory  and  Power  in  Legal  and 
310.  Studies  in  Old  English  Literature  Literary  Studies 

312.  Studies  in  Middle  English  Literature 
315.  Studies  in  Chaucer 


Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 


321.  Studies  in  Renaissance  Literature  383.  Studies  in  Textual  Criticism 

Tutorials 

Specialized  subjects  of  study  may  be  offered,  numbered  in  the  390s,  to  accommodate 
the  interests  of  advanced  graduate  students.  Tutorials  may  be  offered  to  single  students 
or  to  small  groups.  Instruction  will  be  conducted  in  weekly  sessions,  or  in  more  frequently 
scheduled  sessions,  if  the  instructor  wishes.  Emphasis  will  be  on  independent  reading 
and  investigation,  and  oral  and  written  reports.  A  substantial  amount  of  writing  will  be 
required. 

Students  are  advised  to  consult  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  about  the  availa- 
bility of  tutorials. 

Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 

Professor  George  F.  Dutrow,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Dean 

Professor  William  J.  Stambaugh,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Kenneth  R.  Knoerr,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Curtis  J.  Richardson,  Ph.D.  (Tennessee) 
Associate  Professors 

Norman  L.  Christensen,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Santa  Barbara);  Randall  A.  Kramer,  Ph.D.  (California  at 
Davis);  Kenneth  H.  Reckow,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Daniel  D.  Richter,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

52 


Assistant  Professors 

Bruce  C.  Faust,  Ph.D.  (Calif.  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Richard  T.  Di  Giulio,  Ph.D.  (Virginia  Polytechnic  Inst.);  Lynn 
A.  Maguire,  Ph.D.  (Utah  State);  RamOren,  Ph.D.  (Oregon  State);  Peter  J.  Parks,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley) 

Professors  Emeriti 

Roger  F.  Anderson,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota);  Henry  Hellmers,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Jane  Philpott,  Ph.D. 
(Iowa);  James  G.  Yoho,  Ph.D.  (Michigan  State) 

Adjunct  Professors 

StephenG.  Boyce,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  State);  WilliamK.  Condrell,  J.D.  (Harvard);  MichaelP.  Dieter,  Ph.D. 
(University  of  Mississippi);  William  F.  Hyde,  Ph.  D.  (Michigan);  William  Sizemore,  Ph .  D.  (University  of  Geor- 
gia); Harold  K.  Steen,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Washington) 

Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

Robert  G.  Healy,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles) 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professor 

Ralph  Joseph  Alig,  Ph.D.  (Oregon  State) 

Major  and  minor  work  is  offered  in  the  areas  of  natural  resource  science/ecology,  nat- 
ural resource  systems  science,  and  natural  resource  economics/policy.  Programs  of  study 
and  research  lead  to  the  A.M.,  M.S.,  and  Ph.D.  degrees.  College  graduates  who  have  a 
bachelor's  degree  in  one  of  the  natural  or  social  sciences,  forestry,  engineering,  business, 
or  environmental  science  will  be  considered  for  admission  to  a  degree  program.  Students 
will  be  restricted  to  the  particular  fields  of  specialization  for  which  they  are  qualified  aca- 
demically. Graduate  School  programs  usually  concentrate  on  some  area  of  natural  re- 
source science/ecology  systems  science,  or  economics/policy,  while  study  in  resource 
management  is  more  commonly  followed  in  one  of  the  professional  master's  degree  pro- 
grams of  the  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies.  For  more  complete  program 
descriptions  and  information  on  professional  training  in  forestry  or  environmental 
studies,  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  should 
be  consulted. 

The  specific  degrees  available  in  forestry  and  related  natural  resources  through  the 
Graduate  School  are:  the  A.M.  (with  or  without  a  thesis),  M.S.  (with  a  thesis),  and  the 
Ph.D.  Students  majoring  in  forestry  or  environmental  studies  may  be  required  to  demon- 
strate satisfactory  knowledge  of  one  or  two  foreign  languages  for  the  Ph.D.  degree. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Student  Projects 

201.  Field  Studies 

204.  Forest  Inventory,  Growth,  and  Yield 

205.  Silviculture 

207.  Forest  Pest  Management 

208.  Fire  Behavior  and  Use 
210L.  Forest  Pathology 

211L.  Applied  Ecology  and  Ecosystem  Management 

212.  Ecological  Toxicology 

213.  Forest  Ecosystems 

215.  Environmental  Physiology 

216.  Applied  Population  Ecology 
218.  Barrier  Island  Ecology 
221L.  Soil  Resources 

230.  Weather  and  Climate 

231 .  Environmental  Climatology 

232.  Microclimatology 
234.  Watershed  Hydrology 

236.  Water  Quality  Management 

237.  Watershed  Modeling 
242.  Environmental  Chemistry 

261.  Remote  Sensing  for  Resource  Management 

262.  Forest  Utilization 

266.  Ecology  of  Southern  Appalachian  Forests 
267  Wildland  and  Wildlife  Management 
270.  Resource  Economics  and  Policy 
283.  Environmental  Policy  and  Values 
285.  Land  Use  Principles  and  Policies 


299.  Independent  Projects 

301 .  Forest  Nutrition  Management 

302.  Models  in  Forestry 

305.  Harvesting  Effects  on  Productivity 

306.  Dynamic  Modeling  of  Forest  Management 
Strategies 

307.  Ecophysiology  of  Productivity  and  Stress 

312.  Wetlands  Ecology 

313.  Advanced  Topics  in  Ecotoxicology 

316.  Case  Studies  in  Environmental  Management 

322.  Microbiology  of  Forest  Soils 

330L.  Environmental  Monitoring  and  Instrumentation 

331 .  Water  Resource  Systems 

332.  Air  Quality  Management 
335.  Water  Quality  Modeling 
350.  Applied  Regression  Analysis 

355.  Optimization  Methods  for  Resource  Management 

357.  Systems  Ecology  and  Modeling 

361 .  Forest  Resource  Management 

366.  Mathematical  Modeling  of  Lake  and  Reservoir 

Water  Quality 
367  Seminar  in  Forest  Resource  Management 
372,  373.  Advanced  Natural  Resource  Economics 

381 .  Natural  Resource  Policy 

382.  International  Environmental  Problems 
385.  Decision  Theory  and  Risk  Analysis 

388.  Seminar  in  Resource  and  Environmental  Policy 

389.  Seminar  in  Forest  and  Conservation  History 


53 


Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

209.  Forest  Entomology 

212.  Ecosystem  Dynamics  in  Forest  Productivity 
252.  Computer  Applications  in  Forestry 
304.  Forest  Yield 

308.  Tree  Biology 

309.  Forest  Regeneration 

310.  Forest  Productivity  and  Mineral  Cycling 

314.  Integrated  Case  Studies  in  Toxicology 

315.  Effects  of  Pollutants  on  Ecosystems 


317.  Applied  Ecological  Problem  Solving 

318.  Seminar  in  Ecotoxicology 

319.  Seminar  in  Natural  Resource  Ecology 

320.  Seminar  in  Integrated  Case  Studies  in  Natural 
Resource  Analysis 

325.  Ecologic  Effects  of  Acid  Deposition 
338.  Micrometeorology  and  Biometeorology  Seminar 
384.  Special  Tax  Problems  for  Industrial  Timberland 
Owners 


The  University  Program  in  Genetics 

Professor  Paul  Modrich,  Ph.D.  (Stanford),  Director 

Professors 

Deepak  Bastia,  Ph. D.  (Chicago);  John  E.  Boynton,  Ph. D.  (California  at  Davis);  Sheila  Counce,  Ph . D.  (Univ. 
of  Edinburgh);  Nicholas  Gillham,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Samson  R.  Gross,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Wolfgang  Karl 
Joklik,  D.Phil.  (Univ.  of  Oxford),  JamesB.  Duke  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology;  Nicholas  M.Kredich, 
M.D  (Michigan);  Montrose  J.  Moses,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Joseph  Nevins,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  R.  Bruce  Nicklas, 
Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Calvin  L.  Ward,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  Frances  Ellen  Ward,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Robert  E.  Webster, 
Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Associate  Professors 

Sharyn  Endow,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Ronald  C.  Greene,  Ph.D.  (California  Inst,  of  Tech.);  AmoL.  Greenleaf,  Ph.D. 
(Harvard);  Edward  W.  Holmes,  M.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Tao-shih  Hsieh,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Jack 
D.  Keene,  Ph.D.  (Washington  at  Seattle);  Cathy  C.  Laurie,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota);  Elwood  A.  Linney,  Ph.D. 
(California  at  San  Diego);  MarkD.  Rausher,  Ph.D.  (Cornell);  Frederick  H.  Schachat,  Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Deborah 
A.  Steege,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Judith  L.  Swain,  M.D.  (California  at  San  Diego);  Marcy  K.  Uyenoyama,  Ph.D. 
(Stanford) 

Assistant  Professors 

Michael  D.  Been,  Ph.D.  (Washington  at  Seattle);  Mary  Vickers  Burdett,  Ph.D.  (Georgetown);  Michael  S.  Hersh- 
field,  M.D.  (Pennsylvania);  Stephen  A.  Johnston,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  Russel  E.  Kaufman,  M.D.  (Ohio  State 
University);  Bruce  D  Kohom,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Kenneth  N.  Kreuzer,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Chicago);  Michael 
C.  Ostrowski,  Ph.D.  (South  Carolina  at  Columbia) 

Adjunct  Professors 

John  W  Drake,  Ph.D.  (California  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Burke  H.  Judd,  Ph.D.  (California  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Thomas 
Kunkel,  Ph.D.,  (Cincinnati);  John  Charles  Lucchesi,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Michael  A.  Resnick,  Ph.D. 
(University  of  California  at  Berkeley);  Akio  Sugino,  Ph.D.  (Nagoya  University,  Japan) 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics  provides  a  course  of  study  in  those  facets  of  bi- 
ology related  to  genetics.  Graduate  students  registered  in  any  of  the  biological  sciences 
departments  may  apply  to  the  faculty  of  the  genetics  program  to  pursue  study  and  re- 
search leading  to  an  advanced  degree.  It  would  be  helpful  if  applicants  for  admission  to 
the  Graduate  School  indicated  their  interest  in  the  genetics  program  at  the  time  of  appli- 
cation. Requests  for  information  describing  the  research  interests  of  the  staff,  facilities, 
and  special  stipends  and  fellowships  should  be  addressed  to  the  Director,  Genetics  Pro- 
gram (Department  of  Biochemistry). 

Courses  of  Instruction 

205.  Molecular  Biology 

215.  Molecular  Genetics  I:  Genetic  Mechanisms 

268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids 

280.  Principles  of  Genetics 

281S.  DNA,  Chromosomes,  and  Evolution 


283.  Extrachromosomal  Inheritance 
285S.  Ecological  Genetics 
286.  Evolutionary  Mechanisms 
288.  Mathematical  Population  Genetics 


Geology 


Professor  Ronald  D  Perkins,  Ph.D.  (Indiana),  Chairman 

Professor  S.  Duncan  Heron,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Orrin  H.  Pilkey,  Ph.D.  (Horida  State),  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Geology;  Bruce  R.  Rosendahl,  Ph.D.  (California 
at  San  Diego) 


54 


Associate  Professors 

Paul  A .  Baker,  Ph .  D.  (California  at  San  Diego);  Bruce  Hayward  Corliss,  Ph .  D.  (Univ.  of  Rhode  Island);  Thomas 
C.  Johnson,  Ph.D.  (California  at  San  Diego);  Jeffrey  A.  Karson,  Ph.D.  (SUNY) 
Assistant  Professors 

Alan  Boudreau,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Washington);  Emily  M.  Kline,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Richard  A.  Strelitz, 
Ph.D.  (Princeton) 

The  Department  of  Geology  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees.  An  undergraduate  degree  in  geology  is  not  a  prerequisite  for  graduate  studies, 
but  a  student  must  have  had  or  must  take  a  summer  field  geology  course  (or  equivalent 
experience),  mineralogy,  igneous  and  metamorphic  rocks,  stratigraphy  or  sedimentation, 
and  structural  geology.  In  addition,  the  student  must  have  had  or  must  take  one  year  of 
college  chemistry,  one  year  of  college  physics,  and  mathematics  through  calculus. 

Graduate  courses  in  the  Department  of  Geology  provide  specialized  training  in  the 
fields  of  facies  analysis,  sedimentary  petrology,  geological  oceanography  and  limnolo- 
gy, coastal  geology,  micropaleontology,  paleoceanography  geophysics,  low-temperature 
geochemistry;  igneous  petrology,  high-temperature  geochemistry,  and  structural  geol- 
ogy and  tectonics. 

An  acceptable  thesis  is  required.  There  is  no  language  requirement  for  the  M.S. 
degree. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Beach  and  Coastal  Processes  251.  Physics  of  the  Earth 

203.  Physical  Oceanography  252.  Exploration  Seismology 

206S.  Principles  of  Geological  Oceanography  255.  Seismic  Interpretation 

208S.  Paleoceanography  260S.  Hydrocarbon  Exploration 

209.  Marine  Sediments  269.  Theoretical  Geochemistry 

212.  Carbonate  Facies  Analysis:  Recent  and  Ancient  270.  Sedimentary  Geochemistry 

214S.  Sedimentary  Petrography  271.  Isotope  Geochemistry 

215.  Clashes  Facies  Analysis:  Recent  and  Ancient  272.  Biogeochemistry 

216.  Field  Analysis  of  South  Florida  Carbonates  281S.  Advanced  Topics  In  Igneous  Petrology 

217.  Field  Analysis  of  Ancient  Sedimentary  Sequences   283S.  Experimental  Methods  in  Geology 
219.  Sediment  Transport  292.  Computer  Methods  in  Geology 
230.  Advanced  Structural  Geology  295S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology 

233.  Oceanic  Crust  and  Ophiolites  371,  372.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology 

236.  Lithosphere  Plate  Boundaries  _  _,  .»     ¥  T        i_jij 

237.  Structure  and  Evolution  of  the  Appalachian  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 
Orogen  204.  Chemical  Oceanography 

239.  Advanced  Topics  in  Structural  Geology  and  253S.  Geophysics 

Tectonics  275.  Economic  Geology 

249.  Marine  Micropaleontology 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

Associate  Professor  Frank  Borchardt,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins),  Chairman 
Professor  James  L.  Rolleston,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Associate  Professor 

A.TiloAlt,  Ph.D.  (Texas) 
Assistant  Professors 

Michael  M.  Morton,  Ph.D.  (Virginia);  Ann  Marie  Rasmussen,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 
Professor  Emeritus 

Leland  R.  Phelps,  Ph.D.  (Ohio  State) 

The  Department  of  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature  offers  graduate  work  lead- 
ing to  the  A.M.  degree.  Students  who  expect  to  major  in  German  should  have  had  suffi- 
cient undergraduate  courses  in  Germanic  languages  to  enable  them  to  proceed  to  more 
advanced  work. 

Students  who  wish  to  take  courses  in  German  as  a  related  field  should  normally  have 
completed  a  third-year  course  (in  exceptional  cases,  a  second  year)  of  college  German  with 
acceptable  grades. 


55 


216.  History  of  the  German  Language 

217S.  Renaissance  and  Reformation  Literature 

218S.  The  Teaching  of  German 

219.  Applied  Linguistics 

230S.  Lyric  Poetry 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

321,  322.  Germanic  Seminar 


Courses  of  Instruction 

200S.  Proseminar 

201S,  202S.  Goethe 

205,  206.  Middle  High  German 

207S.  German  Romanticism 

209S.  Drama 

210S.  The  Eighteenth  Century 

211S.  Nineteenth-Century  Literature 

214S.  The  Twentieth  Century 

215S.  Seventeenth-Century  Literature 

Health  Administration 

Professor  J.  Alexander  McMahon,  J.D.  (Harvard),  Chairman 

Associate  Professor  Robert  Taylor,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

B.  Jon  Jaeger,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  David  G.  Warren,  J.D.  (Duke) 
Associate  Professors 

David  J.  Falcone,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Aleda  V.  Roth,  Ph.D.  (Ohio  State) 
Consultant 

Robert  E.  Toomey,  LL.D.  (Clemson) 
Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

Robert  G.  Winfree,  M.A.  (Iowa) 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professors 

William  J.  Donelan,  M.S.  (Duke);  John  Kevin  Moore,  J.D  (University  of  Minnesota);  Duncan  Yaggy,  Ph.D. 

(Brandeis) 

The  Department  of  Health  Administration  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  M .  H .  A. 
degree.  The  graduate  program  is  offered  through  two  academic  years  (including  a  sum- 
mer administrative  internship)  and  leads  principally  toward  a  career  in  the  corporate 
management  of  hospitals  and  other  health  care  delivery  organizations.  Students  with- 
out previous  administrative  experience  in  the  health  field  are  encouraged  to  apply  for  a 
twelve-month  administrative  fellowship  following  graduation.  Admission  to  the  program 
is  based  upon  the  capability  for  graduate  study  and  demonstrated  leadership  potential 
of  the  candidate. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

301  Health  System  and  the  Environment 

302.  Organizational  Behavior  in  Health  Systems 

303,  304.  Health  Systems  and  the  Environment- 
Laboratory 

311,  312.  Leadership  Seminar 

321,  322.  Strategic  Management 

325.  Health  Law  for  Management 

327.  Financial  Management  for  Health  Care 

Organizations 
331.  Human  Resources  Management 
341,  342.  Advanced  Seminar  in  Health  Care 

Institutional  Management 


343.  Comparative  Health  Systems 
352.  Health  Services  for  the  Aged 
354.  Quality  Assurance,  Risk  Management,  and 
Liability  Insurance 

356.  Health  Policy  Analysis 

357.  Current  Health  Issues 

358.  Cost  Benefit  Analysis 

362.  Planning  and  Managing  Alternative  Delivery 

Systems 
371,  372.  Directed  Research 


History 


Professor  Warren  Lerner,  Ph.D.  (Columbia),  Chairman 

Associate  Professor  Peter  H.  Wood,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  Directorof  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Clark  R.  Cahow,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  John  Cell,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  William  Chafe,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Calvin  D  Davis, 
Ph.D.  (Indiana);  Robert  F.  Durden,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  David  Barry  Gaspar,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  Bruce 
R.  Kuniholm,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Seymour  Mauskopf,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Martin  Miller,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  John 
F.  Oates,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  John  F.  Richards,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Alex  Roland,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Anne 
Firor  Scott,  Ph.D.  (Raddiffe);  WilliamE.  Scott,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  JohnJ.TePaske,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Ronald  Witt,  Ph.D. 
(Harvard);  Charles  R.  Young,  Ph.D.  (Cornell) 


56 


Associate  Professors 

Arif  Dirlik,  Ph.D.  (Rochester);  Peter  C.  English,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Raymond  Gavins,  Ph.D.  (Virginia); 
LawrenceC.  Goodwyn,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  Andrew  Gordon,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Cynthia  B.  Herrup,  Ph.D.  (North- 
western); Alexander  Keyssar,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Claudia  Koonz,  Ph.D.  (Rutgers);  Sydney  Nathans,  Ph.D. 
(Johns  Hopkins);  Kristen B.  Neuschel,  Ph.D.  (Brown University);  William M.  Reddy,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Peter 
H.  Wood,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 

Assistant  Professors 

Janet  J.  Ewald,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  Monica  Green,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Thomas  Robisheaux,  Ph.D.  (Virginia); 
Julius  S.  Scott,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Professors  Emeriti 

Arthur  Ferguson,  Ph.D.  (Cornell);  Joel  G.  Colton,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  John  Hope  Franklin,  Ph.D.  (Harvard), 
James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of History;  Irving  B.  Holley,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Harold  T.  Parker,  Ph.D.  (Chica- 
go); Richard  A.  Preston,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Theodore  Ropp,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Richard  L.  Watson,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 

The  Department  of  History  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees.  Candidates  for  the  A.M.  degree  must  have  a  reading  knowledge  of  at  least  one 
ancient  or  modern  foreign  language  related  to  their  programs  of  study  and  have  completed 
successfully  a  substantial  research  paper,  or  two  seminar  papers,  normally  the  product 
of  a  year's  seminar  or  two  semester  courses.  The  paper(s)  must  be  approved  by  two  readers, 
the  supervising  professor  and  a  second  professor  from  the  graduate  staff.  Students  an- 
ticipating a  May  degree  must  have  their  papers  read  and  approved  by  April  15;  those  an- 
ticipating a  September  degree  must  have  their  papers  read  and  approved  by  August  1. 

Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  prepare  themselves  for  examina- 
tions in  four  fields,  at  least  three  of  which  shall  be  in  history.  The  choice  of  fields  is  deter- 
mined in  consultation  with  the  student's  supervisor  and  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 
The  department  offers  graduate  instruction  in  the  fields  of  Africa,  Afro-American  histo- 
ry, ancient  history,  medieval  and  early  modern  Europe,  modern  Europe,  American  his- 
tory, Britain  and  the  Commonwealth,  Imperial  Russia,  Soviet  Russia,  Latin  America, 
South  Asia,  China,  modern  Japan,  military  history,  history  of  science,  and  history  of  medi- 
cine. The  candidate  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  must  have  a  reading  knowledge  of  two  foreign 
languages  to  be  picked  in  conjunction  with  the  candidate's  supervisor.  In  certain  cases, 
an  alternative  to  the  second  language  may  be  chosen  if  approved  by  both  the  candidate's 
supervisor  and  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  Such  an  alternative  must  take  the  form 
of  successful  completion  of  a  course  or  courses  which  would  appreciably  increase  the 
candidate's  methodological  proficiency;  such  as  a  graduate  course  in  statistics,  archaeol- 
ogy, demography,  numismatics,  cartography,  or  a  summer  training  program  for  devel- 
oping methodological  skills.  A  course  or  courses  in  a  discipline  outside  history- 
anthropology,  literature,  sociology,  political  science,  ecology,  geography,  etc.— will  not 
necessarily  qualify  as  an  alternative  to  a  second  language.  Also,  the  alternative  must  be 
in  addition  to  any  previous  undergraduate  work  in  the  methodology.  Whether  satisfied 
by  two  languages  or  by  one  language  and  an  alternative,  the  requirement  must  be  met 
prior  to  the  preliminary  examination. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

201S.  The  Russian  Intelligentsia  and  the  Origins  of  227-228.  Recent  United  States  History:  Major  Political 

the  Revolution  and  Social  Movements 

202S.  The  Russian  Revolution  231S,  232S.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Spain  and  the 

203.  Topics  in  Modern  World  Environmental  History  Spanish  Empire 

204.  German  Society,  1914-1955  233.  Slave  Resistance  and  Social  Control  in  New  World 
207,  208.  Constitutional  History  of  Britain:  The  Rise  of  Societies 

the  Common  Law  234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of 
215S,  216S.  The  Diplomatic  History  of  the  United  Change  in  the  Third  World 

States  235S.  The  Antebellum  South 

219S,  220S.  History  of  Science  and  Technology  237S.  Europe  in  the  Early  Middle  Ages 

221.  Topics  in  the  Social  and  Economic  History  of  238S.  Europe  in  the  High  Middle  Ages 
Europe,  1200-1700  239S.  History  of  Socialism  and  Communism 

222.  Problems  in  the  Intellectual  History  of  the  241-242.  United  States  Constitutional  History 
European  Renaissance  and  Reformation  243-244.  Marxism  and  History 

225S.  Problems  in  Comparative  Labor  History  245,  246.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  of  China 

226.  Topics  in  the  Labor  History  of  the  United  States       247.  History  of  Modern  India  and  Pakistan,  1707-1857 

57 


248.  History  of  Modern  India  and  Pakistan,  1857  to  279,  280.  Health,  Healing,  and  History 

the  Present  282S.  Canada 

249-250.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  of  the  284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences 

United  States  285S,  286S.  Oral  History 

253S,  254S.  European  Diplomatic  History,  1871-1945  301-302.  Research  Seminar  in  History 

256.  Modern  Literature  and  History  307-308.  Seminar  in  United  States  History 

260.  Fifth  and  Fourth  Century  Greece  312.  Seminar  in  the  Teaching  of  History  in  College 

261.  Alexander  and  the  Hellenistic  World  314.  Historical  and  Social  Science  Methodology 

262.  Problems  in  Soviet  History  351-352.  Colloquia 

263.  The  Roman  Republic  371-372.  Research  Seminars 

264.  The  Roman  Empire  399.  Special  Readings 

265S.  Problems  in  Modern  Latin  American  History  ^  _,  .  ■     T ,        .      ,    ,     . 

267S.  England  in  the  Sixteenth  Century  Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

268S.  England  in  the  Seventeenth  Century  212.  The  American  Indian  in  the  Revolutionary  Era, 
269S-270S.  British  History,  Seventeenth  Century  to  1760-1800 

the  Present  229S,  230S.  Revolution  in  Modern  Europe,  1789-1919 

273S,  274S.  Topics  in  the  History  of  Science  259.  Archaic  Greece 

277S.  The  Coming  of  the  Civil  War  in  the  United  266.  Late  Antiquity 

States,  1820-1861 
278S.  The  Civil  War  in  the  United  States  and  Its 

Aftermath,  1861-1900 


The  Master  of  Arts  Program  in  Humanities 

Professor  Charles  R.  Young  (Cornell),  Director 

The  Master  of  Arts  Program  in  Humanities  is  an  interdepartmental  program  and  is 
tailored  to  the  needs  of  individual  students.  The  candidate  defines  a  theme  and  selects 
appropriate  course  work  with  the  aid  and  approval  of  a  supervising  committee.  Thirty 
units  of  course  work  and  proficiency  in  reading  a  foreign  language  are  required  for  com- 
pletion of  the  program.  The  degree  may  be  earned  with  or  without  a  thesis.  The  candi- 
date who  chooses  not  to  submit  a  thesis  will  submit  instead  at  least  two  substantial  papers 
arising  from  course  work  for  review  by  committee  members,  and  meets  with  them  to  dis- 
cuss his  or  her  program  in  a  final  master's  colloquium. 

The  program  is  open  to  holders  of  undergraduate  degrees  in  any  discipline  who  can 
demonstrate  sufficient  background  in  humanities  to  permit  study  at  the  graduate  level . 
Admission  is  by  regular  application  to  the  Graduate  School .  Students  may  enroll  full  time 
or  part  time  (minimum  of  3  units  per  term) .  Students  considering  entering  the  program 
may  enroll  in  an  appropriate  graduate  course  or  courses  through  the  Office  of  Continu- 
ing Education,  at  the  same  time  making  their  interests  known  to  the  Director  of  the  Hu- 
manities Program. 


The  Master  of  Arts  Program  in  Liberal  Studies 

Diane  Sasson,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill),  Director 

The  Master  of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies  program  allows  individuals  with  a  variety  of 
professional  and  personal  educational  goals  the  flexibility  to  pursue  their  interests  across 
traditional  disciplinary  boundaries.  The  program  is  managed  by  an  interdepartmental 
committee.  Students  study  primarily  on  a  part-time  basis  and  choose  from  an  array  of 
interdisciplinary  courses  developed  specifically  for  this  program.  In  addition  to  those 
courses,  students  may  select  other  graduate-level  courses  that  fit  their  individual  needs 
and  interests. 

The  MALS  program  consists  of  nine  courses  and  a  final  project.  These  courses  are 
offered  during  three  academic  terms  (fall,  spring,  and  summer).  For  more  information 
on  specific  courses  and  other  program  requirements,  a  separate  bulletin  on  the  Master 
of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies  may  be  requested  from  the  program  director  (120  Allen  Build- 
ing, Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706,  684-3222). 

58 


The  Graduate  Program  in  Literature 

Professor  Fredric  Jameson,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Chairman 

Professor  Annabel  Patterson,  Ph.D.  (London),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Faculty 

A.  Leigh  DeNeef,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania  State);  Ariel  Dorfman,  Licenzia  en  Philosophia  (Univ.  of  Chile);  Gusta- 
vo Perez  Firmat,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Stanley  Fish,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Frank  Lentricchia,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Valentin 
Mudimbe,  Ph.D.  (Louvain);  Janice Radway,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  James  Rolleston,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Barbara Herrn- 
stein  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Brandeis);  Phillip  Stewart,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Jean-Jacques  Thomas,  Doctorat  de  3e  Cycle  (Univ. 
of  Paris);  Jane  Tompkins,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 
Resource  Faculty  (All  have  Ph.D.'s—  available  for  advising  and  supervision  of  students) 

Frank  L.  Borchardt,  Peter  Burian,  Alice  Kaplan,  Francis  Newton,  Linda  Orr,  Lee  Patterson,  Clyde  de  Loache 
Ryals,  Marcel  Tetel,  Bruce  Wardropper 

The  Graduate  Program  in  Literature  has  as  its  goals  the  education  of  men  and  wom- 
en who  will  be  fully  qualified  to  teach  in  departments  of  national  literatures  as  well  as  in 
the  humanities  and  other  interdisciplinary  programs.  The  program  is  not  comparatist  in 
the  traditional  sense  but  theoretical  in  focus,  dedicated  to  the  understanding  of  cultural 
history  and  the  reshaping  of  literary  studies  in  the  context  of  contemporary  thought .  The 
program  acknowledges  the  challenges  posed  by  the  emergence  of  non-Western  literatures, 
by  the  increasing  importance  of  oppositional  cultures  within  the  West  (feminism,  Marx- 
ism, discourse  analysis),  by  the  significance  of  new  media  such  as  film,  and  by  the  rela- 
tionship between  verbal  and  nonverbal  arts  such  as  painting  and  music.  The  newly- 
founded  Duke  Center  for  Critical  Theory  supplements  and  enhances  the  goals  for  the 
Graduate  Program  in  Literature  by  annual  conferences,  special  seminars,  and  lectures 
presented  by  international  scholars  and  thinkers.  A  full  descriptive  brochure  is  availa- 
ble from  Professor  A .  Patterson,  Duke  University,  305  Carr  Building,  Durham,  North  Caro- 
lina 27706. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

251.  History  of  Criticism  286.  Topics  in  Legal  Theory 

252.  Criticism  and  Literary  Theory  in  the  Twentieth        287  Problems  in  Narrative  Analysis 

Century  288.  Basic  Issues  in  the  History  of  Literary  Theory 

253.  Philology,  Linguistics,  and  the  Roots  of  289.  Topics  in  Feminist  Theory 
Literature  290.  Topics  in  Psychoanalytic  Criticism 

254.  Introduction  to  Feminism  291.  Topics  in  Popular  Culture  and  the  Media 

280.  Semiotics  for  Literature  292.  Topics  in  Non-Western  Literature  and  Culture 

281 .  Paradigms  of  Modern  Thought  293.  Literature  and  History 

282.  Contemporary  Literary  Theory  300.  Problems  in  the  Theory  of  Value  and  Judgment 

283.  Modernism  391 .  Topics  in  Special  Readings 

284.  The  Intellectual  as  Writer  399.  Independent  Studies 

285.  Literature  and  Ideology 

The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences 

Professor  Joseph  S.  Ramus,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley),  Acting  Director  and  Director  of  Graduate  Student  Affairs 

Professors 

JohnD.  Costlow,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Richard  B.  Forward,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Santa  Barbara);  John  Gutknecht, 
Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  DavidR.  McClay*  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  OrrinPilkeyt 
Ph.D.  (Horida  State);  Richard  B.  Searles*  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley) 

Associate  Professors 

CeliaBonaventura,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  Joseph Bonaventura,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  Thomas C.  Johnson,  Ph.D.  (Califor- 
nia at  San  Diego);  J.  Boiling  Sullivan,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  John  P.  Sutherland,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley) 

Assistant  Professor 

Daniel  Rittschof,  Ph.D.  (Michigan  at  Ann  Arbor) 

Professor  Emeritus 

Cazlyn  Green  Bookhout,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 


*In  residence  during  summer  only, 
tin  residence  during  spring  only. 


59 


Graduate  students  from  any  and  all  academic  disciplines  are  encouraged  to  take 
professional  training  at  the  Marine  Laboratory.  The  program  operates  year-round,  provid- 
ing course  work  in  the  marine  sciences,  an  active  seminar  program,  and  facilities  sup- 
porting dissertation  research.  Resident  graduate  students  represent  the  Departments  of 
Biochemistry,  Botany,  Cell  Biology,  Geology,  and  Zoology,  and  the  School  of  Forestry  and 
Environmental  Studies.  Ordinarily,  dissertation  advisers  are  resident  as  well,  although 
this  need  not  be  the  case.  The  Marine  Laboratory  has  available  several  graduate  student 
instructional  assistantships  and  endowed  fellowships  during  the  academic  year,  including 
summer.  In  addition,  tuition  credits  obtained  from  fellowship  support  may  be  applied 
to  courses  given  both  at  the  Marine  Laboratory  and  the  Durham  campus. 

Persons  interested  in  graduate  work  in  marine  sciences  should  apply  through  one 
of  the  appropriate  departments.  Forms  may  be  obtained  from  the  Graduate  School. 

Applications  for  summer  courses  at  the  laboratory  should  be  addressed  to  the  Ad- 
missions Office,  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516. 
Additional  information  and  the  application  form  are  included  in  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  Univer- 
sity: Marine  Laboratory.  The  application  for  enrollment  in  summer  courses  at  the  labora- 
tory should  be  accompanied  by  transcripts  of  undergraduate  and  graduate  work.  Appli- 
cations should  be  received  as  early  as  possible.  Graduate  students  planning  to  enroll  in 
courses  or  seminars  offered  during  the  fall  or  spring  at  the  Marine  Laboratory  should  noti- 
fy the  Admissions  Office  of  the  Marine  Laboratory  of  such  intent  prior  to  the  beginning 
of  the  respective  semester. 

Students  registering  for  research  should  do  so  under  the  appropriate  departmental 
numbers. 

The  following  courses  are  offered  at  Beaufort.  See  the  Marine  Laboratory  bulletin  for 
the  current  schedule  of  courses. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

203.  Physical  Oceanography 
203L.  Marine  Ecology 
209S.  Marine  Sediments 

209,  210.  Independent  Study 

210.  Individual  Study 
213L.  Behavioral  Ecology 

217L.  Biology  of  Marine  Macrophytes 

218.  Barrier  Island  Ecology 

219L.  Benthic  Marine  Algae 

250L.  Physiology  of  Marine  Animals 

263L.  Tropical  Seaweeds 

274L.  Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology 

278L.  Invertebrate  Developmental  Biology 


295S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology:  Continental 

Margin  Sedimentation 
353,  354.  Research 
359,  360.  Research 

371,  372.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology 
.  Seminar 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

245L.  Macromolecules,  Ecology,  and  Evolution 

247L.  Plant  Ecology 

266S.  Marine  Biochemistry  and  Genetics 

276.  Comparative  and  Evolutionary  Biochemistry 


Mathematics 

Professor  Michael  C.  Reed,  Ph.D.  (Stanford),  Chairman 

Professor  J.  Thomas  Beale,  Ph.D.  (Stanford),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

WilliamK.  Allard,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Robert  L.  Bryant,  Ph.D.  (University  of  North  Carolina),  Arts  and  Sciences 
Professor  of  Mathematics;  Phillip  A.  Griffiths,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  David  G.  Schaeffer,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts 
Inst,  of  Tech.);  Joseph  R.  Schoenfield,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Seth  L.  Warner,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Morris  Weisfeld, 
Ph.D.  (Yale) 

Associate  Professors 

Donald  S.  Burdick,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Richard  E.  Hodel,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Joseph  W.  Kitchen,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Har- 
vard); David  P.  Kraines,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  California  at  Berkeley);  Gregory  F.  Lawler,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Lawrence 
C.  Moore,  Ph.D.  (Cal.  Tech.);  David  R.  Morrison,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  William  L.  Pardon,  Ph.D.  (Princeton); 
Leslie  Saper,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Richard  A.  Scoville,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  David  A.  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Mark  Stem, 
Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Stephanos  Venakides,  Ph.D.  (Courant) 

Assistant  Professors 

Margaret  Cheney,  Ph.D.  (Indiana);  Carl  Gardner,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Harold  E.  Layton, 
Ph.D.  (Duke);  Dana  W.  Nance,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Vassilis  Papanicolaou,  Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Chadmark  L. 
Schoen,  Ph.D.  (Chicago) 


60 


Adjunct  Professor 

Jagdish  Chandra,  Ph.D.  (Rensselaer) 
Visiting  Assistant  Professors 

Heisuke  Hironaka,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Harsh  V.  Pittie,  Ph.D.  (Princeton) 

Graduate  work  in  the  Department  of  Mathematics  is  offered  leading  to  the  A  .M .  and 
Ph.D.  degrees.  Admission  to  these  programs  is  based  on  the  applicant's  undergraduate 
academic  record,  level  of  preparation  for  graduate  study,  the  Graduate  Record  Examina- 
tion, and  letters  of  recommendation. 

All  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  candidates  are  required  to  pass  a  qualifying  examination  after 
completing  their  first  year  of  graduate  study.  The  A.M.  degree  with  a  major  in  mathematics 
is  awarded  upon  completion  of  30  units  of  graded  course  work  and  passing  the  qualify- 
ing examination.  A  thesis  may  be  substituted  for  6  units  of  course  work  only  under  spe- 
cial circumstances. 

Soon  after  the  student  who  is  pursuing  a  Ph.D.  degree  passes  the  qualifying  exami- 
nation, the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  appoints  a  committee  of  two  graduate  faculty 
members  who  determine  the  conditions  to  be  met  by  the  student  before  he  or  she  takes 
the  preliminary  examination.  Normally,  this  committee  forms  the  nucleus  of  the  student's 
advisory  committee.  The  conditions  may  include  a  reading  knowledge  of  one  or  more 
foreign  languages  appropriate  to  the  student's  intended  area  of  specialization,  an  ap- 
propriate level  of  computer  programming  proficiency,  or  specific  course  work. 

Candidacy  for  the  Ph.D.  is  established  by  passing  an  oral  preliminary  examination. 
The  preliminary  examination  is  normally  taken  at  the  beginning  of  the  third  year.  The 
preliminary  examination  is  conducted  by  a  committee  selected  by  the  rules  of  the  Graduate 
School  and  the  department .  The  examination  can,  at  the  student's  option,  consist  of  ques- 
tions based  either  on  the  student's  course  work  at  Duke  or  on  the  specific  area  of  research 
plus  a  minor  subject  selected  by  the  student. 

After  admission  to  candidacy,  the  Ph.D.  degree  is  awarded  on  the  basis  of  the  stu- 
dent's scholarly  ability  as  demonstrated  by  the  dissertation  and  its  defense.  The  disser- 
tation is  the  most  important  requirement  in  the  award  of  the  Ph.D.  degree. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Introduction  to  Algebraic  Structures  1 

201 .  Introduction  to  Algebraic  Structures  II 

203.  Basic  Analysis  I 

204.  Basic  Analysis  II 

205.  Topology 

206.  Differential  Geometry 

221.  Numerical  Analysis  I 

222.  Numerical  Differential  Equations 

223.  Numerical  Linear  Algebra 

230.  Mathematical  Methods  in  Physics  and 
Engineering  I 

231.  Mathematical  Methods  in  Physics  and 
Engineering  II 

233.  Asymptotic  and  Perturbation  Methods 

234.  Mathematics  for  Quantum  Mechanics 

235.  Topics  in  Mathematical  Physics 
238,  239.  Topics  in  Applied  Mathematics 

240.  Applied  Stochastic  Processes 

241.  Linear  Models 

242.  Multivariate  Statistics 

245.  Functional  Analysis  for  Scientific  Computing 

250.  Introductory  Mathematical  Logic 

251.  Set  Theory  I 

252.  Set  Theory  II 

253.  Recursion  Theory 
258,  259.  Topics  in  Logic 

260.  Groups,  Rings,  and  Fields 

261 .  Commutative  Algebra 
268,  269.  Topics  in  Algebra 


271 .  Algebraic  Topology 
273.  Algebraic  Geometry 

275.  Differential  Geometry 

276.  Topics  in  Differential  Geometry 

277.  Topics  in  Algebraic  Geometry 

278.  279.  Topics  in  Topology 

280.  Differential  Analysis 

281.  Real  Analysis  I 

282.  Real  Analysis  II 

283.  Linear  Operators 

284.  Topics  in  Functional  Analysis 

285.  Complex  Analysis 

286.  Topics  in  Complex  Analysis 
288,  289.  Topics  in  Analysis 
290.  Probability 

293,  294.  Topics  in  Probability  Theory 

295.  Fourier  Analysis  and  Distribution 

296.  Ordinary  Differential  Equations 

297.  Partial  Differential  Equations  I 

298.  Partial  Differential  Equations  II 

299.  Topics  in  Partial  Differential  Equations 
378-379.  Current  Research  in  Topology 
388,  389.  Current  Research  in  Analysis 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

358-359.  Current  Research  in  Logic 

368-369.  Current  Research  in  Algebra 

387.  Current  Research  in  Mathematical  Physics 


61 


Program  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies 

Professor  Lee  Patterson,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Chairman 

Professor  Charles  R.  Young,  Ph.D.  (Cornell),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

The  graduate  Program  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  is  an  interdisciplinary 
program  administered  by  the  Duke  University  Center  for  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  In  consultation  with  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  students  in  the  program 
select  courses  in  art,  history,  music,  philosophy,  religion,  language,  and  literature  (clas- 
sical studies,  English,  German,  and  Romance  languages).  The  program  is  described  in 
the  section  on  special  programs;  for  a  description  of  individual  courses  see  the  large  Bulle- 
tin of  Duke  University:  Graduate  School. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

Department  of  Art  and  Art  History 

230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture 
232S.  Romanesque  and  Gothic  Art  and 

Architecture 
234.  Medieval  Architecture 
242S.  Studies  in  Italian  Renaissance  Art 
243S.  Studies  in  Northern  Art 

Department  of  Classical  Studies 
221.  Medieval  Latin 

Department  of  English 

208.  History  of  the  English  Language 

210.  Old  English  Literary  Tradition 

212.  Middle  English  Literature:  1100  to  1500 

221.  Renaissance  Prose  and  Poetry:  1500  to  1660 
225.  Renaissance  Drama:  1500  to  1642 

310.  Studies  in  Old  English  Literature 

312.  Studies  in  Middle  English  Literature 

315.  Studies  in  Chaucer 

321 .  Studies  in  Renaissance  Literature 

324.  Studies  in  Shakespeare 

329.  Studies  in  Milton 

Department  of  Germanic  Languages 
and  Literature 

205,  206.  Middle  High  German 

215S.  Seventeenth-Century  Literature 

216.  History  of  the  German  Language 

217S.  Renaissance  and  Reformation  Literature 

Department  of  History 

207.  Constitutional  History  of  Britain: 
The  Rise  of  the  Common  Law 

222.  Problems  in  the  Intellectual  History  of  the 
European  Renaissance  and  Reformation 

237S.  Europe  in  the  Early  Middle  Ages 
238S.  Europe  in  the  High  Middle  Ages 
267S-268S.  From  Medieval  to  Early  Modern 
England 

Department  of  Music 

211.  Medieval  Notation 

212.  Renaissance  Notation 

222.  Music  in  the  Middle  Ages 

223.  Music  in  the  Renaissance 

317S.  Seminar  in  the  History  of  Music 
341S.  History  of  Music  Theory  to  Rameau 
351S.  Studies  in  Musical  Iconography 
361S.  Music  Organology 


Department  of  Philosophy 

218S.  Medieval  Philosophy 

219S.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Philosophy 

Department  of  Religion 

219.  Augustine 

236.  Luther  and  the  Reformation  in  Germany 

337.  Theology  of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas 

338.  Calvin  and  the  Reformed  Tradition 

339.  The  Radical  Reformation 

Department  of  Romance  Studies 

French 

211.  History  of  the  French  Language 

240.  Old  French  Literature 

248.  French  Literature  of  the  Seventeenth  Century 

325.  French  Prose  of  the  Sixteenth  Century 

326.  Topics  in  Renaissance  Poetry 

391,  392.  French  Seminar  (medieval  and 
Renaissance  topics) 

Italian 

284,  285.  Dante 

Spanish 

210.  History  of  the  Spanish  Language 

251.  The  Origins  of  Spanish  Prose  Fiction 

253.  Cervantes 

254.  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age 

258.  Spanish  Lyric  Poetry  before  1700 
391,  392.  Hispanic  Seminar  (medieval  and 
Renaissance  topics) 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

Classical  Studies  327.  Seminar  in  Byzantine  History 

English  383.  Textual  Criticism 

Religion  206.  Christian  Mysticism  in  the  Middle 

Ages 
Religion  241.  Problems  in  Reformation  Theology 
Religion  251.  The  Counter-Reformation  and  the 

Development  of  Catholic  Dogma 
Religion  334.  Theology  and  Reform  in  the  Later 

Middle  Ages 
Religion  344.  Zwingli  and  the  Origins  of  Reformed 

Theology 


62 


Microbiology  and  Immunology 


Professor  Wolfgang  Karl  Joklik,  D.PhU.  (Univ.  of  Oxford),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 

and  Chairman 

Professor  Hilda  Pope  Willett,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

D.  Bernard  Amos,  M.D.  (Guys  Hospital,  London),  JamesB.  Duke  Professor  of  Immunology;  Deepak  Bastia,  Ph.D. 
(Chicago);  Dani  P.  Bolognesi,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Rebecca  Buckley,  M.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Peter 
Cresswell,  Ph.D.  (University  of  London);  Jack  D.  Keene,  Ph.D.  (Washington  at  Seattle);  David  R.  McClay, 
Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Richard  S.  Metzgar,  Ph.D.  (Buffalo);  Joseph  R.  Nevins,  Ph.D.  (Duke); 
Suydam  Osterhout,  M.D.  (Duke),  Ph.D.  (Rockefeller  University);  Wendell  F.  Rosse,  M.D.  (Chicago);  Hil- 
liard  F.  Seigler,  M.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Frances  E.  Ward,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Robert  W.  Wheat, 
Ph.D.  (Washington) 

Associate  Professors 

DolphO.  Adams,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Ronald  B.  Corley,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Jeffrey  R. 
Dawson,  Ph.D.  (Case  Western  Reserve);  Sharyn  Endow,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Warner  C.  Greene,  M.D.,  Ph.D. 
(Washington);  Barton  F.  Haynes,  M.D.  (Baylor);  Elwood  A.  Linney,  Ph.D.  (California  at  San  Diego);  Tho- 
mas G.  Mitchell,  Ph.D.  (Tulane);  Harvey  J.  Sage,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 

Assistant  Professors 

Yair  Argon,  Ph.D.  (Harvard  Medical  School);  C.  Edward  Buckley  III,  M.D.  (Duke);  Olivera  J.  Finn,  Ph.D. 
(Stanford);  Kenneth  N.  Kreuzer,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Michael  C.  Ostrowski,  Ph.D.  (South  Carolina  at  Colum- 
bia); David  J.  Pickup,  Ph.D.  (National  Institute  of  Medical  Research,  London);  David  S.  Pisetsky,  M.D,  Ph.D. 
(Albert  Einstein) 

Associate  Medical  Research  Professors 

Andrew  E.  Balber,  Ph.D.  (Rockefeller  University);  Sara  E.  Miller,  Ph.D.  (Georgia) 

Assistant  Medical  Research  Professors 

Mary  Vickers  Burdett,  Ph.D.  (Georgetown);  Kay  H.  Singer,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

The  Department  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology  offers  graduate  training  leading 
to  a  Ph .  D.  degree.  It  is  a  participating  department  in  interdisciplinary  University  Programs 
in  Genetics  and  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  and  in  the  Medical  Scientist  Training  Pro- 
gram. Sixty-six  predoctoral  students  and  forty-five  postdoctoral  fellows  are  currently  in 
residence. 

The  curriculum  of  the  graduate  program  is  designed  to  provide  students  with  basic 
training  in  virology,  prokaryotic  and  eukaryotic  molecular  cell  biology,  molecular  genet- 
ics, and  immunology.  This  part  of  the  program,  which  takes  from  eight  to  sixteen  months, 
is  composed  of  formal  course  work  and  laboratory  and  library  research.  Research  train- 
ing is  stressed  throughout  the  program  and  is  available  in  all  of  the  32  well-equipped  re- 
search laboratories  of  the  department.  Expertise  in  a  broad  cross-section  of  molecular 
genetics  and  cell  biology  is  represented,  including  techniques  of  DNA  and  RNA  sequenc- 
ing, genetic  engineering,  and  hybridoma  technology.  Research  programs  are  available 
in  molecular  virology,  viral  oncology,  molecular  cell  biology,  cellular  differentiation  and 
development,  tumor  cell  biology,  cell-surface  immunochemistry,  medical  mycology,  im- 
munogenetics,  tumor  immunology,  molecular  immunology,  and  cellular  immunology. 

Undergraduate  preparation  in  the  biological  and  physical  sciences  and  in  biochemis- 
try is  required.  A  brochure  describing  the  Ph.D.  degree  program,  prerequisites  for  ad- 
mission, financial  support  and  research  in  the  department  may  be  obtained  by  writing 
the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  Box  3020,  Duke  University  Medical  Center,  Durham, 
North  Carolina  27710. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

214.  Fundamentals  of  Electron  Microscopy  291 .  Comprehensive  Immunology 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation        304.  Molecular  Membrane  Biology 

221 .  Medical  Microbiology  310.  Molecular  Development 

234.  Introduction  to  Biostatistical  Methods  323.  Topics  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology 

244.  Principles  of  Immunology  324.  Topics  in  Molecular  Genetics 

246S.  Parasitic  Diseases  325.  Medical  Mycology 

252.  General  Virology  and  Viral  Oncology  330.  Medical  Immunology 

259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Proteins  and  Enzymes  331.1-331.8.  Microbiology  Seminar 

268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids  332.1-332.8.  Immunology  Seminar 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology  336.  Contemporary  Topics  in  Immunogenetics 


63 


Music 

Professor  Alexander  SUbiger,  Ph.D.  (Brandeis),  Chairman 

Professor  Tilman  Seebass,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Basel),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professor 

Peter  Williams,  Ph.D.,  Litt.D.  (Cambridge) 
Associate  Professors 

Stephen  Jaffe,  A.M.  (Pennsylvania);  R.  Larry  Todd,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 
Assistant  Professors 

M.  ElizabethC.  Bartlet,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Bryan  Gilliam,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Paula  Higgins,  Ph.D.  (Princeton); 

Robert  Hill,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professor 

John  Druesedow,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Indiana),  Director  of  Music  Library 

The  Department  of  Music  offers  graduate  programs  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees  in  musicology,  the  A.M.  degree  in  composition  and  the  A.M.  degree  in  perfor- 
mance practice.  The  department  has  traditionally  emphasized  the  study  of  music  within 
the  framework  of  cultural  and  intellectual  history.  To  this  has  been  added  more  recently 
emphasis  on  performance  practice.  In  addition,  there  is  a  strong  interest,  within  both  the 
composition  and  musicology  programs,  in  opera  and  musical  theater.  Students  are  en- 
couraged to  include  work  outside  their  main  area  of  concentration  in  their  degree  pro- 
grams. They  also  may  be  admitted  to  the  Program  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies 
(see  section  on  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies). 

Nondegree  students  and  especially  graduate  students  from  other  departments  may 
be  admitted  to  graduate  courses  by  consent  of  the  instructor,  according  to  their  level  of 
achievement  in  the  proposed  area  of  study.  A  reading  knowledge  of  one  foreign  language 
is  required  for  the  A.M.  in  composition,  musicology,  and  performance  practice;  a  mini- 
mum of  two  languages  are  required  for  the  Ph .  D.  (one  of  which  will  normally  need  to  be 
German).  For  many  dissertation  topics  a  third  language  may  be  required.  A  detailed 
description  of  the  requirements  for  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  is  available  upon  request  from 
the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

201.  Introduction  to  Musicology  295S.  Composition  Seminar 

203.  Proseseminar  in  Performance  Practice  296S.  Analysis  of  Contemporary  Music 

211,  212.  Notation  297,  298,  299.  Composition 

213.  Theories  and  Notation  of  Contemporary  Music        317S.  Seminar  in  the  History  of  Music 

215.  Music  Analysis  318S.  Seminar  in  Performance  Practice 

216.  Analysis  of  Twentieth-Century  Music  331,  332,  333.  Independent  Study  in  Performance 

222.  Music  in  the  Middle  Ages  Practice  and  Interpretation 

223.  Music  in  the  Renaissance  341S.  History  of  Music  Theory  to  Rameau 

224.  Music  in  the  Baroque  Era  351S.  Studies  in  Musical  Iconography 

225.  Music  in  the  Classic  Era  361S.  Musical  Organology 

226.  Music  in  the  Nineteenth  Century  382S.  Studies  in  Ethnomusicology 

227.  Music  in  the  Twentieth  Century  390.  Independent  Study 
236.  Nineteenth-century  Piano  Music 


Neurobiology 


Professor  William  C.  Hall,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Interim  Chairman 

Professor  Sidney  A.  Simon,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Mohamed  B.  Abou-Donia,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  James  N.  Davis,  M.D  (Cornell);  Irving  T.  Diamond, 
Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  John  W  Moore,  Ph.D.  (Virginia);  J.  David  Robertson,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  M.D.  (Mas- 
sachusetts Institute  of  Technology);  Allen  D.  Roses,  M.D.  (Pennsylvania);  George  G.  Somjen,  M.D.  (Am- 
sterdam), Ph.D.  (New  Zealand);  John  Staddon,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 
Associate  Professors 

Peter B.  Bennett,  Ph.D.,  M.D.  (Southampton);  NeUB.  Cant,  Ph.D.  (Ann  Arbor);  Joseph M.  Corless,  M.D., 
Ph.D.  (Duke);  RobertP.  Erickson,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  J.  Victor  Nadler,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  MyronL.  Wolbarsht,  Ph.D. 
(Johns  Hopkins) 


64 


Assistant  Professors 

Robert  R.  H.  Anholt,  Ph.D.  (California  at  San  Diego);  Barbara  J.  Crain,  M.D,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  David  Fitzpatrick, 

Ph.D.  (Duke);  Darrell  V.  Lewis,  M.D.  (Minnesota) 
Professor  Emeritus 

John  W.  Everett,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 
Associate  Medical  Research  Professors 

John.  H.  Casseday,  Ph.D.  (Indiana  at  Bloomington);  Michael  L.  Hines,  Ph.D.  (Chicago) 
Assistant  Medical  Research  Professors 

Peter  G.  Aitken,  Ph.D.  (Connecticut);  Gillian  Einstein,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania  at  Philadelphia);  Pedro  Labarca, 

Ph.D.  (Brandeis);  Denis  Raczkowski,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professors 

Thomas  W.  Anderson,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Virgil  Holland,  Ph.D.  (South  Carolina  at  Columbia);  Chia-Sheng  Lin, 

Ph.D.  (Vanderbilt) 

Neurobiology  is  concerned  with  accounting  for  behavior  in  terms  of  the  form,  func- 
tion, evolution,  and  development  of  structures  in  nervous  systems.  A  wide  range  of  tools 
and  approaches  are  used  in  neuroscience  research.  These  include:  light  and  electron 
microscopy  to  reveal  neuron  and  supporting  cell  shapes  and  connections  as  well  as  to  visual- 
ize labeled  antibodies  to  identify  the  constituents  of  neural  tissue;  electrical  recording  to 
measure  electrical  activity  from  individual  cells  and  collections  of  cells  at  macroscopic  and 
microscopic  levels  (these  measurements  include  voltage  and  patch  clamping  of  individual 
cells);  optical  recording  ranging  from  noninvasive  studies  of  intracellular  messengers  to 
detecting  impulses  in  spatially  distributed  cells;  biochemical  techniques  to  identify  the  chem- 
ical machinery  involved  in  signal  transduction  and  cell  regulation;  molecular  biology  to  de- 
termine the  effects  of  perturbations  of  molecular  constituents  on  development  and  mac- 
romolecule  function;  and  computer  simulations  to  understand  functioning  of  neurons  and 
neuron  networks. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

202.  Basic  Neurobiology  302.  Anatomy  and  Physiology  of  the  Central  Nervous 

208.  Cellular  Physiology  of  Nervous  Tissue  I  System 

209.  Cellular  Physiology  of  Nervous  Tissue  II  310.  Frontiers  in  Neurobiology 

210.  Individual  Study  360.  Neuropharmacology 
222.  Behavioral  and  Neural  Modeling  364.  Neurotoxicology 
225.  Neurobiology  of  Sensory  Systems  370.  Neurobiology  I 

266S.  Comparative  Neurobiology  372.  Research  in  Neurobiology 
280.  Student  Seminar 


Pathology 


Professor  Robert  B.  Jennings,  M.D.  (Northwestern),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Pathology  and  Chairman 
Professor  DarellD.  Bigner,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Edwin  L.,  Jr.  and  Lucille  Finch  Jones  Cancer  Research  Pmfessor  of  Pathology 
and  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Dolph  O.  Adams,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Sandra  H.  Bigner,  M.D.  (Tennessee);  Ed- 
ward H.  Bossen,  M.D.  (Duke);  William D.  Bradford,  M.D.  (Western Reserve);  Peter C.  Burger,  M.D.  (North- 
western); Bernard  F.  Fetter,  M.D.  (Duke);  Doyle  G.  Graham,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Donald  B.  Hackel,  M.D. 
(Harvard);  William  W.  Johnston,  M.D.  (Duke);  Gordon  K.  Klintworth,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Witwatersrand); 
John  A.  Koepke,  M.D.  (Wisconsin  at  Madison);  George  Michalopoulos,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  Salva- 
tore  V.  Pizzo,  M.D,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Philip  Pratt,  M.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  John  D.  Shelburne,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke); 
Joachim  R.  Sommer,  M.D.  (Munich);  F.  Stephen  Vogel,  M.D.  (Western  Reserve);  Benjamin  Wittels,  M.D 
(Minnesota) 

Associate  Professors 

Jane  G.  Elchlepp,  M.D.  (Iowa),  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Raymond  E.  Ideker,  M.D.  (Tennessee);  Kenneth  Scott 
McCarty,  Jr.,  M.D,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Keith  Arnold  Reimer,  M.D,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern);  Alfred  P.  Sanfilippo, 
M.D,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  John  D.  Shelburne,  M.D.,  Ph.D  (Duke);  Peter  Zwadyk,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Iowa) 

Assistant  Professors 

John  Lloyd  Abernethy,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  James  D.  Crapo,  M.D.  (Rochester);  Randy  L.  Jirtle,  Ph.D.  (Wiscon- 
sin); Stanley  C.  Schold,  Jr.,  M.D.  (Arizona);  Michael  R.  Zalutsky,  Ph.D.  (Washington  University) 

Associate  Medical  Research  Professor 

Carol  J.  Wikstrand,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill) 

Assistant  Clinical  Professor 

Robin  T.  Vollmer,  M.D.  (Duke) 

65 


Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

James  A.  Swenberg,  D.V.M.  (Minnesota),  Ph.D.  (Ohio  State) 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professor 

Arnold  R.  Brody,  Ph.D.  (Colorado  State) 

The  Department  of  Pathology  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees  with  areas  of  specialization  such  as  subcellular  and  molecular  pathology.  Course 
work  is  designed  to  give  a  broad  background  in  classical  and  modern  pathology  with  em- 
phasis on  the  application  of  modern  research  techniques.  Students  will  be  required  to 
take  such  courses  as  are  necessary  to  obtain  a  broad  foundation,  as  well  as  courses  ap- 
plicable to  areas  of  speciality  and  research.  Further  information  including  brochures  giving 
details  of  departmental  facilities,  staff,  trainee  stipends,  and  the  M.D.-Ph.D.  program  are 
available  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 


367.  Special  Topics  in  Pathology 

369.  Ophthalmic  Pathology 

370.  Developmental  Pathology  and  Teratology 
374.  Pulmonary  Pathology  and  Postmortem 

Pathophysiology 
377.  Pathology  of  the  Kidney 

380.  Diagnostic  Immunology 

381.  Cancer  Biology 

382.  General  Pathology  for  Toxicologists 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

360.  Cytochemistry 


Courses  of  Instruction 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of 
Differentiation 

250.  General  Pathology 

251.  Laboratory  Course  in  General  Pathology 
258.  Cellular  and  Subcellular  Pathology 
275.  Fundamentals  of  Electron  Microscopy  and 

Biological  Microanalysis 
325.  Cardiovascular  Pathology 
353.  Advanced  Neuropathology 
355.  Graduate  Seminar  in  Pathology 
357.  Research  in  Pathology 
361,  362.  Autopsy  Pathology 
364.  Systemic  Pathology 

Pharmacology 

Professor  Saul  M.  Schanberg,  Ph.D.,  M.D.  (Yale),  Acting  Chairman 
Professor  Elliott  Mills,  Ph.D.  (Columbia),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

MohamedBahie  Abou-Donia,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley );  Everett  H.  Ellinwood,  Jr.,  M.D.  (North  Caro- 
lina at  Chapel  Hill);  Norman  Kirshner,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania  State);  Leon  Lack,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  J.  Victor 
Nadler,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Athos  Ottolenghi,  M.D.  (Univ.  of  Pavia);  Theodore  A.  Slotkin,  Ph.D.  (Rochester);  Harold 
C.  Strauss,  M.D  (McGUl);  Walter  D.  Watkins,  Ph.D.  (Michigan),  M.D.  (Colorado);  Pelham  Wilder,  Jr.,  Ph.D. 
(Harvard) 

Associate  Professors 

James  N.  Davis,  M.D.  (Cornell);  Cynthia  Moreton  Kuhn,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  James  O.  McNamara,  M.D.  (Michi- 
gan); CharlesB.  Nemeroff,  Ph.D.,  M.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  A.  Richard  Whorton,  Ph.D.  (Van- 
derbilt) 

Assistant  Professors 

Clinton  Donald  Kilts,  Ph.D.  (Michigan  State);  Rochelle  D.  Schwartz,  Ph.D.  (Georgetown) 

Professor  Emeritus 

Frederick  Bernheim,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Cambridge),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Pharmacology 

Medical  Research  Professor 

Gertrude  B.  Elion,  D.M.Sc.  (Brown) 

Associate  Medical  Research  Professor 
Wilkie  A.  Wilson,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Assistant  Medical  Research  Professors 

Jorge  V.  Bartolome,  Ph.D.  (Chile);  Daniel  M.  Lapadula,  Ph.D.  (New  York  University);  Frederic  J.  Seidler, 
Ph.D.  (Duke);  Robert  L.  Wolpert,  Ph.D.  (Princeton) 

The  Department  of  Pharmacology  offers  a  graduate  program  which  leads  to  the  Ph .  D. 
degree.  Training  is  available  in  the  following  areas:  neuropharmacology,  developmen- 
tal, toxicological,  biochemical,  cardiovascular,  molecular,  and  behavioral  pharmacology. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Pharmacology:  Mode  Action  of  Drugs 

210,  211.  Individual  Study  and  Research 

219.  Tutorial  in  Pharmacology 

233.  Principles  of  Pharmacology  and  Toxicology  I 


254.  Mammalian  Toxicology 
280.  Student  Seminar  in  Pharmacology 
331.  Laboratory  Methods  in  Pharmacology 
347,  348.  Seminar  in  Toxicology 


66 


360.  Neuropharmacology  372.  Research  in  Pharmacology 

364.  Neurotoxicology 


Philosophy 


Professor  David  H.  Sanford,  Ph.D.  (Cornell),  Chairman 

Associate  Professor  Robert  N.  Brandon,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Martin  P.  Golding,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Edward  P.  Mahoney,  Ph.D.  (Columbia) 

Associate  Professor 

Carl  J.  Posy,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 

Assistant  Professors 

Michael  T.  Ferejohn,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Irvine);  MarciaLind,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technolo- 
gy); Marshall  R.  Roderick,  Ph.D.  (Texas  at  Austin) 

Professors  Emeriti 

William  Bernard  Peach,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Paul  Welsh,  Ph.D.  (Cornell) 

The  Department  of  Philosophy  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A .  M .  and  Ph .  D. 
degrees.  Tutorial  work  complements  formal  instruction.  Students  may,  after  taking  a 
balanced  program,  specialize  in  any  of  the  following  fields :  the  history  of  philosophy,  logic, 
philosophy  of  science,  epistemology,  metaphysics,  philosophy  of  mind,  philosophical 
analysis,  ethics,  aesthetics,  political  philosophy,  philosophy  of  law,  philosophy  of  medi- 
cine, and  philosophy  of  religion. 

Individual  programs  of  study  are  developed  for  each  student.  Prior  to  being  admit- 
ted to  candidacy  for  the  Ph .  D.  degree,  the  student  must  demonstrate  a  competence  in  one 
foreign  language  and  must  successfully  complete  a  series  of  essays  and  examinations 
covering  the  following:  logic  and  formal  philosophy;  value  theory;  metaphysics,  episte- 
mology, and  philosophy  of  science;  and  the  history  of  philosophy.  In  these  exercises  stu- 
dents are  expected  to  combine  factual  knowledge  with  critical  understanding. 

Work  in  a  minor  or  related  field,  not  necessarily  confined  to  any  one  department,  is 
encouraged  but  not  required .  A  minor  normally  includes  6  units  for  the  A.M.  or  the  Ph  .D. 
degree  and  may  include  more  as  a  student's  program  requires  or  permits. 

A  student  who  meets  the  general  requirements  of  the  Graduate  School  may  earn  the 
A.M.  degree  in  philosophy  by  passing  an  oral  master's  examination.  This  examination, 
which  can  be  the  defense  of  either  a  master's  thesis  or  an  alternative  academic  exercise 
approved  by  the  department  and  the  student's  committee,  is  normally  given  in  the  stu- 
dent's fourth  term  of  full-time  registration.  The  examination  can  be  given  earlier  in  two 
special  circumstances: 

1.  A  student  with  a  strong  undergraduate  background  in  philosophy  who  satisfies 
the  department  of  his  or  her  qualifications  by  submitting  several  samples  of  written  work 
before  beginning  the  program  may  be  admitted  to  the  master's  program  with  the  under- 
standing that  the  master's  examination  can  be  given  in  the  second  or  third  term  of  full- 
time  registration. 

2.Astudentwho  combines  the  A.M.  program  in  philosophy  with  another  advanced 
degree  program,  such  as  the  programs  for  the  J.  D.,  theM.D.,  or  the  Ph.D.  in  another  field, 
will  register  as  a  full-time  graduate  student  of  philosophy  for  only  two  terms,  the  mini- 
mum registration  that  meets  the  general  requirements  of  the  Graduate  School  for  the  A.M. 
degree.  These  two  terms  of  full-time  registration  need  not  be  consecutive,  and  their  po- 
sition in  the  student's  overall  program  is  determined  in  individual  cases.  A  student  in  a 
combined  program  will  normally  do  some  work  in  philosophy  while  registered  in  the  stu- 
dent's primary  program  and  do  some  work  in  the  primary  field  while  registered  in  phi- 
losophy. The  master's  examination  can  be  given  in  the  second  term  of  full-time  registra- 
tion as  a  philosophy  graduate  student  or  in  a  later  term  when  the  student  is  registered 
in  the  primary  program. 

A  student  in  the  philosophy  Ph .  D.  program  who  meets  the  general  requirements  of 
the  Graduate  School  for  the  A.M.  degree  may  earn  this  degree  by  passing  the  prelimi- 
nary for  the  Ph.D.  degree. 

67 


A  reading  knowledge  of  at  least  one  foreign  language,  ancient  or  modern,  is  required 
for  the  Ph.D.  degree.  Students  may  not  take  their  preliminary  examinations  until  they 
have  demonstrated  this  ability.  More  than  one  language  may  be  required  where  this  is 
judged  appropriate  to  the  research  demanded  by  the  candidate's  dissertation. 


234S.  Problems  in  the  Philosophy  of  Biology 

235S.  Nineteenth-Century  German  Philosophy 

250S.  Topics  in  Formal  Philosophy 

251S.  Epistemology 

252S.  Metaphysics 

253S.  Philosophy  of  Mind 

254S.  Philosophy  of  Religion 

291S,  292S.  Special  Fields  of  Philosophy 

300.  Problems  in  the  Theory  of  Value  and  Judgment 

311.  Philosophy  and  Medicine 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

202S.  Aesthetics:  The  Philosophy  of  Art 

232S.  Recent  Continental  Philosophy 

331,  332.  Seminar  in  Special  Fields  of  Philosophy 


Courses  of  Instruction 

203S.  Contemporary  Ethical  Theories 

204S.  Philosophy  of  Law 

205S.  Topics  in  Philosophy  of  History 

206S.  Responsibility 

208S.  Political  Values 

211S.  Plato 

217S.  Aristotle 

218S.  Medieval  Philosophy 

219S.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Philosophy 

225S.  British  Empiricism 

227S.  Continental  Rationalism 

228S.  Recent  and  Contemporary  Philosophy 

230S.  The  Meaning  of  Religious  Language 

231S.  Kant's  Critique  of  Pure  Reason 

233S.  Methodology  of  the  Empirical  Sciences 

Physical  Therapy 

Professor  Robert  C.  Bartlert,  M.A.  (New  York  Univ.),  Chairman 

Associate  Professor  Eleanor  F.  Branch,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Associate  Professors 

Terry  R.  Malone,  Ed.D  (Duke);  Elia  E.  Villanueva,  A.M.  (Duke) 
Assistant  Professors 

Pamela  W.  Duncan,  M.A.C.T.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Janet  L.  Gwyer,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel 

Hill);  Grace  C.  Horton,  B.S.  (Albright) 
Assistant  Clinical  Professor 

Mary  Ellen  Riordan,  M.S.  (Wisconsin) 
Clinical  Associates 

Julie  M.  Chandler,  M.S.  (Duke);  Rebecca  H.  Crouch,  M.S.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill);  Daniel  V.  Dore, 

M.P.A.  (Maine);  Linda  M.  Lawrence,  B.S.  (SUNY  at  Buffalo) 

The  Department  of  Physical  Therapy  offers  an  entry  level  professional  program  lead- 
ing to  the  M.S.  degree.  To  be  eligible  for  admission  to  the  program,  applicants  must  have 
obtained  a  baccalaureate  degree  and  have  a  background  in  the  basic  sciences  and  social 
sciences,  including  course  work  in  biology,  chemistry,  physics,  and  psychology. 

The  program  is  designed  to  provide  for  integration  of  classroom  knowledge  and  clin- 
ical learning  experiences  essential  for  the  competent  practice  of  physical  therapy.  In  view 
of  this  integrated  curriculum,  failure  in  a  major  course  within  a  semester  would  prevent 
the  student  from  continuing  in  the  program.  Major  courses  are  all  courses  offered  by  the 
Department  of  Physical  Therapy  as  well  as  required  courses  offered  by  the  Department 
of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  and  the  Department  of  Neurobiology.  A  grade 
of  F  (or  noncredit  in  the  case  of  Physical  Therapy  342, 343,  and  344)  in  any  of  these  courses 
will  occasion  withdrawal  from  the  program.  Program  requirements  also  include  a  com- 
prehensive examination,  at  the  completion  of  the  curriculum,  and  a  research  project.  Fur- 
ther information  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  Department 
of  Physical  Therapy,  Box  3965,  Duke  University  Medical  Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina 
27710. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

210.  Independent  Study 

301.  Introduction  to  Scientific  Inquiry 

303.  Research 

313.  Physical  Agents 

314.  Electrotherapy  and  Electrodiagnosis 
317.  Kinesiology 


318.  Arthrology  and  Pathokinesiology 

319.  Introduction  to  Evaluation  and  Patient  Care 

320.  Evaluation  and  Therapeutic  Procedures  I 

321.  Evaluation  and  Therapeutic  Procedures  II 

322.  Evaluation  and  Therapeutic  Procedures  HI 


68 


332.  Physical  Therapy  and  Health  Services: 
Administration  and  Issues 

333.  Human  Development:  Pediatrics/Geriatrics 

334.  Introductory  Pathology 

335.  Orthopedics 

336.  Medical  Sciences 

340.  Special  Topics  in  Physical  Therapy 
342.  Directed  Clinical  Experience  in  Physical 
Therapy  I 


343.  Directed  Clinical  Experience  in  Physical  Therapy  II 

344.  Directed  Clinical  Experience  in  Physical  Therapy  III 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

302.  Research 

304.  Seminar  in  Applied  Neurophysiology 

324.  Prosthetics  and  Orthotics 


Phy: 


S1CS 

Professor  Lawrence  E.  Evans,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins),  Chairman 
Professor  Alfred  T.  Goshaw,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

L.  C.  Biedenharn,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Edward  G.  Bilpuch,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at 
Chapel  Hill);  Frank  C.  DeLucia,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Lloyd  Fortney,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  Moo-Young  Han,  Ph.D. 
(Rochester);  Eric  Herbst,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  John  M.  J.  Madey,  Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Johannes  Horst  Max  Mey- 
er, Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Geneva);  N.  Russell  Roberson,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  Hugh  G.  Robinson,  Ph.D.  (Duke); 
William D.  Walker,  Ph.D.,  (Cornell);  Richard  L.  Walter,  Ph.D.  (Notre  Dame);  Henry  R.  WeUer,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Associate  Professors 

Robert  P.  Behringer,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Henry  S.  Greenside,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Richard  G.  Palmer,  Ph.D.  (Cam- 
bridge); John  Thomas,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.) 

Assistant  Professors 

Calvin  R.  Howell,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Seog  Hwan  Oh,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  Stephen  W  Teits- 
worth  (Harvard) 

Professors  Emeriti 

Henry  A.  Fairbank,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Harold  W.  Lewis,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Adjunct  Professors 

Mikael  Ciftan,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  B.D.  Guenther,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Missouri);  G.  Allan  Johnson  (Duke); 
Fearghus  OFoghludha,  Ph.D.  (National  Univ.  of  Ireland);  Herman  R.  Robl,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Vienna);  Michael 
A.  Stroscio  (Yale) 

The  Department  of  Physics  offers  graduate  work  for  students  wishing  to  earn  the  A.M. 
or  Ph.D.  degree.  In  addition  to  a  balanced  program  of  basic  graduate  courses,  thedepart- 
ment  offers  specialized  courses  and  seminars  in  several  fields  in  which  research  is  being 
done  by  faculty  and  staff. 

With  the  help  of  faculty  advisers,  students  select  a  course  program  to  fit  their  needs, 
including  work  in  a  related  field,  usually  mathematics  or  chemistry.  Students  are  en- 
couraged to  begin  research  work  early  in  their  careers. 

Courses  of  Instruction 


211.  Modern  Physics 

213.  Introduction  to  Nonlinear  Dynamics 

214.  Introduction  to  Solid-State  Physics 

215.  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics 

217S,  218S.  Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  and  Seminar 
220.  Electronics 

240.  Computer  Applications  to  Physical  Measurement 
244.  Nuclear  and  Particle  Physics 

302.  Advanced  Mechanics 

303.  Statistical  Mechanics 

304.  Advanced  Topics  in  Statistical  Mechanics* 

305.  Introduction  to  Nuclear  Physics 

308.  Introduction  to  High-Energy  Physics 

309.  Solid-State  Physics  I 

316.  Principles  of  Quantum  Theory 

317.  Intermediate  Quantum  Theory 
318-319.  Electromagnetic  Field  Theory 
331 .  Quantum  Electronics 

Political  Science 

Professor  Allan  Kornberg,  Ph.D.  (Michigan),  Chairman 


333.  Electronic  Properties  of  Submicron  Solid 
State  Devices 

334.  Atomic  Physics  and  Spectroscopy 

335.  Molecular  Spectroscopy 

341.  Advanced  Topics  in  Quantum  Theory 

345.  Advanced  High  Energy  Physics 
351,  352.  Seminar 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

306.  Low  Temperature  Physics 

310.  Solid-State  Physics  II 

312.  Phase  Transitions  and  Critical  Phenomena 

330.  Nuclear  Structure  Theory 

342.  Theory  of  Elementary  Particles 

343.  Nuclear  Physics 

344.  Advanced  Nuclear  Physics 

346.  Topics  in  Theoretical  Physics 

397,  398.  Low  Temperature  and  Solid-State  Seminar 


"Offered  on  demand. 


69 


Associate  Professor  Peter  Lange,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

John  Aldrich,  Ph.D.  (Rochester);  William  Louis  Ascher,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  James  D.  Barber,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  James 
B.  DukeProfessorofPoliticalScience;RobertBates,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.),  Luce  Professor  of  Politi- 
cal Economy;  Ralph  Braibanti,  Ph.D.  (Syracuse),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Political  Science;  Peter  G.  Fish,  Ph.D. 
(Johns  Hopkins);  Ole  R.  Holsri,  Ph.D.  (Stanford),  George  V.  Allen  Professor  of  Political  Science;  Donald  L. 
Horowitz,  LL.M.,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Jerry  F.  Hough,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Political  Science; 
Richard  H.  Leach,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  David  L.  Paletz,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles);  Thomas  A.  Spra- 
gens,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

Associate  Professors 

Albert  FJdridge,  Ph.D.  (Kentucky);  Sheridan  Johns  HI,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Margaret  A.  McKean,  Ph.D.  (Califor- 
nia at  Berkeley) 

Assistant  Professors 

William  Bianco,  Ph.D.  (Rochester);  DavidT.  Canon,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota);  Romand  Coles,  Ph.D.  (University 
of  Massachusetts);  Robert  M.  Entman,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Michael  A.  Gillespie,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Ruth  Grant,  Ph.D. 
(Chicago);  Joseph  M.  Grieco,  Ph.D.  (Cornell);  Herbert  P.  Kitschelt,  Ph.D.  (Bielefeld,  West  Germany);  Timothy 
J.  Lomperis,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Emerson  M.  S.  Niou,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Texas  at  Austin);  Darryl  Lamont  Roberts, 
Ph.D.  (Cornell);  Steven  Rathgeb  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.) 

Professors  Emeriti 

M.  Margaret  Ball,  Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Frederic  N.  Cleaveland,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Robert  Taylor  Cole,  Ph.D. 
(Harvard);  Kazimierz  Grzybowski,  S.J.D.  (Harvard);  Hugh  M.  Hall,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  John  Hamilton  Hal- 
lowell,  Ph.D.  (Princeton) 

Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

JeanF.  CBarr,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern) 

The  Department  of  Political  Science  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees.  Before  being  admitted  to  candidacy  for  the  Ph.D.  degree,  an  applicant  must 
have  qualified  for  the  A.M.  degree. 

Instruction  is  designed  to  prepare  the  student  for  teaching  and  research,  for  govern- 
ment service,  and  for  other  work  related  to  public  affairs.  Before  undertaking  graduate 
study  in  political  science,  a  student  is  ordinarily  expected  to  have  completed  at  least  12 
semester  hours  of  course  work  in  political  science.  Instruction  is  currently  offered  in  the 
following  fields:  American  government  and  politics,  comparative  government  and  pol- 
itics, political  theory,  and  international  relations. 

The  candidate  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in  political  science  must  take 
at  least  sixteen  courses  in  all,  including  twelve  in  the  department,  and  demonstrate  com- 
petence in  at  least  two  general  fields  of  the  discipline  as  well  as  in  a  third  general  field  or 
in  a  specialized  subfield  or  in  a  field  external  to  the  department.  The  candidate  must  also 
demonstrate  a  satisfactory  knowledge  of  statistical  techniques  and/or  one  or  more  for- 
eign languages. 

The  terminal  degree  of  Master  of  Arts,  for  those  who  do  not  intend  to  continue  with 
doctoral  studies,  is  awarded  following  successful  completion  of:  (1)  eight  one-semester 
courses  of  3  units  each,  at  least  half  of  which  must  be  in  political  science;  and  (2)  either 
the  A.M.  thesis  or  two  seminar-length  research  papers  done  for  Duke  courses  with  a  grade 
of  C+  or  better.  Whichever  of  these  options  is  selected,  the  student  will  be  required  to  pass 
an  oral  exam.  In  addition,  candidates  for  the  A.M.  degree  must  demonstrate  competence 
in  one  foreign  language  or  in  statistics. 

Further  details  on  the  graduate  program  in  political  science,  the  departmental  facili- 
ties, the  staff,  and  available  financial  aid  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies,  Department  of  Political  Science. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

201S.  Problems  in  International  Security  213S.  Theories  of  International  Political  Economy 

203S.  Issues  and  Problems  in  Politics  and  the  Media  215S.  Philosophical  Bases  of  Political  Economy  and 
204S.  Ethics  in  Political  Life  Society 

207S.  American  Constitutional  Interpretation  216S.  Evolution  of  European  Marxism 

208S.  Analyzing  the  News  218S,  219S.  Political  Thought  in  the  United  States 

209.  Problems  in  State  Government  and  Politics  220S.  Problems  in  International  Politics 

21  IS.  Current  Problems  and  Issues  in  Japanese  Politics  221S.  International  Institutions  and  the  World  Political 
212S.  Domestic  Structures  and  Foreign  Policies  of  Economy 

Advanced  Democratic  States  222.  Seminar:  Modern  Political  Classics 

70 


223.  Ancient  Political  Philosophy 

224S.  Modern  Political  Theory 

225.  Topics  in  Comparative  Government  and  Politics: 

Western  Europe 
226S.  Theories  of  International  Relations 
228S.  Nineteenth-  and  Twentieth-Century  Political 

Philosophy 
229S.  Contemporary  Theory  of  Liberal  Democracy 

230.  Introduction  to  Positive  Political  Theory 

231 .  Crisis,  Choice,  and  Change  in  Advanced 
Democratic  States 

232.  Political  Economy:  Theory  and  Applications 
233S.  Quantitative  Political  Analysis  II 
234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of 

Change  in  the  Third  World 
235S.  Comparative  Development  of  Islam 
236.  Statistical  Analysis 
237S.  Comparative  Public  Policy 
240.  American  Political  Behavior 
242S.  Comparative  Law  and  Policy:  Ethnic  Group 

Relations 
243S.  Political  Applications  of  Game  Theory 
245.  Ethics  and  Policy-Making 
246S.  Political  Hypocrisy  and  Idealism 

248.  The  Politics  of  the  Policy  Process 

249.  Comparative  International  Development  and 
Technology  Flow 

251S.  The  American  Presidency 

253S.  Comparative  Government  and  the  Study  of 

Latin  America 
255.  Political  Sociology 

256S.  Arms  Control  and  National  Security  Policy 
259S.  Low  Intensity  Conflict  and  the  Lessons  of 

Viet  Nam 
260S.  The  Tradition  of  Political  Inquiry 
261 .  Politics  and  the  Future 
262S.  International  Communism 
263S.  Methods  of  Political  Science 
264S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences 

Related  Course  Work  in  the  School  of  Law 

There  may  be  graduate  credit  for  course  work  completed  in  the  Duke  University 
School  of  Law,  under  regulations  referred  to  in  the  larger  Graduate  School  bulletin  (see 
the  section  on  academic  regulations  in  the  chapter  on  "Regulations"  in  that  bulletin). 

Psychology 

Professor  Robert  P.  Erickson,  Ph.D.  (Brown),  Chairman 

Professor  Lynn  Hasher,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

IrvingE.  Alexander,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Robert  C.  Carson,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern);  John  D.  Coie,  Ph.D.  (Califor- 
nia at  Berkeley);  Philip  R .  Costanzo,  Ph .  D.  (Florida);  Irving  T.  Diamond,  Ph .  D.  (Chicago),  James  B.  Duke  Professor 
of  Psychology;  Carl  J.  Erickson,  Ph.D.  (Rutgers);  Warren  G.  Hall,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  Peter  C.  Holland, 
Ph.D.  (Yale);  Martin  Lakin,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Gregory  R.  Lockhead,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins);  David C.  Rubin, 
Ph.D.  (Harvard);  JohnE.R.Staddon,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  famesB.  DukeProfessorofPsychology;Mici\ae\  A.  Wallach, 
Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Cliff  W.  Wing,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Tulane) 

Associate  Professors 

Ruth  S.  Day,  Ph.D.  (Stanford);  Carol  O.  Eckerman,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Martha  Putallaz,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Susan 
Roth,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern) 

Assistant  Professor 

Irwin  Kremen,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 

Professors  Emeriti 

Lloyd  J.  Borstelmann,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley);  Gregory  A.  Kimble,  Ph.D.  (Iowa);  Harold  Schiffman, 
Ph.D.  (Princeton) 


267S.  Policy  Making  in  International  Organizations 

270S.  Fundamentals  of  Political  Economy 

275.  The  American  Party  System 

277.  Comparative  Party  Politics 

279S.  Political  Protest  and  Collective  Mobilization 

282S.  Canada 

283S.  Congressional  Policy  Making 

284S.  Public  Policy  Process  in  Developing  Countries 

286S.  Judicial  Administration 

293.  Federalism 

299.  Special  Topics  in  Government  and  Politics 

303.  Seminar  on  Statistics 

305.  Seminar  in  U.S.  Foreign  Policy 

306.  Political  Development  of  the  U.S.  Fourth  Circuit 
Courts 

308.  Individual  Research 

309.  Seminar  in  International  Relations 

321.  Seminar  in  Political  Theory 

322.  Topics  in  Early  Modern  Political  Thought 

324.  Seminar  in  Comparative  Politics  (A) 

325.  Seminar  in  Comparative  Politics  (B) 

326.  Research  Seminar  in  Comparative  Government 
and  Politics 

327.  Comparative  Political  Behavior 

332.  Seminar  on  Political  Economy:  Micro  Level 

333.  Seminar  on  Political  Economy:  Macro  Level 
340.  Seminar  in  American  Politics  and  Institutions 
381.  Research  Seminar  in  Latin  American  Government 

and  Politics 
390.  Research  Seminar  in  International  Relations 
397,  398.  Selected  Topics  in  Government  and  Politics 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

214S.  The  Politics  of  Scarcity 

280S.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics: 

Sub-Saharan  Africa 
360.  Seminar  in  Government  and  Politics  in  the 

Soviet  Union 


71 


Adjunct  Professors 

W.  Edward  Craighead,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Illinois-  Urbana);  Herbert  F.  Crovitz,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  WilliamC. 
Hall,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Susan  S.  Schiffman.Ph.D.  (Duke);  Robert  J.  Thompson,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (North  Dakota);  Lise 
Wallach,  Ph.D.  (Kansas);  Jay  M.  Weiss,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 

Adjunct  Associate  Professors 

Gail  Marsh,  Ph.D.  (Iowa);  Scott  Swartzwelder,  Ph.D.  (American  University) 

Adjunct  Assistant  Professors 

Ralph  Cooper,  Ph.D.  (Rutgers);  MaryLindahl,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Chicago);  John  Lochman,  Ph.D.  (Univer- 
sity of  Connecticut) 

The  department  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  Ph .  D.  degree .  The  areas  of  con- 
centration are  biological,  cognitive  and  sensory  sciences,  personality,  developmental,  and 
clinical.  A  brochure  is  available  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  which  describes 
the  program  in  more  detail  and  gives  information  on  financial  assistance,  facilities,  and 
current  research  activities.  The  Psychology  Department  has  no  foreign  language  re- 
quirement. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Advanced  Neuroscience  I 

201 .  Advanced  Neuroscience  II 
203S.  Sensation  and  Perception 
204S.  Great  Ideas  in  Psychology 
207S.  Topics  in  Psychobiology 
210S.  Cognition 
212S.  Human  Memory 
214S.  Development  of  Social  Interaction 
215S.  Cognitive  Development 
217S.  Advanced  Social  Psychology 
219S.  Physiological  Foundations  of  Psychology 
220S.  Psycholinguistics 
234S.  Advanced  Personality 
238S.  Psychophysiology 
266S.  Comparative  Neurobiology 
267S.  Brain  Mechanisms  of  Behavior 
270S.  A-R,  U-Z.  Selected  Problems 
273S.  Statistical  Principles  in  Experimental  Design 
284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences 
289S.  Psychology  of  Prevention 

301.  Group  Psychotherapy  and  Group 
Influence  Processes 

302.  Personality  Theory 
305.  Psychopathology 
307.  Introduction  to  Theories  and  Methods  of 

Mainstream  Psychotherapies 

Public  Policy  Studies 

Professor  Bruce  R.  Kuniholm,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Director 

Professor  Charles  T.  Clotfelter,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

William  Louis  Ascher,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  James  D.  Barber,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Robert  D.  Behn,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Joel 
L.  Heishman,  LL.M.  (Yale);  S.  Malcolm  Gillis,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Donald  L.  Horowitz,  LL.M.,  Ph.D.  (Har- 
vard); Jerry  F.  Hough,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Wesley  A.  Magat,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern);  George  W.  Pearsall,  Sc.D. 
(Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.);  David  E.  Price,  Ph.D.  (Yale) 

Associate  Professors 

Robert  F.  Conrad,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  Joseph  Lipscomb,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Vanderbilt);  John  B.  McConahay,  Ph.D. 
(California  at  Los  Angeles);  Elizabeth  Rapaport,  Ph.D.  (Case  Western  Reserve),  J.D.  (Harvard);  Carol  B.  Stack, 
Ph.D.  (Illinois) 

Assistant  Professors 

MichelineR.  Malson,  Ed.D.  (Harvard);  Frederick  W.  Mayer,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Steven R.  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Mass. 
Institute  of  Tech.) 

Professors  of  the  Practice 

Henry  Geller,  J.D.  (Northwestern);  Richard  A.  Stubbing,  M.B.A.  (Harvard),  Ph.D.  (Notre  Dame);  Duncan 
Yaggy,  Ph.D.  (Brandeis) 


309.  Seminar  in  Learning 

310.  Seminar  in  Perception 

318.  Measurement  and  Methods 
329-330.  Proseminar  in  Psychology 
335-336.  Personality  Assessment 

338.  Ethics  for  Psychologists 

339.  Ethics  for  Psychotherapists 
343-344.  Clinical  Practicum 

348.  Psychotherapy  with  Children  and  Families 
349-350.  Practicum  in  Psychological  Research 

351 .  Developmental  Psychopathology 

398.  Graded  Research 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Psychology 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

206S.  Stress  and  Health 

230S.  Social  Behavior  of  Animals 

231S.  Parent-Child  Interaction 

255S.  Perinatal  Behavior 

286S.  Biological  Basis  of  Hearing 

323,  324.  Seminar  in  Community  Psychology 

337.  Seminar  in  Sensory  Discrimination 

352.  Child  Assessment 

353.  Research  Practicum  in  Prevention 


72 


Lecturer 

Bruce  L.  Payne,  M.A.  (Yale) 

The  graduate  program  in  public  policy  studies  is  offered  through  the  Institute  of  Policy 
Sciences  and  Public  Affairs.  The  objective  of  the  program  is  to  prepare  students  for  jobs, 
particularly  in  the  public  sector,  which  require  analytical  skills  and  a  practical  understand- 
ing of  the  processes  by  which  policy  is  made  and  implemented. 

The  A.M.  degree  requires  two  academic  years  and  a  summer  internship.  The  first  year 
is  devoted  to  core  courses  in  policy  analysis,  including  sequences  in  quantitative  methods, 
economics,  political  analysis,  and  ethics.  The  summer  internship  is  arranged  with  a  fed- 
eral, state,  or  local  agency.  The  second-year  curriculum  includes  course  work  in  public 
management  and  macroeconomics,  a  concentration  in  a  substantive  policy  area,  and  a 
masters  "memo"  to  be  researched  and  written  on  a  problem  of  current  policy  concern. 

Students  who  are  concurrently  enrolled  in  a  Ph.D.  program  or  a  professional  degree 
program  (M.D.,  J. D.,  M.B.  A.,  M.H.  A.,  etc.)  or  who  have  already  obtained  such  a  degree, 
can  apply  for  an  abbreviated  version  of  the  A.M.  program.  Such  students  are  excused  from 
most  second-year  requirements,  so  ordinarily  the  A . M .  in  public  policy  can  be  complet- 
ed in  one  additional  year.  Students  usually  apply  for  a  joint  degree  program  simultane- 
ously with  their  applications  to  the  graduate  departments  or  professional  schools,  or  dur- 
ing their  first  or  second  year  of  advanced  study. 

The  institute  does  not  award  a  Ph.D. 

More  information  concerning  the  A.M.  programs  can  be  obtained  by  writing  the 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

204S.  Ethics  in  Political  Life 

217.  Microeconomics  and  Public  Policy-Making 

218.  Macroeconomic  Policy 

219.  The  Politics  of  the  Policy  Process 

221.  Decision  Analysis  for  Public  Policymakers 

222.  Data  Analysis  for  Public  Policymakers 

223.  Ethics  and  Policy-Making 

231.  Quantitative  Evaluation  Methods 

232.  Microeconomics:  Policy  Applications 

236,  237.  Public  Management  I  and  II:  Managing 

Public  Agencies 
238S.  Public  Budgeting  and  Financial  Management 
240S.  Analyzing  the  News 
241.  Reporting  the  American  People 
245S.  Leadership  Tutorial 
250S.  Policy,  Philanthropy,  and  the  Arts 
254.  Transportation  Planning  and  Policy  Analysis 
257.  United  States  Policy  in  the  Middle  East 
264S.  Research  Seminar:  Topics  in  Public  Policy  I 
267S.  Policy-Making  in  International  Organizations 
268.  Federal  Tax  Policy 


270S.  Humanistic  Perspectives  on  Public  Policy 

272.  Resource  Economics  and  Policy 

278.  Human  Service  Bureaucracies 

283S.  Congressional  Policy-Making 

284S.  Public  Policy  Process  in  Developing  Countries 

286S.  Economic  Policy-Making  in  Developing 

Countries 
303.  Public  Policy  Workshop  I 
304.01.  Public  Policy  Workshop  II 
305.01.  Public  Policy  Workshop  III 
325S,  326S.  Program  in  International  Development 

Policy  Sector  Seminar 
327,  328.  Program  in  International  Development 

Policy  Issue  Seminar 

387.  Research  Tutorial  in  Public  Policy 

388.  Research  Tutorial  in  Public  Policy 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Public  Policy  Studies 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

256.  The  Economics  of  Health  Care 


Religion 


Professor  Hans  Hillerbrand,  Chairman 

Professor  Stanley  Hauerwas,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Dennis  M.  Campbell,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Elizabeth  A.  Clark,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  James  L.  Crenshaw,  Ph.D.  (Van- 
derbilt);  Frederick  Herzog,Th.D.  (Princeton);  Wesley  A.  Kort,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Thomas  A.  Langford,  Ph.D. 
(Duke);  Bruce  B.  Lawrence,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  C.  Eric  Lincoln,  Ph.D.  (Boston);  George  Marsden,  Ph.D.  (Yale); 
EricM.  Meyers,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Robert  T.  Osborn,  Ph.D.  (Drew);  D.  Moody  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Harmon 
L.  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  DavidC.  Steinmetz,  Th.D  (Harvard);  DanO.  Via,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Geoffrey  Wain- 
wright,  Dr.  Theol.  (Geneva);  Orval  S.  Wintermute,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins) 
Associate  Professors 

Lloyd  R.  Bailey,  Ph.D.  (Hebrew  Union  Coll.,  Jerusalem);  Kalman  Bland,  Ph.D.  (Brandeis);  Roger  J.  Corless, 


73 


Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  Carol L.  Meyers,  Ph.D.  (Brandeis);  Harry  B.  Partin,  Ph.D.  (Chicago);  Melvin K.  H.  Peters, 

Ph.D.  (Toronto),  Kenneth  Surin,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Birmingham,  England). 
Assistant  Professors 

Teresa  Berger,  Ph.D.  (Ruprecht  Karl  Universitat);  Ted  A.  Campbell,  Ph.D.  (Southern  Methodist);  Mary  Fulker- 

son,  Ph.D.  (Vanderbilt);  Susan  Keefe,  Ph.D.  (Toronto);  Dale  Martin,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  SandraP.  Robinson,  Ph.D. 

(Chicago);  William  C.  Turner,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 
Professors  Emeriti 

William  W.  Beach,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  David  G.  Bradley,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Stuart  C.  Henry,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Creighton 

Lacy,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Roland  E.  Murphy,  S.T.D.  (Catholic  Univ.  of  America);  WilliamH.  Poteat,  Ph.D.  (Duke); 

James  Ligon  Price,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Cambridge);  Franklin  W  Young,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 
Research  Professor 

Russell  Richey,  Ph.D.  (Princeton) 

The  Department  of  Religion  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees.  Students  may  major  in  one  of  seven  fields:  (1)  Hebrew  Bible  and  Semitic  studies, 
(2)  New  Testament  and  Christian  origins,  (3)  history  of  Christianity,  (4)  Christian  theol- 
ogy and  ethics,  (5)  history  of  Judaism,  (6)  history  of  religions,  and  (7)  religion  and  culture. 
They  will  be  expected  to  take  courses  which  will  contribute  to  an  adequate  understand- 
ing of  their  chosen  fields  of  specialization  and  will  be  required  to  take  two  written  prelimi- 
nary examinations  within  their  field  of  concentration. 

In  addition  to  course  work  in  their  major  field,  students  will  take  such  other  courses 
in  cognate  fields  as  will  contribute  to  the  enrichment  of  their  major  studies  and  will  be 
required  to  take  one  written  preliminary  examination  in  a  single  cognate  area  within  the 
department.  A  minor  requirement  may  be  fulfilled  by  work  in  a  cognate  department,  such 
as  classical  studies,  history,  philosophy  political  science,  or  sociology,  and  will  consti- 
tute the  outside  minor  and  material  for  a  fourth  written  preliminary  examination.  There 
is,  in  addition,  an  oral  examination  conducted  by  the  student's  committee  immediately 
subsequent  to  the  written  examinations. 

The  program  of  doctoral  studies  presumes  a  foundation  in  the  academic  study  of  re- 
ligion. Students  applying  for  graduate  work  in  religion  directly  from  an  undergraduate 
program  should  have  had  a  strong  undergraduate  major  in  religion,  and  will  be  accept- 
ed for  the  M.  A.-Ph.D.  program  which  presumes  they  will  complete  the  M.  A.  as  part  of 
their  progress  toward  the  Ph.D. 

The  graduate  program  also  offers  an  A .  M .  degree  that  is  not  linked  to  a  specific  Ph .  D. 
field .  Such  study  is  intended  to  encourage  individuals  to  pursue  a  variety  of  interests  ir- 
respective of  whether  they  desire  further  graduate  study  An  A.M.  concentration  may 
be  in  any  of  the  seven  Ph.D.  fields  or  in  an  individually  designed  program  of  study  (such 
as  Islamic  studies  or  religion  and  the  social  sciences). 


Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Person  and  Work  of  Christ 

201.  Studies  in  Intertestamental  Literature 

202.  Language  and  Literature  of  the  Dead 
Sea  Scrolls 

203.  Studies  in  American  Methodism 

204.  Origen 

205.  War  and  the  Christian  Tradition 
207,  208.  Intermediate  Biblical  Hebrew 

209.  Old  Testament  Theology 

210.  Contemporary  British  Theology 

211.  Authority  in  Theology 

213.  Christian  Ethics  in  America 

214.  Feminist  Theology 
215S.  Theological  Ethics 

217.  Islam  in  India 

218.  Religions  of  East  Asia 

219.  Augustine 

220.  Rabbinic  Hebrew 

221.  Readings  in  Hebrew  Biblical  Commentaries 

222.  John  Among  the  Gospels 

223A-G.  Exegesis  of  the  Hebrew  Old  Testament 


225.  Living  Issues  in  New  Testament  Theology 
226A-F.  Exegesis  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  I 
227A-E.  Exegesis  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  II 
228.  Twentieth-Century  Continental  Theology 
230S.  The  Meaning  of  Religious  Language 
231S.  Seminar  in  Religion  and  Contemporary  Thought 
232S.  Religion  and  Literature 

233.  Modern  Narratives  and  Religious  Meanings 

234.  Early  Christian  Asceticism 

235.  Heresy:  Theological  and  Social  Dimensions  of 
Early  Christian  Dissent 

236.  Luther  and  the  Reformation  in  Germany 

237.  History  of  the  Ancient  Near  East 

238.  Jewish  Responses  to  Christianity 

239.  Introduction  to  Middle  Egyptian  I 

240.  Introduction  to  Middle  Egyptian  II 

242.  Life  After  Death  in  Semitic  Thought 

243.  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Biblical  Times 

244.  The  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in 
Hellenistic-Roman  Times 

245.  Ethics  in  World  Religions 


74 


246.  Problems  in  Historical  Theology 

248.  The  Theology  of  Karl  Barth 

249.  The  Lord's  Prayer 

250.  Women  in  the  Medieval  Church 

256.  John  Wesley  in  Controversial  and  Ecumenical 
Theology 

257.  New  Testament  Ethics 

258.  Coptic 

259.  Icon  Theology 

260.  Life  and  Thought  of  the  Wesleys 

262.  Marxist  Ideology  and  Christian  Faith 

263.  Third  World  Theology 

264.  The  Sociology  of  the  Black  Church 

265.  The  Religions  of  the  West  Africa  Diaspora 

266.  Ethics  and  Health  Care 

267.  American  Puritan  Thought  through  Edwards 

268.  Revelation  and  Authority  in  the  Church 

269.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities 

270.  American  Evangelicalism  and  Fundamentalism 

272.  The  Early  Medieval  Church 

273.  Continental  and  British  Roots  of  Evangelicalism 
276.  Baptism  in  the  Patristic  and  Early  Medieval  Period 

279.  Understandings  of  the  Resurrection  in 
Contemporary  Thought 

280.  The  History  of  Religions 

281.  Phenomenology  and  Religion 

282.  Myth  and  Ritual 

283.  Islam  and  Modernism 

284.  The  Religion  and  History  of  Islam 

285.  Introduction  to  the  History  of  Religions 

287.  The  Scriptures  of  Asia 

288.  Buddhist  Thought  and  Practice 

289.  Theology  and  Contemporary  Secular 
Understandings  of  Human  Nature 

290.  Current  Problems  in  Christian  Social  Ethics 

291.  Historical  Forms  of  Protestant  Ethics 

292.  Happiness,  Virtue,  and  Friendship 

293.  Religious  Issues  in  American  History 
293A.  Christianity  and  American  Thought 

294.  Christianity  and  the  State 

295.  Religion  in  the  American  South 

297.  Philosophical  and  Theological  Discourses 
on  Modernity 

298.  Religious  Pluralism  and  Christian  Theologies 

299.  The  Christian  Understanding  of  Human  Nature 
and  Destiny 

300.  Systematic  Theology:  The  Doctrine  of  the  Trinity 
302.  Studies  in  the  Intertestamental  Literature 

304.  Aramaic 

304A.  Targumic  Aramaic 

305.  The  Septuagint 

306.  Language  and  Literature  of  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls 

307.  Syriac 

308.  Greek  Patristic  Texts 

309.  Hermeneutics 

310.  Readings  in  Judaica 

311.  Pharasaic  Judaism  in  the  First  Century 
315-316.  Seminar:  History  of  Religions 
318.  Seminar  in  the  Greek  Fathers 

322.  Nineteenth-Century  European  Theology 

323A.  Comparative  Semitic  I 

323B.  Comparative  Semitic  II 

324.  Readings  in  the  History  of  Religion 


325.  Philosophical  Theology  I 

326.  Philosophical  Theology  II 

329.  Readings  in  Theology  and  Language 

330.  Contemporary  Christologies 

331.  Eschatology 

332.  System  in  Theology 

333.  The  Doctrine  of  the  Trinity 

334.  Theology  and  Reform  in  the  Later  Middle  Ages 

336.  Worlds  and  Texts 

337.  Theology  of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas 

338.  Calvin  and  the  Reformed  Tradition 
340-341 .  Seminar  in  the  New  Testament 

342.  American  Religious  Biography 

343.  Readings  in  Ancient  Near  Eastern  Wisdom 
Literature 

346.  Practical  Reason  and  Personal  Identity: 
Explorations  in  Narrative 

347.  Hebrew  Narrative  Art 
350-351.  Old  Testament  Seminar 

352.  Seminar  in  Christian  Theology 

353.  Seminar  on  Text  Criticism 

360.  Special  Problems  in  Religion  and  Culture 

362.  Readings  in  Old  Testament  and  Semitic  Studies 

363.  Readings  in  New  Testament  and  Christian  Origins 

364.  Readings  in  History  of  Christianity 

365.  Readings  in  Christian  Theology  and  Ethics 

366.  Readings  in  History  of  Religions 

367.  Readings  in  Religion  and  Culture 
373-374.  Elementary  Akkadian 

380.  Existentialist  Thought 

383.  Moral  Theology  in  the  Twentieth  Century 

386.  Christianity  in  Dialogue  with  Other  Faiths 

387.  Ethical  Method 

388.  Ethics  and  Medicine 

389.  Christian  Ethics  and  Contemporary  Culture 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

221.  Readings  in  Hebrew  Biblical  Commentaries 

241.  Problems  in  Reformation  Theology 

242.  Life  after  Death  in  Semitic  Thought 
247.  Readings  in  Latin  Theological  Literature 

251.  Counter-Reformation  and  Development  of 
Catholic  Dogma 

252.  Nineteenth-  and  Twentieth-Century  Roman 
Catholic  Theology 

301.  Seminar  in  Contemporary  Christian  Ethics 

311.  Pharisaic  Judaism  in  the  First  Century 

312.  Pauline  Theology 

313.  The  Apostolic  Fathers 

314.  Judaism  and  Christianity  in  the  New  Testament 
317.  Seminar  in  the  Greek  Apologists 

319.  The  Gospel  According  to  St.  Matthew  in 
Recent  Research 

320.  Theology,  Power,  and  Justice 

324.  Readings  in  the  History  of  Religion 

327.  Philosophical  Method  in  Religious  Studies 

328.  Twentieth-Century  European  Theology 

335.  The  English  Church  in  the  Eighteenth  Century 

339.  The  Radical  Reformation 

344.  Zwingli  and  the  Origins  of  Reformed  Theology 

397.  Contemporary  American  Theology 

398.  Colloquium  on  the  Teaching  of  Religion 
401.  Colloquium  in  Biblical  Studies 


75 


Romance  Studies 


Professor  Gustavo  Pefez-Firmat,  Ph.D.  (Michigan),  Chairman 
Associate  Professor  Linda  Orr,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

John  M.  Fein,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Miguel  Garci-Gomez,  Ph.D.  (Catholic  Univ.);  Fredric  R.  Jameson,  Ph.D. 
(Yale);  Valentin  Mudimbe,  Ph.D.  (Louvain);  Rafael Osuna,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Naomi Schor,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Wil- 
liam H.  Wannamaker  Professor  of  Romance  Languages;  Philip  Stewart,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Marcel  Tetel,  Ph.D.  (Wis- 
consin); Jean-Jacques  Thomas,  Doctorat  de  3e  Cycle  (Univ.  of  Paris) 

Associate  Professors 

David  F.  Bell  III,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Ernesto  Caserta,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Alexander  Hull,  Ph.D.  (Washington);  Alice 
Yaeger  Kaplan,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Elisabeth  Mudimbe-Boyi,  Ph.D.  (Zaire) 

Assistant  Professor 

Valeria  Finucci,  Ph.D.  (Illinois);  Paol  Keineg,  Ph.D.  (Brown);  Kathleen  A.  Ross,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Stephanie  Sie- 
burth,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Helen  Solterer,  Ph.D.  (Toronto) 

Professors  Emeriti 

Thomas  Cordle,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Wallace  Fowlie,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Bruce  W.  Wardropper,  Ph.D.  (Pennsylvania) 

Visiting  Professor 

Ariel  Dorfman,  M.  A.  (University  of  California  at  Berkeley) 

Lecturer  and  Director  of  Language  Instruction 
Claire  Tufts,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina) 

The  Department  of  Romance  Languages  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M. 
andPh.D.  degrees  in  French  and  Spanish.  Requirements  for  the  A.M.  may  be  completed 
by  submission  of  a  thesis  or  by  passing  a  comprehensive  examination  in  the  major  field . 
Related  work  for  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  is  required  in  a  second  Romance  language 
or  in  any  one  or  two  of  a  number  of  other  subject  areas.  A  reading  knowledge  of  one  foreign 
language  which  is  outside  the  major  language  is  required. 

In  order  to  undertake  graduate  study  in  Romance  languages,  the  entering  student 
should  have  credit  for  at  least  18  semester  hours  (or  equivalent)  above  the  intermediate 
level  in  the  major  language. 


French 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200S.  Seminar  in  French  Literature 

210.  The  Structure  of  French 

211.  History  of  the  French  Language 
223.  Semiotics  for  Literature 

240.  Old  French  Literature 

248.  French  Literature  of  the  Seventeenth  Century 

251,  252.  Literature  of  the  Eighteenth  Century 

255.  French  Preromantic  and  Romantic  Poetry 

256.  Modern  Literature  and  History 

257.  Problems  of  Identity  in  the  Nineteenth-Century 
French  Novel 

258.  The  Narrative  of  Social  Crisis 
261.  French  Symbolism 

263.  Contemporary  French  Theater 

264.  Contemporary  French  Poetry 

265.  French  Literature  of  the  Early  Twentieth 
Century 

266.  French  Literature  of  the  Mid-Twentieth 
Century 

267.  Contemporary  French  Novel 
290S.  Studies  ir  a  Contemporary  Figure 

325.  French  Prose  of  the  Sixteenth  Century 

326.  Topics  in  Renaissance  Poetry 
391,  392.  French  Seminar 
Graduate  Reading  Course 

Italian 

Courses  of  Instruction 

283.  Italian  Novel  of  the  Novecento 

284.  Dante 

285.  Dante 


Spanish 

Courses  of  Instruction 

200S.  Seminar  in  Spanish  Literature 
210.  History  of  the  Spanish  Language 

241.  Colonial  Prose  of  Spanish  America 

242.  Colonial  Poetry  and  Theater  of  Spanish 
America 

245.  Modern  Spanish-American  Poetry 

246.  Modern  Spanish-American  Fiction 
248.  Studies  in  Spanish-American  Literature 
251.  The  Origins  of  Spanish  Prose  Fiction 

253.  Cervantes 

254.  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age 

258S.  Spanish  Lyric  Poetry  before  1700 

262.  The  Romantic  Movement 

266.  Nineteenth-Century  Prose  Fiction 

275.  Modern  Spanish  Poetry 

276.  Modern  Spanish  Drama 

277.  Modern  Spanish  Novel 
391,  392.  Hispanic  Seminar 

Romance  Languages 

Courses  of  Instruction 

218.  The  Teaching  of  Romance  Languages 
310.  Computers  for  the  Humanities 


76 


Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 

Associate  Professor  Thomas  Lahusen,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Lausanne),  Chairman 
Assistant  Professor  Edna  Andrews,  Ph.D.  (Indiana  Univ.),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Assistant  Professor 

Stephan  Pugh,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill) 

The  Department  of  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures  offers  graduate  courses  in  Rus- 
sian linguistics  and  literature  and  limited  training  in  the  language  and  literature  of  Poland . 

Students  should  have  sufficient  preparation  in  the  Russian  language  to  enable  them 
to  read  Russian  literature  in  the  original.  Additional  courses  in  linguistics  and  literature 
may  be  offered  upon  request. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

Linguistics  Literature 

201.  Topics  in  Comparative  Slavic  Linguistics  210.  Literature  and  Criticism  of  Socialist  Realism 

203.  Old  Church  Slavonic  250.  Trends  in  Soviet  and  East  European  Literary 

205.  Semiotics  and  Linguistics  Criticism 

207.  Semantics  399.  Special  Readings 


Sociology 


Professor  Kenneth  C.  Land,  Ph.D.  (Texas),  Chairman 
Professor  Gary  Gereffi,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

Kurt  W.  Back,  Ph.D.  (Massachusetts  Inst,  of  Tech.),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Sociology;  Linda  K.  George,  Ph.D. 
(Duke);  Alan C.  Kerckhoff,  Ph.D.  (Wisconsin);  George  L.  Maddox,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Michigan  State);  George  C. 
Myers,  Ph.D.  (Washington);  Erdman B.  Palmore,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Ida H.  Simpson,  Ph.D.  (North Caroli- 
na at  Chapel  Hill);  Joel  Smith,  Ph.D.  (Northwestern);  Edward  A.  Tiryakian,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 

Associate  Professors 

Thomas  A.  DiPrete,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  Angela  CRand,  Ph.D.  (Temple);  Kenneth  I.  Spenner,  Ph.D.  (Wis- 
consin); John  Wilson,  D.Phil.  (Oxford) 

Assistant  Professors 

Art  Burdos,  Ph.D.  (UCLA);  Thomas  Janoski,  Ph.D.  (California-Berkeley);  Mark  D.  Reed,  Ph.D.  (SUNY- 
Albany) 

Professors  Emeriti 

John  C.  McKinney,  Ph.D.  (Michigan  State);  Jack  J.  Preiss,  Ph.D.  (Michigan  State) 

Research  Professor 

Kenneth  G.  Manton,  Ph.D.  (Duke) 

The  Department  of  Sociology  offers  a  challenging  and  rigorous  program  of  study  and 
research  training  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  degree.  It  also  offers  a  special  M.  A.  program  in  Com- 
parative Development.  Although  graduate  students  working  toward  the  Ph.D.  receive 
a  Master's  degree  as  certain  requirements  are  completed,  the  program  of  study  is  organized 
primarily  for  Ph.D.  candidates.  Its  main  components  include:  (1)  12-14  semester-length 
courses,  almost  exclusively  in  a  seminar  format;  (2)  informal  research  training  through 
a  close  working  relationship  with  one  or  more  faculty  members;  and  (3)  independent  re- 
search for  the  doctoral  dissertation. 

All  entering  students  in  the  Ph .  D.  program  must  complete  three  required  departmen- 
tal core  curriculum  courses  as  soon  as  possible  during  the  first  two  years  of  study.  They 
include  courses  in  sociological  theory,  statistical  analysis,  and  survey  research  methods, 
and  are  intended  to  provide  basic  skills  for  advanced  work.  Other  course  work  includes 
requirements  in  a  primary  and  secondary  specialization,  and  departmental  and  other 
electives. 

Course  work  usually  is  completed  in  two  or  two-and-one-half  years  with  research 
training  undertaken  concurrently.  Preliminary  examinations  with  written  and  oral  com- 
ponents must  be  taken  no  later  than  the  fifth  semester  of  graduate  study  (third  semester 
for  those  entering  with  an  M.  A.).  They  must  be  completed  successfully  before  disserta- 
tion research  can  begin. 


77 


Further  details  concerning  the  sociology  department  and  its  programs  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

200S.  Exile  and  Frontiers:  Finding  a  Definition 
of  Home  for  the  Twentieth  Century 

206.  Sociological  Theory 

207.  Social  Statistics  I:  Basic  Concepts  and  Methods 

208.  Survey  Research  Methods 

211A-E.  Proseminars  in  Sociological  Theory 

212.  Social  Statistics  II:  Linear  Models,  Path  Analysis, 
and  Structural  Equation  Systems 

213.  Social  Statistics  III:  Discrete  Multivariate  Models 

214.  Comparative  and  Historical  Methods 

215.  Basic  Demographic  Methods  and  Materials 

216.  Advanced  Methods  of  Demographic  Analysis 
217A-F.  Proseminars  in  Social  Statistics  and 

Research  Methods 
221A-D.  Proseminars  in  Aging  and  Life  Course 
Analysis 


222A-D.  Proseminars  in  Comparative  and  Historical 

Sociology 
223A-E.  Proseminars  in  Crime,  Law,  and  Deviance 
224A-E.  Proseminars  in  Populations  Studies 
225A-E.  Proseminars  in  Organizations,  Markets, 

and  Work 
226A-H .  Proseminars  in  Social  Institutions  and 

Processes 
234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of 

Change  in  the  Third  World 
255.  Political  Sociology 
282S.  Canada 

298S,  299S.  Seminar  in  Selected  Topics 
392.  Individual  Research  in  Sociology 


Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences 

Professor  John  F.  Geweke,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota),  William  R.  Kenan  Jr.  Professor  of  Economics,  Director 
Professor  Jean  Francois  Richard,  Ph.D.  (Louvain,  Belgium),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professor 

Robert  L.  Winkler,  Ph.D.  (Chicago),  Calvin  Bryce  Hoover  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Associate  Professors 

Donald  Burdick,  Ph.D.  (Princeton);  Mike  West,  Ph.D.  (Nottingham,  UK);  Robert  Wolpert,  Ph.D.  (Princeton) 
Assistant  Professor 

Michael  Lavine,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota) 
Adjunct  Professor 

David  W.  Peterson,  Ph.D.  (Stanford) 
Adjunct  Associate  Professor 

William  E.  Wilkinson,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill) 

The  Institute  of  Statistics  and  Decision  Sciences  offers  graduate  study  leading  to  the 
Ph.D.  degree  in  statistics.  Distinguishing  features  of  the  institute's  program  are  the  op- 
portunity for  thorough  preparation  in  Bayesian  as  well  as  classical  statistics;  research  op- 
portunities at  the  interface  between  statistics,  decision  sciences,  and  statistical  comput- 
ing; and  close  working  relationships  with  graduate  programs  in  several  disciplines. 
Financial  aid  for  all  ISDS  Ph .  D.  students  is  provided  through  University  fellowships,  re- 
search grants,  and  teaching  assistantships  with  a  time  limit  of  four  years  which  cor- 
responds to  expected  completion  time  for  the  Ph.D.  program. 

Requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  in  statistics  include  courses  in  statistics,  proba- 
bility, statistical  computing,  decision  sciences  and  related  areas;  a  qualifying  examina- 
tion at  the  end  of  the  first  semester  and  a  preliminary  examination  at  the  end  of  the  sec- 
ond year.  The  student  also  selects  two  areas  of  study  from  the  following  four:  statistics; 
statistical  decision  science;  statistics  and  econometrics;  or  statistics  and  computer  sciences. 
Following  completion  of  all  course  work,  the  student  submits  a  dissertation  written  un- 
der the  supervision  of  a  thesis  advisor. 

Courses  of  Instruction 

203S.  Senior  Seminar  in  Statistics 

205.  Probability  and  Measure  Theory 

207.  Probability 

210.  Statistics  and  Data  Analysis 

213.  Introduction  to  Statistical  Methods 

215.  Introduction  to  Mathematical  Statistics 

216.  Generalized  Linear  Models 


221.  Bayesian  Inference  and  Decision 

226.  Bayesian  Analysis  and  Statistical  Decision  Theory 

231.  Behavioral  Decision  Theory 

234.  Choice  Theory 

242.  Applied  Regression  Analysis 

244.  Introduction  to  Linear  Models 

245.  Introduction  to  Multivariate  Statistics 


78 


253.  Applied  Stochastic  Processes  345.  Multivariate  Statistical  Analysis 

265.  Econometrics  II  356.  Time  Series  and  Forecasting 

266.  Selected  Topics  in  Econometric  Theory  357.  Stochastic  Processes 

273.  Numerical  Analysis  I  376.  Advanced  Modeling  and  Scientific  Computing 

282.  Optimization  Methods  380.  Quantitative  Methods  and  Statistics 

293,  294.  Special  Topics  in  Statistics  391,  392.  Proseminar  in  Applied  Statistics 
307,  308.  Topics  in  Probability  Theory 

The  University  Program  in  Toxicology 

Professor  of  Pathology  Doyle  G.  Graham,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Director 

Professor  Mohamed  B.  Abou-Donia,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley),  Deputy  Director 

James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry  Irwin  Fridovich,  Ph.D.  (Duke),  Deputy  Director 

Associate  Professor  Curtis  J.  Richardson,  Ph.D.  (Tennessee),  Deputy  Director 

Professor  Dolph  Adams,  M.D.,  Ph.D.  (University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

The  University  Program  in  Toxicology  seeks  to  produce  investigators  with  sound  train- 
ing in  the  scientific  basis  for  research  in  toxicology  who  will  advance  the  science  of  this 
discipline.  After  broad  general  courses  in  epidemiology  and  statistics,  pathology,  and 
mammalian  toxicology,  students  will  be  trained  in  one  of  three  tracks:  (1)  as  generalist 
toxicologists,  with  broad  training  in  the  principles  and  concepts  of  toxicology  and  the  de- 
sign of  protocols  for  toxicological  assessments;  (2)  as  specialist  toxicologists  in  those  areas 
of  toxicology  research  in  which  faculty  members  are  currently  productive:  pulmonary 
toxicology,  neurotoxicology,  immunotoxicology,  genetic  toxicology  (carcinogenesis),  and 
biochemical  toxicology;  or  (3)  as  ecotoxicologists  with  broad  training  in  principles  and 
concepts  of  both  toxicology  and  ecology  as  they  relate  to  the  release,  transport,  exposure, 
accumulation,  and  effects  of  toxicants  in  the  ecosystems. 

The  toxicology  program  faculty  is  comprised  of  members  from  the  Departments  of 
Anesthesiology,  Biochemistry,  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  Chemistry,  Medicine,  Microbi- 
ology and  Immunology,  Neurobiology,  Pathology,  Pharmacology,  Zoology,  the  School 
of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies,  and  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory 

Students  seeking  the  Ph.D.  in  one  of  the  participating  Graduate  School  departments 
must  make  initial  application  to  that  department.  Students  who  apply  initially  for  gradu- 
ate study  in  one  of  the  departments  may  also  be  nominated  by  that  department  for  ad- 
mission to  the  program.  Such  students  should  list  toxicology  as  their  'Special  Field'  on 
the  application  form.  It  is  expected  that  most  students  will  have  a  strong  undergraduate 
preparation  in  mathematics  and  the  physical  and  biological  sciences  with  demonstrat- 
ed excellence  of  performance  as  judged  by  grades  in  course  work  and  letters  of  recom- 
mendation from  former  instructors. 

Each  student  in  the  program  will  take  a  series  of  courses  in  toxicology  as  well  as  courses 
specified  by  his  or  her  department.  A  student  will  be  expected  to  choose  a  dissertation 
ad  viser  in  his  or  her  department  by  the  end  of  the  first  two  semesters  in  the  program,  and 
will  normally  be  expected  to  begin  dissertation  research  during  the  third  semester  in  resi- 
dence. Upon  satisfactorily  completing  all  degree  requirements  in  the  program  and  in  the 
department,  students  will  be  jointly  recommended  for  the  Ph.D.  degree. 

Further  information  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  the  toxicology  program 
(Department  of  Pathology). 

Women's  Studies 

Associate  Professor  Jean  F.  O'Barr,  (Northwestern),  Director 
Associate  Professor  Carol  Meyers,  (Brandeis),  Associate  Director 

The  Women's  Studies  Program  provides  a  focal  point  within  the  university  for  the 
study  of  gender.  Students  enrolled  in  any  of  the  university's  departments  and  professional 
schools  may  participate  in  the  program  through  enrollment  in  the  courses  listed  below, 
through  specialized  study  in  independent  research  with  any  of  the  fifty-four  faculty  mem- 
bers associated  with  the  program,  and  through  pursuing  an  M.  A.  or  Ph.D.  thesis  topic 


79 


in  feminist  theory.  Students  considering  a  concentration  in  women's  studies  are  en- 
couraged to  consult  the  Director  for  assistance  in  tailoring  a  program  of  study  suited  to 
their  individual  professional  needs.  A  graduate  certificate  in  women's  studies  is  offered 
to  those  doing  IDC  211  and  at  least  two  other  courses  on  women  at  the  graduate  level. 
SIGNS:  Journal  of  Women  in  Culture  and  Society  is  edited  at  Duke.  Internships  and  work- 
study  positions  form  an  important  part  of  the  graduate  education  of  students  interested 
in  feminist  scholarship. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

Interdisciplinary  Course  211 .  History  of  Feminist 

Thought 
Interdisciplinary  Course  283.  Feminist  Theory  and 

the  Humanities 
Interdisciplinary  Course  284.  Feminist  Theory  and 

the  Social  Sciences 

Courses  on  Women  Offered 
by  Departments 

Cultural  Anthropology 

215.  The  Anthropology  of  Women 

251S.  American  Marriage:  A  Cultural  Approach 

272.  Marxism  and  Feminism 

English 

269.  American  Women  Writers 

283.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities 

287.  Feminist  Literary  Theory 

321.  Gender  and  Power  in  Renaissance  Texts 

French 

290S.  Studies  in  a  Contemporary  Figure:  Wittig 
391.  French  Prose  of  the  16th  Century: 
Marguerite  de  Navaree 


History 

227-228.  Recent  United  States  History:  Major 

Political  and  Social  Movements 
351.40.  Colloquium  in  Women's  History 

Literature 

282.  Structuralism,  Post-Structuralism 

and  After 
289.  Topics  in  Feminist  Theory 
302.  New  Criticism  in  Literary  Theory 

Political  Science 

200A.  Contemporary  American  Feminism 

Public  Policy  Studies 

264.  Women  and  Justice 

278.  Human  Service  Bureaucracies 

Religion 

Christian  Theology  214.  Feminist  Theology 
Religion  234.  Early  Christian  Asceticism 


Zoology 


Professor  Nicholas  W.  Gillham,  Ph.D.  (Harvard),  Chairman 

Associate  Professor  Mark  D.  Rausher,  Ph.D.  (Cornell),  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

Professors 

John  D.  Costlow,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  Donald  J.  Fluke,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Richard  B.  Forward,  Jr.,  Ph.D.  (California 
at  Santa  Barbara);  Peter  H.  Klopfer,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  Daniel  A.  Livingstone,  Ph.D.  (Yale),  James  B.  Duke  Professor 
of  Zoology;  John  G.  Lundberg,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  David  R.  McClay,  Ph.D.  (North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill); 
R.  Bruce  Nicklas,  Ph.D.  (Columbia);  H.  Frederik  Nijhout,  Ph.D.  (Harvard);  John  E.  R.  Staddon,  Ph.D.  (Har- 
vard), James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Zoology;  Vance  A.  Tucker,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Los  Angeles);  Steven  Vogel, 
Ph.D.  (Harvard);  Stephen  A.  Wainwright,  Ph.D.  (California  at  Berkeley),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Zoology; 
Calvin  L.  Ward,  Ph.D.  (Texas);  Henry  M.  Wilbur,  Ph.D.  (Michigan) 

Associate  Professors 

Cathy  C.  Laurie,  Ph.D.  (Minnesota);  Virginia  Louise  Roth,  Ph.D.  (Yale);  John  P.  Sutherland,  Ph.D.  (California 
at  Berkeley);  Marcy  K.  Uyenoyama,  Ph.D.  (Stanford) 

Assistant  Professors 

Stephen  Nowicki,  Ph.D.  (Cornell);  Daniel  Rittschoff,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Michigan) 

Professors  Emeriti 

Joseph R.  Bailey,  Ph.D.  (Michigan);  Cazlyn G.  Bookhout,  Ph.D.  (Duke);  John R.  Gregg,  Ph.D.  (Princeton); 
Knut  Schmidt-Nielsen,  Dr.Phil.  (University  of  Copenhagen);  Karl  M.  Wilbur,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Penn- 
sylvania) 

Adjunct  Professor 

Klaus  Schmidt-Koenig,  Ph.D.  (Univ.  of  Freiburg) 

Lecturer 

Mary  M.  Nijhout,  Ph.D.  (Harvard) 

The  Department  of  Zoology  manages  a  variety  of  programs  tailored  to  individual 
needs  of  students  seeking  the  Ph.D.  degree.  The  A.M.  degree  maybe  taken  by  students 
en  route  to  the  Ph.D.,  or  by  those  who  leave  the  doctoral  program.  Ordinarily,  only  stu- 
dents seeking  the  doctorate  are  admitted  to  the  department. 


80 


In  general,  students  entering  the  department  will  be  equipped  to  pursue  advanced 
degrees  if  they  have  completed  an  undergraduate  major  in  biology  along  with  some  for- 
mal training  in  college-level  chemistry  mathematics,  physics,  and  foreign  languages. 

Nevertheless,  in  recognition  and  support  of  the  modern  trend  toward  interdiscipli- 
nary research,  the  department  is  prepared  to  accept  promising  students  with  less  orthodox 
academic  backgrounds  and  is  ready  to  encourage  any  student  wishing  to  undertake  a  pro- 
gram of  study  leading,  in  effect,  to  an  interdisciplinary  degree  sponsored  by  the 
department. 

Thus,  all  students  are  urged  to  search  widely  in  both  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University: 
Undergraduate  Instruction  and  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Graduate  School  for  informa- 
tion about  the  intellectual  resources  of  the  University.  Special  attention  should  be  given 
to  announcements  of  the  Departments  of  Biochemistry,  Biological  Anthropology  and 
Anatomy,  Botany,  Cell  Biology,  Chemistry,  Geology,  History,  Mathematics,  Microbiolo- 
gy and  Immunology,  Neurobiology,  Pharmacology,  Philosophy,  Psychology,  Sociology, 
and  Zoology;  announcements  of  the  Schools  of  Engineering  and  Forestry  and  Environ- 
mental Studies  should  also  be  consulted. 


Courses  of  Instruction 

200.  Advanced  Neuroscience  I 

201L.  Animal  Behavior 

203L.  Marine  Ecology 

206S.  Controversies  in  Biology 

213L.  Behavioral  Ecology 

216L.  Limnology 

222L.  Entomology 

226L.  Ichthyology 

234S.  Problems  in  the  Philosophy  of  Biology 

237L.  Systematic  Biology 

244.  Principles  of  Immunology 

245S.  Radiation  Biology 

247S.  Photobiology 

249.  Comparative  Biomechanics 

250L.  Physiology  of  Marine  Animals 

259L.  Laboratory  in  Biomechanics 

262.  Biology  of  Parasitism 

267L.  Community  Ecology 


269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology 

274L.  Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology 

278L.  Invertebrate  Developmental  Biology 

280.  Principles  of  Genetics 

281 .  DNA,  Chromosomes,  and  Evolution 
283.  Extrachromosomal  Inheritance 

286.  Evolutionary  Mechanisms 

287S.  Macroevolution 

288.  Mathematical  Population  Genetics 

290.  Modeling  Biological  Systems 

293L.  Population  Biology 

295S,  296S.  Seminar 

353,  354.  Research 

360,  361.  Tutorials 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

233.  Principles  of  Insect  Behavior 
355,  356.  Seminar 


Related  Programs 

The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  See  announcement  in  this 
bulletin. 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  Genetics  courses  offered  by  the  Department 
of  Zoology  are  part  of  the  University  Program  in  Genetics;  see  announcement  in  this 
bulletin. 

The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences.  Consult  Marine  Sciences  in  this  bulletin 
for  offerings  at  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory. 

Program  in  Tropical  Biology.  Fellowships  are  available  for  travel  and  subsistence  in 
field-oriented  programs  in  Latin  America.  Refer  to  Organization  for  Tropical  Studies  in 
this  bulletin  in  the  section  on  special  programs. 


81 


POSTM 
to: 

(USPS  0 
Durham 

03 

re* 

5' 

> 

•> 

rs 

o 

a  a 

g  c 

1—1 

M 

00 

Z 

n 

1 

On 
00 

a 

sr  B 

> 

01   w 
0-  ? 

o 

re 

3    C 

re* 
3 

send 
uate 

On 

C 

3 

£  i 

03 

en  o 

S" 

5?  ™ 

P5 

^   0) 

re 

ity 
2770 

a 

3' 
ctq 

8  ^ 

O  crq 

•■^  re 

ON 

o 

l-h> 

a 

pi 

a 

N< 

n  s? 

9 

s*fc& 

Q 

3  0l5 

C 

>              fD 

ui 

z 

Cfl 

n 

bulletin  of 

DukeUniversity 
1989-90 

Graduate  School 


bulletin  of 

DukeUniversity 
1989-90 

Graduate  School 


ACADEMIC  LIAISON 

A.  Leigh  DeNeef 

Associate  Dean 


EDITOR 

Judv  Smith 

SENIOR  EDITORIAL  ASSISTANTS 

Jean  Carlton 

Elizabeth  Matheson 


PHOTOGRAPHS 
Robin  Alexander 

Scott  Taylor 

Les  Todd 

Jimmy  Wallace 

Jem'  Markatos 


Typesetting  by  Paste-Ups,  Limited,  Research  Triangle  Park,  North  Carolina 
Printed  by  Port  City  Press,  Washington,  DC 

The  information  in  the  bulletin  applies  to  the  academic  year  1989-90  and  is  accurate  and  current,  to  the  best 
of  our  knowledge,  as  of  January,  1989.  The  University  reserves  the  right  to  change  programs  of  study,  academic 
requirements,  lecturers,  teaching  staffs,  the  announced  University  calendar,  and  other  matters  described  in  the 
bulletin  without  prior  notice,  in  accordance  with  established  procedures. 

Duke  University  does  not  discriminate  on  the  basis  of  race,  color,  religion,  national  origin,  handicap,  vet- 
eran status,  sexual  orientation  or  preference,  sex,  or  age  in  the  administration  of  educational  policies,  admission 
policies,  financial  aid,  employment,  or  any  other  University  program  or  activity.  It  admits  qualified  students  to 
all  the  rights,  privileges,  programs,  and  activities  generally  accorded  or  made  available  to  students.  For  further 
information,  call  Dolores  L.  Burke,  Equal  Opportunity  Officer,  (919)  684-8111. 

Duke  University  is  a  member  of  the  North  Carolina  Association  of  Independent  Colleges  and  Universities, 
the  Southern  Association  of  Colleges  and  Schools,  and  the  Association  of  American  Universities.  Additionally, 
the  Graduate  School  is  affiliated  with  the  Association  of  Graduate  Schools  and  the  Council  of  Graduate  Schools. 

The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University,  Volume61,  includes  the  following  titles:  The  Fuqua  School  of  Business;  TheSchool 
of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies;  Marine  Laboratory;  Undergraduate  Instruction;  The  Graduate  School;  TheMedi- 
calCenter;  The  Divinity  School;  Information  for  Prospective  Students;  The  Graduate  School  (short  form);  TheSchoolof 
Law;  and  Information  and  Regulations. 


Volume  61  Number  2A  March  1989 

The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University  (USPS  073-680)  is  published  by  Duke  University,  Duke  Station,  Durham,  North 
Carolina  27706  as  follows:  monthly— May;  semimonthly— March,  April,  June,  and  August;  thrice-monthly— 
September.  Second-class  postage  paid  at  Durham. 


Contents 

Calendar  of  the  Graduate  School  4 

University  Administration  5 

Graduate  School  Faculty  6 

Academic  and  Cooperative 

Programs  22 

Admission  26 

Financial  Information  32 

Tuition  and  Fees  33 

Expenses  36 

Fellowships  and  Scholarships  37 

Assistantships  39 

Payment  of  Awards  40 

Loans  40 

Work-Study  Program  Employment  40 

Summer  Financial  Aid  41 

Registration  42 

Regulations  46 

General  Academic  Regulations  47 

Degree  Regulations— The  Master's  Degree  49 

Degree  Regulations— The  Doctoral  Degree  52 

Commencement  54 

Standards  of  Conduct  54 

Courses  of  Instruction  58 
Special  and  Cooperative  Programs       190 

Resources  for  Study  198 

Student  Life  210 

Living  Accommodations  211 

Food  Services  212 

Services  Available  213 

Student  Affairs  216 

Visiting  Scholars  217 

Postdoctoral  Research  217 

Index  218 


Calendar  of  the  Graduate  School* 


April 

3 

May 

9 

10 

18 
22 

June 

26 

30 

July 

1 
5 
7 

August 

17 
18 


August 

21 
21 

21 

22-23 

25 
28 
29 

30-31 

September 

1 


4 

5-8 

8 

12-23 

23 

October 

13 
18 

November 

6-7 
22 
27 


Summer  1989+ 


Monday— Beginning  of  registration  for  summer  1989. 

Tuesday— Beginning  this  day,  summer  drop/adds  must  be  approved  by  the  Direc- 
tor of  Graduate  Studies. 

Wednesday —Last  day  for  registration  and  payment  of  Term  I  fees  without  $25  late 
fee  (before  4:30  p.m.). 
Thursday— Term  I  classes  begin. 
Monday— Drop/add  for  Term  I  ends  at  4:00  p.m. 

Monday —Last  day  for  registration  and  payment  of  Term  II  fees  without  $25  late 

fee  (before  4:30  p.m.). 

Friday— Term  I  final  examinations  begin. 

Saturday— Term  I  final  examinations  end. 

Wednesday— Term  II  classes  begin. 

Friday— Drop/add  for  Term  II  ends  at  4:00  p.m. 

Thursday— Term  II  final  examinations  begin. 
Friday— Term  II  final  examinations  end. 

Fall  1989 


Monday— Drop/add  for  graduate  students  who  registered  in  April. 

Monday— Consultations  with  Directors  of  Graduate  Studies. 

Monday— English  examination  for  foreign  students.  (See  chapter  "Admission" 

for  section  on  additional  procedures  for  foreign  students.) 

Tuesday-Wednesday— Registration  for  all  new  and  nonregistered  returning 

students  in  the  Graduate  School. 

Friday— Graduate  and  Professional  School  opening  convocation. 

Monday— Fall  semester  classes  begin. 

Tuesday— Late  registration  and  drop/add  from  1:00-3:00  p.m.  in  127  Allen 

Building. 

Wednesday-Thursday— Drop/add  continues. 

Friday— Drop/add  continues  in  127  Allen  Building.  Final  date  for  changing  regis- 
tration with  reduction  in  fees.  Final  date  for  changing  enrollment  status  from  full- 
time  to  part-time. 

Monday— Classes  in  session.  No  drop/adds  taken. 
Tuesday-Friday— Drop/add  continues  in  127  Allen  Building. 
Friday— Final  date  for  changes  in  registration  which  involve  adding  courses.  No 
late  registrations  taken  after  this  date. 

Monday-Friday— Drop/add  continues  for  dropping  course/seminar  registration 
and  adding  equivalent  units  of  ungraded  research  or  residence. 
Friday— Final  date  for  dropping  course/seminar  registration  and  adding  equivalent 
units  of  ungraded  research. 

Friday— Fall  break  begins. 
Wednesday— Classes  resume. 

Monday-Tuesday— Registration  for  spring  semester  1990. 
Wednesday— Thanksgiving  recess  begins. 
Monday— Classes  resume. 


The  dates  in  this  calendar  are  subject  to  change. 

tThe  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies,  the  Fuqua  School  of  Business,  the  Marine  Laboratory, 
the  Department  of  Health  Administration,  and  the  Department  of  Physical  Therapy  have  different  term  lengths 
and/or  starting  dates  during  the  summer;  consult  the  appropriate  bulletins  and  schedules. 


December 

1 

1 
2-10 

10 

11-16 

15 


January 

9 
9 

10 

11 

12 
15-17 


18-24 
24 

25-31 

February 

1 

1-2 
2 

March 

9 
19 
30 

April 

2-3 

16 

20 

21-29 

27 


30 

May 

5 
11 
13 


Friday— Final  date  for  filing  with  the  Graduate  School  office  the  intention  to  receive 

an  advanced  degree  in  December. 

Friday— Graduate  classes  end. 

Saturday-Sunday— Graduate  reading  period;  length  of  200-level  course  reading 

period  is  determined  by  the  instructor. 

Sunday— Founders'  Day. 

Monday-Saturday— Final  examinations. 

Friday— Final  date  for  completion  of  requirements  for  an  advanced  degree  to  be 

dated  December  1989.  All  final  copies  of  examined  and  signed  theses  and 

dissertations  must  be  returned  to  the  Graduate  School  by  this  date. 

Spring  1990 

Tuesday— Drop/add  for  graduate  students  who  registered  in  November. 
Tuesday— English  examination  for  foreign  students.  (See  chapter  "Admission" 
for  section  on  additional  procedures  for  foreign  students.) 
Wednesday— Registration  for  all  new  and  nonregistered  returning  graduate 
students. 

Thursday— Spring  semester  classes  begin. 
Friday— Late  registration  and  drop/add  from  1:00-3:00  p.m. 
Monday-Wednesday— Drop/add  continues.  Final  date  for  changing  registration 
with  reduction  in  fees.  Final  date  for  changing  enrollment  status  from  full-time 
to  part-time. 

Thursday-Wednesday— Drop/add  continues. 

Wednesday— Final  date  for  changes  in  registration  which  involve  adding  courses. 
No  late  registrations  taken  after  this  date. 

Thursday-Wednesday— Drop/add  continues  for  dropping  course/seminar  regis- 
tration and  adding  equivalent  units  of  ungraded  research. 

Thursday— Final  date  for  filing  with  the  Graduate  School  office  the  intention  to 

receive  an  advanced  degree  in  May. 

Thursday-Friday— Drop/add  continues  for  dropping  course/seminar  registration 

and  adding  equivalent  units  of  ungraded  research  or  residence. 

Friday— Last  day  to  drop  course/seminar  registration  and  add  equivalent  units 

of  ungraded  research  or  residence. 

Friday— Spring  recess  begins. 

Monday— Classes  resume. 

Friday— Final  date  for  submitting  dissertation  for  the  Ph.D.  degree. 

Monday-Tuesday— Graduate  registration  for  fall  semester  1990  and  beginning  of 

registration  for  summer  1990. 

Monday— Final  date  for  submitting  theses  for  master's  degrees. 

Friday— Graduate  classes  end. 

Saturday-Sunday— Graduate  reading  period;  length  of  200-level  course  reading 

period  is  determined  by  the  instructor. 

Friday— Final  day  for  completing  degree  requirements  for  an  advanced  degree 

to  be  awarded  in  May  1990.  All  final  copies  of  examined  and  signed  theses  and 

dissertations  must  be  returned  to  the  Graduate  School  office  by  this  date. 

Monday— Final  examinations  begin. 

Monday— Final  examinations  end. 

Friday— Commencement  begins. 

Sunday— Graduation  exercises.  Conferring  of  degrees. 


University  Administration 


General  Administration 

H.  Keith  H.  Brodie,  M.D,  LL.D,  President 

Phillip  A.  Griffiths,  Ph.D.,  Provost 

Ralph  Snyderman,  M.D,  Chancellor  for  Health  Affairs  and  Dean  of  the  Medical  School 

Eugene  J.  McDonald,  LL.M.,  Executive  Vice-President,  Administration 


William  G.  Anlyan,  M.D.,  D.Sc,  Chancellor 

Joel  L.  Fleishman,  LL.M.,  Senior  Vice-President 

J.  Peyton  Fuller,  A.B.,  Vice-President,  Planning  and  Treasurer 

William  J.  Griffith,  A.B.,  Vice-President  for  Student  Affairs 

John  J.  Piva,  Jr.,  B.A.,  Vice-President  for  Alumni  Affairs  and  Development 

Patricia  C.  Skarulis,  M.A.,  Vice-President  for  Information  Systems 

Andrew  G.  Wallace,  M.D.,  Vice-President  for  Health  Affairs 

John  F.  Adcock,  B.S.,  Vice-President  and  Corporate  Controller 

Tom  A.  Butters,  B.A.,  Vice-President  and  Director  of  Athletics 

N.  Allison  Haltom,  A.B.,  Secretary  of  the  University 

Graduate  School  Administration 

Malcolm  Gillis,  Ph.D.,  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 
A.  Leigh  DeNeef,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Dean 
Donna  Lee  Giles,  A.B.,  Assistant  Dean 
Jacqueline  Looney,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Dean 
Katharine  Pfeiffer,  M.A.,  Assistant  Dean 
Aleane  G.  Webb,  Assistant  Dean 

Executive  Committee  of  the  Graduate  Faculty 

Dean  Malcolm  Gillis 
Associate  Dean  Leigh  DeNeef 

William  Ascher 
Robert  Ashton 
Steven  Baldwin 
Jeffrey  R.  Dawson 
Oliver  Ferguson 
Alfred  Goshaw 
Lynn  Hasher 
Robert  Hochmuth 
Peter  Lange 
Bruce  Lawrence 
Annabel  Patterson 
George  Pearsall 
Salvatore  Pizzo 
Richard  Searles 
Kathleen  Smith 
Larry  Todd 

Graduate  School  Faculty 

(As  of  November  1,  1988.) 

The  date  denotes  the  first  year  of  service  at  Duke  University. 

Mohamed  Bahie  Abou-Donia  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

DolphO.  Adams  (1972),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology  and  Associate  Professor  of  Immunology 

John  H.  Aldrich  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Irving  E.  Alexander  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 

Dimirri  Alexandrou  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Ralph  J.  Alig  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Forest  Economics 

William  K.  Allard  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mathematics 

A.  Tito  Alt  (1961-65;  1967),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

D.  Bernard  Amos  (1962),  M.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Immunology 

Carl  L.  Anderson  (1955),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Nels  C.  Anderson  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Page  A.  W  Anderson  (1973),  M.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Edna  Andrews  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 

Robert  Anholt  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Janis  Antonovics  (1970),  Ph  D.,  James  J.  Wolfe  Professor  of  Botany 

James  W.  Applewhite  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  English 

Mahadev  L.  Apte  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cultural  Anthropology 

Yair  Argon  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Immunology 

Edward  M.  Arnett  (1980),  Ph.D.,  R.  /.  Reynolds  Professor  of  Chemistry 

William  Louis  Ascher  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Alison  Hubbard  Ashton  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 


Robert  H.  Ashton  (1986),  Ph.D.  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Kurt  W.  Back  (1959),  Ph .  D. ,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Sociology 

Lloyd  Richard  Bailey  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Religion,  Old  Testament 

Paul  A.  Baker  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Geology 

Andrew  E.  Balber  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Immunology 

Steven  W.  Baldwin  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Helmy  Hamdollah  Baligh  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Robert  H.  Ballantyne  (1962),  Ed.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Education 

James  David  Barber  (1972),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Political  Science  and  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies 

Roger  C.  Barr(l%9),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 

Elizabeth  C.  Bartlet  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Music 

Robert  Charles  Bartlett  (1976),  M.A.,  Professor  of  Physical  Therapy 

Jorge  Vails  Bartolome  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

Deepak  Bastia  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Microbiology 

Robert  H.  Bates  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Henry  R.  Luce  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Joseph  Battle  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

James  R.  Baumgardner  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

J.  Thomas  Beale  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Hie  Ping  Beall  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Michael  Been  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Robert  D.  Behn  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies 

Robert  Paul  Behringer  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

Adrian  Bejan  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science 

Joanne  M.  Bell  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

Robert  M.  Bell  (1972),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Peter  Brian  Bennett  (1972),  Ph.D.,  D.Sc,  Associate  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Vann  Bennett  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Teresa  Berger  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion,  Ecumenical  Theology 

James  R.  Bettman  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Burlington  Industries  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

William  T.  Bianco  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 

L.  C.  Biedenharn,  Jr.  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Alan  Biermann  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

DarellD.  Bigner  (1972),  M.D,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Sandra  H.  Bigner  (1977),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Edward  George  Bilpuch  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Mrinmay  Biswas  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

Perry  J.  Blackshear  (1985),  M.D,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Kalman  P.  Bland  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Religion 

Donald  B.  Bliss  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science 

J.  J.  Blum  (1962),  Ph.D.,  /antes  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

JohnA.  Board,  Jr.  (1986),  Ph.D.,  AssistantProfessorofElectricalEngineeringandAssistantProfessorofComputerScience 

Mary  T.  Boatwright  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Classical  Studies 

Dani  P.  Bolognesi  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Virology 

Celia  Bonaventura  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Joseph  Bonaventura  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

James  F.  Bonk  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Frank  Borchardt  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

Edward  H.  Bossen  (1972),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Alan  E.  Boudreau  (1989),  Ph.D.  Assistant  Professor  of  Geology 

William  F.  Boulding  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Stephen  G.  Boyce  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Natural  Resources 

John  E.  Boynton  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 

William  D.  Bradford  (1966),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Ralph  Braibanti  (1953),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Eleanor  F.  Branch  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Physical  Therapy 

Robert  N.  Brandon  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Andrew  W.  Mellon  Associate  Professor  of  Philosophy 

Philip  L.  Brock  (1982),  Ph .  D. ,  Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

Arnold  Ralph  Brody  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Pathology 

Caroline  A.  Bruzelius  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Andrew  W.  Mellon  Associate  Professor  of  Art  History 

Robert  Bryant  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Arts  and  Sciences  Professor  of  Mathematics 

James  D.  Bryers  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  and  Associate  Professor 

of  Biochemical  Engineering 
C.  Edward  Buckley  III  (1963),  M.D,  Assistant  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 
Rebecca  Buckley  (1968),  M.D,  Professor  of  Immunology 
Louis  J.  Budd  (1952),  Ph  .D ,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  English 
M.  Vickers  Burdert  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Microbiology 


Donald  S.  Burdick(1962),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of Mathematics  and  Associate Professor of 'Biomedical  Engineering 

Peter  C.  Burger  (1973),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Peter  Burian  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Classical  Studies 

Marian  Burke  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Richard  M.  Burton  (1970),  D.B.A.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Jane  Butt  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Ronald  Richard  Butters  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  English 

Gale  H.  Buzzard  (1957),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Nancv  E.  Cahill  (1987),  J.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Health  Administration 

Clark  R.  Cahow  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Arts  and  Sciences  Professor  of  History 

Dennis  M.  Campbell  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion.  Theology 

Ted  Allen  Campbell  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion,  Church  History 

Enrico  Mario  Camporesi  (1977),  M.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

David  T.  Canon  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Nell  B.  Cant  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Peter  F.  Carbone  (1966),  Ed.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Education 

Marc  Caron  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Robert  C.  Carson  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 

Reginald  D.  Carter  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Matt  Cartmill  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy  and  Professor  of  Anthropology 

Ernesto  Caserta  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

H.  Craig  Casey,  Jr.  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

John  H.  Casseday  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Psychology 

David  Castriota  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assisfanf  Professor  of  Art  History 

John  Cell  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 

Jack  B.  Chaddock  (1966),  Sc.D.,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

William  Chafe  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Alice  Baldwin  Professor  of  History 

Jagdish  Chandra  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Margaret  Cheney  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assisfanf  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Robert  S.  Cherry  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assisfanf  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science 

Donald  B.  Chesnut  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Norman  L.  Christensen,  Jr.  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany  and  Professor  of  Forestry 

Mikael  Ciftan  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Physics 

Elizabeth  Ann  Clark  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion 

Howard  G.  Clark  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering  and  Professor  of  Materials  Science 

Charles  T.  Clotfelter  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Professor  of  Economics 

John  MacKenzie  Clum  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  English 

A.  W.  Coats  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Research  Professor  of  Economics 

Franklin  H.  Cocks  (1972),  Sc.D.,  Professor  of  Materials  Science 

Kalman  J.  Cohen  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Distinguished  Bank  Research  Professor  and  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

John  D.  Coie  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 

Romand  Coles  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Visifing  Assisfanf  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Joel  Colton  (1947),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 

William  K.  Condrell  (1982),  J.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Forestry 

Philip  J.  Cook  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Professor  of  Economics 

Joseph  M.  Corless(1972),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology  and  Associate  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Roger  J.  Corless  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Religion 

Ronald  B.  Corley  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Immunology 

Bruce  Hay  ward  Corliss  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Geology 

Philip  R.  Costanzo  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 

John  D.  Costlow,  Jr.  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 

William  M.  Coughran  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

Sheila  J.  Counce  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Barbara  J.  Crain  (1986),  M .  D. ,  Ph .  D. ,  Assisfanf  Professor  of  Neu  robiology  and  Assistant  Professor  of  Pathology 

James  D.  Crapo  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pathology 

James  Crenshaw  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion.  Old  Testament 

Peter  Cresswell  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Immunology 

Herbert  F  Crovitz  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Psychology 

Alvin  L.  Crumbliss  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Chicita  F.  Culberson  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Botany 

William  Louis  Culberson  (1955),  Ph.D.,  Hugo  L.  Blomquist  Professor  of  Botany 

Ronald  Y.  Cusson  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Frederick  Daniels  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assisfanf  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 

Richard  L.  Daniels  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assisfanf  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

David  G.  Davies  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

James  Norman  Davis  (1972),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 


Lucy  T.  Davis  (1969),  Ed.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Education 

Richard  L.  Davis  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 

Jeffrey  R.  Dawson  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Immunology 

Ruth  S.  Day  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Psychology 

David  C.  Dellinger  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Frank  C.  De  Lucia  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Neil  Barry  de  Marchi  (1971-80;  1983),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

A.  Leigh  DeNeef  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Vincent  W.  Dennis  (1973),  M.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Irving  T.  Diamond  (1958),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Psychology  and  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Joseph  Di  Bona  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Education 

Robert  Dickens  (1949),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Michael  P.  Dieter  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Ecotoxicology 

Richard  T.  Di  Giulio  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Ecotoxicology 

Thomas  A.  DiPrete  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Sociology 

Arif  Dirlik  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 

Apostolos  Dollas  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Virginia  R.  Dominguez  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cultural  Anthropology 

William  J.  Donelan  (1982),  M.S.,  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Health  Administration 

Earl  H.  Dowell  (1983),  Sc.D,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Joanne  Bechta  Dugan  (1985),  Ph.  D. ,  Associate  Professor  of  Computer  Science  and  Research  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical 

Engineering 
Pamela  W.  Duncan  (1979),  M.A.C.T.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Physical  Therapy 
Robert  F.  Durden  (1952),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 
Dan  Durning  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies 
George  F.  Durrow  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Forestry 
Carol  O.  Eckerman  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Psychology 

David  M.Eddy  (1981),  M.D,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of Public  Policy  Studies  and  Professor  of Community  and  Family  Medicine 
Julie  A.  Edell  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Leah  Edelstein  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Lecturer  in  Mathematics 
Eric  L.  Effmann  (1977),  M.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Albert  Eldridge  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Everett  H.  Ellinwood,  Jr.  (1966),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
CarlaS.  Ellis  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Computer  Science 
John  L.  Ellis  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Research  Associate  Professor  of  Computer  Science 
Sharyn  Endow  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 
Peter  C.  English  (1978),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 

Robert  M .  Entman  (1980),  Ph .  D ,  Assistant  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Carl  J.  Erickson  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 
Harold  P.  Erickson  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Robert  P.  Erickson  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology  and  Associate  Professor  of  Neurobiology 
Lawrence  E.  Evans  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 
Janet  J.  Ewald  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  History 
Richard  B.  Fair  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 
Henry  A.  Fairbank  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

David  J.  Falcone  (1975),  M.H.A.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Health  Administration 
Bruce  C.  Faust  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Research  Assistant  Professor  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 
John  Morton  Fein  (1950),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
Michael  T.  Ferejohn  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Philosophy 
Oliver  W.  Ferguson  (1957),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 
Thomas  J.  Ferraro  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 
Bernard  F.  Fetter  (1951),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 
Carol  Fierke  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Olivera  J.  Finn  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Immunology 
Valeria  Finucci  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
Peter  G.  Fish  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Stanley  Fish  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Arts  and  Sciences  Professor  of  English 

David  Fitzpatrick  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Neurobiology  and  Adjunct  Research  Professor  of  Psychology 
Joel  Fleishman  (1971),  LL.M.,  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies 
Donald  J.  Fluke  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 
John  D.  Forsyth  (1978),  D.B.A.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Lloyd  R.  Fortney  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 
Richard  B.  Forward  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 
F.  Douglas  Foster  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Richard  G.  Fox  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cultural  Anthropology 
Jennifer  Francis  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 


Bertram  O.  Fraser-Reid  (1983),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Karen  Z.  Frenzel  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Research  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Irwin  Fridovich  (1958),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Mary  Fulkerson  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion,  Theology 

Jane  Marie  Gaines  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  English 

Thomas  M.  Gallie,  Jr.  (1954-55;  1956),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

Miguel  Garci-Gomez  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

CarlL.  Gardner  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Computer  Science  and  Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Grant  W.  Gardner  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Devendra  P.  Garg  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

David  Barry  Gaspar  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 

Raymond  Gavins  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 

Linda  K.  George  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 

Rhett  Truesdale  George,  Jr.  (1957),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

John  G.  Georgiadis  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science 

Gerald  E.  Gerber  (1962),  Ph .  D ,  Associate  Professor  of  English 

Gary  Gereffi  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Sociology 

John  F.  Geweke  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Kenan  Professor  of  Economics 

Michael  A.  Gillespie  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Nicholas  W.  Gillham  (1968),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Zoology 

Bryan  Gilliam  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Music 

Stephen  Malcolm  Gillis  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Professor  of  Economics 

Kenneth  E.  Glander  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 

RobertF.  Gleckner  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Martin  P.  Golding  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Philosophy 

Craufurd  Goodwin  (1962),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Economics 

Lawrence  C.  Goodwyn  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 

George  D.  Gopen  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  English 

Andrew  Gordon  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 

Ulrich  M.  Gbsele  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Alfred  T.  Goshaw  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Henry  G.  Grabowski  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

Daniel  A.  Graham  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

Doyle  G.  Graham  (1970),  M.D,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Ruth  W.  Grant  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Monica  Green  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  History 

Ronald  C.  Greene  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Warner  Craig  Greene  (1987),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 

Joseph  C.  Greenfield  (1962),  M.D,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

ArnoL.  Greenleaf  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Henry  S.  Greenside  (1986),  Associate  Professor  of  Computer  Science  and  Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

Christopher  Gresov  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Joseph  M.  Grieco  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Phillip  A.  Griffiths  (1983),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Samson  R.  Gross  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Bobby  D.  Guenther  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Physics 

John  W.  Gutknecht  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Janet  Gwyer  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Physical  Therapy 

Donald  B.  Hackel  (I960),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Herbert  Hacker,  Jr.  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Peter  K.  Haff(1988),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

Warren  G.  Hall  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 

William  C.  Hall  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Neurobiology  and  Adjunct  Professor  of  Psychology 

William  E.  Hammond  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 

Moo-Young  Han  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

John  H.  L.  Hansen  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Stuart  Handwerger  (1971),  M.D,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Charles  Morgan  Harman  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Campbell  Harvey  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Lynn  Hasher  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 

Diane  L.  Hatchell  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Stanley  Hauerwas  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion,  Theological  Ethics 

Thomas  M.  Havrilesky  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

Barton  Ford  Haynes  (1980),  M.D,  Associate  Professor  of  Immunology 

RobertG.  Healy  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 

Michael  Hemler  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistanf  Professor  of  Business  Administration 


10 


James  M.  Henderson  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Research  Professor  of  Economics 
Robert  William  Henkens  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Eric  Herbst  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 
Duncan  Heron  (1950),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Geology 
Cynthia  B.  Herrup  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 
Michael  Steven  Hershfield  (1976),  M.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Frederick  Herzog  (1960),  Th.D,  Professor  of  Religion,  Systematic  Theology 
Paula  Higgins  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Music 
Robert  Hill  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Music 
Robert  L.  Hill  (1961),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Hans  Hillerbrand  (1959-1970;  1988),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion 
Michael  Lee  Hines  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Robert  M.  Hochmuth  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science  and  Professor  of  Bio- 
medical Engineering 
Richard  Earl  Hodel  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Peter  C.  Holland  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Psychology 
Mark  A.  Holliday  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Computer  Science 
Edward  V.  Holmes  (1986),  M.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Ole  R.  Holsti  (1974),  Ph.D.,  George  V.  Allen  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Donald  L.  Horowitz  (1980),  LL.M.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Jerry  F.  Hough  (1973),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Political  Science  and  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies 
Calvin  R.  Howell  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Physics 
Tao-shih  Hsieh  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Joel  C.  Huber  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Tomasz  A.  Hueckel  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Sc.D,  Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 
Alexander  Hull  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
William  F.  Hyde  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 
William  L.  Hylander  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 
Raymond  E.  Ideker  (1978),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pathology 
Wallace  Jackson  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 
B.  Jon  Jaeger  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Health  Administration 
Stephen  Jaffe  (1983),  A.M.,  Associate  Professor  of  Music 

Emma  Raff  Jakoi  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Fredric  R.  Jameson  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Comparative  Literature  and  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
Thomas  Janoski  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Sociology 
Peter  W.Jeffs  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Robert  B.  Jennings  (1975),  M.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Pathology 
Randy  L.  Jirtle  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Pathology 
Frans  F.  Jbbsis  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Sheridan  Johns  III  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Charles  B.  Johnson  (1956),  Ed.D,  Associate  Professor  of  Education 
Edward  A.  Johnson  (1963),  M.D,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Thomas  C.  Johnson  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Geology 
Stephen  A.  Johnston  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Botany 
William  W.  Johnston  (1963),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 
William  Thomas  Joines  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 
Wolfgang  Karl  Joklik  (1968),  D.Phil.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 
Buford  Jones  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  English 
Phillip  L.  Jones  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Materials  Science 
Alice  Yaeger  Kaplan  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
Jeffrey  A.  Karson  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Geology 
Bernard  Kaufman  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Russel  Kaufman  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Richard  F.  Kay  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 

Gershon  Kedem  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of Computer  Science  and  Associate  Professor  of Electrical  Engineering 
Susan  Keefe  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion,  Church  History 
Jack  D.  Keene  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Virology 

Thomas  F.  Keller  (1959),  Ph.D.,  R.  J.  Reynolds  Industries  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Allen  C.  Kelley  (1972),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Economics 
AlanC.  Kerckhoff  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 
Robert  B.  Kerr  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 
Alexander  Keyssar  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 
Clinton  Donald  Kilts  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Kent  P.  Kimbrough  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  oj  Economics 
Norman  Kirshner  (1956),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 


11 


Naoki  Kishimoto  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Joseph  Weston  Kitchen,  Jr.  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Herbert  P.  Kitschelt  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Emily  M.  Klein  (1989),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Geology 
Gordon  K.  Klintworth  (1964),  M.D,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology 
Peter  H.  Klopfer  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 

Josiah  Doss  Knight  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 
KennethR.  Knoerr  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Forest  Meteorology  and  Associate  Professor  of  Botany 
John  A.  Koepke  (1979),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 
Bruce  D.  Kohorn  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Botany 
Claudia  Koonz  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 

J.MailenKootsey  (1971-76;  1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of Cell  Biology  and  Research  Associate  Professor  of Com- 
puter Science 
Allan  Kornberg  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Wesley  A.  Kort  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion 
David  Paul  Kraines  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Randall  A.  Kramer  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Resource  Economics 
Wilmer  L.  Kranich  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 
Nicholas  Michael  Kredich  (1968),  M.D,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Irwin  Kremen  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 
Kenneth  N.  Kreuzer  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Microbiology 
William  R.  Krigbaum  (1952),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Anne  O.  Krueger  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Distinguished  Professor  of  Economics 
Cynthia  Moreton  Kuhn(1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Bruce  R.  Kuniholm  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Professor  of  History 
Thomas  A.  Kunkel  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  in  the  Genetics  Program 
Leon  Lack  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

Helen  F.  Ladd  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Adjunct  Professor  of  Economics 
Martin  Lakin  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 
Michael  K.  Lamvik  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Kenneth  C.  Land  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 
Peter  Lange  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Thomas  A.  Langford  (1956),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion,  Systematic  Theology 
Daniel  M.  Lapadula  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Dan  Laughhunn  (1968-75;  1976),  D.B.A.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Cathy  C.  Laurie  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Zoology 
Gregory  F.  Lawler  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Bruce  B.  Lawrence  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion 
Harold  E.  Layton  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Richard  H.  Leach  (1955),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Robert  Lefkowitz  (1973),  M.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Ann  LeFurgey  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Frank  Lentricchia  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 
Warren  Lerner  (1961),  Ph.D.  Professor  of  History 

Steven  Levine  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Visiting  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Arie  Y.  Lewin  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Darrell  Vincent  Lewis  (1978),  M.D,  Assistant  Professor  of  Neurobiology 
Melvyn  Lieberman  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Chia-Sheng  Lin  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Neurobiology 
C.  Eric  Lincoln  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology  of  Religion 
Frederick  W.  Lindahl  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 
Elwood  A.  Linney  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 
Joseph  Lipscomb,  Jr.  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies 
Daniel  A.  Livingstone  (1956),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Zoology 
John  E.  Lochman  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 

Charles  H .  Lochmuller  (1969),  Ph.  D. ,  Professor  of  Chemistry  and  Professor  of  Biochemical  Engineering 
Gregory  R.  Lockhead  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 
Timothy  J.  Lomperis  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Donald  W.  Loveland  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science 
John  Charles  Lucchesi  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  in  the  Genetics  Program 
John  G.  Lundberg  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Zoology 
John  M.  McCann  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Kevin  F.  McCardle  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Kenneth  S.  McCarty  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Kenneth  Scott  McCarty,  Jr.  (1976),  M.D,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pathology 
David  R.  McClay  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of Zoology  and  Professor  of  Immunology 


12 


John  B.  McConahay  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies 
James  H.  McElhaney  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 
Marjorie  McElroy  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 
Linda  McGown  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Thomas  J.  Mcintosh  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Margaret  A.  McKean  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Thomas  J.  McManus  (1961),  M.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
James  O.  McNamara  (1973),  M.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Andrew  T.  McPhail  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Richard  A.  MacPhail  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry 
George  L.  Maddox,  Jr.  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 

Wesley  A.  Magat  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  in  Puaua  School  of Business  and  Associate  Professor  of Public  Poli- 
cy Studies 
Lynn  A.  Maguire  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Resource  Ecology 
Edward  P.  Mahoney  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Philosophy 
Terry  Malone  (1987),  Ed.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Physical  Therapy 
Lazaro  J.  Mandel  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Kenneth  G.  Manton  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Research  Professor  of  Demographic  Studies 
Luigi  Manzetti  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Visiting  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 
Peter  N.  Marinos  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering  and  Professor  of  Computer  Science 
George  Marsden  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion,  History  of  Christianity  in  America 
Gail  R.  Marsh  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 
Robert  C.  Marshall  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Economics 
Dale  Martin  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion 
HishamZ.  Massoud  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 
Seymour  Mauskopf  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 
Mary  E.  Mayesky  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Education 
Joseph  B.  Mazzola  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Miguel  A.  Medina,  Jr.  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 
Elgin  W.  Mellown,  Jr.  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  English 
Robert  J.  Melosh  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 
Daniel  B.  Menzel  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Richard  S.  Metzgar  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Immunology 
Michael  J.  Meurer  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 
Johannes  Horst  Max  Meyer  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 
Carol  L.  Meyers  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Religion 
Eric  M.  Meyers  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion 
George  Michalopoulos  (1977),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology 
Agnes  K.  L.  Michels  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Classical  Studies 
Martin  Miller  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 

Sara  Elizabeth  Miller  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Microbiology 
Elliott  Mills  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology  and  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Brent  Drennen  Mishler  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Botany 
Thomas  G.  Mitchell  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mycology 
Paul  L.  Modrich  (1976),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Michael  Moon  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  English 
John  Kevin  Moore  (1984),  J.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Health  Administration 
John  W.  Moore  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Neurobiology 
Lawrence  C.  Moore,  Jr.  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Michael  Moore  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
David  R.  Morrison  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
MichaelM.  Morton  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  German 
Michael  Moses  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  English 
Montrose  J.  Moses  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Valentin  Mudimbe  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
George  C.  Myers  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 
Gopalan  Nadathur  (1986),  Assistant  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

J.  Victor  Nadler  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pharmacology  and  Associate  Professor  of  Neurobiology 
Dana  W.  Nance  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Sydney  Nathans  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 
Robert  F.  Nau  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Thomas  H.  Naylor  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 
David  Needham  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 
Charles  B.  Nemeroff  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Kristen  B.  Neuschel  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  History 
Joseph  Nevins  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 


13 


Francis  Newton  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Latin  in  Classical  Studies 

Robert  Bruce  Nicklas  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 

James  Edward  Niedel  (1986),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

Frederik  Nijhout  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 

Mary  M.  Nijhout  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Lecturer  in  Zoology 

Emerson  Niou  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Loren  W.  Nolte  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering  and  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 

Stephen  Nowicki  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Zoology 

Holger  O.  Nygard  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

John  F.  Oates  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Ancient  History  in  Classical  Studies 

Jean  Fox  CBarr  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Political  Science 

William  M.  CBarr  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cultural  Anthropology  and  Professor  of  Sociology 

Fearghus  O'Foghludha  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Physics 

Seog  Hwan  Oh  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Physics 

Angela  O'Rand  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Sociology 

Ram  Oren  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 

Linda  Orr  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

Robert  T.  Osborn  (1954),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion 

Charles  Barry  Osmond  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Arts  and  Sciences  Professor  of  Botany 

Suydam  Osterhout  (1959),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Microbiology 

Michael  C.  Ostrowski  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Virology 

Rafael  Osuna  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

Athos  Ottolenghi  (1959),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

George  M.  Padilla  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Ellis  B.  Page  (1979),  Ed.D,  Professor  of  Education 

David  L.  Paletz  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Richard  A.  Palmer  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Richard  G.  Palmer  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

Erdman  B.  Palmore  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 

Vassilis  G.  Papanicolaou  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

William  Leslie  Pardon  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Peter  Parks  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 

Harry  B.  Partin  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Religion 

Eric  I.  Pas  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 

Merrell  Lee  Patrick  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

Annabel  M.  Patterson  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

David  T.  Patterson  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Botany 

Lee  Patterson  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

John  W.  Payne  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

George  Wilbur  Pearsall  (1964),  Sc.D,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science  and  Professor  of  Public 

Policy  Studies 
J.  Jeffrey  Peirce  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 
Gustavo  Perez-Firmat  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
Ronald  D.  Perkins  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Geology 
Melvin  K.  H.  Peters  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Religion 
David  West  Peterson  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Henry  J.  Petroski  (1980),  Ph.D,  Associate  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 
Donna  Rae  Philbrick  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
David  J.  Pickup  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Virology 
Orrin  Pilkey  (1965),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Geology 

Theo  C.  Pilkington  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering  and  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 
David  Stephen  Pisetsky  (1978),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Immunology 
Salvatore  V.  Pizzo  (1976),  M.D,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Robert  Plonsey  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering  and  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
Richard  P.  Polniaszek  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Deborah  Pope  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  English 
Joseph  A .  Porter  (1980),  Ph .  D. ,  Associate  Professor  of  English 
Ned  Allen  Porter  (1969),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Carl  J.  Posy  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Philosophy 
Philip  Pratt  (1966),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 
Vernon  G.  Pratt  (1986),  M.F.A.,  Associate  Professor  of  Art 

David  Eugene  Price  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Political  Science  and  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies 
Reynolds  Price  (1958),  DLitt.,  Professor  of  English 
Michael  J.  Prisant  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Stefan  Pugh  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Slavic  Languages 
Martha  Putallaz  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Psychology 


14 


Alician  Veronica  Quinlan  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Associate  Professor  of  En- 
vironmental Engineering 

Naomi  Quinn  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cultural  Anthropology 

Denis  Raczkowski  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

K.  V,  Rajagopalan  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Dietolf  Ramm  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Research  Associate  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

Joseph  S.  Ramus  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 

Dale  B.  J.  Randall  (1957),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Ann  Marie  Rasmussen  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

Mark  D.  Rausher  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Zoology 

Kenneth  H.  Reckhow  (1980),  Ph  .D. ,  Associate  Professor  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  and  Associate  Profes- 
sor of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 

William  M.  Reddy  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 

Michael  Charles  Reed  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Michael  K.  Reedy  (1969),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

William  Reichert  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of Biomedical  Engineering  and  Assistant  Professor  of Biochemical 
Engineering 

JohnH.  Reif  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

Keith  Arnold  Reimer  (1975),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pathology 

Michael  A.  Resnick  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  in  the  Genetics  Program 

Jacqueline  A.  Reynolds  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

John  F.  Richards  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 

Curtis  J.  Richardson  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Resource  Ecology 

David  Claude  Richardson  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Jane  Richardson  (1970),  M.A.T.,  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Lawrence  Richardson,  Jr.  (1966),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Latin  in  Classical  Studies 

Russell  Richey  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Research  Professor  of  Religion,  Church  History 

Daniel  D.  Richter  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 

William  E.  Ricks  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Stephen  J.  Riederer  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 

Kent  J.  Rigsby  (1971),  Society  of  Fellows  (Harvard),  Associate  Professor  of  Classical  Studies 

Mary  Ellen  Riordan  (1978),  M.S.,  Assistant  Clinical  Professor  of  Physical  Therapy 

Nathan  Russell  Roberson  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Darryl  Lamont  Roberts  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 

J.  David  Robertson  (1966),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Hugh  G.  Robinson  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Sandra  P.  Robinson  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion 

Thomas  Robisheaux  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  History 

Herman  R.  Robl  (1959-64;  1966),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Physics 

Marshall  R.  Roderick  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Philosophy 

Alex  Roland  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 

James  L.  Rolleston  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

Elaine  Romanelli  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration  and  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  So- 
ciology 

Donald  J.  Rose(1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science  and  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Bruce  R.  Rosendahl  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Geology 

Kathleen  A.  Ross  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

Wendell  F.  Rosse  (1966),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Immunology 

Susan  Roth  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Psychology 

Virginia  Louise  Roth  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Zoology 

David  C.  Rubin  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 

Joan  V.  Ruderman  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology  and  Associate  Professor  of  Microbiology 

Jeffrey  Rummel  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Clyde  de  Loache  Ryals  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Harvey  J.  Sage  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry  and  Associate  Professor  of  Immunology 

Alfred  Paul  Sanfilippo  (1979),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pathology 

David  H.  Sanford  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Philosophy 

Leslie  D.  Saper  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Rakesh  Sarin  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

RobertN.  Sawyer  (1976),  Ed.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Education 

Frederick  H.  Schachat  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

David  G.  Schaeffer  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Saul  M.  Schanberg  (1967),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

Susan  S.  Schiffman  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Psychology 

William  H.  Schlesinger  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 

David  M.  Schlossman  (1985),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biochemistry 


15 


Klaus  Schmidt-Koenig  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Zoology 

Chadmark  L.  Schoen  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Stanley  Clifford  Schold,  Jr.  (1978),  M.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Pathology 

David  W.  Schomberg  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Regina  Schwartz  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  English 

Rochelle  D.  Schwartz  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

Laura  Schweitzer  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Anne  Firor  Scott  (1961),  Ph.D.,  William  K.  Boyd  Professor  of  History 

Julius  S.  Scott  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  History 

William  E.  Scott  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 

Richard  A.  Scoville  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Richard  B.  Searles  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 

EveK.  Sedgwick  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  English 

Tilman  Seebass  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Music 

Hilliard  Foster  Seigler  (1967),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Immunology 

Edward  J.  Shaughnessy,  Jr.  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Barbara  Ramsay  Shaw  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry 

John  Shelburne  (1973),  M.D,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Marion  L.  Shepard  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Materials  Science 

Blair  H.  Sheppard  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

Sudhir  Shetty  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 

Joseph  R.  Shoenfield  (1952),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Stephanie  Sieburth  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

James  N.  Siedow  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 

Lewis  M.  Siegel  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Alexander  Silbiger  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Music 

Sidney  Arthur  Simon  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

ElwynL.  Simons  (1977),  Ph.D.,  D.Phil.,  JamesB.  Duke  Professor  of Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 

Ida  Harper  Simpson  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 

Kay  H.  Singer  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 

William  R.  Sizemore  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Forestry 

Theodore  Alan  Slotkin  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

Barbara  Herrnstein  Smith  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Braxton  Craven  Professor  of  Comparative  Literature  and  English 

CarolA.  Smith  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Cultural  Anthropology 

D.  Moody  Smith  (1965),  Ph.D.,  George  Washington  Ivey  Professor  of  New  Testament  Interpretation 

David  A.  Smith  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 

Donald  S.  Smith  II  (1961),  M.H.A.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Health  Administration 

GroverC.  Smith  (1952),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Harmon  L.  Smith  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion,  Moral  Theology 

Joel  Smith  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 

Kathleen  K.  Smith  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 

Peter  Smith  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Steven  Smith  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Assistant  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Helen  Solterer  (1986),  Assistant  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

George  G.  Somjen  (1963),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology  and  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Joachim  R.  Sommer(1957),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology  and  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Madison  S.  Spach  (1958),  M.D,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

John  R.  Spencer  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Art  History 

Kenneth  I.  Spenner  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Sociology 

Leonard  Spicer  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Thomas  Arthur  Spragens,  Jr.  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Political  Science 

Carol  B.  Stack  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of PublicPolicyStudiesandAdjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Anthropology 

John  E.  R.  Staddon  (1967),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Psychology,  Professor  of  Neurobiology,  and  Professor  of 

Zoology 
Richard  Staelin  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Edward  and  Rose  Donnell  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
William  J.  Stambaugh  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Forest  Pathology 
Dennis  Keith  Stanley  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Classical  Studies 
Charles  Franklin  Starmer,  Jr.  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science 
Deborah  A.  Steege  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
Harold  K.  Steen  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 
David  Curtis  Steinmetz  (1971),  Th.D.,  Professor  of  Religion,  Church  History  and  Doctrine 
Jens  A.  Stephan  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Mark  Andrew  Stern  (1985),  Ph .  D. ,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Philip  Stewart  (1972),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
Donald  E.  Stone  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 


16 


Boyd  R.  Strain  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 

Victor  H.  Strandberg  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Harold  Carl  Strauss  (1972),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 

Richard  A  Strelitz  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Geology 

Howard  Austin  Strobel  (1948),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Norman  C.  Strole  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Akio  Sugino  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  of  Genetics 

Judy  Sund  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Art  History 

J.  Boiling  Sullivan  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Kenneth  Surin  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Religion 

John  P.  Sutherland  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Zoology 

Judith  Swain  (1987),  M.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Microbiology  and  Immunology 

James  A.  Swenberg  (1979),  D.V.M.,  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Pathology 

Avis  L.  Sylvia  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Daniel  B.  Szyld  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

Teh  Yu  Tan  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Materials  Science 

George  E.  Tauchen  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

Roger  Trans-Son  Tay  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Research  Assistant  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science 

Kenneth  Allen  Taylor  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

Robert  Taylor  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Health  Administration 

John  J.  TePaske  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 

Marcel  Tetel  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

John  E.  Thomas  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Physics 

Jean-Jacques  Thomas  (1981),  Doctorat  de  3e  Cycle,  Associate  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 

Robert  J.  Thompson,  Jr.  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Psychology 

Fredrick  L.  Thurstone  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 

Edward  A.  Tiryakian  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology 

R.  Larry  Todd  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Music 

Jane  Tompkins  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Robert  E.  Toomey  (1980),  LL.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Health  Administration 

Marianna  Torgovnick  (1981),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 

Edward  Tower  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

Gregg  E.  Trahey  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 

Vladimir  G.  Treml  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

Kishor  S.  Trivedi  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Computer  Science  and  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

George  Truskey  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering  and  Assistant  Professor  of  Biochemical 

Engineering 
Vance  Tucker  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 
Clare  Tufts  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Lecturer  in  Romance  Languages 
William  Turner  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Religion,  Theology  and  Black  Church  Studies 

E.  Lee  Tyrey  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Neurobiology 

Senol  Utku  (1970),  Sc.D,  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering  and  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

Marcy  K.  Uyenoyama  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Zoology 

Stephanos  Venakides  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics 

John  M.  Vernon  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 

P.  Aarne  Vesilind  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 

Dan  O.  Via,  Jr.  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion,  New  Testament 

Steven  Vigna  (1987),  Ph.D. ,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

RytasJ.  Vilgalys  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Botany 

Elia  E.  Villanueva  (1969),  A.M.,  Associate  Professor  of  Physical  Therapy 

S.  Viswanathan  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Business  Administration 

F.  Stephen  Vogel  (1961),  M.D,  Professor  of  Pathology 
Steven  Vogel  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 

Robin  T.  Vollmer  (1975),  M.D,  Assistant  Clinical  Professor  of  Pathology 

Olaf  T.  von  Ramm  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering 

Robert  A.  Wagner  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Computer  Science 

Geoffrey  Wainwright  (1983),  Dr.Theol.,  Professor  of  Religion,  Systematic  Theology 

Stephen  A.  Wainwright  (1964),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Zoology 

William  D  Walker  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Andrew  G.  Wallace  (1964),  M.D,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 

T.  Dudley  Wallace  (1974),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Economics 

Lise  Wallach  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Psychology 

Michael  A.  Wallach  (1962-72;  1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 

Richard  L.  Walter  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 

Paul  P.  Wang  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Calvin  L.  Ward  (1952),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 


17 


Frances  Ellen  Ward  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Immunology 

Bruce  W.  Wardropper  (1962),  Ph.D.,  William  Hanes  Wannamaker  Professor  of  Romance  Languages 
Seth  L.  Warner  (1955),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mathematics 
David  Grant  Warren  (1975),  J.D.,  Professor  of  Health  Administration 
W.  David  Watkins  (1984),  M.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Robert  E.  Webster  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 
E.  Roy  Weintraub  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 
Morris  Weisfeld  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Mathematics 
Jay  M.  Weiss  (1984),  Ph  D. ,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Psychology 
Henry  R.  Weller  (1978),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Physics 
Robert  P.  Weller  (1980),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Anthropology 
Richard  L.  Wells  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry 
Robert  E.  Whalev  (1986),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Annabel  Wharton  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Art 
Robert  W.  Wheat  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Microbiology 
Richard  A.  White  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 
Richard  Whorton  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Carol  J.  Wikstrand  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Pathology 
Henry  M.  Wilbur  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Zoology 
Robert  L.  Wilbur  (1957),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Botany 

Pelham  Wilder,  Jr.  (1949),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Chemistry  and  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Hilda  Pope  Willett  (1948),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Microbiology 
George  W.  Williams  (1957),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 
Kenny  J.  Williams  (1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  English 
Peter  Fredric  Williams  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Music 
Robert  Sanders  Williams  (1987),  M.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
James  F.  Wilson  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Civil  Engineering 
John  Wilson  (1968),  D.Phil.,  Associate  Professor  of  Sociology 
Thomas  George  Wilson  (1959),  Sc.D,  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 
Wilkie  Andrew  Wilson,  Jr.  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  of  Pharmacology 
Robert  G.  Winfree  (1974),  M.A.,  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  of  Health  Administration 
Cliff  W.  Wing,  Jr.  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Psychology 
Robert  L.  Winkler  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Business  Administration 
Orval  S.  Wintermute  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion 
Ronald  Witt  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 
Benjamin  Wittels  (1961),  M.D.,  Professor  of  Pathology 

Myron  L.  Wolbarsht  (1968),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biomedical  Engineering  and  Associate  Professor  of  Neurobiology 
Robert  L.  Wolpert  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Research  Associate  Professor  of  Statistics 
Ronald  C.  Wong  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Electrical  Engineering 
Peter  H.  Wood  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History 
Donald  Wright  (1967),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 
Patricia  Chappie  Wright  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 
Duncan  Yaggy  (1980),  Ph.D. ,  Professor  of  Public  Management  in  Public  Policy  Studies  and  Adjunct  Associate  Profes- 
sor of  Health  Administration 
William  E.  Yarger  (1971),  M.D,  Assistant  Professor  of  Cell  Biology 
William  P.  Yohe  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Economics 
Charles  R.  Young  (1954),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History 
John  G.  Younger  (1974),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Classical  Studies 
Michael  Rod  Zalutsky  (1986),  Ph.D.  Assistant  Professor  of  Pathology 
Gary  A.  Zarkin  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Economics 
Peter  Zwadyk,  Jr.  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pathology 

Professors  Emeriti 

John  Richard  Alden  (1955),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

Lewis  Edward  Anderson  (1936),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Botany 

Roger  Fabian  Anderson  (1950),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Entomology 

Joseph  Randle  Bailey  (1946),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Zoology 

Frank  Baker  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  English  Church  History 

M.  Margaret  Ball  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 

Katharine  May  Banham  (1946),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Psychology 

William  Waldo  Beach,  (1946),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Christian  Ethics 

Frederick  Bernheim  (1930),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Pharmacology 

MaryL.  C.  Bernheim  (1930),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Biochemistry 

William  Dwight  Billings  (1952),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Botany 

Cazlyn  Green  Bookhout  (1935),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Zoology 

18 


Lloyd  J.  Borstelmann  (1953),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Psychology 

Benjamin  Boyce  (1950),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

David  G.  Bradley  (1949),  Ph.D.  Professor  Emeritus  of  Religion 

Charles  Kilgo  Bradsher  (1939),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

Martin  Bronfenbrenner  (1971),  Ph.D.,  William  R.  Kenan,  fr.  Professor  Emeritus  of  Economics 

Earl  Ivan  Brown  II  (1960),  Ph.D.,  /.  A.  Jones  Professor  Emeritus  of  Civil  Engineering 

Frances  Campbell  Brown  (1931),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

Edwin  H.  Cady  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Andrew  W.  Mellon  Professor  Emeritus  in  the  Humanities 

Leonard  Carlitz  (1932),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 

William  H.  Cartwright  (1951),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

Frederic  N.  Cleaveland  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 

Robert  Taylor  Cole  (1935),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Research  Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 

Joel  Colton  (1947),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

Robert  Merle  Colver  (1953),  Ed.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

Robert  E.  Cushman  (1945),  Ph.D.,  Research  Professor  Emeritus  of  Systematic  Theology 

Bingham  Dai  (1943),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Psychology 

WilliamD.  Davies(1966),  D.D.,  F.B.A.,  George  Washington  Ivey  Professor  Emeritus  of  Advanced  Studiesand  Research 

in  Christian  Origins 
Eugene  Davis  Day  (1962),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Immunology 
Neal  Dow  (1934),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Romance  Languages 
Francis  George  Dressel  (1929),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 

Kenneth  Lindsay  Duke  (1940),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 
Howard  Easley  (1930),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 
William  Whitfield  Elliott  (1925),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 
Ernest  Elsevier  (1950),  M.S.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mechanical  Engineering 
John  Wendell  Everett  (1932),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Neuwbiology 
Arthur  Bowles  Ferguson  (1939),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 
Wallace  Fowlie  (1964),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Romance  Languages 
John  Hope  Franklin  (1981),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 
Ernestine  Friedl  (1973),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Anthropology 
William  J.  Furbish  (1954),  M.S.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Geology 
W.  Scott  Gehman,  Jr.  (1954),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Psychology  in  Education 
Clarence  Gohdes  (1930),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 
Walter  Gordy  (1946),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics 
John  R.  Gregg  (1957),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Zoology 
Kazimierz  Grzybowski  (1967),  S.J.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 
Hugh  Marshall  Hall,  Jr.  (1952),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 
Louise  Hall  (1931),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Architecture 

John  Hamilton  Hallowell  (1942),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 
Jerome  S.  Harris  (1936),  M.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Biochemistry 
William  S.  Heckscher  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Benjamin  N.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Art 
Henry  Hellmers  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Botany  and  Professor  Emeritus  of  Forestry 
Stuart  C.  Henry  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  American  Christianity 

Marcus  Edwin  Hobbs  (1935),  Ph.D.,  University  Distinguished  Service  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 
Irving  B.  Holley,  Jr.  (1947),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 
Everett  H.  Hopkins  (1961),  M.A.,  LL.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 
Wanda  S.  Hunter  (1947),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Zoology 
Allan  S.  Hurlburt  (1956),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 
Benjamin  A.  Jayne  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Forestry 
Marianna  Jenkins  (1948),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Art 

Bronislas  de  Leval  Jezierski  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 
Terry  W.  Johnson,  Jr.  (1954),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Botany 
Brady  Rimbey  Jordan  (1927),  Ph  D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Romance  Languages 
Gregory  A.  Kimble  (1952-68;  1977),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Psychology 
Paul  Jackson  Kramer  (1931),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Botany 
William  R.  Krigbaum  (1952),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 
Magnus  Jan  Krynski  (1966),  Ph.  D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 
Wladyslaw  W.  Kulski  (1963),  Ph.D.,  LL.D,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Russian  Affairs 
Weston  LaBarre  (1946),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Anthropology 
Creighton  Lacy  (1953),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  World  Christianity 

Harold  Walter  Lewis  (1946),  Ph.D.,  University  Distinguished  Service  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physics 
H.  Gregg  Lewis  (1975),  Ph.D.,  Profesor  Emeritus  of  Economics 
John  L.  Lievsay  (1962),  Ph.D.,  lames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 
L.  Sigfred  Linderoth,  Jr.  (1965),  M.E.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mechanical  Engineering 
JohnC.  McKinney  (1957),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Sociology 
John  Nelson  Macduff  (1956),  M.M.E.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mechanical  Engineering 


19 


Sidney  David  Markman  (1947),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Art  History  and  Professor  Emeritus  of  Archaeology 

Earl  George  Mueller  ( 1945),  Ph .  D ,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Art 

Roland  E.  Murphy  (1967-68;  1971),  S.T.D.,  George  Washington  Ivey  Professor  Emeritus  of  Old  Testament 

Francis  Joseph  Murray  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Mathematics 

Aubrey  Willard  Naylor  (1952),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Botany 

Yasuhiko  Nozaki  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Biochemistry 

JamesG.  Osborne  (1961),  B.S.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Forest  Biometry 

Harrv  Ashton  Owen,  Jr.  (1951),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Electrical  Engineering 

Harold  Talbot  Parker  (1939),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

Lewis  Patton  (1926),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

William  Bernard  Peach  (1951),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Philosophy 

Ray  C.  Perry  (1937),  Ph.D.,  LL.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Church  History 

Olan  Lee  Petty  (1952),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

Leland  R.  Phelps  (1961),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

Jane  Philpott  (1951),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Botany  and  Professor  Emeritus  of  Wood  Anatomy 

Jacques  C.  Poirier  (1955),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

William  H.  Poteat  (1960),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  if  Religion  and  Professor  Emeritus  of  Comparative  Studies 

Jack  J.  Preiss  (1959),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Sociology 

Richard  A.  Preston  (1965),  Ph.D.,  William  K.  Boyd  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

James  Ligon  Price,  Jr.  (1952),  Professor  Emeritus  of  Religion 

Louis  DuBose  Quin  (1957),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

Theodore  Ropp  (1938),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

Mabel  F.  Rudisill  (1948),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

Charles  Richard  Sanders  (1937),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  English 

Lloyd  Saville  (1946),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Economics 

Harold  Schiffman  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Psychology 

Knut  Schmidt-Nielsen  (1952),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physiology  and  Zoology 

William  H.  Simpson  (1930),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Political  Science 

Joseph  John  Spengler  (1934),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Economics 

William  Franklin  Stinespring  (1936),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Old  Testament  and  Semitics 

W.  A.  Stumpf  (1948),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

Elizabeth  Read  Sunderland  (1939-42;  1943),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Art 

Charles  Tanford  (1960),  Ph.D.,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Physiology 

Edgar  Tristram  Thompson  (1935),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Sociology 

James  Nardin  Truesdale  (1930),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Greek 

Richard  L.  Tuthill  (1953),  Ed.D,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Economic  Geography 

Patrick  R.  Vincent  (1954),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Romance  Languages 

Warren  Chase  Vosburgh  (1928),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Chemistry 

Richard  Lyness  Watson,  Jr.  (1939),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

Henry  Weitz  (1950),  Ed.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Education 

Paul  Welsh  (1948),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Philosophy 

Karl  Milton  Wilbur  (1946),  Ph.D.,  James  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Zoology 

William  Hailey  Willis  (1963),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Greek  in  Classical  Studies 

Max  A.  Woodbury  (1966),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Computer  Science 

Robert  Hilliard  Woody  (1929),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  History 

James  G.  Yoho  (1984),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Forestry 

Franklin  W.  Young  (1944-50;  1968),  Amos  Ragan  Keams  Professor  Emeritus  of  New  Testament  and  Patristic  Studies 


20 


To  the  Prospective  Graduate  Student 


A  graduate  school  is  where  excellence  is  established  in  a 
university.  At  Duke,  the  Graduate  School  is  where  the  two  essen- 
tial functions  of  a  university,  teaching  and  research,  truly  come 
together.  Over  the  years  Duke's  strength  at  the  graduate  level  has 
grown  in  all  the  main  fields  of  knowledge.  The  nineteen-eighties 
have  been  particularly  fruitful  years  for  recruitment  of  faculty,  es- 
tablishment of  new  programs,  and  attraction  of  outstanding  stu- 
dents. The  faculty  enjoys  international  distinction.  The  laborato- 
ries, libraries,  and  computer  facilities  are  among  the  very  best.  Yet 
the  Graduate  School  remains  small  enough  so  that  personal  con- 
tact is  a  central  feature  of  our  programs,  and  fruitful  interaction 
across  disciplines  is  a  common  experience,  both  for  faculty  and 
students. 

For  the  student  in  search  of  a  strong  graduate  education,  Duke 
University  has  much  to  offer.  This  is  a  community  in  which  minds 
and  ideas  grow.  We  provide  training  for  many  careers,  but  we  seek 
also  to  foster  personal  creativity  and  to  provide  stimulating  yet 
congenial  surroundings  for  productive  education  and  research. 

The  following  pages  provide  the  information  you  require  in 
making  the  important  choice  of  the  course  of  your  graduate  edu- 
cation. We  look  forward  to  welcoming  you  to  the  Duke  commu- 
nity of  scholars. 


Malcolm  Gillis 


Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 


21 


Academic  and  Cooperative  Programs 


Department  or  Program 

Art  and  Art  History 
Asian-Pacific  Studies 

Degrees  Offered 

A.M. 

Page 

59 
189 

Biochemistry 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 

Botany 

Business  Administration 

Ph.D 

Ph.D. 

A.M.,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 

Ph.D. 

62 
63 
65 
69 

Canadian  Studies 

— 

192 

Cell  and  Molecular  Biology 

— 

71 

Cell  Biology 
Chemistry 
Classical  Studies 

Ph.D. 
Ph.D. 
Ph.D. 

72 
76 
78 

Computer  Science 
Cultural  Anthropology 
Economics 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 

Ph.D. 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 

81 
85 

87 

Education 

— 

92 

Engineering: 
Biochemical 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 

191 

Biomedical 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 

94 

Civil  and  Environmental 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 

97 

Electrical 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 

102 

Mechanical  and  Materials  Science 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 

106 

English 
Forestry 
Genetics 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 
A.M.,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 

110 
113 
119 

Geology 
German 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 
A.M. 

121 
123 

Health  Administration 

M.H.A. 

124 

History 
Humanities 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 

A.M. 

126 
130 

Islamic  and  Arabian  Studies 

— 

193 

Latin  American  Studies 

— 

193 

Liberal  Studies 

A.M. 

130 

Literature 

Ph.D. 

131 

Marine  Sciences 

— 

132 

Mathematics 

A.M.,  M.S.,  Ph.D. 

135 

Medical  History 
Medical  Science 

— 

195 
195 

Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies 

— 

139 

Degrees  Offered       23 


Department  or  Program 

Degrees  Offered 

Page 

Microbiology  and  Immunology 

Ph.D. 

140 

Music 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 

143 

Neurobiology 

Ph.D. 

145 

Pathology 

M.S.,  Ph.D. 

146 

Pharmacology 

Ph.D. 

148 

Philosophy 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 

150 

Physical  Therapy 

M.S. 

152 

Physics 

Ph.D. 

154 

Political  Science 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 

156 

Psychology 

Ph.D. 

162 

Public  Policy  Studies 

A.M. 

166 

Religion 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 

169 

Romance  Languages 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 

178 

Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 

— 

181 

Sociology 

A.M.,  Ph.D. 

181 

Toxicology 

— 

184 

Women's  Studies 

— 

185 

Zoology 

Ph.D. 

186 

24       Academic  and  Cooperative  Programs 


Degrees  Offered       25 


Admission 


Degree  and  Nondegree  Admission 

All  students  seeking  a  graduate  degree  from  Duke  University  must  formally  be  ad- 
mitted to  the  Graduate  School.  Prerequisites  for  admission  include  a  bachelor's  degree 
(or  the  equivalent)  from  an  accredited  institution  and  satisfactory  scores  on  the  Gradu- 
ate Record  Examination.  Individual  departments  may  specify  additional  prerequisites, 
which  can  be  found  in  the  chapter  on  "Courses  of  Instruction." 

Students  who  do  not  intend  to  earn  an  advanced  degree  at  Duke,  but  who  wish  to 
take  graduate  courses,  may  apply  for  nondegree  admission.  Such  admission  is  granted 
in  three  different  categories:  (1)  admission  as  a  regular  nondegree  student  with  a  partic- 
ular department;  (2)  admission  as  a  special  nondegree  student  without  departmental  af- 
filiation through  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education;  and  (3)  admission  as  an  unclassi- 
fied student  in  the  summer  session  only. 

Credits  earned  by  nondegree  students  in  graduate  courses  taken  at  Duke  before  full 
admission  to  the  Graduate  School  may  be  carried  over  into  a  graduate  degree  program 
if  (1)  the  action  is  recommended  by  the  student's  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  and  ap- 
proved by  the  Dean,  (2)  the  work  is  not  more  than  two  years  old,  (3)  the  amount  of  such 
credit  does  not  exceed  12  units,  and  (4)  the  work  has  received  grades  of  G  or  better. 

Students  who  have  discontinued  a  program  of  degree  work  at  Duke  must  apply  for 
readmission  to  the  Graduate  School.  Those  who  discontinue  study  prior  to  completing 
a  degree  must,  by  letter,  request  permission  of  the  Dean  to  be  readmitted  to  the  degree 
program;  those  who  discontinue  study  after  earning  a  master's  degree  must  file  a  new 
application  for  the  doctoral  program. 

Admission  Procedures* 

A  student  seeking  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  should  obtain  an  application 
packet  from  the  Graduate  School  Admissions  Office.  This  packet  contains  the  necessary 
forms  and  detailed  instructions  on  how  to  apply.  The  application  form  and  accompany- 
ing Summary  Data  sheet  must  be  filled  out  completely,  signed,  and  returned  to  the  Gradu- 
ate Admissions  Office  accompanied  by  a  nonrefundable  fee  of  $50t  in  U.S.  currency  (check 
or  money  order  payable  to  Duke  University).  In  addition,  the  student  must  provide  the 
following  supporting  documents:  (1)  two  copies  of  the  official,  confidential  transcript  from 
each  postsecondary  institution  attended,  sent  directly  to  the  Graduate  School  by  the 


This  chapter  is  a  brief  summary  of,  and  supplement  to,  information  contained  in  the  current  Graduate  School 
"Information  for  Applicants"  booklet.  This  booklet  is  part  of  a  standard  application  packet,  which  should  be  con- 
sulted for  more  comprehensive  information  on  all  aspects  of  the  process  of  applying  for  admission  and  award. 

tAll  fees  are  based  on  current  charges  and  are  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

Admission  Procedures       27 


28       Admission 


institution;  (2)  three  letters  of  evaluation,  written  on  the  forms  provided  and  returned 
by  the  applicant  in  the  confidential  envelopes  that  have  been  sealed-then-signed  by  the 
evaluators  (or  returned  directly  to  the  Graduate  School  by  the  evaluator);  (3)  official  scores 
on  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  General  Test  for  applicants  to  all  departments;  and 
(4)  official  scores  on  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  Subject  Test  for  applicants  to  cer- 
tain specified  departments.  Please  consult  the  current  application  packet  for  more  detailed 
information  on  all  requirements. 

Applications  cannot  be  reviewed  until  all  supporting  documents  are  on  file.  Materi- 
als submitted  in  support  of  an  application  are  not  released  for  other  purposes  and  cannot  be  returned 
to  the  applicant. 

Students  applying  for  fall  admission  and  award  should  take  the  Graduate  Record  Ex- 
amination no  later  than  the  October  testing  in  the  previous  year  in  order  to  meet  our  dead- 
lines. Information  on  the  times  and  places  of  the  Graduate  Record  Examinations  can  be 
obtained  from  the  applicant's  college  or  the  Educational  Testing  Service,  RO.  Box  6000, 
Princeton,  New  Jersey  08541-6000. 

Additional  Procedures  for  Foreign  Students.  Fully  qualified  students  from  outside 
the  United  States  are  invited  to  apply  for  admission  to  full-time  study  in  the  Graduate 
School .  The  foreign  student  must,  in  addition  to  the  information  required  of  all  students, 
submit  with  the  application  materials:  (1)  if  the  student's  native  language  is  not  English, 
certification  of  English  proficiency  demonstrated  by  official  scores  from  the  Test  of  Eng- 
lish as  a  Foreign  Language  (TOEFL),  administered  through  the  Educational  Testing  Serv- 
ice, P.O.  Box  6155,  Princeton,  New  Jersey,  08541-6155  (the  Graduate  School  requires  a  mini- 
mum score  of  550);  and  (2)  a  statement  showing  financial  arrangements  for  the  proposed 
term  at  Duke  (estimated  costs  per  calendar  year  are  about  $19,500).* 

During  new  matriculants'  first  registration  period  at  Duke,  every  foreign  student 
whose  native  language  is  not  English  will  be  required  to  take  a  test  to  verify  competence 
in  the  use  of  oral  and  written  English .  Students  found  to  lack  necessary  competence  will 
be  expected  to  undertake  additional  English  language  instruction.  Students  who  do  not 
perform  satisfactorily  on  the  competency  test  by  the  end  of  their  first  year  of  residency 
will  not  be  permitted  to  continue  graduate  work  at  Duke  University.  Please  note  that  the 
competency  test  does  not  take  the  place  of  the  TOEFL  550  requirement,  nor  does  pass- 
ing the  competency  examination  meet  degTee  requirements  for  a  foreign  language. 

Part-Time  Graduate  Study.  Many  graduate  departments  will  consider  applications 
from  students  wishing  to  pursue  degree  study  on  a  full-time  or  part-time  basis.  (Consult 
application  materials  for  listing  of  departments.)  Admission  requirements,  procedures, 
and  deadlines  are  the  same  in  either  case.  See  the  chapter  on  "Registration"  for  additional 
rules  governing  minimum  registration,  time  limitations,  and  financial  aid  restrictions  on 
part-time  study.  Visa  restrictions  do  not  allow  nonimmigrant  students  to  pursue  graduate  study 
on  a  part-time  basis. 

Master  of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies  Procedures.  Students  seeking  admission  to  the 
MALS  should  contact  that  program  directly  for  information,  requirements,  and  special 
application  materials. 

Summer  Session  Procedures.  Students  who  wish  to  begin  graduate  work  during  the 
summer  must,  in  addition  to  applying  for  regular  admission  to  the  Graduate  School,  apply 
for  admission  to  the  summer  session.  Application  forms  may  be  obtained  from  Summer 
Session,  121  Allen  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706,  and  may 
be  submitted  at  the  time  of  registration. 


"Figures  are  based  on  1988-89  charges  and  are  subject  to  change  before  the  fall  1989  semester. 


Admission  Procedures       29 


Students  who  wish  to  take  graduate  courses  in  the  summer  but  not  pursue  a  gradu- 
ate degree  may  be  admitted  to  the  summer  session  under  the  following  categories.  Duke 
Students:  current  students  in  good  standing  may  attend  the  summer  session  without  for- 
mal application.  Non-Duke  Students:  other  persons  may  seek  admission  to  the  summer 
session  provided  they  are  (or  were)  in  good  standing  at  a  fully  accredited  college  or 
university. 

Continuing  Education  Procedures.  A  student  seeking  admission  as  a  nondegree  con- 
tinuing education  graduate  student  at  Duke  must  have  received  a  bachelor's  degree  and 
must  either  reside  in  the  area  or  be  moving  to  the  area  with  the  intention  of  residing  here 
for  a  substantial  period  of  time.  Application  materials  and  additional  information  may 
be  obtained  from  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education,  The  Bishop's  House,  Duke  Univer- 
sity Durham,  North  Carolina  27708,  telephone  (919)  684-6259. 

Review  of  Application  and  Notification  of  Status.  All  applications  are  considered 
without  regard  to  race,  color,  religion,  national  origin,  handicap,  veteran  status,  sexual 
orientation  or  preference,  sex,  or  age. 

Application  files  are  assembled  in  the  Graduate  Admissions  Office,  where  all  offi- 
cial record-keeping  is  maintained .  Applications,  when  complete,  are  sent  to  the  depart- 
ments. A  departmental  admissions  committee,  usually  headed  by  the  Director  of  Gradu- 


30       Admissi 


ate  Studies,  reviews  the  applications  and  makes  recommendations  to  the  Dean.  Formal 
admission  to  the  Graduate  School  is  offered  only  by  the  Dean,  who  will  contact  students 
in  writing.  An  admission  offer  is  only  for  the  semester  specified  in  the  letter  of  admis- 
sion, and  admission  may  not  be  deferred  from  one  term  to  another. 

Immunizations.  North  Carolina  Statute  G.S. :  130A-155. 1  states  that  no  person  shall 
attend  a  college  or  university,  public,  private,  or  religious,  excluding  students  attending 
night  classes  only  and  students  matriculating  in  off-campus  courses,  unless  a  certificate 
of  immunizations  against  diptheria,  tetanus,  whooping  cough,  poliomyelitis,  red  mea- 
sles (rubeola),  and  rubella  is  presented  to  the  college  or  university  on  or  before  the  first 
day  of  matriculation.  The  required  forms  and  instructions  are  provided  to  students  in  the 
packet  of  materials  sent  with  the  letter  of  admission. 

Deadlines  for  Application 

It  is  the  applicant's  responsibility  to  make  certain  that  the  Graduate  School  office  has 
received  all  required  materials  before  the  specified  deadlines.  Only  complete  applications 
can  be  considered.  To  ensure  that  the  admissions  office  will  have  adequate  time  to  assem- 
ble all  items  submitted  on  an  applicant's  behalf,  applications  should  be  sent  at  least  two 
weeks  before  the  stated  deadlines. 

Consult  current  application  materials  for  a  more  detailed  explanation  of  deadlines  and  their 
enforcement. 

FOR  FALL  SEMESTER 

January  15,  5:00  P.M.  Deadline  for  completion  of  applications  to  specified  programs  (see 
application  materials)  for  fall  1990. 

January  31,  5:00  P.M.  Deadline  for  completion  of  applications  for  admission  and  award 
to  all  other  programs  for  the  fall  1990  semester. 

January  15/31  are  Priority  Filing  Dates .  Applications  received  and  completed  by  this 
date  (depending  on  the  program)  are  guaranteed  a  review;  those  received/completed  after 
this  date  are  not  guaranteed  consideration.  Late  applications  may  be  considered  for  ad- 
mission, only  if  all  spaces  have  not  been  filled,  and  for  financial  aid,  only  if  funds  are  still 
available. 

All  students  seeking  fall  admission  should  complete  their  applications  by  the  Priority 
Filing  Date,  since  it  is  likely  that  enrollment  in  many  departments  will  be  filled  soon  af- 
ter this  date.  Applications  which  are  incomplete  on  January  15/31  cannot  be  considered 
for  awards  until  decisions  have  been  made  on  all  complete  applications. 

The  final  cut-off  date  for  processing  new  applications  is  July  15.  Few  departments, 
however,  continue  to  review  applications  this  late.  No  applications  for  fall  received  after 
this  date  will  be  processed. 

FOR  SPRING  SEMESTER 

November  1.  Final  date  for  completion  of  applications  for  admission  to  the  spring 
semester,  space  permitting.  Not  all  departments  accept  new  students  for  the  spring  se- 
mester, nor  is  financial  aid  readily  available  for  spring  matriculants. 

FOR  SUMMER  SESSION 

Students  seeking  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  for  study  in  the  summer  session 
should  apply  to  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  and  to  the  Director  of  the  Summer 
Session. 

April  15.  Last  day  for  completing  application  to  summer  session  Term  I. 

May  15.  Last  day  for  completing  application  to  summer  session  Term  II. 


Deadlines  for  Application       31 


Financial  Information 


Tuition  and  Fees* 

STUDENTS  ENROLLING  FALL  SEMESTER  1988 

The  1989-90  tuition  for  new  students  enrolling  full-time  during  the  fall  semester  (ex- 
cept those  students  in  health  administration  and  physical  therapy)  is  $3,840  (12  units  at 
$320  per  unit)  or  $2,880  (9  units  at  $320  per  unit)  for  teaching  and  research  assistants.  In 
addition  to  tuition  a  registration  fee  of  $450  (not  applicable  for  students  who  matriculat- 
ed before  fall  semester  1985)  is  required  each  semester.  Part-time  tuition  is  calculated  at 
the  rate  of  $320  per  unit  in  the  fall,  spring,  and  summer. 

Payment  of  Accounts.  Duke  University  does  not  have  a  deferred  payment  plan  for 
tuition,  fees,  or  other  charges.  New  students  are  expected  to  pay  tuition  and  fees  at  the 
time  of  matriculation .  Following  first  enrollment  in  the  Graduate  School,  monthly  invoices 
are  sent  to  each  student  by  the  Bursar's  office.  As  a  part  of  the  agreement  of  admission 
to  Duke  University  a  student  is  required  to  pay  all  invoices  upon  receipt. 

Graduate  students  who  receive  payments  from  the  University  for  fellowships,  as- 
sistantships,  or  employment  and  who  plan  to  pay  tuition  and  fees  and/or  campus  hous- 
ing charges  via  payroll  deduction  must  make  arrangements  for  payroll  deduction  in  the 
Bursar's  office  by  the  published  deadline  for  each  semester  in  order  to  avoid  assessment 
of  the  late  payment  charge. 

All  full-time  graduate  students  and  part-time  degree  candidates  are  charged  the  stu- 
dent health  fee  as  well  as  student  accident  and  sickness  insurance  coverage  unless  they 
file  properly  completed  and  signed  insurance  waivers  in  the  Bursar's  office  by  the  invoice 
date.  Students  registered  in  absentia  are  not  charged  the  health  fee  and  insurance  unless 
they  elect  to  enroll  in  the  insurance  plan.  The  student  accident  and  sickness  insurance  pay- 
ment is  due  in  full  at  the  beginning  of  the  term  (insurance  may  not  be  paid  by  payroll  deduction). 
Payment  in  full  for  campus  housing  is  due  at  the  beginning  of  each  semester  unless  the  student  quali- 
fies for  University  payroll  deduction. 

Late  Payment  Charge.  A  late  registration  fee  of  $25  is  charged  any  student  who  does 
not  complete  registration  during  the  announced  registration  periods.  Students  who  fail 
to  pay  by  the  due  date  the  total  amount  of  an  invoice  received  from  the  Bursar  will  be 
charged  a  late  payment  fee.  That  fee  is  assessed  at  the  rate  of  1 V3  percent  per  month  (16 
percent  per  year)  applied  to  the  past  due  balance  and  accrued  from  the  billing  date  of  the 
invoice  (matriculation  date  for  new  students). 


*A11  fees  are  based  on  current  charges  and  are  subject  to  change  without  notice. 

Tuition  and  Fees       33 


Restrictions.  A  student  in  default  on  tuition  or  fee  charges  will  not  be  allowed  to  reg- 
ister for  classes,  receive  a  transcript  of  academic  records,  have  academic  credits  certified, 
be  granted  a  leave  of  absence,  or  receive  a  diploma  at  graduation.  In  addition,  such  stu- 
dents may  be  subject  to  withdrawal  from  the  Graduate  School. 

Reduction  in  Registration  and  Tuition.  Full  refunds  are  granted  students  who  reduce 
registration  on  the  drop/add  date  at  the  beginning  of  each  semester.  A  reduction  in  regis- 
tration and  tuition  necessitated  by  changes  in  departmental  service  requirements  for  as- 
sistants may  be  made  during  the  first  week  of  classes  with  approval  of  the  Dean. 

Refunds  for  Withdrawal  from  School  during  Fall  and  Spring  Semesters.  For  students 
who  withdraw  from  school  or  who  are  withdrawn  by  the  University,  refunds  of  tuition 
and  fees  are  governed  by  the  following  policy. 

1.  In  the  event  of  death,  refund  of  full  tuition  and  fees  will  be  granted. 

2.  In  all  other  cases  of  withdrawal  from  the  University,  students  may  have  tuition 
refunded  according  to  the  following  schedule: 

a.  Withdrawal  before  classes  begin:  full  refund; 

b .  Withdrawal  during  the  first  or  second  week  of  classes :  80  percent  refund  (the 
student  health  fee  will  not  be  refunded); 

c .  Withdrawal  during  the  third,  fourth,  or  fifth  week  of  classes:  60  percent  refund 
(the  student  health  fee  will  not  be  refunded); 

d .  Withdrawal  during  the  sixth  week:  20  percent  refund  (the  student  health  fee 
will  not  be  refunded); 

e.  Withdrawal  after  the  sixth  week:  no  refund. 

/.  Tuition  charges  paid  from  grants  or  loans  will  be  restored  to  those  funds  on  the 
same  pro  rata  basis  and  will  not  be  refunded  or  carried  forward. 

3.  If  a  student  has  to  drop  a  course  for  which  no  alternate  registration  is  available, 
drops  special  fee  courses  (music,  golf,  etc.),  or  drops  a  paid  audit  during  the  first 
two  weeks  of  the  drop/add  period,  a  full  refund  may  be  granted  with  the  approval 
of  the  Dean.  (The  student  health  fee  will  not  be  refunded.) 

Withdrawal  Charges  and  Refunds  during  Summer  Session.  Students  who  will  not 
be  attending  a  summer  term  or  course(s)  for  which  they  have  registered  must  follow  the 
correct  procedure  and  drop  the  course(s)  prior  to  the  first  day  of  the  term,  even  if  they 
have  not  paid  tuition  and  fees.  Failure  to  drop  the  course(s)  will  result  in  administrative 
withdrawal  from  the  summer  session  at  the  end  of  the  first  three  days  of  the  term  and  in 
billing  the  student  for  20  percent  of  the  tuition  plus  the  health  fee.  If  tuition  and  fees  have 
been  paid  for  the  summer  term,  the  following  refund  policies  apply: 

1 .  When  applications  for  withdrawal  from  a  term  or  drop  of  a  course  are  received  by 
the  Director  of  the  Summer  Session  before  the  first  class  day  of  a  given  term,  full 
tuition  and  fees  will  be  refunded. 

2 .  When  applications  for  withdrawal  are  received  by  the  Director  during  the  first  three 
class  days,  80  percent  of  the  tuition  will  be  refunded.  (The  health  fee  will  not  be 
refunded.) 

3.  When  applications  for  withdrawal  from  a  term  or  drop  of  a  course  are  received  by 
the  Director  after  the  third  class  day,  there  will  be  no  refund  of  tuition  and  fees. 

Special  Tuition  Benefits  for  Employees.  The  Graduate  School  recognizes  a  special 
obligation  to  encourage  the  professional  and  personal  advancement  of  employees.  The 
University  thus  grants  reductions  in  tuition  to  eligible  employees  enrolling  in  courses 
offered  by  the  University. 

Half-time  employees  with  one  or  more  years  of  continuous  service  who  receive  per- 
mission of  their  supervisors  may  take  up  to  two  courses  a  semester  and  will  be  charged 
one-half  of  the  tuition  rate.  This  benefit  applies  only  to  nondegree  work.  Full-time  em- 
ployees (30  or  more  hours  a  week)  with  two  or  more  years  of  continuous  service  who  re- 
ceive permission  to  take  such  courses  will  be  charged  one-tenth  the  tuition  rate  for  up 

34       Financial  Information 


to  two  courses  per  semester  and  will  be  permitted  to  audit  at  no  charge.  This  benefit  ap- 
plies to  degree  work  as  well  as  nondegree.  Tuition  reduction  for  undergraduate  course 
work  may  be  considered  taxable  income  and  W-2  forms  will  include  the  value  of  the  benefit 
received  during  the  year.  Tuition  reduction  for  graduate  course  work  is  considered  taxa- 
ble income  under  current  law. 

Employees  who  wish  to  take  graduate  classes  on  a  nondegree  basis  apply  through 
Continuing  Education.  No  Graduate  Record  Exam  is  required  at  this  point.  If  an  employee 
is  later  admitted  into  a  degree  program,  up  to  12  semester  hours  of  these  credits  may  then 
be  transferred  into  that  program  if  certain  criteria  are  met  (see  page  51). 

Employees  wishing  to  enroll  in  a  graduate  degree  program  may  apply  directly  to  the 
Graduate  School.  Since  not  all  of  these  programs  can  accommodate  part-time  study, 
please  make  early  contact  with  the  appropriate  department  for  advice  on  your  particu- 
lar educational  needs. 

Eligible  employees  should  consult  the  Benefits  Office,  705  Broad  Street,  (919)  684-6723, 
at  least  two  weeks  in  advance  of  payment  date  to  obtain  the  appropriate  tuition  voucher. 

Thesis  or  Dissertation  Fees.  Fees  incurred  in  connection  with  a  thesis  or  dissertation 
are  as  follows: 

Binding  fee,  three  University  copies  of  thesis  or  dissertation  $22.50 

Microfilming  fee,  doctoral  degree  only,  upon  final  submission  $40 

Copyright  fee  (doctoral  degree  only,  optional)  $20 

Athletic  Fee.  An  athletic  fee  of  $125  for  basketball  games  is  optional  and  payable  early 
in  the  fall  semester. 

Fee  for  Undergraduate  Courses.  Graduate  students  registering  for  undergraduate 
courses  will  be  assessed  3  units  for  a  nonlaboratory  course  and  4  units  for  a  laboratory 
course. 

Marine  Laboratory  Fee.  For  Marine  Laboratory  investigators'  research  table  fee,  see 
the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Marine  Laboratory. 

Audit  Fee.  Students  registered  full  time  during  fall  and  spring  may  audit  courses  with- 
out charge.  Students  may  not  audit  activity  courses,  e.g.,  physical  education,  orapplied 
music.  Otherwise,  audit  fees  are  $125  per  course. 

During  the  summer,  students  registered  for  a  full  course  program  (two  courses)  may 
audit  nonlaboratory  courses  (except  physical  education  activity  courses,  applied  music 
courses,  and  studio  art  courses)  with  the  permission  of  the  instructor  and  the  Director 
of  the  Summer  Session  at  no  extra  charge.  Students  carrying  less  than  a  full  course  pro- 
gram during  the  summer  may  be  granted  permission  by  the  instructor  and  the  Director 
to  audit  a  course  (above  restrictions  apply),  but  must  pay  half  the  University  tuition  charge 
for  the  course. 

Vehicle  Fee.  Resident  students  are  required  to  pay  an  annual  fee  of  $50  for  each  mo- 
tor vehicle  or  $25  for  each  two-wheeled  motor  vehicle.  Resident  students  registering  a 
vehicle  for  the  first  time  after  January  1  are  required  to  pay  $34  for  a  motor  vehicle  or  $17 
for  a  two-wheeled  motor  vehicle. 

If  a  motor  vehicle  or  a  two- wheeled  vehicle  is  removed  from  the  campus  permanently 
and  the  permit  is  returned  to  the  traffic  office  prior  to  January  20,  there  will  be  a  refund 
of  $25  for  a  motor  vehicle  and  $12.50  for  a  two-wheeled  motor  vehicle. 

Students  enrolled  in  the  summer  session  only  must  also  register  their  motor  vehi- 
cles with  the  traffic  office.  The  fee  is  $17.50  from  May  1  through  August  31,  or  $7  for  each 
thirty-day  period. 

Transcript  Fee.  Students  who  wish  to  obtain  copies  of  their  academic  records  should 
direct  requests  to  the  Registrar's  office.  A  fee  of  $2  is  charged  for  each  copy. 


Tuition  and  Fees       35 


The  Student  Health  Fee.  All  full-time  students  and  part-time  degree  candidates  (ex- 
cept those  registered  in  absentia)  are  assessed  a  fee  for  the  Student  Health  Service.  For  the 
fall  and  spring,  the  fee  is  $238  ($119  each  semester).  For  the  summer,  the  fee  is  $35  per 
term.  The  health  fee  will  be  $29  for  each  five-week  period  at  the  Marine  Laboratory. 

Expenses* 

Housing  Fee.  The  fee  for  Town  House  Apartments,  not  including  utilities,  is  $2,067 
per  occupant  for  the  fall  and  spring  on  the  basis  of  two  students  to  a  two-bedroom  apart- 
ment. The  fee  for  modular  homes,  not  including  utilities,  is  $1,817  per  occupant  on  the 
basis  of  three  students  to  a  home.  Rates  in  Central  Campus  Apartments  range  from  $2,075 
per  occupant  for  three  students  in  a  three-bedroom  apartment  to  $3, 203  for  an  efficiency 
apartment. 

Apartments  are  available  during  the  summer  and  rates  vary  according  to  the  type  of 
unit  desired  and  the  number  of  persons  occupying  the  apartment. 

Housing  fees  are  subject  to  change  prior  to  the  1989-90  academic  year.  A  $100  depos- 
it is  required  with  all  applications.  Refund  on  housing  fees  is  made  in  accordance  with 
the  schedules  published  by  the  Department  of  Housing  Management.  For  further  infor- 
mation on  housing  facilities,  see  the  section  on  living  accommodations  in  the  chapter  on 
"Student  Life." 

Food.  Food  service  is  described  in  the  section  on  living  accommodations  in  the  chapter 
on  "Student  Life."  The  cost  of  meals  is  estimated  at  an  average  of  $10.50  per  day,  or  about 
$2,460  for  the  academic  year. 

Summary.  The  table  below  represents  an  estimate  of  a  graduate  student's  basic  ex- 
penses during  the  fall  and  spring  for  a  full  program  of  work.  Miscellaneous  items  (recre- 
ation, travel,  clothing,  laundry,  etc.)  will  vary  according  to  personal  needs  and  tastes. 
Tuition  $7,680  (24  units) 

Registration  fee  900 

Student  health  fee  252 

Apartment  rent 

(Central  Campus  Apts.)  2,442 

Meals  2,460 

Books  780 

Miscellaneous  (laundry,  etc.)  2,336 


Total 

$16,850 

The  estimated  cost  for  one  term  of  the . 

summer  session  is: 

Tuition  (two  nonlaboratory  courses  or 

6  graduate  units) 
Registration  Fee 
Student  health  fee 

$1,596 

100 

35 

Apartment  Rent 

(Central  Campus  Apts.) 
Meals 

422 
500 

Books  and  class  materials  (average) 
Miscellaneous  (laundry,  etc.) 

60 
203 

Total 

$2,916 

The  figures  contained  in  this  section  are  based  on  1988  figures  and  are  subject  to  change  prior  to  the  be- 
ginning of  the  fall  1989  semester. 


36       Financial  Information 


Fellowships  and  Scholarships 

Application  Procedure.  Fellowships  and  scholarships  are  available  to  students  in  most 
graduate  programs.  A  student  who  wishes  to  be  considered  for  any  of  the  following  fel- 
lowships, scholarships,  or  assistantships  should  so  indicate  on  the  application  form  for 
admission  and  award .  Selection  of  award  recipients  is  made  on  the  basis  of  academic  merit 
and  departmental  recommendations. 

While  personal  financial  need  may  not  be  the  basis  for  the  granting  of  many  gradu- 
ate awards,  the  Graduate  School  requests  that  all  matriculating  students  (except  non- 
United  States  citizens)  complete  the  Graduate  and  Professional  Student  Financial  Aid 
Service  (GAPSFAS)  form. 

Satisfactory  Progress.  A  graduate  student  is  expected  to  make  satisfactory  progress 
in  his  or  her  program  in  order  to  remain  enrolled  in  a  degree  program  or  to  receive  finan- 
cial aid.  (See  "Grades"  under  the  section  General  Academic  Regulations  in  this  chapter) . 
A  student  is  considered  to  be  making  satisfactory  progress  if  he  or  she  is  eligible  to  con- 
tinue during  the  academic  year.  Determination  of  academic  load  is  made  at  the  end  of 
the  drop/add  period  for  each  semester.  If  hours  are  reduced  below  these  levels,  the  Gradu- 
ate School  Financial  Aid  Office  must  be  notified  and  some  monies  or  types  of  aid  may 
have  to  be  repaid.  The  student  should  contact  the  Financial  Aid  Office  if  this  situation 
is  contemplated  or  occurs. 

James  B.  Duke  Fellowships.  The  James  B.  Duke  One-Hundredth  Anniversary  Fund 
provides  fellowships  for  students  who  wish  to  pursue  a  program  leading  to  the  Ph .  D.  de- 
gree in  the  Graduate  School  at  Duke  University.  Its  objective  is  to  aid  in  attracting  and 
developing  outstanding  scholars  at  Duke.  Selection  of  recipients  is  made  by  a  faculty  com- 
mittee upon  nomination  by  the  appropriate  department.  These  fellowships  provide  for 
payment  of  tuition  for  full  registration  during  the  academic  year,  plus  the  registration  fee 
during  the  summer  sessions.  They  also  provide  an  income  stipend  of  $1,000  per  month 
for  twelve  months  during  the  duration  of  the  award .  Students  entering  with  baccalaure- 
ate degrees  may  hold  this  fellowship  for  three  years.  Students  entering  with  master's 
degrees  may  be  fellows  for  two  years.  The  award  requires  no  service  and  is  renewable  each 
year  if  the  student  is  satisfactorily  progressing  toward  the  degree.  The  total  value  of  a  James 
B.  Duke  Fellowship  over  the  three  years  of  tenure  for  a  student  who  enters  Duke  with  the 
B.  A .  degree  is  over  $60,000  at  current  tuition  rates.  There  are  forty-five  James  B.  Duke  fel- 
lows currently  enrolled. 

Andrew  W.  Mellon  Graduate  Fellowships  in  the  Humanities.  As  many  as  six  one- 
year  dissertation  fellowships  are  awarded  to  graduate  students  in  the  humanities.  Selec- 
tion of  recipients  is  made  by  a  faculty  committee  upon  recommendation  by  the  appropriate 
department.  These  fellowships  provide  for  payment  of  tuition  and  health  fees  plus  a 
monthly  stipend. 

Endowed  Fellowships.  Other  special  endowments  provide  fellowships  for  gradu- 
ate study.  The  Angier  B.  Duke  Fellowship  provides  support  on  the  same  level  as  the  James 
B.  Duke  Fellowship  for  one  student  for  three  academic  years.  There  are  five  Gurney  Har- 
ris Kearns  Fellowships  in  religion.  Selection  for  these  fellowships  is  made  through  faculty 
committees.  The  E.  Bayard  Halsted  Fellowship  in  science,  history,  or  journalism  is  awarded 
to  a  graduate  of  Duke  University  intending  to  pursue  an  advanced  degree  at  Duke.  The 
Frank  T.  de  Vyver  Fellowship,  administered  by  the  Department  of  Economics,  is  award- 
ed each  year  to  an  outstanding  student  entering  the  doctoral  program  in  economics.  The 
Clare  Hamilton  Memorial  Endowed  Fellowship  is  awarded  yearly  on  the  basis  of  merit 
and  need  to  one  or  more  outstanding  students  in  clinical  psychology.  The  Charles  R.  Haus- 
er  Fellowship  is  awarded  to  an  outstanding  graduate  student  in  the  last  year  of  work  to- 
ward a  Ph.D.  degree  in  organic  chemistry.  The  Calvin  Bryce  Hoover  Fellowship  is  ad- 
ministered by  the  Department  of  Economics  and  is  awarded  each  year  to  an  outstanding 


Fellowships  and  Scholarships       37 


student  entering  the  doctoral  program  in  economics.  The  Robert  R.  Wilson  Fellowship 
in  the  Department  of  Political  Science  is  awarded  to  a  student  currently  enrolled  in  or  en- 
tering a  doctoral  program  in  international  law,  international  organization,  or  international 
relations.  The  Gertrude  Weil  Fellowship,  administered  by  the  Department  of  Religion, 
is  awarded  to  students  interested  in  Judaic  studies.  The  John  L.  Lievsay  Fellowship  is 
awarded  to  a  dissertation-year  student  in  English  literature.  The  Anne  McDougall 
Memorial  Award  for  Women,  administered  through  women's  studies,  is  awarded  each 
year  to  one  woman  student  studying  psychology  or  a  related  field. 

Graduate  Fellowships.  Graduate  fellowships  funded  by  Duke  University  are  avail- 
able to  students  in  the  Graduate  School  for  study  during  the  academic  year.  Awards,  which 
include  tuition,  range  from  $8,610  to  $15,000. 

Federal  Fellowships*  Duke  University  participates  in  the  following  programs: 

National  Science  Foundation  Fellowships.  A  number  of  students  hold  National  Science 
Foundation  Graduate  Fellowships  which  provide  tuition  plus  a  stipend  of  $12,300. 

Jacob  K.  Javits  Fellows  Program.  Five  students  received  the  Jacob  K.  Javits  Fellowships 
in  1987-88.  This  federal  program  for  students  in  the  humanities  provides  tuition  plus  a 
stipend  of  up  to  $10,000  based  on  the  student's  need. 

Other  federal  programs  support  fellowships,  traineeships,  and  research  assistant- 
ships  through  departmental  auspices. 

Fellowships  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  Three  fellowships  are  awarded 
annually  by  the  Duke  University  Committee  on  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  Fel- 
lows are  chosen  from  among  students  enrolled  in  Ph  .D.  programs.  They  receive  full  tui- 
tion, plus  a  monthly  stipend  of  $800  for  nine  months,  and  may  request  two  renewals  of 
the  appointment. 

Special  Fellowships.  The  following  special  fellowships  are  available  to  qualifed  Duke 
students  from  sources  outside  the  University: 

Shell  Fellowships.  Available  to  students  in  the  social  sciences  engaged  in  dissertation 
research  on  developing  countries.  Recipients  must  be  citizens  of  the  United  States  or  per- 
manent residents  intending  to  become  United  States  citizens.  The  fellowships  are 
designed  to  cover  the  expenses  of  field  research  in  the  preparation  of  doctoral  disserta- 
tions. The  stipend  for  each  fellowship  is  $7,000  plus  a  reasonable  amount  for  transporta- 
tion expenses.  Recipients  are  chosen  competitively  from  departmental  nominees.  In- 
quiries should  be  made  to  the  Program  Coordinator,  Center  for  International  Studies,  2122 
Campus  Drive,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Exchange  Fellowships  with  the  Free  University  of  Berlin .  Fellowships  are  available  through 
an  exchange  arrangement  with  the  Free  University  of  Berlin  which  will  provide  funds  for 
one  graduate  student  to  study  during  the  regular  academic  year  in  Berlin.  Interested  stu- 
dents should  write  to  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  prior  to  February  1. 

James  B.  Duke  International  Studies  Fellowships.  Available  to  outstanding  students  from 
foreign  countries  who  have  completed  their  undergraduate  education  in  institutions  out- 
side the  United  States.  Eligibility  criteria  include  concentration  in  areas  broadly  defined 
as  international  studies,  and  admission  to  a  Ph.D.  program  in  Duke's  Graduate  School. 
Fellowships  provide  an  annual  stipend  of  $12,000,  payable  for  twelve  months,  plus  tui- 
tion and  health  fees.  They  are  renewable  for  three  years.  Recipients  are  chosen  competi- 
tively from  departmental  nominees  by  a  faculty  committee.  In  addition,  the  program  offers 
a  one-year  fellowship  to  an  advanced  Duke  graduate  student  planning  dissertation  re- 
search abroad  in  the  field  of  international  studies  who  has  passed  the  preliminary  exami- 
nations by  the  time  the  award  begins. 

Frederick  K.  Weyerhaeuser  Forest  History  Fellowship.  Fellowship  is  available  campus-wide 
to  students  who  wish  to  study  broadly  in  the  area  of  forest  and  conservation  history.  The 
annual  stipend  is  $10,000.  Inquiries  should  be  made  to  the  Forest  History  Society,  701  Vick- 
ers  Avenue,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27701. 


'United  States  citizenship  is  generally  a  requirement  for  eligibility. 

38       Financial  Information 


Graduate  Fellowships  for  Minority  Students.  A  substantial  pool  of  fellowship  funds 
is  reserved  for  the  support  of  minority  students,  in  some  instances  with  a  multi-year  com- 
mitment. 

Duke  Endowment  Fellowships.  The  University  has  allocated  a  substantial  pool  of  funds 
exclusively  for  the  support  of  U.S.  minority  students.  These  awards,  called  the  Duke  En- 
dowment fellowships,  are  made  to  students  who  have  been  nominated  by  their  depart- 
ments to  a  central  review  committee,  which  considers  all  nominations  and  announces 
the  recipients.  The  fellowships  cover  tuition  and  fees  and  provide  a  stipend  up  to  $8, 100 
for  two  years  if  the  student  has  the  masters  and  three  years  if  the  student  has  the  bac- 
calaureate degree. 

Presidential  Fellowships.  The  Presidential  Fellowships  represent  one  of  Duke's  newest 
initiatives  in  providing  financial  support  for  minority  students.  These  fellowships  will 
be  awarded  based  on  academic  qualifications  to  students  pursuing  the  Ph.D.  degree  in 
any  of  40  programs.  These  programs  range  from  the  basic  sciences  to  the  humanities  and 
business.  The  fellowship  covers  tuition  and  provides  a  stipend  for  a  maximum  of  three 
years  of  support. 

Patricia  Roberts  Harris  Fellowship  Program.  This  program  makes  direct  fellowship  grants 
available  to  colleges  and  universities  for  the  purpose  of  providing  financial  support  to 
minority  and  women  graduate  and  professional  students  who  demonstrate  financial 
need.  Duke  has  received  fellowship  support  through  this  program  and  will  continue  to 
apply  for  this  support  for  our  graduate  departments.  The  fellowships  are  funded  by  the 
Department  of  Education  and  are  awarded  for  up  to  three  years  of  graduate  study. 

The  National  Consortium  for  Education  Access  (NCEA)  Fellowship.  The  NCEA  is  a  part- 
nership agreement  between  Historically  Black  Colleges  and  Universities,  Ph.D.-degree 
granting  institutions  and  corporations.  The  goals  of  the  NCEA  are  (1)  to  increase  the  pool 
of  Black  Americans  holding  the  Ph.D.  degree  in  disciplines  where  they  are  now  under- 
represented;  and  (2)  to  address  the  underrepresentation  of  Black  faculty  in  the  nation's 
colleges  and  universities.  The  NCEA  provides  fellowship  support  for  both  students  and 
faculty  enrolled  in  a  member  Ph.D.-granting  institution.  Students  are  eligible  to  receive 
a  minimum  of  $3,000  per  year,  while  faculty  are  eligible  for  a  minimum  of  $5,000  per  year 
in  assistance.  These  fellowships  are  in  addition  to  financial  assistance  the  Ph.D.  candi- 
dates receive  from  the  participating  institution.  Students  can  apply  for  this  fellowship 
directly  through  the  NCEA  by  obtaining  an  application  from  a  member  institution  or  by 
writing  to:  Dr.  Leroy  Ervin,  Executive  Director,  National  Consortium  for  Educational  Ac- 
cess, 296  Interstate  North  Parkway,  Suite  100,  Atlanta,  GA  30339. 

Departmental  Fellowships.  Various  departments  and  schools  within  Duke  Univer- 
sity have  fellowships  which  are  available  to  students  pursuing  graduate  study.  Informa- 
tion may  be  obtained  from  the  individual  departments. 

Graduate  Scholarships.  Graduate  scholarships  funded  by  Duke  University  are  avail- 
able to  students  in  many  departments  of  the  Graduate  School  for  study  during  the  aca- 
demic year.  Awards  are  for  full  or  partial  payment  of  tuition;  they  range  in  value  to  $8,610. 

Alison  Bracy  von  Brock  Talent  Identification  Program  Research  Fellowship  Fund. 

This  fund  will  support  research  in  the  area  of  the  academically  talented,  curriculum  de- 
sign and/or  teaching  methods  of  the  Talent  Identification  Program.  First  priority  will  be 
given  to  a  Duke  University  doctoral  candidate  for  postpreliminary  examination  disser- 
tation research.  Second  priority  shall  be  given  to  a  qualified  postdoctoral  candidate  to  con- 
duct research  at  Duke  University  as  a  visiting  fellow  under  the  auspices  of  the  Talent  Iden- 
tification Program.  The  award  will  be  made  for  one  year  with  a  possible  renewal  for  a 
second  year. 

Assistantships 

Graduate  Assistantships.  Appointments  as  graduate  assistants  carry  a  total  stipend 
of  up  to  $7,500  for  the  academic  year.  The  value  of  the  stipend  is  determined  by  the  time 

Assistantships       39 


spent  in  assisting,  the  qualifications  of  the  assistant,  and  the  nature  of  the  work  assigned . 
Graduate  assistants  also  may  receive  tuition  scholarships  in  addition  to  payments  for  serv- 
ice as  an  assistant. 

Research  Assistantships.  Appointments  are  available  for  graduate  students  whose 
special  training  and  qualifications  enable  them  to  serve  as  assistants  to  individual  staff 
members  in  certain  departments.  Stipends  may  be  up  to  $8,400,  depending  on  the  na- 
ture of  the  assistance  and  the  assisting  time  required. 

Part-time  Instruction.  Several  departments  offering  graduate  work  have  exception- 
ally qualified  graduate  students  work  as  part-time  instructors,  tutors,  and  teaching  as- 
sistants. Amounts  of  these  assistantships  vary  and  interested  applicants  should  contact 
their  departments  directly. 

Payment  of  Awards 

The  payment  of  stipends  for  graduate  assistantships  and  fellowships  starts  on  Sep- 
tember 25  and  is  made  in  equal  payments  on  the  twenty-fifth  day  of  each  month  there- 
after. Under  the  Tax  Reform  Act  of  1986,  the  only  graduate  student  financial  assistance 
exempt  from  taxation  are  amounts  paid  for  tuition,  fees,  books,  supplies,  and  equipment 
required  for  course  instruction.  If  services  are  required  for  payment  of  tuition  and  fees, 
then  that  tuition  is  considered  income  and  is  subject  to  taxation.  The  graduate  school  of- 
fice will  supply  detailed  information. 

It  is  the  responsibility  of  the  student  to  be  sure  that  tuition  and  fees  are  paid  or  that 
arrangements  have  been  made  with  the  appropriate  office  or  department  for  submission 
of  tuition  payment  notices  to  the  Bursar  (101  Allen  Building).  Graduate  students  should 
contact  either  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  their  department  or  the  Graduate  School 
Financial  Aid  Coordinator  (123  Allen  Building)  depending  upon  the  type  of  award. 
Faculty,  senior  administrative  staff,  employees,  and  eligible  spouses  not  in  degree  pro- 
grams should  contact  Harrison  Brooke  (705  Broad  Street)  regarding  tuition  benefits. 

Loans 

Students  who  anticipate  a  need  to  supplement  their  financial  resources  through  loans 
or  college  work-study  employment  must  obtain  and  complete  a  Graduate  and  Professional 
Student  Financial  Aid  Service  (GAPSFAS)  form.  These  forms  are  available  at  most  finan- 
cial aid  offices  or  from  the  Financial  Aid  Coordinator,  Graduate  School,  Duke  Universi- 
ty, Durham,  North  Carolina  27706.  A  student  seeking  a  loan  should  contact  his  or  her  state 
lending  agency. 

It  is  the  policy  of  the  Graduate  School  to  provide  loans  through  the  University  to  help 
students  meet  their  educational  expenses.  Only  students  with  full-time  status  who  meet 
the  federal  criteria  for  need  are  eligible  for  loans.  Loan  funds  are  provided  through  the 
Carl  Perkins  Student  Loan  Program  after  a  student  has  borrowed  the  maximum  from  the 
Guaranteed  Student  Loan  Program.  Generally,  loans  made  from  these  funds,  as  is  the 
case  with  loans  from  state  agencies,  bear  no  interest  charge  to  qualified  borrowers  while 
they  maintain  student  status  and  for  a  short  period  thereafter.  Interest  during  the  repay- 
ment period  is  at  a  favorable  rate. 

Inquiries  concerning  loans  should  indicate  the  department  of  intended  matricula- 
tion and  include  all  pertinent  information  concerning  application  to  a  state  agency.  These 
inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  the  Financial  Aid  Coordinator,  Graduate  School,  Duke 
University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Work-Study  Program  Employment 

Funds  are  available  through  the  college  work-study  program  for  short-term  or  part- 
time  employment  of  graduate  students.  A  student  who  wishes  to  apply  for  work-study 

40       Financial  Information 


must  complete  a  GAPSFAS  form.  Students  considering  the  possibility  of  work-study  for 
the  fall  should  submit  GAPSFAS  forms  by  April  15.  Eligibility  requirements  are  similar 
to  those  of  the  federal  loan  programs.  In  addition  to  departmental  employment  oppor- 
tunities, the  placement  office  maintains  a  listing  of  employment  openings  for  students. 

Summer  Financial  Aid 

A  limited  amount  of  financial  aid  is  available  to  students  in  summer  study.  Summer 
financial  aid,  determined  according  to  demonstrated  need,  may  consist  of  institutional 
grant  funds  and/or  low  interest  loans  from  the  Federally  Insured  Student  Loan  program 
and  the  Carl  Perkins  Student  Loan  program.  To  qualify  for  summer  school  aid,  a  student 
must  be  enrolled  or  accepted  for  enrollment  at  Duke  during  the  academic  year  immedi- 
ately preceding  the  summer  for  which  aid  is  requested.  (Students  enrolled  only  for  the 
summer  may  be  eligible  to  borrow  from  outside  lenders  under  the  Federally  In- 
sured/Guaranteed Loan  program  in  their  home  states  or  from  the  schools  at  which  they 
are  regularly  enrolled .  They  should  contact  their  college's  financial  aid  office  or  the  state's 
department  of  higher  education  for  information  and  applications.)  The  college  work-study 
aid  is  determined  by  the  financial  aid  office  based  upon  the  student's  financial  need  and 
the  availability  of  funds.  Graduate  awards  are  determined  by  departments  depending 
on  usual  criteria  and  availability  of  funds. 


Summer  Financial  Aid  41 


Registration 


Registration  for  Fall  1989 

All  students  must  register  each  fall  and  spring  semester  for  credit  toward  their  degrees 
and  pay  a  registration  fee  each  semester  unless  waived  by  an  approved  leave  of  absence 
granted  by  the  Dean .  Doctoral  students  are  expected  to  register  for  60  units  of  degree  credit. 
After  the  60  units  of  credit  have  been  achieved,  the  student  will  pay  only  the  registration 
fee  each  semester  until  all  degree  requirements  have  been  met.  A  master's  student  (ex- 
cept for  those  students  enrolled  in  the  two-year  health  administration,  physical  thera- 
py, and  public  policy  studies  programs)  will  register  for  a  minimum  of  30  units  of  degree 
credit  and  for  any  course  units  beyond  the  30  required  of  their  program.  A  registration 
fee  is  charged  each  semester. 

Approved  transfer  course  work  into  a  master's  program  will  not  reduce  the  minimum 
registration  for  a  master's  degree  of  30  units  at  Duke  University.  Approved  transfer  of  an 
earned  master's  degree  will  reduce  the  minimum  doctoral  registration  to  45  units  of  de- 
gree credit  at  Duke  University. 

Full-time  students  will  register  at  the  rate  of  either  9  units  as  teaching  or  research  as- 
sistants or  12  units  each  semester  until  the  minimum  units  of  degree  credit  have  been  com- 
pleted. Part-time  students  will  register  for  a  minimum  of  3  units  per  semester. 

Students  who  are  in  residence  during  the  summer  session,  but  not  enrolled  in  any 
courses,  pay  only  the  registration  fee. 

Except  for  these  registration  procedures,  all  other  degree  regulations  remain  as  stat- 
ed in  the  other  sections  of  this  bulletin. 

All  students  who  enrolled  prior  to  1985  should  consult  the  bulletin  of  their  year  of 
matriculation  for  registration  procedures  and  requirements. 

Failure  to  maintain  continuous  registration  each  fall  and  spring  semester  will  result 
in  administrative  withdrawal  from  the  University. 

Registration  Periods.  All  students  who  are  enrolled  in  the  Graduate  School  and  who 
have  not  been  granted  a  leave  of  absence  by  the  Dean  must  register  each  fall  and  spring 
until  all  degree  requirements  are  completed.  New  students  will  register  immediately  prior 
to  the  first  day  of  classes  in  either  term;  continuing  students  register  during  the  announced 
preregistration  periods  in  November  and  March .  Students  who  have  been  on  leaves  of 
absence  and  who  intend  to  resume  a  degree  program  must  give  the  department  and  the 
Dean  notice  of  this  intention  two  months  before  registration. 

Late  Registration.  All  students  are  expected  to  register  at  the  times  specified  by  the 
University.  A  late  registration  fee  of  $25  is  charged  any  student  registering  late,  includ- 
ing a  current  student  who  delays  registering  until  the  registration  for  new  students. 

Change  of  Registration .  During  the  first  two  weeks  of  the  fall  or  spring  semester,  regis- 
tration may  be  changed  with  the  approval  of  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  if  no  reduc- 
tion of  fee  is  entailed .  If  fees  are  to  be  refunded,  the  approval  of  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate 

Registration  for  Fall  1989       43 


School  is  required .  For  the  succeeding  two  weeks,  courses  may  be  dropped  and  equiva- 
lent hours  of  ungraded  research  or  residence  added  with  the  approval  of  the  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies  and  the  Dean. 

Summer  Registration.  Students  who  are  in  residence  at  Duke  University  during  the 
spring  and  who  plan  to  enroll  for  courses  in  the  summer  session  may  have  their  course 
programs  approved  by  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  during  the  week  of  Graduate 
School  registration  in  March .  Course  cards  for  courses  or  graded  research  should  be  sub- 
mitted to  the  Office  of  the  Summer  Session.  Summer  session  students  may  register  in 
the  summer  session  office  at  any  time  beginning  with  the  March  registration  period  and 
up  to  the  Wednesday  preceding  the  start  of  the  appropriate  term.  Graduate  students  who 
intend  to  remain  in  residence  during  one  or  more  of  the  summer  session  terms  without 
registering  for  course  work  must  either  register  for  1  unit  of  research  (students  who  matric- 
ulated prior  to  fall  1985)  or  pay  a  summer  registration  fee  (students  who  matriculated  fall 
1985  or  later). 

Students  who  are  not  in  residence  at  Duke  during  the  spring  (including  newly  ad- 
mitted students  to  the  Graduate  School  and  students  of  other  colleges  and  universities 
desiring  to  earn  credits  for  transfer)  may  register  by  mail  for  the  summer  session.  Advance 
registration  by  mail  includes: 

1 .  Completion  of  the  su  mmer  session  application .  (Applications  may  be  obtained 
by  writing  to  the  Office  of  the  Summer  Session,  121  Allen  Building.) 

2.  Admission  to  the  summer  session  by  the  Director  of  the  Summer  Session.  (Stu- 
dents who  have  been  admitted  to  the  Graduate  School  for  the  summer  term  need 
not  apply  to  the  summer  session.) 

3.  Submission  of  a  properly  approved  and  completed  course  card  in  the  Office  of 
the  Summer  Session. 

The  University  does  not  mail  statements  for  summer  session  tuition  and  fees.  All  tu- 
ition and  fees  should  be  paid  in  the  Office  of  the  Bursar  (101  Allen  Building)  at  least  five 
full  working  days  prior  to  the  first  day  of  class  (see  summer  session  calendar).  Students 
who  fail  to  register  and  pay  all  tuition  and  fees  before  this  deadline  will  be  assessed  a  late 
charge.  Failure  to  pay  tuition  and  fees  by  the  end  of  the  drop/add  period  will  result  in  ad- 
ministrative withdrawal  of  the  student. 

After  April  30  all  course  changes  must  be  approved  by  the  appropriate  director  of 
graduate  studies.  The  Director  of  the  Summer  Session  serves  as  the  dean  for  all  non-Duke 
students.  Course  changes  are  accomplished  by  submitting  the  three-part  drop/add  form 
to  the  Office  of  the  Summer  Session,  121  Allen  Building.  Students  who  are  out  of  town 
must  contact  their  director  of  graduate  studies  directly  to  arrange  for  dropping  or  adding 
courses. 

Summer  session  students  may  add  a  course  or  courses  before  or  during  the  first  three 
days  of  the  term .  Courses  may  also  be  dropped  before  and  during  the  first  three  days,  but 
a  20  percent  tuition  fee  will  be  charged  (1)  if  the  course  is  not  dropped  before  the  first  day, 
and  (2)  the  dropped  course(s)  results  in  a  total  tuition  reduction.  Courses  dropped  after 
the  third  day  of  classes  are  not  eligible  for  tuition  refund. 

Additional  Registration  Requirements.  It  is  necessary  to  be  a  fully  registered  student  ac- 
cording to  the  regulations  listed  in  the  chapter  on  "Registration"  in  order  to  be  eligible 
for  library  carrel  and  laboratory  space,  student  housing,  University  and  some  outside 
loans,  and  the  Student  Health  Service,  including  accident  and  sickness  insurance.  See 
the  chapter  on  "Student  Life." 

Part-time  graduate  students  must  be  enrolled  for  at  least  8  units  each  semester  in  or- 
der to  qualify  for  loans  (National  Direct  Student  Loan,  Guaranteed  Student  Loan). 


44       Registration 


Registration  for  Fall  1989       45 


Regulations 


General  Academic  Regulations 


Credits.  The  following  regulations  pertain  to  credits  earned  outside  the  Duke  Univer- 
sity Graduate  School: 

Graduate  Credit  Earned  before  the  A.  B.  Degree  Is  G  ranted.  Ordinarily  no  credit  will  be  al- 
lowed for  graduate  courses  taken  before  a  student  has  been  awarded  the  A .  B.  or  B.  S.  de- 
gree. However,  an  undergraduate  student  at  Duke  University,  who  at  the  beginning  of 
the  final  semester  lacks  no  more  than  three  courses  in  order  to  fulfill  the  requirements 
of  the  bachelor's  degree,  may  apply  for  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  for  that  final 
semester.  If  the  student  meets  the  requirements  for  admission,  permission  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  to  enroll  for  graduate  courses  to  bring  the 
total  program  to  no  more  than  five  courses.  In  addition  to  undergraduate  registration, 
the  student  must  register  in  and  pay  tuition  for  those  courses  to  the  Graduate  School  at 
the  beginning  of  the  semester  in  which  graduate  credit  is  to  be  earned  in  order  for  the 
courses  to  be  credited  toward  a  graduate  degree  program. 

Transfer  of  Graduate  Credits.  Transfer  of  credit  for  graduate  work  completed  at  anoth- 
er institution  will  be  considered  only  after  a  student  has  earned  a  minimum  of  12  units 
of  graduate  study  at  Duke  University.  After  completing  the  12  units,  the  student  should 
file  a  request  for  transfer  of  credits  on  the  appropriate  Graduate  School  form. 

Summer  Session  Credit.  Summer  session  credit  does  not  mean  degree  credit  at  Duke 
University  unless  the  student  has  been  admitted  as  a  degree  candidate  by  one  of  the  col- 
leges or  schools  of  the  University.  The  majority  of  summer  session  courses  carry  3  units 
of  credit  and  require  one  term  of  residence.  A  student  taking  a  course  for  credit  is  expect- 
ed to  do  all  the  work  required  and  to  take  the  final  examination,  and  will  receive  a  grade. 
( G.  I.  Bill  benefits  are  available  only  to  those  veterans  who  en  roll  for  credit. ) 

Grades.  Grades  in  the  Graduate  School  are  as  follows:  £,  G,  S,  F,  and  7.  £  (excellent) 
is  the  highest  mark;  G  (good)  and  S  (satisfactory)  are  the  remaining  passing  marks;  F  (fail- 
ing) is  an  unsatisfactory  grade;  and  I  (incomplete)  indicates  that  some  portion  of  the  stu- 
dent's work  is  lacking,  for  an  acceptable  reason,  at  the  time  the  grades  are  reported .  For  stu- 
dents enrolled  in  the  Graduate  School,  the  instructor  who  gives  an  7  for  a  course  specifies 
the  date  by  which  the  student  must  make  up  the  deficiency.  For  unclassified  graduate  stu- 
dents enrolled  in  the  summer  session,  a  temporary  7  for  a  course  may  be  assigned  after 
the  student  has  submitted  a  written  request.  If  the  request  is  approved  by  the  instructor 
of  the  course,  then  the  student  must  satisfactorily  complete  the  work  prior  to  the  last  day 
of  classes  of  the  subsequent  summer  term .  If  a  course  is  not  completed  within  one  calen- 
dar year  from  the  date  the  course  ended,  the  grade  of  7  becomes  permanent  and  may  not 
be  removed  from  the  student's  record.  The  grade  of  Z  indicates  satisfactory  progress  at 
the  end  of  the  first  semester  of  a  two-semester  course.  A  grade  of  F  in  a  major  course  nor- 

General  Academic  Regulations       47 


mally  occasions  withdrawal  from  a  degree  program  not  later  than  the  end  of  the  ensuing 
semester  or  term;  a  grade  of  F  in  any  other  course  occasions  academic  probation. 

Reciprocal  or  Interinstirutional  Agreements  with  Neighboring  Universities.  Un- 
der a  plan  of  cooperation  between  Duke  University  and  the  University  of  North  Caroli- 
na at  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina  Central  University  in  Durham,  and  North  Carolina  State 
University  at  Raleigh,  students  properly  enrolled  in  the  Graduate  School  of  Duke  Univer- 
sity during  the  regular  academic  year,  and  paying  full  tuition  to  this  institution,  may  be 
admitted  to  a  maximum  of  two  courses  per  semester  at  one  of  the  other  institutions  in 
the  cooperative  plan.  APh.D.  student  who  matriculated  prior  to  fall  semester  1985,  who 
has  passed  the  preliminary  examination,  and  who  registers  for  a  minimum  of  3  units  at 
Duke,  may  register  for  3  to  6  additional  units  at  the  other  institution.  Under  the  same  ar- 
rangement, students  in  the  graduate  schools  in  the  neighboring  institutions  may  be  ad- 
mitted to  course  work  at  Duke  University.  Credit  so  earned  is  not  defined  as  transfer  credit. 
To  take  advantage  of  this  arrangement  during  any  summer  session  term,  the  student 
registers  each  term  for  3  units  of  credit  at  the  home  institution  and  3  units  of  credit  at  the 
other  institution,  for  a  total  of  6  units.  All  interinstirutional  registrations  involving  extra- 
fee  courses  or  special  fees  required  of  all  students  will  be  made  at  the  expense  of  the  stu- 
dent and  will  not  be  considered  a  part  of  the  Duke  University  tuition  coverage.  This 
reciprocal  agreement  does  not  apply  to  contract  programs  such  as  the  American  Dance 
Festival. 

Identification  Cards.  Graduate  students  are  issued  identification  cards  which  they 
should  carry  at  all  times.  The  card  is  a  means  of  identification  for  library  privileges,  ath- 
letic events,  and  other  University  functions  or  services  open  to  them  as  University  stu- 
dents. Students  will  be  expected  to  present  their  cards  on  request  to  any  University  offi- 
cial or  employee.  The  card  is  not  transferable,  and  fraudulent  use  may  result  in  loss  of 
student  privileges  or  suspension  from  the  Graduate  School.  A  report  of  the  loss  of  a  card 
must  be  given  immediately  to  the  Registrar's  office.  The  cost  of  a  new  ID  card  is  $5. 

Courses  Primarily  for  Undergraduates.  Students  granted  provisional  admission  and 
others  whose  preparation  is  found  deficient  may  occasionally  be  required,  as  part  of  their 
programs,  to  take  undergraduate  courses  as  prerequisites  to  continued  graduate  study. 
Undergraduate  courses  thus  taken  and  others  elected  by  the  student  carry  no  credit  to- 
ward a  degree. 

In  exceptional  cases,  100-level  courses  outside  the  major  department  may  be  taken 
for  degree  credit  to  a  maximum  of  two  one-semester  courses  or  a  one  year  course  not  ex- 
ceeding a  total  of  8  units,  when  approved  by  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  the  major 
department  and  in  the  department  in  which  the  course  is  listed .  In  order  to  receive  credit 
for  any  such  undergraduate  work,  the  graduate  student  must  earn  a  grade  of  at  least  B. 

Under  the  above  conditions,  and  with  the  additional  approval  of  the  student's  depart- 
ment or  program,  foreign  language  reading  courses  numbered  above  100  may  form  a  part 
or  all  of  such  degree  credit.  This  provision  is  effective  only  for  language  courses  taken  af- 
ter the  spring  1988  semester. 

Withdrawal  from  a  Course.  For  permissible  changes  during  the  first  four  weeks  of 
the  fall  or  spring  semester  and  during  the  first  three  days  of  summer  session  term,  see 
the  chapter  on  "Registration."  If  a  course  is  dropped  without  the  necessary  approval,  the 
permanent  record  will,  at  the  discretion  of  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  and  with  the 
permission  of  the  instructor,  list  the  course  as  withdrawal  error  (WE) .  If  a  course  is  dropped 
after  the  four- week  period  during  the  fall  or  spring  or  after  the  first  three  days  of  classes 
during  the  summer,  the  status  of  the  student  at  the  time  of  withdrawal  from  the  course 
will  be  determined  and  indicated  on  the  permanent  record  as  Withdrew  Passing  (WP)  or 
Withdrew  Failing  (WF). 

Interruption  of  Program  and  Withdrawal  from  the  Graduate  School.  Students  are 
expected  to  meet  academic  requirements  and  financial  obligations,  as  specified  elsewhere 

48       Regulations 


in  this  bulletin,  in  order  to  remain  in  good  standing.  Certain  nonacademic  rules  and  regu- 
lations must  be  observed  also.  Failure  to  meet  these  requirements  may  result  in  dismiss- 
al by  the  appropriate  officer  of  the  University. 

The  University  reserves  the  right,  and  matriculation  by  the  student  is  a  concession 
to  this  right,  to  request  the  withdrawal  of  any  student  whose  academic  performance  at 
any  time  is  not  satisfactory  to  the  University.  A  student  who  wishes  for  any  reason  to  with- 
draw from  the  Graduate  School  during  the  fall,  spring,  or  summer  session  should  noti- 
fy in  writing  both  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  the  major  department  and  the  Dean 
of  the  Graduate  School  prior  to  the  date  of  the  expected  withdrawal  and  no  later  than  the 
published  last  day  of  classes  for  that  semester  or  summer  session .  If  students  wish  to  with- 
draw from  courses  in  the  summer  session,  they  must  consult  both  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  in  the  major  department  and  the  Director  of  the  Summer  Session.  For  refunds 
upon  withdrawal,  see  the  chapter  on  "Financial  Information." 

A  student  who,  after  successfully  completing  one  semester  of  graduate  study,  must 
withdraw  before  completion  of  a  graduate  program  may,  with  the  approval  of  the  major 
department,  request  the  Dean  to  issue  a  certificate  of  graduate  study. 

Leave  of  Absence.  A  leave  of  absence  for  a  period  of  time  no  longer  than  one  calen- 
dar year  may  be  granted  because  of  medical  necessity,  full-time  employment,  acceptance 
of  an  external  award  judged  likely  to  benefit  the  student  as  an  individual  but  not  related 
to  the  degree  requirements,  or  other  acceptable  reasons.  A  request  for  a  leave  of  absence 
should  be  originated  by  the  student,  endorsed  by  the  student's  major  professor  and  Direc- 
tor of  Graduate  Studies,  and  submitted  to  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  for  consider- 
ation prior  to  the  beginning  of  the  semester  for  which  the  leave  is  requested.  A  student 
is  eligible  to  request  a  leave  of  absence  only  after  having  completed  at  least  one  semester 
at  Duke.  Time  limitations  which  pertain  to  the  various  degrees  and  the  completion  of 
courses  on  which  a  grade  of  /  (incomplete)  was  earned  are  not  waived. 

Language  Requirements.  The  Graduate  School  has  no  foreign  language  requirement 
for  any  of  the  degrees.  Individual  departments,  however,  may  require  foreign  language 
proficiency.  See  individual  departmental  sections  in  this  bulletin  or  contact  the  appropriate 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies  to  determine  specific  requirements. 

English  as  a  Second  Language.  International  graduate  students  may  take  advantage 
of  a  course  designed  to  familiarize  them  with  the  American  English  sound  system  and 
with  the  structures  and  expectations  of  English  written  discourse.  English  200  is  neither 
a  remedial  course  nor  a  conversational  course,  but  is  advanced-level  preparation  for  the 
papers  and  presentations  required  of  the  graduate  student  and  professional.  Addition- 
ally, the  instructors  offer  coaching  and  editing  in  presentations,  written  and  oral,  in  weekly 
conferences.  Although  English  200  carries  three  units  of  credit,  these  credits  will  not  count 
toward  the  minimum  registration  required  for  graduate  degrees  at  Duke  University. 

Degree  Regulations— The  Master's  Degrees 

MASTER  OF  ARTS 

Prerequisites.  As  a  prerequisite  to  graduate  study  in  the  major  subjects,  a  student 
must  have  completed  a  minimum  of  24  undergraduate  semester  hours— ordinarily  12  se- 
mester hours  of  approved  college  courses  in  the  major  subject  and  12  semester  hours  in 
the  major  or  in  related  work.  Since  some  departments  require  more  than  12  semester  hours 
in  the  proposed  field  of  study,  students  should  read  carefully  the  special  requirements 
listed  by  their  major  departments  in  the  chapter  on  "Courses  of  Instruction."  If  special 
master's  requirements  are  not  specified  in  this  chapter  and  there  is  a  question  about  the 
prerequisite,  prospective  students  should  write  directly  to  the  appropriate  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies. 


Degree  Regulations— The  Master's  Degrees      49 


Language  Requirements.  The  Graduate  School  requires  no  foreign  language  for  the 
master's  degree.  Certain  departments,  however,  do  have  language  requirements  and  these 
must  be  satisfied  before  the  master's  examination  can  be  taken  .See  the  departmental  list- 
ings in  the  chapter  on  "Courses  of  Instruction." 

Major  and  Related  Subjects.  Thirty  units  of  graduate  credit  at  Duke  constitutes  mini- 
mum enrollment  for  the  Master  of  Arts  degree.  The  students  must  present  acceptable 
grades  for  a  minimum  of  24  units  of  graded  course  work,  12  of  which  must  be  in  the  ma- 
jor subject.  A  minimum  of  6  units  of  the  required  24  must  be  in  a  minor  subject  or  in  related 
fields  which  are  approved  by  the  student's  major  department.  The  remaining  6  units  of 
the  required  24  may  be  taken  either  in  the  major  or  in  related  fields  approved  by  the  ma- 
jor department  and  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School. 

Individual  departments  decide  whether  the  M .  A .  program  may  be  completed  by  sub- 
mission of  an  approved  thesis  or  by  other  academic  exercises  (see  requirements  listed  in 
the  chapter  on  "Courses  of  Instruction").  In  either  case,  a  maximum  of  6  units  may  be 
earned  by  the  completion  exercises  and  the  final  examination. 

Thesis  Requirements.  The  thesis  should  demonstrate  the  student's  ability  to  collect, 
arrange,  interpret,  and  report  pertinent  material  on  a  research  problem.  The  thesis  must 
be  written  in  an  acceptable  style  and  should  exhibit  the  student's  competence  in  schol- 
arly procedures.  Requirements  of  form  are  set  forth  in  the  Duke  University  Guide  for  the 
Preparation  of  Theses  and  Dissertations,  copies  of  which  are  available  in  the  Graduate  School 
office. 

The  thesis  must  be  submitted  in  an  approved  form  to  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 
on  or  before  April  15  for  a  May  degree,  one  week  before  the  final  day  of  the  Duke  Univer- 
sity second  summer  term  for  a  September  degree,  one  week  before  the  final  day  of  the 
fall  semester  for  a  December  degree,  and  at  least  one  week  before  the  scheduled  date  of 
the  final  examination.  The  copies  of  the  thesis  then  will  be  distributed  by  the  student  to 
the  several  members  of  the  examining  committee.  Two  copies  for  the  library  and  one  copy 
for  the  adviser  will  be  bound  upon  payment  of  the  University  binding  fee  of  $22.50. 

The  Examining  Committee  and  the  Examination.  The  faculty  member  who  directs 
the  student's  program  recommends  an  examining  committee  composed  of  three  mem- 
bers of  the  graduate  faculty,  one  of  whom  usually  must  be  from  a  department  other  than 
the  major  department .  If  the  student  has  been  permitted  to  take  related  work  within  the 
major  department,  the  third  member  may  be  chosen  from  within  the  department.  Nomi- 
nations for  membership  on  this  committee  are  submitted  for  approval  to  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School  at  least  one  week  preceding  the  final  examination. 

The  committee  will  conduct  the  examination  and  certify  the  student's  success  or  fail- 
ure by  signing  the  card  provided  by  the  Graduate  School  office.  This  card  indicates  com- 
pletion of  all  requirements  for  the  degree.  If  a  thesis  is  presented,  the  committee  mem- 
bers also  sign  all  copies  of  the  thesis,  and  the  candidate  then  returns  the  original  and  first 
two  copies  to  the  Graduate  School  office. 

MASTER  OF  SCIENCE 

Prerequisites.  A  bachelor's  degree  is  a  prerequisite  for  the  M.S.  degree.  Departments 
offering  an  M.S.  degree  consider  for  admission  students  from  allied  fields  provided  they 
have  satisfactory  scientific  and  mathematical  backgrounds. 

Language  Requirements.  There  is  no  foreign  language  requirement  in  Master  of 
Science  degree  programs. 

Major  and  Related  Subjects.  Thirty  units  of  graduate  credit  at  Duke  constitutes  mini- 
mum enrollment  for  the  Master  of  Science  degree.  The  student  must  present  acceptable 
grades  for  a  minimum  of  24  units  of  graded  graduate  courses.  Of  these,  at  least  12  units 
must  be  in  the  major  subject.  A  minimum  of  6  units  must  be  in  a  minor  subject  or  in  related 


50       Regulations 


fields  which  are  approved  by  the  student's  major  department.  The  remaining  6  units  of 
the  required  24  may  be  taken  either  in  the  major  or  in  related  fields  approved  by  the  ma- 
jor department  and  by  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School .  A  maximum  of  6  units  may  be 
earned  either  by  submission  of  an  approved  thesis,  or  by  completing  courses  or  other  aca- 
demic activities  approved  by  the  student's  department.  As  other  requirements  vary  ac- 
cording to  department,  please  consult  the  chapter  on  "Courses  of  Instruction"  for  fur- 
ther information. 

Thesis  and  Examination.  Some  departments  require  a  thesis;  all  departments  require 
an  examination.  The  regulations  and  options  for  theses  and  other  means  of  completing 
the  program,  as  well  as  the  provisions  for  examination  and  the  examining  committee,  are 
the  same  as  the  requirements  for  the  Master  of  Arts  degree. 

MASTER  OF  HEALTH  ADMINISTRATION 

Prerequisites.  Students  with  any  undergraduate  major  may  apply.  Algebra  at  the  col- 
lege level  is  the  only  prerequisite,  and  a  special  course  is  available  each  summer  for  stu- 
dents whose  preparation  in  mathematics  is  inadequate  or  out  of  date. 

Major  Subjects.  The  Master  of  Health  Administration  requires  a  minimum  of  67  units 
of  graduate  credit,  and  the  program  is  normally  completed  in  four  semesters. 

Additional  Master's  Regulations 

Filing  the  Intention  to  Receive  Degree.  On  or  before  February  1  for  a  May  degree,  on 
or  before  August  1  for  a  September  degree,  or  on  or  before  December  1  for  a  December  de- 
gree, and  at  least  one  month  prior  to  the  final  examination,  the  student  must  file  in  the 
Office  of  the  Graduate  School,  on  the  official  form,  a  declaration  of  intention  to  gradu- 
ate. The  declaration  of  intention  presents  the  title  of  the  thesis  or  specifies  alternative  aca- 
demic exercises  on  which  the  degree  candidate  will  be  examined.  During  their  final  se- 
mester students  may  not  change  from  a  thesis  program  to  a  non-thesis  program  or  from 
a  non-thesis  program  to  a  thesis  program  after  this  form  has  been  filed  with  the  Gradu- 
ate School  Office.  The  declaration  must  have  the  approval  of  both  the  Director  of  Gradu- 
ate Studies  in  the  major  department  and  the  chairman  of  the  student's  advisory  com- 
mittee. 

Transfer  of  Credits.  A  maximum  of  6  accredited  units  of  graduate  credit  may  be  trans- 
ferred for  graduate  courses  completed  at  other  institutions.  Such  units  will  be  transferred 
only  if  the  student  has  received  a  grade  of  B  (or  its  equivalent)  or  better.  The  transfer  of 
graduate  credit  does  not  reduce  the  required  minimum  registration  of  30  units  for  a 
master's  degree  at  Duke.  Requests  for  transfer  should  be  submitted  on  the  approved 
Graduate  School  form. 

A  student  who  is  granted  such  transfer  credit  may  be  permitted  to  register  for  as  much 
as  12  units  of  thesis  research  instead  of  the  usual  6  units.  As  another  option,  a  student 
may  take  as  many  as  6  units  of  further  undergraduate  training  or  6  units  of  required  lan- 
guage courses  on  the  undergraduate  level. 

Nondegree  Students.  Credit  for  graduate  courses  taken  at  Duke  by  a  student  (not  un- 
dergraduate) before  degree  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  or  while  registered  as  a  non- 
degree  student  through  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education  or  the  Graduate  School  may 
be  carried  over  into  a  graduate  degree  program  if  (1)  the  action  is  recommended  by  the 
student's  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  and  approved  by  the  Dean,  (2)  the  amount  of  such 
credit  does  not  exceed  12  units,  (3)  the  work  has  received  grades  of  G  or  better,  (4)  the  work 
is  not  more  than  two  years  old,  and  (5)  the  student  applies  for  and  is  granted  formal  ad- 
mission into  a  degree  program. 


Additional  Master's  Regulations       51 


Time  Limits  for  Completion  of  Master's  Degrees.  Master's  degree  candidates  who 
are  in  residence  for  consecutive  academic  years  should  complete  all  requirements  for  the 
degree  within  two  calendar  years  from  the  date  of  their  first  registration  in  the  Graduate 
School.  Candidates  must  complete  all  requirements  within  six  calendar  years  of  their  first 
registration. 

To  be  awarded  a  degree  in  May,  the  recording  of  transfer  credit  must  be  completed 
by  the  first  day  of  the  final  examination  period  and  all  other  requirements  must  be  com- 
pleted by  the  last  day  of  the  final  examination  period .  If  a  thesis  is  one  of  the  requirements, 
it  must  be  submitted  to  the  Graduate  School  office  no  later  than  April  15.  Candidates  desir- 
ing to  have  their  degrees  conferred  on  September  1  must  have  completed  all  requirements, 
including  the  recording  of  transfer  of  credit,  by  the  final  day  of  the  Duke  University  sum- 
mer session.  Candidates  completing  degree  requirements  after  that  date  and  during  the 
fall  will  have  their  degrees  conferred  on  December  30. 

Degree  Regulations— The  Doctoral  Degree 

Requirements.  The  formal  requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  are  as  follows:  (1)  ma- 
jor and  related  courses,  (2)  foreign  language(s)  in  many  departments,  (3)  a  supervisory 
committee  for  the  student's  program  of  study,  (4)  residence,  (5)  preliminary  examination, 
(6)  dissertation,  and  (7)  final  examination. 

Major  and  Related  Work.  The  student's  program  of  study  demands  substantial  con- 
centration on  courses  in  the  major  department .  However,  a  minimum  of  6  units  in  a  related 
field  approved  by  the  major  department  must  be  included.  A  few  programs  have  been 
authorized  by  the  Executive  Committee  of  the  Graduate  Faculty  to  utilize  courses  in  fields 
within  the  major  department  in  fulfilling  the  related  field  requirement.  If  there  are  defi- 
ciencies in  a  student's  undergraduate  program,  departments  may  require  certain  under- 
graduate courses  to  be  taken  for  which  the  student  will  not  receive  degree  credit.  In  all 
cases  the  student's  supervisory  committee  will  determine  if  the  student  must  meet  re- 
quirements above  the  minimum. 

Foreign  Languages.  The  Graduate  School  has  no  foreign  language  requirement  for 
the  Ph .  D.  Some  departments  require  two  languages;  other  departments  have  no  foreign 
language  requirements.  For  specific  departmental  requirements,  see  the  chapter  on 
"Courses  of  Instruction"  or  contact  the  appropriate  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

Students  working  toward  the  doctoral  degree  in  a  department  requiring  a  foreign  lan- 
guage^) should  complete  this  requirement  by  the  end  of  their  first  year  of  residence.  Those 
who  fail  to  meet  the  requirement  by  the  end  of  their  third  semester  of  residence  should 
register  in  the  appropriate  special  reading  course.  Any  foreign  language  requirement  must 
be  met  before  the  preliminary  examination  is  taken. 

Committee  to  Supervise  the  Program  of  Study.  As  early  in  a  student's  course  of  study 
as  is  practicable  and  not  later  than  two  months  before  the  preliminary  examination,  the  Direc- 
tor of  Graduate  Studies  in  the  major  department  will  nominate  for  the  approval  of  the 
Dean  a  supervising  committee  consisting  of  five  members,  with  one  member  designat- 
ed as  chairman.  This  committee  will  include  at  least  three  graduate  faculty  members  of 
the  major  department  and,  usually,  at  least  one  from  outside  the  department.  For  pro- 
grams in  which  approval  has  been  granted  for  related  work  from  a  clearly  differentiated 
division  within  the  department,  one  member  of  the  committee  will  be  chosen  from  that 
division.  This  committee,  with  all  members  participating,  will  determine  a  program  of 
study  and  administer  the  preliminary  examination. 

Residence.  The  minimum  residence  requirement  is  one  academic  year  (two  consecu- 
tive semesters  in  the  same  academic  year)  of  full-time  registration  at  Duke  (that  is,  regis- 
tration of  12  units  each  semester  or,  in  the  case  of  graduate  assistants,  9  units  each  semes- 


52       Regulations 


ter) .  The  minimum  registration  requirement  is  60  units  of  graduate  degree  credit,  of  which 
not  more  than  15  units  of  a  completed  master's  degree  may  be  accepted  by  transfer.  Such 
transfer  of  credit  will  not  reduce  the  minimum  requirement  of  one  full-time  academic  year 
at  Duke. 

Time  Limits.  Ordinarily  a  student  registered  for  full-time  study  should  pass  the 
preliminary  examination  by  the  end  of  the  third  year.  A  student  who  has  not  passed  the 
examination  by  the  end  of  this  time  must  file  with  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  a  state- 
ment, approved  by  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  the  major  department,  explain- 
ing the  delay  and  setting  a  date  for  the  examination.  Except  under  unusual  circumstances, 
extension  will  not  be  granted  beyond  the  middle  of  the  fourth  year. 

The  doctoral  dissertation  should  be  submitted  and  accepted  within  two  calendar  years 
after  the  preliminary  examination  is  passed.  Should  the  dissertation  not  be  submitted 
and  accepted  within  four  years  after  the  examination,  the  candidate,  with  the  approval 
of  the  committee,  may  petition  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  for  an  extension  of  up 
to  one  year.  If  this  extension  is  granted  and  the  dissertation  is  not  submitted  and  accept- 
ed by  the  new  deadline,  the  student  will  be  dropped  from  candidacy.  The  student  must 
then  pass  a  second  preliminary  examination  to  be  reinstated  as  a  candidate  for  the  de- 
gree. In  such  cases,  the  time  limit  for  submitting  the  dissertation  will  be  determined  by 
the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  and  the  candidate's  committee. 

Ordinarily,  credit  is  not  allowed  for  graduate  courses  (including  transfers)  or  foreign 
language  examinations  that  are  more  than  six  years  old  at  the  date  of  the  preliminary  ex- 
amination .  Similarly,  credit  will  not  be  allowed  for  a  preliminary  examination  that  is  five 
years  old  at  the  date  of  the  final  examination .  In  cases  of  exceptional  merit,  however,  the 
Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  may  extend  these  limits.  Should  the  five  year  limits  be  ex- 
ceeded, the  student's  department  must  submit  to  the  Dean  specific  requirements  for 
revalidating  credits. 

Preliminary  Examination.  A  student  is  not  accepted  as  a  candidate  for  the  Ph .  D.  de- 
gree until  the  preliminary  examination  has  been  passed.  The  examination  ordinarily 
covers  both  the  major  field  and  related  work.  In  the  summer  a  preliminary  examination 
may  be  scheduled  only  between  the  opening  and  closing  dates  of  the  summer  session. 

A  student  who  fails  the  preliminary  examination  may  apply,  with  the  consent  of  the 
supervisory  committee  and  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School,  for  the  privilege  of  a  sec- 
ond examination  to  be  taken  no  earlier  than  three  months  after  the  date  of  the  first.  Suc- 
cessful completion  of  the  second  examination  requires  the  affirmative  vote  of  all  committee 
members.  Failure  on  the  second  examination  will  render  a  student  ineligible  to  continue 
a  program  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  at  Duke  University. 

The  Dissertation.  The  dissertation  is  expected  to  be  a  mature  and  competent  piece 
of  writing,  embodying  the  results  of  significant  and  original  research. 

One  month  before  the  dissertation  is  presented  and  no  later  than  February  1  preced- 
ing the  May  commencement,  August  1  for  a  September  degree,  and  December  1  for  a  De- 
cember degree,  the  student  must  file  with  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School,  on  the  offi- 
cial form  available  in  the  Graduate  School  office,  the  title  of  the  dissertation.  This  title  must 
receive  the  written  approval  of  both  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  of  the  student's  major 
department  and  the  professor  who  directs  the  dissertation. 

The  basic  requirements  for  preparing  the  dissertation  (type  of  paper,  form,  and  bind- 
ing) are  prescribed  in  the  Guide  for  the  Preparation  of  Theses  and  Dissertations,  copies  of  which 
are  available  in  the  Graduate  School  office. 

The  dissertation  must  be  completed  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  professor  who  directs 
the  dissertation,  members  of  the  student's  advisory  committee,  and  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School .  A  copy  of  the  dissertation  must  be  submitted  to  the  Dean  of  the  Gradu- 
ate School  on  or  before  April  1  preceding  the  May  commencement,  one  week  before  the 
end  of  the  Duke  summer  session  for  a  September  degree,  or  one  week  before  the  end  of 


Degree  Regulations— The  Doctoral  Degree       53 


the  fall  semester  for  a  December  degree.  The  dissertation  must  be  submitted  to  the  Gradu- 
ate School  office  at  least  seven  days  before  the  scheduled  date  of  the  student's  examination. 

All  doctoral  dissertations  are  published  on  microfilm  through  University  Microfilms, 
Ann  Arbor,  Michigan .  Authors  may  copyright  them  if  they  wish .  Abstracts  are  published 
in  Dissertation  Abstracts  International. 

Two  extra  copies  of  the  abstract  (not  more  than  350  words  long)  are  submitted  when 
the  dissertation  is  presented  to  the  Graduate  School  office.  A  nonrefundable  fee  of  $40 
is  charged  for  microfilming.  If  copyright  is  desired,  an  additional  fee  of  $20  is  charged. 
The  original  and  two  copies  will  be  bound  at  a  cost  of  $22.50. 

Final  Examination.  The  final  examination  is  normally  administered  by  the  five  mem- 
bers of  the  supervising  committee,  but  it  may  be  administered  by  four  members  of  the 
committee  if  the  member  representing  the  related  field  is  present.  In  either  case,  successful 
completion  of  the  final  examination  requires  at  least  four  affirmative  votes.  The  final  oral 
examination  shall  be  primarily  on  the  dissertation;  however,  questions  may  be  asked  in 
the  candidate's  major  field .  Except  in  unusual  circumstances  approved  by  the  Dean,  a  fi- 
nal examination  will  not  be  scheduled  when  the  University  is  not  in  session. 

A  student  who  fails  the  final  examination  may  be  allowed  to  take  it  a  second  time, 
but  no  earlier  than  six  months  from  the  date  of  the  first  examination .  Permission  to  take 
the  second  examination  must  be  obtained  from  the  professor  who  directed  the  disserta- 
tion and  from  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School.  Failure  to  pass  the  second  examination 
renders  the  student  ineligible  to  continue  work  for  the  Ph .  D.  degree  at  Duke  University. 

Deposit  of  the  Dissertation.  After  passing  the  examination,  candidates  bring  to  the 
Graduate  School  office  the  original  and  the  first  two  copies  of  the  dissertation,  properly 
signed.  At  this  time  they  sign  the  microfilming  agreement  and  pay  microfilming  and  copy- 
right fees. 

Commencement 

Graduation  exercises  are  held  once  a  year,  in  May,  when  degrees  are  conferred  on 
and  diplomas  are  issued  to  those  students  who  have  completed  requirements  by  the  end 
of  the  spring.  Those  who  complete  degree  requirements  by  the  end  of  the  fall  or  by  the 
end  of  a  summer  term  receive  diplomas  dated  December  30  or  September  1,  respective- 
ly. There  is  a  delay  in  the  mailing  of  September  and  December  diplomas  because  diplo- 
mas cannot  be  issued  until  they  are  approved  by  the  Academic  Council  and  the  Board 
of  Trustees. 

Standards  of  Conduct 

Duke  University  expects  and  will  require  of  all  its  students  cooperation  in  develop- 
ing and  maintaining  high  standards  of  scholarship  and  conduct. 

Students  are  expected  to  meet  academic  requirements  and  financial  obligations,  as 
specified  elsewhere  in  this  bulletin,  in  order  to  remain  in  good  standing.  Certain  nonaca- 
demic  rules  and  regulations  must  be  observed  also.  Failure  to  meet  these  requirements 
may  result  in  dismissal  by  the  appropriate  officer  of  the  University. 

The  University  wishes  to  emphasize  its  policy  that  all  students  are  subject  to  the  rules 
and  regulations  of  the  University  currently  in  effect  or  which,  from  time  to  time,  are  put 
into  effect  by  the  appropriate  authorities  of  the  University.  Students,  in  accepting  admis- 
sion, indicate  their  willingness  to  subscribe  to  and  be  governed  by  these  rules  and  regu- 
lations and  acknowledge  the  right  of  the  University  to  take  such  disciplinary  action,  in- 
cluding suspension  and/or  expulsion,  as  may  be  deemed  appropriate  for  failure  to  abide 
by  such  rules  and  regulations  or  for  conduct  adjudged  unsatisfactory  or  detrimental  to 
the  University.  University  authorities  will  take  action  in  accordance  with  due  process. 


54      Regulations 


Duke  University,  as  a  community  of  scholars,  strongly  relies  upon  the  standard  of 
academic  integrity.  Plagiarism  and  other  forms  of  academic  dishonesty  represent  a  cor- 
ruption of  this  integrity  and,  as  such,  cannot  be  tolerated  within  the  community.  Igno- 
rance of  what  constitutes  academic  dishonesty  is  no  excuse  for  actions  which  violate  the 
integrity  of  the  community.  In  a  community  which  builds  on  the  notion  of  academic  in- 
tegrity, the  threat  of  academic  dishonesty  represents  an  intolerable  risk.  Students  unsure 
about  the  university  definition  of  plagiarism  may  wish  to  consult  the  Bulletin  of  Duke 
University:  Information  and  Regulations  (especially  the  chapter  on  "Academic  Honesty"). 

Sexual  Harassment  Procedures.  A  committee  of  students,  faculty,  and  administra- 
tors exists  at  Duke  to  respond  to  concerns  about  sexual  intimidation  in  any  form.  For  con- 
fidential assistance  and  information  on  procedures,  contact  Professor  Kate  Bartlett  (law), 
684-6946,  or  Dr.  Judith  Ruderman  (Continuing  Education),  684-6259. 

Student  Discrimination  Grievance  Procedures.  It  is  the  responsibility  of  the  Direc- 
tor of  Graduate  Studies  to  inform  each  graduate  student  of  the  appropriate  channels  of 
redress.  In  normal  circumstances,  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  is  the  first  to  hear  the 
complaint.  If  the  complaint  cannot  be  resolved  satisfactorily  at  this  level,  the  student  may 
address,  in  turn,  the  department  chairman,  the  Associate  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School, 
the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School,  the  Provost,  and  as  a  last  resort,  the  President  of  the 
University. 

Judicial  Code  and  Procedures.  In  the  spring  of  1971,  the  Graduate  School  commu- 
nity ratified  and  adopted  the  following  official  judicial  code  and  procedures: 

I.  Graduate  School  Judicial  Code  and  Procedures 

A.  A  student,  by  accepting  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  of  Duke  University,  thereby  indicates  will- 
ingness to  subscribe  to  and  be  governed  by  the  rules  and  regulations  of  the  University  as  currently  are  in  effect 
or,  from  time  to  time,  are  put  into  effect  by  the  appropriate  authorities  of  the  University,  and  indicates  willing- 
ness to  accept  disciplinary  action,  if  behavior  is  adjudged  to  be  in  violation  of  those  rules  or  in  some  way  unac- 
ceptable or  detrimental  to  the  University.  However,  a  student's  position  of  responsibility  to  the  authorities  and 
the  regulations  of  the  University  in  no  way  alters  or  modifies  responsibilities  in  relation  to  civil  authorities  and  laws. 

B.  A  graduate  student  at  Duke  University  stands  in  a  primary  and  unique  relation  of  responsibility  to  the 
faculty  in  the  major  department,  the  faculty  upon  whose  recommendation  a  graduate  degree  will  or  will  not  be 
awarded  to  the  student.  In  matters  which  involve  or  may  affect  the  student's  intellectual  or  professional  life,  the 
student  is  directly  responsible  to  this  department  and  its  representatives,  and  such  matters  should  primarily  be 
handled  by  the  department. 

C.  Actions  which  appear  to  conflict  with  University-wide  rules  and  regulations  will  fall  under  the  jurisdic- 
tion of  the  University  Judicial  Board . 

D.  A  student  may  elect  to  have  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  hear  matters  related  to  the  student's  con- 
duct in  addition  to  or  instead  of  faculty  members  from  the  student's  major  department,  or  may  elect  to  have  such 
matters  reviewed  and  judged  by  a  judicial  board  instead  of  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School  or  members  of  the 
faculty  in  the  major  department.  (The  constitution  and  procedure  of  the  judicial  board  are  detailed  below.) 

E.  The  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  the  student's  major  department  may  request  that  a  student's  actions 
be  reviewed  by  the  Judicial  Board  or  by  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School. 

II.  The  Graduate  School  Judicial  Board 

A.  Composition.  The  Graduate  School  Judicial  Board  shall  have  five  members,  serving  for  a  period  of  two 
years:  two  students  selected  from  the  student  body,  two  members  of  the  Graduate  Faculty  appointed  by  the  Ex- 
ecutive Committee  of  the  Graduate  School,  and  one  Associate  or  Assistant  Dean  appointed  by  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School.  The  Board  shall  elect  one  of  its  members  as  Chairman.  The  Board  shall  have  at  its  service  a 
recording  secretary  to  keep  minutes  of  the  hearings  and  of  the  Board's  actions  in  a  permanent,  confidential  rec- 
ord book.  The  Board  will  be  constituted  in  order  to  hear  cases  in  which  the  accused  is  a  student  currently  en- 
rolled in  the  Graduate  School  and  which  have  been  referred  to  it  by  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  the  stu- 
dent's department,  by  the  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School,  or  by  the  student  himself. 

B.  Preliminary  Procedures.  If  a  student  requests  a  hearing  by  the  Judicial  Board  it  must  be  done  in  writing, 
allowing  its  Chairman  at  least  seventy-two  hours  to  convene  the  Board.  In  addition,  the  Chairman  shall  not  convene 
the  Board  until  seventy-two  hours  after  being  asked  to  convene  the  Board.  It  is  the  responsibility  of  the  Chair- 
man of  the  Judicial  Board  fully  to  inform  its  members  concerning  the  case  and  the  reasons  the  case  has  been  re- 
ferred to  the  Board;  and  to  prepare  a  written  summary  of  this  information  for  the  Board,  the  Dean,  and  the  student . 


Standards  of  Conduct       55 


C.  Procedural  Safeguards  for  the  Hearing.  The  Accused  has  the  right  to  challenge  any  member  of  the  Judicial 
Board  on  grounds  of  prejudice.  If  the  Board  decides  to  excuse  one  or  more  of  its  members  for  reasons  given  by 
the  Accused,  it  shall  consult  with  the  Dean  about  the  need  for  replacements.  The  Accused  may  choose  an  Ad- 
viser to  assist  in  the  defense.  The  Accused  may  also  produce  witnesses  (including  no  more  than  two  character 
witnesses),  introduce  documents,  and  offer  testimony.  A  person  having  direct  knowledge  relevant  to  a  case  be- 
ing heard  by  the  Board  is  a  material  witness.  The  Judicial  Board  may  request  the  appearance  of  material  witnesses. 
The  Board  shall  also  request,  upon  written  request  of  the  Complainant  or  the  Accused,  the  appearance  of  mate- 
rial witnesses.  Witnesses  shall  be  notified  of  the  time,  place,  and  purpose  of  their  appearance.  The  Accused  has 
the  right  to  examine  the  written  statement  of  any  witness  relevant  to  the  case  at  least  seventy-two  hours  before 
the  hearing.  The  Accused  has  the  right  to  be  faced  with  any  witness  who  has  given  a  statement  relevant  to  the 
case  at  the  hearing  if  the  witness's  attendance  can  be  secured. 

The  hearing  will  be  conducted  in  private  unless  the  Accused  requests  an  open  hearing.  If  any  objection  is 
raised  to  conducting  an  open  hearing  in  any  particular  case,  the  Judicial  Board  shall  decide  the  issue  by  majority 
vote.  If  the  decision  is  made  not  to  hold  an  open  hearing,  the  Accused  shall  be  informed  in  writing  of  the  reasons 
for  the  decision. 

The  Judicial  Board  shall  consider  only  the  report  of  the  Chairman,  documents  submitted  into  evidence, 
and  the  testimony  of  witnesses  at  the  hearing  in  reaching  its  decisions. 

D.  Conduct  of  the  Hearing.  The  hearing  of  any  case  shall  begin  with  a  reading  of  the  charge  by  the  Chairman 
in  the  presence  of  the  Accused.  The  Accused  shall  then  plead  guilty  or  not  guilty  or  move  to  terminate  or  post- 
pone the  hearing.  The  Accused  may  qualify  a  plea,  admitting  guilt  in  part  and  denying  it  in  part.  The  Accused 
may  not  be  questioned  for  more  than  one  hour  without  recess. 

At  any  time  during  the  hearing,  the  Accused  or  the  Judicial  Board  may  move  to  terminate  or  to  postpone 
the  hearing  or  to  qualify  the  plea  or  to  modify  its  charge. 

Pending  verdict  on  charges  (including  appeal)  against  the  Accused,  status  as  a  student  shall  not  be  changed, 
nor  the  right  to  be  on  campus  or  to  attend  classes  suspended,  except  that  the  Chancellor  or  Provost  may  impose 
an  interim  suspension  upon  any  member  of  the  University  community  who  demonstrates,  by  conduct,  that  con- 
tinued presence  on  the  campus  constitutes  an  immediate  threat  to  the  physical  well-being  or  property  of  mem- 
bers of  the  University  community  or  the  property  or  orderly  functioning  of  the  University. 

E.  Sanctions  and  the  Verdict.  The  Graduate  School  Judicial  Board  shall  have  the  power  to  impose  the  follow- 
ing penalties:  expulsion,  dismissal  from  the  University  with  the  recommendation  that  the  person  never  be  read- 
mitted; suspension,  dismissal  from  the  University  and  from  participation  in  all  University  activities  for  a  speci- 
fied period  of  time,  after  which  the  student  may  apply  for  readmission;  disciplinary  probation,  placing  the  student 
on  a  probationary  status  for  a  specified  period  of  time,  during  which  conviction  for  violation  of  any  regulation 
may  result  in  more  serious  disciplinary  action;  restitution,  payment  for  all,  oraportionof  property  damage  caused 
during  the  commission  of  an  offense.  Restitution  may  be  imposed  by  itself  or  in  addition  to  any  of  the  other  penalties. 
The  Judgment  shall  consist  of  a  finding  of  guilty  or  not  guilty  of  the  charge  and,  when  the  Accused  is  found  guilty, 
a  statement  of  the  punishment  assessed.  On  all  questions,  including  the  verdict  and  the  finding  of  guilty  or  not 
guilty,  the  Board  shall  be  governed  by  a  majority  vote.  The  Judicial  Board  may  decide  to  rehear  a  case  in  which 
significant  new  evidence  can  be  introduced.  In  addition,  the  defendant  may  request  an  appeal. 

F.  Appeals.  The  appellant  may  submit  to  the  Dean  a  written  statement  containing  the  grounds  for  appeal 
and  arguments.  In  such  cases,  the  Dean  should  determine  if  the  appeal  should  be  granted,  and  the  Dean  can 
hear  the  case,  or  refer  it  to  the  appropriate  faculty  in  the  student's  department  or  to  the  Judicial  Board. 

An  appeal  shall  be  granted  on  the  following  grounds:  procedural  error  substantially  affecting  the  rights 
of  the  accused;  incompatibility  of  the  verdict  with  the  evidence;  excessive  penalty  not  in  accord  with  "current 
community  standards;"  new  evidence  of  a  character  directly  to  affect  the  judgment  but  on  which  the  original 
tribunal  had  refused  a  new  hearing. 

III.  Amendment  and  Construction 

This  Judicial  code  and  procedure  and  this  constitution  and  procedure  for  the  Graduate  School  Judicial  Board 
may  be  amended  at  any  time  with  due  notice  or  publication  by  consent  of  the  Dean,  the  Executive  Committee, 
and  the  graduate  students.  Questions  and  problems  not  answered  or  anticipated  by  the  foregoing  may  be  re- 
solved by  the  use  of  other  existing  institutions  or  by  amendment. 


56       Regulations 


\v^ 


fc,  jr    If 


Standards  of  Conduct       57 


Courses  of  Instruction 


Course  Enrollment 

Courses  numbered  200-299  are  sometimes  open  to  qualified  undergraduate  students 
who  have  received  permission  of  the  instructor  and  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 
Undergraduate  students  are  not  permitted  in  any  courses  above  300. 

In  general,  courses  with  odd  numbers  are  offered  in  the  fall  semester,  those  with  even 
numbers  in  the  spring  semester.  Double  numbers  separated  by  a  hyphen  indicate  that 
the  course  is  a  year  course  and  usually  must  be  continued  throughout  the  year  if  credit 
is  to  be  received.  A  student  must  secure  written  consent  from  the  instructor  in  order  to 
receive  credit  for  either  semester  of  a  year  course.  Double  numbers  separated  by  a  comma 
indicate  that  although  the  course  is  a  year  course,  credit  may  be  received  for  either  semester 
without  special  consent.  Ordinarily,  courses  which  bear  no  date  are  offered  every  year. 

In  each  department  the  number  399  is  reserved  to  designate  special  (individual)  read- 
ings in  a  specified  area  and  supervised  by  a  regular  member  of  the  graduate  staff,  with 
credit  of  1-3  units  each  registration,  only  one  course  per  registration,  and  9  units  maxi- 
mum in  three  successive  registrations.  The  course  is  restricted  to  resident  master's  and 
doctoral  programs,  must  have  a  completion  exercise,  and  must  carry  a  grade. 

The  symbol  S,  suffixed  to  a  course  number,  identifies  that  course  as  a  seminar. 

Art  and  Art  History 

Professor  Spencer,  Chairman  and  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  (112A  East  Duke);  Associ- 
ate Professors  Bruzelius  and  Wharton;  Assistant  Professors  Castriota,  Cernuschi,  Stiles, 
Sund,  and  van  Miegroet;  Professor  Emeritus  Markman 

Graduate  work  in  the  Department  of  Art  and  Art  History  is  offered  leading  to  the  A.M. 
degree  in  art  history  and  is  designed  to  provide  basic  training  in  the  history  of  art  with 
specialization  in  a  given  field  selected  by  the  student  after  consultation  with  and  approval 
by  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  Prospective  students  should  present  a  minimum  of 
24  semester  hours  of  undergraduate  work  in  the  history  of  art.  In  special  cases  a  student 
who  does  not  fulfill  this  prerequisite  may  be  required  to  attend  prescribed  undergradu- 
ate courses.  A  reading  knowledge  of  one  foreign  language  (preferably  German)  is 
required;  candidates  who  do  not  meet  this  requirement  upon  admission  to  the  program 
are  expected  to  do  so  by  the  end  of  their  first  term  in  residence. 

The  program  for  the  A.M.  degree  in  art  history  consists  of  30  units  as  follows :  12  units 
in  art  history;  6  units  in  an  approved  minor;  6  units  in  the  major  or  minor,  or  other 
approved  subject;  and  6  units  in  thesis.  A  written  thesis  is  required. 

Art  and  Art  History       59 


For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

220S.  Studies  in  Greek  Art.  Specific  aspects  of  the  art  or  architecture  in  the  Greek 
world  from  the  late  geometric  to  the  Hellenistic  periods.  Subject  varies  from  year  to  year. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  220S.  3  units.  Castriota 

221S.  Studies  in  Roman  Art.  Selected  topics  in  the  art  and  architecture  of  Late  Repub- 
lican and  Imperial  Rome.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  227S. 
3  units.  Castriota 

222S.  Greek  Sculpture.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  231S.  3  units.  Stanley 

223S.  Greek  Painting.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  232S.  3  units.  Stanley 

224S.  Greek  Architecture.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  233S.  3  units.  Richardson 

225S.  Roman  Architecture.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  235S.  3  units.  Richardson 

226S.  Roman  Painting.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  236S.  3  units.  Richardson 

230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture.  Conceptual,  institutional,  or 
stylistic  topics.  Subject  varies  from  year  to  year.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L: 
Classical  Studies  230S  and  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Bruzelius  or  Wharton 

232S.  Romanesque  and  Gothic  Art  and  Architecture.  Analysis  of  an  individual  top- 
ic. Subject  varies  from  year  to  year.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Bruzelius 

234.  Medieval  Architecture.  The  development  of  medieval  architecture  through  the 
mid-fourteenth  century.  Emphasis  on  churches,  with  some  discussion  of  castles  and  for- 
tifications, town  planning,  and  domestic  architecture.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  3  units.  Bruzelius 

235.  Gothic  Cathedrals.  Major  monuments  of  Gothic  architecture  in  the  twelfth  and 
thirteenth  centuries  on  the  continent  and  in  England  with  concentration  on  the  great 
cathedrals  of  France.  3  units.  Bruzelius 

241.  Fifteenth-Century  Italian  Art.  Painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture  from  Masac- 
cio,  Donatello,  and  Brunelleschi  to  Leonardo.  Emphasis  on  the  art  of  Florence.  3  units. 
Spencer 

242S.  Studies  in  Italian  Renaissance  Art.  Specific  problems  dealing  with  iconogra- 
phy, style,  or  an  individual  master  from  ca.  1300  to  1600.  Subject  varies  from  year  to  year. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units. 

Spencer 

243S.  Studies  in  Northern  Art.  Selected  topics  such  as  the  Antwerp  workshops  of 
the  sixteenth  centur)',  picturing  in  Haarlem  at  the  turn  of  the  seventeenth  century,  or 
Rubens  and  Rembrandt.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units,  van  Miegroet 

251.  Italian  Baroque  Art.  Seventeenth-century  painting,  sculpture,  and  architecture. 
3  units.  Staff 

252.  Northern  Baroque  Painting.  Seventeenth-century  Flemish  and  Dutch  painting, 
with  emphasis  on  the  art  of  Rubens  and  Rembrandt.  3  units,  van  Miegroet 

261S.  Studies  in  Romanticism.  Examination  of  the  work  of  a  single  artist  or  the  de- 
velopment of  a  specific  theme  or  movement  within  the  period  1760  to  1850. 3  units.  Staff 

262S.  Studies  in  Nineteenth-Century  Art.  Focus  on  a  major  artist,  movement,  or  trend 
in  nineteenth-century  art.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Sund 

60       Courses  of  Instruction 


274.  The  History  of  Impressionism.  The  evolution  of  the  impressionist  movement 
and  the  works  of  its  major  masters.  Particular  attention  will  be  paid  to  Monet,  Degas, 
Cezanne,  Pissarro,  and  Renoir.  3  units.  Sund 

275.  Surrealism.  The  surrealist  movement  that  flourished  in  Paris  between  the  World 
Wars;  its  origins,  aims,  and  major  adherents— such  as  the  artists  Miro,  Magritte,  Tanguy, 
and  Dali— examined  in  the  context  of  surrealist  literature,  theory,  and  politics.  3  units.  Sund 

276S.  Problems  in  Modern  Art.  Selected  topics  in  modern  art  before  1945,  with  em- 
phasis on  major  movements  or  masters.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Cer- 
nuschi,  Stiles,  or  Sund 

277S.  Contemporary  Art.  Historical  and  critical  principles  applied  to  present-day  ar- 
tists and/or  movements  in  all  media  since  World  War  II.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. Cemuschi  or  Sund 

278.  Twentieth-Century  Criticism.  Twentieth-century  art  through  the  writings  of  its 
major  proponents  from  Apollinaire  and  Roger  Fry  through  Meyer,  Schapiro,  and  Clem- 
ent Greenberg  to  present-day  theorists  of  postmodernism .  The  definition  of  modernism 
and  the  role  of  the  critic  as  advocate,  mediator,  arbiter,  and  prophet  of  contemporary 
trends.  3  units.  Staff 

282S.  Contemporary  Theory  in  the  Visual  Arts.  Theory  in  contemporary  history  and 
its  accommodation  to  theoretical  developments  in  other  disciplines  (for  example,  litera- 
ture, women's  studies,  Marxism,  and  anthropology).  Focus  on  the  writings  of  contem- 
porary, theory-centered  art  historians  and  critics.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3 
units.  Wharton 

293S.  Methodology  of  Art  History.  Approaches  to  the  study  and  theory  of  art :  histori- 
ography, connoisseurship,  iconology  and  criticism.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 
3  units.  Staff 

294, 295.  Special  Problems  in  Art  History.  Individual  study  and  research.  6  units.  Staff 
COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

227.  Early  Christian  Culture:  Evidence  of  Art  and  Literature 
231.  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture 
245.  Sixteenth-Century  Italian  Art 

248.  Art  of  Northern  Europe  in  the  Fifteenth  and  Sixteenth  Centuries 

249.  Death  in  Art 

279S.  Problems  in  Modern  Architecture 

Asian  Languages 

The  courses  are  offered  as  an  enrichment  for  students  interested  in  the  South  Asian 
subcontinent  and  may  be  taken  as  a  general  elective  by  advanced  undergraduate  students. 
No  major  work  is  offered  in  Hindi-Urdu. 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

Hindi-Urdu  200,  201.  Special  Studies  in  South  Asian  Languages 

For  courses  in  Chinese  and  Japanese,  see  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Undergraduate 
Instruction. 


Asian  Languages       61 


Biochemistry 

Professor  Hill,  Chairman  (255  NanalineH.  Duke);  Professor  Webster,  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  (157-B  Nanaline  H.  Duke);  Professors  Bell,  Bennett,  Fridovich,  Gross,  Kredich, 
Lefkowitz,  McCarty,  Modrich,  Rajagopalan,  Siegel,  and  Spicer;  Associate  Professors 
Greene,  Greenleaf,  Hsieh,  B.  Kaufman,  D.  Richardson,  Sage,  Steege,  and  Sullivan;  As- 
sistant Professors  Been,  Blackshear,  Fierke,  Hershfield,  R.  Kaufman,  and  Schlossman; 
Professor  Emeritus  Bernheim;  Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  J.  Richardson 

Graduate  work  in  the  Department  of  Biochemistry  is  offered  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  de- 
gree. Preparation  for  such  graduate  study  may  take  diverse  forms.  Undergraduate  majors 
in  chemistry,  biology,  mathematics,  or  physics  are  welcome,  but  adequate  preparation 
in  chemistry  is  essential.  Graduate  specialization  areas  include  protein  structure  and  func- 
tion, crystallography  of  macromolecules,  nucleic  acid  structure  and  function,  lipid  bio- 
chemistry, membrane  structure  and  function,  molecular  genetics,  and  enzyme  mechan- 
isms. The  biochemistry  department,  in  cooperation  with  the  University  Programs  in 
Genetics  and  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  offers  biochemistry  students  the  opportu- 
nity to  pursue  advanced  research  and  study  to  fulfill  the  requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  de- 
gree related  to  these  fields. 

200.  General  Biochemistry.  An  introductory  survey  of  fundamental  aspects  of  bio- 
chemistry with  emphasis  on  the  structure  of  macromolecules,  mechanism  of  enzyme  ac- 
tion, metabolic  pathways,  biochemical  genetics,  and  the  structure  and  functions  of  spe- 
cial tissues.  Designed  for  medical  students;  graduate  students  only  with  consent  of 
instructor.  4  units.  Hill  and  staff 

209, 210.  Independent  Study.  A  tutorial  designed  for  students  who  are  interested  in 
either  a  laboratory  or  a  library  project  in  biochemistry.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences.  Credit  to 
be  arranged.  Staff 

215.  Genetic  Mechanisms.  Genetic  mechanisms  in  molecular  terms  emphasizing 
gene  function,  segregation,  and  regulation  in  prokaryotes  and  eukaryotes.  Systems  cov- 
ered include  bacterial  viruses,  bacteria,  plasmids,  cellular  organelles,  and  selected  low- 
er and  higher  eukaryotes.  Course  material  will  be  drawn  from  original  literature.  Prereq- 
uisite: introductory  biochemistry.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  3  units. 
Webster  and  staff 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation.  See  C-L :  Cell  Biology  219;  also 
C-L:  Microbiology  and  Immunology  219  and  Pathology  219.  3  units.  Counce  and  staff 

219S.  Seminar.  Optional  seminar  in  conjunction  with  Biochemistry  219.  McCarty 

222.  Structure  of  Biological  Macromolecules.  Introduction  to  the  techniques  of  struc- 
ture determination  by  X-ray  crystallography  and  study  of  some  biological  macromolecules 
whose  three-dimensional  structures  have  been  determined  at  high  resolution.  2  units. 
Richardson 

224.  Biochemistry  of  Development  and  Differentiation.  The  course  represents  an 
extension  of  topics  covered  in  the  first  semester  course,  Biochemistry  219.  Emphasis  will 
be  on  the  control  of  transcription  and  translation  of  messenger  RNA  in  mammalian  cells. 
These  studies  include  gene  amplification,  postsynthetic  modifications  of  chromosomal 
proteins,  as  a  result  of  hormone  induction .  Specific  systems  will  include  the  development 
of  the  mammary  gland,  the  pancreas,  and  the  chick  oviduct.  2  units.  McCarty 

227.  Introductory  Biochemistry  I:  Intermediary  Metabolism.  Chemistry  of  the  con- 
stituents of  proteins,  lipids,  carbohydrates,  and  nucleic  acids  and  their  metabolic  inter- 
relationships. Prerequisite:  organic  chemistry.  3  units.  Fridovich  and  Rajagopalan 


62       Courses  of  Instruction 


259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Protein  and  Membrane  Structure/Function.  Detailed  con- 
cepts of  the  structure  and  function  of  proteins  as  enzymes  and  as  structural  elements  of 
cellular  substructures,  including:  protein  primary  structure  and  its  determination,  pat- 
terns of  protein  folding,  mechanisms  of  enzyme  catalysis  and  regulation,  function  and 
formation  of  multimeric  protein  assemblies,  proteins  and  other  constituents  of  biologi- 
cal membranes.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biochemistry  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  The 
University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  Cell  Biology  259,  and  Microbiology 
and  Immunology  259.  3  units.  Erickson  and  staff 

265S,  266S.  Seminar.  Topics  and  instructors  announced  each  semester.  C-L:  Marine 
Sciences  266S.  2  units  or  variable.  Staff 

268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids.  Structure  and  metabolism  of  nucleic  acids 
in  the  context  of  their  biological  function  in  information  transfer.  Prerequisites:  introduc- 
tory biochemistry,  Biochemistry  259,  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  The  University  Pro- 
gram in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  Cell  Biology  268,  The  University  Program  in  Genet- 
ics, and  Microbiology  and  Immunology  268.  4  units.  Modrich  and  staff 

286.  Current  Topics  in  Immunology.  Introduction  to  some  biochemical  aspects  of 
modern  immunology.  Primary  focus  on  the  structure  of  antibodies  and  T-cell  receptors, 
their  interaction  with  antigens,  and  mechanisms  which  generate  their  diversity.  Other 
topics  include  the  differentiation  of  B-  and  T-cells  and  the  effect  of  lymphokines  on  these 
processes,  and  immunochemical  methods  and  their  application  to  biochemical  problems. 
2  units.  Sage 

288.  The  Carbohydrates  and  Lipids  of  Biological  Systems.  The  subjects  will  be  con- 
sidered in  the  following  two  general  categories:  (a)  the  relationship  between  chemical 
structure  and  biological  function  and  (b)  biosynthesis  and  catabolism.  2  units.  Kaufman 

291.  Physical  Biochemistry.  Principles  of  thermodynamics,  hydrodynamics,  spec- 
troscopy, and  X-ray  diffraction  and  scattering  are  applied  to  biological  systems.  Biologi- 
cal molecules  and  macromolecules  in  both  soluble  and  crystalline  states  are  discussed. 
Prerequisite:  undergraduate  physical  chemistry,  including  solution  thermodynamics, 
kinetics,  introductory  quantum  mechanics,  and  introductory  crystallography.  3  units. 
Hsieh  and  staff 

297.  Intermediary  Metabolism.  Lectures  and  student  presentations  on  selected  topics 
in  the  areas  of  metabolic  regulation,  bioenergetics,  and  other  subjects  of  current  research 
interest  in  metabolism.  3  units.  Siegel  and  staff 

345, 346.  Biochemistry  Seminar.  Required  of  all  biochemistry  students.  1  unit  each . 
Hill 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

245L.  Macromolecules,  Ecology,  and  Evolution 
276.  Comparative  and  Evolutionary  Biochemistry 
296.  Biological  Oxidations 
299.  Nutrition 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 

Professor  Kay,  Chairman  (254  Sands);  Associate  Professor  Smith,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 
(256  Sands);  Professors  Cartmill,  Hylander,  Simons,  and  Terborgh;  Associate  Professors 
Glander  and  van  Schaik;  Assistant  Professors  Bassett,  Roth,  and  Wright;  Associate  Profes- 
sor Emeritus  Duke;  Visiting  Assistant  Professor  White 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy       63 


Students  will  be  accepted  for  the  Ph .  D.  degree.  Admission  to  the  program  is  not  con- 
tingent on  any  particular  course  of  study  at  the  undergraduate  level.  The  goal  of  the  gradu- 
ate program  in  biological  anthropology  and  anatomy  is  to  provide  students  with  a  broad- 
based  background  in  organismal  biology  with  which  to  study  the  behavior,  ecology,  and 
evolution  of  primates.  The  three  general  areas  of  specialization  in  the  department  are: 
(1)  behavior,  physiology,  and  ecology;  (2)  paleontology,  systematics,  and  evolution;  and 
(3)  functional,  comparative,  and  developmental  morphology.  Students  are  encouraged 
to  define  a  course  of  study  that  crosses  these  boundaries  and  that  extends  beyond  the  strict 
limits  of  primatology.  Research  opportunities  include  behavioral  research  at  the  Duke 
University  Primate  Center;  ecological  fieldwork  in  South  America,  Asia,  and  the  Malagasy 
Republic;  paleontological  fieldwork  in  Africa,  South  America,  North  America,  and  the 
Malagasy  Republic;  and  laboratories  in  experimental  functional  morphology  and  com- 
parative embryology. 

Courses  of  study  are  tailored  to  meet  individual  needs,  but  all  students  will  be  ex- 
pected to  take  gross  human  anatomy,  a  course  in  statistics  and  experimental  design,  and 
at  least  one  course  in  each  of  the  subfields  of  the  department.  Students  are  required  to 
demonstrate  a  reading  knowledge  of  at  least  one  language  other  than  English.  Further 
details  are  available  in  the  Guide  to  the  Graduate  Program  in  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anat- 
omy, available  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

238.  Functional  and  Evolutionary  Morphology  of  Primates.  History  and  functional 
significance  of  locomotor  and  feeding  adaptations,  craniofacial  morphology,  sense  or- 
gans, and  reproductive  systems  in  primates,  including  Homo  sapiens.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

244S.  Primate  Behavior.  Social  behavior  of  prosimians,  monkeys,  and  apes  and  the 
evolutionary  development  of  primates.  3  units.  Glander 

246S.  The  Primate  Fossil  Record.  Evolution  of  humans  and  other  primates  as  inferred 
from  fossil  remains.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in  human  evolution.  3  units.  Simons 

280S,  281S.  Seminar  in  Selected  Topics.  Special  topics  in  methodology,  theory,  or  area. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units  each.  Staff 

292S.  Topics  in  Morphology  and  Evolution.  Various  aspects  of  vertebrate  morphol- 
ogy and  evolution,  including  major  historical  approaches  to  the  interpretation  of  mor- 
phology; the  evolution,  development,  and  function  of  specific  morphological  structures; 
and  patterns  of  vertebrate  evolution.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  1-3  units.  Smith 

301.  Anatomy  of  the  Limbs.  The  musculoskeletal  anatomy  of  the  limbs  and  limb  gir- 
dles. Emphasis  is  on  detailed  dissection  of  the  extremities,  with  a  minor  focus  on  clinical 
applications.  Course  primarily  intended  for  advanced  graduate  students  in  physical  ther- 
apy. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  1-3  units.  Staff 

305.  Gross  Human  Anatomy.  Includes  complete  dissection  of  a  cadaver;  laboratory 
work  is  supplemented  by  conferences  which  emphasize  biological  and  evolutionary 
aspects.  Prerequisites:  adequate  background  in  biology,  including  comparative  anato- 
my and  embryology  and  written  consent  of  instructor.  Required  of  entering  graduate  stu- 
dents in  anatomy;  by  arrangement,  may  extend  into  second  semester.  3  units.  Staff 

312.  Research.  Individual  investigations  in  the  various  fields  of  biological  anthropol- 
ogy and  anatomy.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Credit  to  be  arranged;  maximum 
6  units.  Staff 

313.  Anatomy  Seminar.  Regular  meeting  of  graduate  students  and  staff  in  which  cur- 
rent research  problems  in  anatomy  will  be  presented.  1  unit  each.  Staff 

314.  Biological  Anthropology  Seminar.  Regular  meeting  of  graduate  students  and 
staff  in  which  current  research  problems  in  biological  anthropology  will  be  presented. 
1  unit  each.  Staff 

64       Courses  of  Instruction 


334.  Topics  in  Physical  Anthropology.  3  units.  Staff 

340.  Tutorial  in  Advanced  Anatomy.  Topics  for  intensive  reading  and  discussion  will 
be  chosen  according  to  the  student's  interests,  related  to  basic  problems  in  function  of  bone 
and  muscle  systems,  development  and  differentiation,  comparative  anatomy  at  the  gross 
and  histological  level  and  vertebrate  evolution.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Vari- 
able units.  Staff 

354.  Research  in  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy.  A  preceptorial  course  in 
various  research  methods  in  biological  anthropology  and  anatomy.  Prerequisite:  consent 
of  instructor.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

Botany 

Professor  W.  Culberson,  Chairman  (149  Biological  Sciences);  Professor  Schlesinger,  Director 
of  Graduate  Studies  (145  Biological  Sciences);  Professors  Antonovics,  Boynton,  Christen- 
sen,  Osmond,  Ramus,  Searles,  Siedow,  Stone,  Strain,  White,  and  Wilbur;  Associate 
Professor  Knoerr;  Assistant  Professors  Johnston,  Kohorn,  Mishler,  and  Vilgalys;  Profes- 
sors Emeriti  Anderson,  Billings,  Hellmers,  Kramer,  Naylor,  and  Philpott;  Adjunct  Profes- 
sor C.  Culberson;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Patterson 

Graduate  work  in  the  Department  of  Botany  is  offered  leading  to  the  A.M.  (nonthe- 
sis),  M.S.  (thesis),  and  Ph.D.  degrees.  Students  entering  the  graduate  program  in  bota- 
ny normally  have  a  broad  background  in  the  botanical  or  biological  sciences  supplemented 
with  basic  courses  in  chemistry,  mathematics,  and  physics.  Biochemistry  and  physical 
chemistry  are  strongly  recommended  for  students  interested  in  molecular  areas,  and  ad- 
vanced courses  in  mathematics  are  recommended  for  students  in  population  generics  and 
ecology.  Deficiencies  may  be  corrected  by  taking  appropriate  courses  during  the  first  year 
of  graduate  study. 

Students  in  botany  may  specialize  in  a  wide  variety  of  areas  including  anatomy;  cel- 
lular and  molecular  biology;  evolution;  developmental,  ecological,  molecular,  organelle, 
and  population  genetics;  physiology;  community,  ecosystem,  physiological,  and  popu- 
lation ecology;  marine  biology;  and  the  systematics  of  algae,  fungi,  lichens,  bryophytes, 
ferns,  and  flowering  plants.  Students'  programs  are  tailored  to  individual  needs.  A 
brochure  providing  detailed  information  on  the  botany  department  is  available  from  the 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

205.  Molecular  Biology.  Molecular  aspects  of  gene  expression  and  cell  differentia- 
tion; application  of  recombinant  DNA  techniques  to  basic  and  applied  problems.  Prereq- 
uisites: cell  biology  and/or  genetics  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Johnston 

210L.  Bryology.  Morphological,  systematic,  and  ecological  characteristics  of  mosses 
and  liverworts.  3  units.  Mishler 

212L.  Phycology.  Morphological  and  ecological  characteristics  of  common  freshwater 
and  marine  algae  and  principles  of  their  classification.  3  units.  Searles 

217L.  Biology  of  Marine  Macrophytes.  Physiology  and  ecology  of  seaweeds,  sea- 
grasses,  marshgrasses,  and  mangroves.  Biological  flux  of  carbon  and  nutrients  in  coast- 
al seas.  Ecological  consequences  of  photosynthetic  adaptations.  Prerequisites:  introduc- 
tory biology  and  chemistry.  Given  at  Beaufort.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  217L.  4  units.  Ramus 

218.  Barrier  Island  Ecology.  Adaptation  of  plants  to  barrier  island  migration  and  other 
physical  characteristics  of  the  coastal  environment.  Major  emphasis  will  be  placed  on 
management  of  barrier  beaches  from  Maine  to  Texas  and  the  impact  of  human  interfer- 
ence with  natural  processes.  Field  studies.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in  general  ecology.  Given 
at  Beaufort.  C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  218  and  Marine  Sciences  218. 6  units. 
Staff 


Botany       65 


219L.  Benthic  Marine  Algae.  Morphology,  reproduction,  life  histories,  systematics, 
and  natural  history  of  seaweeds.  Lectures,  laboratories,  and  fieldwork  in  ocean  and  es- 
tuaries. Prerequisite:  introductory  biology;  plant  diversity  recommended.  C-L:  Marine 
Sciences  219L.  4  units.  Schneider  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

220L.  Mycology.  Survey  of  the  major  groups  of  fungi  with  emphasis  on  life  history 
and  systematics.  Field  and  laboratory  exercises.  3  units.  Vilgalys 

221S.  Topics  in  Advanced  Mycology.  Current  research  on  fungal  evolution,  genet- 
ics, physiology,  and  ecology.  Prerequisites:  Botany  220L  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units. 

Vilgalys 

224T,  225T.  Special  Problems.  Students  with  adequate  training  may  do  special  work 
in  the  fields  listed  below.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  1  to  4  units. 

1.  Genetics.  Antonovics 

2.  Genetics.  Boynton 

3.  Ecology.  Christensen 

4.  Lichenology.  W.  Culberson 

5.  Molecular  Botany.  Johnston 

6.  Cell  Biology.  Kohom 

7.  Bryology  and  Systematics.  Mishler 

8.  Physiological  Ecology.  Osmond 

9.  Phycology.  Ramus 

10.  Ecology.  Schlesinger 

11.  Phycology.  Searles 

12.  Physiology.  Siedow 

13.  Systematics  of  Flowering  Plants.  Stone 

14.  Ecology.  Strain 

15.  Mycology  and  Molecular  Systematics.  Vilgalys 

16.  Anatomy  and  Morphology  of  Vascular  Plants.  White 
Y7.  Systematics  of  Vascular  Plants.  Wilbur 

232.  Microclimatology.  See  C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  232.  3  units. 
Knoerr 

234S.  Problems  in  the  Philosophy  of  Biology.  Prerequisite :  consent  of  instructor.  See 
C-L:  Philosophy  234S;  also  C-L:  Zoology  234S.  3  units.  Brandon  (philosophy) 

237L.  Systematic  Biology.  Theory  and  practice  of  identification,  species  discovery, 
phylogeny  reconstruction,  classification,  and  nomenclature.  Prerequisites:  introducto- 
ry biology  and  one  course  in  animal  or  plant  diversity.  C-L:  Zoology  237L.  3  units.  Lund- 
berg  (zoology)  and  Mishler 

240L.  Plant  Diversity.  Major  groups  of  the  living  plants;  their  evolutionary  origins 
and  phylogenetic  relationships.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  3  units.  Mishler,  Searles, 
or  Wilbur 

242L.  Systematics.  Principles  of  vascular  plant  taxonomy,  with  practice  in  identifi- 
cation of  the  local  flora.  Lectures,  laboratories,  and  field  trips.  Prerequisite:  one  year  of 
biology.  3  units.  Wilbur 

252L.  Plant  Physiology.  The  principal  physiological  processes  of  plants  including 
respiration,  photosynthesis,  water  relations,  and  factors  associated  with  plant  morpho- 
genesis. Prerequisites:  introductory  college  biology  and  one  year  of  chemistry;  organic 
chemistry  is  desirable.  3  units.  Siedow 

253.  Biophysical  Plant  Physiology.  Application  of  physical  principles  to  such  pro- 
cesses as  ion  transport,  water  relations,  and  the  interconversion  of  energy  in  plant  cells. 
Prerequisites:  Biology  152L  and  Mathematics  32  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Knoerr  or  Siedow 


66       Courses  of  Instruction 


255L.  Molecular  Systematics  and  Evolution.  Descriptive  and  experimental  proce- 
dures used  to  assess  evolutionary  diversity  for  analysis  of  population  genetics  and  sys- 
tematic relationships.  Laboratory  problems,  discussion,  and  individual  research  projects. 
Prerequisites:  basic  course  work  in  systematics,  evolution,  and  genetics.  3  units.  Vilgalys 

256L,S.  Plant  Biosystematics.  Descriptive  and  experimental  procedures  used  to  as- 
sess systematic  implications  of  plant  evolution.  Laboratory,  discussion,  and  field-oriented 
problems.  Prerequisites:  basic  courses  in  systematics  and  genetics.  3  units.  Vilgalys 

261.  Photosynthesis.  Principles  of  plant  photosynthesis:  developmental,  mechanistic, 
regulatory,  and  ecological  aspects  of  the  photosynthetic  process.  Prerequisite:  Biology 
152L  or  Botany  252L.  3  units.  Siedow 

263L.  Tropical  Seaweeds.  Collection,  preservation,  description,  illustration,  and 
descriptive  ecology.  Two-week  field  study.  Prerequisite:  Biology  140L  or  equivalent  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  263L.  2  units.  Searles 

265L.  Physiological  Plant  Ecology.  The  physiological  approach  to  interpreting  adap- 
tation in  plants,  with  emphasis  on  terrestrial  seed  plants.  Prerequisites:  Biology  110L  and 
152L  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Strain 

266.  Plant  Population  Biology.  Theoretical,  experimental,  and  field  approaches  to 
plant  population  dynamics;  population  growth  and  regulation;  effects  of  density,  com- 
petition, and  predation.  3  units.  Staff 

267L.  Community  Ecology.  Mechanisms  that  determine  the  distribution  and  abun- 
dance of  plants  and  animals:  geology,  climate,  physiography,  soils,  competition,  and  his- 
tory. Lectures  focus  on  ecological  principles.  Seminars  and  weekend  field  trips.  Prereq- 
uisites: an  introductory  ecology  course  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Zoology  267L.  3 
units.  Christensen  and  H.  Wilbur  (zoology) 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology.  Prerequisite :  introductory  cell  biology  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. See  C-L:  Zoology  269;  also  C-L:  Cell  Biology  269,  Microbiology  and  Immunol- 
ogy 269  and  The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  3  units.  McClay  (zo- 
ology) and  staff 

272.  Biogeochemistry.  Processes  controlling  the  circulation  of  carbon  and  biochem- 
ical elements  in  natural  ecosystems  and  at  the  global  level,  with  emphasis  on  soil  and  sur- 
ficial  processes.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  12  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Geology  272.  3  units. 
Schlesinger 

280.  Principles  of  Genetics.  Structure  and  properties  of  genes  and  chromosomes  in 
individual  organisms  and  in  populations.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  C-L:  Zoology 
280  and  The  University  Program  in  Genetics  280. 3  units.  Antonovics,  Boynton,  Gillham  (zool- 
ogy), and  Laurie  (zoology) 

283.  Extrachromosomal  Inheritance.  Genetics,  biochemistry,  and  molecular  biolo- 
gy of  the  organelles  of  eukaryotic  cells,  and  cellular  symbionts.  Prerequisite:  introducto- 
ry genetics.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics  and  Zoology  283.  3  units.  Boynton 
and  Gillham  (zoology) 

285S.  Ecological  Genetics.  Interaction  of  genetics  and  ecology  and  its  importance  in 
explaining  the  evolution,  diversity,  and  distribution  of  plants  and  animals.  Prerequisites: 
Biology  180  and  Botany  286  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Antonovics 

286.  Evolutionary  Mechanisms.  Population  ecology  and  population  genetics  of  plants 
and  animals.  Fitness  concepts,  life  history  evolution,  mating  systems,  genetic  divergence, 
and  causes  and  maintenance  of  genetic  diversity.  Prerequisites:  Biology  140L  and  Bota- 
ny 240L  or  Biology  74L,  and  a  course  in  genetics.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genet- 
ics and  Zoology  286.  3  units.  Antonovics,  Uyenoyama  (zoology),  and  H.  Wilbur  (zoology) 

Botany       67 


287S.  Macroevolution.  Evolutionary  patterns  and  processes  at  and  above  the  species 
level.  Topics  include:  species  concepts,  speciation,  diversification,  extinction,  ontogeny 
and  phylogeny,  rates  of  evolution,  and  alternative  explanations  for  adaptation  and  evolu- 
tionary trends.  Prerequisite :  one  course  in  plant  or  animal  diversity.  C-L:  Zoology  287S. 
3  units.  Mishlerand  Roth  (zoology) 

293L.  Population  Biology.  Theoretical  approach  to  population  genetics,  life  table 
mathematics,  life  cycle  evolution  in  plants  and  animals,  population  dynamics,  and  regu- 
lation. Laboratories  emphasize  experimental  methods.  Individual  projects  and  weekend 
field  trips.  Prerequisites:  calculus,  ecology,  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Zoology  293L. 
3  units.  Antonovics  and  H.  Wilbur  (zoology) 

295S,  296S.  Seminar.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

300.  Tropical  Biology:  An  Ecological  Approach.  Highly  intensive,  field-oriented 
course  conducted  in  Costa  Rica  under  auspices  of  the  Organization  for  Tropical  Studies. 
For  additional  information  refer  to  the  chapter  "Special  and  Cooperative  Programs."  6  to 
8  units.  Staff 

305S,  306S.  Plant  Systematics  Seminar.  Weekly  presentation  of  current  research  in 
plant  systematics  by  students,  faculty,  and  invited  speakers.  1  unit.  Vilgalys 

310S,  311S.  Plant  Ecology  Seminar.  Discussion  of  current  research  and  literature.  1 
unit.  Staff 

315S,  316S.  Population  Genetics  Seminar.  Discussion  of  recent  developments  in 
population  genetics.  Topics  include  population  dynamics,  forces  affecting  gene  frequency 
change,  molecular  evolution,  philosophy  of  evolutionary  biology.  Student  presentations 
are  integral  to  the  course.  1  unit.  Antonovics 

320S,  321S.  Systematics  Discussion  Group.  An  informal  discussion  group.  Topics 
vary  from  semester  to  semester;  cover  systematic  and  evolutionary  biology  in  the  broad 
sense.  1  unit.  Staff 

325S,  326S.  Developmental,  Cellular,  and  Molecular  Biology  Seminar.  Weekly 
presentations  in  developmental,  cellular,  and  molecular  biology  topics  by  students, 
faculty,  and  invited  speakers.  1  unit.  Staff 

330L.  Environmental  Monitoring  and  Instrumentation.  Methods  of  measuring  and 
monitoring  the  earth's  physical  environment  with  emphasis  on  water  and  air  resources. 
Characteristics  and  uses  of  contemporary  sensors,  measurement  and  data  acquisition  sys- 
tems. Methods  of  obtaining  and  processing  computer  compatible  data  records.  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  330L.  Spring,  on 
demand.  4  units.  Knoerr 

359, 360.  Research  in  Botany.  Individual  investigation  in  the  various  fields  of  botany. 
C-L:  Marine  Sciences  359,  360.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  All  members  of  the  graduate  staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
209L.  Lichenology 
243S.  Classification  of  Angiosperms 
247L.  Plant  Ecology 
270L.  Plant  Anatomy 
344.  Micrometeorology  and  Biometeorology  Seminar 


68       Courses  of  Instruction 


RELATED  PROGRAMS 

The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  Cell  and  molecular  biolo- 
gy courses  offered  by  the  botany  department  are  an  integral  part  of  this  interdepartmen- 
tal program.  Refer  to  the  announcement  in  this  bulletin  under  Cell  and  Molecular  Biolo- 
gy for  descriptions  of  the  following  courses:  259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Protein  and 
Membrane  Structure/Function,  and  264.  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology  Seminar. 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  Genetics  courses  offered  by  the  botany  depart- 
ment are  an  integral  part  of  this  interdepartmental  program.  Refer  to  the  announcement 
in  this  bulletin  under  the  University  Program  in  Genetics  for  more  information. 

The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences.  Interdisciplinary  programs  emphasiz- 
ing marine  botany  are  available.  Refer  to  the  section  on  the  University  Program  in  Ma- 
rine Sciences. 

Program  in  Tropical  Biology.  Fellowships  are  available  for  travel  and  subsistence  in 
field-oriented  programs  in  Central  America .  Refer  to  the  section  on  Organization  for  Trop- 
ical Studies  in  the  chapter  "Special  and  Cooperative  Programs." 

Business  Administration 

Professor  Keller,  Dean  (219W  Fuqua  School  of  Business);  Professor  Bettman,  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies  (429E  Fuqua  School  of  Business);  Professors  R.  Ashton,  Baligh,  Burton, 
Cohen,  Forsyth,  Laughhunn,  Lewin,  Magat,  Payne,  Sarin,  Staelin,  and  Winkler;  Associ- 
ate Professors  A.  Ashton,  Breeden,  Edell,  Gardner,  Huber,  Mazzola,  McCann,  Moore, 
Ricks,  Sheppard,  Whaley,  and  Zeithaml;  Assistant  Professors  Boulding,  Butt,  Daniels, 
Feinberg,  Foster,  Francis,  Gresov,  Harvey  Hemler,  Kirmani,  Kishimoto,  Lindahl,  McCar- 
dle,  Moore,  Nau,  Philbrick,  Purohit,  Romanelli,  Stephan,  and  Viswanathan 

The  Ph.D.  in  Business  Administration  program  prepares  candidates  for  research  and 
teaching  careers  at  leading  educational  institutions  and  for  careers  in  business  and  gov- 
ernmental organizations  where  advanced  research  and  analytical  capabilities  are  required. 
The  Ph .  D.  program  places  major  emphasis  on  independent  inquiry,  on  the  development 
of  competence  in  research  methodology,  and  on  the  commu  nication  of  research  results. 

The  student  and  his/her  faculty  committee  determine  the  specific  program  of  study. 
Each  student  takes  a  comprehensive  examination  at  the  end  of  the  second  year  or  at  the 
beginning  of  the  third  year  of  residence.  The  final  requirement  is  the  presentation  of  a 
dissertation.  The  Ph.D.  program  usually  requires  four  years  of  work  beyond  the  bache- 
lor degree. 

Refer  to  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  The  Fuqua  School  of  Business  for  a  complete  list 
of  courses  and  course  descriptions. 

510.  Bayesian  Inference  and  Decision.  Methods  of  Bayesian  inference  and  statisti- 
cal decision  theory,  with  emphasis  on  the  general  approach  of  modeling  inferential  and 
decision-making  problems  as  well  as  the  development  of  specific  procedures  for  certain 
classes  of  problems.  Topics  include  subjective  probability,  Bayesian  inference  and  predic- 
tion, natural-conjugate  families  of  distributions,  Bayesian  analysis  for  various  processes, 
Bayesian  estimation  and  hypothesis  testing,  comparisons  with  classical  methods, 
decision-making  criteria,  utility  theory,  value  of  information,  and  sequential  decision 
making.  3  units.  Winkler 

513.  Choice  Theory.  This  seminar  deals  with  the  topics  of  measurement  theory,  conjoint 
measurement,  expected  utility  and  subjective  expected  utility  theory,  multiattribute  utility 
theory  and  recent  advances  in  preference  modeling  (generalized  nonlinear  utility  the- 
ories). The  goal  of  this  seminar  is  to  equip  students  with  tools  so  that  they  can  use  prefer- 
ence modeling  in  a  wide  variety  of  social  science  applications.  3  units.  Sarin 


Business  Administration       69 


521.  Organization  Seminar:  A  Micro  Focus.  Individual  and  small  group  behavior  in 
organizations.  Theories  of  motivation,  decisionmaking,  interpersonal  behavior,  group 
processes,  and  leadership.  A  variety  of  research  approaches  and  methods  includes 
presentation  of  behavioral  research  by  members  of  the  Fuqua  School  of  Business  and  other 
researchers.  3  units.  Staff 

522.  Organization  Seminar:  A  Macro  Focus.  The  organization  and  the  subunits  which 
make  up  the  organization.  Theories  of  organization,  structure,  decentralization,  division- 
alization, functional  area  integration,  task  design,  incentives  and  rewards,  information 
systems,  and  decision  rules  are  developed  with  an  orientation  toward  their  choice  and 
design  for  high  performance.  Includes  presentation  of  research  by  members  of  the  Fu- 
qua School  of  Business  and  other  researchers.  3  units.  Staff 

525.  Behavioral  Decision  Theory.  How  people  process  information  when  making 
judgments  and  choices,  and  with  how  knowledge  of  the  psychology  of  decisions  can  be 
used  to  improve  decision  processes.  Five  basic  topics  of  research  will  be  covered:  (1)  think- 
ing about  uncertainty,  (2)  multiattribute  preferences,  (3)  risk  taking,  (4)  problem  struc- 
turing, and  (5)  group  decision  making.  Examples  of  behavioral  research  will  be  drawn 
from  the  areas  of  accounting,  finance,  marketing,  medicine,  organizational  theory,  and 
public  policy,  as  well  as  the  more  basic  behavioral  sciences.  3  units.  Payne 

531.  Financial  Accounting  Seminar.  The  nature  of  published  financial  statement  in- 
formation and  its  relationship  with  various  economic  variables.  The  list  of  related  varia- 
bles might  include  stock  market  data,  bankruptcy  filings,  and  the  actions  of  various  users 
of  financial  statement  information,  including  management,  investors,  creditors,  and  regu- 
lators. The  focus  is  on  the  current  research  methodologies  and  research  efforts  used  to 
analyze  the  above  relationships.  A  background  in  masters-level  accounting  and  finance 
is  assumed.  3  units.  Staff 

532.  Management  Accounting  Seminar.  Information  systems  and  their  use  in  facilitat- 
ing management  decision  making  and  organizational  control.  Emphasis  on  the  appropri- 
ate research  methodologies  and  paradigms  including  information  economics,  decision 
theory,  and  organizational  theory.  Topics  include  budgeting,  incentive  systems/ 
performance  evaluation,  variance  investigation,  and  cost  allocation.  3  units.  Staff 

551.  Corporate  Finance  Seminar.  Introduction  to  research  areas  in  corporate  finance. 
Emphasis  on  the  research  interests  of  the  instructor,  and  one  of  the  following  topics  to 
be  explored  in  depth:  capital  budgeting,  capital  structure,  mergers  and  acquisitions,  in- 
ternational finance,  and  cash  management.  3  units.  Staff 

552.  Investment  Seminar.  Survey  of  research  in  the  investment  area  and  exploration 
in  depth  of  one  or  more  problems  in  which  research  is  currently  active.  Emphasis  deter- 
mined by  the  instructor  from  one  or  more  of  the  following  areas :  valuation  of  risky  secu- 
rities, capital  asset  pricing  model  and  extensions,  capital  market  efficiency,  portfolio  the- 
ory, options  and  warrants,  investment  management,  and  futures  contracts.  3  units.  Staff 

553.  Portfolio  Theory  and  Asset  Pricing.  This  course  mathematically  derives  well- 
known  results  in  portfolio  theory  and  asset-pricing  models  in  finance.  Topics  to  be  cov- 
ered include:  single-period  mean-variance  efficient  portfolios  and  the  CAPM;  pareto  op- 
timal allocations;  multiperiod  and  continuous-time  optimal  consumption  and  portfolio 
rules;  intertemporal  asset-pricing  model;  arbitrage  pricing  theory;  the  term  structure  of 
interest  rates  and  inflation  risk;  allocational  roles  of  futures  and  options;  and  pricing  and 
hedging  results.  Basic  mathematics  background  in  calulus,  statistics,  matrix  algebra,  op- 
timization and  dynamic  programming  is  required.  MBA-level  courses  in  options,  futures, 
and  investments  are  prerequisites.  3  units.  Breeden 

561.  Seminar  in  Quantitative  Research  in  Marketing.  An  overview  of  the  quantita- 
tive techniques  which  are  important  in  marketing  research.  Each  model  and  technique 

70       Courses  of  Instruction 


will  be  examined  in  considerable  detail  so  as  to  permit  an  understanding  of  its  assump- 
tions, structure,  and  usefulness.  Topics  covered  will  include  the  general  data  analysis  tech- 
niques as  well  as  models  from  advertising,  new  products,  and  pricing  decisions.  3  units. 
Staff 

562.  Seminar  in  Behavioral  Models  in  Marketing.  Examines  the  development  of  re- 
search in  consumer  behavior.  Major  emphasis  is  given  to  theoretical  developments  and 
empirical  research.  Students  are  expected  to  formulate  and  test  a  framework  or  model 
of  consumer  behavior  with  respect  to  a  marketing  problem  or  topic.  3  units.  Staff 

563.  Marketing  Models  Seminar.  The  primary  goals  of  this  seminar  are  (a)  to  criti- 
cally review  the  most  current  research  in  marketing  and  (b)  to  gain  a  better  understand- 
ing of  and  ability  to  build  one's  own  model.  After  taking  this  course,  students  should  be 
able  to  understand  the  assumptions  and  mathematical  development  of  the  current  quan- 
titative work  in  marketing  and  to  use  this  understanding  to  develop  meaningful  exten- 
sions. 3  units.  Staelin 

571.  Operations  Strategy  Seminar.  Recent  developments  in  the  strategy  of  operations 
in  both  the  manufacturing  and  service  sectors.  Topics  include  the  focused  factory  con- 
cept, Japanese  manufacturing  philosophy,  technological  policy  toward  new  process  de- 
velopment and  toward  new  product  introduction,  vertical  integration,  choice  of  capaci- 
ty and  location,  industry  analysis,  and  the  impact  of  government  regulation.  Emphasis 
on  the  development  of  hypotheses  about  strategic  topics  and  the  empirical  means  by 
which  they  can  be  tested.  3  units.  Staff 

572.  Seminar  in  Operational  and  Technological  Tactics.  Current  issues  in  the  day- 
to-day  management  of  manufacturing  and  service  delivery  systems.  Topics  include  ma- 
terial requirements  planning,  capacity  requirements  planning,  quality  of  work  life 
projects,  productivity  measurement  and  enhancement,  implementation  of  new  product 
introductions  and  production  process  modifications,  quality  assurance,  production  plan- 
ning and  scheduling,  and  logistics.  Concentration  on  the  substance  of  recent  develop- 
ments, the  generation  and  test  of  hypotheses  about  tactical  issues,  and  the  applicability 
of  various  optimization  techniques  to  the  advance  of  operation  tactics.  3  units.  Staff 

591.  Selected  Topics  in  Business.  Allows  the  doctoral  student  the  opportunity  to  study 
special  topics  in  management  on  an  occasional  basis  depending  on  the  availability  and 
interests  of  students  and  faculty.  3  units.  Staff 

597.  Dissertation  Research.  For  students  actively  pursuing  research  on  their  disser- 
tation. Prerequisites:  student  must  have  passed  the  preliminary  examination  and  have 
the  consent  of  the  Director  of  the  Doctoral  Program  and  instructor.  Credit  to  be  arranged . 
Staff 

598.  Independent  Study.  Allows  the  doctoral  student  the  opportunity  to  engage  in 
study  or  tutorial  on  special  topics  on  an  individual  basis  under  the  supervision  of  a  faculty 
member.  Prerequisites:  Doctoral  Program  standing  and  consent  of  the  Director  of  the  Doc- 
toral Program  and  instructor.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

599.  Directed  Research.  Allows  the  doctoral  student  to  engage  in  individual  research 
projects  under  the  supervision  of  a  faculty  member.  Prerequisites:  Doctoral  Program 
standing  and  consent  of  the  Director  of  the  Doctoral  Program  and  instructor.  Credit  to 
be  arranged.  Staff 

The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology 

Program  Administration:  Professor  Hill,  Director  (biochemistry);  Associate  Professor  B.  Kauf- 
man, Associate  Director  (biochemistry);  Professors  McClay  (zoology),  Mills  (pharmacol- 
ogy), Pizzo  (pathology),  Siedow  (botany),  Siegel  (biochemistry),  and  Simon  (neurobio- 

The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology       71 


logy);  Associate  Professors  Caron  (cell  biology)  and  Keene  (microbiology  and  immu- 
nology) 

Faculty:  A  complete  list  of  faculty,  including  research  interests,  will  be  made  availa- 
ble to  prospective  students. 

Research  training  in  cell,  developmental,  and  molecular  biology  is  found  in  eight 
departments  at  Duke  University:  biochemistry,  botany,  cell  biology,  microbiology  and 
immunology,  neurobiology,  pathology,  pharmacology,  and  zoology.  To  effectively  uti- 
lize this  broad  spectrum  of  expertise  for  the  training  of  promising  young  scientists  while 
still  providing  a  coherent  curriculum,  the  Duke  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecu- 
lar Biology  has  been  established. 

During  the  first  year  of  doctoral  study  a  student  will  complete  the  program's  three- 
course  sequence  presenting  current  understanding  and  research  activities  in  cell  biolo- 
gy and  the  molecular  biology  of  nucleic  acids,  proteins,  and  membranes.  Each  student 
will  also  affiliate  with  a  department,  fulfill  departmental  requirements,  and  choose  elective 
courses  in  an  area  of  specialization.  Research  training  is  stressed  throughout  the  program 
and  dissertation  research  usually  begins  by  the  third  semester.  Normally  the  disserta- 
tion adviser  will  be  chosen  from  within  the  student's  own  department  but,  depending 
on  the  student's  research  interests,  dissertation  research  with  an  adviser  in  another  depart- 
ment may  be  approved. 

Prospective  students  may  apply  directly  to  the  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology  Program 
or  to  one  of  the  eight  participating  departments.  Those  who  apply  to  the  program  must 
also  designate  a  departmental  preference.  Applicants  must  have  demonstrated,  in  ad- 
dition to  overall  academic  excellence,  a  proficiency  in  the  biological  and  physical  sciences. 
Applications  for  admission  and  fellowship  support  must  be  received  by  February  1,  but 
early  applications  may  receive  advanced  consideration. 

259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Protein  and  Membrane  Structure/Function.  Detailed  con- 
cepts of  the  structure  and  function  of  proteins  as  enzymes  and  as  structural  elements  of 
cellular  substructures,  including:  protein  primary  structure  and  its  determination,  pat- 
terns of  protein  folding,  mechanisms  of  enzyme  catalysis  and  regulation,  function  and 
formation  of  multimeric  protein  assemblies,  proteins  and  other  constituents  of  biologi- 
cal membranes.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biochemistry  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Bio- 
chemistry 259,  Cell  Biology  259,  and  Microbiology  and  Immunology  259.  3  units.  Erick- 
son  and  staff 

264.  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology  Seminar.  Required  of  all  students.  Third-  and  fourth- 
year  students  discuss  their  dissertation  research.  1  unit.  Staff 

268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids.  Structure  and  metabolism  of  nucleic  acids 
in  the  context  of  their  biological  function  in  information  transfer.  Prerequisites :  introduc- 
tory biochemistry,  Biochemistry  259,  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Biochemistry  268,  Cell 
Biology  268,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  268,  and  The  University  Program  in  Genet- 
ics. 4  units.  Modrich  and  staff 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology.  Structural  and  functional  organization  of  cells  and  their 
components  with  emphasis  on  current  research  problems  and  prospects.  Prerequisite: 
introductory  cell  biology  or  consent  of  designated  instructor.  C-L:  Botany  269,  Cell  Biol- 
ogy 269,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  269,  and  Zoology  269.  3  units.  McClay  and  staff 

Cell  Biology 

Professor  Erickson,  Interim  Chairman;  Professor  Lieberman,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies; 
Professors  Blum,  Camporesi,  Counce,  Gutknecht,  Handwerger,  Hatchell,  Jobsis,  John- 
son, Mandel,  Moses,  Nicklas,  Padilla,  Plonsey,  Reedy,  Robertson,  Somjen,  Sommer,  and 
Spach;  Associate  Professors  N.  Anderson,  C.  Bonaventura,  J.  Bonavenrura,  Caron,  Cor- 
less,  Effmann,  Greenfield,  Kootsey,  Mcintosh,  McManus,  Mills,  Schachat,  Schomberg, 

72       Courses  of  Instruction 


and  Vigna;  Assistant  Professors  P.  Anderson,  Argon,  Dennis,  Garrett,  Jakoi,  Lamvik, 
LeFurgey,  Saling,  Wallace,  Williams,  and  Yarger;  Associate  Medical  Research  Professors 
Aitken,  Taylor,  and  Sylvia;  Assistant  Medical  Research  Professors  Gerth  and  Lobaugh; 
Adjunct  Assistant  Professors  Beall,  Carter  and  Kopf 

The  Department  of  Cell  Biology  offers  graduate  training  in  modern  cell  biology  and 
physiology  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  degree. 

Department  research  interests  center  on  cell  structure  and  function  at  several  levels 
of  biological  organization.  Areas  of  research  include:  membrane  function  and  structure; 
cell  motility  and  cytoskeletal  elements;  macromolecular  self-assembly  and  structure;  chro- 
mosome biology;  molecular  mechanisms  of  signal  transduction;  genetics  and  molecu- 
lar biology  of  contractile  proteins;  ultrastructure  of  cardiac  and  striated  muscle;  biophysics 
of  artificial  membranes;  and  molecular  and  structural  biology  of  vertebrate  photorecep- 
tors. Other  interests  include  genetics  and  development;  cell  growth  and  differentiation; 
and  cellular  physiology. 

Within  the  Division  of  Physiology,  research  focuses  on :  membrane  transport  and  elec- 
trophysiology;  metabolism;  cellular  physiology;  microcirculation;  hyperbaric  physiol- 
ogy; and  theoretical  studies  and  modeling  of  physiological  processes. 

The  department  has  excellent  facilities  for  light  and  electron  microscopy;  image 
processing,  analysis  and  3-D  reconstruction;  X-ray  diffraction;  and  computer  modeling 
and  simulation.  The  cell  biology  department  also  participates  in  several  university-wide 
interdisciplinary  training  programs,  such  as  those  in  genetics,  cell  and  molecular  biolo- 
gy, neurobiology,  pharmacology,  biomedical  engineering  and  toxicology. 

For  further  information,  contact  the  departmental  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

200.  Medical  Physiology.  Lectures  and  conferences  on  cell  and  organ  physiology.  Hu- 
man and  medical  aspects  are  stressed  in  clinical  conferences.  Lectures,  conferences,  and 
computer-based  laboratory  exercises.  Consent  of  instructor  required .  Students  may  take 
either  200  or  203-204,  but  not  both,  for  credit.  Fall.  5  units.  Somjen  and  staff 

203.  Introduction  to  Modern  Physiology  I.  The  course  sequence  203-204  is  intend- 
ed to  provide  an  in-depth  introduction  to  modern  integrative  physiology.  Topics  to  be  cov- 
ered include:  ionic  distribution  and  cellular  electric  potentials;  osmotic  and  ionic  regu- 
lation; kidney  function;  hydrodynamics  of  fluid  flow  in  blood  vessels;  autoregulation  of 
flow;  pulmonary  function  and  its  regulation;  regulation  of  contraction  in  different  kinds 
of  muscle.  Cell  Biology  203  and  204  are  required  of  all  graduate  students  in  the  Division 
of  Physiology.  Nonmajors  may  take  either  203  or  204  upon  consent  of  course  director.  Fall. 
3  units.  Blum  and  staff 

204.  Introduction  to  Modern  Physiology  II.  Topics  to  be  covered  include:  cardiac  func- 
tion and  its  regulation;  the  gastrointestinal  system,  including  regulation  of  food  and  wa- 
ter intake,  of  motility,  and  of  digestion;  hormonal  control  of  growth,  reproduction,  lac- 
tation and  metabolism;  thermoregulation  and  role  of  brown  adipose  tissue  in  a  variety 
of  physiological  states;  dynamics  of  bone  and  cartilage  and  control  of  systemic  calcium 
levels.  (Continuation  of  203.)  Spring.  3  units.  Blum  and  staff 

205.  Design  and  Analysis  of  Biological  Experiments.  An  introductory-level  course 
for  individuals  engaged  in  or  planning  research  projects  in  life  sciences.  Emphasis  is  on 
development  of  an  adequate  background  in  the  fundamentals  of  probability,  statistics, 
and  hypothesis  testing  for  application  of  these  principles  to  commonly  encountered  re- 
search situations.  The  course  will  include  lectures,  hands-on  use  of  the  Statistical  Anal- 
ysis System  (SAS)  computer  package  for  data  analysis  and  critical  evaluation  of  experimen- 
tal designs  employed  in  representative  studies  from  the  literature.  Fall.  2  units.  Lobaugh 

210.  Individual  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  in  cell  biology/physiology. 
Descriptions  of  specific  areas  of  study  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  210. 
3  to  9  units  each.  Staff 

Cell  Biology       73 


217.  Membrane  Transport.  Basic  principles  of  the  transport  of  water  and  solutes  across 
biological  and  model  membranes.  The  course  uses  physicochemical  principles  to  pro- 
vide a  comprehensive  understanding  of  phenomena  such  as  active  and  passive  trans- 
port, energy  barriers  through  membranes,  surface  effects,  and  ion  selectivity.  The  meth- 
odology and  conceptual  framework  for  the  study  of  transport  are  described  with  selected 
examples  frombilayers,  red  blood  cells,  nerve,  and  epithelia.  Physical  chemistry  is  recom- 
mended. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Spring.  3  units.  Mandel 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation.  A  multidisciplinary  approach 
stressing  the  molecular,  cellular,  and  genetic  processes  involved  in  differentiation  in  eu- 
karyotes.  C-L:  Biochemistry  219,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  219,  and  Pathology  219. 
3  units.  Counce  and  staff 

225.  Neurobiology  of  Sensory  Systems.  See  C-L:  Neurobiology  225.  Spring.  3  units. 
Simon,  Corless,  and  guest  lecturers 

230.  Cytoskeleton  and  Cell  Motility.  Recent  research  articles  will  be  read  and  dis- 
cussed in  depth  at  a  two-hour  meeting  once  a  week.  Instructors  will  select  papers  and 
provide  a  brief  introduction.  Students  will  present  papers  and  lead  discussion  in  a  jour- 
nal club  format.  Areas  covered  will  include:  microtubules,  actin,  intermediate  filaments, 
spectrin,  clathrin;  dynamic  instability;  kinesin  motility,  amoeboid  crawling.  Spring  1990 
and  alternate  years  thereafter.  2  units.  Bennett,  H.  Erickson,  and  Schlossman 

232.  Extracellular  Matrix  and  Cell  Adhesion.  Recent  research  articles  will  be  read  and 
discussed  in  depth  at  a  two-hour  meeting  once  a  week.  Instructors  will  select  papers  and 
provide  a  brief  introduction.  Students  will  present  papers  and  lead  discussion  in  a  jour- 
nal club  format.  Topics  covered  will  include:  fibronectin,  laminin,  hexabrachion,  colla- 
gens;  integrins  and  cell-substrate  adhesion;  cell-cell  adhesion  molecules.  Alternate  years. 
2  units.  Bennett,  H.  Erickson,  and  Lightner 

233.  Introduction  to  Biomedical  Simulation.  An  introduction  to  the  methods  and 
applications  of  computer  simulation  to  a  wide  range  of  biomedical  problems.  Subjects 
to  be  discussed  include:  the  goals  and  objectives  of  simulation,  selection  of  numerical 
methods  for  solving  model  equations,  parameter  fitting  and  optimization,  experiment 
planning  using  simulation,  evaluation,  and  selection  of  models,  as  well  as  several  sam- 
ple applications.  Prerequisites:  calculus;  prior  computer  or  programming  experience  not 
required.  Fall.  3  units.  Kootsey  and  staff 

234.  Methods  in  Physiological  Simulation.  Application  of  digital  computers  to  model- 
ing physiological  processes.  Emphasis  on  practical  uses  and  pitfalls  in  both  continuous 
and  discrete  systems.  Topics  studied  include:  membrane  excitability,  epithelial  transport, 
metabolic  pathways,  sensory  transduction,  molecular  graphics,  and  cellular  motility. 
Methods  include:  numerical  solution  of  differential  equations,  graph  theory,  and  finite 
element  methods.  Prerequisites:  a  course  in  physiology  and  knowledge  of  a  high-level 
computer  language,  or  consent  of  instructor.  Spring.  3  units.  Magid  and  staff 

236S.  Seminar  on  the  Cellular  and  Molecular  Biology  of  Skeletal  Muscle.  This  semi- 
nar course  will  focus  on  the  molecular  and  cellular  biological  approaches  to  skeletal  muscle 
development  and  physiology.  Topics  will  include  the  role  of  cell  lineage,  developmen- 
tally  preprogrammed  patterns  of  contractile  protein  expression,  the  nature  of  muscle  fi- 
ber diversity  and  the  generic  mechanisms  that  generate  contractile  protein  heterogeneity. 
Spring.  3  units.  Schachut 

259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Protein  and  Membrane  Structure/Function.  See  C-L:  Bio- 
chemistry 259;  also  C-L:  Microbiology  and  Immunology  259,  and  the  University  Program 
in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  3  units.  Erickson  and  staff 


74        Courses  of  Instruction 


268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids.  See  C-L:  Biochemistry  268;  also  C-L: 
Microbiology  and  Immunology  268,  The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Bi- 
ology, and  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  4  units.  Modrich  and  staff 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology.  See  C-L:  Zoology  269;  also  C-L:  Botany  269,  Microbiol- 
ogy and  Immunology  269;  and  the  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology. 
3  units.  Mcintosh  and  staff 

280.  Student  Seminar.  Preparation  and  presentation  of  seminars  to  students  and 
faculty  on  topics  of  broad  interest  to  cell  biology  and  physiology.  Required  of  all  cell  biol- 
ogy department  students  C-L:  Neurobiology  280.  2  units.  Staff 

307.  Microscopic  Anatomy.  Lectures  on  structural  organization  of  different  tissues 
and  organs,  as  determined  by  light  and  electron  microscopy  with  emphasis  on  the  rela- 
tion of  structure  to  function  at  the  cellular  level.  The  laboratory  provides  practical  ex- 
perience with  light  microscopy,  studying  and  analyzing  our  extensive  slide  collection  of 
mammalian  tissues.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Fall.  3  units.  Mcintosh  and  staff 

312.  Research.  Specific  areas  of  investigation  include:  membrane  structure;  extracel- 
lular matrix;  cell  adhesion;  cell  motility;  cytoskeletal  elements;  chromosome  structure 
and  movement;  genetics  and  molecular  biology  of  contractile  proteins;  muscle  ultrastruc- 
ture;  gamete  biology;  molecular  and  structural  biology  of  photoreceptors;  hormone  recep- 
tors; cell  growth;  developmental  biology;  membrane  transport  and  electrophysiology; 
metabolism;  cardiovascular  physiology;  microcirculation;  hyperbaric  physiology;  and 
theoretical  studies  and  computer  modeling  of  physiological  processes.  Variable  units.  Staff 

313,  314.  Departmental  Seminar.  Regular  meeting  of  graduate  students  and  staff  in 
which  current  research  problems  will  be  presented.  1  unit.  Staff 

340.  Tutorial  in  Advanced  Cell  Biology/Physiology.  Topics  for  intensive  reading  and 
discussion  chosen  according  to  the  student's  interests,  related  to  basic  problems  in  bio- 
physics, cytology,  endocrinological  control,  growth  and  development,  neuroanatomy, 
physical  differentiation,  and  evolutionary  origins  of  functional  microsystems.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  Variable  units.  Staff 

399.  Readings  in  Cell  Biology.  Directed  reading  and  research  in  cell  biology/phys- 
iology. Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  3  to  9  units  each.  Staff 

417.  Cellular  Endocrinology.  Current  concepts  of  the  mechanisms  of  action  of  hor- 
mones at  the  cellular  level,  including  hormone-receptor  interactions;  secondary  mes- 
senger systems  for  hormones;  mechanisms  of  regulation  of  hormone  responsiveness; 
regulation  of  growth,  differentiation,  and  proliferation;  cellular  and  electrophysiologi- 
cal mechanisms  of  secretory  stimulus  sensing  and  transduction;  systems  approach  to  feed- 
back regulation;  and  information  transfer  in  an  endocrine  system.  Lectures  by  local  and 
outside  clinical  faculty  will  stress  the  clinical  correlation  of  the  basic  concepts  elaborated 
in  the  course.  Students  will  be  expected  to  participate  in  one  seminar  presentation.  C-L: 
Pharmacology  417.  Fall.  3  units.  Caron,  staff,  and  guest  faculties 

418.  Reproductive  Biology.  An  in-depth  study  of  male  and  female  reproductive 
processes  including  hypothalamic,  pituitary,  and  gonadal  control  mechanisms,  as  well 
as  the  physiology  of  pregnancy  and  parturition .  Lectures  by  guest  clinical  faculty  will  em- 
phasize the  interface  between  basic  science  and  clinical  medicine.  The  lecture  material 
in  each  section  of  the  course  is  followed  by  seminar  presentations  which  will  contribute 
to  Cell  Biology  424,  a  corequisite  for  the  course.  Spring.  2  units.  N.  Anderson,  Schomberg, 
and  Tyrey 

424.  Seminar  in  Reproductive  Biology.  Selected  topics  in  reproductive  biology  will 
be  chosen  for  in-depth  reading  and  analysis  in  the  seminar  format.  Can  be  taken  indepen- 
dently or  as  a  corequisite  with  Cell  Biology  418. 1  unit.  N.  Anderson,  Schomberg,  and  tyrey 

Cell  Biology       75 


COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
220.  Developmental  Biology 
281.  Teaching  in  Physiology 
288S.  The  Cell  in  Development  and  Heredity 

Chemistry 

Professor  Arnett,  Chairman  (101  Gross  Chemical  Laboratory);  Professor  Baldwin,  Direc- 
tor of  Graduate  Studies  (373  Gross  Chemical  Laboratory);  Professors  Bonk,  Chesnut,  Crum- 
bliss,  Fraser-Reid,  Krigbaum,  Lochmiiller,  McPhail,  Palmer,  Porter,  Smith,  Strobel,  Wells, 
and  Wilder;  Associate  Professors  Henkens,  McGown,  and  Shaw;  Assistant  Professors 
MacPhail,  Polniaszek,  and  Prisant;  Professors  Emeriti  Bradsher,  Hobbs,  Poirier,  andQuin; 
Adjunct  Professors  Chao,  Ghirardelli,  Jeffs,  Millington,  Morosoff ,  Painter,  Pitt,  Preston, 
Spielvogel,  and  Sternback 

In  the  Department  of  Chemistry  graduate  work  is  offered  leading  to  the  M.S.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees.  Before  undertaking  a  graduate  program  in  chemistry,  a  student  should 
have  taken  an  undergraduate  major  in  chemistry,  along  with  related  work  in  mathemat- 
ics and  physics. 

Graduate  courses  in  the  department  are  offered  in  the  fields  of  analytical,  inorgan- 
ic, organic,  and  physical  chemistry.  Research  programs  are  active  in  all  these  fields. 

A  booklet  providing  detailed  information  on  the  department  is  available  from  the 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

201 .  Molecular  Spectroscopy.  Selected  spectroscopic  methods  in  the  study  of  molecu- 
lar structure.  Symmetry  and  group  theoretical  basis  for  selection  rules,  theories  of  mag- 
netic and  optical  resonance,  and  interpretation  of  spectra;  examples  from  both  inorgan- 
ic and  organic  chemistry.  Three  lectures.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department.  1  to  3  units. 
Fraser-Reid,  Palmer,  and  Smith 

203.  Quantum  Chemistry.  Basic  principles  of  quantum  and  group  theoretical 
methods.  Topics  include  symmetry,  a  review  of  the  fundamentals,  and  the  mathemati- 
cal foundations  of  quantum  theory.  Emphasis  on  the  application  of  molecular  orbital  the- 
ory to  organic  and  inorganic  systems.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  162. 1  to  3  units.  Chesnut 
and  Polniaszek 

205.  Structure  and  Reaction  Dynamics.  Structure  and  mechanisms  in  organic  and 
inorganic  compounds,  substitution  reactions,  linear  free  energy  relations,  and  molecu- 
lar rearrangements.  Emphasis  on  the  use  of  kinetic  techniques  to  solve  problems  in  reac- 
tion mechanisms.  Three  lectures.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  department.  1  to  3  units.  Ar- 
nett,  Crumbliss,  and  Polniaszek 

207.  Principles  of  Kinetics,  Thermodynamics,  and  Diffraction.  Three  lectures. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  1  to  3  units.  Smith,  Prisant,  and  McPhail 

275, 276.  Advanced  Studies.  (1)  Analytical  chemistry,  (2)  inorganic  chemistry,  (3)  or- 
ganic chemistry,  and  (4)  physical  chemistry.  Open  to  especially  well-prepared  under- 
graduates by  consent  of  department.  6  units.  McPhail,  Smith,  or  staff 

For  Graduates 

300.  Basic  Statistical  Mechanics.  Fundamentals  of  quantum  and  classical  statistical 
mechanics  using  the  ensemble  approach .  Emphasis  on  systems  of  weakly  interacting  par- 
ticles with  internal  degrees  of  freedom.  3  units.  MacPhail  or  staff 


76       Courses  of  Instruction 


302.  Basic  Quantum  Mechanics.  The  fundamentals  of  quantum  mechanics  with  spe- 
cial emphasis  on  chemical  applications.  Topics  included  are:  linear  algebra,  the  uncer- 
tainty relations,  angular  momentum,  perturbation  theory  and  time  dependent  phenome- 
na, molecules  in  electromagnetic  fields,  group  methods,  and  electron  correlation.  3  units. 
Chesnut  or  staff 

303,  304.  Special  Topics  in  Physical  Chemistry.  Presentation  of  one  or  more  topics 
of  staff  interest  such  as  advanced  methods  in  crystallography,  light  scattering  and  small 
angle  X-ray  diffraction,  application  of  ESR  spectroscopy  to  chemical  problems,  electronic 
spectroscopy  of  proteins,  group  theory,  intermolecular  forces,  liquid  crystals,  methods 
of  determining  the  rates  of  elementary  steps  in  reaction  kinetics,  physical  chemistry  of 
aerosols,  physical-chemical  methods  of  polymer  characterization,  structure  and  bond- 
ing in  metallo-enzymes,  statistical  mechanics  of  fluids,  topics  in  structural  chemistry,  and 
triplet  excitons.  1  to  3  units  each.  Staff 

310.  Theoretical  and  Structural  Inorganic  Chemistry.  An  advanced  study  of  theo- 
retical concepts  and  structural  determination  techniques  as  applied  to  inorganic  systems. 
Areas  included  are  crystal  field  and  ligand  field  theories;  magnetic  susceptibility;  and 
electronic,  infrared,  and  Raman  spectroscopy  3  units.  Crambliss  and  Palmer 

312.  Inorganic  Reactions  and  Mechanisms.  Chemistry  of  main  group  and  transition 
elements.  Emphasis  on  current  developments  in  synthetic  and  mechanistic  studies  of  in- 
organic, organometallic,  and  organometalloid  compounds.  3  units.  Crumbliss  and  Wells 

313.  Special  Topics  in  Inorganic  Chemistry.  Lectures,  oral  reports,  and  discussions 
on  advanced  topics  and  recent  advances  in  the  field  of  inorganic  chemistry.  Examples  of 
topics  which  may  be  discussed  are  bioinorganic  chemistry,  fluxional  molecules, 
homogeneous  catalysis,  synthesis  and  properties  of  selected  groups  of  compounds,  and 
new  physical  methods.  1  to  3  units.  Staff 

320.  Synthetic  Organic  Chemistry.  A  study  of  the  scope  and  limitations  of  the  more 
important  types  of  reactions  in  synthetic  organic  chemistry.  Some  discussion  of  the  rapidly 
developing  use  of  transition  metals,  complex  hydrides,  and  photochemistry  will  be  in- 
cluded. 3  units.  Baldwin,  Fraser-Reid,  or  Polniaszek 

322.  Organic  Reactive  Intermediates.  A  discussion  of  reactive  intermediates  in  or- 
ganic chemistry.  Topics  will  include  carbanions,  carbenes,  carbonium  ions,  free  radicals, 
photochemical  excited  states,  and  other  reactive  species.  3  units.  Arnett  and  Porter 

324.  Special  Topics  in  Organic  Chemistry.  Advanced  topics  and  recent  developments 
in  the  field  of  organic  chemistry.  Representative  topics  include  heterocyclic  chemistry,  nat- 
ural products  chemistry,  carbohydrate  chemistry,  molecular  mechanics,  and  two- 
dimensional  NMR  spectroscopy.  Lectures  and  written  and  oral  reports.  1  to  3  units.  Staff 

330.  Separation  Science  and  Fundamental  Electrochemistry.  Section  .01,  fundamen- 
tal separation  chemistry;  section  .02,  practical  aspects  of  chromatographic  separation 
methods;  section  .03,  fundamentals  of  electrochemistry.  1  to  3  units.  LochmullerorStrobel 

331, 332.  Special  Topics  in  Analytical  Chemistry.  An  advanced  treatment  of  impor- 
tant areas  in  modern  analysis.  Possible  topics  include:  electrochemistry,  small  computer 
applications,  magnetic  resonance,  and  problem-solving  approaches.  1  to  3  units  each .  Staff 

334.  Chemical  Instrumentation  and  Practical  Electrochemistry.  Section  .01,  basic 
chemical  instrumentation;  section  .02,  optical  chemical  instrumentation;  section  .03,  prac- 
tical electrochemistry.  1  to  3  units.  McGown  or  Strobel 

373, 374.  Seminar.  One  unit  is  required  of  all  Ph .  D.  candidates  in  chemistry.  One  hour 
a  week  discussion.  1  unit  each.  All  members  of  the  graduate  staff 


Chemistry       77 


375,  376.  Research.  The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  instruction  in  methods  used  in 
the  investigation  of  original  problems.  Individual  work  and  conferences.  1  to  6  units  each. 
All  members  of  the  graduate  staff 

377.  Research  Orientation  Seminar.  A  survey  of  departmental  research .  Required  of 
all  entering  graduate  students  in  chemistry.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Gradu- 
ate Studies.  1  unit.  All  members  of  the  graduate  staff 

Classical  Studies 

Professor  Newton,  Chairman  (326  Carr);  Associate  Professor  Rigsby,  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  (327  Carr);  Professors  Oates  and  Richardson;  Associate  Professors  Boatwright, 
Burian,  Stanley,  and  Younger;  Professor  Emeritus  Willis 

The  Department  of  Classical  Studies  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees  in  classical  studies.  Work  in  the  department  encompasses  all  aspects  of 
the  Greco-Roman  world:  students  in  the  program  are  able,  through  course  work,  direct- 
ed research,  and  their  own  teaching,  to  prepare  for  careers  of  teaching  and  research  as 
broadly  trained  classical  scholars.  For  regular  admission,  students  should  offer  at  least 
three  years  of  college  study  in  one  of  the  classical  languages  and  two  in  the  other.  Before 
developing  a  specialization  within  the  program,  students  are  expected  to  acquire  facili- 
ty in  both  Greek  and  Latin,  a  broad  knowledge  of  the  literatures  and  of  ancient  history 
and  archaeology,  and  command  of  research  methods.  Reading  knowledge  of  French  and 
German  is  required  for  the  Ph .  D.  The  resources  of  the  department  include  important  col- 
lections of  Greek  and  Latin  manuscripts  and  papyri,  computer  facilities  in  the  ancient 
languages,  and  a  valuable  study  collection  of  Greek  and  Roman  art.  The  department  pub- 
lishes the  journal  Greek,  Roman,  and  Byzantine  Studies.  The  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 
will  provide  on  request  a  brochure  giving  further  information  about  the  department's  re- 
quirements, resources,  and  financial  aid;  prospective  students  should  also  consult  the 
general  requirements  of  the  University  set  forth  in  the  chapter  on  "Registration"  in  this 
bulletin. 

GREEK 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Readings  in  Greek  Literature.  3  units.  Staff 

201.  Studies  in  Greek  Literature  I.  3  units.  Staff 

202.  Studies  in  Greek  Literature  II.  3  units.  Staff 

203.  Homer.  Problems  of  language  and  structure  in  the  Iliad;  present  state  of  Homer- 
ic scholarship.  3  units.  Stanley 

205.  Greek  Lyric  Poets.  Fragments  of  the  early  lyric  poets;  selected  odes  of  Pindar  and 
Bacchylides.  3  units.  Burian  or  Stanley 

207.  The  Dramatists.  Readings  and  studies  of  selected  plays  by  the  major  playwrights 
Aeschylus,  Sophocles,  Euripides,  and  Aristophanes.  3  units.  Burian 

210.  Hellenistic  Literature.  Examples  of  Hellenistic  literature  with  emphasis  on  the 
Argonautica  of  Apollonius  of  Rhodes,  and  attention  to  the  shorter  poems  of  Theocritus 
and  Callimachus.  One  course.  Stanley 

211S.  Plato.  Selected  dialogues.  C-L:  Philosophy  211S.  3  units.  Ferejohn 

217S.  Aristotle.  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Philosophy  217S.  3  units.  Ferejohn 


78       Courses  of  Instruction 


222.  The  Historians.  Reading  and  studies  in  the  major  Greek  historians  Herodotus, 
Thucydides,  and  Xenophon.  3  units.  Rigsby 

For  Graduates 

301.  Seminar  in  Greek  Literature  I.  Selected  authors  and  topics.  3  units.  Burian  or 
Stanley 

302.  Seminar  in  Greek  Literature  II.  Selected  authors  and  topics.  3  units.  Burian  or 
Stanley 

313.  Seminar  in  Greek  Epigraphy.  3  units.  Rigsby 

399.  Directed  Reading  and  Research.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 
221.  Early  Greek  Prose 
226.  The  Orators 
321.  Seminar  in  Literary  Papyri 

LATIN 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Readings  in  Latin  Literature.  3  units.  Staff 

201.  Studies  in  Latin  Literature  I.  3  units.  Staff 

202.  Studies  in  Latin  Literature  II.  3  units.  Staff 

206.  Cicero.  3  units.  Richardson 

207S.  Vergil's  Aetteid.  Intensive  analysis  of  all  of  Vergil's  Aeneid,  focusing  on  text  and 
historical  context,  complemented  by  research  papers  and  reports.  3  units.  Newton 

211S.  Elegiac  Poets.  Analysis  of  most  of  the  corpora  of  Propertius,  Tibullus,  and  Ovid, 
with  close  attention  to  the  stylistics  of  the  poems,  their  place  in  the  traditions  of  Latin  love 
elegy,  and  their  relation  to  other  phenomena  of  the  Augustan  period.  3  units.  Richardson 

214S.  The  Historians.  Investigations  of  the  Romans'  conceptions  and  practices  of  writ- 
ing history,  based  on  detailed  analysis  of  the  works  of  Sallust,  Livy,  and  Tacitus.  Addi- 
tional readings  in  the  fragments  of  other  Latin  historians,  and  in  comparative  Greek 
historians.  3  units.  Boatwright 

For  Graduates 

301.  Seminar  in  Latin  Literature  I.  Selected  authors  and  topics.  3  units.  Boatwright, 
Newton,  or  Richardson 

302.  Seminar  in  Latin  Literature  II.  Selected  authors  and  topics.  3  units.  Boatwright, 
Newton,  or  Richardson 

312.  Seminar  in  Latin  Paleography.  3  units.  Newton 

314.  Seminar  in  Latin  Epigraphy.  3  units.  Rigsby 

315.  Seminar  in  Roman  Law.  3  units.  Oates 

399.  Directed  Reading  and  Research.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 


Classical  Studies       79 


Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

204.  Epic  of  the  Silver  Age:  Lucan  to  Statius 

205.  The  Roman  Novel 

208.  Lyric  and  Occasional  Poetry 

221.  Medieval  Latin 

CLASSICAL  STUDIES  (ANCIENT  HISTORY) 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

222.  Fifth  and  Fourth  Century  Greece.  From  the  Persian  Wars  to  the  dominance  of 
Philip  of  Macedon.  C-L:  History  260.  3  units.  Oates  or  Rigsby 

223.  Alexander  and  the  Hellenistic  World.  The  achievements  and  legacy  of  Alexander 
the  Great  and  the  rise  of  Roman  power  in  the  Eastern  Mediterranean.  C-L:  History  261. 
3  units.  Oates 

224.  The  Roman  Republic.  The  rise  of  Rome,  to  its  mastery  of  the  Mediterranean;  the 
political,  social,  and  intellectual  consequences.  C-L:  History  263.  3  units.  Boatwright  or 
Rigsby 

225.  The  Roman  Empire.  The  foundation,  consolidation,  and  transformation  of  Ro- 
man rule  from  Augustus  to  Diocletian.  C-L:  History  264.  3  units.  Boatwright 

258.  The  Hellenistic  and  Roman  East.  The  social  and  cultural  history  of  the  Greco- 
Roman  world,  concentrating  on  papyrological  evidence.  Prerequisite:  knowledge  of  an- 
cient Greek  and  Latin.  3  units.  Oates 

For  Graduates 

321.  Seminar  in  Ancient  History  I.  Selected  topics.  3units.  Boatwright,  Oates,  orRigsby 

322.  Seminar  in  Ancient  History  II.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Boatwright,  Oates,  orRigsby 
399.  Directed  Reading  and  Research.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 
221.  Archaic  Greece 

226.  Late  Antiquity 

327.  Seminar  in  Byzantine  History 

CLASSICAL  STUDIES  (ARCHAEOLOGY) 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

220S.  Studies  in  Greek  Art.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Art  220S. 
3  units.  Castriota 

227S.  Studies  in  Roman  Art.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Art  221S. 
3  units.  Castriota 

230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. See  C-L:  Art  230S;  also  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Bruzelius  or 
Wharton 

231S.  Greek  Sculpture.  Free  standing,  relief,  and  architectural  sculpture  from  the  ar- 
chaic period  to  the  Hellenistic  Age,  representing  changing  aesthetic,  social,  and  politi- 
cal aims.  C-L:  Art  222S.  3  units.  Stanley 

80       Courses  of  Instruction 


232S.  Greek  Painting.  From  the  late  Bronze  Age  to  the  fourth  century  B.C.,  with  em- 
phasis on  archaic  and  classical  Athenian  vase  painters.  C-L:  Art  223S.  3  units.  Stanley 

233S.  Greek  Architecture.  Development  of  form  and  function  in  the  various  religious, 
civic,  and  domestic  building  types,  from  the  Bronze  Age  through  the  Hellenistic  period . 
C-L:  Art  224S.  3  units.  Richardson 

235S.  Roman  Architecture.  Development  of  design  and  engineering  in  the  architec- 
ture of  ancient  Rome.  The  major  building  forms,  public  and  private,  and  the  principal 
styles  from  the  regal  period  to  Hadrian.  C-L:  Art  225S.  3  units.  Richardson 

236S.  Roman  Painting.  Roman  pictorial  art  with  concentration  on  the  wall  paintings 
from  Campania.  Investigation  of  techniques,  iconography,  and  the  use  of  pictures  in  deco- 
ration. C-L:  Art  226S.  3  units.  Richardson 

For  Graduates 

311.  Archaeology  Seminar  I.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Staff 

312.  Archaeology  Seminar  II.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Staff 

399.  Directed  Reading  and  Research.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

Courses  Currently  Unscheduled 

234S.  Roman  Sculpture 

Under  the  terms  of  a  cooperative  agreement,  graduate  students  of  Duke  University 
may  take  any  graduate  course  offered  by  the  Department  of  Classics  of  the  University  of 
North  Carolina.  A  list  of  these  courses  will  be  sent  upon  request. 

Computer  Science 

Professor  Rose,  Chairman  (206  North  Building);  Associate  Professor  Kedem,  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies  (202  North  Building);  Professors  Biermann,  Gallie,  Loveland,  Marinos, 
Patrick,  Reif,  Starmer,  Trivedi,  and  Utku;  Associate  Professors  Dugan,  C.  Ellis,  Green- 
side,  and  Wagner;  Assistant  Professors  Board,  Gardner,  Holliday,  Nadathur,  and  Szyld; 
Research  Associate  Professors  J.  Ellis,  Kootsey,  and  Ramm;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor 
W.  Coughran;  Visiting  Assistant  Professor  Gazit 

The  Department  of  Computer  Science  offers  programs  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.  D. 
degrees.  The  department  also  actively  cooperates  with  the  Computer  Science  Depart- 
ment of  the  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill. 

A  student  entering  graduate  work  in  computer  science  should  have  had  three 
semesters  of  calculus  and  one  semester  of  linear  algebra,  and  have  a  knowledge  of  data 
structures,  and  of  assembler  as  well  as  higher-level  computer  programming  languages. 
Research  interests  of  present  faculty  include  mathematical  foundations  of  computer 
science,  artificial  intelligence,  analysis  of  algorithms,  programming  methodology,  real- 
time computing,  operating  data  base  systems,  computer  systems  design  and  analysis, 
parallel  processing  systems,  scientific  computation  (including  numerical  analysis),  and 
very  large-scale  integration. 

Each  student  should  consult  the  document  Graduate  Degree  Requirements  of  the  Com- 
puter Science  Department  for  degree  requirements  not  listed  in  this  bulletin. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Programming  Methodology  I.  Practical  and  theoretical  topics  including  struc- 
tured programming,  specification  and  documentation  of  programs,  debugging  and  testing 
strategies,  choice  and  effective  use  of  programming  languages  and  systems,  psychology 


Computer  Science       81 


of  computer  programming,  proof  of  correctness  of  programs,  analysis  of  algorithms,  and 
properties  of  program  schemata.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  102.  3  units.  Wagner 

201.  Programming  Languages.  Information  binding,  data  structures  and  storage,  con- 
trol structures,  recursion,  execution  environments,  input/output;  syntax  and  semantics 
of  languages;  study  of  PL/1,  Fortran,  Algol,  APL,  LISP,  SNOBOL,  and  SIMULA;  exer- 
cises in  programming.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  200.  3  units.  Holliday,  ortaughtat 
UNC-CH  as  Comp  244 

202.  Applied  Discrete  Structures.  Aspects  of  discrete  mathematics  that  are  essential 
to  the  development  of  computer  science.  Topics  from  combinatorics  and  graph  theory, 
discrete  probability  theory,  and  mathematical  logic.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  103  and 
104  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Staff 

204.  Computer  Network  Architecture.  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  157.  See 
C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  204.  3  units.  Strole 

207.  Fault-Tolerant  Computer  Systems.  See  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  207.  3  units. 

Board  or  Marinos 

208.  Digital  Computer  Architecture  and  Design.  See  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  208. 
3  units.  Dollas  or  Marinos 

209.  Microprocessor  Fundamentals  and  Applications.  See  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering 
209.  4  units.  George 

210.  Introduction  to  VLSI  Design.  A  first  course  in  VLSI  design  with  CMOS  tech- 
nologies. A  study  of  devices,  circuits,  fabrication  technology,  logic  design  techniques,  sub- 
system design  and  system  architecture.  Modeling  of  circuits  and  subsystems.  Testing  of 
gates,  subsystems  and  chips,  and  design  for  testability.  The  fundamentals  of  full-custom 
design,  and  some  semi-custom  design.  Prerequisites:  logic  design  (Computer 
Science/Electrical  Engineering  157  or  equivalent),  and  Electronics  (Electrical  Engineer- 
ing 161,  or  Computer  Science/Electrical  Engineering  160,  or  equivalent).  C-L:  Electrical 
Engineering  210.  3  units.  Dollas  or  Kedem 

212.  Introduction  to  Scientific  Computing.  Practical  introduction  for  graduate  stu- 
dents and  faculty  to  computer  resources  that  facilitate  scientific  research:  scientific  word 
processing  (Tex  and  LaTex),  symbolic  manipulation  programs,  software  tools,  numeri- 
cal software  packages,  and  graphics.  Case  studies  used  to  illustrate  these  resources.  For 
noncomputer  scientists.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  103,  104  or  equivalent;  some 
programming  experience.  3  units.  Gardner  or  Greenside 

213.  Introduction  to  Nonlinear  Dynamics.  Introduction  to  the  mathematical  theory 
of  nonlinear  dynamics,  and  how  this  theory  compares  with  physical  experiments,  with 
applications  to  biology  (Turing  states  and  morphogenesis),  computer  science  (random- 
ness and  computability).  mathematics  (chaos  and  strange  attractors),  and  physics  (pat- 
tern formation  and  transition  to  turbulence).  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  51, 
Mathematics  111,  and  Physics  51,  52.  C-L:  Physics  213.  3  units.  Greenside 

215.  Artificial  Intelligence.  Heuristic  versus  algorithmic  methods;  programming  of 
games  such  as  chess;  theorem  proving  and  its  relation  to  correctness  of  programs;  read- 
ings in  simulation  of  cognitive  processes,  problem  solving,  semantic  memory,  analogy, 
adaptive  learning.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  102  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units. 

Biermann,  Loveland,  orNadathur 

221.  Numerical  Analysis.  Error  analysis,  interpolation  and  spline  approximation,  nu- 
merical differentiation  and  integration,  solutions  of  linear  systems,  nonlinear  equations, 
and  ordinary  differential  equations.  Prerequisites:  knowledge  of  an  algorithmic  program- 


82       Courses  of  Instruction 


ming  language,  intermediate  calculus  including  some  differential  equations,  and 
Mathematics  104.  C-L:  Mathematics  221.  3  units.  Gardner,  Greenside,  orSzyld 

222.  Numerical  Differential  Equations.  Numerical  methods  for  solving  ordinary  and 
partial  differential  equations,  emphasizing  nonlinear  differential  equations.  Methods  for 
solving  ordinary  differential  equations  that  generalize  to  solve  partial  differential  equa- 
tions: finite  difference,  spectral,  and  finite  element  methods.  Solution  of  hyperbolic,  para- 
bolic, and  elliptic  partial  differential  equations  arising  in  scientific  problems.  Prerequi- 
site: Computer  Science  221.  C-L:  Mathematics  222.  3  units.  Gardner,  Greenside,  Rose,  or 
Szyld 

223.  Numerical  Linear  Algebra.  Solution  of  large,  sparse  linear  systems  of  equations. 
Storage  schemes,  graph  theory  for  sparse  matrices,  different  orderings  to  minimize  fill, 
block  factorizations,  iterative  methods,  analysis  of  different  splittings,  conjugate  gradient 
methods.  Eigenvalue  problems,  QR  factorization,  Lanczos  method,  power  method  and 
inverse  iteration,  Rayleigh  quotient.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  221  or  equivalent. 
C-L:  Mathematics  223.  3  units.  Gardner,  Greenside,  Rose,  or  Szyld 

224.  Analysis  of  Algorithms.  Design  and  analysis  of  efficient  algorithms.  Design  tech- 
niques include  recursion,  divide-and-conquer,  and  dynamic  programming.  Applications 
include  sorting,  searching,  dynamic  structures,  path-finding,  fast  multiplication,  fast  Fou- 
rier transform.  Nondeterministic  algorithms.  Computationally  hard  problems.  NP- 
completeness.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  102  and  four  semesters  of  college 
mathematics.  3  units.  Loveland  or  Reif 

225.  Formal  Languages  and  Theory  of  Computation.  An  introduction  to  the  study 
of  abstract  machines  and  the  languages  they  define,  their  capabilities  and  limitations. 
Finite-state  automata,  regular  languages,  pushdown  automata,  context-free  languages, 
Turing  machines,  recursive  functions  and  recursively  enumerable  sets,  noncomputable 
sets,  measures  of  complexity  for  algorithms.  Prerequisites:  four  semesters  of  undergradu- 
ate mathematics.  3  units.  Loi>eland  or  Reif 

226.  Mathematical  Methods  for  Systems  Analysis  I.  Basic  concepts  and  techniques 
used  in  the  stochastic  modeling  of  systems.  Elements  of  probability,  statistics,  queuing 
theory,  and  simulation.  Prerequisites:  four  semesters  of  college  mathematics.  3  units. 
Trivedi 

227.  Mathematical  Methods  for  Systems  Analysis  II.  Basic  concepts  and  techniques 
used  in  the  deterministic  modeling  of  systems.  Elements  of  linear  algebra;  linear,  integer, 
dynamic,  and  geometric  programming;  and  unconstrained  and  constrained  optimiza- 
tion. Prerequisites:  four  semesters  of  college  mathematics.  3  units.  Staff 

231.  Operating  Systems.  Fundamental  principles  of  operating  system  design  applied 
to  state-of-the-art  computing  environments  (multiprocessors  and  distributed  systems) 
including  process  management  (coscheduling  and  load  balancing),  shared  memory 
management  (data  migration  and  consistency),  and  distributed  file  systems.  Advanced 
topics  include  transaction-based  operating  systems,  reliable  communication  protocols, 
concurrency  control  and  recovery  mechanisms,  computer  security,  and  performance  anal- 
ysis. Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  104.  3  units.  Dugan,  C.  Ellis,  Holliday,  or  Trivedi 

232.  Compiler  Construction.  Models  and  techniques  used  in  the  design  and  im- 
plementation of  assemblers,  interpreters,  and  compilers.  Lexical  analysis,  compilation 
of  arithmetic  expressions  and  simple  statements,  specifications  of  syntax,  algorithms  for 
syntactic  analysis,  code  generation,  and  optimization  techniques.  3  units.  Wagner 

241.  Data  Base  Methodology.  Basic  concepts  and  principles.  Relational,  hierarchi- 
cal, and  network  approaches  to  data  organization;  data  entry  and  query  language  sup- 
port for  data  base  systems;  theories  of  data  organization;  security  and  privacy  issues. 


Computer  Science       83 


Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  104  and  155.  C-L:  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials 
Science  242.  3  units.  C.  Ellis 

245.  Functional  Analysis  for  Scientific  Computing.  Linear  spaces,  topologies,  norms, 
and  completeness.  Focus  on  Banach  and  Hilbert  spaces  including  Sovolev  spaces.  Line- 
ar and  nonlinear  operators.  Frechet  derivatives.  Iterative  methods  for  nonlinear  opera- 
tor systems,  such  as  Newton-like  methods.  Applications.  Intended  for  science  and  en- 
gineering students  but  not  mathematics  graduate  students.  Prerequisite:  Computer 
Science  221.  C-L:  Mathematics  245.  3  units.  Rose  or  Szyld 

252.  Computer  Systems  Organization.  Hardware  and  software  aspects.  Processor, 
memory,  device,  and  communication  subsystems;  case  studies  of  hardware  system  or- 
ganization, e.g. ,  parallel,  associative,  fault-tolerant;  organization  of  software  systems  to 
exploit  hardware  systems  organization;  economic  and  reliability  aspects  of  various  hard- 
ware organizations.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  104  and  157.  C-L:  Electrical  Engineer- 
ing 252.  3  units.  /.  Ellis  or  Patrick 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Computer  Science.  3  units.  Staff 

276.  Communication,  Computation,  and  Memory  in  Biological  Systems.  Commu- 
nication and  memory  in  biological  systems:  in  voltage  sensitive  ion  channels,  hormone- 
receptor  interactions,  and  initiation  and  control  of  RNA/DNA  synthesis.  Models  of  sig- 
naling and  memory  are  developed  and  related  to  electronic  signaling  schemes.  Prereq- 
uisites: Computer  Science  102,  two  semesters  of  college  chemistry,  and  four  semesters 
of  college  mathematics.  3  units.  Starmer 

For  Graduates 

308.  Advanced  Topics  in  Digital  Systems.  See  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  308. 3  units. 

Marinos 

310.  CMOS  VLSI  Design.  A  second  course  in  VLSI,  aimed  at  the  design  of  VLSI  sys- 
tems in  CMOS.  The  main  thrusts  of  the  course  will  be  (1)  to  provide  enough  background 
in  the  theory  of  CMOS  circuits  to  understand  circuit  level  trade-offs;  (2)  to  introduce  a 
symbolic  design  system  and  its  supporting  software,  which  greatly  aid  the  design  proc- 
ess; (3)  to  examine  sample  chip  designs  with  an  eye  to  understanding  competitive  design 
methodologies.  Students  will  complete  a  CMOS-oriented  project  comprising  the  design 
and  implementation  of  either  a  hardware  or  a  software  subsystem.  Prerequisite:  Com- 
puter Science  210  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  310.  3  units.  Kedem 

315.  Advanced  Topics  in  Artificial  Intelligence.  Course  content  will  vary  from  year 
to  year  and  will  include  a  detailed  study  of  one  or  more  of  the  following:  mechanical  the- 
orem proving,  natural  language  processing,  automatic  program  synthesis,  machine  learn- 
ing and  inference,  representations  of  knowledge,  languages  for  artificial  intelligence  re- 
search, artificial  sensorimotor  systems,  and  others.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  215. 
3  units.  Biermann,  Loveland,  orNadathur 

316.  Computational  Linguistics.  A  historical  and  technical  introduction  to  the  com- 
puter processing  of  English  or  other  natural  language  inputs,  with  emphasis  on  such  ap- 
plications as  data  base  query,  programming,  and  office  automation.  Topics  will  include 
techniques  for  the  morphological,  syntactic,  semantic,  and  pragmatic  analysis  of  Eng- 
lish. Recent  developments  in  the  area  will  also  be  studied.  Students  will  write  a  short  paper 
and/or  do  a  project.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  215.  3  units.  Biermann 

320.  VLSI  Algorithmics.  Algorithmic  and  systems  aspects  of  VLSI.  Topics  include 
theoretical  studies  of  the  layout  problem,  array  logic,  placement  and  routing,  fault- 
tolerance  in  VLSI  designs,  design  for  testability,  the  design  of  networks  of  processors, 
and  cost  trade-offs  in  VLSI  designs.  Each  student  will  complete  an  in-depth  study  of  a 


84       Courses  of  Instruction 


topic  approved  by  the  instructor.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  224  and  either  210  or 
310.  3  units.  Staff 

321.  Topics  in  Numerical  Mathematics.  Advanced  topics  in  numerical  mathemat- 
ics to  be  selected  from  areas  of  current  research.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  221  and 
222.  3  units.  Gardner,  Greenside,  Rose,  or  Szyld 

326.  Systems  Modeling.  Advanced  study  of  analytical  models  of  systems;  queuing 
model  and  its  parameterization  and  validation.  Methods  for  computer  solutions  of  some 
models.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  226  and  231.  3  units.  Trivedi 

331.  Operating  Systems  Theory.  Advanced  study  of  theoretical  aspects  of  operating 
systems  emphasizing  models  and  control  of  concurrent  processes,  processor  schedul- 
ing, and  memory  management.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  226  and  231.  3  units. 
C.  Ellis,  Trivedi,  or  Wagner 

381 .  Seminar  in  Computer  Systems  Analysis.  Topics  in  computer  systems  analysis, 
especially  for  fault-tolerant  systems,  including  reliability,  availability  and  performance 
analysis,  comparative  analysis  of  architectures,  performability,  analytic  and  numerical 
solution  techniques,  stochastic  Petri  nets,  simulation.  1  to  3  units.  Dugan  or  Trivedi 

382.  Seminar  in  Artificial  Intelligence.  Topics  in  artificial  intelligence,  such  as  nat- 
ural language  understanding,  learning,  theorem  proving  and  problem  solving,  search 
methodologies.  Topics  will  vary  from  semester  to  semester.  Includes  research  literature 
reading  with  student  presentation.  1-3  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
301.  Topics  in  Programming  Theory 
325.  Theory  of  Computation 

332.  Topics  in  Operating  Systems 

SUPPLEMENTARY  COURSES  OFFERED  AT  UNC-CH 
Comp  145.  Software  Engineering  Laboratory 
Comp  171.  Natural  Language  Processing 
Comp  230.  File  Management  Systems 
Comp  236.  Computer  Graphics 
Comp  238.  Raster  Graphics 

Comp  254.  Picture  Processing  and  Pattern  Recognition 
Comp  265.  Architecture  of  Computers 

Cultural  Anthropology 

Professor  Friedl,  Chairman  and  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  (114  Social  Sciences);  Profes- 
sors Apte,  Fox,  and  OT3arr;  Associate  Professors  Dominguez,  Quinn,  and  Smith;  Profes- 
sor Emeritus  La  Barre;  Adjunct  Professor  Cartmill 

The  department  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  Ph  .D.  degree  in  cultural  anthro- 
pology. Applicants  for  admission  should  submit  scores  on  the  Graduate  Record  Exami- 
nation Aptitude  Test.  Admission  to  the  program  is  not  contingent  on  previous  anthropo- 
logical course  work  or  any  other  specific  program  of  study  at  the  undergraduate  level. 

The  department  offers  a  program  of  specialization  in  social/cultural  anthropology. 
The  emphasis  of  the  social/cultural  anthropology  program  is  the  application  of  a  theo- 

Cultural  Anthropology       85 


retical  and  comparative  perspective  to  research  in  complex  societies.  Within  this  perspec- 
tive, a  wide  range  of  interests  is  represented  in  the  department. 

Curriculum  is  tailored  to  the  individual  student's  background,  academic  needs,  and 
research  goals;  pursuit  of  relevant  cross-disciplinary  study,  within  and  outside  the  depart- 
ment, is  expected .  However,  a  modest  number  of  courses  is  required  of  all  students,  and 
a  reading  knowledge  of  one  foreign  language  is  required  of  all  doctoral  students.  Candi- 
dates for  the  Ph.D.  degree  must  demonstrate  competence  in  their  chosen  subfield  of 
specialization  and  knowledge  of  the  broad  theoretical  perspectives,  from  all  disciplines 
relevant  for  their  area  of  concentration. 

Further  details  of  the  graduate  program  in  anthropology,  the  departmental  facilities, 
the  staff,  and  various  stipends  available  are  described  in  the  Guidelines  for  Graduate  Stu- 
dents in  Anthropology  which  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies, 
Department  of  Anthropology. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

201S.  Marxism  and  Anthropology.  The  interaction  of  Marxist  and  anthropological 
theory  over  the  last  half  century;  particular  attention  to  evolution,  historical  transforma- 
tion, mode  of  production,  labor  processes,  culture,  ideology,  and  consciousness.  3  units. 

Smith 

204S.  The  Anthropology  of  Cities.  Organization  and  behavior  in  urban  centers  from 
an  evolutionary  perspective;  cross-cultural  analysis  of  cities.  Prerequisite:  Cultural  An- 
thropology 94.  3  units.  Fox  or  Smith 

206S.  Current  Theoretical  Schools  in  Anthropology.  The  theoretical  schools  since 
World  War  II,  including  cultural  materialism  and  neo-Marxism,  structuralism,  cognitive 
anthropology,  cultural  analysis  and  symbolic  anthropology,  transactional  analysis,  and 
sociobiology.  Prerequisite :  Cultural  Anthropology  94  or  graduate  standing  or  consent  of 
instructor.  3  units.  Apte,  Dominguez,  Fox,  O'Barr,  Quinn,  or  Smith 

211S.  Ethnography  of  Communication.  History  of  the  mutual  influence  of  linguis- 
tics and  anthropology  leading  to  the  development  of  ethnography  of  speaking,  ethno- 
science,  structuralism,  and  sociolinguisrics.  Topics  vary  each  semester.  Prerequisite:  Cul- 
tural Anthropology  111  or  119  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Apte,  Dominguez,  or  O  'Ban 

215S.  The  Anthropology  of  Women:  Theoretical  Issues.  Topic  to  be  selected  each  se- 
mester from:  gender  ideology,  women  and  work,  gender  inequality,  the  history  of  femi- 
nist anthropology,  or  others.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  3  units.  Dominguez,  Quinn,  or  Smith 

228S.  Slavery  and  Society.  Western  and  non-Western  systems  of  slavery  and  their  ef- 
fects on  social  organization,  self -concepts,  and  race  relations.  3  units.  Dominguez 

234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World. 

See  C-L:  Political  Science  234S;  also  C-L:  History  234S  and  Sociology  234S.  3  units.  Fox, 
Gereffi,  or  Smith 

239.  Culture  and  Ideology.  Major  theories  about  the  relationship  between  ideologies 
and  social  /economic  systems.  Readings  from  the  works  of  Marx,  Weber,  Gramsci,  Althuss- 
er,  Geertz,  and  others.  3  units.  Fox  or  Smith 

251S.  American  Marriage:  A  Cultural  Approach.  Individual  research  on  the  Ameri- 
can cultural  model  of  marriage.  Collection,  transcription,  and  analysis  of  how  individu- 
als adapt  it  to  understanding  their  own  experiences.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  3  units.  Quinn 

255S.  Heroes  and  Heroics:  Culture  and  the  Individual.  Can  great  men  or  women 
change  the  course  of  cultures?  Or  are  even  those  we  call  geniuses  and  heroes  simply  car- 
riers of  their  culture?  The  relationship  between  individuals  and  their  cultures  as  portrayed 


86       Courses  of  Instruction 


in  anthropology  and  related  disciplines.  Various  approaches  to  the  lives  of  selected  heroes, 
using  M.  K.  Gandhi  as  an  exemplar.  3  units.  Fox 

258S.  Symbols  in  Society.  Symbolic  action  and  expressive  culture  among  tribal,  peas- 
ant, and  industrial  societies.  Approaches  emphasized  are  functionalism,  symbolic  in- 
teraction, structuralism,  and  cultural  interpretation.  3  units.  Apte  or  Dominguez 

267.  Cognitive  Anthropology.  The  organization  of  culturally  shared  knowledge;  cog- 
nitive tasks  such  as  categorizing,  decision  making,  problem  solving,  and  reasoning.  3 
units.  Quinn 

272S.  Marxism  and  Feminism.  Introduction  to  the  theoretical  literature  and  debates 
linking  Marxism  and  Feminism.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Women's  Studies. 
3  units.  Smith 

282S.  Canada.  See  C-L:  History  282S;  also  C-L:  Political  Science  282S  and  Sociology 
282S.  3  units.  Cahaw 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  See  C-L:  History  284S;  also  C-L:  Po- 
litical Science  264S,  Psychology  284S,  Sociology  284S,  and  Women's  Studies.  3  units.  Chafe, 
Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  orSpenner 

For  Graduates 

330S,  331S.  Theories  in  Sociocul  tural  Anthropology.  A  two-semester  seminar  in  an- 
thropological theory,  in  which  the  modern  currents  and  debates  in  the  field  are  exam- 
ined and  discussed.  Particular  topics  to  be  chosen  by  the  instructors.  6  units.  Staff 

393.  Individual  Research  in  Anthropology.  Supervision  and  guidance  of  A.M.  the- 
sis preparation,  Ph.D.  dissertation  preparation,  or  other  intensive  research  on  a  select- 
ed problem.  3  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
205.  The  Anthropology  of  Anthropology 
237S.  Interpretations  of  Kinship 
275S.  Inequality  in  Precapitalist  Societies 

Economics 

Professor  Vernon,  Chairman  (215A  Social  Sciences);  Professor  Wallace,  Director  of  Gradu- 
ate Studies  (238  Social  Sciences);  Professors  Clotfelter,  Coats,  Cook,  Davies,  de  Marchi, 
Geweke,  Gillis,  Goodwin,  Grabowski,  Graham,  Havrilesky,  Henderson,  Kelley,  Krue- 
ger,  Lewis,  McElroy,  Naylor,  Tauchen,  Tower,  Treml,  Viscusi,  Weintraub,  and  Yohe;  As- 
sociate Professors  Kimbrough  and  Marshall;  Assistant  Professors  Baumgardner,  Brock, 
Meurer,  and  Pessino;  Adjunct  Professors  Bates,  Gallant,  Ladd,  and  Richard 

The  Department  of  Economics  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees.  Among  the  undergraduate  courses  of  distinct  advantage  to  the  graduate  student 
in  economics  are  statistics,  economic  theory,  and  basic  courses  in  philosophy,  mathemat- 
ics, and  social  sciences  other  than  economics.  Advanced  work  in  mathematics  or  statis- 
tics is  also  useful. 

Requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  in  economics  include  courses  in  economic  the- 
ory and  econometrics  in  the  first  year.  By  the  beginning  of  the  third  year,  the  student  must 
have  passed  a  core  examination  in  economic  analysis.  In  addition,  a  student  must  obtain 
certification  in  three  fields,  one  of  which  may  be  in  an  outside  minor.  The  student  may 
select  from  advanced  economic  theory,  history  of  political  economy,  economic  develop- 
ment, economic  history,  international  economics,  money  and  banking,  labor  econom- 

Economics       87 


ics,  public  finance,  industrial  organization,  econometrics,  Soviet  economics,  and  certain 
fields  outside  the  economics  department  (e.g.,  statistics,  demography).  Course  workfor 
the  Ph.D.  degree  should  be  completed  in  five  or  six  semesters  of  residence. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Capitalism  and  Socialism.  Selected  ideological  classics  of  new  and  old,  right  and 
left  economics  including  both  "counsels  for  perfection"  (Utopias)  and  "precepts  for  ac- 
tion" in  political  economy.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  154  or  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 3  units.  Naylor 

204S.  Advanced  Monetary  Economics.  Monetary  theory  and  its  statistical  and  institu- 
tional implementation.  Particular  attention  to  the  development  of  aggregative  theories 
of  prices,  interest  rates,  and  production;  the  functioning  of  monetary  policy  within  vari- 
ous theoretical  frameworks;  appraisal  of  recent  use  and  limitations  of  Federal  Reserve  poli- 
cy. Prerequisite:  Economics  153.  3  units.  Havrilesky  or  Yohe 

205S.  Advanced  Monetary  Theory  and  Policy.  Emphasis  on  recent  issues:  innova- 
tions in  the  payments  mechanism  and  new  monetary  aggregates,  the  subterranean  econ- 
omy, financial  crises,  alternative  views  of  the  monetary  policy  transmission  mechanism, 
and  the  monetarist-fiscalist  controversy.  Prerequisites:  Economics  138  and  153.  3  units. 
Havrilesky  or  Yohe 

212S.  Economic  Science  and  Economic  Policy.  A  historical  examination  of  the  impact 
of  economics  on  public  policy;  topics  vary  each  semester  and  have  included  energy  and 
anti-inflation  policy,  productivity  growth,  the  Third  World,  and  the  Council  of  Econom- 
ic Advisers.  3  units.  Goodwin  or  Henderson 

213S.1.  The  Economics  of  Slavery  in  the  American  South.  The  nature,  development, 
economics,  and  social  consequences  of  slavery  in  the  United  States  during  the  nineteenth 
century.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Coars 

214.  Social  Choice.  The  economic  study  of  nonmarket  decision  making.  Theory  of 
constitutions,  voting  rules,  voter  behavior,  the  bureaucracy,  incentives  for  reaching  con- 
sensus, and  the  evolution  of  cooperation.  Applications  to  the  provision  of  public  goods, 
and  tax  policy  and  redistribution .  Available  only  in  the  Duke  in  Amsterdam  Summer  Pro- 
gram. Prerequisites:  Economics  1  or  51,  2  or  52.  3  units,  de  Marchi 

214S.  Social  Choice.  A  seminar  version  of  214.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  con- 
sent of  instructor.  3  units,  de  Marchi 

215S.  Applied  Welfare  Economics.  The  principles  of  economic  cost  benefit  analysis 
applicable  to  circumstances  in  which  market  valuations  do  not  provide  adequate  meas- 
ures of  social  desirability.  Socially  relevant  prices  for  labor,  capital,  energy,  materials,  for- 
eign exchange,  and  valuation  of  public  goods.  Development  of  analysis  for  individual 
projects,  extended  to  cover  economic  policies.  Prerequisite:  Economics  149.  3  units. 
Henderson 

218.  Macroeconomic  Policy.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  218.  3  units.  Staff 

219S.  Economic  Problems  of  Underdeveloped  Areas.  Analysis  of  underdeveloped 
countries  with  some  attention  to  national  and  international  programs  designed  to  acceler- 
ate development.  Prerequisite :  Economics  149  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Kelley  or 
Naylor 

220S.  Computer  Modeling  for  Policy  Analysis.  Introduction  to  the  use  of  computer 
techniques  in  economic  policy  evaluation;  policy  applications  to  international  econom- 
ics, public  finance  and  development  economics;  computer  analysis  of  linear  and  nonlinear 
models.  Students  required  to  complete  a  major  modeling  project.  Prerequisites:  Econom- 
ics 149  and  Economics  154.  3  units.  Tower 

88       Courses  of  Instruction 


232.  Microeconomics:  Policy  Applications.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  232. 3  units. 
Ladd 

233.  Public  Sector  Economics  and  Policies.  Analysis  of  expenditures,  taxation,  debt, 
public  enterprises,  and  current  government  programs.  Prerequisite:  Economics  149  or 
consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

239.  Introduction  to  Econometrics.  Data  collection,  estimation,  and  hypothesis  test- 
ing. Use  of  econometric  models  for  analysis  and  policy.  (Not  open  to  students  who  have 
had  Economics  139. )  Prerequisites :  Economics  2  or  52  and  Mathematics  32  or  equivalent 
and  Economics  138  or  equivalent.  3  units.  McElroy,  Pessino,  Tauchen,  or  Wallace 

243.  Econometrics  I.  Economic  theory,  mathematics,  statistical  inference,  and  elec- 
tronic computers  applied  to  analysis  of  economic  phenomena.  Objective  is  to  give  em- 
pirical content  to  economic  theory.  Matrix  algebra  used  to  develop  topics  in  inference, 
linear  regression,  and  systems  of  simultaneous  equations.  Use  is  made  of  the  electronic 
computer.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and  237  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Geweke,  Marshall, 
or  Wallace 

244.  Corporate  Economics  I.  Strategic  planning  models  of  the  firm  including  mar- 
ginal analysis,  mathematical  programming,  portfolio,  and  corporate  simulation  models. 
Economics  as  the  language  of  corporate  planning  and  modeling.  Prerequisites:  Economics 
138  and  149  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Naylor 

245.  Econometrics  II.  Advanced  theory  and  applications:  includes  specification  er- 
ror, generalized  least  squares,  lag  structures,  Bayesian  decision  making,  simultaneous 
equation  methods,  and  forecasting.  Emphasis  on  current  applied  literature.  Prerequisite: 
Economics  243.  3  units.  Geweke  or  Tauchen 

246.  Selected  Topics  in  Econometric  Theory.  Analysis  of  panel  data,  combining  data 
from  different  sources,  vector  autoregressive  methods,  problems  of  causation  in  time  se- 
ries data,  nonlinear  estimation,  limited  dependent  variables,  sample  selection  bias,  and 
other  topics  to  be  chosen  subject  to  the  interests  of  the  class.  3  units.  Geweke,  Richard,  or 
Tauchen 

247S.  Applied  Econometrics.  Application  of  current  developments  in  econometric 
methodology  to  empirical  problems  in  economics.  Emphasis  on  the  conduct  of  empiri- 
cal research,  including  model  and  hypothesis  formulation,  testing,  and  integration  of  eco- 
nomic and  econometric  theory.  3  units.  McElroy,  Pessino,  and  Wallace 

249.  Microeconomics.  Cost  and  supply  considerations  in  price  theory;  the  demand 
for  factors  of  production.  The  allocation  of  resources  in  the  context  of  competitive  and 
monopolistic  market  structures.  (Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Economics  149.) 
Prerequisites:  Economics  2  or  52  and  Mathematics  31.  3  units.  Staff 

250S.  Modern  Economic  Thought.  Integrated  survey  of  the  several  major  streams  of 
economic  theory  since  1936.  Selected  topics  from  the  economics  of  Keynes,  its  offshoots 
and  coordinate  developments,  and  post-Marxian  economic  theory.  Historical  evolution 
of  recent  ideas  and  their  interrelations.  Prerequisite:  Economics  138  and  149  and  154  or 
consent  of  instructor.  3  units,  de  Marchi  or  Weintraub 

254.  Macroeconomics.  Concepts  and  measurement  of  national  income  and  expen- 
ditures, employment  interest  rates,  and  price  levels;  the  theoretical  determination  of  these 
aggregates,  applications  of  macroeconomic  growth.  (Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken 
Economics  154.)  3  units.  Staff 

265S.  International  Trade  and  Finance.  Fundamental  principles  of  international  eco- 
nomic relations.  The  economic  basis  for  international  specialization  and  trade  and  the 
economic  gains  from  trade,  the  balance  of  international  payments,  problems  of  interna- 


Economics       89 


tional  finance,  investments,  and  monetary  problems.  Prerequisites:  Economics  149  and 
154.  3  units.  Brock,  Kimbrough,  Krueger,  or  Tower 

268.  Federal  Tax  Policy.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  268.  3  units.  Clotfelter  or 
Schmalbeck 

270S.  Fundamentals  of  Political  Economy.  See  C-L:  Political  Science  270S.  3  units. 
Aldrich,  Bates,  or  Bianco 

286S.  Economic  Policy-Making  in  Developing  Countries.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy 
Studies  286S.  3  units.  Conrad  or  Gillis 

287.  Public  Finance.  Economic  aspects  of  such  problems  as  the  growth  of  government, 
the  proper  role  of  the  state,  the  centralization  and  decentralization  of  government,  govern- 
ment bureaucracy,  the  impact  of  taxes  and  spending  on  the  wealthy  and  the  poor,  other 
public  policies  and  questions.  Prerequisite:  Economics  149.  3  units.  Staff 

293.  Soviet  Economic  History.  Establishment  of  foundations  of  a  socialist  economy: 
collectivization,  industrialization,  and  search  for  economic  efficiency.  3  units.  Treml 

294S.  Soviet  Economic  System.  Economic  planning  and  administration  in  the  Sovi- 
et Union  and  other  socialist  countries.  International  comparisons.  Theoretical  and  ap- 
plied problems  of  resource  allocation,  economic  development,  and  optimal  micro 
decision-making  in  a  nonmarket  economy.  3  units.  Treml 

For  Graduates 

301.  Microeconomic  Analysis  I.  Review  of  contemporary  theory  relating  to  produc- 
tion, the  firm,  and  income  distribution  in  competitive  and  imperfectly  competitive  mar- 
kets. 3  units.  Tower 

302.  Microeconomic  Analysis  II.  A  continuation  of  Economics  301  with  emphasis 
on  analyses  of  consumer  behavior,  general  equilibrium,  welfare  economics,  and  capital 
theory.  Prerequisite:  Economics  301.  3  units.  Graham 

304, 305.  Monetary  Theory  and  Policy.  304:  theories  of  the  supply  of  and  demand  for 
money  (neoclassical  and  Keynesian  macroeconomic),  general  equilibrium  theories,  and 
theories  of  the  term  structure  of  interest  rates.  305:  the  theory  and  practice  of  monetary 
policy  with  emphasis  on  recent  issues,  the  monetarist-fiscalist  controversy,  the  mone- 
tary policy  transmission  mechanism,  and  policy  simulations  with  econometric  models. 
3  units  each.  Havrilesky,  Kimbrough,  or  Yohe 

309.  Trade  and  Development  Theory.  Theory  of  international  trade  and  trade  policy 
as  it  affects  the  structure  and  growth  of  individual  economies,  with  emphasis  on  develop- 
ing countries.  Comparative  advantage,  factor  proportions  explanation  of  trade,  infant  in- 
dustry and  other  arguments  for  protection,  interactions  of  exchange  rate  and  trade  poli- 
cy and  special  issues  relating  to  primary  commodities  are  examined.  3  units.  Krueger 

311, 312.  History  of  Political  Economy.  A  detailed  review  of  the  development  of  eco- 
nomic theory,  the  tools  of  economic  analysis,  and  economics  as  a  science,  together  with 
an  analysis  of  the  circumstances  affecting  this  development.  Period  covered:  pre-Christian 
times  through  1936.  3  units  each.  Goodwin 

313,  314.  Seminar  in  Economic  Theory.  Prerequisite:  Economics  301  or  equivalent. 
3  units  each.  Weintraub 

317.  Seminar  in  Demographic,  Population,  and  Resource  Problems  (Development 
Economics  I).  Historical,  empirical,  and  theoretical  topics  in  development  economics 
focusing  on  real  aspects  of  growth  in  a  closed  economy.  Special  attention  to  human 


90       Courses  of  Instruction 


resource  economics  (demography,  education,  nutrition),  models  of  dualism,  agricultural 
growth,  and  technology.  3  units.  Brock  orKelley 

319.  Seminar  in  the  Theory  and  the  Problems  of  Economic  Growth  and  Change  (De- 
velopment Economics  II).  Links  between  aid,  financial  markets,  and  real  investment  in 
an  open  economy  stressing  tariff  protection  and  capital  controls  (internal  and  external) . 
Economic  policy-making  using  market  solutions  and/or  planning  models  (input-output, 
linear  programming,  and  computable  general  equilibrium).  3  units.  Brock 

320.  Macroeconomic  Analysis  I.  Measurement  of  national  income  and  other  impor- 
tant aggregates;  classical  macroeconomics;  Keynesian  and  more  recent  views  of  the  de- 
terminants of  income,  employment,  and  price  levels;  empirical  studies  of  consumption, 
investment,  and  monetary  variables.  3  units.  Kimbrough  or  Tauchen 

322.  Macroeconomic  Analysis  II.  Further  analysis  of  topics  treated  in  Economics  320. 
Optimal  economic  growth;  business  cycles.  Issues  in  economic  policy.  Prerequisite:  Eco- 
nomics 320.  3  units.  Kimbrough  or  Tauchen 

326.  Stochastic  Macroeconomics.  Advanced  topics  in  macroeconomics  with  an  em- 
phasis on  empirical  macroeconomics  and  the  interrelationship  between  economic  the- 
ory and  empirical  work  in  macroeconomics.  Topics  include  the  interpretation  of  macro- 
economic  time  series,  formulating  and  testing  models  of  asset  pricing  and  market 
efficiency,  solution  and  estimation  of  rational  expectations  models,  vector  autoregression 
models,  and  policy  evaluation  with  empirical  macroeconomic  models.  3  units.  Tauchen 

329.  Federal  Finance.  An  analysis  of  the  trends  and  hypotheses  concerning  the  growth 
in  governmental  activity,  the  optimum  level  and  composition  of  governmental  spend- 
ing, and  the  microeconomic  and  macroeconomic  effects  of  governmental  spending  and 
tax  policies.  3  units.  Clotfelteror  Viscusi 

330.  Seminar  in  Public  Finance.  3  units.  Viscusi 

350.  Modern  Economic  Thought.  Principles  of  microeconomics  in  the  analysis  of 
problems  and  policies.  The  particular  contextual  materials  that  will  be  subjected  to  anal- 
ysis will  vary.  Materials  will  be  treated  in  the  tradition  of  positive  economics.  3  or  6  units. 
Staff 

355.  Seminar  in  Labor  Economics.  3  units.  Baumgardner  or  McElroy 

358.  Seminar  in  Labor  Market  and  Related  Analysis.  3  units.  Baumgardner  or  McElroy 

359.  Economic  Analysis  of  Legal  Issues.  An  exploration  of  diverse  topics  in  law  and 
economics  such  as  property  rights  and  externalities,  tort  law  and  optimal  accident  preven- 
tion, bargaining  and  game  theory,  the  economics  of  contracts,  and  theories  of  economic 
justice.  3  units.  Culp 

365.  Seminar  in  International  Trade  Theory  and  Policy.  3  units.  Tower 

366.  Seminar  in  International  Monetary  Theory.  3  units.  Kimbrough 

380.  Graduate  Economics  Workshops.  For  postpreliminary  students.  May  be  taken 
for  multiple  credit.  Sections:  01.  Industrial  Organization  and  Regulation;  02.  International 
Economics;  03.  Labor  Economics;  04.  Macroeconomics;  05.  Public  Finance;  06.  Econom- 
ic Thought;  07.  Corporate  Economics;  08.  Applied  Econometrics.  3  units  each.  Staff 

388.  Industrial  Organization.  The  theory,  measurement,  and  history  of  the  firm- 
structure  of  industry.  Emphasis  upon  the  structure  of  American  industry  and  upon  ac- 
tual production  and  pricing  practices.  Criteria  for  evaluating  industrial  performance.  3 
units.  Graboivski,  Meurer,  or  Vernon 


Economics       91 


389.  Seminar  in  Industrial  and  Governmental  Problems.  3  units.  Grabmoski,  Marshall, 
or  Vernon 

397,  398.  Directed  Research.  3  units.  Staff 
COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

234.  Urban  and  Regional  Economics 

235.  The  Economics  of  Crime,  Law  Enforcement,  and  Justice 
285.  Evaluation  of  Public  Expenditures 

303.  Theory  of  Economic  Decision  Making 

307.  Quantitative  Analysis  I 

308.  Quantitative  Analysis  II 

316.  Seminar  in  Economics  of  Soviet-Type  Socialism 
321.  Theory  of  Quantitative  Economic  Policy 

323.  Income  Distribution  Theory 

324,  325.  Economics  of  the  Law 
331.  Seminar  in  Economic  History 

345,  346.  Demographic  Techniques  I  and  II 

401.  Seminar  on  the  British  Commonwealth 

402.  Interdisciplinary  Seminar  in  the  History  of  the  Social  Sciences 

RELATED  COURSES  IN  OTHER  DEPARTMENTS 

Courses  in  related  fields  maybe  selected  from  anthropology,  computer  science,  for- 
estry, history,  mathematics,  philosophy,  political  science,  public  policy  sciences,  sociol- 
ogy, and  statistics  or  from  an  area  that  complements  the  candidate's  area  of  research  in- 
terests in  economics. 

See  the  Center  for  Demographic  Studies  in  the  chapter  "Special  and  Cooperative  Pro- 
grams" for  further  information. 

Education 

Associate  Professor  Davis,  Chairman  and  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  (213  West  Duke); 
Professor  Page;  Associate  Professors  Ballantyne,  Carbone,  Di  Bona,  Johnson,  and  Saw- 
yer; Professor  Emeritus  Gehman;  Adjunct  Associate  Professors  Martin  and  Pittillo;  Ad- 
junct Assistant  Professor  Mayesky;  Lecturer  Fowler 

For  students  admitted  to  graduate  programs  prior  to  fall  1981,  specific  requirements 
may  be  obtained  in  the  Graduate  School  office.  Qualified  juniors,  seniors,  and  graduate 
students  may  enroll  in  appropriate  education  courses  as  electives. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

205,  206.  Selected  Topics.  Three  units  each.  Staff 

215S.  Seminar  in  Secondary  School  Teaching.  Principles,  practices,  and  problems 
in  secondary  school  instruction.  3  units.  Carbone  or  staff 

216.  Secondary  Education:  Internship.  Supervised  internship  in  senior  high  schools 
involving  some  full-time  teaching.  For  student  teachers  only.  6  units.  Carbone  or  staff 

92       Courses  of  Instruction 


225.  The  Teaching  of  History  and  the  Social  Studies.  Evaluation  of  the  objectives, 
content,  materials,  and  methods  in  the  teaching  of  history  and  the  social  studies.  3  units. 
Carbone  or  staff 

232.  Learning  and  Living  in  Families.  Role  and  function  of  the  family  as  related  to 
the  development  and  behavior  of  its  members,  to  gender  identification,  to  parenting,  and 
to  interactions  among  family  members.  3  units.  Ballantyne  or  Davis 

236.  Teaching  Developmental  and  Remedial  Reading  in  the  Secondary  School.  Prin- 
ciples, methods,  and  materials  for  the  development  of  effective  reading  attitudes  and  skills 
in  developmental  and  remedial  programs.  3  units.  Staff 

242S.  Group  Interactions.  Examination  of  theoretical  issues  and  processes  involved 
in  the  dynamics  of,  and  learning  in,  small  groups  of  children,  adolescents,  parents,  oth- 
er adults,  with  attention  to  problem-oriented  groups.  3  units.  Ballantyne 

246.  Teaching  of  Mathematics.  Aims,  curriculum,  and  classroom  procedure  for  teach- 
ing secondary  school  mathematics.  3  units.  Staff 

276.  Teaching  of  High  School  Science.  Discussion,  lectures,  and  collateral  reading 
related  to  such  topics  as  aims,  tests,  curriculum,  classroom  and  laboratory  procedure,  field 
trips,  and  course  and  lesson  planning  for  secondary  school  science.  3  units.  Staff 

For  Graduates 

350,  351.  Directed  Activities  in  Education.  Internship  experiences  at  an  advanced 
level  under  supervision  of  appropriate  staff.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units 
each.  Staff 

357.  Directed  Research.  For  students  who  have  passed  the  preliminary  examination. 
1  to  6  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
211.  Education  and  the  Mass  Media 
212S.  Pedagogy  and  Political  Economy:  A  World  View 
227.  Contemporary  Theories  of  Counseling  and  Psychotherapy 
248.  Practicum  in  Counseling 

Engineering 

Earl  H.  Dowell,  Sc.D.,  Dean  (305  Teer  Engineering  Library  Building) 

Jack  B.  Chaddock,  Sc.D.,y4ssociflfe  Dean  for  Research  (305  Teer  Engineering  Library  Building) 

The  School  of  Engineering  offers  programs  of  study  and  research  leading  to  the  M .  S. 
and  Ph.D.  degrees  with  a  major  in  biochemical,  biomedical,  civil  and  environmental,  elec- 
trical, and  mechanical  engineering  and  materials  science.  These  programs  are  designed 
to  provide:  (1)  development  of  depth  and  breadth  in  mathematics,  computer  science,  the 
basic  physical  sciences,  the  life  sciences  where  appropriate,  and  the  engineering  sciences; 
(2)  mastery  of  an  advanced  body  of  knowledge  in  the  candidate's  chosen  field  of  speciali- 
zation or  research;  (3)  experience  in  the  art  of  engineering,  including  strong  elements  of 
intuition,  imagination,  and  judgment;  and  (4)  performance  of  original  research  which, 
in  the  case  of  the  M.S.  degree,  demonstrates  the  ability  to  advance  knowledge  in  the  area 
of  professional  study  and,  in  the  case  of  the  Ph .  D.  degree,  makes  a  significant  contribu- 
tion to  the  research  literature  through  publication  in  a  leading  professional  journal  in  the 
field.  Engineering  graduate  students  are  expected  to  participate  in  seminars  appropri- 
ate to  their  fields  of  study.  A  minimum  of  30  units  of  earned  graduate  credit  beyond  the 

Engineering       93 


bachelor's  degree  is  required  for  the  M.S.  degree:  12  in  the  major,  6  in  related  minor  work 
(usually  mathematics  or  natural  science),  6  in  either  the  major  or  minor  subject  or  in  other 
areas  approved  by  the  major  department,  and  6  for  a  research-based  thesis.  A  nonthesis 
option  requiring  30  units  of  course  credit  is  available.  Each  of  the  departments  imposes 
additional  requirements  in  the  exercise  of  this  option .  There  is  no  language  requirement 
for  this  degree.  A  minimum  of  60  units  of  earned  graduate  credit  beyond  the  bachelor's 
degree  is  required  for  the  Ph.D.  degree.  In  civil  and  environmental  engineering,  12  units 
of  course  work  beyond  the  master's  degree  are  required  to  be  in  the  major  field,  6  in  a  relat- 
ed minor  field,  and  6  in  either  the  major  or  minor  field;  in  electrical  engineering,  24  units 
are  required  in  the  major  field  and  12  units  in  a  related  minor  field  (often  mathematics 
or  natural  science),  12  in  either  the  major  or  minor  subject  or  other  areas  approved  by  the 
major  department,  and  12  for  a  research-based  dissertation .  In  biomedical  and  mechanical 
engineering  and  materials  science  there  are  no  specific  course  requirements;  each  pro- 
gram is  planned  to  meet  individual  needs.  Doctoral  students  are  required  to  pass  qualify- 
ing and  preliminary  examinations  which  may  be  either  written,  oral,  or  a  combination 
of  written  and  oral  components,  at  the  discretion  of  the  committee  and  the  department. 

The  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering  offers  both  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  in  bio- 
chemical engineering.  Further  details  about  this  program  may  be  found  in  the  chapter 
"Special  and  Cooperative  Programs"  in  this  bulletin  or  obtained  from  the  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies,  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering. 

In  addition,  the  School  of  Engineering  and  the  Fuqua  School  of  Business  offer  an 
MBA/MS  Joint-Degree  Program.  Further  details  about  this  program  may  be  obtained  from: 
Professor  Eric  Pas,  Director,  MBA/MS  Joint-Degree  Program,  Department  of  Civil  and  En- 
vironmental Engineering. 

ENGINEERING 

221.  Computational  Linear  Algebra.  Linear  vector  spaces  of  real  and  complex  n- 
touples,  norms,  metrics,  inner-products,  basis  vectors,  rank  and  dimensionality;  matrices 
as  linear  maps,  rank  and  nullity,  particular  and  general  solutions  of  Ax = b;  LR,  LDU,  and 
QR  type  factorization  of  matrices  by  direct  methods  and  successive  transformations  (us- 
ing ordinary,  unitary,  Hermitian  unitary  elementary  matrices);  solution  of  Ax  =  b  by  di- 
rect methods  using  the  factors,  and  iterative  methods  0acobi,  Gauss-Seidel,  SOR,  Lanczos 
type);  iterative  solutions  of  nonlinear  equations;  special  and  general  eigenvalue  prob- 
lems; tridiagonalization  by  similarity  transformations  (Givens,  Householder,  Lanczos 
type);  diagonalizationbyjacobi,  LR,  QR  type  algorithms;  power  methods;  computational 
complexities,  storage  requirements,  convergence  characteristics,  and  the  mathematical 
basis  of  the  studied  algorithms.  Prerequisites:  undergraduate  mathematics  requirement 
of  the  School  of  Engineering,  knowledge  of  any  algorithmic  programming  language.  3 
units.  Utku 

222.  Computer  Solutions  of  Ordinary  and  Partial  Differential  Equations.  Ordinary 
differential  equations;  initial  value  problems;  Lipschitz  conditions;  single  and  multistep 
methods;  predictor-corrector  methods;  stability  and  error  control;  elliptic  partial  differen- 
tial equations;  linear  boundary  value  problems,  solutions  by  finite  differences  and  finite 
elements;  parabolic  differential  equations,  initial  value  problems,  solutions  by  succes- 
sive boundary  value  problems,  stability  and  error  control;  hyperbolic  differential  equa- 
tions; propagation  of  discontinuities;  method  of  characteristics.  Prerequisites:  Engineer- 
ing 221  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Utku 

BIOMEDICAL  ENGINEERING 

Professor  McElhaney,  Chairman  (136  Engineering);  Professor  von  Ramm,  Director  of Gradu- 
ate Studies  (267 Engineering  Annex);  Professors  Barr,  Clark,  Hammond,  Hochmuth,  Nolte, 
Pilkington,  Plonsey,  Thurstone,  and  Wolbarsht;  Associate  Professors  Burdick,  Jaszczak, 


94       Courses  of  Instruction 


and  Pasipoularides;  Assistant  Professors  Cusma,  Daniels,  Floyd,  Jacobs,  Reichert,  Smith, 
Trahey,  and  Truskey 

Biomedical  Engineering  is  the  discipline  in  which  the  physical,  mathematical,  and 
engineering  sciences  and  associated  technology  are  applied  to  biology  and  medicine.  Con- 
tributions range  from  modeling  and  simulation  of  physiological  systems  through  ex- 
perimental research  to  solutions  of  practical  clinical  problems.  The  goal  of  the  graduate 
program  in  biomedical  engineering  is  to  combine  training  in  advanced  engineering,  bio- 
medical engineering,  and  the  life  sciences  so  that  graduates  of  the  program  can  contrib- 
ute at  the  most  advanced  professional  level.  The  doctoral  dissertation  should  demonstrate 
significant  and  original  contributions  to  an  interdisciplinary  topic,  accomplished  as  an 
independent  investigator.  The  major,  current  research  areas  are:  biochemical  engineer- 
ing, biofluid  mechanics,  biomechanics,  biomedical  materials,  biomedical  modeling,  bio- 
sensors, biotechnology,  data  acquisition  and  processing,  medical  imaging,  and  elec- 
trophysiology.  Every  biomedical  engineering  graduate  student  is  required  to  serve  as  a 
teaching  assistant  as  part  of  the  graduate  training. 

201.  Electrophysiology.  The  electrophysiology  of  excitable  cells  from  a  quantitative 
perspective.  Topics  include  the  ionic  basis  of  action  potentials,  the  Hodgkin-Huxley  mod- 
el, impulse  propagation,  source-field  relationships,  and  an  introduction  to  functional  elec- 
trical stimulation.  Student  chooses  a  relevant  topic  area  for  detailed  study  and  report. 
Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Biomedical  Engineering  101  or  equivalent.  3  units. 
Barr  or  Plonsey 

202.  Biomedical  Transfer  Processes.  An  introduction  to  biomedical  diffusion  and 
momentum  transfer  with  particular  emphasis  on  physical  models  of  biological  and  ar- 
tificial organ  systems.  3  units.  Clark  and  Hochmuth 

205, 206.  Microprocessors  and  Digital  Instruments.  Design  of  microcomputer-based 
devices  including  both  hardware  and  software  considerations  of  system  design.  Prima- 
ry emphasis  on  hardware  aspects,  including  a  progression  through  initial  design,  pro- 
totype construction  in  the  laboratory,  testing  of  prototypes  to  locate  and  correct  faults, 
and  final  design  evaluation.  Evaluation  includes  examination  of  complexity,  reliability, 
and  cost.  Design  and  construction  oriented  toward  biomedical  devices  or  instruments 
that  include  dedicated  microcomputers,  usually  operating  in  real  time.  Prerequisites  for 
205:  Engineering  51  and  Biomedical  Engineering  163, 164  or  equivalents;  for  206:  satis- 
factory work  in  205.  4  units  each.  Barr,  Hammond,  and  von  Ramm 

207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems.  An  introduction  to  the  modeling 
of  complex  biological  systems  using  principles  of  advanced  transport  and  kinetic  proc- 
ess analyses.  A  continuum  approach  will  be  used  to  analyze  multicomponent  mass  trans- 
port and  reactions  in  systems  found  in  biotechnological  and  biomedical  applications.  Sys- 
tems considered  will  include  facilitated  versus  active  transport  of  nutrients  across 
membranes,  lung  oxygen  transport  models,  artificial  kidney  design  (external  membrane 
dialysis  and  peritoneal  dialysis),  electrophoresis,  pulsatile  flow  in  arterial  systems,  at- 
tached enzyme  reactions,  and  microbial  adhesion  to  solid  surfaces.  C-L:  Civil  Engineer- 
ing 207  and  Mechanical  Engineering  207.  3  units.  Bryers,  Daniels,  or  Truskey 

211.  Theoretical  Electrophysiology.  Mathematical  analysis  of  intracellular  and  ex- 
tracellular currents  and  voltages  arising  from  subthreshold  and  transthreshold  stimuli 
applied  to  excitable  tissue  (cardiac  and  striated  muscle  and  nerve).  Bases  for  and  behavior 
of  models  of  excitable  tissue  utilizing  discrete  and  continuous  formulations.  Evaluation 
of  sources  of  extracellular  fields.  Description  of,  and  evaluation  of,  models  of  membrane 
behavior.  Laboratory  exercises  based  on  computer  simulation,  with  emphasis  on  quan- 
titative behavior  and  design.  Readings  from  original  literature.  Prerequisite:  Biomedical 
Engineering  101  or  201.  4  units.  Barr  and  Plonsey 


Engineering      95 


212.  Theoretical  Electrocardiography.  Mathematical  analysis  of  currents  flowing  be- 
tween the  heart  and  body  surface.  Cardiac  electrophysiology.  Consideration  of  cardiac 
models,  inhomogeneities,  and  surface  lead  systems.  Examination  of  lead  systems,  and 
the  interpretation  of  body  surface  measurements  using  inverse  calculations.  Laboratory 
exercises  based  on  computer  simulation  with  emphasis  on  quantitative  behavior  and  de- 
sign. Readings  from  the  original  literature.  Prerequisite:  Biomedical  Engineering  101  or 
201.  4  units.  Ban  and  Plonsey 

215.  Biomedical  Materials  and  Artificial  Organs.  Chemical  structures,  processing 
methods,  evaluation  procedures,  and  regulations  for  materials  used  in  biomedical  ap- 
plications. Applications  will  include  implant  materials,  components  of  ex  vivo  circuits, 
and  cosmetic  prostheses.  Primary  emphasis  will  be  placed  on  polymer-based  materials 
and  on  optimization  of  parameters  of  materials  which  determine  their  utility  in  applica- 
tions such  as  artificial  kidney  membranes  and  artificial  arteries.  Prerequisite:  Engineer- 
ing 83  or  Chemistry  151  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L :  Mechanical  Engineering  215. 3  units. 
Clark 

216.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Cells  and  Organs.  Applications  of  the  principles  of  mass 
and  momentum  transport  to  the  analysis  of  selected  processes  of  biomedical  and  biotech- 
nological  interest.  Emphasis  placed  on  the  development  and  critical  analysis  of  models 
of  the  particular  transport  process.  Topics  discussed  include :  reaction-diffusion  process, 
transport  in  natural  and  artificial  membranes,  dynamics  of  blood  flow,  pharmacokinet- 
ics, receptor-mediated  processes  and  macromolecular  transport  normal  and  neoplastic 
tissue.  Prerequisite:  Biomedical  Engineering  207  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Truskey 

222.  Principles  of  Ultrasound  Imaging.  Propagation,  reflection,  refraction,  and 
diffraction  of  acoustic  waves  in  biologic  media.  Topics  include  geometric  optics,  physi- 
cal optics,  attenuation,  and  image  quality  parameters  such  as  signal-to-noise  ratio,  dy- 
namic range,  and  resolution.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  design  and  analysis  of  medical 
ultrasound  imaging  systems.  Prerequisites:  Physics  52  and  Mathematics  111.  3  units,  von 
Ramm 

230.  Biomechanics.  Basic  elements  of  mechanics  are  developed  with  application  in 
biomechanics.  Primary  emphasis  is  given  to  trauma  mechanisms,  injury  criteria,  and  hu- 
man protection.  Head  and  neck  injuries  and  helmet  design  are  discussed.  Case  studies 
from  product  liability  lawsuits  with  a  strong  biomechanics  context  are  discussed  in  a  semi- 
nar mode.  3  units.  McElhaney 

233.  Modern  Diagnostic  Imaging  Systems.  The  underlying  concepts  and  instrumen- 
tation of  several  modern  medical  imaging  modalities.  Review  of  applicable  linear  systems 
theory  and  relevant  principles  of  physics.  Modalities  studied  include  X-ray  radiography 
(conventional  film-screen  imaging  and  modern  electronic  imaging),  computerized  tomog- 
raphy (including  the  theory  of  reconstruction),  and  nuclear  magnetic  resonance  imag- 
ing. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Cusma  or  Floyd 

235.  Acoustics  and  Hearing.  This  course  covers  the  generation  and  propagation  of 
acoustic  (vibrational)  waves  and  their  reception  and  interpretation  by  the  auditory  sys- 
tem. Topics  under  the  heading  of  generation  and  propagation  include  free  and  forced 
vibrations  of  discrete  and  continuous  systems,  resonance  and  damping,  and  the  wave 
equation  and  solutions.  To  understand  the  reception  and  interpretation  of  sound,  the  anat- 
omy and  physiology  of  the  mammalian  auditory  system  are  presented,  and  the  mechanics 
of  the  middle  and  inner  ears  studied.  Prerequisites:  Physics  52  and  Mathematics  111  or 
equivalents.  3  units.  Trahey 

241.  Artificial  Intelligence  in  Medicine.  Basic  concepts  of  Artificial  Intelligence  (AI) 
and  in-depth  examination  of  medical  applications  of  AI .  Knowledge  of  heuristic  program- 

96       Courses  of  Instruction 


ming;  brief  examination  of  the  classic  AI  programming  languages  (LISP  and  PROLOG) 
and  AI  programming;  a  study  of  rule-based  systems  and  cognitive  models.  3  units. 
Hammond 

243.  Computers  in  Biomedical  Engineering.  An  in-depth  study  of  the  use  of  com- 
puters in  biomedical  applications.  Hardware,  software,  and  applications  programming. 
Data  collection,  analysis,  and  presentation  studied  within  application  areas  such  as 
monitoring,  medical  records,  computer-aided  diagnoses,  computer-aided  instruction, 
M.D.-assistance  programs,  laboratory  processing,  wave  form  analysis,  hospital  informa- 
tion systems,  and  medical  information  systems.  3  units.  Hammond 

244.  Mathematical  Models  of  Physiological  Systems.  Mathematical  modeling  and 
computer  simulation  of  physiological  and  other  biomedical  systems.  Formulation  of  quan- 
titative models  of  physiological  processes  using  methods  drawn  from  a  variety  of  engineer- 
ing disciplines  including  transport  phenomena,  feedback  control,  and  continuum 
mechanics.  Digital  techniques  for  the  solution  of  coupled  nonlinear  equations,  emphasiz- 
ing systems  of  ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations.  Selected  readings  from  the  liter- 
ature covering  current  models  of  cardiovascular,  renal,  neural,  respiratory,  and  sensory 
systems.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  111  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Daniels 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Biomedical  Engineering.  Advanced  subjects  related  to  pro- 
grams within  biomedical  engineering  tailored  to  fit  the  requirements  of  a  small  group. 
Prerequisites:  consent  of  instructor.  1  to  4  units.  Staff 

For  Graduates 

333.  Biomedical  Imaging.  A  study  of  the  fundamentals  of  information  detection, 
processing,  and  presentation  associated  with  imaging  in  biology  and  medicine.  Analy- 
sis of  coherent  and  incoherent  radiation  and  various  image  generation  techniques.  Also 
covered  will  be  the  psychometrics  of  image  evaluation  dealing  with  subjective  and  ob- 
jective parameters.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  upon  sonography,  thermography,  X-ray,  var- 
ious forms  of  nuclear  radiography,  microscopy,  and  holography.  3  units,  von  Ramm 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Biomedical  Engineering.  Individual  readings  in  advanced 
study  and  research  areas  of  biomedical  engineering.  Prerequisite:  approval  of  Director 
of  Graduate  Studies.  1  to  3  units  each.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

204.  Measurement  and  Control  of  Cardiac  Electrical  Events 
221.  Electrophysiological  Techniques 
311.  Inverse  Models 

CIVIL  AND  ENVIRONMENTAL  ENGINEERING 

Professor  Vesilind,  Chairman  (121  Engineering);  Associate  Professor  Peirce,  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies  (122  Engineering);  Professors  Haff,  Melosh,  Petroski,  S.  Utku,  Vesilind, 
and  J.  F.  Wilson;  Associate  Professors  Biswas,  Bryers,  Hueckel,  Medina,  Pas,  and  Reck- 
how;  Assistant  Professors  Faust  and  Jacobs;  Adjunct  Professors  Kranich  and  B.  Utku 

A  student  may  specialize  in  one  of  the  following  fields  of  study  for  either  the  M.S. 
or  the  Ph.D.  degree:  environmental  engineering;  geotechnical  engineering  and  soil 
mechanics;  mechanics  of  solids;  materials  engineering;  fluid  mechanics  and  water 
resources;  structural  engineering;  and  urban  systems  and  transportation.  Interdiscipli- 
nary programs  combining  study  in  some  of  the  major  areas  with  biological,  chemical,  and 
physical  sciences,  business  administration,  materials  science,  social  sciences,  political 
science,  public  policy  studies,  and  other  areas  of  engineering  are  also  available. 

Students  at  the  M.S.  level  are  expected  to  complete  a  thesis.  However,  with  the  ap- 
proval of  the  department,  a  master's  degree  candidate  in  civil  engineering  may  choose, 

Engineering       97 


in  lieu  of  submitting  a  thesis,  to  complete  an  additional  6  units  of  course  work  plus  a  spe- 
cial project.  If  this  alternative  is  elected,  candidates  are  expected  to  take  comprehensive 
examinations  over  their  graduate  course  work,  and  also  to  defend  orally  their  special 
projects. 

Under  the  Reciprocal  Agreement  with  Neighboring  Universities,  a  student  may  in- 
clude as  a  portion  of  the  minimum  requirements  work  offered  by  the  Department  of  En- 
vironmental Sciences  and  Engineering  of  the  University  of  North  Carolina.  Although 
related  work  normally  is  taken  in  the  natural  sciences  or  mathematics,  a  student  whose 
major  interest  relates  to  the  social  or  managerial  sciences  may  take  relevant  work  in  these 
areas. 

201.  Advanced  Mechanics  of  Solids.  Tensor  fields  and  index  notation.  Analysis  of 
states  of  stress  and  strain.  Conservation  laws  and  field  equations.  Constitutive  equations 
for  elastic,  viscoelastic,  and  elastic-plastic  solids.  Formulation  and  solution  of  simple  prob- 
lems in  elasticity,  viscoelasticity,  and  plasticity.  3  units.  Hueckel  or  Petroski 

203.  Plasticity.  Inelastic  behavior  of  soils  and  engineering  materials;  yield  criteria; 
flow  rules;  concepts  of  perfect  plasticity  and  plastic  hardening;  methods  of  rigid-plasticity; 
limit  analysis;  isotropic  and  kinematic  hardening;  plastic  softening;  diffused  damage; 
thermo-plasticity;  and  visco-plasticity.  Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 
201  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Hueckel 

204.  Plates  and  Shells.  Differential  equation  and  exrremum  formulations  of  linear 
equilibrium  problems  of  Kirchhoffian  and  non-Kirchhoffian  plates  of  isotropic  and  or- 
thotropic  material .  Solution  methods.  Differential  equation  formulation  of  thin  shell  prob- 
lems in  curvilinear  coordinates;  membrane  and  bending  theories;  specialization  for  shal- 
low shells,  shells  of  revolution,  and  plates.  Exrremum  formulation  of  shell  problems. 
Solution  methods.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  HI  and  Engineering  75  or  135. 3  units.  Utku 

205.  Elasticity.  Introduction  to  linear  theory  of  elasticity.  Constitutive  equations  for 
anisotropic  and  isotropic  elastic  solids.  Formulation  and  solution  of  torsion,  bending,  and 
flexure  problems.  Plane,  axisymmetric,  and  three-dimensional  problems.  3  units.  Petroski 

207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems.  See  C-L:  Biomedical  Engineering 
207;  also  C-L:  Mechanical  Engineering  207.  3  units.  Bryers,  Daniels,  or  Truskey 

210.  Intermediate  Dynamics.  See  C-L:  Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science 
210.  3  units.  Dowell 

212.  Mechanical  Behavior  and  Fracture  of  Materials.  Historical  perspective  on  struc- 
tural failure.  Fracture  mechanics  and  its  application  to  brittle  and  ductile  fracture;  fatigue 
in  structural  materials.  Analysis  of  load  spectra;  fatigue  crack  growth  calculations.  3  units. 
Petroski 

215.  Engineering  Systems  Analysis.  Fundamental  concepts  and  tools  for  engineer- 
ing systems  analysis,  including  optimization  techniques  and  decision  analysis.  System 
definition  and  model  formulation,  optimization  by  calculus,  linear  programming,  integer 
programming,  separable  integer  programming,  nonlinear  programming,  network  anal- 
ysis, dynamic  programming,  and  decision  analysis.  Application  to  diverse  engineering 
systems.  3  units.  Pas 

216.  Transportation  Planning  and  Policy  Analysis.  Issues  in  policy  planning  and  de- 
cision making  in  urban  and  rural  transportation  systems.  Transportation  legislation.  Pub- 
lic transportation  alternatives  with  emphasis  on  public  transit  and  pararransit  solutions. 
Prerequisite  or  corequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  116  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  254.  3  units.  Pas 

217.  Transportation  Systems  Analysis.  The  transportation  systems  planning  proc- 
ess. Quantitative  analysis;  mathematical  modeling  and  computer  simulation  techniques 

98       Courses  of  Instruction 


for  short-  and  long-range  planning  and  evaluation  of  transportation  systems.  Prerequi- 
site or  corequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  116  or  consent  of  instructor.  3 
units.  Pas 

218.  Engineering  Management  and  Project  Evaluation.  Statistical  analysis  and  eco- 
nomics. Data  organization,  distributions,  estimates  of  parameters,  hypothesis  testing, 
analysis  of  variance.  Economic  impact  assessment,  supply  and  demand  forecasting,  ben- 
efit/cost analysis,  economic  incentives,  public  and  private  finance,  input/output  analy- 
sis. 3  units.  Peirce 

225.  Dynamic  Engineering  Hydrology.  Dynamics  of  the  occurrence,  circulation,  and 
distribution  of  water;  hydrometeorology;  geophysical  fluid  motions.  Precipitation,  sur- 
face runoff  and  stream-flow,  infiltration,  water  losses.  Hydrograph  analysis,  catchment 
characteristics,  hydrologic  instrumentation,  and  computer  simulation  models.  Prereq- 
uisite: Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  122  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Medina 

227.  Groundwater  Hydrology  and  Contaminant  Transport.  Review  of  surface  hydrol- 
ogy and  its  interaction  with  groundwater.  The  nature  of  porous  media,  hydraulic  con- 
ductivity, and  permeability.  General  hydrodynamic  equations  of  flow  in  isotropic  and 
anisotropic  media.  Water  quality  standards  and  contaminant  transport  processes: 
advective-dispersive  equation  for  solute  transport  in  saturated  porous  media.  Analyti- 
cal and  numerical  methods,  selected  computer  applications.  Deterministic  versus  stochas- 
tic models.  Applications:  leachate  from  sanitary  landfills,  industrial  lagoons  and  ponds, 
subsurface  wastewater  injection,  monitoring  of  groundwater  contamination.  Conjunc- 
tive surface-subsurface  models.  Prerequisites:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  122 
and  123  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Medina 

233.  Prestressed  Concrete  Design.  A  critical  review  of  research  and  recent  develop- 
ments in  prestressed  concrete  design.  Prestressed  tanks,  beams,  and  columns;  partial 
prestressing  and  composite  design.  Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering 
133.  3  units.  Biswas 

235.  Foundation  Engineering.  An  introduction  to  methods  of  analysis,  design,  and 
construction  of  foundations.  Bearing  capacity  and  settlement  of  shallow  and  deep  foun- 
dations. Soil  exploration,  excavation  and  bracing,  drainage  and  stabilization,  and  under- 
pinning. Foundation  vibrations.  3  units.  Hueckel 

236.  Earth  Structures.  An  introduction  to  methods  of  analysis,  design,  and  construc- 
tion of  earth  structures  such  as  dams,  embankments,  cuts,  canals,  and  airfield  and  high- 
way pavements.  Selection  of  materials,  soil  compaction,  and  stabilization.  Theory  of  seep- 
age, design  of  wells  and  drainage  collectors.  Slope  stability  and  related  problems.  Theory 
of  layered  systems  and  pavement  design  procedures.  3  units.  Hueckel 

237.  Advanced  Soil  Mechanics.  Characterization  of  behavior  of  geomaterials;  stress- 
strain  incremental  laws;  nonlinear  elasticity,  hypo-elasticity,  plasticity,  and  visco-elasticity 
of  geomaterials;  approximated  laws  of  soil  mechanics;  fluid  saturated  soil  behavior;  cy- 
clic behavior  of  soils,  liquefaction  and  cyclic  mobility;  elements  of  soil  dynamics;  and  ther- 
mal effects  on  soils.  Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  139  or  equivalent. 
3  units.  Hueckel 

240.  Fate  of  Organic  Chemicals  in  the  Environment.  Kinetic,  equilibrium,  and  ana- 
lytical approaches  applied  to  quantitative  description  of  processes  affecting  the  fate  of 
anthropogenic  and  natural  organic  compounds  in  ground,  surface,  and  atmospheric 
waters,  and  in  selected  treatment  processes.  Processes  discussed  include  sorption 
phenomena,  gas  transfer,  hydrolysis,  photochemistry,  oxidation-reduction,  and  biodegra- 
dation.  Techniques  discussed  include  gas  chromatography,  liquid  chromatography,  and 
mass  spectrometry.  Spring,  odd-numbered  years.  Prerequisite:  (or  corequisite)  Civil  and 
Environmental  Engineering  242/Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  242  or  equivalent . 
C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  240.  3  units.  Faust  and  Dubay 

Engineering       99 


242.  Environmental  Chemistry.  Principles  of  chemical  kinetics  and  equilibria  applied 
to  quantitative  description  of  the  chemistry  of  lakes,  rivers,  oceans,  atmospheric  waters, 
groundwaters  and  selected  treatment  processes.  Equilibrium,  steady  state  and  other  ki- 
netic models  applied  to  processes  such  as  the  carbonate  system,  coordination  chemis- 
try, precipitation  and  dissolution,  oxidation-reduction,  photochemistry,  heterogeneous 
reactions,  gas  transfer,  and  some  aspects  of  atmospheric  chemistry.  Spring.  C-L:  Forest- 
ry and  Environmental  Studies  242.  3  units.  Faust 

243.  Physicochemical  Unit  Operations  in  Water  Treatment.  Fundamental  bases  for 
design  of  water  and  waste  treatment  systems,  including  transport,  mixing,  sedimenta- 
tion and  filtration,  gas  transfer,  coagulation,  and  biotreatment  processes.  Prerequisite: 
Engineering  24  or  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  124.  3  units.  Bryers  or  Vesilind 

244.  Applied  Microbial  Processes.  Existing  and  novel  biological  processes  used  to 
treat  or  exploit  waste.  Concepts  of  microbiology,  chemical  engineering,  and  process  anal- 
ysis. Specific  biological  processes  such  as  aerobic  carbon  oxidation,  nitrification,  denitrifi- 
cation,  methane  production,  biological  electricity  generation,  aerobic  digestion,  and 
wastewater  treatment  for  long-term  space  travel.  3  units.  Bryers 

245.  Pollutant  Transport  Systems.  Distribution  of  pollutants  in  natural  waters  and  the 
atmosphere,  diffusive  and  advective  transport  phenomena  within  the  natural  environ- 
ment and  through  artificial  conduits  and  storage/treatment  systems.  Analytical  and  nu- 
merical prediction  methods.  Prerequisites:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  122  and 
Mathematics  111  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Medina 

246.  Water  Supply  Design.  The  study  of  water  resources  and  municipal  water  require- 
ments including  reservoirs,  transmission,  treatment  and  distribution  systems;  methods 
of  collection,  treatment,  and  disposal  of  municipal  and  industrial  wastewaters.  The  course 
includes  the  preparation  of  a  comprehensive  engineering  report  encompassing  all  aspects 
of  municipal  water  and  wastewater  systems.  Field  trips  to  be  arranged.  Prerequisite:  Civil 
and  Environmental  Engineering  124  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Vesilind 

248.  Solid  Waste  and  Resource  Recovery  Engineering.  Engineering  design  of  resource 
recovery  systems  including  traditional  and  advanced  technologies.  Sanitary  landfills  and 
incineration  of  solid  wastes.  Energy  recovery  and  recycling  municipal  refuse.  Collection, 
treatment,  and  disposal  of  solid  wastes  from  wastewater  treatment.  Prerequisite:  Civil 
and  Environmental  Engineering  124  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Vesilind 

249.  Control  of  Hazardous  and  Toxic  Waste  Engineering.  Solutions  to  industrial  and 
municipal  hazardous  waste  management  problems.  Handling,  transportation,  storage, 
and  disposal  technologies.  Biological,  chemical,  and  physical  processes.  Upgrading  an 
abandoned  disposal  site.  Economic  and  regulatory  aspects.  Case  studies.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Peirce 

251.  Systematic  Engineering  Analysis.  Mathematical  formulation  and  numerical 
analysis  of  discrete  engineering  systems  with  emphasis  on  theory  of  structures.  Equilibri- 
um and  propagation  problems  in  continuum;  properties  of  these  systems  and  their  dis- 
cretization by  the  trial  functions  with  undetermined  parameters.  The  use  of  weighted 
residual  methods,  finite  elements,  and  finite  differences.  Prerequisite:  senior  or  gradu- 
ate standing.  3  units.  Utku 

254.  Applications  of  Finite  Element  Analysis.  Theory  of  element  and  material  models; 
models  of  metals,  rock,  reinforced  concrete,  wood,  glass,  soil,  water,  and  air;  analyses 
of  torsion  members,  shear  walls,  membranes,  plates,  shells,  solids,  and  compound  struc- 
tural systems;  analysis  of  soil-structure  and  fluid-structure  systems;  prediction  of  field 
heating,  seepage,  and  pollution.  Prerequisite:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  251 
or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Melosh 


100     Courses  of  Instruction 


257.  Structural  Optimization.  Computer-aided  improvement  of  structural  designs; 
redesign  search  processes,  sensitivity  analysis,  integrity  analysis;  optimization  of  stat- 
ic, steady-state,  and  transient  response  systems;  minimization  of  structural  weight  and 
response  potentials  for  trusses,  frames,  and  continua.  3  units.  Melosh 

258.  Analysis  of  Dynamic  and  Nonlinear  Behavior  of  Structures.  Computation  of 
nonlinear  response  by  discretization;  models  for  simulation  of  geometric,  material,  and 
boundary  constraint  nonlinearities;  analysis  of  limit  loads,  bifurcations,  and  snap- 
through;  simulation  of  super-elastic,  plastic,  viscoelastic,  and  slipping  materials;  predic- 
tion of  collapsing,  ballooning,  gapping,  metal  forming,  and  welding  behavior.  Prereq- 
uisite: Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  251  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Melosh 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering.  Opportunity  for 
study  of  advanced  subjects  relating  to  programs  within  the  civil  and  environmental  en- 
gineering department  tailored  to  fit  the  requirements  of  a  small  group.  1  to  3  units.  G  raduate 
staff 

281.  Experimental  Systems.  Formulation  of  experiments;  Pi  theorem  and  principles 
of  similitude;  data  acquisition  systems;  static  and  dynamic  measurement  of  displacement, 
force,  and  strain;  interfacing  experiments  with  digital  computers  for  data  storage  analy- 
sis and  plotting;  students  select,  design,  perform,  and  interpret  laboratory-scale  experi- 
ments in  areas  of  fluid  systems  including  environmental  engineering,  and  in  solid  sys- 
tems including  structural  and  basic  material  behavior.  3  units.  /.  F.  Wilson 

283.  Structural  Dynamics.  Formulation  of  dynamic  models  for  discrete  and  continu- 
ous structures,  normal  mode  analysis,  deterministic  and  stochastic  responses  to  shocks 
and  environmental  loading  (earthquakes,  winds,  and  waves),  introduction  to  nonlinear 
dynamic  systems,  analysis  and  stability  of  structural  components  (beams  and  cables  and 
large  systems  such  as  offshore  towers,  moored  ships,  and  floating  platforms).  3  units. 
/.  F.  Wilson 

301,  302.  Fall  and  Spring  Seminars.  Current  topics  in  civil  and  environmental  en- 
gineering theory  and  practice.  No  credit.  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering.  Special  individual 
readings  in  a  specific  area  of  study  in  civil  and  environmental  engineering.  Prerequisite: 
approval  of  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  1  to  3  units.  Graduate  staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
202.  Advanced  Mechanics  of  Solids  II 

221.  Incompressible  Fluid  Flow 

222.  Open  Channel  Flow 

223.  Flow  Through  Porous  Media 
226.  Operational  Hydrology 

231.  Structural  Engineering  Analysis 

232.  Reinforced  Concrete  Design 

234.  Advanced  Structural  Design  in  Metals 

238.  Rock  Mechanics 

239.  Physical  Properties  of  Soils 
247.  Air  Pollution  Control 

337.  Elements  of  Soil  Dynamics 
350.  Advanced  Engineering  Analysis 

Engineering         101 


ELECTRICAL  ENGINEERING 

Professor  Casey,  Chairman  (130  Engineering);  Professor  Marinos,  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  (173  Engineering);  Professors  Fair,  Joines,  Kerr,  Nolte,  Pilkington,  Trivedi,  Wang, 
and  T.  G.  Wilson;  Associate  Professors  Dugan,  Hacker,  Kedem,  and  Massoud;  Assistant 
Professors  Alexandrou,  Board,  Dollas,  George,  Hansen,  and  Wong;  Research  Assistant 
Professor  Frenzel;  Professor  Emeritus  Owen 

A  student  may  specialize  in  any  one  of  the  following  fields  in  working  toward  either 
the  M.S.  or  the  Ph.D.  degree  with  a  major  in  electrical  engineering:  computer-aided  de- 
sign, computer  engineering,  detection  and  estimation  theory,  digital  signal  processing, 
electromagnetic  fields  and  microwaves,  integrated  circuit  design  and  fabrication, 
microprocessor  systems,  robotics  and  control  systems,  III-V  compound  semiconductor 
devices  and  materials,  solid-state  power  conditioning,  and  VLSI  circuit  design. 

Recommended  prerequisites  for  the  graduate  courses  in  electrical  engineering  include 
a  knowledge  of  basic  mathematics  and  physics,  electric  networks,  and  system  theory.  Stu- 
dents in  doubt  about  their  background  for  enrollment  in  specific  courses  should  discuss 
the  matter  with  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  The  M.S.  degree  program  includes  ei- 
ther a  thesis  or  a  project  and  an  oral  examination.  A  qualifying  examination  is  required 
for  the  Ph .  D.  degree  program .  This  examination  is  intended  to  test  both  the  breadth  and 
depth  of  the  student's  understanding  of  basic  electrical  engineering  concepts.  There  is 
no  foreign  language  requirement. 

201.  Digital  Processing  of  Speech  Signals.  Detailed  treatment  of  the  theory  and  ap- 
plication of  digital  speech  processing.  Modeling  of  the  speech  production  system  and 
speech  signals,  speech  processing  methods;  digital  techniques  in  speech  transmission, 
speech  synthesis,  speech  recognition,  and  speaker  verification.  Acoustic-phonetics,  dig- 
ital speech  modeling  techniques,  LPC  analysis  methods,  speech  coding  techniques.  Ap- 
plication case  studies:  synthesis,  vocoders,  DTW  (dynamic  time  warping)/HMM  (hid- 
den Markov  modeling)  recognition  methods,  speaker  verification/identification. 
Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  206  or  equivalent  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units. 
Hansen 

202.  Digital  Communication  Systems.  Transmission  of  pulse  signals  over  analog 
channels  at  baseband  and  high  frequency.  Effects  of  channel  amplitude  and  phase  dis- 
tortion, multipath,  and  noise.  Typical  signaling  formats  and  their  autocorrelation  func- 
tions and  power  spectra .  Theory  and  design  of  adaptive  transversal  filters  for  the  elimi- 
nation of  intersymbol  interference.  Design  of  digital  transversal  matched  filters  to  reduce 
error  probabilities  in  the  presence  of  noise.  Optimum  pulse  shaping  techniques  and  Ny- 
quist  channel  characteristics.  Discrete  Fourier  transforms,  FFT's,  and  their  relation  to  con- 
tinuous Fourier  transforms.  Introduction  to  the  channel  characteristics  and  sources  of 
noise  in  optical  fiber  channels.  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineering  186,  and  Mathematics 
135  or  Electrical  Engineering  203,  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Kerr 

203.  Random  Signals  and  Noise.  Introduction  to  mathematical  methods  of  describ- 
ing and  analyzing  random  signals  and  noise.  Review  of  basic  probability  theory;  joint, 
conditional,  and  marginal  distributions;  random  processes.  Time  and  ensemble  averages, 
correlation,  and  power  spectra.  Optimum  linear  smoothing  and  predicting  filters.  Intro- 
duction to  optimum  signal  detection  and  parameter  estimation.  3  units.  Kerr  or  Nolte 

204.  Computer  Network  Architecture.  The  architecture  of  computer  communication 
networks  and  the  hardware  and  software  required  to  implement  the  protocols  that  de- 
fine the  architecture.  Basic  communication  theory,  transmission  technology,  private  and 
common  carrier  facilities.  International  standards.  Satellite  communications  and  local 

102         Courses  of  Instruction 


area  networks.  Performance  analysis  and  modeling  of  communication  networks.  Prereq- 
uisite: Electrical  Engineering  157.  C-L:  Computer  Science  204.  3  units.  Strole 

205.  Signal  Detection  and  Extraction  Theory.  Introduction  to  signal  detection  and 
information  extraction  theory  from  a  statistical  decision  theory  viewpoint.  Subject  areas 
covered  within  the  context  of  a  digital  environment  are  decision  theory,  detection  and  es- 
timation of  known  and  random  signals  in  noise,  estimation  of  parameters  and  adaptive 
recursive  digital  filtering,  and  decision  processes  with  finite  memory.  Applications  to 
problems  in  communication  theory.  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  203  or  consent 
of  instructor.  3  units.  Nolte 

206.  Digital  Signal  Processing.  Introduction  to  the  fundamentals  of  processing  sig- 
nals by  digital  techniques  with  applications  to  practical  problems.  Discrete  time  signals 
and  systems,  elements  of  the  Z-transform,  discrete  Fourier  transforms,  digital  filter  de- 
sign techniques,  fast  Fourier  transforms,  and  discrete  random  signals.  3  units.  Nolte 

207.  Fault-Tolerant  and  Testable  Computer  Systems.  Faults  and  failure  mechanisms, 
test  generation  techniques  and  diagnostic  program  development  for  detection  and  loca- 
tion of  faults  in  digital  networks;  design  for  testability,  redundancy  techniques,  self- 
checking  and  fail-safe  networks,  fault-tolerant  computer  architectures.  Prerequisite:  Elec- 
trical Engineering  157  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Computer  Science  207.  Fall.  3  units.  Board  or 
Marinos 

208.  Digital  Computer  Architecture  and  Design.  Structural  organization  and  hard- 
ware design  of  digital  computer  systems.  Arithmetic  unit,  switching  matrices,  memory 
organization,  central  processing  unit  (CPU),  I/O  unit,  and  microprogram  control .  Detailed 
design  and  simulation  of  a  general-purpose  computer  system.  Computer  systems  based 
on  cellular  structures,  hardware  compilers,  and  parallel  processing  architectures  are  also 
discussed.  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineering  157  and  Computer  Science  104,  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  C-L:  Computer  Science  208.  Spring.  3  units.  Dollas  or  Marinos 

209.  Microprocessor  Fundamentals  and  Applications.  Various  state-of-the-art 
microprocessor  chips  and  their  associated  instruction  sets,  microcomputer  architectures, 
comparative  study  of  various  microprocessor  designs,  microprocessor-based  system  de- 
sign illustrated  by  several  carefully  selected  design  projects.  Prerequisites:  Electrical  En- 
gineering 157  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Computer  Science  209.  Fall.  4  units.  George 

210.  Introduction  to  VLSI  Design.  A  study  of  devices,  circuits,  fabrication  technolo- 
gy, logic  design  techniques,  subsystem  design  and  system  architecture.  Modeling  of  cir- 
cuits and  subsystems.  Testing  of  gates,  subsystems  and  chips,  and  design  for  testability. 
The  fundamentals  of  full-custom  design,  and  some  semi-custom  design.  Prerequisites: 
logic  design  (Computer  Science/Electrical  Engineering  157  or  equivalent),  and  Electronics 
(Electrical  Engineering  161,  or  Computer  Science/Electrical  Engineering  160,  or  equiva- 
lent). C-L:  Computer  Science  210.  3  units.  Dollas  orKedem 

211.  Quantum  Mechanics.  Wave  mechanics  and  elementary  applications,  free  par- 
ticle motion,  Schrodinger  equation,  approximation  methods.  Fall.  3  units.  Staff 

213.  Modern  Optics.  Optical  processes  including  the  propagation  of  light,  coherence, 
interference,  and  diffraction.  Consideration  of  the  optical  properties  of  solids  with  ap- 
plications of  these  concepts  to  lasers  and  modern  optical  devices.  3  units.  Guenther  or 
Hacker 

214.  Introduction  to  Solid-State  Physics.  Discussion  of  solid-state  phenomena  includ- 
ing crystalline  structures,  thermal  properties,  free  electron  theory  of  metals,  and  band 
theory  of  semiconductors  with  emphasis  on  understanding  the  electrical,  magnetic,  and 
optical  properties  of  solids.  Prerequisite:  Physics  161  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Physics  214.  3 
units.  Hacker 


Engineering         103 


216.  Devices  for  Integrated  Circuits.  Basic  operating  concepts  of  the  devices  that  are 
used  in  integrated  circuits:  Schottky-barriers,  ohmic  contacts,  p-n  junctions,  bipolar  tran- 
sistors, and  Si  MOS  capacitors  and  field-effect  transistors.  Basic  MOS  logic  circuits.  Select- 
ed laboratory  work.  Fall.  3  units.  Casey 

218.  Integrated  Circuit  Engineering.  Basic  processing  techniques  and  layout  tech- 
nology for  integrated  circuits.  Photolithography,  diffusion,  oxidation,  ion  implantation, 
and  metallization.  Design,  fabrication,  and  testing  of  integrated  circuits.  Prerequisite:  Elec- 
trical Engineering  216.  4  units.  Casey  or  Fair 

219.  Digital  Integrated  Circuits.  Analysis  and  design  of  digital  integrated  circuits. 
MOSFET  and  bipolar  devices.  SPICE  models.  Major  logic  families  such  as  NMOS,  CMOS, 
TTL,  ECL,  and  PL  as  well  as  regenerative  logic  circuits  and  memories.  Circuit  design  con- 
siderations for  LSI  and  VLSI.  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineering  157  and  216.  3  units. 

Massoud 

225.  Microwave  Electronic  Circuits.  Microwave  circuit  analysis  and  design  techniques. 
Properties  of  planar  transmission  lines  for  integrated  circuits.  Matrix  and  computer-aided 
methods  for  analysis  and  design  of  circuit  components.  Analysis  and  design  of  input, 
output,  and  interstage  networks  for  microwave  transistor  amplifiers  and  oscillators. 
Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  161  or  equivalent.  3  units,  pines 

227.  Network  Synthesis.  Linear  network  theory,  including  a  review  of  time  and  fre- 
quency domain  analysis;  network  graphs,  network  functions  and  realizability  condition; 
driving  point  impedance  synthesis  of  passive  networks;  driving  point  and  transfer  specifi- 
cations; approximation  methods.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  George 

234.  Power  Electronics:  High-Power  Circuits.  Basic  principles  of  analysis  and  design 
of  electronic  power  control  and  conversion  circuits  with  particular  emphasis  on  thyris- 
tor  (SCPvS,  TRIACs)  circuits.  Characteristics  of  high-power  semiconductors,  commutat- 
ing  circuits,  AC  voltage  controllers,  AC-to-AC  controlled  rectifiers,  DC-to-DC  converters, 
DC-to-AC  inverters,  AC-to-AC  converters.  Laboratory.  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering 
161  or  equivalent.  4  units.  T.  G.  Wilson 

235.  Nonlinear  Magnetic  and  Semiconductor  Power  Converters.  Nonlinear  magnetic 
and  semiconductor  switching  characteristics  for  transient  and  steady-state  analysis  of 
power  electronic  circuits.  Design  of  saturable  and  nonsaturating  magnetic  devices.  State- 
plane  analysis  of  negative-resistance  oscillators  and  self-oscillating  inverters.  Laborato- 
ry. Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  161  or  equivalent.  4  units.  T.  G.  Wilson 

236.  Energy-Storage  Power  Converters.  Analysis  and  design  of  switch-mode  electronic 
power  converters  utilizing  energy-storage  principles.  Determination  of  large-signal  and 
small-signal  dynamic  response  and  stability  of  closed-loop  regulated  converters.  Exten- 
sive use  of  computer-aided  analysis,  design  and  measurement  techniques.  Laboratory. 
Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  161  or  equivalent.  4  units.  T.  G.  Wilson 

241.  Linear  Systems.  Modeling  of  multiple  input-output  linear  systems  in  the  frequen- 
cy and  time  domains.  Matrix  differential  and  difference  equations  and  their  solutions; 
state  variables.  Digital  simulation  of  differential  systems.  Fourier  analysis  of  signals  and 
systems.  Transform  techniques  applied  to  state  variable  models.  State-space  models  of 
distributed  systems.  3  units.  Kerr  or  Wang 

243.  Advanced  Linear  Systems.  Linear  spaces  and  linear  operators.  Impulse-response 
matrices.  Controllability  and  observability.  Irreducible  realizations  of  rational  transfer- 
function  matrices.  Canonical  forms,  state  estimators,  and  observer  theory.  Stability.  Linear 
time-invariant  composite  systems.  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  241. 3units.  Wang 

250.  Introduction  to  Robotics.  Fundamental  notions  in  robotics,  basic  configurations 
of  manipulator  arm  designs,  coordinate  transformations,  control  of  robot  actions,  robot 

104         Courses  of  Instruction 


programming,  artificial  intelligence;  machine  vision,  force,  touch,  and  other  sensory  sys- 
tems; selected  laboratory  assignments.  Prerequisites:  Electrical  Engineering  112  and  con- 
sent of  instructor.  3  units.  Wang 

251.  Pattern  Classification  and  Recognition.  Parameter  estimation  and  supervised 
learning;  nonparametric  techniques;  linear  discriminant  functions;  clustering;  language 
theory  related  to  pattern  recognition;  examples  from  areas  such  as  character  and  severe 
weather  recognition,  classification  of  community  health  data,  recognition  of  geometri- 
cal configurations,  algorithms  for  recognizing  low  resolution  touch-sensor  array  signa- 
tures and  3-D  objects.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Wang 

252.  Computer  Systems  Organization.  See  C-L:  Computer  Science  252. 3  units.  /.  Ellis 
or  Patrick 

253.  Digital  Control  Systems.  For  digital  controllers  employing  algorithms  not  easi- 
ly modeled  by  discrete-time  difference  equations  (e.g.,  expert  systems),  the  assumptions 
required  by  traditional  design  and  analysis  tools  used  in  automatic  control  are  limiting. 
Review  of  the  traditional  techniques  used  for  the  design  of  discrete-time  control  systems 
and  introduce  some  of  the  "nonclassical"  control  problems  associated  with  the  control 
of  intelligent  machines  such  as  robots.  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  112.  3  units. 
Myers 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Electrical  Engineering.  Opportunity  for  study  of  advanced 
subjects  related  to  programs  within  the  electrical  engineering  department  tailored  to  fit 
the  requirements  of  a  small  group.  Prerequisites :  approval  of  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 
and  instructor.  1  to  4  units.  Staff 

271 .  Electromagnetic  Theory.  The  classical  theory  of  Maxwell's  equations;  electrostat- 
ics, magnetostatics,  boundary  value  problems  including  numerical  solutions,  currents 
and  their  interactions,  and  force  and  energy  relations.  Three  class  sessions.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Hacker  or  Joines 

272.  Electromagnetic  Communication  Systems.  Review  of  fundamental  laws  of  Max- 
well, Gauss,  Ampere,  and  Faraday.  Elements  of  waveguide  propagation  and  antenna  radi- 
ation .  Analysis  of  antenna  arrays  by  images.  Determination  of  gain,  loss,  and  noise  tem- 
perature parameters  for  terrestrial  and  satellite  electromagnetic  communication  systems. 
Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  164  or  271.  3  units,  joines 

273.  Optical  Communication  Systems.  Mathematical  methods,  physical  ideas,  and 
device  concepts  of  optoelectronics.  Maxwell's  equations,  and  definitions  of  energy  den- 
sity and  power  flow.  Transmission  and  reflection  of  plane  waves  at  interfaces.  Optical  reso- 
nators, waveguides,  fibers,  and  detectors  are  also  presented.  Prerequisite:  Electrical  En- 
gineering 143  or  equivalent.  3  units,  foines 

308.  Advanced  Topics  in  Digital  Systems.  A  selection  of  advanced  topics  from  the 
areas  of  digital  computer  architectures  and  fault-tolerant  computer  design.  Prerequisite : 
Electrical  Engineering  208  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Computer  Science  308.  3  units.  Marinos 

310.  CMOS  VLSI  Design.  A  second  course  in  VLSI,  aimed  at  the  design  of  VLSI  sys- 
tems in  CMOS.  The  main  thrusts  of  the  course  will  be  (1)  to  provide  enough  background 
in  the  theory  of  CMOS  circuits  to  understand  circuit  level  trade-offs;  (2)  to  introduce  a 
symbolic  design  system  and  its  supporting  software,  which  greatly  aid  the  design  proc- 
ess; (3)  to  examine  sample  chip  designs  with  an  eye  to  understanding  competitive  design 
methodologies.  Students  will  complete  a  CMOS-oriented  project  comprising  the  design 
and  implementation  of  either  a  hardware  or  a  software  subsystem.  Prerequisite:  Electri- 
cal Engineering  210  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Computer  Science  310.  3  units.  Kedem 

316.  Advanced  Physics  of  Semiconductor  Devices.  Semiconductor  materials:  band 
structure  and  carrier  statistics.  Advanced  treatments  of  metal-semiconductor  contacts, 

Engineering        105 


Schottky  barriers,  p-n  junctions,  bipolar  transistors  (charge-control  and  Gummel-Poon 
models),  and  field-effect  transistors  (short  channel  effects,  scaling  theory,  subthreshold 
conduction,  nonuniformly  doped  substrates,  surface  and  buried-channel  devices,  hot- 
electron  effects).  Device  modeling  in  two  dimensions  using  PISCES.  Prerequisite:  Elec- 
trical Engineering  216.  3  units.  Massoud  and  Goodwin-Johansson 

320.  Integrated  Circuit  Fabrication  Laboratory.  Introduction  to  IC  fabrication  proc- 
esses. Device  layout.  Mask  design  and  technology.  Wafer  cleaning,  etching,  thermal  ox- 
idation, thermal  diffusion,  lithography,  and  metallization.  Laboratory  fabrication  and 
characterization  of  basic  IC  elements  (p-n  junctions,  resistors,  MOS  capacitors,  gated  di- 
odes, andMOSFETs).  Use  of  four-point  probe,  ellipsometer,  spreading  resistance  probe, 
scanning  electron  microscope,  and  evaporation  system.  Testing  of  basic  inverters  and 
gates.  Prerequisite:  Electrical  Engineering  218  and  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Massoud 

333.  Electronic  Properties  of  Submicron  Solid-State  Devices.  See  C-L:  Physics  333. 
3  units.  Stroscio 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Electrical  Engineering.  Special  individual  readings  in  a 
specified  area  of  study  in  electrical  engineering.  Prerequisite:  approval  of  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies.  1  to  4  units.  Graduate  staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
215.  Semiconductor  Physics 
217.  Lasers 

222.  Nonlinear  Analysis 
224.  Advanced  Electronic  Circuits 

226.  Modeling/Computer-Aided  Analysis  of  Electronic  Systems 
302.  Applied  Information  Theory  and  Statistical  Estimation 
305.  Advanced  Topics  in  Signal  Processing 
317.  Quantum  Electronics 

324.  Nonlinear  Oscillations  in  Physical  Systems 
342.  Optimal  Control  Theory 
371.  Advanced  Electromagnetic  Theory 
373.  Selected  Topics  in  Field  Theory 

MECHANICAL  ENGINEERING  AND  MATERIALS  SCIENCE 

Professor  Hochmuth,  Chairman  (142A  Engineering);  Professor  Harman,  Director  of  Gradu- 
ate Studies  (145  Engineering);  Professors  Bejan,  Chaddock,  Cocks,  Dowell,  Garg,  Gosele, 
Pearsall,  Shaughnessy,  Shepard,  and  Tan;  Associate  Professors  Bliss,  Jones,  Quinlan,  and 
Wright;  Assistant  Professors  Buzzard,  Cherry,  Georgiadis,  Knight,  and  Needham;  As- 
sociate Professor  Emeritus  Elsevier;  Research  Assistant  Professor  Tran-Son-Tay;  Adjunct 
Associate  Professor  Wu;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professors  Hart,  Jenkins,  and  Lind 

The  department  offers  programs  of  study  and  research  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees  in  both  mechanical  engineering  and  materials  science.  Within  mechanical  en- 
gineering, the  broad  areas  of  concentration  include  thermal  and  fluids  systems,  mechanics 
and  biomechanics,  and  dynamics  and  control.  Within  materials  science,  the  areas  of  con- 
centration include  electronic  materials,  biomaterials,  and  the  determination  of  material 
characteristics.  The  department  emphasizes  a  highly  research-oriented  Ph.D.  degree 
program. 

106         Courses  of  Instruction 


Current  research  areas  available  include:  cellular  biomechanics;  biorheology;  con- 
vection; diffusion  and  heat  transfer  in  heterogeneous  media;  aeroelasticity;  computational 
fluid  dynamics;  chaotic  systems;  vibrations  and  acoustics  of  dynamic  systems;  sound 
propagation  and  absorbing  materials;  thermal  performance  of  buildings;  thermal  design 
by  entropy  generation;  control  systems;  robotics;  expert  systems;  bearing  design  and  lubri- 
cation; mechanical  properties  of  human  stones;  positron  annihilation  spectroscopy;  diffu- 
sion and  kinetics  in  Si,  GaAs,  and  other  electronic  materials;  modeling  and  optimization 
of  bioprocesses;  and  cell  culture  optimization. 

202.  Engineering  Thermodynamics.  Axiomatic  formulations  of  the  first  and  second 
laws.  General  thermodynamic  relationships  and  properties  of  real  substances.  Exergy, 
availability,  and  second  law  analysis  of  energy  conversion  processes.  Reaction  and  mul- 
tiphase equilibrium.  Power  generation.  Low  temperature  refrigeration  and  the  third  law 
of  thermodynamics.  Thermodynamic  design.  3  units.  Bejan 

205.  Biochemical  Engineering.  Mathematical  analysis  of  the  effects  of  substrate  con- 
centration, pH,  temperature,  and  chemical  inhibitors  on  the  rate  and  yield  of  biological 
processes.  Enzyme  kinetics.  Kinetics  of  cell  growth  and  metabolite  production  in  batch 
and  continuous  culture.  Design  of  bioreactors  for  microbial,  mammalian,  and  plant  cell 
culture.  Prerequisites:  calculus  and  a  course  in  microbial  physiology  or  biochemistry.  3 
units.  Quinlan 

206.  Optimization  of  Bioprocess  Kinetics.  Concepts  and  mathematical  modeling 
techniques  needed  to  maximize  the  rates  and  yields  at  which  cells  produce  biomass  and 
metabolites.  Prerequisite:  Mechanical  Engineering  205.  3  units.  Quinlan 

207.  Transport  Phenomena  in  Biological  Systems.  See  C-L:  Biomedical  Engineering 
207;  also  C-L:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  207.  3  units.  Bryers,  Daniels,  or  Truskey 

208.  Introduction  to  Colloid  and  Surface  Science.  The  colloid  state :  classification  of 
colloids  and  the  theoretical  frameworks  and  experimental  techniques  involved  in  their 
characterization.  Interfaces:  includes  surface  tension  and  free  energy;  curved  interfaces; 
adhesion,  cohesion,  and  wetting;  surface  activity;  catalytic  and  mechanical  properties 
of  solid  surfaces.  Inter-surface  forces:  the  balance  of  attractive  and  repulsive  forces  which 
operate  between  colloidal  particles  and  at  macroscopic  surfaces.  Some  emphasis  will  be 
placed  on  natural  and  artificial  biomembranes.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units. 
Needham 

210.  Intermediate  Dynamics.  Comprehensive  treatment  of  space  kinematics,  kinetics 
of  particles  and  rigid  bodies;  generalized  coordinates  and  Lagrange's  equations;  introduc- 
tion to  stability,  nonlinear,  and  random  dynamic  analysis  of  flexible,  continuous  systems. 
C-L:  Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering  210.  3  units.  Dowell 

211.  Theoretical  and  Applied  Polymer  Science.  An  advanced  course  in  materials 
science  and  engineering,  dealing  specifically  with  the  structure  and  properties  of  poly- 
mers. Particular  attention  is  paid  to  recent  developments  in  the  processing  and  use  of  mod- 
ern plastics  and  fibers.  Product  design  is  considered  in  terms  of  polymer  structures, 
processing  techniques,  and  properties.  3  units.  Clark  or  Pearsall 

212.  Electronic  Materials.  An  advanced  course  in  materials  science  and  engineering 
dealing  with  the  various  materials  important  for  solid  state  electronics  including  semi- 
conductors, ceramics,  and  polymers.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  thermodynamic  concepts 
and  on  defects  in  these  materials.  Materials  preparation  and  modification  methods  for 
technological  applications  are  discussed  in  detail.  Prerequisite:  Engineering  83. 3  units. 
Cocks,  G'dsele,  or  Tan 

214.  Corrosion  and  Corrosion  Control.  Effects  of  environments  on  the  design  and 
utilization  of  modern  engineering  alloys.  Theory  and  mechanisms  of  corrosion,  partic- 


Engineering         107 


ularly  in  seawater  and  atmospheric  environments.  Microstructural  aspects  of  diffusion, 
oxidation,  hot  corrosion,  and  stress  corrosion.  Prerequisite:  Engineering  83. 3  units.  Cocfcs 
or  Jones 

215.  Biomedical  Materials  and  Artificial  Organs.  See  C-L:  Biomedical  Engineering 
215.  3  units.  Clark 

216.  Materials  Science  and  Solar  Technology.  All  aspects  of  materials  science  as  related 
to  solar  energy  development.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  photovoltaic  materials  and  devices, 
including  the  relationship  of  conversion  efficiency  to  material  properties  and  solar  cell 
design.  3  units.  Cocfcs 

217.  Fracture  of  Engineering  Materials.  Conventional  design  concepts  and  their  rela- 
tionship to  the  occurrence  of  fracture.  Linear  elastic  and  general  yield  fracture  mechan- 
ics. Microscopic  plastic  deformation  and  crack  propagation.  The  relationship  between 
macroscopic  and  microscopic  aspects  of  fracture.  Time  dependent  fracture.  Fracture  of 
specific  materials.  Prerequisites :  Engineering  83  and  Mechanical  Engineering  115. 3  units. 
Jones 

218.  Thermodynamics  of  Electronic  Materials.  Basic  thermodynamic  concepts  and 
their  application  to  solid  state  materials  with  emphasis  on  technologically  relevant  elec- 
tronic materials  such  as  silicon  and  GaAS.  Thermodynamic  functions,  phase  diagrams, 
solubilities  and  thermal  equilibrium  concentrations  of  point  defects  will  be  covered,  as 
well  as  non-equilibrium  processes  and  the  kinetic  phenomena  of  diffusion,  precipitation 
and  growth.  3  units.  Cocfcs,  Gosele,  or  Tan 

221 .  Compressible  Fluid  Flow.  Basic  concepts  of  the  flow  of  gases  from  the  subsonic 
to  the  hypersonic  regime.  Effects  of  friction,  heat  transfer,  and  shock  on  one-dimensional 
inviscid  flow.  Potential  theory,  oblique  shock  waves,  and  special  calculation  techniques 
in  two-dimensional  flow.  3  units.  Harman  or  Shaughnessy 

224.  An  Introduction  to  Turbulence.  Flow  instability  and  the  transition  to  turbulence. 
Physical  characteristics  of  turbulent  flows,  averaging,  and  the  Reynolds  equation.  Tur- 
bulent transport  and  mixing  length  theories.  The  statistical  description  of  turbulence, 
correlations,  and  spectra.  Fourier  transforms.  Measurement  techniques.  3  units. 
Shaughnessy 

225.  Mechanics  of  Viscous  Fluids.  Equations  of  motion  for  a  viscous  fluid,  general  proper- 
ties and  selected  solutions  of  the  Navier-Stokes  equations,  the  Stokes  equations,  lami- 
nar boundary  layer  equations  with  selected  solutions  and  approximate  techniques,  ori- 
gin of  turbulence.  3  units.  Hochmuth 

226.  Intermediate  Fluid  Mechanics.  A  survey  of  the  principal  concepts  and  equations 
of  fluid  mechanics,  fluid  statics,  surface  tension,  the  Eulerian  and  Lagrangian  descrip- 
tion, kinematics,  Reynolds  Transport  Theorem,  the  differential  and  integral  equations 
of  motion,  constitutive  equations  for  a  Newtonian  fluid,  the  Navier-Stokes  equations, 
and  boundary  conditions  on  velocity  and  stress  at  material  interfaces.  3  units.  Shaughnessy 

227.  Advanced  Fluid  Mechanics.  Flow  of  a  uniform  incompressible  viscous  fluid.  Exact 
solutions  to  the  Navier-Stokes  equation.  Similarity  methods.  Irrotational  flow  theory  and 
its  applications.  Elements  of  boundary  layer  theory.  Prerequisite:  Mechanical  Engineer- 
ing 226  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Shaughnessy 

228.  Lubrication.  Derivation  and  application  of  the  basic  governing  equations  for 
lubrication;  the  Reynolds  equation  and  energy  equation  for  thin  films.  Analytical  and  com- 
putational solutions  to  the  governing  equations.  Analysis  and  design  of  hydrostatic  and 
hydrodynamic  slider  bearings  and  journal  bearings.  Introduction  to  the  effects  of  fluid 
inertia  and  compressibility.  Dynamic  characteristics  of  a  fluid  film  and  effects  of  bearing 
design  on  dynamics  of  machinery.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  111  and  Mechanical 
Engineering  226.  3  units.  Knight 

108         Courses  of  Instruction 


229.  Computational  Fluid  Mechanics  and  Heat  Transfer.  An  exposition  of  numeri- 
cal techniques  commonly  used  for  the  solution  of  partial  differential  equations  encoun- 
tered in  engineering  physics.  Finite-difference  schemes  (which  are  well-suited  for  fluid 
mechanics  problems)  are  discussed  together  with  the  notions  of  accuracy,  conservation, 
consistency,  stability,  and  convergence.  Recent  applications  of  weighted  residuals 
methods  (Galerkin),  finite-element  methods,  and  grid  generation  techniques  are  also 
presented.  Through  specific  examples,  the  student  will  be  guided  to  construct  and  as- 
sess the  performance  of  the  numerical  scheme  selected  for  the  particular  type  of  trans- 
port equation  (parabolic,  elliptic,  or  hyperbolic).  3  units.  Georgiadis 

230.  Modern  Control  and  Dynamic  Systems.  Dynamic  modeling  of  complex  linear 
and  nonlinear  physical  systems  involving  the  storage  and  transfer  of  matter  and  energy. 
Unified  treatment  of  active  and  passive  mechanical,  electrical,  and  fluid  systems.  State- 
space  formulation  of  physical  systems.  Time  and  frequency-domain  representation.  Con- 
trollability and  observability  concepts.  System  response  using  analytical  and  computa- 
tional techniques.  Lyapunov  method  for  system  stability.  Modification  of  system  charac- 
teristics using  feedback  control  and  compensation.  Emphasis  on  application  of  techniques 
to  physical  systems.  3  units.  Garg  or  Wright 

236.  Engineering  Acoustics.  Fundamentals  of  acoustics  including  sound  generation, 
propagation,  reflection,  absorption,  and  scattering.  Emphasis  on  basic  principles  and  ana- 
lytical methods  in  the  description  of  wave  motion  and  the  characterization  of  sound  fields. 
Applications  including  topics  from  noise  control,  sound,  reproduction,  architectural 
acoustics,  and  aerodynamic  noise.  Occasional  classroom  or  laboratory  demonstration. 
Prerequisites :  Mathematics  111  and  Engineering  123  or  consent  of  instructor.  2  units.  Bliss 

237.  Aerodynamics.  Fundamentals  of  aerodynamics  applied  to  wings  and  bodies  in 
subsonic  and  supersonic  flow.  Basic  principles  of  fluid  mechanics  and  analytical  methods 
for  aerodynamic  analysis.  Two-  and  three-dimensional  wing  theory,  slender-body  the- 
ory, lifting  surface  methods,  vortex  and  wave  drag.  Brief  introduction  to  vehicle  design, 
performance,  and  dynamics.  3  units.  Bliss 

240.  Patent  Technology  and  Law  for  Engineers.  The  use  of  patents  as  a  technological 
data  base  is  emphasized  including  information  retrieval  in  selected  engineering  dis- 
ciplines. Fundamentals  of  patent  law  and  patent  office  procedures.  3  units.  Cocks 

242.  Data  Base  Methodology.  Prerequisites:  Computer  Science  154 and  155.  See  C-L: 
Computer  Science  241.  3  units.  C.  E//;s  orMcHugh 

245.  Applications  in  Expert  Systems.  A  comprehensive  introduction  to  the  key  prac- 
tical principles,  techniques,  and  tools  being  used  to  implement  knowledge-based  sys- 
tems. The  classic  MYCIN  system  is  studied  in  detail  to  provide  historic  perspective.  Cur- 
rent systems  employing  combinations  of  production  rules,  prototypical  knowledge,  and 
frame-based  case  studies  are  also  introduced.  Student  term  projects  consist  of  the  develop- 
ment of  individual,  unique  expert  systems  using  the  Texas  Instruments  Personal  Con- 
sultant. Knowledge  of  LISP  is  not  a  prerequisite.  3  units.  Wright 

265.  Advanced  Topics  in  Mechanical  Engineering.  Opportunity  for  study  of  advanced 
subjects  related  to  programs  within  mechanical  engineering  tailored  to  fit  the  require- 
ments of  a  small  group.  Prerequisites:  approval  of  Director  of  Undergraduate  or  Gradu- 
ate Studies  and  instructor.  1  to  3  units.  Staff 

270.  Robot  Control  and  Automation.  Review  of  kinematics  and  dynamics  of  robotic 
devices;  mechanical  considerations  in  design  of  automated  systems  and  processes,  hy- 
draulic and  pneumatic  control  of  components  and  circuits;  stability  analysis  of  robots  in- 
volving nonlinearities;  robotic  sensors  and  interfacing;  flexible  manufacturing;  man- 
machine  interaction  and  safety  considerations.  Prerequisites:  Mechanical  Engineering 
230  or  equivalent  and  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Garg 

Engineering        109 


277.  Optimization  Methods  for  Mechanical  Design.  Definition  of  optimal  design. 
Methodology  of  constructing  quantitative  mathematical  models.  Nonlinear  programming 
methods  for  finding  "best"  combination  of  design  variables:  minimizing  steps,  gradient 
methods,  flexible  tolerance  techniques  for  unconstrained  and  constrained  problems.  Em- 
phasis on  computer  applications  and  term  projects.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor. 
3  units.  Wright 

280.  Convective  Heat  Transfer.  Models  and  equations  for  fluid  motion,  the  general 
energy  equation,  and  transport  properties.  Exact,  approximate,  and  boundary  layer  so- 
lutions for  laminar  flow  heat  transfer  problems.  Use  of  the  principle  of  similarity  and  anal- 
ogy in  the  solution  of  turbulent  flow  heat  transfer.  Two-phase  flow,  nucleation,  boiling, 
and  condensation  heat  and  mass  transfer.  3  units.  Bejan 

281.  Conduction  and  Radiation  Heat  Transfer.  Conduction  heat  transfer  in  the  steady 
and  transient  state;  in  rectangular,  cylindrical,  and  spherical  coordinates.  Melting  and 
solidification.  Radiation  exchange  involving  absorbing  and  emitting  media  including 
gases  and  flames,  combined  conduction  and  radiation,  and  combined  convection  and 
radiation.  Exact  and  approximate  methods  of  solution  including  separation  of  variables, 
transform  calculus,  numerical  procedures,  and  integral  and  variational  methods.  3  units. 
Bejan 

325.  Aeroelasticity.  A  study  of  the  statics  and  dynamics  of  fluid/structural  interaction . 
Topics  covered  include  static  aeroelasticity  (divergence,  control  surface  reversal),  dynamic 
aeroelasticity  (flutter,  gust  response),  unsteady  aerodynamics  (subsonic,  supersonic,  and 
transonic  flow),  and  a  review  of  the  recent  literature  including  nonlinear  effects  such  as 
chaotic  oscillations.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  230  and  consent  of  instructor.  3  units. 
Dowell 

331.  Nonlinear  Control  Systems.  Analytical,  computational,  and  graphical  tech- 
niques for  solution  of  nonlinear  systems;  Krylov  and  Bogoliubov  asymptotic  method; 
describing  function  techniques  for  analysis  and  design;  Liapunov  functions  and  Lure's 
methods  for  stability  analysis;  Aizerman  and  Kalman  conjectures;  Popov,  circle,  and  other 
frequency-domain  stability  criteria  for  analysis  and  synthesis.  Prerequisite :  Mechanical 
Engineering  230  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Garg  or  Wright 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Mechanical  Engineering.  Individual  readings  in  advanced 
study  and  research  areas  of  mechanical  engineering.  Prerequisite:  approval  of  Director 
of  Graduate  Studies.  1  to  3  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
235.  Advanced  Mechanical  Vibrations 
322.  Mechanics  of  Viscous  Fluids 

English 

Professor  Fish,  Chairman  (312  Allen);  Professor  Torgovnick,  Assistant  Chairman;  Profes- 
sor Ferguson,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  (316  Allen);  Assistant  Professor  Moses,  Assis- 
tant Director  of  Graduate  Studies;  Professors  Anderson,  Applewhite,  Budd,  DeNeef,  Gleck- 
ner,  Jackson,  Lentricchia,  Nygard,  A.  Patterson,  L.  Patterson,  Price,  Randall,  Ryals, 
Sedgwick,  B.  H.  Smith,  G.  Smith,  Strandberg,  Tompkins,  G.  Williams,  andK.  Williams; 
Associate  Professors  Butters,  Clum,  Gerber,  Gopen,  Jones,  Mellown,  Pope,  Porter,  and 
Schwartz;  Assistant  Professors  Ferraro,  Gaines,  and  Moon;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor 
Tetel 

The  department  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  degrees,  al- 
though normally  only  students  seeking  the  doctorate  are  admitted  to  the  department. 

110         Courses  of  Instruction 


The  A.M.  degree,  if  not  already  earned  elsewhere,  may  be  taken  by  students  en  route  to 
the  Ph.D.  (although  it  is  not  required)  and  by  those  who  elect  to  leave  the  doctoral  pro- 
gram. A  statement  of  the  requirements  for  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  may  be  obtained 
from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  The  department  requires  a  reading  knowledge 
of  at  least  one  foreign  language  for  the  Ph.  D.  degree,  the  specific  language  (or  languages) 
to  be  determined  by  the  student's  doctoral  committee. 

Applicants  to  the  program  in  English  should  also  furnish  a  copy  (not  returnable)  of 
a  term  paper  or  other  essay  in  nonf iction  prose  submitted  in  fulfillment  of  a  requirement 
in  an  academic  course. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  ESL  Composition.  Advanced  English  composition  and  conversation  for  graduate 
students  who  are  not  native  speakers  of  English.  Selected  readings  in  nonfiction  prose. 
Designated  special  sections  include  forms  of  oral  discourse.  Prospective  students  must 
submit  a  writing  sample.  Credit  may  not  be  applied  toward  a  graduate  degree.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Brett 

205.  Semiotics  and  Linguistics.  See  C-L:  Russian  205.  3  units.  Andrews 

207.  Old  English  Language  and  Literature.  The  pre-Conquest  language  and  represen- 
tative prose  and  poetry.  3  units.  Nygard 

208.  History  of  the  English  Language.  Introductory  survey  of  the  changes  in  sounds, 
forms,  and  vocabulary  of  the  English  language  from  its  beginning  to  the  present,  with 
emphasis  on  the  evolution  of  the  language  as  a  medium  of  literary  expression.  C-L:  Me- 
dieval and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Butters,  Tetel,  or  Nygard 

209.  Present-Day  English.  A  survey  of  contemporary  linguistic  theories  applied  to 
modern  English;  designed  for  students  of  literature  and  teachers  of  English.  3units.  Butters 
or  Nygard 

212.  Middle  English  Literature:  1100  to  1500.  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Fish,  Gopen,  Nygard,  orL.  Patterson 

221.  Renaissance  Prose  and  Poetry:  1500  to  1660.  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Medieval  and 
Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  Schwartz,  orG.  Williams 

225.  Renaissance  Drama:  1500  to  1642.  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renais- 
sance Studies.  3 units.  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  orG.  Williams 

235.  Restoration  and  Eighteenth-Century  Literature:  1660  to  1800.  Selected  topics. 
3  units.  Ferguson  or  Jackson 

241.  Romantic  Literature:  1790  to  1830.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Applewhite,  Gleckner, 
or  Jackson 

245.  Victorian  Literature:  1830  to  1900.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Ryals  or  Sedgwick 

251.  British  Literature  since  1900.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Melloum,  Moses,  or  G.  Smith 

263.  American  Literature  to  1865.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Anderson,  Jones,  Moon,  or 
Tompkins 

267.  American  Literature:  1865  to  1915.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Budd,  Moon,  Tompkins, 
orK.  Williams 

269.  American  Women  Writers.  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  3units.  Pope 
or  Tompkins 

275.  American  Literature  since  1915.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Ferraro,  Lentricchia,  Moses, 
Pope,  or  Strandberg 

English        111 


281.  Studies  in  Genre.  History,  criticism,  and  theory  of  literary  genres  such  as  the 
novel,  pastoral,  epic,  and  drama.  3  units.  Staff 

283.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities.  C-L:  Religion  269  and  Women's  Studies. 
3  units.  Clark,  Orr,  Pope,  Sedgwick,  or  Tompkins 

285.  Major  Texts  in  the  History  of  Literary  Criticism.  A  survey  of  major  critical  writ- 
ings from  Aristotle  to  the  present.  3  units.  Staff 

288.  Special  Topics.  Subjects,  areas,  or  themes  that  cut  across  historical  eras,  several 
national  literatures,  or  genres.  3  units.  Staff 

289.  The  Theory  of  the  Novel.  Major  issues  in  the  history  and  theory  of  the  novel. 
3  units.  Moses  or  Torgovnick 

For  Graduates 

310.  Studies  in  Old  English  Literature.  Intensive  study  of  major  Old  English  texts. 

Nygard 

312.  Studies  in  Middle  English  Literature.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 
3  units.  Fish,  Nygard,  orL.  Patterson 

315.  Studies  in  Chaucer.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Fish,  Nygard, 
or  L.  Patterson 

321.  Studies  in  Renaissance  Literature.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  and 
Women's  Studies.  3  units.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  Schwartz,  orG.  Williams 

324.  Studies  in  Shakespeare.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  A.  Pat- 
terson, Porter,  or  G.  Williams 

329.  Studies  in  Milton.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  DeNeef,  Fish, 
A.  Patterson,  or  Schwartz 

337.  Studies  in  Augustanism.  3  units.  Ferguson  or  fackson 

338.  Studies  in  a  Major  Augustan  Author.  3  units.  Ferguson  or  Jackson 
341.  Studies  in  Romanticism.  3  units.  Applewhite,  Gleckner,  or  Jackson 

347.  Studies  in  Victorianism.  3  units.  Ryals  or  Sedgwick 

348.  Studies  in  a  Major  Nineteenth-Century  British  Author.  3  units.  Gleckner,  Jack- 
son, Ryals,  or  Sedgwick 

353.  Studies  in  Modern  British  Literature.  3  units.  Mellown,  Moses,  G.  Smith,  or  Tor- 
govnick 

361.  Studies  in  American  Literature  before  1915. 3  units.  Anderson,  Budd,  Jones,  Moon, 
Tompkins,  or  K.  Williams 

368.  Studies  in  a  Major  American  Author  before  1915. 3  units.  Anderson,  Budd,  Jones, 
Moon,  Tompkins,  orK.  Williams 

375.  Studies  in  Modern  American  Literature.  3  units.  Applewhite,  Ferraro,  Lentricchia, 
Moses,  or  Strandberg 

376.  Studies  in  a  Modern  Author  (British  or  American).  3  units.  Applewhite,  Ferraro, 
Lentricchia,  Mellown,  Moses,  Pope,  G.  Smith,  Strandberg,  or  Torgovnick 

381.  Special  Topics  Seminar.  3  units.  Staff 

385.  Studies  in  Literary  Criticism.  3  units.  Fish,  Lentricchia,  Pope,  Sedgwick,  B.  H.  Smith, 
or  Tompkins 

112        Courses  of  Instruction 


386.  Problems  in  the  Theory  of  Value  and  Judgment.  See  C-L:  Literature  300;  also 
C-L:  Philosophy  300.  3  units.  B.  H.  Smith 

388.  The  History  of  Rhetoric:  Classical  to  Renaissance.  The  foundations  of  rhetori- 
cal studies  from  Plato,  Aristotle,  Cicero,  and  Quintilian  through  Longinus,  Augustine, 
and  Erasmus  to  Bacon  and  Ramus.  No  prerequisites.  3  units.  Gopen 

389.  The  History  of  Rhetoric:  Eighteenth  to  Twentieth  Centuries.  Continuing  study 
of  the  major  texts  in  the  history  of  rhetoric  with  special  attention  paid  to  J.  Q.  Adams, 
Campbell,  Blair,  Whately,  Bain,  Perelman,  and  Burke.  Investigation  of  three  centuries  of 
composition  pedagogy.  Prerequisite:  English  388.  3  units.  Gopen 

390.  Composition  Theory  and  Pedagogy.  Methodologies  of  teaching  composition, 
with  special  emphasis  on  the  theories  of  structural  stylistics  employed  in  the  University 
Writing  Program  (UWP).  The  course  also  deals  with  psychological,  sociological,  and  dra- 
matic considerations  in  becoming  a  teacher.  All  students  registering  in  the  course  must 
hold  a  tutorship  in  the  UWP,  must  attend  the  UWP  training  seminar  and  all  scheduled 
UWP  staff  meetings,  and  will  be  observed  teaching  by  a  UWP  director.  3  units,  ungrad- 
ed. Gopen 

391 .  Tutorial  in  Special  Topics.  Directed  research  and  writing  in  areas  unrepresent- 
ed by  regular  course  offerings.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

392.  Tutorial  in  Journal  Editing.  Systematic  exposure  to  all  phases  of  academic  journal 
editing.  Restricted  to  holders  of  journal  editing  internships.  3  units,  ungraded.  Budd  or 
Lentricchia 

393.  Professionalism,  Theory,  and  Power  in  Legal  and  Literary  Studies.  3  units.  Fish 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
383.  Studies  in  Textual  Criticism 

TUTORIALS 

Tutorials  in  specialized  subjects  of  study  not  available  in  the  courses  listed  above  may 
be  offered  to  single  students  or  to  small  groups.  Instruction  normally  will  be  conducted 
in  weekly  sessions,  or  more  frequently  if  the  instructor  wishes.  Emphasis  will  be  on  in- 
dependent reading  and  investigation,  and  on  oral  and  written  reports.  A  substantial 
amount  of  writing  will  be  required. 

Permission  of  the  instructor  and  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  is  required. 

Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 

Professor  Durrow,  Dean  (216  Biological  Sciences);  Professor  Stambaugh,  DirectorofGradu- 
ate  Studies  (011  Biological  Sciences);  Professors  Christensen,  Knoerr,  and  Richardson;  As- 
sociate Professors  Kramer,  Reckhow,  and  Richter;  Assistant  Professors  Di  Giulio,  Faust, 
Maguire,  Oren,  and  Parks;  Professors  Emeriti  Anderson,  Hellmers,  Jayne,  Philpott,  and 
Yoho;  Adjunct  Professors  Boyce,  Condrell,  Dieter,  Hyde,  Sizemore,  and  Steen;  Adjunct 
Associate  Professor  Healy;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Alig 

Major  and  minor  work  is  offered  in  the  areas  of  natural  resource  science/ecology,  nat- 
ural resource  systems  science,  and  natural  resource  economics/policy.  Programs  of  study 
and  research  lead  to  the  A.M.,  M.S.,  and  Ph.D.  degrees.  College  graduates  who  have  a 
bachelor's  degree  in  one  of  the  natural  or  social  sciences,  forestry,  engineering,  business, 
or  environmental  science  will  be  considered  for  admission  to  a  degree  program.  Students 
will  be  restricted  to  the  particular  fields  of  specialization  for  which  they  are  qualified  aca- 
demically. Graduate  School  programs  usually  concentrate  on  some  area  of  natural  re- 
source science/ecology,  systems  science,  or  economics/policy,  while  study  in  resource 

Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies         113 


management  is  more  commonly  followed  in  one  of  the  professional  master's  degree  pro- 
grams of  the  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies.  For  more  complete  program 
descriptions  and  information  on  professional  training  in  forestry  or  environmental 
studies,  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  should 
be  consulted. 

The  specific  degrees  available  in  forestry  and  related  natural  resources  through  the 
Graduate  School  are:  the  A.M.  (with  or  without  a  thesis),  M.S.  (with  a  thesis),  and  the 
Ph.D.  Students  majoring  in  forestry  or  environmental  studies  may  be  required  to  demon- 
strate satisfactory  knowledge  of  one  or  two  foreign  languages  for  the  Ph .  D.  degree.  More 
information  on  degree  and  language  requirements  can  be  found  in  the  registration  and 
regulations  section  of  this  bulletin. 

200.  Student  Projects.  Prerequisite :  consent  of  the  dean  of  the  School  of  Forestry  and 
Environmental  Studies.  Units  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

201.  Field  Studies.  Units  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

204.  Forest  Inventory,  Growth,  and  Yield.  Measurement  of  land  and  forests  for  pur- 
poses of  management,  appraisal,  purchase,  and  sale.  Techniques  for  predicting  the  growth 
and  future  yield  of  stands  by  various  methods.  Fall.  3  units.  Davison 

205.  Silviculture.  Consideration  of  the  decision-making  processes  by  which  prescrip- 
tions are  formulated  for  regeneration,  tending,  and  harvesting  of  forest  stands.  Biologi- 
cal factors  underlying  stand  manipulation  are  stressed  and  economic,  harvesting,  and 
utilization  variables  are  discussed  as  appropriate.  Emphasis  on  principles  and  techniques 
that  transcend  vegetational  types  or  geographic  regions.  Spring.  4  units.  Oren 

207.  Forest  Pest  Management.  Fundamentals  of  entomology  and  plant  pathology  as 
appropriate  to  understanding  the  impacts  of  insects  and  diseases  on  forest  productivity 
and  their  assessment  for  integration  into  forest  management.  Regional  case  examples  and 
complexes  are  evaluated  in  terms  of  pest-population,  forest-stand  dynamics;  economic 
and  societal  constraints;  treatment  strategies;  monitoring  systems;  and  benefit-cost  anal- 
ysis. This  approach  seeks  to  develop  predictive  capabilities  in  long-range  pest  manage- 
ment and  decision  making.  Laboratory  is  largely  field  oriented  to  focus  on  diagnostics 
and  impact  analysis.  Fall.  3  units;  4  units  with  laboratory.  Stambaugh 

210L.  Forest  Pathology.  Diseases  of  North  American  forests  and  their  timbers,  with 
emphasis  on  current  literature  and  management  strategies.  Field  and  laboratory  diagnosis. 
Offered  on  demand.  3  units;  4  units  with  laboratory.  Stambaugh 

211L.  Applied  Ecology  and  Ecosystem  Management.  An  application  of  ecological 
principles  to  applied  resource  and  environmental  problems  with  an  emphasis  on  the  eco- 
system as  a  basic  working  unit.  Perspectives  include  such  topics  as  land/water  interac- 
tions, the  patchiness  concept,  succession,  energy  flow,  productivity,  mineral  cycling,  per- 
turbation effects  on  ecosystems,  and  limiting  factors.  Laboratory  studies  will  focus  on  the 
team  approach  to  analyzing  the  biotic  and  abiotic  components  of  the  ecosystem  and  im- 
pact analysis.  Fall.  4  units.  Richardson 

212.  Ecological  Toxicology.  Study  of  environmental  contaminants  from  a  broad  per- 
spective encompassing  biochemical,  ecological,  and  toxicological  principles  and  metho- 
dologies. Discussion  of  sources,  environmental  transport  and  transformation  phenome- 
na, accumulation  in  biota  and  ecosystems.  Impacts  at  various  levels  of  organization, 
particularly  biochemical  and  physiological  effects.  Fall.  Prerequisites:  organic  chemistry 
and  vertebrate  physiology  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Di  Giulio 

213.  Forest  Ecosystems.  Introduction  to  basic  processes  regulating  ecosystem  develop- 
ment, structure  and  function;  examination  of  ecosystem  concepts  and  the  effects  of 
management  activities  on  ecosystem  processes  and  patterns.  Elective  laboratory,  taught 


114         Courses  of  Instruction 


as  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  266,  introduces  field  aspects  of  forest  ecology. 
Spring.  3  units.  Richter 

215.  Environmental  Physiology.  Examination  of  the  concepts  of  tolerance,  limiting 
factors,  bioenergetics,  nutrition,  stress  physiology,  homeostasis,  and  alleopathy  for  both 
plant  and  animal  life.  Discussion  of  procedures  for  and  examples  of  monitoring  physio- 
logical perturbations  due  to  resource  manipulation.  Spring,  even-numbered  years.  3 
units.  Di  Giulio  and  Oren 

216.  Applied  Population  Ecology.  Discussion  of  population  dynamics  of  natural  and 
exploited  populations.  A  quantitative  approach  with  an  emphasis  on  mathematical 
models  and  their  application  to  population  problems.  Spring,  odd-numbered  years.  3 
units.  Maguire 

218.  Barrier  Island  Ecology.  Adaptation  of  plants  to  barrier  island  migration  and  other 
physical  characteristics  of  the  coastal  environment.  Major  emphasis  will  be  placed  on 
management  of  barrier  beaches  from  Maine  to  Texas  and  the  impact  of  human  interfer- 
ence with  natural  processes.  Field  studies.  Prerequisite:  a  course  in  general  ecology.  Given 
at  Beaufort.  C-L:  Botany  218  and  Marine  Sciences  218.  6  units.  Evans,  Peterson,  and  Wells 

221.  Soil  Resources.  Introduction  to  soil  resources  and  the  interactions  of  forest 
production,  management,  and  soil  fertility.  Topics  include  soil  chemistry,  physics,  de- 
velopment, and  nutrient  cycling,  all  from  the  perspective  of  maintaining  and  improving 
forest  productivity.  Fall.  3  units.  Richter 

230.  Weather  and  Climate.  Overview  of  the  science  of  meteorology  and  principles 
of  climatology,  especially  as  applied  to  problems  in  ecology  and  natural  resource  manage- 
ment. Emphasis  on  the  processes  and  characteristics  of  weather  phenomena  and  local 
and  regional  climates.  General  introduction  to  sources  of  climatic  data  and  climatic  data 
analysis.  Fall.  4  units.  Knoerr 

231.  Environmental  Climatology.  Applications  of  climatology  to  solving  problems 
in  ecology  and  natural  resource  management.  History  of  the  atmosphere  and  world  cli- 
mates is  considered  to  provide  a  perspective  on  current  conditions.  Impact  of  weather 
on  human  behavior,  property  and  natural  resource  management.  Spring,  on  demand. 
3  units.  Staff 

232.  Microclimatology.  Introduction  to  the  microclimatological  processes.  Discus- 
sion of  the  integration  of  these  processes  and  the  resulting  microclimates  in  the  rural  (for- 
est, field,  and  water  surface)  and  urban  environments.  Methods  for  modification  of  the 
microclimate.  C-L:  Botany  232.  Spring,  on  demand.  3  units.  Knoerr 

234.  Watershed  Hydrology.  Introduction  to  the  hydrologic  cycle  with  emphasis  on 
the  influence  of  land  use,  vegetation,  soil  types,  climate,  and  land  forms  on  water  quan- 
tity and  quality  and  methods  for  control .  Development  of  water  balance  models.  Analy- 
sis of  precipitation  patterns,  rainfall  and  runoff,  and  nonpoint  source  impacts.  Statisti- 
cal handling  and  preparation  of  hydrologic  data,  simulation  and  prediction  models, 
introduction  to  groundwater  flow,  laboratory  and  field  sampling  methods.  Fall.  4  units. 
Staff 

236.  Water  Quality  Management.  Types,  sources,  and  effects  of  pollutants.  Water  qual- 
ity standards  and  criteria.  Engineering  approaches  to  water  management.  Mathemati- 
cal models  and  their  application  to  water  quality  management.  Federal  regulations,  in 
particular,  the  Federal  Water  Pollution  Control  Act  amendments  of  1972  and  1977.  Eco- 
nomic and  policy  analysis  for  water  quality  management  planning.  Fall.  3  units.  Reckhow 

237.  Watershed  Modeling  and  Management.  Analysis  of  models  for  individual  hydro- 
logic  processes.  Evaluation  of  management-oriented  watershed  models  based  on  the 
hydrologic  process  models.  Simulations  with  watershed  models  as  a  basis  for  manage- 

Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies         115 


ment  decision  making  to  optimize  water  yield  quantity,  timing,  or  quality  under  various 
vegetative,  climatic,  topographic,  and  soil  conditions.  Prerequisite :  Forestry  and  Environ- 
mental Studies  234.  Spring.  3  units.  Knoerr 

240.  Fate  of  Organic  Chemicals  in  the  Environment.  Kinetic,  equilibrium,  and  ana- 
lytical approaches  applied  to  quantitative  description  of  processes  affecting  the  fate  of 
anthropogenic  and  natural  organic  compounds  in  ground,  surface,  and  atmospheric 
waters,  and  in  selected  treatment  processes.  Processes  include  sorption  phenomena,  gas 
transfer,  hydrolysis,  photochemistry,  oxidation-reduction,  and  biodegradation.  Tech- 
niques discussed  include  gas  chromatography,  liquid  chromatography,  and  mass  spec- 
trometry. Spring,  odd-numbered  years.  Prerequisite:  (or  corequisite)  Civil  and  Environ- 
mental Engineering  242/Fbrestry  and  Environmental  Studies  242  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Civil 
and  Environmental  Engineering  240.  3  units.  Dubay  and  Faust 

242.  Environmental  Chemistry.  Principles  of  chemical  kinetics  and  equilibria  applied 
to  quantitative  description  of  the  chemistry  of  lakes,  rivers,  oceans,  atmospheric  waters, 
groundwaters,  and  selected  treatment  processes.  Equilibrium,  steady  state,  and  other 
kinetic  models  applied  to  processes  such  as  the  carbonate  system,  coordination  chemis- 
try, precipitation  and  dissolution,  oxidation-reduction,  photochemistry,  heterogeneous 
reactions,  gas  transfer,  and  some  aspects  of  atmospheric  chemistry.  Spring.  C-L:  Civil  and 
Environmental  Engineering  242.  3  units.  Faust 

261.  Remote  Sensing  for  Resource  Management.  An  examination  of  remote  sens- 
ing systems  as  sources  of  information  in  resource  management  with  an  emphasis  on  aerial 
photography  and  multispectral  scanners.  Emphasis  on  the  interpretation  of  airborne  and 
space  imagery.  Spring.  3  units.  Davison 

262.  Forest  Utilization.  Introduction  to  utilization  in  the  managed  forest  and  the  prin- 
cipal wood-using  industries.  Taught  as  a  one-week  field  seminar.  May  be  taken  by  non- 
forestry  majors.  Spring.  1  unit,  intensive.  Staff 

266.  Ecology  of  Southern  Appalachian  Forests.  One-week  introduction  to  forest 
ecosystems  in  the  southern  Appalachians,  including  species  identification,  major  for- 
est types,  patterns  in  ecosystem  distributions,  and  effects  of  human  activities.  1  unit,  in- 
tensive. Richter 

267.  Wildland  and  Wildlife  Management.  Overview  of  topics  in  wildlife  and  habi- 
tat management,  each  focusing  on  biological,  economic,  legal,  and  sociopolitical  con- 
straints; action  variables  and  points  of  influence;  and  institutional  contexts  at  the  local, 
national,  and  international  levels.  Lectures,  guest  speakers,  and  student  presentations. 
Fall,  on  demand.  3  units.  Boyceand  Maguire 

270.  Resource  Economics  and  Policy.  The  application  of  economic  concepts  to  private 
and  public  sector  decision  making  concerning  natural  and  environmental  resources.  In- 
vestment analysis,  benefit-cost  analysis.  Planning  and  policy  concepts.  Prerequisite:  in- 
troductory course  in  economics.  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  272.  Spring.  4  units.  Kramer 

283.  Environmental  Policy  and  Values.  Discussion  of  varying  philosophical  ap- 
proaches to  the  allocation  and  use  of  natural  resources  and  the  environment.  Views  es- 
poused by  ecologists,  preservationists,  naturalists,  conservationists,  economists,  plan- 
ners, theologians,  lawyers,  and  political  scientists  are  considered.  Through  extensive 
readings,  students  consider  who  values  what  in  society,  and  who  gets  what,  when,  and 
how.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Fall.  3  units.  Staff 

285.  Land  Use  Principles  and  Policies.  Consideration  of  four  major  roles  of  land  in 
the  United  States :  as  a  producer  of  commodities,  financial  asset,  component  of  environ- 
mental systems,  and  location  of  development.  Analysis  of  market  allocation  of  land,  mar- 
ket failure,  role  of  public  planning  and  regulation.  3  units.  Fall.  Healy 


116         Courses  of  Instruction 


299.  Independent  Projects.  Directed  readings  or  research  at  the  graduate  level  to  meet 
the  needs  of  individual  students.  Units  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

301.  Forest  Nutrition  Management.  Basic  processes  of  soil  chemistry  and  ecosystem 
nutrient  cycling  as  regulators  of  forest  production.  Management  impacts  such  as  fertili- 
zation, fire,  harvest,  and  biological  nitrogen  fixation.  Laboratories  include  methods  of 
determining  site  fertility,  assessing  forest  productivity,  and  using  computer  simulation 
models  to  guide  management  decisions  in  forest  nutrition  programs.  Spring.  4  units.  Staff 

302.  Models  in  Forestry.  Students  learn  how  to  design  and  choose  models  for  for- 
estry and  ecology.  Emphasis  on  using  models  to  develop  strategy  and  evaluate  policy  for 
culturing  forests  and  related  ecosystems.  Subjects  include  timber,  wildlife,  water,  recre- 
ation, and  cash  flow.  Fall.  3  units.  Boyce 

306.  Dynamic  Modeling  of  Forest  Management  Strategies.  Simulation  of  the  finan- 
cial aspects  of  silvicultural  practices  when  used  to  produce  timber,  wildlife  habitat,  wa- 
ter, range  and  recreational  benefits;  economics  of  production;  and  trade-offs  for  multi- 
ple benefits.  Students  use  actual  forest  inventories  to  devise  silvicultural  strategies,  which 
are  simulated  with  the  system  dynamics  models  DYNAST  and  STELLA  on  microcom- 
puters. Fall.  1  unit,  intensive.  Boyce  and  Easterling 

307.  Forest  Stress.  Exploration  of  principles  governing  stand  growth  and  its  responses 
to  a  variety  of  stresses.  Emphasis  on  climate,  soil  resources,  and  competition.  Stresses 
and  their  reliefs  as  modifiers  of  either  the  availability  of  resources  or  the  physiological 
properties  of  trees.  Fall.  3  units.  Oren 

312.  Wetlands  Ecology.  The  study  of  bogs,  fens,  marshes,  and  swamps.  Emphasis 
on  processes  within  the  ecosystem:  biogeochemical  cycling,  decomposition,  hydrology, 
and  primary  productivity.  Ecosystem  structure,  the  response  of  these  systems  to  pertur- 
bations, and  management  strategies  are  discussed.  A  research  project  is  required.  Prereq- 
uisites: Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  211  or  equivalent  and  consent  of  instructor. 
Spring,  odd-numbered  years.  3  units.  Richardson 

313.  Advanced  Topics  in  Ecotoxicology.  Discussion  of  current  issues.  Topics  vary  but 
may  include  chemical  carcinogenesis  in  aquatic  animals;  biomarkers  for  exposure  and 
sublethal  stress  in  plants  and  animals;  techniques  for  ecological  hazard  assessments;  and 
means  of  determining  population,  community,  and  ecosystem  level  effects.  Lectures  and 
discussions  led  by  instructor,  guest  speakers,  and  students.  Spring,  odd-numbered  years. 
Prerequisite:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  212.  Di  Giulio 

314.  Integrated  Case  Studies  in  Toxicology.  See  C-L:  Pharmacology  314. 4  units.  Abou- 
Donia  and  staff 

316.  Case  Studies  in  Environmental  Management.  Introduces  an  integrated  ecolog- 
ical, economic,  and  sociopolitical  approach  to  solving  resource  management  problems. 
Students  work  in  groups  to  analyze  local  problems  and  present  their  results.  Emphasis 
on  setting  goals  for  research,  project  organization,  selection  of  quantitative  tools,  prepa- 
ration of  written  and  oral  presentations.  Prerequisites:  Forestry  and  Environmental 
Studies  211  and  251  or  equivalents.  Spring.  4  units.  Staff 

'ill.  Microbiology  of  Forest  Soils.  Ecology  of  the  microbial  populations  of  forest  soils, 
with  emphasis  on  rhizosphere  interactions,  root  pathogenesis,  and  mycorrhizae.  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor;  mycology  and  bacteriology  are  recommended.  Spring,  odd- 
numbered  years.  4  units,  offered  on  demand.  Stambaugh 

330L.  Environmental  Monitoring  and  Instrumentation.  Methods  of  measuring  and 
monitoring  the  earth's  physical  environment  with  emphasis  on  water  and  air  resources. 
Characteristics  and  uses  of  contemporary  sensors,  measurement  and  data  acquisition  sys- 
tems. Methods  of  obtaining  and  processing  computer  compatible  data  records.  Includes 
laboratory.  C-L:  Botany  330L.  Spring,  on  demand.  4  units.  Knoerr 

forestry  and  Environmental  Studies         \Y7 


331.  Water  Resource  Systems.  Introduction  to  the  fundamentals  of  water  resource  sys- 
tems planning  and  management.  Emphasis  on  optimization,  simulation,  statistical  and 
economic  principles  for  management  of  surface  and  subsurface  water  resources.  Topics 
include  project  selection  and  evaluation,  design  of  standards  and  regulations,  stochas- 
tic and  deterministic  quantity/quality  simulation  models,  water  supply  and  wastewater 
treatment  technologies,  decision  and  risk  analysis.  Spring.  3  units.  Staff 

332.  Air  Quality  Management  and  Modeling.  Types  and  sources  of  atmospheric  con- 
taminants including  effects  of  industry,  urban  development,  farming  and  forestry  prac- 
tices, and  recreation.  Meteorological  effects  on  air  quality.  Determination  of  air  quality 
trends  and  the  application  of  management  systems  from  a  meteorological  point  of  view. 
Types  and  applications  of  air  quality  models.  Performance  of  air  quality  models  under 
various  emission  sources,  meteorological,  and  topographic  conditions.  Fall,  on  demand. 
3  units.  Staff 

335.  Water  Quality  Modeling.  Development  and  evaluation  of  simulation  models  of 
surface  water  quality.  Mechanistic  description  of  aquatic  ecosystems  and  materials  trans- 
port. Parameter  estimation,  methods  of  solution,  including  uncertainty  analysis.  Prereq- 
uisites: Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  234,  236,  350,  355.  Fall,  odd-numbered  years. 
2  units.  Reckhow 

350.  Applied  Regression  Analysis.  Regression  analysis  with  nonexperimental  data 
using  ordinary  least  squares.  Emphasis  on  assumption  violations :  consequences  and  cor- 
rectives. Analysis  of  variance  and  time  series  analysis  using  Box- Jenkins  methods  as  time 
permits.  Prerequisite:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  251  or  equivalent.  Spring.  4 
units.  Reckhow 

355.  Optimization  Methods  for  Resource  Management.  Introductory  survey  of  op- 
timization techniques  useful  in  resource  management  and  environmental  decision  mak- 
ing. Numerical  techniques  for  unconstrained  optimization,  linear  programming,  dynamic 
programming,  and  optimal  control  methods.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Fall.  3 
units.  Staff 

357.  Systems  Ecology  and  Modeling.  Concepts  of  systems  analysis  and  simulation 
modeling  in  ecology.  Examples  emphasize  use  of  systems  analysis  and  modeling  to  solve 
environmental  management  problems.  Prerequisites:  ecology,  introductory  statistics, 
computer  programming  on  microcomputer  and  TUCC;  additional  quantitative  back- 
ground desirable.  Spring,  even-numbered  years.  3  units.  Maguire 

361.  Forest  Resource  Management.  The  integration  of  biological,  socioeconomic,  and 
environmental  constraints  in  planning,  organizing,  and  managing  forest  properties  for 
maximizing  production  of  timber  and  other  benefits.  Emphasis  on  analysis  of  growth  and 
yield  for  regulation  of  growing  stock;  application  of  economic  imperatives  in  decision  mak- 
ing, including  valuation  of  forest  land  and  related  resources;  and  use  of  microcomputers 
in  simulating  management  options.  Prerequisites:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 
204,  205,  270,  and  302.  Spring.  4  units.  Parks 

366.  Mathematical  Modeling  of  Lake  and  Reservoir  Water  Quality.  Practical  appli- 
cation of  mathematical  models  of  lake  and  reservoir  water  quality.  The  major  objective 
is  to  expose  the  participant  to  a  wide  variety  of  techniques  that  are  useful  in  predicting 
the  responses  of  lakes  and  impoundments  to  pollutants.  Statistical  and  mass  balance 
models  are  included.  Knowledge  of  elementary  calculus  and  statistics  is  recommended. 
Fall.  1  unit,  intensive.  Chapra  and  Reckhow 

367.  Seminar  in  Forest  Resource  Management.  Examination  of  concepts,  practices, 
and  policies  employed  in  the  management  of  industrial  and  public  forests;  discussion 
of  the  problems  of  large-scale  forest  management.  Offered  since  1985-86  as  the  Laird  Nor- 
ton Distinguished  Visitor  Series.  Spring.  1  unit.  MacKinnon 

1 18        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


372, 373.  Advanced  Natural  Resource  Economics.  Survey  of  advanced  topics  in  nat- 
ural resource  and  environmental  economics.  Emphasis  on  renewable  resources  and  public 
policy.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Fall  and  spring.  3  units  each.  Staff 

376.  USDA  Forest  Service  Inventory  Data:  Content  and  Use.  Introduction  to  means 
of  applying  inventory  data  to  particular  problems.  Fall.  1  unit,  intensive.  Boyce 

381.  Natural  Resource  Policy.  An  examination  of  institutions  and  processes  in  the 
public  sector  that  influence  natural  resource  allocation  and  use  of  the  environment.  Em- 
phasis on  political  allocation  of  resources,  especially  legislative  and  administrative  pro- 
cesses. Topics  include  the  rules  of  democracy  and  free  enterprise,  lobbying,  public  par- 
ticipation, planning,  and  advocacy.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Spring.  3  units.  Staff 

382.  International  Environmental  Problems.  Global  and  transboundary  issues; 
management  of  international  disputes.  Environmental  consequences  of  Third  World  de- 
velopment, including  industrial  pollution,  rural  land  degradation,  deforestation,  mis- 
use of  chemicals,  protection  of  biodiversity.  Comparative  analysis  of  policies.  Spring.  3 
units.  Healy 

385.  Decision  Theory  and  Risk  Analysis.  Bayesian  decision  theory,  including  con- 
ditional probability,  subjective  probability,  utility  theory,  value  of  sample  information, 
and  multiattribute  problems.  Behavioral  decision  theory.  Applications  of  decision  the- 
ory in  resource  and  environmental  policy-making.  Prerequisite:  Forestry  and  Environ- 
mental Studies  251  or  equivalent.  Spring,  even-numbered  years.  3  units.  Maguire  and 
Reckhow 

388.  Seminar  in  Resource  and  Environmental  Policy.  Discussion  of  the  political,  le- 
gal, and  socioeconomic  aspects  of  public  and  private  action  in  environmental  quality  con- 
trol and  management.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Fall,  spring.  1  unit.  Staff 

389.  Seminar  in  Forest  and  Conservation  History.  Evolution  of  resource  agencies,  for- 
est industries  and  associations,  and  conservation/environmental  organizations.  Public 
policies  for  land  and  resources  are  compared  with  priorities  and  constraints  in  the  pri- 
vate sector.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Spring,  odd-numbered  years.  2  units.  Steen 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

208.  Fire  Behavior  and  Use 

209.  Forest  Entomology 

305.  Harvesting  Effects  on  Productivity 

308.  Tree  Biology 

309.  Forest  Regeneration 

310.  Forest  Productivity  and  Mineral  Cycling 
318.  Seminar  in  Ecotoxicology 

338.  Micrometeorology  and  Biometeorology  Seminar 

384.  Special  Tax  Problems  for  Industrial  Timberland  Owners 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics 

Professors  Amos  (microbiology  and  immunology),  Antonovics  (botany),  Bastia  (microbi- 
ology and  immunology),  Boynton  (botany),  Counce  (cell  biology),  Gillham  (zoology), 
Gross  (biochemistry),  Holmes  (medicine  and  biochemistry),  Joklik  (microbiology  and 


The  University  Program  in  Genetics         119 


immunology),  Kredich  (biochemistry),  Modrich  (biochemistry),  Moses  (cell  biology), 
Nevins  (microbiology),  Nicklas  (zoology),  Ruderman  (zoology),  C.  Ward  (zoology),  F. 
Ward  (microbiology  and  immunology),  and  Webster  (biochemistry);  Associate  Profes- 
sors Endow  (microbiology  and  immunology),  Greene  (biochemistry),  Greenleaf  (bio- 
chemistry), M.  Hershfield  (biochemistry),  Hsieh  (biochemistry),  Keene  (microbiology 
and  immunology),  Laurie  (zoology),  Linney  (microbiology  and  immunology),  Rausher 
(zoology),  Steege  (biochemistry),  and  Uyenoyama  (zoology);  Assistant  Professors  Bur- 
dett  (microbiology  and  immunology),  Johnston  (botany),  Kaufman  (biochemistry),  Ko- 
horn  (botany),  Kreuzer  (microbiology  and  immunology),  Ostrowski  (microbiology  and 
immunology),  Pickup  (microbiology),  Schachat  (cell  biology),  and  Swain  (microbiolo- 
gy); Adjunct  Professors  Drake  (National  Institute  of  Environmental  Health  Sciences),  Judd 
(National  Institute  of  Environmental  Health  Sciences),  Kunkel  (National  Institute  of  En- 
vironmental Health  Sciences),  Lucchesi  (University  of  North  Carolina),  Resnick  (National 
Institute  of  Environmental  Health  Sciences),  and  Sugino  (National  Institute  of  Environ- 
mental Health  Sciences) 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics  provides  a  coherent  course  of  study  in  all  facets 
of  biology  related  to  genetics.  This  is  an  interdisciplinary  program  with  a  faculty  drawn 
from  several  of  the  biological  science  departments  (cell  biology,  biochemistry,  botany, 
microbiology  and  immunology,  and  zoology) .  Graduate  students  registered  in  any  of  the 
biological  sciences  departments  may  apply  to  the  faculty  of  the  genetics  program  to  pur- 
sue study  and  research  leading  to  an  advanced  degree.  It  would  be  helpful  if  applicants 
for  admission  to  the  Graduate  School  indicated  their  interest  in  the  genetics  program  at 
the  time  of  application.  Requests  for  information  describing  more  completely  the  research 
interests  of  the  staff,  facilities,  and  special  stipends  and  fellowships  should  be  addressed 
to  the  Director,  Genetics  Program  (Department  of  Biochemistry). 

215.  Genetic  Mechanisms.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biochemistry.  See  C-L:  Bio- 
chemistry 215.  3  units.  Webster  and  staff 

268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids.  SeeC-L:  Biochemistry  268;  alsoC-L:  Cell 
Biology  268,  Microbiology  and  Immunology  268,  and  The  University  Program  in  Cell  and 
Molecular  Biology.  4  units.  Modrich  and  staff 

280.  Principles  of  Genetics.  See  C-L:  Botany  280;  also  C-L:  Zoology  280.  3  units.  An- 
tonovics,  Boynton,  Gillham,  and  Laurie 

281.  DNA,  Chromosomes,  and  Evolution.  Prerequisites:  an  introductory  course  in 
genetics  or  cell  or  molecular  biology,  or  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L :  Zoology  281 . 3  units. 
Laurie  and  Nicklas 

283.  Extrachromosomal  Inheritance.  See  C-L:  Zoology  283;  also  C-L:  Botany  283.  3 
units.  Boynton  (botany)  and  Gillham 

285S.  Ecological  Genetics.  Prerequisites:  Biology  180  and  Botany  286  or  equivalents. 
See  C-L:  Botany  285S.  3  units.  Antonovics 

286.  Evolutionary  Mechanisms.  See  C-L:  Botany  286;  also  C-L:  Zoology  286. 3  units. 
Antonovics  (botany),  Uyenoyama,  and  H.  Wilbur 

288.  Mathematical  Population  Genetics.  See  C-L:  Zoology  288.  3  units.  Uyenoyama 

336.  Contemporary  Topics  in  Immunogenetics.  See  C-L:  Microbiology  and  Immu- 
nology 336.  2  units.  Amos  and  Ward 

Genetics  Colloquium.  Lectures,  discussion  sections,  and  seminars  on  selected  topics 
of  current  interest  in  genetics.  Required  of  all  students  specializing  in  genetics.  Prereq- 
uisites: a  course  in  genetics  and  consent  of  instructor.  1  unit.  Antonovics  and  staff 


120         Courses  of  Instruction 


Geology 

Professor  Perkins,  Chairman  (204  Old  Chemistry);  Professor  Heron,  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  (205  Old  Chemistry);  Professors  Pilkey  and  Rosendahl;  Associate  Professors  Baker, 
Corliss,  Johnson,  and  Karson;  Assistant  Professors  Boudreau,  Klein,  and  Strelitz 

The  Department  of  Geology  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees.  An  undergraduate  degree  in  geology  is  not  a  prerequisite  for  graduate  studies, 
but  a  student  must  have  had  or  must  take  a  summer  field  geology  course  (or  equivalent 
experience),  mineralogy,  igneous  and  metamorphic  rocks,  stratigraphy  or  sedimentation, 
and  structural  geology.  In  addition,  the  student  must  have  had  one  year  of  college  chemis- 
try, one  year  of  college  physics,  and  mathematics  through  calculus. 

Graduate  courses  and  research  in  the  Department  of  Geology  provide  specialized 
training  in  the  fields  of  facies  analysis,  sedimentary  petrology,  geological  oceanography 
and  limnology,  coastal  geology,  micropaleontology,  paleoceanography  geophysics,  low- 
temperature  geochemistry,  igneous  petrology,  high-temperature  geochemistry,  and  struc- 
tural geology  and  tectonics.  An  acceptable  thesis  is  required.  There  is  no  language  require- 
ment for  the  M.S.  degree. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Beach  and  Coastal  Processes.  The  study  of  sedimentary  processes,  and  geomor- 
phology  of  nearshore  environments  with  emphasis  on  both  developed  and  undeveloped 
barrier  island  systems.  3  units.  Pilkey 

203.  Physical  Oceanography.  Physical  processes  in  the  oceans:  the  physical  proper- 
ties of  seawater,  the  dynamics  of  currents,  waves  and  tides,  and  the  transmission  of  light 
and  sound  in  the  sea.  Prerequisite:  Physics  41  or  51.  (Given  at  Duke  Marine  Lab,  Beaufort.) 
C-L:  Marine  Sciences  203.  2  units.  Johnson 

206S.  Principles  of  Geological  Oceanography.  Geological  aspects  of  the  ocean  ba- 
sins including  coastal  to  deep  water  sediment  types  and  sedimentation  processes,  sea 
floor  physiography  and  environmental  problems.  3  units.  Pilkey 

208S.  Paleoceanography.  Geology,  paleoceanography,  and  evolution  of  the  oceans, 
ocean  basins,  and  marine  biota  based  on  analysis  of  deep-sea  sedimentary  sequences. 
3  units.  Corliss 

209S.  Marine  Sediments.  Sedimentary  processes  in  nearshore,  shelf,  and  deep-sea 
environments.  Emphasis  on  field  methods  and  laboratory  analyses.  (Given  at  Beaufort . ) 
C-L:  Marine  Sciences  209S.  4  units.  Johnson 

212.  Carbonate  Facies  Analysis:  Recent  and  Ancient.  Origin,  distribution,  and  dia- 
genetic  alteration  of  recent  carbonate  sediments  and  their  ancient  analogs.  Prerequisite: 
Geology  111.  3  units.  Perkins 

214S.  Sedimentary  Petrography.  Descriptive  and  interpretive  analysis  of  sediments 
and  sedimentary  rocks  in  thin  section,  with  an  emphasis  on  diagenesis.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  instructor.  3  units.  Perkins 

215.  Clastics  Facies  Analysis:  Recent  and  Ancient.  Modern  clastic  depositional  sys- 
tems and  their  ancient  analogs.  Prerequisite:  Geology  111.  3  units.  Heron 

216.  Field  Analysis  of  South  Florida  Carbonates.  Analysis  of  recent  sediments  and 
organisms  and  their  Pleistocene  analogs.  One-week  field  trip.  Prerequisite:  Geology  111 
or  consent  of  instructor.  1  unit.  Perkins 

219.  Sediment  Transport.  How  river,  ocean,  and  wind  currents  move  solid  particles. 
Dimensional  analysis,  near-bed  turbulence,  boundary  layer  forces,  initiation  and  rates 
of  particle  movement,  bed-load  vs.  suspended-load,  erosion,  deposition,  sorting, 

Geology        121 


evolution  and  motion  of  dunes  and  other  bed  forms.  Emphasis  on  physical  understand- 
ing of  phenomena  with  application  to  environmental  issues  (for  example,  dust  genera- 
tion, desertification),  engineering  questions  (for  example,  silting  of  channels)  and  geo- 
logical problems  (for  example,  ripple  laminae,  size-sorting).  Prerequisite:  Civil  and 
Environmental  Engineering  122  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Haff 

230S.  Advanced  Structural  Geology.  In  depth  treatment  of  stress  and  strain  for  ge- 
ologists emphasizing  geometric,  kinematic,  and  dynamic  analysis  of  microstructures  and 
mesoscopic  structures.  Prerequisite:  Geology  130  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Karson 

233.  Oceanic  Crust  and  Ophiolites.  Structure,  tectonics,  petrology,  and  geochemis- 
try of  oceanic  spreading  environments  and  ophiolite  complexes.  Prerequisites:  Geolo- 
gy 106  and  130  or  consent  of  instructors.  3  units.  Karson 

236.  Lithosphere  Plate  Boundaries.  Plate  tectonics  and  the  geological  and  geophysical 
expression  of  orogenic  belts,  spreading  centers,  transform  faults,  subduction  zones. 
Prerequisite:  Geology  130  or  consent  of  instructors.  3  units.  Karson  and  Rosendahl 

237S.  Structure  and  Evolution  of  the  Appalachian  Orogen.  Overview  of  sedimen- 
tation, deformation,  and  metamorphism  responsible  for  the  development  of  the  Ap- 
palachian Mountain  Belt  from  Newfoundland  to  Alabama  in  the  context  of  plate  tecton- 
ics. Prerequisites:  Geology  106, 108,  and  130  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Karson 

239S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Structural  Geology  and  Tectonics.  Selected  topics  related 
to  deformation  of  rocks  ranging  from  microstructure  to  plate  tectonics.  Prerequisites:  Ge- 
ology 130  and  230  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Karson 

249.  Marine  Micropaleontology.  Introduction  to  marine  microfossils,  basic  princi- 
ples of  micropaleontology  and  stable  isotope  geochemistry  with  applications  to 
paleoceanography.  Lectures  and  laboratory.  3  units.  Corliss 

251.  Physics  of  the  Earth.  Origin,  primeval  evolution,  rotation,  potential  fields, 
paleomagnetism,  gravity  anomalies,  earthquake  seismology,  thermal  properties,  inter- 
nal structure  of  the  earth,  and  thermodynamics  of  plate  motions.  Prerequisites:  Geolo- 
gy 41  and  Chemistry  12  and  Mathematics  32  and  Physics  52  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units. 

Strelitz 

252 .  Exploration  Seismology.  Elastic  wave  theory,  reflection  and  refraction  of  acoustic 
waves,  field  methodologies,  computer  processing,  and  interpretation  of  seismic  data. 
Prerequisites :  Geology  41  and  Mathematics  32  and  Computer  Science  51  and  Physics  52 
or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Rosendahl 

255.  Seismic  Interpretation.  Basic  rock  physics,  seismic  expression  of  structural  styles, 
seismic  facies  analysis,  maps  generated  from  seismic  data,  and  basin-wide  seismic  strati- 
graphic  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Geology  251;  corequisite:  Geology  252  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. 3  units.  Rosendahl  and  Staff 

260S.  Hydrocarbon  Exploration.  Origin,  migration,  and  accumulation  of  hydrocar- 
bons with  emphasis  on  exploration  techniques.  Prerequisites:  Geology  111  and  251.  3 
units.  Perkins  and  Rosendahl 

270.  Sedimentary  Geochemistry.  Chemistry  of  aqueous  solutions  and  authigenic 
minerals  in  sedimentary  systems.  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  12  and  Mathematics  32.  3 
units.  Baker 

271.  Isotope  Geochemistry.  Theory  and  applications  of  stable  and  radioactive  isotope 
distributions  in  nature.  Prerequisites:  Chemistry  12  and  Mathematics  32.  3  units.  Baker 

272.  Biogeochemistry.  Processes  controlling  the  circulation  of  carbon  and  biochem- 
ical elements  in  natural  ecosystems  and  at  the  global  level,  with  emphasis  on  soil  and  sur- 


122         Courses  of  Instruction 


ficial  processes.  Prerequisite:  Chemistry  12  or  equivalent.  C-L:  Botany  272.  3  units. 
Schlesinger 

275.  Economic  Geology.  Geology  and  geochemistry  of  ore  deposits.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  instructor.  3  units.  Baker 

281S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Igneous  Petrology.  Current  topics  in  igneous  petrology  in- 
cluding andesite  petrogenesis,  ocean  ridge  basalts,  and  experimental  petrology.  Prereq- 
uisites: Geology  105  and  106.  3  units.  Staff 

283S.  Experimental  Methods  in  Geology.  Theory  and  application  of  experimental 
techniques  in  igneous  and  metamorphic  petrology  and  high-  and  low-temperature  geo- 
chemistry, with  examples  from  recent  literature.  Prerequisites:  Geology  105  and  106  or 
consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

292.  Computer  Methods  in  Geology.  Techniques  used  in  the  geological  sciences  in- 
cluding simulation  and  forward  modeling,  inverse  and  least  squares  methods,  statisti- 
cal methods  and  exploratory  data  analysis  as  well  as  graphics.  Prerequisites :  Mathemat- 
ics 32  and  Computer  Science  51,  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Strelitz 

295S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology.  Topics,  instructors,  and  credits  to  be  arranged 
each  semester.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  295S.  Staff 

For  Graduates 

371,  372.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology.  To  meet  the  individual  needs  of  graduate  stu- 
dents for  independent  study  in  various  environmental  sedimentary  fields.  1  to  3  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

217.  Field  Analysis  of  Ancient  Sedimentary  Sequences 
253S.  Geophysics 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature 

Associate  Professor  Borchardt,  Chairman;  Professor  Rolleston,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 
(102  Languages);  Associate  Professor  Alt;  Assistant  Professors  Morton  and  Rasmussen 

The  Department  of  Germanic  Languages  and  Literature  offers  graduate  work  lead- 
ing to  the  A.M.  degree.  Students  who  expect  to  major  in  German  should  have  had  suffi- 
cient undergraduate  courses  in  Germanic  languages  to  enable  them  to  proceed  to  more 
advanced  work. 

Students  who  wish  to  take  courses  in  German  as  a  related  field  should  normally  have 
completed  a  third-year  course  (in  exceptional  cases,  a  second  year)  of  college  German  with 
acceptable  grades. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200S.  Proseminar.  Fundamental  course  for  advanced  study  of  German;  literary  his- 
tory, schools  of  criticism,  practical  exercises  in  interpretation,  and  research  methods.  3 
units.  Alt 

201S,  202S.  Goethe.  His  life  and  works,  in  the  light  of  his  lasting  significance  to  Ger- 
man and  world  literature.  201S:  lyrics,  prose,  fiction,  and  selected  dramas.  202S:  Faust 
land  11.  3  units  each.  Morton 

205, 206.  Middle  High  German.  The  language  and  literature  of  Germany's  first  clas- 
sical period.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units  each.  Rasmussen 

207S.  German  Romanticism.  The  principal  writers  of  the  period  from  1795  to  1830. 
3  units.  Alt  or  Rolleston 

209S.  Drama.  Studies  in  the  German-speaking  theater  with  emphasis  on  the  nine- 
teenth century.  3  units.  Alt 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature        123 


210S.  The  Eighteenth  Century.  The  culture  of  reason,  progress,  and  the  individual 
in  early  modern  philosophy  and  literature.  Leibniz,  Lessing,  Herder,  Kant,  Schiller.  3 
units.  Morton 

211S.  Nineteenth-Century  Literature.  From  the  end  of  romanticism  through  realism. 
3  units.  Alt 

214S.  The  Twentieth  Century.  Literature  of  the  twentieth  century  presented  through 
representative  authors.  3  units.  Rolleston 

215S.  Seventeenth-Century  Literature.  Leading  writers  of  the  baroque,  viewed  against 
the  background  of  their  time.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Borchardt 

216.  History  of  the  German  Language.  Development  of  the  phonology,  morpholo- 
gy, and  syntax  of  German  from  the  beginnings  to  the  present.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renais- 
sance Studies.  3  units.  Rasmussen 

217S.  Renaissance  and  Reformation  Literature.  The  period  from  1400  to  about  1600. 
C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Borchardt 

218S.  The  Teaching  of  German.  A  survey  of  modern  teaching  techniques:  problems 
in  the  teaching  of  German  on  the  secondary  and  college  levels.  Analysis  and  valuation 
of  textbooks,  related  audiovisual  material,  and  computer  programs.  3  units.  Alt 

219.  Applied  Linguistics.  The  application  of  modern  linguistic  principles  to  a  sys- 
tematic study  of  the  phonetics,  morphology,  and  syntax  of  modern  German.  Prerequi- 
site: consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Rasmussen 

230S.  Lyric  Poetry.  Studies  in  poetry  and  poetic  theory.  From  Goethe  and  the  roman- 
tics to  Rilke,  Benn,  and  contemporary  authors.  3  units.  Rolleston 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
321,  322.  Germanic  Seminar 


Health  Administration 

Professor  McMahon,  Chairman;  Associate  Professor  Taylor,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies; 
Professors  Jaeger  and  Warren;  Associate  Professors  Falcone  and  Roth;  Assistant  Profes- 
sor Smith;  Adjunct  Associate  Professors  Donelan,  Winfree,  and  Yaggy;  Adjunct  Assis- 
tant Professors  Magruder-Habib  and  Moore 

The  Department  of  Health  Administration  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  M.H.  A. 
degree .  The  graduate  program  is  offered  through  two  academic  years  and  leads  principally 
toward  a  career  in  the  corporate  management  of  hospitals  and  other  health  services  or- 
ganizations. Most  of  the  required  first  year  courses  are  taken  in  the  Fuqua  School  of  Busi- 
ness and  second  year  electives  are  also  available  there.  A  ten- week  administrative  intern- 
ship at  an  approved  health  care  institution  or  agency  is  required  between  the  first  and 
second  year.  Students  without  previous  administrative  experience  in  the  health  field  are 
encouraged  to  apply  for  a  twelve-month  administrative  fellowship  following  graduation. 
Admission  to  the  program  is  based  upon  the  capability  for  graduate  study  and  demon- 
strated leadership  potential  of  the  candidate. 

301.  Health  System  and  the  Environment.  Introduction  to  the  organizational  and 
professional  systems  which  provide  health  care  services,  including  past,  present,  and 
future  perspectives  and  relationships  among  institutions,  professionals,  government, 
and  the  private  sector.  Emphasis  is  on  the  changing  and  dynamic  nature  of  the  health  care 
environment  and  resulting  system  responses.  3  units.  Staff 

124        Courses  of  Instruction 


302.  Organizational  Behavior  in  Health  Systems.  This  course  will  consider  the  leader- 
ship roles  of  the  manager  and  his  or  her  responsibility  for  maintaining  a  productive 
organization  in  a  changing  economic  environment.  It  will  develop  models  for  consider- 
ing consequences  of  the  interaction  of  members  of  the  organization  with  changing  tech- 
nology and  other  externalities,  and  will  examine  how  appropriate  leadership  behavior 
frequently  determines  the  success  or  failure  of  an  institution.  3  units.  Taylor 

303-304.  Health  Systems  and  the  EnvironmentLaboratory.  A  laboratory  course  to 
facilitate  familiarity  with  the  operation  of  health  facilities  and  the  appreciation  of  the  chal- 
lenge of  planning,  organizing,  financing,  staffing,  controlling,  and  evaluating  the  pro- 
vision of  health  care  services.  (To  be  taken  concurrently  with  Health  Administration  301 
and  302.)  1  unit  each.  McMahon 

311-312.  Leadership  Seminar.  Designed  as  the  integrating  course  of  the  program,  this 
two-semester  seminar  provides  a  forum  for  ongoing  interaction  among  student/ 
faculty/practitioners  in  the  context  of  exploring  the  concepts  and  implementation  of  strate- 
gies for  both  causing  and  responding  to  the  dynamics  of  change  in  health  organizations. 
1  unit  each.  McMahon 

321-322.  Strategic  Management.  A  comprehensive,  two-semester  course  which  ap- 
plies and  extends  courses  taken  in  the  Fuqua  School  and  draws  upon  several  disciplinary 
areas  in  order  to  develop  a  conceptual  and  operational  basis  for  management  control  over 
designing,  planning,  allocating,  utilizing,  and  evaluating  resources  used  in  providing 
health  services.  3  units  each.  Warren,  Jaeger,  and  Roth 

325.  Health  Law  for  Management.  Introduction  to  law  and  the  legal  approach  to  prob- 
lem solving  in  health  care;  provides  background  for  understanding  the  role  of  law  and 
legal  institutions  in  affecting  access,  availability,  cost,  quality,  and  evaluation  of  health 
care  services.  3  units.  Warren 

327.  Financial  Management  for  Health  Care  Organizations.  Provides  a  comprehen- 
sive overview  of  both  short-run  and  long-term  issues  in  health  care  financial  management . 
Topics  include  cash  management,  collection  and  disbursement  techniques,  cash  forecast- 
ing, short-run  financial  planning,  receivables  management,  capital  budgeting  under  un- 
certainty, dividend  policy,  and  capital  structure  decisions.  3  units.  Taylor 

331.  Human  Resources  Management.  Course  focuses  on  the  responsibilities  and  role 
of  all  managers  and  supervisors  in  regard  to  human  resource  management,  the  issues 
in  developing  a  proactive  human  resource  planning  model  with  an  adaptable  framework, 
and  strategies  for  responding  to  events,  trends,  and  issues  affecting  human  resources. 
3  units.  Taylor 

341, 342.  Advanced  Seminar  in  Health  Care  Institutional  Management.  An  integrat- 
ing sequence  of  case  studies  in  institutional  and  programmatic  settings  designed  to  pro- 
vide students  the  opportunity  to  study  actual  problems  and  to  propose  solutions  in  the 
classroom  setting.  3  units  each.  Jaeger 

343.  Comparative  Health  Systems.  Against  the  backdrop  of  the  United  States  health 
system,  including  the  Veterans  Administration  system,  the  course  examines  the  poten- 
tial for  innovation  and  common  problems  in  health  services  delivery  from  an  international 
perspective.  3  units.  Falcone 

352.  Health  Services  for  the  Aged.  Covers  socioeconomic,  cultural,  and  demographic 
trends  affecting  health  and  medical  care  for  older  persons;  political  and  legal  develop- 
ments; health  care  facilities  and  alternatives  to  institutionalization;  geriatrics  and  geron- 
tology for  the  administrator.  3  units.  Falcone 

354.  Quality  Assurance,  Risk  Management,  and  Liability  Insurance.  A  seminar  to 
acquaint  students  with  the  theory  and  concepts  of  coordinated  quality  assurance  and  risk 

Health  Administration         125 


management  in  health  care  organizations.  Attention  is  given  to  the  steps  involved  in 
designing  and  implementing  an  effective  QA/RM  program  and  various  insurance 
mechanisms.  3  units.  Moore  and  Warren 

356.  Health  Policy  Analysis.  The  major  purpose  is  to  broaden  and  enrich  students' 
perspectives  on  the  health  system  through  an  examination  of  policy  determinants,  with 
a  focus  on  political  system  variables,  structures,  and  processes,  against  the  backdrop  of 
environmental  constraints.  3  units.  Falcone 

357.  Current  Legal  Issues  in  Health  Administration.  A  seminar  which  covers  cur- 
rent regulatory,  legislative,  and  judicial  matters  which  affect  the  administration  of  health 
services.  Emphasis  is  on  identifying  governmental  developments,  such  as  new  Medicare 
or  OSHA  regulations,  and  analyzing  their  potential  impact  on  the  field,  as  well  as  sur- 
veying possible  legal  and  administrative  responses.  Both  current  hospital  literature  and 
legal  materials,  including  the  Federal  Register,  are  used  in  class  participation.  3  units. 
McMahon  and  Warren 

358.  Cost-Benefit  Analysis.  Demonstrates  the  utility  of  logical  modes  in  management 
and  planning  decisions.  Since  this  logic  is  usually  quantifiable  within  limits,  the  course 
reviews  problem  conceptualization,  methodology,  and  techniques  for  determining  the 
costs,  benefits,  effectiveness,  and  efficacy  of  decisions  regarding  optimal  deployment  of 
resources.  3  units.  Falcone 

362.  Managed  Care.  This  course  is  designed  to  examine  the  current  state  of  develop- 
ment of  alternative  delivery  systems  (health  maintenance  organizations,  preferred  pro- 
vider organizations,  competitive  medical  plans  and  other  mechanisms  to  control  costs 
by  changing  provider  incentives)  and  to  explore  likely  future  directions  such  systems  will 
take.  3  units.  Jaeger 

371,  372.  Directed  Research.  Individual  studies  and  health  services  projects  by  ar- 
rangement. 3  units  each.  Staff 

History 

Professor  Warren  Lerner,  Chairman  (235  Allen);  Associate  Professor  Wood,  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies  (233A  Allen);  Professors  Cahow,  Cell,  Chafe,  C.  Davis,  Durden,  Gaspar, 
Kuniholm,  Mauskopf,  Miller,  Oates,  Richards,  Roland,  A.  Scott,  W.  Scott,  TePaske,  Witt, 
and  Young;  Associate  Professors  R.  Davis,  Dirlik,  English,  Gavins,  Goodwyn,  Gordon, 
Herrup,  Keyssar,  Koonz,  Nathans,  Neuschel,  and  Reddy;  Assistant  Professors  Ewald, 
Green,  Robisheaux,  and  J.  Scott;  Professors  Emeriti  Colton,  Ferguson,  Franklin,  Holley, 
Parker,  Preston,  Ropp,  and  Watson 

The  Department  of  History  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees.  Candidates  for  the  A.M.  degree  must  have  a  reading  knowledge  of  at  least  one 
ancient  or  modern  foreign  language  related  to  their  programs  of  study  and  have  completed 
successfully  a  substantial  research  paper,  or  two  seminar  papers,  normally  the  product 
of  a  year's  seminar  or  two  semester  courses.  The  paper(s)  must  be  approved  by  two  readers, 
the  supervising  professor  and  a  second  professor  from  the  graduate  staff.  Students  an- 
ticipating a  May  degree  must  have  their  papers  read  and  approved  by  April  15;  those  an- 
ticipating a  September  degree  must  have  their  papers  read  and  approved  by  August  1. 

Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  prepare  themselves  for  examina- 
tions in  four  fields,  at  least  three  of  which  shall  be  in  history.  The  choice  of  fields  is  deter- 
mined in  consultation  with  the  student's  supervisor  and  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 
The  department  offers  graduate  instruction  in  the  broad  areas  of  North  America;  Latin 
America;  Great  Britain  and  the  Commonwealth;  ancient,  medieval,  and  Renaissance  Eu- 
rope; modern  Europe;  Russia;  Japan;  China;  South  Asia;  military;  history  of  science,  tech- 
nology, and  medicine;  and  in  the  comparative  and  thematic  fields  of  women's  history, 

126         Courses  of  Instruction 


environmental  history,  diplomatic  history,  labor  history,  and  slave  societies.  The  candi- 
date for  the  Ph .  D.  degree  must  have  a  reading  knowledge  of  two  foreign  languages  to  be 
picked  in  conjunction  with  the  candidate's  supervisor.  In  certain  cases,  an  alternative  to 
the  second  language  may  be  chosen  if  approved  by  both  the  candidate's  supervisor  and 
the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  Such  an  alternative  must  take  the  form  of  successful 
completion  of  a  course  or  courses  which  would  appreciably  increase  the  candidate's 
methodological  proficiency;  such  as  a  graduate  course  in  statistics,  archaeology,  demog- 
raphy, numismatics,  cartography,  or  a  summer  training  program  for  developing  methodo- 
logical skills.  A  course  or  courses  in  a  discipline  outside  history— anthropology,  litera- 
ture, sociology,  political  science,  ecology,  geography,  etc.— will  not  necessarily  qualify  as 
an  alternative  to  a  second  language.  Also,  the  alternative  must  be  in  addition  to  any  previ- 
ous undergraduate  work  in  the  methodology.  Whether  satisfied  by  two  languages  or  by 
one  language  and  an  alternative,  the  requirement  must  be  met  prior  to  the  preliminary 
examination. 

Ancient  History.  For  courses  in  ancient  history  which  may  be  taken  for  credit  in  ei- 
ther history  or  classical  studies,  see  Classical  Studies. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

Students  may  receive  credit  for  either  semester  of  a  hyphenated  course  at  the  200  level 
without  taking  the  other  semester  if  they  obtain  written  consent  from  the  instructor. 

201S.  The  Russian  Intelligentsia  and  the  Origins  of  the  Revolution.  Origin  and  dy- 
namics of  the  Russian  revolutionary  movement,  the  intelligentsia,  and  the  emergence 
of  the  labor  movement.  3  units.  Miller 

202S.  The  Russian  Revolution.  An  analysis  of  the  Bolshevik  seizure  of  power  in  1917 
and  the  establishment  of  a  revolutionary  society  and  state  during  the  1920s.  3  units.  Miller 

207,  208.  Constitutional  History  of  Britain:  The  Rise  of  the  Common  Law.  The  ori- 
gins and  development  of  Britain's  law  and  constitution,  related  to  its  setting  in  a  chang- 
ing society.  C-L:  (for  207)  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units  each.  Herrup 

215-216.  The  Diplomatic  History  of  the  United  States.  (Not  open  to  undergraduates 
who  have  had  History  121,  122.)  6  units.  C.  Davis 

217S,  218S.  Western  Europe  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  Topics  in  political  and  social 
history:  Europe  in  1900;  the  impact  of  two  world  wars;  the  social  politics  of  the  great 
depression;  fascism  and  nazism;  economic  recovery  and  changes  after  1945. 3  units  each. 
Staff 

219S,  220S.  History  of  Science  and  Technology.  The  interaction  of  science  and  tech- 
nology in  the  Western  world  from  earliest  times  to  the  present.  3  units  each .  Mauskopfand 
Roland 

221.  Topics  in  the  Social  and  Economic  History  of  Europe,  1200-1700.  C-L:  Medieval 
and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Staff 

222.  Problems  in  the  Intellectual  History  of  the  European  Renaissance  and  Refor- 
mation. Prerequisites:  History  194  and  reading  knowledge  of  German,  French,  or  Ital- 
ian. C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Witt 

225S.  Problems  in  Comparative  Labor  History.  Common  dilemmas  and  varying  so- 
lutions in  the  cross-national  development  of  labor-management  relations,  their  politi- 
cal implications,  and  their  larger  historical  significance.  3  units.  Gordon,  Keyssar,  orReddy 

226.  Topics  in  the  Labor  History  of  the  United  States.  3  units.  Keyssar 

History         127 


227-228.  Recent  United  States  History:  Major  Political  and  Social  Movements.  C-L: 

Women's  Studies.  6  units.  Chafe 

231S,  232S.  Problems  in  the  History  of  Spain  and  the  Spanish  Empire.  3  units  each. 
TePaske 

233.  Slave  Resistance  and  Social  Control  in  New  World  Societies.  The  operation  of 
slave  societies  in  the  Americas  from  the  sixteenth  to  the  nineteenth  centuries  focusing 
on  master-slave  relations  and  slave  resistance.  3  units.  Gaspar 

234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World. 

See  C-L:  Political  Science  234S;  also  C-  L:  Cultural  Anthropology  234S  and  Sociology  234S. 
3  units.  Fox,  Gereffi,  Smith,  and  Valenzuela 

235S.  The  Antebellum  South.  The  economic,  political,  and  social  aspects  of  life  in 
the  South,  1820-1860.  3  units.  Nathans 

237S.  Europe  in  the  Early  Middle  Ages.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3 
units.  Young 

238S.  Europe  in  the  High  Middle  Ages.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3 
units.  Young 

239S.  History  of  Socialism  and  Communism.  Problems  in  the  origins  and  develop- 
ment of  socialist  and  communist  movements.  3  units.  Lerner 

241-242.  United  States  Constitutional  History.  241 :  to  1865;  242: 1865  to  the  present. 

6  units.  Cahow 

243-244.  Marxism  and  History.  Critical  examination  of  Marxist  theory  and  its  rele- 
vance to  historical  understanding  and  explanation.  6  units.  Dirlik 

245,  246.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  of  China.  3  units  each.  R.  Davis  and  Dirlik 

247.  History  of  Modern  India  and  Pakistan,  1707-1857.  Analysis  and  interpretation, 
with  special  emphasis  on  social  and  economic  change.  3  units.  Richards 

248.  History  of  Modern  India  and  Pakistan,  1857  to  the  Present.  3  units.  Richards 

249-250.  Social  and  Intellectual  History  of  the  United  States.  The  interplay  of  ideas 
and  social  practice  through  the  examination  of  attitudes  and  institutions  in  such  fields 
as  science  and  technology,  law,  learning,  and  religion.  6  units.  Holley 

253S,  254S.  European  Diplomatic  History,  1871-1945.  Origins  of  the  First  and  Second 
World  Wars,  the  diplomacy  of  the  wars,  and  the  peace  settlements  which  followed  them. 
3  units  each.  W.  Scott 

260.  Fifth  and  Fourth  Century  Greece.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  222.  3  units.  Oates 

or  Rigsby 

261.  Alexander  and  the  Hellenistic  World.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  223.  Oates 

262.  Problems  in  Soviet  History.  Studies  in  the  background  of  the  Revolution  of  1917 
and  the  history  and  politics  of  the  Soviet  state.  3  units.  Lerner 

263.  The  Roman  Republic.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  224. 3  units.  Boatwright  or  Rigsby 

264.  The  Roman  Empire.  See  C-L:  Classical  Studies  225.  3  units.  Boatwright 

265S.  Problems  in  Modern  Latin  American  History.  3  units.  Staff 

267S.  England  in  the  Sixteenth  Century.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3 
units.  Herrup 

128        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


268S.  England  in  the  Seventeenth  Century.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 
3  units.  Herrup 

269S-270S.  British  History,  Seventeenth  Century  to  the  Present.  Historiography  of 
social  structure  and  social  change:  English  Revolution,  party,  the  Industrial  Revolution, 
class  and  class  consciousness,  Victorianism,  and  the  impact  of  war  in  the  twentieth  cen- 
tury. 6  units.  Cell 

273S,  274S.  Topics  in  the  History  of  Science.  Critical  stages  in  the  evolution  of  scien- 
tific thought.  3  units  each.  Mauskopf 

277S.  The  Coming  of  the  Civil  War  in  the  United  States,  1820-1861.  3  units.  Durden 

278S.  The  Civil  War  in  the  United  States  and  Its  Aftermath,  1861-1900. 3  units.  Du  rden 

279,  280.  Health,  Healing,  and  History.  The  development  of  medicine  within  the 
broader  cultural  context  from  prehistory  to  the  twentieth  century.  Not  open  to  students 
who  have  had  History  181,  182.  3  units  each.  English 

282S.  Canada.  Topics  vary  each  semester  and  may  include  nationalism  in  Canada, 
Canadian  defense  policies,  Canadian-American  relations,  regionalism  in  Canada,  en- 
vironmental issues,  and  others.  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  282S,  Political  Science  282S, 
and  Sociology  282S.  3  units.  Cahow 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  Examination  of  feminist  modes  of 
inquiry  in  the  social  sciences.  The  relationship  of  gender  in  economic,  political,  social, 
and  cultural  systems  and  the  resulting  shifts  in  social  science  disciplines.  C-L:  Cultural 
Anthropology  284S,  Political  Science  264S,  Psychology  284S,  Sociology  284S,  and  Wom- 
en's Studies.  3  units.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  orSpenner 

285S,  286S.  Oral  History.  Research  on  race  relations  and  civil  rights  in  the  United  States 
in  the  twentieth  century  using  techniques  of  oral  history.  3  units  each .  Chafe  and  Goodwyn 

Required  Courses  for  Graduates 

301-302.  Research  Seminar  in  History.  Either  this  seminar  or  History  307-308  is  re- 
quired of  all  entering  first-year  doctoral  candidates  in  history.  6  units.  Staff 

307-308.  Seminar  in  United  States  History.  Either  this  seminar  or  History  301-302  is 
required  of  all  entering  first-year  doctoral  candidates  in  history.  6  units.  Staff 

312.  Seminar  in  the  Teaching  of  History  in  College.  The  work  in  this  course  is  intend- 
ed to  acquaint  students  with  the  problems  involved  in  teaching  history  in  college.  Required 
of  all  candidates  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  who  are  in  residence  for  two  years 
at  Duke.  As  an  alternate  method  of  meeting  this  requirement,  a  graduate  student  may, 
in  cooperation  with  a  member  of  the  faculty,  serve  a  one-semester  teaching  apprentice- 
ship. No  credit.  Supervised  by  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

314.  Historical  and  Social  Science  Methodology.  Methods  used  in  historical  research 
with  emphasis  upon  the  various  social  science  approaches.  3  units.  Neuschel 

History  314  is  required  of  all  candidates  for  the  Ph.D.  degree  who  are  in  residence  for 
two  years  at  Duke  University. 

Colloquia  and  Seminars  for  Graduates 

351-352.  Colloquia.  Each  colloquium  deals  with  an  aspect  of  history  by  means  of  read- 
ings, oral  and  written  reports,  and  discussion,  with  attention  to  bibliography.  Ad  hoc  col- 
loquia may  be  worked  out  during  registration  in  the  various  fields  represented  by  mem- 
bers of  the  graduate  faculty;  these  colloquia  do  not  appear  on  the  official  schedule  of 
courses.  In  some  instances,  students  may  take  the  equivalent  of  a  research  seminar  in  con- 


History        129 


junction  with  the  colloquium  and  will  be  credited  with  an  additional  6  units  by  register- 
ing for  371.1-372.1,  etc.  C-L:  Women's  Studies. 

371-372.  Research  Seminars.  To  be  taken  either  in  conjunction  with  colloquia  listed 
above  or  by  special  arrangement  with  appropriate  graduate  instructors  when  research 
seminars  in  a  desired  area  are  not  offered.  These  seminars  do  not  appear  on  the  official 
schedule  of  courses.  6  units.  Staff 

Independent  Study 

399.  Special  Readings.  Supervised  independent  study  and  reading.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  professor.  3  units. 

N.B.  For  the  most  current  listing  of  scheduled  courses,  please  refer  to  the  most  recent  Duke 
University  official  schedule  of  courses  printed  twice  a  year. 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

212.  The  American  Indian  in  the  Revolutionary  Era,  1760-1800 
229S,  230S.  Revolution  in  Modern  Europe,  1789-1919 
259.  Archaic  Greece 
266.  Late  Antiquity 

The  Master  of  Arts  Program  in  Humanities 

Professor  Charles  R.  Young,  Director  (history) 

The  Master  of  Arts  Program  in  Humanities  is  an  interdepartmental  program  and  is 
tailored  to  the  needs  of  individual  students.  The  candidate  defines  a  theme  and  selects 
appropriate  course  work  with  the  aid  and  approval  of  a  supervising  committee.  Thirty 
units  of  course  work  and  proficiency  in  a  foreign  language  are  required  for  completion 
of  the  program.  The  degree  may  be  earned  with  or  without  a  thesis.  The  candidate  who 
chooses  not  to  submit  a  thesis  will  submit  instead  at  least  two  substantial  papers  arising 
from  course  work  for  review  by  committee  members,  and  meets  with  them  to  discuss  his 
or  her  program  in  a  final  master's  colloquium. 

The  program  is  open  to  holders  of  undergraduate  degrees  in  any  discipline  who  can 
demonstrate  sufficient  background  in  humanities  to  permit  study  at  the  graduate  level. 
Admission  is  by  regular  application  to  the  Graduate  School.  Students  may  enroll  full  time 
or  part  time  (minimum  of  3  units  per  term) .  Students  considering  entering  the  program 
may  enroll  in  an  appropriate  graduate  course  or  courses  through  the  Office  of  Continu- 
ing Education,  at  the  same  time  making  their  interest  known  to  the  Director  of  the  Hu- 
manities Program. 

The  Master  of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies  Program 

Diane  Sasson,  Ph.D.,  Director 

This  interdisciplinary  program  allows  individuals  with  a  variety  of  professional  and 
personal  educational  interests  the  flexibility  to  pursue  their  goals  across  traditional  dis- 
ciplinary boundaries.  The  program  is  managed  by  an  interdepartmental  committee  which 
admits  students,  selects  courses,  and  determines  policy.  Students  study  primarily  on  a 
part-time  basis  and  choose  from  an  array  of  interdisciplinary  courses  developed  specifi- 
cally for  this  program.  In  addition  to  the  special  liberal  studies  courses,  students  may  se- 
lect courses  from  other  departments  in  the  Graduate  School. 

The  MALS  program  consists  of  nine  courses  and  a  final  project.  These  courses  are 
offered  during  three  academic  terms  (fall,  spring,  and  summer)  and  may  be  taken  either 
full-time  or  part-time.  For  more  information  on  specific  courses  and  other  program  re- 

130         Courses  of  Instruction 


quirements,  a  separate  bulletin  on  the  Master  of  Arts  in  Liberal  Studies  may  be  request- 
ed from  the  program  director  (120  Allen  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Caro- 
lina 27706). 

The  Ph.D.  Program  in  Literature 

Professor  Jameson,  Chairman  (Graduate  Program  in  Literature  and  French);  Professor  A. 
Patterson,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  (Graduate  Program  in  Literature  and  English); 
Professors  DeNeef  (English),  Dorfman  (Graduate  Program  in  Literature  and  Latin  Ameri- 
can Studies),  Fish  (English  and  Law),  Lentricchia  (English  and  Graduate  Program  in  Liter- 
ature), Mudimbe  (French  and  Graduate  Program  in  Literature),  Perez  Firmat  (Spanish 
and  Graduate  Program  in  Literature),  Radway  (Graduate  Program  in  Literature),  Rolleston 
(Germanic  languages  and  literature),  B.  H.  Smith  (Graduate  Program  in  Literature  and 
English),  Stewart  (French),  Thomas  (French),  and  Tompkins  (English) 

The  interdepartmental  program  leading  to  a  Ph .  D.  in  literature  offers  to  qualified  stu- 
dents the  opportunity  to  develop  individual  courses  of  study  with  a  strong  emphasis  on 
interdisciplinary  work,  literary  theory,  and  cultural  studies,  while  at  the  same  time  build- 
ing strength  in  one  or  more  of  the  national  literatures.  The  program  offers  both  introduc- 
tory courses  (the  250  series)  and  more  specialized  seminars  (the  280  series),  as  well  as 
tutorials  (300)  in  specific  research  projects  or  problems. 

For  tutorials,  advising,  and  dissertation  supervision  the  program  draws  also  on  the 
expertise  of  other  faculty  such  as  Associate  Professor  Wharton  (art);  Professor  Newton 
and  Associate  Professor  Burian  (classical  studies);  Professors  Ryals  and  L.  Patterson  (Eng- 
lish); Professor  Tetel  and  Associate  Professors  Orr  and  Kaplan  (French);  Professor  Bor- 
chardt  (German);  Assistant  Professor  Roderick  (philosophy). 

Students  entering  the  program  must  present  evidence  of  ability  to  read  one  language 
other  than  English,  and  must  acquire  reading  competence  in  a  second  language  before 
taking  their  preliminary  examinations. 

More  information  on  the  program  and  a  full  descriptive  brochure  is  available  from 
Professor  Patterson,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  305  Carr  Building,  Duke  University, 
Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

251.  History  of  Criticism.  A  historical  survey  of  critical  and  philosophical  concepts 
affecting  the  definition  and  evaluation  of  literature  from  Plato  and  Aristotle  through  the 
nineteenth  century.  3  units.  DeNeef,  Lentricchia,  or  Perez  Firmat 

252.  Criticism  and  Literary  Theory  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  Introduction  to  criti- 
cal movements,  philosophies,  and  strategies  forming  contemporary  theories  of  literature : 
deconstruction,  feminism,  formalism,  Marxism,  New  Criticism,  phenomenology,  psy- 
choanalysis, structuralism.  May  be  repeated  for  credit  according  to  change  of  content  or 
instructor.  3  units.  Jameson  or  Rolleston,  with  guest  lecturers 

253.  Philology,  Linguistics,  and  the  Roots  of  Literature.  A  survey  of  the  various  ways 
in  which  language  and  literature  interact,  with  an  introduction  to  philology  and  histori- 
cal linguistics.  3  units.  Thomas 

(The  280-290  series  implies  prior  knowledge  of  literary  theory,  past  and  present;  these  cou  rses  are 
open  to  graduate  students  and  qualified  seniors  only.) 

280.  Semiotics  for  Literature.  See  C-L:  French  223.  3  units.  Thomas 

281.  Paradigms  of  Modern  Thought.  Specialized  study  of  the  work  of  individual 
thinkers  who  have  modified  our  conceptions  of  human  reality  and  social  and  cultural  his- 
tory, with  special  emphasis  on  the  form  and  linguistic  structures  of  their  texts  considered 
as  'language  experiments."  Topics  will  vary  from  year  to  year,  including:  Marx  and  Freud; 
J.-P.  Sartre;  Walter  Benjamin;  etc.  3  units.  Jameson 

The  Ph.D.  Program  in  Literature         131 


282.  Contemporary  Literary  Theory.  Specialized  studies  in  literary  theory  from  Saus- 
surean  linguistics  to  the  present  day  (e.g.,  deconstruction,  feminism,  new  historicism, 
neopragmatism,  reception  theory).  3  units.  Fish,  Jameson,  Lentricchia,  Patterson,  orTompkins 

283.  Modernism.  Aspects  of  the  "modern,"  sometimes  with  emphasis  on  the  formal 
analysis  of  specific  literary  and  nonliterary  texts  (Joyce,  Kafka,  Mahler,  Eisenstein);  some- 
times with  a  focus  on  theories  of  modernism  ( Adorno),  or  on  the  modernism/postmoder- 
nism debate,  or  on  the  sociological  and  technological  dimensions  of  the  modern  in  its  re- 
lations to  modernization,  etc.  3  units.  Jameson  or  Lentricchia 

284.  The  Intellectual  as  Writer.  History  and  theory  of  the  literary  role  of  the  intellec- 
tual in  society  (e.g.,  in  Augustan  Rome,  the  late  middle  ages,  the  Renaissance,  America, 
Latin  America).  3  units.  Jameson,  Lentricchia,  Mudimbe,  or  Patterson 

285.  Literature  and  Ideology.  The  theoretical  problem  of  the  relationship  between 
literature  and  ideology,  explored  through  the  cultural  history  of  genres,  major  writers, 
or  aesthetic  movements.  3  units.  Jameson,  Lentricchia,  Mudimbe,  or  Patterson 

286.  Topics  in  Legal  Theory.  A  consideration  of  those  points  at  which  literary  and  le- 
gal theory  intersect  (e.g.,  matters  of  intention,  the  sources  of  authority,  the  emergence 
of  professional  obligation).  3  units.  Fish 

287.  Problems  in  Narrative  Analysis.  An  introduction  to  contemporary  theories  and 
methods  of  narrative  analysis  (Greimas,  Barthes,  Hayden  White,  etc.),  with  emphasis 
on  a  specific  area,  e.g.,  historiography,  film,  sub-genres  of  the  novel,  myth,  cognitive  dis- 
course. 3  units.  Jameson,  Mudimbe,  orRadway 

288.  Basic  Issues  in  the  History  of  Literary  Theory.  Issues  include  attempts  to  define 
literature,  divergent  views  of  its  social  functions  and  psychological  effects,  and  contem- 
porary controversies  regarding  literary  meaning  and  interpretation.  Readings  range  from 
classic  texts  in  philosophy  of  art  to  contemporary  essays  in  critical  theory.  3  units.  B.  H. 
Smith 

289.  Topics  in  Feminist  Theory.  3  units.  Radway  or  Tompkins 

290.  Topics  in  Psychoanalytic  Criticism.  3  units.  Staff 

291.  Topics  in  Popular  Culture  and  the  Media.  3  units.  Radway  or  Tompkins 

292.  Topics  in  Non-Western  Literature  and  Culture.  3  units.  Mudimbe  or  Perez  Firmat 

300.  Problems  in  the  Theory  of  Value  and  Judgment.  An  advanced  seminar  dealing 
with  classic  problems  relating  to  the  concept  of  value  and  evaluative  behavior  (e.g.,  stan- 
dards, judgments,  canon-formation,  taste),  as  illuminated  by  contemporary  work  in  crit- 
ical theory,  anthropology,  economics,  sociology,  etc.  C-L:  English  386  and  Philosophy  300. 
3  units.  B.  H.  Smith 

The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences 

Professor  Ramus  (botany)  Acting  Director ;  Professors  Costlow*  (zoology),  Forward  (zool- 
ogy), Gutknecht  (cell  biology),  McClayt  (zoology),  Osmond  (botany),  Pilkey t  (geology), 
and  SearlesJ  (botany);  Associate  Professors  C.  Bonaventura  (cell  biology),  J.  Bonaven- 
tura  (cell  biology),  Johnson  (geology),  Sullivan  (biochemistry),  and  Sutherland  (zoolo- 
gy); Assistant  Professor  Rittschof  (zoology);  Professor  Emeritus  Bookhout  (zoology) 


*On  sabbatical  leave  1  January-31  December  1989. 
tSummer  only. 
^Spring  only. 

132        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


Graduate  students  from  any  and  all  academic  disciplines  are  encouraged  to  take 
professional  training  at  the  Marine  Laboratory.  The  program  operates  year-round,  provid- 
ing course  work  in  the  marine  sciences,  an  active  seminar  program,  and  facilities  sup- 
porting dissertation  research.  Resident  graduate  students  represent  the  Departments  of 
Biochemistry,  Botany,  Cell  Biology,  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies,  Geology,  and 
Zoology.  Ordinarily,  dissertation  advisers  are  resident  as  well,  although  this  need  not  be 
the  case.  The  Marine  Laboratory  has  available  several  graduate  student  instructional  as- 
sistantships  and  fellowships  during  the  academic  year,  including  summer.  In  addition, 
tuition  credits  obtained  from  fellowship  support  may  be  applied  to  courses  given  both 
at  the  Marine  Laboratory  and  the  Durham  campus. 

Persons  interested  in  graduate  work  in  marine  sciences  should  apply  through  one 
of  the  appropriate  departments.  Forms  may  be  obtained  from  the  Graduate  School. 

Applications  for  graduate  or  undergraduate  courses  and  for  graduate  graded  research 
during  the  summer  at  the  laboratory  should  be  addressed  to  the  Admissions  Office,  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516.  Additional  information 
and  the  application  form  are  included  in  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Marine  Laborato- 
ry. The  application  for  enrollment  in  summer  courses  at  the  laboratory  should  be  accom- 
panied by  transcripts  of  undergraduate  and  graduate  work.  Applications  should  be 
received  as  early  as  possible.  Graduate  students  planning  to  enroll  in  courses  or  semi- 
nars offered  during  the  fall  or  spring  at  the  Marine  Laboratory  should  notify  the  Admis- 
sions Office  of  the  Marine  Laboratory  of  such  intent  prior  to  the  beginning  of  the  respec- 
tive semester.  Students  registering  for  graded  research  in  the  fall,  spring,  or  summer 
should  do  so  under  the  appropriate  departmental  numbers. 

The  following  courses  are  offered  at  Beaufort.  See  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Ma- 
rine Laboratory  for  the  current  schedule  of  courses. 

FALL,  SPRING,  OR  SUMMER  PROGRAM  AT  BEAUFORT 

For  Juniors,  Seniors,  and  Graduates 

203.  Physical  Oceanography.  Physical  processes  in  the  oceans:  the  physical  proper- 
ties of  seawater,  the  dynamics  of  currents,  waves  and  tides,  and  the  transmission  of  light 
and  sound  in  the  sea.  Prerequisite:  Physics  41  or  51.  C-L:  Geology  203.  2  units,  fohnson 

203L.  Marine  Ecology.  Application  of  ecological  theory  to  marine  systems.  Empha- 
sis on  hypothesis  formulation,  field  experimentation,  data  analysis,  scientific  writing, 
and  familiarity  with  current  ecological  literature.  Prerequisite:  course  in  introductory  ecol- 
ogy, invertebrate  zoology,  or  marine  botany  (phycology);  knowledge  of  statistics  helpful . 
C-L:  Zoology  203L.  6  units.  Hay  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

209S.  Marine  Sediments.  Sedimentary  processes  in  nearshore,  shelf,  and  deep-sea 
environments.  Emphasis  on  field  methods  and  laboratory  analyses.  C-L:  Geology  209S. 
4  units.  Johnson 

209, 210.  Independent  Study.  A  tutorial  designed  for  students  who  are  interested  in 
either  a  laboratory  or  a  library  project  in  biochemistry.  C-L:  Biochemistry  209,  210.  Cred- 
it to  be  arranged.  Staff 

210.  Individual  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  in  cell  biology/physiology. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  C-L:  Cell  Biology  210.  Credittobe 
arranged.  Staff 

213L.  Behavioral  Ecology.  How  ecological  factors  shape  foraging,  mating,  aggressive, 
and  social  behavior.  Laboratory  experiments  and  field  observations  from  the  Outer  Banks 
environment.  Independent  projects  and  seminars.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology. 
C-L:  Zoology  213L.  4  units.  Rubenstein  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

217L.  Biology  of  Marine  Macrophytes.  Physiology  and  ecology  of  seaweeds,  sea- 
grasses,  marshgrasses,  and  mangroves.  Biological  flux  of  carbon  and  nutrients  in  coastal 

The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences         133 


seas.  Ecological  consequences  of  photosynthetic  adaptations.  Prerequisites:  introductory 
biology  and  chemistry.  C-L:  Botany  217L.  4  units.  Ramus  and  Osmond 

218.  Barrier  Island  Ecology.  Adaptation  of  plants  to  barrier  island  migration  and  other 
physical  characteristics  of  the  coastal  environment.  Major  emphasis  will  be  placed  on 
management  of  barrier  beaches  from  Maine  to  Texas  and  the  impact  of  human  interfer- 
ence with  natural  processes.  Field  studies.  Prerequisite:  course  in  general  ecology.  C-L: 
Botany  218  and  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  218. 6  units.  Evans,  Peterson,  and  Wells 
(visiting  summer  faculty) 

219L.  Benthic  Marine  Algae.  Morphology,  reproduction,  life  histories,  systematics, 
and  natural  history  of  seaweeds.  Lectures,  laboratories,  and  fieldwork  in  ocean  and  es- 
tuaries. Prerequisite:  introductory  biology;  plant  diversity  recommended.  C-L:  Botany 
219L.  4  units.  Schneider  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

250L.  Physiology  of  Marine  Animals.  Environmental  factors,  biological  rhythms,  and 
behavioral  adaptations  in  the  comparative  physiology  of  marine  animals.  Prerequisites: 
introductory  biology  and  chemistry.  C-L:  Zoology  250L.  4  units.  Forward 

263L.  Tropical  Seaweeds.  Collection,  preservation,  description,  illustration,  and 
descriptive  ecology.  Two- week  field  study.  Prerequisite :  Biology  140L  or  equivalent  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  C-L:  Botany  263L.  2  units.  Searles 

266S.  Seminar.  C-L:  Biochemistry  266S.  2  units  or  variable.  Staff 

274L.  Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology.  Structures,  functions,  and  habits  of  invertebrate 
animals  under  natural  and  experimental  conditions.  Field  trips  included.  Prerequisite: 
introductory  biology.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Zoology  76L  or  176L.  C-L: 
Zoology  274L.  6  units.  Ruppert  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

278L.  Invertebrate  Developmental  Biology.  Gametogenesis,  fertilization,  and  de- 
velopment of  invertebrates,  with  emphasis  on  experimental  studies  of  prelarval  stages. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Zoology  278L.  6  units.  McClay  and  visiting  staff 

295S.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology:  Continental  Margin  Sedimentation.  Sediment 
composition  and  distribution  on  the  continental  margin,  with  emphasis  on  North  Caro- 
lina barrier  island/lagoon,  shelf  and  slope  environments.  The  course  includes  fieldwork 
and  laboratory  analyses  of  sediments  as  well  as  readings  and  discussion  of  the  current 
literature.  Prerequisite:  Geology  206S  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Geology  295S.  4  units. 
Johnson  and  Wells 

353, 354.  Research.  To  be  carried  on  under  the  direction  of  the  appropriate  staff  mem- 
bers. (For  graduate  students  only.)  Hours  and  credit  to  be  arranged.  C-L:  Zoology  353, 
354.  Staff 

359, 360.  Research.  Individual  investigation  in  the  various  fields  of  botany.  C-L:  Botany 
359,  360.  Credit  to  be  arranged.  All  members  of  the  Graduate  School  staff 

371, 372.  Advanced  Topics  in  Geology.  To  meet  the  individual  needs  of  graduate  stu- 
dents for  independent  study  in  various  environmental  sedimentary  fields.  1  to  3  units.  Staff 

Seminar.  Special  topics  in  the  marine  sciences.  Exploration  at  the  advanced  level  of 
current  research  in  the  marine  sciences.  Subject  dependent  on  faculty  and  student  in- 
terests. C-L:  Biochemistry  265S,  266S;  Botany  295S,  296S;  and  Zoology  295S,  296S.  2  units. 
Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

245L.  Macromolecules,  Ecology,  and  Evolution.  (C-L:  Biochemistry  245L.) 
247L.  Plant  Ecology.  (C-L:  Botany  247L.) 


134         Courses  of  Instruction 


276.  Comparative  and  Evolutionary  Biochemistry.  (C-L:  Biochemistry  276.) 

Mathematics 

Professor  Reed,  Chairman  (215  Physics);  Professor  Beale,  Director  of Graduate  Studies  (124B 
Physics);  Professors  Allard,  Bryant,  Griffiths,  Schaeffer,  Shoenfield,  Warner,  and  Weis- 
feld;  Associate  Professors  Burdick,  Hodel,  Kitchen,  Kraines,  Lawler,  Moore,  Morrison, 
Pardon,  Saper,  Scoville,  Smith,  Stern,  and  Venakides;  Assistant  Professors  Cheney,  Gard- 
ner, Layton,  Nance,  Papanicolaou,  and  Schoen;  Adjunct  Professor  Chandra;  Visiting 
Professor  Persson;  Visiting  Associate  Professors  Bonilla  and  Pittie 

Graduate  work  in  the  Department  of  Mathematics  is  offered  leading  to  the  A.M.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees.  Admission  to  these  programs  is  based  on  the  applicant's  undergraduate 
academic  record,  level  of  preparation  for  graduate  study,  the  Graduate  Record  Examina- 
tion, and  letters  of  recommendation. 

All  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  candidates  are  required  to  pass  a  qualifying  examination  after 
completing  their  first  year  of  graduate  study.  The  A.M.  degree  with  a  major  in  mathematics 
is  awarded  upon  completion  of  30  units  of  graded  course  work  and  passing  the  qualify- 
ing examination.  A  thesis  may  be  substituted  for  6  units  of  course  work  only  under  spe- 
cial circumstances. 

Soon  after  the  student  who  is  pursuing  a  Ph.D.  degree  passes  the  qualifying  exami- 
nation, the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  appoints  a  committee  of  two  graduate  faculty 
members  who  determine  the  conditions  to  be  met  by  the  student  before  he  or  she  takes 
the  preliminary  examination .  Normally,  this  committee  forms  the  nucleus  of  the  student's 
advisory  committee.  The  conditions  may  include  a  reading  knowledge  of  one  or  more 
foreign  languages  appropriate  to  the  student's  intended  area  of  specialization,  an  ap- 
propriate level  of  computer  programming  proficiency,  or  specific  course  work. 

Candidacy  for  the  Ph.D.  is  established  by  passing  an  oral  preliminary  examination. 
The  preliminary  examination  is  normally  taken  at  the  beginning  of  the  third  year.  The 
preliminary  examination  is  conducted  by  a  committee  selected  by  the  rules  of  the  Graduate 
School  and  the  department .  The  examination  can,  at  the  student's  option,  consist  of  ques- 
tions based  either  on  the  student's  course  work  at  Duke  or  on  the  specific  area  of  research 
plus  a  minor  subject  selected  by  the  student. 

After  admission  to  candidacy,  the  Ph.D.  degree  is  awarded  on  the  basis  of  the  stu- 
dent's scholarly  ability  as  demonstrated  by  the  dissertation  and  its  defense.  The  disser- 
tation is  the  most  important  requirement  in  the  award  of  the  Ph.D.  degree. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Introduction  to  Algebraic  Structures  I.  Laws  of  composition,  groups,  rings; 
isomorphism  theorems;  axiomatic  treatment  of  natural  numbers;  polynomial  rings;  di- 
vision and  Euclidean  algorithms.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  121 . 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  104  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

201.  Introduction  to  Algebraic  Structures  II.  Vector  spaces,  matrices  and  linear  trans- 
formations, fields,  extensions  of  fields,  construction  of  real  numbers.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  200,  or  Mathematics  121  and  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

203.  Basic  Analysis  I.  Topology  of  Rn,  continuous  functions,  uniform  convergence, 
compactness,  infinite  series,  theory  of  differentiation,  and  integration.  Not  open  to  stu- 
dents who  have  had  Mathematics  139.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  104.  3  units.  Staff 

204.  Basic  Analysis  II.  Inverse  and  implicit  function  theorems,  differential  forms,  in- 
tegrals on  surfaces,  Stokes'  theorem.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics 
140.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  203.  3  units.  Staff 


Mathematics         135 


205.  Topology.  Elementary  topology,  surfaces,  covering  spaces,  Euler  characteristic, 
fundamental  group,  homology  theory,  exact  sequences.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  104. 
3  units.  Staff 

206.  Differential  Geometry.  Geometry  of  curves  and  surfaces,  the  Serret-Frenet  frame 
of  a  space  curve,  the  Gauss  curvature,  Codazzi-Mainardi  equations,  the  Gauss-Bonnet 
formula.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  104.  3  units.  Staff 

221.  Numerical  Analysis.  Prerequisites:  knowledge  of  an  algorithmic  programming 
language,  intermediate  calculus  including  some  differential  equations,  and  Mathemat- 
ics 104.  See  C-L:  Computer  Science  221.  3  units.  Gardner,  Greenside,  or  Szyld 

222.  Numerical  Differential  Equations.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  221.  See  C-L: 
Computer  Science  222.  3  units.  Gardner,  Greenside,  Rose,  or  Szyld 

223.  Numerical  Linear  Algebra.  Prerequisite:  Computer  Science  221  or  equivalent. 
See  C-L:  Computer  Science  223.  3  units.  Gardner,  Greenside,  Rose,  or  Szyld 

230.  Mathematical  Methods  in  Physics  and  Engineering  I.  Heat  and  wave  equations, 
initial  and  boundary  value  problems,  Fourier  series,  Fourier  transforms,  potential  the- 
ory. Not  open  to  students  who  have  had  Mathematics  114.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics 

103  and  104  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Staff 

231.  Mathematical  Methods  in  Physics  and  Engineering  II.  Green's  functions,  par- 
tial differential  equations  in  several  space  dimensions.  Complex  variables,  analytic  func- 
tions, Cauchy's  theorem,  residues,  contour  integrals.  Other  topics  may  include  method 
of  characteristics,  perturbation  theory,  calculus  of  variations,  or  stability  of  equilibria. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  114  or  Mathematics  230.  3  units.  Staff 

233.  Asymptotic  and  Perturbation  Methods.  Asymptotic  solution  of  linear  and  non- 
linear ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations.  Asymptotic  evaluation  of  integrals.  Sin- 
gular perturbation.  Boundary  layer  theory.  Multiple  scale  analysis.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  114  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

234.  Mathematics  for  Quantum  Mechanics.  Hilbert  space,  self-adjoint  operators,  the 
mathematical  model  of  quantum  mechanics,  commutation  relations,  spectral  analysis  of 
Hamiltonians,  time  dependent  scattering  theory.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  230  and  231 
or  equivalents.  3  units.  Staff 

235.  Topics  in  Mathematical  Physics.  Group  representations,  perturbation  theory, 
quantum  field  theory,  statistical  mechanics,  or  general  relativity.  Prerequisite:  Mathemat- 
ics 231  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

238, 239.  Topics  in  Applied  Mathematics.  Conceptual  basis  of  applied  mathematics, 
combinatorics,  graph  theory,  game  theory,  mathematical  programming,  or  numerical  so- 
lution of  ordinary  and  partial  differential  equations.  Prerequisites :  Mathematics  103  and 

104  or  equivalents.  6  units.  Staff 

240.  Applied  Stochastic  Processes.  Applications  of  probability  theory  and  stochas- 
tic processes  to  economics  and  environmental  science.  Markoff  chains,  optional  stopping, 
queuing  theory,  decision  theory,  birth  and  death  processes,  and  the  Monte  Carlo  meth- 
od. Prerequisite:  Mathematics  135  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

241 .  Linear  Models.  Geometric  interpretation,  multiple  regression,  analysis  of  vari- 
ance, experimental  design,  analysis  of  covariance.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  136  or 
equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

242.  Multivariate  Statistics.  Multinormal  distributions,  multivariate  general  linear 
model,  Hotelling's  T2  statistic,  Roy  union-intersection  principle,  principal  components, 
canonical  analysis,  factor  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  241  or  equivalent.  3units. 
Staff 

136        Courses  of  Instruction 


245.  Functional  Analysis  for  Scientific  Computing.  See  C-L:  Computer  Science  245. 
3  units.  Rose  or  Szyld 

250.  Introductory  Mathematical  Logic.  First-order  logic,  completeness  theorem,  com- 
pactness theorem,  introduction  to  recursive  functions,  incompleteness  theorem.  Prereq- 
uisite: Mathematics  187  or  Mathematics  200  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

251.  Set  Theory  I.  Zermelo-Fraenkel  axioms,  ordinals  and  cardinals,  models  of  set 
theory,  constructive  sets.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  187  or  Mathematics  200  or  equiva- 
lent. 3  units.  Staff 

252.  Set  Theory  II.  Forcing,  large  cardinals,  determinateness,  and  other  advanced 
topics.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  251.  3  units.  Staff 

253.  Recursion  Theory.  Register  and  Turing  machines;  recursive  functions  and  sets; 
enumeration  theorem;  recursively  enumerable  sets;  arithmetical  and  analytic  hierarchies; 
degrees;  unsolvable  problems;  complexity  theory.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  187  or 
Mathematics  200  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

258,  259.  Topics  in  Logic.  Model  theory,  recursion  theory,  set  theory,  or  other  fields 
of  logic.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  250  or  equivalent.  6  units.  Staff 

260.  Groups,  Rings,  and  Fields.  Groups  including  nilpotent  and  solvable  groups, 
p-groups  and  Sylow  theorems;  rings  and  modules  including  classification  of  modules 
over  a  PID  and  applications  to  linear  algebra;  fields  including  extensions  and  Galois  theory. 
Prerequisite:  Mathematics  201  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

261.  Commutative  Algebra.  Extension  and  contraction  of  ideals,  modules  of  fractions, 
primary  decomposition,  integral  dependence,  chain  conditions,  affine  algebraic  varie- 
ties, Dedekind  domains,  completions.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  260  or  equivalent.  3 
units.  Staff 

268, 269.  Topics  in  Algebra.  Algebraic  number  theory,  algebraic  K-theory,  homolog- 
ical  algebra,  or  topological  algebra.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  260.  6  units.  Staff 

271.  Algebraic  Topology.  Fundamental  group  and  covering  spaces,  homology  groups 
of  cell  complexes,  classification  of  compact  surfaces,  the  cohomology  ring,  andPoincare 
duality  for  manifolds.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  171S  and  200  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Staff 

273.  Algebraic  Geometry.  Local  theory:  affine  varieties,  algebraic  and  topological  the- 
ory of  singularities.  Global  theory  over  the  complex  numbers:  Riemann  surfaces,  Jaco- 
bians,  Kahler  manifolds,  Hodge  theory,  theorems  of  Lefschetz  and  Kodaira.  Prerequi- 
site: Mathematics  261  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

275.  Differential  Geometry.  Differentiable  manifolds,  fiber  bundles,  connections,  cur- 
vature, characteristic  classes,  Riemannian  geometry  including  submanifolds  and  varia- 
tions of  the  length  integral,  complex  manifolds,  homogeneous  spaces.  Prerequisites: 
Mathematics  204  and  260  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Staff 

276.  Topics  in  Differential  Geometry.  Lie  groups  and  related  topics,  Hodge  theory, 
index  theory,  minimal  surfaces,  Yang-Mills  fields,  exterior  differential  systems,  several 
complex  variables.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  275  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

277.  Topics  in  Algebraic  Geometry.  Projective  varieties  and  the  theory  of  extremal  rays, 
classification  of  surfaces  and  higher-dimensional  varieties,  variation  of  Hodge  structure 
and  moduli  problems,  schemes  and  arithmetic  varieties,  or  other  advanced  topics.  Prereq- 
uisite: Mathematics  273  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

278, 279.  Topics  in  Topology.  Point  set,  algebraic,  geometric,  or  differential  topology. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  6  units.  Staff 

Mathematics        137 


280.  Differential  Analysis.  Differential  calculus,  ordinary  differential  equations, 
flows,  Lie  bracket,  total  differential  equations,  first  order  partial  differential  equations, 
deRham  theory.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  140  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

281.  Real  Analysis  I.  Measures,  Lebesgue  integral,  LP-spaces,  Daniell  integral, 
differentiation  theory,  product  measures.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  204  or  equivalent. 
3  units.  Staff 

282.  Real  Analysis  II.  Metric  spaces,  fixed  point  theorems,  Baire  category  theorem, 
Banach  spaces,  fundamental  theorems  of  functional  analysis,  Fourier  transform.  Prereq- 
uisite: Mathematics  281  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

283.  Linear  Operators.  Bounded  and  unbounded  operators  on  Banach  and  Hilbert 
spaces,  symmetric  and  self-adjoint  operators,  Banach  algebras,  spectral  theorem,  uni- 
tary groups,  compact  operators,  Fredholm  theory,  accretive  operators,  semigroups  of  oper- 
ators. Prerequisite:  Mathematics  282  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

284.  Topics  in  Functional  Analysis.  Advanced  spectral  analysis,  operator  algebras, 
nonlinear  functional  analysis,  or  structure  theory  of  Banach  spaces.  Prerequisite: 
Mathematics  282  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

285.  Complex  Analysis.  Complex  calculus,  conformal  mapping,  Riemann  mapping 
theorem,  Riemann  surfaces.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  140  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

286.  Topics  in  Complex  Analysis.  Geometric  function  theory,  function  algebras,  sever- 
al complex  variables,  uniformization,  or  analytic  number  theory.  Prerequisite:  Mathemat- 
ics 285  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

288, 289.  Topics  in  Analysis.  Harmonic  analysis,  dynamical  systems,  geometric  meas- 
ure theory,  or  calculus  of  variations.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  281  and  285  or  equiva- 
lents. 6  units.  Staff 

290.  Probability.  Random  variables,  independence,  expectations,  laws  of  large  num- 
bers, central  limit  theorem,  Markoff  chains.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  281  or  equivalent. 
3  units.  Staff 

293,  294.  Topics  in  Probability  Theory.  Ergodic  theory,  multiparameter  stochastic 
processes  and  random  fields,  stochastic  control  theory,  or  stochastic  differential  equa- 
tions. Prerequisite:  Mathematics  290  or  consent  of  instructor.  6  units.  Staff 

295.  Fourier  Analysis  and  Distribution  Theory.  Tempered  distributions,  Fourier  trans- 
forms, classical  inequalities,  and  oscillatory  integrals.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics  204  and 
285  or  equivalents.  3  units.  Staff 

296.  Ordinary  Differential  Equations.  Existence  and  uniqueness  theorems  for  non- 
linear systems,  well-posedness,  two-point  boundary  value  problems,  phase  plane  dia- 
grams, stability,  dynamical  systems,  and  strange  attractors.  Prerequisites:  Mathematics 
104,  111  or  131,  and  203  or  139.  3  units.  Staff 

297.  Partial  Differential  Equations  I.  Fundamental  solutions  of  linear  partial  differen- 
tial equations,  hyperbolic  equations,  characteristics,  Cauchy-Kowalevski  theorem,  propa- 
gation of  singularities.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics  204  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

298.  Partial  Differential  Equations  II.  Elliptic  boundary  value  problems,  regularity 
theorems,  the  diffusion  equation,  and  nonlinear  equations.  Prerequisite:  Mathematics 
297  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

299.  Topics  in  Partial  Differential  Equations.  Hyperbolic  conservation  laws,  pseudo- 
differential  operators,  variational  inequalities,  theoretical  continuum  mechanics.  Prereq- 
uisite: 298  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

378-379.  Current  Research  in  Topology.  6  units.  Staff 
138        Courses  of  Instruction 


388,  389.  Current  Research  in  Analysis.  6  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
358-359.  Current  Research  in  Logic 
368-369.  Current  Research  in  Algebra 
387.  Current  Research  in  Mathematical  Physics 

Program  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies 

Professor  L.  Patterson,  Chairman  (402  Allen) 

Professor  Charles  R.  Young,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  (102  West  Duke) 

The  graduate  Program  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  is  an  interdisciplinary 
program  administered  by  the  Duke  University  Center  for  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  In  consultation  with  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  students  in  the  program 
select  courses  in  art,  history,  music,  philosophy,  religion,  language,  and  literature  (clas- 
sical studies,  English,  German,  and  Romance  languages).  For  descriptions  of  the  individu- 
al courses  see  the  listings  under  the  specified  department. 

DEPARTMENT  OF  ART  AND  ART  HISTORY 

230S.  Medieval  and  Byzantine  Art  and  Architecture.  Bruzelius  or  Wharton 

232S.  Romanesque  and  Gothic  Art  and  Architecture.  Bruzelius 

234.  Medieval  Architecture.  Bruzelius 

242S.  Studies  in  Italian  Renaissance  Art.  Spencer 

243S.  Studies  in  Northern  Art.  van  Migroet 

DEPARTMENT  OF  CLASSICAL  STUDIES 

221.  Medieval  Latin.  Newton 

DEPARTMENT  OF  ENGLISH 

208.  History  of  the  English  Language.  Butters,  Nygard,  or  Tetel 

212.  Middle  English  Literature:  1100  to  1500.  Fish,  Gopen,  Nygard,  or  I.  Patterson 

221.  Renaissance  Prose  and  Poetry:  1500  to  1660.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  Schwartz,  orC.  Williams 

225.  Renaissance  Drama:  1500  to  1642.  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  or  G.  Williams 

312.  Studies  in  Middle  English  Literature.  Fish,  Nygard,  or  L.  Patterson 

315.  Studies  in  Chaucer.  Fish,  Nygard,  or  L.  Patterson 

321.  Studies  in  Renaissance  Literature.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  Randall,  Schwartz,  or  G.  Williams 

324.  Studies  in  Shakespeare.  A.  Patterson,  Porter,  orG.  Williams 

329.  Studies  in  Milton.  DeNeef,  Fish,  A.  Patterson,  or  Schwartz 

DEPARTMENT  OF  GERMANIC  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURE 

205,  206.  Middle  High  German.  Rasmussen 
215S.  Seventeenth-Century  Literature.  Borchardt 
216.  History  of  the  German  Language.  Rasmussen 
217S.  Renaissance  and  Reformation  Literature.  Borchardt 

DEPARTMENT  OF  HISTORY 

207.  Constitutional  History  of  Britain:  The  Rise  of  the  Common  Law.  Herrup 

221.  Topics  in  the  Social  and  Economic  History  of  Europe,  1200-1700.  Staff 

222.  Problems  in  the  Intellectual  History  of  the  European  Renaissance  and  Reformation.  Witt 
237S.  Europe  in  the  Early  Middle  Ages.  Young 

238S.  Europe  in  the  High  Middle  Ages.  Young 

267S-268S.  From  Medieval  to  Early  Modern  England.  Herrup 

DEPARTMENT  OF  MUSIC 

211,  212.  Notation.  Higgins  or  Williams 

222.  Music  in  the  Middle  Ages.  Higgins  or  Seebass 

223.  Music  in  the  Renaissance.  Higgins  or  Silbiger 

317S.  Seminar  in  the  History  of  Music.  (Topics  vary.)  Staff 
341S.  History  of  Music  Theory  to  Rameau.  Silbiger 


Program  in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies         139 


351S.  Studies  in  Musical  Iconography.  Seebass 
361S.  Music  Organology.  Seebass  or  Williams 

DEPARTMENT  OF  PHILOSOPHY 

218S.  Medieval  Philosophy.  Mahoney 

219S.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Philosophy.  Mahoney 

DEPARTMENT  OF  RELIGION 

219.  Augustine.  Clark 

236.  Luther  and  the  Reformation  in  Germany.  Steinmetz 

241.  Problems  in  Reformation  Theology.  Steinmetz 

334.  Theology  and  Reform  in  the  Later  Middle  Ages.  Steinmetz 

337  Theology  of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas.  Staff 

338.  Calvin  and  the  Reformed  Tradition.  Steinmetz 

339.  The  Radical  Reformation.  Steinmetz 

DEPARTMENT  OF  ROMANCE  STUDIES 

French 

211.  History  of  the  French  Language.  Hull 

240.  Old  French  Literature.  Solterer 

248.  French  Literature  of  the  Seventeenth  Century.  Ferrell 

325.  French  Prose  of  the  Sixteenth  Century.  Tetel 

326.  Topics  in  Renaissance  Poetry.  Tetel 
391,  392.  French  Seminar  (medieval  and  Renaissance  topics).  Tetel  and  staff 

Italian 

284,  285.  Dante.  Caserta 

Spanish 

210.  History  of  the  Spanish  Language.  Garci-Gbmez 
251.  The  Origins  of  Spanish  Prose  Fiction.  Wardropper 

253.  Cervantes.  Wardropper 

254.  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age.  Wardropper 
258S.  Spanish  Lyric  Poetry  before  1700.  Wardropper 
391,  392.  Hispanic  Seminar  (medieval  and  Renaissance  topics).  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 

Classical  Studies  327.  Seminar  in  Byzantine  History 

English  310.  Studies  in  Old  English  Literature 

English  383.  Textual  Criticism 

Religion  206.  Christian  Mysticism  in  the  Middle  Ages 

Religion  251.  The  Counter-Reformation  and  the  Development  of  Catholic  Dogma 

Religion  344.  Zwingli  and  the  Origins  of  Reformed  Theology 

Microbiology  and  Immunology 

Professor  Joklik,  Chairman  (414A  Jones);  Professor  Willett,  Director  of Graduate  Studies  (420 
Jones);  Professors  Amos,  Bastia,  Bolognesi,  R.  Buckley,  Cresswell,  McClay,  Metzgar, 
Nevins,  Osterhout,  Rosse,  Seigler,  Ward,  and  Wheat;  Associate  Professors  Adams,  Corley, 
Dawson,  Endow,  Greene,  Haynes,  Keene,  Linney,  Mitchell,  Ruderman,  and  Sage;  As- 
sistant Professors  Argon,  C.  E.  Buckley,  Finn,  Kreuzer,  Ostrowski,  Pickup,  and  Pisetsky; 
Associate  Medical  Research  Professors  Balber  and  Miller;  Assistant  Medical  Research 
Professors  Burdert  and  Singer 

The  department  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  degree.  Research  programs 
are  available  in  many  areas  of  molecular  prokaryotic  and  eukaryotic  genetics  and  cell 
biology— molecular  viology,  viral  oncology,  cellular  differentiation  and  development,  tu- 
mor cell  biology,  immunogenetics,  molecular  and  cellular  immunology,  and  mycology. 
The  department  is  also  a  participating  member  of  the  interdisciplinary  University  Pro- 
grams in  Genetics,  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  and  the  Medical  Scientist  Training 
Program. 


140         Courses  of  Instruction 


Undergraduate  preparation  in  the  biological  and  physical  sciences  and  in  biochemis- 
try is  required.  A  brochure  describing  the  Ph.D.  degree  program,  prerequisites  for  ad- 
mission, and  research  in  the  department  may  be  obtained  by  writing  the  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies,  Box  3020,  Duke  University  Medical  Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina 
27710. 

214.  Fundamentals  of  Electron  Microscopy.  Introduction  to  the  basics  of  transmis- 
sion electron  microscopy.  Specimen  preparation  techniques  include:  grid  preparation, 
negative  staining,  metal  shadowing,  nucleic  acid  spreading,  embedding,  and  thin  sec- 
tioning. Students  gain  experience  in  the  use  of  the  ultramicrotome  and  electron  micro- 
scope by  working  on  their  own  projects.  Additional  techniques  included  are  ultra- 
cryotomy  immunoelectron  microscopy,  freeze-fracture,  scanning  electron  microscopy, 
and  X-ray  spectroscopy.  3  units.  Miller 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation.  See  C-L:  Cell  Biology  219;  also 
C-L:  Biochemistry  219  and  Pathology  219.  Counceand  staff 

221.  Medical  Microbiology.  An  intensive  study  of  common  bacteria,  viruses,  fun- 
gi, and  parasites  which  cause  disease  in  humans.  The  didactic  portion  of  the  course  fo- 
cuses on  the  nature  and  biological  properties  of  microorganisms  causing  disease,  the  man- 
ner of  their  multiplication,  and  their  interaction  with  the  entire  host  as  well  as  specific 
organs  and  cells.  4  units.  Joklik  and  staff 

244.  Principles  of  Immunology.  An  introduction  to  the  molecular  and  cellular  basis 
of  the  immune  response.  Topics  include  anatomy  of  the  lymphoid  system,  lymphocyte 
biology,  antigen-antibody  interactions,  humoral  and  cellular  effector  mechanisms,  and 
control  of  immune  responses.  Prerequisites:  Biology  160  and  Chemistry  152  and  consent 
of  instructor.  C-L:  Zoology  244.  3  units.  Amos,  McClay,  and  staff 

246S.  Parasitic  Diseases.  Topics  in  the  physiology  and  immunology  of  major  human 
and  animal  parasites  with  an  emphasis  on  protozoa  and  schistosomes.  Extensive  read- 
ing in  and  discussion  of  current  literature.  Basic  parasitology  developed  in  introductory 
readings  and  lectures.  Prerequisites:  Microbiology  and  Immunology  244  or  291,  and  Bio- 
chemistry 227  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Balber 

252.  General  Virology  and  Viral  Oncology.  The  first  half  of  the  course  will  be  devot- 
ed to  a  discussion  of  the  structure  and  replication  of  mammalian  and  bacterial  viruses. 
The  second  half  deals  specifically  with  tumor  viruses,  which  are  discussed  in  terms  of 
the  virus-cell  interaction,  the  relationship  of  virus  infection  to  neoplasia,  and  the  role  of 
the  immunological  response  to  tumor  virus  infection.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 4  units.  Keene  and  staff 

259.  Molecular  Biology  I:  Protein  and  Membrane  Structure/Function.  See  C-L:  The 
University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology;  also  C-L:  Biochemistry  259  and  Cell 
Biology  259.  3  units.  Erickson  and  staff 

268.  Molecular  Biology  II:  Nucleic  Acids.  See  C-L:  Biochemistry  268;  also  C-L:  Cell 
Biology  268,  The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  and  The  University 
Program  in  Genetics.  4  units.  Modrich  and  staff 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology.  See  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecu- 
lar Biology;  alsoC-L:  Botany  269,  Cell  Biology  269,  andZoology  269. 3units.  McClay  and  staff 

291 .  Comprehensive  Immunology.  An  intensive  course  in  the  biology  of  the  immune 
system  and  the  structure  and  function  of  its  component  parts.  Major  topics  discussed  are : 
properties  of  antigens;  specificity  of  antibody  molecules  and  their  biologic  functions;  cells 
and  organs  of  the  lymphoid  system;  structure  and  function  of  complement;  inflamma- 
tion and  nonspecific  effector  mechanisms;  cellular  interactions  and  soluble  mediators  in 
lymphocyte  activation,  replication,  and  differentiation;  regulation  of  immune  responses; 

Microbiology  and  Immunology         141 


neoplasia  and  the  immune  system;  molecular  structure  and  genetic  organization  of  (a) 
immunoglobulins,  (b)  histocompatibility  antigens,  and  T-cell  receptor.  4  units.  Argon,  Finn, 
and  staff 

For  Graduates 

304.  Molecular  Membrane  Biology.  An  advanced  seminar  course  covering  selected 
aspects  of  current  research  on  biogenesis  and  dynamics  of  various  cellular  membranes. 
Emphasis  will  be  on  the  cell  biology  of  the  immune  system.  Discussion  topics  will  repre- 
sent the  following  areas:  biosynthesis  of  membrane  proteins;  intracellular  transport  vesi- 
cles; endocytosis;  signal  transduction  across  the  plasma  membrane;  intracellular  or- 
ganelles and  protein  sorting;  cell  interactions  in  differentiation .  Prerequisite :  Microbiology 
269  or  consent  of  instructor.  2  units.  Argon  and  Cresswell 

310.  Molecular  Development.  Selected  topics  of  current  research  using  molecular 
and  genetic  approaches  to  study  development  and  developmental  gene  regulation  in  eu- 
karyotes.  Lectures  and  student  presentations  of  research  with  various  developmental  sys- 
tems (e.g.,  C.  elegans,  Drosophila,  mouse  teratocarcinoma  cells,  and  mouse  embryos) 
will  be  included  in  the  course.  2  units.  Linney  and  staff 

324.  Topics  in  Molecular  Genetics.  An  advanced  treatment  of  selected  topics  and  re- 
cent developments  in  molecular  genetics.  2  units.  Staff 

325.  Medical  Mycology.  Comprehensive  lecture  and  laboratory  coverage  of  all  the 
fungi  pathogenic  for  humans.  Practical  aspects  as  well  as  future  trends  in  the  mycology, 
immunology,  diagnosis,  pathogenesis,  and  epidemiology  of  each  mycotic  agent  will  be 
explored .  There  will  be  several  invited  lecturers,  each  an  internationally  recognized  scien- 
tist, discussing  his  or  her  particular  area  of  mycological  expertise  and  current  research. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  4  units.  Mitchell 

330.  Medical  Immunology.  A  comprehensive  course  in  medical  immunology  which 
attempts  to  define  the  role  that  immunology  plays  in  the  etiology,  diagnosis,  nosology, 
and  therapy  of  human  disease.  6  units.  Ward  and  staff 

331.1-331.8.  Microbiology  Seminar.  Current  topics  in  microbiology  with  seminars 
presented  by  students,  faculty,  and  outside  speakers.  Required  course  for  all  students 
specializing  in  microbiology.  1  unit  each.  Staff 

332.1-332.8.  Immunology  Seminar.  Current  topics  in  immunology  with  seminars 
presented  by  students,  faculty,  and  outside  speakers.  Required  course  for  all  students 
specializing  in  immunology.  1  unit  each.  Staff 

336.  Contemporary  Topics  in  Immunogenetics.  Selected  themes  in  immunogenet- 
ics  with  special  emphasis  on  molecular  approaches.  The  major  areas  discussed  are:  the 
nature,  interaction,  and  expression  of  immunoglobulin  genes  and  T-cell  receptor  genes, 
the  genes  of  the  major  histocompatibility  complex,  and  the  genes  of  the  T/t  complex.  The 
central  ideas  discussed  include  the  manner  in  which  cells  recognize  and  interact  with  each 
other  in  phylogeny,  ontogeny,  and  in  differentiation;  how  gene  families  evolve  and  in- 
teract; and  how  information  about  these  complex  genetic  systems  is  used  in  basic  research 
and  in  clinical  medicine.  Prerequisite:  Microbiology  and  Immunology  244  or  291  or  330 
or  equivalent.  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  2  units.  Amos  and  Ward 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
234.  Introduction  to  Biostatistical  Methods 
236.  Statistical  Methods  in  Human  Genetics 
282.  Molecular  Microbiology 
323.  Topics  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology 

142        Courses  of  Instruction 


Music 

Professor  Silbiger,  Acting  Chairman  (105  Mary  Duke  Biddle  Music  Building);  Associate 
Professor  Seebass,  Acting  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  (054  Mary  Duke  Biddle  Music  Build- 
ing); Professor  Williams;  Associate  Professors  Jaf  fe  and  Todd;  Assistant  Professors  Bart- 
let,  Gilliam,  Higgins,  and  Hill;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Druesedow,  Director  of  Mu- 
sic Library 

The  Department  of  Music  offers  graduate  programs  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees  in  musicology,  the  A . M .  degree  in  composition,  and  the  A.M.  degree  in  perfor- 
mance practice.  The  department  has  traditionally  emphasized  the  study  of  music  with- 
in the  framework  of  cultural  and  intellectual  history.  To  this  has  been  added  more  recently 
an  emphasis  on  performance  practice.  In  addition,  there  is  a  strong  interest,  within  both 
the  composition  and  musicology  programs,  in  opera  and  musical  theater.  Students  are 
encouraged  to  include  work  outside  their  main  area  of  concentration  in  their  degree 
programs. 

Nondegree  students  and  especially  graduate  students  from  other  departments  may 
be  admitted  to  graduate  courses  by  consent  of  the  instructor,  according  to  their  level  of 
achievement  in  the  proposed  area  of  study.  Students  may  be  admitted  to  the  Program 
in  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies  (see  section  on  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies) . 
A  reading  knowledge  of  one  foreign  language  is  required  for  the  A.M.  in  composition, 
musicology,  and  performance  practice;  a  minimum  of  two  languages  is  required  for  the 
Ph.D.  (one  of  which  will  normally  need  to  be  German).  For  many  dissertation  topics  a 
third  language  may  be  required. 

A  detailed  description  of  the  requirements  for  the  A.M.  and  Ph .  D.  is  available  upon 
request  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

201.  Introduction  to  Musicology.  Methods  of  research  on  music  and  its  history,  in- 
cluding studies  of  musical  and  literary  sources,  iconography,  performance  practice,  eth- 
nomusicology,  and  historical  analysis,  with  special  attention  to  the  interrelationships  of 
these  approaches.  3  units.  Druesedow  or  Seebass 

203.  Proseseminar  in  Performance  Practice.  Critical  methods  in  the  study  of  histori- 
cal performance  practice,  including  the  evaluation  of  evidence  provided  by  musical  and 
theoretical  sources,  archival  and  iconographic  materials,  instruments,  and  sound  record- 
ings. Current  issues  regarding  the  performance  practice  for  music  from  the  middle  ages 
to  the  twentieth  century.  3  units.  Silbiger 

211, 212.  Notation.  A  comprehensive  course  tracing  the  development  and  changing 
function  of  musical  notation  from  ca.  900toca.  1900,  including  plainchant  notations,  black 
notations,  white  notations,  the  invention  of  printing  (particularly  movable  type  and  en- 
graving), keyboard  and  lute  tablatures,  scores.  6  units.  Higgins  or  Williams 

213.  Theories  and  Notation  of  Contemporary  Music.  The  diverse  languages  of  con- 
temporary music  and  their  roots  in  the  early  twentieth  century,  with  emphasis  on  the  prob- 
lems and  continuity  of  musical  language.  Recent  composers  and  their  stylistic  progeni- 
tors (e.g.,  Ligeti,  Bartok,  and  Berg;  Carter,  Schoenberg,  Ives  and  Copland;  Crumb, 
Messiaen,  and  Webern;  Cage,  Varese,  Cowell  and  Stockhausen).  3  units.  Jaffe 

215.  Music  Analysis.  Historical,  philosophical,  and  ideological  issues  raised  by  mu- 
sic analysis.  Intensive  study  of  harmony  and  voice  leading  in  the  works  of  major  tonal 
composers,  with  emphasis  on  the  analytic  approach  of  Heinrich  Schenker.  3  units.  Hill 
or  Todd 

Courses  dealing  with  selected  topics  in  the  period  concerned,  at  a  level  between 
simple  surveys  and  advanced  seminars: 


Music        143 


222.  Music  in  the  Middle  Ages.  3  units.  Higgins  or  Seebass 

223.  Music  in  the  Renaissance.  3  units.  Higgins  or  Silbiger 

224.  Music  in  the  Baroque  Era.  3  units.  Silbiger  or  Williams 

225.  Music  in  the  Classic  Era.  3  units.  Bart  let,  Seebass,  or  Todd 

226.  Music  in  the  Nineteenth  Century.  3  units.  Bartlet,  Gilliam,  or  Todd 

227.  Music  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  3  units.  Gilliam  or  Todd 

236.  Nineteenth-Century  Piano  Music.  Beethoven,  Schubert,  Weber,  Mendelssohn, 
Schumann,  Chopin,  Liszt,  and  Brahms.  The  arts  of  improvisation  and  transcription,  the 
keyboard  virtuoso,  the  character  piece,  and  the  conflict  between  romantic  content  and 
form.  3  units.  Todd 

295S.  Composition  Seminar.  Selected  topics  in  composition,  including  original  com- 
position in  stylized  genres  (for  example,  classical-period  sonata,  romantic  piano  piece, 
free  atonal  song)  as  well  as  free  composition  on  given  materials.  Related  topics  in  form, 
harmony,  and  instrumentation.  3  units.  Jaffe 

296S.  Analysis  of  Contemporary  Music.  Structures,  expressive  intentions,  and  func- 
tions since  1914.  Contemporary  orchestral  music,  American  music,  European  music, 
popular  media,  musical  tradition,  and  contemporary  composers.  Analysis  of  works  per- 
formed in  the  department's  Encounters  Series  with  occasional  guest  composers  present. 
3  units.  Jaffe 

297, 298, 299.  Composition.  Weekly  independent  study  sessions  at  an  advanced  lev- 
el with  a  member  of  the  graduate  faculty  in  composition.  3  units,  faffe 

317S.  Seminar  in  the  History  of  Music.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Staff 

318S.  Seminar  in  Performance  Practice.  A  practical  seminar  in  which  participants  will 
be  expected  to  perform,  to  introduce  the  work  to  be  played  or  sung,  and  to  outline  its  in- 
terpretative problems.  A  list  of  the  music  concerned  will  be  posted  in  advance,  and  all 
students  will  participate  in  the  study  (if  not  necessarily  in  the  performance)  of  the  works 
announced.  It  is  expected  that  the  seminar  will  cover  most  periods,  from  Gregorian  chant 
to  twentieth-century  repertories.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  the  instructor.  3  units.  Williams 

331,  332,  333.  Independent  Study  in  Performance  Practice  and  Interpretation.  The 

exploration  of  significant  interpretive  and  performance-practice  issues  as  they  affect  a 
specific  repertory.  Weekly  meetings  with  a  member  of  the  graduate  faculty.  Prerequisites: 
consent  of  instructor  and  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  3  units.  Staff 

341S.  History  of  Music  Theory  to  Rameau.  A  study  of  writings  on  pitch  systems  (in- 
cluding monochord  divisions  and  hexachord  solmization),  tonal  relationships  (includ- 
ing counterpoint  and  modal  theories),  and  the  organization  of  time  (including  mensural 
systems  and  proportions);  implications  for  performance  practice  (e.g.,  intonation  and 
temperaments,  rhythm  and  tempo,  musicaficta)  and  for  the  analysis  of  music  from  before 
1700.  3  units.  Silbiger 

351S.  Studies  in  Musical  Iconography.  The  history  and  current  trends  in  musical 
iconography;  iconography  as  a  part  of  the  history  of  ideas  and  as  Realienforschung,  "the 
study  of  real  objects."  Discussion  of  papers  in  the  area  of  interest  of  participants.  3  units. 
Seebass 

361S.  Musical  Organology.  Musical  instruments  in  Western  and  non-Western  mu- 
sic. Classification  and  organological  literature.  The  primary  function  of  instruments:  their 
construction,  their  sound,  and  their  impact  on  performance  practice  and  the  musical 
score.  The  secondary  function  of  instruments:  their  social  importance,  their  aesthetic  and 

144         Courses  of  Instruction 


scientific  value,  their  religious  symbolism.  Iconography  of  instruments.  3  units.  Seebass 
or  Williams 

382S.  Studies  in  Ethnomusicology.  Ethnomusicology  as  a  branch  of  musicology.  Dis- 
cussion of  papers  in  Southeast  Asian  music  and  in  the  areas  of  interest  of  the  participants. 
3  units.  Seebass 

390.  Independent  Study.  With  the  consent  of  a  graduate  faculty  member  and  the  ap- 
proval of  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  the  student  will  undertake  a  specialized  re- 
search project  of  his/her  own  choosing.  3  units.  Staff 

Neurobiology 

Professor  Hall,  Acting  Chairman  (267  Sands);  Professor  Simon,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 
(370  Nanalfne  H.  Duke);  Professors  Diamond,  Moore,  Robertson,  Somjen,  and  Staddon; 
Associate  Professors  Bennett,  Cant,  Corless,  Erickson,  Nadler,  Tyrey,  and  Wolbarsht;  As- 
sistant Professors  Anholt,  Crain,  Fitzpatrick,  and  Lewis;  Professor  Emeritus  Everett;  As- 
sistant Medical  Research  Professors  Aitken,  Casseday,  Hines,  Raczkowski,  and  Schweit- 
zer; Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Lin 

Neurobiology  is  concerned  with  accounting  for  behavior  in  terms  of  the  form,  func- 
tion, evolution,  and  development  of  structures  in  nervous  systems.  A  wide  range  of  tools 
and  approaches  are  used  in  neuroscience  research.  These  include:  light  and  electron 
microscopy  to  reveal  neuron  and  supporting  cell  shapes  and  connections  as  well  as  to 
visualize  fluorescently  labeled  antibodies  to  identify  the  constituents  of  neural  tissue;  and 
electrical  recording  to  measure  electrical  activity  from  individual  cells  and  collections  of 
cells  at  macroscopic  and  microscopic  levels.  These  measurements  include  voltage  and 
patch  clamping  of  individual  cells;  optical  recording  ranging  from  noninvasive  studies 
of  intracellular  messengers  to  detecting  impulses  in  spatially  distributed  cells;  biochemical 
techniques  to  identify  the  chemical  machinery  involved  in  signal  transduction  and  cell 
regulation;  molecular  biology  to  determine  the  effects  of  perturbations  of  molecular  con- 
stituents on  development  and  macromolecule  function;  and  computer  simulations  to  un- 
derstand the  functioning  of  neurons  and  neuron  networks. 

202.  Basic  Neurobiology.  An  integrated  interdepartmental  course  designed  for  first- 
year  medical  students  and  other  professional  and  graduate  students  who  need  a  core 
course  on  the  morphology  and  functions  of  the  mammalian  nervous  system.  Lectures, 
laboratory  demonstrations,  clinical  conferences,  and  lecture  conferences  during  the 
month  of  January  only.  4  units.  Hall,  Moore,  and  Somjen 

208.  Cellular  Physiology  of  Nervous  Tissue  I.  Basic  principles  of  the  transport  of 
nonelectrolytes  and  electrolytes  across  biological  and  model  membranes.  The  course  uses 
physicochemical  principles  to  provide  a  comprehensive  understanding  of  phenomena 
such  as  surface  charge,  gating,  channels,  selectivity,  and  reactions  at  electrode  surfaces. 
The  methodology  and  conceptual  framework  for  the  study  of  transport  is  described  with 
selected  examples  from  bilayers  and  nerves.  Physical  chemistry  is  recommended .  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor.  Fall.  3  units.  Anholt,  Moore,  Nadler,  and  Simon 

209.  Cellular  Physiology  of  Nervous  Tissue  II.  Role  of  ionic  channels  in  generation 
of  action  potentials,  impulse  propagation  in  various  morphologies,  and  transmission  at 
synapses.  Modulation  and  control  of  channel  and  synaptic  properties  by  drugs,  toxins, 
and  second  messengers.  Computer  simulations  of  several  of  these  phenomena  will  be 
shown.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Spring.  3  units.  Moore,  Nadler,  and  Simon 

210.  Individual  Study.  Directed  reading  and  research  in  neurobiology.  Prerequisite: 
consent  of  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  3  to  9  units  each.  Staff 


Neurobiology        145 


222.  Behavioral  and  Neural  Modeling.  The  nervous  system  as  controller  of  adaptive 
behavior.  Basic  facts  and  principles  of  perception,  learning,  and  memory.  Theory  of  neural 
networks.  Formal  networks  as  models  for  behavior  and  neural  systems.  Spring.  3  units. 

Moore,  Staddon,  and  staff 

225.  Neurobiology  of  Sensory  Systems.  An  interdisciplinary  course  dealing  with  prin- 
ciples involved  in  the  structure,  biochemistry,  and  electrophysiology  of  sensory  systems. 
The  major  focus  is  on  the  visual  system  with  lesser  emphasis  on  auditory,  gustatory, 
olfactory,  and  somatic-sensory  systems.  Systems  will  be  examined  from  the  receptor  to 
the  cortical  levels.  C-L:  Cell  Biology  225.  Spring.  3  units.  Simon,  Corless,  and  guest  lecturers 

280.  Student  Seminar.  Preparation  and  presentation  of  seminars  to  students  and 
faculty  on  topics  of  broad  interest  to  cell  biology,  neurobiology,  and  physiology.  Required 
of  all  neurobiology  students.  C-L:  Cell  Biology  280.  2  units.  Anholt 

302.  Anatomy  and  Physiology  of  the  Central  Nervous  System.  The  course  begins  with 
an  intensive  one-month  overview  of  the  morphology  and  functions  of  the  mammalian 
nervous  system  and  then  turns  to  the  discussion  of  original  papers  by  pioneers  in  the  study 
of  the  structure  and  function  of  the  central  nervous  system  of  vertebrates.  Spring.  4  units. 
Staff 

310.  Frontiers  in  Neurobiology.  Course  consists  of  readings  and  student  and  faculty 
presentations  of  current  problems  in  neurobiology.  3  units.  Cant  and  Hall 

360.  Neuropharmacology.  Seminar-lecture  course  emphasizing  neurotransmitter 
mechanisms  and  the  mechanisms  of  action  of  drugs  used  to  modify  nervous  system  func- 
tion. Material  will  be  drawn  from  recent  literature.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L: 
Pharmacology  360.  3  units.  Nadler 

370.  Neurobiology  I.  Interdisciplinary  approach  to  neuronal  function  at  the  cellular 
and  molecular  levels.  Focus  is  on  the  anatomy,  biophysics,  biochemistry,  and  pharma- 
cology of  conductance  and  transmission  of  the  neuronal  impulse.  C-L:  Pharmacology 
370.  3  units.  Kirschnerand  staff 

372.  Research  in  Neurobiology.  Laboratory  investigation  in  various  areas  of  neurobi- 
ology. Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

Pathology 

Professor  Jennings,  Chairman  (301B  Davison);  Professor  D.  Bigner,  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  (207  Jones);  Professors  Adams,  S.  Bigner,  Bossen,  Bradford,  Burger,  Fetter,  Gra- 
ham, Hackel,  Johnston,  Klintworth,  Koepke,  Michalopoulos,  Pizzo,  Pratt,  Shelburne, 
Sommer,  Vogel,  and  Wittels;  Associate  Professors  Elchlepp,  Ideker,  McCarty,  Reimer,  San- 
filippo,  andZwadyk;  Assistant  Professors  Abernethy  Crapo,  Jirtle,  Schold,  andZalutsky; 
Associate  Medical  Research  Professor  Wikstrand;  Assistant  Clinical  Professor  Vollmer; 
Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Swenberg;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Brody 

The  Department  of  Pathology  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  M.S.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees  with  areas  of  specialization  such  as  subcellular  and  molecular  pathology.  Course 
work  is  designed  to  give  a  broad  background  in  classical  and  modern  pathology  with  em- 
phasis on  the  application  of  modern  research  techniques.  Students  will  be  required  to 
take  such  courses  as  are  necessary  to  obtain  a  broad  foundation,  as  well  as  courses  ap- 
plicable to  areas  of  speciality  and  research .  Further  information  including  brochures  giving 
details  of  departmental  facilities,  staff,  trainee  stipends,  andtheM.D.-Ph.D.  program  are 
available  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

219.  Molecular  and  Cellular  Bases  of  Differentiation.  See  C-L:  Cell  Biology  219;  also 
C-L:  Biochemistry  219  and  Microbiology  and  Immunology  219.  3  units.  Counce  and  staff 


146         Courses  of  Instruction 


250.  General  Pathology.  The  fundamentals  of  pathology  are  presented  to  the  student. 
Lectures  developing  broad  concepts  of  disease  processes  are  given  by  the  members  of  the 
senior  staff.  The  emphasis  is  placed  on  etiology  and  pathogenesis  of  disease.  Lectures. 
Prerequisites:  histology  and  consent  of  instructor.  4  units.  Hackel  and  staff 

251.  Laboratory  Course  in  General  Pathology.  Laboratory  session  to  complement 
Pathology  250.  Gross  and  microscopic  material  is  correlated  with  and  related  to  disease 
processes.  Pathology  250  may  be  taken  concurrently.  Prerequisites:  histology  and  con- 
sent of  instructor.  4  units.  Hackel  or  staff 

258.  Cellular  and  Subcellular  Pathology.  This  course  is  designed  for  students  wish- 
ing to  broaden  their  knowledge  of  cellular  structure  and  cellular  pathology.  The  course 
consists  of  lectures  and  seminars  discussing  the  alterations  in  cellular  structure  and  as- 
sociated functions  that  accompany  cell  injury.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Hours 
to  be  arranged.  2  units.  Shelburne  and  Sommer 

275.  Fundamentals  of  Electron  Microscopy  and  Biological  Microanalysis.  Empha- 
sis will  be  placed  on  preparative  procedures  including  freezing  techniques  and  on  the 
application  of  electron  microscopy  to  ultrastructural  pathology.  Scanning  electron 
microscopy  X-ray  microanalysis,  and  scanning  ion  microscopy  will  be  discussed  in  ad- 
dition to  conventional  transmission  electron  microscopy.  Limited  laboratory  experience 
included.  3  units.  Brody,  Ingram,  Shelburne,  and  Sommer 

325.  Cardiovascular  Pathology.  Cardiovascular  disease  processes  will  be  studied, 
reviewing  anatomic,  embryologic,  and  physiologic  features,  and  utilizing  case  material 
and  gross  specimens.  Consideration  will  be  given  to  principles  of  electrocardiography. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Hackel 

353.  Advanced  Neuropathology.  This  course  deals  with  current  problems  and  re- 
search methods  related  to  diseases  which  affect  the  nervous  system.  Prerequisite:  con- 
sent of  instructor.  3  units.  Vogel 

355.  Graduate  Seminar  in  Pathology.  Discussions  outlining  the  scope  of  modern 
pathology.  This  will  include  reports  of  original  researchers  by  members  of  staff  and  visi- 
tors. 1  unit.  Bigner  and  staff 

357.  Research  in  Pathology.  Independent  research  projects  in  various  fields  of  pathol- 
ogy. Hours  and  credit  to  be  arranged.  Graduate  faculty 

361,  362.  Autopsy  Pathology.  A  detailed  consideration  of  the  morphologic,  physio- 
logic, and  biochemical  manifestations  of  disease.  Emphasis  is  on  individual  work  in  the 
laboratory  with  tutorial  supervision.  Gross  dissection;  histologic  examination;  process- 
ing; analyzing  of  morphologic,  microbiologic,  and  biochemical  data;  and  interpretation 
of  results.  For  advanced  students.  Prerequisites:  Pathology  250  and  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 3  to  6  units  each.  Adams  and  staff 

364.  Systemic  Pathology.  Systematic  presentation  of  the  characteristics  of  disease 
processes  as  they  affect  specific  organ  systems.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  6  units. 
Hackel  and  staff 

367.  Special  Topics  in  Pathology.  Special  problems  in  pathology  will  be  studied  with 
a  member  of  the  senior  staff;  the  subject  matter  will  be  individually  arranged.  Hours  to 
be  arranged.  2  to  4  units.  Jennings  and  staff 

369.  Ophthalmic  Pathology.  This  course  will  consist  of  lectures,  seminars,  and  labora- 
tory sessions.  The  normal  anatomy  and  embryology  of  the  eye  will  be  reviewed  as  a  ba- 
sis for  the  study  of  the  various  ocular  disease  processes.  The  more  common  diseases  of 
the  eye  will  be  considered  in  detail.  Problems  in  ophthalmic  pathology  will  be  discussed 
together  with  methods  of  solving  them.  3  units.  Klintworth 


Pathology        147 


370.  Developmental  Pathology  and  Teratology.  A  systematic  study  of  disease  proc- 
esses involving  the  prenatal,  natal,  and  postnatal  period.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  de- 
velopmental anatomy  and  teratogenesis.  The  format  includes  seminars  and  clinicopatho- 
logic  correlations  derived  from  gross  and  microscopic  material.  Prerequisites:  Pathology 
250  and  anatomy  and  histology.  3  units.  Bradford 

374.  Pulmonary  Pathology  and  Postmortem  Pathophysiology.  Emphasis  will  be  on 
pulmonary  pathology  and  pathophysiology  of  infectious,  metabolic,  environmental,  and 
neoplastic  diseases,  and  certain  diseases  of  unknown  etiology  (e.g.,  sarcoid,  alveolar  pro- 
teinosis). Ventilatory  experiments  will  be  done  on  excised  human  lungs.  3  units.  Pratt 

377.  Pathology  of  the  Kidney.  The  course  includes  a  comprehensive  study  of  patho- 
logical, immunological,  and  clinical  features  of  glomerulonephritis,  and  pyelonephritis, 
as  well  as  of  metabolic,  congenital,  and  neoplastic  renal  disorders.  Lectures  will  be  sup- 
plemented with  gross  and  microscopic  specimens,  demonstrations,  and  special  library 
studies.  3  units.  Sanfilippo 

380.  Diagnostic  Immunology.  Diagnostic  and  laboratory  procedures  used  in  evalu- 
ating immunologic  diseases:  especially  autoimmune,  infectious,  immunodeficiency,  im- 
munoproliferative,  and  hypersensitivity  disorders.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  the  theoreti- 
cal and  practical  aspects  of  testing  procedures  and  their  proper  interpretation. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  2  units.  R.  Buckley,  Sanfilippo,  and  Zwadyk 

381.  Cancer  Biology.  Emphasis  of  the  course  will  be  on  cellular  biology  of  the  cancer 
cell.  The  instructors  will  present  topics  on  aspects  of  cancer  research  and  will  attempt  to 
correlate  them  with  the  biologic  and  clinical  behavior  of  specific  forms  of  neoplasia .  2  units. 

Falletta  and  Michalopoulos 

382.  General  Pathology  for  Toxicologists.  General  principles  of  pathology  using  ex- 
amples from  human  and  experimental  toxicological  disease.  Prerequisites:  courses  in  bio- 
chemistry, physiology,  and  histology  (histology  may  be  taken  concurrently).  3  units.  Gra- 
ham, Jennings,  and  pathologists  from  UNC  and  Research  Triangle  Park 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
360.  Cytochemistry 


Pharmacology 


Professor  Schanberg,  Acting  Chairman  (439  Nanaline  H.  Duke);  Professor  Mills,  Director 
of  Graduate  Studies  (432  Nanaline  H.  Duke);  Professors  Abou-Donia,  Ellinwood,  Kirsh- 
ner,  Lack,  Ottolenghi,  Slotkin,  Strauss,  Watkins,  and  Wilder;  Associate  Professors  Da- 
vis, Kuhn,  McNamara,  Nadler,  Nemeroff,  Niedel,  and  Whorton;  Assistant  Professors  Kilts 
and  Schwartz;  Professor  Emeritus  Bemheim;  Medical  Research  Professor  Elion;  Associate 
Medical  Research  Professors  Bartolome  and  Wilson;  Assistant  Medical  Research  Profes- 
sors Lapadula,  Seidler,  and  Wolpert 

The  Department  of  Pharmacology  offers  a  graduate  program  which  leads  to  the  Ph .  D. 
degree.  Training  is  available  in  these  areas  of  pharmacology:  neuropharmacology,  de- 
velopmental, toxicology,  biochemical,  cardiovascular,  molecular,  and  behavioral.  Because 
pharmacology  is  an  interdisciplinary  field,  the  department  gives  serious  consideration 
to  applicants  with  strong  undergraduate  backgrounds  in  biological,  chemical,  and  neu- 
ral or  behavioral  sciences.  There  is  no  foreign  language  requirement. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Pharmacology:  Mode  Action  of  Drugs.  Studies  and  discussion  of  the  pharmaco- 
logical action  of  drugs  in  terms  of  biochemical  and  physiological  processes.  Four  lectures, 
one  clinical  correlation,  and  two  conferences  per  week.  5  units.  Ottolenghi  and  staff 

148         Courses  of  Instruction 


210, 211.  Individual  Study  and  Research.  Directed  reading  and  research  in  pharma- 
cology. Prerequisite:  consent  of  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  3  to  9  units  each.  Staff 

219.  Tutorial  in  Pharmacology.  Guided  independent  study  of  original  literature. 
Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

233.  Principles  of  Pharmacology  and  Toxicology.  Drug  absorption,  distribution,  ex- 
cretion and  metabolism;  pharmacokinetics;  Hansch  correlation  of  structure  and  activi- 
ty; stereochemistry;  drug  and  hormone  receptors  and  target  cell  responses.  Prerequisites: 
biology,  organic  chemistry,  differential  and  integral  calculus.  4  units.  Slotkin  and  staff 

254.  Mammalian  Toxicology.  Principles  of  toxicology  as  related  to  humans.  Empha- 
sis on  the  molecular  basis  for  toxicity  of  chemical  and  physical  agents.  Subjects  include 
metabolism  and  toxicokinetics,  toxicologic  evaluation,  toxic  agents,  target  organs,  toxic 
effects,  environmental  toxicity,  management  of  poisoning,  epidemiology,  risk  assessment, 
and  regulatory  toxicology.  Prerequisite:  biology,  organic  chemistry  or  biochemistry  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  4  units.  Abou-Donia  and  staff 

280.  Student  Seminar  in  Pharmacology.  Preparation  and  presentation  of  seminars 
to  students  and  faculty  on  topics  of  broad  interest  to  pharmacology.  Required  of  all  phar- 
macology graduate  students.  2  units.  Whorton 

For  Graduates 

314.  Integrated  Case  Studies  in  Toxicology.  Students  are  assigned  topics  relative  to 
their  chosen  research  discipline  in  toxicology  and  are  asked  to  develop  case  studies  to  pres- 
ent at  a  roundtable  workshop.  Emphasis  on  review  and  analysis  of  toxicological  problems 
from  a  holistic  (multidisciplinary)  viewpoint.  C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 
314.  Spring.  1  unit.  Abou-Donia 

331.  Laboratory  Methods  in  Pharmacology.  Tutorial  laboratory  training  in  various 
fields  of  pharmacology  including  neuropharmacology,  cardiovascular  pharmacology,  bio- 
chemical pharmacology,  and  biophysical  pharmacology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. 3  to  6  units.  Staff 

347,  348.  Seminar  in  Toxicology.  A  weekly  research  seminar  throughout  the  year  is 
required  of  participants  in  the  Toxicology  Program .  Students,  faculty,  and  invited  speakers 
present  their  findings.  1  unit  per  semester.  Abou-Donia  and  Lynn 

360.  Neuropharmacology.  Seminar-lecture  course  emphasizing  neurotransmitter 
mechanisms  and  the  mechanisms  of  action  of  drugs  used  to  modify  nervous  system  func- 
tion. Material  will  be  drawn  from  recent  literature.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L: 
Neurobiology  360.  3  units.  Nadler 

364.  Neurotoxicology.  Adverse  effects  of  drugs  and  toxicants  on  the  central  and 
peripheral  nervous  system;  target  sites  and  pathophysiology  aspects  of  neurotoxicity;  fac- 
tors affecting  neurotoxicity,  screening  and  assessment  of  neurotoxicity  in  humans;  ex- 
perimental methodology  for  detection  and  screening  of  chemicals  for  neurotoxicity.  3 
units.  Abou-Donia  and  staff 

370.  Neurobiology  I.  See  C-L:  Neurobiology  370.  3  units.  Kirschnerand  staff 

372.  Research  in  Pharmacology.  Laboratory  investigation  in  various  areas  of  phar- 
macology. Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

417.  Cellular  Endocrinology.  See  C-L:  Cell  Biology  417.  Fall.  3  units.  Caron,  staff,  and 
guest  faculties 

423.  Neurobiological  Basis  of  Behavior.  The  course  surveys  neuroanatomical,  neu- 
rophysiological,  neurochemical,  and  neuropharmacological  evidence  of  central  nervous 
system  function  as  it  relates  to  normal  and  abnormal  behavior.  Clinical  description,  meas- 
urement of  function,  as  well  as  the  biological  substrates  of  affective  disorders  and  psy- 


Pharmacology         149 


choses  will  be  emphasized .  Scientific  bases  of  current  therapeutic  procedures,  especial- 
ly psychopharmacological,  will  be  examined.  Prerequisite:  familiarity  with  basic  neuroa- 
natomy, neurophysiology,  and  neuropharmacology  is  assumed.  4  units.  Ellinwood  and  staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
256.  Human  Nutrition 
301.  Physical  Chemistry  of  Aqueous  Solutions 

Philosophy 

Professor  Sanford,  Chairman  (201D  West  Duke);  Associate  Professor  Brandon,  Director 
of  Graduate  Studies  (201C  West  Duke);  Professors  Golding  and  Mahoney;  Associate  Profes- 
sor Posy;  Assistant  Professors  Ferejohn,  Lind,  Roderick,  and  Vander  Waerdt;  Professors 
Emeriti  Peach  and  Welsh 

The  Department  of  Philosophy  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph  .D. 
degrees.  Tutorial  work  complements  formal  instruction.  Students  may,  after  taking  a 
balanced  program,  specialize  in  any  of  the  following  fields :  the  history  of  philosophy,  logic, 
philosophy  of  science,  epistemology,  metaphysics,  philosophy  of  mind,  philosophical 
analysis,  ethics,  aesthetics,  political  philosophy,  philosophy  of  law,  philosophy  of  medi- 
cine, and  philosophy  of  religion. 

Individual  programs  of  study  are  developed  for  each  student.  Prior  to  being  admit- 
ted to  candidacy  for  the  Ph.D.  degree,  the  student  must  demonstrate  a  competence  in  one 
foreign  language  and  must  successfully  complete  a  series  of  essays  and  examinations 
covering  the  following:  logic  and  formal  philosophy;  value  theory;  metaphysics,  episte- 
mology, and  philosophy  of  science;  and  the  history  of  philosophy.  In  these  exercises  stu- 
dents are  expected  to  combine  factual  knowledge  with  critical  understanding. 

Work  in  a  minor  or  related  field,  not  necessarily  confined  to  any  one  department,  is 
encouraged  but  not  required.  A  minor  normally  includes  6  units  for  the  A.M.  or  the  Ph.D. 
degree  and  may  include  more  as  a  student's  program  requires  or  permits. 

A  student  who  meets  the  general  requirements  of  the  Graduate  School  may  earn  the 
A.M.  degree  in  philosophy  by  passing  an  oral  master's  examination.  This  examination, 
which  can  be  the  defense  of  either  a  master's  thesis  or  an  alternative  academic  exercise 
approved  by  the  department  and  the  student's  committee,  is  normally  given  in  the  stu- 
dent's fourth  term  of  full-time  registration.  The  examination  can  be  given  earlier  in  two 
special  circumstances: 

1.  A  student  with  a  strong  undergraduate  background  in  philosophy  who  satisfies 
the  department  of  his  or  her  qualifications  by  submitting  several  samples  of  written  work 
before  beginning  the  program  may  be  admitted  to  the  master's  program  with  the  under- 
standing that  the  master's  examination  can  be  given  in  the  second  or  third  term  of  full- 
time  registration. 

2.  A  student  who  combines  the  A . M .  program  in  philosophy  with  another  advanced 
degree  program,  such  as  the  programs  fortheJ.D,  theM.D.,  orthePh.D  in  another  field, 
will  register  as  a  full-time  graduate  student  of  philosophy  for  only  two  terms,  the  mini- 
mum registration  that  meets  the  general  requirements  of  the  Graduate  School  for  the  A.M. 
degree.  These  two  terms  of  full-time  registration  need  not  be  consecutive,  and  their  po- 
sition in  the  student's  overall  program  is  determined  in  individual  cases.  A  student  in  a 
combined  program  will  normally  do  some  work  in  philosophy  while  registered  in  the  stu- 
dent's primary  program  and  do  some  work  in  the  primary  field  while  registered  in  phi- 
losophy. The  master's  examination  can  be  given  in  the  second  term  of  full-time  registra- 
tion as  a  philosophy  graduate  student  or  in  a  later  term  when  the  student  is  registered 
in  the  primary  program. 

A  student  in  the  philosophy  Ph.D.  program  who  meets  the  general  requirements  of 
the  Graduate  School  for  the  A.M.  degree  may  earn  this  degree  by  completing  the  prelimi- 
nary exercises  for  the  Ph.D.  degree. 

150         Courses  of  Instruction 


A  reading  knowledge  of  at  least  one  foreign  language,  ancient  or  modern,  is  required 
for  the  Ph.D.  degree.  Students  must  satisfy  this  requirement  by  the  end  of  the  fifth  se- 
mester of  residency.  More  than  one  language  may  be  required  where  this  is  judged  ap- 
propriate to  the  research  demanded  by  the  candidate's  dissertation. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

203S.  Contemporary  Ethical  Theories.  The  nature  and  justification  of  basic  ethical 
concepts  in  the  light  of  the  chief  ethical  theories  of  twentieth-century  British  and  Ameri- 
can philosophers.  3  units.  Golding  or  hind 

204S.  Philosophy  of  Law.  Natural  law  theory  and  positivism,  the  idea  of  obligation 
(legal,  political,  social,  moral),  and  the  relation  of  law  and  morality.  3  units.  Golding 

205S.  Topics  in  Philosophy  of  History.  Nature  of  historical  knowledge  and  inquiry; 
theories  of  the  historical  process.  3  units.  Staff 

206S.  Responsibility.  The  relationship  between  responsibility  in  the  law  and  moral 
blameworthiness;  excuses  and  defenses;  the  roles  of  such  concepts  as  act,  intention,  mo- 
tive, ignorance,  and  causation.  3  units.  Golding 

208S.  Political  Values.  Analysis  of  the  systematic  justification  of  political  principles 
and  the  political  values  in  the  administration  of  law.  3  units.  Golding 

211S.  Plato.  Selected  dialogues.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  211S.  3  units.  Ferejohn 

217S.  Aristotle.  Selected  topics.  C-L:  Classical  Studies  217S.  3  units.  Ferejohn 

218S.  Medieval  Philosophy.  Selected  problems.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  3  units.  Mahoney 

219S.  Late  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Philosophy.  Selected  problems.  C-L:  Medie- 
val and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Mahoney 

225S.  British  Empiricism.  A  critical  study  of  the  writings  of  Locke,  Berkeley,  or  Hume 
with  special  emphasis  on  problems  in  the  theory  of  knowledge.  3  units.  Lind 

227S.  Continental  Rationalism.  A  critical  study  of  the  writings  of  Descartes,  Spino- 
za, or  Leibniz  with  special  emphasis  on  problems  in  the  theory  of  knowledge  and 
metaphysics.  3  units.  Staff 

228S.  Recent  and  Contemporary  Philosophy.  A  critical  study  of  some  contemporary 
movements,  with  special  emphasis  on  analytic  philosophers.  3  units.  Posy 

230S.  The  Meaning  of  Religious  Language.  See  C-L:  Religion  230S.  3  units.  Staff 

231S.  Kant's  Critique  of  Pure  Reason.  3  units.  Posy 

233S.  Methodology  of  the  Empirical  Sciences.  Recent  philosophical  discussion  of 
the  concept  of  a  scientific  explanation,  the  nature  of  laws,  theory  and  observation,  prob- 
ability and  induction,  and  other  topics.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Brandon 

234S.  Problems  in  the  Philosophy  of  Biology.  Selected  topics,  with  emphasis  on 
evolutionary  biology:  the  structure  of  evolutionary  theory,  adaptation,  teleological  or 
teleonomic  explanations  in  biology,  reductionism  and  organicism,  the  units  of  selection 
and  sociobiology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Botany  234S  and  Zoology  234S. 
3  units.  Brandon 

235S.  Nineteenth-Century  German  Philosophy.  A  critical  examination  of  the  writ- 
ings of  Hegel,  Marx,  or  Nietzsche.  3  units.  Roderick 

250S.  Topics  in  Formal  Philosophy.  Topics  selected  from  formal  logic,  philosophy  of 
mathematics,  philosophy  of  logic,  or  philosophy  of  language.  3  units.  Posy 

Philosophy        151 


251S.  Epistemology.  Selected  topics  in  the  theory  of  knowledge,  for  example,  con- 
ditions of  knowledge,  scepticism  and  certainty,  perception,  memory,  knowledge  of  oth- 
er minds,  and  knowledge  of  necessary  truths.  3  units.  Sanford 

252S.  Metaphysics.  Selected  topics:  substance,  qualities  and  universals,  identity, 
space,  time,  causation,  and  determinism.  3  units.  Sanford 

253S.  Philosophy  of  Mind.  Analysis  of  concepts  such  as  thought  and  belief;  issues 
such  as  mind-body  relations,  thought  and  action,  the  nature  of  persons,  and  personal 
identity  3  units.  Sanford 

254S.  Philosophy  of  Religion.  Topics  such  as  proofs  of  the  existence  of  God;  meaning- 
fulness  of  religious  language;  the  problems  of  evil,  immortality,  and  resurrection.  3  units. 
Staff 

291S,  292S.  Special  Fields  of  Philosophy.  3  units  each.  Staff 
For  Graduates 

300.  Problems  in  the  Theory  of  Value  and  Judgment.  See  C-L:  Literature  300;  also 
C-L:  English  386.  3  units.  Smith 

311.  Philosophy  and  Medicine.  The  scope  of  medicine  as  a  philosophical  problem, 
the  concept  of  health,  and  investigation  of  ethical  issues  arising  in  medical  contexts.  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Golding 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
202S.  Aesthetics:  The  Philosophy  of  Art 
232S.  Recent  Continental  Philosophy 
331,  332.  Seminar  in  Special  Fields  of  Philosophy 


Physical  Therapy 


Professor  Bartlett,  Chairman  (045  Hospital);  Associate  Professor  Branch,  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  (045  Hospital);  Associate  Professors  Villanueva  and  Malone;  Assistant  Professors 
Duncan,  Gwyer,  and  Horton;  Assistant  Clinical  Professor  Riordan;  Clinical  Associates 
Chandler,  Dore,  and  Lawrence 

The  Department  of  Physical  Therapy  offers  an  entry  level  professional  program  lead- 
ing to  the  M.S.  degree.  To  be  eligible  for  admission  to  the  program,  applicants  must  have 
obtained  a  baccalaureate  degree  and  have  a  background  in  the  basic  sciences  and  social 
sciences,  including  course  work  in  biology,  chemistry,  physics,  and  psychology. 

The  program  is  designed  to  provide  for  integration  of  classroom  knowledge  and  clin- 
ical learning  experiences  essential  for  the  competent  practice  of  physical  therapy.  In  view 
of  this  integrated  curriculum,  failure  in  a  major  course  within  a  semester  would  prevent 
the  student  from  continuing  in  the  program.  Major  courses  are  all  courses  offered  by  the 
Department  of  Physical  Therapy  as  well  as  required  courses  offered  by  the  Departments 
of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy,  and  Neurobiology.  A  grade  of  F  (or  noncredit 
in  the  case  of  Physical  Therapy  342,  343,  and  344)  in  any  of  these  courses  will  occasion 
withdrawal  from  the  program.  Program  requirements  also  include  a  comprehensive  ex- 
amination at  the  completion  of  the  curriculum  and  a  research  project.  Further  informa- 
tion may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  Department  of  Physical  Ther- 
apy, Box  3965,  Duke  University  Medical  Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

210.  Independent  Study.  Designed  for  nonmajors.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instruc- 
tor. Credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

152         Courses  of  Instruction 


301.  Introduction  to  Scientific  Inquiry.  Theory  and  methods  of  research  process,  re- 
search design,  data  collection,  preparation  of  a  research  proposal.  2units.  Gwyer and  staff 

303.  Research.  Completion  of  a  research  project  under  the  supervision  of  a  faculty 
adviser;  instruction  in  statistical  techniques  and  the  use  of  the  computer.  3-5  units.  Staff 

313.  Physical  Agents.  Physical  aspects  and  physiological  effects  of  selected  physical 
agents,  including  massage,  superficial  heat  and  cold,  ultraviolet,  diathermy,  and  ultra- 
sound. 2  units.  Branch 

314.  Electrotherapy  and  Electrodiagnosis.  Physical  aspects  and  therapeutic  effects 
of  electrical  currents.  Electrodiagnostic  testing,  introduction  to  electromyography  and 
nerve  conduction  studies.  1-2  units.  Staff 

317.  Kinesiology.  Fundamentals  of  arthrology  and  myology,  movement  and  joint 
description,  surface  anatomy,  principles  of  biomechanics  and  anthropometry.  2  units. 

Villanueva 

318.  Arthrology  and  Pathokinesiology.  Detailed  study  of  the  arthrology  and  kinesiol- 
ogy of  the  trunk  and  limbs  during  normal  and  pathological  conditions,  with  emphasis 
on  the  sequential  electromyographic  and  joint  motion  analysis  of  body  segments  during 
selected  human  movement  patterns,  including  locomotion.  3  units.  Villanueva 

319.  Introduction  to  Evaluation  and  Patient  Care.  Orientation  to  basic  patient  care 
skills,  including  reaction  to  illness.  Introduction  to  Problem-Oriented  Record  System. 
Principles  and  methods  of  evaluation,  including  assessment  of  muscle  function,  joint  mo- 
bility, neurological  and  respiratory  function,  posture,  gait,  and  physical  level  of  independ- 
ence. Opportunities  for  direct  patient  care  in  laboratory  and  clinic.  3  units.  Hortonand  Vil- 
lanueva 

320.  Evaluation  and  Therapeutic  Procedures  I.  Specific  assessment  of  neuromuscular 
and  cardiopulmonary  functions.  Physiological  basis  of  therapeutic  intervention  and 
specific  exercise  programs.  3  units.  Staff 

321.  Evaluation  and  Therapeutic  Procedures  II.  Assessment  and  treatment  of  specific 
neuromuscular  and  cardiopulmonary  problems.  Introduction  to  techniques  of  neuromus- 
cular facilitation.  2  units.  Duncan  and  staff 

322.  Evaluation  and  Therapeutic  Procedures  III.  Introduction  to  the  neurophysio- 
logical  basis  for  evaluation  and  treatment  of  children  and  adults  with  central  nervous  sys- 
tem disorders;  emphasis  on  assessment  of  abnormal  movement  and  selection  of  appropri- 
ate therapeutic  programs.  Problems  associated  with  spinal  cord  injuries,  methods  of 
therapeutic  intervention,  and  functional  testing.  3  units.  Bartlett  and  Duncan 

332.  Physical  Therapy  and  Health  Services:  Administration  and  Issues.  Planning, 
organizing,  delivering,  and  evaluating  physical  therapy  and  health  services.  Examina- 
tion of  health  policy  and  issues.  Principles  of  administration,  leadership  styles,  and 
management  roles.  2  units.  Bartlett  and  Riordan 

333.  Human  Development:  Pediatrics/Geriatrics.  Aspects  of  normal  human  develop- 
ment throughout  the  life  cycle.  Clinical  features  and  management  of  common  pediatric 
and  geriatric  problems.  2  units.  Riordan  and  staff 

334.  Introductory  Pathology.  Fundamentals  of  pathology  with  emphasis  on  broad 
concepts  of  disease.  2  units.  Branch 

335.  Orthopedics.  Detailed  examination  of  the  musculoskeletal  system,  through  lec- 
ture and  laboratory,  and  the  application  of  findings  to  the  establishment  of  physical  ther- 
apy care  plans.  Introduction  to  common  orthopedic  problems  and  their  medical  and  sur- 
gical management.  2  units.  Lawrence 


Physical  Therapy        153 


336.  Medical  Sciences.  The  clinical  manifestations  and  management  of  common  med- 
ical and  surgical  disorders.  Lectures  by  physicians,  physical  therapists,  clinical  pharma- 
cists, and  other  health  personnel;  selected  laboratory  experiences.  Areas  covered  include 
prosthetics  and  orthotics,  burns,  rheumatology,  cardiopulmonary  disorders,  neurolo- 
gy, and  neurosurgery.  Seminars  in  patient  management.  3  units.  Branch  and  staff 

340.  Special  Topics  in  Physical  Therapy.  Opportunity  for  study  under  the  direction 
of  an  individual  staff  member.  Prerequisite :  consent  of  Director  of  Graduate  Studies.  Cred- 
it to  be  arranged.  Staff 

343.  Directed  Clinical  Experience  in  Physical  Therapy  II.  Full-time  supervised  clinical 
learning  experiences  in  physical  therapy  settings  within  limited  radius  of  the  Universi- 
ty. 2  units.  Clinical  staffs 

344.  Directed  Clinical  Experience  in  Physical  Therapy  HI.  Full-time  supervised  clin- 
ical learning  experiences  in  physical  therapy  settings  throughout  the  country.  3  units.  Clin- 
ical staffs 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
302.  Research 

304.  Seminar  in  Applied  Neurophysiology 
324.  Prosthetics  and  Orthotics 
342.  Directed  Clinical  Experience  in  Physical  Therapy  I 

Physics 

Professor  Evans,  Chairman  (118  Physics);  Professor  Goshaw,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 
(111  Physics);  Professors  Biedenharn,  Bilpuch,  De  Lucia,  Fortney,  Han,  Herbst,  Johnson, 
Madey,  Meyer,  Roberson,  Robinson,  Walker,  Walter,  and  Weller;  Associate  Professors 
Behringer,  Greenside,  Palmer,  and  Thomas;  Assistant  Professors  Howell,  Oh,  and  Teit- 
sworth;  Professors  Emeriti  Fairbank  and  Lewis;  Adjunct  Professors  Ciftan,  Guenther, 
OToghludha,  Robl,  and  Stroscio 

The  Department  of  Physics  offers  graduate  work  for  students  wishing  to  earn  the  A.M. 
or  Ph.D.  degree.  In  addition  to  a  balanced  program  of  basic  graduate  courses,  the  depart- 
ment offers  specialized  courses  and  seminars  in  several  fields  in  which  research  is  being 
done  by  faculty  and  staff. 

With  the  help  of  faculty  advisers,  students  select  a  course  program  to  fit  their  needs, 
including  work  in  a  related  field,  usually  mathematics  or  chemistry.  Students  are  en- 
couraged to  begin  research  work  early  in  their  careers. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

211.  Modern  Physics.  Fundamental  concepts  of  quantum  theory  applied  mainly  to 
study  of  atomic  structure  and  spectra,  and  to  statistical  physics.  Prerequisites:  Physics 
181  and  Mathematics  111.  3  units.  Goshaw  or  Herbst 

213.  Introduction  to  Nonlinear  Dynamics.  See  C-L:  Computer  Science  213. 3  units. 
Greenside 

214.  Introduction  to  Solid-State  Physics.  Prerequisite:  Physics  161  or  equivalent.  See 
C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  214.  3  units.  Hacker 

215.  Introduction  to  Quantum  Mechanics.  Fundamental  postulates;  wave  mechan- 
ics and  elementary  applications;  operators,  eigenvalues,  and  eigenfunctions;  angular 
momentum  and  rotations;  spin  and  coupling  of  angular  momenta;  perturbation  theory, 
transition  rates,  and  selection  rules;  identical  particles;  applications.  Prerequisites:  Physics 
181  and  211;  Mathematics  111  and  114  (may  be  taken  concurrently).  3  units.  Robinson 

154        Courses  of  Instruction 


217S,  218S.  Advanced  Physics  Laboratory  and  Seminar.  Experiments  involving  the 
fields  of  electricity,  magnetism,  heat,  optics,  and  modern  physics.  6  units.  Meyer 

220.  Electronics.  Basic  elements  of  modern  electronics  including  AC  circuits,  trans- 
fer functions,  solid-state  circuits,  transistor  circuits,  operational  amplifier  applications, 
digital  circuits,  and  computer  interfaces.  3  units.  Fortney 

240.  Computer  Applications  to  Physical  Measurement.  Hardware  and  software  tech- 
niques for  computer-assisted  data  acquisition,  display,  and  control  in  the  modern  ex- 
perimental environment .  Theory  and  application  of  discrete  signal  analysis  including  dig- 
ital filters,  Z- transform,  and  fast  Fourier  transform.  Lecture  and  laboratory.  Prerequisite: 
Physics  171  or  220  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Fortney 

244.  Nuclear  and  Particle  Physics.  Current  ideas  and  models  in  nuclear  and  particle 
physics.  Experimental  methods;  nuclear  structure;  nuclear  reactions;  families  of  elemen- 
tary particles;  quarks  and  gluons;  weak  interactions.  Prerequisite:  Physics  211. 3 units.  Oh 

For  Graduates 

302.  Advanced  Mechanics.  The  fundamental  principles  of  Newtonian  mechanics, 
general  dynamics  of  systems  of  particles  and  rigid  bodies,  the  methods  of  Lagrange  and 
Hamilton,  generalized  mechanics.  3  units.  Fortney  or  Han 

303.  Statistical  Mechanics.  Fundamental  laws  of  thermodynamics  and  statistical 
mechanics  with  applications  to  physics  and  chemistry.  Classical  and  quantum  ideal  gases; 
approximate  methods  for  real  gases  and  liquids.  Prerequisite:  Physics  215.  3  units. 
Behringer 

304.  Advanced  Topics  in  Statistical  Mechanics*  This  course  will  vary  from  year  to 
year.  Possible  topics  include  Fermi  liquids,  systems  of  bosons,  many-body  theory,  none- 
quilibrium  statistical  mechanics.  Prerequisites:  Physics  303  and  316.  3  units.  Staff 

305.  Introduction  to  Nuclear  Physics.  Phenomenological  aspects  of  nuclear  physics, 
interaction  of  gamma  radiation  and  charged  particles  with  matter,  nuclear  detectors,  par- 
ticle accelerators,  radioactivity,  basic  properties  of  nuclei,  nuclear  systematics,  nuclear 
reactions,  particle  scattering,  nuclear  models  of  the  deuteron,  nuclear  forces,  parity.  3 
units.  Weller 

308.  Introduction  to  High-Energy  Physics.  High-energy  processes;  electromagnet- 
ic, weak,  and  strong  interactions.  Experimental  instrumentation.  3units.  Goshaw or  Walker 

309.  Solid-State  Physics  I.  Properties  of  matter  in  the  condensed  state;  crystal  lattices, 
electrons  in  metals  and  semiconductors,  band  theory,  nonmetallic  solids,  lattice  dynamics, 
and  phonons.  Prerequisites:  Physics  215  and  303.  3  units.  Palmer 

316.  Principles  of  Quantum  Theory.  Original  and  fundamental  concepts  of  quantum 
theory,  wave  and  matrix  mechanics,  theory  of  measurements,  exclusion  principle,  and 
electronic  spin.  Prerequisites:  Physics  215  and  302.  3  units.  Thomas 

317.  Intermediate  Quantum  Theory.  General  operator  methods,  angular  momentum, 
Dirac  electron  theory.  Second  quantization;  symmetry  principles  and  conservation  the- 
orems. Applications  to  the  theory  of  solids,  of  nuclei,  and  of  elementary  particles  will  be 
stressed.  Prerequisite:  Physics  316.  3  units.  Thomas 

318-319.  Electromagnetic  Field  Theory.  Electrodynamics,  theory  of  wave  optics,  radi- 
ation of  electric  and  magnetic  multipole  fields,  special  relativity,  covariant  electrodynam- 
ics, Lienard-Wiechert  potentials,  scattering  and  dispersion,  Hamiltonian  field  equations. 
Prerequisite:  Physics  182.  3  units  each.  Biedenham 


•Offered  on  demand. 


Physics         155 


331.  Quantum  Electronics*  Electromagnetic  radiation  and  its  interaction  with  mat- 
ter. Lasers,  nonlinear  optics,  submillimeter  waves,  detection  theory,  propagation.  3  units. 
De  Lucia 

333.  Electronic  Properties  of  Submicron  Solid  State  Devices.  Doping,  disordering, 
and  grading  in  heterojunctions  and  superlattices.  MOCVD  and  MBE  growth  techniques. 
Physical  properties  of  submicron  electronic  devices,  high  speed  transport,  mobility,  ener- 
gy band  structure,  and  scattering  processes.  Classical  and  quantum  transport,  quantum 
state  transfer,  control  deformation  of  electron  wave  functions,  mobility  modulation,  and 
phonon  dynamics.  Two-dimensional  electron  gases  and  plasmas.  Monte  Carlo  simula- 
tion of  submicron  device  performance.  Current  research  and  recent  developments  will 
be  emphasized.  C-L:  Electrical  Engineering  333.  3  units.  Stroscio 

334.  Atomic  Physics  and  Spectroscopy.  The  interaction  of  atoms  and  radiation:  atomic 
structure.  Spontaneous  and  stimulated  transitions.  Shapes  of  spectral  lines.  Radiative 
transfer.  Population  inversion.  Laser  oscillation.  Resonant  modes  of  optical  cavities.  Tech- 
niques of  laser  spectroscopy.  3  units.  Holmgren 

335.  Molecular  Spectroscopy.  Interpretation  and  theory  of  electronic,  vibrational,  rota- 
tional, and  nuclear  hyperfine  states.  Bound  state  quantum  mechanics.  Emphasis  on  small 
fundamental  species  of  importance  in  science  and  technology.  3  units.  De  Lucia 

341.  Advanced  Topics  in  Quantum  Theory.  Introduction  to  relativistic  quantum  field 
theory,  Lorentz  and  Poincare  groups,  quantization  of  free  fields,  interacting  fields  and 
S-matrix,  applications  of  quantum  electrodynamics  and  dispersion  relations.  Prerequi- 
site: Physics  317.  3  units.  Biedenham 

345.  Advanced  High  Energy  Physics.  Experimental  and  theoretical  aspects  of  high 
energy  nuclear  processes;  properties  of  mesons  and  hyperons.  3  units.  Staff 

351,  352.  Seminar.  A  series  of  weekly  discussions  on  topics  related  to  the  research 
projects  under  investigation  in  the  department.  Credit/no  credit.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
214.  Introduction  to  Solid-State  Physics 
306.  Low  Temperature  Physics 
310.  Solid-State  Physics  II 
312.  Phase  Transitions  and  Critical  Phenomena 
330.  Nuclear  Structure  Theory 

342.  Theory  of  Elementary  Particles 

343.  Nuclear  Physics 

344.  Advanced  Nuclear  Physics 

346.  Topics  in  Theoretical  Physics 

397,  398.  Low  Temperature  and  Solid-State  Seminar 

Political  Science 

Professor  Romberg,  Chairman  (214  Perkins);  Associate  Professor  Lange,  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  (331  Perkins);  Professors  Aldrich,  Ascher,  Barber,  Bates,  Braibanti,  Fish,  Holsti, 


"Offered  on  demand. 
156         Courses  of  Instruction 


Horowitz,  Hough,  Leach,  Paletz,  and  Spragens;  Associate  Professors  Eldridge,  Johns, 
and  McKean;  Assistant  Professors  Bianco,  Canon,  Gillespie,  Grant,  Grieco,  Kitschelt, 
Lomperis,  Niou,  Roberts,  and  Smith;  Professors  Emeriti  Ball,  Cleaveland,  Cole, 
Grzybowski,  Hall,  Hallowell,  Kulski,  and  Simpson;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  CBarr 

The  Department  of  Political  Science  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees.  Before  being  admitted  to  candidacy  for  the  Ph.D.  degree,  an  applicant  must 
have  qualified  for  the  A.M.  degree. 

Instruction  is  designed  to  prepare  the  student  for  teaching  and  research,  for  govern- 
ment service,  and  for  other  work  related  to  public  affairs.  Before  undertaking  graduate 
study  in  political  science,  a  student  is  ordinarily  expected  to  have  completed  at  least  12 
semester  hours  of  course  work  in  political  science.  Instruction  is  currently  offered  in  the 
following  fields:  American  government  and  politics,  comparative  government  and  pol- 
itics, political  theory,  and  international  relations. 

The  candidate  for  the  degree  of  Doctor  of  Philosophy  in  political  science  must  take 
at  least  sixteen  courses  in  all,  including  twelve  in  the  department,  and  demonstrate  com- 
petence in  at  least  two  general  fields  of  the  discipline  as  well  as  in  a  third  general  field  or 
in  a  specialized  subfield  or  in  a  field  external  to  the  department.  The  candidate  must  also 
demonstrate  a  satisfactory  knowledge  of  statistical  techniques  and/or  one  or  more  for- 
eign languages. 

The  terminal  degree  of  Master  of  Arts,  for  those  who  do  not  intend  to  continue  with 
doctoral  studies,  is  awarded  following  successful  completion  of:  (1)  eight  one-semester 
courses  of  3  units  each,  at  least  half  of  which  must  be  in  political  science;  and  (2)  either 
the  A.M.  thesis  or  two  seminar-length  research  papers  done  for  Duke  courses  with  a  grade 
of  G  +  or  above  (the  student  will  be  required  to  pass  an  oral  exam  with  either  of  these  op- 
tions). In  addition,  candidates  for  the  A.M.  degree  must  demonstrate  competence  in  one 
foreign  language  or  in  statistics. 

Further  details  on  the  graduate  program  in  political  science,  the  departmental  facili- 
ties, the  staff,  and  available  financial  aid  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies,  Department  of  Political  Science. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

201S.  Problems  in  International  Security.  Major  security  issues.  Prerequisite:  a  course 
in  international  relations  or  foreign  policy.  3  units.  Staff 

203S.  Issues  and  Problems  in  Politics  and  the  Media.  Research  seminar  analyzing 
significant  questions  in  the  relationship  between  politics  and  the  media  of  communica- 
tion. Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Paletz 

204S.  Ethics  in  Political  Life.  Ethical  issues  arising  in  the  conduct  of  political  voca- 
tions and  activities.  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  204S.  3  units.  Spragens 

207S.  American  Constitutional  Interpretation.  Development  of  the  Constitution  of 
the  United  States  through  Supreme  Court  decisions.  3  units.  Fish 

208S.  Analyzing  the  News.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  240S.  3  units.  Staff 

209.  Problems  in  State  Government  and  Politics.  3  units.  Leach 

211S.  Current  Problems  and  Issues  in  Japanese  Politics.  Sources  of  strength  and 
weakness  in  the  Japanese  economy,  the  rise  of  new  issues  and  strains  in  postindustrial 
society,  changes  in  the  party  system  and  decision-making  process,  the  possible  transfer 
of  power,  the  challenge  of  Japan's  new  world  role.  3  units.  McKean 

212S.  Domestic  Structures  and  Foreign  Policies  of  Advanced  Democratic  States.  The 

influence  of  democratic  institutions  on  the  national-security  and  foreign-economic  poli- 
cies of  advanced  industrialized  states.  3  units.  Grieco 


Political  Science        157 


213S.  Theories  of  International  Political  Economy.  Comparison  and  assessment  of 
traditional  and  modern  theories  in  terms  of  their  logical  and  empirical  validity.  3  units. 
Grieco 

215S.  Philosophical  Bases  of  Political  Economy  and  Society.  Central  questions  in  the 
relationship  between  economy  and  society  through  an  examination  of  the  classical  texts 
of  political  economy.  Themes  include :  democracy  and  capitalism,  the  world  economy  and 
foreign  policy  critiques  of  capitalism  from  the  left  and  right.  Readings  drawn  from  Adam 
Smith,  Karl  Marx,  J.  M .  Keynes,  Joseph  Schumpeter,  Milton  Friedman,  and  others.  3  units. 
Staff 

216S.  Evolution  of  European  Marxism.  The  central  themes  in  the  evolution  of  Euro- 
pean Marxism:  socialist  thought  prior  to  Marx;  the  writings  of  Marx  and  Engels.  The 
themes  are  articulated  in:  Russian  Marxism;  Soviet  communism  and  its  Marxist  critics; 
the  rethinking  of  Marx's  political  economy,  the  theory  of  the  state,  and  concepts  of  class 
consciousness  in  the  works  of  twentieth-century  European  Marxists.  3  units.  Staff 

218.  Political  Thought  in  the  United  States.  American  political  thought  through  the 
Civil  War  period.  The  Founders  and  their  European  antecedents.  Debates  over  the  Con- 
stitution, slavery,  and  the  Union.  3  units.  Grant  or  Gillespie 

220S.  Problems  in  International  Politics.  Prerequisite:  one  course  on  international 
relations  or  foreign  policy  or  diplomatic  history.  3  units.  Hoist i  or  Hough 

221S.  International  Institutions  and  the  World  Political  Economy.  Examination  of 
theory  concerning  the  role  of  international  institutions  in  facilitating  economic  coopera- 
tion among  advanced  democratic  states.  Investigation  of  the  impact  on  international  eco- 
nomic relations  of  such  multilateral  institutions  as  the  International  Monetary  Fund,  the 
World  Bank,  the  General  Agreement  on  Tariffs  and  Trade,  and  the  International  Energy 
Agency.  3  units.  Grieco 

222S.  Seminar:  Modern  Political  Classics.  How  social  scientists  think  about  politics. 
Works  influential  in  shaping  contemporary  political  science,  written  by  political  scien- 
tists, economists,  and  sociologists.  Topics  include  democracy,  capitalism,  socialism,  vot- 
ing, and  collective  action.  3  units.  Staff 

223.  Ancient  Political  Philosophy.  Intensive  analysis  of  the  political  philosophy  of 
Plato,  Aristotle,  and  other  ancient  theorists.  3  units.  Gillespie  or  Grant 

224S.  Modern  Political  Theory.  A  historical  survey  and  philosophical  analysis  of  po- 
litical theory  from  the  beginning  of  the  seventeenth  to  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury. The  rise  of  liberalism,  the  Age  of  Enlightenment,  the  romantic  and  conservative  reac- 
tion, idealism,  and  utilitarianism.  3  units.  Grant  or  Spragens 

225.  Topics  in  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Western  Europe.  Topics  vary : 
the  development  of  mass  democracy  and  the  welfare  state;  political  and  electoral  partic- 
ipation and  mobilization;  social  movements  and  political  change;  center-periphery  con- 
flicts; government  and  bureaucratic  institutions  and  their  relationships  to  society;  the 
modern  welfare  state  and  political  economy.  3  units.  Kitschelt  or  Lange 

226S.  Theories  of  International  Relations.  An  overview  with  applications  to  political- 
military  and  political-economic  empirical  problems.  3  units.  Grieco 

228S.  Nineteenth-  and  Twentieth-Century  Political  Philosophy.  Topics  in  nineteenth- 
and  twentieth-century  political  philosophy,  considering  such  authors  as  Hegel,  Marx, 
Nietzsche,  Dostoevski,  Heidegger,  Malraux,  and  Camus.  3  units.  Gillespie 

229S.  Contemporary  Theory  of  Liberal  Democracy.  Reading  of  major  works  and  dis- 
cussion of  current  issues  in  contemporary  liberal  and  democratic  theory.  3  units.  Spragens 

158         Courses  of  Instruction 


230S.  Introduction  to  Positive  Political  Theory.  Basic  concepts  of  political  economy, 
theory  of  preference  and  choice,  social  choice  theory,  and  decision  and  game  theory.  3 
units.  Aldrich,  Bates,  or  Bianco 

231S.  Crisis,  Choice,  and  Change  in  Advanced  Democratic  States.  Contribution  of 
Marx,  Weber,  and  Durkheim  toward  analysis  of  modern  democracies.  Examination  of 
selected  contemporary  studies  using  these  three  perspectives  to  highlight  processes  of 
change  and  crisis.  Unsettling  effects  of  markets  upon  political  systems,  consequences  of 
bureaucratic  regulation,  and  transformation  of  sources  of  solidarity  and  integration  in 
modern  politics.  3  units.  Kitschelt 

232.  Political  Economy:  Theory  and  Applications.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Lange 

233S.  Quantitative  Political  Analysis  II.  Intermediate  statistical  methods,  especial- 
ly linear  regression,  for  political  science  research.  Emphasis  on  assumptions  and  interpre- 
tations of  results.  Prerequisite:  Political  Science  138  or  236  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World. 

Alternative  approaches  to  political,  economic,  and  social  change  in  Latin  America,  Afri- 
ca, and  Asia.  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  234S,  History  234S,  and  Sociology  234S.  3  units. 
Bates,  Fox,  Gereffi,  Smith,  or  Trouillot 

235S.  Comparative  Development  of  Islam.  Comparative  development  of  Islam  in  In- 
donesia, Malaysia,  Pakistan,  India,  North  Africa,  and  sub-Saharan  Africa.  A  compara- 
tive analysis  of  the  resurgence  of  Islam  as  a  religious,  political,  and  cultural  force.  3  units. 
Braibanti 

236.  Statistical  Analysis.  Introduction  to  statistics  in  political  research,  emphasizing 
research  design,  descriptive  and  inferential  statistics,  and  use  of  computers.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  had  or  who  are  enrolled  in  Political  Science  138,  Economics  138, 
Mathematics  53  or  117,  Psychology  117,  Public  Policy  Studies  112  or  122,  or  Sociology  132 
or  293.  3  units.  Staff 

237S.  Comparative  Public  Policy.  Introduction  to  methods,  concepts,  and  theories 
of  comparative  public  policy  analysis.  Substantive  policies  examined  in  the  course  vary 
each  semester  and  may  include  economic,  industrial,  social,  and  civil  rights  policies.  3 
units.  Kitschelt 

240.  American  Political  Behavior.  3  units.  Staff 

242S.  Comparative  Law  and  Policy:  Ethnic  Group  Relations.  Various  approaches  to 
the  reduction  of  conflict  in  deeply  divided  societies,  primarily  in  Asia  and  Africa,  with 
secondary  attention  to  Western  countries.  The  nature  of  ethnic  identity,  the  sources  of 
group  conflict,  and  the  forms  and  patterns  it  takes.  Methods  of  analyzing  social  science 
materials  and  utilizing  them  for  the  design  of  policies,  laws,  and  institutions.  3  units. 
Horowitz 

243S.  Political  Applications  of  Game  Theory.  Theory  of  games  as  a  tool  to  understand 
strategic  behavior  of  political  actors.  Applications  to  legislative  politics,  international 
cooperation,  bureaucratic  behavior.  3  units.  Bianco 

245.  Ethics  and  Policy-Making.  Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy 
Studies  116.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  223.  3  units.  Rapaport 

246S.  Political  Hypocrisy  and  Idealism.  The  cases  for  and  against  hypocrisy  in  po- 
litical and  social  life.  The  concept  of  authenticity  as  the  alternative  to  hypocrisy.  Selec- 
tions from  Machiavelli,  Shakespeare,  Rousseau,  Nietzsche,  and  others.  3  units.  Grant 

248.  The  Politics  of  the  Policy  Process.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  219.  3  units. 
Mayer 


Political  Science        159 


249.  Comparative  International  Development  and  Technology  Flow.  Theoretical 
analysis  of  social,  political,  and  economic  development  in  Third  World  countries.  The  in- 
ternal problem  of  maintaining  political  systems  and  the  external  problem  of  adapting  in- 
termediate or  appropriate  technologies.  3  units.  Braibanti 

251S.  The  American  Presidency.  The  presidency  and  its  impact  on  the  American  po- 
litical system.  3  units.  Paletz 

253S.  Comparative  Government  and  the  Study  of  Latin  America.  Current  literature 
on  major  themes  of  Latin  American  politics.  3  units.  Staff 

255.  Political  Sociology.  See  C-L:  Sociology  255.  3  units.  Smith  or  Tiryakian 

256S.  Arms  Control  and  National  Security  Policy.  The  evolution  of  nuclear  weapons 
and  strategy  and  of  global  defense  policy  toward  the  Soviet  Union  and  other  adversaries; 
the  arms  control  process  and  nonproliferation.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units. 
Lomperis 

259S.  Low  Intensity  Conflict  and  the  Lessons  of  Viet  Nam.  The  Viet  Nam  conflict 
and  comparative  cases;  implications  for  Western  interventions  in  the  Third  World .  Prereq- 
uisite: consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Lomperis 

260S.  The  Tradition  of  Political  Inquiry.  Past  and  present  problems,  goals,  presup- 
positions, and  methods.  3  units.  Spragens 

261.  Politics  and  the  Future.  The  projection  of  possible  political  orders:  the  effects  of 
changing  resources,  technologies,  and  values  on  mankind's  ability  to  govern.  3  units. 
Lomperis 

262S.  International  Communism.  3  units.  Hough 

263S.  Methods  of  Political  Science.  The  relation  between  theory  and  evidence;  re- 
search designs  for  the  comparative  analyses  of  historical  and  statistical  evidence.  3  units. 
Roberts 

264S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  See  C-L:  History  284S;  also  C-L:  Cul- 
tural Anthropology  284S,  Psychology  284S,  Sociology  284S,  and  Women's  Studies.  3  units. 
Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  or  Spenner 

267S.  Policy-Making  in  International  Organizations.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies 
267S.  3  units.  Ascher 

270S.  Fundamentals  of  Political  Economy.  Application  of  economic  reasoning  to  the 
study  of  politics.  Analysis  of  campaigns  and  elections,  legislatures,  and  the  regulation 
of  industries.  C-L:  Economics  270S.  3  units.  Aldrich,  Bates,  or  Bianco 

275.  The  American  Party  System.  An  intensive  examination  of  selected  facets  of  Ameri- 
can national  political  parties,  such  as  relationships  between  presidential  and  congres- 
sional politics,  the  politics  of  national  conventions,  recent  foreign  policy  and  party  align- 
ments, and  the  controversy  over  party  government.  3  units.  Komberg 

277.  Comparative  Party  Politics.  The  impact  of  social  and  political  systems  on  party 
structures,  functions,  ideologies,  and  leadership  recruitment.  Emphasis  upon  research 
techniques  and  objectives.  3  units.  Kornberg  or  Lange 

279S.  Political  Protest  and  Collective  Mobilization.  Survey  of  theories,  methods,  and 
empirical  studies  of  political  mobilization  outside  institutional  channels;  protest  behavior 
and  strategies;  responses  of  the  state  to  these  challenges;  the  success  of  collective  mobili- 
zation. Emphasis  on  comparative  analyses  of  protest  in  advanced  industrial  democra- 
cies. 3  units.  Kitschelt 

282S.  Canada.  See  C-L:  History  282S;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  282S  and  So- 
ciology 282S.  3  units.  Cahow 

160        Courses  of  Instruction 


283S.  Congressional  Policy-Making.  Lawmaking  and  oversight  of  the  executive 
branch  by  the  United  States  Congress.  Committee,  party,  executive,  and  interest  group 
roles.  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies  283S.  3  units.  Bianco  or  Canon 

284S.  Public  Policy  Process  in  Developing  Countries.  See  C-L:  Public  Policy  Studies 
284S.  3  units.  Ascher 

286S.  Judicial  Administration.  Organization,  case  processing,  and  management  of 
courts  with  emphasis  on  federal  appellate  courts.  Prerequisite:  Political  Science  127.  3 
units.  Fish 

293.  Federalism.  Theoretical  and  operational  aspects  of  federal  systems  of  govern- 
ment, focusing  on  the  United  States  and  Canada.  3  units.  Leach 

299.  Special  Topics  in  Government  and  Politics.  Topics  vary  from  semester  to  semes- 
ter. 3  units  each.  Staff 

A.  American  Government  and  Politics 

B.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics 

C.  Political  Theory 

D.  International  Relations 

For  Graduates 

303.  Seminar  on  Statistics.  Application  of  advanced  statistical  methods  to  political 
science  research  problems.  Primary  focus  on  multiple  regression  procedures.  Emphasis 
on  assumptions,  interpretation  of  results,  and  use  of  the  computer.  Prerequisite:  Political 
Science  236  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

305.  Seminar  in  U.S.  Foreign  Policy.  Decision  making  in  American  foreign  policy.  The 
sources,  substance,  and  consequences  of  U.S.  policy  will  be  examined.  The  emphasis  is 
on  the  period  since  1945.  3  units.  Holsti 

306.  Political  Development  of  the  U.S.  Fourth  Circuit  Courts.  A  research  seminar  on 
federal  trial  and  appellate  courts,  judges,  and  law:  Maryland,  Virginia,  West  Virginia, 
North  and  South  Carolina,  1789-1958.  3  units.  Fish 

308.  Individual  Research.  Students  will  conduct  research  designed  to  evaluate  hy- 
potheses of  their  choice .  Reports  on  the  research  must  be  presented  in  appropriate  profes- 
sional style.  3  units.  Staff 

309.  Seminar  in  International  Relations.  Critical  survey  of  theories  and  research  in 
international  relations  and  foreign  policy.  Emphasis  will  be  placed  on  the  interrelation 
between  theory  and  research.  3  units.  Holsti 

321.  Seminar  in  Political  Theory.  Prerequisites :  6  units  in  political  science  elected  from 
223,  224,  229,  231,  or  their  equivalents.  3  units.  Staff 

322.  Topics  in  Early  Modern  Political  Thought.  Selected  readings  from  political 
thinkers  ranging  from  Machiavelli  to  Mill.  3  units.  Grant  or  Spragens 

324.  Seminar  in  Comparative  Politics  (A) .  A  field  survey  with  emphasis  on  the  politics 
of  developing  areas.  Note:  it  is  generally  expected  that  political  science  graduate  students 
taking  comparative  politics  as  a  preliminary  field  will  take  both  this  course  and  Political 
Science  325.  3  units.  Staff 

325.  Seminar  in  Comparative  Politics  (B).  A  field  survey  with  emphasis  on  the  politics 
of  advanced  industrial  democracies.  Note:  it  is  generally  expected  that  political  science 
graduate  students  taking  comparative  politics  as  a  preliminary  field  will  take  both  this 
course  and  Political  Science  324.  3  units.  Staff 


Political  Science         161 


326.  Research  Seminar  in  Comparative  Government  and  Politics.  Seminar  in  major 
issues  in  comparative  politics  and  intensive  individual  student  research  projects.  3  units. 
Staff 

327.  Comparative  Political  Behavior  (B).  This  seminar  critically  examines  research 
on  variations  in  elite  and  mass  behavior  as  well  as  the  conditions  affecting  that  behavior 
in  a  variety  of  western  countries.  3  units.  Kornberg 

332.  Seminar  on  Political  Economy:  Micro  Level.  Survey  of  recent  work  in  political 
science  and  economics  on  the  organization  of  institutions:  political,  sociological,  and  eco- 
nomic. Focus  upon  the  ways  in  which  rational  choice  theory  is  applied  to  areas  outside 
of  economics.  3  units.  Bates 

333.  Seminar  in  Political  Economy:  Macro  Level.  Survey  and  analysis  of  recent  work 
in  political  science,  economics,  and  sociology  on  the  relationships  between  states  and  mar- 
kets. Special  emphasis  on  the  ways  states  influence  market  outcomes  and  the  ways  the 
organization  of  power  in  markets  influences  state  behavior,  especially  in  democratic  sys- 
tems. 3  units.  Lange 

340.  Seminar  in  American  Politics  and  Institutions.  Survey,  analysis,  and  critique 
of  the  literature.  3  units.  Paletz  or  staff 

381.  Research  Seminar  in  Latin  American  Government  and  Politics.  Prerequisite: 
Political  Science  253  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

390.  Research  Seminar  in  International  Relations.  Prerequisite:  Political  Science  226, 
Political  Science  309  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Holsti 

397.  Selected  Topics  in  Government  and  Politics.  Topics  vary  from  semester  to  semes- 
ter. 2  units.  Staff 

398.  Selected  Topics  in  Government  and  Politics.  Topics  vary  from  semester  to  se- 
mester. 3  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
214S.  The  Politics  of  Scarcity 

280S.  Comparative  Government  and  Politics:  Sub-Saharan  Africa 
360.  Seminar  in  Government  and  Politics  in  the  Soviet  Union 

RELATED  COURSE  WORK  IN  THE  SCHOOL  OF  LAW 

There  may  be  graduate  credit  for  course  work  completed  in  the  Duke  University 
School  of  Law,  under  regulations  referred  to  in  this  bulletin  under  the  section  on  academic 
regulations. 

Psychology 

Professor  R.  Erickson,  Chairman  (224  Psychology-Sociology);  Professor  Hasher,  Director 
of  Graduate  Studies  (305  Psychology-Sociology);  Professors  Alexander,  Carson,  Coie, 
Costanzo,  Diamond,  C.  Erickson,  W.  G.  Hall,  Lakin,  Lockhead,  Rubin,  Staddon,  M.  Wal- 
lach,  and  Wing;  Associate  Professors  Day,  Eckerman,  and  Roth;  Assistant  Professors  Kre- 
menandPutallaz;  Professors  Emeriti  Borstelmann,  Kimble,  andH.  Schiffman;  Adjunct 
Professors  Brodie,  Crovitz,  W.  C.  Hall,  S.  Schiffman,  Thompson,  L.  Wallach,  and  Weiss; 
Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Marsh;  Adjunct  Assistant  Professor  Lochman 

The  department  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  Ph.D.  degree.  The  areas  of  con- 
centration are  cognitive  and  sensory  sciences,  behavioral  neurosciences,  human  develop- 


162        Courses  of  Instruction 


ment,  and  clinical-personality.  A  brochure  is  available  from  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  which  describes  the  program  in  more  detail  and  gives  information  on  financial 
assistance,  facilities,  and  current  research  activities.  The  psychology  department  has  no 
foreign  language  requirement. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Advanced  Neuroscience  I.  Basic  neuroanatomy  and  neurophysiology,  physiol- 
ogy of  the  neuron  and  neural  networks,  neurotransmitter  functions,  sensory  and  motor 
systems.  Fall  semester.  C-L:  Zoology  200.  3  units  (4  with  laboratory).  Cant  and  McClay 

201.  Advanced  Neuroscience  II.  Integrative  activities  of  the  nervous  system:  sensory- 
motor  relationships,  neuroendocrine  relationships,  emotion  and  motivation,  sleep,  learn- 
ing and  memory,  diseases  of  the  nervous  system  and  their  psychological  correlates.  Spring 
semester.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  200. 3  units  (4  with  laboratory) .  R.  Erickson  and  W.  G. 
Hall 

203S.  Sensation  and  Perception.  Classical  and  current  concepts  and  methods.  3  units. 
Lockhead 

204S.  Great  Ideas  in  Psychology.  Ideas  in  psychology  drawn  from  various  areas  (per- 
ception, personality,  motivation,  biological  bases,  social,  cognitive,  developmental,  learn- 
ing, clinical)  and  various  methodological  approaches  (experimental,  introspection,  ob- 
servation, interview,  longitudinal,  simulation).  3  units.  Day 

207S.  Topics  in  Psychobiology.  The  biological  substrates  of  human  behavior  in  health 
and  disease.  Drug  abuse,  alcoholism,  depression,  schizophrenia,  and  human  aggression. 
Films  and  videotapes.  Student  presentations;  patient  interviews.  3  units.  Brodie 

210S.  Cognition.  Schematic  view  of  cognitive  psychology  plus  intensive  study  of  two 
to  three  specific  research  topics  such  as  forms  of  representation,  individual  differences, 
and  problem-solving  models.  Emphasis  on  alternative  experimental  and  theoretical  ap- 
proaches. Prerequisite:  Psychology  107  or  graduate  status.  3  units.  Day 

212S.  Human  Memory.  Classical  and  modern  literature,  data,  and  theories  relating 
to  mechanisms  of  information  processing,  storage,  and  retrieval.  3  units.  Hasher  or  Rubin 

214S.  Development  of  Social  Interaction.  Major  concepts  and  methods  pertaining 
to  early  social  development,  emphasizing  human  social  behavior  and  a  developmental 
psychobiological  approach.  3  units.  Eckerman 

215S.  Cognitive  Development.  Major  approaches  to  the  development  of  knowledge, 
including  Piaget,  Thomas  Kuhn,  Vygotsky  Eleanor  Gibson,  Kohlberg,  and  others.  3  units. 
I.  Wallach 

217S.  Advanced  Social  Psychology.  The  psychology  of  interpersonal  influence  and 
control;  the  cognitive  and  social  factors  affecting  the  perception  of  persons  and  social  ac- 
tion; the  dynamics  of  interpersonal  relations  and  relationship  formation  and  change;  the 
contribution  of  individual  differences  to  social  behavior.  Applications  in  environmental 
psychology,  social  psychology  and  law,  and  organizational  psychology.  3  units.  Costanzo 

219S.  Physiological  Foundations  of  Psychology.  Structure  and  function  of  the  ner- 
vous system  as  related  to  problems  of  sensory-motor  processes,  learning,  motivation,  and 
memory.  3  units.  C.  Erickson  and  R.  Erickson 

220S.  Psycholinguistics.  Selected  topics  such  as  neurolinguistics,  linguistic  versus 
pictorial  representation,  individual  differences,  oral  vs.  written  expression,  language  and 
personality,  and  the  language-thought  interaction.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  134  or  gradu- 
ate status.  3  units.  Day 

Psychology         163 


164        Courses  of  Instruction 


234S.  Advanced  Personality.  Selected  topics  of  current  interest  concerning  empiri- 
cal research  on  personality.  Strategies  for  the  definition  of  research  questions  and  the 
evaluation  of  research  progress.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  M.  Wallach 

238S.  Psychophysiology.  How  emotional  and  cognitive  processes  are  expressed  phys- 
iologically and  recorded  from  heart,  skin,  muscle,  and  brain  activity.  Discussion  of  ma- 
jor research  papers  in  the  field;  focus  on  outlining  what  is  known  and  developing  an  un- 
derstanding of  the  major  issues  in  psychophysiology.  Topics  include:  sleep,  selective 
attention,  memory,  language  processes,  lie  detection,  and  differentiation  between  arousal, 
anger,  and  fear.  Laboratory.  3  units.  Marsh 

266S.  Comparative  Neurobiology.  The  evolution  and  functional  organization  of  the 
vertebrate  brain .  A  study  of  the  original  papers  of  the  pioneers  in  comparative  anatomy. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  3  units.  Diamond  and  W.  C.  Hall 

267S.  Brain  Mechanisms  of  Behavior.  General  physiological  principles  of  brain  or- 
ganization in  relation  to  behavioral  processes  from  sensation  to  concept  formation  .Dis- 
cussions of  original  readings  from  seminal  papers  in  the  early  nineteenth  century  to  the 
present.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor  or  graduate  status.  3  units.  R.  Erickson 

270S.  A-R,  U-Z.  Selected  Problems.  New  courses  not  yet  in  the  bulletin  are  designated 
as  170S  or  270S  depending  on  level.  Since  all  faculty  offer  these  courses,  their  contents 
vary  accordingly.  Different  courses  indicated  by  the  letter.  3  units.  Staff 

273S.  Statistical  Principles  in  Experimental  Design.  The  problems  of  scientific  in- 
ference; methods  of  data  analysis  and  issues  in  experimental  design.  3  units.  Roth  or  staff 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  See  C-L:  History  284S;  also  C-L:  Cul- 
tural Anthropology  284S,  Political  Science  264S,  Sociology  284S,  and  Women's  Studies. 
3 units.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  orSpenner 

289S.  Psychology  of  Prevention.  Concepts  of  prevention  and  mental  health  promo- 
tion; community  psychology  and  social  systems;  epidemiology  and  prediction  of  disor- 
der; intervention  strategies;  evaluation  of  prevention  trials;  and  ethical  and  cultural  is- 
sues. 3  units.  Coie 

For  Graduates 

301.  Group  Psychotherapy  and  Group  Influence  Processes.  Theories  of  group  inter- 
ventions and  group  techniques.  3  units.  Lakin 

302.  Personality  Theory.  An  advanced  course  in  the  representative  theories  of  hu- 
man functioning,  from  Freud  to  contemporary  approaches.  3  units.  Staff 

305.  Psychopathology.  An  examination  of  behavior  disorders,  with  particular  empha- 
sis on  explanatory  concepts  and  the  evidence  from  research  in  this  field.  3  units.  Carson 

307.  Introduction  to  Theories  and  Methods  of  Mainstream  Psychotherapies.  Appli- 
cation of  personality  theories  to  therapeutic  change  processes.  Problems  of  therapy  case 
management.  3  units.  Carson  or  Lakin 

309.  Seminar  in  Learning.  Selected  topics  in  operant  conditioning  and  discrimina- 
tion learning.  3  units.  Staddon 

310.  Seminar  in  Perception.  3  units.  Lockhead 

318.  Measurement  and  Methods.  Examination  of  relationships  among  ideas, 
methods,  and  measures  in  psychological  and  social  research.  3  units.  Staff 


Psychology        165 


329-330.  Proseminar  in  Psychology.  A  historically  oriented,  team-taught  course  in- 
troducing graduate  students  to  important  ideas  and  discoveries  in  scientific  psycholo- 
gy. 6  units.  Staff 

335-336.  Personality  Assessment.  First  semester:  personality  assessment  through  in- 
terviews and  the  study  of  personal  documents.  Second  semester:  personality  assessment 
through  the  study  of  formal  tests,  objective  and  projective.  6  units.  Alexander 

338.  Ethics  for  Psychologists.  A  course  for  graduate  students  in  all  the  areas  of  psy- 
chology. 3  units.  Lakin 

339.  Ethics  for  Psychotherapists.  A  course  for  graduate  students  in  the  clinical  pro- 
gram. 3  units.  Lakin 

343-344.  Clinical  Practicum.  Intensive  experience  and  supervision  in  clinical  inter- 
vention processes.  Student  training  in  psychotherapy  strategies  and  techniques  and  in 
clinical  consultation  skills  is  conducted  in  clinical  settings.  6  units.  Staff 

348.  Psychotherapy  with  Children  and  Families.  Major  theoretical  approaches  to  clin- 
ical intervention  with  children  and  adolescents,  either  individually  or  in  the  family  sys- 
tem context.  3  units.  Coie 

349-350.  Practicum  in  Psychological  Research.  6  units.  Staff 

351.  Developmental  Psychopathology.  Consideration  of  major  psychopathological 
disorders  in  childhood  and  adolescence,  theories  and  research  on  etiology  and  predic- 
tion of  disorder.  3  units.  Lochtnan  and  Thompson 

398.  Graded  Research.  1  to  3  units.  Staff 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Psychology.  3  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
206S.  Stress  and  Health 
230S.  Social  Behavior  of  Animals 
231S.  Parent-Child  Interaction 
255S.  Perinatal  Behavior 
286S.  Biological  Basis  of  Hearing 
323,  324.  Seminar  in  Community  Psychology 
337.  Seminar  in  Sensory  Discrimination 

352.  Child  Assessment 

353.  Research  Practicum  in  Prevention 

Public  Policy  Studies 

Professor  Cook,  Director  (109C  Old  Chemistry);  Professor  Ladd,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies 
(112  Old  Chemistry);  Professors  Ascher,  Barber  (political  science),  Behn,  Clotfelter,  Eddy, 
Fleishman  (School  of  Law),  Gillis,  Horowitz  (School  of  Law),  Hough  (political  science), 
Kuniholm,  Pearsall  (engineering),  and  Price  (political  science);  Associate  Professors  Con- 
rad, Lipscomb,  Magat  (Fuqua  School  of  Business),  McConahay,  Rapaport,  and  Stack;  As- 
sistant Professors  Durning,  Malson,  Mayer,  and  Smith;  Professors  of  the  Practice  Geller, 
Stubbing,  and  Yaggy;  Lecturer  Payne;  Visiting  Professor  Healy  (School  of  Forestry  and 
Environmental  Studies) 

166         Courses  of  Instruction 


The  graduate  program  in  public  policy  studies  is  offered  through  the  Institute  of  Policy 
Sciences  and  Public  Affairs.  The  objective  of  the  program  is  to  prepare  students  for  jobs, 
particularly  in  the  public  sector,  which  require  analytical  skills  and  a  practical  understand- 
ing of  the  processes  by  which  policy  is  made  and  implemented. 

The  A.M.  degree  requires  two  academic  years  and  a  summer  internship.  The  first  year 
is  devoted  to  core  courses  in  policy  analysis,  including  sequences  in  quantitative  methods, 
economics,  political  analysis,  and  ethics.  The  summer  internship  is  arranged  with  a  fed- 
eral, state,  or  local  agency.  The  second-year  curriculum  includes  course  work  in  public 
management  and  macroeconomics,  a  concentration  in  a  substantive  policy  area,  and  a 
master's  "memo"  to  be  researched  and  written  on  a  problem  of  current  policy  concern. 

Students  who  are  concurrently  enrolled  in  a  Ph.D.  program  or  a  professional  degree 
program  (M.D.,  J.D.,M.B.A.,M.H.A.,  etc.),  or  who  have  already  obtained  such  a  degree, 
can  apply  for  an  abbreviated  version  of  the  A.M.  program.  Such  students  are  excused  from 
most  second-year  requirements,  so  ordinarily  the  A .  M .  in  public  policy  can  be  complet- 
ed in  one  additional  year.  Students  usually  apply  for  a  joint  degree  program  simultane- 
ously with  their  applications  to  the  graduate  departments  or  professional  schools,  or  dur- 
ing their  first  or  second  year  of  advanced  study. 

The  institute  does  not  award  a  Ph.D. 

More  information  concerning  the  A.M.  programs  can  be  obtained  by  writing  the 
Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

204S.  Ethics  in  Political  Life.  See  C-L:  Political  Science  204S.  3  units.  Spragens 

217.  Microeconomics  and  Public  Policy-Making.  Consumption  and  production  the- 
ory, welfare  economics,  theories  of  collective  choice,  market  structures  and  regulation, 
and  nonmarket  decision  making.  (Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy 
Studies  110.)  3  units.  Clotfelter 

218.  Macroeconomic  Policy.  Survey  of  macroeconomic  theory  and  analysis  of  poli- 
cies designed  to  reduce  unemployment,  stimulate  economic  growth,  and  stabilize  prices. 
Conventional  monetary  and  fiscal  instruments,  employment  policies,  and  new  policies 
designed  to  combat  inflation.  C-L:  Economics  218.  3  units.  Staff 

219.  The  Politics  of  the  Policy  Process.  The  formulation  of  public  policies,  substan- 
tive policies  in  a  variety  of  contexts  from  local  government  to  international  affairs;  the  role 
of  legislatures,  interest  groups,  chief  executives,  and  the  bureaucracy  in  defining  alter- 
natives and  in  shaping  policy  from  agenda  formulation  to  implementation.  (Not  open 
to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy  Studies  114.)  C-L:  Political  Science  248. 3  units. 
Mayer 

221.  Decision  Analysis  for  Public  Policymakers.  Methods  for  structuring  decision 
dilemmas  and  decomposing  complex  problems,  assessing  the  probabilities  of  uncertain 
consequences  of  alternative  decisions,  appraising  the  decision  maker's  preferences  for 
these  consequences  and  for  re-examining  the  decision.  (Not  open  to  students  who  have 
taken  Public  Policy  Studies  55.)  3  units.  Behn 

222.  Data  Analysis  for  Public  Policymakers.  Sampling  theory,  Bayesian  statistics,  and 
regression  analysis.  Examples  from  problems  in  health  care,  transportation,  crime,  ur- 
ban affairs,  and  politics.  (Not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy  Studies  112.) 
3  units.  McConahay 

223.  Ethics  and  Policy-Making.  Normative  concepts  in  politics,  liberty,  justice,  the 
public  interest:  historical  and  philosophical  roots,  relationship  to  one  another  and  to 
American  political  tradition,  and  implications  for  domestic  policy  problems.  Not  open 
to  students  who  have  taken  Public  Policy  Studies  116.  C-L:  Political  Science  245.  3  units. 
Rapaport 

Public  Policy  Studies        167 


231.  Quantitative  Evaluation  Methods.  Problems  in  quantifying  policy  target  varia- 
bles such  as  unemployment,  crime,  and  poverty.  Experimental  and  nonexperimental 
methods  for  evaluating  the  effect  of  public  programs,  including  topics  in  experimental 
design,  regression  analysis,  and  simulation.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  222  or 
equivalent.  3  units.  Cook  or  McConahay 

232.  Microeconomics:  Policy  Applications.  Cost  benefit  analysis  of  public  programs. 
Public  utility  regulation,  pollution  regulation,  hospital  rate  setting,  regulation  of  prod- 
uct safety.  Quantitative  methods  and  microeconomic  theory  for  analysis  of  both  norma- 
tive and  positive  aspects  of  economic  policy.  Prerequisites:  Public  Policy  Studies  110  or 
217  or  Economics  149  and  familiarity  with  regression  analysis  or  concurrent  enrollment 
in  Public  Policy  Studies  231.  C-L:  Economics  232.  3  units.  Ladd 

236S,  237S.  Public  Management  I  and  II:  Managing  Public  Agencies.  236S:  opera- 
tions management,  information  and  performance,  personnel  management,  public  sec- 
tor marketing.  237S:  organizational  strategy,  organizational  structure  and  design,  leader- 
ship and  motivation,  labor  negotiations.  Prerequisite  for  237S :  Public  Policy  Studies  236S. 
3  units  each.  Behn  or  Yaggy 

238S.  Public  Budgeting  and  Financial  Management.  Fund  accounting  for  govern- 
ment; techniques  of  financial  analysis,  including  break-even  analysis,  cost  accounting, 
cash-flow  analysis,  and  capital  budgeting;  and  governmental  budgeting,  including  the 
budgetary  process  and  reforms,  and  the  budget  crunch  in  the  public  sector.  3  units. 
Stubbing 

240S.  Analyzing  the  News.  Research  seminar  on  political  messages  and  effects  of  me- 
dia. Methods  and  findings  of  content  analysis,  survey  research,  critical  theory,  semiolo- 
gy; research  project  integrating  these  approaches.  C-L:  Political  Science  208S.  3  units.  Staff 

241.  Reporting  the  American  People.  Critical  analysis  of  the  sources  of  information 
the  media  rely  upon  in  reporting  opinion  and  policy  preferences:  opinion  polls,  bell- 
wethers, informed  elites.  Includes  the  design  and  execution  of  a  public  opinion  poll  on 
a  topic  of  local  or  national  interest.  3  units.  McConahay 

245S.  Leadership  Tutorial.  Analysis  of  techniques,  personal  qualities,  and  organiza- 
tional factors  that  help  or  hinder  effective  leadership.  Practical  experience  in  evaluation 
of  leadership  efforts.  Prerequisite:  Public  Policy  Studies  145D  or  consent  of  instructor.  3 
units.  Payne 

250S.  Policy,  Philanthropy,  and  the  Arts.  Democratic  and  aesthetic  values  in  relation 
to  past  and  present  patterns  of  public,  corporate,  and  philanthropic  support  for  the  arts. 
The  uses  of  art  criticism  and  political  theory  in  evaluating  subsidies,  grants,  tax  incen- 
tives, and  censorship.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Payne 

254.  Transportation  Planning  and  Policy  Analysis.  Prerequisite  or  corequisite:  Civ- 
il and  Environmental  Engineering  116  or  consent  of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Civil  and  Environ- 
mental Engineering  216.  3  units.  Pas 

257.  United  States  Policy  in  the  Middle  East.  From  World  War  II  to  the  present  with 
a  focus  on  current  policy  options.  3  units.  Kuniholm 

264S.  Research  Seminar:  Topics  in  Public  Policy  I.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Staff 

267S.  Policy-Making  in  International  Organizations.  Emphasis  on  international 
financial  institutions  such  as  the  World  Bank  and  the  International  Monetary  Fund. 
C-L:  Political  Science  267S.  3  units.  Ascher 

268.  Federal  Tax  Policy.  Structure,  incidence,  and  economic  effects  of  major  federal 
taxes.  Special  attention  to  problems  of  inflation,  income  definition,  distortions,  savings, 
and  investment.  C-L:  Economics  268.  3  units.  Clotfelteror  Schmalbeck 

168         Courses  of  Instruction 


270S.  Humanistic  Perspectives  on  Public  Policy.  Modes  of  inquiry  into  aspects  of  social 
life  important  to  policymakers  but  beyond  the  normal  reach  of  social  science.  Reading 
from  James  Agee,  Robert  Coles,  Eudora  Welty  James  Baldwin,  George  Eliot,  and  others. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Coles  and  Payne 

272.  Resource  Economics  and  Policy.  See  C-L:  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies 
270.  4  units.  Kramer 

278.  Human  Service  Bureaucracies.  Schools,  prisons,  courts,  welfare  agencies:  de- 
cision making,  implementation,  the  impact  of  work  practices  on  clients.  The  future  of 
street-level  bureaucracy.  3  units.  Malson 

283S.  Congressional  Policy-Making.  See  C-L:  Political  Science  283S.  3  units.  Bianco 
or  Canon 

284S.  Public  Policy  Process  in  Developing  Countries.  Policy-making  patterns  in  less 
developed  countries;  examples  from  Latin  America,  Africa,  and  Asia.  C-L:  Political 
Science  284S.  3  units.  Ascher 

286S.  Economic  Policy-Making  in  Developing  Countries.  Fiscal,  monetary,  and  ex- 
change rate  policies  in  less  developed  countries;  issues  in  public  policy  toward  natural 
resources  and  state-owned  enterprises.  Prerequisite :  Public  Policy  Studies  110  or  Econom- 
ics 149.  C-L:  Economics  286S.  3  units.  Conrad  or  Gillis 

For  Graduates 

303.  Public  Policy  Workshop  I.  Introduction  to  policy  analysis  and  advising.  Emphasis 
on  written  and  oral  communication  skills,  the  substance  of  public  policies,  and  the  role 
of  policy  analysts.  Open  to  Public  Policy  Studies  A.M.  students  only.  3  units.  Duming 

304.01.  Public  Policy  Workshop  II.  The  role  and  influence  of  policy  analysis.  The  ex- 
amination of  specific  public  policy  cases  and  recommendations  for  action .  Emphasis  on 
written  and  oral  communications  skills.  3  units.  Durning 

305.01.  Public  Policy  Workshop  III.  Emphasis  on  individual  or  group  projects.  Prepa- 
ration for  Master's  Memo.  Open  to  Public  Policy  Studies  A.M.  students  only.  3  units.  Yaggy 

325S,  326S.  Program  in  International  Development  Policy  Sector  Seminar.  Explo- 
ration of  the  relationships  among  sectoral  policies  and  sustainable  development  in  less 
developed  countries,  with  emphasis  on  a  particular  sector  each  year.  Open  only  to  Pro- 
gram in  International  Development  Policy  Fellows,  or  by  consent  of  instructor.  Variable 
credit.  Staff 

327, 328.  Program  in  International  Development  Policy  Issue  Seminar.  Topics  in  the 
policy  issues  and  institutional  structures  of  sectoral  policy-making  in  less  developed  coun- 
tries. Open  only  to  Program  in  International  Development  Policy  Fellows,  or  by  consent 
of  instructor.  Variable  credit.  Staff 

388.  Research  Tutorial  in  Public  Policy.  3  units.  Staff 

399.  Special  Readings  in  Public  Policy  Studies.  3  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
256.  The  Economics  of  Health  Care 
270S.  Humanistic  Perspectives  on  Public  Policy 

Religion 

Professor  Hillerbrand,  Chairman  (123A  Gray);  Professor  Hauerwas,  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  (209A  Divinity  School);  Professors  D.  Campbell,  Clark,  Crenshaw,  Herzog,  Kort, 

Religion         169 


Langford,  Lawrence,  Lincoln,  Marsden,  E.  Meyers,  Osborn,  D.  M.  Smith,  H.  Smith, 
Steinmetz,  Via,  Wainwright,  and  Wintermute;  Associate  Professors  Bailey,  Bland,  Cor- 
less,  C.  Meyers,  Partin,  Peters,  and  Surin;  Assistant  Professors  Berger,  T.  Campbell,  Fulker- 
son,  Keefe,  Martin,  Robinson,  and  Turner;  Research  Professor  Richey 

The  Department  of  Religion  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D. 
degrees.  Students  may  major  in  one  of  seven  fields:  (1)  Hebrew  Bible  and  Semitics,  (2) 
New  Testament  and  Christian  origins,  (3)  history  of  Christianity,  (4)  Christian  theology 
and  ethics,  (5)  history  of  Judaism,  (6)  history  of  religions,  and  (7)  religion  and  culture.  They 
will  be  expected  to  take  courses  which  will  contribute  to  an  adequate  understanding  of 
their  chosen  fields  of  specialization  and  will  be  required  to  take  two  written  preliminary 
examinations  within  their  field  of  concentration. 

In  addition  to  course  work  in  their  major  field,  students  will  take  such  other  courses 
in  cognate  fields  as  will  contribute  to  the  enrichment  of  their  major  studies  and  will  be 
required  to  take  one  written  preliminary  examination  in  a  single  cognate  area  within  the 
department.  A  minor  requirement  may  be  fulfilled  by  work  in  a  cognate  department,  such 
as  classical  studies,  history,  philosophy,  political  science,  or  sociology,  and  will  consti- 
tute the  outside  minor  and  material  for  a  fourth  written  preliminary  examination.  There 
is,  in  addition,  an  oral  examination  conducted  by  the  student's  committee  immediately 
subsequent  to  the  written  examinations.  There  is  a  foreign  language  requirement  of  two 
languages  which  must  be  met  before  taking  the  doctoral  preliminary  examination. 

The  program  of  doctoral  studies  presumes  a  foundation  in  the  academic  study  of  re- 
ligion. Students  applying  for  graduate  work  in  religion  directly  from  an  undergraduate 
program  should  have  had  a  strong  undergraduate  major  in  religion,  and  will  be  accept- 
ed for  the  Ph .  D.  program  only  upon  the  satisfactory  completion  of  the  A .  M .  degree  with 
the  department. 

The  graduate  program  also  offers  an  A . M .  degree  that  is  not  linked  to  a  specific  Ph.  D 
field .  Such  study  is  intended  to  encourage  individuals  to  pursue  a  variety  of  interests  ir- 
respective of  whether  they  desire  further  graduate  study.  An  A.M.  concentration  may 
be  in  any  of  the  seven  Ph .  D.  fields  or  in  an  individually  designed  program  of  study  (such 
as  Islamic  studies  or  religion  and  the  social  sciences). 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200.  Person  and  Work  of  Christ.  The  problem  of  knowledge  of  Christ  and  formula- 
tion of  a  doctrine  of  his  work  and  person  in  the  light  of  biblical  eschatology.  3  units.  Staff 

203.  Studies  in  American  Methodism.  Research  seminar  devoted  to  selected  topics 
in  the  Wesleyan  and  Methodist  traditions  in  America.  3  units.  Richey 

205.  War  and  the  Christian  Tradition.  An  analysis  of  how  Christians  have  understood 
and  evaluated  war,  with  particular  attention  to  the  question  of  the  moral  status  of  war. 
Works  by  Augustine,  Aquinas,  Bainton,  Ramsey,  Childress,  Niebuhr,  and  Johnson  will 
be  considered.  3  units.  Hauerwas 

207, 208.  Intermediate  Biblical  Hebrew.  Grammar  with  reading  and  exegesis  of  Old 
Testament  prose  and  poetry.  Prerequisite:  at  least  one  year  of  Hebrew  or  consent  of  in- 
structor. C-L:  Old  Testament  207,  208  in  the  Divinity  School.  6  units.  Staff 

210.  Contemporary  British  Theology.  Selected  problems  in  representative  British  the- 
ological writings  after  1900.  3  units.  Langford 

211.  Authority  in  Theology.  The  idea  and  function  of  authority  in  theology.  3  units. 
Fulkerson 

213.  Christian  Ethics  in  America.  Ethical  thought  in  America  since  Rauschenbush. 
3  units.  Hauerwas 


170        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


214.  Feminist  Theology.  Examination  of  feminist  theologians  and  religionists,  their 
critical  perspective  on  the  Christian  tradition  and  constructive  proposals  out  of  the 
resources  of  "female  experience."  3  units.  Fulkerson 

215S.  Theological  Ethics.  Philosophical  paradigms  and  the  nature  of  the  Christian 
life.  3  units.  Hauerwas 

217.  Islam  in  India.  History  and  thought  of  major  Indian  Muslims  from  Biruni  to  Wali- 
Ullah,  with  special  attention  to  the  role  of  Sufism.  An  introduction  to  selected  Muslim 
scholars  and  saints  who  contributed  to  the  interaction  between  Islam  and  Hinduism  in 
northern  India  during  the  second  millennium  A.D.  3  units.  Lawrence 

218.  Religions  of  East  Asia.  Shinto,  Taoism,  Confucianism,  and  East  Asian  Buddhism 
studied  phenomenologically  in  relation  to  the  Axial  Age.  3  units.  Corless 

219.  Augustine.  The  religion  of  the  Bishop  of  Hippo  in  late  antiquity.  C-L:  Medieval 
and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Clark 

220.  Rabbinic  Hebrew.  Interpretive  study  of  late  Hebrew,  with  readings  from  the 
Mishnah  and  Jewish  liturgy.  3  units.  E.  Meyers  or  staff 

221.  Readings  in  Hebrew  Biblical  Commentaries.  Selected  Hebrew  texts  in  Midrash 
Aggadah  and  other  Hebrew  commentaries  reflecting  major  trends  of  classical  Jewish  ex- 
egesis. 3  units.  Bland  or  staff 

222.  John  among  the  Gospels.  A  consideration  of  the  character,  content,  and  purpose 
of  the  Gospel  of  John  in  relation  to  the  synoptic  and  apocryphal  gospels.  Prerequisite: 
one  year  of  Hellenistic  Greek.  3  units.  M.  Smith 

223A-E.  Exegesis  of  the  Hebrew  Old  Testament.  3  units  each. 

A.  Pentateuch.  Staff 

B.  Historical  Books.  Staff 

C.  Major  Prophets.  Staff 

D.  Minor  Prophets.  Staff 

E.  Writings.  Staff 

225.  Living  Issues  in  New  Testament  Theology.  Critical  examination  of  major  prob- 
lems and  issues  in  New  Testament  interpretation  and  theology.  3  units.  Via 

226A-F.  Exegesis  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  I.  3  units  each. 

A.  Matthew.  Via 

B.  Romans.  Staff 

C.  Mark.  Via 

E.  The  Gospel  and  Epistles  of  John.  D.  M.  Smith 

F.  I  and  II  Corinthians.  D.  M.  Smith 

227A-E.  Exegesis  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  II.  3  units  each. 

A.  Luke.  Staff 

B.  Galatians.  D.  M.  Smith 

C.  The  Pastoral  Epistles.  Staff 

D.  Epistles  of  Peter  and  James.  Staff 

E.  Acts.  M.  Smith 

228.  Twentieth-Century  Continental  Theology.  An  investigation  of  leading  the- 
ologians and  theological  trends.  3  units.  Osborn 

230S.  The  Meaning  of  Religious  Language.  An  analysis  of  the  credentials  of  some 
typical  claims  of  theism  in  the  light  of  theories  of  meaning  in  recent  thought.  C-L:  Phi- 
losophy 230S.  3  units.  Staff 

232S.  Religion  and  Literature.  Theories  concerning  the  relation  of  religion  to  liter- 
ary forms,  particularly  narrative.  3  units.  Kort 

Religion        171 


233.  Modern  Narratives  and  Religious  Meanings.  A  study  of  kinds  of  religious  mean- 
ing or  significance  in  representative  American,  British,  and  Continental  fiction  of  the  first 
half  of  the  twentieth  century.  3  units.  Kort 

234.  Early  Christian  Asceticism.  The  development  of  asceticism  and  monasticism  in 
the  first  six  centuries  of  Christianity.  C-L:  Women's  Studies.  3  units.  Clark 

235.  Heresy:  Theological  and  Social  Dimensions  of  Early  Christian  Dissent.  3  units. 
Clark 

236.  Luther  and  the  Reformation  in  Germany.  The  theology  of  Martin  Luther  in  the 
context  of  competing  visions  of  reform .  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units. 
Steinmetz 

237.  History  of  the  Ancient  Near  East.  Emphasis  upon  the  religions,  literature,  and 
art  of  Mesopotamia.  3  units.  Bailey 

238.  Jewish  Responses  to  Christianity.  Apologetic  and  polemical  themes  in  rabbin- 
ic, medieval,  and  contemporary  writings.  3  units.  Bland 

239.  Introduction  to  Middle  Egyptian  I.  Grammar  and  readings  in  hieroglyphic  texts 
relating  to  the  Old  Testament.  3  units.  Wintermute 

240.  Introduction  to  Middle  Egyptian  II.  Readings  in  Middle  Egyptian  and  introduc- 
tion to  New  Egyptian  Grammar.  Prerequisite:  Religion  239.  3  units.  Wintermute 

242.  Life  after  Death  in  Semitic  Thought.  Consideration  of  the  various  ideas  from 
the  early  second  millennium  through  the  intertestamental  period.  Exegesis  of  selected 
Old  Testament  passages.  Evaluation  of  recent  research.  Knowledge  of  Hebrew  helpful 
but  not  required.  3  units.  Bailey 

243.  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Biblical  Times.  Investigation  of  selected  material 
remains  from  the  Bronze  Age  to  the  Persian  period.  Trends  in  biblical  studies,  with  par- 
ticular attention  to  methodological  considerations  and  current  developments.  3  units.  C. 

Meyers 

244.  The  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Hellenistic-Roman  Times.  The  study  of  mate- 
rial and  epigraphic  remains  as  they  relate  to  Judaism  in  Hellenistic-Roman  times,  with 
special  emphasis  on  Jewish  art.  3  units.  E.  Meyers 

246.  Problems  in  Historical  Theology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

247.  Readings  in  Latin  Ecclesiastical  Literature.  Readings  in  Latin  of  pastoral,  theo- 
logical, and  church-disciplinary  literature  from  the  late  patristic  and  medieval  period. 
Prerequisite:  knowledge  of  Latin.  3  units.  Keefe 

248.  The  Theology  of  Karl  Barth .  A  historical  and  critical  study  of  the  theology  of  Karl 
Barth.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Osborn 

250.  Women  in  the  Medieval  Church.  The  history  of  the  medieval  church  told  from 
its  women  figures:  the  life  and  writings  of  saints,  heretics,  abbesses,  queens,  mystics, 
recluses,  virgins,  bishops'  wives,  and  reformers.  3  units.  Keefe 

257.  New  Testament  Ethics.  Scope  and  basic  problems  of  New  Testament  ethics;  con- 
sideration of  two  important  New  Testament  books.  Problems  and  issues  such  as  the  role 
of  the  law,  symbolic  language  in  ethical  discourse,  conscience,  homosexuality,  the  state, 
and  self  deception.  3  units.  Via 

258.  Coptic.  Introduction  to  the  Sahidic  dialect  with  selected  readings  from  Chris- 
tian and  Gnostic  texts.  Prerequisite:  at  least  one  year  of  Greek.  3  units.  Wintermute 

172        Cou  rses  of  Instruction 


260.  Life  and  Thought  of  the  Wesleys.  A  seminar  on  John  and  Charles  Wesley  and 
their  colleagues  in  relation  to  English  culture  and  religion  in  the  eighteenth  century.  3  units. 
T.  Campbell 

264.  The  Sociology  of  the  Black  Church.  An  effort  to  identify,  define,  describe,  and 
interpret  the  black  church.  3  units.  Lincoln 

265.  The  Religions  of  the  West  Africa  Diaspora.  Religious  development  of  Africans 
displaced  to  the  Western  Hemisphere  by  slavery.  3  units.  Lincoln 

266.  Ethics  and  Health  Care.  3  units.  H.  Smith 

267.  American  Puritan  Thought  through  Edwards.  Study  of  some  of  the  classic  in- 
vestigations of  American  Puritan  thought,  culminating  with  a  more  intensive  look  at  liter- 
ature by  and  about  Jonathan  Edwards.  3  units.  Marsden 

268.  Revelation  and  Authority  in  the  Church.  A  critical  and  constructive  examina- 
tion of  contemporary  concepts.  3  units.  H.  Smith 

269.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities.  C-L:  English  283  and  Women's  Studies. 
3  units.  Clark,  Orr,  Pope,  or  Tompkins 

270.  American  Evangelicalism  and  Fundamentalism.  A  study  of  some  of  the  major 
themes  in  the  development  of  transdenominational  evangelicalism  and  fundamental- 
ism in  America  from  the  eighteenth  century  to  the  present.  This  will  be  a  reading  semi- 
nar involving  analyses  and  discussions  of  literature  (mostly  secondary  works)  important 
for  understanding  American  evangelicalism  as  a  distinct  movement.  3  units.  Marsden 

272.  The  Early  Medieval  Church:  Gregory  of  Tours;  Isidore  of  Seville;  Bede.  A  so- 
cial history  of  the  church  in  France,  Spain,  and  England  from  the  sixth  to  the  eighth  cen- 
turies studied  through  the  writings  of  Gregory  of  Tours,  Isidore  of  Seville,  and  Bede. 
Prerequisite:  knowledge  of  Latin.  3  units.  Keefe 

273.  Continental  and  British  Roots  of  Evangelicalism.  This  course  will  introduce  a 
range  of  religious  phenomena  in  Europe  and  Britain  in  the  late  seventeenth  and  eight- 
eenth centuries  characterized  by  a  stress  on  personal  religious  experience.  Movements 
studied  will  include  Jansenism,  quietism,  radical  movements  of  the  English  Revolution, 
pietistic  puritanism,  precisianism,  reformed  and  Lutheran  pietism,  and  the  evangelical 
revival  in  Wales  and  England.  3  units.  T.  Campbell 

276.  Baptism  in  the  Patristic  and  Early  Medieval  Period.  A  study  of  the  celebration 
and  interpretation  of  the  rite  of  Christian  initiation  in  the  church  orders,  catechetical  ser- 
mons and  liturgical  commentaries  of  the  first  five  centuries  and  in  the  service  books  and 
legislative  and  pastoral  texts  of  the  early  church  writers.  3  units.  Keefe 

279.  Understandings  of  the  Resurrection  in  Contemporary  Thought.  Recent  litera- 
ture on  the  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ  from  the  perspectives  of  exegesis,  historical  criti- 
cism, hermeneutics,  and  systematic  significance.  3  units.  Wainwright 

280.  The  History  of  the  History  of  Religions.  The  origin  and  history  of  the  compara- 
tive study  of  religion,  with  particular  attention  to  its  methodology.  3  units.  Partin 

282.  Myth  and  Ritual.  Myths,  rites,  and  symbols  as  modes  of  religious  expression. 
Interpretation  of  symbolic  configurations  of  kingship,  initiation,  sacrifice,  and  pilgrimage 
in  diverse  cultural  contexts.  3  units.  Robinson  and  staff 

283.  Islam  and  Modernism.  Cultural,  religious,  and  ideological  forces  which  shape 
Muslim  responses  to  modernism.  3  units.  Lawrence 

285.  Introduction  to  the  History  of  Religions.  The  history,  symbols,  rites,  and  struc- 
tures of  the  manifestations  of  the  sacred  in  the  major  religious  traditions  of  the  world. 
3  units.  Staff 

Religion        173 


287.  The  Scriptures  of  Asia.  Translations  of  basic  texts  from  the  religious  traditions 
of  India,  China,  and  Japan.  3  units.  Staff 

292.  Happiness,  Virtue,  and  Friendship.  Issues  of  their  relationship  in  moral  phi- 
losophy. 3  units.  Hauerwas 

293.  Religious  Issues  in  American  History.  A  reading  seminar  devoted  to  selected 
topics,  problems,  and  issues  in  American  religion.  3  units.  Richey 

295.  Religion  in  the  American  South.  A  study  of  the  interrelationships  of  Southern 
religion  and  Southern  culture.  3  units.  Marsden 

297.  Philosophical  and  Theological  Discourses  on  Modernity.  Theological  responses 
to  the  intellectual  and  cultural  agendas  set  by  the  Enlightenment.  3  units.  Surin 

298.  Religious  Pluralism  and  Christian  Theologies.  The  ascription  of  superiority  or 
uniqueness  to  particular  religions  within  the  context  of  the  world  religions.  The  phenome- 
non of  religious  pluralism  will  provide  a  thematic  focus  for  this  study.  3  units.  Surin 

299.  The  Christian  Understanding  of  Human  Nature  and  Destiny.  Representative 
historical  and  recent  theological  interpretations  of  human  nature,  predicament,  deliver- 
ance, and  possibility.  3  units.  Langford 

For  Graduates 

300.  Systematic  Theology.  Method  and  structure  of  systematic  theology,  the  doctrine 
of  God,  theological  anthropology,  and  Christology.  3  units.  Herzog 

302.  Studies  in  the  Intertestamental  Literature.  Selected  documents  of  the  Apocry- 
pha and  Pseudepigrapha  examined  exegetically  and  theologically  in  their  relation  to 
postexilic  Judaism.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

304.  Aramaic.  A  study  of  the  Aramaic  portions  of  the  Old  Testament  and  selected  pas- 
sages from  the  Elephantine  and  Qumran  texts.  3  units.  E.  Meyers  or  Wintermute 

305.  The  Septuagint .  A  study  of  the  modern  critical  use  of  the  Greek  Old  Testament. 
Prerequisites:  knowledge  of  Greek  and  Hebrew.  3  units.  Peters 

306.  Language  and  Literature  of  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls.  A  study  in  interpretation. 
Prerequisite:  a  knowledge  of  Hebrew.  3  units.  Staff 

307.  Syriac.  A  study  of  the  script  and  grammar,  with  readings  from  the  Syriac  New 
Testament  and  other  early  Christian  documents.  Prerequisite:  some  knowledge  of  He- 
brew and  Aramaic.  3  units.  Staff 

309.  Hermeneutics.  Consideration  of  the  nature  of  understanding  and  of  several  in- 
terpretive methods— such  as  phenomenological,  existential,  historical,  literary, 
structural— along  with  their  application  to  New  Testament  texts,  primarily  the  parables 
of  Jesus.  3  units.  Via 

310.  Readings  in  Judaica.  Selected  studies  in  Jewish  material  culture  and  problems 
in  Jewish  religious  and  intellectual  history.  3  units.  Bland,  E.  Meyers,  and  staff 

316S.  History  of  Religions.  Selected  problems  in  the  field.  3  units.  Staff 

322.  Nineteenth-Century  European  Theology.  Protestant  theology  from  Kant  to  Herr- 
mann. 3  units.  Herzog 

323A.  Comparative  Semitic  I.  An  introduction  to  the  morphology  and  syntax  of  clas- 
sical Ethiopic  and  the  Semitic  languages  of  Mesopotamia,  together  with  a  consideration 
of  their  relationship  to  Hebrew.  3  units.  Wintermute 

174         Courses  of  Instruction 


323B.  Comparative  Semitic  II.  An  introduction  to  the  morphology  and  syntax  of  clas- 
sical Arabic  and  the  Semitic  languages  of  Palestine-Syria,  together  with  a  consideration 
of  their  relationship  to  Hebrew.  3  units.  Wintertnute 

325.  Philosophical  Theology  I.  Theology,  as  the  knowledge  of  God,  considered  in 
dialogue  with  selected  pagan  and  Christian  philosophers  from  Plato  to  Kant.  3  units. 
Langford 

326.  Philosophical  Theology  II.  Continuation  of  Philosophical  Theology  I.  3  units. 
Langford 

329.  Readings  in  Theology  and  Language.  Sample  treatments  of  religious  language 
in  linguistic  analysis,  hermeneutical  theory,  literary  criticism,  liturgical  practice,  and  fun- 
damental theology.  3  units.  Wainwright 

330.  Contemporary  Christologies.  A  seminar  dealing  with  contemporary  Roman 
Catholic  and  Protestant  Christology.  Readings  and  discussion  will  focus  on  theological 
proposals  from  major  contemporary  figures.  3  units.  Wainwright 

332.  System  in  Theology.  An  examination  of  the  various  factors  that  go  into  the  shap- 
ing of  a  systematic  theology,  followed  by  a  study  of  several  recent  and  contemporary  ex- 
amples of  the  genre.  3  units.  Wainwright 

333.  The  Doctrine  of  the  Trinity.  Biblical  bases,  patristic  developments,  contemporary 
statements  and  connections.  3  units.  Wainwright 

335.  The  English  Church  in  the  Eighteenth  Century.  Studies  of  Christianity  in  En- 
gland from  the  Act  of  Toleration,  1689,  tothedeathof  John  Wesley,  1791. 3units.  T.  Campbell 

336.  Worlds  and  Texts.  The  focus  of  this  course  will  be  on  specific  works  in  theologi- 
cal method  which  deal,  whether  directly  or  indirectly,  with  the  question  of  the  affiliations 
between  texts  and  their  mediating  social  and  historical  realities.  3  units.  Surin 

337.  Theology  of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas.  Intensive  reading  of  the  Summa  Tlieologica  and 
biblical  commentaries.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Steinmetz 

338.  Calvin  and  the  Reformed  Tradition.  The  theological  development  of  John  Cal- 
vin. A  comprehensive  examination  of  his  mature  position  with  constant  reference  to  the 
theology  of  other  reformers.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Steinmetz 

339.  The  Radical  Reformation.  Protestant  movements  of  dissent  in  the  sixteenth  cen- 
tury. Special  attention  will  be  devoted  to  Miintzer,  Carlstadt,  Hubmaier,  Schwenckfeld, 
Denck,  Marpeck,  Socinus,  and  Menno  Simons.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies. 
3  units.  Steinmetz 

340, 341.  Seminar  in  the  New  Testament.  Research  and  discussion  on  a  selected  prob- 
lem in  the  biblical  field.  Spring  only.  3  units  each.  Staff 

342.  American  Religious  Biography.  A  study  of  the  leading  biographies  of  Ameri- 
can religious  figures  and  of  the  qualities  of  a  successful  biography.  3  units.  Marsden 

343.  Readings  in  Ancient  Near  Eastern  Wisdom  Literature.  A  survey  of  the  principal 
Egyptian  and  Mesopotamian  works  that  relate  to  biblical  wisdom.  3  units.  Crenshaw 

346.  Practical  Reason  and  Personal  Identity:  Explorations  in  Narrative.  This  course 
will  deal  with  questions  of  the  nature  of  rationality  in  morality  and  theology  and  attend 
particularly  to  those  suggestions  about  narrative  as  the  form  of  such  rationality.  The  read- 
ings will  involve  works  by  Frei,  Ricoeur,  Goldberg,  Maclntyre,  and  McClendon,  as  well 
as  work  in  literary  criticism.  3  units.  Hauerwas 

347.  Hebrew  Narrative  Art.  Analysis  of  the  literary  craft  of  selected  biblical  narratives, 
and  critique  of  various  approaches  to  studying  the  art  of  Hebrew  narrative.  Prerequisites: 
knowledge  of  Hebrew  and  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Crenshaw 

Religion         175 


350,  351.  Old  Testament  Seminar.  Research  and  discussion  on  selected  problems  in 
the  Old  Testament  and  related  fields.  Fall  only.  3  units  each.  Staff 

352.  Seminar  in  Christian  Theology.  Research  and  discussion  of  a  selected  problem 
in  the  systematic  field.  3  units.  Staff 

353.  Seminar  on  Text  Criticism.  Emphasis  upon  transmission,  versions,  apparatus, 
and  method.  Prerequisite:  reading  knowledge  of  Hebrew  and  Greek.  3  units.  Bailey 

360.  Special  Problems  in  Religion  and  Culture.  Intensive  investigation  of  the  rela- 
tions of  religion  and  modernity,  using  seminal  contemporary  texts.  Topics  announced 
each  semester.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Surin 

362.  Readings  in  Old  Testament  and  Semitic  Studies.  Selected  studies  in  the  Hebrew 
Bible  and  the  languages  and  literatures  of  the  ancient  Near  East.  3  units.  Staff 

363.  Readings  in  New  Testament  and  Christian  Origins.  Selected  studies  on  a  theme 
in  modern  New  Testament  scholarship.  3  units.  Staff 

364.  Readings  in  History  of  Christianity.  Selected  issues  in  the  social,  material,  and 
intellectual  history  of  Christianity.  3  units.  Staff 

365.  Readings  in  Christian  Theology  and  Ethics.  An  examination  of  selected  topics 
of  historical  and  contemporary  interest  in  these  fields.  3  units.  Staff 

366.  Readings  in  History  of  Religions.  Selected  studies  in  cross-cultural  and  inter- 
creedal  material,  together  with  assessment  of  the  problems  they  pose  for  the  study  of  re- 
ligion. 3  units.  Staff 

367.  Readings  in  Religion  and  Culture.  Analysis  and  discussion  of  theories  and  of 
individual  research  projects.  3  units.  Staff 

373-374.  Elementary  Akkadian.  Study  of  the  elements  of  Akkadian  grammar.  Read- 
ing of  neo-Assyrian  texts  shedding  light  on  the  Old  Testament .  Prerequisite :  biblical  He- 
brew. 6  units.  Bailey 

383.  Moral  Theology  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  Critical  and  comparative  examina- 
tion of  ethical  theory  as  exhibited  in  the  work  of  selected  contemporary  theologians.  3 
units.  H.  Smith 

387.  Ethical  Method.  Selected  methodological  issues  in  contemporary  theological 
ethics.  3  units.  H.  Smith 

388.  Ethics  and  Medicine.  A  critical  study  of  selected  aspects  of  modern  biomedical 
technology,  with  special  reference  to  the  ethical  assumptions  informing  their  develop- 
ment and  practice.  3  units.  H.  Smith 

389.  Christian  Ethics  and  Contemporary  Culture.  A  study  of  the  interaction  between 
Christian  thought  and  current  social  theory.  3  units.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
204.  Origen 

206.  Christian  Mysticism  in  the  Middle  Ages 
209.  Old  Testament  Theology 

231S.  Seminar  in  Religion  and  Contemporary  Thought 
241.  Problems  in  Reformation  Theology 
245.  Ethics  in  World  Religions 
247.  Readings  in  Latin  Theological  Literature 
249.  The  Lord's  Prayer 

176         Courses  of  Instruction 


251.  Counter-Reformation  and  Development  of  Catholic  Dogma 

252.  Nineteenth-  and  Twentieth-Century  Roman  Catholic  Theology 
256.  John  Wesley  in  Controversial  and  Ecumenical  Theology 

259.  Icon  Theology 

262.  Marxist  Ideology  and  Christian  Faith 

263.  Third  World  Theology 

281.  Phenomenology  and  Religion 
284.  The  Religion  and  History  of  Islam 

288.  Buddhist  Thought  and  Practive 

289.  Theology  and  Contemporary  Secular  Understanding  of  Human  Nature 

290.  Current  Problems  in  Christian  Social  Ethics 

291.  Historical  Forms  of  Protestant  Ethics 
294.  Christianity  and  the  State 

301.  Seminar  in  Contemporary  Christian  Ethics 
304A.  Targumic  Aramaic 
308.  Greek  Patristic  Texts 

311.  Pharisaic  Judaism  in  the  First  Century 

312.  Pauline  Theology 

313.  The  Apostolic  Fathers 

314.  Judaism  and  Christianity  in  the  New  Testament 

317.  Seminar  in  the  Greek  Apologists 

318.  Seminar  in  the  Greek  Fathers 

319.  The  Gospel  According  to  Saint  Matthew  in  Recent  Research 

320.  Theology,  Power,  and  Justice 

324.  Readings  in  the  History  of  Religion 

327.  Philosophical  Method  in  Religious  Studies 

328.  Twentieth-Century  European  Theology 
331.  Eschatology 

334.  Theology  and  Reform  in  the  Later  Middle  Ages 
344.  Zwingli  and  the  Origins  of  Reformed  Theology 
380.  Existentialist  Thought 
386.  Christianity  in  Dialogue  with  Other  Faiths 

397.  Issues  in  American  Theology 

398.  Colloquium  on  the  Teaching  of  Religion 
401.  Colloquium  on  Biblical  Studies 

Religion        177 


Romance  Studies 

Professor  Perez  Firmat,  Chairman  (205  Languages);  Associate  Professor  Kaplan,  Director 
of  Graduate  Studies  (308  Languages);  Professors  Fein,  Garci-Gomez,  Jameson,  Mudimbe, 
Osuna,  Schor,  Stewart,  Tetel,  Thomas,  and  Wardropper;  Associate  Professors  Caserta, 
Hull,  Mudimbe-Boyi  and  Orr,  Assistant  Professors  Bell,  Ferrell,  Finucci,  Ross,  Sieburth, 
and  Solterer;  Visiting  Professor  Dorfman 

The  Department  of  Romance  Studies  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  A.M.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees  in  French  and  Spanish.  Requirements  for  the  A.M.  may  be  completed  by 
submission  of  a  thesis  or  by  passing  a  comprehensive  examination  in  the  major  field .  Relat- 
ed work  for  the  A.M.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  is  required  in  a  second  Romance  language  or 
in  any  one  or  two  of  a  number  of  other  subject  areas.  A  reading  knowledge  of  one  foreign 
language  which  is  outside  the  major  language  is  required. 

In  order  to  undertake  graduate  study  in  Romance  languages,  the  entering  student 
should  have  credit  for  at  least  18  semester  hours  (or  equivalent)  above  the  intermediate 
level  in  the  major  language. 

FRENCH 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200S.  Seminar  in  French  Literature.  Topics  to  be  announced.  3  units.  Staff 

210.  The  Structure  of  French.  Modern  French  phonology,  morphology,  and  syntax. 
Readings  in  current  linguistic  theory.  3  units.  Hull 

211 .  History  of  the  French  Language.  The  evolution  of  French  from  Latin  to  its  pres- 
ent form;  internal  developments  and  external  influences.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  3  units.  Hull 

223.  Semiotics  for  Literature.  Theoretical  writings  in  general  semiotics  by  Frege,  Peirce, 
Saussure,  Mukarovsky,  Morris  and  their  applications  for  textual  analysis  of  French  liter- 
ary works  by  representative  contemporary  critics  such  as  Eco,  Riffaterre,  Corti,  and  Grei- 
mas.  Taught  in  English.  C-L:  Literature  280.  3  units.  Thomas 

240.  Old  French  Literature.  An  introduction  to  the  reading  of  medieval  French  liter- 
ary texts.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Solterer 

248.  French  Literature  of  the  Seventeenth  Century.  The  baroque  and  the  classical: 
form  and  meaning  in  the  plays  of  Corneille,  Racine,  and  Moliere.  Readings  in  baroque 
and  precieux  poetry.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Ferrell 

251, 252.  Literature  of  the  Eighteenth  Century.  Problems  of  literary  history,  critical 
reading,  and  interpretation,  focused  on  varying  topics.  6  units.  Stewart 

255.  French  Preromantic  and  Romantic  Poetry.  Chenier,  Vigny,  Lamartine,  Musset, 
Hugo,  and  Nerval.  3  units.  Orr 

256.  Modern  Literature  and  History.  The  problems  of  history,  society,  and  politics 
in  literature,  through  the  writings  of  Rousseau,  Tocqueville,  Michelet,  Flaubert,  Hugo, 
Merleau-Ponty,  Foucault,  and  others.  3  units.  Orr 

257.  Problems  of  Identity  in  the  Nineteenth-Century  Novel.  Romanticism  and  roman- 
tic realism,  studied  especially  in  the  works  of  Chateaubriand,  Stendhal,  Constant,  de 
Stael,  and  Sand.  3  units.  Bell,  Jameson,  Orr,  or  Schor 

258.  The  Narrative  of  Social  Crisis.  Realism  and  naturalism,  with  special  emphasis 
on  Balzac,  Flaubert,  and  Zola.  3  units.  Bell,  Jameson,  Orr,  or  Schor 

261.  French  Symbolism.  Poetry  and  theories  of  Baudelaire,  Mallarme,  and  Rimbaud. 
Decadence:  Lautreamont  and  Laforgue.  3  units.  Thomas 

178        Courses  of  Instruction 


263.  Contemporary  French  Theater.  Dramatic  theory;  the  art  of  the  leading  directors; 
the  major  texts  of  Claudel,  Anouilh,  Sartre,  Beckett,  Ionesco,  Genet,  Adamov,  Arrabal, 
and  Rezvani.  3  units.  Kaplan,  Orr,  or  Thomas 

264.  Contemporary  French  Poetry.  The  language  of  poetry.  A  chronological  and  the- 
oretical approach  to  the  major  poets  and  movements  since  1950.  Selections  from  Bonne- 
foy,  Char,  Daive,  Deguy,  Dupin,  Jabes,  Jaccottet,  Faye,  Guillevic,  Michaux,  Meschonnic, 
Noel,  Oulipo,  Ponge,  Stefan,  Tortel,  and  others.  3  units.  Orr  or  Thomas 

265.  French  Literature  of  the  Early  Twentieth  Century.  Emphasis  on  Gide,  Mauriac, 
Proust,  and  Colette.  3  units.  Kaplan 

266.  French  Literature  of  the  Mid-Twentieth  Century.  Emphasis  on  Malraux,  Sartre, 
Camus,  and  the  nonveau  roman.  3  units.  Jameson 

267.  Contemporary  French  Novel.  A  chronological  and  theoretical  approach  to  the 
major  writers  and  movements  since  1970.  Selections  from  Duras,  LeClezio,  Sallenave,  Mo- 
diano,  Sollers,  Tournier,  Oulipo,  Yourcenar,  and  others.  3  units.  Kaplan,  Orr,  or  Thomas 

290S.  Studies  in  a  Contemporary  Figure.  A  writer,  philosopher,  critic,  or  artist.  3  units. 
Staff 

For  Graduates 

325.  French  Prose  of  the  Sixteenth  Century.  Rabelais,  Marguerite  de  Navarre,  Mon- 
taigne, and  others.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Tetel 

326.  Topics  in  Renaissance  Poetry.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units. 
Tetel 

391,  392.  French  Seminar.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Bell,  Ter- 
rell, Jameson,  Kaplan,  Mudimbe,  Mudimbe-Boyi,  Orr,  Schor,  Solterer,  Steivart,  Tetel,  and  Thomas 

Graduate  Reading  Course.  An  intensive  course  in  French  to  develop  rapidly  the  ability 
to  read  French  in  several  fields.  Graduate  students  only.  No  credit. 

ITALIAN 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

283.  Italian  Novel  of  the  Novecento.  Representative  novelists  from  Svevo  to  the  most 
recent  writers.  3  units.  Caserta 

284.  Dante.  La  Vita  Nuova  and  a  close  reading  of  the  Inferno.  Conducted  in  English. 
C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Caserta 

285.  Dante.  The  Purgatorio  and  the  Paradiso  in  the  light  of  Dante's  cultural  world .  Special 
attention  will  be  given  to  the  poetic  significance  of  the  Commedia.  Prerequisite:  Italian  284 
or  equivalent.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Caserta 

SPANISH 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

200S.  Seminar  in  Spanish  Literature.  Topics  to  be  announced.  3  units.  Staff 

210.  History  of  the  Spanish  Language.  Formation  and  development  of  Spanish:  in- 
ternal forces  and  external  contributions.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units. 
Garci-Gbmez 

241.  Colonial  Prose  of  Spanish  America.  Narrative  forms  written  in  Spanish  America 
during  the  sixteenth,  seventeenth,  and  eighteenth  centuries.  3  units.  Ross 

Romance  Studies         179 


242.  Colonial  Poetry  and  Theater  of  Spanish  America.  The  expression  of  Renaissance 
and  baroque  styles  in  the  Hispanic  New  World,  including  works  of  Sor  Juana,  Ruiz  de 
Alarcon,  Ercilla,  and  others.  3  units.  Ross 

245.  Modern  Spanish-American  Poetry.  From  modernismo  to  the  present.  3units.  Fein 

246.  Modern  Spanish-American  Fiction.  Twentieth-century  novels  and  short  stories 
by  Borges,  Carpentier,  Cortazar,  Gallegos,  Garcia  Marquez,  Quiroga,  and  others.  3  units. 
Perez  Firmat 

248.  Studies  in  Spanish-American  Literature.  Concentration  on  single  authors, 
genres,  movements,  or  themes.  3  units.  Dorfman  and  staff 

251.  The  Origins  of  Spanish  Prose  Fiction.  Selected  examples  of  the  romance  and 
the  novel:  Amadis  de  Gaula,  Diego  de  San  Pedro's  La  Carcel  deamor,  the  Abencerraje,  the 
Lazarillo,  Montemajor's  Diana.  C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Wardropper 

253.  Cervantes.  The  life  and  works  of  Cervantes,  with  special  emphasis  on  his  Quijote. 
C-L:  Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Wardropper 

254.  Drama  of  the  Golden  Age.  The  chief  Spanish  dramatists  of  the  seventeenth  cen- 
tury with  readings  of  representative  plays  of  this  period .  C-L :  Medieval  and  Renaissance 
Studies.  3  units.  Wardropper 

258S.  Spanish  Lyric  Poetry  before  1700.  A  critical  study,  based  on  close  reading  and 
discussion,  of  selected  poems  of  the  Middle  Ages,  Renaissance,  and  baroque.  Special  em- 
phasis on  the  Razbn  deamor,  la  Poesia  de  tipo  tradicional,  and  Santillana;  on  Garcilaso,  San 
Juan  de  la  Cruz,  Fray  Luis  de  Leon,  and  Herrera;  on  Gongora  and  Quevedo.  C-L:  Medi- 
eval and  Renaissance  Studies.  3  units.  Wardropper 

262.  The  Romantic  Movement.  Principal  manifestations  of  romanticism  in  Hispan- 
ic literature;  poetry  (Becquer,  Espronceda,  Rosalia  de  Castro),  drama  (Rivas,  Zorrilla),  and 
the  novel  (Issacs,  Marmol).  3  units.  Perez  Firmat  or  Sieburth 

266.  Nineteenth-Century  Prose  Fiction.  Readings  by  novelists  such  as  Valera,  Galdos, 
Alas,  and  Pardo  Bazan  in  the  light  of  current  critical  theory.  3  units.  Sieburth 

275.  Modern  Spanish  Poetry.  Juan  Ramon  Jimenez,  Unamuno,  Antonio  Machado, 
the  Generation  of  1927,  and  the  contemporary  poets.  3  units.  Osuna  or  Perez  Firmat 

276.  Modern  Spanish  Drama.  The  theater  of  Benavente,  Valle-Inclan,  Lorca,  Caso- 
na,  Buero  Vallejo,  Sastre,  and  Arrabal.  3  units.  Osuna 

277.  Modern  Spanish  Novel.  From  the  Generation  of  1898  to  the  present.  3  units.  Osu- 
na or  Perez  Firmat 

For  Graduates 

391, 392.  Hispanic  Seminar.  Each  semester  one  of  the  following  topics  will  be  select- 
ed for  intensive  treatment:  the  Spanish  language  in  America,  studies  in  medieval  litera- 
ture, studies  in  the  literature  of  the  Golden  Age,  studies  in  Latin  American  literature, 
studies  in  the  Spanish  Renaissance  and  baroque,  studies  in  Spanish  poetry,  studies  in 
nineteenth-century  Spanish  literature,  and  studies  in  twentieth-century  literature.  C-L: 
Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies.  6  units.  Staff 

ROMANCE  STUDIES 

218.  The  Teaching  of  Romance  Languages.  Evaluation  of  objectives  and  methods; 
practical  problems  of  language  teaching  at  the  elementary,  secondary,  and  college  lev- 
els; analysis  of  textbooks,  texts,  and  audiovisual  aids;  applied  linguistics.  3  units.  Hull 

180        Courses  of  Instruction 


310.  Computers  for  the  Humanities.  Applications  of  computers  in  three  major  hu- 
manistic areas:  (a)  textual  research— concordances,  stylistic  analysis,  critical  editing;  (b) 
text  processing;  and  computer-assisted  or  computer-managed  instruction  in  the  humanis- 
tic disciplines.  No  prior  training  in  computing  is  required.  Theoretical  lectures  and 
programming  practicum.  3  units.  Thomas 

Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 

Assistant  Professors  Andrews  and  Pugh;  Professor  Emeritus  Krynski;  Associate  Professor 
Emeritus  Jezierski;  Adjunct  Associate  Professor  Pelech;  Visiting  Associate  Professor 
Lahusen 

The  Department  of  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures  offers  graduate  courses  in  Rus- 
sian language  and  literature  and  limited  training  in  the  language  and  literature  of  Poland . 

Students  should  have  sufficient  preparation  in  the  Russian  language  to  enable  them 
to  read  Russian  classical  literature  in  the  original.  Any  presently  unscheduled  course  will 
be  taught  in  any  semester  upon  request. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

201, 202.  Russian  Novel  of  the  Nineteenth  Century.  201 :  1830  to  1870. 202: 1870  to  1900. 
Prerequisites:  Russian  161  and  162  or  equivalents.  6  units.  Staff 

205.  Semiotics  and  Linguistics.  A  survey  of  modern  semiotics,  particularly  the  works 
of  C.  S.  Peirce  and  Umberto  Eco.  Semiotic  works  directly  related  to  modern  linguistic 
thought  and  linguistic  sign  theory.  Emphasis  on  the  interdisciplinary  aspects  of  semiot- 
ic theory.  C-L:  English  205.  3  units.  Andrews 

225.  Tolstoy.  War  and  Peace  and  other  works.  Prerequisite:  Russian  175S  or  equivalent. 
3  units.  Staff 

232.  Dostoevsky.  Emphasis  on  Brothers  Karamazov  and  the  theory  of  the  novel .  Prereq- 
uisite: Russian  176  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Staff 

250.  Russian  Literary  Criticism  from  Lomonosov  to  Lotman.  Russian  literary  criti- 
cism from  its  beginning  with  Mihkail  Lomonosov  to  its  most  eminent  living  practition- 
er, Iurii  Lotman.  Some  major  figures  treated  are  Lomonosov,  Karamzin,  Belinskii,  Cher- 
nyshevskii,  Dobroliubov,  Pisarev,  Mikhailovskii,  Shklovskii,  Bakhtin,  Jakobson,  Lotman. 
Taught  in  English.  3  units.  Pelech 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
207.  Soviet  Literature  and  Culture 
230.  Chekhov 

Sociology 

Professor  Land,  Chairman  (268  Sociology-Psychology);  Associate  Professor  Gereffi,  Direc- 
tor of  Graduate  Studies  (264  Sociology-Psychology);  Professors  Back,  George  (psychiatry 
and  Aging  Center),  Kerckhoff,  Maddox,  Myers,  CBarr  (cultural  anthropology),  Simp- 
son, Smith,  and  Tiryakian;  Associate  Professors  DiPrete,  O'Rand,  Spenner,  and  Wilson; 
Assistant  Professor  Janoski;  Professor  Emeritus  Preiss;  Adjunct  Professors  Manton  (demo- 
graphic studies)  and  Palmore  (psychiatry  and  Aging  Center);  Adjunct  Assistant  Profes- 
sor Romanelli  (Fuqua  School  of  Business) 

The  department  offers  graduate  work  leading  to  the  M.  A.  and  Ph.D.  degrees  in  so- 
ciology. Students  beginning  work  toward  an  advanced  degree  should  have  completed 
a  minimum  of  12  semester  hours  of  acceptable  courses  in  sociology  and  an  additional  12 

Sociology        181 


semester  hours  in  related  work  (e.g.,  other  social  sciences,  statistics,  computer  science, 
philosophy,  mathematics) .  Accepted  applicants  who  have  not  had  such  preparation  may 
be  required  to  take  work  beyond  the  usual  requirements.  Applicants  for  admission  are 
required  to  take  the  verbal  and  quantitative  aptitude  tests  of  the  Graduate  Record  Exami- 
nation. 

The  Ph.D.  program  requires  the  student  to  take  three  core  courses  (Sociology  206, 
207, 208)  and  a  primary  and  a  secondary  specialization.  Specializations  (with  the  associat- 
ed proseminars  indicated  in  parentheses)  include  Life  Course  and  Aging  Studies  (So- 
ciology 221);  Comparative  and  Historical  Sociology  (Sociology  222);  Crime,  Law,  and 
Deviance  (Sociology  223);  Population  Studies  (Sociology  224);  and  Organizations,  Mar- 
kets, and  Work  (Sociology  225).  Including  the  two  courses  outside  the  department  re- 
quired by  the  Graduate  School,  a  student  entering  with  only  an  undergraduate  degree 
and  adequate  course  preparation  would  need  to  take  a  minimum  of  twelve  to  fourteen 
courses  to  satisfy  degree  requirements.  Up  to  fifteen  credits,  the  equivalent  of  five  courses, 
may  be  transferred  for  graduate  work  taken  elsewhere. 

Further  details  concerning  the  general  departmental  program,  the  specialities  and 
their  requirements,  departmental  facilities,  the  faculty,  ongoing  research,  and  stipends 
available  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

206.  Sociological  Theory.  Structure,  foundations,  and  historical  antecedents  of  re- 
cent formulations  of  such  theoretical  approaches  as  phenomenological  sociology,  ex- 
change theory,  critical  theory,  structuralism,  neo-Marxist  sociology,  sociobiology,  and  ac- 
tion theory.  3  units.  Tiryakian  or  Wilson 

207.  Social  Statistics  I:  Basic  Concepts  and  Methods.  Review  of  descriptive  statistics; 
probability  concepts;  statistical  inference,  t-tests  and  the  analysis  of  variance.  Bivariate 
correlation  and  regression,  dummy  variables,  multiple  regression,  and  the  analysis  of 
covariance.  Stress  on  applications.  Statistical  computing  using  SPSS  and  other  programs. 
3  units.  DiPrete,  Land,  or  Spenner 

208.  Survey  Research  Methods.  Theory  and  application  of  survey  research  techniques 
in  the  social  sciences.  Sampling,  measurement,  questionnaire  construction  and  distri- 
bution, pretesting  and  post-testing,  response  effects,  validity  and  reliability,  scaling  of 
data,  data  reduction  and  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Sociology  207  or  the  equivalent.  3  units. 
Back,  Kerckhoff,  or  Smith 

211 A-E.  Proseminars  in  Sociological  Theory.  Development  of  sociological  thought, 
systematic  sociological  theory,  interrelations  with  other  social  and  behavioral  sciences. 
3  units.  Tiryakian  or  Wilson 

A.  Background  of  Sociology 

B.  Formal  Aspects  of  Theory 

C.  Sociology  of  Knowledge 

D.  Evolutionary  Theory  and  Sociobiology 

E.  Special  Topics  in  Sociological  Theory 

212.  Social  Statistics  II:  Linear  Models,  Path  Analysis,  and  Structural  Equation  Sys- 
tems. Model  specification,  review  of  simple  regression,  the  Gauss-Markov  theorem,  mul- 
tiple regression  in  matrix  form,  ordinary  and  generalized  least  squares,  residual  and  in- 
fluence analysis.  Path  analysis,  recursive  and  nonrecursive  structural  equation  models; 
measurement  errors  and  unobserved  variables.  Application  of  statistical  computing  pack- 
ages. Prerequisite:  Sociology  207  or  equivalent.  3  units.  DiPrete,  Land,  or  Spenner 

213.  Social  Statistics  HI:  Discrete  Multivariate  Models.  Assumptions,  estimation, 
testing,  and  parameter  interpretation  for  the  log-linear,  logit,  logistic,  and  probit  models. 


182         Courses  of  Instruction 


Model  comparisons,  application  of  statistical  computing  packages  and  programs.  Prereq- 
uisite: Sociology  212  or  equivalent.  3  units.  DiPrete,  Land,  orSpenner 

214.  Comparative  and  Historical  Methods.  Scope,  methods,  and  controversies  of 
comparative  and  historical  sociology.  3  units.  Janoski,  Smith,  or  Tiryakian 

215.  Basic  Demographic  Methods  and  Materials.  Population  composition,  change, 
and  distribution.  Methods  of  standardizing  and  decomposing  rates,  life  tables  and  popu- 
lation models,  analysis  of  data  from  advanced  and  developing  countries.  Applications 
of  computer  programs  for  demographic  analysis.  Prerequisite:  Sociology  207  or  equiva- 
lent. 3  units.  Myers 

216.  Advanced  Methods  of  Demographic  Analysis.  Theory  and  estimationmethods 
for  life  tables.  Reproductivity,  the  stable  population  model.  Graduation,  interpolation, 
and  other  data  adjustments  for  faulty  data.  Hazards  models.  Prerequisite:  Sociology  215 
or  equivalent.  3  units.  Land 

217A-F.  Proseminars  in  Social  Statistics  and  Research  Methods.  Selected  topics  in 
the  collection  and  analysis  of  social  science  data.  3  units.  Back,  Gereffi,  Land,  Manton,  My- 
ers, Smith,  Spenner,  or  Tiryakian 

A.  Discrete  and  Continuous  Models  of  Measurement 

B.  Hazards  Models,  Event  History  Analysis,  and  Panel  Data 

C.  Dynamic  Model  and  Times  Series  Analysis 

D.  Research  Design 

E.  Evaluation  Research  Methods 

F.  Special  Topics  in  Social  Statistics  and  Research  Methods 

221A-D.  Proseminars  in  Aging  and  Life  Course  Analysis.  Selected  topics  in  sociali- 
zation, human  development,  status  attainment  and  careers,  and  the  sociology  of  aging. 
3 units.  Back,  George,  Kerckhoff,  Land,  Maddox,  Manton,  Myers,  O'Rand,  Palmore,  orSpenner 

A.  Social  Structure  and  the  Life  Course 

B.  Social  Patterns  of  Personal  Development 

C.  Social  Gerontology 

D.  Special  Topics  in  Aging  and  Life  Course  Analysis 

222A-D.  Proseminars  in  Comparative  and  Historical  Sociology.  Selected  topics  in 
the  differentiation  and  transformation  of  societies.  3  units.  Gereffi,  fanoski,  Kerckhoff,  Mad- 
dox, Myers,  Simpson,  Smith,  or  Tiryakian 

A.  Theories  of  Social  Change 

B.  Comparative  Aspects  of  Societal  Transformation 

C.  Theories  of  Change  in  Third  World 

D.  Special  Topics  in  Comparative  and  Historical  Sociology 

223A-E.  Proseminars  in  Crime,  Law,  and  Deviance.  Selected  topics  in  crime  and  the 
institutions  of  social  control.  3  units.  Land,  Simpson,  Tiryakian,  or  Wilson 

A.  Theories  of  Crime  Causation 

B.  Human  Development  and  Criminal  Careers 

C.  Social  Control  and  the  Criminal  Justice  System 

D.  Sociology  of  Law 

E.  Special  Topics  in  Crime,  Law,  and  Deviance 

224A-F.  Proseminars  in  Population  Studies.  Selected  topics.  3  units.  Back,  DiPrete, 
Land,  Maddox,  Manton,  Myers,  O'Rand,  or  Smith 

A.  Population  Dynamics 

B.  Mortality,  Morbidity,  and  Epidemiology 

C.  Urbanization  and  Migration 

D.  Demography  of  the  Labor  Force 

E.  Demography  of  Aging 

F.  Special  Topics  in  Population  Studies 

Sociology         183 


225A-E.  Proseminars  in  Organizations,  Markets,  and  Work.  Selected  topics  in  com- 
plex organizations,  the  labor  process,  and  changing  occupations.  3  units.  Gereffi,  Kerck- 
hoff,  Land,  Maddox,  O'Rand,  Simpson,  Smith,  Spenner,  or  Wilson 

A.  Organizations  and  Environments 

B.  The  Social  Psychology  of  Organizations 

C.  Markets  and  Market  Behavior 

D.  Careers  and  Labor  Markets 

E.  Special  Topics  in  Organizations,  Markets,  and  Work 

226A-H.  Proseminars  in  Social  Institutions  and  Processes.  Selected  topics  in  the  so- 
ciology of  institutions  and  social  and  institutional  behavior.  3  units.  Back,  George,  Kerck- 
hoff,  Maddox,  O'Barr,  O'Rand,  Smith,  Spenner,  Tiryakian,  or  Wilson 

A.  Social  Psychology 

B.  Social  Stratification 

C.  Political  Sociology 

D.  Sociology  of  Religion 

E.  Sociology  of  Science 

F.  Sociology  of  Education 

G.  Medical  Sociology 

H.  Special  Topics  in  Social  Institutions  and  Processes 

234S.  Political  Economy  of  Development:  Theories  of  Change  in  the  Third  World. 

See  C-L:  Political  Science  234S;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  234S  and  History  234S. 
3  units.  Bergquist,  Fox,  Gereffi,  or  C.  Smith 

255.  Political  Sociology.  Pluralist,  elite,  and  class  theories  of  the  relationship  between 
state  and  society.  Topics  include:  recent  debates  on  the  welfare  state,  social  control,  po- 
litical participation,  and  state-society  relations  in  socialist  economies.  C-L:  Political  Science 
255.  3  units.  Smith  or  Tiryakian 

282S.  Canada.  See  C-L:  History  282S;  also  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  282S  and  Po- 
litical Science  282S.  3  units.  Cahow 

284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  See  C-L:  History  284S;  also  C-L:  Cul- 
tural Anthropology  284S,  Political  Science  264S,  Psychology  284S,  and  Women's  Studies. 
Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith,  or  Spenner 

298S,  299S.  Seminar  in  Selected  Topics.  Substantive,  theoretical,  or  methodologi- 
cal topics.  3  units  each.  Staff 

For  Graduates 

392.  Individual  Research  in  Sociology.  Students  will  conduct  on  an  individual  ba- 
sis research  designed  to  evaluate  a  sociological  hypothesis  of  their  choice.  The  process 
must  be  completed  by  preparation  of  a  report  on  this  research  in  adequate  professional 
style.  Prerequisite:  Sociology  207,  208  or  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Staff 

The  University  Program  in  Toxicology 

Professor  Graham,  Director  (M255  Davison  Building);  Professor  Abou-Donia,  Deputy 
Director  (020  Research  Park  IV);  James  B.  Duke  Professor  Fridovich,  Deputy  Director  (231 
Nanaline  Duke  Building);  Professor  Richardson,  Deputy  Director  (004A  Biological  Sciences 
Building);  Professor  Adams,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  (M310-B  Davison  Building) 

The  University  Program  in  Toxicology  seeks  to  produce  investigators  with  sound  train- 
ing in  the  scientific  basis  for  research  in  toxicology  who  will  advance  the  science  of  this 
discipline.  After  broad  general  courses  in  epidemiology  and  statistics,  pathology,  and 
mammalian  toxicology,  students  will  be  trained  in  one  of  three  tracks:  (1)  as  generalist 


184         Cou  rses  of  Inst  ruction 


toxicologists,  with  broad  training  in  the  principles  and  concepts  of  toxicology  and  the  de- 
sign of  protocols  for  toxicological  assessments;  (2)  as  specialist  toxicologists  in  those  areas 
of  toxicology  research  in  which  faculty  members  are  currently  productive— in  pulmonary 
toxicology,  neurotoxicology,  immunotoxicology,  genetic  toxicology  (carcinogenesis),  and 
biochemical  toxicology;  or  (3)  as  ecotoxicologists  with  broad  training  in  principles  and 
concepts  of  both  toxicology  and  ecology  as  they  relate  to  the  release,  transport,  exposure, 
accumulation,  and  effects  of  toxicants  in  the  ecosystem. 

The  toxicology  program  faculty  is  comprised  of  members  from  the  Departments  of 
Anesthesiology,  Biochemistry,  Cellular  and  Molecular  Biology,  Chemistry,  Medicine, 
Microbiology  and  Immunology,  Neurobiology,  Pathology,  Pharmacology,  Zoology,  the 
School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies,  and  the  Duke  University  Marine 
Laboratory. 

Students  seeking  a  Ph.D.  in  one  of  the  participating  Graduate  School  departments 
must  make  initial  application  to  that  department.  Students  who  apply  initially  for  gradu- 
ate study  in  one  of  the  departments  may  also  be  nominated  by  that  department  for  ad- 
mission to  the  program.  Such  students  should  list  toxicology  as  their  "Special  Field"  on 
the  application  form.  It  is  expected  that  most  students  will  have  a  strong  undergraduate 
preparation  in  mathematics  and  the  physical  and  biological  sciences  with  demonstrat- 
ed excellence  of  performance  as  judged  by  grades  in  course  work  and  letters  of  recom- 
mendation from  former  instructors. 

Each  student  in  the  program  will  take  a  series  of  courses  in  toxicology  as  well  as  courses 
specified  by  his  or  her  department.  A  student  will  be  expected  to  choose  a  dissertation 
advisor  in  his  or  her  department  at  least  by  the  end  of  the  first  two  semesters  in  the  pro- 
gram, and  will  normally  be  expected  to  begin  dissertation  research  during  the  third  se- 
mester in  residence.  Upon  satisfactorily  completing  all  degree  requirements  in  the  pro- 
gram and  in  the  department,  students  will  be  jointly  recommended  for  the  Ph .  D.  degree. 

Further  information  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  the  Toxicology  Program. 

Women's  Studies 

Jean  F.  O'Barr,  Director  (207  East  Duke  Building);  Carol  Meyers,  Associate  Director 

The  Women's  Studies  Program  provides  a  focal  point  within  the  university  for  the 
study  of  gender.  Students  enrolled  in  any  of  the  university's  departments  and  professional 
schools  may  participate  in  the  program  through  enrollment  in  the  courses  listed  below, 
through  specialized  study  in  independent  research  with  any  of  the  fifty-four  faculty  mem- 
bers associated  with  the  program,  and  through  pursuing  an  M.  A.  or  Ph.D.  thesis  topic 
in  feminist  theory.  Students  considering  a  concentration  in  women's  studies  are  en- 
couraged to  consult  the  Director  for  assistance  in  tailoring  a  program  of  study  suited  to 
their  individual  professional  needs. 

SIGNS:  Journal  of  Women  in  Culture  and  Society  is  edited  at  Duke.  Internships  and  work- 
study  positions  form  an  important  part  of  the  graduate  education  of  students  interested 
in  feminist  scholarship. 

Interdisciplinary  Course  211S.  History  of  Feminist  Thought.  The  intellectual  histo- 
ry of  feminist  thought  and  an  analysis  of  the  sex/gender  system  from  medieval  through 
modern  times.  Examination  of  classical  philosophical,  sociological,  and  literary  texts.  3 
units.  Neuschel,  J.  O'Barr,  or  Pope 

Interdisciplinary  Course  283S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities.  Beliefs  about 
gender  in  the  assumptions,  methods,  and  central  issues,  as  well  as  the  principal  subject 
matter,  of  mainstream  scholarship  in  traditional  humanities  disciplines.  Consideration 
will  be  given  to  the  way  particular  social  and  institutional  circumstances  linked  to  gen- 
der distinctions  have,  historically,  lent  the  disciplines  their  particular  character  and  tradi- 
tional concerns.  3  units.  C-L:  English  283S  and  Religion  269S.  Clark,  Orr,  Pope,  orTompkins 


Women's  Studies        185 


Interdisciplinary  Course  284S.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  Examina- 
tion of  feminist  modes  of  inquiry  in  the  social  sciences.  The  relationship  of  gender  in  eco- 
nomic, political,  social,  and  cultural  systems  and  the  resulting  methodological  shifts  in 
social  science  disciplines.  C-L:  Cultural  Anthropology  284S,  History  284S,  Political  Science 
264S,  Psychology  284S,  and  Sociology  284S.  3  units.  Chafe,  Neuschel,  O'Rand,  C.  Smith, 
or  Spenner 

COURSES  ON  WOMEN  OFFERED  BY  DEPARTMENTS 

Christian  Theology  214.  Feminist  Theology.  McClintock-Fulkerson 

Cultural  Anthropology  215S.  The  Anthropology  of  Women:  Theoretical  Issues.  Staff 

Cultural  Anthropology  2515.  American  Marriage:  A  Cultural  Approach.  Quinn 

Cultural  Anthropology  272S.  Marxism  and  Feminism.  Smif/i 

English  269.  American  Women  Writers.  Pope  or  Tompkins 

English  283.  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities.  Clark,  Orr,  Pope,  Sedgzuick,  or  Tompkins 

English  287.  Feminist  Literary  Theory.  Pope 

English  321 .  Gender  and  Power  in  Renaissance  Texts.  DeNeef 

French  290S.  Studies  in  a  Contemporary  Figure:  Wittig.  Orr 

French  391 .  French  Seminar:  Autobiography.  Kaplan 

History  227-228.  Recent  United  States  History:  Major  Political  and  Social  Movements.  Chafe 

History  351.40.  Colloquium  in  Women's  History.  Scott 

Literature  282.  Structuralism,  Poststructuralism  and  After.  Tompkins 

Literature  289.  Topics  in  Feminist  Theory.  Staff 

Literature  302.  New  Criticism  in  Literary  Theory.  Staff 

Political  Science  200A.  Contemporary  American  Feminism.  /.  O'Barr 

Public  Policy  Studies  264.  Women  and  Justice.  Stack 

Public  Policy  Studies  278.  Human  Service  Bureaucracies.  Stack 

Religion  234.  Early  Christian  Asceticism.  Clark 

Zoology 

Professor  Gillham,  Chairman  (227  Biological  Sciences);  Associate  Professor  Rausher,  Direc- 
tor of  Graduate  Studies  (226  Biological  Sciences);  Professors  Costlow,  Fluke,  Klopfer,  Living- 
stone, McClay,  Nicklas,  H.  Nijhout,  Staddon,  Tucker,  Vogel,  Wainwright,  Ward,  and  H. 
Wilbur;  Associate  Professors  Forward,  Laurie,  Lundberg,  Ruderman,  Sutherland,  and 
Uyenoyama;  Assistant  Professors  Nowicki  and  Roth;  Professors  Emeriti  Bailey,  Bookhout, 
Gregg,  Schmidt-Nielsen,  and  K.  Wilbur;  Adjunct  Professor  Schmidt-Koenig;  Lecturer 
M.  Nijhout 

The  Department  of  Zoology  manages  a  variety  of  programs  tailored  to  individual 
needs  of  students  seeking  the  Ph.D.  degree.  The  A.M.  degree  may  be  taken  by  students 
en  route  to  the  Ph.D.,  or  by  those  who  leave  the  doctoral  program.  Ordinarily,  only  stu- 
dents seeking  the  doctorate  are  admitted  to  the  department. 

In  general,  students  entering  the  department  will  be  equipped  to  pursue  advanced 
degrees  if  they  have  completed  an  undergraduate  major  in  biology  along  with  some  for- 
mal training  in  college  level  chemistry,  mathematics,  physics,  and  foreign  languages.  A 
reading  knowledge  of  one  foreign  language  is  required  of  all  doctoral  students  in  zoology. 

Nevertheless,  in  recognition  and  support  of  the  modern  trend  toward  interdiscipli- 
nary research,  the  department  is  prepared  to  accept  promising  students  with  less  orthodox 
academic  backgrounds  and  is  ready  to  encourage  any  student  wishing  to  undertake  a  pro- 
gram of  study  leading,  in  effect,  to  an  interdisciplinary  degree  sponsored  by  the 
department. 

Thus,  all  students  are  urged  to  search  widely  in  both  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University: 
Undergraduate  Instruction  and  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Graduate  School  for  informa- 
tion about  the  intellectual  resources  of  the  University.  Special  attention  should  be  given 
to  announcements  of  the  Departments  of  Biochemistry,  Biological  Anthropology  and 
Anatomy,  Botany,  Cell  Biology,  Chemistry,  Cultural  Anthropology,  Geology,  History, 
Mathematics,  Microbiology  and  Immunology,  Pharmacology,  Philosophy,  Psychology, 

186         Courses  of  Instruction 


Sociology,  and  Zoology;  announcements  of  the  Schools  of  Engineering  and  Forestry  and 
Environmental  Studies  should  also  be  consulted. 

For  Seniors  and  Graduates 

The  L  suffix  on  a  zoology  course  number  indicates  that  the  course  includes  a 
laboratory. 

200.  Advanced  Neuroscience  I.  Prerequisite:  Psychology  103.  See  C-L:  Psychology 
200.  3  units.  Cant  and  McClay 

201L.  Animal  Behavior.  Survey  of  past  developments  and  current  controversies  in 
animal  behavior.  Extensive  readings,  followed  by  individual  experimental  or  descriptive 
projects  in  the  laboratory  or  field  (or  Primate  Center) .  Recommended  background :  Biol- 
ogy 74L,  Biology  151L,  and  Statistics  117,  or  equivalents.  4  units.  Klopfer 

203L.  Marine  Ecology.  Application  of  ecological  theory  to  marine  systems.  Empha- 
sis on  hypothesis  formulation,  field  experimentation,  data  analysis,  scientific  writing, 
and  familiarity  with  current  ecological  literature.  Prerequisite:  course  in  introductory  ecol- 
ogy, invertebrate  zoology,  or  marine  botany  (phycology);  knowledge  of  statistics  helpful . 
Offered  at  Beaufort.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  203L.  6  units.  Hay  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

206S.  Controversies  in  Biology.  A  contentious  theme  for  reading,  discussion,  and 
an  individual  or  joint  paper.  Illustrative  past  topics:  the  nature  of  the  creative  process, 
causality  in  biological  thought,  the  lack  of  political  impact  of  many  scientific  developments. 
Open  to  nonmajors.  3  units.  Klopfer 

213L.  Behavioral  Ecology.  How  ecological  factors  shape  foraging,  mating,  aggressive 
and  social  behavior.  Laboratory  experiments  and  field  observations  from  the  Outer  Banks 
environment.  Independent  projects  and  seminars.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology. 
C-L:  Marine  Sciences  213L.  4  units.  Rubenstein  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

216L.  Limnology.  Lakes,  ponds,  and  streams:  their  origin,  development,  geochemis- 
try, energy  balance,  productivity,  and  the  dynamics  of  plant  and  animal  communities. 
Laboratory  includes  field  trips.  Offered  biennially.  Prerequisites:  introductory  biology 
and  Chemistry  12  and  physics  and  Mathematics  32  or  consent  of  instructor.  4  units. 

Livingstone 

222L.  Entomology.  The  biology  of  insects:  diversity,  development,  physiology,  and 
ecology.  Field  trips.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  4  units.  H.  Nijhout 

226L.  Ichthyology.  Diversity,  evolution,  natural  history,  and  ecology  of  fishes.  Labora- 
tory includes  overnight  field  trips  to  marine  and  freshwater  habitats.  Prerequisites:  in- 
troductory biology  and  Biology  108L  or  equivalent.  3  units.  Lundberg 

234S.  Problems  in  the  Philosophy  of  Biology.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  See 
C-L:  Philosophy  234S;  also  C-L:  Botany  234S.  3  units.  Brandon  (philosophy) 

237L.  Systematic  Biology.  Theory  and  practice  of  identification,  species  discovery, 
phylogeny  reconstruction,  classification,  and  nomenclature.  Prerequisites:  introducto- 
ry biology  and  one  course  in  animal  or  plant  diversity.  C-L:  Botany  237L.  3  units.  Lund- 
berg and  Mishler  (botany) 

244.  Principles  of  Immunology.  Prerequisites :  Biology  160  and  Chemistry  152  or  con- 
sent of  instructor.  See  C-L:  Microbiology  and  Immunology  244.  3  units.  Amos,  McClay, 
and  staff 

245S.  Radiation  Biology.  The  biological  effects  of  ionizing  radiations:  classical  con- 
cepts in  the  context  of  recent  research  papers.  Analytical  uses  of  radiation .  Prerequisites: 
introductory  biology,  Chemistry  11,  12,  and  Physics  51,  52.  3  units.  Fluke 

Zoology        187 


247S.  Photobiology.  Effects  of  visible  light  and  of  ultraviolet  and  near  ultraviolet  radi- 
ation in  living  systems:  repair  processes,  quantum  processes,  physical  optics.  Prerequi- 
sites: college  physics  and  introductory  biology.  3  units.  Fluke 

249.  Comparative  Biomechanics.  The  structure  and  operation  of  organisms  in  rela- 
tion to  the  mechanics  of  solids  and  fluids,  including  readings  from  the  primary  literature. 
Prerequisites:  Physics  51  and  Mathematics  31  or  equivalents.  Not  open  to  students  who 
have  taken  Biology  149.  3  units.  Vogel  and  Wainwright 

250L.  Physiology  of  Marine  Animals.  Environmental  factors,  biological  rhythms,  and 
behavioral  adaptations  in  the  comparative  physiology  of  marine  animals.  Prerequisites : 
introductory  biology  and  chemistry.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  250L.  4  units.  Forzvard 

259L.  Laboratory  in  Biomechanics.  Introduction  to  instruments  used  in  investiga- 
tions of  solid  and  fluid  biomechanics.  Exercises  and  individual  projects.  Prerequisite:  Zool- 
ogy 249.  3  units.  Vogel  and  Wainwright 

262.  Biology  of  Parasitism.  How  parasites,  from  viruses  through  vertebrates,  have 
solved  the  special  problems  associated  with  their  dependence  on  other  organisms.  Em- 
phasis on  life  cycles,  host-parasite  interactions,  and  experimental  parasitology.  Prereq- 
uisites: cell  biology  and  animal  diversity.  3  units.  M.  Nijhout 

267L.  Community  Ecology.  Mechanisms  that  determine  the  distribution  and  abun- 
dance of  plants  and  animals:  geology,  climate,  physiography,  soils,  competition,  preda- 
tion,  and  history.  Lectures  focus  on  ecological  principles.  Seminars  and  weekend  field 
trips.  Prerequisites:  an  introductory  ecology  course  and  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Botany 
267L.  3  units.  Christensen  (botany)  and  Wilbur 

269.  Advanced  Cell  Biology.  Structural  and  functional  organization  of  cells  and  their 
components  with  emphasis  on  current  research  problems  and  prospects.  Prerequisite: 
introductory  cell  biology  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L:  Botany  269,  Cell  Biology  269, 
Microbiology  and  Immunology  269,  and  The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular 
Biology.  3  units.  McClay  and  staff 

274L.  Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology.  Structures,  functions,  and  habits  of  invertebrate 
animals  under  natural  and  experimental  conditions.  Field  trips  included.  Not  open  to 
students  who  have  taken  Biology  76L  or  176L.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  Offered 
at  Beaufort.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  274L.  6  units.  Ruppert  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

278L.  Invertebrate  Developmental  Biology.  Gametogenesis,  fertilization,  and  de- 
velopment of  invertebrates,  with  emphasis  on  experimental  studies  of  prelarval  stages. 
Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Offered  at  Beaufort.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  278L.  6  units. 
McClay  and  visiting  staff 

280.  Principles  of  Genetics.  Structure  and  properties  of  genes  and  chromosomes  in 
individual  organisms  and  in  populations.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  C-L:  Bota- 
ny 280  and  The  University  Program  in  Genetics  280. 3  units.  Antonovics  (botany),  Boynton 
(botany),  Gillham,  and  Laurie 

281.  DNA,  Chromosomes,  and  Evolution.  The  relationship  of  chromosome  and 
DNA-sequence  organization  with  evolution;  karyotype  changes  and  speciation;  repeti- 
tive DNA,  split  genes,  transposable  elements,  and  evolutionary  mechanisms;  phyloge- 
ny  reconstruction;  evolution  of  mitosis  and  the  chromosome  cycle.  Prerequisites:  an  in- 
troductory course  in  genetics  or  cell  or  molecular  biology,  or  consent  of  instructor.  C-L: 
The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  3  units.  Laurie  and  Nicklas 

283.  Extrachromosomal  Inheritance.  Genetics,  biochemistry,  and  molecular  biolo- 
gy of  the  organelles  of  eukaryotic  cells,  and  cellular  symbionts.  Emphasis  on  recent  liter- 
ature. Prerequisite:  introductory  genetics.  C-L:  Botany  283  and  The  University  Program 
in  Genetics.  3  units.  Boynton  (botany)  and  Gillham 

188         Courses  of  Instruction 


286.  Evolutionary  Mechanisms.  Prerequisites:  Biology  140L  and  a  course  in  genet- 
ics. See  C-L:  Botany  286;  also  C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  3  units.  Antonovics 
(botany),  Uyenoyama,  and  H.  Wilbur 

287S.  Macroevolution.  Evolutionary  patterns  and  processes  at  and  above  the  species 
level;  species  concepts,  speciation,  diversification,  extinction,  ontogeny  and  phylogeny, 
rates  of  evolution,  and  alternative  explanations  for  adaptation  and  evolutionary  trends. 
Prerequisite:  one  course  in  plant  or  animal  diversity.  C-L:  Botany  287S.  3  units.  Mishler 
(botany)  and  Roth 

288.  Mathematical  Population  Genetics.  Principles  of  formulation  and  analysis  of  dy- 
namic mathematical  models  of  genetic  evolution.  Rotating  topics  include:  mating  systems, 
sex  ratio,  stochastic  processes.  Prerequisite:  calculus;  statistics  and  linear  algebra  recom- 
mended. C-L:  The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  3  units.  Uyenoyama 

290.  Modeling  Biological  Systems.  The  tools  commonly  used  for  analyzing,  inter- 
preting, and  criticizing  mathematical  models  of  biological  systems.  Difference  equations, 
differential  equations,  stability  theory,  phase  plane  methods,  bifurcations.  Prerequisite: 
calculus  and  consent  of  instructor.  3  units.  Edelstein-Keshet 

293L.  Population  Biology.  See  C-L:  Botany  293L.  3  units.  Antonovics  (botany)  and  H. 
Wilbur 

295S,  296S.  Seminar.  Topics,  instructors,  and  course  credits  announced  each  semester. 
C-L:  Marine  Sciences  295S,  296S.  3  units.  Staff 

For  Graduates 

353, 354.  Research.  To  be  carried  on  under  the  direction  of  the  appropriate  staff  mem- 
bers. Hours  and  credit  to  be  arranged.  C-L:  Marine  Sciences  353,  354.  Staff 

360, 361.  Tutorials.  An  approved  academic  exercise,  such  as  writing  an  essay  or  learn- 
ing a  research  skill,  carried  out  under  the  direction  of  the  appropriate  staff  members.  Hours 
and  credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

COURSES  CURRENTLY  UNSCHEDULED 
233.  Principles  of  Insect  Behavior 
355,  356.  Seminar 

RELATED  PROGRAMS 

The  University  Program  in  Cell  and  Molecular  Biology.  See  announcement  in  this 
bulletin. 

The  University  Program  in  Genetics.  Genetics  courses  offered  by  the  Department 
of  Zoology  are  part  of  the  University  Program  in  Genetics;  see  announcement  in  this 
bulletin. 

The  University  Program  in  Marine  Sciences.  Consult  Marine  Sciences  in  this  bulletin 
for  offerings  at  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory. 

Program  in  Tropical  Biology.  Fellowships  are  available  for  travel  and  subsistence  in 
field-oriented  programs  in  Latin  America .  Refer  to  the  section  Organization  for  Tropical 
Studies  in  this  bulletin  in  the  chapter  on  "Special  and  Cooperative  Programs." 


Zoology         189 


Special  and  Cooperative  Programs 


Center  for  the  Study  of  Aging  and  Human  Development 

The  center  is  a  multidisciplinary  program  devoted  to  research,  training,  and  clinical 
activities  in  gerontology  and  geriatrics.  Although  the  center  does  not  offer  degrees,  the 
varied  programs,  research  laboratories,  and  clinical  settings  provide  a  context  and  resource 
for  undergraduate  and  graduate  students  and  for  health  professionals  with  special  in- 
terests in  adult  development  and  aging.  The  center  conducts  multidisciplinary,  two-year 
programs  for  postdoctoral  fellows  interested  in  focused  training  for  independent  research 
on  many  varied  aspects  of  aging  and  adult  development.  Resources  of  this  all-University 
program  include  data  from  two  longitudinal  studies,  a  wide  range  of  archival  data  of  spe- 
cial interest  to  social  scientists,  an  animal  colony,  and  the  center's  basic  and  applied  re- 
search laboratories.  A  division  of  geriatrics  coordinates  research,  training,  and  services 
related  to  the  care  of  older  adults.  Undergraduate  and  graduate  students  of  the  Univer- 
sity are  welcome  to  inquire  about  participation  in  all  programs  at  the  center.  Inquiries 
should  be  addressed  to  Harvey  Jay  Cohen,  M.D.,  Director,  Duke  University  Center  for 
the  Study  of  Aging  and  Human  Development,  Box  3003,  Duke  University  Medical  Cen- 
ter, Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

Asian-Pacific  Studies  Institute 

The  institute  sponsors  an  agenda  of  visiting  speakers  and  scholars  and  coordinates 
study  abroad  programs  in  China  and  Japan.  A  limited  number  of  fellowships  are  grant- 
ed which  provide  stipends  for  a  two-year  period.  Incoming  graduate  students  with  the 
Ph.D.  as  their  objective,  students  in  good  standing  in  the  first  year  of  study  in  Duke  profes- 
sional schools,  and  current  Duke  students  enrolled  in  Ph.D.  programs  may  be  consid- 
ered for  these  fellowships.  Further  information  may  be  obtained  from  the  Asian-Pacific 
Studies  Institute,  2111  Campus  Drive,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering 

The  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering  offers  versatile  and  broad  education  at  the 
graduate  level  for  students  interested  in  developing  and  using  engineering  principles  to 
understand  and  implement  biological  and  biochemical  processes.  The  programs  of  study 
in  biochemical  engineering  are  thus  interdisciplinary.  Students  follow  a  program  of  course 
work  to  reinforce  advanced  principles  of  chemical  process  engineering,  mathematics,  and 
physics,  as  well  as  microbiology,  biochemistry,  immunology,  and  genetics.  Close  relations 

The  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering         191 


are  maintained  with  many  departments  and  schools  of  the  University,  and  research 
projects  involving  work  in  these  other  departments  are  encouraged.  Major  emphasis  is 
placed  on  study  leading  to  the  Ph.D.,  the  traditional  degree  of  scholarship  awarded  for 
mastery  of  a  significant  field  of  knowledge.  This  mastery  is  demonstrated  by  a  combina- 
tion of  course  work  in  a  major  and  minor  field,  completion  of  an  original  research  pro- 
ject submitted  as  a  dissertation,  and  a  successful  defense  of  the  research .  Programs  leading 
to  the  Master  of  Science  degree  are  also  available.  Students  from  non-engineering  pro- 
grams are  encouraged  to  apply  to  either  degree  program.  Further  information  may  be  ob- 
tained from  the  Director  of  Graduate  Studies,  The  Center  for  Biochemical  Engineering, 
Duke  University,  Durham,  NC  27706. 

Canadian  Studies  Program 

The  Canadian  Studies  Program  is  supported  in  part  by  grants  from  the  U.S.  Depart- 
ment of  Education,  the  Ford  Foundation,  the  Mellon  Foundation,  and  by  occasional  funds 
from  the  departments  of  Canada's  provincial  and  federal  governments.  Its  purpose  is  to 
formalize  and  expand  the  interest  of  graduate  students  in  Canada,  to  introduce  the  study 
of  Canadian  life  and  culture  at  the  undergraduate  level,  and  to  encourage  such  study  in 
primary  and  secondary  schools. 

The  program  awards  a  limited  number  of  graduate  fellowships  and  teaching  assistant- 
ships  for  the  study  of  Canada  to  American  residents.  Fellows  must  work  on  a  Canadian 
dissertation  topic  within  their  disciplines.  Grants  of  travel  aid  for  field  research  in  Cana- 
da are  also  offered. 

The  program  sponsors  lectures  by  Canadian  specialists  and  supports  seminars  devot- 
ed to  Canada.  Opportunities  for  study  in  Canada  are  offered  to  honors  undergraduates 
in  Canadian  Studies,  graduates,  and  faculty. 

Inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  the  Director,  Canadian  Studies  Center,  2016  Cam- 
pus Drive,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Program  in  Russian  and  East  European  Studies 

The  graduate  school  of  Duke  University  offers  a  program  leading  to  the  A.M.  and 
Ph.D.  degrees  in  several  disciplines  (economics,  history,  literature,  linguistics,  and  po- 
litical science),  with  a  concentration  in  Russian  and  East  European  studies.  Students  are 
encouraged  to  utilize  the  libraries  and  facilities  of  both  Duke  and  the  University  of  North 
Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill.  The  holdings  of  the  two  libraries  in  Russian  and  East  European 
materials  are  substantial  and  complementary.  Both  libraries  have  a  policy  of  purchasing 
all  significant  published  works  in  Slavic  history,  economics,  government,  geography,  liter- 
ature, and  linguistics.  Other  joint  activities  include  periodic  colloquia  involving  the  per- 
sonnel of  the  two  institutions  and  distinguished  visiting  scholars. 

For  more  information,  contact  Professor  Martin  A.  Miller,  Chair,  Russian  and  East 
European  Studies  Committee,  Center  for  International  Studies,  2101  Campus  Drive,  Duke 
University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Center  for  Demographic  Studies 

The  center  promotes  research  and  training  in  demographic  studies.  Its  facilities,  lo- 
cated at  2117  Campus  Drive,  include  a  population  library,  the  Joseph  J.  Spengler  Collec- 
tion of  publications  and  research  materials,  and  extensive  data  resources.  The  center  does 
not  offer  degrees;  it  promotes  the  pursuit  of  advanced  degrees,  with  a  specialization  in 
population  studies,  through  either  the  Department  of  Sociology  or  the  Department  of 
Economics.  The  center's  program  provides  opportunities  for  direct  student  participation 
in  ongoing  research  projects.  The  program  of  extramural  research  stresses,  but  is  not  limit- 
ed to,  applied  work  in  the  demography  of  aging,  health,  mortality,  fertility,  and  migration. 

192        Special  and  Cooperative  Programs 


Inquiries  for  training  opportunities  may  be  directed  to  Dr.  George  C.  Myers,  Direc- 
tor, Center  for  Demographic  Studies,  2117  Campus  Drive,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  Program  for  the  Study  of  Developed  Shorelines 

The  Program  for  the  Study  of  Developed  Shorelines  was  established  in  recognition 
of  a  critical  need  for  both  academic  programs  and  geological  research  on  national  coastal 
issues.  The  goal  of  the  program  is  promotion  of  research,  education,  and  publications 
concerned  with  oceanic  shorelines  already  under  development.  A  limited  number  of 
graduate  research  fellowships  are  available  to  both  M.S.  and  Ph.D.  candidates  and  post- 
doctoral support  is  available  for  individuals  involved  in  appropriate  research.  The  pro- 
gram is  centered  entirely  within  the  Department  of  Geology  and  fellows  supported  by 
the  program  must  satisfy  all  departmental  requirements.  For  more  information  contact 
Professor  Orrin  Pilkey,  Director,  Program  for  the  Study  of  Developed  Shorelines,  Depart- 
ment of  Geology,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27709. 

Islamic  and  Arabian  Development  Studies 

The  program  in  Islamic  and  Arabian  Development  Studies,  established  in  1977  with 
support  from  some  twenty  American  and  foreign  corporations,  sponsors  teaching  and 
research  on  Islamic  themes  with  special  reference  to  developmental  problems  of  the  Ara- 
bian peninsula.  Emphasis  is  also  placed  on  Afghanistan,  Pakistan,  and  Muslim  refugees. 
The  program  has  sponsored  four  international  conferences,  has  sent  groups  of  faculty 
and  students  to  Jordan  and  Saudi  Arabia,  and  has  sponsored  Duke  student  delegations 
to  the  Model  Assembly  of  the  League  of  Arab  States.  Its  fourth  international  conference 
was  held  at  the  Rockefeller  Conference  Center,  Bellagio,  Italy,  in  October  1987  on  the  topic 
of  Muslim  refugees.  The  program  arranged  for  the  acquisition  by  the  Perkins  Library  of 
the  Malone  Collection  on  Arabian  Affairs  and  the  Louis  and  Nancy  Hatch  Dupree  Col- 
lection on  Islamic  Inner  Asia .  Its  publication  series  includes  volumes  on  Islam  in  the  Philip- 
pines, the  Genesis  of  American  Orientalism,  and  Muslim  refugees,  as  well  as  volumes 
on  Pakistan  and  Saudi  Arabia.  It  also  sponsors  an  outreach  program  which  includes  Ap- 
palachian State  University,  Belmont  Abbey  College,  the  College  of  Charleston,  Converse 
College,  Davidson  College,  Johnson  C.  Smith  University,  Old  Dominion  University,  and 
the  University  of  the  South.  Inquiries  should  be  addressed  to  Dr.  Ralph  Braibanti,  Director, 
Islamic  and  Arabian  Development  Studies,  2114  Campus  Drive,  Duke  University, 
Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Latin  American  Studies  Program 

The  Graduate  School  offers  an  interdepartmental  program  in  Latin  American  studies 
in  conjunction  with  several  departments:  anthropology,  history,  economics,  political 
science,  sociology  and  Romance  languages.  In  addition  to  fulfilling  the  requirements  of 
their  departments,  students  in  the  Latin  American  Studies  Program  undertake  special 
courses  of  interdisciplinary  study  to  broaden  their  knowledge  of  the  Latin  American  field. 

The  holdings  of  Perkins  Library  for  graduate  work  and  research  in  Latin  American 
history,  inter-American  relations,  economic  history,  politics,  art,  and  Spanish-American 
literature  are  constantly  being  enlarged.  Program  faculty  are  involved  in  different  national 
research  programs  dealing  with  Latin  American  topics  and  offer  advice  on  fellowship  sup- 
port for  graduate  research  in  Latin  America  and  the  Caribbean .  Inquiries  should  be  direct- 
ed to  the  Council  on  Latin  American  Studies,  Center  for  International  Studies,  2122  Cam- 
pus Drive,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 


Latin  American  Studies  Program         193 


194        Special  and  Cooperative  Programs 


Medical  Historian  Training  Program 

The  Medical  Historian  Training  Program  is  conducted  under  the  auspices  of  the 
School  of  Medicine  and  the  Graduate  School .  The  M .  D.-Ph .  D.  program  requires  a  mini- 
mum of  six  years  of  graduate  and  medical  study,  and  the  M.D.-A.M.  four  or  five  years, 
depending  on  the  use  of  summer  terms.  The  M . D.-Ph .  D.  program  is  intended  for  those 
students  who  know  that  their  major  career  effort  will  be  in  teaching  and  other  scholarly 
activities  in  the  history  of  medicine  (not  necessarily  to  the  total  exclusion  of  clinical  medi- 
cine). The  M.D.-A.M.,  on  the  other  hand,  is  appropriate  for  those  who  are  undecided, 
but  who  wish  to  acquire  a  firm  foundation  for  future  study.  In  both  programs  the  first  two 
years  and  the  last  year  will  be  spent  in  the  medical  school.  All  requirements  for  the  Ph.D. 
and  the  A.M.  must  be  completed  before  the  final  year  of  the  M.D.  program. 

Application  and  Admission  Procedures.  Applicants  must  meet  the  requirements  for 
admission  to  the  School  of  Medicine  and  the  Graduate  School  in  the  Department  of  His- 
tory including  the  MCAT  and  GRE  exams.  Those  candidates  holding  the  M.D.  degree 
will  be  considered  for  the  Ph.D.  and  the  A.M.  degrees.  Candidates  who  have  complet- 
ed two  years  of  medical  school  will  also  be  considered  for  either  degree. 

Applicants  should  complete  and  submit  an  application  to  the  Graduate  School  for 
admission  to  the  Department  of  History. 

Additional  information  may  be  obtained  by  writing  to  Dr.  Peter  Wood,  Director  of 
Graduate  Studies,  Department  of  History,  233  Allen  Building,  Duke  University  Durham, 
North  Carolina  27706. 

Medical  Scientist  Training  Program 

The  Medical  Scientist  Training  Program,  conducted  under  the  auspices  of  the  Gradu- 
ate School  and  the  School  of  Medicine,  is  designed  for  students  with  a  strong  background 
in  science  who  are  motivated  toward  a  career  in  the  medical  sciences  and  academic  medi- 
cine. It  provides  an  opportunity  to  integrate  graduate  education  in  one  of  the  sciences 
basic  to  medicine  with  the  clinical  curriculum  of  the  School  of  Medicine.  The  program 
usually  requires  six  to  seven  years  of  study  and  leads  to  both  the  M.D.  and  Ph .  D.  degrees. 
Although  the  special  emphasis  of  this  program  is  on  basic  medical  science,  the  trainees, 
because  of  their  education  in  clinical  medicine,  have  a  remarkable  range  of  career  oppor- 
tunities open  to  them.  Graduates  of  this  program  generally  follow  one  of  two  broad  paths. 
Some  directly  pursue  careers  in  teaching  and  research  in  one  of  the  basic  medical  sciences, 
while  maintaining  strong  ties  with  clinical  science  as  a  result  of  their  combined  training; 
others  enter  residency  programs  before  pursuing  investigative  and  teaching  careers  in 
clinical  medicine,  carrying  with  them  strong  academic  backgrounds  in  the  basic  sciences. 

Eligibility.  Applicants  must  meet  the  admission  requirements  of  both  the  Graduate 
School  as  a  candidate  for  the  Ph .  D.  degree  and  the  School  of  Medicine  as  a  candidate  for 
the  M.D.  degree.  Most  candidates  apply  for  admission  to  the  first  year  of  the  program, 
but  applications  are  sometimes  accepted  from  students  who  are  enrolled  in  appropriate 
stages  of  their  curriculum  in  the  Graduate  School  or  School  of  Medicine  of  Duke  Univer- 
sity. In  addition  to  the  minimum  requirements  for  acceptance  in  the  Graduate  School  and 
the  School  of  Medicine,  advanced  course  work  in  science  and  mathematics  as  well  as  prior 
research  experience  count  heavily  in  the  selection  of  candidates. 

Financial  Support.  Students  admitted  to  the  first  year  of  the  program  can  receive  a 
traineeship  award,  consisting  of  a  stipend  and  full  tuition  allowance,  provided  by  a  grant 
from  the  National  Institutes  of  Health .  The  present  annual  stipend  is  $8,500.  Current  policy 
of  the  National  Institutes  of  Health  limits  the  duration  of  the  traineeship  to  six  years,  but 
the  years  need  not  be  consecutive;  this  permits  curricula  which  take  more  than  six  years. 

This  traineeship,  created  by  the  National  Research  Service  Award  Act  of  1974  (PL 
93-348)  provides  (as  do  all  research  training  awards  under  this  act)  for  certain  alternate 

Medical  Scientist  Training  Program         195 


service  or  payback  requirements  in  the  event  that  a  research  career  is  not  pursued.  Sup- 
port by  the  NIH  under  the  National  Research  Service  Award  Act  requires  the  recipient 
to  be  a  citizen  or  resident  of  the  United  States. 

The  Training  Program.  This  program  has  been  designed  to  offer  trainees  latitude  in 
the  selection  of  course  material.  Basic  requirements  are  two  academic  years  composed 
of  the  first  basic  science  year  and  the  second  clinical  science  year  of  the  curriculum  for 
medical  students  at  Duke  University.  Following  completion  of  the  second  year,  the  trainee 
enters  the  graduate  program  to  complete  the  requirements  for  the  Ph.D.  degree.  A  final 
academic  year  of  elective  clinical  study  is  necessary  to  complete  the  requirements  for  the 
M.D.  degree.  Both  degrees  are  awarded  at  the  completion  of  this  sequence. 

Additional  information  may  be  obtained  by  writing  Professor  Salvatore  V.  Pizzo,  Med- 
ical Scientist  Training  Program,  Department  of  Pathology,  Box  371 1  Duke  University  Med- 
ical Center,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27710. 

Oak  Ridge  Associated  Universities 

Duke  University  is  one  of  the  sponsoring  universities  of  the  Oak  Ridge  Associated 
Universities  located  at  Oak  Ridge,  Tennessee.  The  graduate  research  program  at  Duke 
has  available  to  it  all  the  facilities  of  the  Oak  Ridge  National  Laboratory  and  the  coopera- 
tive supervision  of  student  research  by  the  staff  at  Oak  Ridge.  Fellowships  in  several  fields 
of  science  are  available  to  qualified  applicants. 

Graduate  Fellowship  Program.  On  application  by  a  university,  ORAU  awards  fellow- 
ships to  candidates  for  the  master's  and  doctor's  degrees.  The  student  uses  the  fellow- 
ship to  conduct  thesis  research  in  certain  federal  laboratories. 

The  application  deadlines  depend  upon  the  fellowship.  Further  information  may  be 
obtained  from  Judith  Argon,  Office  of  Research  Support,  001E  Allen  Building. 

Office  of  Research  Support 

The  Office  of  Research  Support,  located  in  001E  Allen  Building,  provides  assistance 
to  faculty  members  (outside  the  Medical  Center)  who  seek  research  funding  and  to  gradu- 
ate students  who  seek  graduate  fellowships.  The  office  houses  a  library  of  reference  materi- 
als dealing  with  external  funding.  The  ORS  Fellowship  File  contains  fellowship  informa- 
tion for  faculty,  postdoctoral  fellows,  and  graduate  students  from  a  variety  of  sources.  It 
is  arranged  primarily  by  discipline  and  also  includes  such  categories  as  "study  abroad" 
and  "dissertation  support."  Graduate  students  may  take  advantage  of  the  resources  of 
the  office  by  browsing  through  the  information  on  their  own  or  they  may  make  an  ap- 
pointment to  talk  with  the  staff  by  calling  684-3030.  The  office  also  reviews  all  grant 
proposals  submitted  to  external  funding  sources,  negotiates  with  the  agency,  and  process- 
es the  award.  Office  hours  are  from  8:30-5:00  daily;  no  appointment  is  necessary. 

Center  for  Resource  and  Environmental  Policy  Research 

The  Center  for  Resource  and  Environmental  Policy  Research  at  Duke  University  is 
committed  to  the  study  of  public  policies  on  natural  resources  and  the  environment. 
Housed  in  the  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  and  initially  supported  by 
the  Andrew  W.  Mellon  Foundation,  the  center  combines  the  efforts  of  a  small  permanent 
faculty  with  participation  by  business  leaders,  government  officials,  and  the  faculty  and 
students  of  Duke  University  and  other  universities  to  provide  a  center  of  excellence  for 
the  analysis  of  contemporary  resource  and  environmental  policy  issues.  The  center  offers 
a  forum  for  the  examination  of  public  and  private  responsibilities  for  natural  resources 
and  the  environment  and  provides  a  means  to  link  the  specialized  knowledge  of  acade- 
mia  with  the  information  needs  of  government  and  industry. 


196         Special  and  Cooperative  Programs 


Graduate  research  assistantships  are  offered  to  qualified  students  researching  re- 
source and  environmental  policy  problems.  Support  is  available  to  students  pursuing 
M.S.,  A.M.,  or  Ph.D.  degrees  through  the  Graduate  School  at  Duke  University  and  in 
conjunction  with  the  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  or  other  departments. 
Course  work  is  offered  in  both  intensive  and  semester-long  formats. 

For  further  information,  write  to  the  Center  for  Resource  and  Environmental  Policy 
Research,  212  Biological  Sciences  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina 
27706. 

Organization  for  Tropical  Studies 

Duke  University  is  a  member  of  an  international  consortium  created  to  provide  leader- 
ship in  education,  research,  and  the  wise  use  of  natural  resources  in  the  tropics.  The  ba- 
sic OTS  course,  Tropical  Biology:  An  Ecological  Approach,  extends  for  an  eight-week  peri- 
od in  January-March  and  in  July-August.  Advanced  offerings  are  scheduled  periodically 
in  agroecology,  anthropology,  botany,  earth  sciences,  forestry,  geography,  marine  biolo- 
gy, meteorology,  and  zoology. 

The  application  deadlines  are  March  1  and  October  1 .  Fellowship  applications  for  trav- 
el and  subsistence  in  the  field-oriented  programs  conducted  in  Costa  Rica  are  available 
through  the  faculty  representatives.  Consult  Dr.  Donald  Stone  (botany),  Dr.  Richard  White 
(botany),  or  Dr.  John  Lundberg  (zoology)  for  information. 

Center  for  Research  on  Women 

The  Duke-UNC  Center  for  Research  on  Women  was  founded  in  1982  as  a  collabora- 
tive endeavor  between  Duke  University  and  the  University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel 
Hill  to  promote  women's  studies  scholarship  and  research  throughout  the  tri-state  area 
of  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  and  Virginia;  to  support  curriculum  development  in 
women's  studies;  and  to  disseminate  women's  studies  research  and  information  through- 
out the  South.  The  center's  principal  focus  is  to  explore  the  intersection  of  gender,  race, 
and  class,  with  a  particular  emphasis  on  the  American  South  and  Third  World  societies. 

The  center  offers  postdoctoral  humanist-in-residence  fellowships,  funded  by  the 
Rockefeller  Foundation,  a  limited  number  of  unpaid  visiting  scholar  affiliations,  and  op- 
portunities for  graduate  student  internships.  Regular  activities  include  an  annual  visit- 
ing lectureship  series;  a  working  paper  series,  Southern  Women:  The  Intersection  of  Race, 
Class  and  Gender,  published  jointly  with  the  research  centers  at  Memphis  State  Universi- 
ty and  Spelman  College;  the  publication  of  a  biannual  newsletter,  Branches;  and  spon- 
sorship of  conferences,  colloquia,  and  community  events.  The  research  center  also  houses 
SIGNS:  A  Journal  of  Women  in  Culture  and  Society. 

The  research  center  is  located  at  207  East  Duke  Building,  (919)  684-  6641,  on  the  Duke 
campus,  and  at  03  Caldwell  Hall  009A  at  UNC,  (919)  966-5787.  Dr.  William  H.  Chafe  is  the 
Academic  Director  and  Dr.  Christina  Greene  is  the  Project  Director. 


Center  for  Research  on  Women         197 


Resources  for  Study 


The  Libraries 

The  libraries  of  the  University  consist  of  the  William  R.  Perkins  Library  and  its  seven 
branches  on  campus:  Biology-Forestry,  Chemistry,  Divinity,  East  Campus,  Engineering, 
Music,  and  Mathematics-Physics;  the  Pearse  Memorial  Library  at  the  Duke  Marine 
Laboratory  in  Beaufort;  and  the  independently  administered  libraries  of  Fuqua  (Business), 
Law,  and  Medicine.  In  June  1988,  these  libraries  contained  approximately  3,669,724 
volumes.  Approximately  8,958  periodicals,  9,685  serials,  and  222  newspapers  are  received 
regularly.  The  collection  includes  about  2.6  million  manuscripts,  90,000  maps,  42,500  music 
scores,  535,000  microform  pieces,  and  over  1,000,000  public  documents. 

In  addition  to  noteworthy  holdings  in  British  history,  English  literature,  American 
history  and  literature,  Commonwealth  studies,  Latin  American  history,  religion,  and 
science,  the  libraries  include  several  distinguished  special  collections  of  international  repu- 
tation such  as  the  George  Washington  Rowers  Collection  of  Southern  Americana,  the 
Baker  Collection  of  Wesleyana  and  British  Methodistica,  the  Mazzoni  Collection  of  Ital- 
ian Literature,  the  Perez  de  Velasco  Collection  of  Latin  American  History,  the  Jantz  Col- 
lection of  German  Baroque  Literature  and  German  Americana,  the  Trent  Collection  of 
Walt  Whitman,  the  Trent  Collection  in  the  History  of  Medicine,  and  the  Strisower  Col- 
lection of  International  Law.  The  J.  Walter  Thompson  Newspaper  Archives  were  acquired 
during  the  past  year. 

THE  WILLIAM  R.  PERKINS  LIBRARY 

Collections.  The  William  R.  Perkins  Library,  the  main  library  of  the  University,  houses 
most  of  the  books  and  journals  in  the  humanities  and  social  sciences,  large  files  of  Unit- 
ed States  federal  and  state  documents,  public  documents  of  many  European  and  Latin 
American  countries,  publications  of  European  academies  and  learned  societies,  and  spe- 
cial collections  from  South  Asian,  Far  Eastern,  and  Slavic  countries.  The  newspaper  col- 
lection, with  nearly  530,000  microform  pieces  and  several  thousand  bound  volumes,  has 
long  eighteenth-century  files;  strong  holdings  of  nineteenth-century  New  England 
papers;  antebellum  and  Civil  War  papers  of  North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  Virginia, 
and  Georgia;  and  many  European  and  Latin  American  papers.  The  manuscript  collec- 
tion of  approximately  7,500,000  items  is  particularly  strong  in  all  phases  of  the  history,  pol- 
itics, and  social  and  economic  life  of  the  South  Atlantic  region  and  includes  significant 
papers  in  English  and  American  literature.  The  collection  in  the  Rare  Book  Room  con- 
tains scarce  and  valuable  materials  covering  a  broad  range  of  fields.  The  Latin  and  Greek 
manuscript  collection  constitutes  one  of  the  outstanding  groups  of  its  kind  in  the  United 
States.  The  collection  of  Confederate  imprints  is  the  largest  in  the  country. 

The  Libraries        199 


The  branch  libraries  serve  the  academic  disciplines  bearing  their  names.  The  East 
Campus  Library  is  primarily  for  undergraduate  use;  however,  it  also  contains  the  prin- 
cipal collections  for  graduate  and  undergraduate  study  in  art. 

Materials  on  reference  services,  closed  and  open  carrels,  interlibrary  loans,  and 
microfilming/photocopying  are  available  in  the  library. 

THE  MEDICAL  CENTER  LIBRARY 

The  Medical  Center  Library,  located  in  the  Seeley  G.  Mudd  Communications  Cen- 
ter and  Library  Building  on  the  Medical  Campus,  provides  services  and  informational 
resources  necessary  to  further  education,  research,  and  clinical  activities  in  the  medical 
field.  In  addition  to  the  faculties  and  students  in  the  Schools  of  Medicine,  Allied  Health, 
and  Medical  Center  graduate  departments,  the  library  serves  the  professional  and  tech- 
nical staffs  of  Duke  Hospital  as  well  as  other  health  professionals  throughout  North  Caro- 
lina. Over  232,000  volumes  are  available;  approximately  2,650  journal  subscriptions  are 
received  currently.  Professional  reference  librarians  are  available  for  assistance  in  the  use 
of  library  resources,  and  arrangements  may  be  made  for  individual  or  group  tours,  in- 
struction, or  specialized  seminars. 

The  History  of  Medicine  Collections,  including  the  Josiah  C.  Trent  Collection,  con- 
sist of  rare  books  and  manuscripts  and  a  supporting  group  of  histories,  biographies,  bib- 
liographies, pictures,  and  ephemeral  materials.  The  rare  books  are  available  to  all,  but 
are  restricted  to  library  use.  Most  modern  books  may  be  borrowed.  The  History  of  Medi- 
cine Collections  also  include  the  Duke  Authors  Collection,  which  preserves  an  archival 
copy  of  each  book  published  by  a  member  of  the  Duke  medical  faculty. 

The  Frank  Engel  Memorial  Collection  consists  of  a  small  group  of  books  for  leisure 
reading  in  nonmedical  subjects,  supplemented  by  several  newspapers  and  popular 
magazines. 

A  reserve  collection  of  heavily  used  books  and  journals  is  maintained  in  the  Medical 
Sciences  Branch  Library  located  in  the  Nanaline  Duke  Building  and  covers  the  fields  of 
biochemistry,  genetics,  pharmacology,  and  physiology. 

THE  SCHOOL  OF  LAW  LIBRARY 

The  School  of  Law  Library,  with  over  370,000  volumes,  serves  both  the  University  and 
the  local  legal  community.  It  features  comprehensive  coverage  of  basic  Anglo-American 
primary  source  materials,  including  nearly  all  reported  decisions  of  federal  and  state 
courts,  as  well  as  current  and  retrospective  collections  of  federal  and  state  codes  and  ses- 
sion laws.  Digests,  legal  encyclopedias,  and  other  indexing  devices  provide  access  to  the 
primary  documents.  A  large  section  of  the  library  collection  is  devoted  to  treatises  on  all 
phases  of  law  and  legal  sciences,  as  well  as  history,  economics,  government,  and  other 
social  and  behavioral  sciences  relevant  to  legal  research.  The  treatises  are  organized  in 
the  Library  of  Congress  classification  system  and  are  accessible  through  a  public  catalog. 
Special  treatise  collections  are  maintained  in  several  subject  areas,  including  the  George 
C.  Christie  collection  in  jurisprudence  and  the  Floyd  S.  Riddick  collection  of  autographed 
senatorial  material .  The  library  is  a  selective  depository  for  United  States  government  pub- 
lications, with  concentration  on  congressional  and  administrative  law  materials.  The  li- 
brary receives  the  records  and  briefs  from  the  United  States  Supreme  Court,  the  Fourth 
Circuit  Court  of  Appeals,  and  the  North  Carolina  Supreme  Court  and  Court  of  Appeals. 
In  addition  to  its  Anglo-American  holdings,  the  library  holds  substantial  research  collec- 
tions in  foreign  and  international  law.  The  foreign  law  collection  is  extensive  in  coverage, 
with  concentrations  in  European  law  and  business  law  materials.  The  international  law 
collection  is  strong  in  primary  source  and  treatise  material  on  both  private  and  public  in- 
ternational law  topics.  Undergraduate  and  graduate  students  whose  course  of  study  re- 
quires access  to  legal  literature  may  use  the  library.  However,  access  to  the  library  may 
be  restricted  during  certain  times  because  of  accreditation  standards. 


200        Resources  for  Study 


RECORD  LIBRARY 

The  Department  of  Music  has  a  record  library  separate  from  the  university  libraries 
with  facilities  for  listening  to  records  and  tapes.  While  all  materials  may  be  used  in  the 
listening  room,  recordings  from  the  departmental  collection  may  be  borrowed  only  by 
faculty  of  the  Department  of  Music.  Any  member  of  the  community  may  borrow  from 
the  Arts  Council  Collection  of  more  than  2,700  records  for  a  nominal  fee. 

UNIVERSITY  ARCHIVES 

The  Duke  University  Archives,  the  official  archival  agency  of  the  University,  collects, 
preserves,  and  administers  the  records  of  the  University  having  continuing  administra- 
tive or  historical  value.  The  institutional  archives,  which  also  include  published  materi- 
al, photographs,  papers  of  student  groups  and  faculty,  and  selected  memorabilia,  are  avail- 
able for  research  under  controlled  conditions  in  341  Perkins  Library. 

Science  Laboratories 

Computation  Center.  The  Duke  University  Computation  Center  (DUCC)  maintains 
an  IBM  3083  System  Complex  with  sixteen  megabytes  of  memory,  eight  IBM  3380  disk 
drives,  eight  IBM  3350  disk  drives,  eight  IBM  3330-11  disk  drives,  six  IBM  3420  tape  drives, 
one  Xerox  8700  laser  printer,  three  IBM  high-speed  printers,  a  CalComp  digital  plotter, 
and  an  IBM  2540  card  reader/punch.  The  DUCC  facility  is  connected  by  a  high-speed 
microwave  to  the  Triangle  Universities  Computation  Center  (TUCC)  located  in  the  Re- 
search Triangle  Park. 

TUCC  is  a  regional  computer  network  formed  and  operated  jointly  by  Duke  Univer- 
sity, North  Carolina  State  University  at  Raleigh,  and  the  University  of  North  Carolina  at 
Chapel  Hill .  The  computer  equipment  at  TUCC  consists  of  one  IBM  3081  with  thirty -two 
million  bytes  of  memory,  multiple  3330-  and  3350-type  disk  drives,  thirteen  tape  drives, 
card  readers,  and  printers. 

Duke's  IBM  3083  is  used  mostly  for  administrative  computing  and  as  a  high-speed 
link  to  TUCC.  Also  connected  to  TUCC  are  four  medium-speed  printers  located  in  the 
Engineering  Building,  the  Biological  Sciences  Building,  the  Sociology-Psychology  Build- 
ing, and  West  Duke  Building  on  East  Campus,  as  well  as  seven  low-speed  keyboard  ter- 
minal clusters  located  at  various  points  around  the  University.  Seven  clusters  and  two 
laboratories  of  IBM  personal  computers  are  also  available.  The  laboratories  are  located 
in  the  Engineering  Building  and  in  North  Building.  Also  available  are  several  APPLE 
Macintosh  microcomputer  clusters. 

All  users  of  the  Computation  Center  facilities  are  urged  to  obtain  funds  to  pay  for  com- 
puter services.  Users  unable  to  obtain  grant  funding  may  ask  for  financial  support  from 
their  departments  when  applying  for  services.  More  specific  information  regarding  Duke 
computing  facilities  may  be  obtained  from  the  Director  of  the  Computation  Center. 

Botanical  and  Zoological  Laboratories.  Facilities  for  graduate  study  in  the  Depart- 
ments of  Botany  and  Zoology  are  located  on  the  West  Campus.  The  Biological  Sciences 
Building  contains  well-equipped  modern  laboratories  for  teaching  and  research  in  the 
fields  of  botany,  forestry,  and  zoology.  Special  facilities  include  animal  rooms,  green- 
houses, darkrooms,  refrigerated  and  controlled-environment  laboratories,  scanning  and 
transmission  electron  microscopes,  a  Van  de  Graaf  accelerator,  X-ray  machines,  radiation 
and  radioisotope  equipment,  and  other  modern  research  facilities.  Extensive  facilities  for 
experimentation  in  environmental  control  of  plant  growth  are  available  in  the  phytotron 
adjacent  to  the  botany  greenhouses. 

The  herbarium  contains  over  500,000  specimens  and  includes  notable  collections  of 
mosses  and  lichens.  Other  assets  for  teaching  and  research  are  the  Sarah  P.  Duke  Gardens 
on  the  West  Campus;  the  eleven-acre  experimental  plot  and  field  laboratory  developed 
by  the  Department  of  Botany;  the  Duke  Forest,  comprising  8,300  acres  of  woodland 

Science  Laboratories        201 


adjacent  to  the  West  Campus;  the  field  station  for  the  study  of  animal  behavior  and  ecol- 
ogy; and  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory,  an  interdepartmental  facility  located 
on  a  small  island  on  the  coast  at  Beaufort,  North  Carolina,  where  twenty-two  buildings 
and  a  small  flotilla  of  ships  and  boats  provide  teaching  and  research  facilities  for  resident 
graduate  students  and  faculty  as  well  as  visiting  individuals  or  groups. 

Duke  University,  through  the  botany  and  zoology  departments,  is  a  member  insti- 
tution of  the  Organization  for  Tropical  Studies,  Inc.,  a  consortium  of  universities  with 
field  station  facilities  in  Costa  Rica  that  provide  opportunities  for  course  work  and  research 
in  tropical  science. 

Highlands  Biological  Station.  Duke  University  holds  a  contributing  membership 
in  the  Highlands  Biological  Station  at  Highlands,  North  Carolina,  on  the  southern  edge 
of  the  Blue  Ridge  Mountains  at  an  elevation  of  4, 118  feet .  The  station  and  the  region  offer 
an  excellent  opportunity  for  field  studies  and  some  laboratory  work.  A  limited  number 
of  qualified  students  in  botany  and  zoology  may  make  arrangements  to  carry  out  research 
here.  Scholarships  for  advanced  study  during  the  summer  months  are  available  through 
the  station. 

For  further  information  contact  Dr.  M.  D.  Rausher,  Department  of  Zoology,  or  Dr.  N. 
L.  Christensen,  Department  of  Botany,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  Phytotron.  The  phytotron,  a  national  environmental  control  facility  operated  for 
the  National  Science  Foundation,  is  adjacent  to  the  Biological  Sciences  Building  and  is 
administered  by  the  botany  department.  The  phytotron  is  an  integrated  series  of  plant- 
growth  rooms,  chambers,  and  greenhouses,  with  forty-six  separately  controlled  environ- 
ments providing  more  than  4,000  square  feet  of  plant-growing  space.  The  factors  of  the 
environment  controlled  in  the  units  to  study  plant  growth  include  light,  temperature, 
nutrients,  carbon  dioxide  concentration,  and  humidity.  By  using  the  conditions  in  vari- 
ous day  and  night  combinations,  an  exceptionally  large  number  of  environments  can  be 
simulated  for  testing  the  growth  responses  of  plants.  The  phytotron  also  includes  research 
laboratories  and  facilities  for  studying  and  monitoring  the  physiological  processes  of 
plants. 

Research  space  in  the  phytotron  is  available  to  graduate  students  and  faculty  at  Duke 
and  to  members  of  other  educational  and  research  organizations.  For  information  con- 
cerning the  rental  of  research  space,  contact  Dr.  Boyd  R .  Strain,  Director  of  the  Phytotron, 
Department  of  Botany,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Duke  Forest.  The  Duke  Forest  comprises  approximately  8,300  acres  of  land  in  five  ma- 
jor divisions  and  several  smaller  tracts.  A  ten-minute  walk  from  campus  will  take  one  well 
into  many  parts  of  the  Durham  Division,  and  a  network  of  roads  and  fire  trails  make  al- 
most all  areas  of  the  forest  easily  accessible. 

The  forest  lies  primarily  in  Durham  and  Orange  counties,  near  the  eastern  edge  of 
the  piedmont  plateau,  and  supports  a  cross-section  of  the  woodlands  found  in  the  up- 
per coastal  plain  and  lower  piedmont  of  the  Southeast.  A  variety  of  timber  types,  plant 
species,  soils,  topography,  and  past  land  use  conditions  are  represented.  Elevations  range 
from  260  to  760  feet.  Soils  of  the  region  are  derived  from  such  diverse  parent  materials 
as  metamorphic  rock  of  the  Carolina  slate  formation,  granite,  Triassic  sedimentary  rock, 
and  basic  intrusives. 

The  forest  serves  for  research  in  such  areas  as  forestry,  zoology,  botany,  and  ecology 
by  faculty  and  students  at  Duke  and  neighboring  universities.  Background  information 
useful  to  researchers  covers  such  features  as  soils,  topography,  inventory,  plantation  and 
cultural  records,  as  well  as  a  bibliography  of  past  and  current  studies.  Current  work  on 
problems  associated  with  developmental  pressures  at  the  urban-rural  interface  and  in- 
tegrated approaches  to  natural  resource  management  have  multiplied  the  value  and  ben- 
efit of  the  forest.  For  information  contact:  Judson  Edeburn,  Duke  Forest  Resource  Man- 
ager, Room  206-A  Biological  Sciences  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina 
27706. 

202        Resources  for  Study 


Forestry  Sciences  Laboratory.  The  Forestry  Sciences  Laboratory  of  the  USDA  Forest 
Service,  Southeastern  Forest  Experiment  Station  is  located  in  the  Research  Triangle  Park 
near  Durham.  This  research  organization  provides  excellent  opportunities  to  complement 
research  conducted  by  students  in  the  School  of  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies. 
Specialized  research  projects  in  timber  investment  opportunities,  market  efficiency  forest 
soils,  insect  toxicology,  air  pollution  impacts,  and  the  economics  of  forestry  in  develop- 
ing countries  are  currently  under  way  at  the  laboratory.  The  staff  of  the  laboratory  is  avail- 
able for  consultation  and  participation  in  seminars.  Arrangements  may  be  made  for  stu- 
dents to  conduct  certain  aspects  of  their  research  at  the  laboratory. 

Marine  Laboratory.  The  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  (DUML),  an  interdepart- 
mental training  and  research  facility  of  the  University,  is  located  on  Pivers  Island,  adja- 
cent to  the  historic  seacoast  town  of  Beaufort,  North  Carolina.  Because  of  the  richness 
and  diversity  of  the  area's  flora  and  fauna  (including  direct  access  from  the  laboratory  to 
the  open  ocean,  Cape  Lookout  National  Seashore  Park,  the  Outer  Banks,  estuaries,  sand 
beaches,  wetlands,  and  coastal  forests),  the  laboratory  provides  an  excellent  opportuni- 
ty for  marine  study  and  research .  The  laboratory  accommodates  nearly  3,700  visitors  per 
year,  including  fifteen  to  twenty  resident  graduate  students  who  are  involved  in  year- 
round  activities.  (For  additional  information  concerning  the  graduate  program,  refer  to 
the  section  on  marine  sciences  in  the  chapter  "Courses  of  Instruction"  in  this  bulletin  and 
the  current  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Marine  Laboratory.)  The  physical  plant  consists  of 
twenty-three  buildings,  including  classroom  laboratories,  six  research  buildings,  four  dor- 
mitories, a  maintenance  complex,  and  a  dining  hall.  The  laboratory  has  skiffs,  a  50-foot 
training  vessel,  the  R/V  First  Mate,  and  a  new  135-foot  research  and  training  vessel,  the 
R/V  Cape  Hatteras,  which  is  operated  by  the  Duke/UNC  Oceanographic  Consortium. 

For  information  concerning  teaching  and  research  space,  write  to  the  Personnel  and 
Auxiliaries  Office,  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516. 

Zoology  Field  Station.  The  Zoology  Field  Station,  located  less  than  one  mile  from 
campus,  provides  facilities  for  the  study  of  penned,  free-ranging,  and  caged  animals  in 
a  protected  wooded  area  of  eighty  acres.  These  facilities  include  soundproofed  observa- 
tion chambers,  barns,  aviaries,  pens  for  large  animals  and  birds,  and  two  ponds.  For  in- 
formation regarding  research  space,  write  to  Dr.  Mark  D.  Rausher,  Department  of  Zool- 
ogy, Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Primate  Center.  The  Duke  University  Primate  Center  is  located  in  the  Duke  Forest 
about  two  miles  from  the  main  campus.  The  colony  is  composed  of  approximately  730 
prosimian  primates  representing  six  families,  fourteen  genera,  twenty-five  species,  and 
thirty-three  varieties.  This  is  both  the  largest  and  most  diversified  colony  of  living  lower 
primates  in  the  world  and  the  world's  largest  conservation  center  for  primates.  The  cen- 
ter also  houses  frozen,  preserved,  and  fossil  primate  collections.  These  collections  and 
animals  are  utilized  by  faculty  members  and  both  graduate  and  undergraduate  students 
in  the  Departments  of  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy,  Forestry,  Geology,  Psychol- 
ogy, and  Zoology  for  all  qualified  researchers  in  primate  paleontology,  prosimian  aging, 
locomotion,  cytogenetics,  comparative  anatomy,  behavior,  and  physiology.  Applications 
for  graduate  study  in  one  of  these  areas  should  be  directed  to  the  Director  of  Graduate 
Studies  of  any  of  the  five  departments.  For  information  pertaining  to  the  use  of  the  Pri- 
mate Center,  graduate  studies,  or  availability  of  research  space,  write  to  Dr.  Elwyn  L.  Si- 
mons, Director,  Duke  University  Primate  Center,  3705  Erwin  Road,  Durham,  North  Caro- 
lina 27705. 

The  Vivarium.  The  vivarium  facilities  are  maintained  solely  to  support  research  and 
teaching  programs  of  Duke  University.  The  central  vivarium  contains  forty-four  animal 
housing  rooms,  four  sterile  operating  rooms,  two  necropsy  rooms,  ten  project  rooms,  and 
a  diet  kitchen.  Presently,  Duke  medical  students  and  physician's  associate  students  at- 
tend classes  in  animal  surgery  at  the  vivarium.  A  farm  facility  also  is  available  to  accom- 

Science  Laboratories        203 


modate  dog  kennels  and  large  farm  animals.  The  vivarium  is  staffed  by  veterinarians,  tech- 
nicians, and  caretakers  to  assure  humane  care  and  treatment  of  animals.  The  vivarium 
is  fully  accredited  by  the  American  Association  of  Laboratory  Animal  Care  which  assures 
compliance  with  standards  of  NIH. 

Psychology  Laboratories.  The  facilities  of  the  Department  of  Psychology  include 
sound-attenuating  and  electrically  shielded  rooms,  some  for  use  with  human  subjects 
and  others  for  use  with  animal  subjects;  rooms  for  computer-controlled  experiments  in 
human  perception,  memory,  and  language;  electrophysiological  recording  rooms;  and 
interconnected  rooms  to  provide  observation,  communication,  and  videotaping  capa- 
bilities for  the  study  of  social  interactions  and  for  the  study  of  personality  and  clinical 
processes. 

As  well  as  such  specially  designed  spaces,  there  is  a  variety  of  support  facilities.  To 
aid  in  the  study  of  animal  behavior  and  psychobiology,  there  are  a  breeding  colony  of  ring 
doves  and  colonies  of  pigeons,  rats,  and  mice.  To  aid  in  physiological  research,  there  are 
surgeries,  histology  laboratories,  and  photographic  darkrooms.  To  aid  in  data  collection 
and  analyses,  for  both  human  and  animal  experiments,  there  are  facilities  for 
microprocessor-controlled  experiments  and  videotaping  in  a  variety  of  situations,  includ- 
ing special  facilities  for  the  study  of  operant  conditioning,  perception,  and  behavioral 
ecology. 

Several  laboratories  have  independent  computers,  some  with  graphics  capabilities, 
and  there  are  direct  connections  to  the  large-scale  computers  at  the  Triangle  Universities 
Computation  Center.  There  are  also  fully  equipped  machine,  woodworking,  and  elec- 
tronics shops  staffed  by  full-time  technicians.  Additional  facilities  for  research  and  teach- 
ing are  available  in  the  laboratories  and  clinics  of  the  adjacent  Duke  Medical  Center,  in 
the  Veterans  Administration  Medical  Center  nearby,  and  in  the  universities  and  research 
companies  in  the  area. 

A  number  of  clinical  installations  for  adults  and  children,  specializing  in  clinical  and 
guidance  problems,  cooperate  with  the  department  in  providing  facilities  for  research 
and  training.  Clinical  research  is  often  conducted  at  the  Duke  Psychology  Clinic  operat- 
ed by  the  clinical  psychology  program.  This  facility  offers  a  full  range  of  clinical  services 
to  adults,  children,  and  families. 

Chemistry  Laboratories.  The  Department  of  Chemistry  is  housed  in  the  Paul  M .  Gross 
Chemical  Laboratory.  This  well-equipped  modern  chemical  laboratory  provides  condi- 
tions very  conducive  to  research.  In-house  nuclear  magnetic  resonance  facilities  include 
Varian  XL-300,  IBM  NR-80,  JEOL  60  and  90  multinuclear  FT-NMR  spectrometers,  and 
several  routine  proton  instruments.  The  University  NMR  center,  of  which  chemistry  is 
a  part,  also  includes  GE  GN-500  and  GN-300  (wide  bore)  spectrometers.  An  ESR  spec- 
trometer, a  Varian  E-9,  provides  excellent  facilities  for  research  in  electron  spin  resonance. 
Mass  spectrometric  service  is  provided  by  two  Hewlett-Packard  GC-MS  systems,  as  well 
as  access  to  other  HR-MS  instruments  located  in  the  Research  Triangle  area.  X-ray  diffrac- 
tion cameras  of  all  types  are  available,  along  with  Enraf-Nonius  automatic  and  Picker  au- 
tomatic full-circle  diffractometers.  Numerous  instruments  of  varying  sophistication  for 
photoacoustic,  fluorescence,  infrared,  U.V.,  and  ORD-CD  spectroscopy  are  available. 
Several  preparative  and  analytical  gas  and  liquid  chromatographs  are  also  located  in  the 
building.  Computing  facilities  in  the  Department  of  Chemistry  include  a  cluster  of  twelve 
IBM  personal  computers  and  a  cluster  of  five  remote  job  entry  terminals  which  utilize  an 
IBM  Series  1,  WIDJET  system  to  access  the  dual  IBM  370/165-Amdahl  systems  of  the  Tri- 
angle Universities  Computation  Center  via  a  19  Kb  microwave  link.  The  department  also 
houses  a  DEC  11/42  system  (1  Mbyte,  16  terminal)  which  operates  in  a  multiuser  FOR- 
TRAN environment  emphasizing  computer  graphics  as  a  training  tool .  An  AED  512  col- 
or graphics/imaging  terminal  is  also  available.  Numerous  other  computers  are  associat- 
ed with  specific  research  groups.  The  department  has  a  machine  shop  and  an  electronics 
shop.  The  facilities  of  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  on  the  coast  at  Beaufort, 


204        Resou rces  for  Study 


Science  Laboratories        205 


North  Carolina,  are  available  for  specimen  and  water  collecting;  joint  research  projects 
with  members  of  the  resident  staff  have  been  conducted  in  the  areas  of  biological  chemistry 
and  chemical  aspects  of  oceanography.  The  Department  of  Chemistry  Library,  with  hold- 
ings of  approximately  42,000  volumes,  is  also  located  in  the  Paul  M.  Gross  Chemical 
Laboratory.  The  library  receives  600  current  scientific  serial  publications  and  has  a  ter- 
minal facility  for  complete  information  retrieval. 

Physics  Laboratories.  The  Physics  Building  houses  research  and  instruction  in  the 
Departments  of  Physics  and  Mathematics.  Additional  space  is  provided  by  the  adjacent 
Nuclear  Laboratory  Building.  Graduate  students  in  the  two  departments  usually  have 
offices  in  these  buildings. 

About  half  of  the  physics  space  is  devoted  to  research  laboratories  for  the  department's 
programs.  Special  equipment  includes:  microwave  facilities  operating  at  high  frequen- 
cies (1000  GHz  and  beyond);  picosecond,  dye,  carbon  dioxide,  and  far  infrared  lasers; 
a  high-resolution  3  MeV  Van  de  Graaff  accelerator;  a  16  MeV  tandem  Van  de  Graaff  ac- 
celerator with  cryogenically-cooled  polarized  targets;  a  helium  liquefier,  cryostats,  mag- 
nets, and  associated  equipment  for  research  in  the  millikelvin  temperature  range;  VAX 
computers  for  data  collection  and  processing  in  nuclear  physics  and  in  high-energy  phys- 
ics; various  minicomputers  and  microcomputers  in  the  research  groups;  and  a  Sun 
minicomputer  for  general  departmental  use. 

The  Mathematics-Physics  Library  is  located  in  the  Physics  Building;  it  contains  a  large 
selection  of  books  and  scholarly  periodicals.  Also  located  in  the  building  are  instrument 
and  electronics  shops,  staffed  by  instrument  makers  and  electronics  technicians. 

Engineering  Research  Laboratories.  The  laboratories  of  the  four  departments  of  the 
School  of  Engineering  contain  extensive  basic  equipment  that  may  be  applied  in  several 
specialized  fields.  The  facilities  available  for  instruction  and  research  are  suggested  by 
the  following  brief  listing  of  equipment  found  in  each  department: 

Biomedical  Engineering.  Ultrasound  imaging  and  transducer  laboratories;  cellular  elec- 
trophysiology  and  neurophysiology  instrumentation;  stereomicroscope,  micromanipu- 
lators, stimulators,  isolation  units,  and  microelectrode  puller;  facilities  for  studying  bio- 
medical materials  and  surface  interactions;  polarizing  microscope,  internal  reflectance 
infrared  spectrophotometer,  and  dialyzers;  soft  tissue  creep  and  relaxation  test  system; 
biocellular  material  testing  equipment;  quantitative  videomicroscopy,  laser  fluorescence 
microscopy,  and  nanogram-level  micromechanical  testing  equipment;  microprocessor 
development  systems;  microprocessor  data  acquisition  and  control  systems;  cardi- 
orespiratory measurements;  respirator;  and  a  VAX  11/780  and  several  PDP-11  and  IBM 
digital  computers. 

Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering.  Well-equipped  research  laboratories  are  availa- 
ble for  work  in  environmental  engineering,  soil  mechanics  and  geotechnical  engineer- 
ing, solid  mechanics  and  materials  engineering,  structural  mechanics  and  structural  en- 
gineering, fluid  mechanics,  water  resources,  and  urban  systems  and  transportation 
engineering.  Available  research  facilities  include  four  independent  closed-loop  electro- 
hydraulic  dynamic  loading  systems  (MTS)  capable  of  applying  pulses  of  any  shape  and 
controlled  in  force  or  displacement  modes,  frequency  range  up  to  100  Hz,  load  capacity 
6,000, 35,000, 50,000,  and  220,000  lbs.  (the  6,000  lbs.  actuator  can  develop  a  constant  cross- 
head  speed  up  to  50,000  in./min.);  equipment  for  fabricating  specimens  of  and  testing 
fiber-reinforced  polymer  composites;  environmental  chamber  for  testing  in  the  temper- 
ature range  of  -320  to  500;  ultra-high-pressure  triaxial  shear  apparatus  for  confining  pres- 
sures up  to  100,000  psi;  rock-testing  facilities;  model-testing  equipment  for  anchored  walls 
and  penetrometer  studies;  a  large-aperture  research  polariscope;  a  reflective  photoelas- 
tic  polariscope;  sustained-loading  facility  for  long  duration  in  studies  of  prestressed  con- 
crete; wet  and  dry  environmental  laboratories  equipped  to  analyze  a  range  of  physical, 
chemical,  and  biological  processes;  a  fully  integrated  resource  recovery  pilot  plant; 
calorimetry  for  the  measurement  of  heating  values  of  secondary  fuels;  air  classifiers 


206        Resources  for  Study 


interfaced  with  computer  readout;  several  microcomputers,  including  personal  com- 
puters with  graphics  capability;  and  access  to  the  extensive  computer  facilities  of  the  Duke 
University  Computation  Center  as  well  as  the  Triangle  Universities  Computation  Center. 

The  research  facilities  in  water  resources  are  located  both  indoors  and  outdoors.  In- 
doors, the  laboratory  houses  flow-measurement  devices  (flumes,  Venturi  meters,  manom- 
eters, etc.)  and  digital  computation  hardware.  A  dual  capability  teletype  terminal  is  hard- 
wired to  a  Data  General  32-bit  MV/20000  computer  supported  by  three-dimensional  color 
graphic  printers  and,  through  an  acoustic  coupler,  the  same  terminal  can  be  switched  to 
access  an  IBM  3081  computer  at  the  Triangle  Universities  Computation  Center,  the  WAT- 
STORE  data  base  system  of  the  U.S.  Geological  Survey  in  Reston,  Virginia,  or  any  other 
computation  system  connected  via  telephone  lines.  Outdoors,  the  Sarah  P.  Duke  Gardens 
watershed  (about  100  acres  on  campus)  has  been  instrumented  with  rain  gauges,  com- 
pound weirs,  and  liquid-level  flow  recorders  enabling  hydrologic  simulation  and  calibra- 
tion and  verification  with  real  data. 

Electrical  Engineering.  Digital  data  processing  laboratory  equipped  with  the  Data 
General  32-bit  MV/20000  as  a  multi-user  computer  operating  in  a  UNIX  type  environment 
for  interactive  design,  graphics,  computation,  and  computer-aided  engineering;  Digi- 
tal Equipment  Microvax  work  stations  for  VLSI  design;  ethernet  network  for  connection 
to  regional,  national,  and  international  data  networks;  Signal  Processing  Laboratory  with 
Sun  workstations;  microwave  facilities  for  experimentation  up  to  35  GHz;  robotics  with 
a  GE  P-50  robot;  microprocessor  laboratory;  Digital  Systems  Laboratory;  solid-state  power 
conditioning  laboratories  with  dedicated  computers  for  controlling  instruments,  including 
digital  processing  oscilloscopes  and  network  and  impedance  analyzers,  and  for  computer- 
aided  design;  clean  room  and  semiconductor  nMOS  fabrication  laboratory  for  integrat- 
ed circuits;  access  to  the  design,  fabrication,  and  research  facilities  of  the  Microelectron- 
ics Center  of  North  Carolina;  and  an  ion  implanter  and  MOCVD  epitaxial  growth  sys- 
tem in  a  III-V  compound  semiconductor  lab  at  the  Research  Triangle  Institute. 

Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science.  The  department  has  a  number  of  well- 
equipped  laboratories  for  studies  in  aerodynamics,  acoustics,  nonlinear  dynamics  and 
chaos,  convective  heat  transfer,  computational  fluid  mechanics  and  heat  transfer,  con- 
trol theory,  cell  and  membrane  biomechanics,  biochemical  and  bioprocess  engineering, 
biorheology,  polymer  engineering,  corrosion,  electronic  materials,  physical  metallurgy, 
positron  annihilation  spectroscopy,  product  liability  and  expert  systems.  Equipment  in 
these  laboratories  includes  a  wind  tunnel,  a  scanning  electron  microscope,  a  scanning 
tunneling  microscope,  spectrometers,  a  positron  annihilation  system  and  diffusion  fur- 
nace, inverted  microscopes,  low-light-level  video  cameras  and  a  photon  counter,  cell- 
culture  systems,  and  an  anechoic  chamber.  Other  recently  acquired  equipment  includes 
Mac,  Sun,  and  Micro/VAX  computers  with  high-resolution  color  graphics  terminals,  an 
X-ray  generator  and  dif  fractometer,  a  flourescence  microscope,  a  correlation  signal  aver- 
ager, a  symbolic  computer,  a  biostat  fermenter,  and  a  video  signal  digital  processor. 

F.  G.  Hall  Hypo-Hyperbaric  Center.  The  F.  G.  Hall  Hypo-Hyperbaric  Center  con- 
tains eight  hyperbaric  and/or  hypobaric  pressure  chambers  used  to  simulate  altitude  or 
deep-sea  diving  conditions,  for  the  purpose  of  both  experimentation  and  medical  treat- 
ments. The  interconnected  steel  chambers  can  simulate  depths  of  3,600  feet,  or  altitude 
of  155,000  feet,  a  capability  unmatched  in  the  United  States.  In  1982  a  research  dive  to  2, 250 
feet  set  a  new  world's  record.  Research  of  this  type  has  led  to  the  development  of  safer 
and  faster  decompression  tables,  better  breathing  mixtures,  and  improved  types  of  div- 
ing equipment  together  with  new  treatments  for  diving  accidents  and  diseases  treated 
with  high-pressure  oxygen .  The  laboratory  provides  opportunities  for  basic  and  applied 
research  and  for  training  physicians,  postdoctorates,  and  graduate  students  in  pressure- 
related  medicine  and  physiology.  The  program  is  multidisciplinary  with  major  partici- 
pation by  the  Departments  of  Anesthesiology,  Cell  Biology,  Neurobiology,  Medicine,  Sur- 
gery, and  the  School  of  Engineering. 


Science  Laboratories         207 


The  Medical  Center.  The  Medical  Center  currently  occupies  approximately  140  acres. 
The  southern  portion  is  contiguous  with  the  main  quadrangle  of  the  University  and  con- 
sists of  the  following:  Davison  Building,  Duke  Hospital  South,  Baker  House,  Barnes 
Woodhall  Building,  Diagnostic  and  Treatment  Building,  Ewald  W.  Busse  Building,  Eu- 
gene A.  Stead  Building,  Clinical  Research  II,  and  the  Edwin  A.  Morris  Clinical  Cancer 
Research  Building. 

The  northern  portion  includes  the  Nanaline  H.  Duke  Medical  Sciences  Building,  Alex 
H.  Sands  Medical  Sciences  Building,  Edwin  L.  Jones  Basic  Cancer  Research  Building, 
Clinical  Laboratory  and  Medical  Research  Building,  Bell  Building,  Seeley  G.  Mudd  Com- 
munications Center  and  Library,  Searle  Center  for  Continuing  Education,  Eye  Center, 
and  Duke  Hospital  North. 

In  the  western  section  of  the  campus  are:  Research  Park  Buildings  I,  II,  HI,  and  IV; 
the  Vivarium;  the  Animal  Laboratory  Isolation  Facility;  a  new  environmental  safety  build- 
ing; and  a  surgical  oncology  research  building. 

In  the  eastern  section  of  the  campus  are  Pickens  Rehabilitation  Center,  Civitan  Mental 
Retardation  and  Child  Development  Center,  Child  Guidance  Center,  and  Trent  Drive  Hall. 


208        Resources  for  Stu dy 


Science  Laboratories        209 


Student  Life 


Living  Accommodations 

Duke  University  has  several  residential  apartment  facilities  in  which  single  gradu- 
ate and  professional  students  live.  These  apartments  are  available  for  continuous  occupan- 
cy throughout  the  calendar  year.  All  of  the  apartments  are  completely  furnished  by  the 
University.  An  itemization  of  furnishings  is  included  with  the  floor  plans  sent  out  in  the 
application  packet.  Spaces  in  apartments  for  single  students  are  provided  on  an  individual 
basis  with  each  student  paying  rent  per  academic  term  to  the  University.  This  method 
permits  students  to  share  apartments  with  others  of  their  choice.  When  this  is  impracti- 
cal, the  Department  of  Housing  Management  strives  to  place  persons  with  similar  interests 
together.  Married  student  housing  is  not  available.  Married  students  should  refer  to  the 
section  entitled  Off -campus  Housing. 

Town  House  Apartments.  Town  House  Apartments,  located  about  three  blocks  from 
the  main  East-West  Campus  bus  line,  is  a  thirty- two-unit  complex.  These  apartments  are 
more  spacious  than  most  apartments  found  on  campus  or  in  Durham.  Because  of  its  lo- 
cation away  from  the  academic  facilities,  students  find  that  it  offers  a  change  from  nor- 
mal campus  life  and  activities. 

Each  air-conditioned  apartment  includes  a  living  room,  a  master  bedroom,  a  smaller 
bedroom,  a  bath  and  a  half,  and  an  all-electric  kitchen  with  a  dining  area.  Spacious  closets 
and  storage  spaces  are  provided  within  each  apartment.  A  swimming  pool,  located  in 
the  center  of  the  complex,  is  open  during  the  late  spring  and  throughout  the  summer 
months. 

Occupants  must  make  arrangements  with  the  local  utility  companies  to  pay  for  elec- 
tricity, gas,  and  telephone  service.  These  companies  usually  require  a  deposit  when  ini- 
tial applications  for  service  are  made.  Utility  companies  should  be  contacted  prior  to  ar- 
rival as  it  usually  takes  several  days  to  obtain  service. 

Central  Campus  Apartments.  During  1975,  Duke  University  completed  a  500-unit 
apartment  complex.  A  swimming  pool,  located  in  the  center  of  the  complex,  isopen  dur- 
ing the  late  spring  and  throughout  the  summer  months.  Additional  facilities  include  a 
pub,  convenience  store,  tennis  courts,  and  basketball  courts. 

All  utilities— water,  heat,  air-conditioning,  and  electricity —are  provided.  Telephones, 
which  are  provided  in  preinstalled  locations  in  each  apartment,  are  serviced  through  Duke 
University's  Tel-Com  telephone  service.  Central  Campus  Apartments  residents  are 
responsible  for  having  their  phones  connected. 

Efficiency,  two-bedroom,  and  three-bedroom  apartments  are  rented  to  single  stu- 
dents. Efficiency  units  are  very  limited  in  number  and  are  generally  not  available  to  new 
students. 

Living  Accommodations        211 


Modular  Homes.  The  University  owns  six  prefabricated  modular  homes  which  are 
located  one  block  from  the  main  East- West  Campus  bus  line.  The  houses,  completely  fur- 
nished, provide  more  privacy  than  most  apartments. 

In  addition  to  having  three  bedrooms,  each  home  contains  a  full  bath,  an  all-electric 
kitchen,  a  dining  area,  and  a  living  room.  Sliding  glass  doors  in  the  living  room  open  onto 
a  wooden  deck.  An  outside  storage  area  is  provided  in  addition  to  spacious  closets  with- 
in the  home.  Except  for  the  bathroom,  kitchen,  and  dining  area,  the  homes  are  completely 
carpeted  and  paneled. 

Residents  of  the  modular  homes  are  responsible  for  making  arrangements  with  lo- 
cal utility  companies  for  electricity  and  telephone  services. 

Application  Procedures.  When  students  are  informed  of  their  acceptance  to  Graduate 
School  they  will  also  receive  a  postcard  on  which  to  indicate  preference  for  University 
housing.  This  postcard  should  be  returned  to  the  Department  of  Housing  Management . 
Detailed  information  on  the  types  of  accommodations  and  application  forms  will  be  for- 
warded to  the  accepted  student .  Assignment  to  all  University  housing  is  made  on  a  first- 
apply,  first-assigned  basis,  and  it  is  not  guaranteed. 

Off-campus  Housing.  The  Department  of  Housing  Management  maintains  a  list- 
ing of  rental  apartments,  rooms,  and  houses  provided  by  property  owners  or  real  estate 
agencies  in  Durham.  These  listings  are  available  in  the  department  only;  during  the  sum- 
mer an  assistant  is  available  to  answer  questions  and  aid  students  in  their  attempt  to  ob- 
tain housing  off  campus.  Information  on  commercial  complexes  in  the  Durham  area  may 
be  obtained  by  indicating  a  preference  for  off -campus  housing  on  the  postcard  which  you 
will  receive  with  your  acceptance  notice.  Except  for  assuring  that  owners  sign  a  statement 
of  nondiscrimination,  off -campus  property  is  in  no  way  verified  and  neither  the  University 
nor  its  agents  negotiate  between  owners  and  interested  parties. 

The  search  for  accommodations  should  begin  as  soon  as  possible  after  acceptance 
to  the  Graduate  School .  A  visit  of  two  or  three  days  will  allow  you  the  opportunity  to  make 
use  of  the  off -campus  service  and  to  inspect  personally  the  available  facilities. 

Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory.  The  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory,  lo- 
cated on  Pivers  Island,  has  cottage-type  residence  halls  which  are  available.  Further  in- 
formation may  be  obtained  from  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Marine  Laboratory. 

Food  Services 

Graduate  students  who  wish  to  eat  on  campus  may  participate  in  Duke  University 
Food  Services'  innovative  food  program.  The  meal  plan  allows  users  to  select  the  loca- 
tion, the  time,  and  the  type  of  food  service  they  desire.  At  the  desired  operation,  select 
from  the  offerings  at  that  location  and  present  your  Duke  card  for  payment. 

East  Court  Cafeteria  is  located  in  the  East  Campus  Union  Building,  and  the  Blue  &  White 
Cafeteria  is  located  in  the  West  Campus  Union  Building.  These  cafeterias  afford  customers 
the  opportunity  of  paying  a  predetermined  price  and  eating  as  much  as  they  like.  Each 
cafeteria  offers  a  selection  of  six  or  seven  entrees,  a  choice  of  vegetables,  a  salad  bar,  a  pasta 
bar,  yogurt  bars,  a  dessert  bar,  and  self-service  ice  cream. 

Trent  Cafeteria,  in  the  mall  on  the  lower  level  of  Trent  Drive  Hall,  offers  a  wide  a  la  carte 
selection,  ice  cream  fountain,  and  a  large  salad  bar. 

The  University  Room,  located  in  the  West  Campus  Union  Building  on  the  main  level, 
is  open  Monday  through  Friday  and  serves  breakfast,  lunch,  and  a  fine  selection  of  steaks, 
chops,  and  seafood  for  dinner. 

The  Rathskeller,  in  the  Bryan  Center,  offers  gourmet  burgers,  pasta,  broiled  chicken, 
Mexican  style  foods,  and  salads. 

The  Downunder,  located  in  the  lower  level  of  the  Gilbert -Addoms  Residence  Hall,  is 
open  evenings  and  has  a  wide  variety  of  fast  foods. 

212        Student  Life 


The  East  Campus  Dope  Shop  is  a  soda  fountain,  and  the  Pub  at  Central  serves  sandwiches 
and  drinks. 

The  Cambridge  Inn  has  big  burgers,  deli  sandwiches,  pizza  by  the  slice,  and  several 
brands  of  draft  beer.  The  Boyd-Pishko  Cafe  is  fast  food  right  in  the  middle  of  the  Bryan  Cen- 
ter. It  offers  breakfast  biscuits,  danish,  donuts,  and  beverages.  At  lunch  it  offers  burgers, 
hot  dogs,  chicken  filet  sandwiches,  ice  cream,  salads,  and  beverages. 

The  Magnolia  Room,  in  the  East  Campus  building,  is  open  each  evening,  Tuesday 
through  Friday.  Seating  is  by  reservation  only.  The  Oak  Room,  on  the  second  level  of  the 
West  Campus  Union  Building,  is  a  full-  service  restaurant  with  a  wide  variety  of  lunch- 
eon and  dinner  offerings. 

Arthur's,  located  in  the  Eden's  Quad  and  The  North  Central  Connection  at  Trent  Hall 
are  open  late  evening  to  provide  snack  and  ice  cream  fountain  service  for  each  of  these 
living  groups. 

Call  University  Catering  for  delivery  of  anything  from  coffee-break  fare  to  a  full  meal. 
Catering  arrangements  can  be  made  for  groups  or  special  occasions. 

For  more  information  on  the  meal  plan  and  to  open  an  account,  visit  the  Auxiliaries 
Contract  Card  Office.  It  is  located  on  the  lower  level  of  the  West  Campus  Union  Build- 
ing, Room  024. 

Services  Available 

Medical  Care.  The  goals  of  the  Duke  Student  Health  Program  are  to  provide  com- 
prehensive high  quality  medical  care;  to  encourage  students  to  make  informed  decisions 
leading  to  healthy  lifestyles;  and  to  act  as  a  liaison  when  students  need  medical  care  not 
available  at  Student  Health. 

The  components  of  the  Student  Health  Program  include: 

1.  The  Student  Health  Clinic,  located  at  the  Pickens  Health  Center. 

2.  The  University  Infirmary,  located  on  the  fourth  floor  of  Duke  Hospital,  South  Di- 
vision. 

3.  The  Sports  Injury  Treatment  and  Prevention  Clinic,  located  in  the  basement  of  Card 
Gym. 

4.  The  Health  Education  Program,  headquartered  in  the  Pickens  Health  Center  and 
operating  campus-wide. 

The  Student  Health  Clinic  at  Pickens  is  open  during  both  regular  and  summer  ses- 
sions, and  provides  outpatient  medical  care  for  a  broad  range  of  primary  care  services, 
comparable  to  those  available  in  a  large  family  practice.  The  Infirmary,  which  provides 
for  recuperative  care  requiring  bed  rest,  is  open  twenty-four  hours  a  day  from  the  start 
of  fall  semester  through  the  fall  final  exams  period,  and  from  the  start  of  spring  semester 
through  spring  graduation  day.  All  currently  enrolled  full-time  students  are  required  to 
pay  the  Student  Health  fee  which  covers  most  services  offered  within  the  Pickens  Health 
Center,  at  the  Infirmary,  at  the  Sports  Injury  Treatment  and  Prevention  Clinic,  and  through 
Counseling  and  Psychological  Services  (CAPS).  Information  regarding  this  fee  is  avail- 
able from  the  University  Bursar.  More  information  on  covered  services  is  available  in  the 
Student  Health  Program  and  CAPS  brochures. 

In  addition  to  the  Student  Health  Program,  the  resources  of  other  services  within  the 
Duke  University  Medical  Center  are  available  to  all  Duke  students  and  their  spouses  and 
children;  however,  charges  for  any  and  all  services  received  from  the  Medical  Center  other 
than  those  covered  by  the  Student  Health  fee  are  the  responsibility  of  the  student,  as  are 
the  charges  for  service  received  from  physicians  not  associated  with  Duke  University.  The 
Student  Health  fee  does  not  cover  the  cost  of  health  care  for  spouses  and  dependent  chil- 
dren of  married  students.  Coverage  of  the  married  student's  family  can  be  provided 
through  the  University's  Student  Accident  and  Sickness  Insurance  Plan  for  an  additional 
fee,  and  clinical  services  for  family  members  can  be  provided  by  Pickens  Health  Center. 


Services  Available        213 


214         Student  Life 


The  University  has  made  arrangements  for  a  Student  Accident  and  Sickness  Insur- 
ance Plan  to  cover  all  full-time  students  for  a  twelve-month  period.  For  additional  fees 
a  student  may  obtain  coverage  for  a  spouse  and  a  child.  Although  participation  in  this 
program  is  voluntary,  the  University  requires  all  graduate  students  to  be  financially 
responsible  for  medical  expenses  above  those  covered  by  the  University  Student  Health 
Program  through  the  University  Accident  and  Sickness  Policy,  a  private  policy,  or  per- 
sonal financial  resources.  Students  who  have  equivalent  medical  insurance  or  wish  to 
accept  the  financial  responsibility  for  any  medical  expense  may  elect  not  to  take  the  Duke 
plan  by  signing  a  statement  to  this  effect.  Each  full-time  student  in  residence  during  the 
fall  and  spring  must  purchase  this  student  health  insurance  or  indicate  the  alternative 
arrangement.  The  Student  Accident  and  Sickness  Insurance  Policy  provides  protection 
twenty-four  hours  a  day  during  the  full  twelve-month  term  of  the  policy  for  each  student 
insured.  Students  are  covered  on  and  off  campus,  at  home,  while  traveling  between  home 
and  school,  and  during  interim  vacation  periods.  The  term  of  the  policy  begins  on  the 
opening  day  of  school  in  the  fall.  Coverage  and  services  are  subject  to  change  each  year 
as  deemed  necessary  by  the  University. 

All  full-time  students  are  enrolled  in  and  charged  for  the  Student  Accident  and  In- 
surance Policy  unless  they  submit  properly  completed  and  signed  waivers  by  the  pub- 
lished due  date.  All  foreign  students  are  required  to  enroll  in  the  University  insurance 
plan  or  complete  the  waiver  listing  the  policy  number  and  name  of  the  insurance  com- 
pany providing  their  comparable  coverage.  Full  payment  for  student  insurance  is  due  at 
the  beginning  of  the  term  (insurance  may  not  be  paid  via  payroll  deduction).  More  in- 
formation on  student  insurance  can  be  obtained  through  the  office  of  the  Dean  of  Stu- 
dent Life,  or  by  contacting  the  Student  Health  Education  Program  at  684-6721. 

Counseling  and  Psychological  Services.  Counseling  and  Psychological  Services 
(CAPS)  is  a  component  of  student  services  which  provides  a  comprehensive  range  of 
counseling  and  developmental  services  to  assist  and  promote  the  personal  growth  of  Duke 
students. 

The  professional  staff  is  composed  of  psychologists,  clinical  social  workers,  and  psy- 
chiatrists experienced  in  working  with  young  adults.  They  provide  direct  services  to  stu- 
dents including  evaluation  and  brief  counseling/psychotherapy  regarding  a  wide  range 
of  concerns.  These  include  issues  of  self-esteem  and  identity,  family  relationships,  aca- 
demic performance,  dating,  intimacy,  and  sexual  concerns.  Ordinarily  students  are  seen 
for  counseling  by  appointment.  If  your  concern  requires  immediate  attention,  a  CAPS 
staff  member  will  assist  you  with  the  emergency  at  the  earliest  possible  time. 

Each  year  CAPS  offers  a  series  of  self-development  seminars  and  support  groups. 
These  explore  such  interests  as  stress  management,  career  planning,  and  management 
of  eating  disorders.  A  special  support  group  for  graduate  and  professional  school  wom- 
en is  offered  most  semesters.  Interested  students  may  contact  CAPS  for  further  infor- 
mation. 

CAPS  is  Duke's  center  for  the  administration  of  national  testing  programs.  Among 
the  number  of  tests  offered  is  the  Graduate  School  Foreign  Language  Test  (GSFLT). 

Another  function  of  CAPS  is  to  provide  consultation  regarding  student  development 
and  mental  health  issues  affecting  not  only  individual  students  but  the  campus  commu- 
nity as  a  whole.  The  staff  works  with  campus  personnel  including  administrators,  faculty, 
student  health  staff,  and  student  groups  in  meeting  needs  identified  through  such  liai- 
sons. Staff  members  are  available  to  lead  workshops  and  discussion  groups  on  topics  of 
interest  to  students. 

CAPS  carefully  adheres  to  professional  standards  of  ethics  and  confidentiality.  If  a 
student  wants  information  concerning  his/her  contact  with  the  CAPS  staff  released, 
he/she  must  sign  a  specific  written  authorization. 

Initial  evaluation  and  brief  counseling/ therapy,  as  well  as  career  and  self -development 
seminars,  are  covered  by  the  student  health  fee.  There  are  no  additional  costs  for  these 


Services  Available        215 


services.  If  appropriate,  referral  may  be  made  to  other  staff  members  or  to  a  wide  variety 
of  local  resources. 

Appointments  may  be  made  by  calling  684-5100  between  8:00  A.M.  and  5:00  P.M.,  Mon- 
day through  Friday.  If  a  student's  concern  needs  immediate  attention,  that  should  be  made 
known  to  the  secretary  and  every  effort  will  be  made  to  arrange  for  the  student  to  talk  with 
a  staff  member  at  the  earliest  possible  time. 

Office  of  Placement  Services.  Duke  University  maintains  an  Office  of  Placement  Serv- 
ices which  acts  as  a  liaison  between  the  University  and  potential  employers  in  business 
and  industry,  education,  and  government.  The  office  is  located  in  214  and  309  Flowers 
Building. 

The  staff  is  available  to  talk  with  graduate  students  about  their  future  professional 
plans.  Students  who  are  eligible  to  register  with  the  office  are  offered  an  opportunity  to 
assemble  a  complete  dossier  of  academic  records  and  recommendations  to  support  ap- 
plications for  permanent  positions  and  to  have  a  permanent  file  for  future  reference.  Per- 
tinent recommendations  should  be  accumulated  while  the  student  is  enrolled  at  Duke. 
Interviews  with  representatives  visiting  Duke  are  scheduled  during  the  academic  year 
for  students  registered  with  the  Office  of  Placement  Services. 

All  services  are  offered  without  charge  to  Duke  students  and  alumni. 

Student  Affairs 

Cocurricular  Activities.  Graduate  students  at  Duke  University  are  welcome  to  use 
such  University  recreational  facilities  as  swimming  pools,  tennis  courts,  the  golf  course, 
and  to  affiliate  with  the  choral,  dance,  drama,  music,  and  religious  groups.  They  may  be- 
come junior  members  of  the  American  Association  of  University  Professors  and  may  af- 
filiate with  Phi  Beta  Kappa  and  social  fraternities. 

A  full  program  of  cultural,  recreational,  and  religious  activities  is  presented  by  the 
Office  of  Cultural  Affairs,  the  Duke  University  Campus  Ministry,  the  Duke  University 
Union,  the  Office  of  Student  Activities,  and  recreational  clubs.  The  Duke  University  Union 
sponsors  a  wide  range  of  programs  through  its  committees,  which  are  open  to  all  seg- 
ments of  the  campus  community.  Included  are  touring  Broadway  shows;  rock,  jazz,  and 
pop  concerts;  speakers;  films;  a  film-making  program;  the  largest  fully  student-run  tel- 
evision station  in  the  country;  art  exhibits  in  three  galleries;  and  a  broad  program  in  crafts 
located  in  Southgate  Dormitory  and  the  Bryan  University  Center.  The  Aquatic  Center  and 
the  East  Campus  Gymnasium  pool  are  available  to  students,  faculty,  and  staff  families. 
The  handball,  racquetball,  squash,  and  tennis  facilities  and  the  weight  room  on  East  and 
West  Campus  are  also  available.  Interested  students  may  participate  in  Softball  and  oth- 
er team  sports. 

The  University  Center  complex  includes  the  Bryan  University  Center,  which  houses 
the  Information  Center,  two  drama  theaters,  a  film  theater,  lounges,  stores,  meeting  rooms, 
games  room,  the  Rathskeller,  art  gallery,  and  other  facilities;  the  West  Union,  which  in- 
cludes dining  facilities;  and  Flowers  Building,  which  includes  student  publications,  Page 
Auditorium,  and  the  University  box  office. 

Inquiries  should  be  directed  to  the  Recreation  Office,  105  Card  Gymnasium;  the  Of- 
fice of  Cultural  Affairs,  109  Page  Building;  Duke  Chapel;  the  Duke  University  Union, 
Bryan  University  Center;  or  the  Office  of  Student  Activities,  Bryan  University  Center. 

Full  information  regarding  the  scheduling  of  major  events  and  programs  for  the  en- 
tire year  will  be  found  in  the  Duke  University  Yearly  Calendar;  detailed  and  updated  in- 
formation for  the  fall  and  spring  semesters  in  the  Duke  Dialogue,  available  each  Friday; 
updated  information  for  the  summer  session  in  the  Summer  Session  Calendar,  published 
at  the  beginning  of  each  summer  term;  and  the  Duke  Ch  ronicle,  published  each  Monday 
through  Friday  during  the  fall  and  spring  and  each  Thursday  during  the  summer.  Co- 
pies of  the  Duke  University  calendars  may  be  obtained  at  the  information  desk,  Bryan 
University  Center,  or  the  calendar  office,  Page  Building.  Also  during  the  summer,  the 

216        Student  Life 


Summer  Session  Calendar  is  published  weekly  by  the  summer  session  office  and  is  availa- 
ble at  convenient  locations. 

Graduate  and  Professional  Student  Council.  The  Graduate  and  Professional  Stu- 
dent Council  is  the  representative  body  for  the  students  of  graduate  departments  and 
professional  schools.  The  council  provides  a  means  of  communication  between  schools 
and  between  graduate  students  and  the  administration.  The  council  selects  graduate  stu- 
dents for  membership  on  University  committees.  Representatives  of  each  department 
and  officers  of  the  council  are  selected  annually. 

Religious  Life.  The  Duke  University  Chapel,  open  from  8:00  A.M.  until  10:00  P.M.,  pro- 
vides a  magnificent  setting  for  daily  prayer  and  meditation .  In  addition,  a  variety  of  wor- 
ship experiences  are  provided  throughout  the  week  including  the  University  service  of 
worship  at  11:00  A.M.  each  Sunday,  noonday  prayer  each  weekday  during  term,  and  Cho- 
ral Vespers  each  Thursday  at  5: 15  P.M.  The  150-voice  Chapel  Choir  is  open  by  audition  to 
all  interested  singers.  The  Graduate  and  Professional  Student  Fellowship,  sponsored  by 
Duke  Chapel,  provides  ecumenical  fellowship  as  well  as  service  opportunities  for  interest- 
ed students.  Duke  Campus  Ministry  also  invites  graduate  students  to  participate  in  the 
various  religious  life  groups.  Contact  the  office  of  Minister  or  Associate  Minister  to  the 
University,  Duke  Chapel,  for  further  details. 

Visiting  Scholars 

The  libraries  and  other  facilities  of  Duke  University  are  made  available,  to  the  extent 
practicable,  to  faculty  members  of  other  colleges  and  universities  who  wish  to  pursue  their 
scholarly  interests  on  the  Duke  campus.  Such  visitors  are  not  charged  unless  they  wish 
to  participate  in  activities  for  which  a  special  fee  is  assessed.  Inquiries  pertaining  to  visiting 
scholars  should  be  addressed  to  the  department  chairman  concerned  or  the  Dean  of  the 
Graduate  School. 

Postdoctoral  Research 

Scholars  engaged  in  postdoctoral  research  often  find  it  advantageous  to  use  the 
resources  of  Duke  University  during  the  summer.  The  University  welcomes  these  visi- 
tors and  makes  living  accommodations  available  to  them  during  the  summer  sessions 
from  May  9  to  August  8.  Persons  desiring  research  privileges  (library  and/or  laboratory) 
should  request  approval  through  the  department  in  which  the  research  interests  lie  or 
through  the  Graduate  School. 


Postdoctoral  Research         217 


Index 


Academic  Regulations,  47 

Academic  and  Cooperative  Programs,  22 

Administration,  5 

Executive  Committee  of  the  Graduate 
Faculty,  6 
Admission,  26 

Application  Fee,  27 

Application  Deadlines,  31 

Continuing  Education,  30 

Examinations  for,  29 

Foreign  Students,  Procedures  for,  29 

Nondegree,  27 

Notification  of  Status,  30 

Prerequisites,  General,  27 

Procedures,  27 

Summer  Session,  29,  30,  31 
Aging  and  Human  Development,  Center  for  the 

Study  of,  191 
Anatomy,  see  Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy 
Anthropology,  see  Biological  Anthropology  and 
Anatomy,  and  Cultural  Anthropology 
Application  Procedures,  see  Admission 
Archaeology,  see  Classical  Studies 
Art  and  Art  History,  59 
Asian  Languages,  61 
Asian-Pacific  Studies  Institute,  191 
Assistantships:  Graduate,  Part-time  Instruction, 

Research,  39 
Audit  Fee,  35 
Biochemistry,  62 

Biological  Anthropology  and  Anatomy,  63 
Botany,  65 

Laboratories,  201 

Organization  for  Tropical  Studies,  197 
Biochemical  Engineering,  93 

Center  for,  191 
Biomedical  Engineering,  94 
Business  Administration,  69 
Calendar,  4,  31 

Canadian  Studies  ProgTam,  192 
Cell  and  Molecular  Biology,  University  Program 

in,  71 
Cell  Biology,  72 
Chemistry,  76 

Laboratories,  204 
Civil  and  Environmental  Engineering,  97 
Classical  Studies,  78 
Cocurricular  Activities,  216 
Commencement,  54 
Computation  Center,  201 
Computer  Science,  81 
Conduct,  Standards  of,  54 
Continuing  Education,  27,  30 
Counseling  and  Psychological  Services,  215 
Course  Load,  43 

See  also  Residence  Requirements,  Courses  of 
Instruction  (departmental  and  subject 
listings) 
Credit,  Graduate,  47 

See  also  Doctor  of  Philosophy  and  Master's 
Degrees  (all),  Time  Limits 
Cultural  Anthropology,  85 
Deadlines 

Application,  31 


Dissertation,  53,  54 

Intention  to  Graduate,  51 

Passing  Preliminary  Examination,  53 

Thesis,  50 
Degree  Requirements,  see  Individual  Degree  listings 
Degrees  Offered,  23 
Demographic  Studies,  Center  for,  192 
Developed  Shorelines,  Program  for  the  Study  of, 

193 
Dissertation,  see  Relevant  Doctoral  Degree 
Dissertation  Expenses,  35 
Doctor  of  Philosophy  Degree,  52 

Committee,  Supervisory,  52 

Credit,  47 

Deposit  of  Dissertation,  54 

Dissertation,  53 

Examinations,  Final,  54;  Preliminary,  53 

Fees,  Dissertation,  35 

Foreign  Language  Requirement,  52 

Major  and  Related  Work,  52 

Residence  Requirements,  52 

Time  Limits,  53 

Transfer  of  Credit,  47 
Duke  Forest,  202 
Economics,  87 
Education,  92 
Electrical  Engineering,  102 
Engineering,  93 

Biochemical,  93 

Biomedical,  94 

Civil  and  Environmental,  97 

Electrical,  102 

Laboratories,  206 

Mechanical  and  Materials  Science,  106 
English,  110 

as  a  second  language,  49 
Entrance  Tests 

English  Tests  for  Foreign  Students,  29 

Graduate  Record  Examination,  29 
Faculty,  6 
Fees 

Athletic,  35 

Audit,  35 

Binding,  35,  54 

Copyright,  35,  54 

Health  Fee,  36 

Housing,  36 

Late  Registration,  33 

Marine  Lab,  35 

Microfilming,  35,  54 

Motor  Vehicle  Registration,  35 

Thesis  or  Dissertation,  35 

Transcript,  35 

Undergraduate  Courses,  35 
Fellowships  and  Scholarships 

Application  Procedures,  37 

Departmental,  38 

Endowed,  37 

Federal,  38 

Graduate  Fellowships,  38 

Graduate  Scholarships,  39 

James  B.  Duke,  37 

Andrew  W.  Mellon,  37 

Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies,  38 


218 


Payment  of  Awards,  40 

Special  Fellowships,  38 
See  also  Financial  Information,  Special  Fellowships, 

and  Student  Aid 
Financial  Information,  32 
Food  Services 

Descriptions  of  Facilities,  212 

Estimated  Costs,  36 
Foreign  Language  Examination,  52 

Waiver  of,  50 
Foreign  Students,  29 
Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies,  113 
Forestry  Sciences  Laboratories,  203 
French,  see  Romance  Languages 
Genetics,  University  Program  in,  119 
Geology,  121 

Germanic  Languages  and  Literature,  123 
Grades,  47,  48 

Graduate  and  Professional  Student  Council,  217 
Graduate  Record  Examination,  29 
Graduate  School  Foreign  Language  Test,  49 
Greek,  see  Classical  Studies 
Health  Administration,  124 
Health  Program  for  Students,  213 
Highlands  Biological  Station,  202 
Hindi-Urdu,  see  Asian  Languages 
History,  126 
Housing,  211 

Humanities,  Master  of  Arts  Program  in,  130 
Hypo-Hyperbaric  Center,  FG.  Hall,  207 
Identification  Cards,  48 

Immunology,  see  Microbiology  and  Immunology 
Instructional  Staff,  6 

Emeriti  Professors,  18 

See  also  Courses  of  Instruction 
Insurance,  213 

Islamic  and  Arabian  Development  Studies,  193 
Italian,  see  Romance  Languages 
Judicial  Code,  55 
Laboratories,  201 
Language  Requirements,  49,  50 
Latin,  see  Classical  Studies 
Latin  American  Studies  Program,  193 
Leave  of  Absence,  49 

Liberal  Studies,  Master  of  Arts  Program,  23,  29,  130 
Libraries,  199 

Literature,  Ph.D.  Program  in,  23,  131 
Living  Accommodations 

Application  Procedure,  212 

Cost  of,  36 

Description  of,  211 
Loans,  40;  see  also  Financial  Information 
Marine  Laboratory,  203;  see  also  Botany,  Chemistry, 
Zoology,  and  Marine  Sciences,  the 
University  Program 
Marine  Sciences,  University  Program  in,  132 
Master  of  Arts  Degree,  49 

Examining  Committee  and  Examination,  50 

Filing  Intention  to  Graduate,  51 

Language  Requirements,  50 

Major  and  Related  Subject  Requirements,  50 

Nonthesis  Option  for  Completion  of  Program, 
51 

Prerequisites,  49 

Time  Limits,  52 

Thesis,  50 


Transfer  of  Credits,  51 
Master  of  Health  Administration  Degree,  23,  51 

Prerequisites,  51 

Major  Subjects,  51 
Master  of  Science  Degree,  50 

Language  Requirement,  50 

Major  and  Related  Subjects,  50 

Prerequisites,  50 

Thesis  and  Examination,  51 
Mathematics,  135 

Mechanical  Engineering  and  Materials  Science,  106 
Medical  Care,  213 
Medical  Center,  208 

Medical  Historian  Training  Program,  195 
Medical  Scientist  Training  Program,  195 
Medieval  and  Renaissance  Studies,  Program  in,  139 
Microbiology  and  Immunology,  140 
Motor  Vehicle  Registration,  35 
Music,  143 
Neurobiology,  145 
Nondegree  Admission,  27,  30 
Oak  Ridge  Associated  Universities,  196 
Part-Time  Graduate  Study,  29 
Pathology,  146 
Pharmacology,  148 
Philosophy,  150 
Physical  Therapy,  152 
Physics,  154 

Laboratories,  206 
Physiology,  division  of,  see  Cell  Biology 
Phytotron,  202 
Placement  Services,  216 
Polish,  see  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 
Political  Science,  156 
Postdoctoral  Research,  217 
Primate  Center,  203 
Program  Information,  23 
Psychology,  162 

Laboratories,  204 
Public  Policy  Studies,  166 

Reciprocal  Agreements  with  Neighboring  Universi- 
ties, 48 
Refunds 

Summer  Session,  34 

Tuition,  34 
Registration,  42 

Change  of,  43 

Fall,  43 

Late,  43 

Periods,  43 

Summer  Session,  44 
Related  Subjects,  see  Relevant  Degree  Program 
Religion,  169 
Religious  Life,  217 
Research  Support,  Office  of,  196 
Residence  Requirements 

Academic  Regulations,  53 

See  also  Course  Load 
Resource  and  Environmental  Policy  Research, 

Center  for,  196 
Romance  Languages,  178 
Russian,  see  Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures 
Russian  and  East  European  Studies,  Cooperative 

Program  in,  192 
Satisfactory  Progress,  37 


219 


Scholarships,  see  Fellowships  and  Scholarships,  and 

Student  Aid 
Slavic  Languages  and  Literatures,  181 
Sociology,  181 

Spanish,  see  Romance  Languages 
Special  Fellowships,  38 

See  also  Fellowships  and  Scholarships 
Standards  of  Conduct,  54 
Student  Affairs,  216 
Student  Aid 

Assistantships,  39 

Fellowships  and  Scholarships,  37 

Loans,  40 

Payment  of  Awards,  40 

Summer  Session,  41 

Work-Study  Program  Employment,  40 
Summer  Session 

Admission,  29,  31 

Credit,  47 

Financial  Aid,  40 

Refunds,  34 

Registration,  44 

Tuition  and  Fees,  33 
Thesis 

Expenses,  36 

See  also  Relevant  Master's  Degree 
Toxicology,  University  Program  in,  184 
Transfer  of  Graduate  Credit,  47,  51 
Tropical  Studies,  Organization  for,  197 
Tuition,  33 

Benefits  for  Employees,  34 
Transcript  Fee,  35 
Undergraduates 

Courses  Primarily  for,  48 

Duke  Students,  Graduate  Credit  for,  47 
Visiting  Scholars,  217 
Vivarium,  203 

Withdrawal  or  Interruption  of  Program,  48 
Women's  Studies,  185 
Women's  Studies  Research  Center,  197 
Work-Study  Program,  40 
Zoology,  186 

Laboratories,  201 

Organization  for  Tropical  Studies,  197 
Zoology  Field  Station,  203 


220 


o  o 

C   e 
ro  -  • 

My 


n  o 


-a 
O 
en 

H 

> 

H 

Q.   O     ^ 
c    ro    w 

1 8.3 
*  s»  & 

3"  3    si 
— -  rD 


3 


C 

— 
in 

n£ 
o 

<3> 


— 


e 

7- 
fD 

C 

3 
<' 


bulletin  of 

Duke  University  1989 


Marine  Laboratory 


bulletin  of 

Duke  Univereity  1989 

Marine  Laboratory 


EDITOR 

Judy  Smith 

SENIOR  EDITORIAL  ASSISTANT 

Elizabeth  Matheson 

STAFF  SPECIALIST 

Lilian  I.  Lorenzsonn-Willis 

PHOTOGRAPHS 

Scott  D.  Taylor 
COVER  DESIGN 

ludv  Smith 
COVER  PHOTO 
Scott  D.  Taylor 


Typesetting  by  Paste-Ups  Limited,  Research  Triangle  Park,  North  Carolina 
Printed  by  PBM  Graphics,  Research  Triangle  Park,  North  Carolina 

The  information  in  this  bulletin  applies  to  the  calendar  year  1989  and  is  accurate  and  current,  to  the  extent 
possible,  as  of  August  1988.  The  University  reserves  the  right  to  change  programs  of  study,  academic  require- 
ments, teaching  staff,  the  calendar,  and  other  matters  described  herein  without  prior  notice,  in  accordance  with 
established  procedures. 

Duke  University  does  not  discriminate  on  the  basis  of  age,  race,  color,  national  and  ethnic  origin,  sex,  or 
handicap,  in  the  administration  of  educational  policies,  admission  policies,  financial  aid,  employment,  or  any 
other  University  program  or  activity.  It  admits  qualified  students  to  all  the  rights,  privileges,  programs,  and  ac- 
tivities generallv  accorded  or  made  available  to  students.  For  further  information,  contact  Dolores  L.  Burke, 
Equal  Opportunity  Officer  (919)  684-8111. 


Volume  61  September  1988  Number  IB 

The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University  (USPS  073-680)  is  published  by  Duke  University,  Duke  Station,  Durham,  North 
Carolina  27706  as  follows:  monthly— May;  semimonthlv—  March,  April,  June,  and  August;  thrice-monthly,  Sep- 
tember. Second-class  postage  paid  at  Durham,  North  Carolina. 


Contents 


University  Administration 

4 

Administration  of  the  Marine  Laboratory 

4 

Advisory  Committee 

4 

Advisory  Board 

4 

Academic  Staff 

5 

Scientific  Staff 

5 

Technical  Support  Staff 

5 

Support  Staff 

5 

General  Information 

8 

The  Beaufort  Setting 

9 

The  Natural  Resources  for  Study  and  Research 

9 

The  Marine  Laboratory 

9 

The  Beaufort  Experience 

11 

Academic  Programs 

12 

Marine  Laboratory  Academic  Calendar 

13 

Spring  Semester— Undergraduate  Marine 

Sciences  Program 

14 

Cooperative  Undergraduate  Program  in  the 

Marine  Sciences 

15 

First  Summer  Term 

15 

Second  Summer  Term 

16 

Third  Summer  Term 

17 

Fall  Semester— Undergraduate  Marine 

Sciences  Program 

17 

Graduate  Program 

18 

Marine  Sciences  Education  Consortium  (MSEC) 

19 

Visiting  Scholar  Programs 

19 

Requirements  and  Procedures 

19 

Financial  Information 

21 

Financial  Assistance 

24 

Resources  for  Study  and  Research 

26 

Research  Staff  and  Their  Programs 

27 

Research  Facilities 

34 

Financial  Information 

35 

Application  Forms  37 


University  Administration 

H.  Keith  H.  Brodie,  M.D.,  LL.D.,  President 

Phillip  A.  Griffiths,  Ph.D.,  Provost 

Eugene  J.  McDonald,  LL.M.,  Executive  Vice-President 

William  G.  Anlyan,  M.D,  D.Sc.,  Chancellor 

Joel  L.  Fleishman,  LL.M.,  Vice-President 

J.  Peyton  Fuller,  A.B.,  Vice-President,  Planning  and  Treasurer 

William  J.  Griffith,  A.B.,  Vice-President  for  Student  Affairs 

John  J.  Piva,  Jr.,  B.A.,  Vice-President  for  Alumni  Affairs  and  Development 

Patricia  C.  Skarulis,  M.A.,  Vice-President  for  Information  Systems 

Andrew  G.  Wallace,  M.D,  Vice-President  for  Health  Affairs 

John  F.  Adcock,  M.B.A.,  Corporate  Controller 

Tom  A.  Butters,  B.A.,  Vice-President  and  Director  of  Athletics 

N.  Allison  Haltom,  A.B.,  Secretary  of  the  University 

Administration  of  the  Marine  Laboratory 

*  John  D.  Costlow,  Director 

t  Joseph  S.  Ramus,  Acting  Director  and  Assistant  Director  for  Academic  Programs 

Joseph  Bonaventura  and  Celia  Bonaventura,  Assistant  Directors  for  Marine  Biomedical  Programs 

Dianne  R.  Gagnon,  Business  Manager 

Advisory  Committee 


Josephs.  Ramus,  Acting  Director,  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  and  Professor  of  Botany,  Chairman  of  the  Committee 

Bruce  H.  Corliss,  Associate  Professor  of  Geology 

Alvin  L.  Crumbliss,  Professor  of  Chemistry 

Richard  T.  Di  Giulio,  Assistant  Professor  of  Ecotoxicology 

David  R.  McClay,  Professor  of  Zoology  and  Immunology 

Richard  B.  Searles,  Professor  of  Botany 

Edward  J.  Shaughnessy,  Jr.,  Professor  of  Mechanical  Engineering 

Robert  E.  Webster,  Professor  of  Biochemistry 

Ex-officio 

Margaret  R.  Bates,  Vice-Provost  for  Academic  Programs  and  Facilities 

S.  Malcolm  Gillis,  Vice-Proi'ost  for  Academic  Affairs  and  Dean  of  the  Graduate  School 

Charles  E.  Putnam,  Vice-Provost  for  Research  and  Development 

Richard  A.  White,  Dean  of  Arts  and  Sciences,  Dean  of  Trinity  College  and  Professor  of  Botany 


Advisory  Board 


Richard  C.  Seale,  Washington,  North  Carolina,  Cochairman  of  the  Board 

W.  Mason  Shehan,  Coral  Gables,  Florida,  Cochairman  of  the  Board 

David  M.  Barringer,  Atlantic  Beach,  North  Carolina 

Charles  F.  Blanchard,  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Michael  P.  Bradley,  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 

Robert  W.  Carr,  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Arthur  W.  Clark,  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Nelson  B.  Crisp,  Greenville,  North  Carolina 

C.  Howard  Hardesty,  Jr.,  McDaniel,  Maryland 

Watts  Hill,  Jr.,  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina 

A.  Smith  Holcomb,  Mt.  Airy,  North  Carolina 

Amos  R.  Reams,  Jr.,  High  Point,  North  Carolina 

A.  William  Kennon,  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Henry  O.  Lineberger,  Jr.,  M.D,  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Diane  L.  McCallister,  Chevy  Chase,  Maryland 

Anne  F.  McMahon,  Durham,  North  Carolina 

William  C.  Powell,  Burlington,  North  Carolina 

Robert  W.  San-it,  Jr.,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina 


*On  sabbatical  leave  1  January-31  December  1989. 
tActing  Director  1  January-31  August  1989. 


[Catherine  Goodman  Stern,  Greensboro,  North  Carolina 
Thomas  A.  Stokes,  Jr.,  M.D.,  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Norwood  A.  Thomas,  Jr.,  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Charles  Byrd  Wade,  Jr.,  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 
Stephen  A.  Wainwright,  Ph.D.,  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Academic  Staff 

Celia  Bonaventura,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology.  Protein  structure  and  function. 

Joseph  Bonaventura,  Associate  Professor  of  Cell  Biology.  Protein  structure  and  function. 

C.  G.  Bookhout,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Zoology.  Marine  invertebrate  embryology  and  invertebrate  zoology. 

Marius  Brouwer,  Research  Assistant  Professor— Marine  Laboratory.  Protein  biochemistry. 
*  John  D.  Costlow,  Professor  of  Zoology.  Marine  invertebrate  embryology  and  experimental  zoology. 

Richard  B.  Forward,  Professor  of  Zoology  and  Director  of  Undergraduate  Student  Affairs,  Marine  Laboratory.  Physiology 
of  marine  animals. 

Donald  J.  Gerhart,  Research  Assistant  Professor— Marine  Laboratory.  Chemical  ecology. 

John  Gutknecht,  Professor  of  Cell  Biology.  Membrane  physiology. 

Paul  J.  Hearty,  Research  Assistant  Professor— Marine  Laboratory.  Geological  oceanography. 

Thomas  C.  Johnson,  Associate  Professor  of  Geology  and  Director  of  the  Duke/University  of  North  Carolina  Oceano- 
graphic  Consortium.  Geological  oceanography. 

William  W.  Kirby-Smith,  Research  Associate  Professor— Marine  Laboratory.  Marine  ecology, 
t  Orrin  H.  Pilkey,  Professor  of  Geology.  Geological  oceanography. 

Joseph  S.  Ramus,  Professor  of  Botany  and  Director  of  Graduate  Student  Affairs— Marine  Laboratory.  Algal  ecological 
physiology. 

Daniel  Rittschof,  Research  Assistant  Professor— Marine  Laboratory.  Chemical  ecology. 
:f  Richard  B.  Searles,  Professor  of  Botany.  Marine  phycology. 

J.  Boiling  Sullivan,  Associate  Professor  of  Biochemistry.  Comparative  and  evolutionary  biochemistry. 

John  P.  Sutherland,  Associate  Professor  of  Zoology.  Marine  ecology. 

Scientific  Staff 

Robert  E.  Cashon,  Research  Associate 
Anthony  S.  Clare,  Research  Associate 
William  J.  Henley,  Research  Associate 
Bruce  E.  Kenney,  Research  Associate 
Sonia  Ortega,  Research  Associate 

Technical  Support  Staff 

Theodora  Brouwer-Hoexum,  Senior  Research  Technician 

Gail  W.  Cannon,  Senior  Research  Technician 

Guilia  Ferruzzi,  Senior  Research  Technician 

Gerald  O.  Godette,  Senior  Research  Technician 

William  D.  Hunnings,  Jr.,  Senior  Electronics  Technician 

Mary  C.  Jones,  Research  Technician 

Jacqueline  P.  Ramus,  Research  Technician 

Alva  R.  Schmidt,  Senior  Research  Technician 

Shirley  E.  Tesh,  Senior  Research  Technician 

Suzanne  P.  Thompson,  Senior  Research  Technician 

Christopher  A.  Wellins,  Laboratory  Technician 


Support  Staff 


Cynthia  K.  Baldwin,  Manager,  Personnel  and  Auxiliaries 
Joanne  Beckwith,  Receptionist/Payroll  Clerk 
L.  Thomas  Morton,  Head  Cook 
Sylvester  Murray,  Assistant  Head  Cook 
Bettie  E.  Tyson,  Food  Service  Aide 


*  On  sabbatical  leave  1  January-31  December  1989. 
t  Spring  only. 
J  Summer  only. 


Norris  A.  Hill,  Manager,  Physical  Plant 

Clifton  W.  Davis,  Maintenance  Foreman 

Ellen  D.  Jones,  Staff  Assistant 

James  G.  Chadvvick,  Grounds  Maintenance  Mechanic 

Donald  Gagnon,  General  Maintenance  Mechanic,  Certified/Licensed 

Horace  R.  Holland,  General  Maintenance  Mechanic,  Senior 

Johnnie  Lupton,  General  Maintenance  Mechanic,  Senior 

Quentin  M.  Lewis,  Jr.,  Captain,  R/V  First  Mate 

Olive  C.  Godette,  Housekeeping  Supervisor 

Claudia  O.  Davis,  Housekeeper  Senior 

Eunice  T.  Godette,  Housekeeper 

Mildred  E.  Tyre,  Housekeeper 

Dianne  R.  Gagnon,  Business  Manager 
Patricia  M.  Nolin,  Staff  Specialist 
Susan  H.  Kenney,  Staff  Specialist 
Sophia  D.  Turnage,  Staff  Specialist 
Margaret  J.  Forward,  Artist  Illustrator 
Sue  Book,  Secretary,  Development 
Scott  D.  Taylor,  Photographer 

Mamre  M.  Wilson,  Staff  Assistant 
Helen  E.  Nearing,  Word  Processor 

Joseph  S.  Ramus,  Acting  Director  and  Assistant  Director  for  Academic  Programs 
Lilian  I.  Lorenzsonn-Willis,  Staff  Specialist 
William  D.  Hunnings,  Electronics  Technician  Senior 
Jean  S.  Williams,  Library  Associate 

Joseph  Bonaventura  and  Celia  Bonaventura,  Codirectors  of  the  Marine  Biomedical  Center 
Belinda  B.  Williford,  Administrative  Assistant 

Joseph  F.  Ustach,  Executive  Officer,  Duke/University  of  North  Camlina  Oceanographic  Consortium 

Eric  B.  Nelson,  Marine  Superintendent,  Duke/University  of  North  Carolina  Oceanographic  Consortium 

George  A.  Newton,  Assistant  Marine  Superintendent,  Duke/University  of  North  Carolina  Oceanographic  Consortium 

Dorothy  T.  Johnson,  Staff  Assistant 

Timothy  W.  Boynton,  Electronics  Technician  Senior 

David  L.  Bunting,  Draftsman  Senior 

Woody  Sutherland,  Computer  Technologist 

Richard  C.  Ogus,  Master,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 

Dale  H.  Murphy,  Chief  Mate,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 

Larry  N.  Morris,  Second  Mate,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 

Jay  Venger,  Bosun,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 

Lester  A.  Salter,  Ordinary  Seaman,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 

Curtis  A.  Oden,  Deck  Engineer,  R'V  Cape  Hatteras 

Orville  G.  Weeks,  Chief  Engineer,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 

Mitchell  Dixon,  Firsf  Assistant  Engineer,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 

Robert  Lipscomb,  Steward/Cook,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 

Byron  Boyer,  Cook/Messman,  R/V  Cape  Hatteras 


General  Information 


The  Beaufort  Setting 

The  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  is  situated  on  fifteen  acres  of  Pivers  Island, 
within  the  Outer  Banks  of  North  Carolina,  and  adjacent  to  the  historic  town  of  Beaufort. 
Beaufort  itself  is  the  third  oldest  town  in  the  state  and  is  surrounded  by  fishing  and  agricul- 
tural communities.  Cape  Lookout  National  Seashore  Park  and  the  Rachel  Carson  Estu- 
arine  Research  Reserve  are  located  within  easy  boating  distance  of  the  Marine  Labora- 
tory. From  the  Marine  Laboratory,  as  well  as  from  the  Beaufort  waterfront  and  its 
boardwalk,  one  can  often  see  feral  horses  grazing,  see  egrets  or  pelicans  flying  by,  or  just 
observe  the  beautiful  natural  scenery  in  its  entirety. 

The  Natural  Resources  for  Study  and  Research 

The  area's  system  of  barrier  islands,  sounds,  and  estuaries  is  well-known  for  its  rich 
flora  and  fauna,  and  diverse  habitats,  including  rivers,  creeks,  mud  flats,  unspoiled  sand 
beaches,  dunes,  marshes,  peat  bogs,  cypress  swamps,  bird  islands,  and  coastal  forests, 
making  the  area  an  excellent  haven  for  both  nature  lovers  and  those  interested  in  the  pur- 
suit of  marine  science.  The  area  lies  within  the  range  of  both  the  temperate  and  tropical 
species  of  biota .  The  edge  of  the  Gulf  Stream  oscillates  between  twenty  and  thirty  miles 
offshore,  with  occasional  reefs  in  between.  A  great  variety  of  phytoplankton,  seaweeds, 
seagrasses,  and  marshgrasses  may  be  found  in  the  area.  Common  animals  include  the 
blue  crab,  squid,  shrimps,  snails,  clams,  ctenophores,  jellyfish,  hydroids,  sponges,  poly- 
chaetes,  sea  urchins,  starfish,  brittle  stars,  sand  dollars,  skimmers,  terns,  gulls,  herons, 
sea  turtles,  porpoises,  and  many  species  of  fish.  All  provide  ample  opportunity  for  study 
and  research  and  are  readily  accessible  from  the  Marine  Laboratory  on  foot,  by  car,  or 
by  boat. 

The  Marine  Laboratory 

During  the  1930s,  Dr.  A.  S.  Pearse  and  colleagues  from  Duke  University  were  attracted 
to  the  site  of  Pivers  Island  and  its  surrounding  abundance  of  marine  life  for  their  sum- 
mer field  studies.  The  site  afforded  an  excellent  location  for  a  marine  facility  and  through 
the  subsequent  efforts  of  Dr.  Pearse  and  others,  the  land  was  acquired  for  the  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory.  Construction  began  and  by  1938  the  first  buildings  were 
erected.  Originally,  the  laboratory  served  only  as  a  summer  training  and  research  facility. 


The  Marine  Laboratory     9 


The  Marine  Laboratory  has  experienced  considerable  growth  since  1938,  and  today 
operates  year-round  to  provide  training  and  research  opportunities  to  about  3,000  per- 
sons annually,  including  undergraduate  and  graduate  students  enrolled  in  the  labora- 
tory's academic  programs,  visiting  student  groups  who  utilize  the  laboratory's  facilities, 
as  well  as  scientists  who  come  from  North  America  and  abroad  to  conduct  their  own  re- 
search. 

The  Marine  Laboratory  is  an  interdepartmental  training  and  research  facility  of  Duke 
University,  and  as  such  operates  under  the  policies,  procedures,  and  regulations  of  the 
University.  Each  resident  faculty  member  is  affiliated  with  a  department  of  the  Univer- 
sity. The  resident  faculty  represent  the  fields  of  biochemistry,  ecology,  developmental 
biology,  geology,  oceanography,  physiology,  and  systematics. 

Pivers  Island  is  only  150  yards  across  the  channel  from  Beaufort,  with  a  bridge  lead- 
ing to  U.S.  Highway  70,  making  the  island  readily  accessible  by  automobile.  Other  trans- 
portation to  the  laboratory  consists  of  bus  service  to  Morehead  City,  about  two  miles  dis- 
tant from  Beaufort  and  airline  service  to  regional  airports  (New  Bern,  Kinston,  or 
Jacksonville). 

The  modern  physical  plant  consists  of  twenty-three  buildings,  including  four  dor- 
mitories, a  large  dining  hall,  one  residence,  boathouse,  storehouse  for  ship's  gear,  class- 
room laboratories,  six  research  buildings,  and  a  maintenance  complex. 

On  the  Marine  Laboratory  campus  there  are  recreational  facilities  for  fishing,  swim- 
ming, rowing,  sailing,  shuffleboard,  basketball,  volleyball,  and  croquet.  There  are  also 
ample  opportunities  for  recreation  in  and  around  Beaufort.  The  Beaufort  area  is  well- 
known  for  its  moderate  climate,  tempered  by  the  Gulf  Stream. 

The  laboratory's  year-round  seminar/lecture  series  features  many  distinguished 
scientific  speakers  from  across  the  nation  and  abroad  who  help  to  acquaint  both  students 
and  fellow  researchers  with  the  latest  findings  in  their  respective  research  areas,  or  present 
other  lectures  of  a  more  general  nature.  Many  of  the  lectures  are  open  to  the  public  as 
well  as  to  personnel  from  surrounding  marine  facilities. 

The  Beaufort-Morehead  City  area  provides  location  for  five  other  facilities  which  col- 
lectively are  one  of  the  higher  concentrations  of  marine  scientists  in  the  nation.  These 
are  the  University  of  North  Carolina,  Institute  of  Marine  Sciences;  North  Carolina  State 
University,  Seafood  Laboratory;  State  of  North  Carolina,  Aquarium— Bogue  Banks;  State 
of  North  Carolina,  Division  of  Marine  Fisheries;  and  the  National  Oceanic  and  Atmos- 
pheric Administration,  National  Marine  Fisheries  Service,  Beaufort  Laboratory.  This  con- 
centration of  marine  scientists  provides  a  critical  mass  for  the  pursuit  of  science  and  edu- 
cation. 

THE  DUKE/UNIVERSITY  OF  NORTH  CAROLINA  OCEANOGRAPHIC 
CONSORTIUM 

The  Oceanographic  Consortium  operates  a  135-foot  oceanographic  research  vessel, 
the  R/V  Cape  Hatteras.  The  ship  operates  both  on  the  continental  shelf  and  in  the  deep 
sea  in  the  western  North  Atlantic,  concentrating  in  the  region  between  Nova  Scotia  and 
the  Caribbean.  The  ship  is  a  member  of  the  academic  research  fleet  supported  by  the 
National  Science  Foundation  for  the  purpose  of  providing  oceanographic  research  op- 
portunities to  investigators.  R/V  Cape  Hatteras  is  used  for  training  at  sea  by  the  five  univer- 
sities that  make  up  the  Oceanographic  Consortium  (Duke,  North  Carolina  State,  UNC- 
Chapel  Hill,  UNC-Wilmington,  and  East  Carolina).  The  consortium  also  manages  the 
acquisition  and  maintenance  of  oceanographic  instrumentation  used  aboard  R/V  Cape 
Hatteras,  and  promotes  annual  meetings  of  marine  science  staff  and  graduate  students 
from  member  institutions.  These  meetings  are  held  at  the  Duke  University  Marine 
Laboratory. 


10    General  Information 


THE  MARINE  BIOMEDICAL  CENTER 

The  National  Institute  of  Environmental  Health  Sciences  (NIEHS)  provides  support 
to  the  Duke  University  Marine  and  Freshwater  Biomedical  Sciences  Center  with  the  ob- 
jective of  promoting  research  in  the  marine  sciences  relevant  to  problems  of  environmental 
health.  The  research  goals  of  this  Duke  Center  are  to  gain  an  understanding  of  the 
mechanisms  involved  in  the  adaptation  of  man  and  other  organisms  to  an  environment 
that  is  both  hostile  and  continually  changing.  Emphasis  is  on  the  biochemical  and  bio- 
logical impact  of  organic  and  metallic  pollutants  and  the  use  of  marine  and  freshwater 
organisms  as  models. 

Studies  at  the  center  concern:  (1)  the  effects  of  chemical  pollutants  on  respiratory 
proteins  and  electron  transport  proteins;  (2)  the  effects  of  metal  and  nonmetal  pollutants 
on  larval  development  of  various  invertebrates;  (3)  pollutant  toxicology  using  blood  as 
a  model  organ;  (4)  behavioral  aspects  of  pollution  of  estuarine  and  marine  systems;  (5) 
the  role  of  metal  and  nonmetal  pollutants  in  processes  associated  with  animal,  plant, 
and  artificial  membrane  systems;  and  (6)  effects  of  heavy  metals  on  ion  transport 
phenomena  and  cellular  membrane  potentials.  Feasibility  studies  are  conducted  to  ex- 
plore the  advantages  of  various  experimental  approaches  and  to  encourage  innovative 
research. 


The  Beaufort  Experience 


The  Marine  Laboratory  is  an  academic  community  and  the  self-sufficient  nature  of 
its  residential  life  serves  well  those  who  come  here  to  study  or  to  conduct  research.  The 
academic  programs  are  limited  to  fifty  students  per  regular  academic  semester  or  sum- 
mer term  (spring,  summer,  or  fall),  making  for  small  group  learning.  Although  recrea- 
tional opportunities  are  ample,  the  distractions  are  limited,  allowing  both  student  and 
researcher  to  become  totally  involved  in  the  pursuit  of  marine  science.  Both  students  and 
researchers  alike  find  that  the  Marine  Laboratory  has  an  invitingly  open,  friendly,  and 
relaxed  atmosphere  which  draws  many  back  year  after  year.  This  community  feeling, 
as  well  as  the  potential  for  total  immersion,  has  become  part  of  what  has  been  termed 
"The  Beaufort  Experience." 


The  Beaufort  Experience    11 


Academic  Programs 


1989 

Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory 

Calendar 

PROGRAM  I   JAN  |  FEB  |  MAR  |  APR  |  MAY  |  JUN  |  JUL   |  AUG  |  SEP  |  OCT   |  NOV  |  DEC 


SPRING 

CUPMS1 

I 
en 
C 

1  » 

m 

sa 

III 
FALL 


(Jan.  12-May6)- 


(April3-May  13)- 


■—  (May  15-June  16)  - 


(June  19-July  21)  - 


(July  24-Aug.  25)  - 


(Aug.  28-Dec.  16) 


'Cooperative  Undergraduate  ProgTam  in  Marine  Science 


The  academic  programs  and  curricula  listed  herein  may  be  subject  to  change. 

Academic  Programs 

In  today's  competitive  world,  students  seek  education  not  only  for  self-enrichment, 
but  also  for  career  enhancement.  Marine  studies  can  fulfill  both  needs.  The  orderly  ex- 
ploitation of  the  earth's  remaining  frontier,  the  oceans,  not  only  requires  marine  scien- 
tists, but  increasingly  requires  legal,  business,  and  political  leaders  who  understand  the 
oceans.  Exploration  and  research  must  now  be  complemented  by  development,  regu- 
lation, and  litigation. 

Over  the  last  fifty  years,  more  than  4,000  students  from  over  300  schools  have  taken 
courses  at  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  (DUML).  Thousands  more  have  used 
our  laboratory  facilities  for  field  trips. 


Academic  Programs    13 


The  fall  and  spring  semester  programs  are  open  to  qualified  juniors  and  seniors  from 
any  college  or  university.  Before  attending  DUML  for  a  semester  program,  it  is  advised 
that  a  student  has  completed  the  following  introductory  college  courses:  mathematics, 
biology,  chemistry,  and  physics. 

In  our  three-term  summer  program,  the  wide  variety  of  courses  offer  choices  for  both 
science  and  nonscience  majors.  Some  courses  have  no  prerequisites  and  others  are  in- 
tended for  advanced  majors. 

Graduate  students  may  also  participate  in  the  fall,  spring,  or  summer  program.  The 
200-level  courses  are  intended  for  graduate/advanced  undergraduate  students. 

Our  Cooperative  Undergraduate  Program  in  the  Marine  Sciences  (CUPMS),  taught 
in  the  spring,  has  been  developed  specifically  for  students  whose  school  calendar  is  differ- 
ent from  that  of  Duke.  This  six-week  intensive  program  is  intended  for  science  students 
in  their  junior  or  senior  year. 

The  following  courses  fulfill  specific  requirements  for  Duke  degree  candidates  in  the 
majors  of  zoology  and  biology  (A.B.  and  B.S.): 

1.  Zoology  76L  (Fall)  Fulfills  animal  diversity  requirement 

2.  Zoology  176L  (Summer  I)  Fulfills  animal  diversity  requirement  and 

zoology  lab  requirement 

3.  Zoology  274L  (Summer  III)  Fulfills  animal  diversity  requirement  and 

zoology  lab  requirement 

4.  Zoology  150L  (Spring  and  Summer  I)     Fulfills  physiology  option  or  can  be  taken 

as  an  elective  if  ZOO  151L  has  already 
been  taken 

5.  Zoology  169L  (Fall)  Fulfills  ecology  option;  cannot  be  taken  if 

ZOO  103L  has  already  been  taken 

6.  Zoology  203L  (Summer  II)  Fulfills  ecology  option  or  can  be  taken  as 

an  elective  if  ZOO  103L  has  already  been 
taken 

All  other  100-  and  200-level  zoology  and  botany  courses  and  200-level  geology  courses 
count  as  electives  within  the  botany,  biology,  and  zoology  major. 

Spring  Semester — Undergraduate  Marine  Sciences  Program 

12  January-6  May  1989 

A  full  study  list  ordinarily  is  four  (4)  course  credits.  The  curriculum  consists  of  the 
courses  below. 

Biological  Oceanography.  (Botany  114L  or  Zoology  114L.)  Physical,  chemical,  and 
biological  processes  of  the  oceans,  emphasizing  special  adaptations  for  life  in  the  sea 
and  factors  controlling  distribution  and  abundance  of  organisms.  Laboratory  empha- 
sis. Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  One  course  (4  s.h.*).  Ramus 

Physiology  of  Marine  Animals.  (Zoology  150L.)  Environmental  factors,  biological 
rhythms,  and  behavioral  adaptations  in  the  comparative  physiology  of  marine  animals. 
(Fulfills  Duke  physiology  option,  or  can  be  taken  as  an  elective  if  Zoology  151L  has  al- 
ready been  taken.)  Prerequisites:  introductory  biology  and  chemistry.  One  course  (4  s.h.). 

Fonvard 

Beach  and  Island  Geological  Processes.  (Geology  196S.)  Processes  affecting  evolu- 
tion of  beaches  and  barrier  islands  with  emphasis  on  the  effect  of  construction .  Half  course 
(2  s.h.).  Pilkey 


*  Semester  Hour(s)  =  s.h. 
14    Academic  Programs 


The  Ecology  of  Chemical  Signals.  (Zoology  296S.)  Pheromone  communication, 
predator-prey  interactions,  chemical  warfare,  resource  location.  An  experimental  and 
mechanistic  study  of  chemically  mediated  behaviors  central  to  marine  ecology.  Half 
course  (2  s.h.).  Rittschof 

Experimental  Ecology  of  the  Marine  Intertidal  Zone.  (Zoology  296S. )  Reading  and 
discussion  of  papers  published  since  about  1960.  Half  course  (2  s.h.).  Sutherland 

Independent  Study.  (Botany  192,  Geology  192,  Geology  195,  or  Zoology  192.)  For 
seniors  and  juniors  with  consent  of  the  appropriate  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies 
and  the  supervising  instructor.  One  course  (3-4  s.h.).  Staff 

COOPERATIVE  UNDERGRADUATE  PROGRAM  IN  THE  MARINE  SCIENCES 

3  April-13  May  1989 

During  the  late  spring,  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  offers  an  intensive 
six-week  program  on  the  marine  environment  to  students  from  institutions  which  have 
no  marine  laboratory  facilities. 

Lectures  in  the  program  cover  the  physical,  chemical,  geological,  and  biological 
aspects  of  the  marine  environment  with  emphasis  on  the  ecology  of  marine  organisms. 
Numerous  field  trips  are  made  to  estuarine  and  near-shore  habitats  which  involve  en- 
vironmental measurements,  identification  of  plants  and  animals  collected,  and  discus- 
sion with  emphasis  on  morphological,  physiological,  and  ecological  adaptations  to  the 
particular  habitat.  Students  do  independent  research,  read  original  research  papers,  give 
oral  reports  on  relevant  topics,  and  submit  written  reports  on  laboratory  and  field  work. 

NOTE:  Summer  tuition  scholarships  available;  see  section  on  Financial  Assistance. 

First  Summer  Term 

15  May-16  June  1989 

Marine  Biology.  (Biology  10L.)  Physical  and  chemical  characteristics  of  marine 
ecosystems  and  the  functional  adaptations  of  marine  organisms  to  these  systems.  Lec- 
tures, field  trips,  and  laboratories.  For  students  not  majoring  in  a  natural  science.  One 
course  (4  s.h.).  Kenney 

Biological  Oceanography.  (Botany  114L  or  Zoology  114L.)  Physical,  chemical,  and 
biological  processes  of  the  oceans,  emphasizing  special  adaptations  for  life  in  the  sea 
and  factors  controlling  distribution  and  abundance  of  organisms.  Laboratory  empha- 
sis. Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  One  and  one-half  courses  (6  s.h.).  Staff 

Physiology  of  Marine  Animals.  (Zoology  150L  or  Zoology  250L. )  Environmental  fac- 
tors, biological  rhythms,  and  behavioral  adaptations  in  the  comparative  physiology  of 
marine  animals.  (Fulfills  Duke  physiology  option,  or  can  be  taken  as  an  elective  if  Zool- 
ogy 151L  has  already  been  taken.)  Prerequisites:  introductory  biology  and  chemistry. 
One  course  or  4  graduate  units  (4  s.h.).  Forward 

Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology.  (Zoology  176L.)  Structure,  functions,  and  develop- 
ment of  invertebrates  collected  from  estuarine  and  marine  habitats.  Not  open  to  students 
who  have  taken  Zoology  76L  or  274L.  (Fulfills  Duke  animal  diversity  requirement  and 
zoology  lab  requirement.)  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology.  One  and  one-half  courses 
(6  s.h.).  Kirby-Smith 

Independent  Study.  (Botany  191  or  Zoology  191 . )  For  senior  and  junior  majors  with 
permission  of  the  appropriate  director  of  undergraduate  studies  and  the  supervising  in- 
structor. Course  credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 


Spring  Semester— Undergraduate  Marine  Sciences  Program    15 


Research.  (Botany  359.)  Individual  investigation  in  the  various  fields  of  botany.  Credit 
to  be  arranged.  (For  graduate  students  only.)  Staff 

Research.  (Zoology  353.)  To  be  carried  on  under  the  direction  of  the  appropriate  staff 
members.  Hours  and  credit  to  be  arranged.  (For  graduate  students  only.)  Staff 

Second  Summer  Term 

19  June-21  July  1989 

Behavioral  Ecology.  (Zoology  113L  or  Zoology  213L)  How  ecological  factors  shape 
foraging,  mating,  aggressive,  and  social  behavior.  Laboratory  experiments  and  field  ob- 
servations from  the  Outer  Banks  environment.  Independent  projects  and  seminars.  Zo- 
ology 113L  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  Zoology  213L.  Prerequisite:  introduc- 
tory biology.  One  course  or  4  graduate  units  (4  s.h.).  Rubenstein  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

Biology  of  Marine  Macrophytes.  (Botany  116L  or  Botany  216L.)  Physiology  and  ecol- 
ogy of  seaweeds,  seagrasses,  marshgrasses,  and  mangroves.  Biological  flux  of  carbon 
and  nutrients  in  coastal  seas.  Ecological  consequences  of  photosynthetic  adaptations. 
Prerequisites:  introductory  biology  and  chemistry.  One  course  or  4  graduate  units  (4  s.h.). 
Ramus 

Marine  Policy.  (Public  Policy  Studies  195S.)  Formal  study  of  policy  and  policymak- 
ing regulating  the  exploitation  of  the  marine  environment.  History  of  specific  marine- 
related  organizations,  legislation,  and  issues  are  traced  and  their  effects  on  local,  regional, 
national,  and  international  arenas.  Topics  explored  through  use  of  theoretical  and 
methodological  perspectives,  including  political  science,  sociology,  and  economics.  Lec- 
tures, including  seminar  presentations  by  visiting  marine  policymakers  and  policy 
analysts.  Major  emphasis  is  national  in  scope;  some  examples  from  North  Carolina  and 
the  Mid-  and  South  Atlantic  areas.  One  course  (3  s.h.).  Orbach  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

Marine  Ecology.  (Zoology  203L.)  Application  of  ecological  theory  to  marine  systems. 
Emphasis  on  hypothesis  formulation,  field  experimentation,  data  analysis,  scientific  writ- 
ing, and  familiarity  with  current  ecological  literature.  (Fulfills  Duke  ecology  option,  or 
can  be  taken  as  an  elective  if  Zoology  103L  has  already  been  taken . )  Prerequisite :  a  course 
in  introductory  ecology,  invertebrate  zoology,  or  marine  botany  (phycology);  knowledge 
of  statistics  helpful.  One  and  one-half  courses  or  6  graduate  units  (6  s.h.).  Hay  (visiting 
summer  faculty) 

Barrier  Island  Ecology.  (Botany  218  or  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies  218.) 
Adaptation  of  plants  to  barrier  island  migration  and  other  physical  characteristics  of  the 
coastal  environment.  Major  emphasis  on  management  of  barrier  beaches  from  Maine 
to  Texas  and  the  impact  of  human  interference  with  natural  processes.  Field  studies. 
Prerequisite:  course  in  general  ecology.  One  and  one-half  courses  or  6  graduate  units 
(6  s.h.).  Evans,  Peterson,  and  Wells  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

Benthic  Marine  Algae.  (Botany  219L.)  Morphology,  reproduction,  life  histories,  sys- 
tematics,  and  natural  history  of  seaweeds.  Lectures,  laboratories,  and  field  work  in  ocean 
and  estuaries.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology;  plant  diversity  recommended.  One 
course  or  4  graduate  units  (4  s.h.).  Searles 

Independent  Study.  (Botany  192  or  Zoology  192. )  For  senior  and  junior  majors  with 
permission  of  the  appropriate  director  of  undergraduate  studies  and  the  supervising  in- 
structor. Course  credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

Research.  (Botany  360.)  Individual  investigation  in  the  various  fields  of  botany.  Credit 
to  be  arranged.  (For  graduate  students  only.)  Staff 

Research.  (Zoology  354. )  To  be  carried  on  under  the  direction  of  the  appropriate  staff 
members.  Hours  and  credit  to  be  arranged.  (For  graduate  students  only.)  Staff 

16    Academic  Programs 


Third  Summer  Term 

24  July-25  August  1989 

Marine  Biology.  (Biology  10L.)  Physical  and  chemical  characteristics  of  marine 
ecosystems  and  the  functional  adaptations  of  marine  organisms  to  these  systems.  Lec- 
tures, field  trips,  and  laboratories.  For  students  not  majoring  in  a  natural  science.  One 
course  (4  s.h.).  Kenney 

Marine  Invertebrate  Zoology.  (Zoology  274L.)  Structures,  functions,  and  habits  of 
invertebrate  animals  under  natural  and  experimental  conditions.  Field  trips.  (Fulfills  Duke 
animal  diversity  requirement  and  zoology  lab  requirement.)  Not  open  to  undergradu- 
ate students  who  have  taken  Zoology  76L  or  176L.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biology. 
One  and  one-half  courses  or  6  graduate  units  (6  s.h.).  Ruppert  (visiting  summer  faculty) 

Invertebrate  Developmental  Biology.  (Zoology  278L.)  Gametogenesis,  fertilization, 
and  development  of  invertebrates,  with  emphasis  on  experimental  studies  of  prelarval 
stages.  Prerequisite :  consent  of  instructor.  One  and  one-half  courses  or  6  graduate  units 
(6  s.h.).  Staff 

Continental  Margin  Sedimentation.  (Geology  295S.)  Sediment  composition  and  dis- 
tribution on  the  continental  margin,  with  emphasis  on  North  Carolina  barrier  island/ 
lagoon,  shelf  and  slope  environments.  The  course  includes  field  work  and  laboratory 
analyses  of  sediments  as  well  as  readings  and  discussion  of  the  current  literature.  (Offered 
alternate  years;  not  offered  during  1989.)  Prerequisite:  Geology  205S  or  Geology  206S 
or  consent  of  instructor.  One  course  or  4  graduate  units  (4  s.h.).  Johnson  and  Wells  (visit- 
ing summer  faculty) 

Independent  Study.  (Botany  191  or  Zoology  191 .)  For  senior  and  junior  majors  with 
permission  of  the  appropriate  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  and  the  supervising 
instructor.  Coilrse  credit  to  be  arranged.  Staff 

Research.  (Botany  359.)  Individual  investigation  in  the  various  fields  of  botany.  Credit 
to  be  arranged.  (For  graduate  students  only.)  Staff 

Research.  (Zoology  353. )  To  be  carried  on  under  the  direction  of  the  appropriate  staff 
members.  Hours  and  credit  to  be  arranged.  (For  graduate  students  only.)  Staff 

Fall  Semester — Undergraduate  Marine  Sciences  Program 

28  August-16  December  1989 

A  full  study  list  ordinarily  is  four  (4)  course  credits.  The  curriculum  consists  of  the 
courses  listed  below. 

Marine  Invertebrate  Diversity.  (Zoology  76L.)  Form,  function,  and  evolution  of  in- 
vertebrates from  estuarine  and  coastal  habitats.  Laboratory  study  of  perception,  feed- 
ing, digestion,  respiration,  locomotion,  reproduction,  and  development.  Field  study  of 
adaptations  to  natural  environments.  (Fulfills  Duke  animal  diversity  requirement.)  Not 
open  to  students  who  have  taken  Zoology  176L  or  274L.  Prerequisite:  introductory  biol- 
ogy. One  course  (4  s.h.).  Kirby-Smith 

Marine  Sediments.  (Geology  109S  or  Geology  209S*.)  Sedimentary  processes  in  near- 
shore,  shelf  and  deep-sea  environments.  Emphasis  on  field  methods  and  laboratory  anal- 
yses. (*Geology  209S:  additional  requirement  of  term  paper.)  One  course  (4  s.h.).  Johnson 

Organization  of  Marine  Communities.  (Zoology  169L.)  Dynamics  of  marine  com- 
munities in  the  context  of  current  ecological  theory.  Life  history  strategies,  competition, 
predation,  diversity,  and  stability;  detailed  considerations  of  benthic  and  pelagic  com- 
munities. (Fulfills  Duke  ecology  option.)  Students  may  not  receive  credit  for  both  Zool- 

Fall  Semester— Undergraduate  Marine  Sciences  Program    17 


ogy  103L  and  169L.  Prerequisites:  introductory  biology  and  mathematics.  One  course 
(4  s.h.).  Sutherland 

Light  in  the  Sea.  (Botany  195S. )  Properties  of  light  in  the  sea  and  the  biological  con- 
sequences; orientation,  bioluminescence,  biological  rhythms,  primary  production,  and 
sensing  devices.  Half  course  (2  s.h.).  Ramus 

Physical  Oceanography.  (Geology  203. )  Physical  processes  in  the  oceans :  the  phys- 
ical properties  of  seawater,  the  dynamics  of  currents,  waves  and  tides,  and  the  transmis- 
sion of  light  and  sound  in  the  sea.  Prerequisite:  Physics  41  or  51.  Half  course  (2  s.h.). 
Johnson 

Marine  Animal  Navigation.  (Zoology  295S.)  Orientation  to  visual,  chemical, 
mechanical,  and  magnetic  cues.  To  examine  aspects  of  the  cues  used  for  navigation,  be- 
havior involved,  functional  significance,  and  experimental  design.  Half  course  (2  s.h.). 

Forward 

Independent  Study.  (Botany  191,  Geology  191,  Geology  195,  or  Zoology  191.)  For 
seniors  and  juniors  with  consent  of  the  appropriate  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies 
and  the  supervising  instructor.  One  course  (3-4  s.h.).  Staff 

Graduate  Program 

Graduate  students  from  any  and  all  academic  disciplines  are  encouraged  to  take 
professional  training  at  the  Marine  Laboratory.  The  program  operates  year-round,  provid- 
ing course  work  in  the  marine  sciences,  an  active  seminar  program,  and  facilities  sup- 
porting dissertation  research.  Resident  graduate  students  represent  the  Departments 
of  Biochemistry,  Botany,  Forestry  and  Environmental  Studies,  Geology,  and  Zoology. 
Ordinarily,  dissertation  advisers  are  resident  as  well,  although  this  need  not  be  the  case. 
The  Marine  Laboratory  has  available  several  full-time  instructional  assistantships  (in- 
cluding summer)  as  well  as  endowed  fellowships,  including  the  Rachel  Carson  Gradu- 
ate Fellowship,  the  Harvey  W.  Smith  Graduate  Fellowship  in  Biological  Oceanography, 
the  Lynde  and  Harry  Bradley  Fellowship,  and  the  Robert  Safrit  Fellowship.  In  addition, 
tuition  credits  obtained  from  fellowship  support  may  be  applied  to  courses  given  both 
at  the  Marine  Laboratory  and  the  Durham  campus,  regular  semesters  and  summer  terms. 


18    Academic  Programs 


Students  are  admitted  to  degree  programs  in  regular  academic  departments,  not  the  Ma- 
rine Laboratory  (consult  the  current  Bulletin  of  Duke  University— Graduate  School  for  ad- 
ditional information).  Generally,  degree  requirements,  excepting  dissertation  research, 
are  met  on  the  Durham  campus,  then  students  take  residence  at  the  Marine  Laboratory 
for  dissertation  research. 

Marine  Sciences  Education  Consortium  (MSEC) 

The  Marine  Sciences  Education  Consortium  (MSEC)  was  developed  to  provide  a 
formal  curriculum  in  the  marine  sciences,  including  supervised  research,  to  member 
institutions.  Such  institutions  are  liberal  arts  colleges  or  universities  attended  by  students 
who  are  preparing  for  careers  in  the  marine  sciences  or  who  have  a  strong  liberal  arts 
interest  in  the  oceans  but  for  whom  no  specialized  programs  in  the  marine  sciences  are 
available.  Duke  University  has  developed  the  specialized  coastal  physical  plant,  vessels, 
equipment,  library,  and  faculty  necessary  to  implement  such  programs.  MSEC  students 
have  access  to  the  spring  and  fall  semester  programs  in  marine  sciences  as  well  as  the 
summer  program  here  at  the  Duke  Marine  Laboratory,  including  room/board  facilities. 
Currently,  member  institutions  include  Denison  University,  the  Five  Colleges  Coastal 
and  Marine  Sciences  Program  (Amherst  College,  Hampshire  College,  Mount  Holyoke 
College,  Smith  College,  and  the  University  of  Massachusetts),  Furman  University,  Gettys- 
burg College,  Hood  College,  Juniata  College,  Macalester  College,  Miami  University,  North 
Carolina  State  University,  Oberlin  College,  Presbyterian  College,  Trinity  College,  Univer- 
sity of  Richmond  and  Wittenberg  University. 

Members  join  upon  invitation  and  mutual  agreement.  Inquiries  from  interested  in- 
stitutions are  welcome  and  requests  to  join  the  MSEC  will  be  considered.  Such  inquiries 
should  be  addressed  to  the  Assistant  Director  for  Academic  Programs,  Duke  University 
Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516. 

Visiting  Scholar  Programs 

The  exchange  of  knowledge  is  kept  lively  by  several  programs  which  bring  distin- 
guished scientists/educators  to  the  Marine  Laboratory.  The  Visiting  Scholar  Program 
brings  lecturers  for  a  period  of  several  days  on  a  monthly  basis  year-round.  The  Cocos 
Foundation  brings  visitors  for  longer  periods  of  time,  usually  five  weeks  and  only  dur- 
ing the  summers.  The  scholars,  while  in  residence,  lecture  to  the  community  at  large 
as  well  as  enrich  specific  research  groups. 

Requirements  and  Procedures 

Spring  and  Fall  Semester — Undergraduate  Marine  Sciences  Programs.  During  the 
spring  and  fall  semesters  interdisciplinary  programs  in  marine  sciences  provide  an  op- 
portunity for  undergraduate  students  to  live  and  study  at  the  Marine  Laboratory.  The 
programs  are  open  to  qualified  junior  and  senior  students.  In  the  case  of  Duke  students, 
participation  in  both  the  spring  and  fall  semesters  is  possible  only  with  the  consent  of 
their  departmental  adviser. 

Duke  students  can  obtain  the  appropriate  application  form  from  the  back  of  this  bulle- 
tin, the  Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies  in  their  major  department,  or  by  writing  to 
the  Marine  Laboratory.  On  the  Durham  campus,  additional  information  about  the  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory  and  the  academic  programs  is  available  from  Dean  Deborah 
Roach,  04  Allen  Building.  Duke  students  should  submit  the  completed  application.  Non- 
Duke  students  should  submit  the  appropriate  application  form  (contained  toward  the 
back  of  this  bulletin),  one  letter  of  recommendation  from  academic  faculty,  and  a  cur- 
rent transcript  of  academic  work.  All  completed  applications  and  supporting  creden- 
tials, if  required,  (from  all  applicants)  should  be  received  prior  to  the  preceding  31  Oc- 
tober (for  spring  semester  1989)  and  the  preceding  27  March  (for  fall  semester  1989)  by 

Requirements  and  Procedures    19 


the  Admissions  Office  of  the  Marine  Laboratory.  (Applications  received  after  these  dates 
will  be  considered  on  a  space-available  basis.)  Applicants  will  be  notified  by  mail  con- 
cerning their  admission  status. 

Summer  Terms.  Introductory  level  courses  (numbered  below  100)  offered  during  the 
summer  at  the  laboratory  are  open  to  all  qualified  college  students;  advanced  level  courses 
(numbered  100  to  199)  are  intended  for  undergraduate  students  from  the  sophomore 
to  the  senior  level;  senior-graduate  level  courses  (numbered  from  200  to  299)  are  intended 
for  advanced  undergraduates  and  graduate  students  (juniors  and  well-qualified  sopho- 
mores may  enroll  in  these  courses  with  special  permission).  Undergraduates  may  not 
enroll  in  300-level  courses. 

Students  apply  for  all  undergraduate  and  graduate  courses  and  for  graduate  graded  re- 
search by  submitting  the  Summer  Session  application  found  at  the  back  of  this  bulletin. 

The  application  and  current  transcripts  (in  the  case  of  those  who  are  applying  to 
courses  numbered  100  or  above)  should  be  submitted  by  all  applicants  to  the  Admissions 
Office  of  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  as  early  as  possible  to  allow  for  ade- 
quate processing  time  and  to  assure  a  space  in  the  desired  course(s).  Late  applicants  will 
be  considered  if  space  permits.  All  applicants  will  be  notified  by  mail  as  promptly  as  pos- 
sible after  a  decision  has  been  reached  concerning  their  application.  Upon  acceptance, 
payment  of  required  deposit(s)  is  essential  to  reserve  space  in  a  course  as  well  as  room 
and  board  accommodations. 

Students  who  have  had  adequate  preparation  and  approval  of  their  major  profes- 
sor may  request  space  for  independent  or  thesis  research.  Students  register  for  ungrad- 
ed graduate  research  and  residence  only  on  Graduate  School  course  cards  (available  from  the 
appropriate  director  of  graduate  studies  and  to  be  returned  to  the  Graduate  School,  127  Allen 
Building). 

Summer  Credit.  The  summer  session  term  credit  does  not  mean  degree  credit  at 
Duke  University  unless  the  student  has  been  admitted  as  a  degree  candidate  by  one  of 
the  colleges  or  schools  of  the  University.  Other  students  will  be  categorized  as  nondegree 
(unclassified)  students  for  the  summer  only.  A  student  taking  a  course  for  credit  is  ex- 
pected to  do  all  the  work  required  and  to  take  the  final  examination,  and  will  receive  a 
grade. 

Summer  Minimum  Enrollment.  Some  courses  are  offered  subject  to  minimum  en- 
rollments. In  withdrawing  a  course  not  having  adequate  enrollment,  every  effort  will 
be  made  to  place  the  student  in  an  alternate  course  which  has  been  listed  by  the  student 
as  a  second  choice. 

Summer  Maximum  Program  Load.  The  maximum  load  for  one  term  of  the  summer 
session  at  the  Marine  Laboratory  is  a  one  and  one-half  course  (or  6  graduate  unit)  pro- 
gram (semester  hour  equivalents  are  listed  under  the  course  descriptions).  A  greater  load 
may  be  possible  only  with  the  approval  of  the  student's  Dean  or  the  appropriate  direc- 
tor of  graduate  studies.  Non-Duke  students  must  obtain  approval  from  the  director  of 
the  summer  session. 

Immunizations.  North  Carolina  Statute  G.S. :  130A-155.1  states  that  no  person  shall 
attend  a  college  or  university,  public,  private,  or  religious  .  .  .  unless  a  certificate  of  im- 
munizations against  diphtheria,  tetanus,  whooping  cough,  poliomyelitis,  red  measles 
(rubeola),  and  rubella  is  presented  to  the  college  or  university  on  or  before  the  first  day 
of  matriculation. 

Duke  students  should  have  already  satisfied  this  provision.  Non-Duke  students  must 
obtain  the  required  immunizations  and  present  certification  that  the  required  immuni- 
zations have  been  received.  Certifications  must  be  sent  to  Director  of  Student  Health 
Services,  Box  2914  DUMC,  Duke  University,  Durham,  NC  27710.  Failure  to  do  so  will  re- 
sult in  the  students  being  withdrawn  from  classes.  There  will  be  no  refunds.  Non-Duke  students 
have  the  responsibility  for  requesting  forms  from  the  Marine  Laboratory  Admissions  Office. 

20    Academic  Programs 


Financial  Information 

Figu  res  quoted  in  this  section  are  projections  in  some  cases  and  may  be  subject  to  change  without 
prior  notice. 

SPRING  AND  FALL  SEMESTER— UNDERGRADUATE  MARINE  SCIENCES 
PROGRAMS 

Tuition  and  fees  for  the  fall  semester  are  unavailable  at  the  time  of  this  printing. 

Tuition.  Tuition  for  the  spring  semester  will  be  $5,300.  (See  also  section  on  payment 
of  tuition  and  fees.) 

Health  Fee.  Students  are  required  to  pay  $119  for  the  spring  semester. 

Student  Activity  Fee.  The  student  activity  fee  for  the  spring  semester  will  be  $57. 

Room  and  Board.  The  total  room  and  board  fee  for  the  spring  semester  will  be  $2,035. 
All  dormitory  occupants  must  supply  their  own  linens,  blankets,  and  towels,  but  pil- 
lows will  be  furnished.  A  key  deposit  of  $10  (per  semester)  will  be  charged  each  person 
occupying  a  room.  This  deposit  will  be  refunded  at  time  of  departure  and  return  of  key. 

Full  board  provides  for  three  meals  a  day,  Monday  through  Saturday,  and  breakfast 
and  dinner  on  Sunday.  No  credit  will  be  allowed  for  meals  that  are  missed. 

Estimated  Semester  Costs.  Estimated  costs  for  the  spring  semester  will  be: 
tuition— $5,300;  health  fee— $119;  student  activity  fee— $57;  room  and  board— $2,035. 
Books,  if  required  by  the  instructor,  will  be  available  at  registration. 

Payment  of  Tuition  and  Fees.  The  Office  of  the  Bursar  (Duke  University,  Durham 
campus)  will  issue  invoices  to  registered  students  for  tuition,  fees,  and  other  charges  ap- 
proximately four  to  six  weeks  prior  to  the  beginning  of  classes  each  semester.  The  total 
amount  due  on  the  invoice  is  payable  by  the  invoice  late  payment  date  which  is  normally 
one  week  prior  to  the  beginning  of  classes.  A  student  is  required  to  pay  all  invoices  as 
presented.  If  full  payment  is  not  received,  a  late  payment  charge  as  described  below  will 
be  assessed  on  the  next  invoice  and  certain  restrictions  will  be  applied.  Failure  to  receive 
an  invoice  does  not  warrant  exemption  from  the  payment  of  tuition  and  fees  nor  from 
the  penalties  and  restrictions.  (Duke  University  students  on  other  tuition  payment 
plans— see  the  current  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  Undergraduate  Instruction.)  Non- 
registered  students  will  be  required  to  make  payment  for  tuition  and  fees  (and  any  past 
due  balance)  at  the  time  of  registration.  Payments  should  be  sent  to  the  address  indicat- 
ed on  the  invoice  and  not  to  the  Duke  Marine  Laboratory. 

Late  Payment  Charge.  If  the  total  amount  due  on  an  invoice  is  not  received  by  the  in- 
voice late  payment  date,  the  next  invoice  will  reflect  a  penalty  charge  of  1  and  V4  percent 
per  month  assessed  on  the  past  due  balance  regardless  of  the  number  of  days  past  due. 
The  past  due  balance  is  defined  as  the  previous  balance  less  any  payments  and  credits 
received  on  or  before  the  late  payment  date  and  also  any  student  loan  or  scholarship 
memo  credits  related  to  the  previous  balance  which  appear  on  the  invoice. 

SUMMER  TERMS 

Tuition.  The  following  are  tuition  charges  for  summer  registration. 

1.   Undergraduate  students: 

a.  $1,842  for  each  one  and  one-half  course  (6  s.h.) 

b.  $1,228  for  each  undergraduate  laboratory  course  (4  s.h.) 

c.  $921  for  each  nonlaboratory  course  (3  s.h.) 

d.  $614  for  each  half-course  (2  s.h.) 


Financial  Information    21 


2.    Graduate  students: 

a.  $307  per  unit  (s.h.) 

b.  For  an  undergraduate  course,  the  tuition  rate  indicated  in  section  1  above  is 
applicable. 

Auditing  Fees. 

1 .  With  permission  of  the  instructor  and  the  director,  students  registered  for  a  full 
program  (6  s.h.)  may  audit  courses.  No  extra  charge  is  made. 

2.  Students  carrying  less  than  a  full  program  (6  s.h.)  may  be  granted  permission 
by  the  instructor  and  the  director  to  audit  a  course,  but  must  pay  half  the  Univer- 
sity fee  for  the  course. 

Health  Fee.  Students  are  required  to  pay  $33  per  term. 

Room  and  Board.  Total  charges  for  room  and  board  are  estimated  at  $765  per  term 
or  higher. 

Air-conditioned,  as  well  as  a  few  non-air-conditioned,  dormitory  rooms  are  availa- 
ble. (Upon  acceptance  in  a  course,  students  will  be  sent  an  acceptance  and  reservation 
form.  Reservation  for  housing  and  board  should  be  made  on  this  form  and  the  form 
promptly  returned  to  the  Marine  Laboratory  along  with  the  room  and  board  reserva- 
tion deposit,  if  the  student  elects  to  utilize  room  and  board.) 

Occupants  must  supply  their  own  linens,  blankets,  and  towels,  but  pillows  will  be 
furnished. 

Full  board  provides  for  three  meals  a  day,  Monday  through  Saturday,  and  breakfast 
and  dinner  on  Sunday.  There  will  be  no  credit  allowed  for  missed  meals. 

Deposits. 

1 .  Course  Deposit.  Upon  acceptance  in  a  course,  a  nonrefundable  deposit  of  $100 
(per  course)  is  required  to  ensure  a  reservation  in  that  course.  If  the  student  proper- 
ly registers  for  the  course  and  attends,  the  deposit  will  be  credited  to  tuition. 

2.  Room  and  Board  Deposit.  A  $50  deposit  (per  term)  is  required  to  ensure  a  reser- 
vation for  room  and  board.  If  the  student  properly  registers,  the  deposit  will  be 
credited  to  the  room  and  board  charge.  The  deposit  is  refundable  if  a  student  who 
has  previously  made  a  room  and  board  reservation  properly  withdraws  from  a 
course  prior  to  the  beginning  of  the  term.  The  deposit  is  nonrefundable  if  a  student 
who  has  previously  made  a  room  and  board  reservation  at  the  Marine  Laboratory  subse- 
quently decides  not  to  utilize  the  room  and  board  facilities  (although  he  or  she  still  plans 
to  attend  the  course)  and  does  not  notify  the  Marine  Laboratory  at  least  two  weeks  prior 
to  the  beginning  of  the  term. 

3.  Key  Deposit.  A  key  deposit  of  $10  per  term  will  be  charged  each  person  occupy- 
ing a  dormitory  room.  This  deposit  will  be  refunded  at  time  of  departure  and  re- 
turn of  the  key. 

Estimated  Term  Costs.  Estimated  costs  for  each  of  the  summer  terms  will  be:  tuition— 
(see  tuition  section);  student  health  fee— $33;  room  and  board— about  $765  or  higher. 
Books,  if  required  by  the  instructor,  will  be  available  at  registration. 

Payment  of  Tuition  and  Fees.  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  does  not  mail  state- 
ments for  summer  term  tuition  and  fees.  All  tuition  and  fees  must  be  paid  to  the  Account- 
ing Office  (Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516)  on  or 
before  the  Friday  preceding  the  beginning  of  each  summer  term— see  Duke  University 
Marine  Laboratory  calendar  for  term  dates).  Checks  should  be  made  payable  to  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory  and  may  be  mailed  to  the  above  address.  Failure  to  pay  tu- 
ition and  fees  by  the  end  of  the  drop/add  period  (the  first  three  days  of  classes  in  any  term)  will 
result  in  administrative  withdrawal  of  the  student.  These  withdrawn  students  will  be  billed 
the  health  fee  and  an  administrative  withdrawal  fee  of  $225  (per  6  semester  hour  course), 

22    Academic  Programs 


$150  (per  3-4  semester  hour  course),  or  $75  (per  2  semester  hour  course)  and  receive  a 
Wfor  each  course  for  which  they  were  registered.  Students  who,  subsequent  to  with- 
drawal, clear  with  the  Marine  Laboratory  Accounting  Office  may,  with  written  permis- 
sion of  their  academic  dean,  be  reinstated  in  their  classes  as  originally  registered  and 
receive  regular  grades  instead  of  Ws.  The  administrative  withdrawal  fee  will  stand  and 
the  student  will  be  liable  for  full  tuition  and  fees.  Students  who  are  unable  to  meet  these 
deadlines  should  consult  with  the  Accounting  Office  and  their  academic  dean  (in  the 
case  of  Duke  University  students)  prior  to  the  deadline. 

Late  Payment  Charge.  Students  who  fail  to  pay  all  tuition  and  fees  on  or  before  the 
Friday  preceding  the  beginning  of  each  term  will  pay  an  extra  charge  of  $25. 

TRANSCRIPTS 

Requests  for  transcripts  of  academic  records  should  be  directed  to  the  Associate  Regis- 
trar, Office  of  the  Registrar,  103  Allen  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Caro- 
lina 27706.  Ten  days  should  be  allowed  for  processing.  A  fee  of  $2,  payable  in  advance, 
is  charged  for  each  copy.  Such  requests  should  not  be  directed  to  the  Marine  Laboratory. 

REFUNDS 

Spring  and  Fall.  In  the  case  of  withdrawal  from  the  University,  students  or  their  par- 
ents may  elect  to  have  tuition  refunded  or  carried  forward  as  a  credit  for  later  study  ac- 
cording to  the  following  schedule: 

Withdrawal  Refund 

Before  classes  begin  Full  amount 

During  first  or  second  week  80  percent 

During  third,  fourth,  or  fifth  week  60  percent 

During  sixth  week  20  percent 

After  sixth  week  None 

Tuition  charges  paid  from  grants  or  loans  will  be  restored  to  those  funds  on  the  same 
pro  rata  basis  and  will  not  be  refunded  or  carried  forward.  In  addition  to  tuition  the  sched- 
ule also  applies  to  other  Marine  Laboratory  fees.  In  the  event  of  death,  a  full  tuition  and 
fees  refund  will  be  granted.  Consult  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University— Undergraduate  In- 
struction for  additional  information. 

Summer  Terms — Drop  or  Administrative  Withdrawal  Charges  and  Refund  of  Tu- 
ition and  Fees.  Students  who  will  not  be  attending  a  summer  term  or  course  for  which  they 
have  been  officially  accepted  must  drop  the  course(s)  prior  to  the  beginning  of  the  term 
whether  or  not  they  have  not  paid  tuition  and  fees.  Students  who  fail  to  drop  the  course(s) 
prior  to  the  beginning  of  the  term  will  be  charged  $225  (per  6  semester  hour  course),  $150 
(per  3-4  semester  hour  course),  or  $75  (per  2  semester  hour  course)  plus  the  health  fee. 

Students  who  will  not  be  attending  a  summer  term  or  course  for  which  tuition  and 
fees  have  been  paid  are  eligible  for  refunds  following  these  policies: 

1.  There  is  no  refund  of  tuition  and  fees  if  the  student  drops  a  course(s)  or  with- 
draws from  the  term  after  the  third  day.  After  the  first  week  of  the  term,  the  room 
and  board  fee  less  the  cost  of  each  week  of  room  and  board  (a  week  of  room  and 
board  is  considered  Sunday-Saturday)  is  refunded. 

2.  Full  tuition  less  $225  (for  a  6  semester  hour  course),  $150  (for  a  3-4  semester  hour 
course),  or  $75  (for  a  2  semester  hour  course)  is  refunded  if  the  student  officially 
drops  a  course(s)  or  withdraws  from  the  term  during  the  first  three  days;  the  room 
and  board  fee  less  the  cost  of  one  week  of  room  and  board  will  also  be  refunded. 
The  health  fee  is  not  refunded.  (There  is  no  charge  for  drop/adds  that  result  in 
no  change  in  course  load  in  the  same  term). 

3.  Full  tuition  and  fees  are  refunded  if  the  student  officially  drops  a  course(s)  or  with- 
draws from  the  term  before  the  first  day  of  the  term. 

Financial  Information    23 


CHECK  CASHING 

The  banks  in  the  Beaufort-Morehead  City  area  have  indicated  that  they  will  not  cash 
personal  checks  for  students  unless  they  are  guaranteed.  Therefore,  it  is  recommended 
that  students  who  come  to  the  laboratory  bring  with  them  sufficient  travelers'  checks, 
money  orders,  certified  checks  (which  the  banks  will  cash),  or  cash  to  cover  personal 
expenses.  The  Marine  Laboratory  will  accept  personal  checks  to  pay  course  fees.  There 
is  a  Wachovia  Bank  in  Beaufort  and  Morehead  City. 

Financial  Assistance 

SUMMER  TUITION  SCHOLARSHIPS  AND  FELLOWSHIPS  FOR 
UNDERGRADUATE  AND  GRADUATE  STUDENTS 

The  Bookhout  Scholarship,  the  Deborah  Susan  Steer  Memorial  Scholarship  in 
Marine-Life  Sciences,  the  Wade  Family  Fellowship,  and  the  Harvey  W.  Smith  Under- 
graduate Fellowship  are  awarded  on  a  competitive  basis  by  the  Duke  University  Marine 
Laboratory  (DUML).  Each  award  provides  tuition  for  one  course  taken  during  the  sum- 
mer. Awards  require  that  the  student  live  on  campus,  i.e.,  take  room  and  board  at  the 
Marine  Laboratory.  Undergraduate  Independent  Study  and  Graduate  Research  courses 
do  no  qualify  for  these  awards.  The  criteria  which  are  used  in  review  of  scholarship/fellow- 
ship applicants  include  academic  excellence,  scope  of  preparation,  and  professional  goals. 
Selection  of  awardees  will  be  made  by  the  DUML  faculty. 

A  precondition  to  review  of  a  scholarship/fellowship  application  is  admission  to  a 
specific  summer  course.  (Admission  to  courses  does  not  automatically  imply  award  of 
scholarship/fellowship;  separate  reviews  are  conducted.) 

A  separate  scholarship/fellowship  application  form  is  not  utilized.  Intent  to  apply 
for  a  scholarship/fellowship  should  be  made  known  on  the  reverse  of  the  summer  course 
application  located  at  the  back  of  this  bulletin.  In  addition  to  the  summer  application 
for  courses,  each  scholarship/fellowship  applicant  is  required  to  submit  (1)  college  or 
professional  school  transcript(s),  (2)  a  letter  of  recommendation  from  academic  faculty, 
and  (3)  a  brief  statement  of  purpose,  i.e.,  the  reason  for  taking  the  particular  course.  All 
scholarship/fellowship  credentials  must  be  received  no  later  than  30  March  1989  by  the  Admis- 
sions Office  of  the  Marine  Laboratory.  Announcement  of  award  will  be  made  by  mail  shortly 
after  the  deadline  date. 

In  addition,  the  Richard  C.  and  Linda  G.  Seale  Scholarship  is  intended  to  provide 
support  to  qualified  students  from  Denison  University  for  participation  in  summer 
courses  at  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory.  Denison  University  students  interest- 
ed in  applying  for  this  scholarship  are  directed  to  the  Chairman,  Department  of  Biology, 
at  Denison  University  with  respect  to  required  supporting  credentials  and  deadlines  for 
application  and  award  notification.  Should  there  be  no  applicants  from  Denison,  the 
scholarship  may  be  used  to  provide  financial  assistance  to  any  qualified  student. 

Bookhout  Scholarship.  The  Bookhout  Scholarship  provides  financial  assistance  to 
juniors,  seniors,  or  beginning  graduate  students  with  a  professional  interest  in  the  nat- 
ural sciences. 

Deborah  Susan  Steer  Memorial  Scholarship  in  Marine-Life  Sciences.  Each  year  the 
income  from  the  fund  is  used  to  provide  financial  assistance  to  promising  Duke  under- 
graduates who  wish  to  study  marine  life-sciences  at  the  Duke  University  Marine 
Laboratory. 

The  Wade  Family  Fund.  The  income  from  this  fund  is  used  to  support  undergradu- 
ate and  graduate  student  participation  in  academic  courses.  Awards  are  made  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  Director  of  the  Marine  Laboratory. 


24    Academic  Programs 


Harvey  W.  Smith  Undergraduate  Fellowship  in  Biological  Oceanography.  The  in- 
come from  this  fund  is  used  to  support  undergraduate  participation  in  academic  courses. 

Richard  C.  and  Linda  G.  Seale  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund.  The  fund  income 
is  used  to  support  qualified  Denison  University  students  in  academic  summer  courses 
at  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory.  In  the  event  that  there  are  no  students  from 
Denison  who  apply  or  who  are  qualified  for  the  scholarship,  such  income  may  be  used 
to  provide  financial  assistance  to  any  qualified  student. 

UNDERGRADUATE  FINANCIAL  AID 

Financial  aid  is  available  to  Duke  University  undergraduate  students  for  each  sum- 
mer term.  Interested  students  can  obtain  specific  details  and  an  application  from  the 
Financial  Aid  Office,  Duke  University,  2106  Campus  Drive,  Durham,  NC  27706  in  March 
of  each  year. 

FULL-TIME  GRADUATE  SUPPORT 

Full-time  (academic  year,  including  summer)  graduate  support  is  available  to  stu- 
dents registered  in  a  graduate  program  in  any  department  in  the  sciences  at  Duke  Univer- 
sity. Recipients  must  be  in  residence  at  the  Marine  Laboratory  during  the  period  of  their 
appointment  and  must  also  conduct,  or  plan  to  conduct,  their  research  at  the  Beaufort 
campus.  Support  is  available  in  the  form  of  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  Instruc- 
tional Assistantships,  the  Rachel  Carson  Fellowship,  the  Harvey  W.  Smith  Graduate  Fel- 
lowship in  Biological  Oceanography,  the  Lynde  and  Harry  Bradley  Fellowship,  and  the 
Robert  Safrit  Graduate  Fellowship.  Awards  will  be  made  annually  for  a  maximum  of  three 
years. 

Instructional  assistantship  applicants  must  submit  (1)  a  letter  of  recommendation 
from  their  major  professor  and  (2)  graduate  record,  including  (a)  date  admitted  to  the 
Graduate  School,  (b)  courses  completed  and  grades,  (c)  dissertation  committee,  (d)  date 
of  qualifying  examination,  (e)  statement  of  research  program.  Fellowship  applicants  must 
submit  (1)  a  statement  of  the  proposed  research  for  the  term  of  the  fellowship,  (2)  two 
letters  of  recommendation,  one  of  which  must  come  from  faculty  outside  of  the  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory,  and  (3)  graduate  record,  including  (a)  date  admitted  to 
the  Graduate  School,  (b)  date  of  qualifying  examination,  (e)  title  of  dissertation  or  the- 
sis. Complete  applications  for  instructional  assistantships  and/or  fellowships  must  be  received  by 
the  Assistant  Director  for  Academic  Programs  before  28  February  1989. 

For  further  information,  write  the  Assistant  Director  for  Academic  Programs,  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516. 

Rachel  Carson  Graduate  Fellowship.  The  recipient  is  expected  to  conduct  research 
related  to  some  aspect  of  the  Rachel  Carson  Estuarine  Research  Reserve. 

Harvey  W.  Smith  Graduate  Fellowship  in  Biological  Oceanography.  The  recipient 
must  conduct  research  in  biological  oceanography. 

Lynde  and  Harry  Bradley  Fellowship.  The  recipient  must  conduct  research  in  some 
aspect  of  marine  science  or  policy.  Awards  are  made  at  the  discretion  of  the  Director  of 
the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory. 

Robert  Safrit  Graduate  Fellowship.  The  recipient  must  conduct  research  in  some 
aspect  of  marine  science.  Awards  are  made  at  the  discretion  of  the  Director  of  the  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory. 


Financial  Assistance    25 


Resources  for  Study  and  Research 


Research  Staff  and  Their  Programs 

Drs.  Joseph  Bonaventura  and  Celia  Bonaventura.  Physiological  and  Biochemical  Adap- 
tations of  Organisms  to  the  Marine  Environment  and  Marine  Biotechnology. 

Marine  organisms  are  found  in  environments  characterized  by  great  diversity  in  tem- 
perature, pH,  salinity  oxygen  availability  etc.  Through  biochemical  studies  the  struc- 
tural and  functional  diversity  of  these  organisms  and  their  environments  is  being  shown 
to  be  paralleled  by  diversity  at  the  molecular  level.  The  respiratory  proteins  of  marine 
organisms  are  being  studied  in  order  to  increase  the  understanding  of  molecular  adap- 
tations and  the  mechanisms  which  give  rise  to  functional  flexibility.  Investigations  in- 
clude measurements  of  the  kinetics  and  equilibria  of  ligand  binding  to  hemoglobins, 
hemocyanins,  and  cytochrome  c  oxidase  with  emphasis  on  the  reactivity  of  these  pro- 
teins as  regulated  by  metabolic  effectors.  The  subunit  interactions  involved  in  assembly 
of  giant  hemocyanin  molecules  are  also  under  investigation.  These  studies  are  com- 
plemented by  work  in  the  Protein  Engineering  and  Technology  Laboratory  where  proper- 
ties of  chemically  modified,  crosslinked,  and  immobilized  forms  of  biologically  active 
molecules  are  characterized. 

Bickar,  D.;  Lehninger,  A.;  Brunori,  M.;  Bonaventura,  J.;  and  Bonaventura,  C.  1985. 
Functional  equivalence  of  monomeric  (shark)  and  dimeric  (bovine)  cytochrome  c  oxi- 
dase. /.  Inorg.  Biochem.  23:365-372. 

Johnson,  B.  A.;  Bonaventura,  C;  and  Bonaventura,  J.  1988.  Callinectes  sapidus 
hemocyanin:  Cooperative  oxygen  binding  and  interactions  with  L-lactate,  calcium,  and 
protons.  Biochemistry  27:1995-2001. 

Sugihara,  J.;  Imamura,  T;  Nagafuchi,  S.;  Bonaventura,  J.;  Bonaventura,  C;  and 
Cashon,  R.  1985.  Hemoglobin  Rahere,  a  human  hemoglobin  variant  with  amino  acid 
substitution  at  the  2,3-diphosphoglycerate  binding  site.  Functional  consequences  of  the 
alteration  and  effects  of  bezaf ibrate  on  the  oxygen  bindings.  /.  Clin.  Invest.  76:1169-1173. 

Topham,  R.  W.;  Tesh,  S.;  Bonaventura,  C;  and  Bonaventura,  J.  1988.  Active-site  het- 
erogeneity in  Limulus  hemocyanin  as  revealed  by  reaction  with  peroxides.  Arch.  Biochem. 
Biophys.  261(2):299-311. 


Research  Staff  and  Their  Programs    27 


Dr.  C.  G.  Bookhout.  Larval  Ecology  and  Larval  Development  of  Invertebrates. 

This  laboratory  investigates  the  effects  of  pollutants,  such  as  insecticides  and  drilling 
fluids,  on  the  complete  development  of  mud-crabs  and  blue  crabs.  Also,  a  study  of  the 
development  of  the  family  of  crabs  to  which  the  blue  crab  belongs  is  being  conducted. 

Bookhout,  C.  G.;  Costlow,  J.  D.;  and  Monroe,  R.  1980.  Kepone*  effects  on  larval  de- 
velopment of  mud-crab  and  blue  crab.  Water  Air  Soil  Pollut.  13:57-77. 

Bookhout,  C.  G.;  Monroe,  R.  J.;  Forward,  R.  B.,  Jr.;  and  Costlow,  J.  D.,  Jr.  1984.  Ef- 
fects of  soluble  fractions  of  drilling  fluids  on  development  of  crabs,  Rhithropanopeus  har- 
risii  and  Callinectes  sapidus.  Water  Air  Soil  Pollut.  21:183-197. 

Bookhout,  C.  G.;  Monroe,  R.  J.;  Forward,  R.  B.,  Jr.;  and  Costlow,  J.  D.,  Jr.  1984.  Ef- 
fects of  hexavalent  chromium  on  development  of  crabs,  Rhithropanopeus  harrisii  and  Cal- 
linectes sapidus.  Water  Air  Soil  Pollut.  21:199-216. 

Dr.  Marius  Brouwer.  Role  of  Metal  Ions  in  Biological  Systems. 

(1)  Basic  studies  on  the  mechanism  of  oxygen  binding  by  respiratory  metallo-proteins 
and  by  organo-metallic  complexes.  (2)  Biochemical  mechanisms  of  trace  metal  toxicity. 
(3)  Characterization  of  structure  and  function  of  trace  metal-binding  proteins  in  marine 
Crustacea. 

Brouwer,  M.,  and  Brouwer-Hoexum,  T.  1985.  Mechanism  of  Cu(II)  and  Hg(II)  in- 
duced loss  of  red  blood  cell  deformability.  Fed.  Proc.  44:2620. 

Brouwer,  M.;  Whaling,  P.;  and  Engel,  D.  1986.  Copper-metallothioneins  in  the  Ameri- 
can lobster,  Homarusamericanus:  Potential  role  as  Cu(I)  donors  to  apohemocyanin.  Envi- 
ron. Health  Perspect.  65:93-100. 

Engel,  D.  W.,  and  Brouwer,  M.  1987.  Metal  regulation  and  molting  in  decapod  crusta- 
ceans: Metallothionein  function  in  metal  metabolism.  Biol.  Bull.  173:239-251. 

Dr.  Robert  Cashon.  Effect  of  Metabolic  Intermediates  on  Hemoglobin  Function. 

Being  investigated  are  the  effects  of  metabolites  on  the  oxygen  binding  properties 
of  normal  and  abnormal  human  hemoglobins  and  on  fish  hemoglobins. 

Cashon,  R.  1981.  The  Malate  Dehydrogenase  Isozymes  and  Allozymes  of  Fundulus 
heteroclitus.  The  Johns  Hopkins  University  Ph.D.  dissertation. 

Focesi,  A.;  Cashon,  R.;  Bonaventura,  C;  and  Bonaventura,  J.  1983.  Allosteric  inter- 
actions of  nicotinamide  nucleotides  and  EDTA  with  human  hemoglobin.  Fed.  Proc. 
42:2030. 

Dr.  Anthony  S.  Clare.  Invertebrate  Endocrinology. 

(1)  Endocrine  control  of  reproduction— spawning  and  vitellogenesis.  (2)  Functions 
of  invertebrate  eicosanoids.  (3)  Bioassay  development  for  invertebrate  hormones.  (4)  Effect 
of  pesticides  on  regeneration  of  chelae  in  mud  crabs  and  the  role  of  hormones  in  this 
process. 

Clare,  A.  S.  1987.  Endocrinology  of  cirripedes.  In  Barnacle  Biology,  ed.  A.  J.  South- 
ward. Rotterdam:  A.  A.  Balkema. 

Clare,  A.  S.;  van  Elk,  R.;  and  Feyen,  J.  H.  M.  1986.  Eicosanoids:  Their  biosynthesis 
in  accessory  sex  organs  of  Lymnaea  stagnalis  (L.).  Int.  ].  lnvertebr.  Dev.  10:125-131. 

Clare,  A.  S.;  Walker,  G.;  Holland,  D  L.;  and  Crisp,  D.  J.  1985.  The  hatching  substance 
of  the  barnacle,  Balanus  balanoides  (L.).  Proc.  R.  Soc.  bond.  224(B):  131-147. 

Dr.  John  D.  Costlow.  Crustacean  Development. 

Much  of  the  research  in  developmental  biology  deals  with  the  culture  of  invertebrate 
larvae  under  controlled  conditions  in  the  laboratory,  from  hatching  until  the  juvenile 
stages  are  reached.  The  availability  of  numerous  larvae  of  known  species,  age,  and  stage 
of  development  has  led  to  studies  on  the  extent  to  which  environmental  factors  within 
the  marine  environment  affect  rates  of  development,  survival,  and  morphological 


28    Resources  for  Study  and  Research 


normalities.  In  addition  to  studying  the  effects  of  natural  environmental  factors,  research 
is  under  way  to  determine  the  effects  of  pollutants  on  larval  development  of  marine 
Crustacea.  The  developmental  biology  program  also  includes  studies  on  the  physiology 
of  crustacean  larvae  and  the  factors  involved  in  regulation  of  molting,  rate  of  develop- 
ment, and  metamorphosis  during  larval  development. 

A  second  major  area  of  research  interest  involves  the  hormonal  and  physiological 
factors  regulating  barnacle  development,  settling,  and  metamorphosis.  Present  studies 
include  the  identification  of  naturally  occurring  substances  in  other  marine  organisms 
which  inhibit  or  prevent  the  settlement  of  acorn  barnacles  and  the  mechanisms  of  de- 
tection by  the  larvae  of  these  compounds. 

West,  T.  L.,  and  Costlow,  J.  D.  1987.  Size  regulation  in  larvae  of  the  crustacean  Bala- 
nus  eburneus  (Cirripedia:  Thoracica).  Mar.  Biol.  96:47-58. 

Wilson,  J.  E.  H.,  and  Costlow,  J.  D.  1987.  Acute  toxicity  of  diflubenzuron  (DFB)  to 
various  life  stages  of  the  grass  shrimp,  Palaemonetes  pugio.  Water  Air  Soil  Pollut.  33:411-417. 

Costlow,  J.  D.,  and  Tipper,  R.  C,  eds.  1984.  Marine  biodeterioration:  An  interdis- 
ciplinary study.  In  Proceedings  of  the  Symposium  on  Marine  Biodeterioration,  Uniformed  Ser- 
vices, University  of  Health  Sciences,  20-23  April  1981,  408  pp.  Copyright  1984  U.S.  Na- 
val Institute  Press,  Annapolis,  Maryland. 

Dr.  Richard  B.  Forward,  Jr.  Physiological  Ecology. 

This  laboratory  investigates  the  behavior  and  physiology  of  estuarine  and  coastal 
zooplankton.  This  includes  the  photobehavior,  photophysiology,  biological  rhythms, 
diurnal  vertical  migration,  and  horizontal  migration  of  crustacean  larvae.  Past  students 
have  worked  with  crustaceans  and  chaetognaths  on  the  effects  of  temperature,  salinity, 
and  feeding  on  phototaxis  and  geotaxis,  salinity  perception,  polarized  light  perception, 
and  field  studies  of  horizontal  and  vertical  distributions  as  related  to  environmental 
factors. 

Additional  studies  involve  rhythms  in  egg  hatching  by  crustaceans.  Types  of  rhythms, 
flexibility,  and  the  involvement  of  peptide  pheromones  are  being  considered. 

Forward,  R.  B.,  Jr.  1987.  A  comparative  study  of  crustacean  larval  photoresponse. 
Mar.  Biol.  94:589-595. 

Forward,  R.  B. ,  Jr.  1987.  Larval  release  rhythms  of  decapod  crustaceans:  An  overview. 
Bull.  Mar.  Sci.  41:165-176. 

Forward,  R.  B.,  Jr.;  Cronin,  T.  W;  and  Douglass,  J.  K.  1988.  The  visual  pigments  of 
crabs.  II.  Environmental  adaptations.  /.  Comp.  Physiol.  162:479-490. 

Dr.  Donald  J.  Gerhart.  Chemical  Ecology  . 

Many  important  ecological  interactions,  in  both  aquatic  and  terrestrial  environments, 
are  chemically  mediated  or  influenced.  Interests  center  on  the  biochemical  ecology  and 
evolution  of  marine  invertebrates,  especially  chemical  defenses,  chemical  systematics, 
and  roles  of  secondary  metabolites  in  invertebrate  predator-prey  symbioses,  and  the  bio- 
chemical induction  and  inhibition  of  larval  settlement.  In  collaboration  with  Dr.  Daniel 
Rittschof  and  Dr.  Richard  Forward  of  Duke  University  and  Dr.  Bruce  Erickson  of  the 
University  of  North  Carolina,  the  potential  involvement  of  peptides  in  pheromone  com- 
munication systems  of  aquatic  crustaceans  is  also  being  investigated. 

Gerhart,  D.  J.  1983.  Chemical  systematics  of  colonial  marine  animals:  An  estimated 
phylogeny  of  the  order  Gorgonacea  based  on  terpenoid  characters.  Biol.  Bull.  164:71-81. 

Gerhart,  D.  J.  1984.  Prostaglandin  A2 :  An  agent  of  chemical  defense  in  the  gorgonian 
Plexaura  homomalla.  Mar.  Ecol.  Progr.  Ser.  19:181-187. 

Gerhart,  D.  J.  1986.  Gregariousness  in  the  gorgonian-eating  gastropod  Cyphomagib- 
bosum:  Tests  of  several  possible  causes.  Mar.  Ecol.  Prog.  Ser.  31:255-263. 

Gerhart,  D.  J.;  Rittschof,  D;  and  Mayo,  S.  W.  1988.  Chemical  ecology  and  the  search 
for  marine  antifoulants:  Studies  of  a  predator-prey  symbiosis.  /.  Chem.  Ecol.  (In  press.) 


Research  Staff  and  Their  Programs    29 


Dr.  John  Gutknecht.  Membrane  Physiology. 

This  laboratory  studies  the  mechanisms  of  solute  and  water  transport  through  phos- 
pholipid bilayer  membranes  which  are  used  as  models  of  biological  membranes.  Some 
of  the  specific  questions  sought  include  the  following:  (1)  How  do  heavy  metals,  e.g., 
Hg  and  Cd,  permeate  biological  membranes?  (2)  What  are  the  mechanisms  of  action  of 
salicylates,  thiocyanate  and  other  drugs  on  the  gastric  mucosa?  (3)  What  are  the  mechan- 
isms of  proton  and  hydroxyl  ion  transport  through  lipid  bilayer  membranes?  (4)  What 
are  the  rate  limiting  steps  in  water  and  weak  acid/base  transport  through  membranes? 

Gutknecht,  J.  1981.  Inorganic  mercury  transport  through  lipid  bilayer  membranes. 
/.  Membr.  Biol.  61:61-66. 

Gutknecht,  J.  1987.  Proton/hydroxide  conductance  and  permeability  through  phos- 
pholipid bilayer  membranes.  Proc.  Natl.  Acad.  Sci.  USA  84:6443-6446. 

Gutknecht,  J.,  and  Walter,  A.  1982.  SCN-  and  HSCN  transport  through  lipid  bilayer 
membranes:  A  model  for  SCN-inhibition  of  gastric  acid  secretion.  Biochem.  Biophys.  Acta 
685:233-240. 

Dr.  Paul  J.  Hearty.  Quaternary  Coastal  Dynamics. 

Topics  of  current  and  proposed  research  include  the  following:  geochronology  and 
stratigraphy  of  coastal  marine  and  lacustrine  deposits,  sea  level  history,  Quaternary  tec- 
tonic displacement  of  shorelines,  and  archeometry  of  early  man  lithic  assemblages.  The 
research  concept  is  global  in  scope  and  includes  sites  from  the  circum-Mediterranean, 
Bermuda,  the  southeast  U.S.  Coastal  Plain  and  the  Carribean,  the  South  Pacific  and  the 
rift- valley  lakes  of  East  Africa. 

Hearty,  P.  J.,  and  Aharon,  P.  1988.  Amino  acid  chronostratigraphy  of  late  Quater- 
nary coral  reefs:  Huon  Peninsula,  New  Guinea  and  the  Great  Barrier  Reef,  Australia. 
Geology  16(7):  579-583. 

Hearty,  P.  J.;  Miller,  G.  H.;  Stearns,  C.  E.;  and  Szabo,  B.  J.  1986.  Aminostratigraphy 
of  Quaternary  shorelines  in  the  Mediterranean  basin.  Geol.  Soc.  Am.  Bull.  97:850-858. 

Vacher,  H.  L.,  and  Hearty,  P.  J.  1988.  History  of  stage-5  sea  level  in  Bermuda:  Review 
with  new  evidence  of  a  brief  rise  to  present  sea  level  during  substage  5a.  Quat .  Sci.  Rev. 
(In  press.) 

Dr.  Thomas  C.  Johnson.  Geological  Oceanography. 

Research  involves  deep-sea  sedimentation  studies  in  the  western  North  Atlantic  and 
the  application  of  oceanographic  techniques  to  the  study  of  sedimentation  in  large  lakes. 
Present  emphasis  is  upon  Pleistocene  paleocurrent  studies  in  the  Atlantic  and  high- 
resolution  seismic  reflection  profiling,  side-scan  SONAR,  and  sediment  core  analyses 
in  Lakes  Turkana  and  Malawi,  East  Africa. 

Johnson,  T.C.,  and  Davis,  T  W  1988.  High  resolution  seismic  profiles  from  Lake 
Malawi,  East  Africa.  /.  African  Earth  Sci.  (in  press.) 

Johnson,  T.  C;  Halfman,  J.  D.;  Rosendahl,  B.  R.;  and  Leister,  G.  S.  1987.  Climatic 
and  tectonic  effects  on  sedimentation  in  a  rift- valley  lake:  Evidence  from  high-resolution 
profiles,  Lake  Turkana,  Kenya.  Geol.  Soc.  Amer.  Bull.  98:439-447. 

Johnson,  T.  C;  Lynch,  E.  L.;  and  Showers,  W.  J.  1988.  Pleistocene  fluctuations  in 
the  western  boundary  undercurrent  on  the  Blake  Outer  Ridge.  Paleoceanogr.  (In  press.) 

Dr.  Bruce  E.  Kenney.  Algal  Ecological  Physiology. 

Physiological  ecology  of  photosynthesis  by  marine  algae,  specifically  the  influence 
of  environmental  conditions  on  photosynthetic  production,  is  my  primary  area  of  in- 
terest. Understanding  time  scales  of  environmental  variability  is  essential  to  determin- 
ing the  influence  of  such  variations  on  photosynthetic  performance. 

Evaluation  of  fixed  carbon  partitioning  under  varying  environmental  conditions  is 
a  current  goal.  Biotechnological  funding  supports  ongoing  research  on  properties  and 


30    Resources  for  Study  and  Research 


production  rate  optimization  of  viscous  polysaccharides  from  marine  microalgae. 
Computer-aided  data  acquisition  devices  are  being  developed  for  rapid  laboratory  and 
field  evaluation  of  several  aspects  of  primary  production,  including  short-term  evalua- 
tion of  the  metabolic  activity  of  the  integrated  water  column  ecosystem. 

Kenney,  B.  E.,  and  Ramus,  J.  1983.  Short-term  variations  in  seaweed  photosynthetic 
quotients.  (Abstr.  21F-10,  ASLO  winter  meeting.)  EOS  64(52):1042. 

Kenney,  B.  E.;  Litaker,  W.;  Duke,  C.  S.;  and  Ramus,  J.  1988.  Community  metabolism 
in  a  shallow  tidal  estuary.  Estuarine  Coastal  Shelf  Sci.  (In  press.) 

Litaker,  W.;  Duke,  C.  S.;  Kenney,  B.;  and  Ramus,  J.  1987.  Short-term  environment 
variability  and  phytoplankton  abundance  in  a  shallow  tidal  estuary.  I.  Winter  and  sum- 
mer. Mar.  Biol.  96:115-121. 

Dr.  William  W.  Kirby-Smith.  Marine  Ecology. 

Funded  research  projects  include:  (1)  a  study  of  the  fates  and  effects  of  pesticides 
and  herbicide  in  estuaries;  (2)  the  response  of  invertebrates,  fish  and  birds  to  open  marsh 
water  management  for  mosquito  control;  and  (3)  aerial  photographic  mapping  of  the 
North  Carolina  estuarine  sanctuaries.  In  addition,  I  work  on  problems  associated  with 
feeding  and  growth  of  suspension  feeders  in  relation  to  quantity  and  quality  of  food. 

Kirby-Smith,  W.  W.,  and  Ustach,  J.  1986.  Resistance  to  hurricane  damage  of  an  epi- 
faunal  community  on  the  continental  shelf  off  North  Carolina .  Estuarine  Coastal  Shelf  Sci. 
23:433-442. 

Takacs,  R.  L.;  Forward,  R.  B.,  Jr.;  and  Kirby-Smith,  W.  1988.  Effects  of  the  herbicide 
alachlor  on  larval  development  of  the  mud  crab  Rhithropanopeus  harrisii.  Estuaries  (In 
press.) 

Dr.  David  R.  McClay.  Cell-Cell  Interaction  in  the  Sea  Urchin  Embryo. 

A  number  of  molecules  have  been  found  that  participate  in  the  morphogenetic  cell 
rearrangements  during  early  development  of  the  sea  urchin  embryo.  The  research  ef- 
forts of  this  lab  are  to  characterize  the  molecules  involved,  to  determine  their  function, 
and  to  examine  how  the  different  steps  of  morphogenesis  are  interrelated  in  expression 
of  pattern.  The  tools  of  the  lab  incorporate  monoclonal  antibody  technology,  biochemistry, 
immunochemistry,  and  molecular  biology. 

McClay,  D.  R.,  and  Ettensohn,  C.  A.  1987.  Cell  adhesion  in  morphogenesis.  Ann. 
Rev.  Cell  Biol.  3:319-345. 

Alliegro,  M.  C,  and  McClay,  D.  R.  1988.  Storage  and  mobilization  of  extracellular 
matrix  proteins  during  sea  urchin  development.  Dev.  Biol.  125:208-216. 

Ettensohn,  C.  A.,  and  McClay,  D.  R.  1988.  Cell  lineage  conversion  in  the  sea  urchin 
embryo.  Dev.  Biol.  125:396-409. 

Dr.  Barry  Osmond.  Plant  Physiological  Ecology. 

The  physiology  and  ecology  of  photosynthesis  in  marine  organisms  shows  many 
analogies,  as  well  as  differences,  with  the  same  processes  in  land  plants.  Collaboration 
with  Dr.  J.  Ramus  is  designed  to  explore  the  processes  of  light  acclimation  and  potential 
susceptibility  to  photoinhibition  in  marine  macroalgae  under  different  light  and  tem- 
perature conditions  during  growth.  Other  studies  of  natural  abundance  stable  isotope 
composition  can  be  used  to  explore  biochemical  (enzymatic)  and  physical  (dif  fusional) 
limitations  to  photosynthetic  C02  uptake  in  seawater. 

Anderson,  J.  M.,  and  Osmond,  C.  B.  1987.  Sun-shade  responses  compromises  be- 
tween acclimation  and  photoinhibition.  In  Photoinhibition,  Topics  in  Photosynthesis,  eds. 
D.  J.  Kyle,  C.  B.  Osmond  and  C.  J.  Arntzen,  vol.  9,  pp.  1-38.  Amsterdam:  Elsevier. 

Chow,  W.  S.;  Osmond,  C.  B.;  and  Huang,  L.-K.  1988.  Photosystem  II  function  and 
herbicide  binding  sites  during  photoinhibition  of  spinach  chloroplasts  in-vivo  and  in- 
vitro.  Photosynthetic  Res.  (In  press.) 


Research  Staff  and  Their  Programs    31 


Ehleringer,  J.  R.,  and  Osmond,  C.  B.  1988.  Stable  isotopes.  In  Plant  Physiological  Ecol- 
ogy: Field  Methods  and  Instrumentation,  eds.  R.  W.  Pearcy,  H.  A.  Mooney  and  J.  R.  Eh- 
leringer.  Chapman  and  Hall.  (In  press.) 

Dr.  J.  Ramus.  Algal  Ecological  Physiology. 

We  study  physical  forcing  of  primary  productivity  in  a  coastal  plains  estuary  charac- 
terized by  high  flushing  rates  and  variable  nutrient  inputs.  To  do  so  requires  time- 
intensive  sampling  on  the  estuary— including  selected  hydrology,  water  chemistry, 
meteorology  and  productivity  parameters.  Ultimately,  the  research  seeks  a  match  be- 
tween species  specific  physiological  response  and  the  temporal  frequency  of  nutrient 
availability,  the  phasing  of  the  organism  with  its  environment. 

Biotechnological  research  includes  extracellular  polysaccharides  produced  by  ma- 
rine microphotoautotrophs.  Two  aspects  are  under  investigation:  (1)  environmental  regu- 
lation of  carbon  partitioning,  i.e. ,  the  diversion  of  newly  fixed  carbon  from  growth  (new 
photosynthetic  machinery)  to  disposable  heteropolysaccharides  (viscoelastic  bio- 
polymers),  and  (2)  drag  reducing  properties  of  the  biopolymers  in  pipe  flow. 

A  third  area  of  investigation  is  photoacclimation  in  seaweeds.  Of  specific  interest  are 
macromolecular  changes  in  the  photosynthetic  apparatus,  the  dynamic  range  of  change 
and  the  effect  of  change  on  growth  rate. 

Ramus,  J.,  and  Venable,  M.  1987.  Temporal  ammonium  patchiness  and  growth  rate 
in  Codium  and  Ulva  (Ulvophyceae).  /.  Phycol.  23:518-523. 

Duke,  C.  S.;  Lapointe,  B.  E.,  and  Ramus,  J.  1986.  Effect  of  light  on  growth,  RuBP- 
Case  activity  and  chemical  composition  of  Ulva  species  (Chlorophyta).  /.  Phycol. 
22:362-370. 

Litaker,  W.;  Duke,  C.  S.;  Kenney,  B.  E.;  and  Ramus,  J.  1987.  Short-term  environmental 
variability  and  phytoplankton  abundance  in  a  shallow  tidal  estuary.  I.  Winter  and  sum- 
mer. Mar.  B(o/.96:115-121. 

Dr.  Daniel  Rittschof .  Chemical  Ecology. 

(1)  Basic  studies  of  the  chemical  nature  and  functions  of  pheromones  and  other  sub- 
stances used  in  resource  location.  (2)  Contact  chemoreception,  chemical  induction  and 
inhibition  of  larval  settlement.  (3)  Isolation  and  purification  of  native  bioactive  molecules. 
(4)  Chemical  ecology  of  terrestrial  crabs. 

Rittschof,  D.,  and  Gruber,  G.  1988.  Response  to  prey  odors  by  oyster  drills,  Urosal- 
pinx  cinerea  cinerea,  Urosalpinx  cinerea  follyensis,  and  Eupleura  caudata  etteme.  Mar.  Behav. 
Physiol.  (In  press.) 

Maki,  J.;  Rittschof,  D;  Mitchell,  R.;  and  Costlow,  J.  D.  1988.  Effects  of  bacterial  films 
on  settlement  of  barnacle  larva.  Mar.  Biol.  97:199-206. 

Forward,  R.  B.,  Jr.;  Rittschof,  D.;  and  DeVries,  M.  1987.  Peptide  pheromones  syn- 
chronize crustacean  egg  hatching  and  larval  release.  Chem.  Sens.  12(3): 491-498. 

Drs.  J.  David  Robertson  and  John  Z.  Young.  Learning  and  Memory. 

This  laboratory  is  investigating  the  cellular  basis  of  learning  and  memory  using  Oc- 
topus vulgaris  as  the  experimental  animal.  The  work  is  now  concentrated  on  tactile  learning 
and  memory.  Previous  work  has  shown  that  octopus  is  a  very  favorable  animal  for  this 
research  because  tactile  learning  and  memory  is  localized  in  the  posterior  buccal  and 
subfrontal  lobes  of  the  supraesophageal  lobe  of  its  brain.  Surgical  removal  of  these  parts 
of  the  brain  completely  abolish  tactile  learning  and  memory.  The  drug  Cytochalasin  B, 
which  has  the  peculiar  property  of  causing  disruption  of  actin  dependent  portions  of 
the  cytoskeleton  of  cells,  has  been  found  to  be  as  effective  as  surgical  excision  in  block- 
ing tactile  learning  and  memory  in  this  animal.  The  animal  is  being  studied  behaviorally 
and  the  relevant  parts  of  the  brain  are  being  studied  structurally  and  biochemically  us- 
ing electron  microscopy  and  various  biochemical  and  immunological  methods. 


32    Resou  rces  for  Study  and  Research 


Robertson,  J.  D.;  Young,  J.  Z.;  Lee,  P.;  and  Bock,  C.  1987.  Tactile  learning  in  octopus 
is  affected  by  Cytochalasin  B.  Soc.  Neurosci.  Abstr.  13(2):803. 

Robertson,  J.D.;  Young,  J.  Z.;  Lee,  P.  H.;  Bock,  C.  B.  1987.  Possible  effects  of  Cytochala- 
sin on  memory  in  octopus.  In  2nd  World  Conference  of  Neuroscience  Abstr.  (Budapest,  Au- 
gust 16-21,  1987.)  (In  press.) 

Allen,  A.;  Michels,  J.;  and  Young,  J.  Z.  1985.  Memory  and  visual  discrimination  in 
squids.  Mar.  Behav.  Physiol.  11:271-282. 

Allen,  A.;  Michels,  J.;  and  Young,  J.  Z.  1986.  Possible  interactions  between  visual 
and  tactile  memories  in  octopus.  Mar.  Behav.  Physiol.  12:81-97. 

Dr.  Richard  B.  Searles.  Seaweed  Systematics. 

Biology  of  seaweeds  with  emphasis  on  systematics,  ecology,  and  biogeography  of 
tropical  algae  from  North  Carolina  and  the  Caribbean. 

Searles,  R.  B.  1984.  Seaweed  biogeography  of  the  mid-Atlantic  coast  of  the  United 
States.  Helgolander  Meeresunter.  38:259-271. 

Searles,  R.  B.,  and  Ballantine,  D.  L.  1986.  Dudresnaya  puertoricensis  sp.  nov.  (Dumon- 
tiaceae,  Gigartinales,  Rhodophyta).  /.  Phycol.  22:389-394. 

Searles,  R.  B.,  and  Schneider,  C.  W.  1987.  Observations  on  the  deep-water  flora  of 
Bermuda.  Hydwbiologia  151/152:261-266. 

Dr.  J.  Boiling  Sullivan.  Comparative  Protein  Biochemistry. 

The  primary  emphasis  in  the  biochemical  studies  involves  research  on  the  structure, 
function,  and  evolution  of  protein  molecules.  Proteins,  especially  those  involved  in  the 
transport  of  molecular  oxygen  (hemoglobin,  hemocyanin,  chlorocruorin,  and 
hemerythrin),  are  being  isolated  and  their  structural  and  functional  properties  elucidated. 
These  studies  are  intended  to  illustrate  how  protein  molecules  function,  as  well  as  how 
they  have  evolved.  Studies  of  protein  polymorphisms  are  intended  to  illustrate  gene  flow 
among  populations  and  offer  insights  into  the  adaptive  strategies  of  marine  organisms. 

Sullivan,  B.;  Pennell,  L.;  Hutchison,  B.;  and  Hutchings,  R.  1983.  Genetics  and  evo- 
lution of  the  hemocyanin  multigene.  I.  Genetic  variability  in  ilea  pugilatorhom  Beaufort, 
N.C.  Comp.  Biochem.  Physiol.  76:615-618. 

Sullivan,  B.;  Miller,  K.;  Singleton,  K.;  Scheer,  A.  G.;  and  Williams,  A.  B.  1984.  Elec- 
trophoretic  analyses  of  hemocyanins  from  four  species  of  mud  crabs,  genus  Panopeus, 
with  observations  on  the  ecology  of  P.  obesus.  Fish.  Bull.  (In  press.) 

Dr.  John  Sutherland.  Marine  Ecology. 

The  research  attempts  to  identify  and  understand  the  processes  which  result  in  the 
temporal  and  spatial  patterns  in  species  abundance  in  intertidal  and  subtidal,  epiben- 
thic  communities.  Changes  in  the  adult  populations  are  followed  with  point  sampling 
and  photographic  techniques.  The  approach  is  experimental  to  the  extent  that  species 
are  removed  or  excluded  from  the  community  to  assess  their  importance  in  community 
structure  and  function.  This  work  was  initiated  with  estuarine  animal  populations  near 
Beaufort.  Comparable  work  is  now  being  done  on  the  plant  and  animal  populations  in 
the  rocky  substrates  of  southern  Chile  and  the  Pacific  coast  of  Central  America. 

Sutherland,  ].  P.  1981.  The  fouling  community  at  Beaufort,  North  Carolina:  A  study 
in  stability.  Am.  Nat.  118:499-519. 

Sutherland,  J.  P.  1987.  Recruitment  limitation  in  a  tropical  intertidal  barnacle:  Tetraclita 
panamensis  (Pilsbry)  on  the  Pacific  coast  of  Costa  Rica./.  Exp.  Mar.  Biol.  Ecol.  113:267-282. 

Sutherland,  J.  P.,  and  Ortega,  S.  1985.  Competition  conditional  on  recruitment  and 
temporary  escape  from  predators  on  a  tropical  rocky  shore.  /.  Exp.  Mar.  Bio.  Ecol. 
95:155-166. 

Dr.  Joseph  Ustach.  Marsh  Ecology. 

Structure  and  functioning  of  wetlands,  especially  salt  marshes,  within  the  estua- 
rine system.  Major  areas  of  interest  are:  primary  production;  decomposition;  detritus 
formation  and  utilization;  habitat  utilization;  microbial-meiofaunal  interactions. 

Research  Staff  and  Their  Programs    33 


Ustach,  J.  F.  1982.  Algae,  bacteria  and  detritus  as  foods  for  the  harpacticoid  cope- 
pod,  Heteropsyllus  pseudonunni  Coull  and  Palmer.  /.  Exp.  Mar.  Biol.  Ecol.  64:203-214. 

Heinle,  D.  R.;  Flemer,  D.  A.;  and  Ustach,  J.  F.  1976.  Contribution  of  tidal  marshlands 
to  mid-Atlantic  estuarine  food  chains.  In  Estuarine  Processes,  ed.  M.  Wiley,  pp.  309-320. 
New  York:  Academic  Press. 

Dr.  Stephen  A.  Wainwright.  Functional  Morphology  and  Biomechanics. 

Plants  and  animals  have  specialized  structural  materials,  skeletal  elements,  and  en- 
tire supportive  systems  that  permit,  control,  and  limit  their  posture,  movement,  and  be- 
havior in  response  to  forces  of  gravity,  flow,  pressure,  and  muscle  contraction.  At  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory  we  are  studying  the  mechanical  design  of  (1)  swimming 
in  sharks,  rays,  marlin,  and  king  mackerel,  (2)  bending  and  pulling  (to  open  oysters)  by 
starfish,  (3)  movement  and  holding  position  on  surf -beaten  beaches  by  the  coquina  clam, 
and  (4)  stabilization  of  sediment  by  blue-green  bacterial  mats. 

Wainwright,  S.  A.  1983.  To  bend  a  fish.  In  Fish  Biomechanics,  eds.  P.  W.  Webb  and  D. 
Wiehs,  pp.  68-91.  New  York:  Praeger. 

Koehl,  M.  A.  R.,  and  Wainwright,  S.  A.  1977.  Mechanical  adaptations  of  a  giant  kelp. 
Limnol.  Oceanogr.  22:1067-1071. 

Hebrank,  M.  R.,  and  Hebrank,  J.  H.  1986.  The  mechanics  of  fish  skin:  Lack  of  an 
"external  tendon"  role  in  two  teleosts.  Biol.  Bull.  171:236-247. 

Research  Facilities 

Visiting  investigators  may  obtain  research  space  throughout  the  year.  Each  research 
laboratory  building  is  air-conditioned  and  equipped  with  running  seawater  through  a 
PVC  system.  There  are  tanks,  water  tables,  aquaria,  autoclaves,  ovens,  and  outdoor 
continuous-flow  growth  facilities.  In  addition  to  commonly  used  laboratory  equipment, 
the  following  are  available:  refrigerated  centrifuges,  fluorometers,  spectrophotometers, 
balances,  pH  meters,  hoods,  liquid  scintillation  counter,  constant  temperature  equip- 
ment, and  HPLC.  There  is  a  complete  sedimentological  research  laboratory  that  is 
equipped  for  state-of-the-art  chemical  and  size  analyses.  The  Marine  Laboratory  also 
maintains  darkrooms,  a  well-equipped  workshop,  a  stock  room,  and  a  purchasing 
department. 

As  a  result  of  funds  provided  by  the  National  Science  Foundation,  the  following  new 
research  equipment  and  systems  are  available  to  visiting  investigators  at  Duke  Marine 
Laboratory  as  well  as  to  resident  research  personnel:  water  purification  system,  spec- 
trophotometer, camera,  recorder  and  accessories,  spectrofluorometers,  power  supply, 
M-Drive,  CRT  screens,  and  a  printer  for  the  Compupro  computer,  a  respirometer  as  well 
as  accessory  items  for  the  existing  underwater  spectroradiometer.  The  most  recently  fund- 
ed acquisitions  include  a  motion  analyses  system,  static  image  analyzer,  and  draft  plotter. 

In  addition,  the  National  Science  Foundation  has  funded  a  number  of  general  facil- 
ity improvements  such  as  renovations  to  the  R/ V  First  Mate,  renovations  to  the  seawater 
system,  and  updating  the  autoanalyzer  to  state-of-the-art  equipment. 

Funding  made  available  by  the  Office  of  Naval  Research  has  provided  for  a  flow  in- 
jection nutrient  analyzer,  IBM  AT  computer,  and  accessory  items  for  the  existing  under- 
water spectroradiometer. 

I.  E.  Gray  Library-Auditorium.  Located  in  the  building  are  the  1,917  square  feet  au- 
ditorium, with  stage,  a  library,  the  librarian's  office,  two  seminar  rooms,  a  receiving  room, 
a  kitchenette,  and  two  closed  carrels.  The  auditorium  has  a  seating  capacity  of  approxi- 
mately 300  and  is  suitable  for  lectures,  seminars,  symposia,  and  small  regional  or  na- 
tional meetings.  Inquiries  concerning  use  of  auditorium  or  seminar  room  space  should 
be  addressed  to  Personnel  and  Auxiliaries,  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort, 
North  Carolina  28516. 


34    Resources  for  Study  and  Research 


The  building  houses  the  Pearse  Memorial  Library  which  contains  about  53,000  cata- 
logued reference  books  and  journals,  135  current  journals,  and  23,000  reprints.There  are 
also  expedition  reports  in  oceanography,  a  microfilm  library  of  graduate  student  theses 
based  on  research  at  the  laboratory,  and  a  microfilm  reader.  Other  materials  may  be  ob- 
tained by  special  delivery  system  from  the  Perkins  Library  on  the  Durham  campus  or 
through  the  interlibrary  loan  service  with  other  libraries  in  the  United  States. 

Natural  History  Resource  Center.  The  Natural  History  Resource  Center  (NHRC) 
preserves  and  disseminates  knowledge  concerning  ecological  systems  and  the  distribu- 
tion and  abundance  of  marine  plants  and  animals.  The  center  consists  of  an  extensive 
reference  collection  of  marine  organisms  (the  museum),  a  library  of  taxonomic  references 
and  ecological  publications,  and  a  research  laboratory  designed  to  facilitate  the  collec- 
tion, preservation  and  identification  of  marine  organisms.  The  center  provides  students, 
researchers,  and  laymen  with  advice  on  the  natural  history  of  North  Carolina's  marine 
ecosystems.  With  its  growth  in  size  and  function,  the  NHRC  plans  to  expand  its  service 
through  the  publication  of  a  technical  reports  and  monographs  series.  Dr.  William  W. 
Kirby-Smith  is  director  of  the  Natural  History  Resource  Center. 

Computing  Facilities.  The  Marine  Laboratory  operates  a  Compupro  System  8/16 
computer  for  use  by  staff,  students,  and  visiting  investigators.  The  computer  has  1  MB 
of  memory  and  is  operated  under  the  MC-DOS  operating  system.The  BASIC,  FORTRAN, 
and  Pascal  programming  languages  are  available,  as  well  as  application  programs  for  word 
processing,  statistical  analysis,  data  base  management,  and  graphics.  A  21Mb  hard  disk 
drive  and  two  eight-inch  floppy  disk  drives  are  used  for  data  storage.  There  are  a  variety 
of  video  terminals,  graphics  terminals,  printers  and  plotters. 

The  Marine  Laboratory  is  also  the  site  of  one  of  Duke  University's  public  IBM  clusters. 
Three  work  stations  are  networked  to  an  IBM/AT  which  has  a  30Mb  hard  disk  drive.  The 
BASIC  language  is  available  along  with  programs  for  word  processing  and  data  base 
management.  Statistical  analysis  is  by  means  of  a  PC/SAS,  installed  on  the  hard  disk  drive. 
Each  station  is  an  IBM/XT  with  two  5.25  inch  floppy  disks,  640K  memory,  and  math 
coprocessor.  Output  is  by  means  of  two  IBM  Proprinters. 

R/V  Cape  Hatteras.  The  Duke/University  of  North  Carolina  Oceanographic  Con- 
sortium operates  a  135-foot  research  vessel,  the  R/V  Cape  Hatteras.  The  ship  operates  both 
on  the  continental  shelf  and  in  the  deep  sea  in  the  western  North  Atlantic,  concentrat- 
ing in  the  region  between  Nova  Scotia  on  the  north,  the  Caribbean  on  the  south,  and 
Bermuda  to  the  east.  The  ship  is  a  member  of  the  academic  research  fleet  supported  by 
the  National  Science  Foundation  for  the  purpose  of  providing  oceanographic  research 
opportunities  to  investigators.  Inquiries  concerning  use  of  the  research  vessel  should 
be  addressed  to  the  Duke/UNC  Oceanographic  Consortium,  Marine  Laboratory,  Duke 
University,  Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516. 

Financial  Information 

Figures  quoted  in  this  section  are  projections  and  may  be  subject  to  change  in  many  cases 
without  prior  notice.  All  rates  are  effective  9  May  1988  to  14  May  1989. 

Room  and  Board  Costs.  All  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  visitors  who  stay 
on  the  island  will  pay  a  room  and  board  fee  as  follows:  $23  per  day  (1-6  days);  $144  per 
week  (7  +  days).  Allowances  will  be  made  only  for  meals  missed  at  the  beginning  and 
end  of  the  stay. 

Boat  Rentals.  The  following  boats  are  available  at  the  laboratory  for  collecting  and 
instructional  activities.  Charges  apply  to  all  research  and  teaching  activities. 


Financial  Information    35 


Boat  Type  Charges 

50  ft.  cruiser/trawler  (First  Mate)*  $40  per  hour 

20  ft.  outboard  runabouts  $20  per  hour 

16  ft.  outboard  runabout  $15  per  hour 

Outboard  skiffs  $  5  per  hour 


*Crew  required  for  safety  of  user  and  vessel. 

NOTE:  Overtime,  if  applicable,  is  $40  per  hour  for  the  FirsJ  Mate;  $20  per  hour  for  other  craft. 

These  rates  are  intended  to  partially  defray  the  cost  of  operating  and  maintaining 
these  boats. 

These  boats  may  be  scheduled  by  visiting  researchers  through  the  Maintenance  Of- 
fice; however,  first  priority  must  be  given  to  classes  when  they  are  in  session.  Use  of  Duke 
University  Marine  Laboratory  vessels  for  any  sponsored  research  will  be  subject  to 
charges. 

Research  Space.  Research  space,  including  seawater  tables,  is  available  on  a  limited 
basis  for  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory  visitors.  Research  space  rent  for  all  users 
is  $2.25  per  square  foot  per  month.  Typical  size  of  laboratory-office  area  is  100  square 
feet.  Requests  for  laboratory  space,  office  space,  and/or  seawater  tables  should  be  sent 
to  Personnel  and  Auxiliaries,  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory,  Beaufort,  North  Caro- 
lina 28516. 

Teaching  Space.  Various  size  classrooms  are  available  throughout  the  year;  however, 
first  priority  must  be  given  to  Marine  Laboratory  classes  when  they  are  in  session.  Cost 
for  such  space  is  $25-$35/day  depending  upon  which  laboratory  is  utilized.  Requests  for 
these  teaching  areas,  including  class  needs  such  as  seawater  tables,  collecting  equipment, 
etc.,  should  be  sent  to  Personnel  and  Auxiliaries,  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory, 
Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516. 


36    Resources  for  Study  and  Research 


APPLICATION  FOR  ENROLLMENT  IN  THE  DUKE  UNIVERSITY  MARINE  LABORATORY 
UNDERGRADUATE  MARINE  SCIENCES  PROGRAM 


Please  fill  out  completely;  type  or  print. 


Please  specify:  Spring  Semester 


Date. 


Fall  Semester 


Year 


1.    Mr.,  Ms. 


M1ddle 


2.  Social  Securty  Number 

3.  Date  of  Birth:  Month 


Day. 


Year. 


4.    A.  Current  full  mailing  address: 

Street  or  P.O.  Box    

City 


Telephone  Number  (including  area  code) 
B.    Permanent  or  home  full  mailing  address: 

Street  or  P.O.  Box    

City 


State. 


Zip. 


Telephone  Number  (including  area  code) 


State. 


Zip. 


5.    Name  and  full  mailing  address  of  parents  or  guardian: 

Name    

Street  or  P.O.  Box  

City     


Relationship 


State 


Zip 


Telephone  Number  (including  area  code)   

6.    DUKE  STUDENT  (only) 

A.  Trinity Engineering Other  (specify) 

B.  Major 


C.  Class  (e.g.,  junior,  senior)  at  time  of  enrollment  at  DUML 

D.  Expected  date  of  graduation 


NOTE:  Duke  Students  must  obtain  the  approval  of  their  assigned  departmental  adviser  on  this  application. 
E.    Adviser's  signature Date 


7.     NONDUKE  STUDENT  (Students  from  institutions  other  than  Duke  who  are  attending  for  the  semester 
only  and  who  will  be  classified  as  special,  nondegree  students) 

A.  Name  and  address  of  home  institution: 


City  _ 
B.    Major. 


State 


Zip 


C.  Class  (e.g.,  junior,  senior)  at  time  of  enrollment  at  DUML 

D.  Expected  date  of  graduation 


37 


E  .  The  following  person  has  been  requested  to  mail  a  letter  of  recommendation  to  the  Admissions  Of- 
fice of  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory: 


Name 


Position 


Institution, 


F.    Transcript(s)  will  be  sent  by  the  following  institution(s): 


G .  List  courses  currently  in  progress  (which  would  not  yet  appear  on  a  transcript): 


H  .  Have  you  ever  been  placed  on  probation  or  suspended  or  dismissed  from  any  school? 

No Yes (If  yes,  please  explain  below.) 

Mail  Application  to: 

Admissions 

Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory 

Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516 


38 


APPLICATION  FOR  ENROLLMENT  IN  THE  DUKE  UNIVERSITY  MARINE  LABORATORY 

SUMMER  SESSION 

Fill  out  completely;  type  or  print. 

Date    


Mr.  Ms. 


Date  of  Birth:  Month Day Year . 

Social  Security  Number 


Current  full  mailing  address: 
Street  or  P.O.  Box 


City State Zip. 

Telephone  Number  (including  area  code)  

Permanent  or  home  full  mailing  address: 
Street  or  P.O.  Box 


City State Zip_ 

Telephone  Number  (including  area  code)  

Name  and  full  mailing  address  of  parents  or  guardian: 

Name     Relationship     

Street  or  P.O.  Box 


City State Zip_ 

Telephone  Number  (including  area  code)  

DUKE  STUDENT 

Undergraduate:  Trinity Engineering Other  (please  specify)  

Graduate:  Grad.  Sch.  Arts  &  Sci.  Sch.  Forestry  &  Env.  Studies 


Other  (please  specify) 

Class  (e.g.,  junior,  1st  yr.  M.S.)  at  time  of  enrollment  at  DUML  

Expected  date  of  graduation 

Major 

NONDUKE  STUDENT  (Attending  Summer  Session  only) 
Unclassified:  Prebaccalaureate Class  (e.g.,  junior) 


Postbaccalaureate Class  (e.g.,  1st  yr.  M.S.] 

Major  


Expected  date  of  graduation 


If  presently  attending,  list  name  and  address  of  school: 


Have  you  previously  attended  Duke:  No Yes (Give  dates): 


Have  you  received  a  degree  from  Duke:  No Yes (Give  dates): 


39 


ALL  STUDENTS  (Applying  to  courses  numbered  100  or  higher) 
List  courses  currently  in  progress  (which  would  not  yet  appear  on  a  transcript): 


List  other  colleges  and/or  universities  attended  and  degree(s)  received:     

EACH  APPLICANT  IS  REQUIRED  TO  COMPLETE  AND  SUBMIT  THIS  APPLICATION  BLANK  AND  TRAN- 
SCRIPT(S)  (transcript  required  of  students  applying  to  courses  numbered  100  or  higher)  OF  ACADEMIC  WORK 
COMPLETED  TO  DATE  TO  THE  ADMISSIONS  OFFICE.  NOTE:  A  maximum  of  one  6  graduate  unit  or  Vh 
course  program  (6  semester  hours)  will  be  permitted  per  term  (unless  appropriate  approval  is  obtained);  FIRST 
AND  SECOND  CHOICES  SHOULD  BE  INDICATED.  LIST  COURSE(S)  DESIRED  BELOW: 

FIRST  TERM: 

Course  Number  Course  Title 

1 

2 


(DUKE  STUDENTS  ONLY)  Approval  of  assigned  adviser;  after  May  9,  Dean's  approval  required. 

Adviser's/Dean's  Signature Date 

SECOND  TERM: 

Course  Number  Course  Title 

1. 

2 


(DUKE  STUDENTS  ONLY)  Approval  of  assigned  adviser;  after  May  9,  Dean's  approval  required. 

Adviser's/Dean's  Signature Date 

THIRD  TERM: 

Course  Number  Course  Title 


2. 

(DUKE  STUDENTS  ONLY)  Approval  of  assigned  adviser;  after  May  9,  Dean's  approval  required. 
Adviser's/ Dean's  Signature Date 


SUMMER  TUITION  SCHOLARSHIPS  AVAILABLE  ON  COMPETITIVE  BASIS.  In  addition  to  this  com- 
pleted application  and  current  academic  transcript(s),  scholarship  applicants  must  submit  a  letter  of  recom- 
mendation from  academic  faculty  and  a  brief  statement  of  purpose,  i.e.,  the  reason  for  taking  the  particular 
course.  To  be  considered  for  a  summer  tuition  scholarship  an  applicant  must  first  be  admitted  to  a  specific 
course.  All  supporting  scholarship  credentials  must  be  received  by  the  Admissions  Office  of  the  Marine 
Laboratory  no  later  than  Thursday,  March  30,  1989.  For  additional  information,  see  the  section  on  Financial 
Assistance  in  the  1989  Marine  Laboratory  Bulletin.  Please  complete  below: 

Please  consider  me  for  a  summer  tuition  scholarship:    YES  NO  

Mail  Application  to: 

Admissions 

Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory 

Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516 


40 


APPLICATION  FOR  ENROLLMENT  IN  THE  DUKE  UNIVERSITY  MARINE  LABORATORY 
UNDERGRADUATE  MARINE  SCIENCES  PROGRAM 


Please  fill  out  completely;  type  or  print. 


Please  specify:  Spring  Semester 


Date. 


Fall  Semester 


1.    Mr.,  Ms. 


Middle 


2.  Social  Securty  Number 

3.  Date  of  Birth:  Month 


Day_ 


Year_ 


4.    A.  Current  full  mailing  address: 

Street  or  P.O.  Box    

City 


Telephone  Number  (including  area  code) 
B.    Permanent  or  home  full  mailing  address: 

Street  or  P.O.  Box    

City i 


State. 


Zip. 


Telephone  Number  (including  area  code)  . 


State. 


Zip. 


5.    Name  and  full  mailing  address  of  parents  or  guardian: 

Name   

Street  or  P.O.  Box  

City     


Relationship 


State 


Zip 


Telephone  Number  (including  area  code)    

6.    DUKE  STUDENT  (only) 

A.  Trinity Engineering Other  (specify) 

B.  Major 


C.  Class  (e.g.,  junior,  senior)  at  time  of  enrollment  at  DUML 

D.  Expected  date  of  graduation 


NOTE:  Duke  Students  must  obtain  the  approval  of  their  assigned  departmental  adviser  on  this  application. 

E.    Adviser's  signature Date 

7.     NONDUKE  STUDENT  (Students  from  institutions  other  than  Duke  who  are  attending  for  the  semester 
only  and  who  will  be  classified  as  special,  nondegree  students) 

A.  Name  and  address  of  home  institution: 


City   _ 
B.    Major. 


State 


Zip 


C.   Class  (e.g.,  junior,  senior)  at  time  of  enrollment  at  DUML 
D   Expected  date  of  graduation 


41 


E .  The  following  person  has  been  requested  to  mail  a  letter  of  recommendation  to  the  Admissions  Of- 
fice of  the  Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory: 

Name    Position    

Institution 

F.  Transcript(s)  will  be  sent  by  the  following  institution(s): 


G  .  List  courses  currently  in  progress  (which  would  not  yet  appear  on  a  transcript): 


H  .  Have  you  ever  been  placed  on  probation  or  suspended  or  dismissed  from  any  school? 

No Yes (If  yes,  please  explain  below. ) 

Mail  Application  to: 

Admissions 

Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory 

Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516 


42 


APPLICATION  FOR  ENROLLMENT  IN  THE  DUKE  UNIVERSITY  MARINE  LABORATORY 

SUMMER  SESSION 

Fill  out  completely;  type  or  print. 

Date 


Mr.  Ms. 


Last 


Date  of  Birth:  Month  . 


Day. 


Year. 


Social  Security  Number. 


Current  full  mailing  address: 

Street  or  P.O.  Box 

City 


Telephone  Number  (including  area  code) 
Permanent  or  home  full  mailing  address: 

Street  or  P.O.  Box 

City 


State. 


Zip. 


Telephone  Number  (including  area  code) 


State . 


Zip_ 


Name  and  full  mailing  address  of  parents  or  guardian: 

Name     

Street  or  P.O.  Box 

City 

Telephone  Number  (including  area  code)  

DUKE  STUDENT 
Undergraduate:  Trinity Engineering  . 


Relationship 


State . 


Zip. 


Other  (please  specify) 


Sch.  Forestry  &  Env.  Studies  . 


Graduate:  Grad.  Sch.  Arts  &  Sci. 

Other  (please  specify) 

Class  (e.g.,  junior,  1st  yr.  M.S.)  at  time  of  enrollment  at  DUML 

Expected  date  of  graduation 

Major 


NONDUKE  STUDENT  (Attending  Summer  Session  only) 

Unclassified:  Prebaccalaureate Class  (e.g.,  junior) 

Postbaccalaureate Class  (e.g.,  1st  yr.  M.S.)  . 

Major 


Expected  date  of  graduation 


If  presently  attending,  list  name  and  address  of  school: 


Have  you  previously  attended  Duke:  No  . 


Yes. 


Have  you  received  a  degTee  from  Duke:  No  . 


Yes. 


(Give  dates): 


(Give  dates): 


43 


ALL  STUDENTS  (Applying  to  courses  numbered  100  or  higher) 
List  courses  currently  in  progress  (which  would  not  yet  appear  on  a  transcript): 


List  other  colleges  and/or  universities  attended  and  degree(s)  received: 


EACH  APPLICANT  IS  REQUIRED  TO  COMPLETE  AND  SUBMIT  THIS  APPLICATION  BLANK  AND  TRAN- 
SCRIPTS) (transcript  required  of  students  applying  to  courses  numbered  100  or  higher)  OF  ACADEMIC  WORK 
COMPLETED  TO  DATE  TO  THE  ADMISSIONS  OFFICE.  NOTE:  A  maximum  of  one  6  graduate  unit  or  Vh 
course  program  (6  semester  hours)  will  be  permitted  per  term  (unless  appropriate  approval  is  obtained);  FIRST 
AND  SECOND  CHOICES  SHOULD  BE  INDICATED.  LIST  COURSE(S)  DESIRED  BELOW: 

FIRST  TERM: 

Course  Number  Course  Title 

1 

2 

(DUKE  STUDENTS  ONLY)  Approval  of  assigned  adviser;  after  May  9,  Dean's  approval  required. 

Adviser's/ Dean's  Signature Date 

SECOND  TERM: 

Course  Number  Course  Title 


(DUKE  STUDENTS  ONLY)  Approval  of  assigned  adviser;  after  May  9,  Dean's  approval  required. 

Adviser's/Dean's  Signature Date 

THIRD  TERM: 

Course  Number  Course  Title 

1. 

2. 


(DUKE  STUDENTS  ONLY)  Approval  of  assigned  adviser;  after  May  9,  Dean's  approval  required. 
Adviser's/Dean's  Signature Date 


SUMMER  TUITION  SCHOLARSHIPS  AVAILABLE  ON  COMPETITIVE  BASIS.  In  addition  to  this  com- 
pleted application  and  current  academic  transcript(s),  scholarship  applicants  must  submit  a  letter  of  recom- 
mendation from  academic  faculty  and  a  brief  statement  of  purpose,  i.e.,  the  reason  for  taking  the  particular 
course.  To  be  considered  for  a  summer  tuition  scholarship  an  applicant  must  first  be  admitted  to  a  specific 
course.  All  supporting  scholarship  credentials  must  be  received  by  the  Admissions  Office  of  the  Marine 
Laboratory  no  later  than  Thursday,  March  30,  1989.  For  additional  information,  see  the  section  on  Financial 
Assistance  in  the  1989  Marine  Laboratory  Bulletin.  Please  complete  below: 

Please  consider  me  for  a  summer  tuition  scholarship:    YES  NO  

Mail  Application  to: 

Admissions 

Duke  University  Marine  Laboratory 

Beaufort,  North  Carolina  28516 


44 


o 


9  °  £  §  § 

CO    CD    <*>    J:    _ 


1-8 

oc  tr  ,_ 

9  5   £ 

&  ° 
a:  uj  a. 

<  -i  a 

bsI 

3  g  « 
HJ  <  ? 
z  ->  * 


o  < 
£  < 

Si 

%  i  s 

Z  g   < 

5  -i  o: 

S  <  3 

3    CK    O 


o 
I 

z 
o 


o   h    i_  u. 

z   o    o_  u. 

<     I     <     UJ 


C-SINWNWNN 

o 


~> 

n 

IT 

<> 

z 

n 

•3 

X 

z 

o 
</■) 

hi 

rr 

z 

en 

i 

£ 

CO 

2 

1- 

K 

o 

Li- 

CO 

O 
I 
V 

en 
D 
O 
I 

< 

o 

o 

IE 

UJ 

or 

UJ 

h- 
ct 

>- 
IK 

0 

m 

CO 

u. 

-I 
UJ 

z 
z 
< 

<I 

< 

u 

h- 

<  > 

z 

a 

o 

hl 

I 

a 

< 

< 

en 

i 

o 

o 

Z 

1- 

CO 

u 

en 

u 

(0 

_ 

C\J 

ro 

T 

Irt 

IX> 

r- 

CD 

CD 

8 

C\j 

UJ 

a: 

Z 
4 

P 

z 
o 

en 

UJ 

o 

lil 

1- 

0: 

1- 

c/> 

OJ 

III 

en 
5 

cr 
o 

p 

_> 
O 
<n 

hi 

or 

> 

III 

hl 

LC 

Ul 

i- 

^ 

1- 

CE 

UJ 

Z 

z 
o 

< 
3 
Q 

s 
o 

-I 

CK 

< 

s 

O 
Li. 
") 

cc 

< 

en 
o 

o 

< 
UJ 

(J 

UJ 

CD 

cj 

z 

m 

z 

P    z    ^  cT 

111     ID     ZCL 
M     <     O 


cn 

3 


2    —   CMrotcOCOf^CDCD 
O 

a. 


Af 


I 


oa 

01 
P 


T3  O 

Oc 
en 

I3 

a 

m 
a 

o 


<—  C 

,    (/)  = 

3"  "3  re 

tn  a; 

o  3 

SI 

VI 

O 

ON 


a 

c 
re 

C 

3 

<' 

0) 


1  r-  3 

<X  re 
S    O 

ff     0) 


11 

z 
o 


I 


bulletin  of 

DukeUniversity 
1989-90 


The  Divinity  School 


bulletin  of 

DukeUniversity 
1989-90 

The  Divinity  School 


EDITOR 

Judv  Smith 

SENIOR  EDITORIAL  ASSISTANTS 

Elizabeth  Matheson 


DIVINITY  SCHOOL  LIAISON 
Carter  Askren 

PHOTOGRAPHS 

Ron  Ferrell 

Jerry  Markatos 

Les  Todd 
Jimmy  Wallace 


Typesetting  by  Paste-Ups,  Ltd.,  Research  Triangle  Park,  North  Carolina 
Printed  by  PBM  Graphics,  Research  Triangle  Park,  North  Carolina 

The  information  in  the  bulletin  applies  to  the  academic  year  1989-90  and  is  accurate  and  current,  to  the  best 
of  our  knowledge,  as  of  February,  1989.  The  university  reserves  the  right  to  change  programs  of  study,  academic 
requirements,  lecturers,  teaching  staffs,  the  announced  university  calendar,  and  other  matters  described  in  the 
bulletin  without  prior  notice,  in  accordance  with  established  procedures. 

Duke  University  does  not  discriminate  on  the  basis  of  race,  color,  national  and  ethnic  origin,  handicaps, 
sexual  orientation  or  preference,  sex,  or  age  in  the  administration  of  educational  policies,  admission  policies, 
financial  aid,  emplovment,  or  any  other  university  program  or  activity.  It  admits  qualified  students  to  all  the  rights, 
privileges,  programs,  and  activities  generally  accorded  or  made  available  to  students.  For  further  information, 
call  Dolores  L.  Burke,  Equal  Opportunity  Officer,  (919)  684-8111. 

For  further  information  about  the  Divinity  School,  call  (919)  684-3234. 


Volume  61  June  1989  Number  4A 

The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University  (USPS  073-680)  is  published  by  Duke  University,  Duke  Station,  Durham,  North 
Carolina  27706  as  follows:  monthly— May;  semimonthly— March,  April,  June,  and  August;  thrice-monthly— 
September.  Second-class  postage  paid  at  Durham. 


Contents 


Calendar  4 

University  Administration  5 

General  Information  10 

History  11 

The  Role  of  the  Divinity  School  11 
The  Relation  of  the  Divinity  School  to  Duke 

University  12 

Faculty  i6 

Faculty  Biographical  Information  17 

Admissions  24 

Requirements  and  Procedures  25 

Community  Life  30 

Corporate  Worship  31 

Living  Accommodations  31 

Student  Health  32 

Motor  Vehicles  34 

Student  Activities  and  Organizations  34 

Financial  Programs  38 

Fees  and  Expenses  39 

Student  Financial  Aid  41 

Field  Education  50 

International  Programs  56 

Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs  60 

Continuing  Education  64 

Admission  and  Scholarships  65 

In-Residence  Seminars  and  Conferences  65 

International  Travel-Study  Seminars  65 

The  Convocation  and  Pastors'  School  67 

Additional  Study  Opportunities  68 

Curriculum  72 

Degree  Programs  73 
Doctoral  Studies  Accredited  by  the 

Graduate  School  74 
The  Basic  Theological  Degree-Master  of 

Divinity  76 

The  Master  of  Religious  Education  Degree  80 

Master  of  Theological  Studies  82 

The  Master  of  Theology  83 

Duke  Summer  Session  84 

Courses  of  Instruction  86 

Appendix  ios 


Calendar  of  the  Divinity  School 


Fall,  1989 


August 

23 
24 

25 

28 
28 
29 


September 

8 

October 

13 


18 
25-26 
30-31 


November 

1 

22 
27 

December 


Wednesday—  Orientation  for  new  students  begins 

Thursday— Orientation  continues 

Friday,  9:00-10:30  A.M.— Registration  for  returning  students 

10:30-12:00  noon— Registration  for  new  students 
Monday,  12:00  noon— Fall  semester  classes  begin 
Monday— Drop/add  period  begins 
Tuesday,  10:00  A.M.— Divinity  School  Opening  Convocation— Duke  University 

Chapel 


Friday,  12:00  noon— Drop/add  period  ends 


Friday,  4:00  P.M.— Last  day  to  withdraw  with  "W" 

6:00  P.M.— Fall  recess  begins 
Wednesday,  8:30  A.M.— Fall  recess  ends 
Wednesday-Thursday— Registration  for  spring  semester 
Monday-Wednesday— Divinity  School  Convocation  and  Pastors'  School,  Gray 

Lectures  and  Hickman  Lectures 


Divinity  School  Convocation  and  Pastors'  School,  Gray  Lectures  and  Hickman 

Lectures 
Wednesday,  1:00  P.M.— Thanksgiving  recess  begins 
Monday,  12:00  Noon— Classes  resume 


12 
15 


Friday— Fall  semester  classes  end 
Tuesday— Final  examinations  begin 
Friday— Final  examinations  end 


Spring,  1990 


January 

9 
10 

11 
24 

March 

9 

19 

28-29 

April 

12 
13 
25 

27 

May 

1 

4 

12 

13 


Tuesday— Orientation  for  new  students 

Wednesday— Registration  for  new  students;  registration  changes  for  returning 

students 
Thursday,  8:30  A.M.— Spring  semester  classes  begin— Drop/add  period  begins 
Wednesday,  12:00  Noon— Drop  add  period  ends 


Friday,  4:00  P.M.— Last  date  to  withdraw  with  "W";  6:00  P.M.— Spring  recess  begins 
Monday,  12:00  Noon— Spring  classes  resume 
Wednesday-Thursday— Registration  for  fall  semester 


Maundy  Thursday— Classes  do  not  meet 
Good  Friday— Classes  do  not  meet 

Wednesday,  10:00  A.M.— Divinity  School  Closing  Convocation- 
Chapel 
Friday— Spring  semester  classes  end 


Duke  University 


Tuesday— Final  examinations  begin 

Friday— Final  examinations  end 

Saturday,  6:30  P.M.— Divinity  School  Baccalaureate  Service 

Sunday,  10:00  A.M.— Commencement  exercises 


University  Administration 

GENERAL  ADMINISTRATION 

H.  Keith  H.  Brodie,  M.D.,  LL.D.,  President 

Phillip  A.  Griffiths,  Ph.D.,  Provost 

Ralph  Snyderman,  M.D.,  Chancellor  for  Health  Affairsand  Dean  of  the  Medical  School 

William  G.  Anlyan,  M.D.,  D.Sc,  Chancellor 

Eugene  J.  McDonald,  LL.M.,  Executive  Vice-President 

Joel  L.  Fleishman,  LL.M.,  Senior  Vice-President 

J.  Peyton  Fuller,  A.B.,  Vice-President,  Planning  and  Treasurer 

William  J.  Griffith,  A.B.,  Vice-President  for  Student  Affairs 

John  J.  Piva,  Jr.,  B.A.,  Vice-President  for  Alumni  Affairs  and  Development 

Patricia  C.  Skarulis,  M.A.,  Vice-President  for  Information  Systems 

Andrew  G.  Wallace,  M.D.,  Vice-President  for  Health  Affairs 

John  F.  Adcock,  M.B.  A.,  Vice-President  and  Corporate  Controller 

Tom  A.  Butters,  B.A.,  Vice-President  and  Director  of  Athletics 

N.  Allison  Haltom,  A.B.,  Secretary  of  the  University 

Divinity  School  Administration 

EDUCATIONAL  ADMINISTRATION 

Dennis  M.  Campbell  (1979),  B.D,  Ph.D.,  D.D.,  Dean  of  the  Divinity  School 

Russell  E.  Richey  (1986),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Dean  for  Academic  Programs 

B.  Maurice  Ritchie  (1973),  B.D.,  Th.M.,  Associate  Dean  for  Student  Life  and  Field  Education 

Paula  E.  Gilbert  (1980),  M.Div.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Dean  for  Planning  and  Special  Projects 

Gregory  F.  Duncan  (1988),  M.Div.,  Director  of  Admissions 

Wesley  F.  Brown  (1981),  M.Div.,  Director  of  Development  and  Alumni  Affairs 

W.  Joseph  Mann  (1984),  M.Div.,  S.T.M.,  Director  of  Continuing  Education 

William  C.  Turner,  Jr.  (1989),  M.Div.,  Ph.D.,  Director  of  Black  Church  Affairs 

Kelli  Walker-Jones  (1985),  M.Div.,  Associate  Director  of  Admissions  and  Development 

CarterS.  Askren  (1988),  B.S.,  Director  of  Communications 

Clara  S.  Godwin  (1969),  Administrative  Assistant  for  General  Administration  and  Finance 

Wilson  O.  Weldon  (1981),  B.D.,  D.D,  Special  Assistant  to  the  Dean 

Division  of  Special  Programs 

Robert  L.  Wilson  (1970),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Director,  ].  M.  Ormond  Center  for  Research,  Planning,  and  Development 

Division  of  Advanced  Studies 

Stanley  Hauerwas,  Ph.D.,  Director  of  Graduate  Studies  in  Religion 

Library 

Donn  Michael  Farris  (1950),  M.Div.,  M.S.  in  L.S.,  Librarian 
Harriet  V.  Leonard  (1960),  M.Div.,  M.S.  in  L.S.,  Reference  Librarian 
Tom  Clark,  B.A.,  Circulation  Librarian 
Susan  A.  Rogers,  M.Div.,  Assistant  Circulation  Librarian 
Melissa  Harrell,  B.S.,  Assistant  to  the  Librarian 

SUPPORT  STAFF 

Virginia  W.  Ashmore,  B.A.,  Faculty  Secretary 

Margaret  Lois  Blanton,  Administrative  Secretary,  Office  of  the  Dean 

Anita  Gail  Chappell,  Faculty  Secretary 

Mary  P  Chestnut,  Secretary,  Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs  and  Faculty  Secretary 

Mary  Deasey  Collins,  M.S.,  Ph.D.,  Administrative  Secretary,  Registry 

Anne  Cordts,  Administrative  Secretary,  Office  of  Continuing  Education 

Sarah  Freedman,  M.A.,  Faculty  Secretary 

Maxie  B.  Honeycutt,  Financial  Aid  Assistant 

Marjorie  L.  Lobsiger,  Faculty  Secretary 

Margie  M.  Meeler,  Secretary,  Office  of  Student  Life  and  Field  Education 

Frances  D.  Parrish,  Staff  Assistant 

Virginia  Parrish,  Faculty  Secretary 

Annie  C.  Ragan,  Faculty  Secretary 


Marie  Smith,  Secretary,  Office  of  Development  and  Alumni  Affairs,  and  Faculty  Secretary 
Betty  Anne  "Dink"  Suddaby,  Secretary,  Office  of  Admissions  and  Student  Life 
Shelby  Carver  Wallen,  Word  Processing  Coordinator  and  Faculty  Secretary 

FACULTY 

Lloyd  Richard  Bailey  (1971),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Old  Testament 

Teresa  Berger  (1985),  L.Th.,  M.Th.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Ecumenical  Theology 

Dennis  M.  Campbell  (1979),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  D.D.,  Professor  of  Theology 

Jerry  D.  Campbell  (1985),  M.Div.,  M.S.  in  L.S.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  the  Practice  of  Theological  Bibliography 

*  Ted  A.  Campbell  (1985),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Church  History 
James  L.  Crenshaw  (1987),  B.D,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Old  Testament 
James  Michael  Efird  (1962),  B.D,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Biblical  Interpretation 
Donn  Michael  Farris  (1950),  M.Div.,  M.S.  in  L.S.,  Professor  of  Theological  Bibliography 
Mary  McClintock  Fulkerson  (1983),  M.Div.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Theology 
Paula  E.  Gilbert  (1985),  M.Div.,  Ph.D.,  Instructor  in  American  Christianity 

t  Stanley  Hauerwas  (1984),  B.D,  M.A.,  M.Phil.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Theological  Ethics 

Frederick  Herzog  (1960),  Th.D,  Professor  of  Systematic  Theology 

Susan  A.  Keefe  (1988),  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Church  History 

Thomas  A.  Langford  (1956),  B.D,  Ph.D.,  D.D.,  William  Kellon  Quick  Professor  of  Theology  and  Methodist  Studies 

Richard  Lischer  (1979),  M.A.,  B.D,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Homiletics 

George  Marsden  (1986),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  the  History  of  Christianity  in  America 

Paul  A.  Mickey  (1970),  B.D,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Pastoral  Theology 

Carol  M.  Noren  (1986),  M.Div.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Homiletics 

Russell  E.  Richey  (1986),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Research  Professor  of  Church  History 

Grant  S.  Shockley  (1983),  M.Div.,  Ed.D.,  Professor  of  Christian  Education 

Dwight  Moody  Smith,  Jr.  (1965),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  George  Washington  lvey  Professor  of  New  Testament 
t  Harmon  L.  Smith  (1962),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Moral  Theology 

William  E.  Smith  (1989),  S.T.B.,  Th.D,  D.D.,  Professor  of  the  Practice  of  Christian  Ministry 

David  Curtis  Steinmetz  (1971),  B.D.,  Th.D.,  Amos  Ragan  Kearnas  Professor  of  the  History  of  Christianity 

Karen  Westerfield  Tucker  (1989),  M.Div.,  Instructor  in  Liturgies 

William  C.  Turner,  Jr.  (1982),  M.Div.,  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Research  Professor  of  Theology  and  Black  Church  Studies 

Dan  O.  Via  (1984),  B.D,  Ph.D.,  Litt.D.,  Professor  of  New  Testament 

*  Geoffrey  Wainwright  (1983),  B.D.,  Th.D.,  Professor  of  Systematic  Theology 
John  H.  Westerhoff  HI  (1974),  S.T.B.,  Ed.D,  Professor  of  Religion  and  Education 
William  H.  Willimon  (1984),  M.Div.,  S.T.D.,  Professor  of  Christian  Ministry 
Robert  L.  Wilson  (1970),  B.D.,  M.A.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Church  and  Society 

FACULTY,  DEPARTMENT  OF  RELIGION 

(Teachers  in  graduate  program  in  religion  whose  courses  are  open  to  Divinity  School  students.) 

Kalman  Bland  (1973),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Judaic  Studies 

Elizabeth  Clark  (1982),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History  of  Christianity 

Roger  Corless  (1970),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History  of  Religions 

Hans  Hillerbrand  (1988),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion 

Wesley  A.  Kort  (1965),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Religion  and  Literature 

Bruce  B.  Lawrence  (1971),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  History  of  Religions 

C.  Eric  Lincoln  (1976),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Sociology  of  Religion 

Carol  L.  Meyers  (1979),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  Old  Testament 

Eric  M.  Meyers  (1969),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Judaic  Studies 

Robert  T  Osborn  (1954),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Theology 

Harry  B.  Partin  (1964),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History  of  Religions 

MelvinK.  H.  Peters(1983),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  Old  Testament 

Sandra  P.  Robinson  (1983),  Ph.D.,  Assistant  Professor  of  History  of  Religions 

Kenneth  J.  Surin  (1987),  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  of  History  of  Religions 

Orval  Wintermute  (1958),  Ph.D.,  Professor  of  Old  Testament 

RELATED  FACULTY 

Albert  F.  Fisher  (1974),  M.Div.,  D.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Parish  Work 
W.  Kenneth  Goodson  (1978),  B.D.,  D.D.,  Bishop-in-Residence 

James  L.  Travis  III  (1987),  M.Div.,  Ph.D.,  Chaplain  Supervisor  of  Duke  Medical  Center  and  Clinical  Professor  of 
Pastoral  Care 


•Sabbatical  leave,  fall  1989. 
tSabbatical  leave,  spring  1990. 


EMERITI 

Frank  Baker  (1960),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  English  Church  History 

Waldo  Beach  (1946),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Christian  Ethics 

Robert  Earl  Cushman  (1945),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  D.H.L.,  Research  Professor  Ementus  of  Systematic  Theology 

William  David  Davies  (1966),  M.A.,  F.B.A.,  D.Litt.,  George  Washington  Ivey  Professor  Emeritus  of Advanced  Studies 

and  Research  in  Christian  Origins 
Stuart  C.  Henry  (1959),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  American  Christianity 
Osmond  Kelly  Ingram  (1959),  B.D,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Parish  Ministry 
William  Arthur  Kale  (1952),  B.D.,  D.D.,  Professor  Ementus  of  Christian  Education 
Creighton  Lacy  (1953),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  World  Christianity 

Roland  E.  Murphy  (1971),  M.A.,  S.T.D.,  S.S.L.,  George  Washington  Ivey  Professor  Emeritus  of  Biblical  Studies 
M.  Wilson  Nesbitt  (1958),  B.D.,  D.D.,  Adjunct  Professor  Emeritus  of  the  Work  of  the  Rural  Church 
Ray  C.  Petry  (1937),  Ph.D.,  LL.D,  fames  B.  Duke  Professor  Emeritus  of  Church  History 
McMurry  S.  Richey  (1954),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Theology  and  Christian  Nurture 
Charles  K.  Robinson  (1961),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Philosophical  Theology 
John  Jesse  Rudin  11  (1945),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Associate  Professor  Emeritus  of  Liturgy  and  Worship 
William  Franklin  Stinespring  (1936),  Ph.D.,  Professor  Emeritus  of  Old  Testament  and  Senutics 
Franklin  Woodrow  Young  (1968),  B.D.,  Ph.D.,  Amos  Ragan  Kearns  Professor  Emeritus  of  New  Testament  and  Patristic 

Studies 

BOARD  OF  VISITORS 

A.  Morris  Williams,  Jr.,  Chairman  (1989),  Gladwyne,  Pennsylvania 

Bishop  Joseph  B.  Bethea  (1988),  Columbia,  South  Carolina 

Dr.  J.  Seaborn  Blair,  Jr.  (emeritus),  Wallace,  North  Carolina 

The  Reverend  Mr.  Wesley  F.  Brown  (ex  officio),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Dean  Dennis  M.  Campbell  (ex  officio),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Walter  G.  Canipe  (1991),  Charlotte,  North  Carolina 

The  Reverend  Julie  C.  Clarkson  (1991),  Jamestown,  North  Carolina 

Thelma  Barclift  Crowder  (1990),  South  Boston,  Virginia 

Chaplain  Henry  C.  Duncan  (1989),  Pinehurst,  North  Carolina 

Randolph  R.  Few  (emeritus),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

The  Reverend  Dr.  Albert  F.  Fisher  (ex  officio),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

The  Reverend  F.  Owen  Fitzgerald  (emeritus)  Burlington,  North  Carolina 

Bishop  Ernest  A.  Fitzgerald  (1991),  Atlanta,  Georgia 

Bishop  W.  Kenneth  Goodson  (ex  officio),  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 

Margaret  B.  Harvey  (1989),  Kinston,  North  Carolina 

John  P.  Jaquette,  Jr.  (1990),  Scotia,  New  York 

Dr.  J.  Ralph  Jolly  (1991),  Birmingham,  Alabama 

Bishop  L.  Bevel  Jones  III  (1990),  Charlotte,  North  Carolina 

Sarah  C.  Jordan  (1989),  Mt.  Gilead,  North  Carolina 

The  Reverend  Dr.  Wallace  H.  Kirby  (1990),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Dr.  Robin  W.  Lovin  (1990),  Chicago,  Illinois 

Dr.  Clarence  C.  Lyles  (1991),  Spartanburg,  South  Carolina 

Arch  G.  Mainous,  Jr.  (1990),  Louisville,  Kentucky 

Mary  Alice  Massey  (emeritus),  Jacksonville,  Florida 

Bishop  C.  P.  Minnick,  Jr.  (1991),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Professor  C.  G.  Newsome  (1991),  Washington  D.C. 

The  Reverend  Dr.  William  K.  Quick  (1989),  Detroit,  Michigan 

C.  Leonard  Richardson  (emeritus),  Asheboro,  North  Carolina 

E.  Norwood  Robinson  (emeritus),  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 

The  Reverend  Dr.  George  P.  Robinson  (1990),  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 

Beverly  M.  Small  (1989),  Elizabeth  City,  North  Carolina 

Bishop  Thomas  B.  Stockton  (emeritus),  Richmond,  Virginia 

James  T.  Tanner,  (1989),  Rutherfordton,  North  Carolina 

The  Reverend  Dr.  Wilson  O.  Weldon  (ex  officio),  Greensboro,  North  Carolina 

M.  Sherrill  Williams  (1988),  Newton  Grove,  North  Carolina 

Gordon  Wilson  Yarborough  (1988),  High  Point,  North  Carolina 


DURHAM 

NORTH    CAROLINA 

27706 


(life  SiUtnit^  .Scljool 
t&ffue  of  tlje  jBean 


TELEPHONE    (919)  684-4041 


The  Divinity  School  was  the  first  of  Duke  University's  graduate 
professional  schools  to  open  its  doors  after  the  university  was  found- 
ed. This  priority  is  indicative  of  the  central  role  the  school  plays  in  the 
total  university.  We  take  our  university  setting  seriously  and  believe  that 
the  advantages  of  theological  education  in  the  middle  of  Duke  Univer- 
sity are  considerable. 

The  quality  of  our  student  body  has  never  been  better.  We  enroll  391 
students  in  the  professional  degree  programs.  (M.Div.,  M.T.S.,  M.R.E., 
andTh.M)  and  an  additional  80  students  in  the  M.  A. /Ph.D.  program. 
Our  students  are  men  and  women  from  almost  200  undergraduate 
schools,  32  denominations,  38  states  and  7  foreign  countries.  Women 
constitute  approximately  35  percent  of  the  total  enrollment,  and  black 
students  almost  10  percent.  Most  of  our  students  receive  substantial 
financial  support  in  the  form  of  scholarships  and  grants-in-aid,  this  year 
a  total  of  $1.1  million.  Duke's  program  of  financial  aid  is  rightfully 
renowned. 

While  the  accomplishments  of  its  distinguished  faculty  and  aggres- 
sive international  programs  earn  it  increasing  prominence  in  theolog- 
ical education  and  the  ecumenical  world,  the  Divinity  School  enjoys  ex- 
ceptionally strong  regional,  denominational  and  alumni  support  as 
well. 

Duke's  unique  field  education  program  features  grants-in-aid  for 
vocational  preparation .  The  program's  funding  from  The  Duke  Endow- 
ment makes  it  possible  for  our  students  to  advance  their  competency 
in  ministry  while  receiving  substantial  financial  assistance. 

We  are  a  school  of  the  Church  and  of  the  university;  we  are  a  school 
in  the  Wesleyan  tradition  and  in  the  ecumenical  tradition;  we  are  a 
school  committed  to  professional  education  for  the  practice  of  lay  and 
ordained  ministries  and  to  graduate  theological  education,  research  and 
scholarship.  These  are  exciting  times  at  the  Divinity  School  as  we  seek 
bold  and  imaginative  initiatives  equal  to  the  challenges  of  the  late  twen- 
tieth century. 


Dennis  M.  Campbell 
Dean 


General  Information 


History 

Duke  University  as  it  exists  today  developed  from  simple  beginnings.  Established  in 
1838,  Union  Institute  became  Normal  College  by  1851  and  in  1859  was  renamed  Trinity 
College.  In  1892  the  college  moved  to  Durham,  North  Carolina. 

In  1924  James  B.  Duke  established  a  trust  fund  for  educational  and  charitable  pur- 
poses. The  chief  beneficiary  was  Trinity  College,  which  became  Duke  University.  The  pur- 
pose for  establishing  the  trust  was  very  clear:  "I  have  selected  Duke  University  as  one  of 
the  principal  objects  of  this  trust  because  1  recognize  that  education,  when  conducted 
along  sane  and  practical,  as  opposed  to  dogmatic  and  theoretical  lines,  is,  next  to  relig- 
ion, the  greatest  civilizing  influence.  .  . .  And  I  advise  that  the  courses  at  this  institution 
be  arranged,  first,  with  special  reference  to  the  training  of  preachers,  teachers,  lawyers, 
and  physicians,  because  these  are  most  in  the  public  eye,  and  by  precept  and  example 
can  do  most  to  uplift  mankind."  The  School  of  Religion  began  its  work  in  the  academic 
year  1926-27,  and  formal  exercises  for  its  opening  were  held  on  9  November  1926.  In  1940 
the  name  was  changed  to  the  Divinity  School. 

During  its  history  the  Divinity  School  has  had  outstanding  teachers,  scholars,  and 
administrative  leaders*  and  its  graduates  have  distinguished  themselves  by  making  sig- 
nificant contributions  to  the  Church  and  the  world.  In  1964  a  program  of  expansion  was 
begun,  culminating  in  February,  1972,  when  the  Divinity  School  doubled  its  physical  fa- 
cilities and  moved  into  a  new  building. 

The  Role  of  the  Divinity  School 

The  Divinity  School  represents  theological  inquiry  and  learning  within  the  greater 
university.  By  history  and  indenture,  it  stands  within  the  Christian  tradition,  mindful 
of  its  distinctive  lineage  in  and  its  continuing  obligation  to  the  United  Methodist  Church . 
The  Divinity  School,  although  United  Methodist  in  tradition  and  dependency,  receives 
students  from  many  Christian  denominations  and  offers  its  educational  resources  to 
representatives  of  the  several  communions  who  seek  an  education  for  church-related 
ministry.  From  its  inception,  it  has  been  ecumenical  in  aspiration,  teaching,  and  practice, 


'Since  the  institution  of  the  school  in  1926,  the  following  persons  have  served  as  deans  or  acting  deans: 
Edmund  Davidson  Soper,  1926-28;  Elbert  Russell,  1928-41;  Paul  Neff  Garber,  1941-44;  Harvie  Branscomb,  1944-46; 
Gilbert  T.  Roue,  Acting  Dean  of  the  Faculty,  1946-47;  Paul  E.  Root  (elected  in  1947  but  died  before  assuming  of- 
fice); Harold  A.  Bosley;  1947-50;  James  Cannon  III,  acting  dean  1950-51,  dean  1951-58;  Robert  Earl  Cushman, 
1958-71;  Thomas  A.  Langford,  1971-81;  Jameson  Jones,  1981-82;  Dennis  M.  Campbell,  1982-. 

The  Role  of  the  Divinity  School    1 1 


as  well  as  in  its  faculty.  Educational  policy  has  consistently  aspired  to  foster  a  Christian 
understanding  "truly  catholic,  truly  evangelical,  and  truly  reformed." 

The  principal  purpose  of  the  Divinity  School  is  the  professional  education  for  the 
ministry,  which  in  today's  world  is  manifested  in  a  variety  of  forms.  Although  the  con- 
ventional and  inherited  styles  of  ministry  are  now  undergoing  change,  the  Divinity  School 
curriculum  continues  to  prepare  students  for  informed  and  discriminating  discharge  of 
the  historic  offices  of  church  and  congregation  through  the  ministry  of  word  and  sacra- 
ment, pastoral  care,  and  teaching.  The  Divinity  School  believes  these  offices  will  remain, 
although  the  form  and  context  of  the  local  church  may  change. 

With  this  in  mind,  the  Divinity  School  seeks  to  prepare  men  and  women  for  the  ma- 
ture performance  of  their  vocation.  It  hopes  to  develop  in  each  student  a  disciplined  faith, 
informed  by  sound  learning  and  equipped  for  worthy  professional  service.  Its  resources 
are  offered  to  students  with  a  diversity  of  ministerial  aims,  although  the  school  seeks,  by 
recruitment  and  financial  support,  to  prepare  persons  for  ordination  or  lay  professional 
vocations  in  the  churches.  In  all  its  endeavors,  the  Divinity  School  aims  to  serve  Jesus 
Christ  through  service  to  the  Church  and  the  world. 

The  Relation  of  the  Divinity  School  to  Duke  University 

The  Divinity  School  is  an  integral  part  of  the  university  and  shares  fully  in  its  activi- 
ties, privileges,  and  responsibilities.  The  Sunday  services  in  the  University  Chapel  give 
Divinity  School  students  each  year  an  opportunity  to  hear  several  of  the  country's  lead- 
ing preachers.  The  university  libraries  make  a  rich  collection  of  books  and  other  materi- 
als easily  accessible.  Without  paying  additional  fees,  selected  courses  in  the  graduate  and 
professional  schools  are  open  to  Divinity  School  students,  as  well  as  the  general,  cultur- 
al, and  recreational  resources  of  the  university. 

Library  Resources 

Divinity  School  Library.  The  Divinity  School  Library  contains  a  collection  of  more 
than  250,000  volumes  in  the  field  of  religion  and  related  disciplines  and  affords  an  un- 
usual wealth  of  material  for  the  seminary  student .  Although  an  integral  part  of  the  univer- 
sity's twelve-unit  library  system,  which  possesses  more  than  3,625,000  volumes,  the  Di- 
vinity School  Library  has  its  own  separate  facilities  in  the  Divinity  School  building.  Its 
book  collection  is  operated  on  the  open  stack  system,  and  its  reading  rooms  provide  study 
facilities  for  students,  space  for  the  special  reference  collection  in  religion,  and  for  the  more 
than  600  religious  periodicals  to  which  the  library  currently  subscribes. 

Staffed  by  a  librarian  and  a  reference  librarian  trained  in  both  theology  and  library 
administration,  by  a  supporting  staff  of  three  persons,  and  by  a  number  of  student  assis- 
tants, the  library  offers  a  variety  of  reference  services  to  assist  the  student  in  selecting  and 
locating  materials.  The  staff,  in  cooperation  with  the  faculty,  maintains  a  book  and  peri- 
odical collection  to  support  basic  course  work  as  well  as  advanced  research  in  all  major 
fields  of  religious  studies. 

The  Divinity  School  Library  is  adjacent  to  the  Perkins  Library.  The  seminary  student 
may  use  the  resources  and  facilities  of  the  Perkins  Library,  some  of  which  include 
manuscripts,  archives,  public  documents,  newspapers,  periodicals,  microfilms,  maps, 
rare  materials  (among  which  are  eighty-one  prized  ancient  Greek  manuscripts),  and  refer- 
ence assistance.  There  is  a  provision  for  borrowing  books  from  the  libraries  of  the  Univer- 
sity of  North  Carolina  and  other  neighboring  institutions. 

The  Henry  Harrison  Jordan  Loan  Library 

Henry  Harrison  Jordan,  (1862-1931),  distinguished  member  of  the  Western  North 
Carolina  Conference,  was  memorialized  by  his  children  by  the  establishment  of  an  en- 
dowment in  1947.  The  Divinity  School  librarian  is  the  custodian  of  books  purchased 

12    General  Infortnation 


under  this  fund  for  loan,  through  postal  services,  to  qualified  ministers  of  all  denomina- 
tions or  localities.  The  Jordan  Loan  Library  maintains  a  catalogue  of  up-to-date  publica- 
tions representative  of  the  several  theological  disciplines  and  areas  of  the  minister's  profes- 
sional interest.  Books  may  be  borrowed  by  application  to  the  librarian  of  the  Divinity 
School. 

Library  Funds 

The  following  funds  provide  resources  to  enrich  the  collections  of  the  Divinity  School 
Library. 

TheOrmond  Memorial  Fund  was  established  in  1924  by  Dr.  J.  M.  Ormond,  Trinity 
College  Class  of  1902,  and  Mrs.  Ormond,  in  memory  of  his  parents,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  J.  J. 
Ormond.  The  fund  income  maintains  the  collection  of  books  on  the  rural  church. 

The  Avera  Bible  Fund  was  established  in  1895  by  a  gift  of  Mrs.  L.  B.  McCullers  in  mem- 
ory of  her  husband,  Willis  H.  Avera.  The  income  is  for  the  purchase  of  books  for  the  Di- 
vinity School  Library  and  for  the  support  of  the  Avera  Bible  Lectures. 

The  Louis  W.  Bailey  Memorial  Fund  was  established  in  1958  by  the  Reverend  Dr.  A . 
Purnell  Bailey,  Class  of  1948,  in  memory  of  his  father.  The  income  is  to  be  used  for  books 
for  the  Divinity  School  Library. 

The  Stuart  C.  Henry  Collection  Endowment  Fund  was  established  by  the  Class  of 
1975  to  honor  Professor  Henry.  Income  from  the  fund  is  used  to  enhance  the  collection 
on  American  Christianity.  Substantial  additional  contributions  to  this  fund  have  been 
made  by  Miss  Marion  D.  Mullins  of  Fort  Worth,  Texas. 

The  William  Arthur  Kale,  Jr.  Memorial  Fund  was  established  in  1964  by  Professor 
and  Mrs.  William  Arthur  Kale,  Sr.,  for  the  purchase  of  books  and  other  materials  in  the 
area  of  fine  arts  and  religious  musicology  for  the  perpetual  enrichment  of  the  holdings 
of  the  Divinity  School  Library.  William  Arthur  Kale,  Jr.,  was  a  member  of  the  Duke  Univer- 
sity Chapel  Choir. 

The  Walter  McGowan  and  Minnie  Daniel  Upchurch  Fund  was  established  in  1971 
by  W.  M.  Upchurch,  Jr.,  an  alumnus  of  Duke  University  and  a  member  of  its  Board  of 
Trustees,  in  honor  of  his  parents.  The  fund  income  is  used  for  the  purchase  of  materials 
in  the  area  of  sacred  music  and  is  supplementary  to  a  collection  of  materials  given  by  Mr. 
Upchurch  to  the  Divinity  School  Library.  This  collection  includes  anthems  and  other  com- 
positions of  sacred  music,  along  with  62  disc  recordings  of  the  Duke  University  Summer 
Chapel  Choir  for  the  years  1932-41  when  Mr.  Upchurch  was  director  of  the  choir. 

Center  for  Studies  in  the  Wesleyan  Tradition 

The  Center  for  Studies  in  the  Wesleyan  Tradition  was  founded  in  1979  and  is  support- 
ed by  a  permanent  endowment  of  the  Divinity  School  designated  for  its  use.  The  center 
supports  a  wide  variety  of  programs  designed  to  advance  teaching,  research,  and  publi- 
cation in  Wesleyan  history  and  theology. 

Library.  The  Baker  Collection  is  one  of  the  two  largest  collections  of  Wesley  and  Meth- 
odist materials  extant.  Named  for  Professor  Emeritus  Frank  Baker,  the  world's  foremost 
authority  on  John  Wesley,  and  editor  of  the  bicentennial  edition  of  Wesley's  Works,  a  project 
based  at  Duke  Divinity  School,  the  Baker  Collection  is  an  unparalleled  resource. 

Visiting  Professors.  The  center  brings  distinguished  visiting  professors  to  teach  in 
the  Divinity  School.  Recently,  Dr.  David  Stacey,  principal  of  Wesley  College,  Bristol,  En- 
gland, and  Dr.  Jose  Miguez  Bonino,  professor  of  theology  and  ethics  at  the  Protestant  The- 
ological Seminary  in  Buenos  Aires,  Argentina  served  in  this  capacity. 


Center  for  Studies  in  the  Wesleyan  Tradition    13 


Stanley  Hauerwas,  Professor  of  Theological  Ethics 


Visiting  Scholars.  The  center  makes  research  grants  to  scholars  from  around  the  world 
to  work  for  various  periods  of  time  in  the  Divinity  School.  Among  those  who  have  served 
recently  are  Bishop  Ole  Borgen,  United  Methodist  Bishop  of  Sweden,  Norway,  Denmark, 
Finland,  and  Estonia,  and  Professor  Morna  Hooker,  Lady  Margaret  Professor  of  Divinity, 
Cambridge  University,  England. 

Visiting  Lecturers.  The  center  has  an  extensive  program  of  visiting  lecturers  which 
exposes  students  and  faculty  of  the  Divinity  School  to  leading  figures  in  the  VVesleyan 
tradition  from  throughout  the  world.  Most  recently  these  included:  Professor  Peder  Bor- 
gen, University  of  Trondheim,  Norwav;  Dr.  Manfred  Marquardt,  the  Methodist  Theo- 
logical Seminary,  Reutlingen,  West  Germanv;  Dr.  Rutiger  Minor,  the  Methodist  Semi- 
nary in  East  Germany;  the  Reverend  Helmut  Nausner,  district  superintendent,  Vienna, 
Austria;  Professor  Norman  Young,  principal  of  Queens  College,  the  University  of  Mel- 
bourne, Australia;  and  Dean  Walter  Klaiber,  Methodist  Theological  Seminary,  Rentin- 
gon,  West  Germany. 

Publications.  The  center  is  committed  to  a  program  of  scholarlv  publication .  In  1983, 
support  was  given  for  preparation  of  a  reader  in  theology  in  the  VVesleyan  tradition. 

Faculty  Committee.  Divinity  School  faculty  related  to  the  center  include  Professor 
Thomas  A.  Langford,  Professor  Geoffrey  Wainwright,  Professor  Robert  L.  Wilson,  Bishop 
W.  Kenneth  Goodson,  and  Professor  Dennis  M.  Campbell,  dean  and  chairman. 


14    General  Information 


General  Information    15 


Faculty 


Faculty  process  into  Duke  Ompel 


Faculty 

The  faculty  of  Duke  University  Divinity  School  is  regarded  as  one  of  the  world's  stron- 
gest theological  faculties.  The  faculty  is  committed  to  excellence  in  teaching,  research, 
publication,  and  service  to  the  Church,  the  university,  and  the  wider  community.  The 
Duke  faculty  is  particularly  well-known  for  its  strong  commitment  to  the  Church  and  its 
ministry.  The  faculty  is  very  diverse.  It  includes  persons  who  come  from  all  over  the  United 
States  and  the  world .  Virtually  all  major  Christian  traditions  are  represented,  and  iden- 
tity with  specific  communities  within  the  Christian  tradition  is  taken  seriously  by  faculty 
members.  Because  of  its  distinguished  faculty,  the  Divinity  School  is  an  international  cen- 
ter for  research  and  publication  in  the  theological  disciplines  and  for  reflection  on  the  prac- 
tice of  ministry  in  the  late  twentieth  century. 

Faculty  Biographical  Information 

Lloyd  Richard  Bailey,  Associate  Professor  of  Old  Testament.  B.A.,  B.D.  (Duke  University);  Ph.D.  (Hebrew  Union 

College-Jewish  Institute  of  Religion). 

Professor  Bailey's  academic  interests  include  biblical  studies  (primarily  Pentateuch  and  Prophetic  literature), 
the  problem  of  utilizing  ancient  texts  as  Scripture  (text  to  sermon),  ancient  Near  Eastern  civilization  and  archaeology, 
and  perspectives  on  aging,  dying,  and  death.  In  these  areas  he  has  written  and  edited  nearly  two  dozen  books, 
more  than  thirty  articles  in  journals  and  encyclopedias,  and  has  prepared  curriculum  and  media  units  for  the 
United  Methodist  Church .  He  currently  serves  on  the  editorial  boards  of  Biblical  Archaeologist  and  Quarterly  Re- 
view,  is  a  past  president  of  the  Society  of  Biblical  Literature  (Southeastern  Region),  and  is  an  elder  in  the  Western 
North  Carolina  Annual  Conference  of  the  United  Methodist  Church.  Prior  to  joining  the  Duke  faculty,  he  taught 
at  Union  Theological  Seminary  in  New  York. 

Teresa  M.  Berger,  Assistant  Professor  of  Ecumenical  Theology.  M.Th.  (Mainz  University,  West  Germany);  L.Th.  (St. 

John's  College,  Nottingham,  England);  Ph.D.  (University  of  Heidelburg). 

Professor  Berger's  academic  interests  are  in  ecumenical  and  liturgical  theology.  Her  published  research  in- 
cludes studies  on  the  liturgical  thinking  of  nineteenth-century  Tractarianism,  as  well  as  on  an  ecumenical  the- 
ology of  worship,  and  on  women  and  worship.  She  held  a  visiting  position  at  the  Roman  Catholic  faculty  of  the 
University  of  Mainz  (West  Germany),  where  she  taught  liturgical  theology.  She  currently  is  a  council  member 
of  Societas  Liturgica,  and  is  on  the  editorial  board  of  Studia  Liturgica,  of  which  she  is  the  review  editor.  Dr.  Berger 
is  a  Roman  Catholic  who  (as  part  of  a  lived  ecumenical  theology)  currently  lives  and  worships  within  the  East- 
ern Orthodox  tradition. 

Faculty    17 


Dennis  M.  Campbell,  Dean  of  The  Divinity  School  and  Professorof  Theology  A.B.  (Duke  University);  B.  D.  (Yale  Univer- 
sity); Ph.D.  (Duke  University);  D.D.  (Florida  Southern). 

Dean  Campbell  teaches  in  systematic  theology.  His  particular  research  interests  are  in  ecclesiology,  includ- 
ing theology  of  ministry,  and  ethics.  Professor  Campbell's  books  include  Authority  and  the  Renewal  of  American 
Theology;  Doctors,  Laun/ers,  Ministers:  Christian  Ethics  in  Professional  Practice;  and  Tlic  Yoke  of  Obedience:  The  Mean- 
ing oj  Ordination  in  Methodism.  He  has  written  numerous  articles  for  journals  and  is  widely  in  demand  as  a  lec- 
turer and  preacher.  Prior  to  his  appointment  at  Duke  he  served  as  a  pastor  and  as  a  professor  at  the  undergradu- 
ate level.  Dr.  Campbell  is  an  elder  in  the  United  Methodist  Church.  He  has  twice  been  a  delegate  to  General 
Conference  and  is  a  member  of  the  World  Methodist  Council.  He  serves  on  the  Accrediting  Commission  of  the 
Association  of  Theological  Schools  in  the  U.S.  and  Canada.  Through  his  participation  in  several  major  academ- 
ic boards.  Dean  Campbell  is  a  national  leader  in  U.S.  higher  education. 

Jerry  D.  Campbell,  Professor  of  the  Practice  of  Theological  Bibliography.  B.A.  (McMurry  College);  M.Div.,  (Duke  Univer- 
sity); M.S.  (University  of  North  Carolina);  Ph.D.  (University  of  Denver). 

Dr.  Campbell's  principal  efforts  are  directed  toward  insuring  that  the  Divinity  School  provides  the  resources 
necessary  to  support  the  research  and  study  of  faculty  and  students.  He  is  concerned  both  with  bringing  resources 
to  the  Divinity  School  Library  and  with  making  them  available  for  use  as  quickly  as  possible.  His  interests  range 
from  scholarly  publishing  to  the  computer  automation  of  library  practices.  He  also  serves  the  wider  university 
as  vice-provost  for  library  affairs  and  university  librarian.  Dr.  Campbell,  an  ordained  United  Methodist  clergy- 
man, is  a  member  of  the  University  United  Methodist  Church  Charge  Conference  in  Chapel  Hill.  In  University 
United  Methodist  Church,  he  chairs  the  Church  and  Society  Work  Area,  occasionally  teaches  Sunday  School, 
and  assists  the  staff  in  other  ways  as  needed. 

Ted  A.  Campbell,  Assistant  Professor  of  Church  History.  B.A.  (North  Texas  State  University);  B.A.  .M.A.  (Oxford 

University);  Ph.D.  (Southern  Methodist  University). 

Professor  Campbell  teaches  principally  in  the  area  of  post-Reformation  European  and  British  Church  histo- 
ry, with  a  focus  on  Wesley  studies.  He  is  the  author  of  The  Apostolate  of  United  Methodism,  and  has  published  arti- 
cles in  Chu  rch  History,  The  Wesle\/an  Theological  ]ou  rnal,  Circuit  Rider,  and  the  AME  Zion  Quarterly  Review.  Prior  to 
his  joining  the  Divinity  School  faculty  in  1985,  Professor  Campbell  served  church  appointments  in  Texas  and 
taught  for  a  year  as  visiting  lecturer  at  the  Methodist  Theological  School  in  Ohio. 

James  L.  Crenshaw,  Professor  of  Old  Testament.  B.A.  (Furman  University);  B.D  (Southern  Baptist  Theological  Semi- 
nary); Ph.D.  (Vanderbilt  University). 

Professor  Crenshaw's  academic  interests  are  in  literary  and  theological  interpretations  of  the  Hebrew  Bible. 
He  teaches  courses  on  biblical  theology,  wisdom  and  prophetic  literature,  prayer  in  the  Old  Testament,  narra- 
tive art  in  the  Hebrew  Bible,  the  problem  of  evil.  Job,  Ecclesiastes,  Proverbs,  and  introduction  to  the  literature 
and  history  of  ancient  Israel.  Among  his  publications  are  Prophetic  Conflict.  Samson.  Old  Testament  Wisdom,  A  Whirlpool 
of  Torment,  Ecclesiastes,  and  Story  and  Faith.  A  former  editor  of  the  Society  of  Biblical  Literature  Monograph  Se- 
ries, he  currently  edits  a  series  entitled  "Personalities  of  the  Old  Testament."  A  Baptist  minister,  he  has  been  ac- 
tive in  Baptist  and  Christian  (Disciples  of  Christ)  churches  for  over  three  decades.  Before  joining  the  Duke  faculty. 
Professor  Crenshaw  taught  at  Atlantic  Christian  College,  Mercer  University,  and  Vanderbilt  Divinity  School. 

James  Michael  Efird,  Professor  of  Biblical  Interpretation.  A.B.  (Davidson  College);  M.Div.  (Louisville  Presbyteri- 
an Theological  Seminary);  Ph.D.  (Duke  University). 

Having  served  on  the  Duke  Divinity  School  faculty  since  1962,  Professor  Efird  has  concentrated  on  making 
biblical  scholarship  understandable  and  useful  for  men  and  women  preparing  primarily  for  parish  ministry.  In 
addition,  he  has  taken  this  approach  to  the  laitv  of  the  church  in  many  different  denominations.  Professor  Efird's 
teaching,  research,  and  writing  cover  the  broad  spectrum  of  both  the  Old  and  the  New  Testaments  and  are  reflected 
in  eleven  books  and  in  over  fifty  articles  in  various  journals  and  Bible  dictionaries.  Currently  he  is  serving  as  editor 
of  the  Contemporary  Christian  Concerns  series  ("What  the  Bible  Says")  from  Abingdon  Press. 

Donn  Michael  Farris,  Professor ot  Theological  Bibliography.  B.A.  (Berea  College);  M.Div.  (Garrett-Evangelical  The- 
ological Seminary);  M.S.  in  Library  Science  (Columbia  University). 

The  senior  member  of  both  the  Divinity  School  faculty  and  the  university  library  staff.  Professor  Farris  came 
to  Duke  in  1950  and  has  directed  the  growth  of  the  Divinity  School  Library  from  48,000  volumes  at  that  time  to 
its  present  size  of  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  million.  He  is  a  past  president  of  the  American  Theological  Library 
Association  and  is  a  member  of  its  Board  of  Directors.  He  founded  the  association's  official  quarterly  publica- 
tion, the  ATLA  Newsletter,  in  1953,  and  has  edited  it  continuously  for  the  past  thirty-five  years. 

Albert  F.  Fisher,  Adjunct  Professor  of  Parish  Work.  A.B.  (Duke  University);  B.D.  (Duke  University);  D.D.  (North  Caro- 
lina Wesleyan  College). 

Albert  Fisher  has  worked  with  the  Rural  Church  Division  of  The  Duke  Endowment  since  1974,  serving  as 
director  since  1977.  As  Director  of  the  Rural  Church  Division,  he  is  responsible  for  making  requests  to  the  trustees 
of  The  Duke  Endowment  from  eligible  beneficiaries.  Many  of  the  grants  made  through  the  Rural  Church  Divi- 
sion are  made  to  Duke  Divinity  School  or  to  students  in  the  Divinity  School  who  serve  as  student  pastors  or  as- 
sistant pastors  in  rural  United  Methodist  churches  in  North  Carolina.  Prior  to  joining  The  Duke  Endowment,  Fisher 


18    faculty 


was  a  pastor  and  a  district  superintendent  in  the  North  Carolina  Conference.  He  is  a  member  of  the  Board  oi 
Visitors  of  Duke  Divinity  School,  a  past  president  of  the  Divinity  School  Alumni  Association,  and  a  past  presi- 
dent of  the  Duke  University  General  Alumni  Association. 

Mary  McClintock  Fulkerson,  Assistant  Professor  of  Theology.  B.M.  (University  of  North  Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill); 

M.Div.  (Duke  University);  Ph.D.  (Vanderbilt  University). 

Professor  McClintock  Fulkerson's  primary  teaching  interests  are  nineteenth-century  German  Protestant 
thinkers  and  contemporary  Protestant  theology,  focusing  on  authority  in  theology,  ecclesiology,  and  feminist 
theologies.  Her  current  research  is  in  the  role  of  tradition  and  Scripture  in  feminist  theologies.  Ordained  in  the 
Presbyterian  Church,  U.S.A.,  she  was  a  pastor  before  coming  to  Duke.  She  is  a  member  of  Presbytery's  Exami- 
nation Committee  and  of  the  Committee  on  Ministry  Design  of  the  national  Presbyterian  Church,  U.S.A. 

Paula  E.  Gilbert,  Instructor  in  American  Christianity,  and  Assistant  Dean  for  Planning  and  Special  Projects.  B.  A.  (Hunt- 
ingdon College);  M.Div.,  Ph.D.  (Duke  University). 

Professor  Gilbert's  academic  interests  are  in  American  religious  thought  and  British  and  American  Methodism . 
Having  written  about  Georgia  Harkness  for  her  dissertation,  she  is  also  concerned  about  women  and  the  church, 
religion  and  war,  and  ecumenism.  Joint  author  of  Pastoral  Assertiveness:  A  Neit<  Model  for  Pastoral  Care,  Professor 
Gilbert  is  also  minister  to  York  Chapel  and  director  of  the  Ministerial  Course  of  Study  School  at  Duke.  She  is  a 
member  of  the  Board  of  Advisors  for  the  Intentional  Growth  Center  of  the  Southeastern  Jurisdiction  of  the  Unit- 
ed Methodist  Church  and  coordinator  for  the  1988  revision  of  the  correspondence  Course  of  Study  School  cur- 
riculum for  the  United  Methodist  Church.  Dr.  Gilbert  is  an  elder  in  the  Alabama-West  Florida  Annual  Conference. 

Stanley  M.  Hauerwas,  Professor  of  Theological  Ethics.  B.A.  (Southwestern  University);  B.D.,  M.  A.,  M.Phil.,  Ph.D. 

(Yale  University). 

Professor  Hauerwas  works  in  the  field  of  theological  ethics  where  he  has  sought  to  recover  the  significance 
of  the  virtues  for  understanding  the  nature  of  the  Christian  life.  This  has  led  him  to  emphasize  the  importance 
of  the  Church  as  well  as  narrative  for  understanding  the  nature  of  Christian  existence.  His  work  has  been  charac- 
terized by  cutting  across  disciplinary  lines  as  he  is  in  conversation  with  systematic  theology,  philosophical  the- 
ology, philosophical  ethics  and  political  theory,  as  well  as  the  philosophy  of  social  science.  He  has  published 
several  books,  but  perhaps  the  best  known  are  The  Peaceable  Kingdom  and  A  Community  of  Character.  He  lectures 
widely  to  church  and  academic  audiences  but  his  work  clearly  indicates  his  fundamental  interest  is  in  the  up- 
building of  moral  discourse  within  the  contemporary  Christian  community.  Professor  Hauerwas  is  a  lay  mem- 
ber of  Resurrection  United  Methodist  Church  in  Durham. 

Frederick  Herzog,  Professor  of  Systematic  Theology.  Th.D.  (Bonn  University,  Basel  University);  Th.M,  Th.D.  (Prince- 
ton Theological  Seminary);  D.  Theol.  (Bonn  University). 

Prior  to  joining  The  Divinity  School  faculty  in  1960,  Professor  Herzog  was  pastor  in  his  native  North  Dakota 
and  on  the  faculty  of  what  is  now  United  Theological  Seminary  of  the  Twin  Cities.  His  research  centers  in 
nineteenth-century  Protestant  thought,  the  polarization  of  systematics  and  dogmatics,  philosophical  method 
in  religious  studies  and  the  development  of  a  new  paradigm  of  theology.  Since  the  civil  rights  era  he  has  shaped 
liberation  theology  as  hermeneutical  focus  in  the  North  American  context.  His  publications  include  Understanding 
God.  Liberation  Theology,  Justice  Church,  and  God-Walk:  Liberation  Shaping  Dogmatics.  As  member  of  Commissions 
of  the  United  Church  of  Christ  (and  World  Council  of  Churches)  he  has  worked  on  concrete  ecumenical  union, 
doctrinal  renewal,  and  globalization  of  theological  education .  He  is  also  a  member  of  the  Oxford  Institute  of  Meth- 
odist Theological  Studies.  Professor  Herzog  is  an  ordained  minister  of  the  United  Church  of  Christ. 

Susan  A.  Keefe,  Assistant  Professor  Church  History.  Ph.D.  (University  of  Toronto). 

Dr.  Susan  A.  Keefe  joins  the  faculty  as  assistant  professor  of  Church  History  after  a  year  as  an  Andrew  VV. 
Mellon  Faculty  Member  in  the  Humanities  at  Harvard.  Prior  to  that  she  taught  at  Davidson.  She  received  her 
doctorate  in  Medieval  Studies  from  the  Centre  for  Medieval  Studies,  University  of  Toronto,  in  1981 .  Her  disser- 
tation and  publications  examine  the  teaching  and  celebration  of  the  sacraments  of  Christian  initiation  across  Carolin- 
gian  Europe  using  baptismal  instructions  written  for  parish  priests. 

Thomas  A.  Langford,  William  Kellon  Quick  Professor  of  Theology  and  Methodist  Studies.  B.A.  (Davidson  College); 
B.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke  University);  D.D.  (Davidson  College). 
Professor  Langford's  academic  interests  are  in  systematic  and  philosophical  theology,  in  British  theology, 
and  in  theology  in  the  Wesleyan  tradition.  He  attempts  especially  to  explore  the  relation  of  theology  to  culture. 
Philosophy  of  Religion,  Intellect  and  Hope,  Practical  Divinity,  Christian  Wholeness,  Prayer  and  the  Common  Life,  and  Theology 
in  the  Wesleyan  Tradition:  A  Sourcebook  are  among  his  publications.  Activity  in  the  university  as  vice-provost  and 
in  the  United  Methodist  Church  also  expresses  his  interests.  He  helped  write  the  section  on  ministry  in  The  Book 
of  Discipline  of  the  United  Methodist  Church  and  is  the  principal  author  of  the  current  statement  on  the  mission 
of  the  Church.  An  elder  in  the  Western  North  Carolina  Conference,  he  has  served  as  a  delegate  to  Jurisdictional 
and  General  Conferences  since  1972.  Dr.  Langford  was  dean  of  the  Divinity  School  1971-1981. 

Faculty  Biographical  Information    19 


Richard  Alan  Lischer,  Associate  Professor  of  Homiletics.  B.A.  (Concordia  Senior  College);  M.A.  (Washington  Univer- 

sitv);  B.D.  (Concordia  Seminary);  Ph.D.  (University  of  London). 

A  native  of  St.  Louis,  Professor  Lischer's  graduate  theological  training  is  in  systematic  theology.  He  is  an  or- 
dained minister  in  the  Evangelical  Lutheran  Church  in  America  and  has  nine  years  of  pastoral  experience  in  ru- 
ral and  suburban  settings.  He  joined  the  faculty  of  the  Divinity  School  in  1979  where  he  teaches  in  the  areas  of 
homiletics  and  ministrv.  In  his  scholarly  work  Dr.  Lischer  has  sought  to  portray  proclamation  as  an  integrated 
theological  activity.  He  has  published  widely  in  the  areas  of  theology,  ministry,  and  preaching.  His  books,  A  Theology 
of Preaching  and  Theories  of Preaching  deal  with  the  theological  and  rhetorical  bases  of  preaching.  Speaking  of  Jesus 
reflects  his  parish  experiences  with  grassroots  evangelism. 

George  Marsden,  Professor  of  the  History  of  Christianity  in  America.  A.B.  (Haverford  College);  B.D.  (Westminster 

Theological  Seminary);  M.A.,  Ph.D.  (Yale  University). 

Professor  Marsden  has  written  and  edited  books  on  the  history  of  American  evangelicalism  and  fundamen- 
talism. Currently  his  research  focuses  on  the  secularization  of  American  universities.  He  is  an  editor  of  the  Reformed 
journal.  His  books  include  Fundamentalism  and  American  Cultu  re,  The  Evangelical  Mind  and  New  School  Presbyterian 
Experience,  The  Search  for  a  Christian  America,  and  Reforming  Fundamentalism:  Fuller  Seminary  and  the  Neic  Evangelical- 
ism. Before  coming  to  Duke  in  1986  he  taught  for  twenty-one  years  at  Calvin  College. 

Paul  A.  Mickey,  Associate  Professor  of  Pastoral  Theology.  B.A.  (Harvard  University);  B.D.,  Ph.D.  (Princeton  Theo- 
logical Seminary). 

Prior  to  joining  the  Duke  faculty,  Professor  Mickey  served  pastorates  in  Ohio  and  New  Jersey,  was  a  chap- 
lain services  specialist  in  the  Air  Force,  and  was  a  behavioral  and  management  consultant  for  Western  Electric 
Psychological  Testing  Division.  An  ordained  United  Methodist  minister,  his  primary  interests  are  in  the  areas 
of  marriage  and  family  counseling,  developing  parish  leadership  skills,  and  the  intersection  of  theology  and  psy- 
chology. He  has  published  in  the  areas  of  marriage  counseling  and  parish  leadership  skills.  Current  areas  of  in- 
terest are  in  self  esteem  issues  for  adults  and  children,  with  specific  focus  on  adult  children  of  alcoholics,  and 
the  developmental,  spiritual,  and  theological  blockages  resulting  from  abusive  and  obsessive  behavior. 

Carol  Marie  Noren,  Assistant  Professor  of  Homiletics.  B.A.  (Augustana  College);  M.Div.  (Garrett-Evangelical  The- 
ological Seminary);  Ph.D.  (Princeton  Theological  Seminary). 

A  native  of  Illinois,  Professor  Noren  is  an  elder  in  the  United  Methodist  Church.  She  served  churches  in  Man- 
chester, England  and  in  the  Northern  Illinois  Conference  before  entering  Princeton.  She  was  on  the  faculty  of 
Princeton  Theological  Seminary  prior  to  coming  to  the  Divinity  School.  Her  academic  interests  are  in  the  histo- 
ry and  theology  of  preaching,  worship  in  the  Wesleyan  tradition,  and  women  in  preaching.  Her  current  research 
is  on  the  history  of  preaching  in  Swedish-American  Methodism.  She  has  preached  widely  in  the  United  States 
and  England. 

Russell  E.  Richey,  Associate  Dean  for  Academic  Programs  and  Research  Professor  of  Church  History.  B.A.  (Wesleyan 
University);  B.D.  (Union  Theological  Seminary);  M.A.,  Ph.D.  (Princeton  University). 
Before  coming  to  Duke.  Professor  Richey  was  on  the  faculty  of  Drew  University  where  he  taught  American 
church  history  and  served  terms  as  dean  of  students  in  the  Theological  School  and  assistant  to  the  president. 
Editor  of  three  books,  most  recently.  Rethinking  Methodist  Histon/  (1985),  and  of  many  articles,  he  has  research 
interests  in  institutional  aspects  of  American  religion  and  in  Methodist  history.  He  teaches  in  American  Chris- 
tianity and  American  Methodism.  Professor  Richey  is  an  elder  in  the  North  Carolina  Conference  of  the  United 
Methodist  Church. 

B.  Maurice  Ritchie,  Associate  Dean  for  Student  Life  and  Director  of  Field  Education.  B.A.  (Davidson  College);  B.D., 

Th.M.  (Duke  University). 

The  Reverend  B.  Maurice  Ritchie  specializes  in  the  practice  of  ministry  and  the  training  of  persons  for  ministrv 
in  parishes,  institutions,  chaplaincies,  and  a  variety  of  other  settings.  His  own  experience  includes  service  as 
a  parish  minister,  as  college  chaplain,  and  a  professor  at  the  undergraduate  level.  He  previously  served  the  Di- 
vinity School  as  director  of  admissions  and  student  affairs.  He  is  an  elder  in  the  Western  North  Carolina  Confer- 
ence and  a  member  of  the  Board  of  Ordained  Ministry  of  that  conference  and  of  the  Southeastern  Jurisdiction. 

Grant  S.  Shockley,  Professor  of  Christian  Education.  A.B.  (Lincoln  University);  M.Div.  (Drew  University);  M.A., 

Ed.D.  (Union  Theological  Seminary  Columbia  University). 

Professor  Shockley  s  areas  of  teaching  interest  include  curriculum  development,  instructional  and  learning 
theory,  age-level  and  family  life  ministries.  His  previous  teaching  positions  include  Garrett  Theological  Semi- 
nary, Candler  School  of  Theology.  Emorv  University.  Dr.  Shockley  s  research  interests  include  black  theological 
education  and  Methodist  history.  His  many  publications  include  books,  chapters,  research  studies,  numerous 
articles  in  professional  journals  and  curriculum  resource  materials.  He  is  a  consultant  to  Protestant  church  edu- 
cation boards  in  the  United  States,  Africa,  Asia,  and  Latin  America.  He  has  served  as  a  visiting  professor  at  New 
York  University.  Northwestern  University,  Drew  University  and  the  University  of  Zimbabwe. 


20    Faculty 


Dwight  Moody  Smith,  George  Washington  Ivey  Professor  of  New  Testament.  B.A.  (Davidson),  B.D.  (Duke  Universi- 
ty), M. A.,  Ph.D.  (Yale  University). 

Professor  Smith's  Composition  and  Order  of  the  Fourth  Gospel  appeared  in  1965.  Subsequently,  his  contribu- 
tions to  Johannine  scholarship  have  taken  the  form  of  articles,  essays  and  reviews,  the  most  notable  of  which 
were  published  in  Johannine  Christianity.  His  textbook,  with  Robert  A .  Spivey,  Anatomy  of  the  New  Testament,  has 
just  appeared  in  a  fourth  revised  edition,  fohn,  in  the  Proclamation  Commentaries  Series,  appeared  in  a  revised 
edition  in  1986.  He  has  published  Interpreting  the  Gospels  for  Preaching,  as  well  as  articles  in  the  Interpreter's  Dic- 
tionary of  the  Bible,  Harper's  Bible  Dictionary,  and  Macmillan's  Encyclopedia  of  Religion.  A  postdoctoral  fellow  of  the 
Lilly  Foundation  (Zurich  Foundation),  the  Guggenheim  Foundation  (Cambridge  University),  and  the  Associa- 
tion of  Theological  Schools,  from  1960  to  1965,  he  previously  taught  at  the  Methodist  Theological  School  in  Ohio. 
He  is  an  elder  in  the  South  Carolina  Annual  Conference. 

Harmon  L.  Smith,  Professor  of  Moral  Theology  and  Professorof  Community  and  Family  Medicine.  B.  A.  (Millsaps  College); 
B.D.,  Ph.D.  (Duke  University). 

Professor  Smith's  teaching  centers  in  systematic  Christian  ethics  and  medical  ethics.  His  principal  research 
interests  are  in  ethical  method,  decision  theory,  and  ethics  and  medicine.  He  has  been  a  visiting  professor  in  several 
universities  both  here  and  abroad,  and  has  lectured  in  more  than  150  colleges  and  universities,  and  more  than 
75  hospitals  and  medical  schools,  in  the  U.S.,  Canada,  and  Europe.  His  most  recent  book  is  Professional  Ethics 
and  Primary  Care  Medicine  (with  Larry  Churchill).  He  is  a  priest  of  the  Episcopal  Church,  canonically  resident 
in  the  Diocese  of  North  Carolina,  and  currently  interim  rector  of  St.  Titus'  Church,  Durham. 

David  C.  Steinmetz,  Amos  RaganKeams  Professor  of the  History  of Christianity.  B.A.  (Wheaton  College);  B.D.  (Drew- 
University);  Th.D.  (Harvard  University). 

Professor  Steinmetz  is  a  specialist  in  the  history  of  Christianity  in  the  later  middle  ages  and  Reformation. 
Before  coming  to  Duke  in  1971,  he  taught  at  Lancaster  Theological  Seminary  of  the  United  Church  of  Christ.  In 
1977  he  was  a  Visiting  Professor  at  Harvard  University  and  a  Guggenheim  Fellow  at  Cambridge  University.  A 
former  president  of  the  American  Society  of  Church  History  (1985),  he  has  written  numerous  books  and  arti- 
cles in  his  field,  including  Luther  and  Staupitz  (1980),  Luther  in  Context  (1986)  and  Memory  and  Mission:  Theological 
Reflections  on  the  Ch  ristian  Past  ( 1988) .  He  is  a  United  Methodist  minister  and  a  member  of  the  North  Carolina  Con- 
ference. 

James  L.  Travis  III,  Clinical  Professor  of  Pastoral  Care.  B.A.  (Mississippi  College);  B.D.,  Th.M.  (Southern  Baptist 
Theological  Seminary);  Ph.D.  (Emory  University). 

Professor  Travis'  clinical  and  academic  interests  have  blended  over  twenty-five  years  of  pastoral  care  and  edu- 
cation in  psychiatric  and  general  hospitals.  Earlier  publications  address  issues  such  as  New  Testament  implica- 
tions for  pastoral  care  and  counseling,  and  liturgical  worship  in  a  psychiatric  hospital.  Certified  as  a  chaplain 
supervisor  by  the  Association  for  Clinical  Pastoral  Education,  he  is  interested  in  the  formation  and  development 
of  persons  in  the  pastoral  role,  and  medical  ethics  and  pastoral  care.  His  research  interests  include  the  relation- 
ship of  pastoral  care  to  health  care  and  the  measurement  of  objectives  in  CPE  programs.  Dr.  Travis  is  chaplain 
to  Duke  University  Hospital  and  director  of  chaplain  services  at  Duke  University  Medical  Center. 

William  C.  Turner,  Jr.,  Assistant  Research  Professor  of  Theology  and  Black  Church  Studies.  B.S.,  M.Div.,  Ph.D.  (Duke 
University). 

Professor  Turner  held  positions  within  Duke  University  in  student  affairs  and  Afro-American  studies  be- 
fore joining  the  Divinity  School  faculty.  His  ongoing  work  focuses  on  pneumatology  and  the  tradition  of  spirituality 
and  preaching  within  the  black  church.  Upcoming  articles  on  "Black  Evangelicalism,"  "The  Musicality  of  Black 
Preaching,"  and  "The  Black  Church  and  the  Ecumenical  Tradition"  reflect  his  teaching  and  writing  interests.  Profes- 
sor Turner  travels  widely  as  a  preacher  and  lecturer.  He  retains  active  involvement  in  church  and  community 
activities. 

Dan  O.  Via,  Professor  of  New  Testament.  B.S.  (Davidson  College);  B.D.  (Southern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary); 
Ph.D.  (Duke  University),  Litt.  D  (Davidson  College). 

Professor  Via's  teaching  and  research  interests  focus  on  the  parables  of  Jesus,  the  Gospels  of  Mark  and  Mat- 
thew, New  Testament  theology  and  ethics,  andhermeneutics;  andhis  primary  method  of  interpretation  has  been 
to  use  existential  thinking  and  literary  criticism  as  a  means  for  articulating  the  theological  meaning  of  the  New 
Testament.  Among  his  publications  are  The  Parables  and  The  Ethics  of  Mark's  Gospel.  His  current  project  is  a  study 
of  the  problem  of  self-deception  as  it  appears  in  the  writings  of  Paul  and  the  Gospel  of  Matthew.  He  has  held 
visiting  professorships  recently  at  the  University  of  Zimbabwe  and  at  Harvard  Divinity  School.  He  is  an  ordained 
Baptist  minister  and  preaches  in  various  churches  and  lectures  to  ministerial  groups. 

Geoffrey  Wainwright,  Professor  of  Systematic  Theology.  B.A.,  M.A.,  B.D,  D.D.  (University  of  Cambridge);  Th.D. 
(University  of  Geneva). 

A  minister  of  the  British  Methodist  Church,  Dr.  Wainwright  taught  theology  in  Cameroon,  West  Africa 
(1967-73),  Birmingham,  England  (1973-79),  and  Union  Theological  Seminary,  New  York  (1979-83).  He  is  author 
of  Eucharist  and  Eschatology  and  of  Doxology,  and  editor  of  The  Study  of Liturgy  and  The  Study  of  Spirituality,  all  pub- 
lished by  Oxford  University  Press.  He  is  a  member  of  the  Faith  and  Order  Commission  of  the  World  Council  of 


Faculty  Biographical  Information    21 


Churches  and  currently  chairs  the  international  dialogue  between  the  World  Methodist  Council  and  the  Roman 
Catholic  Church.  His  churchly  interests  are  reflected  in  his  book  The  Ecumenical  Moment  and  another  on  Wesley 
and  Calvin  as  Sources  of  Theology,  Liturgy  and  Spirituality.  He  teaches  across  the  entire  range  of  Christian  doctrine 
and  is  particularly  interested  in  the  truth  claims  of  faith  and  theology. 

JohnH.  Westerhoff  HI,  Professor  of  Religion  and  Education.  B.S.  (Ursinus  College);  S.T.B.,  (Harvard  University); 
Ed.D.  (Columbia  University). 

Professor  Westerhoff  is  best  known  for  his  numerous  books,  of  which  Will  Ou  r  Children  have  faith?  has  be- 
come a  classic.  Having  taught  at  various  universities  including  Harvard,  Princeton,  Fordham,  and  Boston  Col- 
lege, hehasbeenat  Duke  for  fifteen  years,  where  he  has  focused  his  scholarship  and  teaching  on  Christian  for- 
mation, education,  and  instruction.  For  the  past  ten  years  he  has  been  editor  of  the  journal  Religious  Education. 
As  a  practical  theologian  he  is  concerned  about  the  intersection  of  various  aspects  of  ministry  such  as  liturgies, 
pastoral  care,  and  spirituality.  An  Episcopal  priest,  he  assists  at  the  Chapel  of  the  Cross  in  Chapel  Hill,  North 
Carolina.  A  popular  speaker  and  workshop  leader,  he  travels  throughout  the  world  working  with  clergy  and 
laity  from  many  traditions. 

William  H.  Willimon,  Professor  of  Christian  Ministry.  B.A.  (Wofford  College);  M.Div.  (Yale  University);  S.T.D.  (Emory 
University). 

Professor  Willimon  teaches  courses  in  preaching  and  worship  in  addition  to  his  duties  as  minister  to  the  univer- 
sity. Before  coming  to  Duke,  he  served  as  pastor  in  churches  in  Georgia  and  South  Carolina.  His  research  and 
publication  includes  work  in  liturgies,  homiletics,  and  pastoral  care.  He  is  the  author  of  twenty-six  books,  two 
of  which  have  been  selected  by  the  Academy  of  Parish  Clergy  as  the  most  useful  book  for  pastors  in  the  year  in 
which  they  were  published .  He  has  served  the  Church  as  an  editor  of  new  worship  resources,  curriculum  writ- 
er, and  as  a  member  of  the  United  Methodist  Commission  on  Worship.  He  is  on  the  editorial  board  of  three  profes- 
sional journals,  including  Quarterly  Reviezo  and  the  Christian  Century,  and  has  lectured  in  the  United  States,  Ko- 
rea, and  Europe.  He  is  an  elder  in  the  South  Carolina  Conference  of  the  United  Methodist  Church. 

Robert  L.  Wilson,  Professor  of  Church  and  Society.  A.B.  (Asbury  College);  M.  A.  (Lehigh  University);  B.D.  Garrett- 
Evangelical  Theological  Seminary;  Ph.D.  (Northwestern  University). 

Professor  Wilson's  research  interests  focus  on  the  relationship  between  church  and  community,  the  sociol- 
ogy of  religious  institutions,  congregational  planning  and  United  Methodist  polity.  His  major  publications  are: 
Faith  and  Form:  A  Unity  of  Theology  and  Polity  in  the  United  Methodist  Tradition  (with  Steve  Harper),  Rekindling  the 
Flame:  Strategies  for  a  Vital  United  Methodism  (with  W.  H.  Willimon),  Shaping  the  Congregation,  Preachingand  Wor- 
ship in  the  Small  Church  (with  Willimon),  and  What's  Ahead  for  Old  First  Church  (with  E.E.  Jones).  He  is  the  author 
of  numerous  articles  and  research  reports.  For  twelve  years  prior  to  coming  to  Duke,  he  served  as  director  of  re- 
search for  the  National  Division  of  the  Board  of  Missions.  An  elder  in  the  North  Carolina  Conference  of  the  United 
Methodist  Church,  he  is  the  director  of  the  J.  M.  Ormond  Center  for  Research  Planning  and  Development  at  Duke 
University. 


22    Faculty 


Faculty  Biographical  Information    23 


Admissions 


Requirements  and  Procedures 

The  Divinity  School  is  a  fully  accredited  member  of  the  Association  of  Theological 
Schools  and  is  one  of  thirteen  accredited  seminaries  of  the  United  Methodist  Church. 
It  considers  candidates  for  admission  who  hold  an  A. B.  degree,  or  its  equivalent,  from 
a  college  approved  by  a  regional  accrediting  body. 

Preseminary  Curriculum.  The  Divinity  School  follows  the  guidelines  of  the  Associ- 
ation of  Theological  Schools  with  respect  to  undergraduate  preparation  for  theological 
study.  In  general,  this  means  a  strong  background  in  liberal  arts,  especially  the  humani- 
ties. A  well-rounded  background  in  English  language  and  literature,  history,  philosophy, 
psychology,  religion,  social  science,  and  foreign  languages  is  especially  desirable. 

Application  Procedures  for  Master  of  Divinity  and  Master  of  Religious  Education 
Programs.  Application  forms  secured  from  the  admissions  office  should  be  filed  six  to 
twelve  months  in  advance  of  the  intended  date  of  enrollment.  Ordinarily,  no  application 
for  a  degree  program  will  be  accepted  after  15  May  and  1  November  for  August  and  January 
enrollments,  respectively.  The  student  should  provide  the  following  supporting  docu- 
ments and  information:  (1)  one  copy  of  the  official  transcript  from  each  college,  univer- 
sity, or  seminary  attended  sent  by  the  institution  directly  to  the  director  of  admissions; 
(2)  one  supplementary  transcript,  sent  as  soon  as  possible,  showing  completion  of  work 
which  was  in  progress  when  the  earlier  transcript  was  made;  and  (3)  the  names  of  five 
persons  who  are  best  qualified  to  judge  the  applicant  as  a  prospective  student  in  the  Di- 
vinity School  and  who  will  be  contacted  by  the  school  for  written  letters  of  recommen- 
dation. Of  these  five  references,  two  or  three  should  be  academic  and  two  or  three  should 
be  general,  including  a  home  pastor  or  official  denominational  representative.  Materials 
submitted  in  support  of  an  application  are  not  released  for  other  purposes  and  cannot  be  returned 
to  the  applicant. 

Applicants  are  strongly  urged  to  come  for  on-campus  visits  and  interviews  prior  to 
final  admission.  A  minimum  of  thirty  days  is  required  to  process  any  application  for  a  degree 
program. 

Graduates  of  unaccredited  senior  colleges  and  universities  may  apply  for  admission, 
but  will  be  considered  for  admission  only  on  a  limited  program  basis  (see  next  page). 

Admission  Requirements.  Those  persons  are  encouraged  to  apply: 

1.  who  have  or  will  have  been  awarded  a  bachelor's  degree  from  a  regionally  ac- 
credited college  or  university  prior  to  their  intended  date  of  enrollment; 

2.  who  have  attained  at  least  an  overall  B-  (2.65  on  4.0  scale)  academic  average;  and 

Requirements  and  Procedures    25 


3.    who  are  committed  to  some  form  of  ordained  or  lay  ministry. 
Applicants  are  eimluated  on  the  basis  of  academic  attainment,  futu  re  promise  for  ministry,  and 
vocational  clarity  and  commitment. 

Admission  on  Limited  Program.  Limited  program  is  a  special  relation  between  the 
school  and  the  student,  designed  to  encourage  and  support  academic  achievement.  Stu- 
dents mav  be  admitted  on  limited  program  for  a  number  of  reasons  including  an  under- 
graduate degree  in  a  program  other  than  liberal  arts,  an  undergraduate  degree  from  a 
nonaccredited  college,  or  an  undergraduate  transcript  that  does  not  fully  meet  Divinity 
School  standards. 

Limited  program  means  reduced  schedules  of  work,  with  the  amount  determined 
by  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs  (ordinarily  no  more  than  three  courses  each 
of  the  first  two  semesters),  and  also  includes  a  review  of  work  at  the  end  of  each  semes- 
ter by  the  Committee  on  Academic  Standing  until  limited  program  status  is  lifted. 

Application  Procedures  for  Master  of  Theological  Studies  Program.  Application 
forms  can  be  secured  from  the  admissions  office  and  should  be  filed  six  to  twelve  months 
in  advance  of  the  intended  date  of  enrollment.  Ordinarily,  no  application  for  the  M.T.S. 
degree  will  be  accepted  after  15  May  and  1  November  for  August  and  January  enrollments, 
respectively.  The  student  should  provide  the  following  supporting  documents  and  in- 
formation: (1)  one  copy  of  the  official  transcript  from  each  college,  university,  or  semi- 
nary attended  sent  by  the  institution  directly  to  the  director  of  admissions;  (2)  one  sup- 
plementary transcript,  sent  as  soon  as  possible,  showing  completion  of  work  which  was 
in  progress  when  the  earlier  transcript  was  made;  (3)  the  names  of  three  or  four  college 
(or  seminarv)  professors  who  are  best  qualified  to  judge  the  applicant  as  a  prospective 
student  in  the  Divinity  School  and  who  will  be  contacted  by  the  school  for  written  letters 
of  recommendation;  and  (4)  the  name  of  at  least  one  person  willing  to  serve  as  a  general 
reference  who  will  be  contacted  bv  the  school  for  a  written  letter  of  recommendation. 
Materials  submitted  in  support  of  an  application  are  not  released  for  other  purposes  and  cannot  be 
returned  to  the  applicant. 

Admission  Requirements.  Those  persons  are  encouraged  to  applv  for  the  M.T.S. : 

1 .  who  have  been  awarded  a  bachelor's  degree  from  a  regionally  accredited  college 
or  university  prior  to  their  intended  date  of  enrollment; 

2.  who  have  attained  at  least  an  overall  8  (3.0  on  a  4.0  scale)  academic  average;  and 

3.  who  demonstrate  program  goals  commensurate  with  this  degree  program. 

Application  Procedures  for  Master  of  Theology  Program.  Application  forms  can  be 
secured  from  the  admissions  office  and  should  be  filed  six  to  twelve  months  in  advance 
of  theintended  date  of  enrollment.  Ordinarily,  no  application  for  the  Th.M.  degree  will 
be  accepted  after  15  May  and  1  November  for  August  and  January  enrollments,  respec- 
tivelv.  The  student  should  provide  the  following  supporting  documents  and  informa- 
tion: (1)  one  copy  of  the  official  transcript  from  each  college,  university,  or  seminary 
attended  sent  directly  to  the  director  of  admissions  by  the  institution;  (2)  one  supplemen- 
tary transcript,  sent  as  soon  as  possible,  from  the  seminarv  showing  completion  of  work 
which  was  in  progress  when  the  earlier  transcript  was  made;  (3)  the  names  of  three  semi- 
nary professors  who  are  best  qualified  to  judge  the  applicant  as  a  prospective  student  in 
the  Divinity  School  and  who  will  be  contacted  by  the  school  for  written  letters  of  recom- 
mendation; (4)  the  name  of  one  denominational  official  qualified  to  appraise  the  appli- 
cant's ministerial  work  who  will  be  contacted  bv  the  school  for  a  written  letter  of  recom- 
mendation; and  (5)  scores  from  either  the  Graduate  Record  Examination  or  the  Miller 
Analogies  Test  sent  directly  to  the  school.  Materials  submitted  in  support  of  an  application 
are  not  released  for  other  purposes  and  cannot  be  returned  to  the  applicant . 


26    Admissions 


Requirements  and  Procedures    27 


Admission  Requirements.  Those  persons  are  encouraged  to  apply  for  the  Th.M.: 

1 .  who  have  been  awarded  a  bachelor's  degree  from  a  regionally  accredited  college 
or  university; 

2.  who  have  or  will  have  been  awarded  the  M .  Div.  degree  (or  the  equivalent)  from 
an  accredited  theological  institution; 

3.  who  have  achieved  superior  academic  records;  and 

4.  who  desire  to  continue  or  resume  their  theological  education  for  enhancement 
of  professional  competence  in  selected  areas  of  study. 

Other  than  one  scholarship  per  year  for  an  international  student,  Master  of Theology  students 
are  not  eligible  for  any  fonn  of  financial  assistance  through  the  Divinity  School. 

Additional  Procedures  for  International  Students.  Fully  qualified  students  from  out- 
side the  United  States  are  welcome  to  apply  for  admission  to  the  Divinity  School.  In  ap- 
plying for  admission  the  international  student  must,  in  addition  to  the  information  re- 
quired of  all  students,  submit  with  the  application  material:  (1)  if  the  student's  native 
language  is  not  English,  certification  of  English  proficiency  demonstrated  by  scores  from 
the  Test  of  English  as  a  Foreign  Language  (TOEFL),  administered  through  the  Educational 
Testing  Service  in  Princeton,  New  Jersey,  (the  Divinity  School  requires  a  score  of  550  or 
higher  on  the  TOEFL);  (2)  a  statement  of  endorsement  from  an  official  of  the  student's 
national  ecclesiastical  body,  affirming  that  ecclesiastical  body's  support  for  the  student's 
pursuit  of  theological  studies  in  the  United  States  and  welcoming  the  student  into  active 
ministry  under  its  jurisdiction  following  the  student's  study  in  this  country;  and  (3)  a  state- 
ment demonstrating  financial  arrangements  for  the  proposed  term  at  the  Divinity  School 
(estimated  costs  per  calendar  year  are  $17,000*).  An  international  student  must  submit  scores 
from  the  TOEFL,  a  financial  statement,  an  endorsement  by  an  official  of  an  ecclesiastical  body,  and 
have  all  transcripts  and  five  letters  of  recommendation  sent  to  the  admissions  office  of  the  Divinity 
School  before  the  Divinity  School  will  make  any  offer  of  admission. 

Admission  as  a  Special  Student.  Special  student  status  is  a  restricted  category  of  ad- 
mission for  persons  who  do  not  have  need  of  a  degree  program  and  who  desire  access 
to  the  rich  offerings  of  the  Divinity  School  curriculum  for  particular  purposes  (courses 
are  taken  for  credit) .  Special  student  status  may  be  granted  after  a  person  has  submitted 
an  application  and  all  transcripts  of  undergraduate  academic  work  and  when  all  three 
letters  of  recommendation  have  been  received  from  listed  references.  Applications  for 
special  student  status  must  be  submitted  at  least  forty-five  days  prior  to  the  intended  date 
of  enrollment.  Special  students  are  ineligible  for  any  form  of  financial  assistance  through  the  Di- 
vinity School. 

Admission  Acceptance.  Applicants  are  expected  to  indicate  their  acceptance  of  ad- 
mission within  three  weeks  of  notification  and  to  confirm  this  with  the  payment  of  an 
admission  fee  of  $50.  Upon  matriculation,  this  fee  is  applied  to  the  first  semester  tuition 
charge. 

To  complete  admission  students  must  provide  a  certificate  of  immunization  and  gener- 
al health  to  the  student  health  service.  The  admission  office  must  also  receive  a  final  tran- 
script verifying  the  conferral  of  the  undergraduate  (for  the  M.Div.,  M.T.S.  and  M.R.E.) 
or  seminary  (for  the  Th.M.)  degree. 

Persons  who  do  not  matriculate  at  the  time  for  which  they  were  originally  admitted 
forfeit  admission  unless  they  present  a  written  request  for  postponement  to  the  director 
of  admissions.  The  application  will  then  be  placed  in  the  deferred  file,  active  for  one  calen- 
dar year. 

Transfer  of  Credit.  Transfer  of  credit  from  theological  schools  accredited  by  the  As- 
sociation of  Theological  Schools  is  allowed  by  the  Divinity  School  towards  the  Master  of 
Divinity,  Master  of  Religious  Education,  and  Master  of  Theological  Studies  degrees.  Credit 


'Figures  are  based  on  1988-89  charges  and  are  subject  to  change. 

28   Admissions 


from  another  institution  will  normally  be  limited  in  the  M.Div  and  M.R.E.  programs  to 
one-third  of  the  total  number  of  credits  required  for  graduation  by  the  Divinity  School 
(and  to  one-quarter  for  the  M.T.S.).  In  each  case  a  letter  of  honorable  dismissal  from  the 
school  from  which  transfer  is  made  is  required  along  with  a  transcript  of  academic  credits. 
Applicants  for  transfer  into  a  degree  program  are  evaluated  on  the  same  basis  as  other 
applicants. 

Conduct  of  Students 

Duke  University  expects  and  will  require  of  all  its  students  continuing  loyal  cooper- 
ation in  developing  and  maintaining  high  standards  of  scholarship  and  conduct.  The 
university  wishes  to  emphasize  its  policy  that  all  students  are  subject  to  the  rules  and  regu- 
lations of  the  university  currently  in  effect,  or  which  are  put  into  effect  from  time  to  time 
by  the  appropriate  authorities  of  the  university.  Any  student,  in  accepting  admission, 
indicates  willingness  to  subscribe  to  and  be  governed  by  these  rules  and  regulations  and 
acknowledges  the  right  of  the  university  to  take  such  disciplinary  action,  including  sus- 
pension and/or  expulsion,  as  may  be  deemed  appropriate,  for  failure  to  abide  by  such 
rules  and  regulations  or  for  conduct  adjudged  unsatisfactory  or  detrimental  to  the 
university. 

The  Divinity  School  expects  its  students  to  participate  in  a  communally  shared  con- 
cern for  growth  in  life  appropriate  to  Christian  faith  and  to  the  dignity  of  their  calling. 

Readmission  to  Duke  Divinity  School 

Persons  seeking  readmission  to  the  Divinity  School's  degree  programs  must  com- 
plete the  following  requirements:  (1)  submit  a  new  application;  (2)  submit  an  additional 
statement  detailing  reasons  for  withdrawal  and  reasons  for  seeking  readmission  at  this 
time,  and  describing  activities  and  employment  undertaken  since  withdrawal;  (3)  sub- 
mit the  names  of  at  least  three  persons  willing  to  serve  as  references,  one  of  which  must 
be  an  ecclesiastical  official;  and  (4)  transcripts  of  all  academic  work  undertaken  since  with- 
drawal from  the  Divinity  School. 

These  new  materials,  supplemented  by  the  individual's  original  application  and 
Divinity  School  academic  and  field  education  files,  will  be  reviewed  by  the  members  of 
the  Admissions  Committee  for  an  admission  decision.  An  interview  with  the  director  of 
admissions  prior  to  the  processing  of  the  application  for  readmission  is  encouraged  and 
may  be  required .  Any  questions  about  readmission  procedures  should  be  addressed  to 
the  director  of  admissions.  Applications  for  readmission  will  be  evaluated  on  the  basis 
of  academic  attainment,  future  promise  for  the  ministry,  and  vocational  clarity  and 
commitment. 


Readmission  to  Duke  Divinity  School    29 


Corporate  Worship 

One  of  the  most  important  aspects  of  training  for  Christian  life  is  vigorous,  inspir- 
ing, and  varied  participation  in  corporate  worship.  This  corporate  life  of  the  Divinity 
School  is  centered  in  York  Chapel  where  three  services  are  held  weekly— a  service  of  word 
and  prayer  on  Tuesday,  a  service  of  preaching  on  Wednesday,  and  a  service  of  word  and 
table  on  Thursday.  These  services  are  led  by  members  of  the  faculty,  the  student  body, 
and  guests.  Services  are  voluntary  but  have  been  and  will  continue  to  be  sources  of  in- 
spiration and  strength  to  the  members  of  the  community. 

The  Divinity  School  enjoys  a  particularly  close  relationship  with  Duke  Chapel. 
Throughout  the  year,  Divinity  School  administrators  and  faculty,  as  well  as  guests  of  na- 
tional and  international  stature,  preach  at  Sunday  morning  worship  services.  Each  year 
many  of  our  students  join  the  200-plus  member  Duke  Chapel  Choir  which  provides  choral 
music  on  Sunday  mornings  and  special  music  programs  throughout  the  academic  year, 
including  an  annual  Christmas  performance  of  Handel's  Messiah .  Divinity  students  and 
faculty  also  contribute  to  the  leadership  of  the  ministry  of  Duke  Chapel  by  chairing  and 
serving  on  standing  committees:  Faith  and  the  Arts,  Supportive  Ministries,  Worship, 
Prophetic  Concerns,  and  Leadership  and  Development. 

Living  Accommodations 

Town  House  Apartments.  Duke  University  operates  Town  House  Apartments 
primarily  for  graduate  and  professional  school  students.  Others  may  be  housed  if  vacan- 
cies exist.  The  setting  of  these  apartments  provides  single  graduate  students  a  comforta- 
ble, home-like  atmosphere.  Sixteen  of  the  thirty-two  air-conditioned  apartments  are 
equipped  for  two  students,  and  the  remaining  sixteen  units  are  equipped  for  three 
students. 

Central  Campus  Apartments.  Duke  University  operates  a  500-unit  housing  facility 
known  as  Central  Campus  Apartments.  The  complex  provides  basic  housing  for  under- 
graduate and  single  graduate  students.  One-bedroom  and  two-bedroom  apartments  are 
fully  furnished.  Assignments  are  made  on  a  first-apply,  first-assigned  basis. 

Application  Procedures.  When  students  are  informed  of  their  acceptance  to  the  Di- 
vinity School,  they  will  also  receive  a  form  on  which  to  indicate  their  preference  for  univer- 
sity housing.  This  form  should  be  returned  to  the  Department  of  Housing  Management. 

Living  Accommodations    31 


Detailed  information  on  the  types  of  accommodations  and  application  forms  will  be  for- 
warded to  the  accepted  student.  However,  if  additional  information  is  desired  prior  to 
a  student's  acceptance,  please  write  to  the  Department  of  Housing  Management,  Duke 
University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Of  f -Campus  Housing.  The  Department  of  Housing  Management  maintains  lists  of 
rental  apartments,  rooms,  and  houses  provided  by  Durham  property  owners  or  real  es- 
tate agents  who  will  agree  not  to  discriminate  in  the  rental  of  property  because  of  race, 
sex,  creed,  or  nationality  of  a  prospective  tenant.  These  lists  are  available  in  the  Central 
Campus  office.  Off-campus  rental  properties  are  not  inspected  or  approved,  nor  does 
the  university  or  its  agents  negotiate  with  owners  for  students,  faculty,  or  staff.  The  majori- 
ty of  divinity  students  live  in  off-campus  apartment  complexes  because  of  their  proximi- 
ty to  the  school  and  their  competitive  rental  rates.  A  listing  of  such  complexes  can  be  se- 
cured from  the  Department  of  Housing  Management  of  the  university  or  from  the  Office 
of  Admissions  of  the  Divinity  School. 

Food  Services.  Food  service  facilities  located  throughout  the  Duke  campus  include 
both  board  plan  and  cash  operations.  Graduate  and  professional  students  are  welcome 
to  eat  in  any  of  the  board  plan  cafeterias  at  guest  meal  prices  or  they  may  participate  volun- 
tarily in  any  of  the  point  plans.  Details  are  available  from  the  Auxilliary  Contract  Office, 
024  West  Union  Building.  Board  plans  in  the  Blue  and  White  Room  Cafeteria  and  the  East 
Court  Cafeteria  provide  participants  and  their  guests  with  unlimited  seconds-style  meals 
throughout  the  week  at  set  prices.  Dining  facilities  on  the  West  Campus  include  a  cafete- 
ria with  multiple-choice  menus,  the  Oak  Room  with  table  service,  and  the  Cambridge 
Inn  with  fast  foods  and  beverages.  The  Bryan  Center  has  a  snack  bar  and  a  Rathskeller, 
both  open  all  week,  morning  through  late  evening.  East  Campus  has  cafeteria  service  and 
a  snack  bar.  Trent  Drive  Hall  has  a  public  cafeteria  and  North  Central  Connection,  a  snack 
bar/delicatessen .  Duke  University  Food  Services  is  the  largest  student  employer  on  cam- 
pus, and  hires  students  in  almost  every  food  operation.  A  listing  of  open  positions  and 
areas  is  available  from  the  Personnel  Office,  B3  East  Union  Building,  or  Student  Labor 
Services  Office,  03  West  Union. 

Student  Health 

Student  Health  Program.  The  aim  of  the  university  health  program  is  to  provide  med- 
ical care  and  health  advice  necessary  to  help  the  student  enjoy  the  university  communi- 
ty. To  serve  this  purpose,  both  the  university  health  service  clinic  and  the  university  in- 
firmary are  available  for  student  health  care  needs.  A  mandatory  student  health  fee  for 
these  services  is  assessed  for  all  full-time  and  part-time  degree  candidates  (special  stu- 
dents, auditors,  and  student  pastors  are  exempt).  Appeal  for  waiver  can  be  made  to  the 
university's  dean  of  student  life  during  registration  for  classes. 

The  main  components  of  the  health  service  include  the  university  health  service  clinic, 
located  in  the  Pickens  Building  on  West  Campus,  and  the  university  infirmary  in  Duke 
Hospital  South .  Emergency  transportation,  rf  required,  can  be  obtained  from  the  Duke 
campus  police.  Residential  staff  personnel  or  Divinity  School  administrators  should  be 
consulted  whenever  possible  for  assistance  in  obtaining  emergency  treatment. 

The  facilities  of  the  university  health  service  clinic  are  available  during  both  regular 
and  summer  sessions  to  all  currently  enrolled  full-time  students.  The  facilities  of  the 
university  infirmary  are  available  during  the  regular  sessions  from  the  opening  of  the 
university  in  the  fall  until  graduation  day  in  the  spring  to  all  currently  enrolled  full-time 
students. 

Student  Insurance  Program.  The  university  has  also  made  arrangements  for  a  Stu- 
dent Accident  and  Sickness  Insurance  plan  to  complement  the  coverage  provided  by  the 
Student  Health  Program.  All  full-time  and  part-time  degree  candidates  are  required  to 
be  financially  responsible  for  medical  expenses  above  those  covered  by  the  Student  Health 


32    Community  Life 


Program,  either  through  this  university  insurance  policy,  a  private  policy,  or  personal 
financial  resources.  Students  who  have  equivalent  medical  insurance  or  wish  to  accept 
the  financial  responsibility  for  any  medical  expense  may  elect  not  to  take  the  Duke 
insurance  plan  by  completing  the  waiver  statement  contained  on  the  remittance  form  of 
the  university  invoice.  This  statement  requires  the  name  of  the  insurance  company  and 
the  policy  number  as  well  as  the  signature  of  the  student  or  parent.  Also,  this  require- 
ment may  be  waived  by  signing  the  appropriate  space  on  the  university  invoice  indicat- 
ing willingness  to  assume  the  medical  costs  of  any  sickness  or  accident. 

For  additional  fees,  a  student  may  obtain  insurance  coverage  for  a  spouse  or  spouse 
and  children.  Married  students  are  expected  to  be  financially  responsible  for  their  depen- 
dents, providing  for  hospital,  medical,  and  surgical  care,  since  their  dependents  are  not 
covered  at  any  time  by  the  Student  Health  Program. 

The  resources  of  the  Duke  University  Medical  Center  are  available  to  all  Duke  stu- 
dents and  their  spouses  and  children.  Charges  for  any  and  all  services  received  from  the 
Medical  Center  are  the  responsibility  of  the  student  as  are  the  charges  for  services  received 
from  physicians  and  hospitals  not  associated  with  Duke  University. 

Counseling  and  Psychological  Services.  Counseling  and  Psychological  Services 
(CAPS)  is  a  component  of  student  services  which  provides  a  coordinated,  comprehen- 
sive range  of  counseling  and  developmental  services  to  assist  and  promote  the  personal 
growth  of  Duke  students.  The  professional  staff  is  composed  of  psychologists,  clinical 
social  workers,  and  psychiatrists  experienced  in  working  with  students  of  all  ages.  They 
provide  evaluation  and  brief  counseling/psychotherapy  regarding  a  wide  range  of  con- 
cerns, including  such  issues  as  self-esteem  and  identity,  family  relationships,  academic 
performance,  dating,  intimacy,  and  sexual  concerns.  While  students'  visits  with  coun- 
selors are  usually  by  appointment,  a  walk-in  consultation  service  is  provided  two  hours 
each  weekday  for  students  with  urgent  personal  concerns. 

Each  year  CAPS  offers  a  series  of  seminars  focusing  on  skills  development  and  spe- 
cial interests.  These  explore  such  interests  as  stress  management,  assertiveness  training, 
career  planning,  couples'  communication,  and  study  skills.  Interested  students  may  call 
or  come  by  CAPS  for  further  information. 

As  Duke's  center  for  administration  of  national  testing  programs,  CAPS  also  offers 
a  wide  variety  of  graduate/professional  school  admission  tests  and  professional  licensure 
and  certification  examinations.  The  staff  is  also  available  to  the  entire  university  commu- 
nity for  consultation  and  educational  activities  in  student  development  and  mental  health 
issues  affecting  not  only  individual  students  but  the  campus  community  as  a  whole.  They 
work  with  campus  personnel,  including  administrators,  faculty,  student  health  staff, 
religious  life  staff,  resident  advisers,  and  student  groups,  in  meeting  needs  identified 
through  such  liaisons.  Staff  members  are  available  to  lead  workshops  and  discussion 
groups  on  topics  of  interest  to  students. 

CAPS  maintains  a  policy  of  strict  confidentiality  concerning  information  about  each 
student's  contact  with  the  CAPS  staff.  If  a  student  desires  that  information  be  released 
to  anyone,  written  authorization  must  be  given  by  the  student  for  such  release. 

There  are  no  charges  for  initial  evaluation,  brief  counseling/psychotherapy,  or  self- 
development  seminars.  If  appropriate,  referral  may  be  made  to  other  staff  members  or 
a  wide  variety  of  local  resources. 

Appointments  may  be  made  by  calling  684-5100  or  coming  by  the  office  in  214  Old 
Chemistry  Building,  West  Campus,  between  8:00  A.M.  and  5:00  P.M.  Monday  through 
Friday.  If  a  student's  concern  needs  immediate  attention,  that  should  be  made  known  to 
the  secretary,  and  every  effort  will  be  made  to  arrange  for  the  student  to  talk  with  a  staff 
member  at  the  earliest  possible  time. 


Student  Health    33 


Motor  Vehicles 

Each  student  possessing  or  maintaining  a  motor  vehicle  at  Duke  University  must  reg- 
ister it  at  the  beginning  of  the  academic  year.  If  a  motor  vehicle  is  acquired  and  maintained 
at  Duke  University  after  academic  registration,  it  must  be  registered  within  five  calen- 
dar days  after  operation  on  the  campuses  begins.  Resident  students  are  required  to  pay 
an  annual  fee  of  $50  for  each  motor  vehicle  or  $25  for  each  two-wheeled  motor  vehicle. 
Students  first  registering  after  1  January  are  required  to  pay  $30  for  a  motor  vehicle  or  $15 
for  a  two-wheeled  motor  vehicle. 

At  the  time  of  registration  of  a  motor  vehicle,  the  following  documents  must  be 
presented:  the  state  vehicle  registration  certificate,  a  valid  driver's  license,  and  satisfac- 
tory evidence  of  automobile  liability  insurance  coverage  with  limits  of  at  least  $10,000  per 
person  and  $20,000  per  accident  for  personal  injuries,  and  $5,000  for  property  damage, 
as  required  by  the  North  Carolina  motor  vehicle  law. 

If  a  motor  vehicle  or  a  two-wheeled  motor  vehicle  is  removed  from  the  campus  per- 
manently and  the  decal  is  returned  to  the  traffic  office  prior  to  20  January  there  will  be 
a  refund  of  one-half  of  the  fee  paid  for  either  a  motor  vehicle  or  a  two-wheeled  motor 
vehicle. 

Student  Activities  and  Organizations 

In  the  absence  of  common  living  and  dining  accommodations,  community  life  in  the 
Divinity  School  centers  around  a  number  of  organizations  and  activities.  The  richness 
of  life  prevents  more  than  a  very  selective  listing  of  activities  and  organizations. 

A  primary  center  for  community  is  a  morning  chapel  service  held  every  Tuesday, 
Wednesday,  and  Thursday  in  York  Chapel  while  school  is  in  session.  Faculty  and  students 
share  joint  responsibility  for  these  services  which  attempt  to  express  the  variety  and  diver- 
sity of  theological  and  liturgical  perspectives  represented  in  the  membership  of  the  com- 
munity. These  chapel  services  are  followed  by  a  fellowship  hour  in  the  Student  Lounge 
where  hot  beverages  and  pastries  are  served  to  a  group  that  on  most  days  includes  stu- 
dents, faculty,  administrators,  support  staff,  student  spouses  and  children,  and  visitors. 

In  addition  to  overseeing  the  planning  of  the  regular  morning  chapel  services,  the 
student-faculty  Worship  Committee  develops  a  number  of  occasional  worship  experiences 
throughout  the  academic  year  in  keeping  with  the  liturgical  calendar  and  church  festivals. 
Special  interest  groups  growing  out  of  and  related  to  the  Worship  Committee  include  such 
sub-committees  as  Sacred  Movement  and  Dance,  Worship  and  the  Arts,  and  Liturgical 
Environment.  Still  other  worship  opportunities  are  available  through  Duke  Chapel  where 
midday  and  evening  prayer  services  on  weekdays  during  the  school  year,  weekly  Sun- 
day worship,  Eucharist,  and  festival  services  are  held. 

Several  informal  groups  exist  whose  major  purpose  is  to  provide  students  with  op- 
portunities to  express  and  share  personal,  professional,  and  spiritual  development  with 
each  other  in  weekly  meetings  on  the  campus  and  at  home.  Among  these  are  covenant 
discipleship,  prayer  and  contemplation,  and  lectionary  discussion  groups. 

Black  Seminarians'  Union.  This  is  an  organization  of  black  students  whose  major 
purposes  are  to  insure  the  development  of  a  theological  perspective  commensurate  with 
the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  and  relevant  to  the  needs  of  black  seminarians  and  the  black 
church  and  to  improve  the  quality  of  life  academically,  spiritually,  politically,  and  socially 
in  the  Divinity  School. 

Christian  Educators  Fellowship.  As  a  professional  organization  for  persons  who  serve 
or  intend  to  serve  as  professional  Christian  educators,  CEF  interprets  the  role  of  the  Chris- 
tian educator  in  the  total  ministry  of  the  Church  and  provides  support,  fellowship,  and 
professional  relationships.  In  addition  to  monthly  program  meetings,  a  Christian  edu- 
cation emphasis  week  is  held  each  spring. 


34    Community  Life 


Student  Activities  and  Organizations    35 


Divinity  School  Choir.  A  student  organization  of  long  standing  is  the  Divinity  School 
Choir.  Membership  is  open  to  all  qualified  students.  The  choir  sings  regularly  for  week- 
day worship  and  at  special  seasonal  programs  and  services.  New  members  are  chosen 
by  informal  auditions  which  are  arranged  for  all  who  are  interested. 

Divinity  Spouses.  Divinity  Spouses  is  an  organization  which  offers  the  spouses  of 
regularly  enrolled  students  opportunities  for  sharing  interests  and  concerns.  The  spouses' 
program,  which  includes  topical  monthly  meetings  with  a  variety  of  speakers,  small  in- 
terest groups,  and  special  projects,  seeks  to  encourage  and  provide  ways  for  spouses  to 
become  a  more  integral  part  of  the  Divinity  School  community.  Monthly  meetings  are 
open  to  all  persons.  A  favorite  event  each  year  is  a  progressive  dinner  for  couples  involv- 
ing the  visitation  of  a  number  of  faculty  homes. 

Episcopal  Students  Fellowships.  Recognizing  a  need  for  denominational  support, 
fellowship,  and  worship  life,  Episcopal  students  organized  the  Episcopal  Students  Fel- 
lowship in  the  spring  of  1988.  In  addition  to  informal  gatherings  and  group  meals,  the 
organization  worships  together  three  times  a  week:  Eucharist  on  Tuesday  mornings, 
Morning  Prayer  on  Wednesday  mornings,  and  Evening  Prayer  on  Thursday  afternoons. 

Order  of  St.  Luke.  Formed  to  bring  about  a  recovery  of  the  worship  and  sacramental 
practice  which  has  sustained  the  Church  since  its  formation  in  apostolic  times,  the  Or- 
der of  St.  Luke  is  a  religious  order  within  the  United  Methodist  Church  that  additional- 
ly is  concerned  to  help  recover  the  spiritual  disciplines  of  John  and  Charles  Wesley  as  a 
means  of  perceiving  and  fulfilling  the  mission  for  which  the  Church  was  formed.  Mem- 
bership in  the  Order  is  open  to  lay  persons,  seminarians,  clergy  of  the  United  Methodist 
Church,  and  to  persons  of  other  denominations.  The  Divinity  School  chapter  of  the  Or- 
der of  St.  Luke  was  chartered  in  the  fall  of  1987. 

Spiritual  Formation  Groups.  While  students  advance  in  the  area  of  academics,  they 
have  a  corresponding  need  to  attend  to  their  spiritual  development.  Within  the  commu- 
nity there  are  several  student-initiated  small  groups  which  help  meet  those  needs.  Stu- 
dents, faculty,  and  staff  are  all  invited  to  participate.  Among  these  are  Covenant  Disciple- 
ship,  Prayer  and  Contemplation,  Care  and  Share,  Walk  to  Emmaus  Reunion,  and 
lectionary  discussion  groups. 

Student  Pastors'  Association.  Students  actively  serving  their  denominations  in  an 
ordained  or  lay  capacity  have  the  opportunity  to  meet,  to  share,  to  plan,  and  to  act  on  their 
common  needs  and  concerns. 

The  Student  Association.  The  officers  of  the  Student  Association  are  elected  and  serve 
as  an  executive  committee  for  conduct  of  the  business  of  the  Representative  Assembly. 

The  purpose  of  the  association  is  to  channel  the  interests  and  concerns  of  Divinity 
School  students  to  the  following  ends: 

1.  to  provide  student  programs  and  activities 

2.  to  represent  students  to  the  faculty  and  administration 

3.  to  represent  students  with  other  Duke  University  organizations;  and 

4.  to  represent  students  in  extra-university  affairs. 

The  Community  Life  Committee  of  the  Student  Representative  Assembly  annually 
plans  at  least  twelve  community-wide  events  for  students  and  faculty.  Weekend  retreats 
present  students  with  an  opportunity  to  become  better  acquainted  with  each  other  and 
with  faculty,  and  to  explore  matters  of  personal,  professional,  or  spiritual  concern.  Dia- 
logues on  ministry  occurring  through  the  year  help  introduce  students  to  practicing 
ministers  and  their  personal,  professional,  and  spiritual  struggles  and  growth. 

The  Christian  Social  Action  Committee  of  the  Student  Representative  Assembly 
serves  as  a  forum  through  which  persons  explore  what  it  means  to  live  out  the  gospel  in 


36    Community  Life 


a  social  context  as  witnesses  of  Christ.  As  an  organization  that  prays  for  the  support  of 
the  community  and  for  guidance  concerning  social  issues  and  also  seeks  to  create  aware- 
ness so  that  our  vision  of  God's  will  in  society  is  enlarged,  CSA  meets  on  a  weekly  basis; 
hosts  forums  on  topics  such  as  capital  punishment,  sexuality  and  the  Church,  and  peace 
with  justice;  provides  leadership  for  events  such  as  the  annual  Crop  Walk  and  Red  Cross 
blood  drives;  and  coordinates  the  matching  of  volunteers  with  church  and  community 
agencies. 

Women's  Center.  The  Women's  Center  serves  the  entire  Divinity  School  communi- 
ty through  a  focus  on  the  special  needs  and  contributions  of  women  in  ministry  in  and 
to  the  Church  and  society.  The  office,  coordinated  by  two  women,  is  a  resource  center 
for  the  whole  community,  in  addition  to  a  support  and  action  center  for  women  in  par- 
ticular. 

Cultural  Resources 

Divinity  School  students  enjoy  access  to  the  many  resources  of  the  university  com- 
munity, particularly  in  the  area  of  the  performing  arts.  Two  active  campus  film  societies 
sponsor  screenings  of  major  motion  pictures  on  Saturday  and  Sunday  evenings.  Other 
films  of  a  classical  nature  are  offered  on  Tuesday  through  Thursday  nights,  with  occasional 
free  films  for  children.  Opportunities  in  music,  dance,  and  drama  are  provided  by  the 
following:  the  Duke  Artists  Series,  Broadway  at  Duke,  the  Chamber  Arts  Society,  Hoof 
'n  Horn,  the  Duke  University  Collegium  Musicum,  Duke  Players,  Duke  Dance,  the  Duke 
University  Symphony  Orchestra  and  the  Wind  Symphony,  the  Duke  University  Jazz  En- 
semble, the  Ciompi  Quartet,  Dance  Black,  and  the  Modern  Black  Mass  Choir,  among 
others. 

Athletic  Programs 

In  addition  to  unrestricted  access  to  all  university  athletic  and  recreational  facilities, 
divinity  students  enjoy  other  benefits  from  Duke's  commitment  to  college  athletics.  The 
university  is  a  member  of  the  Atlantic  Coast  Conference  of  the  National  College  Athletic 
Association,  and  offers  intercollegiate  competition  in  a  variety  of  sports.  Special  admis- 
sion rates  to  football  and  basketball  games  are  available  to  graduate  and  professional  stu- 
dents. The  university  supports  a  strong  intramural  program  in  which  the  Divinity  School 
participates  enthusiastically.  In  recent  seasons  the  school  has  fielded  teams  in  football, 
men's,  women's,  and  co-rec  basketball,  volleyball,  soccer,  and  Softball. 


Athletic  Programs    37 


Financial  Information 


Per  Semester 

Per  Year 

$2,940 

$5,880 

150 

300 

1,100 

2,200 

10 

20 

Fees  and  Expenses 

Master  of  Divinity,  Master  of  Theological  Studies,  and  Master  of  Religious  Educa- 
tion Candidates.  The  table  below  lists  basic  minimum  expenditures.  In  addition  to  the 
fees  cited  here,  there  is  an  admission  fee  of  $50  which  is  applied  to  the  first  term  bill.  See 
relevant  section  on  admissions  for  details. 


Tuition-M.Div.,  M.T.S.,  andM.R.E. 

Student  Health  Fee 

Approximate  Cost  of  Meals 

Student  Representation  Association  Fee 

Tuition  will  be  charged  at  the  rate  of  $735  per  course.  The  figures  shown  are  for  a  pro- 
gram carrying  eight  courses  per  year.  Students  will  be  charged  for  additional  course  en- 
rollments. 

Master  of  Theology  Candidates.  A  student  who  is  a  candidate  for  the  Th.M.  degree 
will  be  liable  for  tuition  on  the  basis  of  eight  courses  at  the  rate  of  $735  per  course.  All  other 
costs  and  regulations  for  the  Th . M .  degree  are  the  same  as  those  for  the  M . Div.  degree. 
Th.M.  students  are  not  ordinarily  eligible  for  student  financial  aid. 

Special  Student.  A  special  student  is  one  who  is  enrolled  for  academic  credit,  but 
who  is  not  a  candidate  for  a  degree  at  that  time.  The  tuition  will  be  charged  on  a  course 
basis.  Other  costs  and  regulations  are  the  same  as  those  for  M.Div.  candidates.  No  financial 
aid  is  available. 

Audit  Fee.  Anyone  seeking  to  audit  a  course  in  the  Divinity  School  must,  with  the 
consent  of  the  instructor  concerned,  secure  permission  from  the  associate  dean's  office. 
In  accordance  with  the  general  university  practice,  a  fee  of  $100  per  course  will  be  charged 
to  all  auditors  who  are  not  enrolled  as  full-time  students. 

Estimated  Living  Expenses.  The  total  cost  for  a  student  to  attend  the  Duke  Divinity 
School  varies  according  to  individual  tastes  and  requirements;  however,  experience  in- 
dicates that  a  single  student  may  expect  to  spend  a  minimum  of  $14,300  for  nine  months 
and  a  married  couple  may  expect  to  spend  a  minimum  of  $19,500  for  twelve  months. 

Housing  Fees.  Estimated  minimal  on-campus  housing  cost  for  a  single  student  will 
be  approximately  $3,000  during  1988-89.  Presently  the  university  does  not  provide  housing 

Fees  and  Expenses    39 


for  married  students.  Housing  fees  are  subject  to  change  prior  to  the  new  academic  year. 
A  $100  deposit  is  required  on  all  reservations. 

Rates  for  Central  Campus  Apartments  will  be  quoted  to  applying  students  upon 
request  to  the  manager  of  apartments  and  property.  Refunds  on  housing  fees  will  be  made 
in  accordance  with  the  established  schedules  of  the  university. 

Athletic  Fee.  Divinity  School  students  may  secure  admission  to  all  regularly  sched- 
uled university  athletic  contests  held  on  the  university  grounds  during  the  entire  academic 
year  by  payment  of  the  athletic  fee  of  $100  per  year  plus  any  federal  tax  that  may  be  im- 
posed. The  fee  is  payable  in  the  fall  semester. 

Payment  and  Penalty.  Invoices  for  tuition,  fees,  and  other  charges  will  be  sent  by  the 
bursar's  office  which  are  payable  by  the  invoice  due  date;  no  deferred  payment  plans  are 
available.  As  a  part  of  the  agreement  of  admission  to  Duke  university  a  student  is  required 
to  pay  all  invoices  as  presented.  If  full  payment  is  not  received,  a  late  payment  charge  as 
described  below  will  be  assessed  on  the  next  invoice  and  also  certain  restrictions  as  stat- 
ed below  will  be  applied. 

If  payment  in  the  amount  of  the  total  amount  due  on  the  student  invoice  is  not  received 
by  the  invoice  due  date,  a  penalty  charge  will  be  accrued  from  the  billing  date  of  the  in- 
voice. The  penalty  charge  will  be  at  a  rate  of  IV3  percent  per  month  (16  percent  per  annum) 
applied  to  the  past  due  balance  on  the  student  invoice.  The  past  due  balance  is  defined 
as  the  previous  balance  less  any  payments  and  credits  received  during  the  current  month 
and  also  any  student  loan  memo  credits,  related  to  the  previous  balance,  which  appear 
on  the  invoice. 

An  individual  will  be  in  default  of  this  agreement  if  the  total  amount  due  on  the 
student  invoice  is  not  paid  in  full  by  the  invoice  due  date.  An  individual  who  is  in  default 
will  not  be  allowed  to  register  for  classes,  receive  a  transcript  of  academic  records,  have 
academic  credits  certified,  be  granted  a  leave  of  absence,  or  receive  a  diploma  at  gradua- 
tion. In  addition,  an  individual  in  default  may  be  subject  to  withdrawal  from  school. 

Refunds  of  tuition  and  fees  are  governed  by  the  following  policy: 

In  the  event  of  death  a  full  tuition  and  fees  refund  will  be  granted. 

In  all  other  cases  of  withdrawal  from  school  tuition  will  be  refunded  according  to  the 
following  schedule:  withdrawal  before  the  opening  of  classes-a  full  refund;  withdrawal 
during  the  first  or  second  week-80  percent;  withdrawal  during  the  third  through  fifth 
week-60  percent;  withdrawal  during  the  sixth  week-  20  percent;  withdrawal  after  the  sixth 
week-no  refund.  No  refund  will  be  granted  for  reduction  in  course  load  after  drop-add  period. 

Tuition  or  other  charges  paid  from  grants  or  loans  will  be  restored  to  those  funds  on 
the  same  prorata  basis  and  will  be  refunded  to  the  student  or  carried  forward. 

These  regulations  applv  to  all  Divinity  School  students— degree  candidates,  special 
students,  and  auditors. 

Debts.  No  records  are  released,  and  no  students  are  considered  by  the  faculty  as  can- 
didates for  graduation,  until  they  have  settled  with  the  bursar  for  all  indebtedness.  Bills 
may  be  sent  to  parents  or  guardians  provided  the  bursar  has  been  requested  in  writing 
to  do  so.  Failure  to  pay  all  university  charges  on  or  before  the  times  specified  by  the  univer- 
sity for  the  semester  will  bar  the  student  from  class  attendance  until  the  account  is  set- 
tled in  full. 

Motor  Vehicle  Registration  Fee.  There  is  a  $50  registration  fee  for  all  automobiles  ($20 
for  two-wheeled  motor  vehicles)  used  on  campus.  Students  who  register  their  automo- 
bile will  not  be  charged  for  registration  of  a  motorcycle.  For  specifics  see  the  chapter 
"Community  Life." 


40    Financial  Information 


Student  Financial  Aid 

A  student  should  select  a  school  on  the  basis  of  educational  opportunity.  At  the  same 
time  financial  consideration  will  be  a  legitimate  and  often  pressing  concern.  Each  student 
should  formulate  at  least  a  tentative  plan  for  financing  the  entire  seminary  education .  Al- 
though the  exact  method  of  financing  the  full  theological  degree  may  not  be  assured  at 
the  beginning,  a  student  should  have  a  clear  understanding  of  the  expenses  and  avail- 
able sources  of  income  for  the  first  year  and  the  assurance  that  there  exist  ways  of  financ- 
ing subsequent  years. 

The  Committee  on  Financial  Aid  will  counsel  the  student  concerning  financial  needs 
and  possible  resources.  There  is  constant  review  of  available  resources  in  order  to  assist 
the  greatest  number  of  students.  However,  the  basic  financial  responsibility  belongs  to 
the  student,  who  is  expected  to  rely  upon  personal  and  family  resources,  earnings,  and 
borrowing  power.  Other  resources  may  include  the  student's  church,  civic  groups,  foun- 
dations, and  resources  of  the  school  (grants,  loans,  field  education  grants,  and  employ- 
ment) .  It  is  the  goal  of  the  financial  aid  office  to  assist  each  student  in  planning  a  finan- 
cial program  so  that  as  little  indebtedness  as  possible  will  be  incurred. 

The  total  amount  available  through  the  Divinity  School  is  limited.  Further,  the  con- 
ditions set  forth  by  the  individual  or  institutional  donors  determine  the  circumstances 
under  which  the  grants  can  be  made.  Almost  without  exception  the  donors  require  ecclesiasti- 
cal endorsement  and/or  declaration  of  ministerial  vocational  aim. 

The  principles  regarding  the  disbursement  of  financial  aid  are  as  follows: 

1 .  Financial  aid  is  recommended  on  the  basis  of  demonstrated  need .  All  students 
must  file  an  application  which  substantiates  need  and  provides  full  information 
on  potential  resources.  This  is  essential  in  order  to  make  Divinity  School  funds 
available  to  the  greatest  number  of  students.  In  order  to  receive  assistance  in  any 
form  from  the  Divinity  School,  a  student  must  be  enrolled  for  at  least  three 
courses  per  semester  and  maintain  an  overall  academic  average  of  2.0  or  higher. 
Falsification  of  a  financial  aid  application  is  a  serious  offense  subject  to  the  pro- 
visions of  the  Divinity  School's  Judicial  Procedures. 

2.  Grants  will  be  made  within  the  limits  of  the  conditions  set  forth  governing  each 
source. 

3.  The  conditions  at  the  beginning  of  the  academic  year  determining  financial  needs 
shall  be  the  governing  criteria  for  the  year.  Financial  aid  programs  are  set  up  on 
a  yearly  basis,  except  for  those  students  who  may  enter  the  second  semester 
and/or  those  few  whose  status  may  change. 

4.  Financial  aid  grants  are  made  on  a  one-year  basis.  The  assistance  may  consist 
of  scholarships,  loans,  tuition  grants,  grants-in-aid,  field  education  grants,  and 
employment,  which  may  be  worked  out  in  various  combinations  on  a  yearly  ba- 
sis. A  new  application  must  be  filed  each  year. 

5.  Grants-in-aid,  or  "tuition  grants,"  are  ballooned  for  the  first  year  of  study  to  as- 
sist students  as  much  as  possible  through  their  transitional  first  year  at  Duke. 
Consequently  grants  for  the  second  and  third  years  of study  will  be  less  than  those  awarded 
for  the  critical  first  year. 

6.  Application  for  financial  aid  may  be  made  by  entering  students  at  time  of  admis- 
sion or  currently  enrolled  students  by  December  1 .  Notification  will  be  given  after 
committee  approval.  Student  pastors  serving  United  Methodist  churches  can 
be  notified  after  the  pastoral  charge  and  Annual  Conference  determine  salary 
schedules.  Financial  aid  applications  for  students  anticipating  fall  matriculation 
are  reviewed  beginning  the  prior  December.  Applications  for  assistance  will  not 
be  accepted  after  June  1  for  August  enrollment  or  after  December  15  for  January 
enrollment. 

7.  Ordinarily  financial  aid  is  not  available  beyond  six  semesters  (eight  for  pastors 
on  reduced  load). 


Student  Financial  Aid    41 


8.  Full-time  students  not  participicating  in  the  field  education  program  mav  work 
up  to  twenty  hours  per  week  in  outside  employment.  Persons  participating  in 
the  field  education  program,  either  summer  or  winter,  may  not  engage  in  other 
forms  of  employment. 

9.  Students  who  have  questions  about  the  Divinity  School's  response  to  their  finan- 
cial aid  request  should  first  speak  with  the  financial  aid  assistant.  Where  desired, 
students  may  file  an  appeals  form  for  full  review  by  the  financial  aid  appeals  com- 
mittee. 

10.  Financial  aid  resources  for  M.T.S.  students  are  limited.  Candidates  are  en- 
couraged to  apply  early. 

11.  Special  students  and  Th.M.  students  (with  the  exception  of  one  international 
scholar  annually)  are  not  eligible  for  any  form  of  financial  assistance  from  the 
Divinity  School.  Th.M.  students  are  eligible  to  apply  for  denominational  and 
federal  loans. 

Financial  Resources 

Personal.  In  order  that  both  the  Church  and  the  Divinity  School  may  be  able  to  ex- 
tend the  use  of  their  limited  funds  to  as  many  students  as  possible,  a  student  who  desires 
a  theological  education  should  be  willing  to  defray  as  far  as  possible  the  cost  of  such  an 
education.  Resources  may  include  savings,  earnings,  gifts,  support  or  loans,  and  if  mar- 
ried, earnings  of  a  spouse.  In  calculating  anticipated  income,  the  student  first  considers 
personal  resources. 

Church.  Many  local  churches  and  conferences  or  other  governing  bodies  provide  gifts 
and  grants  for  theological  education,  such  as  ministerial  education  funds  which  provide 
grants  and/or  service  loans  to  theological  students.  The  student  makes  application  to  the 
home  church,  Annual  Conference,  Presbytery,  or  other  governing  bodv.  The  financial 
aid  office  cooperates  with  these  church  agencies  in  making  recommendations  and  in  han- 
dling the  funds.  United  Methodist  students  and  others  must  be  under  the  care  of  the  appropriate 
church  body  to  be  eligible  for  church  support.  The  school  cannot  compensate  for  a  student's 
indisposition  to  receive  church  funds  when  such  are  available  on  application  through  the 
Annual  Conference  Ministerial  Education  Fund  or  other  agencies. 

The  Divinity  School,  as  a  member  school  of  the  Association  of  United  Methodist  The- 
ological Schools,  takes  cognizance  of  and  subscribes  to  recommended  policy  and  prac- 
tice regarding  the  administration  of  United  Methodist  Church  funds  for  student  finan- 
cial aid  as  adopted  bv  the  association,  1  June  1970,  and  as  bearing  upon  tuition  grants, 
as  follows: 

Resources  for  tuition  grants,  scholarships,  or  the  like  are  primarily  available  to  students  with  declared  voca- 
tional aims  leading  to  ordination  or  recognized  lay  ministries  and  supported  by  commendation  or  endorsement 
of  appropriate  church  representatives.  At  the  same  time,  we  believe  that  consideration  for  a  tuition  grant  may- 
be accorded  to  students  who  adequately  indicate  conscientious  concern  to  explore,  through  seminary  studies, 
a  recognized  church-related  vocation.  Finally,  it  is  our  judgment  that,  where  the  above-mentioned  conditions 
are  deemed  to  be  absent  respecting  a  candidate  for  admission,  the  decision  to  admit  such  a  candidate  should 
be  without  the  assurance  of  any  tuition  subsidy  deriving  from  church  funds.  (AUMTS  Minutes,  1  June  1970.) 

Divinity  School  Scholarships.  A  limited  number  of  scholarships  are  available  to  en- 
courage qualified  students  to  pursue  their  preparation  for  the  Christian  ministry. 

Duke  Scholars  Grant.  Each  vear  the  Divinity  School  awards  a  maximum  of  ten  scholar- 
ships to  entering  junior  students  on  the  basis  of  academic  excellence  in  their  undergradu- 
ate programs  and  promise  for  Christian  ministry.  The  specific  amount  of  a  scholarship 
for  academic  merit  will  depend  upon  a  student's  demonstrated  financial  need  and  will 
not  exceed  a  maximum  $4,500. 

Up  to  ten  scholarships  for  academic  achievement  are  given  for  the  middler  and  senior 
years  of  study.  These  awards  go  to  those  students  with  the  greatest  promise  of  service  to 
the  Church  and  highest  academic  achievement.  The  scholarship  ranges  up  to  $4,500  in 
value,  depending  upon  the  recipient's  demonstrated  financial  need,  and  academic  course 
load. 

42    Financial  Information 


Distinguished  Service  Scholarship.  Each  year  the  Divinity  School  offers  a  maximum  of 
ten  scholarships  ranging  up  to  $4,500  in  value  to  those  students  who  combine  excellence 
in  academic  achievement  with  outstanding  promise  for  ministry  in  the  local  church.  These 
scholarships  are  renewable  in  the  second  and  third  years  if  the  student  continues  to  ex- 
hibit (1)  exceptional  academic  achievement  with  a  grade  point  average  of  3.35  or  higher, 
and  (2)  vocational  promise  as  reflected  in  participation  in  field  education  and  the  Divini- 
ty School  community. 

The  Dean 's  Scholarship.  The  dean's  scholarships  are  awarded  to  eligible  recipients  each 
year.  These  persons  must  represent  strong  promise  for  Christian  ministry,  academic 
achievement,  and  demonstrated  financial  need .  Factors  taken  into  account  are  ethnic  ori- 
gin, missional  responsibilities  for  the  Church  at  home  and  abroad,  and  special  denomina- 
tional needs.  The  specific  amount  of  the  scholarship  is  based  upon  demonstrated  need 
and  may  go  up  to  $4,000  per  year.  The  scholarship  is  renewable  for  two  years  assuming 
continued  academic  achievement,  development  of  ministerial  promise,  and  demonstrated 
financial  need. 

International  Student  Scholarships.  In  cooperation  with  the  Crusade  Scholarship  Com- 
mittee of  the  United  Methodist  Church  and  other  authorized  church  agencies,  students 
are  selected  and  admitted  to  courses  of  study.  Scholarships  for  such  students  are  provided 
from  the  Lewis  Clarence  Kerner  Scholarship  Fund  and  from  individual  churches  and  pri- 
vate philanthropy. 

Tuition  Grants.  These  are  available  in  amounts  commensurate  with  demonstrated 
need  as  adjudged  by  the  Committee  on  Financial  Aid .  Entering  students  may  apply,  on 
notice  of  admission,  by  submitting  the  financial  aid  application  to  the  Office  of  Financial 
Aid.  Enrolled  students  may  apply  for  annual  renewal.  Because  of  the  purpose  and  atten- 
dant educational  objectives  of  the  school,  resources  for  tuition  grants  are  primarily  avail- 
able to  students  with  declared  aims  leading  to  ordination  or  recognized  lay  ministries. 

Field  Education  Grants.  Varying  amounts  ranging  from  $2,400  (winter)  to  a  maximum 
of  $5, 100  (summer)  are  made  available  through  the  Divinity  School  to  students  who  are 
approved  to  participate  in  the  field  education  program.  The  Offices  of  Field  Education 
and  Financial  Aid  work  together  in  determining  placement  and  grant  amount.  This  pro- 
gram includes  the  summer  interns,  winter  interns,  and  student  pastors.  See  full  descrip- 
tion under  the  section  on  field  education. 

Duke  Endowment  Student  Pastor  Grants.  United  Methodist  students  serving  un- 
der episcopal  appointment  as  student  pastors  in  the  state  of  North  Carolina  may  qualify 
for  tuition  assistance  of  no  more  than  $2,400  through  the  Duke  Endowment.  The  Finan- 
cial Aid  Committee  will  determine  student  eligibility  for  such  assistance  after  appoint- 
ments are  read  at  the  meetings  of  the  two  North  Carolina  United  Methodist  Annual  Con- 
ferences. 

Loans.  Loan  funds  held  in  trust  by  the  university,  as  well  as  United  Methodist  stu- 
dent loans  and  funds  supplied  by  the  federal  government  through  the  National  Defense 
Education  Act  of  1958  are  available  to  qualified  students.  The  application  must  be  sub- 
mitted by  1  July. 

Unless  otherwise  indicated,  all  correspondence  concerning  financial  aid  should  be 
directed  to:  Financial  Aid  Office,  The  Divinity  School,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North 
Carolina  27706. 

Employment.  Students  or  spouses  desiring  employment  with  the  university  should 
apply  to  the  director  of  personnel,  Duke  University.  Students  or  spouses  make  their  own 
arrangements  for  employment  either  in  the  city  of  Durham  or  on  campus. 

Endowed  Funds 

Certain  special  funds  have  been  established  as  endowments,  the  income  from  which 
is  used  to  provide  financial  aid  through  scholarships  and  field  education  grants  for  stu- 

Endowed  Funds    43 


dents,  support  for  professorships,  and  enhancement  of  the  Divinity  School  program.  The 
funds  listed  helow  serve  as  essential  resources  for  the  preparation  of  persons  for  leader- 
ship in  Christian  ministry. 

The  Alumni  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1976  by  the  graduates  of  the  Di- 
vinity School  to  provide  financial  support  for  ministerial  candidates. 

The  Martha  Anne  Hills  Andrews  and  John  Spell  Andrews  Scholarship  Fund  was 

estabished  in  1985  by  Don  W.  Andrews  in  memory  of  his  wife,  Martha  Anne,  Divinity 
School  Class  of  1982,  and  their  son,  John.  The  fund  income  provides  student  scholarships 
with  preference  given  to  women  and  men  from  South  Carolina. 

The  R.  Ernest  Atkinson  Legacy  was  established  in  1952  under  the  will  of  the  Rever- 
end R.  Ernest  Atkinson,  Trinity  College  Class  of  1917,  Richmond,  Virginia,  for  ministeri- 
al student  assistance. 

The  Hargrove,  Sr.,  and  Kelly  Bess  Moneyhun  Bowles  Fund  was  established  in  1983 
by  John  Bowles,  Hargrove  Bowles,  Jr.,  R.  Kelly  Bowles,  and  James  Bowles  in  memory  of 
their  parents.  Income  from  the  fund  is  for  scholarship  assistance  in  the  Divinity  School. 

The  Fred  W.  Bradshaw  Fund  was  established  in  1975  through  a  bequest  from  Fred 
VV.  Bradshaw  of  Charlotte,  North  Carolina,  to  be  utilized  for  the  enrichment  of  the  educa- 
tional program  of  the  Divinity  School,  especially  to  support  distinguished  visiting  scholars 
and  outstanding  students. 

The  Emma  McAfee  Cannon  Scholarship  was  established  in  1969  by  Bishop  William 
R.  Cannon  in  memory  of  his  mother,  Emma  McAfee  Cannon,  and  is  designated  to  assist 
students  from  the  North  Carolina  Annual  Conference  of  the  United  Methodist  Church 
who  are  studying  for  the  pastoral  ministry  and  planning  to  serve  in  the  North  Carolina 
Conference. 

The  Clark  Fund  for  Emergency  Assistance  was  established  in  1986  by  Mrs.  Kenneth 
W.  Clark  as  a  discretionary  aid  resource  to  help  meet  the  needs  of  students  who  experience 
unforeseen  crises  due  to  serious  illness,  injury,  or  family  emergencies. 

The  Kenneth  Willis  Clark  Lectureship  Fund  was  established  in  1984  by  Mrs.  Adelaide 
Dickinson  Clark  in  memory  of  her  husband,  Kenneth  W.  Clark,  professor  of  New  Testa- 
ment in  the  Divinity  School,  1931-67.  The  fund  provides  for  distinguished  lectureships 
in  New  Testament  studies  and  textual  criticism. 

The  James  T.  Cleland  Endowment  Fund  was  established  by  friends  and  students  of 
James  T.  Cleland  to  create  a  Chair  of  Preaching  in  his  honor.  He  was  dean  of  the  Duke 
University  Chapel  from  1955  to  1973  and  professor  of  preaching  in  the  Divinity  School. 

The  E.  M.  Cole  Fund  was  established  in  1920  by  Eugene  M.  Cole,  a  United  Method- 
ist layman  of  Charlotte,  North  Carolina,  to  support  the  education  of  ministers. 

The  Lela  H.  Coltrane  Scholarship  was  established  in  1980  by  Mrs.  David  S.  Coltrane 
of  Raleigh,  North  Carolina,  and  friends  of  Mrs.  Coltrane,  to  encourage  excellence  in 
ministry. 

The  Robert  Earl  Cushman  Endowment  Fund  was  established  in  1980  to  create  a 
professorship  in  honor  of  Robert  Earl  Cushman,  research  professor  of  systematic  theol- 
ogy and  dean  of  the  Divinity  School,  1958-71. 

The  Dickson  Foundation  Awards  were  established  by  the  Dickson  Foundation  of 
Mount  Holly,  North  Carolina,  to  provide  assistance  to  students  who  demonstrate  finan- 
cial need  and  superior  ability. 

44    Financial  Information 


The  Duke  Endowment,  established  in  1924,  provides  under  the  Maintenance  and 
Operation  Program,  field  education  grants  for  students  of  the  Divinity  School  who  serve 
in  rural  United  Methodist  churches  under  the  Endowment  and  Field  Education  Program. 

The  Henry  C.  Duncan  Fund  was  established  in  1982  by  the  men  of  the  Village  Chap- 
el, Pinehurst,  North  Carolina,  to  honor  their  pastor,  Chaplain  Henry  C.  Duncan,  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Divinity  School  Class  of  1949.  Income  from  the  fund  is  used  for  scholarships. 

The  N.  Edward  Edgerton  Fund  was  established  in  1939  by  N.  Edward  Edgerton,  Trini- 
ty College  Class  of  1921,  of  Raleigh,  North  Carolina,  for  the  support  of  ministerial  edu- 
cation. 

The  Will  Ervin  Scholarship  Fund  is  an  endowment  established  by  Will  Ervin  in  1980 
and  administered  by  the  Richlands  United  Methodist  Church,  Richlands,  North  Caroli- 
na, for  students  preparing  for  Christian  ministry. 

The  Randolph  R.  and  Shirley  D.  Few  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund  was  established 
in  1987  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Few  of  Durham,  North  Carolina,  to  provide  assistance  for 
ministerial  students  from  the  North  Carolina  Conference  of  the  United  Methodist  Church. 

The  George  D.  Finch  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1972  by  George  David 
Finch,  Trinity  College  Class  of  1924,  of  Thomasville,  North  Carolina,  for  the  support  of 
ministerial  education. 

The  Edgar  B.  Fisher  Memorial  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund  was  established  in  1987 
by  the  family  of  Dr.  Fisher  to  commemorate  his  life  of  distinguished  service  in  ministry 
and  to  provide  assistance  for  men  and  women  preparing  to  be  United  Methodist  pastors 
in  North  Carolina. 

The  W  Kenneth  and  Martha  O.  Goodson  Fund  was  established  in  1981  to  honor  Bish- 
op Goodson,  Divinity  School  Class  of  1937  and  retired  Bishop  of  the  United  Methodist 
Church,  and  Mrs.  Goodson.  The  fund  was  doubled  in  1985  by  a  major  gift  for  scholar- 
ships and  parish  ministry  support  from  Bishop  and  Mrs.  Goodson. 

The  James  A.  Gray  Fund  was  presented  to  the  Divinity  School  in  1947  by  James  A. 
Gray  of  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina,  for  use  in  expanding  and  maintaining  its  educa- 
tional services. 

The  Ned  and  Carmen  Haggar  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1985  by  Carmen 
Haggar  of  Pinehurst,  North  Carolina,  through  her  son,  Alexander  J.  Haggar,  to  support 
theological  education  at  Duke. 

The  P.  Huber  Hanes  Scholarship  was  established  by  the  late  P.  Huber  Hanes  of 
Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina,  Trinity  College  Class  of  1900,  as  a  scholarship  fund  for 
Duke  University,  a  portion  of  which  is  used  to  provide  financial  assistance  for  Divinity 
School  students. 

The  Richard  R.  Hanner,  Jr.  Scholarship  was  established  in  1973  by  friends  of  the  late 
Richard  R.  Hanner,  Jr. ,  Trinity  College  Class  of  1953,  to  support  advanced  work  in  Chris- 
tian education. 

The  Russell  S.  and  Julia  G.  Harrison  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1980  by 
Russell  S.  Harrison,  Divinity  School  Class  of  1934,  and  his  wife,  Julia  G.  Harrison.  The 
fund  supports  persons  from  the  North  Carolina  Conference  of  the  United  Methodist 
Church  preparing  for  ordained  ministry  as  local  church  pastors. 

The  Harvey  Fund  was  established  in  1982  by  C.  Felix  Harvey  and  Margaret  Blount 
Harvey,  Trinity  College  Class  of  1943,  of  Kinston,  North  Carolina,  to  provide  scholarship 
assistance  for  students  preparing  for  parish  ministry. 

Endowed  Funds    45 


The  H.  E.  S.  Inc.  Scholarship  is  a  grant  from  the  H.E.S.,  Inc.,  Los  Angeles,  Califor- 
nia, founded  in  1931  by  Dr.  A .  U.  Michelson,  which  provides  two  full-tuition  scholarships 
each  year. 

The  Stuart  C.  Henry  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1986  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  A. 

Morris  Williams,  Jr.,  of  Gladwyne,  Pennsylvania,  to  honor  the  distinguished  teaching 
career  of  Professor  Henry  and  to  provide  assistance  for  students  with  preference  given 
to  those  affiliated  with  the  Presbyterian  Church. 

The  Franklin  Simpson  Hickman  Memorial  Fund  was  established  in  1966  by  Mrs. 
Veva  Castell  Hickman  in  memory  of  her  husband,  Franklin  S.  Hickman,  who  served  as 
professor  of  the  psychology  of  religion,  the  dean  of  the  Chapel  of  Duke  University,  and 
the  first  preacher  to  the  university.  The  fund  income  supports  a  regular  visiting  lecturer 
in  preaching  and  provides  financial  aid  to  students  who  wish  to  specialize  in  the  psychol- 
ogy of  religion. 

The  George  M.  Ivey  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1948  by  a  gift  of  George 
M.  Ivey,  Trinity  College  Class  of  1920,  of  Charlotte,  North  Carolina,  for  the  support  of 
ministerial  education. 

The  George  Washington  Ivey  Professorship,  with  initial  funding  by  the  Western 
North  Carolina  Conference  of  the  United  Methodist  Church  and  later  funding  by  George 
M.  Ivey,  George  M.  Ivey,  Jr.,  Leon  Ivey,  and  the  Ivey  Trust,  is  the  oldest  named  profes- 
sorship in  the  Divinity  School. 

The  Jameson  Jones  Memorial  Fund  was  established  in  1982  by  a  bequest  and  memori- 
al gifts  following  the  untimely  death  of  Jameson  Jones,  dean  of  the  Divinity  School, 
1981-82.  The  fund  provides  for  the  enrichment  of  programs  and  study  opportunities. 

The  Charles  E.  Jordan  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1969  by  the  family  of 
Charles  E.  Jordan,  former  vice-president  of  Duke  University,  to  support  the  education 
of  ministers. 

The  Amos  Ragan  Kearns  Professorship  was  established  in  1970  by  a  gift  from  the  late 
Amos  Ragan  Kearns  of  High  Point,  North  Carolina,  for  a  Chair  in  Religion. 

The  Lewis  Clarence  Kerner  Scholarship  was  established  in  1959  by  Beatrice  Kerner 
Reavis  of  Henderson,  North  Carolina,  in  memory  of  her  brother  and  designated  for  the 
assistance  of  native  or  foreign-born  students  preparing  for  service  in  world  Christian 
mission. 

The  Carl  H.  and  Mary  E.  King  Memorial  Fund  was  established  in  1976  by  family  and 
friends  of  Carl  and  Mary  King,  distinguished  church  leaders  in  Western  North  Carolina 
Methodism,  to  support  students  preparing  for  educational  ministry  in  the  parish. 

The  John  Haden  Lane  Memorial  Scholarship  was  established  in  1968  by  the  family 
of  John  H .  Lane  to  provide  support  for  education  in  Christian  ministry  including  chaplain- 
cy and  other  specialized  work. 

The  Louie  Mae  Hughes  Langford  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund  was  established 
in  1988  by  Dr.  and  Mrs.  Thomas  A.  Langford  in  memory  of  his  mother. 

The  Thomas  A.  and  Ann  Marie  Langford  Fund  was  established  in  1981  in  honor  of 
Dr.  Thomas  A.  Langford,  dean  of  the  Divinity  School,  1971-81,  and  Mrs.  Langford. 

The  Laurinburg  Christian  Education  Fund  was  established  in  1948  by  members  of 
the  First  United  Methodist  Church,  Laurinburg,  North  Carolina,  for  ministerial  education. 

The  John  Joseph  Lewis  Fund  was  established  in  1982  by  Colonel  Marion  S.  Lewis, 
Trinity  College  Class  of  1916,  of  Charleston,  South  Carolina,  to  honor  his  father,  a  circuit 
riding  Methodist  preacher.  The  fund  income  provides  scholarship  support. 

46    Financial  Information 


The  D.  M.  Litaker  Scholarship  was  originally  established  by  Charles  H.  Litaker  in 
1946  in  honor  of  his  father,  Dr.  D.  M.  Litaker,  Trinity  College  Class  of  1890,  and  was  speci- 
fied for  the  Divinity  School  in  1977  by  the  Litaker  family.  The  income  is  for  support  of  per- 
sons preparing  for  ministry  in  the  Western  North  Carolina  Annual  Conference  of  the 
United  Methodist  Church. 

The  Calvin  M.  Little  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1985  by  the  members  of 
the  First  United  Methodist  Church,  Mt.  Gilead,  North  Carolina,  to  commemorate  a  gener- 
ous bequest  from  Mr.  Little  and  to  affirm  the  important  relationships  between  the  church 
and  the  Divinity  School. 

The  Robert  B.  and  Mary  Alice  Massey  Endowment  Fund  was  established  in  1980  by 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Massey  of  Jacksonville,  Florida,  for  the  support  of  excellence  in  ministry. 

The  Robert  McCormack  Scholarship  was  established  by  the  Trustees  of  the  Duke 
Endowment  to  honor  Robert  McCormack,  chairman  of  the  board  of  the  Duke  Endow- 
ment at  the  time  of  his  death  in  1982. 

The  J.  H.  McCracken  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1947  by  Dr.  J. 
H.  McCracken,  Jr.,  of  Durham,  North  Carolina,  in  memory  of  his  father,  the  Reverend 
Jacob  Holt  McCracken,  a  Methodist  minister  who  served  churches  in  North  Carolina  for 
fifty  years. 

The  C.  Graham  and  Gradie  Ellen  E.  Mitchum  Fund  was  established  in  1985  by  Dr. 
and  Mrs.  Kenneth  E.  Mitchum  of  Pittsboro,  North  Carolina,  in  memory  of  his  father,  a 
lay  preacher,  and  in  honor  of  his  mother.  The  fund  provides  scholarships  for  students 
who  have  significant  financial  needs  and  a  strong  commitment  for  ministry  in  the  local 
church. 

The  J.  Alex  and  Vivian  G.  Mull  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund  was  established  in 
1987  by  the  grant  committee  of  the  Mull  Foundation  of  Morganton,  North  Carolina,  as 
a  memorial  to  Mr.  and  Mrs.  J.  Alex  Mull  who  were  leaders  in  education,  business,  and 
the  church.  Priority  is  given  to  students  from  Burke  County,  North  Carolina. 

The  Myers  Park  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1948  by  members  of  the  My- 
ers Park  United  Methodist  Church,  Charlotte,  North  Carolina,  for  ministerial  education. 

The  Needham-Hauser  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund  was  established  in  1986  by  Eu- 
gene W.  Needham  and  his  wife,  Antoinette  Hauser  Needham,  both  Duke  University 
graduates,  of  Pfafftown,  North  Carolina,  to  provide  assistance  for  students  committed 
to  the  parish  ministry.  Preference  is  given  to  persons  from  the  Western  North  Carolina 
Conference  of  the  United  Methodist  Church. 

The  W.  Fletcher  Nelson  Scholarship  was  established  in  1980  by  friends  of  W.  Fletch- 
er Nelson,  Duke  Divinity  School  Class  of  1930,  of  Morganton,  North  Carolina.  He  was 
responsible  for  the  fund-raising  efforts  which  enabled  renovations  and  the  building  of 
the  new  wing  of  the  Divinity  School. 

The  W.  R.  Odell  Scholarship  was  established  in  1946 by  the  Forest  Hills  United  Meth- 
odist Church,  Concord,  North  Carolina,  to  honor  Mr.  Odell,  a  distinguished  layman. 

The  Parish  Ministry  Fund  was  established  in  1968  to  provide  continuing  education 
opportunities  for  selected  parish  ministers  and  lay  leaders  from  the  Western  North  Caro- 
lina Conference  of  the  United  Methodist  Church.  The  fund  sponsors  seminars,  short 
study  courses,  and  makes  special  grants  for  full-time  study  leaves.  The  program  is  ad- 
ministered by  the  Divinity  School  with  the  assistance  of  the  Parish  Ministry  Fund's  Board 
of  Directors. 

The  Emma  Leah  Watson  and  George  W.  Perrett  Scholarship  was  established  in  1984 
by  Mrs.  Perrett  of  Greensboro,  North  Carolina,  to  provide  scholarships  for  students 
preparing  for  the  ministry  in  the  local  church. 

Endowment  Funds    47 


The  Cornelius  Miller  and  Emma  Watts  Pickens  Memorial  Fund  was  initiated  in  1966 
by  the  Pickens  brothers  to  honor  their  parents.  The  fund  income  helps  to  support  the  Di- 
vinity School  Media  Center. 

The  Maude  Simpson  Pitts  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund  was  established  in  1986 
by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Noah  O.  Pitts,  Jr. ,  of  Morganton,  North  Carolina,  in  memory  of  his  mother. 
The  fund  provides  support  for  students  who  are  committed  to  parish  ministry. 

The  William  Kellon  Quick  Endowment  for  Studies  in  Methodism  and  the  Wesleyan 
Tradition  was  established  in  1985  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Stanley  S.  Kresge  of  Pontiac,  Michi- 
gan, to  support  teaching,  research,  and  publication  in  Methodist  studies  and  to  honor 
their  pastor,  William  K.  Quick,  Divinity  School  Class  of  1958. 

The  Gilbert  T.  Rowe  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1960  through 
the  generosity  of  alumni  and  friends  of  the  Divinity  School  to  honor  the  memory  of  Dr. 
Rowe,  professor  of  systematic  theology. 

The  Elbert  Russell  Scholarship  was  established  in  1942  by  the  Alumni  Association 
of  the  Divinity  School  in  honor  of  Dr.  Russell,  professor  of  biblical  theology  and  dean  of 
the  Divinity  School,  1928-1941. 

The  John  W.  Shackford  Endowment  Fund  was  established  in  1985  by  Margaret  S. 
Turbvfill,  Trinitv  College  Class  of  1940,  of  Newport  News,  Virginia,  to  provide  student 
scholarships  in  memory  of  her  father,  John  W.  Shackford,  who  was  a  leader  in  religious 
education  with  the  former  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  South. 

The  Gaston  Elvin  Small  Family  Fund  was  established  in  1984  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Gaston 
E.  Small,  Jr.  of  Elizabeth  Citv,  North  Carolina.  As  an  unrestricted  endowment,  the  fund 
honors  the  Small  family  and  their  strong  ties  with  Duke  University,  the  Divinity  School, 
and  the  United  Methodist  Church. 

The  Dolly  L.  Spence  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund  was  established  in  1984  bv  Rovall 
H.  Spence,  Sr.  of  Greensboro,  North  Carolina,  in  memory  of  his  wife  and  to  provide  finan- 
cial support  for  ministerial  students. 

The  Hersey  E.  and  Bessie  Spence  Fund  was  established  in  1973  by  a  gift  from  the  es- 
tate of  Hersev  E .  and  Bessie  Spence  and  designated  to  establish  a  Chair  in  Christian  Edu- 
cation. 

The  Hersey  E.  Spence  Scholarship  was  established  in  1947  by  the  Steele  Street  United 
Methodist  Church  of  Sanford,  North  Carolina,  in  honor  of  their  former  pastor  and  late 
professor  in  the  Divinity  School. 

The  David  Johnson  and  Mary  Woodson  Sprott  Fund  was  established  in  1982  by  the 
Sprott  family  of  Winter  Park,  Florida,  with  appreciation  for  Duke-educated  ministers  and 
to  provide  student  scholarships. 

The  Emorie  and  Norman  Stockton  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund  was  established 
in  1988  by  Bishop  Thomas  B.  Stockton,  Divinity  School  Class  of  1955,  and  his  wife  Jean, 
of  Richmond,  Virginia,  in  memory  of  his  parents. 

The  Earl  McCrary  Thompson  Scholarship  was  established  in  1974  in  honor  of  the  late 
Earl  McCrary  Thompson,  Trinity  College  Class  of  1919,  to  support  education  for  ministry. 

The  Wilson  O.  and  Margaret  L.  Weldon  Fund  was  established  in  1983  by  a  friend  to 
honor  Dr.  Weldon,  Divinity  School  Class  of  1934  and  trustee-emeritus  of  Duke  Univer- 
sity, and  Mrs.  Weldon.  Income  from  the  fund  is  for  student  scholarships. 

The  A.  Morris  and  Annabel  Williams  Fund  for  Parish  Ministry  was  established  in 
1983  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  A.  Morris  Williams,  Jr.,  of  Gladwvne,  Pennsylvania,  both  gradu- 
ates of  Duke  University.  This  fund  honors  A.  Morris  Williams,  Divinity  School  Class  of 

48    Financial  Information 


1932,  and  the  late  Mrs.  Williams.  Income  from  the  fund  is  designated  for  scholarships, 
continuing  education,  and  creative  program  support  for  persons  committed  to  Christian 
ministry  through  the  local  church. 

The  A.  Morris  and  Ruth  W.  Williams  Professorship  was  established  in  1988  by  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  A.  Morris  Williams,  Jr.,  of  Gladwyne,  Pennsylvania,  both  graduates  of  Duke 
University.  The  endowment  income  is  restricted  for  use  by  the  Divinity  School  for  a  profes- 
sorship in  the  field  of  parish  ministry  studies. 

The  C.  Carl  Woods,  Jr.,  Family  Scholarship  Endowment  Fund  was  established  in  1988 
by  Mr.  Woods  of  Durham,  North  Carolina,  to  celebrate  the  many  ties  between  three  gener- 
ations of  his  family  and  Duke  University. 

The  United  Methodist  Church  makes  a  substantial  contribution  to  the  Divinity  School 
by  designating  a  percentage  of  its  Ministerial  Education  Fund  and  World  Service  Offer- 
ings for  theological  education .  The  general  Board  of  Higher  Education  and  Ministry  makes 
available  annually  two  national  United  Methodist  scholarships. 

The  Dempster  Graduate  Fellowships  are  awarded  annually  by  the  United  Method- 
ist Board  of  Higher  Education  and  Ministry  for  graduates  of  United  Methodist  theologi- 
cal schools  who  are  engaged  in  programs  of  study  leading  to  the  Ph .  D.  degree  in  religion . 
A  number  of  Divinity  School  graduates  have  held  these  fellowships. 


Endowed  Funds   49 


Field  Education 


Harmon  L.  Smith,  Professor  of  Moral  Theology 


A  Program  for  Ministerial  Formation 

As  the  practice  dimension  of  theological  education,  field  learning  is  designed  to  as- 
sist students  in:  (1)  sharpening  and  clarifying  their  Christian  vocation;  (2)  developing  iden- 
tity as  ministers  by  providing  experience  with  a  variety  of  ministry  tasks;  (3)  providing 
a  ground  for  the  testing  and  reconstruction  of  theological  concepts;  (4)  developing  the 
ability  to  do  critical  and  reflective  thinking  by  relating  theory  and  experience;  (5)  develop- 
ing ministry  skills  to  achieve  an  acceptable  level  of  readiness  for  ministry;  (6)  integrating 
academic  studies,  personal  faith  experiences,  and  critical  reflection  into  a  personal  spiritu- 
al foundation  that  produces  a  confident  and  effective  ministry. 

Field  Education  Credit  Requirements 

Two  units  of  approved  field  education  placement  are  required  for  graduation  in  the 
Master  of  Divinity  degree  program,  one  for  the  Master  of  Religious  Education  program. 
The  Th.M.  and  M.T.S.  degrees  have  no  field  requirements.  A  unit  is  defined  by  one  term 
placement,  either  a  full-time  summer  term  of  ten  weeks  or  twelve  weeks  or  an  academic 
term  of  thirty  weeks  at  fifteen  hours  per  week.  To  be  approved,  the  field  setting  must  pro- 
vide ministerial  identity  and  role,  distinct  ministerial  tasks,  qualified  supervision,  a 
service-learning  covenant,  regular  supervision  conferences,  and  effective  evaluation.  Each 
unit  also  requires  participation  in  orientation  and  reflective  seminars. 

To  qualify  for  credit  the  student  must  apply  and  be  approved  for  a  credited  placement, 
develop  and  complete  a  learning  covenant  with  acceptable  quality  of  work,  cooperate  with 
the  supervisor,  participate  in  a  reflective  seminar,  and  prepare  an  evaluation  of  the  ex- 
perience. Evaluation  will  be  done  by  the  field  supervisor,  student,  field  education  staff, 
and  the  teaching  faculty  of  Church's  Ministry  100  (in  the  case  of  the  second  field  re- 
quirement). 

Prerequisite  for  the  first  field  placement  is  enrollment  in  or  completion  of  Church's 
Ministry  10.  Prerequisite  for  the  second  placement  is  completion  of  sixteen  academic 
credits.  The  first  placement  must  be  completed  within  twelve  months  of  CM  10,  the  sec- 
ond immediately  prior  to  or  concurrent  with  CM  100. 

Administering  Ministerial  Development 

Development  of  readiness  for  ministry  is  the  responsibility  of  each  student .  If  the  Field 
Education  staff  questions  a  student's  readiness  for  a  field  assignment,  a  committee  con- 
sisting of  the  student's  faculty  adviser,  a  member  of  the  Field  Education  Committee,  and 

Administering  Ministerial  Development    51 


Dennis  M.  Campbell,  Dean  and  Professor  of  Theology 


52    Field  Education 


the  Field  Education  staff  will  assess  the  student.  Divinity  School  admissions  materials, 
faculty  perceptions,  evaluation  by  the  Field  Education  staff,  and  if  necessary,  additional 
professional  evaluation  will  be  used.  This  committee  will  approve  the  field  assignment, 
or  refer  the  student  to  remedial  avenues  of  personal  and  professional  development,  in- 
cluding, if  necessary,  a  leave  of  absence  or  withdrawal  from  school.  Such  action  will  be 
referred  to  the  Academic  Standing  Committee  for  inclusion  in  assessment  of  that  student's 
progress  towards  graduation.  When,  for  whatever  reason,  a  student's  evaluation  from 
a  field  setting  raises  questions  about  the  student's  ministerial  learning  and/or  growth, 
or  that  person's  use  of  the  setting  for  those  purposes,  the  same  committee  will  be  con- 
vened to  assess  the  student  and  the  experience  and  to  make  appropriate  recommenda- 
tions to  the  Academic  Standing  Committee. 

Field  Settings  for  Ministerial  Formation 

Students  may  elect  to  meet  their  field  learning  requirement  in  one  of  several  ways. 
They  may  elect  a  voluntary  ministry  avenue.  The  setting  must  meet  the  requirements  set 
by  the  Divinity  School,  but  students,  with  the  direction  of  the  Office  of  Field  Education, 
have  latitude  in  selecting  their  settings.  They  must  invest  a  minimum  of  300  hours  in  prepa- 
ration and  presence,  a  minimum  of  ten  weeks,  in  the  setting  and  comply  with  the  require- 
ments specified  by  the  Divinity  School. 

Students  may  use  a  "private  contract"  field  setting  where  they  have  found  employ- 
ment by  a  congregation  or  church  agency.  Again,  approval  by  the  Office  of  Field  Educa- 
tion for  credit,  300  hours  of  preparation  and  presence  over  a  minimum  of  10  weeks,  plus 
compliance  with  Divinity  School  requirements  regarding  setting,  supervision  and  struc- 
ture are  required. 

Finally,  field  placements  are  often  made  in  settings  that  have  been  developed  and  ap- 
proved by  the  Divinity  School .  These  offer  opportunities  for  ministerial  service  with  su- 
pervision, pastoral  identity,  and  evaluation. 

A  wide  variety  of  ministry  settings  is  available  for  varying  student  goals:  parish  set- 
tings (rural,  suburban,  urban,  larger  parish  patterns,  and  staff  team  ministries);  institu- 
tional settings  (mental  health  institutions,  prisons,  mental  retardation  centers,  and  retire- 
ment homes);  campus  ministry  settings  (positions  on  the  campuses  of  a  variety  of  schools 
as  well  as  internships  in  college  teaching);  and  urban  ministries. 

While  the  Divinity  School  offers  this  rich  diversity  of  settings  for  personal  and 
ministerial  development,  the  large  majority  of  assignments  fall  in  local  churches  in  small 
communities.  Because  of  the  Divinity  School's  ties  with  the  United  Methodist  Church, 
most  field  placements  occur  in  that  tradition.  However,  the  Divinity  School  will  do  every- 
thing possible  to  see  that  each  student  completes  at  least  one  assignment  in  his  or  her  own 
denominational  tradition.  Each  student  is  required  to  complete  one  credit  in  a  local  church 
setting,  unless  permitted  by  the  Field  Education  Committee  to  do  otherwise. 

Internship  Program 

A  full-time  program  embraces  both  a  full-time  salaried  position  and  a  learning  com- 
mitment in  a  single  context  over  a  period  of  time  ranging  from  six  to  twelve  months.  These 
assignments  are  designed  to  engage  the  student  in  considerable  depth  in  particular  minis- 
try skills  in  a  setting  relevant  to  specific  vocational  goals.  Internships  must  encompass 
an  advanced  level  of  specialized  field  experience  which  is  more  complex  and  extensive 
in  its  serving  and  learning  potential  than  the  basic  field  education  short-term  placement. 
The  internship  may  be  individually  designed  to  meet  the  needs  and  interests  of  the  stu- 
dent, provided  that  the  plan  includes  a  student  learning  covenant,  an  agency  service  con- 
tract, approved  supervisory  standards,  and  an  investigation-research  project  acceptable 
to  the  assigned  faculty  adviser.  When  these  components  are  satisfactorily  met  and  the 
evaluation  reports  are  filed,  credit  for  up  to  two  courses  (six  semester  hours)  may  be 

Internship  Program    53 


assigned  for  the  internship.  No  additional  academic  credit  may  be  accumulated  during 
the  intern  year.  Grading  for  the  two  course  credits  will  be  on  a  pass/fail  basis. 

Internship  settings  may  be  student-initiated  or  negotiated  by  the  school.  In  either  case 
an  agency  contract  covering  all  agreements  must  be  made  and  filed  with  the  Office  of  Field 
Education.  Types  of  settings  occasionally  available  for  internship  placement  include:  cam- 
pus ministry  and  college  chaplaincy  positions;  parish  ministry  positions-such  as  associate 
pastor,  parish  director  of  education;  institutional  positions;  and  a  world  mission  intern- 
ship of  one  to  three  years  of  national  or  overseas  service. 

To  be  eligible  to  register  for  an  internship,  the  student  must  have  completed  at  least 
one-half  of  his  or  her  degree  program  and  be  registered  as  a  student  in  good  standing  in 
the  Divinity  School.  Application  forms  and  processing  for  internships  will  be  done 
through  the  Office  of  Field  Education. 

Students  Serving  As  Pastors 

Students  frequently  serve  as  pastors  of  churches,  or  part-time  associates,  during  the 
period  of  their  study  in  the  Divinity  School.  These  appointments  are  made  by  the  ap- 
propriate denominational  official  or  body.  The  Divinity  School  recognizes  this  arrange- 
ment and  recommends  that  the  student  consult  with  the  Office  of  Field  Education,  as 
agent  of  the  dean,  before  accepting  an  appointment  as  pastor  or  associate  pastor. 

The  Office  of  Field  Education  cannot  make  these  appointments.  This  is  within  the 
jurisdiction  of  denominational  authorities,  and  students  should  initiate  their  own  arrange- 
ments. The  Office  of  Field  Education,  however,  requires  a  student  application  for  appoint- 
ment prior  to  accepting  one.  The  office  also  provides  area  church  officials  with  recom- 
mendations for  students. 

Students  who  serve  in  these  capacities  ordinarily  may  enroll  in  no  more  than  three 
courses  per  semester,  thus  requiring  eight  semesters  to  complete  the  Master  of  Divinity 
degree.  Student  pastors  are  not  permitted  to  enroll  in  summer  study  of  any  kind .  Relax- 
ation of  this  regulation  requires  the  permission  (on  the  appropriate  form)  of  the  super- 
vising church  official,  the  field  education  staff,  and  the  associate  dean  for  curricular  af- 
fairs. Students  are  strongly  and  actively  discouraged  from  attempting  to  commute  more 
than  fifty  miles  one  way  on  a  daily  basis.  Extensive  commuting  will  jeopardize  the  stu- 
dent's academic  program,  health,  ministry,  and  family  life. 

In  keeping  with  the  goal  of  the  school  to  develop  competence  in  ministry,  students 
should  use  their  pastoral  appointments  as  learning  contexts  for  field  education  programs 
initiated  by  the  school.  Special  seminars  and  reflection  groups  are  arranged  in  consulta- 
tion with  students  to  advance  their  professional  growth  and  guide  the  pastor's  learning 
activity  in  the  parish.  Periodic  evaluation  will  be  expected  in  the  pastor's  parish,  if  all  the 
conditions  outlined  for  credit  are  met,  and  all  reports  are  completed  and  filed  at  the  ap- 
propriate time.  If,  however,  the  parish  setting  proves  inadequate  for  the  student's  needs 
for  ministerial  growth  and  development,  the  field  education  staff  will  convene  a  review 
committee  consisting  of  the  student's  faculty  adviser,  a  member  of  the  Field  Education 
Committee  and  the  field  education  staff  to  review  the  student's  needs  and  take  appropriate 
action  to  assist  the  student  in  growth.  Examples  of  such  action  are:  requiring  an  alterna- 
tive field  experience,  or  a  basic  unit  of  Clinical  Pastoral  Education,  psychological  evalua- 
tion, personal  therapy,  etc. 

Field  Education  and  Clinical  Pastoral  Education 

Students  may  use  a  basic  unit  of  Clinical  Pastoral  Education  successfully  complet- 
ed in  an  accredited  CPE  center  to  fulfill  either  the  first  or  the  second  field  education  re- 
quirement. To  receive  field  education  placement  credit,  students  must  have  the  CPE  center 
mail  directly  to  the  Field  Education  office  the  original  or  certified  copy  of  the  supervisor's 
final  evaluation  indicating  the  unit  was  successfully  completed  and  a  full  unit  of  credit 
extended.  The  Field  Education  office  will  then  notify  the  Divinity  School  registry  to  this 

54    Field  Education 


effect  and  both  academic  and  field  education  placement  credit  will  be  extended.  CPE  must 
be  taken  concurrent  with  or  within  twelve  months  after  CM  10.  For  field  education  place- 
ment II,  CPE  must  be  taken  immediately  prior  to  or  concurrent  with  CM  100. 


Field  Education  and  Clinical  Pastoral  Education    55 


International  Programs 


MET^DISTflD 


Banner  in  York  Chapel,  a  gift  from  the  Methodist  Church  of  Peru 


A  Global  Perspective  for  Duke  Divinity  School 

It  is  my  hope  that  Duke  will  become  even  better  known  for  its  international  pro- 
grams. Indeed,  Duke's  history,  resources,  and  outstanding  faculty  suggest  to  me 
that  it  has  become  our  solemn  obligation  to  serve  the  world  community,  just  as 
it  once  was  our  duty  to  serve  the  South. 

President  H.  Keith  H.  Brodie,  inaugural  address,  September  28,  1985 

When  Dennis  M .  Campbell  became  dean  of  the  Divinity  School  in  1983,  his  first  ad- 
ministrative addition  was  a  Committee  on  International  Studies  and  Programs.  "I  believe," 
he  wrote,  "that  the  future  of  theological  education  must  be  seen  in  a  global  perspective 
and  that  persons  preparing  for  ministry  must  encounter  the  reality  of  Christianity  in  the 
context  of  our  whole  world." 

Since  that  time,  there  has  been  a  gradual  expansion  of  opportunities  for  study  or  travel 
abroad,  a  slow  but  steady  growth  in  the  number  of  international  students  in  the  Divinity 
School,  and  an  increase  in  faculty  participation  in  programs  outside  of  the  United  States. 
Some  of  these  are  listed  below.  The  faculty  and  administration  of  the  Divinity  School  stand 
ready  and  eager  to  assist  with  any  proposals  for  a  broadening  of  theological  studies  in 
the  international  realm. 

The  Home  Country.  Duke  Divinity  School  continues  to  attract  students  from  other 
countries  who  make  a  significant  contribution  to  the  community.  In  1986-87  there  were 
ten  international  students  from  seven  countries,  in  addition  to  two  graduate  scholars  from 
abroad.  In  1987-88  the  number  of  international  students  remained  constant,  while  the 
number  of  graduate  students  and  international  visiting  scholars  more  than  doubled.  Be- 
cause of  financial  limitations  and  the  maturation  of  higher  theological  institutions  in  other 
parts  of  the  world,  a  majority  of  these  students  come  for  a  shorter  period  of  time  and  for 
advanced  degrees. 

Furthermore,  the  Lecture  Program  Committee  brings  a  succession  of  distinguished 
scholars  and  church  leaders  to  speak  in  the  Divinity  School.  Among  these  have  been  the 
following: 

Spring,  1988 

The  Reverend  Mr.  Findley  McDonald,  Glasgow,  Scotland. 

The  Reverend  Mr.  Nathan  Goto,  African  Council  of  Churches,  Liberia. 

Fall,  1988 

The  Reverend  Dr.  Andrew  Linzey,  University  of  Essex,  England. 

Professor  Gerhard  Sauter,  University  of  Bonn,  Germany. 

The  Reverend  Dr.  Bonganjalo  Goba,  Soweto,  South  Africa. 

The  Reverend  Dr.  Louis  Reinoso,  Lima,  Peru. 

The  Reverend  Dr.  Graeme  Ferguson,  United  Theological  College,  New  South  Wales. 

A  Global  Perspective  for  Duke  Divinity  School    57 


In  addition  to  courses  in  World  Christianity  (including  the  "Christian  World  Mission," 
"Third  World  Theology,"  and  "Dialogue  with  Other  Faiths"),  and  courses  in  the  history 
of  religion  under  the  graduate  program,  various  other  departments  offer  courses  relat- 
ed to  international  studies:  "War  in  the  Christian  Tradition,"  "Ethics  in  World  Religions," 
"Marxist  Ideology  and  Christian  Faith,"  "Food  and  Hunger,"  among  others.  Professors 
Geoffrey  Wainwright  from  Great  Britain  and  Teresa  Berger  from  Germany  add  an  inter- 
national and  ecumenical  flavor  to  the  faculty. 

Travel  Seminars.  For  a  number  of  years,  under  the  supervision  of  the  Center  for  Con- 
tinuing Education,  faculty  members  have  led  travel  seminars  to  study  the  role  of  the  Chris- 
tian church  in  significant  areas  of  social  and  cultural  development.  Each  year  Professor 
McMurry  Richey  (retired  1984)  conducts  groups  of  seminary  students,  faculty,  and 
ministers  to  Mexico,  generally  during  the  spring  recess.  In  alternate  years  (most  recently 
in  1987)  Professor  Creighton  Lacy  has  led  a  group  to  visit  historic  sites  and  the  resurgent 
church  in  the  People's  Republic  of  China.  In  1985  Professor  Moody  Smith  conducted  a 
seminar  called  "Cities  of  the  First  Christians :  Athens,  Corinth,  Ephesus,  Rome";  and  other 
faculty  members  have  led  tours  on  their  own  initiative.  Similar  opportunities  will  be  con- 
tinued, and  in  some  cases,  the  Center  for  Continuing  Education  has  been  able  to  provide 
limited  financial  assistance.  As  one  example  of  a  recent  experience,  three  Duke  students 
were  selected  by  the  United  Methodist  Council  of  Bishops  and  the  Board  of  Global  Minis- 
tries to  participate  in  an  interseminary  visit  to  mission,  refugee,  and  development  projects 
in  Kenya,  Pakistan,  and  India.  Last  winter,  two  Duke  students  participated  in  a  similar 
travel  seminar,  this  time  to  study  the  role  of  the  Church  in  Latin  America. 

Study  Abroad.  At  the  present  time  the  only  regular,  on-going  program  of  study  abroad 
is  an  exchange  with  the  University  of  Bonn,  West  Germany.  Each  year  one  German  stu- 
dent is  enrolled  for  a  year  at  Duke,  while  an  American  student  is  selected  to  study  in  Bonn . 
This  program,  carried  on  for  many  years  under  the  direction  of  Professor  Frederick  Her- 
zog,  has  been  augmented  by  faculty  seminars:  in  Germany  in  May,  1983  on  the  theme 
of  "Luther's  Understanding  of  Human  Nature  and  Its  Significance  for  Contemporary  The- 
ology," with  a  follow-up  at  Duke  in  March,  1985,  focusing  on  North  American  anthropol- 
ogy and  Reinhold  Niebuhr.  Right  at  the  moment,  the  Divinity  School  is  exploring  the  pos- 
sibility of  establishing  a  regular  exchange  program  with  the  Methodist  Church  in  Peru . 
As  a  part  of  this  exploration,  one  of  our  students  and  one  of  our  faculty  members  spent 
the  spring  semester  of  1989  in  Lima,  Peru. 

Duke  University  is  one  of  the  supporting  members  of  the  American  Schools  of  Orien- 
tal Research.  Accordingly,  students  and  faculty  in  the  Divinity  School  have  the  privilege 
of  attending  the  Albright  Institute  of  Oriental  Research  in  Jerusalem,  the  American  Center 
of  Oriental  Research  in  Amman,  and  other  similar  institutions  without  charge  for  tuition . 
They  may  also  compete  for  the  four  fellowships  offered  annually  by  the  schools. 

Individual  students  from  time  to  time  have  made  private  arrangements  for  study 
abroad .  These  have  most  often  taken  place  in  England  or  Scotland,  with  academic  credit 
usually  transferrable  toward  the  Duke  degree.  Other  invitations  have  been  extended  from 
such  widely-scattered  institutions  as  Wesley  College,  Bristol,  England;  Trinity  Theolog- 
ical College,  Singapore;  United  Theological  College,  Bangalore,  South  India;  and  the 
School  of  Theology,  Sao  Paulo,  Brazil.  The  International  Studies  Committee  will  assist 
with  contacts  and  information  for  individual  proposals. 

Foreign  Service.  The  involvement  of  Duke  Divinity  School  with  international  insti- 
tutions and  cultures  has  always  gone  beyond  one-way  educational  opportunities.  Over 
the  years  faculty,  alumni,  and  students  have  lived  and  worked  in  locations  abroad,  un- 
der both  ecclesiastical  and  secular  auspices.  The  latest  listings  include  approximately  a 
score  of  seminary  graduates  in  ministry  overseas,  and  an  equal  number  of  other  Duke 
alumni,  largely  from  the  Ph.D.  program  in  religion,  who  are  serving  in  church-related 
posts.  Nearly  forty  international  students  have  departed  to  their  own— or  other— countries 
to  carry  on  Christian  ministry. 

58    International  Programs 


Divinity  students  often  participate  in  international  service  projects  on  a  short-term 
basis.  Several  have  taken  part  in  evangelistic  or  building  work-teams,  chiefly  in  the  Carib- 
bean area.  At  least  one  recently  spent  a  summer  in  Japan  holding  youth  services  under 
the  auspices  of  OMS  International.  Faculty,  too,  are  engaged  in  a  variety  of  activities  out- 
side the  United  States.  In  addition  to  innumerable  conferences  and  lectures  in  Canada 
and  Europe,  professors  have  taught  and  given  papers  in  Third  World  countries:  e.g., 
Professors  Lacy,  Shockley,  and  Via  at  the  University  of  Zimbabwe;  Professor  Langford 
in  Singapore;  Professor  Westerhoff  in  Japan,  Australia,  Argentina,  Peru,  and  other  coun- 
tries of  Central  and  South  America;  and  Professor  Wainwright  in  Australia  and  New 
Zealand. 

Our  World  Parish.  "The  world  is  my  parish,"  said  John  Wesley,  referring  to  various 
classes  and  social  groups  in  his  own  country  as  well  as  the  foreign  mission  field.  Today 
that  "foreign  mission  field"  has  become  an  international  Christian  community  with  much 
to  share.  Through  its  international  programs,  the  Divinity  School  seeks  to  contribute  to 
a  "covenanting  towards  unity"  with  the  goal  of  full  communion  among  the  churches  of 
the  world.  We  discover  through  our  efforts  as  a  worldwide  community  of  faith  that  we 
are  inseparable  not  only  as  members  of  the  human  family,  but,  above  all,  as  members  of 
the  church  catholic.  We  need  to  embody  this  inseparable  community  locally  by  learning 
from  each  other,  standing  in  solidarity  with  each  other,  celebrating  our  common  faith, 
and  growing  together.  Through  its  international  programs,  the  Divinity  School  seeks  to 
live  out  its  faith  in  a  church  family  which  transcends  national,  racial,  denominational, 
geographic,  gender  related,  political,  and  economic  boundaries. 


A  Global  Perspective  for  Duke  Divinity  School    59 


Black  Church  Affairs 


The  Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs 

The  Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs  has  two  principal  objectives:  (1)  to  assist  black  and 
other  minority  students  in  deriving  the  greatest  possible  value  from  theological  educa- 
tion; and  (2)  to  call  the  entire  Divinity  School  community  to  serious  and  realistic  dialogue 
with  the  black  community.  In  keeping  with  these  objectives,  the  Office  of  Black  Church 
Affairs  provides  the  following  programs,  activities,  and  services: 

Academic  Study.  American  theological  education  has  long  ignored  the  contributions 
of  the  black  religious  experience,  a  circumstance  which  the  Divinity  School  curriculum 
addresses  through  (1)  black-oriented  course  offerings  in  the  core  curriculum  and  (2)  the 
integration  of  black  material  in  the  content  of  all  other  courses. 

Preaching  and  Lecture  Series.  Fall  and  spring  preaching  and  lecture  series  provide 
frequent  opportunities  to  hear  outstanding  black  preachers  in  Divinity  School  classes  and 
worship  services.  The  Gardner  C.  Taylor  Preaching  Series  brings  outstanding  black 
preachers  to  the  campus. 

The  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.  Lecture  Series  brings  to  the  Divinity  School  community 
lecturers  of  national  stature  to  address  the  issues  of  justice,  peace,  and  liberation  in  rela- 
tion to  the  insights  of  the  gospel  and  the  black  religious  experience. 

Continuing  Education.  In  cooperation  with  the  Center  for  Continuing  Education, 
the  Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs  provides  several  programs  for  black  pastors  in  the  re- 
gion, including  the  Gardner  C.  Taylor  Black  Preaching  Series,  the  Martin  Luther  King, 
Jr.  Lecture  Series,  and  seminars  on  black  concerns  and  issues.  Occasional  conferences, 
colloquies,  symposia,  and  the  Annual  Convocation  and  Pastors'  School  supplement  these 
offerings. 

There  are  opportunities  for  academic  study  for  all  qualified  black  pastors  and  lay  per- 
sons. The  extensive  holdings  of  the  Divinity  School  Library  and  the  services  of  the  Hen- 
ry Harrison  Jordan  Loan  Library  are  also  available  upon  application  to  the  librarian  of  the 
Divinity  School. 

Church  Relationships.  Through  the  Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs  the  Divinity  School 
reaches  out  to  the  black  churches  in  the  Durham-Raleigh  vicinity.  Such  relationships  not 
only  afford  excellent  field  settings  for  ministerial  study  and  work,  but  they  also  provide 
a  laboratory  in  which  both  blacks  and  whites  together  can  gain  wider  knowledge  of,  deeper 
appreciation  for,  and  increased  sensitivity  to  the  issues  and  urgencies  of  black  culture. 

The  Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs    61 


62    Black  Church  Affairs 


The  Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs  also  acts  as  a  liaison  with  several  clergy  and  com- 
munity groups  including  the  Interdenominational  Ministerial  Alliance  and  the  Durham 
Ministerial  Association. 

The  Office  of  Black  Church  Affairs  provides  counsel  and  advice  to  prospective  black 
seminarians  in  undergraduate  schools  and  encourages  inquiries  concerning  study  op- 
portunities available  at  Duke  Divinity  School.  For  further  information,  contact  Grant  S. 
Shockley,  Office  of  the  Director  of  Black  Church  Affairs,  Duke  Divinity  School,  Durham, 
North  Carolina  27706. 


The  Office  of  Black  Ch  u  rch  Affairs    63 


Continuing  Education 


The  Center  for  Continuing  Education 

Through  the  Center  for  Continuing  Education  the  Divinity  School  offers  extensive 
opportunities  in  education  for  the  Church's  ministry.  The  Charles  P.  Bowles  Continuing 
Education  Center  in  the  new  wing  of  the  Divinity  School  includes  seminar  rooms  and 
spacious  study  carrels  for  clergy  involved  in  individual  study  or  residential  seminars.  The 
Divinity  School  provides  a  year-round  program  of  residential  seminars  and  conferences, 
extension  seminars  and  consultations,  and  special  services  to  clergy  and  churches 
throughout  the  nation. 

Admission  and  Scholarships 

Conferences,  churches,  and  other  supporting  groups  and  institutions  have  made 
available  through  the  Divinity  School  designated  funds  to  assist  in  continuing  education 
for  ministry.  Inquiries,  applications  for  admission,  and  requests  for  continuing  educa- 
tion scholarships  for  residential  seminars  should  be  directed  to:  The  Reverend  W.  Joseph 
Mann,  Director  of  Continuing  Education,  The  Divinity  School,  Duke  University,  Durham, 
North  Carolina  27706  (919)684-3041. 

In-Residence  Seminars  and  Conferences 

During  the  academic  year  1988-89  the  Divinity  School  conducted  a  series  of  continuing 
education  seminars,  workshops,  and  conferences  for  clergy.  Some  of  these  were:  "Duke 
Reading  Week";  "Theological  Foundations  for  Ordained  Ministry";  "Spiritual  Formation 
and  Christian  Leadership";  and  "Latin  America:  Its  Church  and  History."  In  addition, 
special  seminars  were  presented  for  many  districts  from  the  Western  North  Carolina  Con- 
ference and  the  North  Carolina  Conference  of  the  United  Methodist  Church.  Current 
seminar  schedules  can  be  obtained  through  the  director  of  continuing  education. 

International  Travel-Study  Seminars 

The  Center  for  Continuing  Education  sponsored  two  international  travel-study  semi- 
nars in  1989.  "An  Introduction  to  Mexico"  was  led  by  Dr.  McMurry  Richey;  "Cities  of  the 
First  Christians"  was  led  by  Dr.  Moody  Smith.  The  Center  for  Continuing  Education  in- 
tends to  offer  clergy  more  opportunities  for  international  travel  and  understanding. 

International  Travel-Study  Seminars    65 


Extended  Study  Leave  Program  for  Clergy 

Duke  Divinity  School  receives  requests  from  clergy  from  all  over  the  country  to  spend 
either  a  few  days  or  a  few  weeks  at  the  school.  Some  merely  want  to  spend  time  in  the 
library.  Some  want  to  meet  with  specific  professors,  getting  from  them  direction  for  their 
reading  or  study  and  reflection  on  their  thinking.  Others  have  a  particular  topic  or  sub- 
ject they  wish  to  pursue  and  want  the  director  of  continuing  education  to  point  them  to 
books,  seminars,  or  professors  that  might  help  them.  The  Divinity  School  is  happy  to  re- 
ceive clergy  for  a  study  leave  under  the  following  guidelines: 

1.  The  pastor  submits  a  short  biographical  sketch  and  a  study  proposal. 

2.  The  director  of  continuing  education  assesses  the  appropriateness  of  the 
proposal— for  the  pastor  and  for  the  Divinity  School.  When  a  pastor  is  granted 
permission  to  come  to  Duke  on  a  study  leave,  the  director  of  continuing  educa- 
tion supervises  the  study. 

3.  CEU's  are  awarded  after  a  discussion  with  the  director  of  continuing  education 
and  a  report  from  the  pastor. 

Visiting  Scholars  Program 

The  Center  for  Continuing  Education  provides  carrel  space  and  library  privileges  for 
scholars  who  wish  to  spend  an  extended  time  at  Duke  while  on  sabbatical  leave.  Those 
interested  in  this  program  should  contact  the  director  of  continuing  education. 


66    Continuing  Education 


Duke  Summer  Institute 

The  Duke  Summer  Institute  provides  a  program  for  continuing  education.  Usually 
held  the  last  week  of  July,  the  Summer  Institute  offers  persons  a  choice  of  continuing  edu- 
cation seminars,  lectures,  worship,  and  recreational  opportunities  at  Duke.  In  the  1989 
Summer  Institute  continuing  education  teachers  included  William  Willamon,  Richard 
Lischer,  and  Pat  Arnold.  Clergy  have  found  the  Duke  Summer  Institute  a  good  way  to 
combine  continuing  education  with  family  vacation  or  travel.  Inquiries  about  the  current 
Duke  Summer  Institute  can  be  made  to  the  Office  of  Continuing  Education. 

The  Convocation  and  Pastors'  School 

The  annual  Divinity  School  Convocation  and  Pastors'  School,  a  cooperative  endeavor 
with  the  North  Carolina  and  Western  North  Carolina  Conferences  of  the  United  Meth- 
odist Church  through  the  Board  of  Managers  of  the  Pastors'  School,  brings  together 
ministers,  laypersons,  students,  and  faculty  for  a  series  of  lectures,  sermons,  and  courses, 
along  with  alumni  reunions  and  social  occasions. 

The  James  A.  Gray  Lectures.  These  annual  lectures,  established  in  1950  as  part  of  a 
bequest  made  in  1947  by  James  A .  Gray  of  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina,  are  delivered 
in  the  context  of  the  Divinity  School  Convocation  and  Pastors'  School .  The  1988  Gray  Lec- 
turer was  James  Sanders  from  Claremont  School  of  Theology. 

The  Franklin  S.  Hickman  Lecture.  This  lectureship  was  established  in  1966  as  part 
of  a  bequest  by  Mrs.  Franklin  S.  Hickman  in  memory  of  her  late  husband,  Dr.  Franklin 
Simpson  Hickman,  professor  of  psychology  of  religion,  Duke  Divinity  School,  and  dean 
of  the  Chapel,  Duke  University.  This  lectureship  enables  the  Divinity  School  to  bring  prac- 
ticing ministers  of  extraordinary  qualities  to  lecture  and  preach  in  the  Convocation  and 
Pastors'  School  and  to  participate  in  Divinity  School  classes,  worship,  and  informal  ses- 
sions with  students  and  faculty.  The  1988  Hickman  lecturer  was  Doug  Adams  from  the 
Pacific  School  of  Religion. 

Duke  Lay  Academy  of  Religion 

The  Lay  Academy  of  Religion  offers  continuing  education  courses  for  all  interested 
persons  throughout  the  year.  The  Lay  Academy  offers  continuing  education  courses  in 
the  Bible,  comparative  religions,  theology,  Christian  ethics,  and  other  selected  topics.  Con- 
tact W.  Joseph  Mann,  director  of  continuing  education,  Duke  Divinity  School,  Duke 
University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706.  Call  (919)684-3041  for  more  information  and 
a  current  list  of  courses. 

Ministry  in  the  Vicinity 

Ministers  and  churches  in  the  vicinity  of  Duke  University  are  especially  welcome  to 
avail  themselves  of  continuing  education  programs,  facilities,  and  other  services  of  the 
Divinity  School  and  its  faculty  and  students.  They  are  invited  to  attend  public  lectures, 
visit  with  distinguished  lecturers,  participate  in  in-residence  seminars  and  conferences, 
audit  selected  courses,  study  in  the  continuing  education  carrels,  and  use  the  resources 
of  the  Divinity  School  Library,  the  Henry  Harrison  Jordan  Loan  Library,  and  the  tape 
recordings  collection .  Divinity  School  faculty,  staff,  and  students  are  generally  available 
for  preaching,  teaching,  and  other  services  in  churches  of  the  community  and  region. 


Ministn/  in  the  Vicinity    67 


Additional  Study  Opportunities 


^^ 

■b 

1      ^^ 

HkSm^^BS 

A\  •" 

$ 

mS^u?*' 

wc43| 

&m       fc-MTrl 

vImHI 

Mary  McCUntock  Fulkerson,  Assistant  Professor  of  Theology 


The  J.  M.  Ormond  Center  for  Research,  Planning,  and 
Development 

This  center  was  established  in  memory  of  thelateDr.  J.  M.  Ormond,  professor  of  prac- 
tical theology  at  Duke  Divinity  School  and  director  of  the  rural  church  program  under 
the  Duke  Endowment,  1923-48.  The  North  Carolina  Annual  Conference  established  the 
J.  M .  Ormond  Fund  in  1951  as  part  of  the  special  effort  of  the  North  Carolina  and  the  West- 
ern North  Carolina  Conferences  of  the  United  Methodist  Church  to  provide  additional 
programs  at  the  Divinity  School.  The  center  is  directed  by  Dr.  Robert  L.  Wilson,  profes- 
sor of  church  and  society.  It  is  jointly  supported  by  the  Ormond  Fund  and  the  rural  church 
section  of  the  Duke  Endowment. 

The  center  has  three  purposes.  First,  it  assists  the  Church  in  its  ministry  by  provid- 
ing research  and  planning  services.  Second,  it  provides  training  for  ministerial  students 
in  church  and  community  studies.  Third,  it  contributes  through  basic  research  to  the  un- 
derstanding of  the  nature  and  functioning  of  the  Church .  Emphasis  is  given  to  research 
and  planning  studies  of  rural  United  Methodist  Churches  in  North  Carolina. 

Programs  in  Pastoral  Psychology 

Programs  in  pastoral  psychology  beyond  the  studies  incorporated  in  the  M.Div.  cur- 
riculum are  provided  in  cooperation  with  the  Duke  University  Medical  Center.  Two  such 
programs  are  available. 

1 .  The  Master  of  Theology  degree  with  a  major  in  pastoral  psychology  is  ordinari- 
ly a  calendar  year  program  beginning  the  first  full  week  in  June.  However,  upon 
the  recommendation  of  the  staff,  candidates  with  a  quarter  or  more  of  clinical 
pastoral  education  may  begin  their  program  in  September.  The  candidate  may 
plan  one  of  two  programs  or  concentrations: 

(a. )  a  concentration  in  pastoral  theology  relating  psychology  and  theological  un- 
derstanding to  professional  ministry,  especially  the  parish,  through  course  work 
and  supervised  field  or  clinical  experience;  and  (b. )  a  concentration  in  pastoral 
care  and  an  introduction  to  the  field  of  pastoral  counseling  through  course  work 
and  an  intern  year  in  clinical  pastoral  education. 

A  quarter  of  clinical  pastoral  education  is  considered  a  prerequisite  for  all 
programs.  Students  who  wish  to  complete  the  intern  year  in  CPE  and  earn  a  Mas- 
ter of  Theology  degree  will  normally  need  two  years  to  complete  the  program. 

Programs  in  Pastoral  Psychology    69 


JohnH.  Westerhofflll.  Professor  of  Religion  and  Education 

In  the  context  of  clinical  pastoral  education  various  professional  goals  may 
be  sought  including  general  understanding  and  skills  in  pastoral  care  and 
specialization  in  pastoral  counseling  and  clinical  supervision.  Persons  specializ- 
ing in  pastoral  counseling  and  pastoral  psychotherapy  will  advance  toward  cer- 
tification with  the  American  Association  of  Pastoral  Counselors  and  the  Ameri- 
can Association  of  Marriage  and  Family  Therapists. 

2.  Single  units  of  basic  clinical  pastoral  education  are  offered  each  summer  (begin- 
ning the  first  Monday  in  June  and  running  for  eleven  weeks)  and  concurrent  with 
the  fall  and  spring  semesters  in  the  Medical  Center.  Single  units  of  basic  parish- 
based  clinical  pastoral  education  are  available  concurrent  with  the  fall  and  spring 
semesters.  When  the  unit  is  completed  within  one  semester,  the  student  may 
take  two  other  courses  in  the  regular  M.Div.  program.  Two  transfer  course  credits 
will  be  granted  for  a  summer  CPE  quarter  or  two  course  credits  will  be  granted 
for  the  unit  taken  during  the  academic  year  (unless  a  course  credit  has  already 
been  granted  for  PP  77,  in  which  case  only  one  additional  credit  will  be  given  for 
the  CPE  unit). 

Students  in  CPE  may  not  have  other  field  education  appointments  or  em- 
ployment. However,  a  CPE  unit  will,  when  satisfactorily  completed,  count  as 
one  field  education  placement.  Only  one  field  education  requirement  may  be 
fulfilled  by  CPE.  For  further  information  consult  the  Office  of  Field  Education. 

Students  are  reminded  that  ordinarily  no  more  than  five  courses  out  of 
twenty-four  for  the  M.Div.  degree  should  be  taken  in  any  one  subdivision. 


70    Additional  Study  Opportunities 


3.  A  one-year  certificate  or  nondegree  internship  program  in  clinical  pastoral  edu- 
cation is  available  through  the  Duke  Medical  Center  for  persons  who  hold  the 
Master  of  Divinity  degree  or  its  equivalent.  Also,  students  who  wish  to  pursue 
a  pregraduation  intern  year  are  invited  to  apply,  provided  they  have  completed 
at  least  one  year  of  theological  education .  The  certificate,  nondegree  intern  year 
can  be  done  at  any  level  of  clinical  pastoral  education  (basic,  advanced,  super- 
visory) which  the  candidate  and  the  supervisory  staff  judge  appropriate.  These 
persons  may  enroll  in  the  Divinity  School  as  Special  Students  for  a  course  or  two 
each  semester.  Such  training  usually  provides  four  units  of  certified  clinical  pas- 
toral education  credit. 

Admission  to  either  the  basic  unit  or  the  internship  program  of  clinical  pastoral  edu- 
cation is  distinct  from  admission  to  the  Divinity  School.  Applications  for  CPE  enrollment 
are  available  in  the  Chaplains  Service  Office,  Duke  Medical  Center. 

For  further  information  concerning  any  of  these  programs,  write  to  Director,  Programs 
in  Pastoral  Psychology,  Duke  Divinity  School .  See  the  section  on  the  Master  of  Theology 
degree  program. 

Women's  Studies  at  Duke  University 

Graduate  students  enrolled  in  any  of  Duke  University's  departments  and  professional 
schools  may  participate  in  the  Women's  Studies  Program  by  taking  graduate  level  courses, 
working  with  Women's  Studies  faculty  on  independent  research,  pursuing  the  gradu- 
ate certificate  in  Women's  Studies,  and  writing  masters  and  doctoral  theses  in  feminist 
scholarship. 

To  qualify  for  a  graduate  certificate,  students  must  pass  a  minimum  of  three  gradu- 
ate level  courses  on  women  and  gender.  IDC  211,  History  of  Feminist  Thought,  is  the  core 
course  for  the  certificate,  and  the  only  required  one.  Students  choose  the  second  and  third 
courses,  as  suited  to  their  interests  and  programs  of  study.  These  may  include  Divinity 
School  courses:  CT214,  Feminist  Theology;  CT139,  Women,  Theology  and  the  Church; 
PP 180,  Pastoral  Care  and  Women;  and  PR  282,  Women  and  the  Word;  as  well  as  two  oth- 
er IDC  courses:  IDC  283,  Feminist  Theory  and  the  Humanities;  and  IDC  284,  Feminist 
Theory  and  the  Social  Sciences.  (Divinity  students  may  elect  IDC  21 1  as  one  of  their  two 
permitted  cognate  courses  [see  below  for  "Cognate  Courses"],  and  may  wish  to  expend 
the  other  cognate  opportunity  on  IDC  283  or  284.) 

In  addition  to  coursework,  graduate  students  interested  in  feminist  scholarship  are 
strongly  encouraged  to  take  advantage  of  the  many  cocurricular  and  professional  oppor- 
tunities the  Women's  Studies  Program  presents. 

(For  relation  of  this  opportunity  to  requirements  of  the  several  degree  programs,  see 
below.  Note  especially  the  "Required  Limited  Elective"  in  Theologies  in  Context  which 
is  part  of  the  M.Div.  degree.) 

The  Ministerial  Course  of  Study  School 

In  cooperation  with  the  Division  of  Ordained  Ministry  of  the  Board  of  Higher  Edu- 
cation and  Ministry  and  the  Southeastern  Jurisdictional  Conference  of  the  United  Meth- 
odist Church,  the  Divinity  School  hosts  the  Course  of  Study  School  for  local  pastors  of 
the  United  Methodist  Church.  This  school  is  in  session  for  four  weeks  each  summer,  and 
the  required  studies  for  one  full  year  can  be  completed  in  this  period.  This  is  not  a  part 
of  the  regular  work  of  the  Divinity  School  degree  program,  and  no  credit  toward  a  semi- 
nary degree  can  be  earned.  The  faculty  includes  representatives  from  the  Divinity  School 
and  other  church-related  institutions.  The  fortieth  session  of  the  Course  of  Study  School 
is  being  held  26  June-21  July  1989.  For  further  information  on  the  Course  of  Study  School 
write  to  Dr.  Paula  E.  Gilbert,  Director,  Ministerial  Course  of  Study  School,  Duke  Divini- 
ty School,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

The  Ministerial  Course  of  Study  School    71 


Curriculum 


Degree  Programs 

The  academic  work  of  the  Divinity  School  presently  embraces  four  degree  programs: 
the  Master  of  Divinity  degree  (M .  Div. ),  ordinarily  of  three  academic  years;  a  one-year  pro- 
gram beyond  the  basic  degree,  the  Master  of  Theology  (Th  .M . );  and  two  programs  of  two 
academic  years,  one  leading  to  the  degTee  of  Master  of  Religious  Education  (M .  R .  E . )  and 
the  other  to  the  degree  of  Master  of  Theological  Studies  (M.T.S.).  The  first  three  are 
graduate-professional  degrees;  the  M.T.S.,  inaugurated  only  in  September  of  1987,  is  a 
general  academic  degree.  Admission  to  candidacy  for  any  of  these  degrees  presupposes 
the  completion  of  the  A.B.  or  its  equivalent. 

Students  preparing  for  ordination  to  the  Christian  ministry  and  requiring  appropriate 
graduate-professional  education  will  enroll  for  the  Master  of  Divinity  degree.  Students 
whose  acquired  academic  standing,  under  this  basic  degree  program,  entitles  them  to 
further  specialized  study  may  advance  their  command  of  selected  theological  disciplines 
by  applying  for  an  additional  year  of  studies  leading  to  the  Master  of  Theology  degree. 
Together,  these  two  degree  programs  constitute  a  sequence.  Although  the  Master  of  Di- 
vinity degree  fulfills  requirements  for  ordination  by  prevailing  ecclesiastical  standards, 
the  Th .  M .  program  may  assist  in  assuring  a  larger  measure  of  professional  preparation . 
Application  for  admission  to  the  Th.M.  program  is  open  to  graduates  of  other  schools 
who  have  completed  the  basic  theological  degree. 

The  Master  of  Religious  Education  degree  program  is  designed  to  prepare  qualified 
persons,  ordinarily  not  seeking  ordination,  for  a  ministry  of  Christian  education  in  local 
churches  or  other  organizations.  The  course  of  study  is  arranged  to  provide  grounding 
in  biblical,  historical,  and  theological  disciplines  as  essential  background  for  instruction 
in  and  exercise  of  professional  competence  in  curricular  planning,  teaching  methods,  and 
supervision  of  educational  programs  for  various  age  groups.  The  Master  of  Theological 
Studies  provides  an  introduction  to  the  theological  disciplines  as  foundation  for  a  graduate 
research  degree  (Ph.  D. );  preparation  for  lay  religious  degrees  other  than  Christian  edu- 
cation; grounding  for  teaching,  research  or  practice  in  another  field  (e.g.,  history,  psy- 
chology, music);  enhancement  of  institutional  roles;  and  personal  enrichment. 

The  specific  requirements  for  each  of  these  degrees  are  found  in  the  succeeding  pages. 
Completed  course  work  cannot  be  credited  toward  more  than  one  degree.  Reciprocal 
transfer  of  credit  for  course  work  taken  under  the  M.Div.,  M.R.E.,  or  M.T.S.  programs 
requires  the  permission  of  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs. 

Degree  P rog ra m s    73 


Doctoral  Studies  Accredited  by  the  Graduate  School 

The  Divinity  School  provides  a  substantial  body  of  course  offerings  to  an  advanced 
level  in  biblical,  historical,  systematic  and  contemporary  theological  disciplines  that  are 
accredited  by  the  Graduate  School  and  the  faculty  of  the  Divinity  School,  and  lead  to  the 
Doctor  of  Philosophy  degree.  Sharing  responsibility  with  the  University  Department  of 
Religion  for  staffing  and  curricular  provisions  of  this  course  of  study,  the  Divinity  School 
is  the  principal  contributor  to  the  program  of  graduate  studies  in  religion.  However,  since 
the  Ph.D.  in  religion  is  certified  and  awarded  under  the  Graduate  School,  the  doctoral 
student's  admission  and  matriculation  are  administered  under  that  division  of  Duke 
University. 

With  few  exceptions,  most  courses  in  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  The  Divinity  School 
carrying  a  200  number  or  above  and  belonging  to  the  fields  noted  above  are  applicable 
to  doctoral  programs  of  study.  These  courses  are  open  to  qualified  M.Div.,  Th.M.,  M.R.E., 
or  M.T.S.  students  by  permission  of  the  instructor. 

Qualified  persons  who  desire  to  pursue  studies  leading  to  the  degree  of  M .  A .  or  Ph .  D. 
in  religion,  under  the  administration  of  the  Graduate  School,  are  advised  to  apply  to  the 
dean  of  that  school .  Inquiries  concerning  fellowships  or  specific  requirements  of  the  Pro- 
gram of  Graduate  Studies  in  Religion  may  be  addressed  to  the  Director,  209  Divinity 
School. 

Administration  of  the  Curriculum 

Students  are  required  at  the  time  of  each  registration  period  to  plan  their  course  of 
study  with  the  consultation  and  approval  of  their  assigned  faculty  advisers.  Such  pro- 
grams are  subject  to  the  review  and  approval  of  the  Committee  on  Academic  Standing, 
the  dean,  and  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs.  It  is  the  responsibility  of  each 
student  to  see  that  all  requirements  for  graduation  (and  for  ecclesiastical  ordination)  are 
met,  and  that  any  special  permission  granted  to  deviate  from  the  normal  program  is 
properly  recorded  on  the  personal  files  in  the  registry. 

Grading  System.  The  Divinity  School  employs  the  grading  scale  with  the  following 
letters,  A,  B,  C,  D,  and  F  which  have  been  defined  as  follows:  A,  excellent;  B,  good;  C,  satis- 
factory; D,  passing;  F,  failure;  WI,  withdrew  illness;  W,  withdrew,  discretion  of  the  Dean; 
I,  incomplete;  P,  passed;  NC,  noncredit;  Z,  year  course.  At  the  discretion  of  the  instruc- 
tor, individuals  or  classes  may  in  certain  instances  be  graded  simply  as  pass  or  fail .  Such 
P/F  grades  shall  be  limited  to  no  more  than  25  percent  of  a  student's  total  curriculum  at 
Duke  and  will  not  be  figured  in  the  grade  point  average. 

The  denotations  are  defined  as  follows  according  to  quality  points:  A,  4;  A,  3.7;  B+ , 
3.3;  B,  3.0;  B,  2.7;  C+,  2.3;  C,  2.0;  C,  1.7;  D+,  1.3;  D,  1.0. 

Limited  Program.  Students  whose  work  after  admission  is  not  satisfactory  may  be 
placed  on  limited  programs  by  the  Academic  Standing  Committee  and  are  required  to 
reduce  their  course  loads  or  to  make  other  academic  adjustments.  Students  who  during 
the  first  year  of  Divinity  School  maintain  less  than  a  C  (2.0)  average,  including  failures, 
ordinarily  will  be  required  to  withdraw  from  the  school. 

Incompletes.  A  student  may  petition  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs  to 
receive  a  grade  of  incomplete  in  a  course.  This  petition  must  be  filed  in  writing  on  the 
prescribed  form  with  the  registry  on  or  before  the  last  official  day  of  classes  of  the  semes- 
ter in  question.  Such  permission  may  be  granted  when  a  student,  through  some  circum- 
stances beyond  control,  such  as  illness,  has  been  hindered  from  meeting  the  course  re- 
quirements. Adjudication  of  the  petition  will  rest  with  the  associate  dean  and  the  instructor 
concerned .  The  associate  dean  will  communicate  in  writing  to  the  student  regarding  the 
joint  decision  and  any  conditions  attached  thereto.  An  incomplete  becomes  either  an  F 
or  a  permanent  incomplete  unless  it  is  removed  through  completion  of  assigned  work 

74    Curriculum 


by  the  following  dates:  for  incompletes  incurred  in  fall  semester  courses,  1  February;  for 
incompletes  incurred  in  spring  semester  courses,  15  September.  The  grade  of  permanent 
incomplete  is  reserved  for  instances  in  which  the  student's  work  in  the  course  was  sub- 
stantial and  of  passing  quality. 

Change  of  Courses  or  Withdrawal.  Students  are  permitted  to  change  their  course 
registrations,  without  incurring  a  penalty,  during  the  prescribed  drop/add  period  at  the 
beginning  of  each  semester.  Any  alteration  in  the  number  of  courses  must  be  officially 
reported  and  recorded .  The  adding  of  a  course  requires  the  permission  of  the  instructor 
of  that  course  as  well  as  the  student's  faculty  adviser.  Any  refund  of  tuition  related  to  with- 
drawals will  be  according  to  the  published  schedule. 

No  student  will  be  permitted  to  withdraw  from  a  course  after  one-half  of  the  semes- 
ter without  incurring  failure,  except  for  causes  adjudged  by  the  associate  dean  for  aca- 
demic programs  to  be  beyond  the  student's  control.  Conditions  of  genuine  emergency 
and  not  considerations  of  convenience  will  be  determinative  in  considering  requests, 
which  must  be  submitted  in  writing  on  academic  petition  forms. 

Leave  of  Absence.  A  student  wishing  to  take  a  leave  of  absence  for  one  or  two 

semesters,  and  intending  to  return  to  a  degree  program  in  the  Divinity  School,  should 
so  notify  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs  in  writing  in  advance.  No  leave  of  ab- 
sence will  be  granted  for  more  than  one  full  academic  year,  although  an  emergency  ex- 
tension may  be  requested  from  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs. 

Withdrawals  from  School.  Students  deciding  to  withdraw  from  the  Divinity  School, 
for  whatever  reason,  should  consult  with  their  faculty  advisers  and  the  associate  dean 
for  academic  programs,  and  must  file  a  written  statement  of  withdrawal  prior  to  depar- 
ture. All  students  who  have  officially  withdrawn  or  whose  leave  of  absence  extends  be- 
yond one  academic  year  but  who  wish  later  to  return  to  the  Divinity  School  will  be  re- 
quired to  reapply  for  admission,  and  provide  whatever  documentation  is  required  by  the 
director  of  admissions. 

Directed  Study.  Students  may,  with  permission  of  their  faculty  advisers  and  the  in- 
structors involved,  take  one  or  two  units  of  directed  study,  preferably  not  in  the  same  se- 
mester. These  independent  study  courses  under  individual  faculty  supervision  are  or- 
dinarily in  subjects  at  an  advanced  level  which  cover  material  not  available  in  the  regular 
curriculum.  Students  wishing  to  take  more  than  two  courses  by  directed  study  must  have 
permission  from  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs  in  consultation  with  the  stu- 
dent's faculty  adviser  and  the  instructor  who  agrees  to  direct  that  study. 

Cognate  Courses.  Students  may,  in  consultation  with  their  faculty  advisers,  take  up 
to  two  graduate  level  courses  in  other  departments  of  Duke  University  or  at  the  Univer- 
sity of  North  Carolina.  Permission  for  more  than  two  such  cognate  courses  must  be  se- 
cured from  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs.  Courses  in  the  Duke  Department 
of  Religion  do  not  count  within  this  limit. 

Graduation  with  Distinction.  Students  who  achieve  a  grade  point  average  of  3.85  for 
overall  academic  records  in  the  M.Div.  and  M.R.E.  programs  are  granted  the  degree  summa 
cum  laude.  Students  with  a  grade  point  average  of  3.65  or  above  are  awarded  their  degrees, 
magna  cum  laude.  Such  distinction  is  calculated  on  the  basis  of  letter  grades  only,  totaling 
at  least  three-quarters  of  all  courses  taken  at  Duke,  and  will  be  indicated  on  the  student's 
diploma. 

Part-Time  Students.  Students  taking  fewer  than  three  courses  in  any  given  semes- 
ter are  considered  part-time  students  and  are  ineligible  for  financial  aid  from  the  school . 

Auditors.  Full-time  students  paying  for  at  least  three  courses  are  permitted  to  audit 
additional  courses,  if  space  permits,  with  the  approval  of  their  advisers,  the  associate  dean 
for  academic  programs,  and  the  instructor  of  the  class.  Special  students,  part-time  stu- 
dents, or  persons  not  candidates  for  degrees  in  the  university  are  charged  an  audit  fee 
for  each  such  course. 

Administration  of  the  Curriculum    75 


The  Basic  Theological  Degree — Master  of  Divinity 

The  faculty  of  the  Divinity  School  views  the  curriculum  as  dynamic,  not  static;  cons- 
tantly endeavors  to  review  the  curriculum  as  a  whole  and  to  tailor  individual  courses  to 
meet  the  needs  of  a  rapidly  changing  world;  and  periodically  commits  itself  to  overall  cur- 
ricular  change.  Major  curricular  revisions  were  instituted  in  1948, 1959,  and  1967.  Another 
such  revision  took  effect  in  September  of  1987. 

This  degree  program  is  structured  to  elicit  a  positive  response  to:  (1)  the  challenge 
to  provide  an  adequate  professional  education— education  for  ministry;  (2)  the  needed 
variability  of  ministries  in  today's  complex  world;  (3)  the  norms  of  university  education; 
and  (4)  the  Christian  tradition. 

Aims  of  the  Curriculum.  The  aims  of  the  basic  degree  program  focus  upon  four  goals, 
four  areas  of  personal  and  curricular  responsibility,  four  lifelong  tasks  which  should  be 
strongly  advanced  during  the  seminary  years. 

1.  The  Christian  Tradition.  To  acquire  a  basic  understanding  of  the  biblical,  histori- 
cal, and  theological  heritage. 

2.  Self-Understanding.  To  progress  in  personal  and  professional  maturity— personal 
identity,  life-style  as  an  instrument  of  ministry,  major  drives,  handling  of  con- 
flict, resources,  and  professional  competency  and  so  forth.  This  is  to  be  coupled 
with  a  sensitivity  to  the  world  in  which  we  minister— its  social  forces,  its  power 
structures,  its  potential  for  humanization  and  dehumanization. 

3.  Thinking  Theologically.  To  have  the  ability  to  reflect  about  major  theological  and 
social  issues  and  to  define  current  issues  in  theological  terms  and  theological  is- 
sues in  contemporary  secular  terms. 

4.  Ministering-in-Context.  To  have  the  ability  to  conceptualize  and  participate  effec- 
tively in  some  form  of  contemporary  ministry. 

Goals  of  such  scope  cannot  be  neatly  programmed  in  any  curriculum,  and  the  de- 
gree of  achievement  (in  seminary  and  beyond)  will  vary  with  individuals  and  their  own 
motives  and  incentives. 

The  Basic  Curriculum — General  Description.  Graduation  requirements  for  the  Mas- 
ter of  Divinity  degree  consist  of  satisfactory  completion  of  twenty-four  courses,  with  an 
overall  grade  point  average  of  C  (2.0)  or  better;  ten  basic  courses  or  their  equivalent;  three 
limited  electives;  two  units  of  approved  field  education;  and  two  evaluations. 

The  basic  curriculum  provides  for  foundational  courses  in  biblical,  historical,  theo- 
logical, and  ministerial  studies,  representative  of  the  tradition  and  regarded  as  indispens- 
able background  for  subsequent  elective  work  and  individual  program  information.  These 
required  courses  total  ten  of  the  twenty-four  courses  necessary  for  graduation.  They  are 
Old  Testament  11,  New  Testament  18,  Church  History  13  and  14,  American  Christianity 
28,  Christian  Theology  32,  Christian  Ethics  33,  Preaching  30,  Church's  Ministry  10  and 
100.  At  least  one  course  must  be  elected  from  three  designated  lists  of  offerings  (available 
at  registration)  in  advanced  Biblical  Studies,  Black  Church  Studies,  and  Theologies  in  Con- 
text (the  latter  covers  such  fields  as  Women's  Studies,  World  Christianity,  and  Liberation 
Theology) .  The  opportunity  of  advanced  standing  adds  further  variability  to  the  academic 
program,  depending  upon  the  nature  and  quality  of  the  student's  undergraduate  aca- 
demic work.  Fourteen  courses,  over  half  of  the  required  total,  are  available  for  working 
out  an  individualized  program  of  studies  leading  to  specialized  preparation  in  academ- 
ic depth  and  for  purposes  of  professional  ministerial  competence. 

Required  courses  may  be  staffed  by  one  or  more  professors  and  are  planned  to  treat 
subject  matter  both  in  scope  and  depth  at  the  graduate  level. 

The  formulation  of  the  student's  course  of  studies  is  guided  by  certain  broad  but  nor- 
mative recommendations  for  area  distribution  of  courses  and  by  the  advice  and  counsel 
of  appointed  faculty  advisers  or  authorized  directors. 


76    Curriculum 


Students  and  advisers  are  directed  to  read  diligently  the  paragraphs  on  elective  studies 
and  professional  aims  and  distribution  of  elective  studies  in  the  section  on  administra- 
tion of  the  curriculum. 

All  academic  programs  are  subject  to  review  and  emendation  by  the  dean  and  the 
associate  dean  for  academic  programs  for  the  fulfillment  of  the  aims  of  the  curriculum . 
The  declared  vocational  and  professional  objective  of  the  student  is  of  central  importance 
both  to  the  student  and  to  the  faculty  adviser  in  planning  the  student's  comprehensive 
study  program. 

Six  semesters  of  residential  study  are  ordinarily  required  for  the  completion  of  the 
degree.  With  permission  of  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs,  certified  non- 
residential study,  not  exceeding  the  equivalent  of  eight  courses,  may  be  permitted  to  a 
candidate  for  the  basic  degree. 

The  normal  academic  load  is  four  courses  per  semester.  A  student  with  demonstrat- 
ed competence  may,  with  the  consent  of  the  academic  adviser  and  the  associate  dean  for 
academic  programs,  enroll  for  an  additional  course  in  the  middler  and  senior  years. 

General  Features  of  the  Basic  Curriculum.  The  following  is  a  brief  summary  of  the 
basic  curriculum. 

1 .  Twenty-four  courses  and  six  or  more  semesters  of  residency  are  required  for 
graduation. 

2.  Each  student  is  required  to  complete  two  approved  assignments  in  field  educa- 
tion (with  or  without  remuneration)  under  supervision. 

Such  assignments  might  include  an  internship,  a  summer  of  full-time  work, 
two  semesters  of  part-time  work,  or  involvement  in  church  or  community  serv- 
ice. The  essential  criteria  for  graduation  credits  are  that  the  amount  and  quality 
of  supervision  be  approved  by  the  Office  of  Field  Education,  and  that  the  stu- 
dent be  required  to  evaluate  and  correlate  the  experience  directly. 

3.  A  normal  academic  load  is  four  courses  with  credit. 

Admission  to  candidacy  for  the  Master  of  Divinity  degree  is  admission  to  the  regu- 
lar program  of  studies.  The  suggested  paradigm  defines  the  normal  sequence  of  the  stu- 
dent's developing  program.  Students  enrolled  for  less  than  three  courses  are  considered 
part-time  and  are  not  eligible  for  financial  aid  or  student  health  services. 

The  curriculum  intends  to  serve  graduate-professional  aims  with  maximum  flexibility. 
Fourteen  elective  courses  are  available  and  may  be  programmed  to  satisfy  vocational  and 
professional  preferences.  In  planning  a  course  of  study,  the  student,  in  consultation  with 
the  adviser,  should  choose  a  program  which  will  give  a  broad  understanding  and  appreci- 
ation of  future  professional  responsibilities.  Members  of  the  faculty  and  staff  welcome 
inquiries. 

Professional  ministries  include  those  of  the  parish,  preaching,  teaching,  and  pastoral 
care;  ministries  of  education  in  local  churches  and  higher  education;  missions;  campus 
ministry;  specialized  urban  and  rural  ministries;  chaplaincies— hospital,  institutional, 
industrial,  and  military;  teaching;  religious  journalism;  audiovisual  communications; 
church  agencies;  and  ecumenical  ministries  at  home  and  abroad.  For  many  of  these,  fur- 
ther specialized  training  will  necessarily  be  sought  elsewhere  beyond  the  basic  degree. 
For  all  of  these  ministries  the  student's  program  of  studies  can  be  shaped  for  the  particu- 
lar ministry  in  view. 

Students  are  encouraged  to  elect  at  least  one  course  in  each  of  the  following  areas  or 
subdivisions  of  the  curriculum  beyond  the  required  courses:  American  Christianity;  his- 
tory of  religion;  Christian  education;  world  Christianity  and  ecumenics;  biblical  exege- 
sis; pastoral  psychology;  Christian  ethics;  worship  and  preaching;  care  of  the  parish  (in- 
cluding church  and  community).  Such  advanced  courses  should  be  selected  with  a  view 
to  the  individual's  vocational  and  professional  aims  and  in  consultation  with  the  student's 
faculty  adviser.  Students  are  also  encouraged  to  concentrate,  usually  in  not  more  than 
five  courses  in  any  one  subdivision  of  the  curriculum,  in  an  area  directly  related  to  their 

The  Basic  Theological  Degree— Master  of  Divinity    77 


vocational  and  professional  intention .  The  program  of  each  student  is  subject  to  review 
and  revision  by  action  of  the  faculty  adviser,  the  Committee  on  Academic  Standing,  the 
associate  dean  for  academic  programs,  or  the  dean. 

Evaluation/Self-evaluation.  The  successful  completion  of  the  new  M.Div.  program 
rests  upon  three  components:  (1)  gTades;  (2)  field  education;  (3)  faculty  evaluation.  Two 
points  of  evaluation/self-evaluation  occur.  One,  after  the  first  semester  and  as  an  aspect 
of  Church's  Ministry  10,  provides  an  early  reading  on  the  student's  sense  of  vocation  and 
the  appropriateness  of  the  Duke  M.  Div.  program  for  that  person;  gives  early  direction 
to  the  student's  academic  program;  provides  guidance  for  the  first  field  assignment. 

The  second,  normally  after  the  fourth  semester  and  as  part  of  Church's  Ministry  100, 
reviews  the  student's  progress  to  date  in  classroom  and  field  learning  and  assesses  the 
student's  readiness  to  proceed  into  the  senior  year  and  complete  the  Master  of  Divinity 
program .  Specifically  examined  are  the  student's  (1)  understanding  of  his/her  Christian 
vocation,  (2)  self-perception  as  person  in  ministry,  (3)  command  of  skills  of  ministry,  and 
(4)  ability  to  integrate  practice  and  theology  of  ministry. 

The  instruments  to  be  used  for  the  second  include  (1)  a  self-evaluation  document; 
(2)  field  education  data  and  transcript;  (3)  a  15-25  page  typewritten  paper  on  the  student's 
emerging  theology  of  ministry  in  relation  to  his/her  given  faith  heritage;  (4)  an  episode 
of  ministry  such  as  a  verbatim,  a  sermon,  a  case  study,  a  church  program,  etc.,  which 
demonstrates  the  theology  of  ministry;  and  (5)  a  45  minute  oral  exam  over  the  paper,  specif- 
ic episode,  etc. 

The  evaluation  is  a  graduation  requirement  which  must  be  satisfied  as  any  other  re- 
quirement. Students  who  require  significant  additional  work  as  judged  by  the  evaluat- 
ing committee  will  have  to  complete  that  work  prior  to  graduation. 

Information  from  the  evaluation  is  protected  by  the  statutes  concerning  privacy  and 
confidentiality.  It  will  not  be  shared  by  the  Divinity  School  with  any  extra-university  party 
except  upon  written  release  of  the  student  and  then  only  in  summary  fashion. 

A  SUGGESTED  M.DIV.  CURRICULAR  PARADIGM 

Junior  Year 

Fall  Semester  Spring  Semester 

Church's  Ministry  10  Christian  Theology  32 

Church  History  13  Church  History  14 

Old  Testament  11  New  Testament  18 

Elective  Elective 

(Evaluation  1) 
Field  Education  1 

Middler  Year 

Fall  Semester  Spring  Semester 

Christian  Ethics  33  Elective 

Preaching  30*  (or  Elective)  Preaching  30*  (or  Elective) 

American  Christianity  28  Elective 

Elective  Elective 

Field  Education  2  (Evaluation  2) 

Senior  Year 

Fall  Semester  Spring  Semester 

Church's  Ministry  100  Elective 

Elective  Elective 

Elective  Elective 

Elective  Elective 


'Students  will  take  the  Introduction  to  Preaching  course  before  the  end  of  the  fourth  semester  and  after  the 
foundational  courses  in  Old  and  New  Testament  or  their  equivalents. 

78    Curriculum 


Required  Limited  Electives: 

One  course  in  Black  Church  Studies  (from  designated  list) 

One  course  from  Theologies  in  Context  (from  designated  list  of  courses  treating  Wom- 
en's Studies,  World  Christianity,  Liberation  Theology) 
One  additional  course  in  Scripture. 

The  third  requirement  in  Scripture  may  be  met  in  one  of  the  following  ways: 
(1)  by  the  course  entitled  "The  Interpretation  of  Scripture"  (OT/NT  150);  (2)  by  the 
Biblical  language  sequences  OT 115-16  or  NT  103-4  (or  an  advanced  language  course  in 
which  a  formal  exegetical  paper  is  required);  (3)  by  an  English  exegesis  course  in  which 
a  formal  exegetical  paper  is  required  (the  courses  to  be  specified  in  registration  materi- 
als); (4)  by  a  Greek  or  Hebrew  exegesis  course. 

Field  Education.  Two  units  of  approved  field  education  are  required;  they  are 
represented  above  as  winter  term  placements  (30  weeks);  they  may  also  be  satisfied  in 
summer  placements  (10-12  weeks). 

Student  Pastors  and  Others  with  Heavy  Outside  Employment.  Students  in  candidacy 
for  the  Master  of  Divinity  degree  who  serve  as  full-time  pastors  or  work  more  than  fif- 
teen hours  per  week  in  addition  to  their  academic  schedule  are  advised  that  their  degree 
programs  will  usually  require  a  fourth  academic  year. 

Modification  of  this  schedule  requires  the  approval  of  the  associate  dean  for  academic 
programs  on  recommendation  of  the  associate  dean  for  field  education. 

1 .  Students  with  pastoral  charges  or  comparable  extracurricular  responsibilities 
ordinarily  will  enroll  for  not  more  than  three  courses. 

2.  Students  who  accept  pastoral  charges  in  their  middler  or  senior  year  are  required 
to  have  the  prior  approval  of  the  associate  dean  for  field  education.  Such  students 
will  be  required  to  restrict  their  course  work  in  accordance  with  regulation  1 
above. 

3.  Modifications  of  these  regulations  will  be  scrupulously  administered .  Academic 
achievement,  normally  a  B  average,  must  be  demonstrated  before  any  modifi- 
cation of  these  requirements  is  allowed .  Since  adequate  indication  of  the  student's 
academic  proficiency  is  not  available  before  the  completion  of  the  first  academ- 
ic year,  no  modification  of  regulation  1  is  possible  for  junior  students. 

4.  Students  who  secure  minor  employment  outside  the  channels  of  the  Office  of 
Field  Education  are  required  to  inform  the  associate  dean  for  field  education .  Stu- 
dents carrying  an  outside  employment  work  load  of  more  than  fifteen  hours  per 
week  will  be  required  to  limit  their  academic  load. 

5.  Ordinarily  a  student  may  not  commute  more  than  fifty  miles  (one  way) .  Students 
living  farther  away  than  this  will  be  required  to  stay  in  Durham  during  the  aca- 
demic week. 

6.  Student  assistant  pastors  (not  pastors-in-charge)  may  enroll  for  a  full  academic 
load  if  they  are  not  on  limited  program,  if  their  work  is  under  the  supervision 
of  the  associate  dean  for  field  education,  and  if  their  field  duties  involve  no  more 
than  fifteen  hours  per  week. 

Study  Abroad.  Study  abroad,  with  transferable  credit  toward  graduation,  may  be 
allowed  for  a  candidate  for  the  Master  of  Divinity  degree  by  approval  of  the  associate  dean 
for  academic  programs.  A  strong  academic  record  is  a  prerequisite.  Ordinarily,  permis- 
sion for  such  study  may  be  granted  to  students  who  have  completed  the  work  of  the  mid- 
dler year.  Both  the  institution  abroad  and  a  specific  course  of  study  proposed  must  have 
the  prior  approval  of  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs.  Required  courses  and 
the  two  field  education  units  must  usually  be  completed  at  Duke. 

Transfer  Credits.  Transfer  of  credit  to  the  Divinity  School  of  Duke  University,  lead- 
ing to  candidacy  for  the  degree  of  Master  of  Divinity,  will  normally  be  limited  to  one-third 


The  Basic  Theological  Degree— Master  of  Divinity    79 


of  the  academic  credits  (in  proportional  evaluation)  required  for  fulfillment  of  degree  can- 
didacy (see  the  chapter,  "Admissions"). 

Advanced  Placement.  Students  may,  on  the  basis  of  undergraduate  courses,  a  relig- 
ion major,  or  other  substantial  preparation,  be  given  advanced  placement  in  one  or  more 
of  the  eight  required  subjects.  Such  placement  normally  presumes  at  least  two  college 
courses  in  a  given  area  (e.g.,  Old  Testament)  with  a  satisfactory  grade  average  and  per- 
mits the  student  to  fulfill  the  requirement  by  electing  an  advanced  course  in  the  same  area 
(e.g.,  an  advanced  Old  Testament  course  in  place  of  Old  Testament  11). 

Ordination  Requirements.  Students  preparing  for  ordination  are  strongly  advised 
to  ascertain  early  in  their  seminary  program  the  precise  ordination  requirements  of  their 
denomination. 

United  Methodist  students  must  fulfill  educational  requirements  in  the  Discipline, 
by  completing  the  year-long  course  on  Methodist  doctrine,  history,  and  polity  (CP  159 
and  160).  Most  annual  conferences  also  require  one  or  more  courses  in  preaching  and  wor- 
ship and/or  clinical  pastoral  education. 

Students  from  other  denominations  should  consult  with  their  appropriate  church 
bodies  for  specific  requirements,  which  may  include  biblical  languages.  Polity  courses 
for  certain  other  denominations  may  be  offered  from  time  to  time  by  faculty  members  or 
local  clergy  on  prior  request. 

Continuation  Requirements.  The  following  are  the  continuation  requirements  for 
students  enrolled  in  the  M.Div.  degree  program: 

1 .  The  student  must  maintain  a  cumulative  grade  point  average  of  2.0.  If  a  student 
falls  below  this  level  he  or  she  may  be  terminated  or  warned  and  placed  on  limited 
program.  This  means  that  the  student  may  enroll  in  no  more  than  three  courses. 

2 .  At  the  end  of  the  second  semester  the  student  on  limited  program  who  does  not 
attain  a  cumulative  GPA  of  2.0  is  terminated .  In  exceptional  cases  a  student  who 
shows  substantial  improvement  the  second  semester  but  does  not  quite  attain 
a  GPA  of  2.0  may  be  given  a  third  semester  to  do  so. 

3.  The  progress  of  all  students  is  reviewed  at  the  end  of  every  semester  by  the  Aca- 
demic Standing  Committee. 

The  M .  Div  degree  must  be  completed  within  six  years  (twelve  semesters) .  The  mini- 
mum time  in  which  a  degree  can  be  completed  is  three  years  (six  semesters). 

To  be  classified  as  full  time,  a  student  must  be  enrolled  in  three  or  more  courses  in 
a  semester. 

M.Div.  with  a  Concentration  in  Christian  Education.  Persons  wishing  a  Master  of  Di- 
vinity degree  with  a  concentration  in  Christian  education  will  complete  the  stated  require- 
ments of  the  M.Div.  curriculum.  In  addition,  they  would  ordinarily  take  CED  25  in  the 
first  semester  of  the  junior  year;  CED  132  in  the  first  semester  of  the  middler  year;  CED 
250,  the  Senior  Symposium  in  Christian  Education,  in  the  second  semester  of  the  senior 
year;  and  three  other  Christian  education  courses.  They  would  also  complete  one  field 
education  unit  in  a  Christian  education  setting. 

The  Master  of  Religious  Education  Degree 

The  course  of  study  leading  to  this  degree  is  designed  for  persons  desiring  to  pre- 
pare for  leadership  and  service  in  the  educational  ministry  of  the  church. 

Admission.  Applications  for  admission  to  the  Master  of  Religious  Education  program 
are  evaluated  by  the  same  standards  as  those  applicable  to  the  Master  of  Divinity  degree, 
and  admission  requirements  and  procedures  are  also  the  same  (see  page  25,  "Admissions: 
Requirements  and  Procedures").  Students  planning  to  specialize  in  Christian  education 
should  study  the  sections  of  this  bulletin  which  contain  statements  of  policy  regarding 

80    Curriculum 


the  most  appropriate  prerequisite  studies  for  theological  education  and  the  procedures 
to  be  followed  in  applying  for  admission. 

Requirements.  The  Master  of  Religious  Education  degree  usually  requires  two  years, 
or  four  semesters,  of  residence  and  study  and  the  fulfillment  of  the  following  re- 
quirements: 

1 .    Sixteen  courses  according  to  the  following  curricular  paradigm : 

First  Year 

Fall  Semester  Spring  Semester 

CED  25:  Education  as  a  Pastoral  Ministry  Christian  Theology  32 

Church  History  13  Church  History  14 

Old  Testament  11  New  Testament  18 

Elective  Elective 
(evaluation-1) 

Second  Year 

Fall  Semester  Sprijig  Semester 

Christian  Ethics  33  CED  250:  MRE  Symposium 

CED  132:  Curriculum  Teaching  and  Elective 

Learning  Elective 

Elective  Elective 
Elective 
(evaluation-2) 

Required  Limited  Electives:  Three  courses  in  Christian  Education.  One  unit  of  ap- 
proved Field  Education  is  required. 

Note:  The  courses  in  scripture,  history,  and  theology  above  are  those  typically  elect- 
ed .  Others  in  the  same  divisions  may  be  substituted  with  the  permission  of  the  adviser, 
the  divisional  chair,  and  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs. 

All  M.R.E.  students  will  be  involved  with  their  adviser  in  two  evaluation/self- 
evaluation  processes.  One,  after  the  first  semester,  provides  an  early  reading  on  the  stu- 
dent's sense  of  vocation  and  direction .  The  second,  normally  during  the  third  semester, 
assesses  the  student's  readiness  to  complete  this  professional  degree  program.  The  lat- 
ter includes  the  submission  of  a  fifteen-twenty  page  paper  entitled  "My  Emerging  The- 
ology of  Educational  Ministry."  Both  draw  upon  insights  and  data  from  field  education 
as  well  as  from  academic  performance. 

United  Methodist  Requirements.  This  degree  meets  the  academic  requirements  for 
consecration  as  a  diaconal  minister  in  the  United  Methodist  Church  when  United  Meth- 
odist doctrine  and  polity  (CP  159-60)  are  taken  as  electives.  To  be  certified  as  a  director 
or  minister  of  Christian  education  by  an  annual  conference,  a  student  would  need  to  take 
a  course  in  worship,  typically  CW 178,  and  United  Methodist  history,  doctrine  and  poli- 
ty (CP  159-60),  in  addition  to  the  courses  in  Christian  education  required  for  the  degree. 
Students  are  advised  to  consult  with  their  Conference  Boards  of  Diaconal  Ministry. 

Continuation  Requirements.  The  following  are  the  continuation  requirements  for 
the  M.R.E.  degree  program: 

1 .  The  student  must  maintain  a  cumulative  grade  point  average  of  2.0.  If  a  student 
falls  below  that  he  or  she  may  be  given  a  second  semester  to  bring  the  cumula- 
tive GPA  up  to  2.0.  Failure  to  do  so  results  in  termination. 

2.  The  progress  of  all  students  is  reviewed  at  the  end  of  every  semester  by  the  Aca- 
demic Standing  Committee. 

The  minimum  time  in  which  the  M.R.E.  can  be  completed  is  two  years  (four 
semesters).  The  degree  must  be  completed  in  four  years  (eight  semesters). 

To  be  classified  as  full  time  a  student  must  be  enrolled  in  three  or  more  courses. 

The  Master  of  Religious  Education  Degree    81 


The  Master  of  Theological  Studies  Degree 

This  two-year  (four  semesters)  general  academic  degree,  inaugurated  in  September 
of  1987,  is  designed  to  provide  an  introduction  to  the  theological  disciplines  as:  (1)  foun- 
dation for  a  graduate  research  degree  (Ph.D.);  (2)  preparation  for  lay  religious  careers; 
(3)  grounding  for  teaching,  research  or  practice  in  another  field  (e.g.,  history,  psycholo- 
gy, music);  (4)  enhancement  of  institutional  leadership  roles;  (5)  personal  enrichment. 

Requirements: 

1 .  16  courses  and  four  or  more  semesters  of  residency  (at  least  three  semesters  of 
which  must  be  at  Duke,  i.e.,  transfer  credit  is  limited  to  one  semester); 

2.  a  normal  load  of  four  courses  per  semester; 

3.  two  courses  from  each  of  the  biblical,  historical  and  theological  divisions  (or- 
dinarily those  would  be  the  Old  and  New  Testament  introductions;  the  two  se- 
mester survey  of  church  history;  and  the  basic  theology  and  ethics  courses); 

4.  the  maintenance  of  a  cumulative  grade  point  average  of  2.5; 

5.  a  paper*  submitted  within  a  course  in  the  final  (fourth)  semester  and  fulfill- 
ing, in  part,  the  requirements  of  that  course  which  addresses  itself  to  the  co- 
herence, learnings,  or  major  emphases  of  the  individual's  program  (choice  of 
course  by  mutual  consent  of  student,  instructor,  adviser); 

6.  completion  of  all  requirements  for  the  degree  within  a  four  year  (eight  semes- 
ter) period. 

Administration.  In  consultation  with  their  advisers,  students  will  draft  a  set  of  pro- 
gram goals  and  project  a  four  semester  course  plan  (or  an  appropriate  alternative  plan 
on  a  part-time  basis).  At  each  registration  conference,  students  and  advisers  will  reas- 
sess program  goals  and  the  course  plan  adopted  by  the  student.  At  the  end  of  each  se- 
mester, the  Academic  Standing  Committee  shall  review  the  progress  and  cumulative 
grade  point  average  of  each  student.  The  M.T.S.  program  as  a  whole  will  be  administered 
by  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs  who  will  take  responsibility  for  any  collo- 
quia  or  other  special  M.T.S.  programs. 

Persons  enrolled  for  three  or  more  courses  will  be  classified  as  full  time. 

Students  enrolled  in  the  M.T.S.  program  do  not  ordinarily  elect  Church's  Ministry 
10  and  100  or  Christian  Education  250. 

United  Methodist  Requirements.  This  degree  meets  the  academic  requirements  for 
consecration  as  a  diaconal  minister  in  the  United  Methodist  Church  when  United  Meth- 
odist doctrine  and  polity  (CP 159-60)  are  taken  as  electives.  Students  are  advised  to  con- 
sult with  their  Conference  Boards  of  Diaconal  Ministry. 

A  Suggested  M.T.S.  Curricular  Paradigm 

First  Year 

Fall  Semester  Spn'n^  Semester 

Elective  Christian  Theology  32 

Old  Testament  11  New  Testament  18 

Church  History  13  Church  History  14 

Elective  Elective 

Second  Year 

Fall  Semester  Spring  Semester 

Christian  Ethics  33  Elective** 

Elective  Elective 

Elective  Elective 

Elective  Elective 


'Guidelines  for  the  fourth  semester  paper  will  be  available. 
"One  of  the  electives  serves  as  the  context  for  the  summary  paper. 

82    Curriculum 


The  Master  of  Theology  Degree 

The  course  of  study  leading  to  the  degree  of  Master  of  Theology  is  designed  for  gradu- 
ates of  accredited  theological  schools  who  desire  to  continue  or  resume  their  theological 
education  for  enhancement  of  professional  competence  in  selected  areas  of  study.  En- 
rollment in  the  Th.M.  degree  program  is  open  to  a  limited  number  of  students  who  have 
received  the  M.Div.  (or  the  equivalent)  with  superior  academic  records. 

Inquiries  on  admission  may  be  addressed  to  the  director  of  admissions  for  referral 
to  the  director  of  the  Th.M.  Program. 

General  Requirements.  The  general  requirements  for  the  degree  of  Master  of  The- 
ology are: 

1 .  Eight  course  units  of  advanced  studies,  with  an  average  grade  of  B  (3.0  average 
on  a  4.0  scale). 

2.  Superior  performance  in  a  comprehensive  examination  covering  the  major  area 
of  study.  As  an  alternative  to  the  comprehensive  examination  the  student  may 
elect  to  do  a  research  project  in  one  major  area  if  approved  by  the  supervising 
professor.  This  project  shall  carry  one  course  credit,  to  be  counted  within  the  eight 
units  required. 

3.  Residence  for  one  academic  year  or  the  equivalent.  (Equivalency  to  be  deter- 
mined by  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs). 

There  are  no  general  language  requirements.  However,  classical  or  modern  languages 
may  be  required  for  certain  programs  (for  example,  in  biblical  studies,  Hebrew  or  Greek 
maybe  required). 

The  Program  of  Study.  At  least  four  of  the  required  eight  courses  must  be  taken  in 
one  of  the  basic  theological  disciplines  (biblical,  historical,  theological,  or  ministerial) 
which  shall  be  designated  as  the  candidate's  major,  and  at  least  two  courses  in  another 
discipline  (i.e.  an  area  of  study  distinct  from  the  major)  which  shall  be  designated  as  the 
candidate's  minor.  Ordinarily,  no  more  than  two  units  maybe  taken  through  directed  read- 
ing, and  no  more  than  one  of  these  in  any  one  semester.  In  the  area  of  pastoral  psycholo- 
gy, up  to  four  course  units  may  be  taken  through  clinical  pastoral  education. 

The  comprehensive  examination  will  be  given  at  the  close  of  the  course  of  study  for 
the  degree,  ordinarily  in  May  or  September.  Persons  electing  to  do  a  research  project 
should  obtain  guidelines  for  their  submission  from  the  associate  dean  for  academic 
programs. 

The  entire  program  of  studies  and  comprehensive  examination  or  project  can  be  com- 
pleted within  twelve  months.  In  some  cases,  the  time  limit  may  be  extended,  but  in  no 
case  beyond  three  years. 

The  candidate  majoring  in  pastoral  psychology  may  plan  one  of  three  programs  or 
concentrations:  a  concentration  in  pastoral  theology  relating  psychology  and  theologi- 
cal understanding  to  professional  ministry,  especially  the  parish,  through  course  work 
and  supervised  clinical  or  field  experience;  a  concentration  in  pastoral  care  through  course 
work  and  an  intern  year  in  basic  or  advanced  clinical  pastoral  education;  a  concentration 
in  pastoral  counseling  through  course  work  and  supervised  counseling  experience  in  a 
pastoral  counseling  center.  In  the  context  of  clinical  pastoral  education  various  profes- 
sional goals  may  be  sought,  including  general  understanding  and  skills  in  pastoral  care. 
The  Clinical  Pastoral  Education  Program  is  certified  by  the  Association  for  Clinical  Pas- 
toral Education.  Persons  specializing  in  pastoral  counseling  and  pastoral  psychothera- 
py will  be  moved  toward  certification  with  the  American  Association  of  Pastoral  Coun- 
selors and  the  American  Association  of  Marriage  and  Family  Therapists.  Course  PP 181 
A  (or  its  equivalent)  is  considered  a  prerequisite  for  a  major  in  pastoral  psychology.  It  is 
not  applicable  toward  the  eight  courses  required  for  the  degree,  although  it  will  be  indi- 
cated on  the  student's  transcript.  Accordingly,  the  student  majoring  in  this  area  should 
ordinarily  make  provision  for  a  program  extending  for  a  full  calendar  year. 

The  Master  of  Theology  Degree    83 


Financial  Aid.  Please  note  in  the  pertinent  sections  of  the  chapter  "Financial  Infor- 
mation" that  the  charges  for  tuition  and  general  fee  for  the  Th.M.  degree  are  combined 
and  are  made  on  the  basis  of  the  number  of  courses  taken,  and  that  in  order  to  be  eligible 
for  medical  care  a  student  must  be  taking  at  least  three  courses. 

Continuation  Requirements.  The  following  are  the  continuation  requirements  for 
the  Th.M.  degree  program. 

1 .  The  student  must  maintain  a  cumulative  grade  point  average  of  3.0.  A  student 
who  falls  below  this  level  is  terminated. 

2.  The  progress  of  all  students  is  reviewed  at  the  end  of  every  semester  by  the  Aca- 
demic Standing  Committee. 

The  Th.M.  degree  must  be  completed  within  three  years  (six  semesters).  The  mini- 
mum time  in  which  the  degree  can  be  completed  is  one  year  (two  semesters). 

To  be  classified  as  full  time  a  student  must  be  enrolled  in  three  or  more  courses  in  a 
semester. 

Duke  Summer  Session 

While  the  Divinity  School  does  not  presently  offer  a  regular  summer  program,  stu- 
dents may  enroll  for  intensive  biblical  language  courses  (Hebrew  in  1990  and  Greek  in 
1989)  or  individual  directed  study.  Summer  courses  of  graduate  level  may  also  be  taken 
in  other  departments  as  cognate  credits  (maximum  of  two,  see  provisions  under  adminis- 
tration of  the  curriculum) .  Permission  for  such  credits  must  be  secured  in  advance  from 
the  instructor  and  from  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs,  but  official  registra- 
tion and  payment  of  fees  are  handled  in  the  Office  of  Summer  Educational  Programs,  120 
Allen  Building,  Duke  University,  Durham,  North  Carolina  27706. 

Special  Programs 

Duke  Divinity  School  is  a  participant  in  the  National  Capital  Semester  for  Seminari- 
ans conducted  by  Wesley  Theological  Seminary  in  Washington,  DC.  Students  may,  with 
the  approval  of  the  associate  dean  for  academic  programs,  enroll  in  this  one-semester  pro- 
gram focused  on  political  issues  and  social  ethics,  and  receive  up  to  four  transfer  credits. 
Applicants  must  have  completed  at  least  two  and  not  more  than  four  semesters  at  Duke 
to  be  eligible. 

International  Study  Programs 

For  several  years  the  Divinity  School  has  been  developing  programs  of  international 
study  and  exchange  involving  faculty  and  students.  The  main  areas  in  which  the  develop- 
ment is  centered  at  this  time  are  the  following: 

Mexico  Seminar.  Brief  intensive  travel-study  to  foster  appreciation  of  Mexico,  its  peo- 
ple, history,  culture,  and  religion-with  special  attention  to  the  faith  and  mission  of  the 
church  in  Latin  America  today.  Direct  encounter  with  Third  World  poverty.  About  twelve 
persons  per  seminar.  Annually. 

China  Seminar.  A  travel-study  seminar  on  the  re-emergence  of  the  Church  in  Chi- 
na focusing  on  the  unprecedented  response  to  the  Church  in  a  Marxist  society.  Participants 
have  the  opportunity  also  to  learn  about  China  and  its  people  and  see  firsthand  the 
changes  taking  place  in  this  remarkable  country.  Biannually. 

Robert  E.  Cushman  Exchange  Fellowship.  Each  year  faculty  and  staff  nominate  a  stu- 
dent to  represent  the  Divinity  School  in  the  Bonn/Duke  Exchange  program.  At  Bonn 


84    Curriculum 


University  (West  Germany)  the  student  for  a  year  becomes  thoroughly  acquainted  with 
another  culture  and  different  church  life.  Full  participation  in  classes  at  Bonn  required . 
Language  preparation  necessary. 

Dumfries,  Scotland.  In  cooperation  with  St.  Michael's  Parish,  Dumfries,  Scotland, 
the  Divinity  School  offers  an  academic  year's  experience.  A  modest  stipend  provides  basic 
support  and  trans-Atlantic  air  fare.  This  opportunity  is  open  each  year  to  one  rising  sen- 
ior who  serves  as  a  full-time  parish  assistant  for  this  parish  of  the  Church  of  Scotland. 

Students  wishing  to  make  other  arrangements  for  study  abroad  should  consult  with 
both  associate  deans  as  early  as  feasible.  A  more  extensive  description  of  the  Divinity 
School's  international  programs  follows  the  section,  "Field  Education." 


International  Study  Programs    85 


Courses  of  Instruction 


George  M.  Marsden,  Professor  of  the  History  of  Christianity  in  America 


Course  Enrollment 

The  foundational  courses  typically  carry  two  digit  numbers  (e.g.,  New  Testament  18, 
Church  History  13,  American  Christianity  28,  Christian  Theology  32) .  Other  courses  num- 
bered through  199  are  elective  courses  for  Divinity  School  students  only.  Most  courses 
numbered  200  and  above  are  approved  for  credit  by  both  the  Divinity  School  and  the 
Graduate  School,  and  require  the  permission  of  the  instructor.  For  other  prerequisites 
the  student  should  consult  the  roster  of  courses  of  instruction  in  this  bulletin  and  should 
also  refer  to  published  registration  advices  at  the  time  of  registration  for  each  semester. 

Courses  jointly  approved  by  the  Divinity  School  and  the  Graduate  School  of  Duke 
University  are  published  in  the  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  The  Divinity  School.  Courses 
offered  in  the  Department  of  Religion  of  Duke  University,  or  as  cognate  courses  in  other 
departments,  must  be  of  graduate  level  (numbered  200  or  above)  in  order  to  fulfill  require- 
ments for  degrees  in  the  Divinity  School. 

Projected  Course  Offerings 

The  following  list  of  proposed  course  offerings  for  the  1989-90  academic  year  is  ten- 
tative and  subject  to  change.  Detailed  listings  are  available  at  the  time  of  preregistration 
in  the  middle  of  the  preceding  semester,  and  more  distant  plans  may  be  ascertained  by 
consulting  the  divisional  representative  or  the  instructors  concerned. 

Fall  Semester,  1989 

Old  Testament  (OT)  11,  115,  163 

New  Testament  (NT)  18,  103,  114,  117C,  118,  226B 

Church  History  (CH)  13,  276 

Historical  Theology  (HT)  337 

American  Christianity  (AC)  28,  293A 

Christian  Theology  (CT)  118,  119,  156,  214,  217,  322,  352,  365.35 

Christian  Ethics  (CHE)  33,  387,  389 

Church's  Ministry  (CM)  10 

Care  of  the  Parish  (CP)  50,  159,  147,  151 

Christian  Education  (CED)  22,  25 

Church  Worship  (CW)  178 

Pastoral  Psychology  (PP)  64,  77,  181-A,  271,  278,  281 

Preaching  (PR)  30,  164,  186, 189 

Spring  Semester,  1990 

Old  Testament  (OT)  11,  116,  130,  150,  209,  223B,  302 

Projected  Course  Offerings    87 


New  Testament  (NT)  18,  104,  105,  117D,  226C,  340 

Church  History  (CH)  14 

Historical  Theology  (HT)  338 

American  Christianity  (AC)  203 

Christian  Theology  (CT)  32, 124,  256,  333 

Black  Church  Studies  (BCS)  124 

World  Christianity  (WC) 

Care  of  the  Parish  (CP)  160 

Christian  Education  (CED)  109,  132,  250 

Christian  Worship  (CW)  162,  178 

Pastoral  Psychology  (PP)  181-B 

Preaching  (PR)  30,  164 


I.  Biblical  Studies 

OLD  TESTAMENT 


11.  Introduction  to  Old  Testament  Interpretation.  An  introduction  to  the  literature, 
history,  and  religion  of  ancient  Israel  with  emphasis  upon  exegetical  methodology.  Bailei/ 
and  Crenshaw 

101.  The  Prophetic  Movement.  A  study  of  the  prophetic  movement  in  Israel  from  the 
earliest  period  to  the  postexilic  development  of  apocalyptic  with  special  reference  to  the 
content  and  religious  teaching  of  the  prophetic  writings.  Efird 

106.  Exegesis  of  the  English  Old  Testament.  Prerequisite:  OT  11  or  equivalent. 
106A.  Genesis.  Bailey 
106B.  Amos  and  Hosea.  Bailey 
106D.  Wisdom  Literature  in  the  Old  Testament.  Crenshaw 

106E.  Old  Testament  Psalms.  Exegesis  of  various  literary  types;  theological  orienta- 
tion of  Old  Testament  liturgical  prayer;  implications  for  prayer  and  liturgy  today.  Staff 

109.  The  Religion  of  the  Old  Testament.  A  study  of  the  religious  ideas  contained  in 
the  Old  Testament  with  special  reference  to  their  interpretation  from  Robertson  Smith 
to  the  present.  Efird 

115-116.  Introduction  to  Biblical  Hebrew.  Elements  of  phonology,  morphology,  and 
syntax.  Exercises  in  reading  and  writing  Hebrew.  Exegetical  treatment  of  the  book  of  Jonah. 
(Two  semesters:  no  credit  will  be  given  for  115  without  completion  of  116.)  Bailey 

130.  Dying  and  Death.  Critical  consideration  of  biblical,  legal,  medical,  and  ethical 
perspectives.  Prerequisites:  OT  11,  NT  18,  or  equivalents.  Bailey,  H.  Smith,  and  others 

150.  The  Interpretation  of  Scripture  A  study  of  the  methods  by  which  modern  inter- 
preters seek  to  understand  ancient  texts,  and  of  the  problems  and  options  involved  in  the 
move  from  text  to  sermon.  Consideration  of  texts  from  both  Testaments.  Evaluation  of  the 
Lectionary  as  a  means  of  interpretation.  Prerequisite:  OT11,  NT  18.  Bailey,  Efird,  andothers 

163.  Biblical  Prayer.  Crenshaw 

180.  From  Text  to  Sermon.  (See  PR  180.)  Staff 

207.  Intermediate  Biblical  Hebrew  I.  Historical  Hebrew  grammar  with  reading  and 
exegesis  of  Old  Testament  prose  (Pentateuch  and  historical  books  in  alternate  years). 
Wintermute 

208.  Intermediate  Biblical  Hebrew  II.  Historical  Hebrew  grammar  and  rapid  read- 
ing of  prose  and  poetry.  Meyers 

209.  Old  Testament  Theology.  Studies  of  the  Old  Testament  in  regard  to  theological 
themes  and  content.  Prerequisite:  OT  11  or  equivalent.  Crenshaw 

88    Courses  of  Instruction 


220.  Rabbinic  Hebrew.  An  interpretive  study  of  late  Hebrew,  with  reading  from  the 
Mishnah.  Staff 

223.  Exegesis  of  the  Hebrew  Old  Testament.  Prerequisite  OT  115-116. 

223A.  Amos  and  Hosea.  Stress  on  hermeneutical  method.  Bailey  or  Crenshaio 

223B.  Job.  Crenshaw 

223C.  I  Samuel.  Bailey 

223D.  Song  of  Songs.  Crenshaio 

223E.  Ecclesiastes.  Crenshaw 

223F.  Proverbs.  Crenshaw 

223G.  Genesis.  Bailey 

237.  History  of  the  Ancient  Near  East.  Emphasis  upon  the  religions,  literature,  and 
art  of  Mesopotamia.  Bailey 

242.  Life  after  Death  in  Semitic  Thought.  Consideration  of  the  various  ideas  from 
the  early  second  millennium  through  the  Intertestamental  Period.  Exegesis  of  selected 
Old  Testament  passages.  Evaluation  of  recent  research .  Prerequisite :  OT  1 1  or  equivalent, 
knowledge  of  Hebrew  helpful  but  not  required.  Bailey 

302.  Studies  in  the  Intertestamental  Literature.  Selected  documents  of  the  Apocry- 
pha and  Pseudepigrapha  examined  exegetically  and  theologically  in  their  relation  to 
postexilic  Judaism.  Staff 

304.  Aramaic.  A  study  of  the  Aramaic  portions  of  the  Old  Testament  and  selected  pas- 
sages from  the  Elephantine  and  Qumran  texts.  Wintermute 

343.  Readings  in  Ancient  Near  Eastern  Literature.  Staff 

350,  351.  Seminar  in  Old  Testament.  Research  and  discussion  on  selected  problems 
in  the  Old  Testament  and  related  fields.  Staff 

353.  Seminar  on  Text  Criticism.  Emphasis  upon  transmission,  versions,  apparatus, 
and  method.  Prerequisites:  NT  103-104  and  OT  115-116  or  equivalents.  Bailey  and  others 

373-374.  Elementary  Akkadian.  Study  of  the  elements  of  Akkadian  grammar.  Read- 
ing of  neo-Assyrian  texts  shedding  light  on  the  Old  Testament.  Prerequisite:  biblical  He- 
brew. (Two  semesters:  not  credited  separately.)  Bailey 

375-376.  Elementary  Ugaritic.  Study  of  the  elements  of  Ugaritic.  Prerequisite :  bibli- 
cal Hebrew.  (Two  semesters:  not  credited  separately.)  Staff 

NEW  TESTAMENT 

18.  Introduction  to  New  Testament  Interpretation.  An  introduction  to  the  literature 
of  the  New  Testament  with  special  attention  to  the  perspectives  and  methods  of  historical- 
critical  investigation  and  interpretation.  Efird,  M.  Smith,  or  Via 

103-104.  Hellenistic  Greek.  Designed  for  beginners  to  enable  them  to  read  the  Greek 
New  Testament.  (Two  semesters:  no  credit  will  be  given  for  103  without  completion  of 
104;  however,  students  with  at  least  one  full  year  of  college  Greek  may  be  permitted  to 
enroll  in  104.)  Efird 

105.  Studies  in  Paul.  An  investigation  of  Paul's  apostolate  based  upon  the  Acts  and 
the  Epistles  with  attention  to  Paul's  theology  as  reflected  in  selected  passages.  Efird 

114.  Jesus  in  the  Gospels.  A  consideration  of  the  origins,  transmissions,  and  literary 
fixation  of  the  Jesus  traditions  with  special  attention  to  the  message  of  the  Kingdom,  the 
problem  of  messianic  self -consciousness,  and  the  passion.  M.  Smith  or  Via 

116.  Exegesis  of  the  English  New  Testament  I. Staff 

I.  Biblical  Studies    89 


116A.  Luke-Acts 

116B.  Galatians 

116C.  Selected  Later  Epistles 

116D.  I  and  II  Corinthians 

116E.  Matthew 

117.  Exegesis  of  the  English  New  Testament  II. Staff 
117A.  The  Gospel  and  Epistles  of  John 

117B.  Romans 
117C.  Revelation 
117D.  Mark 

118.  The  New  Testament  in  Greek.  Readings  in  the  Gospels.  Staff 

119.  The  New  Testament  in  Greek.  Readings  in  the  Epistles.  Staff 

150.  The  Interpretation  of  Scripture  A  study  of  the  methods  by  which  modern  inter- 
preters seek  to  understand  ancient  texts,  and  of  the  problems  and  options  involved  in  the 
move  from  text  to  sermon .  Consideration  of  texts  from  both  Testaments.  Evaluation  of  the 
Lectionary  as  a  means  of  interpretation.  Prerequisite:  OT 11,  NT  18.  Bailei/,  Efird  and  others 

180.  From  Text  to  Sermon.  (See  PR  180.)  Staff 

2xx.  Church  and  Ministry  in  the  New  Testament.  A  consideration  of  the  development 
of  the  concept  and  office  of  ministry  in  the  early  church  as  it  is  reflected  in  the  New  Testa- 
ment. M.  Smith 

225.  Living  Issues  in  New  Testament  Theology.  Critical  examination  of  major  prob- 
lems and  issues  in  New  Testament  interpretation  and  theology.  Prerequisite:  NT  18  or 
equivalent.  M.  Smith  or  Via 

226.  Exegesis  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  I.  Prerequisite:  NT  103-104.  M.  Smith  or  Via 
226A.  Matthew 

226B.  Romans 

226C.  Mark 

226D.  I  and  II  Corinthians 

226E.  The  Gospel  and  Epistles  of  John 

227.  Exegesis  of  the  Greek  New  Testament  II.  Prerequisite:  NT  103-104.  M.  Smith 
227A.  Luke 

227B.  Galatians 

227C.  The  Pastoral  Epistles 

227D.  Acts 

257.  New  Testament  Ethics.  An  examination  of  several  approaches  to  the  scope  and 
issues  of  New  Testament  ethics,  including  such  topics  as  symbolic  language  in  ethical  dis- 
course, the  place  of  the  law,  conscience,  community,  sexuality,  and  property.  Via 

309.  Hermeneutics.  Consideration  of  the  nature  of  understanding  and  of  several  in- 
terpretive methods  including  phenomenological,  existential,  historical,  literary,  and  struc- 
tural. Their  application  to  New  Testament  texts,  primarily  the  parables  of  Jesus.  Via 

311.  Pharisaic  Judaism  in  the  First  Century.  A  reading  course  in  first-century  Phari- 
saic Judaism.  Staff 

312.  Pauline  Theology.  Studies  in  some  aspects  of  Paulinism  in  the  light  of  recent 
scholarship.  Staff 

314.  Judaism  and  Christianity  in  the  New  Testament.  A  study  of  their  interaction  with 
special  attention  to  Paul.  Staff 

319.  The  Gospel  According  to  St.  Matthew  in  Recent  Research.  Staff 
90    Courses  of  Instruction 


340, 341.  Seminar  in  the  New  Testament.  Research  and  discussion  on  a  selected  prob- 
lem in  the  biblical  field.  M.  Smith 

345.  The  Epistle  to  the  Hebrews  in  Recent  Research. Staff 

II.  Historical  Studies 

CHURCH  HISTORY 

13.  Early  and  Medieval  Christianity.  A  survey  of  the  history  of  Christianity  from  its 
beginnings  through  the  fifteenth  century.  Steinmetz  and  Keefe 

14.  Modern  European  Christianity.  A  survey  of  the  history  of  Christianity  from  the 
Reformation  to  the  present.  T.  Campbell  ami  Steinmetz 

105.  Studies  in  Patristic  Christianity.  Selected  issues  in  the  worship,  theology  and 
politics  of  the  early  Church.  T.  Campbell 

125.  The  Evangelical  Heritage.  A  study  of  evangelical  Christianity  from  the  mid- 
seventeenth  century  to  the  present.  T  Campbell 

126.  The  English  Reformation.  The  religious  history  of  England  from  the  accession 
of  Henry  VIII  to  the  death  of  Elizabeth  I .  Extensive  readings  in  the  English  reformers  from 
Tyndale  to  Hooker.  Steinmetz 

183.  Renewal  Movements  in  Church  History.  An  investigation  of  renewal  movements 
as  parallel  phenomena  throughout  Christian  history  utilizing  social  scientific  studies  of 
culture  change  and  focusing  on  ancient  monasticism,  Franciscanism,  Anabaptism,  and 
early  Methodism  as  representative  renewal  movements.  T.  Campbell 

202.  Religion  of  the  Cappadocian  Fathers.  Examination  of  the  careers  and  writings 
of  Basil,  Gregory  of  Nyssa,  and  Gregory  of  Nazianzus.  T.  Campbell 

235.  The  English  Church  in  the  Eighteenth  Century.  Studies  of  Christianity  in  En- 
gland from  the  Act  of  Toleration,  1689,  to  the  death  of  John  Wesley,  1791.  T.  Campbell 

236.  Luther  and  the  Reformation  in  Germany.  The  theology  of  Martin  Luther  in  the 
context  of  competing  visions  of  reform.  Steinmetz 

247-A,  B.  Readings  in  Latin  Theological  Literature.  Critical  translation  and  study  of 
important  theological  texts  in  Latin  from  various  periods  of  the  history  of  the  Church. 
Prerequisite:  reading  knowledge  of  Latin  (introductory  course  offered  in  the  classics 
department).  Staff 

276.  Baptism  in  the  Patristic  and  Early  Medieval  Period.  A  study  of  the  celebration 
and  interpretation  of  the  rite  of  Christian  initiation  in  the  church  orders  and  texts  of  the 
early  church  writers.  Keefe 

334.  Theology  and  Reform  in  the  Later  Middle  Ages.  Examination  of  selected  issues 
in  the  life  and  thought  of  the  medieval  church  from  the  twelfth  century  through  the  fif- 
teenth century.  Readings  in  popular  and  academic  theologians  from  Pierre  Abelard  to 
Gabriel  Biel.  Steinmetz 

339.  The  Radical  Reformation.  Protestant  movements  of  dissent  in  the  sixteenth  cen- 
tury. Special  attention  will  be  devoted  to  Muntzer,  Carlstadt,  Hubmaier,  Schwenckfeld, 
Denck,  Marpeck,  Socinus,  and  Menno  Simons.  Steinmetz 

344.  Zwingli  and  the  Origins  of  Reformed  Theology.  Source  studies  in  the  early 
Reformed  tradition.  Steinmetz 


II.  Historical  Studies    91 


HISTORICAL  THEOLOGY 

114.  Christologies  of  the  Early  Church.  Investigation  of  important  soteriologies  and 
debates  centering  upon  the  person  of  Christ  from  the  second  through  the  fifth  centuries. 
T.  Campbell 

123.  Readings  in  Historical  Theology.  Prerequisite:  CH  13-14.  Staff 

183.  Teachings  of  the  Christian  Churches.  An  historical  examination  of  Eastern  Or- 
thodox, Roman  Catholic,  Protestant,  and  evangelical  doctrinal  statements.  T.  Campbell 

201.  Christian  Thought  in  the  Middle  Ages.  A  survey  of  the  historv  of  Christian  the- 
ology from  St.  Augustine  to  the  young  Martin  Luther.  Steinmetz 

204.  Origen.  The  systematic  and  apologetic  writings  of  an  important  Alexandrian 
thinker  and  exegete  of  the  third  century.  Staff 

219.  Augustine.  The  religion  of  the  Bishop  of  Hippo  in  the  setting  of  late  antiquity.  Staff 

241.  Problems  in  Reformation  Theology.  Prerequisite:  permission  of  the  instructor. 
Steinmetz 

246.  Problems  in  Historical  Theology.  Prerequisite:  permission  of  the  instructor.  Staff 

260.  Life  and  Thought  of  the  Wesleys.  A  seminar  on  John  and  Charles  Wesley  and 
their  colleagues  in  relation  to  English  culture  and  religion  in  the  eighteenth  century. 
Prerequisite:  permission  of  the  instructor.  T.  Campbell 

273.  Continental  and  British  Roots  of  Evangelicalism.  A  study  of  seventeenth  and 
eighteenth  century  movements  in  Europe  and  Britain  characterized  by  a  stress  on  per- 
sonal religious  experience.  T.  Campbell 

308.  Greek  Patristic  Texts.  Critical  translation  and  study  of  selected  Greek  texts  illus- 
trative of  significant  aspects  of  patristic  theology  and  history  from  the  second  through 
the  fifth  century  A.D.  Staff 

313.  The  Apostolic  Fathers.  A  study  of  the  religious  thought  in  the  writings  of  the 
Apostolic  Fathers.  Staff 

317.  Seminar  in  the  Greek  Apologists.  A  stud  v  of  the  apologetic  writings  of  the  Greek 
Fathers  in  relation  to  the  challenges  of  their  contemporary  world.  Special  attention  will 
be  given  to  leading  protagonists  of  late  Graeco-Roman  culture,  such  as  Celsus,  Porphyry, 
and  Julian.  Staff 

318.  Seminar  in  the  Greek  Fathers.  A  studv  of  selected  topics  from  the  Greek  Fathers. 
Staff 

337.  Theology  of  St.  Thomas  Aquinas.  Intensive  reading  in  the  Summa  Theologica  and 
biblical  commentaries.  Steinmetz 

338.  Calvin  and  the  Reformed  Tradition.  The  theological  development  of  John  Cal- 
vin. A  comprehensive  examination  of  his  mature  position  with  constant  reference  to  the 
theology  of  the  other  reformers.  Steinmetz 

AMERICAN  CHRISTIANITY 

28.  History  of  American  Christianity.  A  consideration  of  the  nature  of  Christianity 
in  America  and  the  history  of  its  development.  Gilbert  and  Marsden 

190.  The  Protestant  Establishment  and  Secularization  in  Modern  America.  Explo- 
ration of  Protestant  contribution  to  the  secularization  of  America  since  1865  and  of  the  ways 
in  which  Protestantism  itself  has  become  secularized.  Marsden 


92    Courses  of  Instruction 


203.  Studies  in  American  Methodism.  Research  seminar  devoted  to  selected  topics 
in  the  Wesleyan  and  Methodist  traditions  in  America.  Richey 

267.  American  Puritan  Thought  through  Edwards.  A  seminar  built  around  some  of 
the  classic  studies  of  American  Puritan  thought,  culminating  with  a  more  intensive  look 
at  literature  by  and  about  Jonathan  Edwards.  Marsden 

270.  American  Evangelicalism  and  Fundamentalism.  A  reading  seminar  covering 
major  themes  in  the  development  of  transdenominational  evangelicalism  and  fundamen- 
talism in  America  from  the  eighteenth  century  to  the  present.  Marsden 

293.  Religious  Issues  in  American  History.  A  reading  seminar  devoted  to  selected 
topics,  problems  and  issues  in  American  religion.  Richey  or  Marsden 

295.  Religion  in  the  American  South.  A  study  of  the  interrelationships  of  southern 
religion  and  southern  culture.  Marsden 

342.  American  Religious  Biography.  A  study  of  the  leading  biographers  of  Ameri- 
can religious  figures  and  of  the  qualities  of  a  successful  biography.  T.  Campbell 

397.  Issues  in  American  Theology.  A  critical  appraisal  of  major  tendencies.  Staff 

HISTORY  OF  RELIGIONS 

180.  Introduction  to  Asian  Religions.  Preliminary  consideration  of  problems  and 
methods  in  the  study  of  religious  traditions,  followed  by  a  survey  of  the  historical  develop- 
ment, beliefs,  practices,  and  contemporary  significance  of  the  Islamic  religion  and  the 
religions  of  India,  China,  and  Japan.  Staff  (Department  of  Religion) 

See  other  courses  offered  in  the  Department  of  Religion. 

III.  Theological  Studies 

CHRISTIAN  THEOLOGY 

32.  Christian  Theology.  The  course  aims  at  furthering  the  active  appropriation  of  the 
Christian  faith  in  the  context  of  the  contemporary  church  and  in  engagement  with  the 
world  of  today.  It  treats  principally  the  themes  of  the  classic  creeds  or  the  traditional  topics 
of  dogmatics.  It  also  introduces  students  to  the  epistemological  issues  of  revelation,  faith, 
authority,  interpretation,  and  social  location.  Staff 

102.  Science  and  Biblical  Theism.  Implications  of  scientific  knowledge  in  relation 
to  biblical  understandings  of  creation,  revelation,  and  providence.  Staff 

105.  A  Theological  Introduction  to  Roman  Catholicism.  An  exploration  of  fundamen- 
tal themes  of  Roman  Catholic  history,  theology,  liturgy  and  spirituality,  with  special  at- 
tention to  the  mass.  Berger 

108.  Major  Types  of  Protestant  Theology.  A  survey  of  Protestant  theology  from  the 
reformers  to  Karl  Barth.  (For  juniors  only.)  Herzog  or  Langford 

110.  This  Life  and  the  Age  to  Come.  Christian  eschatology  and  the  meaning  of  his- 
tory in  the  light  of  God's  triumph  over  sin,  suffering,  and  death.  Staff 

112.  The  Doctrine  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  An  examination  of  pneumatology  under  sys- 
tematic categories  which  include:  creation,  Old  Testament,  prophecy,  the  life  and  ministry 
of  Christ,  the  Church,  salvation,  the  canon,  the  sacraments,  and  eschatology.  Turner 

118.  Theological  Controversies  from  Schleiermacher  to  Barth.  Examination  of  ma- 
jor figures  and  theological  issues  of  nineteenth-century  Protestant  theology.  Attention 
to  the  relation  of  faith  and  culture,  the  role  of  experience  in  theological  reflection,  reli- 
gion as  illusion,  the  Jesus  of  history  and  the  Christ  of  faith.  Fulkerson 

III.  Theological  Studies    93 


119.  Prayer  and  Contemplation.  Herzog 

124.  Issues  in  the  Wesleyan  Theological  Tradition.  A  study  of  selected  historical  and 
constructive  themes.  Specification  of  topics  will  be  made  at  each  time  of  offering.  Longford 

134.  Theology  of  Pentecostalism.  An  exploration  of  this  tradition  with  examination 
of  its  distinctive  emphases  and  interpretations  of  Christian  faith.  Turner 

133.  The  Task  of  the  Theologian.  An  introduction  to  the  nature  and  task  of  theology 
as  part  of  the  life  of  the  church.  Berger 

139.  Women,  Theology  and  the  Church.  Fulkerson 

149.  Images  of  the  Church.  Selected  theologies  of  the  nature  of  the  church  from  the 
reformation  to  present.  Fulkerson 

200.  The  Person  and  Work  of  Christ.  The  problem  of  knowledge  of  Christ  and  for- 
mulation of  a  doctrine  of  His  work  and  person  in  the  light  of  biblical  eschatology.  Staff 

210.  Contemporary  British  Theology.  Selected  problems  in  representative  British  the- 
ological writings  after  1900.  Langford 

211.  Authority  in  Theology.  The  idea  and  function  of  authority  in  theology.  Langford 
or  Fulkerson 

214.  Feminist  Theology.  Examination  of  feminist  theologians  and  religionists,  their 
critical  perspective  on  the  Christian  tradition  and  constructive  proposals  out  of  the 
resources  of  "female  experience."  Fulkerson 

215.  The  Nature  and  Mission  of  the  Church.  Christian  understanding  of  the 
Church— biblical,  historical,  contemporary— with  a  view  toward  ecumenical  doctrinal 
construction.  Herzog 

216.  Kierkegaard  Studies.  Critical  examination  of  selected  works.  Staff 

217.  Church  and  Sacraments.  The  basic  teachings  on  church  and  sacraments,  bibli- 
cal, historical,  contemporary.  Herzog 

220.  Theological  Explorations.  A  seminar  on  contemporary  theological  issues,  con- 
tent to  be  designated  by  the  theological  division.  Staff 

222.  Contemporary  Pneumatologies.  An  exploration  of  the  doctrine  of  the  Holy  Spirit 
in  relation  to  modern  trends  in  theology  with  special  emphasis  on  those  cases  where  there 
is  an  accompanying  social  movement.  Turner 

225.  The  Christian  Understanding  of  Human  Nature  and  Destiny.  Representative 
historical  and  recent  theological  interpretations  of  human  nature,  predicament,  deliver- 
ance, and  possibility.  Staff 

229.  Tragedy  and  Christian  Faith.  An  analytical  and  constructive  philosophical  in- 
terpretation of  the  fundamental  tragic  dimension  of  human  life  in  the  light  of  a  Christian 
theological  understanding.  Staff 

249.  The  Lord's  Prayer.  By  studying  historic  and  contemporary  expositions  of  the 
Lord's  Prayer,  this  course  provides  an  introduction  not  only  to  the  doctrines  of  God,  hu- 
manity, prayer,  and  the  kingdom,  but  also  to  the  variety  of  the  Christian  spiritual  tradi- 
tion in  time  and  space.  Wainzvright 

256.  John  Wesley  in  Controversial  and  Ecumenical  Theology.  A  study  of  John  Wes- 
ley and  his  theology  both  in  his  engagements  with  other  confessional  traditions,  and  in 
his  views  on  such  matters  as  church,  ministry,  sacraments,  and  authority.  Consideration 
will  also  be  given  to  these  topics  in  relation  to  contemporary  theology,  especially  "Faith 
and  Order."  Wainwright 

94    Courses  of  Instruction 


259.  Icon  Theology.  A  study  of  theological  controversies  surrounding  the  use  of  im- 
ages in  Christian  worship,  followed  by  an  attempt  to  perceive  the  symbolic  conventions 
and  doctrinal  content  of  some  Eastern,  Western,  and  contemporary  icons.  Wainwright 

272.  Theology  of  Paul  Tillich.  An  examination  of  Tillich's  philosophical  theology.  Staff 

279.  Understandings  of  the  Resurrection  in  Contemporary  Theology.  A  study  of  re- 
cent literature  on  the  resurrection  of  Jesus  Christ  from  the  angles  of  exegesis,  historical 
criticism,  hermeneutics,  and  systematic  significance.  Wainwright 

299.  Theology  and  Contemporary  Secular  Understandings  of  Human  Nature.  Critical 
theological  examination  of  selected  current  interpretations  of  human  nature  and  the  hu- 
man situation.  Langford 

300.  Systematic  Theology.  Method  and  structure  of  systematic  theology,  the  doctrine 
of  God,  theological  anthropology,  and  Christology.  Prerequisite:  CT  32  or  equivalent.  Her- 
zog  or  Langford 

303.  Philosophical  Method  in  Religious  Studies.  European  hermeneutic  (Gadamer) 
and  American  process  philosophy  (Whitehead  and  Hartshorne)  as  applied  to  Christian 
theology.  Herzog 

320.  Theology,  Power,  and  Justice.  Critical  examination  of  a  major  theme  of  modern 
thought  in  Schleiermacher,  Hegel,  Marx,  and  Tillich.  Herzog 

322.  Nineteenth-Century  European  Theology.  Protestant  theology  from  Kant  to  Herr- 
mann. Herzog 

325.  Philosophical  Theology  I.  Selected  readings  from  Plato  and  Aristotle  which 
helped  to  shape  philosophical  theology  from  Origen  through  Augustine  and  Aquinas. 
Herzog 

326.  Philosophical  Theology  II .  Main  problems  of  philosophical  theology  in  the  mod- 
ern period.  Staff 

328.  Twentieth-Century  European  Theology.  Critical  examination  of  the  thought  of 
selected  Protestant  theologians  from  1900  to  1950.  Prerequisite:  CT  32.  Herzog 

329.  Readings  in  Theology  and  Language.  Sample  treatments  of  religious  language 
in  linguistic  analysis,  hermeneutical  theory,  literary  criticism,  liturgical  practice,  and  fun- 
damental theology.  Wainwright 

330.  Contemporary  Christologies.  A  seminar  dealing  with  contemporary  Roman 
Catholic  and  Protestant  Christology.  Readings  and  discussion  will  focus  on  theological 
proposals  from  major  contemporary  figures.  Wainwright 

331.  Eschatology.  A  study  of  issues  in  individual,  communal,  and  universal  escha- 
tology  against  the  background  of  twentieth-century  scholarly  work  in  the  kingdom  of  God. 
Wainwright 

332.  System  in  Theology.  An  examination  of  the  various  factors  that  go  into  the  shap- 
ing of  a  systematic  theology,  followed  by  a  study  of  several  recent  and  contemporary  ex- 
amples of  the  genre.  Wainwright 

333.  Systematic  Theology:  The  Doctrine  of  the  Trinity.  Biblical  bases,  patristic  de- 
velopments, contemporary  statements  and  connections.  Wainwright 

352.  Seminar  in  Christian  Theology.  Research  and  discussion  of  a  selected  problem 
in  the  systematic  field.  Staff 

111.  Theological  Studies    95 


CHRISTIAN  ETHICS 

33.  Christian  Ethics.  The  course  tackles  theological  and  conceptual  issues  that  deal 
with  the  ways  in  which  Christian  moral  discourse  is  generated  in  the  life  of  the  Church, 
in  order  that  students  may  gain  a  sense  of  basic  methodological  alternatives  in  Christian 
traditions.  It  introduces  students  to  such  matters  as  the  Church's  relationship  to  the  world, 
casuistry  of  various  kinds,  character  formation,  a  moral  psychology  necessary  for  the  de- 
velopment of  Christian  virtue,  the  place  and  function  of  scripture,  and  how  Christians 
understand  social  responsibility.  Staff 

107.  The  Biblical  Bases  of  Christian  Ethics.  Examination  of  major  themes  and  moral 
teachings,  principally  in  the  Decalogue,  the  Gospels,  and  the  Epistles,  with  application 
to  some  contemporary  issues.  Prerequisite:  OT  11,  NT  18,  or  equivalent.  H.  Smith 

112.  Technology  and  Christian  Ethics.  The  impact  of  the  technological  revolution 
upon  American  culture,  and  a  normative  Christian  response.  Staff 

113.  Contemporary  Issues  in  Christian  Morals.  Constructive  examination  of  select- 
ed areas  of  public  and  private  morality.  Staff 

130.  Dying  and  Death.  Critical  consideration  of  biblical,  legal,  medical,  and  ethical 
perspectives.  Prerequisites:  OT  11,  NT  18,  or  equivalents.  Bailey,  H.  Smith,  and  others 

136.  Perspectives  on  Food  and  Hunger.  An  interdisciplinary  symposium  on  nation- 
al and  world  hunger  and  malnutrition,  including  (whenever  possible)  student  involve- 
ment in  local  hunger-related  agencies.  Staff 

194.  The  Protestant  Church  and  American  Culture.  Analysis  from  the  perspective 
of  Christian  ethics  of  current  problems  in  the  interpretation  of  church  and  culture  with 
explicit  reference  to  the  parish  setting.  H.  Smith 

205.  War  in  the  Christian  Tradition.  An  analysis  of  how  Christians  have  understood 
and  evaluated  war.  Particular  attention  to  the  question  of  whether  war  should  not  be 
regarded  as  a  positive  moral  good.  Works  by  Augustine,  Aquinas,  Bainton,  Ramsey,  Chil- 
dress, Niebuhr,  and  Johnson  will  be  considered.  Hauenoas 

213.  Christian  Ethics  in  America.  Hauenvas 

215.  Seminar  in  Theological  Ethics.  Seminar  that  concentrates  on  readings  in  Aris- 
totle, Aquinas,  Kant,  and  Barth.  Hauenvas 

220.  Ethical  Explorations.  A  seminar  on  contemporary  ethical  issues,  the  specific  con- 
tent in  any  given  semester  to  be  designated  by  the  Theological  Division.  Staff 

230.  Moral  and  Value  Education.  A  critical,  theological  investigation  of  Durkheim, 
Dewey,  Simon,  Kohlberg,  Bull,  Rokeach,  and  implications  for  education  in  church  and 
society.  Prerequisites:  CHE  33  and  CED  105.  H.  Smith  and  Westerhoff 

242.  Human  Sexuality.  Examination  of  biological,  biblical,  cultural,  and  other  aspects 
of  human  sexuality,  together  with  analytical  and  constructive  interpretation.  Permission 
of  instructor  required.  H.  Smith 

244.  Interdisciplinary  Seminar  in  Medical-Legal-Ethical  Issues.  A  seminar  com- 
posed of  students  and  faculty  from  the  Medical,  Law,  and  Divinity  Schools  for  critical  con- 
sideration of  selected  pertinent  issues  of  mutual  professional  interest.  Prerequisite:  per- 
mission of  instructor.  H.  Smith  and  others 

245.  Ethics  in  World  Religions.  Moral  foundations,  assumptions,  and  applications 
in  such  historic  faiths  as  Hinduism,  Buddhism,  Confucianism,  and  Islam,  in  the  light  of 
Christian  ethical  perspectives.  Staff 

96    Courses  of  Instruction 


262.  Marxist  Ideology  and  Christian  Faith.  Comparative  examination  of  Communist 
and  Christian  doctrines  such  as  man,  society,  sin,  history  and  eschatology,  together  with 
an  introduction  to  the  contemporary  dialogue.  Staff 

266.  Ethics  and  Health  Care.  Critical  examination  of  philosophical  and  theological 
bases  of  medical  practice,  and  analysis  of  selected  aspects  of  biomedical  technologies,  with 
particular  attention  to  informing  ethical  assumptions.  H.  Smith 

268.  Revelation  and  Authority  in  the  Church.  A  critical  and  constructive  examina- 
tion of  contemporary  concepts,  exploring  such  questions  as  "Is  the  Church's  memory  au- 
tonomous or  constituted  and  directed  by  what  it  remembers?  How  does  ecclesiology 
shape  epistemology,  and  vice-versa?  Does  the  word  of  the  Church  also  become  the  mis- 
sion of  the  Church?  Is  the  word  of  God  constitutive  of  human  community?"  H.  Smith 

290.  Current  Problems  in  Christian  Social  Ethics.  A  critical  study  of  secularization, 
the  technological  revolution,  and  the  ecological  crisis.  Staff 

291.  Historical  Forms  of  Protestant  Ethics.  A  survey  of  major  types  of  Protestant  ethical 
theory  from  Luther  through  contemporary  figures.  Staff 

292.  Happiness,  the  Life  of  Virtue,  and  Friendship.  An  investigation  of  the  inter- 
relation of  these  themes  in  selected  authors.  An  examination  of  whether  the  loss  of  the 
interrelation  of  these  themes  accounts  for  some  of  the  problems  of  modern  philosophi- 
cal and  theological  ethics.  Hauerwas 

294.  Christianity  and  the  State.  "Civil  religion"  in  its  historic  development  and  con- 
temporary expressions  in  America.  Christian  ethical  premises  of  democratic  political  the- 
ory and  practice.  The  relationships  of  church  and  state.  Staff 

383.  Moral  Theology  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  Critical  and  comparative  examina- 
tion of  ethical  theory  as  exhibited  in  the  work  of  selected  contemporary  theologians. 
H.  Smith 

387.  Ethical  Method.  Selected  methodological  issues  in  contemporary  theological 
ethics.  H.  Smith 

389.  Christian  Ethics  and  Contemporary  Culture.  A  study  of  the  interaction  between 
Christian  thought  and  current  secular  social  theory.  Staff 

BLACK  CHURCH  STUDIES 

100.  Introduction  to  Black  Theology.  An  examination  of  the  historical  roots  of  black 
theology  with  special  attention  to  the  treatments  of  traditional  themes  and  problems  in 
theology  by  black  theologians  and  their  rationale  for  the  black  theological  enterprise. 
Turner 

124.  The  Black  Church  in  America.  A  consideration  of  the  historical  and  theological 
development  of  the  separate  black  Christian  denominations  in  America  with  attention 
to  some  of  the  major  leaders,  black  worship,  and  black  preaching.  Turner 

126.  Black  Religion  and  Social  Conflicts  in  America.  An  examination  of  some  of  the 
reactions  of  black  religious  groups  to  the  limits  placed  upon  black  people  in  American 
life,  efforts  made  to  break  down  racial  barriers  in  society,  and  attempts  to  institutionalize 
black  responses  to  such  barriers.  Turner 

128.  The  Life  and  Thought  of  Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.  An  examination  of  the  life  of 
Martin  Luther  King,  Jr.,  as  a  minister  and  leader  of  the  civil  rights  movement.  Staff 

144.  Selected  Topics  in  Black  Church  History.  An  exploration  of  pivotal  events,  key 
issues,  and  persons  in  the  development  of  the  black  church  in  America.  Prerequisite:  BCS 
124  or  permission  of  the  instructor.  Staff 

111.  Theological  Studies    97 


Carol  M.  Noren,  Assistant  Professor  of  Homiletics 


98    Courses  of  Instruction 


WORLD  CHRISTIANITY  AND  ECUMENICS 

124.  The  Christian  World  Mission.  A  study  of  theological  foundations,  guiding  prin- 
ciples, and  contemporary  problems  of  the  world  Christian  community.  Staff 

129.  Ecumenical  Visions  of  the  Church  in  the  Twentieth  Century.  A  study  of  some 
of  the  major  theologies  of  the  Church  in  our  century,  as  they  emerged  together  with  the 
growth  of  the  ecumenical  movement.  The  course  will  focus  on  how  specific  ecclesiolo- 
gies  treat  the  question  of  the  unity  of  the  Church(es)  in  the  light  of  ecumenical  hopes, 
proposals  for  unity  and  practical  endeavors.  Berger 

133.  The  Expansion  of  Christianity.  A  survey  of  the  spread  of  Christianity  and  the 
growth  of  the  worldwide  Church  with  special  emphasis  on  nineteenth-  and  twentieth- 
century  Protestantism  in  the  non-Western  world.  Staff 

135.  Contemporary  Issues  in  the  World  Church.  Analysis  of  political,  social,  cultur- 
al, and  religious  conditions  in  a  selected  area  of  the  world,  and  of  theological-ethical  in- 
sights and  perspectives  within  the  indigenous  Christian  community.  Staff 

156.  The  Ecumenical  Movement.  Its  contemporary  development,  structures,  activi- 
ties, and  problems,  against  the  background  of  Church  unity  and  disunity.  Staff 

263.  Third  World  Theology.  An  examination  of  selected  theological  writings  from 
Asia,  Africa,  and  Latin  America,  comparing  their  perspectives  and  their  unique  contri- 
butions with  contemporary  Christian  thought.  Staff 

386.  Christianity  in  Dialogue  with  Other  Faiths.  Contemporary  currents  of  Chris- 
tian thought  as  they  relate  to  resurgent  non-Christian  religions  and  involve  new  formu- 
lations of  a  theology  of  mission.  Staff 

IV.  Ministerial  Studies 

THE  CHURCH'S  MINISTRY 

10.  A  general  and  integrated  introduction  to  critical  reflection  on  the  history,  theolo- 
gy, and  practice  of  ordained  ministry  in  Christian  communities.  Required  of  entering 
M.Div.  students.  Staff 

100.  A  sequel  course,  accenting  the  practice  of  ministry,  to  be  taken  after  a  M .  Div.  stu- 
dent has  completed  fifteen  courses.  Staff 

THE  CARE  OF  THE  PARISH 

50.  Church  and  Community.  The  structure  and  dynamic  factors  shaping  the  present- 
day  community  together  with  their  import  for  the  work  of  the  Church.  Wilson 

128.  Ministerial  Leadership  and  Participative  Skills.  A  study  of  the  pastor's  role  as 
participant-facilitator  with  attention  to  organizational  theory  and  facilitative  skills  em- 
ploying the  group  workshop  method  of  learning.  Staff 

129.  The  Pastor  as  Consultant  to  Church  Organizations.  A  consideration  of  the  pas- 
tor's role  as  organizational  consultant  with  special  emphasis  on  data  gathering,  diagno- 
sis, and  intervention  using  experiential  learning  designs.  Staff 

130.  Planning  and  Directing  the  Church's  Program.  Principles  of  planning,  organiz- 
ing, staffing,  directing,  and  evaluating  the  program  of  the  local  church.  Staff 

142.  Women  and  Ministry.  Theological  and  practical  issues  related  to  women  and 

ministry.  Staff 

147.  The  Pastoral  Responsibility  for  Administration.  A  consideration  of  the  major 
responsibilities  of  the  pastor  in  the  administration  of  the  local  church.  Staff 

IV.  Ministerial  Studies    99 


148.  Christian  Stewardship  and  Church  Finance.  A  seminar  to  consider  the  princi- 
ples of  stewardship,  education,  budget-making,  enlistment  in  church  support  and  church 
financial  management  in  theological  perspective.  Staff 

151.  The  Town  and  Country  Church.  The  small  church,  the  circuit  church,  circuit  ad- 
ministration, larger  parish  and  group  ministry,  and  the  town  and  country  movement. 
Wilson 

152.  Evangelism  as  a  Pastoral  Concern.  A  study  of  the  nature,  purposes,  and  methods 
of  contemporary  Christian  evangelism  with  special  attention  to  the  local  church.  Staff 

154.  The  Urban  Church.  The  function,  nature,  program,  and  administration  of  the 
effective  city  church  and  of  the  urban  minister's  distinctive  task.  Wilson 

155.  Church  Polity. 

155B.  The  Baptist  Churches 

155C.  The  United  Church  of  Christ 

155D.  The  Presbyterian  Churches 

155E.  The  Christian  Church  (Disciples  of  Christ) 

155F.  The  Episcopal  Church 

157.  The  Church  and  Social  Change.  A  sociological  study  of  the  relationship  of  the 
Church  to  the  process  of  social  change,  including  the  role  of  the  Church  as  innovator,  the 
Church  as  participant  in  social  movements,  method(s)  of  accomplishing  change,  and  the 
religious  leader  as  an  agent  of  social  change.  Wilson 

158.  Contemporary  Religious  Sects.  The  nature,  ideology,  development,  clientele, 
and  role  of  contemporary  religious  sects;  the  process  by  which  such  sects  develop  into 
established  organizations;  and  their  relationship  to  the  mainline  churches.  Wilson 

159.  Early  Methodism:  History,  Theology,  and  Polity.  A  study  of  the  character  and 
development  of  Methodism,  beginning  with  John  Wesley  and  tracing  important  features 
of  this  tradition  through  the  nineteenth  century.  D.  Campbell,  Goodson,  and  Wilson 

160.  Twentieth-Century  Methodism:  History,  Theology,  and  Polity.  The  development 
of  the  United  Methodist  Church,  focusing  on  theological  diversity  and  patterns  of  or- 
ganizational life,  with  major  concentration  on  the  polity  of  this  church  as  provided  by  the 
current  Discipline.  D.  Campbell,  Goodson,  and  Wilson 

189.  The  Multiple  Staff  Ministry.  Group  work,  leadership,  and  organizational  the- 
ories as  applied  to  staff  ministries  in  large  church  and  cooperative  parish  settings.  Staff 

200.  Church  Research.  Methods  of  research  and  survey  for  the  gathering,  analysis, 
and  interpretation  of  church  and  community  data,  together  with  preparation  and  use  of 
denominational  statistics.  Wilson 

220.  Seminar  in  Contemporary  Ministries.  A  seminar  in  patterns  and  issues  of  con- 
temporary ministries,  content  to  be  designated  by  the  Ministerial  Division.  Staff 

CHRISTIAN  EDUCATION 

22.  The  Spiritual  Life.  An  introduction  to  spirituality,  spiritual  formation,  and  the 
development  of  a  personal  spiritual  discipline.  Westerhoff 

25.  Education  as  a  Pastoral  Ministry.  An  introduction  to  Christian  formation,  edu- 
cation, and  instruction  within  the  life  of  a  worshipping  faith  community  Westerhoff 

102.  Christian  Education  and  the  Small  Membership  Church.  An  overview  of  the 
educational  ministry  of  churches  with  small  memberships  including  goal  setting, 
program-format,  leadership  development,  selection  of  curriculum  resources, 
organization-design,  and  evaluation  methodology.  Staff 

100     Courses  of  Instruction 


109.  Ministries  with  Youth.  An  experimental  approach  to  inventing  strategies  for 
church  educational  ministries  with  junior  highs,  senior  highs,  and  older  youth.  Atten- 
tion will  be  given  to  teaching  methods,  curriculum  resources,  confirmation,  and  various 
teaching  settings.  Staff 

110.  Educational  Ministries  with  Adults  and  Families.  An  introductory  course  to  the 
educational  ministry  of  the  church  with  adults  and  families.  Guidance  and  resources  to- 
ward the  development  of  comprehensive  programing.  Attention  will  be  given  to  adult 
ages  and  stages  and  family  life  cycles.  Staff 

112.  Educational  Ministries  with  Children  and  Youth.  An  introductory  course  to  the 
educational  ministry  of  the  Church  with  children  and  youth .  It  will  consider  foundations, 
religious  development  theories,  goal-setting,  teaching-learning,  curricula,  and  leader- 
ship education.  Staff 

132.  Curriculum,  Teaching,  and  Learning  in  Christian  Education.  An  introductory 
survey  of  teaching-learning  theory,  principles  and  practices,  curriculum  designs  and 
resources,  from  a  local  church  perspective.  Staff 

153.  Education  and  Social  Issues.  An  exploration  of  contemporary  social  issues  and 
their  relationship  to  education  and  to  the  Church.  Staff 

185.  The  Arts  and  the  Church.  An  exploration  of  the  intuitive  way  of  knowing  and 
the  place  of  the  imagination  in  Christian  faith  and  life  with  special  attention  to  the  use 
of  the  arts  in  the  Church,  in  Christian  education,  and  in  worship.  Westerhoff 

190.  The  Church's  Teaching  Office.  An  applied  course  in  the  teaching/  learning  proc- 
ess, along  with  models,  strategies,  and  methods  for  teaching  adults,  including  instruc- 
tional preaching.  Westerhoff 

220.  Colloquium  in  Religious  Education.  Staff 

233.  Pastoral  Spirituality.  An  introduction  to  spiritual  direction,  the  spirituality  of 
healing  and  reconciliation,  and  spiritual  formation.  Prerequisites:  CED  22  and  permis- 
sion of  the  instructor.  Westerhoff 

250.  M.R.E.  Senior  Symposium.  This  course  will  deal  with  the  theory  and  practice 
of  educational  leadership  in  the  Church  and  will  include  the  following:  Field  Education 
seminar,  professional  competence  evaluation,  and  comprehensive  examination.  Westerhoff 

269.  Major  Issues  in  Christian  Education.  Critical  examination  of  selected  theologi- 
cal and  historical  issues  in  Christian  education.  Staff 

PASTORAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

64.  Pastoral  Counseling  in  a  Parish  Setting.  The  local  church  as  the  setting  for  pas- 
toral counseling.  Lectures,  group  supervision,  and  student  verbatim  materials  will  be  uti- 
lized. Prerequisite:  currently  placed  in  a  field  setting  or  permission  of  instructor.  Mickey 

77.  Pastoral  Care  in  the  General  Hospital  Setting.  An  examination  through  intensive 
individual  and  group  supervision,  of  the  student's  pastoral  ministry  to  the  ill,  the  dying, 
and  the  bereaved  in  the  general  hospital  setting.  (Not  recommended  for  those  planning 
totakePP181orl82.)Sfa/f 

171.  Pastoral  Counseling.  Consideration  of  the  structures  and  processes  of  pastoral 
counseling;  pastoral  evaluation,  referral,  intake  contract,  goals,  transference,  termina- 
tion, and  other  special  problems.  Prerequisite:  permission  of  instructor.  Staff 

172.  Premarital  Counseling.  Pastoral  care  in  marriage  and  family  life  with  special  em- 
phasis on  premarital  guidance  within  the  context  of  the  local  church's  program  of  family 
life  education.  Staff 

IV.  Ministerial  Studies      101 


173.  Psychotherapy  and  Sanctification.  An  analysis  of  structuring  and  growth 
processes  in  psychotherapy  in  the  light  of  a  Christian  understanding  of  sanctification. 
Mickey 

174.  Theology  and  Personality  Processes.  Theological  and  psychological  understand- 
ings of  basic  human  experiences;  explorations  of  the  dynamics  and  values  of  religious 
practices,  developmental  concerns,  self  awareness.  Mickey 

175.  Special  Practicum  Projects.  For  advanced  students  who  want  additional  clini- 
cal experience  under  supervision  in  a  pastoral  care  setting  (inner-city;  alcoholic  rehabili- 
tation; counseling;  etc.).  Staff 

176.  Pastoral  Care  and  Persons  in  Institutions. 

176B.  Lectures  by  staff  and  ward  visits  at  the  Murdoch  Center  for  the  Mentally 
Retarded  and  the  facilities  in  the  Butner,  North  Carolina,  complex  (state  hospital,  alco- 
holic rehabilitation,  training  school).  Staff 

176C.  Lectures  by  staff  and  ward  visits  at  the  Central  Prison  in  Raleigh  and  relat- 
ed correctional  facilities.  Staff 

176D.  The  Church's  ministry  to  the  elderly  and  home  bound  explored  through 
lectures,  case  conferences,  and  visits  to  the  elderly  and  homebound  parishioners  of  lo- 
cal Durham  churches.  Staff 

178.  Power  and  Restraint  in  the  Parish .  Exploring  the  nature  of  power  and  leadership 
in  developing  skills  for  local  church  ministry,  utilizing  theological,  psychological,  socio- 
logical insights.  Verbatim  materials.  Mickei/ 

180.  Pastoral  Care  and  Women.  Lecture-discussions  by  staff  and  visiting  profession- 
als to  aid  in  developing  skill  in  the  pastoral  care  of  women.  Issues  addressed:  moral  de- 
velopment, sexual  dynamics,  dual  career  families,  child  and  spouse  abuse,  women  in 
leadership  positions.  Mickei/ 

181-A,  B.  Basic  Clinical  Pastoral  Education,  Extended.  A  semester  long  unit  of  CPE 
in  the  fall  semester  and  a  semester  long  unit  of  CPE  in  the  spring  semester.  The  program 
is  accredited  by  ACPE  and  is  conducted  at  Duke  Hospital.  The  maximum  credit  is  two 
course  credits.  Staff 

182-A,  B,C.  Basic  Clinical  Pastoral  Education.  Units  of  Basic  CPE  offered  in  the  sum- 
mer, fall,  and  spring  in  programs  accredited  by  ACPE.  (Two  course  units  each,  maximum 
credit.)  Staff 

183.  Pastoral  Care:  Individual  and  Community.  A  seminar  examining  the  practice 
of  pastoral  care.  Focus  on  assessment  and  intervention  by  the  counseling  pastor  in  criti- 
cal human  situations.  Meador 

271 .  Marriage  and  Family.  The  psychody namics  of  marital  conflict  and  family  prob- 
lems; principles  and  procedures  in  marriage  and  family  counseling.  (For  seniors  and 
Th.M.  candidates.)  Staff 

273.  Seminar  in  Pastoral  Theology:  Theological  Dimensions  of  Pastoral  Counsel- 
ing. Research  and  discussion  of  issues  of  developmental  psychology  and  spiritual  growth . 
Mickey 

275.  Individual  Study  in  Pastoral  Psychology.  Selected  readings  in  major  issues  in 
pastoral  psychology  issuing  in  a  research  or  honors  paper.  Staff 

278.  Psychological  Theories  of  Personality.  A  systematic  presentation  of  leading  per- 
sonality theories,  with  reference  to  developmental  processes  (motivation,  cognition, 
learning,  etc.)  and  their  implications  for  Christian  ministry.  Mickei/ 


102     Courses  of  Instruction 


281-A,B,C.  Advanced  Clinical  Pastoral  Education  in  Pastoral  Care  and  Counseling. 

Pastoral  care  with  inpatients  and  pastoral  counseling  of  individuals,  couples,  families, 
and  groups  in  a  pastoral  counseling  center.  (Two  course  units  each.)  Staff 

PREACHING 

20.  Communication  Lab.  A  workshop  on  principles  of  speech  and  effective  oral  com- 
munication, making  extensive  use  of  audio-visual  resources  and  private  conferences.  To 
be  taken  concurrently  with  PR  30.  Staff 

30.  Theology  and  Practice  of  Preaching.  The  development  of  a  theology  of  preach- 
ing and  methods  of  sermon  construction,  including  preaching  in  class,  critique,  private 
conference,  and  local  church  evaluation.  Prerequisite:  OT 11  or  NT  18  or  permission  of 
instructor.  Lischer  and  Noren 

161.  Preaching  and  the  Church  Year.  Preaching  the  lectionary  texts  in  the  context  of 
the  Church's  worship  and  calendar.  The  appropriate  cycle  of  the  lectionary  will  be  fol- 
lowed. In-class  preaching  and  evaluation.  Prerequisite:  PR  30  Lischer  and  Noren 

162.  The  Rhetoric  of  Preaching.  Preaching  and  the  art  of  language.  A  survey  of  rhe- 
torical theories,  forms,  and  techniques  in  service  to  the  Gospel.  In-class  exercises,  preach- 
ing and  evaluation.  Prerequisite:  PR  30.  Lischer 

164.  Proclaiming  the  Parables.  Approaches  to  the  interpretation  and  proclamation 
of  the  parables  of  Jesus.  Readings  in  nonbiblical  narrative  and  parable.  In-class  storytel- 
ling and  preaching.  Prerequisite  PR  30.  Lischer 

165.  Preaching  as  Public  Address.  A  workshop  on  preaching  and  worship  leader- 
ship organized  around  the  principles  of  speech  and  effective  communication.  Extensive 
use  of  audio-visual  recordings  and  private  conferences.  Prerequisite:  30.  Staff 

180.  From  Text  to  Sermon.  Preaching  from  Biblical  sources.  Emphases  upon  the  goal 
and  methodology  of  exegesis,  the  hermeneutic  problem,  and  verbal  communication  in 
the  present.  Prerequisite:  PR  30.  Staff 

182.  Preaching  Practicum.  An  advanced  laboratory  course  for  extra  competence  in 
the  preparation,  delivery,  and  evaluation  of  sermons.  Prerequisite:  PR  30.  Lischer  and  Noren 

183.  Preaching  in  the  Black  Community.  A  study  of  the  style  and  content  of  black 
preaching  with  attention  to  the  unique  roles  of  black  preachers  in  society.  An  analysis  of 
the  essential  characteristic  of  preaching  in  the  black  church.  Prerequisite:  PR  30.  Turner 

184.  Preaching  in  the  Wesleyan  Theological  Tradition.  A  study  of  selected  major 
themes  in  Wesleyan  theology  and  their  interpretation  in  contemporary  preaching.  Prereq- 
uisite: PR  30.  Noren 

186.  Twentieth-Century  Preaching.  A  study  of  contemporary  preaching  based  on 
printed,  recorded,  audio-  and  video-taped  sermons  of  leading  homileticians  of  our  age. 
Prerequisite:  PR  30.  Noren 

189.  Preaching  in  Context.  Prerequisite:  PR  30.  Turner 

196.  Preaching  in  the  Parish.  A  consideration  of  preaching  in  relationship  to  pastor- 
al duties  and  the  total  task  of  ministry  with  attention  to  week-by-week  preaching  in  the 
parish  setting.  Some  attention  will  be  given  to  funerals  and  crisis  situations.  Prerequi- 
site: PR  30.  Staff 

280.  History  of  Preaching.  A  study  of  theological  trends  and  significant  personali- 
ties in  homiletics  in  various  periods  from  the  Apostolic  Age  to  the  present.  Prerequisite: 
PR  30.  Noren 


IV.  Ministerial  Studies     103 


281.  Advanced  Sermon  Analysis  Seminar.  A  critical  study,  on  the  basis  of  selected 
sermons  and  student  presentations,  of  principal  and  practical  problems  facing  the  con- 
temporary preacher.  Prerequisite:  PR  30.  Lischer or Noren 

282.  Women  and  the  Word.  An  examination  of  theological,  social,  historical,  and  com- 
munication issues  pertaining  to  women  and  preaching.  Sermons,  video-tapes  and  oth- 
er resources  will  be  used  in  analvzing  the  styles  and  content  of  preaching  by  women 
representing  various  traditions  and  historical  periods.  Prerequisite:  PR  30.  Noren 

283.  Theories  of  Preaching.  Significant  theories  of  preaching  from  Augustine  to  the 
present.  Seminar  presentations  and  in-class  preaching  and  valuation.  Prerequisite:  PR 
30  or  permission  of  instructor.  Lischer 

WORSHIP  AND  CHURCH  MUSIC 

123.  Baptism,  Confirmation,  and  Renewal.  Biblical,  historical,  and  theological  per- 
spectives on  the  sacrament  of  Christian  initiation.  Issues  related  to  the  catechumenate, 
baptismal  practice,  confirmation,  and  rites  of  renewal  will  be  examined  with  reference 
to  the  reform  of  the  liturgy.  Staff 

141.  The  Church  Year.  An  historical  and  practical  studv  of  the  church  year  and  lec- 
tionary  with  major  attention  to  the  ecumenical  and  United  Methodist  calendar.  Staff 

153.  The  Leadership  of  Worship.  A  practicum  utilizing  a  laboratory  setting  devoted 
to  the  development  of  styles  of  liturgical  leadership  appropriate  to  pastoral  ministry.  Staff 

162.  Hymnody.  A  survey  of  hymns,  various  hymn  types  and  styles,  and  issues  in  hym- 
nody  designed  for  persons  in  or  preparing  for  Christian  ministry.  Includes  an  introduc- 
tion to  the  fundamentals  of  hymnology.  Arcus 

167.  Baptism  and  the  Lord's  Supper.  Studv  of  these  sacraments  with  attention  giv- 
en to  major  representative  traditions  and  to  varieties  of  present  observance  and  practice. 
Staff 

168.  Worship  in  the  Wesleyan  Tradition.  The  history,  development,  and  current  trends 
in  United  Methodist  worship  along  with  practical  experience  and  concerns  related  to  wor- 
ship leadership  in  United  Methodist  churches.  Staff 

178.  Christian  Worship.  A  survey  of  the  history  of  Christian  corporate  worship.  Ex- 
amination of  the  major  biblical,  historical,  and  theological  developments  in  worship  from 
Old  Testament  times  to  the  present.  Readings  in  liturgical  thought  through  the  ages  with 
comparative  study  of  selected  liturgical  traditions.  Staff 

180.  Church  Music.  A  two-fold  study  including:  (1)  a  survey  of  the  great  monuments 
of  church  music;  (2)  musicianship,  song-leading,  and  basic  conducting  with  an  empha- 
sis upon  the  selection  and  use  of  hymns  and  other  music  from  the  Methodist  Hymnal  in 
public  worship.  Staff 

203.  Directed  Reading  in  Church  Music.  An  advanced  course  offering  students  the 
opportunity  to  explore  an  area  of  church  music  of  special  interest  to  them,  culminating 
in  a  major  paper  and/or  public  presentation.  Includes  compilation  of  bibliography  for  the 
study  of  church  music.  Enrollment  limit:  ten.  Prerequisite:  consent  of  instructor.  Arcus 

220.  Selected  Topics.  Staff 

250.  Advanced  Seminar  in  Liturgical  Studies.  Reading  and  research  in  a  selected  area 
of  liturgical  study  to  be  announced.  Staff 

251 .  Studies  in  Spirituality.  A  consideration  of  different  dimensions  of  the  spiritual 
life.  Staff 


104     Courses  of  Instruction 


SPIRITUALITY 

See  the  respective  division  listings  for  course  descriptions. 
OT  163.  Biblical  Prayer.  Crenshaw. 
CH  125.  The  Evangelical  Heritage.  T.  Campbell. 
CT  112.  The  Doctrine  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  Turner. 
CT  119.  Prayer  and  Contemplation.  Herzog. 
CT  249.  The  Lord's  Prayer.  Wainwright. 
CED  22.  The  Spiritual  Life.  Westerhoff. 
CED  233.  Spiritual  Direction.  Westerhoff. 
CW251.  Studies  in  Spirituality.  Staff. 

V.  Clinical  Training  and  Internships 

CLINICAL  TRAINING  IN  PASTORAL  PSYCHOLOGY 

Students  may  earn  up  to  two  course  credits  for  a  quarter  or  unit  of  clinical  pastoral 
education  in  programs  accredited  by  the  Association  for  Clinical  Pastoral  Education 
(ACPE). 

Students  involved  in  clinical  training  under  the  direct  supervision  of  members  of  the 
pastoral  psychology  staff  during  the  academic  year  should  register  for  credit  under  PP 
182  for  two  course  units  unless  a  course  credit  has  already  been  received  for  PP  77,  in  which 
case  only  one  rather  than  two  credits  will  be  granted  for  the  CPE  quarter.  Students  should 
apply  for  such  training  through  the  Director  of  Clinical  Pastoral  Education. 

Students  involved  in  clinical  training  in  summer  CPE  quarters  should  register  with 
ACPE  and  the  Associate  Dean  for  Academic  Programs  as  soon  as  accepted  for  training 
by  a  chaplain  supervisor.  Upon  the  receipt  of  a  supervisor's  report  at  the  end  of  the  train- 
ing period  the  student  will  receive  two  course  units  of  transfer  credit. 

INTERNSHIPS 

In  consultation  with  the  associate  dean  for  field  education  and  the  associate  dean  for 
academic  programs,  an  individually  designed  internship  may  be  developed  in  a  partic- 
ular ministerial  vocational  area  of  interest.  Under  certain  circumstances  it  may  be  possi- 
ble to  earn  one  unit  of  field  education  and  two  course  credits  through  such  internships. 
Such  programs  must  be  formulated  and  recorded  in  advance  in  the  offices  of  both  field 
education  and  curricular  affairs. 

125-126.  Special  Ministry  Internship.  When  a  student  needs  to  develop  profession- 
al competencies  in  a  highly  specialized  form  of  ministry,  the  associate  dean  for  field  edu- 
cation will  assist  in  designing  an  appropriate  learning  contract  and  in  negotiating  for  a 
suitable  placement  setting,  provided  the  arrangements  meet  the  basic  criteria  approved 
by  the  Field  Education  Committee. 

131-132.  Ministry  through  Social  Agency  Internship.  A  twelve-month  placement  in 
a  regular  personnel  position  in  a  social  service  agency  to  meet  the  job  description  of  the 
agency  and  to  develop  a  personal  mode  and  style  of  ministry  in  a  secular  setting  through 
understanding,  appreciation,  involvement  in,  and  critical  theological  reflection  upon  en- 
vironment, structures,  values,  and  decision-making  processes  as  conveyed  by  the  con- 
duct of  the  agency. 

137-138.  Parish  Ministry  Internship.  A  twelve-month  placement,  individually 
designed  to  engage  the  student  in  specified  learnings  in  a  wide  variety  of  ministry  func- 

V.  Clinical  Training  and  Internships     105 


tions  in  a  local  parish,  under  qualified  supervision  and  using  the  guidelines  of  a  learn- 
ing contract. 

143-144.  Campus  Ministry  Internship.  A  nine-  to  twelve-month  placement  in  ap- 
proved locations  designed  to  provide  special  learnings  in  delivering  a  ministry  to  college 
students  under  qualified  guidance  and  utilizing  a  learning  contract  which  specifies  semi- 
nars, a  personal  journal,  directed  reading,  and  consultations  to  develop  competency  in 
these  functions. 

175-176.  Clinical  Pastoral  Education  Internship.  A  twelve-month  placement  in  a  clin- 
ical program  accredited  by  the  Association  for  Clinical  Pastoral  Education  (ACPE). 

197-198.  Mission  Internship.  A  special  internship  to  prepare  for  service  in  church  mis- 
sions may  be  arranged  by  enlisting  in  the  national  or  overseas  program  of  the  United  Meth- 
odist Board  of  Global  Ministries  for  one  to  three  years.  As  a  requirement  for  agency  plan- 
ning, applications  should  be  initiated  in  the  fall  of  the  middler  year.  Other  denominational 
and/or  work-study  experiences  abroad  may  be  given  field  education  credit  by  special 
rrangement  with  the  associate  dean  for  field  education. 

Department  of  Religion — Graduate  Courses 

The  following  courses  are  offered  periodically  in  the  Graduate  Department  of  Reli- 
gion by  Department  of  Religion  faculty  and  may  be  taken  by  Divinity  students  with  per- 
mission of  the  instructor. 

217.  Islam  in  India 

219.  Augustine 

221.  Reading  in  Hebrew  Biblical  Commentaries 

230.  The  Meaning  of  Religious  Language 

231.  Seminar  in  Christianity  and  Contemporary  Thought 
233.  Modern  Narrative  and  Religious  Language 

243.  The  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Biblical  Times 

244.  The  Archaeology  of  Palestine  in  Hellenistic-Roman  Times 
248.  The  Theology  of  Karl  Barth 

252.  Nineteenth-  and  Twentieth-Century  Roman  Catholic  Theology 

254.  Introduction  to  African  Religions 

255.  Seminar  in  African  Religions 
258.  Coptic 

264.  The  Sociology  of  the  Black  Church 

265.  The  Religions  of  the  West  Africa  Diaspora 

280.  The  History  of  Religions 

281.  Phenomenology  and  Religion 
284.  The  Religion  and  History  of  Islam 

301.  Seminar  in  Contemporary  Christian  Ethics 

302.  Studies  in  Intertestamental  Literature 
304.  Aramaic 

304A.  Targumic  Aramaic 

306.  Language  and  Literature  of  the  Dead  Sea  Scrolls 

310.  Readings  in  Judaica 

323.  A-B.  Comparative  Semitic  I-II 

324.  Readings  in  the  History  of  Religion 

360.  Special  Problems  in  Religion  and  Culture 
370.  Seminar  in  Religion  and  Literature 
380.  Existentialist  Thought 


106     Courses  of  Instruction 


Department  of  Religion— Graduate  Courses     107 


Appendix 

GUIDELINES  FOR  INCLUSIVE  LANGUAGE 
Duke  Divinity  School 

.  .  .  the  decadence  of  our  language  is  probably  curable.  Those  who  deny  this 
would  argue,  if  they  produced  an  argument  at  all,  that  language  merely  reflects 
existing  social  conditions,  and  that  we  cannot  influence  its  development  by  any 
direct  tinkering  with  words  and  constructions.  So  far  as  the  general  tone  or  spirit 
of  language  goes,  this  may  be  true,  but  it  is  not  true  in  detail .  Silly  words  and  ex- 
pressions have  often  disappeared,  not  through  any  evolutionary  process  but  ow- 
ing to  the  conscious  action  of  a  minority. 

George  Orwell 

Politics  of  the  English  Language 

The  necessity  for  change  is  the  parent  of  tradition.  If  we  want  a  change  in  our  lan- 
guage to  come,  we  must  first  facilitate  that  change  through  concerted  action.  Our  language 
is  determined  both  by  who  we  are  as  individuals  and  communities  and  who  we  want  to 
become. 

The  affirmation  of  the  integrity  of  people  with  various  opinions  and  interpretations 
on  the  issue  of  language  is  assumed.  It  is  recognized,  however,  that  exclusive  language 
can  work  unwitting  and  unintended  harm  by  distorting  reality  and  excluding  members 
from  our  community.  Therefore,  all  members  of  this  Duke  Divinity  School  community 
(students,  faculty,  administrators,  and  staff)  are  invited  to  join  together  in  using  language 
which  most  adequately  reflects  the  unity  of  the  people  of  God  and  the  reality  of  God. 

LANGUAGE  ABOUT  PERSONS 

I.  Generic  Usage 

Although  "man"  originally  carried  the  meaning  of  both  "human  beings"  and  "adult 
males,"  such  can  no  longer  be  assumed.  Even  though  technically  "man"  is  inclusive,  its 
actual  use  is  often  exclusive. 

A .  Use  precise  language.  When  in  the  past  you  would  have  been  inclined  to  use  the 
generic  term  "man,"  find  creative  ways  to  use  such  words  as  "humankind,  hu- 
mans, persons,  everyone,  men  and  women,  children  of  God,  etc." 

B.  Use  words  that  do  not  include  "man"  when  referring  to  occupations  and  posi- 
tions that  can  include  both  males  and  females.  Alternative  descriptions  can  of- 
ten be  found  which  are  not  awkward  compounds: 

(instead  of)  (try) 

Clergyperson  Clergy 

Chairperson  Chair 

Congressperson  Representative 

Policeman  Police  Officer 

Fireman  Fire  Fighter 

Chairperson  Moderator,  Presiding  Officer,  Convenor 

108     Appendix 


II.  Pronoun  Usage 

Pronoun  usage  which  avoids  gender  specific  categories  is  an  effective  way  to  include 
all  members  of  society  or  a  given  community  in  general  references.  While  English  gram- 
mars generally  maintain  that  the  nonspecific  individual  be  referred  to  as  "he,"  such  a  refer- 
ence is  not  inclusive.  One  should  attempt  to  make  all  pronoun  references  inclusive. 

A .  When  speaking  in  general  terms  or  when  referring  to  both  women  and  men,  use 
pronouns  so  as  to  make  explicit  that  both  men  and  women  are  included.  This 
may  be  accomplished  by  using  such  methods  as  "he  and  she,"  "hers  and  his," 
or  combinations  such  as  "he/she,"  "s/he,"  and  "his/hers." 

B.  Other  approaches  to  the  pronoun  issue  include: 

1 .  Use  writing  that  reduces  unnecessary  or  excessive  gender  specific  pronouns : 
"The  average  American  drives  his  car  to  work"  can  become  "The  average 
American  drives  to  work." 

2.  Rephrase  statements  into  the  plural:  "Most  Americans  drive  their  cars  to 
work." 

3.  When  speaking  in  generic  terms  or  when  including  women  and  men  in  the 
same  group,  some  guides  suggest  alternating  female  and  male  pronouns: 
"A  person  should  take  good  care  of  her  car.  He  should  check  the  oil  level  daily- 
She  should  also  make  sure  that  the  tires  are  properly  inflated." 

4.  The  indefinite  use  of  the  second  person  pronoun  you  to  refer  to  people  in 
general  is  a  widespread  conversational  device.  You  must  realize,  however, 
that  the  use  of  the  second  person  in  writing  creates  an  intimate  relationship 
between  the  writer  and  the  reader.  For  this  reason,  when  you  use  the  sec- 
ond person,  be  sure  that  the  person  or  persons  to  whom  the  argument  is 
directed  is  clearly  identified. 

5.  Masculine  pronouns  can  be  replaced  by  the  impersonal  pronoun  one  and 
this  is  still  preferred  in  formal  usage.  However,  one  should  use  this  form 
sparingly. 

III.  Forms  of  Address 

Traditionally  there  has  been  little  need  for  particular  ways  to  refer  to  individual  women 
or  married  individuals  with  different  titles.  Women  did  not  have  titles  other  than  "Miss" 
or  "Mrs.,"  and  it  was  assumed  that  their  identity  derived  from  their  marital  status.  That 
assumption  is  no  longer  valid,  and  forms  of  address  should  recognize  that  identity  which 
women  have  as  individuals. 

A.  In  referring  to  an  individual  woman  there  is  no  need  to  refer  to  her  marital  status, 
just  as  traditional  references  to  men  give  no  indication  of  their  marital  status.  Ex- 
amples: 

1.  Ms.  Lorna  Stafford 

2.  The  Reverend  Ms.  Louise  Lind 

3.  The  Reverend  Mr.  Louis  Lind 

4.  Dr.  Jennifer  Jones 

B.  Different  titles  should  be  recognized  when  addressing  married  couples.  Ex- 
amples: 

1.  Clergy  woman  married  to  a  layperson:  The  Reverend  Ms.  Sally  Jones  and 
Mr.  Gerald  Jones 


Appendix     109 


2.  Clergy  couples:  The  Reverends  Ms.  Sallv  Smith  and  Mr.  Gerald  Jones;  The 
Reverends  M/M  Sally  and  Gerald  Jones 

3.  Other  titles:  Professor  Louise  Lind  and  Dr.  Jonathan  Smith;  Drs.  Cynthia 
and  Jackson  Whittaker 

C.  While  the  use  of  individual  names  is  assumed  when  married  people  have  differ- 
ent titles,  this  is  desirable  for  others  as  well.  Instead  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Steve  Jack- 
son, try: 

1.  Steve  and  Lorna  Jackson 

2.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Steve  and  Lorna  Jackson 

3.  M/M  Steve  Jackson  and  Lorna  Stafford 

D.  Titles  can  be  eliminated  altogether,  but  in  formal  usage  this  practice  is  generally 
not  preferred. 

IV.   References  to  Collective  and  Abstract  Nouns 

Social  institutions  (e.g.,  Church),  concepts  (e.g.,  evil),  or  inanimate  objects  (e.g.,  a 
ship)  do  not  have  gender.  Referring  to  them  as  female  or  male  encourages  stereotyping 
groups  of  people  with  the  qualities  specific  to  that  institution,  concept,  or  object. 

A.  Pronouns  that  refer  to  collective  and  abstract  nouns  should  be  neuter,  except  in 
direct  quotations. 

1 .  Direct  quotation :  "And  I  saw  the  holy  city,  new  Jerusalem,  coming  down  out 
of  heaven  from  God,  prepared  as  a  bride  adorned  for  her  husband.  ..." 
(Rev.  21:2). 

2.  Modern  usage:  The  Church  is  described  as  the  new  Jerusalem.  It  is  adorned 
for  the  worship  of  God,  and  its  relationship  with  God  is  seen  as  a  gift  from 
God. 

B.  Direct  quotations  can  often  be  made  inclusive  through  the  use  of  brackets:  "A 
person  must  make  his  [or  her]  own  way  in  this  broken  world." 

LANGUAGE  ABOUT  GOD 

While  these  guidelines  are  designed  mainly  for  use  in  terms  of  language  about  peo- 
ple, care  and  attention  should  be  given  also  to  language  about  God  in  writing,  speaking, 
and  in  worship.  Language  about  God  should  articulate  the  variety  and  richness  of  God's 
manifestations  to  humankind.  It  should  also  respect  the  deeply  personal  nature  of  God 
as  expressed  through  the  Trinity.  These  suggestions  are  offered  as  a  beginning  point  from 
which  one  can  develop  androgynous  language  about  God. 

A.  The  exclusive  use  of  either  masculine  or  feminine  pronouns  for  God  should  be 
avoided. 

B.  Metaphors  showing  God's  personal  relationship  with  humans  should  be  used, 
but  need  not  be  personalized  with  "he"  or  "she." 

C .  A  variety  of  sex-specific  metaphors  can  be  used :  "God  is  the  father  who  welcomes 
his  son  home,  but  she  is  also  the  woman  who  searches  for  the  lost  coin." 

Imagination,  patience,  and  diligence  are  required  in  order  to  use  language  which  ex- 
pands and  enriches  our  understanding  of  God. 


110     Appendix 


JUDICIAL  PROCEDURES 

Duke  Divinity  School 

Adopted  January  1987,  The  Divinity  School  Community: 

"Duke  University  expects  and  will  require  of  all  its  students  continuing  loyal  cooper- 
ation in  developing  and  maintaining  high  standards  of  scholarship  and  conduct.  .  .  .Any 
student,  in  accepting  admission,  indicates  willingness  to  subscribe  to  and  be  governed 
by  these  rules  and  regulations  and  acknowledges  the  right  of  the  university  to  take  such 
disciplinary  action,  including  suspension  and/or  expulsion,  as  may  be  deemed  appropri- 
ate, for  failure  to  abide  by  such  rules  and  regulations  or  for  conduct  adjudged  unsatis- 
factory or  detrimental  to  the  university." 

[The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University  :The  Divinity  School:  "Admissions-Conduct  of  Students"] 
The  judicial  system  hereinafter  described  is  constituted  for  the  Divinity  School  Com- 
munity as  required  by  the  Judicial  System  of  Duke  University  and  the  university's  rubric 
on  Student  Life.  It  conforms  to  and  functions  within  those  larger  structures.  [Reference 
will  be  made  in  this  document  to  the  most  readily  available  specification  of  university  rules, 
The  Bulletin  of  Duke  University:  "Information  and  Regulations"  which  may  be  consulted  in 
the  office  of  either  associate  dean  or  in  the  Divinity  School  Library  and  obtained  through 
the  Office  of  Student  Life  of  Trinity  College.  See  sections  on  "Student  Life"  and  Appen- 
dix entitled  "The  Judicial  System  of  Duke  University."] 

The  Divinity  School  Judicial  Board 

The  Divinity  School  Judicial  Board  [hereinafter  simply  "the  board"]  is  composed  of 
the  two  associate  deans  and  five  students  (one  of  whom  shall  be  designated  an  alternate) 
and  three  faculty  or  staff  members  (one  of  whom  shall  be  designated  an  alternate) .  They 
shall  be  chosen  respectively  by  the  Student  Representative  Assembly  and  the  Divinity 
School  faculty  through  the  normal  procedures  for  constituting  committees.  The  board 
is  constituted  at  the  opening  of  school  in  the  fall;  members  serve  until  the  opening  of  the 
next  school  year  or  until  replaced  by  their  respective  governing  bodies.  At  its  first  meet- 
ing, the  board  shall  elect  a  chair  from  among  its  appointed  and  regular  membership. 

A.  Hearing  Alternatives. 

Students  accused  of  violating  university  regulations  or  academic  expectations 
may  elect  either  (1)  an  informal  hearing  in  which  the  accused  student  and  the  accus- 
ing student,  faculty  member  or  staff  member  appear  before  the  appropriate  associ- 
ate dean  [see  below]  and  the  student's  faculty  adviser;  (2)  a  formal  hearing  before  the 
board  according  to  procedures  outlined  below.  (If  the  severity  of  the  offence  dictates 
or  if  procedural  difficulties  loom,  the  chair  and  associate  dean  may  determine  that 
a  formal  hearing  is  required  or  that  higher  university  boards  or  civil  courts  must  have 
jurisdiction.)  (3)  Under  either  option,  the  person  accused  may  be  advised  by  a  per- 
son from  within  the  Divinity  School  Community.  The  adviser  may  attend  but  may 
not  speak  during  the  hearing  and  will  be  excused  during  deliberation  over  verdict 
and  sanctions. 

B.  Jurisdiction. 

Matters  concerning  academic  offences— cheating,  plagiarism,  theft  of  papers,  li- 
brary misconduct— shall  be  heard,  formally  or  informally,  by  the  associate  dean  for 
academic  programs.  Offences  concerning  student  life,  the  university  community,  field 
education,  or  professional  ethics  shall  be  heard,  formally  or  informally,  by  the  associ- 
ate dean  for  student  life  and  field  education. 

C.  Offences. 

Among  the  academic  offences  deemed  unacceptable  at  Duke  University  are 
plagiarism— the  submission  of  work  as  one's  own  which  contains  unacknowledged 
or  improperly  acknowledged  words  or  ideas  of  another— submission  of  papers  in 
more  than  one  course  without  the  explicit  permission  of  the  instructors  concerned, 

Appendix     111 


the  purchase  or  theft  of  papers,  cheating  and  abuse  of  the  library.  Student  life  offences 
include  abuse  of  university  property,  theft,  falsification  of  financial  aid  applications, 
use  of  illegal  substances  and  physical,  mental  or  sexual  harassment.  For  detailed 
specification  and  illustration  of  student  life  offences  see  the  aforementioned  Bulle- 
tin: Information  and  Regulations  under  "Student  Life"  and  "University  Regulations  and 
Policies." 

The  same  volume  treats  academic  offences  in  the  section  entitled  "Academic  Hon- 
esty." Students  are  advised  to  purchase  at  the  Duke  University  Bookstore  the  Com- 
position Guide .  .  .  Duke  University  by  Ronald  R.  Butters  which  provides  detailed  gui- 
dance on  correct  procedure  and  clear  illustrations  of  impermissable  practice. 

D.  Duties  of  the  Associate  Deans. 

The  associate  deans  shall  be  responsible  for  hearing  complaints,  conducting  in- 
vestigations, gathering  evidence,  determining  probable  cause,  establishing  wheth- 
er the  Divinity  School  Board  has  jurisdiction,  specifying  the  charge,  informing  the 
accused  of  his/her  rights,  indicating  the  hearing  options,  impaneling  the  board  in  the 
event  of  a  formal  hearing,  preparing  the  case,  setting  the  date  for  a  hearing,  produc- 
ing witnesses  and  imposing  any  sanctions  or  penalties. 

E.  Formal  Hearings. 

(1)  If  the  student  elects  (or  the  associate  dean  specifies)  a  formal  hearing,  the  associ- 
ate dean  with  jurisdiction  shall  convene  the  board  at  the  earliest  possible  point. 

(2)  A  faculty  or  student  member  shall  disqualify  himself /herself  if  he/she  is  other- 
wise involved  in  the  case  and  the  student  charged  may  challenge  the  seating  of 
a  faculty  or  student  member  of  the  board  (stating  in  writing  the  reasons  for  so 
doing) .  The  chair  (or  in  the  event  of  a  challenge  to  the  chair,  the  associate  dean) 
shall  accept  or  reject  the  challenge.  In  the  event  of  a  disqualification  of  a  mem- 
ber, the  appropriate  alternate  shall  be  seated. 

(3)  Hearings  shall  be  closed.  Formal  hearings  shall  be  recorded  and  the  recording 
retained  for  a  period  of  three  years. 

F.  Hearing  Procedures. 

( 1 )  The  rights  of  the  accused  and  the  hearing  procedures  outlined  in  sections  I.  "Role 
of  Accused,"  and  J,  "Hearing  Procedure,"  in  the  "Judicial  System  of  Duke  Univer- 
sity," Appendix  of  Bulletin:  Information  and  Regulations  shall  guide  the  associate 
dean  and  the  adviser  or  the  board  in  the  conduct  of  a  hearing  (e.g.  judgments 
of  expulsion  or  suspension  require  concurrence  of  four  of  the  five  voting  board 
members). 

(2)  The  board  (or  associate  dean  and  faculty  adviser)  may  impose  the  sanctions  speci- 
fied in  the  same  Appendix  singly  or  in  combination  (e.g.  expulsion,  suspension, 
probation,  warning,  fine,  recommendation  of  counseling,  etc.). 

G.  A  person  convicted  may  appeal  his/her  case  to  the  Dean  by  providing  written  notice 
of  that  intention  within  48  hours  and  a  written  statement  of  the  grounds  within  7  days 
of  the  receipt  of  the  verdict.  Grounds  for  appeal  include  new  and  significant  evidence 
which  might  alter  the  case  or  violation  of  due  process. 


112     Appendix 


ENROLLMENT  SUMMARY  1988-89 
Divinity  School  Students,  total  392 


316 

M.Div. 

(210  men,  107  women) 

15 

M.R.E. 

(3  men,  13  women) 

19 

Th.M. 

(15  men,  4  women) 

15 

Special 

Students 

(12  men,  3  women) 

26 

M.T.S. 

(16  men,  10  women) 

Graduate  Division  of  Religious  Studies,  total  80 

80 

Ph.D. 

Total  471 

GEOGRAPHICAL  DISTRIBUTION  1988-89 

Alabama  7  Nebraska 

Arizona  1  Nevada 

Arkansas  1  New  Jersey 

California  2  New  Mexico 

Colorado  1  New  York 

Connecticut  2  North  Carolina 

Florida  17  Ohio 

Georgia  7  Oregon 

Idaho  1  Pennsylvania 

Illinois  6  South  Carolina 

Indiana  2  South  Dakota 

Iowa  1  Tennessee 

Kansas  2  Texas 

Kentucky  4  Virginia 

Louisiana  2  West  Virginia 

Maine  1  Foreign: 

Maryland  1  Bermuda 

Massachusetts  2                Guyana 

Michigan  1                 Korea 

Minnesota  2                Liberia 

Mississippi  5                Scotland 

Missouri  5                West  Africa 

Montana  2                West  Germany 


1 
1 
2 
3 
5 
188 

12 
1 

14 

12 
1 
8 
7 

44 
6 

1 
2 
2 
1 
1 
1 
2 


Denominations  Represented  1988-89 

African  Methodist  Episcopal 4 

African  Methodist  Episcopal  Zion 2 

American  Baptist  Churches,  USA  5 

Baptist 5 

Christian  Church  (Disciples  of  Christ) 2 

Christian  Methodist  Episcopal 3 

Church  of  Christ 1 

Church  of  God 1 

Church  of  God  (Cleveland,  TN) 2 

Church  of  God  in  Christ 2 

Church  of  the  Brethren 2 

Episcopal   17 

Evangelical  Lutheran 1 

Evangelical  Lutheran  Church  in  America 2 

Evangelisch-Lutherisch 1 

Guyana  Missionary  Baptist  Church 1 

Mennonite  Church 1 


Moravian  Church  in  America 2 

National  Baptist 1 

National  Baptist  Convention  of  America 1 

Nondenominational 4 

Presbyterian 1 

Presbyterian  Church  in  the  USA 19 

Presbyterian  Church  of  America 1 

Progressive  National  Baptist  Convention 1 

Roman  Catholic 3 

Southern  Baptist 12 

Southern  Methodist 1 

Unitarian  Universalist   1 

United  Church  of  Christ 7 

United  Holy  Church  of  America 1 

United  Methodist  276 

Wesleyan 1 

Unaffiliated   1 


Colleges  Represented 

Agnes  Scott  College 
Albright  College 
Allegheny  College 
Alliance  College 
American  Baptist  Seminary 


1  Appalachian  State  University 

1  Arizona  State  University 

1  Atlantic  Christian 

2  Auburn  University 
1  Augustana  College 


Appendix     113 


Averett  College  3 

Baldwin-Wallace  College  2 

Bartlesville  Wesleyan  1 

Baylor  University  1 

Berry  College  1 

Bethune-Cookman  College  1 

Birmingham-Southern  3 

Bluefield  State  College  4 

Boston  University  2 

Brevard  College  1 

Bucknell  University  1 

California  University  of  Pennsylvania  1 

California  Polytechnic  State  University  1 

Campbell  University  3 

Canisius  College  2 

Carnegie-Mellon  University  2 

Carson-Newman  College  2 

Case-Western  Reserve  University  1 

Central  Methodist  College  1 

Central  Wesleyan  College  1 

Centre  College  2 

Clarion  University  1 

Clemson  University  2 

Cleveland  State  University  1 

College  of  New  Rochelle  1 

College  of  William  &  Mary  1 

College  of  St.  Rose  1 

Columbia  College  2 

Concordia  College  1 

Cornell  University  1 

C.W.  Post  College  1 

Detroit  Institute  of  Technology  1 

Dickinson  College  2 

Duke  University  6 

Earlham  College  1 

East  Carolina  University  3 

East  Coast  Bible  College  1 

East  Tennessee  State  University  1 

Eastern  Mennonite  College  1 

Eastern  Michigan  University  1 

Edinboro  University  of  Pennsylvania  2 

Eisenhower  College  1 

Elizabeth  City  State  College  1 

Elon  College  2 

Emerson  College  1 

Emory  and  Henry  College  5 

Emory  University  1 

Empire  State  College  1 

Ewha  Women's  University  1 

Fayetteville  State  University  3 

Ferrum  College  3 

Florida  A  &  M  University  1 

Florida  Atlantic  University  1 

Florida  Southern  College  6 

Francis  Marion  College  1 

Gardner-Webb  College  3 

George  Mason  University  2 

Georgia  Southern  College  3 

Goddard  College  1 

Gordon  College  2 

Greensboro  College  3 

Grove  City  College  2 

Guilford  College  2 

Hampden-Sydnev  College  1 

Hampton  University  1 

Harvard  University  1 

Hendrix  College  3 


High  Point  College 
Hobart-William  Smith 
Hofstra  University 
Houghton  College 
Indiana  University 
Iowa  State  University 
Jacksonville  State  University 
James  Madison  University 
Jarvis  Christian  College 
Johnson  Bible  College 
Johnson  College  Smith  University 
Kansas  Wesleyan 
Kearney  State  College 
Kookmin  University 
Korea  University 
Kutztown  University 
Lebanon  Valley  College 
LeMoyne  College 

Lenoir-Rhyne  College  2 

Livingstone  College  2 

Longwood  College  3 

Lubbock  Christian  College  1 

Lynchburg  College  2 

Malone  College  2 

Manchester  College  1 

Marquette  University  2 

Mars  Hill  College  4 

McKendree  College  1 

McMurry  College  1 

MCV/VCU  1 

Meredith  College  1 

Methodist  College  7 

Miami  University  1 

Michigan  State  University  1 

Middle  Tennessee  State  University  1 

Mississippi  State  University  1 

Morehead  State  University  1 

Morehouse  College  1 

MTSU  1 

Nicholls  State  University  1 

North  Carolina  A&T  State  University  1 

North  Carolina  State  University  5 

North  Carolina  Wesleyan  University  5 

North  Carolina  Central  2 

North  Park  College  1 

Oakland  University  2 

Ohio  Northern  University  1 

Ohio  State  University  1 

Ohio  University  1 

Ohio  Wesleyan  University  1 

Old  Dominion  University  2 

Oral  Roberts  University  2 

Otterbein  College  1 

Park  College  1 

Pembroke  State  University  4 

Pfeiffer  College  8 

Piedmont  Bible  College  1 

Purdue  University  1 

Radford  University  1 

Randolph-Macon  College  1 

Rice  University  2 

Roanoke  Bible  College  1 

Rochester  Institute  of  Technology  1 

Southern  Illinois  University  1 

Sangamon  State  University  1 

Shaw  University  2 

Simpson  College  2 


114     Appendix 


Sioux  Falls  College 

Smith  College 

Southern  Illinois  University 

Southern  Methodist  University 

St.  Andrews  Presbyterian 

St.  Augustine's  College 

St.  Mary  of  the  Plain 

St.  Olaf  College 

State  University  of  New  York 

Stetson  University 

SUNY  at  Geneseo 

Sweet  Briar  College 

Tennessee  Technological  University 

Tennessee  Wesleyan  College 

Texas  A&M  University 

Texas  College 

Texas  Tech  University 

Texas  Wesleyan  College 

Thiel  College 

Trinity  University 

Tusculum  College 

Union  College 

University  of  Alabama 

University  of  Arizona 

University  of  California-Davis 

University  of  California-Los  Angeles 

University  of  Central  Florida 

University  of  Colorado 

University  of  Delaware 

University  of  Erlangen 

University  of  Florida 

University  of  Georgia 

University  of  Idaho 

University  of  Illinois 

University  of  Indianapolis 

University  of  Kentucky 

University  of  Maryland 

University  of  Massachusetts 


1 

University  of  Mississippi 

2 

2 

University  of  Missouri 

1 

2 

University  of  Montana 

1 

1 

University  of  New  York 

1 

1 

UNC-Ash'eville 

1 

1 

UNC-Chapel  Hill 

19 

1 

UNC-Charlotte 

6 

1 

UNC-Greensboro 

3 

1 

UNC-Wilmington 

3 

3 

University  of  South  Carolina 

3 

1 

University  of  Southern  Florida 

2 

1 

University  of  Southern  Mississippi 

2 

1 

University  of  Tennessee 

4 

2 

University  of  Texas 

1 

1 

University  of  Texas-Austin 

3 

1 

University  of  the  South 

1 

1 

University  of  Virginia 

3 

2 

University  of  Wyoming 

1 

1 

Vanderbilt  University 

1 

1 

Vasser  College 

1 

1 

Virginia  Commonwealth  College 

1 

1 

Virginia  Polytechnic  Institute 

1 

1 

Virginia  State  University 

2 

1 

Virginia  Wesleyan  College 

3 

1 

West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College 

8 

1 

Wabash  College 

1 

2 

Wake  Forest  University 

7 

1 

Western  Carolina  University 

4 

1 

Western  Michigan  University 

1 

1 

Western  Virginia  University 

1 

2 

Wheaton  College 

1 

3 

William  and  Mary 

2 

1 

William  Jewell  College 

1 

3 

Wilson  Technical  College 

1 

1 

Wingate  College 

1 

1 

Winston-Salem  State  College 

3 

2 

Wittenberg  University 

2 

1 

Wofford  College 

1 

Colleges  Represented — Graduate  Degrees 

Asbury  Theological  Seminary  2 

Ashland  Theological  Seminary  2 

Boise  State  University  1 

California  Polytechnic  State  University  1 

Candler  School  of  Theology  1 

Church  of  God  School  of  Theology  1 

Denver  Conservative  Baptist  Seminary  1 

Duke  Divinity  School  10 

Duke  University  2 

East  Carolina  University  1 

East  New  Mexico  University  1 

East  Tennessee  State  University  1 

Emerson  College  1 

Florida  Southern  College  2 

Florida  State  University  I 

Fuller  Theological  Seminary  1 

Glasgow  University  1 

Gordon-Conwell  Theological  1 

Hollins  College  1 

Kearney  State  College  1 

Lutheran  Theological  Southern  Seminary  1 

Manchester  College  1 

Mennonite  Biblical  Seminary  1 

Michigan  State  University  1 


Mississippi  College 

Moravian  Theological  Seminary 

North  Carolina  Central  University 

North  Carolina  State  University 

Presbyterian  School  of  Christian  Education 

Purdue  University 

Roosevelt  University 

Southeastern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary 

Southern  Illinois  University 

St.  Thomas  University 

Texas  Wesleyan  College 

Tulane  University 

University  of  Arizona 

University  of  Bonn 

University  of  Colorado 

University  of  Illinois 

University  Of  Kansas 

UNC-Chapel  Hill 

UNC-Charlotte 

UNC-Greensboro 

Union  Theological  Seminary 

University  of  Pittsburgh 

University  of  South  Carolina 

University  of  Southern  California 


Appendix  115 


Colleges  Represented— Graduate  Degrees  (Continued) 

University  of  Virginia  1  Western  Carolina  University  1 

University  of  West  Florida  1  Winthrop  College  1 

Virginia  State  University  1  Wright  State  University  1 

Wake  Forest  University  3  Yale  Divinity  School  1 

Walter  F.  George  School  1 

Candidates  for  the  Master  of  Divinity  Degree 

Adams,  Thomas  J.,  (B.B.A.,  University  of  Kentucky),  Somerset,  Kentucky 
Aist,  Rodney  L.,  (B.A.,  Southern  Methodist  University),  Jonesboro,  Arkansas 
Allen,  Pamela  K.,  (B.A.,  Trinity  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Allen,  Patricia  A.,  (B.S.,  Iowa  State  University),  Randleman,  North  Carolina 
Aydlett,  Wilbur  C,  (B.A.,  UNC-Wilmington),  Butner,  North  Carolina 

Babb,  Mechthild  S.,  (B.A.,  University  of  South  Carolina-Columbia),  Myrtle  Beach,  South  Carolina 
Bachmann,  AnneT,  (A.S.,  Lasell  Jr.  College;  B.S.,  Florida  Southern  College),  Hillsborough,  North  Carolina 
Bailey,  James  E.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Wilmington),  Stem,  North  Carolina 
Bailey,  Keith  A.,  (B.A.,  Tenessee  Wesleyan  College),  Etowah,  Tenessee 
Baker,  Jonathan  B.,  (B.A.,  Vanderbilt  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Barnes,  Harry  M.,  (A.A.S.,  Wilson  Technological  College;  B.A.,  Shaw  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Barnett,  Edward  S.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Tennessee),  Salem,  Virginia 
Battern,  Alisa  K.,  (B.A.,  Simpson  College),  Eldon,  Missouri 
Beam,  David  W.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Concord,  North  Carolina 
Belcher,  Carl  D,  (B.S.,  Bluefield  State  College),  Burlington,  North  Carolina 
Bell,  Daniel  M.,  (B.A.,  Stetson  University),  Miami,  Florida 

Bennett,  Jonathan  L.,  (B.S.,  Eastern  Mennonite  College),  Rockbridge  Baths,  Virginia 

Benson,  Ann  G.,  (B.A.,  Goddard  College;  M.S.,  Southern  Illinois  University),  Washington,  North  Carolina 
Best,  Bobby  R.,  (B.S.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Bird,  Marianne  M.,  (B.S.,  Michigan  State  University;  M.A.L.S.,  Hollins  College),  Roanoke,  Virginia 
Birkner,  Charles  M.,  (B.A.,  High  Point  College),  Walkerton,  North  Carolina 
Bishop,  Jerry  L.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Maryland),  Round  Hill,  Virginia 
Blanchard,  Paul  E.,  (B.S.,  M.S.Ed.,  Kearney  State  College),  Kearney,  Nebraska 
Blanksma,  Daryl  M.,  (B.M.,  University  of  Idaho;  B.M.,  Boise  State  University),  Nampa,  Idaho 
Boayue,  Charles  S.  G.,  Jr.,(B.S.,  Bethune-Cookman  College;  M.B.A.,  Horida  Southern  College).  Monrovia,  Liberia 
Boggs,  Kerry  D.,  (B.S.,  Ferrum  College),  Warfield,  Virginia 
Bonney,  David  J.,  (B.A.,  Old  Dominion  University),  Norfolk,  Virginia 
Bradford,  Spencer  W.,  (B.A.,  Stetson  University),  Deland,  Florida 

Bravender,  PaulE.,  (B.S.,  Western  Michigan  University;  M.M.,  Roosevelt  University ;  Ph.D.,  Michigan  State  Univer- 
sity), Gibsonville,  North  Carolina 
Briggs,  Lynda  T,  (B.S.W.,  Mars  Hill  College),  Asheville,  North  Carolina 

Brock,  A.  C,  (B.Ma.,  University  of  Mississippi),  M.Ed.,  Mississippi  College),  Greensboro,  North  Carolina 
Brookshire,  Jeffrey  A.,  (B.A.,  Purdue  University),  Reynolds,  Indiana 
Broom,  Thomas  C,  (B.S.,  Park  College),  El  Paso,  Texas 

Brower,  Daniel  R..  (B.S.,  Appalachian  State  University),  Trinity,  North  Carolina 
Brown,  Aaron  A.,  (B.A.,  Hendrix  College),  Warrensburg,  Missouri 
Brown,  Arthur  M.,  (B.A.,  Cleveland  State  University),  Charlotte,  North  Carolina 
Brown,  James  S.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Central  Florida),  Mentone,  Alabama 
Buchanan,  Carleene  H.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Waynesville,  North  Carolina 
Bullard,  Lyndle  R.,  (B.S.,  Eastern  Michigan  University),  Ponchatoula,  Louisiana 
Bunch,  Eric  T.,  (B.A.,  Jarvis  Christian  College),  Goldsboro,  North  Carolina 
Burks,  Benjamin  D.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Virginia),  Buena  Vista,  Virginia 
Burks,  Gregory  A.,  (B.A.,  Hendrix  College),  North  Little  Rock,  Arkansas 
Burks,  Vickie  B.,  (B.A.,  Atlantic  Christian  College),  Wilson,  North  Carolina 
Byrd,  James  P.,  (B.  A.,  Gardner-Webb  College),  Rutherfordton,  North  Carolina 
Campbell,  John  A.,  (B.A.,  Pembroke  State  University),  Red  Springs,  North  Carolina 
Carlisle,  Virginia  L.,  (B.S.N. ,  Wittenberg  University;  M.S.,  Wright  State  University),  Springfield,  Ohio 
Carson,  Joseph  D.,  (B.S.,  Appalachian  State  University),  Martinsville,  Virginia 
Carson,  Martha  A.,  (B.A.,  Ohio  State  University),  Coolville,  Ohio 
Chiles,  Kristin  K.,  (B.A.,  Baldwin-Wallace  College),  Worthington,  Ohio 
Christ}',  David  H.,  (B.A.,  Pfeiffer  College),  Thomasville,  North  Carolina 
Christy,  John  P.,  (B.A.,  Pfeiffer  College),  Thomasville,  North  Carolina 
Ciesluk,  Gregory  P.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Massachusetts),  Chelmsford,  Massachusetts 
Clark,  Stanley  M.,  (B.A.,  Emory  University),  Spring  City,  Tennessee 
Clark-Boothby,  Martha  E.,  (B.A.,  Harvard  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Cleary,  Patricia  T.,  (B.F.A.,  Carnegie-Mellon  University),  Pittsburgh,  Pennsylvania 
Cleary,  Wayne  R.,  (B.A.,  Clarion  University),  Lake  Citv,  Pennsylvania 


116     Appendix 


Clontz,  MarkE.,  (A.B.,  Pfeiffer  College),  Reidsville,  North  Carolina 
Coleman,  George  R,  Jr.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Virginia),  Lynchburg,  Virginia 
Colwell,  Robin  L.,  (B.S.,  Radford  University),  Catawba,  Virginia 
Craig,  Carolyn,  (B.A.,  University  of  Colorado),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Creech,  Sharon  S.,  (B.F.A.,  UNC-Greensboro),  Clayton,  North  Carolina 
Cumbest,  Christopher  O.,  (B.S.,  University  Southern  Mississippi),  Pascagoula,  Mississippi 
Davies,  Larry  E.,  (B.S.,  Virginia  Polytechnic  Insitute),  Jarrett,  Virginia 

Davis,  Judith  A.,  (B.S.,  High  Point  College;  M.T.,  Bowman  Gray  School  of  Medicine;  M.Ed.,  Ph.D.,  Universi- 
ty of  Florida),  Carthage,  North  Carolina 
Denny,  Clyde  A.,  (B.S.,  North  Carolina  State  University),  Mebane,  North  Carolina 
Derflinger,  James  M.,  (B.S.,  Longwood  College),  Moneta,  Virginia 
DeSilva,  Earlston  E.,  (B.S.,  Hampton  University),  Hamilton,  Bermuda 
Dickerman,  Carol  H.,  (B.F.A.,  University  of  Texas-Austin),  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina 
Eaton,  Michael  J.,  (B.S.,  Arizona  State  University),  Phoenix,  Arizona 
Ebert  E.  W.,  (B.S.,  Indiana  University),  Cocoa  Beach,  Florida 
Edwards,  Patricia  A.,  (B.S.,  University  of  New  York),  Fayetteville,  North  Carolina 
Edwards,  Swindell,  (B.S.,  St.  Augustine's  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Ellison,  Sharon  L.,  (B.A.,  University  of  South  Florida),  Clearwater,  Florida 

Englebreth,  William  R.,  (B.S.,  Ohio  University;  M.S.,  Florida  State  University),  York,  Pennsylvania 
Eo,  Yunho,  (B.A.,  Korea  University;  M.A.,  North  Carolina  State  University),  Seoul,  Korea 
Evans,  Mark  D.,  (B.A.,  Simpson  College),  Clear  Lake,  Iowa 
Facer,  Deborah,  (B.A.,  Virginia  Wesleyan  State  College),  Gasburg,  Virginia 
Fairfax,  Laura  A.,  (B.A.,  St.  Andrews  Presbyterian  College),  Charlotte,  North  Carolina 
Falgout,  Roy  F.,  Jr.,  (B.A.,  Johnson  Bible  College),  Henderson,  North  Carolina 
Ferrell,  Sheila  B„  (B.A.,  UNC-Charlotte),  Ramseur,  North  Carolina 
Fils-Aime,  Alicia,  (B.A.,  College  of  New  Rochelle),  New  York,  New  York 
Filston,  Nancy  L.,  (B.S.N.,  Case-Western  Reserve  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Finegan,  Mary  E.,  (B.A.,  West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College),  Grantsville,  West  Virginia 
Fischbeck,  Lisa  G.,  (B.A.,  Duke  University;  M.A.,  University  of  Virginia),  Orange  County,  North  Carolina 
Fishel,  Wendy  G.,  (B.  A.,  High  Point  College),  McLeansville,  North  Carolina 
Fisher,  James  A.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Tennessee),  Indianola,  Mississippi 
Fitzgerald,  John  C,  (B.S.,  Appalachian  State  University),  Monroe,  North  Carolina 
Flood,  Richard  L.,  (B.A.,  Wittenberg  University),  Oberlin,  Ohio 
Formo,  Steven  N.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Hillsborough,  North  Carolina 
Forstall,  Walton  C,  (B.S.,  George  Mason  University),  Chase  City,  Virginia 
Foster,  William  R.,  (B.A.,  High  Point  College),  Saluda,  North  Carolina 
Fox,  Doris  T.,  (B.A.,  Fayetteville  State),  Sanford,  North  Carolina 
Fraser,  Mary  W.  S.,  (B.A.,  Duke  University),  Hilton  Head  Island,  South  Carolina 
Freeman,  Early  Y,  (B.A.,  Birmingham-Southern  College),  Gadsden,  Alabama 
Fulcher,  Hugh  L.,  (B.A.,  East  Carolina  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Gadsden,  Jerry  L.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Southern  Carolina),  Stephen,  South  Carolina 
Garner,  Kimberly  A.,  (B.S.,  Western  Carolina  University),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 
Gerber,  Anette  D.,  (B.A.,  West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College),  St.  Mary's,  Pennsylvania 
Gerber,  John  E.,  (B.A.,  Houghton  College),  St.  Mary's,  Pennsylvania 
Gestwick,  Douglas  D.,  (B.S.,  Geneseo  State  University),  Buffalo,  New  York 

Gibson,  John  K„  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill;  M.S.L.S.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Mebane,  North  Carolina 
Gibson,  Randall  W.,  (B.A.,  George  Mason  University),  Rock  Cave,  West  Virginia 

Gillikin,  Haywood  W,  (B.  A.,  East  Carolina  University;  M.  A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Smithfield,  North  Carolina 
Glover,  Karen  A.,  (B.S.,  State  University  of  New  York),  New  York,  New  York 
Gonia,  Ronald  E.,  (B.A.,  Birmingham-Southern  College),  Huntsville,  Alabama 

Goode,  LehomaB.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill;  M.A.,  Wake  Forest  University),  Winston  Salem,  North  Carolina 
Graves,  Stacey  Z.,  (B.S.,  North  Carolina  State  University),  Burlington,  North  Carolina 
Graves,  Walter  L.,  (B.A.,  Florida  Atlantic  University),  Ft.  Lauderdale,  Florida 
Greenwood,  Jane  B.,  (B.A.,  Pfeiffer  College),  Crossnore,  North  Carolina 
Guillemette,  Joel  B.,  (B.A.,  Gordon  College),  Lincoln,  Maine 
Gunn,  Alda  V,  (B.S.,  Virginia  State  University),  Boydton,  Virginia 
Hall,  Linda  K.,  (B.S.,  Carnegie-Mellon  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Hall,  William  K.,  (B.A.,  Methodist  College),  Macon,  North  Carolina 
Ham,  Gerald  Q.,  (B.A.,  Clemson  University),  Orville,  South  Carolina 
Harris,  Derrick  K.,  (B.A.,  Canisius  College),  Oxford,  North  Carolina 
Harris,  Ruth  C,  (B.A.,  Canisius  College),  Oxford,  North  Carolina 
Hatch,  Mary  M.,  (B.A.,  Meredith  College),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 
Helm,  Cyrus  V,  Jr.,  (B.B.A.  University  of  Texas-Austin),  Houston,  Texas 
Henry,  Phillip  V,  (B.S.,  Centre  College),  Louisville,  Kentucky 
Hester,  Joseph  L.,  (B.A.,  Duke  University),  Bonn,  West  Germany 

Hill,  Richard  C,  Jr.,  (B.A.,  North  Carolina  Wesleyan  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Hipps,  Mark  D.,  (B.A.,  Western  Carolina  University),  Asheville,  North  Carolina 

Appendix     117 


Hodges,  David  L.,  (B.A.,  East  Carolina  University),  Tallahassee,  Florida 

Hoffman,  Martha  J.,  (B.A.,  Indiana  State  University),  Cincinnati,  Ohio 

House,  Robert  L.,  (B.S.,  Medical  College  of  Virginia/Virginia  Commonwealth  University),  Lawrenceville,  Virginia 

Howell,  Jeremy  L.,  (B.A.,  Georgia  Southern  College),  Albany,  Georgia 

Huff,  David  A.,  (B.A.,  Edinboro  University),  Utica,  Pennsylvania 

Hunt,  Vance,  (B.A.,  Gardner-Webb  College),  Statesville,  North  Carolina 

Hurst,  Phillip  M.,  (B.A.,  Appalachian  State  University),  Mount  Airy,  North  Carolina 

Huskins,  David  R.,  (A.B.,  High  Point  College),  Gastonia,  North  Carolina 

Irelan,  Rebecca  J.,  (B.A.,  Boston  University),  Billings,  Montana 

Ivins,  Billy  Bob,  (B.B.A.,  University  of  Texas),  Odessa,  Texas 

Jay,  Jesse  L.,  (B.S.,  James  Madison  University),  Dillwyn,  Virginia 

Johnson,  James  D.,  (B.S.,  University  of  California-Los  Angeles;  Ph.D.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Chapel  Hill, 
North  Carolina 

Johnson,  Joyce  E.,  (B.A.,  Averett  College),  Newport  News,  Virginia 

Jones,  Judah  L.,  (B.A.,  Greensboro  College),  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 

Jones,  Orea.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Wilmington),  Hillborough,  North  Carolina 

Jones,  Scott  E,  (B.A.,  Oral  Roberts  University),  Orlando,  Florida 

Juliano,  James  D.,  (B.S.,  Middle  Tennessee  State  University),  Murfreesboro,  Tennessee 

Kayler,  Claude  J.,  (B.  A.,  University  of  North  Carolina),  Hendersonville,  North  Carolina 

Kelly,  Sarah  E.,  (B.A.,  University  of  the  South),  New  Haven,  Connecticut 

Kenney,  Carl  W.,  (B.  A.,  University  of  Missouri),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Kiger,  James  A.,  (B.A.,  Centre  College),  Washington  Courthouse,  Ohio 

Kiger,  Janeane  D,  (B.A.,  Duke  University),  Washington  Courthouse,  Ohio 

King,  James  W.,  (B.  A.,  University  of  New  Mexico),  Albuquerque,  New  Mexico 

Kinney,  Debra  M.,  (B.A.,  Ohio  Northern  University),  New  Kensington,  Pennsylvania 

Kirby,  Stephen  H.,  (B.A.,  Gardner-Webb  College),  Catawba,  North  Carolina 

Kirkland,  Milton  D.,  (B.S.,  M.Ed.,  Virginia  State  University),  Richmond,  Virginia 

Kirton,  Brenda,  (B.A.,  Shaw  University),  Georgetown,  Guyana 

Knoop,  Jenovefa  J.,  (B.A.,  North  Carolina  Central  University),  Oxford,  North  Carolina 

Kolm,  CharnellC,  (B.S.,  University  of  Wyoming),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Koppmann,  Cecile,  (B.A.,  Hofstra  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Krueger,  Todd  S.,  (B.A.,  Methodist  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Kuykendall,  Louis  E.,  (B.S.,  Randolph-Macon  College;  M.A.,  University  of  Colorado),  Boulder,  Colorado 

Larson,  Duane  D.,  (B.S.,  Bartlesville  Wesleyan  College),  Corpus  Christi,  Texas 

Lawrence,  Teresa  E.,  (B.S.,  Fayetteville  State  University),  Fayetteville,  North  Carolina 

Lee,  Young  In,  (B.A.,  Kookmin  University),  Inchon,  Korea 

Lefelar,  Laura  B.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Delaware),  Wayne,  New  Jersey 

Lenox,  J.  Patrick,  (B.S.,  Alliance  College;  B.S.,  Edinboro  University  of  Pennsylvania),  Cambridge  Springs,  Penn- 
sylvania 

Leonard,  Danny  B.,  (B.A.,  High  Point  College),  Lexington,  North  Carolina 

Lepley,  Lynne  M.,  (B.  A.,  Wake  Forest  University;  M.L.S.,  East  Carolina  University),  Connelly  Springs,  North 
Carolina 

Leslie,  Paul  D.,  (Th.B.,  Piedmont  Bible  College),  Waterbury,  Connecticut 

Lewis,  PaulB.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Tennessee),  Dyersburg,  Tennessee 

Lile,  David  W.,  (B.S.,  Birmingham-Southern  University),  Greenville,  Kentucky 

Ling,  Steven  M.,  (B.A.,  Averett  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Locklear,  Kenneth  W.,  (B.A.,  Pembroke  State  University),  Pembroke,  North  Carolina 

Loveman,  Susan  J.,  (B.A.,  Oakland  University),  Saxapahaw,  North  Carolina 

Luper,  Suzanne  W.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Texas),  Austin,  Texas 

Luther,  Deborah  E.,  (B.S.,  Clemson  University),  Anderson,  South  Carolina 

Lynn,  William  R.,  (B.A.,  Pfeiffer  College),  Climax,  North  Carolina 

Maafo,  Victor  E.,  (M.Sc,  North  Carolina  Central;  M.A.,  Duke  University),  Ghana,  West  Africa 

MacClellan,  Marshall  E.,  (B.A.,  Florida  Southern  College),  Gainesville,  Florida 

Mandigo,  Clark  L.,  (B.A.,  Old  Domimion  University),  Gretna,  Virginia 

Mangum,  Mark  E.,  (B.S.M.,  Florida  Southern  College),  Lakeland,  Florida 

Mansfield,  Jon  H.,  (B.  A.,  University  of  Tennessee),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Manuel,  CarlL.,  (B.  A.,  Johnson  C.  Smith  University;  M.Ed.,  University  of  Illinois),  Greensboro,  North  Carolina 

Markay,  David  A.,  (B.A.,  Dickinson  College),  Wycoff,  New  Jersey 

Marshbanks,  Ann  M„  (B.S.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Buies  Creek,  North  Carolina 

Martin,  SamF.  I1I,(B.S.,  UNC-Asheville),  Townsville,  North  Carolina 

Maxson,  Karin  A.,  (B.S.,  West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College),  Stokesdale,  North  Carolina 

Maynard,  Philip  R.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Central  Florida;  M.S.Ed.,  University  of  Kansas),  Plant  City,  Florida 

McCalmont,  Cynthia  M.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Virginia),  Charlottesville,  Virginia 

McCoy,  Donald  E.,  (B.S.,  North  Carolina  A&T  State  University),  Greensboro,  North  Carolina 

McCraney,  David  A.,  (B.S.,  Florida  Southern  College),  Dunedin,  Florida 

McDowell,  Thomas  D.,  (B.A.,  Bluefield  State  College),  Yanceyville,  North  Carolina 

McGeady,  JaYong  C,  (B.S.,  Ewha  Women's  University;  B.S.,  Guilford  College),  Brown's  Summit,  North  Carolina 

118     Appendix 


McMullen,  William  C,  (B.S.,  Texas  A&M  University;  MA.,  Presbyterian  School  of  Christian  Education),  Raleigh, 

North  Carolina 
McNamara,  Ann  N.,  (B.A.,  Marquette  University),  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina 
Milbourne,  Mary  H.,  (B.S.,  Miami  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Miller,  Douglas  W.,  (B.A.,  West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College),  Kenova,  West  Virginia 
Miller,  Patrice  C,  (B.A.,  Empire  State  College),  Stewart  Manor,  New  York 
Miller,  Richard  S.,  (B.A.,  Lynchburg  College),  Bedford,  Virginia 
Mills,  Ronald  V,,  (B.S.,  Ferrum  College),  Dry  Fork,  Virginia 
Minnick,  Jonathan  A.,  (B.S.,  College  of  William  and  Mary),  Arlington,  Virginia 
Mitchell,  Theodore  J.,  (A.B.,  Augustana  College),  Champaign,  Illinois 
Moats,  JeanE.,  (B.A.,  Otterbein  College),  Mt.  Sterling,  Ohio 

Money,  Delma  L.,  (B.S.,  Winston-Salem  State  University),  Pinnacle,  North  Carolina 
Moody,  Frances T,  (B.A.,  Carson-Newman  College),  Chesapeake,  Virginia 
Moore,  Keith  D.,  (B.S.,  Longwood  College),  Brookneal,  Virginia 
Moore,  Samuel  H.,  (B.A.,  Greensboro  College),  Reidsville,  North  Carolina 
Moore,  Susan  M.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina 

Morgan,  Molly  D.,  (B.A.,  Agnes  Scott  College;  M.F.A.,  UNC-Greensboro),  Reidsville,  North  Carolina 
Morton,  Thomas  M.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Charlotte;  M.Ed.,  UNC-Charlotte),  Summerfield,  North  Carolina 
Morton-Wilson,  Matthew  A.,  (B.A.,  Wabash  College),  Delaware,  Ohio 
Mott,  Joyce  R.,  (B.A.,  North  Carolina  Wesleyan  College),  Jacksonville,  North  Carolina 
Murphy,  Deanna  H.,  (B.A..  Methodist  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Murray,  Michael  L.,  (B.A.,  Livingstone  College),  Georgetown,  Guyana 
Nave,  Gary  K.,  (B.A.,  Emory  and  Henry  College),  South  Boston,  Virginia 
Nelms,  Benjamin  E.,  (B.A.,  North  Carolina  Wesleyan  College),  Milton,  North  Carolina 
Nelson,  Ricky  D.,  (B.A.,  West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College),  Phenix,  Virginia 
Nicholson,  Sue  Ellen,  (B.A.,  North  Carolina  State  University,  Rocky  Mount,  North  Carolina 
Notar,  Annette,  (B.A.,  Hobart-William  Smith  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Ogburn,  Thomas  C,  (B.S.,  Campbell  University),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 
Page,  Jack  W.,  (B.A.,  North  Carolina  Wesleyan  College),  Coats,  North  Carolina 
Palmer,  James  B.,  (B.A.,  Hendrix  College),  Wichita  Falls,  Texas 
Park,  Eric  S.,  (B.A.,  Dickinson  College),  Johnstown,  Pennsylvania 
Park,  Phillip  W.,  (A.B.,  Pfeiffer  College),  Concord,  North  Carolina 
Parker,  Joyce  L.,  (B.A.,  Smith  College),  Marietta,  Georgia 
Parker,  Richard  H.,  (B.S.,  C.W.  Post  College),  Lake  City,  Florida 
Peacock,  Madeline  J.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Alabama),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 
Peoples,  Belinda  D.,  (B.A.,  Elon  College),  High  Point,  North  Carolina 
Perkinson,  Susan  R.,  (B.A.,  Guilford  College),  Cary,  North  Carolina 
Phillips,  Bruce  D.,  (B.A.,  Southern  Illinois  University),  Kinmundy,  Illinois 
Phillips,  Vicki  D.,  (B.A.,  West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College),  Rock  Cave,  West  Virginia 
Powell,  Randolph  E.,  (B.S.,  M.S.,  California  Polytechnic  State  University),  Peachland,  North  Carolina 
Preston,  Hunter  H.,  (B.A.,  Atlantic  Christian  College),  Wilson,  North  Carolina 
Price,  Clara  P.,  (B.A.,  Columbia  College),  Florence,  South  Carolina 
Radeline,  Rachel  A.,  (B.A.,  Ohio  Wesleyan  University),  Beavercreek,  Ohio 
Radford,  James  O.,  (B.A.,  Longwood  College),  Scottsville,  Virginia 
Ralls,  Walter  M.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  High  Point,  North  Carolina 
Ramey,  Larry  E.,  (B.A.,  Bluefield  College),  Rocky  Gap,  Virginia 
Ramsey,  David  B.,  (B.A.,  Wake  Forest  University),  Asheville,  North  Carolina 
Reppert,  Daniel  K.,  (B.A.,  Albright  College),  Reading,  Pennsylvania 
Reynolds,  Winfred  C,  (B.S.,  Ferrum  College),  Union  Level,  Virginia 
Rice,  David  W.,  (B.A.,  Lenoir-Rhyne  College),  Lexington,  North  Carolina 
Richards,  Gregory  S.,  (B.A.,  Texas  Technological  University),  Apex,  North  Carolina 
Richardson,  Everett  E.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Charlotte),  Charlotte,  North  Carolina 
Riggs,  Edna  R„  (B.A.,  UNC-Charlotte),  Charlotte,  North  Carolina 

Roberts,  Hugh  J.,  (B.S.,  Detroit  Institute  of  Technology;  M.S.,  Ph.D.  Purdue  University),  Portales,  New  Mexico 
Roberts,  Jeffrey  L.,  (B.S.,  Tenessee  Technological  University),  Saltville,  Virginia 
Robinson,  Darryl  W.,  (B.A.,  Wake  Forest  University),  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 
Robinson,  Thomas  A.,  (B.A.,  Wake  Forest  University;  J. D.,  Wake  Forest  School  of  Law),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Rodrigue,  Charlene  L.,  (B.S.,  Nicholls  State  University),  Kenner,  Louisiana 
Rose,  Gail  W.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Southern  Mississippi;  M.C.E.,  Candler  School  Theology),  Winston-Salem, 

North  Carolina 
Rosenquist,  Valerie  B.,  (B.A.,  LeMoyne  College;  Ph.D.,  Duke  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Rudy,  Mary  Kathy,  (B.A.,  College  of  St.  Rose),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Rushing,  Jeffrey  J.,  (B.A.,  Pfeiffer  College),  Peachland,  North  Carolina 
Scott,  Bradley  H.,  (B.A.,  Emory  and  Henry  College),  Weber  City,  Virginia 
Seabron,  Garry  W.,  (B.A.,  Virginia  Commonwealth  College),  Newport  News,  Virginia 
Sears,  Patricia  M.,  (B.A.,  M.S.,  University  of  Arizona;  M.A.,  Eastern  New  Mexico  University),  Portales,  New 

Mexico 

Appendix     119 


Sedlecky,  M.  Leiah  H.,  (B.S.,  Southern  Illinois  University),  Peoria,  Illinois 

Shannon,  Tresco  E.,  (B.S.,  Francis  Marion  College),  Florence,  South  Carolina 

Sharpe,  Benjamin  S.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Graham,  North  Carolina 

Shaw,  Stephen  N.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Greensboro),  Monroe,  North  Carolina 

Simmons,  George  E.,  (B.A.,  Virginia  Wesleyan  College),  Huddleston,  Virginia 

Singletary,  Linda  B.,  (B.S.,  Winston-Salem  State  University),  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina 

Sipes,  Kelly  Dean,  (B.A.,  Kansas  Wesleyan  College),  Salina,  Kansas 

Smith,  Adolph  C,  (B.A.,  Methodist  College),  Jacksonville,  North  Carolina 

Smith,  Clarence  A.,  (B.S.,  Texas  College),  Madison,  North  Carolina 

Smith,  David  B.,  (B.S.,  Wake  Forest  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Smith,  Marsha  D.,  (B.A.,  Sioux  Falls  College),  Sioux  Falls,  South  Dakota 

Smith,  Randolph  W.,  (B.A.,  Concordia  College),  Eagan,  Minnesota 

Smith,  Robert  L.,  (B.A.,  Bluefield  State  College),  Tazewell,  Virginia 

Smith,  Samuel  R.,  (B.A.,  Tusculum  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Solano,  Michael  J.,  (B.S.,  Auburn  University),  Montgomery,  Alabama 

Solberg,  James  M.,  (B.  A.,  University  of  Illinois),  Cary,  North  Carolina 

Speed,  Daniel  G.,  (B.M.S.,  University  of  Southern  Mississippi),  Collins,  Mississippi 

Spence,  Clinton  W.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Georgia),  Atlanta,  Georgia 

Spencer,  Glenn  M.,  (B.A.,  Elon  College),  Ramseur,  North  Carolina 

Stahl,  Jeannine  L.,  (B.A.,  Rice  University),  Hawthorne,  Nevada 

Statler,  Mark  B.,  (B.M.E.,  Central  Methodist  College),  Carothersville,  Missouri 

Stauth,  Thomas  D,  (B.A.,  St.  Mary  of  the  Plain),  Dodge  City,  Kansas 

Stevenson,  Scott  A.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Southern  Carolina),  Summerville,  South  Carolina 

Stewart,  Robert  W.,  (B.A.,  Mars  Hill  College),  Roanoke  Rapids,  North  Carolina 

Stewart,  Samuel  L.,  (B.A.,  Winston-Salem  State  University),  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 

Stone,  Lisa  A.,  (B.A.,  Tennessee  Wesleyan  College),  Fayetteville,  Tennessee 

Sweat,  David  A.,  (B.A.,  Baylor  University),  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina 

Switzer,  Mary  EllenP,  (A.B.,  Smith  College;  M.S.,  University  of  Illinois;  Ph.D.,  University  of  Illinois),  Raleigh, 

North  Carolina 
Taylor,  Berry  L.,  (B.A.,  Alliance  College),  Blairsville,  Pennsylvania 
Taylor,  Linda  L.,  (B.S.,  California  University  of  Pennsylvania),  Avella,  Pennsylvania 
Tennyson,  John  E.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Illinois),  Champaign,  Illinois 
Thornton,  David  B.,  (B.A.,  Morehouse  College),  Columbus,  Georgia 

Tippens,  Norman  G.,  (B.A.,  Roanoke  Bible  College;  B.A.,  Lynchburg  College),  Roanoke  Rapids,  North  Carolina 
Tisdale,  John  K.,  (B.A.,  High  Point  College),  Sanford,  North  Carolina 
Townsley,  Robin  J.,  (B.S.,  Kutztown  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Tyson,  Bobby  P,  (B.A.,  North  Carolina  Wesleyan  College),  Laurel  Hill,  North  Carolina 
Vest,  Roger  A.,  (B.A.,  Berry  College),  Jonesboro,  Georgia 
Wanger,  Stephen  P.,  (B.A.,  Oral  Roberts  University),  Kipling,  North  Carolina 

Ward,  June  R.,  (B.S.,  Wayne  Community  College;  B.  A.  Greensboro  College),  Greensboro,  North  Carolina 
Warren,  Donnie  R.,  (B.S.,  Florida  Southern  College),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 
Watford,  Troy  S.,  (B.A.,  Wofford  College),  Spartanburg,  South  Carolina 
Watson,  Wendelin  J.,  (B.A..  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina 
Weaver,  James  T,  (B.A.,  Pembroke  State  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Weaver,  Nina  C,  (B.S.,  Appalachian  State  University),  Warrensville,  North  Carolina 
Welbaum,  Barbara  E.,  (B.S.,  Oakland  University;  M.S.,  University  of  Southern  Carolina),  Rochester  Hills, 

Michigan 
Wenger,  Tracy  L.,  (B.A.,  Lebanon  Valley  College),  Quarryville,  Pennsylvania 
Wesley,  JohnT.,  (B.A.,  Campbell  College),  Lexington,  Kentucky 
White,  Jan  L.,  (B.A.,  Texas  Wesleyan  College),  Granbury,  Texas 
White,  Robert  D.,  (M.A.,  University  of  West  Florida),  Sun  City  Center,  Florida 
White,  William  M.,  (B.A.,  Hampden-Sydney  College),  Winchester,  Virginia 
Whitney,  Saima  L.,  (B.A.,  Virginia  Wesleyan  College),  Virginia  Beach,  Virginia 
Whittington,  Ella  J.,  (B.A.,  Livingstone  College),  Lenoir,  North  Carolina 
Wickham,  Charles  W,  (B.S.,  Averett  College),  South  Boston,  Virginia 
Wike,  Melissa  H.,  (B.M.,  Lenoir-Rhyne  College),  Denver,  North  Carolina 
Williams,  Ann  H.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Greensboro;  M.Ed.,  UNC-  Greensboro;  M.S.,  UNC-Greensboro),  Durham, 

North  Carolina 
Williams,  Herbert  C,  Jr.,  (B.A.,  Eisenhower  College;  J.D.,  Walter  F.  George  School),  Arlington,  Virginia 
Wilson,  John,  III,  (B.S.,  Florida  A&M  University),  Newport  News,  Virginia 
Wimberley,  Richard  E.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 
Wingo,  Norma  W.,  (B.A.,  Methodist  College),  Rougemont,  North  Carolina 
Winright,  Tobias  Lee,  (B.A.,  University  of  Southern  Florida),  Tarpon  Springs,  Florida 
Wolfe,  Lois  A.,  (B.A.,  Florida  Southern  College),  Hernando,  Florida 
Woodhouse,  Andrea  R.,  (B.  A.,  Emory  and  Henry  College),  Elliston,  Virginia 
Woodhouse,  David  W„  (B.S.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Wilson,  North  Carolina 
Woods,  John  C,  (B.S.,  Georgia  Southern  College),  Hinesville,  Georgia 

120     Appendix 


Woody,  David  S.,  (B.A.,  Emory  and  Henry  College),  Maryville,  Tennessee 
Wright,  Jeffrey  W.,  (B.A.,  Emory  and  Henry  College),  Oxford,  North  Carolina 
Young,  R.  M.,  (B.A.,  Boston  University),  Springfield,  Pennsylvania 

Candidates  for  the  Master  of  Religious  Education  Degree 

Buckley,  Betty  Ann,(B.A.,  Grove  City  College),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Cadle,  Patricia  J.,  (B.S.,  UNC-Greensboro),  Burlington,  North  Carolina 

Collins,  Renee,  (B.A.,  Stetson  University),  Deland,  Florida 

Cumbest,  Sheila  D.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Southern  Mississippi),  Pascagoula,  Mississippi 

Erickson,  Marja  L.,  (B.A.,  High  Point  College),  Rockville,  Maryland 

Hewett,  Benjamin  J.,  (A,  A.,  Lake  City  Community  College;  B.S.,  University  of  Florida),  Fort  White,  Florida 

Lartey,  Seth  O.,  Wilson,  North  Carolina 

Lee,  Virginia  A.,  (B.A.,  College  of  William  &  Mary),  DeWitt,  Virginia 

Madariaga,  Patricia  H.,  (B.S.,  University  of  Florida;  M.  AT.,  Winthrop  College),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Markatos,  Cathy  M.,  (B.A.,  Vasser  College),  Pittsboro,  North  Carolina 

Owen,  Katherine  L.,  (B.A.,  College  of  William  and  Mary),  Blackstone,  Virginia 

Radosevic,  Tracy  A.,  (B.A.,  Grove  City  College),  Canton,  Ohio 

Serwer,  Sheryl  S.,  (B.A.,  Duke  University),  Chapel  Hill,  North  Carolina 

Torres,  Janet  M.,  (B.S.,  Mississippi  State  University),  Moss  Point,  Mississippi 

Triplett,  Carlene  R.,  (B.S.,  Union  College;  M.A.,  Purdue  University),  Bennettsville,  South  Carolina 

Candidates  for  the  Master  of  Theological  Studies 

Bell,  Thomas  J.,(B.M.,  University  of  Georgia;  M.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Jonesboro,  Georgia 

Carr,  Marjorie  B„  (B.S.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill;  M.D.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Christy,  JamyeC,  (A. A.,  Brevard  College;  B.A.,  UNC-Charlotte),  Lexington,  North  Carolina 

Cooper,  William  K.,  (B.A.,  Wake  Forest),  Matthews,  North  Carolina 

Davis,  Mary  Margaret,  (B  A.,  Wake  Forest),  Louisburg,  North  Carolina 

Elliott,  Deronda  E.,  (B.S.,  Marquette  University),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Felts,  Michael  S.,  (B.A.,  University  of  California-Davis),  Visalia,  California 

Freedman,  Sarah  S.,  (B.A.,  Allegheny  College;  M.A.,  University  of  Pittsburgh),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Howell,  Kevin  D.,  (B.A.,  North  Carolina  State  University),  Shelby,  North  Carolina 

Johnson,  Andrew  J.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Texas-Austin),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Johnson,  Bradley  A.,  (B.A.,  St.  Olaf  College),  Bloomington,  Minnesota 

Jones,  Charles  B.,  (B.A.,  Morehead  State  University),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Lambert,  William  R.,  (B.A.,  Lubbock  Christian  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Matteson,  Karen  K.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Illinois,  M.Ed.,  Tulane  University),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Morrison,  Gregory  A.,  (B.A.,  Wheaton  College),  Portland,  Oregon 

Murphy,  Debra  D.,  (B.S.,  West  Virginia  Wesleyan),  Marlinton,  West  Virginia 

Nation,  Mark  K.,  (B.A.,  Sangamon  State  University;  M.A.,  Mennonite  Biblical  Seminary),  Urbana,  Illinois 

Peltier,  Christopher  J.,  (B.A.,  Gordon  College),  Williamstown,  Massachusetts 

Radford,  Claudia  L.,  (B.A.,  Southern  Illinois  University),  Raleigh,  North  Carolina 

Renalds,  Douglas  W.,  (B.A.,  Carson-Newman  College),  Mt.  Sidney,  Virginia 

Sturges,  Harriette  H.,  (B.A.,  Sweet  Briar  College),  Louisburg,  North  Carolina 

Swenson,  KristinaL.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Indianapolis),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Toole,  David  C,  (B.A.,  University  of  Montana),  Helena,  Montana 

Whitmire,  John  T.,  (B.S.,  Jacksonville  State  University),  Jacksonville,  Alabama 

Williams,  Elijah,  (B.A.,  Fayetteville  State  University),  Reidsville,  North  Carolina 

Candidates  for  the  Master  of  Theology  Degree 

Bauer,  Gary  W.,  (B.S.,  M.Div.,  Manchester  College),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Bevere,  Allan  R.,  (B.A.,  Malone  College;  M.Div.,  M.A.,  Ashland  Theological  Seminary),  Seagrove,  North 

Carolina 
Bevere,  Matthew  H.,  (B.A.,  Malone  College;  M.Div.,  M.A.  Ashland  Theological  Seminary),  Canton,  Ohio 
Brown,  Avery  C,  (B.S.,  M.Div.,  Texas  Wesleyan  College),  Greensboro,  North  Carolina 
Butler,  Sean  R.,(B.A.,B.S.,  William  Jewell  College;  M.Div.,  Yale  Divinity  School),  Excelsior  Springs,  Missouri 
Christy,  Larry  D.,  (B.A.,  East  Coast  Bible  College;  M.Div.,  Church  of  God  School  of  Theology),  Greensboro, 

North  Carolina 
Crouch,  FrankL.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill;  M.Div.,  Moravian  Theological  Seminary),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Ellis,  Michael  S.,  (B.A.,  Methodist  College;  M.Div,  Duke  Divinity  School),  Pittsboro,  North  Carolina 
Frey,  NeilE.,  (M.Div.,  American  Baptist  Seminary;  D.Min.,  Fuller  Theological  Seminary;  M.S.S.M.,  Univer- 
sity of  Southern  California),  Lemon  Grove,  California 
Joyner-Milton,  Sadye,  Greensboro,  North  Carolina 

Lanning,  Richard  E.,  (B.  A. .Baldwin-Wallace  College;  M.Div.,  Asbury  Theological  Seminary),  Durham,  North 
Carolina 

Appendix     121 


Lust,  Jeff  A.,  (B.S.,  McMurry  College;  M.Div.,  Duke  Divinity  School),  Littlefield,  Texas 

McFarland,  Gary  W.,  (B.S.,B.A.,  UNC-Charlotte;  M.Div.,  Southeastern  Baptist  Seminary),  Fayetteville,  North 

Carolina 
Nagle,  Daniel  K.,  (A.A.S.,  Rochester  Institute  of  Technology;  B.A.,  North  Park  College;  M.Div.,  Lutheran  School 

of  Theology  of  Chicago),  Jamestown,  New  York 
Sims,  Timothy  C,  (B.  A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill;  M.Div.,  Lutheran  Theological  Southern  Seminary),  Lexington, 

South  Carolina 
Sinopoli,  Kathryn  L.,  (B.A.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill;  M.A.,  Wake  Forest  University),  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina 
Whitten,  Zenda  A.,  (B.A.,  Columbia  College;  M.Div.,  Duke  Divinity  School),  Durham,  North  Carolina 
Wills,  Gregory  A.,  (B.S.,  Duke  University;  M.Div.,  Gordon-Conwell Theological  Seminary),  Memphis,  Tennessee 
Withrow,  Lisa  R.,  (B.A.,  Bucknell  University;  M.Div.,  Duke  Divinity  School),  Glasgow,  Scotland 
Yearick,  Carrie  E.,  (B.A.,  Wingate  College;  M.Div.,  Duke  Divinity  School),  Durham,  North  Carolina 

Special  Students 

Bassett,  Lee  S.,  (B.A.,  Cornell  University),  Cedar  Grove,  North  Carolina 

Blaisdell,  Roger  A.,  (B.A.,  Pembroke  State  University;  M.Div.,  Denver  Conservative  Baptist  Seminary),  Hali- 
fax, North  Carolina 
Browne,  Frances  L.,  (B.A.,  Mars  Hill  College;  M.Div.,  Southeastern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary),  Gadsden, 

Alabama 
Clement,  George  A.,  Jr.,  (B.S.,  North  Carolina  State  University),  Cary,  North  Carolina 
Denton,  Mark  S.,  (B.A.,  Mars  Hill  College;  M.Div.  Southeastern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary),  Advance,  North 

Carolina 
Ellis,  Jerry  D.,  (A.A.S.,  Wabash  Valley  Junior  College;  B.  A.,  McKendree  College),  Fairfield,  Illinois 
Flynn,  Mark  R.,  (B.A.,  University  of  Tennessee;  M.Div.,  Duke  Divinity  School),  Knoxville,  Tennessee 
Hooper,  Dennis  E.,  (B.S.,  M.A.,  Western  Carolina  University;  M.Div.,  Southeastern  Baptist  Theological  Semi- 
nary), Clinton,  North  Carolina 
Jackson,  Richard  W.,  (B.A.,  Methodist  College;  J.D.,  Campbell  College  School  of  Law),  Fayetteville,  North 

Carolina 
Jones,  Frank  T.,  (B.S.,  Liberty  University;  M.A.R.,  Westminster  Theological  Seminary),  Greensboro,  North 

Carolina 
Jordan,  Stephen  R.,  (B.A.,  Central  Wesleyan  College;  M.Div.,  Asbury  Theological  Seminary),  Bennettsville, 

South  Carolina 
Lindquist,  Carl  W.,  (B.A.,  Thiel  College;  M.Div.,  Duke  Divinity  School),  High  Point,  North  Carolina 
Muller,  Markus,  (University  of  Erlangen;  University  of  Bonn),  Dietersheim,  Federal  Republic  of  Germany 
Pierce,  Charlene  H.,  (B.A.,  Campbell  College;  M.Div.,  Southeastern  Baptist  Theological  Seminary),  Fayetteville, 

North  Carolina 
Soliday,  Joanne C,  (B.A.,  West  Virginia  Wesleyan  College;  M.Ed.,  UNC-Chapel  Hill),  Burlington,  North  Carolina 


122     Appendix 


c 

— 
0 

CD 

H 

2 

q  en 

3  o 

> 

f*i  c 

DOCO 

'S, 
H 

Z 
n 

t  j 

<-0  s 

2;  c 

ivini 

uke 

urha 

-•- 

— 

en 

oo  i 

3  5^ 

Z 
— h 

re 

3 

3- 

c 

Scho 

livers 

,  NC 

> 

3 

n 

— 

< 

N>   - '   O 
^J    — 

O 

CO* 

Gfl 

5' 

3 
M 

re 

■3 

o^ 

2 

CO 

o 

a 
a 

0) 

O 

c 

T3 

M 

3 

TI 

o 

a 

3- 

D) 

> 

CO 
03 

n 

3 

z 

o 

CO 

re 

0) 

w 
en 

o 

rreshman 


Seminars 


Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 


Spring  1989 


Published  by 

Office  of  the  Dean 

Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences 

Duke  University 


Produced  by 

Graphic  Arts  Services 
Duke  University 

Jan  Martell,  designer 


The  seminars  described  in  this  pamphlet  are  those  approved  and  scheduled  to  be 
offered  in  the  Spring  1989  semester.  Trinity  College  and  its  academic  departments 
reserve  the  right  to  make  changes  in  announced  offerings  which  may  be  required 
by  staffing  or  other  considerations.  Students  should  consult  the  offical  Schedule  of 
Courses  for  further  information. 

June  1988 


"Freshman  Seminars,  with  a  maximum  of  fifteen  students  in  each 
class,  provide  significant  opportunity  for  enhanced  student-faculty 
interaction  during  the  freshman  year.  These  courses  focus  on  subject 
areas  across  the  curriculum  and  are  taught  by  Duke  faculty  who  have 
been  chosen  on  the  basis  of  their  reputations  as  outstanding  teachers 
and  scholars.  That  the  President  of  the  University  will  be  teaching 
a  course  this  spring  reflects  the  important  contribution  these  seminars 
will  make  to  the  intellectual  activities  of  the  freshman  year." 


Richard  A.  White 
Dean  of  Trinity  College 
Professor  of  Botany 


Trinity  College  Freshman  Seminars 

Small  classes  .  .  .  lively  discussion  ...  a  chance  to  pursue  special 
interests  instead  of  trying  to  "survey"  the  whole  range  of  a  topic  or 
discipline  ...  an  opportunity  to  know  well  and  to  work  closely  with 
an  experienced  faculty  member  who  is  especially  interested  in  sharing 
his  or  her  intellectual  interests  with  freshmen:  these  things  and  more 
are  what  Trinity  College  Freshman  Seminars  are  all  about.  In  registering 
for  the  Spring  1989  semester,  Trinity  College  freshmen  will  be  able  to 
select  from  an  unprecedented  number  of  Freshman  Seminars  and  an 
extraordinary  range  of  seminar  topics. 

Freshman  Seminars  are  open  to  all  students  enrolled  in  their  first  or 
second  semester  in  Trinity  College  of  Arts  and  Sciences.  Offered  by 
regular  members  of  the  teaching  faculty  and  occasionally  by  distin- 
guished emeritus  professors,  Freshman  Seminars  afford  an  opportunity 
for  students  to  investigate  intensively  topics  not  ordinarily  presented 
in  introductory  or  survey  courses.  There  is  no  prescribed  format  for 
seminars,  but  students  should  expect  that,  in  general,  seminars  will 
differ  from  many  other  courses  they  have  taken  in  several  ways: 

Class  size:  Faculty  policy  requires  that  seminars  be  limited  to  15-18 
students,  and  no  faculty  member  may  admit  students  to  a  seminar 
in  excess  of  enrollment  capacity. 


Emphasis  on  student  participation:  Seminars  are  cooperative  ventures, 
in  which  faculty  members  and  students  together  investigate  designated 
topics.  All  students  are  expected  to  participate  fully  in  the  work  of 
the  seminar,  whether  in  discussion,  research  and  investigation,  or 
the  preparation  of  original  projects  or  reports.  Conscientious  prep- 
aration and  absolutely  regular  attendance  at  seminar  meetings  are 
expected  of  all  enrolled  students,  and  freshmen  should  not  elect  any 
seminar  if  they  anticipate  the  need  for  frequent  absences  or  the  need 
frequently  to  fall  behind  in  class  preparation. 

Scope:  Seminars  do  not  attempt  to  "survey"  a  topic.  Rather,  students  and 
faculty  investigate  some  particular  aspect  of  a  topic  or  field.  Students 
should  not  rely  upon  seminars  to  provide  a  broad  factual  background 
for  advanced  study  in  a  given  department  or  area. 

Freshmen  who  have  enrolled  in  seminars  offered  in  past  years  are 
virtually  unanimous  in  their  praise  of  the  seminar  experience.  "Abso- 
lutely the  highlight  of  my  freshman  year"  is  a  frequent  comment. 
Freshman  Seminars  are  not  for  everyone,  and  no  student  will  be 
required  to  participate  in  the  program.  But  for  the  student  who 
values  the  chance  to  work  closely  with  a  faculty  member  on  a  topic 
of  mutual  interest,  Freshman  Seminars  offer  an  opportunity  unparal- 
leled among  lower-division  courses  in  the  Duke  curriculum. 


Registration  Procedure 


With  one  exception,  Freshman  Seminars  are  open  without  prerequisite 
to  Trinity  College  students  in  their  first  or  second  semester  of  enrollment. 
Area  designations  within  General  Studies  and  class  meeting  times  and 
places  will  appear  in  the  schedule  of  courses  which  will  be  available 
in  the  Pre-Major  Advising  Center  approximately  five  weeks  before 
the  Fall  registration  period  and  from  the  Registrar  ten  days  before 
the  start  of  registration.  When  registration  for  a  seminar  requires  the 
consent  of  the  instructor,  that  consent  must  be  obtained  directly  from 
the  faculty  member  concerned,  before  registration. 

Because  of  enrollment  limitations,  freshmen  may  register  for  only  one 
Freshman  Seminar.  Students  who  hope  to  elect  a  seminar  should  list 
the  seminar  of  their  choice  among  their  primary  course  selections  for 
the  spring  term;  seminars  are  not  realistic  options  as  "alternates"  to 
any  student's  first  four  class  choices.  Seminars  are  designated  by  depart- 
ment and  course  and  section  number,  and  because  all  Freshman  Seminars 
bear  the  common  number  49S,  it  is  especially  important  that  the  reg- 
istration card  bear  the  departmental  designation  ('Trench,"  'Tsychology," 
etc.)  rather  than  simply  the  notation  "Freshman  Seminar  49S." 

General  information  about  Freshman  Seminars  is  available  from  staff 
members  in  the  Pre-Major  Advising  Center.  Information  about  specific 
seminars  should  be  sought  from  the  seminar  faculty. 


Freshman  Seminars 


AFRO-AMERICAN  STUDIES  49S.01 

Theater  of  Africa 
and  the  Caribbean 

This  seminar  focuses  inquiry  upon 
the  ideas  and  philosophies  of  theater 
and  drama  within  the  African  diaspora 
as  well  as  those  features  which  are 
distinctive  from  features  of  European 
theater.  The  drama  and  theater  of 
African  people  will  be  studied  for 
additional  understandings  of  the 
struggles  for  hegemony  in  both  poli- 
tical and  social  realities.  Finally  in 
what  might  best  be  termed  "social 
drama/'  the  theater  of  African  people 
is  considered  as  illustrating  features 
such  as  kinship  ties,  personal  style, 
individual  character,  and  symbols  in 
human  communication. 

Edward  S.  Hill,  Ph.D.  (Bowling  Green 
State  University),  directs  the  Mary  Lou 
Williams  Center  for  Black  Culture  and 
teaches  in  tlhe  Department  of  English. 


ANTHROPOLOGY  49S.01 

Social-Cultural 
Manifestation  of 
Friendship 

This  freshman  seminar  course  will 
focus  on  the  behavioral  manifestations, 
culturally  significant  meanings,  and 
overt  and  covert  functions  of  the 
universal  phenomenon  of  human 
bonding  commonly  identified  in  the 
English-speaking  world  by  the  label 
of  "friendship."  The  various  aspects 
of  friendship  in  individual  cultures 
will  be  examined  and  analyzed.  Friend- 
ship will  be  compared  to  other  types 
of  human  bonding  such  as  marriage, 


kinship,  collegiality,  membership  in 
professional  and  other  voluntary 
organizations,  in  order  to  highlight 
similarities  and  differences  between 
them.  Ethnographic,  folkloristic, 
autobiographical  and  literary  sources 
will  be  discussed  to  comprehend  the 
interculturally  diverse  and  complex 
nature  of  friendship  in  order  to  gain 
better  insights  into  its  causes  and 
effects  on  individuals  during  their 
life  cycles. 

Mahadev  L.  Apte,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Wisconsin),  is  a  Professor  of  Anthropology 
whose  special  interests  are  sociolingustics, 
Hindi,  South  Asian  Languages  and 
humor. 


ANTHROPOLOGY  49S.02 

Animal  Rights 

This  seminar  will  consider  the  pros 
and  cons  of:  using  animals  in  medical 
research;  the  practices  used  with  farm 
animals  to  increase  production;  keep- 
ing animals  in  zoos  or  captivity;  and 
the  use  of  animals  for  entertainment 
(racing,  hunting,  fighting).  In  the  past 
few  years,  there  has  been  increasing 
pressure  from  animal  rights  groups 
to  halt  the  use  of  animals  for  bio- 
medical research.  There  have  been 
break-ins  at  labs  around  the  world. 
One,  at  the  University  of  Pennsylvania, 
produced  videotapes  of  monkeys' 
injuries  that  resulted  in  the  end  of 
federal  funding  for  that  lab.  New 
National  Institutes  of  Health  (NIH) 
guidelines  for  the  treatment  of  lab 
animals  were  put  into  effect  as  of 
January  1986.  Similarly,  information 
about  the  production  of  high-priced 
veal  dramatically  increased  public 
concern  about  the  treatment  of  farm 


Spring  1989 


animals.  Seminar  students  will  read 
several  texts:  Fox,  The  Case  for  Animal 
Experimentation;  Singer,  Animal  Liber- 
ation; Harrison,  Animal  Machines. 

Matt  S.  Cartmill,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Chicago),  is  a  Professor  of  Anatomy  and 
of  Anthropology. 


ANTHROPOLOGY  49S.03 

Gandhi  and 
Nonviolence 

The  question  of  the  role  of  the  indi- 
vidual in  cultural  change  is  addressed 
through  the  history  of  Gandhi's  non- 
violent resistance.  A  cross-cultural 
comparison  with  other  versions  of 
nonviolent  or  passive  resistance,  as, 
for  example,  Martin  Luther  King's, 
will  also  be  made.  Readings  include 
autobiographical  materials  by  Gandhi 
and  King,  which  will  undergo  textual 
analysis  in  seminar  session.  Seminar 
participants  will  also  present  research 
papers  on  nonviolent  resistance  in 
practice. 

Richard  G.  fox,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Michigan),  is  a  Professor  of  Anthro- 
pology and  is  currently  serving  as 
Director  of  Undergraduate  Studies 
in  Cultural  Anthropology. 


BOTANY  49S.01 

The  Darwinian 
Revolution 

Considers  the  many  facets  of  one  of 
the  greatest  upheavals  in  human 
thought.  Topics  include:  historical 
antecedents  of  Darwin's  theories; 
the  scientific  evidence  for  evolution 


and  natural  selection;  the  impact  of 
Darwinism  on  religion,  social  theory, 
and  ethics;  later  scientific  develop- 
ments in  genetics,  statistics,  ecology, 
and  systematics  that  resulted  in  the 
so-called  "modern  synthesis"  or 
NeoDarwinism;  and  recent  chal- 
lenges to  the  NeoDarwinian  syn- 
thesis by  latter-day  creationists  and 
by  evolutionary  biologists  citing  new 
and/or  neglected  data  from  paleon- 
tology, developmental  biology,  genet- 
ics, etc.  The  goal  is  to  use  these 
topics  as  an  exemplar  of  scientific 
methods  and  change,  and  of  the  un- 
steady relationship  between  science 
and  the  public. 

Brent  Mishler,  Ph.D.  (Harvard  Univer- 
sity), is  an  Assistant  Professor  of  Botany 
with  a  special  interest  in  bryology. 


BOTANY  49S.01 

Biological  Exploration 
in  the  Age  of  Discovery 

Readings  and  discussions  will  examine 
how  the  profound  changes  resulting 
from  the  biological  and  geographical 
explorations  in  the  fifteenth  to  the 
twentieth  centuries  have  influenced 
not  only  the  way  we  think  about 
ourselves  and  the  world  about  us, 
but  also  such  mundane  matters  as 
what  we  eat  and  wear  and  how  we 
live.  The  expeditions,  voyages,  or 
conquests  of  Marco  Polo,  Columbus, 
da  Gama,  Magellan,  Cortez,  Pizzaro, 
Coronado,  Cook,  Humboldt,  Lewis 
and  Clark,  and  Darwin  as  well  as  the 
lesser-known  but  equally  significant 
efforts  of  Catesby  the  Bartrams,  the 
Michauxes,  Pursh,  Nuttall,  Wilkes, 


Freshman  Seminars 


and  Pringle  will  be  considered  espe- 
cially as  to  the  impact  of  their  dis- 
coveries upon  biology  and  our  lives. 

Robert  L.  Wilbur,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Michigan),  former  chairman  of  the 
Department  of  Botany,  is  well  known  for 
his  research  on  flowering  plants  of  the 
tropics. 


CHEMISTRY  49S.01 

Gender  in  Science 

Some  would  argue  that  science  is 
gender-blind  and  that  discrimination 
on  the  basis  of  sex  does  not  exist. 
Others  have  quite  different  experi- 
ences and  perceptions.  Some  would 
argue  that  scientific  models  of  reality 
are  products  of  gender  bias.  Others 
disagree.  Case  studies  of  scientific 
biographies  (e.g.,  the  Curies),  scien- 
tific institutions  (e.g.,  the  Nobel 
Prize),  and  episodes  of  scientific 
change  (e.g.,  the  elucidation  of  the 
structure  of  DNA)  will  be  examined 
as  they  pertain  to  these  issues.  Sem- 
inar discussions  of  out-of-class  read- 
ings, brief  student  presentations  of 
directed  library  research,  and  guest 
speakers  will  address  these  topics 
further.  Some  background  in  chem- 
istry and  physics  will  be  helpful  but 
not  essential. 

Charles  Lochmuller,  Ph.D.  (Fordham 
University),  is  a  Professor  of  Chemistry 
whose  special  areas  of  interest  are  separa- 
tions and  surface  spectroscopy. 


COMPARATIVE  LITERATURE  49S.01 

The  Poetics  of  Thought 

The  seminar  examines  some  of  the 
ways  in  which  literary  discourse  has 
been  used  as  a  vehicle  of  philosophi- 
cal thought  and  philosophy  in  turn 
has  been  conceived  and  undertaken 
as  a  form  of  literature  from  antiquity 
to  the  twentieth  century.  Readings 
include  the  Book  of  Job,  Plato's 
Symposium,  Dante's  Inferno,  Novalis's 
Hymns  to  the  Night,  Dostoyevsky's 
Notes  from  Underground,  Nietzsche's 
Thus  Spoke  Zarathustra,  and  Camus's 
The  Fall.  The  course  will  be  conducted 
throughout  as  a  seminar,  with  pri- 
mary emphasis  on  student  participa- 
tion in  (and  occasional  direction  of) 
the  analysis  and  discussion  of  the 
texts. 

Michael  Morton,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Virginia),  is  a  member  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Germanic  Languages  and  Litera- 
ture whose  special  interests  include 
Goethe,  Nietzsche  and  Herder. 


DRAMA  49S.01 

Chinese  Art  and 
Theater  Design 

The  social,  philosophic,  and  artistic 
context  of  mainland  Chinese  visual 
arts  and  their  relationship  to  theater 
design  art.  Course  material  is  exam- 
ined from  an  historical  point  of  view 
as  well  as  that  of  contemporary 
practicing  theater  artists. 

Wenhai  Ma,  M.F.A.  (Carnegie-Mellon 
University),  an  artist-in-residence  at 
Duke  Drama,  is  an  award-winning  theater 


Spring  1989 


designer  who  regularly  teaches  at  the 
Central  Academy  of  Drama  in  Beijing, 
People's  Republic  of  China. 


DRAMA  49S.02 

Dreams  and 
Theater/Film/TV 

A  study  of  parallels  between  dream- 
ing and  viewing  theater/film/TV 
events  with  respect  to  mental  and 
physiological  factors.  The  state  of  the 
dreamer  and  the  state  of  the  viewer 
are  similar:  investigation  of  the  simi- 
larities may  reveal  why  viewing 
theater/film/TV  is  the  single  most 
common  activity  engaged  in  by  people 
today.  The  seminar's  thesis  is  the 
possibility  that  the  roots  of  the  need 
to  watch  are  inherent  and  physio- 
logical, possibly  based  on  mechan- 
isms of  central  importance  to  the 
evolution  of  the  species. 

David  Ball,  Ph.D.  (University  of  Minne- 
sota), director  of  the  Duke  Drama  program 
and  a  writer  whose  work  has  been  seen 
across  the  country  and  abroad,  has 
assembled  a  world-class  drama  faculty. 
He  is  currently  writing  for  off-Broadway 
and  producing  Duke  Drama's  first  feature, 
films. 


DRAMA  49S.03 

The  Masks 

of  Modern  Comedy 

On  stage  or  screen,  from  Bernard 
Shaw  to  Woody  Allen,  whether  the 
classic  mask  shows  a  wry  smile  or  a 
boffo  laugh  — in  comedy  of  social 
purpose,  high  comedy  or  low,  satire 


or  tragi-comedy  farce  or  theater  of 
the  absurd -comedy  goes  its  irrever- 
ent way  toward  the  aim  of  Prologue 
in  Machiavelli's  Mandragola  ".  .  .  to 
make  the  hour  less  bitter  than  it 
seems."  Some  of  the  playwrights 
of  the  age  of  comedy  ushered  in  by 
Shaw:  Oscar  Wilde,  Anton  Chekhov, 
Noel  Coward,  J.M.  Synge,  Samuel 
Beckett,  Eugene  Ionesco,  Tom  Stop- 
pard,  Harold  Pinter,  Philip  Barry, 
Robert  Sherwood,  Neil  Simon;  and 
on  screen  the  great  clowns:  Charlie 
Chaplin,  Buster  Keaton,  the  Marx 
Brothers,  Zero  Mostel.  And  amidst 
this  medley  of  inspired  fools  the 
student  will  concentrate,  in  class 
discussion  and  papers,  on  the  chang- 
ing expressions  of  the  masks  of 
comedy  as  created  by  the  authors 
and  interpreted  by  the  performers. 

Kenneth  ].  Reardon,  A.M.  (Boston  Uni- 
versity), famous  among  gerierations  of 
students  for  his  acting  ability  and  teach- 
ing, is  an  emeritus  professor  in  the 
Department  of  English. 


DRAMA  49S.04 

Theater  of  Africa 
and  the  Caribbean 

See  listing  under  Afro-American 
Studies  49S.01.  Students  may  register 
for  this  seminar,  which  is  cross-listed 
as  Afro-American  Studies  49S.01, 
Drama  49S.04,  or  English  49S.02. 


Freshman  Seminars 

ECONOMICS  49S.01 

EDUCATION  49S.02 

The  New  Economics 

Discovering  Childhood 

in  the  Soviet  Union, 

Where  have  all  the  children  gone?  In 

China,  and  Eastern 

our  high  tech  world,  young  children 
are  pushed  to  "grow  up"  too  fast.  How 

Europe 

different  it  was  in  the  old  days  —  or 

was  it?  This  seminar  presents  a  cross- 

This  seminar  examines  the  radical 

disciplinary  look  at  the  concept  of 

changes  in  economic  philosophy  and 

childhood,  including  historical,  edu- 

practice which  are  occurring  in  the 

cation,  sociological,  and  psychological 

U.S.S.R.  and  Eastern  Europe.  Special 

perspectives  on  the  early  years  of  life 

attention  is  devoted  to  the  economic 

(birth  to  age  8).  Childhood  as  depicted 

implications  for  the  United  States 

in  art  and  literature,  the  "hurried" 

and  the  rest  of  the  world  of  the  inte- 

child of  the  '80s,  and  children  and 

gration  of  China  and  the  U.S.S.R. 

the  media  are  some  of  the  areas 

into  the  global  economy. 

explored. 

Thomas  H.  Naylor,  Ph.D.  (Tulane  Uni- 

Mary Mayesky,  Ph.D.  (Wayne  State 

versity),  one  of  Duke's  most  respected 

University),  a  former  principal  and  assis- 

economists, predicted  in  1982  that  the 

tant  principal  has  written  several  textbooks 

Soviet  Union  would  move  toward  drastic 

in  the  areas  of  infancy,  early  childhood 

reform  of  its  economy.  He  is  the  author 

and  primary  education.  She  serves  on  the 

of  The  Gorbachev  Strategy,  scheduled 

North  Carolina  Day  Care  Commission 

for  publication  later  this  year. 

and  on  the  Wake  County  School  Board. 

EDUCATION  49S.01 

ENGLISH  49S.01 

Introduction  to  Specific 

The  Masks 

Learning  Disabilities 

of  Modern  Comedy 

An  examination  of  current  theories 

See  listing  under  Drama  49S.03. 

regarding  specific  learning  disabili- 

Students may  register  for  this  seminar, 

ties;  characteristics  of  individuals; 

which  is  cross-listed  as  Drama  49S.03 

diagnostic  procedures;  psychological 

or  English  49S.01. 

and  educational  treatments  for  indi- 

viduals and  their  families. 

Lucy  T.  Davis,  Ed.D.  (Columbia  Uni- 

ENGLISH 49S.02 

versity),  chairs  the  Education  Program 
and  is  active  in  educational  outreach 

Theater  of  Africa 

programs  in  the  Durham  city  and 
county  school  systems. 

and  the  Caribbean 

See  listing  under  Afro-American 

Studies  49S.01.  Students  may  register 

Spring  1989 


for  this  seminar,  which  is  cross-listed 
as  Afro-American  Studies  49S.01, 
Drama  49S.04,  or  English  49S.02. 


ENGLISH  49S.03 

The  American  Character 

The  question  "Is  the  American  char- 
acter distinctive?"  will  be  examined 
through  focus  on  four  or  five  topics 
such  as  the  reaction  to  World  Wars  I 
and  II,  the  passage  from  adolescence, 
attitudes  toward  the  elderly,  the  sense 
of  shared  community,  and  humor. 
Readings  will  be  drawn  from  short 
fiction,  both  American  and  (in  trans- 
lation) German,  Polish,  and  French. 
In-class  reports  and  a  seminar  paper. 

Louis  J.  Budd,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Wisconsin),  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of 
English,  is  one  fo  the  nation's  best-known 
scholars  of  Mark  Twain. 


ENGLISH  49S.04 

Two  Hundred  Years 
of  Romance 

This  seminar  will  examine  women's 
romantic  fiction  from  Ann  Radcliffe's 
The  Mysteries  of  Udolpho  (1794)  to  the 
current  romance  on  The  New  York  Times 
best-seller  list  in  the  spring  of  1989. 
Seminar  discussion  will  emphasize, 
for  each  of  eight  romances,  the  craft 
of  the  novel  and  the  feminist  issues 
at  stake  in  the  portrayal  of  the  central 
love  relationship.  We  will  cast  these 
discussions  against  a  backdrop  of 
critical  studies  of  women's  romantic 
fiction. 


Julie  Tetel,  Ph.D.  (University  of  North 
Carolina  at  Chapel  Hill),  teaches  linguistics 
in  the  Department  of  English.  She  is 
also  a  popular  author  of  romance  novels. 


ENGLISH  49S.05 

Jewish-American 

Literature: 

Old  Worlds  and  New 

It  has  been  said  that  the  hyphen  in 
"Jewish-American"  is  the  cutting 
edge  of  a  sharp  sensibility.  In  this 
seminar  we  will  trace  the  realities  of 
being  Jewish  in  America  from  the 
late  1800s  to  the  present,  through 
readings  in  fiction  and  nonfiction 
and  through  films  based  on  Jewish- 
American  novels.  We  will  explore 
such  topics  as  the  influence  of  Yiddish 
on  American  life  and  art,  the  evolu- 
tion of  the  "Jewish  mother"  stereo- 
type, the  immigrant  experience, 
assimilation  and  acculturation,  the 
schlemiehl  in  modern  fiction,  and 
more.  Above  all,  we  will  read  and 
discuss  some  very  good  literature. 
Authors  to  be  studied  include,  but 
are  not  limited  to,  the  household 
names  of  Philip  Roth,  Bernard 
Malamud,  Saul  Bellow,  and  Joseph 
Heller,  along  with  such  less  well- 
known  writers  as  Henry  Roth, 
Abraham  Cahan,  Michael  Gold, 
and  Anzia  Yezierska. 

Judith  Ruderman,  Ph.D.  (Duke  Univer- 
sity), is  Director  of  Continuing  Education 
at  Duke.  She  has  published  on  several 
modern  authors  and  is  currently  writing 
on  Joseph  Heller.  As  a  cantor,  she  sings  a 
mean  rendition  of  "My  Yiddishe  Mama." 


Spring  1989 


ENGLISH  49S.06 

The  Vietnam  War  in 
Film  and  Fiction 

This  seminar  will  examine  a  confusing 
and  controversial  chapter  in  our  recent 
history,  the  Vietnam  War.  Viewing 
the  War  primarily  from  the  perspec- 
tives of  American  writers  and  film- 
makers, we  will  consider  the  central 
problem  with  which  they  have  had 
to  contend:  how  to  make  sense  of,  in- 
deed, how  to  "create"  sense  from,  an 
experience  so  resistant  to  traditional 
interpretation  and  understanding.  We 
will  begin  the  course  by  reading  and 
viewing  relatively  straight-forward 
realistic  narratives.  After  we  have  a 
foothold  in  the  more  traditional  man- 
ner of  depicting  war,  we  will  investi- 
gate films  and  novels  that  dwell  upon 
the  paranoid  and  hallucinatory— 
works,  in  other  words,  that  incor- 
porate elements  of  the  fantastic  or 
grotesque.  A  small  amount  of  lecture 
time  will  be  devoted  to  the  literary- 
historical  content  of  the  particular 
work  under  discussion,  but  the  class 
hours  will  concentrate  mainly  on 
discussion  of  the  assigned  films  and 
readings.  Students  are  expected  to 
prepare  a  seminar  paper  or  equi- 
valent project. 

Dale  Jones,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Wisconsin),  has  published  on  American 
writers  and  on  the  fiction  of  the  Viet 
Nam  War.  Major  Jones  teaches  in  the 
Department  of  Military  Science. 


FRENCH  49S.01 

Theatricality: 
French  Theater 

This  seminar  is  designed  to  introduce 
students  to  the  basic  elements  of 
theatrical  performance:  the  nature  of 
the  actor's  work,  the  situation  of  the 
audience,  the  relationship  between 
text  and  performance,  the  relation- 
ship between  the  director  and  the 
author,  theatrical  space,  etc.  Texts  by 
representative  French  theater  theo- 
reticians will  be  read  in  combination 
with  plays  which  will  be  viewed  in 
video  format.  The  accent  will  be  upon 
the  practical  problems  involved  in 
producing  dramatic  texts. 

David  F  Bell,  Ph.D.  (Johns  Hopkins 
University),  former  resident  director  of 
the  Duke  in  France  program,  is  an  au- 
thority on  nineteenth  and  twentieth 
century  French  literature. 

GEOLOGY  49S.01 

Earth— Rock 

An  introduction  to  the  basic  concepts 
of  earth  crust  as  a  framework  for 
discussing  the  locations  of  various 
rocks  and  minerals.  This  background 
will  permit  consideration  of  the  envi- 
ronmental, economical,  and  political 
consequences  of  the  uneven  distribu- 
tion of  rock-related  resources  on  the 
face  of  the  earth.  The  emphasis  will 
be  on  the  role  of  these  resources  in 
industry,  the  military,  and  the  every- 
day life  of  students.  A  large  number 
of  slides  and  props  will  be  used  to 
illustrate  geological  features  and  to 
stimulate  discussion. 

Jeffrey  A.  Karson,  Ph.D.  (State  University 


Freshman  Seminars 


of  New  York,  Albany),  a  structural  geol- 
ogist in  the  Department  of  Geology, 
gains  insight  into  the  evolution  of  rifts 
and  transform  faults,  mapping  projects  in 
conjunction  with  Project  Probe's  seismic 
surveys  in  the  East  African  Rift  System. 

GERMAN  49S.01 

Reformation  and 
Resistance:  Protestant 
Resistance  to  Tyranny 
from  Martin  Luther 
to  Adolf  Hitler 

Examination  of  the  conceptions  of 
Luther,  Calvin  and  other  reformers 
about  the  resistance  to  government, 
and  the  relationship  between  religion 
and  society  and  church  and  state. 
Consideration  of  resistance  of  their 
20th  century  Protestant  successors  to 
National  Socialism.  Readings  of  his- 
torical sources  in  English  translation 
and  viewing  of  documentaries  on 
the  resistance  movements  in  Nazi 
Germany. 

Christa  T.  Johns,  Ph.D.  (Free  University 
of  West  Berlin),  is  a  member  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  Germanic  Languages  and  Litera- 
ture with  an  interest  in  Reformation 
Studies.  She  is  also  Associate  Director  of 
the  Duke  University  Summer  Session 
and  Administrative  Director  of  the  Duke 
in  Berlin  Program. 

GERMAN  49S.02 

Berlin:  From  Monarchy 
to  Democracy 

The  city  of  Berlin  considered  as  the 
focal  point  of  cultural  developments  in 


Germany  since  1871:  emphasis  on  the 
emperors,  the  "Golden  Twenties"  in 
art  and  literature  (expressionism, 
Doblin,  Brecht),  the  rise  of  National 
Socialism,  the  effect  of  World  War  II, 
the  new  beginnings  in  1945,  the  ram- 
ifications of  the  divided  city.  Read- 
ings in  historical  sources  and  literary 
works,  films  (documentaries  and  film 
versions  of  literary  works),  discussions. 

Anette  Koeppel,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
North  Carolina,  Chapel  Hill),  teaches  in 
the  Department  of  Germanic  Languages 
and  Literature  and  has  written  on  the 
Middle  Ages  and  the  short  stories  of 
Thomas  Mann. 

GERMAN  49S.03 

Years  of  Creativity: 
German  Culture,  Art, 
and  Design  between 
World  War  I  and 
the  Third  Reich 

For  those  interested  in  modern 
Germany  and  who  want  to  learn 
about  one  of  the  most  influential 
movements  of  twentieth  century  art, 
crafts,  and  architecture  in  the  context 
of  the  cultural  history  of  Germany  in 
the  1920s  — revolutionary  in  its  time 
and  controversial  today.  Sources  of 
the  Bauhaus,  its  ideas,  objectives, 
most  important  representatives,  and 
transplantation  to  American  shores. 

Margaret  Kentgens-Craig,  M.A.  Art 
History  and  German  (University  of 
Bochum),  teaches  in  the  Department  of 
Germanic  Languages  and  Literature.  She 
assisted  the  curator  for  the  exhibit  "Dutch 
Art  in  the  Age  of  Rembrandt"  at  the 
North  Carolina  Museum  of  Art. 


Freshman  Seminars 


HISTORY  49S.01 

Modern  World 
Environmental  History 

This  seminar  explores  the  accelerat- 
ing effects  of  human  activity  on  the 
biosphere,  oceans,  and  atmosphere. 
We  will  try  to  put  the  environmental 
effects  of  human  actions  into  an  his- 
torical context.  The  scale  of  human 
activity  has  increased  steadily  since 
1700.  Rapid  technological  change  has 
provided  the  means  for  the  develop- 
ment of  a  world  economy  and  in- 
creasingly larger  and  more  effective 
nation-states.  The  result  has  been  that 
environmental  impacts  have  also 
moved  from  a  limited  local  and  regional 
focus  to  become  global  in  their  effects. 
In  the  seminar,  we  will  be  trying  to 
think  in  terms  of  a  global  frame  of 
reference  and  in  terms  of  the  past 
three  centuries  of  human  history.  To 
do  this,  we  will  have  to  oscillate  be- 
tween a  broad  overview  of  human 
history  and  specific  cases  and  exam- 
ples to  illustrate  the  processes  with 
which  we  are  concerned.  The  basic 
issue  to  be  addressed  is  the  apparent 
contradiction  between  legitimate 
human  needs  for  economic  develop- 
ment and  the  effects  on  the  natural 
environment  of  that  development. 

John  F.  Richards,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
California,  Berkeley),  a  member  of  the 
Department  of  History,  is  a  leading  re- 
searcher on  the  economic  effects  of  global 
deforestation. 


HISTORY  49S.02 

The  Jews  of  Russia 
and  Eastern  Europe 
in  Modern  Times 

This  seminar  will  explore  the  devel- 
opment of  Russian  and  East  European 
Jewry  over  the  past  two  centuries,  that 
is  from  the  Polish  partitions  to  the 
present  day.  Particular  attention  will 
be  given  to  the  conflicting  attractions 
of  secularism  and  the  religious  com- 
munity, as  well  as  socialization  with- 
in and  alienation  from  the  broader 
societies  in  which  Russian  and  East 
European  Jews  lived.  We  will  also 
examine  the  problems  of  contem- 
porary observers  in  evaluating  the 
historical  experience  of  Jews  in 
Russia  and  East  Europe. 

Warren  Lerner,  Ph.D.  (Columbia  Uni- 
versity), is  currently  Chair  of  the  Depart- 
ment of  History  and  is  a  recognized 
authority  on  Communism  and  Socialism. 


HISTORY  49S.03 

Emerging  Society 
and  Culture:  Urban 
Britain,  1760-1914 

Using  cities  as  a  focal  point  for  period- 
ization,  this  seminar  will  investigate 
social  patterns  from  a  cultural  per- 
spective, using  artistic,  literary,  and 
musical  sources.  Beginning  in  Beau 
Nash's  Georgian  Bath,  scene  of  Richard 
Sheridan's  The  School  for  Scandal,  stu- 
dents will  explore  the  emergence  of 
a  new  mass  society.  Further  travels 
will  include  Preston,  inspiration  for 
Charles  Dickens's  Hard  Times,  Brighton 


Spring  1989 


and  the  Royal  Pavilion,  Dublin,  and 
finally  London,  renowned  for  the  fast- 
paced  living  of  Bloomsbury  and  the 
squalor  of  the  East  End.  Students 
will  make  presentations  during  the 
second  half  of  the  course  and  will  be 
expected  to  submit  one  research  paper 
of  moderate  length. 

Sharon  S.  Grimes,  Ph.D.  (Duke  Univer- 
sity), is  a  British  Historian  who  teaches 
Western  European  History.  Her  special 
interest  is  in  the  development  of  British 
Social  Policy,  specifically  the  National 
Health  Service.  She  is  an  Assistant 
Director  of  the  Pre-Major  Advising 
Center. 


MATHEMATICS  49S.01 

Number  Theory  and  the 
Theory  of  Infinite  Sets 

The  objective  of  this  seminar  is  to 
introduce  students  to  two  branches 
of  mathematics:  number  theory  and 
the  theory  of  infinite  sets.  The  seminar 
will  include  a  study  of  the  lives  of 
major  contributors,  namely,  Fermat, 
Euler,  Lagrange,  Gauss,  and  Cantor. 

Richard  E.  Hodel,  Ph.D.  (Duke  Univer- 
sity), a  mathematician,  is  working  on 
problems  in  cardinal  functions,  a  major 
area  of  research  in  set-theoretic  topology. 


MATHEMATICS  49S.02 

Applications 

of  Mathematics  to 

Physiology  and  Medicine 

A  variety  of  topics  in  mathematical 
physiology  will  be  considered  includ- 
ing the  heart  and  circulation,  control 
of  cell  volume,  the  functioning  of  the 
kidneys,  and  properties  of  neurons 
and  the  Hodgkin-Huxley  equations. 
PREREQUISITE:  Mathematics  32  or  41, 
or  by  permission  of  the  instructor,  the 
equivalent. 

Michael  Reed,  Ph.D.  (Stanford  Univer- 
sity), professor  and  chairman  of  the  De- 
partment of  Mathematics,  works  on 
research  problems  in  both  pure  and  applied 
mathematics. 


MUSIC  49S.01 

Music,  Revolution, 
and  War,  1789-1918 

While  we  appreciate  musical  master- 
pieces for  their  aesthetic  values  and 
the  pleasure  they  give  us,  we  often 
neglect  the  context  for  which  they 
were  written.  From  Old  Testament 
times  well  into  the  nineteenth  cen- 
tury, music  was  credited  with  the 
capacity  to  influence.  How  did  those 
in  authority  attempt  to  harness  the 
power  of  music?  How  did  composers 
address  contemporary  social  and 
political  concerns  as  well  as  artistic 
ones?  To  consider  these  issues,  we 
shall  examine  music's  role  at  moments 
of  crisis  during  the  period  1789  to 
1918  and  attempt  to  see  it  through 
contemporaries'  eyes.  Among  the 


Freshman  Seminars 


topics  are:  the  French  Revolution 
and  music,  Napoleon  and  Beethoven, 
Wagner,  and  American  music  during 
World  War  I.  There  are  weekly  listen- 
ing and  reading  assignments  (empha- 
sizing primary  sources  — newspapers, 
memoirs,  letters,  official  statements 
as  well  as  the  music  itself).  All  stu- 
dents will  participate  in  discussions, 
give  short  oral  presentations  and 
write  a  paper. 

M.  Elizabeth  C.  Bartlet,  Ph.D.  (Univer- 
sity of  Chicago),  is  an  Assistant  Professor 
of  Music  with  special  interest  in  opera, 
French,  16th,  17th  and  18th  Century 
and  Renaissance  Music. 


MUSIC  49S.02 

The  History  and  Practice 
of  Musical  Criticism 

A  history  of  criticism,  taste,  and  period 
attitudes  in  various  kinds  of  music 
(classical  and  popular)  with  regular 
practical  assignments  (reviews  of  live 
performance  and  recordings).  The  level 
will  be  set  according  to  the  musical 
background  of  students  enrolling  in 
the  seminar.  Particular  study  will  be 
made  of  the  great  composer-critics  of 
the  past,  some  of  whom  (Berlioz, 
Schumann,  Debussy)  serve  as  models 
of  musical  journalism  at  its  best. 

Bryan  Gilliam,  Ph.D.  (Harvard  Univer- 
sity), a  member  of  the  Department  of 
Music,  is  a  performer  and  music  theore- 
tician who  has  professional  interests  in 
the  music  of  Richard  Strauss. 


PHILOSOPHY  49S.01 

Aesthetics:  The  Dance 

Dance  seen  from  a  philosopher's 
point  of  view.  We  examine  what  is 
involved  in  deciding  whether  some- 
thing is  or  is  not  dance;  the  forms 
and  aspects  of  dance  in  art  and  life; 
dance  and  its  relation  to  its  neigh- 
bors (such  as  work,  sport,  and 
games);  the  ways  in  which  dance 
can  be  found  meaningful.  We  ask 
and  try  to  understand  why  dance 
has  played  so  little  part  in  traditional 
philosophies  of  the  arts,  and  why 
these  philosophies  of  the  arts  take 
the  form  they  do.  Selected  readings 
and  film.  Student  reports  and  papers. 
Principal  text:  F.  E.  Sparshott,  Off  the 
Ground. 

Paul  Welsh,  Ph.D.  (Cornell  University), 
is  now  Professor  Emeritus  of  Philosophy. 
His  areas  of  specialization  include  aes- 
thetics, philosophy  of  mind,  ethics  and 
logic. 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE  49S.01 

Turning  Points  in 
American  Political 
Thought 

The  way  Americans  think  about  gov- 
ernment has  not  remained  constant 
over  time.  From  their  renouncement 
of  Britain  at  the  outset,  to  their  em- 
bracement  of  a  broad  suffrage,  to 
their  redefinition  of  the  Union,  to 
their  acceptance  of  a  "welfare"  state, 
to  their  enthusiasm  for  Reagan's 
ideas  of  retrenchment  and  devolu- 
tion, Americans  have  made  a  num- 
ber of  sharp  turns  in  their  thinking. 


Spring  1989 


The  seminar  will  explore  these  and 
possibly  other  turns.  Readings  will 
include:  pre-Revolutionary  writings 
of  English  and  American  thinkers, 
including  Locke,  John  Wise,  James 
Wilson,  Alexander  Hamilton,  and 
John  Adams;  writings  of  Thomas 
Jefferson,  Andrew  Jackson,  and 
Alexis  de  Tocqueville;  debates  on 
the  nature  of  the  Union— Webster, 
Lincoln,  Roger  Taney;  authors  of  the 
Gospel  of  Social  Justice,  Progressiv- 
ism,  and  New  Freedom,  and  the  New 
Deal;  and  contemporary  analyses  of 
the  impact  of  the  Reagan  Presidency. 
Arthur  M.  Schlesinger's  The  Cycles 
of  American  History  will  serve  as  a 
starting  point.  Members  of  the  semi- 
nar will  be  assigned  basic  readings 
but  will  be  expected  to  find  supple- 
mental support  or  opposition  to  the 
points  of  view  expressed  therein. 
They  will  comment  on  their  readings 
both  in  writing  and  orally  at  appro- 
priate seminar  meetings. 

Richard  Leach,  Ph.D.  (Princeton  Uni- 
versity), is  a  Professor  of  Political  Science 
whose  area  of  special  interest  is  American 
politics,  federalism  and  political  theory. 


POLITICAL  SCIENCE  49S.02 

Politics  and 
Decision  Making 

This  seminar  addresses  some  of  the 
most  prominent  problems,  methods, 
ideas,  and  findings  that  have  emerged 
in  recent  theoretical  studies  of  poli- 
tics. Participants  will  examine  intel- 
lectual puzzles,  speculative  models, 
and  normative  and  explanatory  appli- 
cations. Models  of  decision  theory, 
game  theory,  and  social  choice  theory 


will  be  presented  as  they  apply  to 
political  contexts  ranging  from  voting 
in  small  groups  to  candidate  compe- 
tition in  mass  elections. 

Emerson  Niou,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Texas  at  Austin),  is  a  member  of  the 
Political  Science  faculty  and  has  special 
interest  in  Normative  Theory,  Game 
Theory  and  International  Balance  of 
Power. 


PSYCHOLOGY  49S.01 

Freshman  Seminar 
in  Psychobiology 

A  study  of  the  biological  basis  of 
human  behavior  in  health  and  dis- 
eases such  as  anorexia  nervosa,  drug 
abuse,  alcoholism,  depression,  schiz- 
ophrenia, and  mania.  Films,  video- 
tapes, student  presentations,  and 
literature  reviews  will  be  used.  The 
seminar  is  designed  for  students 
with  little  background  in  psychology 
or  the  literature. 

H.  Keith  H.  Brodie,  M.D.  (Columbia 
University),  President  of  Duke  University 
and  James  B.  Duke  Professor  of  Psychia- 
try, is  an  enthusiastic  teacher  and  inter- 
nationally respected  researcher  on  the 
biological  aspects  of  mental  illness. 


Freshman  Seminars 


PSYCHOLOGY  49S.02 

The  Language  of  Dreams 

Dreams  and  dreaming,  once  the  sub- 
ject of  an  arcane  art,  have  in  this  cen- 
tury been  brought  under  scientific 
scrutiny,  earlier  by  Freud  with  his 
psychoanalytic  method;  more  re- 
cently by  investigators  in  laboratories 
following  the  watershed  discovery  in 
the  mid-fifties  that  the  eyes  move 
rapidly  at  regular  intervals  during 
sleep  and  that  these  intervals  mark 
episodes  of  dreaming.  This  seminar 
through  readings,  discussions,  and 
work  on  raw  data  will  examine  cer- 
tain issues -theoretical,  procedural, 
empirical  — that  have  been  focal  to 
this  area  of  research.  Special  atten- 
tion will  be  directed  toward  general 
issues  in  psychological  investigation, 
such  as  reliability  and  validity,  and 
to  the  relation  of  data  to  theory. 

Irwin  Kremen,  Ph.D.  (Harvard  Univer- 
sity), teaches  in  the  Psychology  Depart- 
ment at  Duke  and  has  special  interest  in 
personality  theory  and  visual  art. 


PUBLIC  POLICY  STUDIES  49S.01 

School  Reform 
as  Social  Policy 

This  seminar  will  be  on  education 
policy  and  will  focus  on  the  effect 
of  public  elementary  and  secondary 
schools  on  the  distribution  of  gov- 
ernment benefits  and  the  distribu- 
tion of  income.  Topics  will  include: 
the  economic  model  of  education, 
the  importance  of  education  in  eco- 
nomic growth,  other  social  uses  of 
education,  empirical  work  on  the 


effect  of  schools  on  achievement  and 
other  desirable  outcomes,  the  current 
school  reform  movement,  school  de- 
segregation as  a  federal  policy,  pri- 
vate school  enrollment  and  politics 
affecting  the  financing  of  private 
schools,  and  the  special  problems 
faced  by  central  city  school  systems. 
There  will  be  a  research  paper  in  the 
seminar,  drawing  either  on  individ- 
ual projects  on  city  school  systems  of 
students'  choice,  or  a  collective  effort 
on  the  question  of  school  consolida- 
tion in  Durham  County. 

Charles  T.  Clotfelter,  Ph.D.  (Harvard 
University),  is  a  member  of  the  Economics 
and  Public  Policy  Studies  faculties.  His 
primary  area  of  interest  is  Public  Finance 
and  Social  Policy. 


RELIGION  49S.01 

The  Belief  Structure 
of  Recent  Jewish  Fiction 

This  seminar  will  examine  fiction 
by  four  writers -Elie  Wiesel,  Isaac 
Bashevis  Singer,  Bernard  Malamud, 
and  Philip  Roth -in  order  to  deter- 
mine the  role  in  their  work  of  beliefs 
concerning  the  conditions  of  human 
life,  personal  identity  in  relation  to 
cultural  conflict,  history  and  human 
time,  and  values  as  shared  either 
with  members  of  a  community  or 
with  those  outside  it.  In  addition  to 
texts  by  these  writers,  several  essays 
concerning  Jewish  life  and  thought 
in  the  post-holocaust  period  will  be 
studied. 

Wesley  A.  Kort,  Ph.D.  (University  of 
Chicago),  a  Professor  of  Religion,  teaches 
courses  which  relate  religion  and  modem 
literature. 


Spring  1989 


SOCIOLOGY  49S.01 

Biotechnology 
and  Society 

This  seminar  will  focus  on  the  impact 
of  biological  science,  particularly  of 
modern  innovations  in  bioengineering 
and  human  reproduction  and  disease 
control,  on  aspects  of  human  indi- 
viduals' lives  including  family  life 
cycles,  longevity  patterns,  and  gender 
identities.  Such  technologies  as  in 
vitro  fertilization,  male  contracep- 
tives, genetic  engineering,  and  organ 
transplantation  will  be  considered  in 
their  social  implications. 

Angela  O'Rand,  Ph.D.  (Temple  Univer- 
sity), a  vibrant  undergraduate  teacher,  is 
a  member  of  the  Department  of  Sociology 
with  research  interests  in  the  sociology  of 
science  and  gerontology. 


ZOOLOGY  49S.01 

Beasts  and  Us 

This  seminar  examines  differences  in 
attitudes  towards  animals  as  a  function 
of  history,  culture,  gender,  and  age. 
In  the  United  States,  the  majority  of 
hangers-on  at  stables  are  female, 
while  in  Germany  the  ex-ratio,  at 
least  of  young  adults,  is  near  unity; 


we  are  inclined  to  cuddle  puppies 
while  many  Indian  Hindus  shun 
them.  How  do  biological,  cultural, 
and  historical  factors  account  for 
these  and  other  differences  in  our 
attitudes  and  interactions  with  ani- 
mals? We  will  search  out  and  exam- 
ine studies  that  shed  light  on  these 
questions  and  attempt  to  write  a 
review  summarizing  what  we  learn. 

Peter H.  Klopfer,  Ph.D.  (Yale  University), 
a  member  of  the  Zoology  faculty,  enjoys 
an  international  reputation  for  his  studies 
in  animal  behavior. 


ZOOLOGY  49S.02 

The  Physical  World 
of  Organisms 

How  physical  phenomena  determine 
the  consequences  of  the  evolutionary 
process.  Each  student  will  be  given  a 
phenomenon  or  principle  plus  a  set 
of  references  and  other  material  with 
which  to  get  started,  and  will  then 
attempt  to  become  an  expert  on  iden- 
tifying places  where  the  phenomenon 
or  principle  is  active. 

Steven  Vogel,  Ph.D.  (Harvard  University), 
a  popular  teacher,  is  a  zoologist  known 
for  his  studies  of  how  animals  and  plants 
adapt  themselves  to  the  basic  physical 
laws  that  govern  the  world. 


nn?huouuui. 


D02bUiDUuvji 


jtfOMlVi 


DUKE  UNIVERSITY 
LIBRARY 


DURHAM,  NORTH  CAROLINA 
27706 


9 


KB  BBS 


M 


Iff 


U**l 


Sal 


KB 


ABBS 

Bar 

HI 
BS 


H0BI 


aooo9092oa 


illllll  III  Hi   III  I    lil    III 

sauejqn  AjisJSAiun  3*na